Instruction Manual

Tower Crane
71EC-B 5

V.01.2005 / en
Edition: 01/2010

Id. Nr 9011 921 30

portada_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en
Manufacturer:
Mjfcifss Industrias Metálicas S.A.
Polígono Industrial Agustinos C/E
E – 31014 Pamplona (Navarra) – Apartado 4096
España
www.liebherr.es [email protected]

Product Identification:
Group: Tower Crane
Model: 71EC-B 5
Version:
Crane No.:
Serial No.:
Conformity:

Instruction Manual Identification:

ORIGINAL OPERATING MANUAL
Order Number: 9011 921 30
Version: V.01.2005/en
Edition: 01/2010
Author: Technical Office / Documentation

portada_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en
 Tower Crane / Grue à tour / Gru a torre
Grúa torre / Guindaste de torre

71 EC-B 5

50,0 m
1000 kg
7 x 3,9 m

1,20 m

1,21 m
12,0 m

1,3 m
3,0 m
3,8 m
63 LC
DIN FEM
39,6 m / 41,5 m 1 : 360
 1,3 m 0,92 m r
0,58 m
10,94 m 9,85 m 5,0 m 5,0 m 10,0 m 2,5 m 7,5 m 5,0 m 5,0 m
1,8 m
1,02 m

1,08 m
1,6 m
0,23 m 0,32 m
2,4 m 50,0 m
12,26 m 1000 kg / 850 kg

47,5 m
1150 kg / 1000 kg

45,0 m
1300 kg / 1150 kg

42,5 m
1450 kg / 1300 kg

40,0 m
1600 kg / 1450 kg

37,5 m
1800 kg / 1650 kg

35,0 m
2000 kg / 1850 kg

32,5 m
2250 kg / 2100 kg

30,0 m
2500 kg / 2350 kg

27,5 m
2500 kg / 2650 kg

25,0 m
2500 kg / 3000 kg

22,5 m
2500 kg / 3450 kg

20,0 m
2500 kg / 4000 kg

71 EC-B 5 2
Ausladung und Tragfähigkeit Radius and capacity / Portée et charge / Sbraccio
e portata / Alcances y cargas / Alcance e capacidade de carga

m/kg

15,0 17,5 20,0 22,5 25,0 27,5 30,0 32,5 35,0 37,5 40,0 42,5 45,0 47,5 50,0
m r m / kg
50,0 (r = 51,5) 2,4
2500
– 23,7
2500 2500 2500 2500 2350 2110 1900 1730 1580 1450 1340 1240 1150 1070 1000

47,5 (r = 49,0) 2,4

2500
– 25,0
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2240 2030 1840 1690 1550 1430 1330 1230 1150

45,0 (r = 46,5) 2,4

2500
– 26,1
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2350 2130 1940 1770 1630 1510 1400 1300

42,5 (r = 44,0) 2,4

2500
– 26,9
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2430 2200 2010 1840 1690 1560 1450

40,0 (r = 41,5) 2,4

2500
– 27,4
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2490 2250 2050 1880 1730 1600

37,5 (r = 39,0) 2,4

2500
– 28,3
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2340 2130 1950 1800

35,0 (r = 36,5) 2,4

2500
– 28,9
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2390 2180 2000

32,5 (r = 34,0) 2,4

2500
– 29,7
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2470 2250

30,0 (r = 31,5) 2,4

2500
– 30,0
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500

27,5 (r = 29,0) 2,4

2500
– 27,5
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500

25,0 (r = 26,5) 2,4

2500
– 25,0
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500

22,5 (r = 24,0) 2,4

2500
– 22,5
2500 2500 2500 2500

20,0 (r = 21,5) 2,4

2500
– 20,0
2500 2500 2500

m/kg

15,0 17,5 20,0 22,5 25,0 27,5 30,0 32,5 35,0 37,5 40,0 42,5 45,0 47,5 50,0
m r m / kg
50,0 (r = 51,5) 2,4
2500
– 22,9 2,4 – 12,8
5000 4150 3470 2950 2560 2250 1990 1780 1600 1450 1310 1200 1090 1000 920 850

47,5 (r = 49,0) 2,4

2500
– 24,1 2,4 – 13,4
5000 4400 3680 3140 2730 2390 2120 1900 1710 1550 1410 1290 1180 1090 1000

45,0 (r = 46,5) 2,4

2500
– 25,1 2,4 – 14,0
5000 4600 3850 3290 2860 2510 2230 2000 1800 1630 1490 1360 1250 1150

42,5 (r = 44,0) 2,4

2500
– 25,8 2,4 – 14,3
5000 4750 3970 3400 2950 2600 2310 2070 1870 1700 1550 1420 1300

40,0 (r = 41,5) 2,4

2500
– 26,3 2,4 – 14,6
5000 4840 4060 3470 3020 2660 2360 2120 1910 1740 1580 1450

37,5 (r = 39,0) 2,4

2500
– 27,1 2,4 – 15,0
5000 5000 4200 3600 3130 2760 2450 2200 1990 1810 1650

35,0 (r = 36,5) 2,4

2500
– 27,6 2,4 – 15,3
5000 5000 4290 3670 3200 2820 2510 2250 2040 1850

32,5 (r = 34,0) 2,4

2500
– 28,3 2,4 – 15,7
5000 5000 4410 3780 3290 2900 2590 2320 2100

30,0 (r = 31,5) 2,4

2500
– 28,5 2,4 – 15,8
5000 5000 4460 3820 3330 2940 2620 2350

27,5 (r = 29,0) 2,4

2500
– 27,5 2,4 – 16,0
5000 5000 4510 3870 3370 2970 2650

25,0 (r = 26,5) 2,4

2500
– 25,0 2,4 – 16,1
5000 5000 4550 3900 3400 3000

22,5 (r = 24,0) 2,4

2500
– 22,5 2,4 – 16,3
5000 5000 4620 3960 3450

20,0 (r = 21,5) 2,4

2500
– 20,0 2,4 – 16,5
5000 5000 4670 4000

71 EC-B 5 3
Hubhöhe Hoisting height / Hauteur sous crochet / Altezza di sollevamento / Altura bajo gancho / Altura de montagem

3,9 m
+
3,9 m 5,85 m 5,85 m 11,7 m 63 LC
9 6 3 – – 36,0 – 36,1 – 35,4 – 34,2 –
7+1 – – 34,0 45,6 34,1 45,7 33,4 45,0 32,3 44,2
8 – – 32,1 43,7 32,2 43,8 31,5 43,1 30,3 42,2
6+1 5 29,9 41,5 30,1 41,7 30,2 41,8 29,5 41,1 28,4 40,3
7 28,0 39,6 28,2 39,8 28,3 39,9 27,6 39,2 26,4 38,3
5+1 26,0 37,6 26,2 37,8 26,3 37,9 25,6 37,2 24,5 36,4
6 4 2 24,1 35,7 24,3 35,9 24,4 36,0 23,7 35,3 22,5 34,4
4+1 22,1 33,7 22,3 33,9 22,4 34,0 21,7 33,3 20,6 32,5
5 20,2 31,8 20,4 32,0 20,5 32,1 19,8 31,4 18,6 30,5
3+1 3 18,2 29,8 18,4 30,0 18,5 30,1 17,8 29,4 16,7 28,6
4 16,3 27,9 16,5 28,1 16,6 28,2 15,9 27,5 14,7 26,6
2+1 14,3 25,9 14,5 26,4 14,6 26,5 13,9 25,8 12,8 24,7
3 2 1 12,4 24,0 12,6 24,2 12,7 24,3 12,0 23,6 10,8 22,7
1+1 10,4 22,0 10,6 22,2 10,7 22,3 10,0 21,6 8,9 20,8
2 8,5 20,1 8,7 20,3 8,8 20,4 8,1 19,7 6,9 18,9
0+1 1 6,5 18,1 6,8 18,3 6,9 18,4 6,2 17,7 5,0 16,9
1 4,6 16,2 4,8 16,5 4,9 16,6 4,2 15,9 3,0 14,9
0 0 – 12,3 – 12,5 – 12,6 – 11,9 – 11,0
m m m m m

12,0 m
12,0 m
12,0 m

12,0 m

12,0 m
0,4 m
0,4 m
0,4 m

0,4 m

0,25 m

0,17 m
1,5 m

1,6 m

1,6 m
1,5 m
1,3 m

1,3 m

0,9 m

0,9 m
3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m 3,8 m
3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m 3,0 m

= Ohne Kabine / Without cabin / Sans cabine / Senza cabina / Sin cabina / Sem cabine
Weitere Hubhöhen sowie Klettern auf Anfrage. / Further hoist heights and climbing on request. / Hauteurs sous crochet plus élevées et
hissage sur demande. / Altre altezze di sollevamento come pure telescopaggio, su richiesta. / Para alturas bajo gancho superiores y trepado,
consultar. / Outras alturas de elevação e ascensionamento, mediante consulta.

Antriebe Driving units / Mécanismes d'entraînement / Azionamenti / Mecanismos / Mecanismos

Stufe / Step
Cran / Marcia kg m/min
U/min Marcha / Marcha
0 0,8 sl./min 5,0 kW FU 3,2 / 14,0 / 14,0 kW
tr./min WIW 210 MZ 402 4 Lagen 1 2500 2500 6,2
Layers 2 2500 2500 27,0
Couches 3 1300 1200 54,0
Strati
Camadas
57,0 m/28,0 m Capas 1 5000 3,1
0 60,0 m/min 1,5 kW FU LSTrommel 2 5000 13,5
3 2500 27,0
0 63,0 m/min 3,0 kW FU
6 Lagen 1 2400 2300 6,5
Layers 2 2400 2300 28,5
Couches 3 1200 1100 57,0
Strati
90,0 m/45,0 m Camadas
25,0 m/min 2 x 3,0 kW FU LSTrommel Capas 1 4700 3,3
25,0 m/min 2 x 4,0 kW 2 4700 14,3
3 2350 28,5

22,0 kW FU 1 2500 2500 4,1

WIW 230 MZ 407 5 Lagen
Layers 2 2500 2500 41,0
Couches 3 1800 1700 58,0
Strati 4 1250 1150 82,0
161,0 m/80,0 m Camadas
LSTrommel Capas 1 5000 2,0
14,0 kW 22,0 kW FU 2 5000 21,0
3 3500 29,0
kVA 29,0 30,0 4 2450 41,0
233,0 m/117,0 m**

** Weitere Hublastdaten: siehe Betriebsanleitung. / Further hoist load data: see instruction manual. / Autres données de la charge de
levage: voir manuel d’instruction. / Altri dati sui carichi sollevati: consultare il manuale d’istruzione. / Alturas bajo grancho superiores
según manual. / Outras tabelas de carga: consultar manual de instruções.

71 EC-B 5 4
Kolli-Liste Packing List / Liste de colisage / Lista dei colli / Lista de contenido / Lista de embalagem

Montagegewichte: siehe Betriebsanleitung. / Erection weights: see instruction manual. / Poids de montage: voir manuel de service.
Pesi di montaggio: vedasi le istruzioni sull'uso. / Peso para el montaje: según manual. / Pesos de montagem: vejamse es instruções p. uso.

Upper part of crane / Partie supérieure de grue / Parte superiore della gru
Kranoberteil Parte superior grúa / Parte superior do guindaste L (m) B (m) H (m) kg*
Pos. Anz.
Item Qty.
Rep Qte. Drehbühne kpl. / Slewing platform cpl.
Voce Qta. Ensemble mât cabine cpl. / Piattaforma 2,43 2,74 2,52 3520
Pos. Cant.
Ref Cant. girevole compl. / Plataforma giratória compl.
1 1 Conjunto plataforma de giro
2 1 Drehbühne / Slewing platform
Ensemble mât cabine / Piattaforma
girevole / Plataforma giratória compl. 2,43 1,99 2,52 3310
Conjunto plataforma de giro
3 1 Podeste / Platforms 2,07 0,59 1,31 100
Platesformes / Pedana 2,07 1,04 1,31 110
Plataformas / Plataformas 2,13 0,60 1,33 120
4 1 Kabine / Cabin
Cabine / Cabina 1,35 2,38 2,28 580
Cabina / Cabina
5 1 Gegenausleger / Counterjib
Contrefléche / Contrabaccio 11,02 1,39 0,66 2190
Contrapluma / Contralança
6 1 Podeste Gegenausleger / Counterjib platforms
Platesformes de contreflèche / Ballatoi controfreccia 3,00 0,75 1,32 140
Plataforma contrapluma
7 1 AuslegerAnlenkstück / Jib heel section
Pied de flèche / Settore articolato di braccio 10,05 1,23 1,95 ➀ 1820
Pluma tramo primero / Base articulada de lança
5,22 1,10 1,89 ➁ 530
8 1 AuslegerZwischenstück / Intermediate jib section 2,69 1,10 1,25 ➃ 160
Elément intermédiaire de flèche / Spezzone di braccio 7,68 1,10 1,24 ➄ 380
Tramo intermedio pluma / Peça suplementar da lança 5,17 1,10 1,23 ➅ 200
5,17 1,10 1,23 ➆ 170
9 1 AuslegerZwischenstück / Intermediate jib section
Elément intermédiaire de flèche / Spezzone di braccio 10,20 1,10 1,83 ➂ 740
Tramo intermedio pluma / Peça suplementar da lança
10 1 AuslegerKopfstück / Jib head section
Pointe de flèche / Punta freccia 1,24 1,11 0,44 ➇ 60
Tramo punta de pluma / Cabeça de lança
11 1 Laufkatze / Trolley
Chariot / Carrello 1,60 1,28 0,78 163
Carrito / Carrinho
12 1 Fahrkorb / Maintenance cage
Nacelle d’entretien / Cestello di manutenzione 0,78 0,66 1,25 35
Plataforma de mantenimiento
Tower / Mât / Torre
Turm Torre / Torre
13 1 Grundturmstück / Base tower section
Mât de base / Elemento di torre base 12,00 1,42 1,42 3320
Tramo torre base / Peça de base de torre
14 1 Turmstück / Tower section 3,90 m 4,17 1,20 1,20 970
Elément de mât / Elemento di torre 5,85 m 6,12 1,20 1,20 1330
Tramo torre / Torre 11,70 m 11,97 1,20 1,20 2450
Climbing equipment / Equipement de télescopage / Attrezzatura per allungamento della gru
Klettereinrichtung Equipo de trepado / Acesórios p. subida no edificio
15 1 Führungsstück kpl. / Guide section cpl.
Cage télescopique cpl. / Gabbia de sopraelevazione compl. 8,74 1,66 1,75 2680
Torre de montaje completa / Peça de guia compl.

16 1 Führungsstück Turmstück / Tower guide section

Elément de màt télescopique / Gabbia de sopraelevazione 3,90 m 4,17 1,66 1,66 1190
Tramo torre de montaje / Peca de guia
17 1 Hydraulikanlage, Stütz und Klettertraverse / Hydraulic unit, supporting and climbing cross members
Système hydraul. avec traverses d’appui el de télescop. / Sist. idraul., traversa di appoggio e allugam. gru 2,00 0,90 0,80 530
Sistema hidráulico con traviesa de apoyo y trepade / Instalação hidráulica, tavessa de apoio e subida
Cruciform base / Châssis en croix / Carro della gru
Fundamentkreuz Carro de guindaste / Base cruciforme
18 1 Tragholm I / Arm I
3,0 m 4,88 0,71 0,81 1550
Longeron I / Longherone I
3,8 m 5,68 0,71 0,81 1790
Brazo I / Travessa I
19 1 Tragholm II / Arm II
3,0 m 4,88 0,78 0,66 1340
Longeron II / Longherone II
3,8 m 5,68 0,78 0,66 1580
Brazo II / Travessa II
20 2 Fahrschemel mit Antrieb / Rail bogie with drive
1,31 0,66 0,61 630
Bogie moteur / Telajo con gruppa propulsore
0,96 0,38 0,42 280
Caja rodillo motriz / Quadra sem grupa de propulsão

21 2 Fahrschemel ohne Antrieb / Rail bogie without drive

1,04 0,33 0,61 330
Bogie fou / Telajo senza gruppa propulsore
0,38 0,31 0,42 200
Caja rodillo conducido / Quadra com grupa de propulsão
* Einzelgewichte. / Single weights. / Poids individuels. / Pesi di componenti. / Pesos unitarios. / Pesos de peças componentes.

71 EC-B 5 5
Konstruktionsänderungen vorbehalten! Sämtliche Angaben erfolgen ohne Gewähr. / This information is supplied without liability.
Subject to alterations! / Sous réserves de modifications! Ces renseignements sont sans garantie. / Le indicazioni contenute si intendono salvo errori ed omissioni.
Si fa riserva di modifiche! / ¡Sujeto a modificaciones! Declinamos toda responsabilidad derivada de la información proporcionada. / Declinamos qualquer
Salvo modifição da construcao! responsabilidade quanto à informação fornecida.

120 P – 5100 H1 B3 DIN 15018 • BGL C.0.10.0063 / FEM (Section 1) – Krangruppe A3 • 04.07 / 6 Printed in Germany.

LiebherrWerk Biberach GmbH Liebherr Industrias Metálicas, S.A.

Postfach 1663, D88396 Biberach an der Riss Polígono Industrial Agustinos, Apartado 4096, E31014 Pamplona
+49 73 51 410, Fax: +49 73 51 41 22 25 +3494829 70 00, Fax +3494829 70 29
www.liebherr.com, EMail: [email protected] www.liebherr.com, EMail: [email protected] 71 EC-B 5 6
 NOTE

All details specified in this instruction manual are only valid for
the corresponding components configurations in chapter 2
(details concerning the max. tower configuration, corner
pressures, foundation reaction forces, central ballast and
counterweight).

Component combinations not included in this instruction

manual, or in the "Manual for tower combinations", can be
obtained from LIEBHERR-Werk Biberach GmbH, Statics
department!
Tel. +49 (0) 73 51 / 41 25 49
Fax. +49 (0) 73 51 / 41 28 79

Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02 Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols

 INTRODUCTION
This manual is intended to help you operate the crane safely and to make full use of all its
permitted facilities and methods of working. The manual also provides information on the
operating principle of major assemblies and systems, and can be consulted if spare parts
have to be ordered.

The instruction manual consists of:

● Rail track
● Corner pressures, foundation reaction forces, ballast data
● Erection - Dismantling
● Climbing inside the building
● Operation
● Electrical equipment
● Maintenance
● Ropes
● Accessories

Please ensure that only trained and qualified personnel is employed on this crane. The
operating instructions and all relevant legal requirements and similar directives (for
example accident prevention regulations) must be complied with.

Disregarding these instructions may cause accident or injury.

Special attention must be paid to the safety devices installed on the crane. They must be
regularly checked to ensure that they are in good working order. The crane must not be
operated if they have failed or become unreliable. Always remember:

Safety first!

If you receive any further information on the crane from us, for instance technical
information circulars, always note the contents carefully and insert the information in the
relevant section of the manual without delay.

Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02

Notes on Safety
Avoiding dangers
Liebherr cranes are constructed around state-of-the-art technology and the approved safety-
technical regulations. Should the cranes be operated improperly, however, the user or a third
party could be exposed to serious danger, and the crane or other tangible assets could sustain
damage.
In order that these dangers may be avoided, Liebherr cranes may only be used:
- for the purpose for which they are intended.
- in adherence to the complete crane documentation.
- in adherence to the valid, on-site accident-prevention guidelines.
- if in a sound condition which complies with the safety regulations.

Use as intended
Liebherr cranes may be utilisated for the lifting and lowering, as well as the horizontal transport
of loads suspended freely from the load hooks. The crane must be positioned on firm ground
when the load is lifted, and may not exceed the maximum load specified in the respective load
diagram. The crane must be erected and operated in compliance with the specifications in the
operating instructions. Any other use, or excessive use, is not considered use as intended and is
strictly prohibited.
The following, in particular, are strictly prohibited:
- pulling off fixed loads.
- horizontal displacement of not freely suspended loads.
- the transporting of persons with the load or with the load carrying gear.
- adding weight to loads already lifted.
- the utilisation of inappropriate ropes which do not comply with specifications in the instruction
manual.
- bridging and modification of limit switch settings.
- modification of the crane configuration depicted in this instruction manual.
- installing advertising billboards and accessories, as well as undertaking modifications, without
the express permission of the manufacturer.
- non-adherence to guidelines specific to the respective crane type. Prohibitions must be strictly
observed. See the chapter, Operation: "Operating instructions"
The manufacturer is not liable for any damages which occur as a result of negligence of the
aforementioned points.
Strict adherence to the maintenance and inspection requirements is also cosidered use as
intended.

Personnel qualifications
Operation, maintenance and inspection may only be carried out by a skilled crane operator.
Assembly, disassembly and repair tasks may only be carried out by trained, specialist personnel.
Tasks to the electrical equipment of the crane may only be undertaken by an electrical specialist
in accordance with the electro-technical regulations.
Only personnel with specific knowledge and experience of hydraulics may work on the hydraulic
equipment.

Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02 Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols

Specific hazard areas
Jeopardising stability
Very different prerequisites for stability could arise depending on the configuration of the crane.
The documentation "Corner pressures, foundation loadings, ballast data", or chapter 2 "Stability"
is only valid for the configurations specified. The user must apply for the static data for any
configurations not specified from Liebherr-Werk Biberach.

Danger of crushing
There is a danger of becoming crushed:
- in the immediate vicinity of the crane support.
- at exposed running spur gears.
- in the immediate vicinity of the slewing platform.
- at any point of the crane during the erection and dismantling procedures.
- in the immediate vicinity of the climbing equipment.
All areas which pose a danger of crushing should be accordingly safeguarded or cordoned off.
Should operating, erection or maintenance tasks be necessary within an area of the crane which
has not been safeguarded, a second person must be called in who can shut down the respective
movement immediately should a dangerous situation arise.

Dangers as a result of electrical energy

Keep the switchgear cabinet locked at all times. Access is only permitted to authorised personnel
holding a key or special tool.
Should it be necessary to carry out tasks to parts carrying voltage, a second person must be
called in to switch off the main switch in the event of an emergency.

Dangers as a result of damaged ropes

The utilisation of unsuitable ropes can lead to serious accidents. In order that safe operation can
be ensured at all times:
- only use ropes which comply with Liebherr regulations.
- pay particular attention to the sections of ropes which run over rope pulleys or rope drums or
are in the immediate vicinity of rope end fittings.
- check the ropes carefully in order that any changes in the rope condition is recognised
immediately.

Dangers as a result of hydraulic energy

Pressure must be dissipated from sections of systems and pressure lines which are to be opened
before commencing any repair tasks.
Replace hydraulic hose lines in appropriate time intervals, even if no defects relevant to safety
have been determined.

Risk of environmental contamination

The environment could be subjected to harm if fuels and lubricants are handled carelessly.
Proceed with the utmost of care when replacing or refilling fuels and lubricants. Under no
circumstances should fuels and lubricants be permitted to leak into the ground or waterways.

Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02

 Safety indications

Danger of accident ! correct !

Danger of injury !

WARNING: Live parts!

Electrical installation, connection
work and maintenance must be wrong !
done only by authorized, properly
qualified personnel.

WARNING: Suspended loads !

Danger of falling down !

Wear and use a safety

harness !

Danger of crushing !
Wear gloves !

Check, verify !
Important information !

Environmental protection:
For maintenance and in order to Oil, filters, brake fluid,
maintain the guarantee, original batteries etc. must be
spare parts should only be installed disposed properly !
by authorized, properly qualified
personnel !

Always close the

Explosion hazard ! passage flaps !

Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02 Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols

 Key to symbols

Sequence ! "Light on" !

Erection ! "Out" !
(bottom-slewing cranes)

Operation ! Wind direction !

(bottom-slewing cranes) Wind speed !

1+2+3
Control steps ! Automatic control !

Manual operation !
Direction !

Movement stop ! Maintenance interval !

Rotating !
Direction of rotation ! Check oil level !
Once-through rotation !

Brake applied ! Grease lubrication !

Brake released ! Clean !

2-fall operation /
Keep free from oil and grease !
4-fall operation !

Weight ! Torque wrench !

Load !

Speed ! Hook wrench !

Balance the crane ! Bleeding !

(e.g.: Climbing the crane)

Introduction • Safety indications • Symbols Vorwort_Sicherheit_110EC-B6-120HC_V01_2005_en.doc 25.11.02

Mains power supply, ambient and storage conditions for top-slewing cranes

Mains power supply:

Notice!
The mains power supply must always comply with the with the connected loads of the
crane! Please contact the Technical Office (TB) in the event of differing connected loads!

Network tolerances:

Distribution voltage: 3x 400V +/- 10%

Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 1%

Distribution voltage: 3x 480V + 5% - 10%

Frequency: 60 Hz +/- 1%

Ambiance:

Working temperature for cranes, see "Climate control for switchgear cabinets",
in chapter "Electrical equipment"
Storage temperature (crane dismantled) - 40°C to +70°C
Maximum relative humidity 93% (IEC 68-2-3 during storage /
transport)
Maximum relative humidity 95% non-condensing operation
Maximum height above sea level 1000 meters without effecting
a reduction in output

Storage of crane components with switchgears:

Notice!
Avoid moisture and condensation in the switchgears (switchgear cabinets)!
Moisture or condensation in switchgears can cause direct damage to assemblies of the
electrical equipment!
To prevent moisture and condensation from occurring in the switch cabinets, the
crane cab, as well as all other switchgears (e.g. hoist gear switchgears or luffing
gear switchgears, etc.) must be stood upright during storage.
If the crane cab is laid flat during storage, all access and exit points, as well as the
side windows and front windscreen must be closed. To protect the crane cab
against atmospheric influences, structural elements must be covered whenever
they are laid flat during storage.

Netzversorgung_Klima_Obendreher_11_2007_en.doc Ambiance / climatisation 1

Climate control for switchgear cabinets

This description applies to the following types of top-slewing cranes:

- EC-H - HC-L
- EC-B - EL
- EC-HM - LC

The design and dimension of the climate control unit of the switchgear cabinet depends on the
following criteria:
- Type and configuration of crane control
- Climatic zone where the application is being carried out (ambient
temperature)

Cranes featuring contactor control:

Climate control: Temperature range:

Standard (fan / heater) -25°C to + 45°C

HEAT-PIPE with FC -25°C to + 55°C
Tropicalisation with SL -25°C to + 55°C

Cranes featuring PLC-control:

Climate control: Temperature range:

Standard (fan / heater) -25°C to + 35°C

HEAT-PIPE -25°C to + 45°C
Air-conditioning system -25°C to + 55°C

Special measures for extreme temperatures:

Always contact the Technical Office (TB) to discuss special measures!

Climate control: Temperature range:

Special measures for very low

temperatures - 40°C to -25°C

Special measures for very high

temperatures >+ 55°C

Netzversorgung_Klima_Obendreher_11_2007_en.doc Ambiance / climatisation 1

 


Rail tracks

Preparing the rail tracks ........................................................................................... 1-1

Rails ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
Laying rails on concrete sleepers .......................................................................... 1-3
Laying rails on concrete strip foundation ............................................................... 1-4
Laying rails on steel supports ................................................................................ 1-5
SRS – crane track system ..................................................................................... 1-6
Track end protection .............................................................................................. 1-7
Ramp for travel limit switch .................................................................................... 1-7
Installation tolerances for crane rail tracks according to VDI-directive 3576......... 1-8
Using the stationary undercarriage on foundation slabs ..................................... 1-10
Lightning protection / electrostatic charge ............................................................ 1-11
Laying rail tracks in curve ........................................................................................ 1-12

1-0 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Preparing the rail track

 Install rail track only on firm, well-knit ground of ample load-bearing capacity!

Before installing the rail track, check the load-bearing capacity of the soil!

 Eliminate surface irregularities by dumping and compacting gravel and sand.

safety margin

α = embankment angle

β = embankment angle
when exposed to
load of tower crane

 Install rail track in the vicinity of pits and trenches so that there is no risk of an overloading of the walls or
banks, or of them collapsing. The proof must be furnished by the tower crane operating company! The
distance of the rails from the pit depends on the corner pressure of crane and on the soil condition (its
water content, friction, wear strength etc.)

a = width of scaffolding
b = safety margin 50 cm
c = space occupied by crane
d = rail track gauge

 The safety margin between movable crane parts ( e.g. jib, counter-ballast ) and buildings, handrails and
boundary lines for vehicles must be at least 50 cm.
If this safety margin cannot be kept at any point, the affected area must be fenced off.

Risk of a person being trapped!

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-1

Rails

We recommend the following rails:

Rail
Standard undercarriage Rail height Railhead width
(to DIN 5902)
50, 63, 71, 90, 110, 130 EC-B S 49 149 mm 67 mm
30, 40, 50, 63, 90LD, 100LC S 49 149 mm 67 mm
170 HC S 49 149 mm 67 mm
185 HC / 200 HC S 49 149 mm 67 mm
256 HC / 290 HC S 54 154 mm 67 mm
355 HC / 390 HC S 54 154 mm 67 mm
500 HC / 550 HC S 54 154 mm 67 mm
630 EC-H S 54 154 mm 67 mm

Use only new or evenly worn rails!

The sections of rail must be joined by steel joint bars, bolted through the upright web of the rails,
see figure on page 1-4.

Design and construction of the rail track assembly must take into account horizontal forces of:
1/7 of the specified corner pressures acting along the tracks
1/10 of the specified corner pressures acting across the tracks

1-2 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Laying rails on concrete sleepers

Wooden sleepers are not permitted ! (corner pressures too great)

track gauge
+ 20% "X" = max. 600 mm

= sleeper length
Concrete sleepers
cross-section min. 16 x 24 cm

 Cross-section of sleepers: min. 16 x 24  forces can be transmitted through the track-bed to the
soil

 Distance "X" between sleepers depends on rail size ( max. 600 mm ).

 Only use sleepers which support one rail only ( half-width sleepers):
- as an intermediate support for the outer rails on curves,
- if the sleepers have been tested and approved,
- if they are provided with a certificate of load capacity.

 Make sure that the track gauge is maintained correctly! (see fig. on page 1-4, gauge control rod)

 Concrete sleepers are not recommended for crane track in areas subject to subsidence, on soil exposed
to the risk of frost and on any yielding ground surface.

The rail track assembly must be 2 to 3 m longer at each end than the required travel
range of the tower crane!

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-3

Laying rails on concrete strip foundation

Steel plate Clip bolt

Anchor bolt

"X"

Rein

"X" = max. 600 mm

beton_2.dsf

 Schienen mit Stahlplatten auf den Streifenfundamenten befestigen.

 Secure rails to strip foundations by steel plates.

Do not exceed distance "X" between the steel plates!

 Do not exceed the permissible compressive stress!

Nominal strength of concrete in N/mm² 15 25 35 45

Permissible compressive stress in
14,7 24,5 32,2 37,8
case of partial area loading in N/mm²

 Do not use soleplates from the public railroad systems, as these are usually canted at a slight angle
(German Federal Railroad, for example = 4°).  High rate of wheel and rail wear!

 Link together strip foundations.  Track gauge is maintained!

prevents displacement between the two rails of the track!

 The stress analysis for the foundations is to be carried out in accordance with the rules for stressing
reinforced concrete items.
The loads encountered can be obtained from the corner pressure tables.

 For cold-weather operation of the crane, the concrete strip foundations must have a base which is proof
against frost damage.

1-4 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Laying rails on steel supports

.dsf
srs2

1. Broad flanged beam.

2. Rail.  For cold-weather operation,
the concrete foundations must
3. Rail connection.
have a base which is proof
4. Rail clip. against frost damage!
5. Beam connection.
6. Support for beam (strip foundation).
7. Gauge control rod.
8. Anchor bolt.

Material used to support the broad flanged beam depends on:  soil conditions.
 corner pressure of crane.
 size of beam.

Support possibilities:  bed of road metal.

 individual concrete foundations.
 concrete slabs.
 strip foundation.

Stress analysis of broad flanged beam and supports is essential!

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-5

SRS – crane track system

Prefabricated crane track system consisting of: - straight rail sections 6,0 m long
- pre-formed curved sections available to any
radius
- gauge control rods, points and crossings

can be used for corner pressure up to 1300 kN

1. Concrete sleeper.
2. Rail clip.
3. Rail.
4. Connection plates.
5. Gauge control rod.
6. Movable part of end stop.
7. Fixed end stop.
8. Ramp for travel limit switch.
9. Trackbed.
A Track gauge.

1-6 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Track end protection

Fixed end stop Movable part

of end stop End stop or buffer
with variable
mounting heights

srs1a.dsf

 Strong end stops firmly secured to the rails must be provided at the ends of the rail track assembly in
such a way, that the distance between the stops and the wheel bogies is everywhere the same.

Ramp for travel limit switch

approx.. 1.0 m Travel limit switch

Adjustable in height and laterally!

Secured with locking screws.

srs1b.dsf

 The ramp for the travel limit switch must be installed at al point where the limit switch can be operated in
time to stop the crane about 1 metre before the track end protection.

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-7

Installation tolerances for crane rail tracks according to VDI-directive 3576

For Construction cranes: tolerance group 2 *)

(for cranes of load categories B1 – B3 according to DIN 15018)

desired mean
L ≤ 15 m: A = ± 5 mm
Mean track max. L=L+A min. L=L-A L > 15 m: A = ± (5+0.25 (L-15)) mm
track width L
gauge "L"
with L (m)
SRS_13_1.drw

2000 2000
B = ± 10 mm
b
Position of a rail +B but following gauge dimensions must not be
in plan view -B exceeded over a test length of 2.0 m:
b
b = ± 1.0 mm
SRS_13_2.drw

2000
C = ± 10 mm
Height of a rail desired
+C but following height dimensions must not be
(longitudinal c height
exceeded over al test length of 2.0 m:
gradient) -C
c = ± 2.0 mm
SRS_13_3.drw

L
Relative heights D D = ± 1.0 ‰ of L for tower cranes
of rails (lateral max. ± 10 mm on site:
gradient) D = ± 2.0 ‰ **)
SRS_13_4.drw

B1
A2 gradient A1 B1
beam 1
Relative cant beam 2
angle of rails
E = 0.5 ‰
gradient A2 B2
A1 B2
SRS_13_5.drw E= gradient A1 B1 - gradient A2 B2

Relative position F F = ± 1.0 ‰ of L

of end stops max. 20 mm

SRS_13_6.drw

G
Rail head cant G = ± 8 ‰ of the rail head width
deviation (with flat running surface)

SRS_13_7.drw

*) equivalent to DIN 4132 draft February 1981 **) not laid down DIN 4132

1-8 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Installation tolerances for crane rail tracks according to VDI-directive 3576

Tolerance group 1*) (for cranes in load categories B4 - B6 according to DIN 15018)

L ≤ 15 m: A = ± 3 mm
Mean track max. L=L+A desired mean L > 15 m: A = ± (3+0.25 (L-15)) mm
min. L=L-A
gauge "L" track width L
with L (m)

2000 2000
B = ± 5 mm
b
Position of a rail +B
but following gauge dimensions must not be
in plan view exceeded over a test length of 2.0 m:
b -B
b = ± 1.0 mm

2000 C = ± 10 mm
Height of a rail
desired but following height dimensions must not be
(longitudinal +C c height exceeded over a test length of 2.0 m:
gradient)
-C
c = ± 1.0 mm

L
Relative heights D D = ± 0.2 ‰ of L
of rails (lateral
gradient) max. ± 10 mm

B1
A2 gradient A1 B1
beam 1
Relative cant
angle of rails
beam 2 E = 0.5 ‰
gradient A2 B2
A1 B2
E = gradient A1 B1 - gradient A2 B2

L
Relative position F = ± 0.7 ‰ of L
of end stops F max. 20 mm

G
Rail head cant G = ± 8 ‰ of the rail head width
deviation (with flat running surface)

*) equivalent to DIN 4132 draft February 1981

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-9

Using the stationary undercarriage on foundation slabs
 Concrete the foundation slabs of the crane only on firm, well-knit ground of ample load-bearing capacity!

Before cementing the foundation slabs, check the ground for load-bearing capacity!
Safety margin

α = embankment angle

β = embankment angle
when exposed to
load of tower crane

Grafik5.dsf

Top view

The surfaces of
the foundation
slabs must lie on
one plane

 Cement the foundation slabs in such a way that it is no longer possible for the excavation wall or
excavation embankment to collapse or be overloaded. This must be certified by the operator!
This distance between the foundation slabs and the excavation depends on the corner pressure of the
crane and on the ground composition (moisture content, friction, shear strength etc.)

b
c a

a = width of
scaffolding
b = safety margin
50 cm
c = space occupied
d
by crane
d = rail track gauge

Gleis_4.dsf

 The safety margin between movable crane parts (e.g. jib, counter-jib) and buildings, handrails and
boundary lines for vehicles must be at least 50 cm.
If this safety margin cannot be kept at any point, the affected area must be fenced off!

Risk of a person being trapped!

1-10 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

Lightning protection / electrostatic charge
see as well DIN 57 185 / VDE 0185 part 2 of November 82

Before setting into operation the operator has to consider the necessity of lightning
protection measures and / or earthing measures concerning electrostatic charge and, if
necessary, he has to carry out the appropriate earthing measure!
Whether or not the crane has to be provided with a lightning protection depends on the regula-
tions and specifications of the appropriate supervising authority, on the rules for prevention of
accidents of the employer’s liability insurance association, on the recommendations of the
property insurance companies etc., and on the request of the building owner.

 rail-going cranes
Galvanised
 The rails must be earthed at
steel strip
both ends. If the rail track is 30 mm x
more than 20 m long, 3.5 mm
additional earthing points
should be installed every 20
meters. If there are no other
earthing devices available one
earthing rod which must be
driven at least 1.5 m into the
blitz1.dsf
ground will suffice for each
point.
Bolt M 10
 If there is steel rod or mat rein- with spring washer
forcement in the foundation of
the building, there must be
Earthling rod which
placed a must be driven at least
connection link between the reinforcement 1.5 m into the ground
and one rail. Climbing cranes must be connected twice.

 Equipment, machines, metal pipes within 20 m of the rails of the tower crane track must be linked to
the rails.
 Rail joints assembled by steel fishplates do not need to be bridged for lightning protection.
 In order to protect the electrical equipment of the components, we recommend installing overvoltage
arresters at the mains supply connection.
 stationary cranes
Top-slewing cranes: Bottom-slewing cranes:
Galvanised steel strip
(not connected with the
30 mm x 3.5 mm
steel reinforcement of the
building foundations) or
Insulated copper cable
with at least 16mm²

Bolt M 10 Nut

Spring washer
blitz1.dsf Earthling rod which
must be driven 1.5 m
into the ground

Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc Preparing the rail track 1-11

Laying rail tracks in curve

120 / 132 HC 185 HC 256 HC 256 HC

Undercarriage
170 HC 200 HC 290 HC 290 HC
4.5 m / 4.6 m 6.0 m 6.0 m 8.0 m
a
Track gauge "a"
Inner radius "b" 8.5 m 12.0 m 12.5 m 18.0 m
Outer radius "c" 13.1 m 18.0 m 18.5 m 26.0 m

The dimensions refer to the centrelines of the rail head

A larger radius of curves can be laid

b
out at any time, if space is c
available.

A larger radius of curves improves

the crane running characteristics.

A larger radius of curves reduces

friction and wear at the rail wheels.

c
b

NOTE:
Wear at rail wheels can be reduced and
their operating life prolonged by applying
grease containing graphite to the lateral
running surfaces of the rail heads.

Powered wheel bogie on the

outside of the curve

c
b

srs4a.dsf

1-12 Preparing the rail track Cap1_EC-B_V01_2009_en.doc

 p
Assembly - Disassembly

Assembly
Notes on safety during assembly ................................................................................................ 3
Who is authorised to erect the crane?....................................................................................................... 3
Under which conditions may assembly of the crane be carried out?.......................................................... 3
Which personal protective equipment must be worn?................................................................................ 3
Which additional guidelines must be observed?........................................................................................ 3
Which dangers does the crane present?................................................................................................... 3
Assembly weights and hook heights for the assembly crane ................................................... 6
Stationary cruciform base............................................................................................................ 7
Supporting surface ................................................................................................................................... 7
Assembling the stationary cruciform ......................................................................................................... 9
Setting the support arm horizontally.........................................................................................................10
Mounting the cruciform ............................................................................................................................11
Setting the support arm horizontally.........................................................................................................13
Assembling the stationary cruciform ........................................................................................................14
Mounting the cruciform ............................................................................................................................15
Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) ..................................................................... 17
Assembling the rail-going cruciform base.................................................................................................17
Checking the travel gear attachments......................................................................................................18
Mounting the wheel cases .......................................................................................................................19
Mounting the rail-going cruciform base ....................................................................................................20
Assembly: foundation anchor.................................................................................................... 23
Foundation anchor pinned (standard configuration) .................................................................................23
Foundation anchor bolted (reinforced) .....................................................................................................24
Fasteners for tower and slewing connection.....................................................................27 - 31
Assembly: Tower sections......................................................................................................... 32
Mounting the assembly platform ..............................................................................................................33
Mounting the tower sections ....................................................................................................................34
Dismantling the assembly platform ..........................................................................................................35
Mounting the assembly platform on the mounted tower section................................................................35
Mounting further tower sections ...............................................................................................................35
Assembly: Slewing platform ...................................................................................................... 36
Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration without cab)..............................................................36
Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration with cab)...................................................................37
Slewing platform with cab ........................................................................................................................39
Assembly: Counter-jib................................................................................................................ 40
Preassembling the counter-jib .................................................................................................................40
Ballasting prior to assembling the jib........................................................................................................43

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_0_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-1

Support points for the jib ........................................................................................................... 44
Jib composition .......................................................................................................................... 45
Arrangement of jib parts and positioning of the signs indicating radii ........................................................45
Position and size of the wind surface .......................................................................................................47
Slinging points for the jib and weights...............................................................................48 - 50
Preassembling the jib ................................................................................................................. 51
Connecting the jib sections......................................................................................................................52
Mounting the handrail rope ......................................................................................................................52
Mounting the wedge socket .....................................................................................................................53
Mounting the trolley travel ropes............................................................................................... 55
Summary: reeving the trolley travel ropes ................................................................................................55
Rope end fittings for trolley travel ropes ...................................................................................................56
Applying tension to trolley travel ropes.....................................................................................................57
Jib assembly .............................................................................................................................. 58
Mounting the jib on the slewing platform ..................................................................................................58
Unhooking the trolley travel ropes............................................................................................................60
Fitting the counterweight ........................................................................................................... 61
Reeving the hoist rope ............................................................................................................... 62
Summary: reeving the hoist rope with 2-run load hook .............................................................................62
Summary: reeving the hoist rope with 2/4-run load hook ..........................................................................63
Mounting the load hook on the trolley (using 2-run load hook as an example) ..........................................64
Reeving the hoist rope in the trolley (using 2-run load hook as an example).............................................66
Mounting the hoist rope with twist compensator .......................................................................................67
Changeover of load hook to operation .....................................................................................................68
Mounting the wedge socket ..............................................................................................................69 - 70
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) ............................................................................... 71
Setting the hoist gear limit switches .........................................................................................................71
Adjusting the limit switches for the hoist gear...........................................................................................72
Setting the trolley travel gear limit switches.......................................................................................75 - 76
Setting the slewing gear limit switches (cranes not featuring slip ring) ......................................................78
Adjusting the limit switches for the slewing gear.......................................................................................78
Setting the safety devices (hoist gears) ................................................................................... 80
Permissible loads: ...................................................................................................................................80
Setting the safety devices (overload protection) ..................................................................... 82
Setting the moment range overload protection.........................................................................................82
Setting the constant load range overload protection.................................................................................84
Setting the load speed monitoring............................................................................................................85
Load chart .................................................................................................................................. 86
Load capacity curves (2-/4-x reeving) ......................................................................................................86
Load capacity curves (2-x reeving) ..........................................................................................................88
Setting the safety devices .......................................................................................................... 90
Setting the moment overload protection: loads with greater hoist heights .................................................90
Preparing for initial start-up ...................................................................................................... 91
Disassembling the crane ....................................................................................................92 - 93

3-2 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_0_en.doc

Notes on safety during assembly 71EC-B 5

Who is authorised to erect the crane?

Assembly may only be carried out by specialist personnel. Following assembly, the crane must be inspected
by an expert. The results of the inspection must be logged in the crane test record book.

Under which conditions may assembly of the crane be carried out?

- The site where assembly of the crane base is to be carried out must suit the requirements of the crane
application. For further information, see: chapter ›Structural data‹ and ›Preparing for application of the
crane‹.
- Power supply and sufficient space must meet the requirements. For further information, see: chapter
›Preparing for application of the crane‹.
- Lengths and cross-sections of the electrical supply lines must comply with the calculated electrical con-
nections. For further information, see: chapter ›Technical data (electrical connection data)‹.
- Lightning protection and protection against electrostatic charge must be guaranteed. For further informa-
tion, see: chapter ›Preparing for application of the crane‹.
- Assembly and climbing of the crane is permissible up to a wind force of 6 (12.5 m/s). Please note that
these wind forces may be exceeded by gusts.
- The crane must be clearly visible.
- All parts of the crane must remain free of snow and ice.
- For further information, see: chapter ›Preparing for application of the crane‹.

Which personal protective equipment must be worn?

Always wear:
- safety helmet
- protective gloves
- protective boots
- safety harness

Which additional guidelines must be observed?

- Local guidelines regarding accident-prevention

Which dangers does the crane present?

- Danger of crushing
- Danger of toppling
- Danger resulting from electrical energy !

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-3

Notes on safety during assembly 71EC-B 5

Danger of accident! Risk of injury!

Caution!
Parts are carrying live voltage!
 Tasks may only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel.

Caution!
Suspended loads !
 Wear a safety helmet!

Caution!
Danger of crushing !

Caution!
Danger of falling !
 Put on a safety harness and secure to a suitable point!

Caution!
Danger of falling !
 Always close trapdoors.

Wear protective gloves.

Check or inspect !

Important information !

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met prior to assembly:
- Ensure STABILITY (subsoil) for structural members which must be assembled beforehand (e.g. tower
head, climbing equipment, etc.) !
- Observe the TIGHTENING TORQUES for high-tensile bolt connections !

3-4 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Notes on safety during assembly 71EC-B 5

Danger !
Danger of the crane toppling with DIAGONAL PULL
 Ensure when carrying out all assembly tasks that parts to be assembled and parts which have
already been assembled are not subjected to diagonal pull.

Note
Diagonal pull (deviation from the vertical position) can only be ascertained on the hoist rope of the
assembly crane.

Diagonal pull to the front:

Diagonal pull to the rear: > The crane is pulled forwards.
> The crane is pulled back-
wards.

Correct!
(hoist rope vertical)

Incorrect! Incorrect !
(diagonal pull) (diagonal pull)

Fig. 1: Diagonal pull

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-5

Assembly weights and hook heights for the assembly crane 71EC-B 5
Tower: 71LC / cruciform base: 71LC / Track gauge: 3.8 m

Fig. 2: Parts of the crane

Assembly part Weig Required hook height for

ht assembly crane
Stationary with pyramidal
4.13 t
1 Cruciform base complete supports 7.0m
Rail-going with travel gears 4.56 t
„B2“ 5.0 t
2 Central ballast slabs 11.0m
„D2“ 2.5 t
3 Base tower section 12.0m 3.34 t 18.0m
4 1 x tower section 5.85m 1.33 t 24.0m
5 7 x tower sections 3.9m 0.97 t 51.0m
Slewing platform complete
6 (including ball slewing ring, slewing ring support, slewing 4.45 t 53.0m
gear, hoist gear, cab and platform)
Slewing radius
7 Counter-jib complete 2.22 t 52.0m
approx. 12.0 m
50.43 m / 50.0 m 4.90 t
47.93 m / 47.5 m 4.74 t
45.43 m / 45.0 m 4.73 t
42.93 m / 42.5 m 4.57 t
Jib complete 40.43 m / 40.0 m 4.53 t
(with trolley travel gear, trol- 37.93 m / 37.5 m 4.37 t
ley travel ropes, trolley, load
8 hook and travelling mainte- 35.43 m / 35.0 m 4.18 t 54.0m
nance cage 32.93 m / 32.5 m 4.15 t
(jib length / max. radius) 30.43 m / 30.0 m 3.98 t
27.93 m / 27.5 m 3.62 t
25.43 m / 25.0 m 3.45 t
22.93 m / 22.5 m 3.09 t
20.43 m / 20.0 m 2.92 t
„A“ 1.45 t
9 Counterweight slabs „B“ 1.0 t 57.0m
„C“ 0.5 t

3-6 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Supporting surfaces

Warning!
Improper preparation of supporting surfaces of the cruciform base can lead to accidents.
 Checking the supporting surface (see: table).

Supporting surfaces for the cruciform base

Correct Incorrect

The supporting surface may not be

permitted to become washed out.

The supporting surface must be

level.

The supporting surface must not

indicate any inclines.

The supporting surface should not

be susceptible to yielding.

Table 1: Supporting surfaces for the cruciform base

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-7

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Risk of accident.
Improper assembly of the cruciform base can lead to accidents.
 Adhere to the assembly tolerances of the support arms.

Note
 Take a random sample of the foundation slabs once a year to check condition of the anchor
sleeves (c).

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

The soil features sufficient load bearing capacity.
Specifications, the weight and dimensions of the foundation slab A4 comply with those in the drawing.
For further information, see: structural data.
Dimension A is adhered to (see: fig.).
All bolt connections and pin connections have been sufficiently lubricated prior to commencing assem-
bly.

Fig. 3: Foundation slabs A4 or pyramidal supports for LC71 cruciform base

(a) Version used with founda- (b) Version used with py- (c) Anchor sleeve
tion slabs A4 ramidal supports

Dimension in m Description
A 3.8 Centre distance between outrigger jacks

Table 2: Dimensions of stationary 120HC standard cruciform base

 Position four foundation slabs A4 (a) or four pyramidal supports (b) in compliance with dimension A (see
table).
 Check anchor sleeves (c) of foundation slabs.

3-8 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Assembling the stationary cruciform

Note
Prerequisites for application of the crane on the stationary cruciform base must be fulfilled. For fur-
ther information, see: chap. 4 Preparing for application of the crane.

Application of the 71LC cruciform base with

Pyramidal supports Foundation slabs A4
Drawing no.: C062.070-373.000
Weight: 4.13 t

Table 3: Versions of the 71LC cruciform base used

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-9

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Setting the support arm horizontally

Note
The surface of the support arm must be set vertically.
The difference in height of the support arms over the corner must be less than 2 ‰ and comply with:
7.6 mm with A = 3.8 m.

Fig. 4: Setting the support arm

(a) Support arm (b) Outrigger jack

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

The thread of the outrigger jack is sufficiently lubricated and is not damaged.
The cover and the strut plate are connected with four bolts and secured with washers.
The outrigger jacks are screwed all the way in (unscrew to level horizontally).

 Set the support arm (a) horizontally by turning the outrigger jacks (b).

3-10 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Mounting the cruciform base

Fig. 5: Assembly of support arm I

(a) Threaded pin (f) Support arm I (j) Bolt
(b) Transport butt strap (g) Bolt (k) Washer
(c) Nut (h) Washer (l) Pyramidal support
(d) Pin (i) Nut (m) Foundation slab A4
(e) Spring plug

Warning!
Danger of support arm tipping
 Secure the support arm against tipping.

 Set down support arm I (f) onto two foundation slabs A4 (m) or two pyramidal supports (l), pin and se-
cure.
 Version used with foundation slabs A4: Bolt support arm I (f) and two foundation slabs A4 (m) with
eight bolts (j). Secure each bolt (j) with a washer (k). (1)
 Version used with pyramidal supports: Bolt support arm I (f) and two pyramidal supports (l) with
eight bolts (g). Secure each bolt (g) with two washers (h) and a nut (i). (1)
 Remove the two spring plugs (e) and pins (d). (2)
 Fit the transport butt strap (b) to the two threaded pins (a) and secure with two nuts (c). (3)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-11

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Fig. 6: Assembly of support arm II

(a) Support arm II (b) Support arm I

 Set support arm II (a) horizontally by turning the outrigger jacks (for further information, see ›Setting the
support arm horizontally ‹
 Set down support arm II (a) onto two foundation slabs A4 or two pyramidal supports. (4)

Fig. 7: Assembly of support arm II

(a) Nut (c) Pin (e) Support arm II
(b) Adjusting screw (d) Spring plug (f) Support arm I

 Pin support arm I (f) and support arm II (e) with two pins (c). Secure each pin (c) with two cotter
pins (d). (5)
 Bolt support arm II (e) and two foundation slabs A4 or two pyramidal supports and secure. (6)

3-12 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5
 Version used with foundation slabs A4: Bolt support arm II (e) and two foundation slabs A3 with eight
bolts. Secure each bolt with a washer. (6)
 Version used with pyramidal supports: Bolt support arm II (e) and two pyramidal supports with eight
bolts. Secure each bolt with two washers and a nut. (6)
 Tighten the four adjusting screws (b) lightly and lock using four nuts (a). (7)

Setting the support arm horizontally

Note
The surface of the support arm must be set vertically.
The difference in height of the support arms to each other and over the corner must be less than
2 ‰ and comply with:
7.6 mm with A = 3.8 m.

Fig. 8: Horizontal setting of the cruciform base

(a) Stationary cruciform base (b) Outrigger jack

 Set the surface of the stationary cruciform base (a) horizontally using the outrigger jacks (b) (a).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-13

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Risk of accident.
Improper assembly of the cruciform base can lead to accidents.
 Adhere to the assembly tolerances of the support arms.

Assembling the stationary cruciform

Note
Prerequisites for application of the crane on the stationary cruciform base must be fulfilled. For fur-
ther information, see: chap. 4 Preparing for application of the crane.

Application of the 71LC cruciform base with

concrete foundations
Drawing no.: C062.071-373.000
Weight: 3.96 t

Table 4: Version of the 71LC cruciform base used

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

The soil features sufficient load bearing capacity.
Dimension A is adhered to (see: fig.).
The concrete foundations are produced horizontal (assembly tolerance max. 2 ‰).
All bolt connections and pin connections have been sufficiently lubricated prior to commencing assem-
bly.

3-14 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Mounting the cruciform base

Fig. 9: Assembly of support arm I

(a) Threaded pin (c) Nut (e) Spring plug
(b) Transport butt strap (d) Pin (f) Support arm I

Warning!
Danger of support arm tipping
 Secure the support arm against tipping.

 Set down support arm I (f) onto the foundation.

 Remove two spring plugs (e) and pins (d). (1)
 Fit the transport butt strap (b) to the two threaded pins (a) and secure with two nuts (c). (2)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-15

Stationary cruciform base 71EC-B 5

Fig. 10: Assembly of support arm II

(a) Support arm II (b) Support arm I

 Set down support arm II (a) onto the foundation. (3)

Fig. 11: Assembly of support arm II

(a) Nut (c) Pin (e) Support arm II
(b) Adjusting screw (d) Spring plug (f) Support arm I

 Pin support arm I (f) and support arm II (e) with two pins (c). Secure each pin (c) with two cotter
pins (d). (5)
 Tighten the four adjusting screws (b) lightly and lock using four nuts (a). (7)

3-16 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Note
Prerequisites for application of the rail-going cruciform base must be fulfilled. For further information,
see: chapter ›Preparing for application of the crane‹.
The rail-going cruciform base 71LC is only suitable for straight sections of track.

Assembling the rail-going cruciform base

Application of the 71LC cruciform base on

Rails
Drawing-no.: C062.070-310.000
Weight: 4.56 t

Wheel case
Wheel case
without drive
with drive

Wheel case
without drive Wheel case
with drive

Table 5: Rail-going cruciform base 71LC1

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-17

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Checking the travel gear attachments

Fig. 12: Travel gear for cruciform base 71LC

(a) Wheel case with drive (d) Bogie support left (g) Locking pin
(b) Wheel case without drive (e) Pin (h) Cotter pin
(c) Bogie support right

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

The bogie supports (c) and (d) and the corresponding wheel cases (a) and (b) are connected via the
pins (e) and secured with locking pins (f).
Each locking pin (f) is secured with two locking pins (g).
All locking pins (f) are installed on the exterior side of the travel gear.

3-18 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Mounting the wheel cases

Warning!
Improper assembly of the cruciform base can lead to accidents.
 Secure the wheel cases against tipping prior to assembly of the cruciform base using rail
clamps.

Fig. 13: Travel gear for cruciform base 71LC

Measurement Description
A 3,8m Track gauge and wheel base
B 45 … 145 mm Setting dimension of the travel limit switch

Ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

All bolt connections and pin connections have been sufficiently lubricated prior to commencing assem-
bly.
The pin connections have been secured and the bolt connections have not loosened.
The bogie supports have been mounted accordingly.
 Set the wheel cases onto the rails according to the respective configuration in compliance with dimen-
sion A. (1)
 Adhere to the arrangement of the wheel cases with drive (a) and wheel cases without drive (b).
 Fasten the rail clamps of all wheel cases, lock and secure with wing screws. (2)
 Set the travel limit switch in compliance with dimension B and in accordance with the respective travel
limit switch rail. (3)
For further information, see: ›Rail tracks for rail-going cranes‹.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-19

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Mounting the rail-going cruciform base

Fig. 14: Mounting support arm I

(a) Threaded pin (e) Pin (h) Bolt
(b) Transport butt strap (f) Spring plug (i) Washer (high-tensile)
(c) Nut (g) Support arm I (j) Spacer
(d) Wheel case

 Set support arm I (g) down onto two wheel cases (d), fix with eight bolts (h), eight washers (d) and eight
spacers (d).
High-tensile fastening: Tighten the bolts with the respective tightening torque. For further information,
see: ›Maintenance and inspection – High-tensile, pretensioned bolt connections‹. (1)

Note
Both wheel cases must be positioned parallel to the rail.

 Remove the two spring plugs (f) and pins (e). (2)
 Fit the transport butt strap (b) to the two threaded pins (a) and secure with two nuts (c). (3)

3-20 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Fig. 15: Mounting support arm II

(a) Legend (d) Legend (g) Legend
(b) Legend (e) Legend (h) Legend
(c) Legend (f) Legend (i) Legend

 Set support arm I (g) down onto two wheel cases (d), fix with eight bolts (h), eight washers (d) and eight
spacers (d).
High-tensile fastening: Tighten the bolts with the respective tightening torque. For further information,
see: ›Maintenance and inspection – High-tension, pretensioned bolt connections‹. (4)

Note
Both wheel cases must be positioned parallel to the rail.

 Pin support arm I (f) and support arm II (e) with two pins (c). Secure each pin (c) with two cotter
pins (d). (5)
 Tighten the four adjusting screws (b) lightly and lock using four nuts (a). (7)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-21

Rail-going cruciform base (not for curved track) 71EC-B 5

Fig. 16: Mounting the border supports

(a) Bolt (f) Travel direction (j) Strut
(b) Washer (g) Border support with ca- (k) Support arm
ble drum connection
(c) Locking washer (h) Cotter pin (l) Bolt
(d) Nut (i) Pin (m) Nut
(e) Border support without
cable drum connection

 Fasten three border supports without cable drum connection (e) and one border support with cable
drum connection (g) with two support arms with 16 pins (a). Secure each bolt (a) with two washers (b),
a locking washer (c) and a nut (d). (8)
 Insert the strut (j). (9)
 Connect the strut (j) and border support (g) with two pins (i). Secure each pin (i) with a cotter
pin (h). (10)
 Clamp the strut (j) on the support arm (k) with pin (l) and secure with a nut (m). (11)

3-22 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Assembly: Foundation anchor 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper assembly of the foundation anchor can lead to accidents.
 The protrusion and insertion depth of the foundation anchor must be adhered to.
 Mount the base tower section vertically (maximum inclination ± 2 ‰).

Note
- The foundation must be prepared in compliance with the foundation calculation and the rein-
forcement plan.
- The foundation reaction forces can be obtained from the foundation reaction force charts. For
further information, see: Documentation for structural data.
- Prerequisites for application of the stationary crane on foundation anchors must be fulfilled. For
further information, see: ›Preparing for application of the crane‹.
- The climbing side must be repositioned around 90° to the wall of the building in order that the jib
is positioned parallel to the wall of the building when climbing the crane.
- The crane user is responsible for any damage caused as a result of inappropriate laying of the
foundation or negligence of proper soil conditions.

Foundation anchor pinned (standard configuration)

Drawing no. C052.070-372.000 (Ident.-Nr. 9002 946 30)

Fig. 17: Installation dimensions for the foundation anchor

(a) Foundation anchor (c) Pins with spring plugs (d) Tower section
(b) Foundation pit

 Connect four foundation anchors (a) and tower section (d) with eight pins (c). Secure each pin (c) with a
spring plug. For further information, see ›Fasteners‹. (1)
 Set the tower section with pinned foundation anchor structure centrally and vertically in the foundation
pit (b) and level (maximum inclination ± 2 ‰). Ensure that the protrusion (250 mm) and insertion
depth (1085 mm) are adhered to and that the climbing side is taken into consideration. (2)
 Wedge the foundation anchor structure and lay the reinforcing steel around the foundation anchor.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-23

Assembly: Foundation anchor 71EC-B 5

Fig. 18: Concreting the foundation anchor

(a) Spirit level (b) Corner post

 Ensure vertical positioning of the corner posts (b), as well as horizontal levelling of the tower section
using the spirit level (a) at each corner post. (3)

Warning!
There is a risk of the crane toppling if the concrete has not set properly.
 Allow the concrete to set completely before continuing assembly of the crane.

 Fill the foundation pit (u) with concrete (v). (4)

Foundation anchor bolted (reinforced)

Drawing no. C052.071-372.000 (Ident.-Nr. 9002 919 30)

Fig. 19: Installation dimensions for the foundation anchor

(a) Foundation anchor (c) Bolt (e) Fastener
(b) Nut (d) Foundation pit (f) Tower section

3-24 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Assembly: Foundation anchor 71EC-B 5
 Bolt four foundation anchors (g) with the recumbent base tower section (h), secure and tighten with the
respective tightening torque. For further information, see chap. 5.2.1 ›Fasteners‹ on Liebherr tower
cranes‹ as well as the appendix ›Information brochure for high-tensile (HV), prestressed bolt connec-
tions. (1)
 Position the tower section with pinned foundation anchor structure centrally and vertically onto the
supporting surface and level out (maximum inclination ± 2 ‰). Ensure that the protrusion (170 mm)
and installation depth (1162 mm) are adhered to and that the climbing side is taken into considera-
tion. (2)
 Adjust the bolted base tower section using the four bolts (q) until it is positioned vertically. Lock each
bolt (q) with two nuts (r). (3)
 Wedge the foundation anchor structure and lay the reinforcing steel around the foundation anchor.

Fig. 20: Concreting the foundation anchor

(a) Spirit level (b) Corner post

 Ensure vertical positioning of the corner posts (b), as well as horizontal levelling of the tower section
using the spirit level (a) at each corner post. (4)

Warning!
There is a risk of the crane toppling if the concrete has not set properly.
 Allow the concrete to set completely before continuing assembly of the crane.

 Fill the foundation pit (u) with concrete (v). (5)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-25

Assembly: Foundation anchor 71EC-B 5

3-26 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_1_en.doc

Fasteners for tower and slewing connection 71EC-B 5
on 71LC tower
Page 1 of 5

Fig. 1: Fasteners

Four bolt connections per corner post

Two pin connections per corner post

Connections:
I Slewing platform - Ball slewing ring
II Ball slewing ring – Slewing ring support
III Slewing ring support – Tower section
IV Tower section - Tower section
V Tower section - Base tower section
VI Base tower section – Cruciform base
VII Tower section - Foundation anchor
VIII Tower section – Foundation anchor
IX Tower section – Foundation anchor

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-27

Fasteners for tower and slewing connection 71EC-B 5
Page 2 of 5
Drawing number:
Slewing platform: C 062.070 – 411.000
Slewing connection + fastening: C 052.070 – 351.000
Slewing ring support C 062.071 – 333.111

Warning!
Toppling of crane.
Improper connections on the tower section can jeopardise stability.
The bolts for high-tensile connections must comply with Liebherr-standard LN 31.
The nuts for high-tensile connections must comply with Liebherr-standard LN 32.
 Clean all boreholes and pins before commencing assembly and apply a coating of Liebherr
special grease CTK. Grease all tower connections following every disassembly procedure of the
crane, however, at least every 3 years using Liebherr special grease CTK.
 Check the fasteners, lubricate and tighten with the respective tightening torque. For further
information, see: Information brochure, High-tensile, pretensioned (HV) bolt connections on
Liebherr tower cranes.

Fasteners for ball slewing ring 71EC-B on tower 71LC

I II
Slewing platform - Ball slewing
Slewing ring – Slewing ring support
ring
M20x150
1 Screw
ISO 4014 - 10.9 (DIN 931-10.9)
Quantity 36 36
Order no. 1001 690 9
2 Flat washer HV 21 - DIN 6916 ISO 7416
Number 36 36
Order no. 4215 003 01
48,3 x 12,5 x 60
3 Spacer sleeve
C 059.070 - 1351.123
Number 36 36
Order no. 9004 357 30

3-28 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Fasteners for tower and slewing connection 71EC-B 5
Page 3 of 5

Fastener for 71EC-B on tower 71LC

III IV
Slewing ring support - Tower section Tower section - Tower section
4 Spring plug 7x105 LN 262
Quantity 8 8
Order no. 4331 013 01
with climbing equipment C 052.070 - 331.101
5 Pin
without climbing equipment C 052.070 - 331.102
Quantity 8 8
with climbing equipment 9002 329 30
Order no.
without climbing equipment 9004 550 30
Slewing ring support

Connecting with two pins:

Insert the pins from the inside of the tower and secure using two spring
plugs per corner post (see drawing above).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-29

Fasteners for tower and slewing connection 71EC-B 5
Page 4 of 5

Fastener for 71EC-B on tower 71LC

V VI VII
Tower section - Base Base tower section - Base tower section -
tower section Cruciform base Foundation anchor
4 Spring plug 7x105 LN 262
Quantity 8
Order no. 4331 013 01
with climbing equipment
C 052.070 – 331.101
5 Pin without climbing
equipment
C 052.070 – 331.102
Quantity 8
with climbing equipment
9002 329 30
Order no. without climbing
equipment
9004 550 30
M 36x230 in accordance with LN31, likewise ISO
6 Screw
4014 12.9
Quantity 16
Order no. 1004 112 7
M 36 in accordance with LN 32, likewise ISO 4033
7 Nut
12
Quantity 16
Order no. 4115 183 01
8 Flange 37 in accordance with LN 75
Quantity 32
Order no. 4215 040 01
Protective
9 covering
EP 800/M36

Quantity 16
Order no. 7790 140 01
10 Spacer sleeve C 047.070 – 373.205
Quantity 16
Order no. 9003 049 30

3-30 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Fasteners for tower and slewing connection 71EC-B 5
Page 6 of 6

Fastener for 71EC-B on tower 71LC

VIII IX
Tower section - Undercarriage Tower section - Foundation anchor

11 Stud bolt 7 x 105/1 ESP - ZN

Quantity 8 8
Order no. 4331 013 01
12 Pin ‡ 45 - 42CrMO4V
Quantity 8
Order no. 9002 564 30
13 Pin ‡ 45 - 42CrMO4V
Quantity 8
Order no. 9002 623 30
14 Lock nut M 36 DIN 7967 – ZN
Quantity 16
Order no. 4235 017 01
15 Nut M 36 - 10 ISO 4032 – ZN
Quantity 16
Order no. 4115 061 01
16 Flat washer ‡ 37 LN 75 – ZN
Quantity 32
Order no. 4200 137 01
17 Bush 37 x 70 x 20
Quantity 16
Order no. 9003 049 30
18 Screw M 36 x 240 – 10.9 ISO 4014 – ZN
Quantity 16
Order no. 4062 199 01

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-31

Assembly: Tower sections 71EC-B 5

 Check firmness of the soil before commencing assembly !

 Fix a 5.85 m tower section and a 3.9 m tower section

- or -
the base tower section to the cruciform base. (1)
For further information, see Fasteners 3-13 to 3-17

 Ballast the cruciform base in accordance with hook height

and jib length. (2)
 Distribute the ballast slabs evenly on both sides of the
cruciform base.
For further information regarding the central ballast and
corner pressures, see the corner pressure charts, chapter 2.

 Fit the assembly platform on the upper third of the base

tower section (one on each side in compliance with the
drawing). (3)
For further information, see pages 3-19 and 3-20.

 Mount the remaining tower sections and assembly

platforms and complete assembly of the tower (4)

Note
 Mount the tower sections so that the access
points are shifted around 180º.

 Connect the tower sections one above the other and then
join with the base tower section always using 2 pins for each
corner post. Secure each pin with a spring plug.
Tower configuration

For further information, see pages 3-13 to 3-17

see chapter 2

 Dismantle the assembly platforms when the tower has been

successfully assembled.

Note
- Base tower section 12.0 m = 3.34 t
- Tower section 11.7 m = 2.45 t
- Tower section 5.85 m = 1.33 t
- Tower section 3.9 m = 0.97 t
- 1 11.7 m tower section = 2 5.85 m tower sections
= 3 3.9 m tower sections

3-32 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Assembly: Tower sections 71EC-B 5

Mounting the assembly platforms

Warning!
Improper mounting of the assembly platforms can lead to accidents.
 Do not mount assembly platforms if the mains supply has already been installed on the tower.

Note
Two assembly platforms are necessary for mounting without climbing equipment.

Fig. 2: Mounting the assembly platforms

(a) Ropes, assembly crane (c) Assembly platform (e) Spring plug
(b) Rope eyelet (d) Grip bolt

 Hook the ropes (a) of the assembly crane to two rope eyelets (b) on the assembly platform (c) and
secure. (1)
 Lift the assembly platform (c) and hook onto the base tower section or tower section. (2)
 Pin the assembly platform (c) with two grip bolts (d). Secure each grip bolt (d) with a spring plug (e). (3)
 Hook on the second assembly platform on the opposite side of the base tower section or the tower
section and secure. The procedure is continued as with the first assembly platform. (4)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-33

Assembly: Tower sections 71EC-B 5

Mounting the tower sections

Warning!
Improper mounting of the tower sections can lead to accidents.
Mount the tower sections vertically.
 Select the tower sections in accordance with the crane configuration and the specifications in the
corner pressure charts. For further information, see: › Corner pressures, foundation reaction
forces and ballast specifications‹.
 Use the respective fasteners for assembly of the tower sections. For further information, see
›Fasteners‹.

Fig. 3: Mounting the tower sections

(a) Tower section / Base tower (b) Slinging point, assembly
section crane rope

 Hook on the tower section (a) at the slinging points (c, d) on the ropes (b) of the assembly crane and
secure. (1)
 Align the access points of the tower sections so that they can be accessed without hindrance, taking the
climbing side of the tower into consideration.

Warning!
Danger of crushing when setting down the tower sections.
 Do not intervene between tower section and base tower section (or tower section).

 Lift tower section (e) and set down on the base tower section (or tower section) (l). (2)
 Pin the tower section (e) and base tower section (or tower section) (l) with two pins at each of the four
corner posts. Secure each pin with a spring plug. For further information, see ›Fasteners‹. (3)

3-34 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Assembly: Tower sections 71EC-B 5

Fig. 4: Checking vertical positioning of the tower section

(a) Spirit level (b) Corner post (c) Ropes, assembly crane

 Ensure vertical positioning of the corner posts (b) as well as horizontal positioning of the base tower
section (or tower section) at each corner post using the spirit level (a). (4)
 Unhook the ropes (c) of the assembly crane.

Dismantling the assembly platform

 Hook the ropes of the assembly crane onto the two rope eyelets on the assembly platform.
 Remove the two spring plugs and two pins.
 Dismantle the second assembly platform using exactly the same procedure.

Mounting the assembly platform on the mounted tower section

 For further information, see ›Mounting the assembly platforms‹.

Mounting further tower sections

Warning!
Jeopardising stability.
The central ballast must comply with the erection height and configuration of the crane.
 Check the central ballast. For further information, see: › Corner pressures, foundation reaction
forces and ballast specifications‹.

 Continue to mount the tower sections until the tower height for the respective hook height of the crane is
attained.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-35

Assembly: Slewing platform 71EC-B 5

Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration without cab)

Fig. 5: Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration without cab)

(a) Maintenance platform, (e) Nut (i) Hoist gear
switch cabinet
(b) Switch cabinet (f) Washer (j) Bolt
(c) Slewing platform (g) Bolt (k) Washer
(d) Slewing gear (h) Maintenance platform, (l) Nut
slewing gear

Note
- The slewing platform, the ball slewing ring and the slewing ring support are already assembled
upon delivery.
- The switch cabinet, hoist gear and slewing gear are installed and all electrical connections have
been provided.
- The clearance between pinion and gear wheel has been pre-set correctly at the factory.

 Check all bolt connections and pin connections and tighten with correct tightening torque, or pin and
secure wherever necessary.
 Ensure that the limit switches are mounted properly and are functioning correctly.
 Check slewing gear (d) and hoist gear (b), as well as the switch cabinet (b) for correct assembly and
functioning. For further information, see chapter ›Maintenance and inspection‹.
 Bolt the maintenance platform (a) for switch cabinet and slewing platform (d) with four bolts (j). Secure
each bolt (j) with a washer (k) and a nut (l). (1)
 Bolt the maintenance platform (h) for slewing gear and slewing platform (d) with four bolts (g). Secure
each bolt (g) with a washer (f) and a nut (e). (2)

3-36 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Assembly: Slewing platform 71EC-B 5

Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration with cab)

Fig. 6: Preassembly of the slewing platform (configuration with cab)

(a) Switch cabinet (f) Spring plug (k) Locking washer
(b) Maintenance platform, (g) Pin (l) Bolt
switch cabinet
(c) Slewing platform (h) Cotter pin (m) Platform, cab
(d) Maintenance platform, (i) Nut (n) Slewing gear
slewing gear
(e) Cab (j) Washer (o) Hoist gear

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-37

Assembly: Slewing platform 71EC-B 5

Note
- The slewing platform, the ball slewing ring and the slewing ring support are already assembled
upon delivery.
- The switch cabinet, hoist gear and slewing gear are installed and all electrical connections have
been provided.
- The clearance between pinion and gear wheel has been pre-set correctly at the factory.

 Check all bolt connections and pin connections and tighten with correct tightening torque, or pin and
secure wherever necessary.
 Ensure that the limit switches are mounted properly and are functioning correctly.
 Ensure slewing gear- (n) and hoist gear (o) are mounted properly and are functioning correctly. For
further information, see chapter ›Maintenance and inspection‹.
 Bolt the maintenance platform (b) for the switch cabinet and maintenance platform (d) for the slewing
gear with the slewing platform (c). For further information, see ›Preassembling the slewing gear
(configuration without cab)‹
 Bolt the cab (e) and the platform (m) for the cab with eight bolts (l). Secure each bolt (l) with a
washer (j), locking washer (k) and a nut (i). (1)
 Pin the platform (m) for the cab and maintenance platform (d) for the slewing gear with four pins (g).
Secure each pin (g) with spring plug (f) and cotter pin (h). (2)

3-38 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

 Assembly: Slewing platform 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper mounting of the slewing platform can lead to accidents.
The weight of the slewing platform may not exceed the maximum lifting capacity of the assembly
crane.
For further information, see ›Assembly weights‹.
Use the appropriate tower fasteners when mounting the slewing platform. For further information,
see ›Fasteners‹.

Slewing platform with cab

Note
 The maximum erection height depends on the
selected configuration. For further information,
see ›Maximum erection height‹, chapter 2.

 Hook on the complete slewing platform, lift and set down

onto the tower. (1)
 Pin the slewing platform and the tower with two pins at each
Tower configuration

of the four corner posts. Secure each pin with a spring

see chapter 2

plug. (2)

Fig. 7: Mounting the slewing platform (configuration with cab)

(a) Tower (c) Spring plug (d) Slewing platform complete
(b) Pin

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-39

Assembly: Counter jib 71EC-B 5

Preassembly of the counter-jib

Fig. 8: Preassembly of the counter-jib

(a) Auxiliary platform (e) Pin (i) Pin
(b) Guard rail (f) Cotter pin (j) Washer
(c) Tie bar (g) Support (k) Bolt
(d) Mounting (h) Spring plug

Note
- The counter-jib is delivered with guard rails and tie bars already fitted. These are folded in for
transport.

 Check all bolt connections and pin connections and tighten with correct tightening torque, or pin and
secure wherever necessary.
 Hook the auxiliary platform (a) with quick connector on the counter-jib (b) secure with two bolts (b) and
two washers (b). (1)
 Folding out the guard rails (b) into a vertical position: Remove spring plug (b) and pin (b).
 Fold up guard rail (b) and insert pin (b). Secure each pin with a spring plug (b). (2)
 Remove the cotter pin (b) and pin (b) at the mounting (b) for the tie bars (b). (3)
 Setting the tie bars (b) down on the support (b): Lift the tie bars (b) and fold up the support (b). (4)
 Set down the tie bars onto the support.

3-40 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Assembly: Counter jib 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper assembly of the counter-jib can lead to accidents.
The weights of the counter-jib may not exceed the maximum lifting capacity of the assembly crane.
For further information, see ›Assembly weights‹.

Fig. 9: Mounting the counter-jib onto the slewing platform

(a) Guide rope (d) Rope, assembly crane (g) Cotter pin
(b) Slinging point (e) Cotter pin (h) Pin
(c) Counter-jib (f) Pin

Warning!
Risk of accident with rotating counter-jib.
 Guide the counter-jib using ropes to prevent it from rotating.

 Hook the ropes from the assembly crane (d) with shackles to the slinging points provided (b) and
secure. (1)
 Lift the counter-jib (c) (inclined slightly forward) and approach the slewing platform. (2)
 Set down the counterweight (c) with the centring pins of the mounting plates onto the mounting plates of
the slewing platform. (3)
 Pin the counter-jib and slewing platform with two pins (h). Secure each pin (h) with two cotter pins (g).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-41

Assembly: Counter jib 71EC-B 5

Danger !
Toppling of the crane.
Improper attachment of the counter-jib in the guying can lead to accidents.
 Only lift the counter-jib with the assembly crane, avoiding diagonal pull, so far that it is possible
to pin and secure the tie bars.

 If necessary, lift the counter-jib slightly and lift the tie bars of the slewing platform until the connecting
holes are flush with each other.

Note
The rod for the counter-jib tie bars features a slotted borehole to ease the assembly procedure.

 Pin the tie bars on the counter-jib with the tie bars on the slewing platform using pins. Secure each pin
with two cotter pins. (4)
 Lower the counter-jib until it hooks into the tie bars.
 Fold down the supports of the tie bars.

3-42 Assembly - Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc

Assembly: Counter jib 71EC-B 5

Ballasting prior to assembling the jib

Warning!
Improper ballasting of the counter-jib can lead to accidents.
 Prior to assembly of the jib, insert one, two or not any A-ballast slabs at all, depending on the
length of the jib.
For further information, see chapter 2 ›Number and arrangement of counterweight slabs‹.
 The ballast slabs must be weighed precisely before insertion.
 Always insert the ballast slabs of the counterweight precisely in the correct order (fundamentally,
ballasting should be initiated at the tower and then continued outwards towards the counter-jib).

Note
Weight of the ballast slabs:
- A-ballast slabs 1.45 t
- B-ballast slabs 1.00 t
- C-ballast slabs 0.50 t

Fig. 10: Ballasting prior to assembling of the jib (counterweight represented in the example is for 50m jib)
(a) Direction of ballasting (c) Rope, assembly crane (d) Counter-jib
(b) A-ballast slab

 Hook the rope of the assembly crane (c) into the A-ballast slab (b), lift A-ballast slab and lower
accurately into the guides.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_2_en.doc Assembly - Disassembly 3-43

Jib support points 71EC-B 5

Caution!
The jib could sustain damage if the correct support areas are not observed.
 Only set down the jib onto the positions specified.

Fig. 1: maximum permissible support area for 50.0 m jib

Fig. 2: maximum permissible support area for 47.5 m jib

Fig. 3: maximum permissible support area for 45.0 m jib

Fig. 4: maximum permissible support area for 42.5 m jib

Fig. 5: maximum permissible support area for 40.0 m jib

Fig. 6: maximum permissible support area for 37.5 m jib

Fig. 7: maximum permissible support area for 35.0 m jib

3-44 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Jib configuration 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper combinations of jib sections can lead to accidents.
 Arrange, pin and secure the jib sections to be assembled in compliance with the drawing
numbers and identification numbers specified for a specific jib length of the this crane type.
 For jib lengths 20 m, 22.5 m and 25 m: Install the wind surface in the jib head.
The drawing numbers and identification numbers of the jib sections are stamped on the respective
sections.
All dimensions of the following drawings in m.

Arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii

Fig. 8: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 50.0 m jib

Fig. 9: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 47.5 m jib

Fig. 10: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 45.0 m jib

Fig. 11: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 42.5 m jib

Fig. 12: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 40.0 m jib

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-45
Jib configuration 71EC-B 5

Fig. 13: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 37.5 m jib

Fig. 14: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 35.0 m jib

Fig. 15: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 32.5 m jib

Fig. 16: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 30.0 m jib

Fig. 17: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 27.5 m jib

Fig. 18: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 25.0 m jib

3-46 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Jib configuration 71EC-B 5

Fig. 19: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 22.5 m jib

Fig. 20: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 20.0 m jib

Position and size of the wind surface

Warning!
Improper combinations of jib sections can lead to accidents.
 For jib lengths 20 m, 22.5 m and 25 m: Install the wind surface in the jib head.
All dimensions of the following drawings in m.

Fig. 21: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 25.0 m jib

Fig. 22: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 22.5 m jib

Fig. 23: arrangement of the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii for 20.0 m jib

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-47
Slinging points for jib and weights 71EC-B 5

Note
 Always determine and mark the slinging points.

Fig. 24: slinging points for jib and weights 50.0 m jib

Fig. 25: slinging points for jib and weights 47.5 m jib

Fig. 26: slinging points for jib and weights 45.0 m jib

Fig. 27: slinging points for jib and weights 42.5 m jib

Fig. 28: slinging points for jib and weights 40.0 m jib

3-48 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Slinging points for jib and weights 71EC-B 5

Fig. 29: slinging points for jib and weights 37.5 m jib

Fig. 30: slinging points for jib and weights 35.0 m jib

Fig. 31: slinging points for jib and weights 32.5 m jib

Fig. 32: slinging points for jib and weights 30.0 m jib

Fig. 33: slinging points for jib and weights 27.5 m jib

Fig. 34: slinging points for jib and weights 25.0 m jib

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-49
Slinging points for jib and weights 71EC-B 5

Fig. 35: slinging points for jib and weights 22.5 m jib

Fig. 36: slinging points for jib and weights 20.0 m jib

Fig. 37: Mounting the jib suspensions

(a) Cotter pin (e) Tube (i) Nut
(b) Washer (f) Threaded pin M 24 (j) Washer
(c) Jib suspension (g) Washer (k) Threaded pin M 33
(d) Jib top chord (h) Nut

Mounting the jib suspensions to jib top chord

 Determine and mark the slinging points (for further information, see: › Slinging points for jib and
weights‹; Fig. 24 - Fig. 36).
 Connect two jib suspensions (c) and jib top chord (d) in accordance with the determined slinging points
with two threaded pins M 24 (f) and one threaded pin M 33 (k). Secure each threaded pin (f, k) with two
washers and two nuts.
 Insert a tube (e) through each jib suspension (c) , fit two washers (b) onto the tube (e) from the outside
and secure with two cotter pins (a).

3-50 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Preassembly of the jib 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper combinations of jib sections can lead to accidents.
 Arrange, pin and secure the jib sections to be assembled in compliance with the drawing
numbers and identification numbers specified for a specific jib length of the this crane type.
 For jib lengths 20 m, 22.5 m and 25 m: Install the wind surface in the jib head.
The drawing numbers and identification numbers of the jib sections are stamped on the respective
sections.
All dimensions of the following drawings in mm.

Caution!
Risk of accident due to sinking trolley or support.
The trolley or the support could sink if the underground beneath the support points is not firm enough
to withstand the weight of the jib. The jib and the trolley could sustain damage. (For further
information, see ›Jib support points 71EC-B 5‹.)
 Ensure sufficient load-bearing capacity of the soil. Insert underlays beneath the bearing
surfaces wherever necessary.

Fig. 38: Preassembly of the jib (jib featuring 50.0 m radius represented as example)

 Pin the jib sections without jib head section with each other and secure (for further information, see
›Connecting the jib sections‹). (1)
 Lift the jib, retract the trolley in the jib (pawl is pointing toward the end of the jib) and set down the jib. (2)
> The jib is resting on the trolley.
 Pin the jib head section with the preassembled jib sections and secure (for further information, see
›Connecting the jib sections‹). (3)
 Lift the jib, manoeuvre the trolley to the height of the lifting block and secure the trolley against
moving. (4)
 Set down the jib.
 Mount the handrail rope on the jib upper chord and secure (for further information, see ›Mounting the
handrail rope‹).
 Mount the signs indicating radii onto the jib upper chord. (For further information, see : Arrangement of
the jib sections and positioning of the signs indicating radii‹.)
 Reeve the trolley travel gear ropes (for further information, see: ›Mounting trolley travel ropes
71EC-B 5‹.)
 For jib lengths 20 m, 22.5 m and 25 m: Install wind surface in the jib head (for further information, see:
›Position and size of the wind surface ‹.)
 Mount the jib suspensions on the jib upper chord. (For further information, see: ›Slinging points for jib
and weights 71EC-B 5‹)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-51
Preassembly of the jib 71EC-B 5

Connecting the jib sections

Fig. 39: Jib connections

Connecting the jib upper chords

 Pin the jib upper chords with pins. Secure each pin with two cotter pins.
Connecting the lower chords
 Pin the lower chords with pins. Secure each pin with a spring plug.

Mounting the handrail rope

Fig. 40: Mounting the handrail rope

(a) Tensioning screw (e) Ring nut (i) Shackle
(b) Nut (f) Pin (j) Joint plate, upper chord jib
head section
(c) Cotter pin (g) Wedge socket (k) Jib upper chord
(d) Joint plate, upper chord jib (h) Handrail rope (l) Rope guide
heel piece

3-52 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Preassembly of the jib 71EC-B 5
 Fasten the handrail rope (h) (rope end: cable eye) with shackle (i) on the joint plate (j) and feed through
rope guides (l).

Note
Ensure the correct length when pretensioning the handrail rope (h):
- If handrail rope is too long, length of tensioning screw (a) will not be sufficient for retightening.
- If the handrail rope is too short, the wedge socket (g) can not be pinned with the ring nut (e).

 Pretension the handrail rope (h) (rope end welded) and mount with wedge socket (g). (For further
information, see: ›Fitting the wedge socket‹).
 Insert the tensioning screw (a) in the borehole of the joint plate (d) and lock with nut (b).
 Screw together ring nut (e) and tensioning screw (a). Lock ring nut (e) with nut (b)
 Pin wedge socket (g) and ring nut (e) with pin (f). Secure pin (f) with cotter pin (c).

Fitting the wedge socket

Warning!
The handrail rope could loosen if the wedge socket is not properly fitted.
 Select the correct wedge socket for the respective rope diameter and install in accordance with
size and configuration.
 Do not subject the sides of the wedge socket to loads.

Ensure that the wedge socket, wedge and pin are checked prior to commencing assembly:
Do not use any parts which indicate cracks.
Use original parts (not modified) only.
Repair any small nicks (chinks) on the wedge socket or pin by grinding until the surface is smooth again
(original dimensions may not be reduced by more than 10%).
Do not repair any damages by welding.

Fig. 41: Wedge socket (configuration 1)

(a) Wedge socket (d) Pin (g) Identification „permissible
(b) Cotter pin (e) Rope rope diameter“ (specified in
(c) Wedge (f) Rope clamp mm)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-53
Preassembly of the jib 71EC-B 5

Fig. 42: Wedge socket (configuration 2)

(h) Wedge socket (l) Cotter pin (p) Rope diameter too large
(i) Wedge (m) Rope clamp (q) Identification „permissible
(j) Pin (n) Rope diameter correct rope diameter“ (specified
(k) Rope (o) Rope diameter too small in mm)

Type of rope Dimension „L“ (rope end piece)

at least minimum
6 - 8-strands standard ropes 6 x rope diameter 150mm.
Non-rotating ropes 20 x rope diameter 150mm.

3-54 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Mounting trolley travel ropes 71EC-B 5

Summary: Reeving trolley travel ropes

Fig. 43: Assembly diagram for following jibs

(a) Trolley travel gear (d) Rope deflection pulley II, (f) Trolley travel rope II
jib intermediate piece
(b) Trolley (e) Rope deflection pulley jib (g) Trolley travel rope I
head section
(c) Rope deflection pulley I, jib
intermediate piece

Jib lengths Maximum radius

50.43m 50.0m
47.93m 47.5m
45.43m 45.0m
42.93m 42.5m
40.43m 40.0m
37.93m 37.5m
35.43m 35.0m
32.93m 32.5m

Fig. 44: Assembly diagram for following jibs

(a) Trolley travel gear (c) Rope deflection pulley I, (e) Trolley travel rope II
jib intermediate piece
(b) Trolley (d) Rope deflection pulley jib (f) Trolley travel rope I
head section

Jib lengths Maximum radius

30.43m 30.0m
27.93m 27.5m
25.43m 25.0m
22.93m 22.5m
20.43m 20.0m

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-55
Mounting trolley travel ropes 71EC-B 5

Rope end fittings for trolley travel ropes

Note
If the trolley travel rope breaks, the rope breakage safety lever is forced by its own weight to rotate,
as represented in the diagram. If the trolley moves uncontrollably the rope breakage safety lever gets
jammed in the cross member of the jib.
> The trolley is stopped.

Fig. 45: Rope breakage safety and rope drum, trolley

(a) Jib (g) Joint plate (l) Bolt
(b) Rope breakage safety (h) Trolley (m) Washer
lever
(c) Trolley travel rope I (i) Tensioning screw (n) Wing nut
(d) Nut (j) Bolt with washer (o) Drum flange, tensioning
device
(e) Locknut (k) Rope clamp (p) Pawl
(f) Bolt
Connecting trolley travel rope I with trolley
 Swing the rope breakage safety lever (b) upwards.
 Connect trolley travel rope I (c) with cable eye and joint plate (g) with bolt (f). Connect bolt (f) with
nut (d) and secure with locknut (e). (1)
 Swing the rope breakage safety lever (b) downwards onto the trolley ravel rope. (2)
 Ensure correct positioning and freedom-of-movement of the rope breakage safety.
Connecting trolley travel rope II with trolley
 Remove wing nut (n), washer (m) and bolt (l). Unhook the pawl (p) and secure against falling back
using wing nut (n), washer (m) and bolt (l). (3)
 Fasten trolley travel rope II with rope clamps (k) on the drum flange (o) of the tensioning device on the
trolley. Tighten each rope clamp (k) with bolt (j) and washer (j). (4)
 Wind trolley travel rope II onto the drum flange (o) until at least three windings of the safety rope are
present on the drum flange. (5)

3-56 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc
Mounting trolley travel ropes 71EC-B 5

Applying tension to trolley travel ropes

Fig. 46: Applying tension to trolley travel ropes

(a) Bolt (c) Wing nut (e) Tensioning screw
(b) Washer (d) Pawl

 Wind trolley travel rope I onto the trolley travel gear rope storage drum until light tension has been
applied to trolley travel rope I.
 Remove wing nut (c), washer (b) and bolt (a). Hook in pawl (d) and secure with wing nut (c),
washer (b) and bolt (a). (1)
 Apply light tension to trolley travel rope II via the tensioning screw (e). (2)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_3_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-57
Mounting the jib 71EC-B 5

Mounting the jib onto the slewing platform

Warning!
Improper mounting of the jib can lead to accidents.
 The weight of the sections to be mounted may not exceed the maximum lifting capacity of the
assembly crane (for further information, see: ›Slinging points for jib and weights‹).
 Prior to assembly of the jib, insert one, two or not any A-ballast slabs at all, depending on the
length of the jib. For further information, see chapter 2 ›Number and arrangement of
counterweight slabs‹.

Fig. 1: 71EC-B 5 with 50.0 m jib

 Determine and mark the slinging points for the respective jib on the jib upper chord.
 Mount two jib suspensions on the slinging points (for further information, see: ›Slinging points for jib and
weights‹).
 Fasten the guide ropes on the jib heel piece.
 Hook on and secure the ropes of the assembly crane.

Warning!
Risk of accident due to rotating jib.
 Guide the jib using ropes to prevent it from rotating.

Warning!
Risk of accident as a result of sections colliding.
 Approach the slewing platform carefully with the jib and avoid any collisions.

 Lift jib and approach the slewing platform.

3-58 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Mounting the jib 71EC-B 5

Fig. 2: Pinning the jib with the slewing platform

(a) Folding platform (e) Centring pin (i) Bearing, jib upper chord
(b) Cotter pin (f) Bearing, jib (j) Connection plate
(c) Pin (g) Grip bolt (k) Pin
(d) Bearing, slewing platform (h) Spring plug (l) Cotter pin

Warning!
Danger of falling when standing on the slewing platform.
 When standing on the slewing platform always put on a safety harness and secure accordingly.

 Raise the folding platform (a). (1)

 Retract the jib into the bearings (d) of the slewing platform. (2)
 If all centring pins (e) are resting on the bearings (d) of the slewing platform: Pin the bearings (d, f) of
the slewing platform and of the jib with a pin (c). Secure each pin (c) with two cotter pins (b). (3)
 Remove spring plug (h) and grip bolt (g). (4)

Note
The connection plate (i) features a slotted borehole to simplify assembly.

 To enable the bearing (j) on the jib upper chord to be pinned with the connection plate (i): Turn the
connection plate (i) upwards. (5)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-59
Mounting the jib 71EC-B 5

 Pin the connection plate (i) and bearing (j) on the jib upper chord with a pin (k). Secure the pin (k) with
two cotter pins (l). (6)
 Lower the jib until it hooks into the tie bars for the slewing platform.
 Insert the power supply cable in the trolley travel gear.

Unhooking the assembly ropes

Warning!
Improper unhooking of the assembly crane ropes can lead to accidents.
 Ride with the travelling maintenance cage only as far as the slinging points. Do not ride any
further towards max. reach as ballasting of the crane has not yet been completed.

 Ride in the travelling maintenance cage as far as the slinging points and unhook the assembly crane
ropes.

Fig. 3: Unhooking the assembly crane ropes

3-60 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Installing the counterweight 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Incorrect selection and improper installation of the ballast slabs jeopardises stability of the crane and
can lead to accidents.
 Select configuration, combination and number of ballast slabs in accordance with crane
configuration and application.
 Weigh the ballast slabs before installing in the counter-jib.
 Install the ballast slabs of the counterweight precisely in the correct order. For further
information, see chapter 2 ›Number and arrangement of counterweight slabs‹.

Fig. 4: Arrangement of counterweight slabs (example 71EC-B 5 with 50 m jib)

(a) Direction of ballasting (c) Rope, assembly crane (d) Counter-jib
(b) A-ballast slab

Note
Weight of the ballast slabs:
A-ballast slabs 1.45 t
B-ballast slabs 1.00 t
C-ballast slabs 0.50 t
Hook on A-ballast slabs first, then B-ballast slabs and finally C-ballast slabs.

Example for crane 71EC-B 5 with 50 m jib: 5xA + 2xB + 1xC = 9.75 t
For further information, see chapter 2 ›Number and arrangement of counterweight slabs‹.

 Select the ballast slabs in accordance with the respective crane application.
 Hook the rope of the assembly crane in the ballast slabs.
 Lift the ballast slabs and beginning at the tower, install the ballast slabs accurately in the opening
of the counter-jib working backwards toward the counter-jib.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-61
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper mounting of the hoist rope can lead to accidents.
 When working on the jib and tower: Always close the trapdoors after use and always put on a
safety harness and secure it to an appropriate point.
 Check the hoist rope for damage prior to mounting.
 Always check rope course and reeving.
For further information, see the chap. Maintenance and inspection ›Ropes, rope pulleys, load
hook and rope end fitting‹.

Summary: Reeving the hoist rope with 2-run load hook

Fig. 5: Summary: Reeving the hoist rope (example, reeving with 2-run load hook)
(a) Rope drum, hoist gear (d) Rope deflection pulley, (g) Rope deflection pulley,
slewing platform lower hook block
(b) Rope deflection pulley, (e) Rope deflection pulley,
counter-jib trolley
(c) Rope deflection pulley, (f) Twist compensator (hoist
slewing platform (overload rope locating point)
protection)

3-62 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Summary: Reeving the hoist rope with 2/4-run load hook

Fig. 6: Summary: Reeving the hoist rope (example 2/4-run load hook, reeved with 2-runs)
(a) Rope drum, hoist gear (d) Rope deflection pulley, (g) Rope deflection pulley,
slewing platform lower hook block
(b) Rope deflection pulley, (e) Rope deflection pulley,
counter-jib trolley
(c) Rope deflection pulley, (f) Twist compensator (hoist
slewing platform (overload rope locating point)
protection)

Fig. 7: Summary: Reeving the hoist rope (example 2/4-run load hook, reeved with 4-runs)
(a) Rope drum, hoist gear (d) Rope deflection pulley, (g) Rope deflection pulley,
slewing platform lower hook block
(b) Rope deflection pulley, (e) Rope deflection pulley,
counter-jib trolley
(c) Rope deflection pulley, (f) Twist compensator (hoist
slewing platform (overload rope locating point)
protection)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-63
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Mounting the load hook on the trolley (using 2-load hook as an example)

Fig. 8: Lowering the load hook

(a) Assembly rope (d) Manual winch (f) Spring plug
(b) Rope clamps (e) Grip bolts (g) Load hook with catch funnel
(c) Retaining pin

Ensure that the following prerequisite has been guaranteed:

The hoist rope is secured to the outside of the rope storage drum with rope clamps. Each rope clamp is
secured with two bolts and two washers.
Power supply cable to travel gear is inserted.
 Check whether the rope clamps (b) on the assembly rope (a) are correctly mounted. (1)
 To relieve tension in the grip bolt (e) of the load hook transport safety retainer: Tighten the assembly
rope (a) using the manual winch (d).
 Pull out the two outer grip bolts (e) and the spring plug (f) of the load hook transport safety retainer. (2)
 Lower the load hook and catch funnel (g) with the manual winch (d). (3)

3-64 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Fig. 9: Legend
(a) Grip bolt (c) Trolley (e) Manual winch
(b) Spring plug (d) Catch funnel (f) Retaining pin

 Pin the catch funnel (d) and trolley (c) with the grip bolt (a). Secure each grip bolt (a) with a spring
plug (b). (1)
 Remove the retaining pin on the assembly rope from the guide on the load hook.
 Pull the retaining pin (f) all the way up with the manual winch (e). (2)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-65
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Reeve the hoist rope in the trolley (using 2-run load hook as an example)

Fig. 10: Reeving the hoist rope in the trolley

(a) Hoist rope (d) Washer (g) Mounting
(b) Rope deflection pulley, trolley (e) Bolts (h) Clamp piece, mounting
(c) Rope deflection pulley, upper (f) Nut
hook block

 Wind off the hoist rope (a) slowly and reeve via the rope deflection pulleys (b, c) of the trolley and of the
upper hook block. (1)

Note
For other re-reeving procedures (e.g. 2/4-run) see summaries.

 Loosen the two bolts (e) of the retainer (g) and unscrew the clamp piece (h).
 Guide the end of the hoist rope through the mounting (g) and screw back on the clamp piece(h). (2)
 To fix to the hoist rope(a): Tighten the two bolts (e) (with two washers (d)) of the mounting (g). Secure
each bolt (e) with nut (f) and lock with nut (f). (3)

3-66 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Mounting the hoist rope with twist compensator

Caution!
The hoist rope can be wrenched out of the mounting.
 If the trolley is manoeuvred toward max. reach: Wind off the hoist rope while untensioned.

 Manoeuvre the trolley toward max. reach while simultaneously winding off the hoist rope.

Fig. 11: Mounting the hoist rope with the twist compensator
(a) Trolley (d) Twist compensator (g) Bolt
(b) Wedge socket (e) Cotter pin (h) Nut
(c) Bolt (f) Pin (i) Clamp piece

 Manoeuvre the trolley (a) to the position of max. reach. (1)

 Pin the wedge socket (b) of the hoist rope on the twist compensator (d) with pin (f). Secure the pin (f)
with a cotter pin (e). For further information, see ›Fitting the wedge socket‹, page 3-69). (2)

Note
Do not fix the twist compensator (d) when using low-twist ropes.
 Ensure that the bolt (c) has been loosened. (3)

 Loosen the two bolts (g) of the mounting and unscrew the clamp piece (i). (4)
 Tighten the two bolts (g) (with two washers) of the mounting. Secure each bolt (g) with nut (h) and lock
with nut (h). (5)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-67
Reeving the hoist rope 71EC-B 5

Fig. 12: Manoeuvring the trolley toward min. reach

 Manoeuvre the trolley toward min. reach while simultaneously reeving the hoist rope.

Changeover of load hook to operation

Fig. 13: Folding down the load hook

(a) Load hook (c) Cotter pin (e) Lower hook block
(b) Grip bolt (d) Hoist rope

 Wind off hoist rope (d) and lower the lower hook block (e) (switch position ›Hoist down‹) until the load
hook (a) can be reached by hand. (1)
 Remove the cotter pin (c) and push up the load hook slightly and hold (a).
 Remove the grip bolt (b) (2)
 Fold the load hook (g) downwards. (3)

3-68 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Fitting the wedge socket

Warning!
The handrail rope could loosen if the wedge socket is not properly fitted.
 Select the correct wedge socket for the respective rope diameter and install in accordance with
size and configuration.
 Do not subject the sides of the wedge socket to loads.

Ensure that the wedge socket, wedge and pin are checked prior to commencing assembly:
Do not use any parts which indicate cracks.
Use original parts (not modified) only.
Repair any small nicks (chinks) on the wedge socket or pin by grinding until the surface is smooth again
(original dimensions may not be reduced by more than 10%).
Do not repair any damages by welding.

Fig. 14: Wedge socket (configuration 1)

(a) Wedge socket (d) Pin (g) Identification „permissible
(b) Cotter pin (e) Rope rope diameter“ (specified in
(c) Wedge (f) Rope clamp mm)

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-69
Fitting the wedge socket

Fig. 15: Wedge socket (configuration 2)

(h) Wedge socket (l) Cotter pin (p) Rope diameter too large
(i) Wedge (m) Rope clamp (q) Identification „permissible
(j) Pin (n) Rope diameter correct rope diameter“ (specified
(k) Rope (o) Rope diameter too small in mm)

Type of rope Dimension „L“ (rope end piece)

at least minimum
6 - 8-strands standard ropes 6 x rope diameter 150mm.
Non-rotating ropes 20 x rope diameter 150mm.

3-70 Assembly z
Disassembly Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_4_en.doc
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5

Setting the hoist gear limit switch

The limit switch on the hoist gear restricts upward and downward movements of the load hook whereby the
control stops the hoist gear upon reaching the end positions (motion cut-off).
Just before reaching the end position ›max. hoist height‹ the speed of the hoist gear motor is reduced to the
minimum value possible (speed reduction). To attain the correct speed reduction and motion cut-off, the
control cams of the limit switch must be set prior to start-up.

Fig. 1: Positions of the load hook for speed reduction and motion cut-off
(a) Position motion cut-off (b) Position for speed (c) Position motion cut-off max.
max. hoist height reduction lowering depth

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-71
Setting the safety devices (limit switch) 71EC-B 5

Adjusting the hoist gear limit switch

Fig. 2: Hoist gear limit switch

(a) Fastening screws (d) Contact for speed (g) Adjusting pin for cam plates
reduction
(b) Position for stop with (e) Contact for stop with (h) Limit switch with switching
lowest hoist height. maximum hoist height contacts
(c) not allocated (f) Cam plate

Note
The limit switch must be reset each time working conditions change, e.g. hook height.

 Loosen all fastening screws(a) of the switching contacts slightly (approx. 2 full turns per screw).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-72
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5
Setting motion cut off for max. hoist height
 Manoeuvre the load hook upward until the distance between upper hook block and trolley is at least
1.5 m. At the same time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Tighten the fastening screws (a) of the switching contacts (e) for max. hoist height.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (f) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the motion cut-off position again.
> The hoist gear stops when the motion cut-off position is reached.

The switching contact can be finely adjusted by loosening the fastening screw (maximum 1/2 a turn).
Setting speed reduction
Speed reduction must be set so that minimal speed is attained just before motion cut-off.
The setting is dependent on the type of hoist gear:
- Regulated by pole shifting or via frequency converter
- Number of gears
- Maximum speed (the greater the speed, the earlier the speed reduction must be set)

 Manoeuvre the load hook upward until the distance between the upper hook block and trolley is approx.
5 m. At the same time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Tighten the fastening screws (a) of the switching contact (d) for speed reduction again.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (f) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the speed reduction position for speed reduction again.
> The hoist gear reduces in speed when it reaches the speed reduction.
> Minimum speed is attained when the motion cut-off position is reached.

Problem rectification
Minimum speed is being attained well before the motion cut-off?
The position of the speed reduction is set too early.
 Set the position of the speed reduction a little later.
 Check the setting.

Problem rectification
Speed is not being reduced to minimum prior to motion cut-off?
The position of the speed reduction is set too late.
 Set the position of the speed reduction a little sooner.
 Check the setting.

The switching contact can be finely adjusted by loosening the fastening screw (maximum 1/2 a turn).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-73
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5
Setting the max. lowering depth motion cut-off.
The max. lowering depth motion position must be set so that the hoist gear drum always features at least
three safety windings. The load hook may not be set down. There is no speed reduction.
 Manoeuvre the load hook downward until immediately before the point of being set down. At the same
time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Tighten the fastening screws (a) of the switching contact (b) for max. lowering depth again.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (f) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the motion cut-off position again.
> The hoist gear stops when the motion cut-off is reached.

The switching contact can be finely adjusted by loosening the fastening screw (maximum 1/2 a turn).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-74
Setting the safety devices (limit switch) 71EC-B 5

Setting the trolley travel gear limit switch

The limit switch on the trolley travel gear restricts inward and outward movements of the trolley, whereby the
control stops the trolley travel gear upon reaching the end positions (motion cut-off).
Before reaching the end positions ›min. reach‹ and ›max. reach‹ the speed of the trolley travel gear motor is
reduced to minimum value (speed reduction). To attain the correct speed reduction and motion cut-off, the
control cams of the limit switch must be set prior to start-up.

Fig. 3: Positions of the trolley for speed reduction and motion cut-off
(a) Position min. reach motion (c) Position max. reach (d) Position max. reach motion
cut-off speed reduction cut-off
(b) Position min. reach speed
reduction

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-75
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5

Setting the trolley travel gear limit switch

Fig. 4: Trolley travel gear limit switch

(a) Fastening screws (d) Switching contact min. (g) Limit switch with switching
reach motion cut-off contacts
(b) Switching contact max. (e) Cam plate (h) Switching contact min.
reach motion cut-off reach speed reduction
(c) Switching contact max. (f) Adjusting screw for cam (i) Limit switch with sensor
reach speed reduction plate

Note
The limit switch must be reset each time the application specifications are changed, e.g. jib length.
Allocation of the switching contacts for the respective travel directions can be established by
travelling with the trolley.

 Loosen all fastening screws (a) of the switching contacts (approx. 2 full turns per screw).
Setting the min. reach motion cut-off
 Manoeuvre the load hook inward until the distance between stop buffer and trolley is at least 0.1 m. At
the same time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Tighten the fastening screws (a) of the switching contact (b) for min. reach again.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (f) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the motion cut-off position again.
> The trolley travel gear stops when the motion cut-off position is reached.

The switching contact can be finely adjusted by loosening the fastening screw (maximum 1/2 a turn).

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-76
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5
Setting the min. reach speed reduction
Speed reduction must be set so that minimal speed is attained just before motion cut-off.
The setting is dependent on the type of trolley travel gear:
- Regulated by pole shifting or via frequency converter
- Number of gears
- Maximum speed (the greater the speed, the earlier the speed reduction must be set)
 Manoeuvre the trolley inward until the distance between stop buffer and trolley is approx. 5 m. At the
same time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Tighten the fastening screws (a) of the switching contacts (d) for speed reduction again.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (f) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the speed reduction position again while retracting the trolley.
> The trolley travel gear reduces in speed when it reaches the speed reduction.
> Minimum speed is attained when the motion cut-off position is reached.

Problem rectification
Minimum speed is being attained well before the motion cut-off?
The position of the speed reduction is set too early.
 Set the position of the speed reduction a little later.
 Check the setting.

Problem rectification
Speed is not being reduced to minimum prior to motion cut-off?
The position of the speed reduction is set too late.
 Set the position of the speed reduction a little sooner.
 Check the setting.

The switching contact can be finely adjusted by loosening the fastening screw (maximum 1/2 a turn).
Setting the max. reach motion cut-off.
Setting is carried out in exactly the same way as with setting of min. reach.
 Set the switching contact (b) accordingly
Setting the max. reach speed reduction.
Setting is carried out in exactly the same way as with setting of min. reach.
 Set the switching contact (c) accordingly

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-77
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5

Setting the slewing gear limit switch (cranes not featuring slip ring)
The limit switch for slewing movements stops the slewing movement of the crane by shutting down the
slewing gear if a certain number of turns are accomplished in both directions (motion cut-off).
To attain the correct motion cut-off, the control cams of the limit switch must be set prior to start-up.

Fig. 5: Positions of the jib for motion cut-off (every desired position possible)
(a) Motion cut-off position for (b) Motion cut-off position for
slewing to the right slewing to the left

Adjusting the slewing gear limit switch

(f)

(a)
(d)

(e)

(c)

(b)

Fig. 6: Slewing gear limit switch

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-78
Setting the safety devices (limit switches) 71EC-B 5
(a) Fastening screws (c) Switching contacts for motion cut- (e) Cam plate
off when slewing to the left
(b) Switching contacts for (d) Adjusting screws for cams (f) Contact safety unit
motion cut-off when
slewing to the right

Note
Allocation of the switching contacts for the respective rotational directions can be established by
operating the slewing gear.

 Loosen all fastening screws(a) of the switching contacts slightly (approx. 1 full turn per screw).
Setting motion cut-off for slewing to the right
 Rotate the crane three full turns to the right without twisting the electrical cable. At the same time
check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (e) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the motion cut-off position again.
> The slewing gear stops when the motion cut-off position is reached.

Setting the stop position for slewing to the left

 From the motion cut-off position for slewing to the right with the crane, rotate the crane three full turns
to the left. At the same time check the rotational direction of the cam plates.
 Continue to turn the cam plate (e) for the respective switching contact (do not turn it back) until the
contact switches.
 Check the setting: Approach the motion cut-off position again.
> The slewing gear stops when the motion cut-off position is reached.
 After carrying out the respective settings: Inhibit the cam plate assembly using the fastening screws (a).
 To position the crane in the middle of the traverse path: Undergo three full rotations to the right again.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-79
Setting the safety devices (hoist gears) 71EC-B 5

Permissible loads: WIW 210 MZ 402 – 14 kW, PU

FU PU FU PU
1 - 2500 - 6,2
57m 2 - 2500 - 27,0
3 - 1300 - 54,0
- 2400 - 6,5
90m - 2400 - 28,5
- 1200 - 57,0
Table 1: 2-run configuration 2500 kg maximum load

FU PU FU PU FU PU FU PU
1 - 2500 - 6,2 - 5000 - 3,1
2R - 57 m
2 - 2500 - 27,0 - 5000 - 13,5
4R - 28 m
3 - 1200 - 54,0 - 2500 - 27,0
1 - 2300 - 6,5 - 4700 - 3,3
2R - 57 m
2 - 2300 - 28,5 - 4700 - 14,3
4R - 28 m
3 - 1100 - 57,0 - 2350 - 28,5
Table 2: 2/4-run configuration 3000 / 6000 kg maximum load

Permissible loads: WIW 230 MZ 406 – 22 kW, PU / WIW 230 MZ 407 – 22 kW, FU

FU PU FU PU
1 2500 2400 4,1 8,2
2 2500 2400 41,0 38,0
161m
3 1800 1350 58,0 76,0
4 1250 - 82,0 -
Table 3: 2-run configuration 2500 kg maximum load

FU PU FU PU FU PU FU PU
1 2500 2300 4,1 8,2 5000 4700 2,0 4,1
2R - 161 m
2 2500 2300 41,0 38,0 5000 4700 21,0 19,0
3 1700 1250 58,0 76,0 3500 2700 29,0 38,0
4R - 80 m
4 1150 - 82,0 - 2450 - 41,0 -
Table 4: 2/4-run configuration 2500 / 5000 kg maximum load

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-80
Setting the safety devices (hoist gears) 71EC-B 5

Reference values: WIW 210 MZ 402 – 14 kW, PU

WIW 230 MZ 406 – 22 kW, PU
WIW 230 MZ 407 – 22 kW, PU

Description 2-run 4-run Gear Symbol

2300 kg
4700 kg 1
Max. permissible load 2400 kg 1 and 2
5000 kg
2500 kg
1100 kg
1200 kg
2350 kg
1250 kg
Load for adjustment of limit 2500 kg 1
1300 kg 3
switch REF 1 2700 kg
1350 kg
3500 kg
1700 kg
1800 kg

Load for adjustment of limit 1150 kg 1

2450 kg 4
switch REF 2 1250 kg

Table 5: Reference values for hoist gear limit switches

Note
Select the values which correspond with the motor gear speed and the permissible loads of the hoist
gears

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-81
Setting the safety devices (overload protection) 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Improper adjustment of the overload protection can cause the crane to topple.
 Adjustment tasks may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
 The crane may only be started up when the overload protection has been correctly set.
 The overload protection must activate if the permissible load is exceeded.

Warning!
There is a risk of being crushed when carrying out adjustment tasks on the tower head, as well as a
danger of being drawn into machinery when working in immediate proximity to rope pulleys and
ropes.
 Only actuate the drives when the assistant relays clear signs to do so.

Setting the moment range overload protection

(3) (a)

90%

(b)
(5)

kg 90%
kg

[m] [m]

kg (2) kg (4)
2 1 90% 2 1

(1) kg kg

Fig. 7: Setting the moment range overload protection

(a) Overload limit switch (b) "90%" overload prewarning limit switch

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-82
Setting the safety devices (overload protection) 71EC-B 5

 Manoeuvre the trolley to max. reach and hook on the load permissible for this reach. For further
information, see: chap. ›Load chart 71EC-B 5, page 86‹. (1)
 Lift the load with minimum speed (control lever stage 1) and continue to raise (control lever stage 2). (2)
 Set the limit switch (a) so that the permissible load when lifting with minimum speed (control lever stage
1) and during step enabling (stage 2) is not exceeded. (3)
 Hook on 90 % of the permissible load, lift the load with minimum speed (control lever stage 1) and
continue to raise (control lever stage 2). (4)
 Set the „90%“ limit switch (b) so that it becomes actuated when 90 % of the permissible load is reached
when lifting with minimum speed (control lever stage 1) and during step enabling (stage 2). (5)
 Check the setting of the overload protection.

Note
The limit switch for 90% of the permissible load shuts down the 3rd gear of the trolley travel gear.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-83
Setting the safety devices (overload protection) 71EC-B 5

Setting the constant load range overload protection

kg

(c)

[m]

kg

2 1

1 1
90 - 97%

kg
(a) (b)

Fig. 8: Setting the constant load range overload protection (c) Constant load range
(a) Max. load limit switch (b) Prewarning limit switch

 Manoeuvre the trolley into the constant load range (c) and hook on the permissible load. For further
information, see: chap. ›Load chart 71EC-B 5, page 86‹. (1)
 Lift the load with minimum speed (control lever stage 1; 1st gear).
 Set the limit switch (a) so that the maximum permissible load when lifting with minimum speed (control
lever stage 1) and during step enabling (stage 2) is not exceeded.
 Set the limit switch (b) so that it becomes actuated when 90...97 % of the permissible load is reached
when lifting with minimum speed (control lever stage 1) and during step enabling (stage 2).

Note
The limit switch for 90% of the permissible load shuts down the 3rd gear of the trolley travel gear.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-84
Setting the safety devices (overload protection) 71EC-B 5

Setting the load speed monitoring

kg

(c)

[m]

kg

2 1
4 3

1 1

kg

(a) (b)

Fig. 9: Setting the overload protections. Reference intermediate loads

(a) Limit switch REF 1 (b) Limit switch REF 2 for (c) Range for maximum load
FU-Off only

 Manoeuvre the trolley into the constant load range (c).

 Hook on the reference load for REF 1 (a). For further information, see: chap. ›Load chart 71EC-B 5,
page 86‹.
 Set the limit switch (a) so that it becomes actuated when reference load REF 1 is lifted.
 Hook on reference load REF 2 (b). For further information, see: chap. ›Load chart 71EC-B 5, page 86‹.
 Set the limit switch (b) so that it becomes actuated when the reference load for REF 2 is lifted.

Note
Limit switch REF1 switches the 3rd gear of the trolley off. With hoist gear PU.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-85
Load chart 71EC-B 5

Load capacity curves (2-/4-time reeving)

Fig. 10: Load chart in [kg] with 2-/4-time reeving

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-86
Load chart 71EC-B 5

Fig. 11: Load capacity curves [represented as a graph] with 2-/4-time reeving

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-87
Load chart 71EC-B 5

Load capacity curves (2-time reeving)

Fig. 12: Load chart in [kg] with 2-time reeving

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-88
Load chart 71EC-B 5

Fig. 13: Load capacity curves [represented as a graph] with 2-time reeving

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-89
Setting the safety devices 71EC-B 5

Setting the moment overload protection: Loads with greater hoist heights

Caution!
Setting of the overload protection must fundamentally be carried out with standard hoist height!
(standard hoist height = permissible hook height of the free-standing crane, see chapter 2)
If the climbing of the crane is carried out to a greater hoist height, the greater rope weight is
automatically taken into consideration by the overload protection.
Not permissible: Setting the overload protection with a greater hoist height without taking the
greater rope weight into consideration will cause an overload of the crane without the overload
protection becoming activated.
The crane operates with its normal load curve above the standard hook height as long as the weight
of the additional rope is not more than 5% of the load on the jib head.
With greater hoist heights, the permissible load is reduced by the extra weight of the rope.

Rope diameter Linear weight [kg/m]

[mm] PDD 915 C PDD 1315 C
10 0.42 0.47
11 0.51 0.59
12 0.62 0.69
13 0.72 0.80
14 0.85 0.93
15 0.97 1.06
16 1.15 1.20
17 1.28 1.36
18 1.43 1.52
19 1.59 1.70
20 1.75 1.89
21 1.92 2.08
22 2.10 2.28
23 2.28 2.49
24 2.47 2.70
25 2.68 2.94
26 2.89 3.17
27 3.20 3.44
28 3.44 3.69
29 3.68 3.96
30 3.92 4.26

Table 6: Table for calculating the rope weight:

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-90
Preparing for initial start-up 71EC-B 5

 If the slewing gear is mounted with frequency converter: Enter the parameters at the frequency
converter ›Slewing gear‹. See summary for further information.
 Check the oil level in the fluid coupling, refill as required. For further information, see the chap.
›Maintenance and inspection‹.
 Check setting of the hoist gear brake, travel gear brake and trolley travel gear brake, adjust as
necessary. For further information, see the chap. ›Servicing‹.
 Carry out checks prior to start-up, and then start up the crane. For further information, see the chap.
›Operation‹.

> After carrying out all specified installation and adjustment tasks, operation of the crane may
now be initiated!

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-91
Disassembly of the crane 71EC-B 5

Removing the hoist rope.

 Raise the load hook until it can be pinned to the trolley. Deactivate the limit switch for range of lift.
 Manoeuvre the trolley with min. speed to maximum reach.
 Secure the hoist rope to the trolley using the cable clamp featured on the trolley.

Caution!
 CHECK: The hoist rope must be secured to the trolley via the cable clamp.

 Loosen the end of the hoist rope from the fixed point.
 Secure the trolley against unintentional movement.
 Manoeuvre the trolley with min. speed to min. reach and simultaneously wind the cable onto the hoist
drum.
 Position the trolley at winch height.
 Loosen the hoist rope slightly and remove the rope mounting clamp from the trolley.
 Remove the hoist rope from the trolley and load hook, wind it slowly onto the hoist drum and secure
against unwinding.
 Lower the jaw pivot of the load hook down the connector on the trolley using the winch crank handle.
 Rest the jaw pivot of the load hook down onto the trolley.
 Remove the pins which are securing the load hook to the trolley.
 Lift the load hook using the winch crank handle.
 Insert the pins which secure the load hook at the upper part of the jib.

Remove the counterweight slabs.

 Remove the counterweight, partially or completely, depending on the radius.

Caution!
 Retain either one, two, or no “A“ counterweight slabs (1.45 t) at all, see chapter 2, paragraph.
chap. 2: “Number and arrangement of counterweight slabs.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-92
Disassembly of the crane 71EC-B 5

Dismantling the jib.

 Use the travelling maintenance cage of the trolley to obtain access to the suspension points and to be
able to hook on the assembly ropes.
 Raise the jib slightly (ensure that this does not collide with the slewing platform) and remove the
connecting pins.

Caution!
There is a danger of toppling!
 Lift the jib only until the pinned connection slewing platform-jib can be loosened and removed.

 Fasten the forks to the slewing platform using the locking pins.
 Remove the pins which are connecting the lower part of the jib and the slewing platform and lower the
jib to the ground.

Remove the remaining counterweight

 Remove the remaining counterweight.

Remove the counter-jib.

 Lift the supports of the counter-jib tie bars.
 Hook on the anchoring lugs of the counter-jib using the auxiliary crane.
 Lift the counter-jib slightly until the tie bars are supporting the counter-jib supports.
 Remove the connecting pins and fasten the forks to the slewing platform.
 Unpin the counter-jib from the slewing platform, lower it down to the ground and fold it back into the
transport position.

Remove the slewing platform

 Hook on the complete slewing platform (see. anchoring points) and secure the slewing platform.
 Remove the connecting pins between tower and slewing ring support.
 Lift the complete slewing platform and lower the slewing platform down to the ground.

Caution!
 Lift the slewing platform in a vertical and evenly balanced position.

 Dismantle the components of the slewing platform.

Remove the tower sections

 Dismantle the tower sections, apart from the base tower section, using the auxiliary assembly platform.

Remove the central ballast and base tower section, as well as the cruciform base
 Remove the central ballast and dismantle the base tower section.
 Dismantle the cruciform base.

Cap3_71EC-B5_V01_2005_5_en.doc Assembly z
Disassembly 3-93
 q
Climbing the crane
For further information, see: Appendix Information description › Climbing the crane ‹.

Cap4_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Climbing the crane 4-1

4-2 Climbing the crane Cap4_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc
 r
Operation

Notes on operational safety........................................................................................................ 5-2

Who is permitted to operate the crane?...................................................................................................... 5-2
Under which conditions may the crane be operated?................................................................................. 5-2
For the contractor:....................................................................................................................................... 5-2
For the crane operator: ............................................................................................................................... 5-3
Which requirements must be met before you are entitled to operate the crane......................................... 5-3
Operating instructions .........................................................................................................................5-4 - 5-5
Safe distance ......................................................................................................................................5-6 - 5-7
Measures when in contact with live overhead electric lines ....................................................................... 5-7
Free jib slewing ........................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Plates ................................................................................................................................................5-9 - 5-10
Control and operating elements............................................................................................... 5-11
A summary of all operating elements........................................................................................................ 5-11
Radio remote control desk ........................................................................................................................ 5-12
Functions on the radio remote control desk.............................................................................................. 5-13
Control stand in the cabin (optional) ......................................................................................................... 5-14
Functions on the control desk in the cabin ............................................................................................... 5-15
Operating the crane operator's seat ......................................................................................................... 5-16
Operating heating and ventilation ............................................................................................................. 5-17
Control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing ....................................................................................... 5-18
Functions on the control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing ............................................................ 5-18
Operation .................................................................................................................................... 5-19
Slewing...................................................................................................................................................... 5-19
Trolley traveling......................................................................................................................................... 5-20
Lifting and lowering the hook .................................................................................................................... 5-21
Crane travelling ......................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Re-reeving ........................................................................................................................5-23 - 5-26
Operation: Starting up the crane.............................................................................................. 5-27
Pre-start checks ........................................................................................................................................ 5-27
Checking brakes for correct operation ...................................................................................................... 5-29
Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane ................................................................ 5-32
Bringing the crane into the basic position ................................................................................................. 5-32
Free jib slewing ......................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Shutting down and stopping the crane with radio remote control operation............................................. 5-33
Shutting down and stopping the crane with cabin control stand operation............................................... 5-34
Mechanical setting to free jib slewing ....................................................................................................... 5-35
Securing the crane .................................................................................................................................... 5-36
Setting down the load in the event of power failure .....................................................5-37 - 5-39
Operational faults ...................................................................................................................... 5-40

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-1

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Who is permitted to operate the crane?

The crane should be operated only by reliable persons who are at least 18 years old and who are familiar
with the crane and have been instructed as to the possible accident risks involved.

Under which conditions may the crane be operated?

Operation of the crane is permissible with wind speeds of up to wind force 8 (20 m/s). It must be noted that
strong gusts may cause this wind force to be exceeded.
Ensure that no obstacles are present within the working or travel area.
Ensure that all necessary protective measures to safeguard public transport have been undertaken around
the building site.

For the contractor:

The contractors are responsible for safe operation of the crane. Ensure that all necessary measures
preventing any danger have been undertaken.
Designation of persons who are authorized to operate the crane must be confirmed in writing.
Only experienced persons may be authorized to secure the loads.
All notes concerning safety and danger, as well as the operating instructions, must be on-hand in their
entirety and fully legible.
Ensure that the valid local guidelines for accident-prevention are understood and observed.
Ensure that only authorized persons board the crane.
The crane must be inspected by specialists preceding initial start-up or recomissioning following fundamental
alterations.
The crane may only be operated if all protective and safety devices are available and fully functional. The
safety devices (limit switches) may not be bridged or be readjusted.

5-2 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

For the crane operator:

Operation of a crane demands an elevant sense of responsibility. Malpractice during the operation of a crane
can lead to serious injury. Yourself and other persons could subsequently suffer serious injury, or even
fatalities.
Which requirements must be met before you are entitled to operate the crane
You must be over 18.
You have received instruction for operation of the crane and proven your proficiency to the building
contractor.
The contractor must have authorized you for operation of the crane in writing.
You must have read and fully understood the instruction manual, in particular the chapter concerning notes
on safety and operation.
You must have read and fully understood the valid local guidelines for accident-prevention.

 Carry out a visual inspection before each start-up for damage and faults. The crane may only be
operated when in a technically safe, sound condition.
> Discernible damage and faults must be reported immediately to the person responsible.
> Shut down and secure the crane immediately.

Before starting up the crane, make sure that the following conditions have been met:
All protective and safety devices are in place and fully functional.
All handles, handrails, platforms, landings and ladders on the crane are free from dirt, snow and ice.
No persons are endangered in any way.

Wear your personal protective equipment:

- Safety helmet
- Safety shoes.
- Safety belt (f. ex. during power failure, in order to travel trolley)

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-3

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Operating instructions

Danger!
Disregard of the following operating instructions can cause immediate serious injury. Yourself and
other persons could suffer serious injury, or even fatalities. All liability claims become null and void
with improper operation of the crane.

(1) Use of the crane to dislodge loads which  Do not use the crane as a scale.
are stuck fast is forbidden.  The overload protection in the hoist gear
 Lift free-standing loads only. may not be rendered powerless by adding
weights.
(2) Swinging or pendulous movements of the
 Select the load in accordance with the
load is forbidden.
lifting capacity diagram.
 Maintain a calm handling of the load.
(6) Allowing the hook to rest on the load or
(3) Improper slinging of the load is forbidden.
on the ground is forbidden.
 Secure the load correctly. Only
 Keep the hoist rope taut. Avoid slack
experienced persons should be
rope.
authorized to secure the loads.
(7) Increasing a suspended load is forbidden.
(4) Horizontal displacement of not freely
suspended loads is forbidden. (8) Diagonal pull is forbidden.
 Lift the load first, then move it horizontally.  Before lifting the load: The trolley must
always be positioned vertically or centrally
(5) Exceeding the crane's permissible lifting
above the load.
capacity is forbidden.
 The overload protection devices must not (9) The carriage of persons with the load is
be used to switch off the hoist gear or forbidden.
trolley travel gear.

5-4 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Operating instructions

(10) Moving a load without visual  Always supervise the control stand when
contact/signalman is forbidden. a load is suspended.
 Always maintain visual contact with the (12) Operation of the crane in poor visibility is
load, or organize the aid of a signalman. forbidden.
Ensure a clear understanding with the  Visibility must be sufficient to view the
signalman. entire working area.
(11) Leaving the control stand whenever a load
is suspended from the hook is forbidden.

(13) Installing advertisement boards, making changes, installing

or modifying anything without permission from the
manufacturer is forbidden.
(14) Welding work on loads suspended from the hook without
suitably insulated lifting slings is forbidden.
(15) Instantaneous removing of loads from the crane is forbidden
without first obtaining the manufacturer's authorization.
(16) It is forbidden to travel the trolley, lift or lower loads or slew
the crane while the crane is travelling.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-5

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Safe distance

Warning!
Danger of crushing from moving crane parts.
The safe distance between moving crane parts (e.g. rail-going crane base) and obstacles in the
immediate vicinity must be at least 0,5 m.
 If it is not possible to maintain the safe distance, cordon off the danger area.

Fig 1: Safe distance to obstacles in the immediate vicinity

Fig. 2: Safe distance between cranes and electronic operating-range limiting system
(a) Electronic operating-range (b) Obstruction (e. g. building)
limiting system

5-6 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Safe distance to overhead electric lines

Danger!
Contact with overhead electric lines can lead to fatal injury of the crane operator and persons in the
immediate vicinity of the crane.
 Maintain a safe distance form live overhead electric lines in accordance with DIN 57105 / VDE
0105. Enquire the energy supply company about the voltage level.
 If it is not possible to maintain the safe distances, the overhead electric lines must be de-
energized. This condition must be guaranteed for the duration of the work being carried out.

Fig 3: Maintain distance to live overhead electric lines

Nominal voltage Minimum distance

up to 1kV 1m
more than 1 kV up to 110 kV 3m
more than 110 kV up to 220 kV 4m
more than 220 kV up to 380 kV 5m
if nominal voltage is not known 5m
Tab. 1: Minimum distances to live overhead electric lines

Measures when in contact with live overhead electric lines

Fig. 4: Contact with live overhead electric lines

 Do not leave the tower crane.

 Do not touch the steel construction.
 If possible, move the crane out of the hazard zone.
 Warn others against approaching and touching the crane.
 Arrange to have the power switched off in the contacted/damaged line.
 Do not leave the tower crane until the contacted/damaged line has been safely de-energized.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-7

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Free jib slewing

Warning!
Tipping of the crane.
If the jib does not slew in the direction of the wind, the crane could tip.
The slewing brake must be released after switching off the crane.
The crane must be able to slew freely in the direction of the wind.
 Before shutting down: Set the crane to free jib slewing. For further information see: ›Shutting
down and stopping the crane‹.

Fig. 5: Crane slews into the direction of the wind

5-8 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Safety plates

Warning!
Avoid incomplete or illegible safety plates, in order that persons may be forewarned against possible
dangers. Serious accidents could be resulted.
 Check that the safety plates are complete.
 Ensure that the safety plates are in a legible condition at all times.
 Replace any missing or illegible plates.

Fig. 6: Safety plates

(a) Danger resulting from (d) Accident prevention (g) Danger of becoming
electrical energy prohibition plate B trapped or pulled in via
exposed spur gears
(b) After climbing through, (e) Note
always keep the trapdoor
closed
(c) Danger of falling (f) Accident prevention
Wear and use a safety prohibition plate A
harness

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-9

Notes on operational safety 71EC-B 5

Information plates

Fig. 7: Information plates

(a) Noise emission level [dbA] (b) Type identification plate (c) Capacity plate (154EC-HM6
as example)

 Check that the information plates are complete.

 Replace any missing or illegible plates.

5-10 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

A summary of all operating elements

Fig. 8: A summary of operating elements

(a) Control stand in the cabin (b) Radio remote control (c) Control box ›Electrical
(optional) setting to free jib slewing‹

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-11

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Radio remote control desk

HBC 10165680

Fig. 9: Radio remote control desk HBC 10165680

(a) Control lever ›Slewing (e) Lamp ›Battery charging (i) No function
gear/Trolley travel gear‹ status‹
(b) Control lever ›Hoist (f) Selector switch ›Radio (j) Push-button›Re-reeving‹
gear/crane travel gear‹ remote control On/Off‹
(c) Push-button ›Horn‹ (g) Selector switch ›Radio (k) Push-button ›Control Off‹
frequency‹
(d) Push-button ›Control On‹ (h) Locking switch (l) Push-button ›Applying the
Emergency stop‹ slewing brake‹

5-12 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Functions on the radio remote control desk

Function Actuations on the control desk

Switching on the control circuits again  Press push-button (d).
The control was previously switched off > All crane movements can be performed immediately.
by pressing the ›Control Off‹ push-button.
Switching on the control circuits  Switch on the main switch.
The control was previously switched off  Switch on selector switch (f).
 Press push-button (d).
via the main switch.
> All crane movements can be performed after 30
seconds.

Switching off the control circuits  Press push-button (k).

> All brakes are applied except for the slewing brake.

Switching off the control circuits in the  Press the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch (h).
event of an emergency >All brakes are applied.

Switching on the control circuits again  Release the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch (h) by
following the event of an emergency turning.
 Press push-button (d).
Activating the dead man control  Release the control levers (a, b)
Inductive dead man control on the control > All brakes are applied except for the slewing brake.
Levers, (depending on type)
Applying the slewing brake  Press push-button (l).
The brake is only designed to hold the jib > The slewing brake is applied.
in the desired position, in particular against
the wind. The slewing movement is stopped
by applying counter current.
Releasing the slewing brake  Move the control lever (a).

Tab. 2: Radio remote control desk functions

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-13

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Control stand in the cabin (optional)

Fig. 10: Control desk in the cabin - control panel on the left and on the right
(a) Control lever ›Slewing gear/ (g) Push-button ›Control (m) Locking switch ›Emergency
Trolley travel gear‹ On‹ stop‹
Close slewing gear brake
(b) Lamp red ›Overload‹ (h) Push-button ›Test (n) Control lever ›Hoist gear‹
Overload‹
(c) Lamp yellow ›Overload (i) Push-button ›Cabin (o) Lamp ›Checking the hoist
Prewarning‹ lighting‹ gear brake‹
(d) Push-button ›Horn‹ (j) Push-button (p) Push-button ›Control Off‹
›Windscreen washer‹
(e) Push-button ›Horn‹ (k) Selector switch
›Heating/Ventilation‹
(f) Push-button›Re-reeving‹ (l) Selector switch
›Windscreen wiper‹

5-14 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Functions on the control desk in the cabin

Function Actuations on the control desk

Switching on the control circuits again  Press push-button (g).
The control was previously switched off > The push-button lights up.
by pressing the ›Control Off‹ push-button > All crane movements can be performed
immediately.

Switching on the control circuits  Switch on the main switch.

The control was previously switched off via  Press push-button (f).
the main switch. > The push-button lights up.
> All crane movements can be performed after 30
seconds.

Switching off the control circuits  Press push-button (p).

> The push-button (f) goes out.
> All brakes are applied except for the slewing brake.

Switching off the control circuits in the  Press the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch (m).
event of an emergency > All brakes are applied.

Switching on the control circuits again  Release the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch (m).
following the event of an emergency  Press push-button (g).
> The push-button lights up.
> All crane movements can be performed after 30
seconds.

Testing the overload warning function  Press push-button (g).

> The lamp (c) lights up.
> The lamp (b) lights up.
> The horn sounds.

Activating the dead man control  Release both control levers (a, n)
Inductive dead man control on the control > All brakes are applied except for the slewing brake.
levers. (depending on type)
Applying the slewing brake  Turn control lever (a).
The brake is only designed to hold the jib in > The slewing brake is applied.
the desired position, in particular against the
wind. The slewing movement is stopped by
applying counter current.
Releasing the slewing brake  Move the control lever (a).
> The slewing brake opens.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-15

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Operating the crane operator's seat

Fig. 11: Crane operator's seat

(a) Seat rotation in exiting (f) Seat length adjustment (j) Flap for fresh air and air
position admission
(b) Seat height and inclination (g) 230 V plug socket (k) Length adjustment, side
adjustment consoles
(c) Temperature regulator for (h) Armrest height (l) Time switch for cabin
cabin heating adjustment heating
(d) Lumbar support (i) Side desks inclination (m) Air outlet, adjustable
adjustment adjustment
(e) Back rest inclination

5-16 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Operating heating and ventilation

Fig. 12: Heating and ventilation

(a) Control insert (d) Ventilator stage 1 (g) Selector switch Heating/
Ventilation
(b) Selector switch (e) Heating output 2 kW (h) Temperature regulator
(c) Ventilator stage 2 (f) Heating output 4 kW (i) Lever, Fresh air / Recirculated
air flap

The heating times can be set individually for each day of the week. Duration of the shortest switching unit is
13/4 h.
Activating the heating automatically
 Set the ›Heating/Ventilation‹ selector switch (g) to 0 ›Heating‹.
 Position the control insert (a) of the timer to the respective time period.
 Set the selector switch (b) to ›Automatic‹ (central switch position).
 Select the room temperature via the temperature regulator (h).
> The heating is automatically switched on if the room temperature drops below the set value .

Heating completely switched off

 Set the ›Heating/Ventilation‹ selector switch (g) to 0.
- or -
Set the selector switch (b) on the timer to ›completely off‹ (switch down).
Operating the heating without timer (as required)
 Set the selector switch (b) on the timer to ›continuously on‹ (switch up).
 Use the ›Heating/Ventilation‹ selector switch (g) to select the heating output (stage I: 2 kW; stage
 II: 4 kW).
 Select the room temperature via the temperature regulator .
> The heating is automatically switched on if the room temperature drops below the set value .
Activating the ventilation
 Set the ›Heating/Ventilation‹ selector switch (g) to ventilation stage I or II .
 To obtain fresh air: Position the lever (i) for the flap for fresh air and air admission downwards .
 To obtain air admission: Position the lever (i) for the flap for fresh air and air admission upwards .

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-17

Control and operating elements 71EC-B 5

Control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing

Fig. 13: Control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing

(a) Push-button ›Free jib slewing‹ (b) Lamp ›Free jib slewing‹

Functions on the control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing

Function Actuations on the control box

Setting the crane to free jib slewing  Hold push-button (a) pressed until the lamp
The control was previously switched off by lights up .
pressing the ›Control Off‹ push-button. > The slewing brake is locked in the released
position.
 Press the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch on
the radio remote control
Deactivating the setting to free jib slewing  Press the ›Control On‹ push-button on the radio
remote control or on the control stand in the
cabin.
> The locking of the slewing brake is released.

Tab. 3: Functions control box Electrical setting to free jib slewing

5-18 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation 71EC-B 5

Slewing

Note
- The further the control lever is deflected from the neutral position, the quicker the crane will
rotate. When the control lever is moved towards the neutral position, the drive unit is slowed
down. Use slowest speed to reach the exact stopping position.
- The influences from wind and load will be compensated by the control system.
- The control system prevents the crane from vibrating and the load from swinging.

Fig. 14: Slewing

(a) Push-button ›Applying the (c) Radio remote control (e) Control lever ›Slewing
slewing brake‹ desk gear/Trolley travel gear‹
(Control desk in the cabin)
(b) Control lever ›Slewing (d) Control desk in the
gear/Trolley travel gear‹ cabin
(Radio remote control desk)

Slewing movement to the right or to the left

 Move the control lever (b, e) to the right or to the left. (1)
 Just before reaching the stopping position: Move the control lever (b, e) to the slowest speed step.
 In this step, continue slewing the crane until the slewing movement is stopped. Then return the control
lever (b, e) to the "NEUTRAL" position. (2)
> The slewing brake is applied after approx. 20 seconds.

The slewing movement can be stopped faster by applying counter-current (by moving the control lever
sensitively through the "NEUTRAL" position to the opposite direction to reverse the slewing motors).
Holding the jib in position, in particular against the wind
Make certain that the following conditions have been met:
The slewing movement must be stopped.
The control lever (c) must be returned to the "NEUTRAL" position.
 Press the push-button (a). (4)
- or –
Turn control lever (e) clockwise.
> The slewing brake is applied immediately.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-19

Operation 71EC-B 5

Trolley travelling
Version: Control lever with three switching positions and electric motor with frequency converter
(FU)

Note
The further the control lever is deflected from the neutral position, the quicker the trolley is moved.
By returning the control lever towards the "NEUTRAL" position, the drive unit is slowed down
automatically. Thus, applying counter-current is not required.

Fig 15: Trolley travelling

(a) Control lever ›Slewing (b) Radio remote control desk (c) Control lever ›Slewing gear/
gear/Trolley travel gear‹ Trolley travel gear‹ (Control
(Radio remote control desk) desk in the cabin)

Trolleying-out
 Move the control lever forward. (1)
Stopping the trolley
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" position. (2)
> The trolley travel gear brake is applied.

Trolleying-in
 Move the control lever backward. (3)

5-20 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

 Operation 71EC-B 5

Lifting and lowering the hook

Version: Control lever with four switching positions and electric motor in short circuit switching
(PU-Version).
Control lever with four switching positions and electric motor with frequency converter
(FU-Version).

Note
The further the control lever is deflected from the neutral position, the quicker the load hook is lifted
or lowered.
By positioning the control switch towards zero position, the drive brakes automatically, so that
countering is not required.

Fig. 16: Lifting and lowering the hook

(a) Radio remote control desk (b) Control desk in the cabin

Caution!
Shortening of the gear life
 Do not skip intermediate gear speed stages.

Lifting the hook

 Move the control lever backward. (1)
Stopping the hook
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" position . (2)
>The hoist gear brake is applied.

Lowering the hook

 Move the control lever forward. (3)

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-21

Operation 71EC-B 5

Crane travelling

Danger!
Lifting and lowering loads, as well as slewing during crane travelling, can cause the crane to tip with
certain crane configurations. For further information see: ›Statistic data‹.
 If in doubt, refrain from lifting and lowering of the load, as well as slewing during crane
travelling.

Fig. 17: Crane travelling

(a) Radio remote control desk (d) Control lever ›Hoist gear‹ (g) Control desk in the cabin
Travelling the crane forwards
 Move the control lever (b) to the right. (1)
Stopping the crane
 Move the control lever (b) sensitively through the "NEUTRAL" to the opposite direction (applying
counter-current). (2)
- or -
Return the control lever (b) to the "NEUTRAL" position.
> The crane comes slowly to a standstill.

Travelling the crane backwards

 Move the control lever (b) to the left . (3)
> The brake of the travel gear is applied automatically after a short time. It serves as a holding brake only.

5-22 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Re-reeving 71EC-B 5

Hoist rope re-reeving from 2 to 4-runs

Warning!
Danger of upper hook block falling down due to faulty operation
 Only execute re-reeving process in switching stage 1.
 The load hook must not oscillate during the re-reeving process.
 Observe the red control flaps on both sides.
 Keep the area below the trolley clear.

Fig. 18: Hoist rope re-reeving from 2 to 4-runs

(a) Button for re-reeving (c) Control flap (d) Catch funnel
(b) Upper hook block

 Travel load hook in min. radius. (1)

 Move load hook in min. lowering depth. (2)
> Limit switch „hoist up“ switches off.
 Press button for re-reeving (a). (3)
 Drive the upper hook block (b) with „hoist up“ in switching stage 1 into the catch funnel (d). (4)
> The red control flaps (c) are pressed outwards (see Fig. 19: Lock upper hook block in the catch funnel).

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-23

Re-reeving 71EC-B 5

Fig. 19: Lock upper hook block in the catch funnel

(e) Control flap

 Continue „hoist up“ movement. (5)

 When both control flaps (e) fall back: stop „hoist up“. (6)
 Check that both control flaps (e) are aligned.
 Operate „hoist down“ slightly (also see Fig. 20: Hoist rope re-reeving from 2 to 4-runs) (7).

Fig. 20: Hoist rope re-reeving from 2 to 4-runs

Warning!
Danger of upper hook block falling down
When the upper hook block is not placed exactly on the support blocks, the upper hook block can fall
down.
 Keep the area below the upper hook block clear.
 Ensure that the upper hook block is placed exactly on the support blocks by oscillating briefly.

 Oscillate briefly (travel trolley forth and back). (8)

 Operate „hoist down“. (9)
> Hoist rope is re-reeved to 4-runs.

5-24 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Re-reeving 71EC-B 5

Hoist rope re-reeving from 4 to 2-runs

Warning!
Danger of upper hook block falling down due to faulty operation
 Only execute re-reeving process in switching stage 1.
 The load hook must not oscillate during the re-reeving process.
 Observe the red control flaps on both sides.
 Keep the area below the trolley clear.

Fig. 21: Hoist rope re-reeving from 4 to 2-runs

(a) Button for re-reeving (c) Upper hook block (e) Catch funnel
(b) Lower hook block (d) Catch funnel

 Travel load hook to min. radius. (1)

 Move load hook in min. lowering depth. (2)
> Limit switch „hoist up“ switches off.
 Press button for re-reeving (a). (3)
 Drive the bottom hook block (b) with „hoist up“ in switching stage 1 in the upper hook block (c) and
further into the catch funnel (d). (4)
> The support blocks are pushed outwards with the red control flaps (e) (see Fig. 22: Unlock upper hook
block)

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-25

Re-reeving 71EC-B 5

Fig. 22: Unlock upper hook block

(f) Catch funnel (h) Control flap (i) Wedge
(g) Support block

 Drive „hoist down“. (5)

> The upper hook block suspension pulls the wedge (i) along.
The upper hook block is unlocked.
 Check that both control flaps (e) are aligned. (6)

Fig. 23: Hoist rope re-reeving from 4 to 2-runs

 Operate „hoist down“. (7)

> Hoist rope is reeved to 2-runs.

5-26 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation: Starting up the crane 71EC-B 5

Pre-start checks
Make sure that the following conditions have been met:
The protective measures against dangerous electrical shocks have been undertaken.
The maintenance and inspection tasks in accordance with the maintenance and inspection chart have
been carried out .
The nominal voltage is available at the site junction box .
Central ballast and counter-ballast are complete .
Parameter entries for the slewing gear with frequency converter must be executed. For further
information see: ›Parameter entry on the frequency converter ‹.
All safe distances are maintained .
The slewing area is free of obstacles .
The travel lane is free of obstacles .

Checking the bolt connections

Make sure that the following conditions have been met:
All bolt connections are correctly tightened. In particular on the ball slewing ring and on the tower
connections. For further information see: Preloaded high-strength bolt connections.

Checking the ropes and rope pulleys

For further information see: chap. ›Maintenance and inspection‹

Make sure that the following conditions have been met:

All ropes are correctly reeved and fastened.
All ropes are running correctly in the rope pulleys.
All ropes are well-greased.
The rope pulley grooves are free from hardened grease.
The ropes are undamaged.
All ropes are evenly wound onto their rope drums.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-27

Operation: Starting up the crane 71EC-B 5

Fig. 24: Starting up the crane

(a) Radio remote control desk (c) Main switch (e) Rail clamp
(b) Control desk in the cabin (d) Site junction box

Make sure that the following conditions have been met:

The pre-start checks are carried out.
The ›Emergency stop‹ locking switches have been released.
 In case of rail-going crane: release the rail clamps (e). (1)
 Connect the main power supply: (2)
 Connect the main power supply cable at the site junction box (e).
 Turn the main switch (c) to 1 ›Operation On‹. (3)
 Switch on the crane control circuits on the radio remote control desk (a).
- or -
Switch on the crane control circuits on the control desk (b). (4)

5-28 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation: Starting up the crane 71EC-B 5

Checking brakes for correct operation

Warning!
Faulty drive units and brakes can lead to serious accidents.
Should any malfunctions be detected during the functional inspection, the crane should not be
operated under any circumstances. The malfunction must be reported without delay to the person in
charge.
 Check function daily.

Checking the hoist gear

Fig. 25: Functional check of the hoist gear

 Move the ›Hoist gear‹ control lever forward and backward .

> The hoist gear brake is released.
> Hoist movement occurs in the predetermined direction.
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
> The hoist speed is reduced.
> The hoist gear brake is applied.
> The hoisting movement is stopped.

The load must be kept in this position.

Note
During crane operation, the hoist gear brake air gap is supervised. If the air gap exceeds a specified
value, the lamp ›Checking the hoist gear brake‹ on the control desk in the cabin lights up. In addition,
the horn sounds when the hook is lowered. The crane can be operated for the moment.
 Inform the responsible person in charge.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-29

Operation: Starting up the crane 71EC-B 5

Checking the trolley travel gear

Fig. 26: Functional check of the trolley travel gear

 Move the ›Slewing gear/Trolley travel gear‹ control lever forward and backward.
> The trolley travel gear brake is released.
> Trolley travels in the predetermined direction.
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
> The trolley speed is reduced.
> The trolley travel gear brake is applied.
> The trolley stops.

Checking the slewing gear

Fig. 27: Functional check of the slewing gear

 Move the ›Slewing gear/Trolley travel gear‹ control lever to the left and to the right.
> The slewing brake is released.
> The jib rotates into the determined direction.
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
> The slewing speed is reduced.
> The slewing movement is stopped.
> The slewing brake is applied.

Even with stormy wind (wind force 8), the jib must be held in this position.

5-30 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation: Starting up the crane 71EC-B 5

Checking the crane travel gear

Fig. 28: Functional check of the crane travel gear

 Move the ›Hoist gear‹ control lever to the right and to the left.
> The travel gear brake is released.
> The crane moves into the determined direction.
 Return the control lever to the "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
> The crane travel speed is reduced.
> The travel gear brake is applied.
> The crane stops.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-31

Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane 71EC-B 5

Bringing the crane into the basic position

Fig. 29: Bringing the crane into the basic position

 Set down and remove any suspended load. (1)

 Raise the hook block to the maximum hoisting height. (2)
 Trolley-in to the minimum radius. (3)
 Check that the crane has complete freedom of movement when out of operation and that all safe
distances are retained . (4)

Free jib slewing

Warning!
If the jib can not rotate in the wind, the crane could tip.
 Before shutting down: Set the crane to free jib slewing.

Fig. 30: Free jib slewing

5-32 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane 71EC-B 5

Shutting down and stopping the crane with radio remote control operation

Fig. 31: Shutting down and stopping the crane with radio remote control operation
(a) Push-button›Control system (c) Push-button›Free jib (e) Locking switch ›Emergency
off‹ slewing‹ stop‹
(b) Radio remote control (d) Lamp ›Free jib slewing (f) Selector switch ›Radio remote
active‹ control on/off‹

Make sure that the following conditions have been met:

Both control levers are at "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
All ›Emergency stop‹ locking switches have been released.
 To switch off the control system: press push-button›Control system off‹ (a). (1)
 Set the crane to "free jib slewing": Press the ›Free jib slewing‹ (c) push-button until the lamp (c) lights
up. (2)
> The slewing brake is locked in the ›released‹ position.
 Press locking switch ›Emergency stop‹ (e). (3)
 Switch off radio remote control (b) with selector switch ›Radio remote control on/off‹ (f). (4)

The following equipment remain in operation:

- Aircraft-warning system
- Cabin heating
- Switchgear cabinet heating
- Crane lighting

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-33

Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane 71EC-B 5

Shutting down and stopping the crane with cabin control stand operation

Fig. 32: Shutting down and stopping the crane with cabin control stand operation
(a) Locking switch ›Emergency (c) Push-button›Free jib (e) Main switch on switchgear
stop‹ slewing‹ cabinet S1
(b) Push-button›Control system (d) Lamp ›Free jib slewing
off‹ active‹

Make sure that the following conditions have been met:

Both control levers are at "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
All ›Emergency stop‹ locking switches have been released.
 To switch off the control system: press push-button›Control system off‹ (b). (1)
 Set the crane to "free jib slewing": Press the ›Free jib slewing‹ (c) push-button until the lamp (d) lights
up. (2)
> The slewing brake is locked in the ›released‹ position.
 Press the ›Emergency stop‹ locking switch (a).
- or -
Turn the main switch (e) in switchgear cabinet S1 to 0 ›Operation off‹. (3)

The following equipment remain in operation:

- Aircraft-warning system
- Cabin heating
- Switchgear cabinet heating
- Crane lighting

5-34 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane 71EC-B 5

Mechanical setting to free jib slewing

Fig. 33: Activating and deactivating the mechanical setting to free jib slewing
(a) Rubber plug (c) Rubber plug (e) Hand-operated brake release
lever
(b) Manual operation ›Brake (d) Manual operation ›Brake (f) Locking ›Brake released‹
applied‹ released‹

In the event of power failure: Set the crane to free jib slewing manually
 Remove the rubber plug (c).
 Push the hand-operated brake release lever (e) upwards to the stop and hold in this position.
 Push the manual operation ›Brake released‹ (d) to the stop and keep it pushed.
> The locking ›Brake released‹ (f) is pushed under the hand-operated brake release lever.
 Release the hand-operated brake release lever .
 Release manual operation: ›Open brake‹ (d)
 The brake remains locked in the released position.
 Reinstall the rubber plug (c).

During power failure: deactivate free jib slewing manually

If power supply is available, the setting to free jib slewing is deactivated automatically as soon as the control
is activated and the ›Slewing gear‹ control lever is operated.
Manual deactivation in only necessary in the event of power failure:

 Remove the rubber plug (a).

 Push the hand-operated brake release lever (e) upwards to the stop and hold in this position.
 Push the manual operation ›Brake applied‹ (b) to the stop.
 Lower the hand-operated brake release lever to the stop.
> The brake is applied.
 Reinstall the rubber plug (a).

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-35

Operation: Shutting down and stopping the crane 71EC-B 5

Securing the crane

Fig. 34: Securing the crane

(a) Isolating switch (b) Site junction box (c) Rail clamp

 In case of travelling crane, apply the rail clamps (c). (1)

 Disconnect the main power supply: (2).
 Disconnect the main power supply cable at the site junction box (b).
- or -
Set the isolating switch (a) on the slip ring assembly to the 0 position.

After the main power supply cable has been disconnected, the following equipment are switched off:
- Aircraft-warning system
- Cabin heating
- Switchgear cabinet heating
- Crane lighting

Secure the crane against unauthorized reconnection.

 Lock the site junction box or the isolating switch.
 Lock the cabin.

5-36 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Setting down the load in the event of power failure 71EC-B 5

In the event of power failure, the hoist gear brake is applied automatically. The brake must be released
manually in order that the load may be set down.

Hoist gear type: WIW 210 MZ 402

Fig. 35: Releasing the hoist gear brake in the event of power failure(WIW 210 MZ 402)
(a) Winged screw (c) Winged nut (e) Fan guard
(b) Lever (d) Cover

 To pull the lever (b) out of the mounting: loosen the winged screw (a). (1)
 To turn the cover (d) to the side: loosen the two winged nuts (c). (2)
 Screw the lever (b) into the taphole of the hoist gear brake. (3)
 Open the hoist brake using the lever (b): press the lever (b) towards the fan guard (e). (4)
> The brake is released and the load is lowered.
 Set down the load carefully.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-37

Setting down the load in the event of power failure 71EC-B 5

Hoist gear type: WIW 230 MZ 406

Fig. 36: Releasing the hoist gear brake in the event of power failure (WIW 230 MZ 406)
(a) Hoist gear brake (d) Nut (g) Fan hood
(b) Lever (e) Screw (h) Fan
(c) Disc (f) Disc

 Screw out four screws (e) and remove four discs (f). (1)

Caution!
 Do not damage the fan cable when removing the fan hood (g).

 Remove the fan hood (g). (2)

> The hoist brake (a) is freely accessible.
 To pull the lever (b) out of the mounting: unscrew nut (d) and remove disc (f). (3)
 Screw the lever (b) into the taphole of the hoist gear brake. (4)
 Open the hoist gear brake (a) using the lever (b): press lever (b) towards fan (h). (5)
> The brake is released and the load is lowered.
 Set down the load carefully.

5-38 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Setting down the load in the event of power failure 71EC-B 5

Hoist gear type: WIW 230 MZ 407

Fig. 37: Releasing the hoist gear brake in the event of power failure (WIW 230 MZ 407)
(a) Lever (b) Winged screw (c) Fan guard

 To pull the lever (a) out of the mounting: loosen winged screw (b). (1)
 Screw the lever (a) into the taphole of the hoist gear brake. (3)
 Open the hoist gear brake using the lever (a): press lever (a) towards fan guard (c). (4)
> The brake is released and the load is lowered.
 Set down the load carefully.

Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Operation 5-39

Operational faults 71EC-B 5

Observation Cause Remedy

Insufficient braking action of the Air gap too great.  Adjust the air gap.
driving units. By authorized personnel only!
Brake disc worn.  Replace the brake disc.
By authorized personnel only!
The electrical setting to free jib The Emergency stop  Release the Emergency stop
slewing can not be activated. switch is switch.
The lamp ›Free jib slewing‹ on locked.
the control box does not light up.
The control lever is not at  Move the control lever to the
"NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") "NEUTRAL" ("ZERO") position.
position
The air gap on the slewing  Adjust the air gap.
brake is too great. By authorized personnel only!
Lamp ›Hoist gear brake faulty‹ Air gap too great.  Adjust the air gap.
lights up. By authorized personnel only!
Brake disc worn  Replace the brake disc.
By authorized personnel only!

5-40 Operation Cap5_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

 s

Electrical Equipment

Assembly of the electrical equipment ....................................................................................... 6-2

Electrical equipment.................................................................................................................... 6-3
Parameter entries: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) ...................................... 6-6
Instructions PU FUTRONIC module ......................................................................................... 6-11
Electrical connection................................................................................................................. 6-12
Electric connection data ........................................................................................................... 6-13
Explanation of “electric connection data“ .............................................................................. 6-14
Electrical connection on the site junction box ....................................................................... 6-15
Phase sequence relay ............................................................................................................... 6-17

Enclosed:
Instructions KEB COMBIVERT F5 MULTI FU. slewing gear FU
Instructions LENZE frequency converter 8200 motec. trolley travel gear FU
Instructions DANFOSS VLT 5000 CRANE. hoist gear FU

Circuit diagrams:

Hoist gear Circuit diagrams Switchgear cabinet

WIW 210 MZ 402 – 14Kw PU 4005-22028 9684 930 01

WIW 230 MZ 406 – 22Kw PU 4005-22029 9684 931 01
WIW 230 MZ 407 – 14Kw FU 4005-22030 9684 932 01

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-1

Assembly of the electrical equipment 71EC-B 5

Fig. 1: Assembly of the electrical equipment

(a) Site junction box (h) Supply cable (o) Motor, hoist gear
(b) Cable drum (i) Control cable (p) Wind speed sensor
(c) Travel limit switch (j) Slip ring assembly (q) Wind warning system
(d) Travel gear motor (k) Control stand (r) Aircraft-warning control light
(e) Free jib (l) Isolating switch (s) Overload protection,
slewing/emergency-stop constant load range
(f) Supply main (m) Slewing gear motor (t) 3rd trolley gear limit switch
(g) Control cable, free jib (n) Trolley travel gear motor (u) Overload protection,
slewing moment range

7-2 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Electrical equipment 71EC-B 5

Switchgear cabinets
Switchgear cabinet S1
Installed in the switchgear cabinet:
- Main switch and main contactor (crane power switch).
- Control circuit transformer for the control voltage.
- Control system for slewing gear motor, motor trolley travel gear and motor hoist gear.
- Control unit for heating, lighting, windshield wipers, etc .
Switchgear cabinet S3
Installed in the switchgear cabinet:
- Control system for travel gear motor.

Control device
The crane may be operated with a radio control (optional).
The control stand in the cabin (optional) is connected to electric cabinet S1 in the slewing platform via a
control cable and a plug connector.

Control system for driving units

Hoist gear FU
The 4 stages of the control levers are adapted optimally to the load through the load registration in the
frequency converter. Thus the entire control course of the lever with 4 stages is available for each load.
Hoist gear PU

Changing the drive poles occurs via the control lever signal. There are three switching stages available for
each direction on the control lever corresponding to the four control levers positions. The last two control
lever positions correspond to the last stage of the pole switching for the drive.
If the control lever is placed in the cero-position, the brake activates automatically.
Slewing gear
The frequency-converter slewing gear allows a completely jolt- and jerk-free slewing of the crane. Micro-
slewing movements can be pre-entered via the set point entry, allowing a precision-point positioning of the
load.
The control system recognizes influences from wind and load, and these influences are automatically
compensated for. The crane operator can therefore rotate the crane to a great extent independently of wind
and load factors.
An automatic load swing damping prevents vibration of the crane and load swing. Thus, the load can be
manoeuvred smoothly and safely at all times.
If the set point is cancelled, the driving unit brakes automatically. The crane then retains the speed which
has been pre-entered by the crane operator. It is also possible for the crane operator to further increase the
braking action at any time by applying counter-current. The mechanical slewing gear brake is applied
automatically after a short time if the control lever is in the neutral position.
Trolley travel gear
The frequency-converter trolley travel gear allows a completely jolt- and jerk-free manoeuvring of the trolley.
Micro-travel movements can be pre-entered via the set point entry, allowing a precision-point positioning of
the load.

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-3

Electrical equipment 71EC-B 5

Slip ring assembly

The slip ring assembly includes the slip rings for the power supply cable, for the travel gear motors, for free
jib slewing and for Emergency-Stop. The slip ring assembly allows unlimited slewing movement of the crane
in both directions.

Electronic monitoring system EMS (optional)

Display of the trolley position with lifting capacity table. Displays for load, slewing angle, hook level and wind
speed are also possible options.

Safety devices
Limit switches
All limit switches for movements or loads are essential components of the electrical equipment. As safety is
considerably dependent on these limit switches within the crane area, correct setting and functional safety
must be ensured in particular.
Overload protection
The moment range overload protection protects the crane structure from overloading. This device is
influenced by the suspended load, as well as the trolley position. The further the trolley is away from the
tower, the less load is permitted before the limit switch is actuated. If the 90% limit switch is actuated, trolley-
out movement, as well as hoisting-up is decelerated and the "Overload pre-warning" lamp lights up on the
control desk. If the 100% limit switch is actuated, trolley-out movement, as well as hoisting-up is stopped.
The constant load range overload protection protects the hoist gear from overloading. This device is
influenced by the suspended load only. The load which causes activation of the device remains the same,
irrespective of the position of the trolley. If the limit switches are actuated, hoisting-up is stopped.
Monitoring of load motor speed
The frequency-controlled hoist gear can lift loads at a certain speed. The greater the load, the lower the
speed. The crane control receive reference values via limit switches, based on the output curve of the hoist
gears. The control system monitors the speed of the hoist gear motor, thus preventing overload.

Switching-on and switching-off devices

Isolating switch on the slip ring assembly
This isolating switch is located immediately behind the power supply of the crane, thus adopting the electrical
isolation function. The isolating switch (l) is installed in a terminal box below the slip ring assembly. It is
possible to lock the isolating switch.
Main switch in switchgear cabinet S1
Manual activation and deactivation via the control lever (possible to lock in the ›Off‹ position).
The connections for heating and lighting have been installed in front of the main switch, so that the heating
and lighting remain active when the main switch is switched off .

7-4 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Electrical equipment 71EC-B 5

Switching-on and switching-off devices

Crane power switch in switchgear cabinet S1
The main contactor AQ20 serves as the crane power switch.
The crane power switch is activated via:
- the ›Control on‹ push-button on the control stand in the cabin or on the radio control desk. The control
voltage is switched on simultaneously .
This push-button can only be actuated if all control levers are in the neutral position (no-volt release).
Emergency stop devices
Emergency stop locking switches are located:
- on the control stand in the cabin.
- on the radio control desk.
- on the Free jib slewing control box in the slewing platform and on the tower base (optional).

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-5

Parameter entries: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) 71EC-B 5

Warning!
Danger of accidents through erroneous frequency converter settings.
 The settings on the frequency converter of the crane, may only be altered by specially trained
service personnel.

O General
The parameter set of a frequency converter (FU) determines the travel behaviour of the connected drive
(slewing gear). It is located in the FU „operator“ and is transmitted to the FU again after each start.
[2]
Operator [1]
[1]
The operator is located on the front side of the
frequency converter. The devices are connected to
each other via a serial parametric port (pluggable).

The control field with LED-display [2] serves as a

display and for entering or editing parameters.

[3]
Control field [2]
3. LED-display (5-digits)
4. Port control [4] [5]
START
5. Operating / fault display ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED
6. Keyboard with dual functions STOP

[6]

O Controlling the operator

When switching on the FU (KEB Combivert F5), the value of the parameter CP.2 „0.000“ is indicated.
[1] [2]
Shift between parameter value [1] and FUNC.
[3]
parameter number [2] by actuating the SPEED
Function key (FUNC.) [3].

[7] [6]
The parameter number [6] or, with
adjustable parameters, also the parameter
value [7] can be increased / decreased with
the keys [4] and [5]. STOP STOP
START START

[4] [5] [4] [5]

7-6 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Parameter entries: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) 71EC-B 5
O Password entry

Note
To access CP-parameters, enter the password „200“ on the operator.
After restarting the frequency converter, the CP-parameters are blocked again.

Procedure:

1. Press FUNC. -key. The FUNC.

parameter CP 2 is shown. SPEED

2. Switch from CP 2 to CP 0 with STOP

key .

3. Switch from CP 0 to CP_ro with FUNC.

SPEED
FUNC. -key.

4. Press keys / until the STOP

password „200“ is shown in the START
display.

5. Confirm password „200“ with ENTER

ENTER. F/R

6. CP_on = the CP-parameters can be adjusted!

O Parameter entries and effects

Crane type CP.25
Based on the crane type number the operator decides which parameter set is to b load. See Adjusting
instructions.
When replacing the frequency converter, the crane type needs to be checked and adjusted if necessary.
Operating type CP.26
Various controller functions in the frequency converter can be switched on or off through the operating type
number.

Caution!
 changing the operating type number changes the travel behaviour of the slewing gear
drastically. (e. g. torque- or speed control, see Parameter entries and effects)

Procedure: setting operating type

 Plug the operator on the frequency converter.
 Connect the frequency converter to the power supply and switch on power.
 Enter access password for editing CP-parameters on the operator.
 Shift to CP.26 with the key.
 Set operating type number (CP26 = operating type number, see Adjusting instructions).
 Switch off frequency converter and wait until the display on the operator fades.
 Switch on the frequency converter again and check CP26.

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-7

Parameter entries: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) 71EC-B 5

Parameter entries and effects

Operating type CP.26

0: Speed control (basic setting)

The speed control (0) is operational while accelerating as well as braking the slewing gear.
The slewing gear changes, independent of external influences (f. ex. wind), in accordance to the deflection of
the control levers. The slewing gear brakes automatically when the control lever is pulled back or countered.
The travel behaviour corresponds to an improved version of many other crane types.
1: Torque control
The torque control (1) is operational while accelerating as well as braking the slewing gear (countering «
braking without oscillating). The deflection of the control lever determines the set value for the torque at the
slewing gear. The speed (slewing speed) is set dependent of the current reaction torque (f. ex. wind). Low
slewing speeds or positioning of loads is achieved simply by "tipping" the control lever (see SL/FK -drives). If
the control lever is placed in neutral while slewing, braking is resulted delayed and torque controlled (ramp).
The travel behaviour corresponds to cranes with SL/FK -drives.
2: Speed / Torque control
The speed / torque control (2) is operational while accelerating as well as braking the slewing gear
(countering « braking without oscillating). The slewing gear speed changes independently of external
influences (f. ex. wind), in accordance to the deflection of the control levers. Selected slewing speeds can be
maintained without tipping operation. If the control lever is placed in neutral while slewing, braking is resulted
delayed and torque controlled (ramp). The travel behaviour corresponds to a combination of mode 0 and
mode 1.
Jib identificationCP.31
The jib identification is valid for contactor controlled cranes and corresponds to the currently
mounted jib length (see table CP.31).
When replacing the jib or the frequency converter, the corresponding jib factor needs to be checked and
adjusted if necessary.

Caution!
For Litronic-cranes a jib factor of 1.0 is generally valid.
This jib factor is set at the factory and is adjusted automatically through the SPS software.

Exceptions:
Each valid jib factor (see table CP.31), also for SPS- or Litronic-cranes, must be set for the following
software versions.
Article code: 9332 694 01 (KT94-S ) previous V1.03 or
Article code: 9686 615 01 (Data SMC ) previous V2.01

Procedure: setting jib identification

 Plug the operator on the frequency converter.
 Connect the frequency converter to the power supply and switch on power.
 Enter access password for editing CP-parameters on the operator.

7-8 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Parameter entries: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) 71EC-B 5

 Shift to CP.31 with key.

 Set jib identification (CP31 = jib identification, see Adjusting instructions).
 Switch off frequency converter and wait until the display on the operator fades.
 Switch on frequency converter again and check CP31.

Note
Further information: see appendix, instruction manual Combivert F5 Multi.

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-9

Adjusting instructions: frequency converter „slewing gear“ (KEB F5M) 71EC-B 5

71 EC-B
O Parameter entries: crane type CP.25

CP.25 = 35

O Parameter entries: operating type CP.26*

CP.26 = 2

0 = speed control
1 = torque control
2 = speed / torque control

* entry, see „Parameter entries and effects“

O Parameter entries: jib identification CP.31

CP.31 = see table

The parameter value for CP.31 is ´determined by the jib length used on the crane.
The jib identification corresponds to the currently mounted jib length and is only valid for contactor
controlled cranes.

Crane 71 EC-B
Radius Jib factor
50,0 m 1,00
47,5 m 0,96
45,0 m 0,94
42,5 m 0,89
40,0 m 0,85
37,5 m 0,8
35,0 m 0,75
32,5 m 0,72
30,0 m 0,68
27,5 m 0,59
25,0 m 0,55
22,5 m 0,49
20,0 m 0,45

7-10 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Instructions PU FUTRONIC module 71EC-B 5

This logic module for state of the art contactor controlled cranes with pole switchable drives replaces the
previously used conventional switching and time relay technology.
The various switching conditions in this logic module is indicated on two 7-segments LCD-displays. The
display „H1“ indicates the „set-condition“ according to the control lever commands, the display „H2“ indicates
the „actual-condition“ of the logic circuit.
With fault free condition of the logic module is thus indicated the same switching condition on „H1“ and „H2“.

7 - Segment LCD-display status

1: standstill

2: lift star
3: stage 1 lift
4: stage 2 lift
5: stage 3 lift
6: 2-phase braking 3-2 lift
7: 2-phase braking 2-1 lift
8: no cero position lift

9: Lower star
A: stage 1 lower
B: stage 2 lower
C: stage 3 lower
D: 2-phase braking 3-2 lift
E: 2-phase braking 2-1 lift
F: no cero position lift

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-11

Electrical connection 71EC-B 5

Regulations
- Protective measures; protection against electric shock, DIN VDE 0100, section 410 (1997) (see also IEC
publications 364-4-41, revised in 1992;
- Protection against electric shock and 364-4-47, first edition 1981; application of electric protection
measures)
- Earthing, protective cable, potential equalization conductors, DIN VDE 0100, section 540 (see also IEC
publication 364-5-54 edition 1980

Protection measures at the construction site

A site junction must be provided at the construction site. The site junction box must resist the occurring
electric, mechanical and thermal conditions as well as the moisture conditions.
Following regulations must be observed:
- IEC 60 439-4, 1990 +A2
- EN 60439-4, May 2000
- DIN VDE 0660, section 501 (or the respective national guidelines)
Due to different regulations regarding permitted mains and electric protective measures, the corresponding
national regulations must also be observed!

Notes regarding connecting cranes with FU-drives

The B6-wiring at the input of the intermediate circuit, employed as common practice with frequency
converters, may cause a non-pulsating fault direct current in the event of an earth contact which could block
the release of a residual current (FI-) automatic circuit breaker in accordance with DIN VDE 0664 section
1/10.85.
According to DIN VDE 0160, the fault voltage protection device with pulse current sensitive FI- automatic
circuit breaker may not be applied as the only protection measure against indirect touching for these circuits.
If necessary, another type of protection must be installed on the power supply side against indirect touching,
e. G.. over current protection device or a current sensitive FI – automatic circuit breakers (e. G.. from
Siemens or ABB).
It is absolutely necessary however, to allocate an individual circuit. A derivation by pulse current sensitive FI-
automatic circuit breakers in accordance with DIN VDE 0664, employed as common practice in site junction
boxes, is not authorized according to DIN VDE 0664.

7-12 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

 Output [kW] drives Current Output [kW] Permitted feed line length
at 400V / 50Hz voltage unit/ autotransformer (at 3% voltage drop for continuous current)

switch

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc
In crane

Hoist gear
Travel gear
Total length

Peak output
Brake power

Peak current

Slewing gear
Cross section
Residual length
Electric connection data

Trolley travel gear

Continuous output
Connection output

Continuous current
ring support cut-off point)

(on the shaft of the motor)

Fuse protection / output

(with simultaneous factor of 0,8)

(from hoist gear motor to ball slewing

kW kW kW kW A A A kVA cos M kVA cos M kVA cos M kW mm² m m m

- 42 83 63 29 0,8 57 0,8 69 0,8 14 1x4x16 94 10 84

14,0 PU
1,5FU 2x4 56 97 63 39 0,8 67 0,8 69 0,8 16 1x4x25 126 10 116
22,0 - 55 115 63 38 0,8 79 0,8 100 0,8 23 1x4x25 106 10 96
5,0 FU
PU 2x4 68 128 80 47 0,8 88 0,8 100 0,8 24 1x4x25 95 10 85
22,0 FU 3,0FU - 38 45 50 26 0,9 31 0,9 25 0,9 3 1x4x16 181 10 171

2x4 44 51 50 30 0,9 35 0,9 25 0,9 3 1x4x16 158 10 148

Elektrische Ausrüstung
71EC-B 5

7-13
Explanation of “electric connection data“ 71EC-B 5

Information about voltages

Direct current (in A) Total nominal voltage of all motors with simultaneity factor:
0,8 for slewing cranes in upper area
0,7 for slewing cranes in lower area

Peak current (in A) max. current that can occur under following conditions:
Precondition: all drives are operated considering the simultaneity
factor
Squirrel cage motor: shifts up via the various numbers of poles
Slip ring motor when shifting through all rotor stages (approx. 2 x IN)

Power unit / autotransformer

Continuous output (in kVA) total electrical nominal input of all motors considering the simultaneity
factors. (Calculation: continuous current x mains voltage x ¦3 x 10 - 3)

Peak output (in kVA) max. output, accepted by the crane under following conditions:
Precondition: all drives are operated considering the simultaneity
factor.
Squirrel cage motor: shifts up via the various numbers of poles
Slip ring motor: when shifting through all rotor stages

Connection output (in kVA)

Precondition: all other drives are switched off.
Squirrel cage motor: shifts up via the various numbers of poles
Slip ring motor: when shifting through all rotor stages

Brake power (in KW) Output occurring on the motor shaft when the hoist motor is operated with
full load and at full speed during lowering.
This output has to be slowed by the motor.

7-14 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Electrical connection on the site junction box

Warning!
Danger through electricity.
Faulty installation of the power supply can cause serious accidents.
 Electric installations may only be carried out by professional electricians only.
 Distribution, grounding and protection devices must correspond to local regulations

Note
A site junction box must be available on the site

Rail going cranes:

- Connection from site junction box via motor or spring driven cable drum

Stationary cranes:
- Connection from site junction box to slip ring assembly in the ball slewing ring support

Line protection
The feed line from the supply point at the construction site must be protected against thermal over loading
and against short circuiting.

Protection can occur via following measures:

- Line protection fuses with gl-characteristics
- Line protection switch with tripping characteristics B and C
- Adjustable protection devices (output switch according to IEC 157, DINVDE 0660 section 101 or motor
automatic circuit breaker according to IEC 292, DINVDE 0660 section 104)

Note
When using line protection fuses:
Follow the set assignment of the line protection fuses to the isolated lines nominal sections.
 The current must not be greater than the nominal current of the fuse.

When using a line automatic circuit breaker or an adjustable protection device:

 permitted current load of the line is equal the nominal current of the line.

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-15

Electrical connection on the site junction box

Calculation of feed line

Sketch:
Travel distance

Crane

Travel distance
_________________________________________________

2
Feed line ~"residual length“
Site junction
box with central feed line!

Total length:
Lges = L rest + L crane
L rest = L HH + L way
-------
2
LGes: Total length
LRest: Residual length from the site junction box to the slip ring assembly in the ball slewing ring support
Lcrane: Feed line in crane
LHH: Crane erection or hook height
LWeg/2: Half travel distance with feed line at the centre of the travel distance. If the feed line is located
beyond the centre of the travel distance, the longer distance must be taken into consideration.

Permitted total feed line length

56A003
˜˜  ˜ Un
Lges = ---------------------------
173
 ˜˜I time cos M

LGes: Permitted total length [m] considering the voltage drop

A: Permitted cable diameter [mm2] considering the voltage drop
Un: Operating voltage [V]
Itime: Continuous current [A]
cos M: Phase displacement angle

Note
Values vary depending on crane type. Calculations must be made based on crane related values.
Further information see: Electric connection data.

7-16 Electrical Equipment Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc

Monitoring technology 71EC-B 5

Phase sequence relay MK 9056

varimeter
Application

The MK9056 monitors the correct phase sequence in the three

phase networks voltage L1 - L2 - L3.
If a phase drop should be registered, an asymmetric relay e. g.
AI 942 is recommended.

Technical data

Input circuit:
Nominal voltage UN: 3 AC 42 ... 60 V, 100 ... 127 V
3 AC 230 ... 240, 380 ... 500 V
Voltage range: 0,8 ... 1,1 UN
Nominal frequency from UN: 50 / 60 Hz
Nominal consumption: ca. 2 W

Output circuit

Contact assembly:
MK 9056.12: 2 changer
Functional diagram
Action / response time: < 100 / 50 ms
Thermal current Ith: 5A VDE 0660 T. 200
Switching ability VDE 0660 T. 200
According to AV 11, AC 230 V: 3A
According to DC 11, DC 24 V: 2A
Short circuit tolerance
max. safety fuse: 4 A gL DIN VDE 0660
6
Mechanical life: > 20 x 10 cycles

General data

Nominal operating type: Continuous operation

Temperature range: - 20 ... + 60º C
Air- and tracking distances
Over voltage category/
Degree of contamination III / 2 DIN VDE 0110-1/-2
(01.89)
Rating surge voltage:
Circuit diagram Input-output: 4 kV DIN VDE 0110-1/-2
(01.89)
Rating voltage: AC 250 V DIN VDE
0110-1/-2 (01.89)
Test voltage: 2,5 kV VDE 0435 section 2021
Protection type
Housing: IP 40 DIN VDE
0470-01
Clamps: IP 20 DIN VDE
0470-1
Housing: Thermoplastic with VO-
behaviour acc. to UL subject
94
Order example
Shock tolerance: Amplitude 0,35 mm,
Frequency 10 … 55 Hz,
IEC 68 - 2 - 6
Climate resistance: Moisture class F IEC
68 - 2 - 30
Nominal frequency Clamp configuration: DIN 46 199 - 5
Clamp designation: DIN EN 50 005
Nominal voltage 2
Conductor connection: 2 x 2,5 mm massive or
Contacts 2
2 x 1,5 mm cable with socket
Device type DIN 46 228-1/-2/-3/-4
Conductor fastening: flat clamps with self-lifting
Device dimensions connecting disc DIN 46 206 /
DIN 57 609 / VDE 0609
Width x height x depth: 25,5 x 81 x 99 mm Screw fastening: Fastening dimensions 80 mm,
z according to IEC 255, VDE 0435 2 screws max. M4
z Registers erroneous phase sequence Quick coupler: Top hat rail DIN EN 50 022
z with 2 changers Net weight: 40 g
z22,5 mm overall width

Cap6_71EC-B5_V01_2005_en.doc Elektrische Ausrüstung 7-17

 COMBIVERT

D BETRIEBSANLEITUNG Steuerteil ab V3.2

00.F5.MDB-K320

10/2007
 Diese Betriebsanleitung beschreibt die Steuerungen der KEB COMBIVERT F5 - Serie. Sie ist
D nur gültig in Verbindung mit der Betriebsanleitung Teil 1 und Teil 2. Alle Anleitungen müssen
jedem Anwender zugänglich gemacht werden. Vor jeglichen Arbeiten muß sich der Anwender
mit dem Gerät vertraut machen. Darunter fällt insbesondere die Kenntnis und Beachtung der
Sicherheits- und Warnhinweise aus Teil1. Die in dieser Betriebsanleitung verwendeten Pik-
togramme entsprechen folgender Bedeutung:
D - 3 .........D - 40 Gefahr Achtung Information
Warnung unbedingt Hilfe
Vorsicht beachten Tip
Inhaltsverzeichnis

1. Allgemeines .................................................... 4

2. Einbau und Anschluss ................................... 5

2.1 Übersicht ......................................................................5
D
2.1.1 Gehäusegröße D - E......................................................5
2.1.2 Ab Gehäusegröße G......................................................5
2.2 Steuerkarte MULTI .......................................................6
2.2.1 Belegung der Klemmleiste X2A .....................................6
2.2.2 Anschluss der Steuerung...............................................7
2.2.3 Digitale Eingänge...........................................................7
2.2.4 Analoge Eingänge .........................................................7
2.2.5 Spannungseingang/ externe Versorgung ......................8
2.2.6 Digitale Ausgänge ..........................................................8
2.2.7 Relaisausgänge .............................................................8
2.2.8 Analoge Ausgänge.........................................................8
2.2.9 Spannungsausgang .......................................................8
2.3 Operator........................................................................9

3. Bedienung des Gerätes ............................... 10

3.1 Tastatur .......................................................................10
3.2 Parameterbeschreibung............................................11
3.2.1 Passworteingabe .........................................................12
3.2.2 Betriebsanzeigen .........................................................12
3.2.3 Grundeinstellung des Antriebes ...................................14
3.2.4 Besondere Einstellungen .............................................17
3.3 Größenabhängige Daten ...........................................23
3.4 Der Drivemodus .........................................................24
3.4.1 Antrieb starten / stoppen ...............................................24
3.4.2 Drehrichtung wechseln ................................................24
3.4.3 Sollwert vorgeben ........................................................24
3.4.4 Drivemode verlassen ...................................................24

4. Fehlerdiagnose ............................................. 25

5. Erstinbetriebnahme ...................................... 31

6. Einstellhilfe Drehzahlregler ......................... 32

7. Kurzanleitung................................................ 33

8. Passwörter .................................................... 34

D-3
 Allgemeines

1. Allgemeines
Der Frequenzumrichter KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI ist eine Antriebskomponente, die zum Einbau in elektrische
Anlagen oder Maschinen bestimmt ist. Der Frequenzumrichter dient ausschließlich zur stufenlosen Drehzahlsteu-
erung/-regelung von Drehstromasynchronmotoren. Der Betrieb anderer elektrischer Verbraucher ist unzulässig
D und kann zur Zerstörung der Geräte führen.
Damit beim KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI trotz umfangreicher Programmiermöglichkeiten eine einfache Bedie-
nung und Inbetriebnahme möglich ist, wurde eine spezielle Bedienerebene geschaffen, in der die wichtigsten
Parameter zusammengefasst sind. Sollten jedoch die von KEB vordefinierten Parameter nicht ausreichen, um
Ihren Einsatzfall zu lösen, können Sie von KEB eine Applikationsanleitung beziehen.

D-4
Einbau und Anschluss

2. Einbau und Anschluss

2.1 Übersicht
2.1.1 Gehäusegröße D - E D
Optionaler Bedienoperator
mit 9-pol. Sub-D Buchse
Parametrierschnittstelle

�� ��
��
�
�

��
��
�
��
��

�� � �
��
��

�
�
X2A
Klemmleiste

�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
Anschluss Steuerklemmen

�� ����
�
��
X3B
9-pol. Sub-D Buchse
OPTION

X3A
15-pol. Sub-D Buchse
Anschluss Inkrementalgeber

2.1.2 Ab Gehäusegröße G

Optionaler Bedienoperator
mit 9-pol. Sub-D Buchse
�� ��
��
�
�

��
��
�
��
��

�� ��

Parametrierschnittstelle
��
��

�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�

X3A
15-pol. Sub-D Buchse
Anschluss Inkrementalgeber
�
���
��
��
�� � �� ���� ����� ���
��� ��� ��� � � ��
�� ��� ��� ���

�� ���
�� ��� ����
��� ��� ���

��� ��
�� ��� ����
�� ��� ��

���� �
� ��

��
��

X3B
9-pol. Sub-D Buchse
OPTION

X2A
Klemmleiste
Anschluss Steuerklemmen

��
���
��

Maximale Breite der Stecker für

X3A und X3B beachten.

D-5
 Einbau und Anschluss

2.2 Steuerkarte MULTI X2A

2.2.1 Belegung der 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Klemmleiste X2A
D
PIN Funktion Name Erklärung
Analogeingänge
1 + Sollwerteingang 1 AN1+
0...±10 VDC ^ 0...±CP.22
2 - Sollwerteingang 1 An1- Auflösung 12 Bit
3 + Analogeingang 2 AN2+ Abtastzeit 1 ms
0...±10 VDC ^ 0...±100 %
4 - Analogeingang 2 AN1-
Analogausgänge 5 mA; Ri=100 Ω
Ausgabe der Ausgangsdrehzahl Auflösung 12 bit
5 Analogausgang 1 ANOUT1
0…±10 VDC ^ 0…±3000 min-1 PWM-Frequenz 3,4 kHz
Ausgabe vom Scheinstrom Grenzfrequenz
6 Analogausgang 2 ANOUT2
0…10 VDC ^ 0…2 x IN Filter 1. Ordnung 178 Hz
Spannungsversorgung
7 +10 V Ausgang CRF Referenzspannung für Sollwertpotentiometer +10 VDC +5% / max. 4 mA
8
Analoge Masse COM Masse für analoge Ein- und Ausgänge
9
Digitaleingänge
10 Festdrehzahl 1 I1 I1+I2 = Festdrehzahl 3 (default: 0 1/min)
11 Festdrehzahl 2 I2 kein Eingang gesetzt=analoger Sollwert
12 Externer Fehler I3 Eingang für externe Fehlervorgabe 1)
13 - I4 Im CP-Mode keine Funktion hinterlegt 13…30 V DC ±0 % stabilisiert
14 Endschalter Vorwärts F Ri=2,1 kΩ
Endschalter 1)
15 Endschalter Rückwärts R Abtastzeit 1 ms
Endstufen werden angesteuert;
16 Reglerfreigabe/Reset ST
Fehlerreset beim Öffnen
17 Reset RST Reset; nur im Fehlerfall möglich
Transistorausgänge
18 Konstantfahrt O1 Transistorausgang schaltet bei Istwert = Sollwert
19 Betriebsbereit-Signal O2 Transistorausgang schaltet solange kein Fehler anliegt
Spannungsversorgung
20 24 V-Ausgang Uout ca. 24 V Ausgang (max. 100 mA)
21 20...30 V-Eingang Uin Spannungseingang für externe Versorgung
22
Digitale Masse 0V Bezugspotential für digitale Ein-/Ausgänge
23
Relaisausgänge
24 Schließer 1 RLA
Störmelderelais (Voreinstellung);
25 Öffner 1 RLB
Funktion kann mit CP.33 geändert werden maximal
26 Schaltkontakt 1 RLC
30 V DC
27 Schließer 2 FLA
Run-Signal (Voreinstellung); 0,01…1 A
28 Öffner 2 FLB
Funktion kann mit CP.34 geändert werden
29 Schaltkontakt 2 FLC
1) Die Reaktion auf ein Signal an diesen Klemmen kann mit CP.35 und CP.36 eingestellt
werden. Bei defektem Gerät ist das Ansprechen der Softwareschutzfunktion nicht ge-
währleistet.

D-6
Einbau und Anschluss

2.2.2 Anschluss der Steuerung

Um Fehlfunktionen durch Störspannungseinspeisung an den Steuereingängen zu vermeiden, sollten Sie folgen-
de Hinweise beachten:
• Abgeschirmte/verdrillte Leitungen verwenden
• Schirm einseitig am Umrichter auf Erdpotential legen D
• Steuer- und Leistungskabel getrennt verlegen (ca.10…20 cm Abstand); Kreuzungen im rechten Win-
EMV kel verlegen

2.2.3 Digitale Eingänge

Verwendung der internen Spannungsversorgung

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE

Verwendung einer externen Spannungsversorgung

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 23 PE
13…30 V DC ±0 %
geglättet
Ri = 2,1 kΩ +
20…30 V DC

2.2.4 Analoge Eingänge

Um Sollwertschwankungen zu vermeiden, nicht beschaltete Sollwerteingänge mit der analogen Masse verbin-
den !
Analoge Sollwertvorgabe im drehzahlgeregelten Betrieb (CP.10 = 4):

Extern Intern
Ri = 55 k�
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

*)
+
0...±10 VDC
R = 3...10 k�
Analoge Sollwertvorgabe im momentengeregelten Betrieb (CP.10 = 5) und Sollwertquelle CP.28 = 1:

Ri = 55 k�
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

*)
+
0...±10 VDC

*) Potentialausgleichsleitung nur anschließen, wenn zwischen den Steuerungen ein Potentialunter-

schied >30 V besteht. Der Innenwiderstand reduziert sich hierbei auf 30 kΩ.

D-7
 Einbau und Anschluss

2.2.5 Spannungseingang/ externe Versorgung

Durch die Versorgung der Steuerkarte mit einer externen Spannungsquelle bleibt die Steuerung auch bei ab-
geschaltetem Leistungsteil in Betrieb. Um undefinierte Zustände bei externer Versorgung zu vermeiden, sollte
grundsätzlich erst die Versorgung und dann der Umrichter eingeschaltet werden.
D
X2A 10 11 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

+
20…30 V ±0 % / 1 A DC
geglättet

2.2.6 Digitale Ausgänge

X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

max. 50 mA DC
für beide Ausgänge

2.2.7 Relaisausgänge
Bei induktiver Last an den Relaisausgängen ist eine Schutzbeschaltung vorzusehen (z.B. Freilaufdiode) !

X2A 24 25 26 27 28 29 PE

max. 30 VDC / 1 A

2.2.8 Analoge Ausgänge

X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

0...±10 VDC
max. 5 mA

2.2.9 Spannungsausgang
Der Spannungsausgang dient zur Ansteuerung der digitalen Eingänge sowie zur Versorgung externer Steuerele-
mente. Der maximale Ausgangsstrom von 100 mA darf nicht überschritten werden.

X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

+ -
ca. 24VDC / max. 100 mA

D-8
Einbau und Anschluß

2.3 Operator
Als Zubehör zur lokalen oder externen (Option: Kabel 00.F5.0C0-1xxx) Bedienung der Frequenzumrichter KEB
COMBIVERT F5 ist ein Operator erforderlich. Um Fehlfunktionen zu vermeiden, muss der Umrichter vor dem
Aufstecken/ Abziehen des Operators in den Status nOP (Reglerfreigabe öffnen) gebracht werden. Bei Inbetrieb-
nahme des Umrichters wird mit den zuletzt abgespeicherten Werten, bzw. Werkseinstellung gestartet.

Digital Operator (Artikelnummer 00.F5.060-1000)

Interface Operator (Artikelnummer 00.F5.060-2000)
x x 5-stelliges LED-Display
x x Betriebs-/Fehleranzeige
Normal „LED ein“
Fehler „LED blinkt“
- x Schnittstellenkontrolle
BUS-Betrieb „LED ein“
START

ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED

x x Doppelfunktionstastatur
STOP

- x X6B HSP5 Programmier- und Diagnose-

schnittstelle
- x X6C RS232/RS485 X6B

COMBIVERT
X6C X6D

Für die serielle Datenübertragung nach RS232/485 nur die Operatorschnittstelle

verwenden. Der direkte Anschluss eines PC’s an den Umrichter ist nur über ein
HSP5-Spezialkabel (Artikelnummer 00.F5.0C0-0001) zulässig und würde andern-
falls zur Zerstörung der PC-Schnittstelle führen !

X6C PIN RS485 Signal Bedeutung

1 - - reserviert
5 4 3 2 1 2 - TxD Sendesignal RS232
3 - RxD Empfangssignal RS232
9 8 7 6
4 A‘ RxD-A Empfangssignal A RS485
5 B‘ RxD-B Empfangssignal B RS485
6 - VP Versorgungsspannung +5 V (Imax=10 mA)
7 C/C‘ DGND Datenbezugspotential
8 A TxD-A Sendesignal A RS485
9 B TxD-B Sendesignal B RS485

9 pol. SUB-D Buchse 9 pol. SUB-D Stecker

RS 232 Kabel
Artikelnummer PC Operator
00.58.025-001D
Länge 3 m

Gehäuse (PE)

D-9
Bedienung des Gerätes

3. Bedienung des Gerätes

3.1 Tastatur
Beim Einschalten des KEB COMBIVERT F5 erscheint der Wert des Parameters CP.1 (Umschaltung der Tastatur-
funktion: siehe Drivemode).

Mit der Funktionstaste wird zwischen Parameterwert

und Parameternummer gewechselt.

Mit UP (▲) und DOWN (▼) wird die Parameternummer

oder bei veränderbaren Parametern der Wert erhöht /
verringert.

Grundsätzlich werden Parameterwerte beim Verändern sofort übernommen und nichtflüchtig gespeichert. Bei
einigen Parametern ist es jedoch nicht sinnvoll, dass der eingestellte Wert sofort übernommen wird. Bei diesen
Parametern (siehe Parameterübersicht) wird durch ENTER der eingestellte Wert übernommen und nichtflüchtig
gespeichert.

Tritt während des Betriebes eine Störung auf, wird die aktuelle Anzeige mit der Fehlermeldung überschrieben.
Durch ENTER wird die Fehlermeldung zurückgesetzt.

== Fehler ==>

Durch ENTER wird nur die Fehlermeldung in der Anzeige zurückgesetzt. In der Statusanzeige (CP. 3)
wird der anliegende Fehler weiterhin angezeigt. Um den Fehler selbst zurückzusetzen, muß erst die
Ursache behoben werden und ein Reset oder ein Kaltstart erfolgen.

D - 10
Parameterbeschreibung

3.2 Parameterbeschreibung
Parameter Einstellbereich Auflösung Standard ↵
CP.00 Passworteingabe 0…9999 1 –
CP.01 Istdrehzahl Geber 1 – 0,125 1/min –
CP.02 Sollwertanzeige – 0,125 1/min –
CP.03 Umrichterstatus – 1 – D
CP.04 Scheinstrom – 0,1 A –
CP.05 Scheinstrom Spitzenwert – 0,1 A –
CP.06 Istmoment – 0,01 Nm –
CP.07 Zwischenkreisspannung – 1V –
CP.08 ZK-Spannung Spitzenwert – 1V –
CP.09 Ausgangsspannung – 1V –
CP.10 Konfiguration Drehzahlregler 0 (off)…5 1 0 (off)
CP.11 DASM Nenndrehzahl 0…64000 min-1 1 min-1 LTK 2)
CP.12 DASM Nennfrequenz 0,0…1600,0 Hz 0,1 Hz LTK 2)
CP.13 DASM Nennstrom 0,0…710,0 A 0,1 A LTK 2)
CP.14 DASM Nennspannung 120…500 V 1V LTK 2)
CP.15 DASM cos (phi) 0,50…1,00 0,01 LTK 2)
CP.16 DASM Nennleistung 0,35…400,00 kW 0,01 kW LTK 2)
CP.17 Motoranpassung 0…2 1 0
CP.18 Boost 0,0…25,5 % 0,1 % 2%
CP.19 Eckfrequenz 0…400 Hz 0,0125 Hz 50 Hz
CP.20 Geberstrichzahl 1 1…16383 Ink. 1Ink. 2500 Ink.
CP.21 Drehrichtungstausch Geber 1 0…19 1 0 x
CP.22 max. Sollwert 0…4000 min-1 0,125 min-1 2100 min-1
CP.23 Festwert 1 +4000 min-1 0,125 min-1 100 min-1
CP.24 Festwert 2 +4000 min-1 0,125 min-1 -100 min-1
CP.25 Beschleunigungszeit 0,00…300,00 s 0,01 s 5,00 s
CP.26 Verzögerungszeit -0,01…300,00 s 0,01 s 5,00 s
CP.27 S-Kurvenzeit 0,00 (off)…5,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s (off)
CP.28 Quelle Momentensollwert 0…5 1 2 x
CP.29 Absoluter Momentensollwert +10000,00 0,01 Nm LTK 2)
CP.30 KP Drehzahl 0…32767 1 300
CP.31 KI Drehzahl 0…32767 1 100
CP.32 Schaltfrequenz 2/4/8/12/16 kHz – – 2) x
CP.33 Relaisausgang 1 / Funktion 0…75 1 4 x
CP.34 Relaisausgang 2 / Funktion 0…75 1 2 x
CP.35 Endschalterfehler Reaktion 0…6 1 6
CP.36 Reaktion auf externen Fehler 0…6 1 0
2)
abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“)

Aufgrund von Meß- und Berechnungsungenauigkeiten sind Toleranzen bei den Strom- und Momen-
tenanzeigen sowie bei den Schaltleveln und Begrenzungen zu berücksichtigen. Die angegebenen
Toleranzen (siehe Parameterbeschreibung) sind bezogen auf die zugehörigen Maximalwerte bei ei-
ner Dimensionierung KEB COMBIVERT : Motor = 1 : 1.
In Abhängigkeit der Daten des Motorenherstellers sind durch übliche Typenstreuungen der
Motoren sowie Temperaturdriften größere Toleranzen bei den Momentenanzeigen möglich.

D - 11
 Parameterbeschreibung

3.2.1 Passworteingabe
CP.00 Passworteingabe
Ab Werk wird der Frequenzumrichter ohne Passwortschutz ausgeliefert, d.h. alle veränderbaren Parameter las-
sen sich verstellen. Nach der Parametrierung kann das Gerät gegen unberechtigten Zugang verriegelt werden
(Passwörter: siehe vorletzte Seite). Der eingestellte Mode wird gespeichert.
D
ENTER

Password

Verriegeln der CP-Parameter

UP

FUNC

ENTER

Password

Freigeben der CP-Parameter

UP

FUNC

3.2.2 Betriebsanzeigen
Die folgenden Parameter dienen zur Kontrolle des Frequenzumrichters während des Betriebes.

CP.01 Istdrehzahl Geber 1

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0…±4000 min-1 Anzeige der aktuellen Motordrehzahl (Geberkanal 1). Aus Kontrollgründen wird die Soll-
drehzahl auch dargestellt, wenn die Reglerfreigabe oder Drehrichtung nicht geschaltet
ist. Ein linkslaufendes Drehfeld (rückwärts) wird durch ein negatives Vorzeichen darge-
stellt. Voraussetzung für den korrekten Anzeigewert ist der phasenrichtige Anschluss des
Motors und die richtige Einstellung der Geberstrichzahl (CP.20) sowie der Drehrichtung
(CP.21).

CP.02 Sollwertanzeige

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0…±4000 min-1 Anzeige des aktuellen Sollwertes. Aus Kontrollgründen wird die Solldrehzahl auch darge-
stellt, wenn die Reglerfreigabe oder die Drehrichtung nicht geschaltet ist. Ist keine Dreh-
richtung gegeben, wird die Solldrehzahl für Rechtslauf (vorwärts) angezeigt.

CP.03 Umrichterstatus
Die Statusanzeige zeigt den aktuellen Betriebszustand des Umrichters an. Mögliche Anzeigen und ihre Bedeu-
tung sind:
„no Operation“ Reglerfreigabe nicht gebrückt; Modulation abgeschaltet; Ausgangsspannung=0 V;
Antrieb ist führungslos.
„Low Speed“ keine Drehrichtung vorgegeben; Modulation abgeschaltet; Ausgangsspannung=0 V;
Antrieb ist führungslos.
„Forward Acceleration“ Antrieb beschleunigt mit Drehrichtung Vorwärts.

weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 12
Parameterbeschreibung

„Forward Deceleration“ Antrieb verzögert mit Drehrichtung Vorwärts.

„Reverse Acceleration“ Antrieb beschleunigt mit Drehrichtung Rückwärts.

„Reverse Deceleration“ Antrieb verzögert mit Drehrichtung Rückwärts.

„Forward Constant“ Antrieb läuft mit konstanter Drehzahl und Drehrichtung Vorwärts.
D
„Reverse Constant“ Antrieb läuft mit konstanter Drehzahl und Drehrichtung Rückwärts.

Weitere Statusmeldungen werden bei den Parametern beschrieben, die sie verursachen (siehe auch Kapitel 4
„Fehlerdiagnose“).

CP.04 Scheinstrom

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0…±6553,5 A Anzeige des aktuellen Scheinstromes in Ampere.

CP.05 Scheinstrom / Spitzenwert

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0…±6553,5 A CP.5 ermöglicht es, den maximalen Scheinstrom zu ermitteln. Dazu wird der höchste
aufgetretene Wert von CP.4 in CP.5 gespeichert. Der Spitzenwertspeicher kann durch
Betätigen der Tasten UP, DOWN oder ENTER, sowie über Bus durch Schreiben eines be-
liebigen Wertes an die Adresse von CP.5 gelöscht werden. Ein Abschalten des Umrichters
führt ebenfalls zur Löschung des Speichers.

CP.06 Istmoment

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0,0…±10000,00 Nm Der angezeigte Wert entspricht dem aktuellen Motormoment in Nm. Der Wert wird aus
dem Wirkstrom berechnet. Auf Grund von üblichen Typenstreuungen und Temperaturdrif-
ten der Motoren sind Toleranzen im Grunddrehzahlbereich von bis zu 30 % möglich (siehe
Hinweis unter Abschnitt 3.2).
Grundvoraussetzung für die Momentenanzeige ist die Einstellung der Motordaten
(CP.11…CP.16). Sind die realen Motordaten stark abweichend zu den Typenschilddaten,
kann durch Eingabe der realen Daten das Betriebsverhalten optimiert werden. Zur Inbe-
triebnahme ist die Einstellung der Typenschilddaten ausreichend.

CP.07 Zwischenkreisspannung

Anzeige Beschreibung
0…1000 V Anzeige der aktuellen Zwischenkreisspannung in Volt. Typische Werte sind:
V-Klasse Normalbetrieb Überspannung (E.OP) Unterspannung (E.UP)
230 V 300…330 V DC ca. 400 V DC ca. 216 V DC
400 V 530…620 V DC ca. 800 V DC ca. 240 V DC

CP.08 Zwischenkreisspannung Spitzenwert

Anzeige Beschreibung
0…1000 V CP.8 ermöglicht es, kurzfristige Spannungsanstiege innerhalb eines Betriebszyklus zu er-
mitteln. Dazu wird der höchste aufgetretene Wert von CP.7 in CP.8 gespeichert. Der Spit-
zenwertspeicher kann durch Betätigen der Tasten UP, DOWN oder ENTER, sowie über
Bus durch Schreiben eines beliebigen Wertes an die Adresse von CP.8 gelöscht werden.
Ein Abschalten des Umrichters führt ebenfalls zur Löschung des Speichers.

D - 13
 Parameterbeschreibung

CP.09 Ausgangsspannung

Wertebereich Beschreibung
0…778 V Anzeige der aktuellen Ausgangsspannung in Volt.

D 3.2.3 Grundeinstellung des Antriebes

Die folgenden Parameter bestimmen grundlegende Betriebsdaten des Antriebes und müssen für die Erstinbe-
triebnahme eingestellt werden (siehe Kapitel 5 „Erstinbetriebnahme“). Sie sollten in jedem Fall überprüft, bzw. auf
die Applikation angepaßt werden.

CP.10 Konfiguration Drehzahlregler

Eingabe Vorgabe Funktion Beschreibung

0 x aus (gesteuerter Betrieb)
1 - reserviert -
2 - reserviert -
3 aus (gesteuerter Betrieb) Mit diesem Parameter wird die Grund-
4 Drehzahlregelung (geregelter Betrieb) einstellung des Drehzahlreglers fest-
5 Drehmomentregelung (geregelter Betrieb) gelegt.
6 Drehmoment-/Drehzahlregelung (geregel-
ter Betrieb)
7…127 aus (gesteuerter Betrieb)

CP.11 DASM Nenndrehzahl

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0…64000 min-1 siehe 3.3 Einstellung der Nenndrehzahl gemäß Typenschild. Die Werkseinstellung ist
abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“).

CP.12 DASM Nennfrequenz

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,0…1600,0 Hz siehe 3.3 Einstellung der Motorbemessungsfrequenz gemäß Typenschild. Die Werks-
einstellung ist abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige
Daten“).
CP.13 DASM Nennstrom

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,0…710,0 A siehe 3.3 Einstellung des Motorbemessungsstromes gemäß Typenschild und Verschal-
tung (Y / ∆). Die Werkseinstellung ist abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe
3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“).

CP.14 DASM Nennspannung

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

120…500 V siehe 3.3 Einstellung der Motorbemessungsspannung gemäß Typenschild und Ver-
schaltung (Y / ∆). Die Werkseinstellung ist abhängig von der Gerätegröße
(siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“).

CP.15 DASM cos(phi)

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,50…1,00 siehe 3.3 Einstellung des Motor cos(phi) gemäß Typenschild. Die Werkseinstellung ist
abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“).

D - 14
Parameterbeschreibung

CP.16 DASM Nennleistung

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,35…400 kW siehe 3.3 Einstellung der Motorbemessungsleistung gemäß Typenschild. Die Werks-
einstellung ist abhängig von der Gerätegröße (siehe 3.3 „Größenabhängige
Daten“).

CP.17 Motoranpassung D
Werksmäßig ist der Frequenzumrichter je nach Gerätegröße auf einen speziellen Motor angepasst (siehe 3.3
„Größenabhängige Daten“). Werden die Motordaten CP.11…CP.16 verändert, muss einmal der Parameter CP.17
aktiviert werden. Damit werden die Stromregler, die Momentengrenzkennlinie und die Momentenbegrenzung
neu eingestellt. Die Drehmomentgrenze wird dabei auf den Wert gesetzt, der im Grunddrehzahlbereich maximal
möglich ist (abhängig vom Umrichternennstrom), aber nicht über Mn x 3.
Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung
1 x Voreinstellung der motorabhängigen Regler Parameter.
Als Eingangsspannung wird die Spannungsklasse des Umrichters angenom-
men.
2 Voreinstellung der motorabhängigen Regler Parameter.
Als Eingangsspannung wird die beim Einschalten gemessene Zwischenkreis-
spannung, dividiert durch √2, angenommen. So kann der Frequenzumrichter
an die tatsächlich vorhandene Netzspannung angepasst werden (z.B. USA
mit 460 V).
Bei aktiver Reglerfreigabe werden die Motorparameter nicht übernommen. In der Anzeige
erscheint „nco“!

CP.18 Boost

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,0…25,5 % 2% Im unteren Drehzahlbereich fällt ein Großteil der Motorspannung am Stän-
derwiderstand ab. Damit das Kippmoment des Motors auch im gesteuerten
Betrieb über den gesamten Drehzahlbereich nahezu konstant bleibt, kann der
Spannungsabfall durch den Boost kompensiert werden. Im geregelten Be-
trieb (CP.10 = 4 oder 5) hat dieser Parameter keine Funktion.
Einstellung:
• Auslastung im Leerlauf bei Nenndrehzahl feststellen
• ca. 300 min-1 vorgeben und den Boost so einstellen, dass etwa die gleiche
Auslastung wie bei Nenndrehzahl erreicht wird.
Wenn ein Motor im Dauerbetrieb bei niedrigen Drehzahlen mit zu hoher Spannung gefah-
ren wird, kann dies zur Überhitzung des Motors führen.

D - 15
 Parameterbeschreibung

CP.19 Eckfrequenz

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,00…400,00 Hz 50 Hz Bei der hier eingestellten Frequenz erreicht der Umrichter im gesteuerten Be-
trieb seine maximale Ausgangsspannung. Typisch ist hier die Einstellung der
Motornennfrequenz.

D UA

100%

CP. 19 f

Motoren können bei falsch eingestellter Eckfrequenz überhitzen. Im geregelten Betrieb

(CP.10 = 4 oder 5) hat dieser Parameter keine Funktion.

CP.20 Geberstrichzahl 1

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

1…16383 Ink 2500 Ink Mit diesem Parameter wird die Geberstrichzahl auf den an Kanal 1 ange-
schlossenen Geber eingestellt. Zur Überprüfung der Einstellung werden die
Soll- und Istdrehzahlanzeigen im gesteuerten Betrieb vergleichen. Bei korrek-
ter Einstellung muss Istdrehzahl = Solldrehzahl - Schlupf sein.

Der Wertebereich kann aufgrund verschiedener Geberkennungen variieren.

CP.21 Drehrichtungstausch Geber 1

Bit Wert Funktion Beschreibung

0 Geberdrehrichtung Stellt man während der Inbetriebnahme im gesteu-
0 keine Änderung (standard) erten Betrieb fest, daß Ist- und Solldrehzahl unter-
1 invertiert schiedliche Vorzeichen haben, kann dies auf einen
1 0 - reserviert - falschen Anschluss des Inkrementalgebers zurück-
2 0 - reserviert - zuführen sein. Möglichst sollte dann eine Korrektur
3 0 - reserviert - an der Verdrahtung vorgenommen werden. Ist dies
zu aufwendig, kann mit diesem Parameter ein Dreh-
4 Systeminvertierung
richtungstausch für den Gebereingang 1 durchge-
0 keine Änderung (standard)
führt werden. Die Wirkung entspricht einem Tausch
16 invertiert der A- und B-Spuren des Inkrementalgebers.
Mit Bit 4 kann eine Systeminvertierung eingestellt
werden. Hiermit ist es möglich, den Motor bei positi-
ver Vorgabe an der Welle linkslaufen zu lassen.
Die Werte sind zu addieren und mit „ENTER“ zu bestätigen.

D - 16
Parameterbeschreibung

3.2.4 Besondere Einstellungen

Die folgenden Parameter dienen zur Optimierung des Antriebs und zur Anpassung an die Anwendung. Bei der
Erstinbetriebnahme können diese Einstellungen ignoriert werden.

CP.22 Maximaler Sollwert

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung D

0…4000 min-1 2100 min-1 Um den Sollwert einzugrenzen, muß eine Maximaldrehzahl vorgegeben wer-
den. Dieser Grenzwert bildet die Grundlage zu weiteren Sollwertberechnun-
gen und zur Bestimmung der Sollwertkennlinien. Der Maximalwert begrenzt
nur den Sollwert. Der Istwert kann auf Grund von Drehzahlwelligkeiten, Dreh-
zahlüberschwingern oder Hardwaredefekten (z.B. defekter Geber) diese
Grenze überschreiten.

CP.23 Festdrehzahl 1 (Eingang 1)

CP.24 Festdrehzahl 2 (Eingang 2)

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

CP.23 100 min-1 Es können zwei Festdrehzahlen eingestellt werden. Die Anwahl der
Festdrehzahlen erfolgt über die Eingänge I1 und I2. Erfolgt eine Vor-
0…±4000 min -1
-1 gabe außerhalb der mit CP.22 festgelegten Grenze, wird die Dreh-
CP.24 -100 min
zahl intern begrenzt.
Eingang I1 + Eingang I2 = Festdrehzahl 3 (Werkseinstellung = 0 min-1)
Die Festdrehzahl 3 kann im CP-Mode nicht eingestellt werden.

CP.25 Beschleunigungszeit

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,00…300,00 s 5,00 s Der Parameter legt die benötigte Zeit fest, um von 0 auf 1000 min-1
zu beschleunigen. Die tatsächliche Beschleunigungszeit verhält sich
dabei proportional zur Drehzahländerung (∆n).
∆n Drehzahländerung n [min-1]
∆t Beschleunigungszeit für ∆n
1000

800

∆n

300
∆t
0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.25

Beispiel Der Antrieb soll von 300 min-1 auf 800 min-1 in 1 s beschleunigen.

∆n = 800 min-1 - 300 min-1 = 500 min-1

∆t = 1 s

∆t 1s
CP.25 = –––– x 1000 min-1 = –––––––– x 1000 min-1 = 2 s
∆n 500 min-1

D - 17
 Parameterbeschreibung

CP.26 Verzögerungszeit

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

-0,01…300,00 s 5,00 s Der Parameter legt die benötigte Zeit fest, um von 1000 auf 0 min-1 zu
verzögern. Die tatsächliche Verzögerungszeit verhält sich dabei pro-
D portional zur Drehzahländerung (∆n). Wenn der Wert -1 eingestellt ist,
wird der Wert aus CP.25 übernommen (Anzeige „=Acc“) !
∆n Drehzahländerung n [min-1]
∆t Verzögerungszeit für ∆n
1000
∆t
800

∆n
300

0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.26

Beispiel Der Antrieb soll von 800 min-1 auf 300 min-1 in 1 s verzögern.

∆n = 800 min-1 - 300 min-1 = 500 min-1

∆t = 1 s

∆t 1s
CP.26 = –––– x 1000 min-1 = –––––––– x 1000 min-1 = 2 s
∆n 500 min-1

D - 18
Parameterbeschreibung

CP.27 S-Kurvenzeit

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0,00 (off)…5,00 s 0,00 s (off) Für manche Anwendungen ist es von Vorteil, wenn der Antrieb ruckarm
t1 S-Kurvenzeit (CP.27) anfährt und stoppt. Diese Funktion wird durch einen Verschliff der Be-
t2 Beschleunigungszeit (CP.25) schleunigungs- und Verzögerungsrampen erreicht. Diese Verschliffzeit,
t3 Verzögerungszeit (CP.26) auch S-Kurvenzeit, kann mit CP.27 vorgegeben werden.
+n [min-1] D

t2 t3
t1 t1 t1 t1

t [s]
t1 t1 t1 t1

t2 t3

-n [min-1]

Damit bei aktivierten S-Kurvenzeiten definierte Rampen gefahren werden, müssen die vorgege-
benen Beschleunigungs- bzw. Verzögerungszeiten (CP.25 und CP.26) größer als die S-Kurvenzeit
(CP.27) gewählt werden.

CP.28 Quelle Momentensollwert

Wert Quelle Stellbereich Beschreibung

0 AN1+ / AN1- 0 %…±100 % = 0…±CP.29
Mit diesem Parameter kann die erforderliche
1 AN2+ / AN2- 0 %…±100 % = 0…±CP.29
Sollwertquelle bei Drehmomentregelung einge-
2 digital absolut CP.29
stellt werden.
3…5 nur Applikationsmode
Die Werte sind mit „ENTER“ zu bestätigen.

CP.29 Absoluter Momentensollwert

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

+10000,00 Nm siehe 3.3 Mit dem Parameter CP.29 wird im momentengeregelten Betrieb (CP.10 = 5)
und mit digitaler Sollwertvorgabe (CP.28 = 2) der absolute Momentensollwert
des Antriebes eingestellt. Das Vorzeichen steht für die zu wirkende Drehrich-
tung.
Im drehzahlgeregelten Betrieb (CP.10 = 4) wirkt der Parameter in allen Qua-
dranten als Drehmomentgrenze. Das Vorzeichen hat hierbei keine Auswir-
kung.
Die Werkseinstellung ist abhängig von den eingestellten Motordaten (siehe
3.3 „Größenabhängige Daten“). Im gesteuerten Betrieb (CP.10) hat dieser
Parameter keine Funktion.
Auf Grund von üblichen Typenstreuungen und Temperaturdriften der Motoren sind Tole-
ranzen im Grunddrehzahlbereich von bis zu 30% möglich (siehe Hinweis auf Seite 13).

D - 19
 Parameterbeschreibung

CP.30 KP Drehzahl

Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung

0…32767 300 In diesem Parameter wird der Proportionalfaktor des Drehzahlreglers einge-
stellt (siehe Kapitel 5 „Erstinbetriebnahme“).

CP.31 KI Drehzahl
D Wertebereich Vorgabe Beschreibung
0…32767 100 In diesem Parameter wird der Integralfaktor des Drehzahlreglers eingestellt
(siehe Kapitel 5 „Erstinbetriebnahme“).

CP.32 Schaltfrequenz

Wertebereich Vorgabe
Beschreibung
2 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16 kHz abhängig
Die Schaltfrequenz, mit der die Endstufen getaktet werden, kann abhängig
vom Leis-
vom Einsatzfall verändert werden. Die max. mögliche Schaltfrequenz sowie
tungsteil
die Werkseinstellung wird durch das Leistungsteil festgelegt (siehe Anleitung
Teil 2). Die Werte sind mit „ENTER“ zu bestätigen.
Einflüsse und Auswirkungen der kleine Schaltfrequenz hohe Schaltfrequenz
Schaltfrequenz können aus fol- geringere Umrichtererwärmung geringere Geräuschentwicklung
gender Aufstellung entnommen geringerer Ableitstrom bessere Sinusnachbildung
werden: geringere Schaltverluste weniger Motorverluste
weniger Funkstörungen bessere Reglereigenschaften
besserer Rundlauf bei kleinen Dreh-
zahlen (nur gesteuert!)

Bei Schaltfrequenzen über 4 kHz beachten Sie unbedingt die max. Motorleitungslänge in
den Technischen Daten der Leistungsteilanleitung (Teil 2).

CP.33 Relaisausgang 1 / Funktion

CP.34 Relaisausgang 2 / Funktion

CP.33 und CP.34 bestimmen die Funktion der beiden Relaisausgänge (Klemmen X2A.24…26 und X2A.27…29).
Die Werte sind mit „ENTER“ zu bestätigen.
Wert Funktion
0 Keine Funktion (generell aus)
1 Generell an
2 Run-Signal; auch bei DC-Bremse
3 Betriebsbereit-Signal (kein Fehler)
4 Störmelderelais
5 Störmelderelais (ohne Auto -Reset)
6 Warn- oder Fehlermeldung nach Schnellhalt
7 Überlast-Vorwarnung
8 Übertemperatur-Vorwarnung Endstufen
9 Externe Übertemperatur-Vorwarnung Motor
10 Nur Applikationsmode
11 Übertemperatur-Vorwarnung Umrichterinnenraum OHI
12…19 Nur Applikationsmode
20 Istwert = Sollwert (CP.3 = Fcon; rcon; nicht bei noP, LS, Fehler, SSF)
21 Beschleunigen (CP.3 = FAcc, rAcc, LAS)
22 Verzögern (CP.3 = FdEc, rdEc, LdS)
23 Istdrehrichtung = Solldrehrichtung
24 Auslastung > Schaltpegel 1)
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 20
Parameterbeschreibung

Wert Funktion
25 Wirkstrom > Schaltpegel 1)
26 Nur Applikationsmode
27 Istwert (CP.1) > Schaltpegel 1)
28 Sollwert (CP.2) > Schaltpegel 1)
29…30 Nur Applikationsmode
31 Absoluter Sollwert an AN1 > Schaltpegel 1) D
32 Absoluter Sollwert an AN2 > Schaltpegel 1)
33 Nur Applikationsmode
34 Sollwert an AN1 > Schaltpegel 1)
35 Sollwert an AN2 > Schaltpegel 1)
36…39 Nur Applikationsmode
40 Hardware-Stromgrenze aktiv
41 Modulation An-Signal
42…46 Nur Applikationsmode
47 Rampenausgangswert > Schaltpegel 1)
48 Scheinstrom (CP.4) > Schaltpegel 1)
49 Rechtslauf (nicht bei nOP, LS, Schnellhalt oder Fehler)
50 Linkslauf (nicht bei nOP, LS, Schnellhalt oder Fehler)
51 Warnung E.OL2
52 Stromregler in der Begrenzung
53 Drehzahlregler in der Begrenzung
54…62 Nur Applikationsmode
63 Betrag ANOUT1 > Schaltpegel 1)
64 Betrag ANOUT2 > Schaltpegel 1)
65 ANOUT1 > Schaltpegel 1)
66 ANOUT2 > Schaltpegel 1)
67…69 Nur Applikationsmode
70 Treiberspannung aktiv (Sicherheitsrelais)
71…72 Nur Applikationsmode
73 Betrag Wirkleistung > Schaltpegel 1)
74 Wirkleistung > Schaltpegel 1)
75…79 Nur Applikationsmode
80 Wirkstrom > Schaltpegel 1)
81 Istwert Kanal 1 > Schaltpegel 1)
82 Istwert Kanal 2 > Schaltpegel 1)
83 HSP5-Bus synchronisiert
84 Nur Applikationsmode

1) Schaltpegel für CP.33 = 100; Schaltpegel für CP.34 = 4

D - 21
 Parameterbeschreibung

CP.35 Endschalterfehler / Reaktion

Dieser Parameter bestimmt die Reaktion des Antriebes, auf die Klemme X2A.14 (F) bzw. X2A.15 (R). Diese
Klemmen sind als Software-Endschalter programmiert. Die Reaktion des Antriebes erfolgt entsprechend folgen-
der Tabelle.
Wert Vorgabe Anzeige Reaktion Wiederanlauf
0 E.PRx sofortiges Abschalten der Modulation
D 1 A.PRx
Schnellhalt / Abschalten der Modulation nach Erreichen von Fehler beheben,
Drehzahl 0 Reset
2 A.PRx Schnellhalt / Haltemoment bei Drehzahl 0
3 A.PRx sofortiges Abschalten der Modulation
Schnellhalt / Abschalten der Modulation nach Erreichen von Autoreset, wenn
4 A.PRx
Drehzahl 0 kein Fehler mehr
5 A.PRx Schnellhalt / Haltemoment bei Drehzahl 0
6 x — keine Auswirkung auf den Antrieb, Störung wird ignoriert ! —

CP.36 Reaktion auf externen Fehler

Mit der externen Fehlerüberwachung können externe Geräte direkten Einfluss auf den Antrieb nehmen. Dieser
Parameter bestimmt die Reaktion des Antriebes auf ein Signal an Klemme X2A.12 (I3), entsprechend folgender
Tabelle.
Wert Vorgabe Anzeige Reaktion Wiederanlauf
0 x E.PRx sofortiges Abschalten der Modulation
Schnellhalt / Abschalten der Modulation nach Erreichen von Fehler beheben,
1 A.PRx
Drehzahl 0 Reset
2 A.PRx Schnellhalt / Haltemoment bei Drehzahl 0
3 A.PRx sofortiges Abschalten der Modulation
Schnellhalt / Abschalten der Modulation nach Erreichen von Autoreset, wenn
4 A.PRx
Drehzahl 0 kein Fehler mehr
5 A.PRx Schnellhalt / Haltemoment bei Drehzahl 0
6 — keine Auswirkung auf den Antrieb, Störung wird ignoriert ! —

D - 22
Werkseinstellung

3.3 Größenabhängige Daten

In der folgenden Tabelle sind die Werkseinstellungen für die größenabhängigen Parameterwerte aufgeführt.

Parameter CP.11 CP.12 CP.13 CP.14 CP.15 CP.16 — CP.29

D

Motornennleistungsfaktor
Motornennspannung

Drehmomentgrenze
Motornennfrequenz
Motornenndrehzahl

Motornennleistung
Motornennstrom
Spannungsklasse

Motornenn-
Gerätegröße/

[1/min] [Hz] [A] [V] — cos(Phi) [kW] [Nm]

09/200V 1400 50 5,9 230 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,09
10/200V 1420 50 9,0 230 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,68
12/200V 1435 50 15,2 230 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,53
13/200V 1440 50 18,2 230 0,89 5,5 36,47 69,92
14/200V 1450 50 26,0 230 0,84 7,5 49,39 93,40
15/200V 1450 50 37,5 230 0,85 11,0 72,43 137,48
16/200V 1465 50 50,0 230 0,86 15,0 97,76 190,64
17/200V 1460 50 60,5 230 0,86 18,5 120,99 248,74

09/400V 1400 50 3,4 400 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,47

10/400V 1420 50 5,2 400 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,81
12/400V 1435 50 8,8 400 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,21
13/400V 1440 50 10,5 400 0,89 5,5 36,47 73,26
14/400V 1450 50 15,0 400 0,84 7,5 49,39 80,12
15/400V 1450 50 21,5 400 0,85 11,0 72,43 118,83
16/400V 1465 50 28,5 400 0,86 15,0 97,76 165,88
17/400V 1460 50 35,0 400 0,86 18,5 120,99 213,37
18/400V 1465 50 42,0 400 0,84 22,0 143,83 253,27
19/400V 1465 50 55,5 400 0,85 30,0 195,52 309,88
20/400V 1470 50 67,0 400 0,86 37,0 240,33 393,60
21/400V 1470 50 81,0 400 0,86 45,0 292,29 474,91
22/400V 1475 50 98,5 400 0,86 55,0 356,03 609,86
23/400V 1480 50 140,0 400 0,87 75,0 483,85 752,75
24/400V 1480 50 168,0 400 0,86 90,0 580,63 907,29
25/400V 1485 50 210,0 400 0,85 110,0 707,26 833,38
26/400V 1485 50 240,0 400 0,87 132,0 848,72 1.041,70
27/400V 1485 50 287,0 400 0,88 160,0 1028,75 1.264,01
28/400V 1485 50 370,0 400 0,88 200,0 1285,93 1.413,37
29/400V 1485 50 420,0 400 0,88 250,0 1607,42 1.780,29
30/400V 1490 50 535,0 400 0,88 315,0 2018,55 1.938,63
31/400V 1490 50 623,0 400 0,85 355,0 2274,87 2.566,84
32/400V 1490 50 710,0 400 0,84 400,0 2563,24 3.012,88

D - 23
Drivemodus

3.4 Der Drivemodus

Der Drivemode ist eine Betriebsart des KEB COMBIVERT zur Inbetriebnahme des Antriebs mit dem Operator.
Nach Schalten der Reglerfreigabe erfolgt die Sollwert- und Drehrichtungsvorgabe ausschließlich über die Tasta-
tur. Zur Aktivierung des Drivemodus ist das entsprechende Passwort (siehe vorletzte Seite) in CP. 0 einzugeben.
Die Anzeige schaltet wie folgt um:

Drehrichtung Status
F = Rechtslauf noP = keine Reglerfreigabe
r = Linkslauf LS = Ausgangsposition

3.4.1 Antrieb star- Modulation gesperrt Antrieb

Antrieb verzögert auf
ten / stoppen 0 min-1 und schaltet die
führungslos
Modulation ab

Antrieb beschleunigt auf ein- Antrieb fährt mit

gestellten Sollwert eingestelltem Sollwert
3.4.2 Drehrichtung
Antrieb wechselt
wechseln die Drehrichtung

3.4.3 Sollwert vorge- Anzeige wechselt bei ge-

ben drückter Taste zur Soll-
wertanzeige/-vorgabe
Sollwert kann mit UP/
DOWN bei gedrückter
FUNC/SPEED-Taste
verändert werden

3.4.4 Drivemode ver- Der Drivemode kann nur in Zustand „Stop“ (Anzeige noP oder LS) verlassen wer-
lassen den. Halten Sie dazu die FUNC- und ENTER-Taste gleichzeitig für ca. 3 Sekunden
gedrückt. In der Anzeige erscheinen die CP-Parameter.

+ für 3 Sekunden

D - 24
Fehlerdiagnose

4. Fehlerdiagnose
Fehlermeldungen werden beim KEB COMBIVERT immer mit einem „E.“ und dem entsprechenden Fehlercode in
der Anzeige dargestellt. Fehlermeldungen bewirken ein sofortiges Abschalten der Modulation. Der Wiederanlauf
ist erst nach Reset oder AutoReset möglich.
Störungen werden mit einem „A.“ und der entsprechenden Meldung dargestellt. Auf Störungen kann variabel
reagiert werden. Im folgenden werden die Anzeigen und ihre Ursache beschrieben.

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Statusmeldungen
bbL Motorentregung 76 Endstufen zur Motorentregung gesperrt
bon Bremse schließen 85 Bremsenansteuerung (siehe Kapitel 6.9)
boFF Bremse öffnen 86 Bremsenansteueurng (siehe Kapitel 6.9)
Die Meldung wird während der Erfassung des Motorständerwiderstandes
Cdd Antriebsdatenerfassung 82
ausgegeben.
dcb DC Bremsung 75 Motor wird durch eine Gleichspannung am Ausgang abgebremst.
Modulation aus nach DC- Modulation wird nach der DC-Bremsung abgeschaltet (siehe Kapitel 6.9
dLS 77
Bremsung “DC-Bremsung”).
Es wird mit den eingestellten Rampenzeiten mit Drehrichtung rechts
FAcc Beschleunigung Rechtslauf 64
beschleunigt.
Die Beschleunigungs- / Verzögerungsphase ist beendet und es wird mit
Fcon Konstantfahrt Rechtslauf 66
konstanter Drehzahl / Frequenz mit Drehrichtung rechts gefahren.
Es wird mit den eingestellten Rampenzeiten mit Drehrichtung rechts
FdEc Verzögerung Rechtslauf 65
angehalten.
Die Meldung wird ausgegeben, wenn der Ausgangsstrom die
HCL Hardwarestromgrenze 80
Hardwarestromgrenze erreicht.
Diese Meldung wird angezeigt, wenn während der Beschleunigung die
LAS Beschleunigungsstop 72
Auslastung auf den eingestellten Auslastungspegel begrenzt wird.
Diese Meldung wird angezeigt, wenn während der Verzögerung
die Auslastung auf den eingestellten Auslastungspegel oder die
LdS Verzögerungsstop 73
Zwischenkreisspannung auf den eingestellten Spannungspegel
begrenzt wird.
LS Stillstand (Mod. aus) 70 Es ist keine Drehrichtung vorgegeben, die Modulation ist abgeschaltet.
Das Leistungsteil ist nicht bereit, bzw. wird nicht von der Steuerung
nO_PU Leistungsteil nicht bereit 13
erkannt.
noP keine Reglerfreigabe 0 Reglerfreigabe (Klemme ST) ist nicht geschaltet.
PA Positionierung aktiv 122 Diese Meldung wird während eines Positioniervorganges angezeigt.
Modulation aus nach Netz-
PLS 84 Modulation wurde nach Ablauf der Netz-Aus-Funktion abgeschaltet.
Aus
Die angegebene Position ist innerhalb der vorgegebenen Rampen
PnA Position nicht erreichbar 123 nicht erreichbar. Es kann programmiert werden, ob die Positionierung
abgebrochen wird.
Abhängig von der Programmierung der Funktion (siehe Kapitel 6.9”Netz-
POFF Netz-Aus-Funktion aktiv 78 Aus-Funktion”) läuft der Umrichter bei Netzrückkehr selbstständig, bzw.
erst nach einem Reset an.
POSI Positionierung 83 Die Meldung wird bei aktiver Positionierfunktion (F5-G) ausgegeben.
Es wird mit den eingestellten Rampenzeiten mit Drehrichtung links
rAcc Beschleunigung Linkslauf 67
beschleunigt.
Die Beschleunigungs- / Verzögerungsphase ist beendet und es wird mit
rcon Konstantfahrt Linkslauf 69
konstanter Drehzahl / Frequenz mit Drehrichtung rechts gefahren.
Es wird mit den eingestellten Rampenzeiten mit Drehrichtung links
rdEc Verzögerung Linkslauf 68
angehalten.
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 25
Fehlerdiagnose

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Der Antrieb meldet, das er bereit zum Starten des Positioniervorganges
rFP Zur Positionierung bereit 121
ist.
Diese Meldung wird angezeigt, wenn während der Konstantfahrt die
SLL Stromgrenze erreicht 71
Auslastung auf die eingestellte Stromgrenze begrenzt wird.
SrA Referenzpunktfahrt aktiv 81 Die Meldung wird während der Referenzpunktfahrt ausgegeben.
Drehzahlsuchfunktion aktiv, dass heißt der Umrichter versucht sich auf
SSF Drehzahlsuche 74
einen auslaufenden Motor zu synchronisieren.
Die Meldung wird ausgegeben, wenn als Reaktion auf eine Warnmeldung
StOP Schnellhalt aktiv 79
die Schnellhaltfunktion aktiv wird.
Fehlermeldungen
Fehler: kann bei eingeschalteter Bremsenansteuerung (siehe Kap.
6.9.5) auftreten, wenn
E. br Fehler ! Bremsenansteuerung 56 die Auslastung beim Starten unter dem minimalem Auslastungspegel
(Pn.43) liegt oder das Fehlen einer Motorphase erkannt wurde.
die Auslastung zu gross und die Hardwarestromgrenze erreicht ist.
Die eingestellte Überwachungszeit (Watchdog) der Kommunikation
E.buS Fehler ! Watchdog 18 zwischen Operator und PC, bzw. zwischen Operator und Umrichter
wurde überschritten.
Fehler ! Bei der automatischen Motorständerwiderstandsmessung ist ein Fehler
E.Cdd 60
Antriebsdatenberechnung aufgetreten.
Fehler ! Geber 1
E.co1 54 Der Zähler des Geberkanal 1 hat einen unzulässigen Wert erreicht.
Zählerüberlauf
Fehler ! Geber 2
E.co2 55 Der Zähler des Geberkanal 2 hat einen unzulässigen Wert erreicht.
Zählerüberlauf
Motortemperaturschalter oder PTC an den Klemmen T1/T2 hat ausgelöst.
Fehler erst rücksetzbar bei E.ndOH, wenn PTC wieder niederohmig ist.
Ursachen:
E.dOH Fehler ! Motorüberhitzung 9
Widerstand an den Klemmen T1/T2 >1650 Ohm
Motor überlastet
Leitungsbruch zum Temperaturfühler
Das Relais für die Treiberspannung auf dem Leistungsteil hat bei
E.dri Fehler ! Treiberrelais 51 gegebener Reglerfreigabe nicht angezogen oder ist bei geöffneter
Reglerfreigabe nicht abgefallen.
Nach Rücksetzen ist Betrieb weiter möglich (ohne Speichern im
E.EEP Fehler ! EEPROM defekt 21
EEPROM)
Wird ausgelöst, wenn ein digitaler Eingang als externer Fehlereingang
E. EF Fehler ! Externer Eingang 31
programmiert ist und auslöst.
E.EnC Fehler ! Geberkabel 32 Kabelbruch beim Resolver oder Inkrementalgeber
Es wurde eine Geberschnittstelle mit einer ungültigen Kennung
E.Hyb Fehler ! Geberschnittstelle 52
entdeckt.
Die Geberschnittstellenkennung hat sich geändert und muss über ec.0
E.HybC Fehler ! Neue Geberkennung 59
oder ec.10 bestätigt werden.
Fehler ! NPN/PNP- Hardwarefehler bei der NPN-/PNP-Umschaltung oder bei der Start/
E.iEd 53
Umschaltung Stop-Messung.
E.InI Fehler ! MFC nicht gebootet 57 MFC nicht gebootet.
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 26
Fehlerdiagnose

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Das Ladeshuntrelais ist nicht angezogen. Dies tritt kurzzeitig während
der Einschaltphase auf, muß jedoch sofort selbstständig zurückgesetzt
werden. Bleibt die Fehlermeldung bestehen, können folgende Ursachen
in Frage kommen:
E.LSF Fehler ! Ladeschaltung 15 Ladeshunt defekt
falsche oder zu geringe Eingangsspannung
hohe Verluste in der Versorgungsleitung
Bremswiderstand falsch angeschlossen oder defekt
Bremsmodul defekt
Motortemperatur wieder Motortemperaturschalter oder PTC an den Klemmen T1/T2 ist wieder im
E.ndOH 11
normal normalen Arbeitsbereich. Der Fehler kann nun zurückgesetzt werden.
Kühlkörpertemperatur wieder Temperatur des Kühlkörpers wieder im zulässigen Betriebsbereich. Der
E.nOH 36
normal Fehler kann zurückgesetzt werden.
Innenraumtemperatur wieder keine Übertemperatur Innenraum E.OHI mehr, Innenraumtemperatur ist
E.nOHI 7
normal um mind. 3°C gesunken, Fehler rücksetzbar
keine Überlast mehr, OL-Zähler hat 0 % erreicht; nach Fehler E.OL muß
eine Abkühlphase abgewartet werden. Diese Meldung erscheint nach
E.nOL Überlast beseitigt 17
Beendigung der Abkühlphase. Der Fehler kann zurückgesetzt werden.
Der Umrichter muss während der Abkühlphase eingeschaltet bleiben.
Überlast im Stillstand Die Abkühlzeit ist abgelaufen und der Fehler kann zurückgesetzt
E.nOL2 20
behoben werden.
Tritt auf, wenn der angegebene Spitzenstrom überschritten wird.
Ursachen:
zu kurze Beschleunigungsrampen
zu große Last bei abgeschaltetem Beschleunigungsstop und
abgeschalteter Konstantstromgrenze
E. OC Fehler ! Überstrom 4 Kurzschluß am Ausgang
Erdschluß
zu kurze Verzögerungsrampe
Motorleitung zu lang
EMV
DC-Bremse bei großen Leistungen aktiv (siehe 6.9.3)
Temperatur des Kühlkörpers ist zu hoch. Fehler erst rücksetzbar bei
E.nOH Ursachen:
Fehler ! Übertemperatur
E. OH 8 unzureichender Luftstrom am Kühlkörper (verschmutzt)
Kühlkörper
zu hohe Umgebungstemperatur
Lüfter verstopft
E.OH2 Fehler ! Motorschutzfunktion 30 Das elektronische Motorschutzrelais hat ausgelöst.
Fehler ! Übertemperatur Innenraumtemperatur zu hoch. Fehler erst rücksetzbar bei E.nOHI,
E.OHI 6
Innenraum wenn die Innenraumtemperatur um mind. 3 °C gesunken ist
Überlast Fehler erst rücksetzbar, bei E.nOL, wenn OL-Zähler wieder 0
% erreicht hat. Tritt auf, wenn eine zu große Belastung länger als für die
zulässige Zeit (s. Technische Daten) anliegt. Ursachen:
schlechter Reglerabgleich
E. OL Fehler ! Überlast (Ixt) 16
mechanischer Fehler oder Überlastung in der Applikation
Umrichter falsch dimensioniert
Motor falsch beschaltet
Geber defekt
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 27
Fehlerdiagnose

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Tritt auf, wenn der Stillstandsdauerstrom überschritten wird (siehe
E.OL2 Fehler ! Überlast im Stillstand 19 technische Daten und Überlastkurven). Der Fehler ist erst rücksetzbar,
wenn die Abkühlzeit abgelaufen ist und E.nOL2 angezeigt wird.
Spannung im Zwischenkreis zu hoch. Tritt auf, wenn die
Zwischenkreisspannung über den zugelassenen Wert ansteigt.
Ursachen:
schlechter Reglerabgleich (Überschwinger)
E. OP Fehler ! Überspannung 1
Eingangsspannung zu hoch
Störspannungen am Eingang
zu kurze Verzögerungsrampe
Bremswiderstand defekt oder zu klein
Fehler !
E.OS 58 Die Drehzahl liegt ausserhalb der festlegten Grenzen
Drehzahlüberschreitung
E.PFC Fehler ! PFC 33 Fehler in der Leistungsfaktorkorrektur
Der Antrieb ist auf den rechten Endschalter aufgefahren. Als Reaktion
Fehler ! Endschalter
E.PrF 46 wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset” programmiert (siehe Kapitel 6.7
Rechtslauf
“Reaktion auf Fehler oder Warnmeldungen”).
Der Antrieb ist auf den linken Endschalter aufgefahren. Als Reaktion
E.Prr Fehler ! Endschalter Linkslauf 47 wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset” programmiert (siehe Kapitel 6.7
“Reaktion auf Fehler oder Warnmeldungen”).
E. Pu Fehler ! Leistungsteil 12 Allgemeiner Leistungsteilfehler (z.B. Lüfter
Fehler ! Leistungsteil Während der Initalisierungsphase wurde das Leistungsteil nicht, oder
E.Puci 49
unbekannt als nicht zulässig, erkannt.
Die Leistungsteilkennung hat sich geändert; bei gültigem Leistungsteil
kann der Fehler durch Schreiben auf SY.3 zurückgesetzt werden.
Wenn der in SY.3 angezeigte Werte geschrieben wird, werden nur die
Fehler ! Leistungsteil
E.Puch 50 leistungsteilabhängigen Parameter neu initialisiert. Wird ein beliebiger
geändert
anderer Wert geschrieben, dann werden Defaultwerte geladen. Bei
manchen Geräten ist nach dem Schreiben von Sy.3 ein Power-On-
Reset erfoderlich.
Fehler ! Leistungsteil Parameterwert konnte nicht zum Leistungsteil geschrieben werden.
E.PUCO 22
Kommunikation Quittung vom LT <> OK
Fehler ! Leistungsteil Fehler: Softwareversion von Leistungsteil und Steuerkarte sind
E.PUIN 14
Kodierung unterschiedlich. Fehler nicht rücksetzbar (nur bei F5-G im B-Gehäuse)
Synchronisierung über den Sercosbus nicht möglich. Als Reaktion
E.SbuS Fehler ! Bussynchronisierung 23
wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset” programmiert.
Fehler ! Es wurde versucht, einen gesperrten Parametersatz anzuwählen. Als
E.SEt 39
Parametersatzanwahl Reaktion wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset” programmiert.
Die Ziellage liegt außerhalb der mit dem rechten Software-Endschalter
Fehler ! Software-
E.SLF 44 festgelegten Grenze. Als Reaktion wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset”
Endschalter rechts
programmiert.
Die Ziellage liegt außerhalb der mit dem linken Software-Endschalter
Fehler ! Software-
E.SLr 45 festgelegten Grenze. Als Reaktion wurde “Fehler, Neustart nach Reset”
Endschalter links
programmiert.
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 28
Fehlerdiagnose

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Spannung im Zwischenkreis zu gering. Tritt auf, wenn die
Zwischenkreisspannung unter den zugelassenen Wert sinkt. Ursachen:
Eingangsspannung zu gering oder instabil
Umrichterleistung zu klein
Spannungsverluste durch falsche Verkabelung
Versorgungsspannung durch Generator / Transformator bricht bei sehr
E. UP Fehler ! Unterspannung 2
kurzen Rampen ein
Bei F5-G im B-Gehäuse wird E.UP auch angezeigt, wenn keine
Kommunikation zwischen Leistungsteil und Steuerkarte erfolgt.
Sprungfaktor (Pn.56) zu klein
wenn ein digitaler Eingang als externer Fehlereingang mit Fehlermeldung
E.UP programmiert ist (Pn.65).
E.UPh Fehler ! Netzphase 3 Phase der Eingangsspannung fehlt (Ripple detect)
Warnmeldungen
Watchdog für Kommunikation zwischen Operator - PC oder Operator
A.buS Warnung ! Watchdog 93 – Umrichter hat angesprochen. Die Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann
programmiert werden.
Die Motortemperatur hat einen eingestellbaren Warnpegel überschritten.
Die Abschaltzeit wird gestartet. Die Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann
A.dOH Warnung ! Motorüberhitzung 96
programmiert werden. Diese Warnung kann nur mit einem speziellen
Leistungsteil generiert werden.
Diese Warnung wird über einen externen Eingang ausgelöst. Die
A. EF Warnung ! Externer Eingang 90
Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Entwarnung ! Die Motortemperatur ist wieder unterhalb des eingestellten Warnpegels.
A.ndOH 91
Motorüberhitzung Die Abschaltzeit wird angehalten.
Entwarnung ! Übertemperatur
A.nOH 88 Die Kühlkörpertemperatur ist wieder unterhalb des Warnpegels.
Kühlkörper
Entwarnung ! Übertemperatur Die Temperatur im Innraum des Umrichters ist wieder unterhalb der
A.nOHI 92
Innenraum Warnschwelle.
Der Überlastzähler (OL-Zähler) hat 0 % erreicht, die Warnung “Überlast
A.nOL Entwarnung ! Überlast 98
kann zurückgesetzt werden.
Entwarnung ! Überlast im Die Abkühlzeit nach “Warnung ! Überlast im Stillstand” ist abgelaufen.
A.nOL2 101
Stillstand Die Warnmeldung kann zurückgesetzt werden.
Es kann ein Pegel festgelegt werden, bei dessen Überschreitung diese
Warnung ! Übertemperatur
A. OH 89 Warnung ausgegeben wird. Weiterhin kann eine Reaktion auf diese
Kühlkörper
Warnung programmiert werden.
Warnung ! Die elektronische Motorschutzfunktion hat ausgelöst. Die Reaktion auf
A.OH2 97
Motorschutzfunktion diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Die Temperatur im Innenraum des Umrichters liegt über dem zulässigem
Warnung ! Übertemperatur
A.OHI 87 Pegel. Die Abschaltzeit wurde gestartet. Die eingestellte Reaktion auf
Innenraum
die Warnmeldung wird ausgeführt.
Es kann ein Pegel zwischen 0 und 100% des Auslastungszählers
A. OL Warnung ! Überlast 99 eingestellt werden, bei dessen Überschreiten die Warnung ausgegeben
wird. Die Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Die Warnung wird ausgegeben, wenn der Stillstandsdauerstrom
überschritten wird (siehe technische Daten und Überlastkurven). Die
Warnung ! Überlast im
A.OL2 100 Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden. Die Warnung
Stillstand
ist erst rücksetzbar, wenn die Abkühlzeit abgelaufen ist und A.nOL2
angezeigt wird.
Warnung ! Endschalter Der Antrieb ist auf den rechten Endschalter aufgefahren. Die Reaktion
A.PrF 94
Rechtslauf auf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
weiter auf nächster Seite

D - 29
Fehlerdiagnose

Display COMBIVIS Wert Bedeutung

Warnung ! Endschalter Der Antrieb ist auf den linken Endschalter aufgefahren. Die Reaktion auf
A.Prr 95
Linkslauf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Warnung ! Synchronisierung über den Sercosbus nicht möglich. Die Reaktion auf
A.SbuS 103
Bussynchronisation diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Warnung ! Es wurde versucht, einen gesperrten Parametersatz anzuwählen. Die
A.SEt 102
Parametersatzanwahl Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert werden.
Die Ziellage liegt außerhalb der mit dem rechten Software-Endschalter
Warnung ! Software-
A.SLF 104 festgelegten Grenze. Die Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert
Endschalter rechts
werden.
Die Ziellage liegt außerhalb der mit dem linken Software-Endschalter
Warnung ! Software-
A.SLr 105 festgelegten Grenze. Die Reaktion auf diese Warnung kann programmiert
Endschalter links
werden.

D - 30
Inbetriebnahme

5. Erstinbetriebnahme
Für die Erstinbetriebnahme des KEB COMBIVERT F5-M empfiehlt sich folgende Vorgehensweise:
1. Reglerfreigabe öffnen (Klemme X2A.16) => Frequenzumrichter im Status „noP“
2. Gesteuerten Betrieb anwählen => Parameter CP.10 = 0 D
3. Motordaten eingeben => Parameter CP.11…CP.16
4. Motoranpassung aktivieren => Parameter CP.17 = 1 oder 2
5. ggf. erforderlichen Boost eingeben => Parameter CP.18
6. Geberstrichzahl eingeben => Parameter CP.20
7. Grenzfrequenz des Gebers beachten => siehe Geberspezifikation
8. Inbetriebnahme gesteuerter Betrieb => siehe nachfolgendes Flußdiagramm

Start
│
positive Solldrehzahl vorgeben ┐
◄────── Fehlerursache beheben
REF 1 (Klemmen X2A.1 / X2A.2) │
│
Reglerfreigabe aktivieren
(Klemme X2A.16)
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
Ist die Drehrichtung des Motors (Rechtslauf)
korrekt ? ─ nein──► Motorphasen tauschen

ja
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
Ist das Vozeichen der Istdrehzahlanzeige Geberspuren tauschen
(CP.1) positiv ? ─ nein──► (Parameter CP.21)
ja
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
mögliche Gründe: Geber defekt, Interface defekt, │
Istdrehzahl (CP.1) gleich Solldrehzahl (CP.2)
minus Schlupf ? ─ nein──► EMV-Probleme, Grenzfrequenz des Gebers zu klein, │
falsche Geberstrichzahl (CP.20)
┘
ja
│
Erstinbetriebnahme erfolgreich !

D - 31
 Inbetriebnahme

6. Einstellhilfe Drehzahlregler
1. Reglerfreigabe öffnen (Klemme X2A.16) => Frequenzumrichter im Status „noP“
2. Geregelten Betrieb anwählen => Parameter CP.10 = 4

Problem sehr langer Einschwingvorgang Problem zu hoher Drehzahlüberschwinger

Abhilfe KP-Drehzahl (CP.30) erhöhen; evtl. KI- Abhilfe KP-Drehzahl (CP.30) erhöhen; evtl.
Drehzahl (CP.31) reduzieren KI-Drehzahl (CP.31) reduzieren

Problem kurzwellige Dauerschwingungen, Ge- Problem zu langsamer Einschwingvorgang /

räusche Vibrationen bleibende Regelabweichung
Abhilfe KP-Drehzahl (CP.30) verringern Abhilfe KI-Drehzahl (CP.31) erhöhen

Problem zu langer Überschwinger, starke Dreh- Problem langwellige Dauerschwingung

zahleinbrüche bei Lastwechsel

Abhilfe KI-Drehzahl (CP.31) erhöhen Abhilfe KI-Drehzahl (CP.31) reduzieren und /

oder KP-Drehzahl (CP.30) reduzieren

D - 32
Kurzanleitung

7. Kurzanleitung
Parameter Einstellbereich Auflösung ↵ Kundeneinstellung
CP.00 Passworteingabe 0…9999 1 —
D
CP.01 Istdrehzahl Geber 1 — 0,125 min-1 —
CP.02 Sollwertanzeige — 0,125 min-1 —
CP.03 Umrichterstatus — 1 —
CP.04 Scheinstrom — 0,1 A —
CP.05 Scheinstrom Spitzenwert — 0,1 A —
CP.06 Istmoment — 0,01 Nm —
CP.07 Zwischenkreisspannung — 1V —
CP.08 ZK-Spannung Spitzenwert — 1V —
CP.09 Ausgangsspannung — 1V —
CP.10 Konfiguration Drehzahlregler 0 (off)…5 1
CP.11 DASM Nenndrehzahl 0…64000 min-1 1 min-1
CP.12 DASM Nennfrequenz 0,0…1600,0 Hz 0,1 Hz
CP.13 DASM Nennstrom 0,0…710,0 A 0,1 A
CP.14 DASM Nennspannung 120…500 V 1V
CP.15 DASM cos (phi) 0,50…1,00 0,01
CP.16 DASM Nennleistung 0,35…400,00 kW 0,01 kW
CP.17 Motoranpassung 0…2 1
CP.18 Boost 0,0…25,5 % 0,1 %
CP.19 Eckfrequenz 0…400 Hz 0,0125 Hz
CP.20 Geberstrichzahl 1 1…16383 Ink. 1 Ink.
CP.21 Drehrichtungstausch Geber 1 0…19 1 x
CP.22 max. Sollwert 0…4000 min-1 0,125 min-1
CP.23 Festwert 1 +4000 min-1 0,125 min-1
CP.24 Festwert 2 +4000 min-1 0,125 min-1
CP.25 Beschleunigungszeit 0,00…300,00 s 0,01 s
CP.26 Verzögerungszeit -0,01…300,00 s 0,01 s
CP.27 S-Kurvenzeit 0,00 (off)…5,00 s 0,01 s
CP.28 Quelle Momentensollwert 0…5 1 x
CP.29 Absoluter Momentensollwert +10000,00 Nm 0,01 Nm
CP.30 KP Drehzahl 0…32767 1
CP.31 KI Drehzahl 0…32767 1
CP.32 Schaltfrequenz 2/4/8/12/16 kHz — x
CP.33 Relaisausgang 1 / Funktion 0…84 1 x
CP.34 Relaisausgang 2 / Funktion 0…84 1 x
CP.35 Endschalterfehler Reaktion 0…6 1
CP.36 Reaktion auf externen Fehler 0…6 1

D - 33
Notizen

D - 38
Passwörter

8. Passwörter

Nur Lesen Lesen/Schreiben Drivemodus

100 200 500

D - 34
 Karl E. Brinkmann GmbH
Försterweg 36-38 • D-32683 Barntrup
fon: +49 5263 401-0 • fax: +49 5263 401-116
net: www.keb.de • mail: [email protected]

KEB Antriebstechnik GmbH & Co. KG KEB (UK) Ltd.

Wildbacher Str. 5 • D–08289 Schneeberg 6 Chieftain Buisiness Park, Morris Close
fon: +49 3772 67-0 • fax: +49 3772 67-281 Park Farm, Wellingborough GB-Northants, NN8 6 XF
mail: [email protected] fon: +44 1933 402220 • fax: +44 1933 400724
net: www.keb-uk.co.uk • mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH
Ritzstraße 8 • A-4614 Marchtrenk KEB Italia S.r.l.
fon: +43 7243 53586-0 • fax: +43 7243 53586-21 Via Newton, 2 • I-20019 Settimo Milanese (Milano)
net: www.keb.at • mail: [email protected] fon: +39 02 33535311 • fax: +39 02 33500790
net: www.keb.it • mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik
Herenveld 2 • B-9500 Geraadsbergen KEB Japan Ltd.
fon: +32 5443 7860 • fax: +32 5443 7898 15–16, 2–Chome, Takanawa Minato-ku
mail: [email protected] J–Tokyo 108-0074
fon: +81 33 445-8515 • fax: +81 33 445-8215
KEB Power Transmission Technology (Shanghai) Co. mail: [email protected]
Ltd – Office Room 401
No. 665 North Songwei Road (New Husong Road), KEB Korea Seoul
Songjiang District, CHN-201613 Shanghai, P.R. China Room 1709, 415 Missy 2000
fon: +86 21 51095995 • fax: +86 21 54450115 725 Su Seo Dong, Gang Nam Gu
net: www.keb.cn • mail: [email protected] ROK-135-757 Seoul/South Korea
fon: +82 2 6253 6771 • fax: +82 2 6253 6770
KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH mail: [email protected]
Organizační složka
K. Weise 1675/5 • CZ-370 04 České Budějovice KEB RUS Ltd.
fon: +420 387 699 111 • fax: +420 387 699 119 Dolgorukovskaja str. 33, building 8
net: www.keb.cz • mail: [email protected] RUS-127006 Moscow
fon: +007 499 972 3162 • fax: +007 499 978 9573
KEB España mail: [email protected]
C/ Mitjer, Nave 8 - Pol. Ind. LA MASIA
E-08798 Sant Cugat Sesgarrigues (Barcelona) KEB Sverige
fon: +34 93 897 0268 • fax: +34 93 899 2035 Box 265 (Bergavägen 19)
mail: [email protected] S-43093 Hälsö
fon: +46 31 961520 • fax: +46 31 961124
Société Française KEB mail: [email protected]
Z.I. de la Croix St. Nicolas • 14, rue Gustave Eiffel
F-94510 LA QUEUE EN BRIE KEB America, Inc.
fon: +33 1 49620101 • fax: +33 1 45767495 5100 Valley Industrial Blvd. South
net: www.keb.fr • mail: [email protected] USA-Shakopee, MN 55379
fon: +1 952 224-1400 • fax: +1 952 224-1499
net: www.kebamerica.com • mail: [email protected]
10/2007
00.F5.MDB-K320
© KEB
 COMBIVERT

GB INSTRUCTION MANUAL Control Circuit from V3.2

00.F5.MEB-K320

10/2007
 This Instruction Manual describes the control circuit of the KEB COMBIVERT F5 - Series. It is only
GB valid together with the Instruction Manuals Part 1 and Part 2. Both Instruction Manuals must be
made available to the user. Prior to performing any work on the unit the user must familiarize himself
GB - 3 ......GB with the unit. This includes especially the knowledge and observance of the safety and warning
- 40 directions of Part 1. The pictographs used in this instruction manual have following meaning:

Danger Attention, Information

Warning observe at Help
Caution all costs Tip
Inhaltsverzeichnis

1. General ............................................................ 4

2. Installation and Connection .......................... 5

2.1 Summary ......................................................................5
2.1.1 Housing Size D - E ........................................................5
2.1.2 Housing Size >= G.........................................................5
2.2 Control Circuit MULTI ..................................................6 GB
2.2.1 Assignment of Terminal Strip X2A .................................6
2.2.2 Connection of the control circuit ....................................7
2.2.3 Digital Inputs ..................................................................7
2.2.4 Analog Inputs .................................................................7
2.2.5 Voltage Input / External Power Supply ..........................8
2.2.6 Digital Outputs ...............................................................8
2.2.7 Relay Outputs ................................................................8
2.2.8 Analog Outputs ..............................................................8
2.2.9 Voltage Output ...............................................................8
2.3 Operator........................................................................9

3. Operation of the Unit .................................... 10

3.1 Keyboard ....................................................................10
3.2 Parameter description ...............................................11
3.2.1 Password Input ............................................................12
3.2.2 Operating Display ........................................................12
3.2.3 Basic Adjustment of the Drive ......................................14
3.2.4 Special Adjustments ....................................................17
3.3 Factory Settings.........................................................23
3.4 The drive mode ..........................................................24
3.4.1 Start / stop drive ............................................................24
3.4.2 Changing the direction of rotation ................................24
3.4.3 Presetting the setpoint .................................................24
3.4.4 Leaving the drive mode ...............................................24

4. Error Assistance ........................................... 25

5. Initial Start-up ............................................... 31

6. Adjustment Speed Controller ...................... 32

7. Quick Reference ........................................... 33

8. Passwords..................................................... 34

GB - 3
 General

1. General
The frequency inverter KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI is a drive component, which is intended for installation in
electrical systems or machines. The frequency inverter is exclusively for stepless speed control / regulation of
three-phase asynchronous motors. The operation of other electrical consumers is not permitted and can lead to
the destruction of the unit.
KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI has very extensive programming options. To make the operation and start-up simpler
for the user, a special operator level was created in which the most important parameters are found. However, if
GB the parameters pre-defined by KEB are not sufficient for your application an application manual is available.

GB - 4
Installation and Connection

2. Installation and Connection

2.1 Summary
2.1.1 Housing Size D - E

Optional Operator
with 9-pole Sub-D Socket GB
Parameter Interface

�� ��
��
�
�

��
��
�
��
��

�� � �
��
��

�
�
X2A
Connection

�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
Connection of control terminal

�� ����
�
��
X3B
9-pole Sub-D Socket
OPTION

X3A
15-pole Sub-D Socket
Connection of incremental encoder

2.1.2 Housing Size >= G

Optional Operator
with 9-pole Sub-D Socket
�� ��
��
�
�

��
��
�
��
��

�� ��

Parameter Interface
��
��

�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�

X3A
15-pole Sub-D Socket
Connection of incremental encoder
�
���
��
��
�� � �� ���� ����� ���
��� ��� ��� � � ��
�� ��� ��� ���

�� ���
�� ��� ����
��� ��� ���

��� ��
�� ��� ����
�� ��� ��

���� �
� ��

��
��

X3B
9-pole Sub-D Socket
OPTION

X2A
Connection
Connection of control terminal

��
���
��

Observe the maximal width of

connectors for X3A and X3B

GB - 5
 Installation and Connection

2.2 Control Circuit MULTI X2A

2.2.1 Assignment of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Terminal Strip X2A

PIN Function Name Description

GB Analog inputs
1 + Set value input 1 AN1+
0...±10 VDC ^ 0...±CP.22
2 - Set value input 1 AN1- Resolution 12 Bit
3 + Analog input 2 AN2+ Scan time 1 ms
0...±10 VDC ^ 0...±100 %
4 - Analog input 2 AN1-
Analog outputs 5 mA; Ri=100 Ω
Analog output of the real speed Resolution 12 Bit
5 Analog output 1 ANOUT1
0…±10 VDC ^ 0…±3000 rpm PWM frequency 3,4 kHz
Analog output of the apparent current Limiting frequency
6 Analog output 2 ANOUT2
0…10 VDC ^ 0…2 x IN Filter 1. Harmonic 178 Hz
Voltage supply
7 +10 V Output CRF Reference voltage for setpoint potentiometer +10 VDC +5% / max. 4 mA
8
Analog Mass COM Mass for analog in- and outputs
9
Digital inputs
10 Fixed Speed 1 I1 I1+I2 = fixed speed 3 (default: 0 rpm)
11 Fixed speed 2 I2 no input = analog set value
12 External fault I3 Input for external fault stopping mode 1)
13 - I4 No function deposited in the CP-Mode 13…30 V DC ±0 % stabilized
14 Limit switch forward F Ri=2,1 kΩ
Software limit switch 1)
15 Limit switch reverse R Scan time 1 ms
Power modules are enabled;
16 Control release / Reset ST
Error Reset at opening
17 reset RST Reset; only when an error occurs
Transistor outputs
18 Speed dependent O1 Transistor output switched at actual speed = set speed
19 Ready signal O2 Transistor output switched, as long as no error occurs
Voltage supply
20 24 V-Output Uout Approx. 24V output (max.100 mA))
21 20...30 V-Input Uin Voltage input for external supply
22
Digital Mass 0V Potential for digital in-/outputs
23
Relay Outputs
24 NO contact 1 RLA
Fault relay (default);
25 NC contact 1 RLB
Function can be changed with CP.33 at maximum
26 Switching contact 1 RLC
30 V DC
27 NO contact 2 FLA
Run-Signal (default); 0.01…1 A
28 NC contact 2 FLB
Function can be changed with CP.34
29 Switching contact 2 FLC

1) The reaction can be adjusted with CP.35 and CP. 36.. If the unit is defective there is no
guarantee that the software protective function will work.

GB - 6
Installation and Connection

2.2.2 Connection of the control circuit

In order to prevent a malfunction caused by interference voltage supply on the control inputs, the following
directions should be observed:
• Use shielded / drilled cables
• Lay shield on one side of the inverter onto earth potential
• Lay control and power cable separately (about 10...20 cm apart); Lay crossings in a right angle (in
EMC case it cannot be prevented)
GB

2.2.3 Digital Inputs

Using of the internal voltage supply

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE

Using of an external voltage supply

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 23 PE
13…30 V DC ±0 %
stabilized
Ri = 2,1 kΩ +
20…30 V DC

2.2.4 Analog Inputs

Connect unused analog inputs to common, to prevent set value fluctuations !
Analog set value setting in speed regulated operation (CP.10 = 4):

external internal
Ri = 55 k�
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

*)
+
0...±10 VDC
R = 3...10 k�
Analog set value setting in torque regulated operation (CP.10 = 5) and reference source CP.28 = 1:

Ri = 55 k�
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

*)
+
0...±10 VDC

*) Connect potential equalizing line only if a potential difference of >30 V exists between the controls.
The internal resistance is reduced to 30 kΩ.

GB - 7
 Installation and Connection

2.2.5 Voltage Input / External Power Supply

The supply of the control circuit through an external voltage source keeps the control in operational condition even
if the power stage is switched off. To prevent undefined conditions at external power supply the basic procedure
is to first switch on the power supply and after that the inverter.

X2A 10 11 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

GB
+
20…30 V ±0 % / 1 A DC
stabilized

2.2.6 Digital Outputs

X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

max. 50 mA DC
for both outputs

2.2.7 Relay Outputs

In case of inductive load on the relay outputs a protective wiring must be provided (e.g. free-wheeling diode)!

X2A 24 25 26 27 28 29 PE

max. 30 VDC / 1 A

2.2.8 Analog Outputs

X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

0...±10 VDC
max. 5 mA

2.2.9 Voltage Output

The voltage output serves for the setting of the digital inputs as well as for the supply of external control elements.
Do no exceed the maximum output current of 100 mA.

X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

+ -
ca. 24VDC / max. 100 mA

GB - 8
Installation and Connection

2.3 Operator
As an accessory to the local or external (option: cable 00.F5.0C0-1xxx) operation an operator is necessary. To
prevent malfunctions, the inverter must be brought into nOP status before connecting / disconnecting the operator
(open control release terminal). When starting the inverter, it is started with the last stored values or factory
setting.

Digital operator (part number 00.F5.060-1000)

Interface operator (part number 00.F5.060-2000)
x x 5-digit LED Display
x x Operating-/Error display
Normal "LED on"
Error "LED blinks"
- x Interface control
Transmit "LED on"
START

ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED

x x Double function keyboard

STOP

- x X6B HSP5 programming and diagnostic

interface
- x X6C RS232/RS485 X6B

COMBIVERT
X6C X6D

Only use the operator interface for the serial data transfer to RS232/485. The
direct connection, PC to the inverter is only valid with a special cable (part number
00.F5.0C0-0001), otherwise, it would lead to the destruction of the PC-interface !

X6C PIN RS485 Signal Meaning

1 - - reserved
5 4 3 2 1 2 - TxD transmission signal RS232
3 - RxD receive signal RS232
9 8 7 6
4 A‘ RxD-A receive signal A RS485
5 B‘ RxD-B receive signal B RS485
6 - VP Voltage supply +5 V (Imax=10 mA)
7 C/C‘ DGND Data reference potential
8 A TxD-A transmission signal A RS485
9 B TxD-B transmission signal B RS485

9-pole Sub-D socket 9-pole SUB-D connector

RS 232 cable
Part number PC Operator
00.58.025-001D
Length 3 m

Housing (PE)

GB - 9
Operation of the Unit

3. Operation of the Unit

3.1 Keyboard
When switching on KEB COMBIVERT F5 the value of parameter CP.1 appears (see Drive mode to switch the
keyboard function).

The function key (FUNC) changes between the parameter

value and parameter number.

With UP (▲) and DOWN (▼) the value of the parameter

number is increased/decreased with changeable
parameters.

Principally during a change, parameter values are immediately accepted and stored non-volatile. However, with
some parameters it is not useful that the adjusted value is accepted immediately. In these cases (CP.28, CP.32,
CP.33, CP.34) the adjusted value is accepted and stored non-volatile by pressing ENTER.

If a malfunction occurs during operation, then the actual display is overwritten by the alarm message. The alarm
message in the display is reset by ENTER.

== Error ==>

With ENTER only the error message in the display is reset. In the inverter status display (CP.3) the
error is still displayed. In order to reset the error itself, the cause must be removed or a power-on
reset must be made.

GB - 10
Parameter description

3.2 Parameter description

Parameter Setting range Resolution Default ↵
CP.00 Password Input 0…9999 1 –
CP.01 Encoder 1 speed – 0,125 1rpm –
CP.02 Setpoint display – 0,125 1rpm –
CP.03 Inverter state – 1 –
CP.04 Apparent current – 0.1 A –
CP.05 Peak apparent current – 0.1 A –
CP.06 Actual torque – 0.01 Nm – GB
CP.07 Actual DC voltage – 1V –
CP.08 Peak DC voltage – 1V –
CP.09 Output voltage – 1V –
CP.10 Speed control configuration 0 (off)…5 1 0 (off)
CP.11 DASM Rated speed 0…64000 rpm 1 rpm LTK 2)
CP.12 DASM rated frequency 0.0…1600.0 Hz 0.1 Hz LTK 2)
CP.13 DASM rated current 0.0…710.0 A 0.1 A LTK 2)
CP.14 DASM Rated voltage 120…500 V 1V LTK 2)
CP.15 DASM Rated cos (phi) 0.50…1.00 0.01 LTK 2)
CP.16 DASM Rated power 0.35…400.00 kW 0.01 kW LTK 2)
CP.17 Load motor dependent parameter 0…2 1 0
CP.18 Boost 0.0…25.5 % 0.1 % 2%
CP.19 rated frequency 0…400 Hz 0.0125 Hz 50 Hz
CP.20 Encoder 1 (inc/r) 1…16383 inc. 1 inc. 2500 inc.
CP.21 Encoder 1 rotation 0…19 1 0 x
CP.22 Maximum speed 0…4000 rpm 0.125 rpm 2100 rpm
CP.23 Step value 1 +4000 rpm 0.125 rpm 100 rpm
CP.24 Step value 2 +4000 rpm 0.125 rpm -100 rpm
CP.25 Acceleration time 0.00…300.00 s 0.01 s 5.00 s
CP.26 Deceleration time -0.01…300.00 s 0.01 s 5.00 s
CP.27 S-curve time 0.00 (off)…5.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s (off)
CP.28 Torque reference source 0…5 1 2 x
CP.29 Absolute torque reference +10000.00 0.01 Nm LTK 2)
CP.30 KP speed 0…32767 1 300
CP.31 KI speed 0…32767 1 100
CP.32 Switching frequency 2/4/8/12/16 kHz – – 2) x
CP.33 Relay output 1 / Function 0…75 1 4 x
CP.34 Relay output 2 / Function 0…75 1 2 x
CP.35 Reaction to limit switch 0…6 1 6
CP.36 Reaction to external fault 0…6 1 0
2)
depending on size (see 3.3 "Factory Settings")

Due to the calculation / measuring accuracies, tolerances with the current and torque displays as well
as with the switching levels and limitations, must be taken into consideration. The given tolerances
(see parameter description) refer to the respective maximum values with the dimensioning KEB
COMBIVERT : Motor = 1 : 1.
Dependent on the data from the motor manufacturer, larger tolerances at the torque displays are
possible, due to the usual variations in the machine parameters and temperature drifts.

GB - 11
 Parameter description

3.2.1 Password Input

CP.00 Password Input
Ex works the frequency inverter is supplied without password protection, this means that all changeable parameters
can be adjusted. After parameterizing the unit can be barred against unauthorized access (Passwords: see last
but one page). The adjusted mode is stored.

ENTER

GB Password

Barring the CP-Parameter

UP

FUNC

ENTER

Password

Enabling the CP-Parameter

UP

FUNC

3.2.2 Operating Display

The parameters below serve for the controlling of the frequency inverter during operation.

CP.01 Encoder 1 speed

Co-domain Description
0…±4000 rpm Display of actual motor speed ( incremental encoder 1). For control reasons the set speed
is displayed, even if the control release or direction of rotation are not switched. A counter-
clockwise rotating field (reverse) is represented by a negative sign. Precondition for the
correct display value is the in-phase connection of the motor and the correct setting of the
encoder line number (CP.20) as well as the direction of rotation (CP.21).

CP.02 Setpoint display

Co-domain Description
0…±4000 rpm Display of actually set value. For control reasons the set speed is displayed, even if the
control release or direction of rotation are not switched. If no direction of rotation is set,
the set speed for clockwise rotation (forward) is displayed.

CP.03 Inverter status

The status display shows the actual working conditions of the inverter. Possible displays and their meanings are:
„no Operation“ control release not bridged; modulation switched off; output voltage = 0 V; drive
is not controlled.
„Low Speed“ no direction of rotation preset; modulation switched off; output voltage = 0 V; drive
is not controlled.
"Forward Acceleration" drive accelerates with direction of rotation forward.

„Forward Deceleration“ drive decelerates with direction of rotation forward.

further on next side

GB - 12
Parameter description

"Reverse Acceleration" drive accelerates with direction of rotation reverse.

"Reverse Deceleration" drive decelerates with direction of rotation reverse.

"Forward Constant" drive runs with a constant speed and direction of rotation forward.

"Reverse Constant" drive runs with constant speed and direction of rotation reverse.

Other status messages are described at the parameters, where they occur (see chapter 4 „Error diagnosis“).
GB
CP.04 Apparent current

Co-domain Description
0…±6553.5 A Display of the actual apparent current in ampere.

CP.05 Apparent current / peak value

Co-domain Description
0…±6553.5 A CP.5 makes is possible to recognize the max. apparent current. For that the highest value
of CP.4 is stored in CP.5 . The peak value memory can be cleared by pressing the UP,
DOWN or ENTER key or over bus by writing any value you like to the address of CP.5.
The switch off of the inverter also clears the memory.

CP.06 Actual torque

Co-domain Description
0.0…±10000.00 A The displayed value corresponds to the actual motor torque in Nm. The value is calculated
from the active current. Because of normal type differences and temperature deviations of
the motors, tolerances of up to 30 % are possible in the base speed range (see reference
at 3.2).
Requirement for the torque display is the adjustment of the motor data (CP.11...CP.16).
If the real motor data deviate strongly from the data on the name plate the operating
performance can be optimized by entering the real data. The adjustment of the name
plate data is sufficient for a start-up.

CP.07 Intermediate circuit voltage

Display Description
0…1000 V Display of actual DC-link voltage in volt. Typical values:
V-class Normal operation Overvoltage (E.OP) Undervoltage (E.UP)
230 V 300…330 V DC approx. 400 V DC approx. 216 V DC
400 V 530…620 V DC approx. 800 V DC approx. 240 V DC

CP.08 DC-link voltage / peak value

Display Description
0…1000 V CP.8 makes it possible to recognize short-time voltage rises within an operating cycle. For
that the highest value of CP.7 is stored in CP.8. The peak value memory can be cleared
by pressing the UP, DOWN or ENTER key or over bus by writing any value you like to the
address of CP.8. The switch off of the inverter also clears the memory.

GB - 13
 Parameter description

CP.09 Output voltage

Co-domain Description
0…778 V Display of the actual output voltage in volt.

3.2.3 Basic Adjustment of the Drive

The following parameters determine the fundamental operating data of the drive and must be adjusted for the
initial commissioning (see chapter 5 "Start-up" ). They should be checked and/or adapted to the application.
GB
CP.10 Speed control configuration

Input Setting Function Description

0 x off (open loop operation)
1 -reserved-
2 -reserved-
3 off (open loop operation)
With this parameter the basic setting of
4 Speed control (closed loop operation)
the speed controller is determined.
5 Torque control (closed loop operation)
6 Torque-/speed control (closed loop
operation)
7…127 off (open loop operation)

CP.11 DASM rated motor speed

Co-domain Setting Description

0…64000 rpm see 3.3 Adjustment of rated motor speed according to the name plate. The factory
setting depends on the unit size ( see 3.3 „Factory Settings“).

CP.12 DASM rated frequency

Co-domain Setting Description

0.0…1600.0 Hz see 3.3 Adjustment of the rated motor frequency according to the name plate. The
factory setting depends on the unit size ( see 3.3 „Factory Settings“).
CP.13 DASM rated current

Co-domain Setting Description

0.0…710.0 A see 3.3 Adjustment of the rated motor current according to the name plate and the
connection (Y / ∆). The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 3.3
„Factory Settings“).

CP.14 DASM rated voltage

Co-domain Setting Description

120…500 V see 3.3 Adjustment of the rated motor current according to the name plate and the
connection (Y / ∆). The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 3.3
„Factory Settings“).

CP.15 DASM cos (phi)

Co-domain Setting Description

0.50…1.00 see 3.3 Adjustment of the motor cos(phi) according to the name plate. The factory
setting depends on the unit size ( see 3.3 „Factory Settings“).

GB - 14
Parameter description

CP.16 DASM rated power

Co-domain Setting Description

0.35…400 kW see 3.3 Adjustment of the rated motor power according to the name plate. The factory
setting depends on the unit size ( see 3.3 „Factory Settings“).

CP.17 Load motor dependent parameter

The basic settings of the inverter correspond to the size of the unit and the respective motor (see 3.3 „Factory
Settings“). If the motor data in CP.11…16 are changed, then CP.17 must be activated once. This re-adjusts the
current controller, torque curve and torque limit. With this, the torque limit is set at the value, that is maximally GB
possible in the speed range (depending on inverter rated current), but not above the rated motor torque x 3.
Co-domain Setting Description
1 x Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.
The voltage class of the inverter is taken as input voltage.
2 Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.
The measured DC-link voltage divided by √2 measured at switch on is taken
as input voltage. Thus the frequency inverter can be adapted to the actually
available mains voltage (e.g. USA with 460 V).
When control release is active the adjustment was not completed. „nco“ appears in the
display.

CP.18 Boost

Co-domain Setting Description

0.0…25.5 % 2% In the lower speed range a large part of the motor voltage decreases on the
stator resistance. So that the breakdown torque of the motor remains nearly
constant in the controlled operation over the entire speed range, the voltage
drop can be compensated by the Boost. During regulated operation (CP.10
= 4 or 5) this parameter has no function.
Adjustment:
• Determine the rate of utilization in no-load operation with rated speed
• Preset about 300 rpm and adjust the boost, so that about the same rate of
utilization is reached as with the rated speed.
When the motor, during continuous operation, drives with low speed and too high voltage
it can lead to an overheating of the motor.

GB - 15
 Parameter description

CP.19 rated frequency

Co-domain Setting Description

0.00…400.00 Hz 50 Hz With the adjusted frequency the inverter reaches in controlled operation a
maximal output voltage. The adjustment of the rated motor frequency is typical
in this case.

UA
GB
100%

CP.19 f

Motors can overheat when the rated frequency is incorrectly adjusted. During regulated
operation (CP.10 = 4 or 5) this parameter has no function.

CP.20 Encoder line number 1

Co-domain Setting Description

1…16383 inc 2500 inc With this parameter the encoder line number is adjusted to the encoder that
is connected to channel 1. Check the set and actual speed displays during
controlled operation and compare. The correct settings must be actual speed
= set speed - slip.

The co-domain can vary due to different encoder identifiers.

CP.21 Encoder 1 rotation

Bit Value Function Description

0 Encoder rotation If you find that during start-up in controlled operation
0 no modification (default) the actual and setpoint speed have different signs it
1 inverted can be an indication for a wrong connection of the
1 0 -reserved- incremental encoder. If possible the wiring should be
2 0 -reserved- corrected. Should this involve too much effort then
3 0 -reserved- you can achieve a rotation reversal of encoder 1 by
means of this parameter. The effect corresponds to
4 system inverting
a change of the A and B tracks of the incremental
0 no modification (default)
encoder.
16 inverted A system inverting can be adjusted with bit 4. With
this it is possible to run the motor with positive setting
counter-clockwise at the shaft.
The bit values are to be added up and confirm by "ENTER".

GB - 16
Parameter description

3.2.4 Special Adjustments

The following parameters serve for the optimization of the drive and the adaption to certain applications. These
adjustments can be ignored at the initial start-up.

CP.22 Maximum speed

Co-domain Setting Description

0…4000 rpm 2100 rpm In order to limit the setpoint value a maximum speed must be preset. This limit
value is the basis for further setpoint calculations and for the determination
of setpoint characteristics. The maximum speed limits the setpoint speed GB
only. Because of speed ripples, speed overshoot or hardware defects (e.g.
defective encoder) the actual speed may exceed these limits.

CP.23 Fixed speed 1 (input 1)

CP.24 Fixed speed 2 (input 2)

Co-domain Setting Description

CP.23 100 rpm Two fixed speeds can be adjusted. The selection is made by the
0…±4000 rpm inputs I1 and I2. If adjustments are made that are outside the fixed
CP.24 -100 rpm limit of CP.22, then the speed is internally limited.
Input I1 + input I2 = fixed speed 3 (factory setting = 0 rpm)
The Step speed 3 cannot adjusted in the CP-mode.

CP.25 Acceleration time

Co-domain Setting Description

0.00…300.00 s 5.00 s Defines the time needed to accelerate from 0 to 1000 rpm. The actual
acceleration time is proportional to the speed change (∆n).
∆n Speed change n [rpm]
∆t Acceleration time for ∆n
1000

800

∆n

300
∆t
0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.25

Example The drive should accelerate from 300 rpm auf 800 rpm in 1 s.

∆n = 800 rpm - 300 rpm = 500 rpm

∆t = 1 s

∆t 1s
CP.25 = –––– x 1000 rpm = –––––––– x 1000 rpm = 2 s
∆n 500 rpm

GB - 17
 Parameter description

CP.26 Deceleration time

Co-domain Setting Description

-0.01…300.00 s 5.00 s Defines the time needed to accelerate from 1000 to 0 rpm. The actual
deceleration time is proportional to the speed change (∆n). At a
deceleration time of -1 the value from CP.25 is used (Display „=Acc“) !
∆n Speed change n [rpm]
∆t Deceleration time for ∆n
1000
∆t
800
GB
∆n
300

0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.26

Example The drive should decelerate from 800 rpm to 300 rpm in 1 s.

∆n = 800 rpm - 300 rpm = 500 rpm

∆t = 1 s

∆t 1s
CP.26 = –––– x 1000 rpm = –––––––– x 1000 rpm = 2 s
∆n 500 rpm

CP.27 S-curve time

Co-domain Setting Description

0.00 (off)…5.00 s 0.00 s (off) For some applications it is of advantage when the drive starts and stops
t1 S-curve time (CP.27) jerk-free. This is achieved through a straightening of the acceleration and
t2 Acceleration time (CP.25) deceleration ramps. The straightening time, also called S-curve time, can
t3 Deceleration time (CP.26) be adjusted with CP.27.
+n [rpm]

t2 t3
t1 t1 t1 t1

t [s]
t1 t1 t1 t1

t2 t3

-n [rpm]

In order to drive defined ramps with activated S-curve time, the acceleration and deceleration times
(CP.25 and CP.26) must be adjusted higher than the S-curve time (CP.27).

GB - 18
Parameter description

CP.28 Torque reference source

Value Source Setting range Description

0 AN1+ / AN1- 0 %…±100 % = 0…±CP.29
1 AN2+ / AN2- 0 %…±100 % = 0…±CP.29 With this parameter the required setpoint source
2 digital absolute CP.29 for torque control can be adjusted.
3…5 only application mode
The values must be confirm by „ENTER“.

CP.29 Absolute torque reference

GB
Co-domain Setting Description
+10000.00 Nm see 3.3 The absolute torque reference of the drive is adjusted with parameter CP.29 in
torque controlled operation (CP.10 = 5) and with digital setpoint setting (CP.28
= 2). The sign stands for direction of rotation to be active.
In speed controlled operation (CP.10 = 4) the parameter works as torque limit
in all quadrants. The sign has no effect at that.
The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 3.3 „Factory Settings“).
During controlled operation (CP....10) this parameter has no function.
Because of normal type differences and temperature deviations of the motors, tolerances
of up to 30% are possible in the base speed range (see reference on page 13).

CP.30 KP speed

Co-domain Setting Description

0…32767 300 The proportional factor of the speed controller is adjusted in these parameters
(see chapter 5 „Start-up“).

CP.31 KI speed

Co-domain Setting Description

0…32767 100 The integral factor of the speed controller is adjusted in these parameters (see
chapter 5 „Start-up“).

CP.32 Switching frequency

Co-domain Setting
Description
2 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16 kHz The switching frequency with which the power modules are clocked can be
changed depending on the application. The employed power stage determines
the maximum switching frequency as well as the factory setting (see manual:
part 2). The values must be confirm by „ENTER“.
Refer to following list to learn low switching frequency high switching frequency
about influences and effects of less inverter heating less noise development
the switching frequency. less discharge current improved sine-wave simulation
less switching losses less motor losses
less radio interferences improved controller characteristics
improved concentricity with low
speed (only open loop!)

At switching frequencies above 4 kHz pay absolute attention to the max. motor line length
in the technical data of the power circuit manual (Part 2).

CP.33 Relay output 1 / function

CP.34 Relay output 2 / function

CP.33 and CP.34 determine the function of the two relay outputs (terminals X2A.24…26 and X2A.27…29). The
values must be confirm by „ENTER“.

GB - 19
 Parameter description

Value Function
0 No function (generally off)
1 Generally on
2 Run signal; also by DC-braking
3 Ready signal (no error)
4 Fault relay
5 Fault relay (not at under voltage error)
6 Warning or error message at abnormal stopping
7 Overload alert signal
GB
8 Overtemperature alert signal power modules
9 External overtemperature alert signal motor
10 Only application mode
11 Overtemperature alert signal interior OHI
12…19 Only application mode
20 Actual value = set value (CP.3 = Fcon; rcon; not at noP, LS, error, SSF)
21 Accelerate (CP.3 = FAcc, rAcc, LAS)
22 Decelerate (CP.3 = FdEc, rdEc, LdS)
23 Real direction of rotation = set direction of rotation
24 Utilization > switching level 1)
25 Active current > switching level 1)
26 Only application mode
27 Real value (CP.1) > switching level 1)
28 Setpoint (CP.2) > switching level 1)
29…30 Only application mode
31 Absolute setpoint at AN1 > switching level 1)
32 Absolute setpoint at AN2 > switching level 1)
33 Only application mode
34 Setpoint at AN1 > switching level 1)
35 Setpoint at AN2 > switching level 1)
36…39 Only application mode
40 Hardware current limit activated
41 Modulation on-signal
42…46 Only application mode
47 Ramp output value > switching level 1)
48 Apparent current (CP.4) > switching level 1)
49 Forward running (not at nOP, LS, abnormal stopping or error)
50 Reverse running (not at nOP, LS, abnormal stopping or error)
51 Warning E.OL2
52 Current regulator limit reached
53 Speed regulator limit reached
54…62 Only application mode
63 Absolute value ANOUT1 > switching level 1)
64 Absolute value ANOUT2 > switching level 1)
65 ANOUT1 > switching level 1)
66 ANOUT2 > switching level 1)
67…69 Only application mode
70 Driving current active (safety relay)
71…72 Only application mode
73 Absolut active power > switching level 1)
74 Active power > switching level 1)
75…79 Only application mode
80 Active current > switching level 1)
further on next side

GB - 20
Parameter description

Value Function
81 Real value channel 1 > switching level 1)
82 Real value channel 2 > switching level 1)
83 HSP5 bus synchronized
84 Only application mode

1) Switching level of CP.33 = 100; switching level of CP.34 = 4

GB

GB - 21
 Parameter description

CP.35 Limit switch / stopping mode

This parameter determines the reaction of the drive, to terminal X2A.14 (F) and/or X2A.15 (R). These terminals
are programmed as limit switches. The reaction of the drive is shown in the table below.
Value Setting Display Reaction Restart
0 E.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation
Quick stopping / disabling of modulation after reaching Remove fault,
1 A.PRx
speed 0 reset
2 A.PRx Quick stopping / holding torque at speed 0
3 A.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation
GB
Quick stopping / disabling of modulation after reaching Autoreset, if no fault
4 A.PRx
speed 0 is present
5 A.PRx Quick stopping / holding torque at speed 0
6 x — No effect to the drive, fault is ignored ! —

CP.36 Reaction to external fault

With the external error monitoring external units can take direct influence on the drive. This parameter determines
the response of the drive to a signal at terminal X2A.12 (I3) according to following table.
Value Setting Display Reaction Restart
0 x E.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation
Quick stopping / disabling of modulation after reaching Remove fault,
1 A.PRx
speed 0 reset
2 A.PRx Quick stopping / holding torque at speed 0
3 A.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation
Quick stopping / disabling of modulation after reaching Autoreset, if no fault
4 A.PRx
speed 0 is present
5 A.PRx Quick stopping / holding torque at speed 0
6 — No effect to the drive, fault is ignored ! —

GB - 22
Factory setting

3.3 Factory Settings

In the table below the factory settings for the size-dependent parameter values are listed.

Parameter CP.11 CP.12 CP.13 CP.14 CP.15 CP.16 — CP.29

Rated motor frequency

Rated motor cos(Phi)

Rated motor voltage
Rated motor current
Rated motor speed

Rated motor power

GB

Maximum torque
Rated motor
voltage class
Unit size/

[ rpm ] [Hz] [A] [V] — cos(Phi) [kW] [Nm]

09/200V 1400 50 5,9 230 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,09
10/200V 1420 50 9,0 230 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,68
12/200V 1435 50 15,2 230 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,53
13/200V 1440 50 18,2 230 0,89 5,5 36,47 69,92
14/200V 1450 50 26,0 230 0,84 7,5 49,39 93,40
15/200V 1450 50 37,5 230 0,85 11,0 72,43 137,48
16/200V 1465 50 50,0 230 0,86 15,0 97,76 190,64
17/200V 1460 50 60,5 230 0,86 18,5 120,99 248,74

09/400V 1400 50 3,4 400 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,47

10/400V 1420 50 5,2 400 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,81
12/400V 1435 50 8,8 400 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,21
13/400V 1440 50 10,5 400 0,89 5,5 36,47 73,26
14/400V 1450 50 15,0 400 0,84 7,5 49,39 80,12
15/400V 1450 50 21,5 400 0,85 11,0 72,43 118,83
16/400V 1465 50 28,5 400 0,86 15,0 97,76 165,88
17/400V 1460 50 35,0 400 0,86 18,5 120,99 213,37
18/400V 1465 50 42,0 400 0,84 22,0 143,83 253,27
19/400V 1465 50 55,5 400 0,85 30,0 195,52 309,88
20/400V 1470 50 67,0 400 0,86 37,0 240,33 393,60
21/400V 1470 50 81,0 400 0,86 45,0 292,29 474,91
22/400V 1475 50 98,5 400 0,86 55,0 356,03 609,86
23/400V 1480 50 140,0 400 0,87 75,0 483,85 752,75
24/400V 1480 50 168,0 400 0,86 90,0 580,63 907,29
25/400V 1485 50 210,0 400 0,85 110,0 707,26 833,38
26/400V 1485 50 240,0 400 0,87 132,0 848,72 1.041,70
27/400V 1485 50 287,0 400 0,88 160,0 1028,75 1.264,01
28/400V 1485 50 370,0 400 0,88 200,0 1285,93 1.413,37
29/400V 1485 50 420,0 400 0,88 250,0 1607,42 1.780,29
30/400V 1490 50 535,0 400 0,88 315,0 2018,55 1.938,63
31/400V 1490 50 623,0 400 0,85 355,0 2274,87 2.566,84
32/400V 1490 50 710,0 400 0,84 400,0 2563,24 3.012,88

GB - 23
Drive mode

3.4 The drive mode

The Drive Mode is an operating mode of KEB COMBIVERT that permits the manual starting of the drive by
the operator. After switching the control release the set value and rotation setting are effected exclusively over
the keyboard. In order to activate the drive mode the corresponding password (see last but one page) must be
entered in CP. 0. The display switches over as follows:

Direction of rotation Status

F = clockwise rotation noP = no control release
r = counter clockwise rotation LS = neutral position

3.4.1 Start / stop drive Modulation blocked

Drive decreases to 0
rpm and switches the
Drive not controlled
modulation off

Drive accelerates onto the Drive operates with

adjusted set value adjusted set value
3.4.2 Changing the
Drive changes
direction of direction of rotation
rotation

3.4.3 Presetting the Display changes when

setpoint key is pressed to set value
display/presetting
Set value can be changed
with UP/DOWN at pressed
FUNC/SPEED key

3.4.4 Leaving the drive To exit the drive mode the inverter must be in status “stop” (Display noP or LS).
mode Press the FUNC and ENTER keys simultaneously for about 3 seconds to leave the
drive mode. The CP-parameters appear in the display.

+ for 3 seconds

GB - 24
Error Assistance

4. Error Assistance
At KEB COMBIVERT error messages are always represented with an "E." and the appropriate error in the
display. Error messages cause the immediate deactivation of the modulation. Restart possible only after reset or
autoreset.
Malfunction are represented with an „A.“ and the appropriate message. Reactions to malfunctions can vary. In the
following the display and their cause are described.

Display COMBIVIS Meaning

Status Messages
bbL base block 76 Power modules for motor de-excitation locked
bon close brake 85 Brake control, brake engaged (see chapter 6.9)
boFF open brake 86 Brake control, brake released (see chapter 6.9)
Cdd calculate drive 82 Measurement of the motor stator resistance.
dcb DC brake 75 Motor is decelerated by a DC-voltage at the output.
Modulation is switched off after DC-braking (see chapter 6.9 "DC-
dLS low speed / DC brake 77
Braking“).
FAcc forward acceleration 64 Acceleration with the adjusted ramps in clockwise direction of rotation.
Acceleration / deceleration phase is completed and it is driven with
Fcon forward constant 66
constant speed / frequency in clockwise direction of rotation.
It is stopped with the adjusted ramp times in clockwise direction of
FdEc forward deceleration 65
rotation.
The message is output if the output current reaches the hardware
HCL hardware current limit 80
current limit.
This message is displayed if during acceleration the load is limited to the
LAS LA stop 72
adjusted load level.
This message is displayed if during deceleration the load is limited to the
LdS Ld stop 73
adjusted load level or the DC-link current to the adjusted voltage level.
LS low speed 70 No direction of rotation pre-set, modulation is off.
nO_PU power unit not ready 13 Power circuit not ready or not identified by the control.
noP no operation 0 Control release (terminal ST) is not switched.
PA positioning active 122 This message is displayed during a positioning process.
PLS low speed / power off 84 No modulation after Power-Off.
The specified position cannot be reached within the pre-set ramps. The
PnA position not reachable 123
abort of the positioning can be programmed.
Depending on the programming of the function (see chapter 6.9 „Power-
POFF power off function 78 off Function) the inverter restarts automatically upon system recovery or
after a reset.
POSI positioning 83 Positioning function active (F5-G).
Acceleration with the adjusted ramp times in anti-clockwise direction of
rAcc reverse acceleration 67
rotation.
Acceleration / deceleration phase is completed and it is driven with
rcon reverse constant 69
constant speed / frequency in clockwise direction of rotation.
It is stopped with the adjusted ramp times in anti-clockwise direction of
rdEc reverse deceleration 68
rotation.
rFP ready for positioning 121 The drive signals that it is ready to start the positioning process.
This message is displayed if during constant operation the load is limited
SLL stall 71
to the adjusted current limit.
SrA search for ref. active 81 Search for reference point approach active.
Speed search function active, that means that the inverter attempts to
SSF speed search 74
synchronize onto a running down motor.
The message is output if as response to a warning signal the quick-stop
STOP quick stop 79
function becomes active.
further on next side

GB - 25
Error Assistance

Display COMBIVIS Meaning

Error Messages
Error: can occur in the case of switched on brake control (see chapter
6.9.5), if
E. br Error ! brake 56 the load is below the minimum load level (Pn.43) at start up or the
absence of an engine phase was detected
the load is too high and the hardware current limit is reached
Adjusted monitoring time (Watchdog) of communication between
E.buS Error ! Watchdog 18
operator and PC / operator and inverter has been exceeded.
E.Cdd Error ! calc. drive data 60 Error: During the automatic motor stator resistance measurement.
E.co1 Error ! counter overrun 1 54 Counter overflow encoder channel 1.
E.co2 Error ! counter overrun 2 55 Counter overflow encoder channel 2.
Error: Overtemperature of motor PTC. Error can only be reset at E.ndOH,
if PTC is again low-resistance. Causes:
E.dOH Error ! drive overheat 9 resistance at the terminals T1/T2 >1650 Ohm
motor overloaded
line breakage to the temperature sensor
Error: Driver relay. Relay for driver voltage on power circuit has not
E.dri Error ! driver relay 51
picked up even though control release was given.
After reset the operation is again possible (without storage in the
E.EEP Error ! EEPROM defective t 21
EEPROM)
Error: External error. Is triggered, if a digital input is being programmed
E. EF Error ! external fault 31
as external error input and trips.
E.EnC Error ! Encoder cable 32 Cable breakage at the resolver or incremental encoder
E.Hyb Error ! hybrid 52 Invalid encoder interface identifier.
Error: Encoder interface identifier has changed, it must be confirmed
E.HybC Error ! hybrid changed 59
over ec.0 or ec.10.
Hardware failure at the NPN/PNP change-over or at the start/stop
E.iEd Error ! input error detect 53
measurement.
E.InI Error ! initialisation MFC 57 MFC not booted.
Load-shunt relay has not picked up. occurs for a short time during the
switch-on phase, but must automatically be reset immediately. If the
error message remains the following causes may be applicable:
load-shunt defective
E.LSF Error ! load shunt fault 15
input voltage wrong or too low
high losses in the supply cable
braking resistor wrongly connected or damaged
braking module defective
Motor temperature switch or PTC at the terminals T1/T2 is again in the
E.ndOH no ERROR drive overheat 11
normal operating range. The error can be reset now.
Temperature of the heat sink is again in the permissible operating range.
E.nOH no E. over heat pow.mod. 36
The error can be reset now.
No longer overheating in the interior E.OHI, interior temperature has
E.nOHI no ERROR overheat int. 7
fallen by at least 3°C
No more overload, OL-counter has reached 0%; after the error E.OL a
cooling phase must elapse. This message appears upon completion of
E.nOL no ERROR overload 17
the cooling phase. The error can be reset now. The inverter must remain
switched on during the cooling phase.
E.nOL2 no ERROR overload 2 20 The cooling time has elapsed. The error can be reset.
further on next side

GB - 26
Error Assistance

Display COMBIVIS Meaning

Occurs, if the specified peak current is exceeded. Causes:
acceleration ramps too short
the load is too big at turned off acceleration stop and turned off constant
current limit
short-circuit at the output
E. OC Error ! overcurrent 4
short-circuit at the output
deceleration ramp too short
motor cable too long
EMC
DC brake at high ratings active (see 6.9.3)
Error: Overtemperature of power module. Error can only be reset at
E.nOH. Causes:
E. OH Error ! overheat pow.mod. 8 insufficient air flow at the heat sink (soiled)
ambient temperature too high
ventilator clogged
E.OH2 Error ! motor protection 30 Electronic motor protective relay has tripped.
Error: Overheating in the interior: error can only be reset at E.nOHI, if
E.OHI Error ! overheat internal 6
the interior temperature has dropped by at least 3 °C.
Error: Overload error can only be reset at E.nOL, if OL-counter reaches
0% again. Occurs, if an excessive load is applied longer than for the
permissible time (see technical data). Causes:
poor control adjustment (overshooting)
E. OL Error ! overload (Ixt) 16
mechanical fault or overload in the application
inverter not correctly dimensioned
motor wrongly wired motor wrongly wired
encoder damaged
Occurs if the standstill constant current is exceeded (see technical data
E.OL2 Error ! overload 2 19 and overload characteristics). The error can only be reset if the cooling
time has elapsed and E.nOL2 is displayed.
Voltage in the DC-link circuit too high. Occurs when the DC bus voltage
rises above the permissible value. Causes:
poor controller adjustment (overshooting)
E. OP Error ! Overvoltage 1 input voltage too high
interference voltages at the input
deceleration ramp too short
braking resistor defective or too small
E.OS Error ! over speed 58 Real speed is bigger than the max. output speed.
E.PFC Error ! Power factor control 33 Error in the power factor control
The drive has driven onto the right limit switch. Programmed response
E.PrF Error ! prot. rot. for. 46 „Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 6.7 „Response to errors or
warning messages”).
The drive has driven onto the left limit switch. Programmed response
E.Prr Error ! prot. rot. rev. 47 „Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 6.7 „Response to errors or
warning messages”).
E. Pu Error ! power unit 12 Error: General power circuit fault
Error: During the initialization the power circuit could not be recognized
E.Puci Error ! Unknown power unit 49
or was identified as invalid.
further on next side

GB - 27
Error Assistance

Display COMBIVIS Meaning

Error: Power circuit identification was changed; with a valid power circuit
this error can be reset by writing to SY.3. If the value displayed in SY.3
E.Puch Error ! power unit changed 50 is written, only the power-circuit dependent parameters are reinitialized.
If any other value is written, then the default set is loaded. On some
systems after writing Sy.3 a Power-On-Reset is necessary.
Error ! Power unit Error: Parameter value could not be written to the power circuit.
E.PUCO 22
communication Acknowledgement from LT <> OK
Error: Software version for power circuit and control card are different.
E.PUIN Error ! Power unit invalid 14
Error cannot be reset (only at F5-G B-housing)
Sychronization over sercos-bus not possible. Programmed response
E.SbuS Error ! bus synchron 23
„Error, restart after reset”.
It has been attempted to select a locked parameter set. Programmed
E.SEt Error ! set 39
response „Error, restart after reset”.
Error ! Software limit switch The target position lies outside of the limit defined with the right software
E.SLF 44
forward limit switch. Programmed response „Error, restart after reset”.
Error ! Software limit switch The target position lies outside of the limit defined with the left software
E.SLr 45
reverse limit switch. Programmed response „Error, restart after reset”.
Error: Undervoltage (DC-link circuit) Occurs, if DC-link voltage falls
below the permissible value. Causes:
input voltage too low or instable
inverter rating too small
voltage losses through wrong cabling
the supply voltage through generator / transformer breaks down at very
E. UP Error ! underpotential 2
short ramps
at F5-G housing B E.UP is also displayed if no communication takes
place between power circuit and control card.
jump factor (Pn.56) too small
if a digital input was programmed as external error input with error
message E.UP (Pn.65).
E.UPh Error ! Phase failure 3 One phase of the input voltage is missing (ripple-detection)
Warning Messages
Warning: Watchdog for communication between operator/control card
A.buS Warning ! Watchdog 93 or operator/PC has responded. The response to this warning can be
programmed.
The motor temperature has exceeded an adjustable warning level.
The switch off time is started. The response to this warning can be
A.dOH Warning ! drive overheat 96
programmed. This warning can be generated only with a special power
circuit.
This warning is triggered via an external input. The response to this
A. EF Warning ! external fault 90
warning can be programmed.
The motor temperature is again below the adjusted warning level. The
A.ndOH All-clear ! drive overheat 91
switch off time is stopped.
A.nOH All-clear ! overheat pow.mod. 88 The heat sink temperature is again below the adjusted warning level.
The temperature in the interior of the inverter is again below the warning
A.nOHI All-clear ! overheat internal 92
threshold.
A.nOL All-clear ! overload 98 OL counter has reached 0 %, the warning “overload“ can be reset.
The cooling time after “Warning ! Overload during standstill" has elapsed.
A.nOL2 All-clear ! overload 2 101
The warning message can be reset.
A level can be defined, when it is exceeded this warning is output. The
A. OH Warning ! overheat pow.mod. 89
response to this warning can be programmed.
further on next side

GB - 28
Error Assistance

Display COMBIVIS Meaning

Warning: electronic motor protective relay has tripped. The response to
A.OH2 Warning ! motor protection 97
this warning can be programmed.
The temperature in the interior of the inverter lies above the permissible
A.OHI Warning ! overheat internal 87 level. The switch off time was started. The programmed response to this
warning message is executed.
A level between 0 and 100 % of the load counter can be adjusted, when
A. OL Warning ! overload 99 it is exceeded this warning is output. The response to this warning can
be programmed.
The warning is output when the standstill continuous current is exceeded
(see technical data and overload characteristics). The response to this
A.OL2 Warning ! overload 2 100
warning can be programmed. The warning message can only be reset
after the cooling time has elapsed and A.nOL2 is displayed.
The drive has driven onto the right limit switch. The response to this
A.PrF Warning ! prot. rot. for. 94
warning can be programmed.
The drive has driven onto the left limit switch. The response to this
A.Prr Warning ! prot. rot. rev. 95
warning can be programmed.
Sychronization over sercos-bus not possible. The response to this
A.SbuS Warning ! synchron 103
warning can be programmed.
It has been attempted to select a locked parameter set. The response to
A.SEt Warning ! set 102
this warning can be programmed.
Warning ! Software limit The target position lies outside of the limit defined with the right software
A.SLF 104
switch forward limit switch. The response to this warning can be programmed.
Warning ! Software limit The target position lies outside of the limit defined with the left software
A.SLr 105
switch reverse limit switch. The response to this warning can be programmed.

GB - 29
Error Assistance

GB - 30
Start-up

5. Initial Start-up
For the initial start-up of KEB COMBIVERT F5-M do the following:
1. Open control release (terminal X2A.16). => frequency inverter in status „noP“
2. Select open loop operation => Parameter CP.10 = 0
3. Enter motor data => Parameter CP.11…CP.16
4. Activate load motor dependent parameter => Parameter CP.17 = 1 or 2
GB
5. Enter necessary boost => Parameter CP.18
6. Enter encoder line number => Parameter CP.20
7. Observe cut-off frequency of encoder => See encoder specification
8. Startup in controlled operation => See the following flow chart

Start
│
Preset positive setpoint speed ┐
◄────── Remove cause of error
REF 1 (terminals X2A.1 / X2A.2) │
│
Activate control release
(terminal X2A.16)
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
Direction of rotation of
the motor (forward) ─ no──► Exchange motor phases
correct ?
Yes
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
Sign of the Exchange encoder tracks
actual speed display (CP.1) positive ? ─ no──► (Parameter CP.21)
Yes
├◄───────── ─────── ────────────┐
Actual speed (CP.1) equal to setpoint speed Possible causes: encoder defective, │
interface defective, EMC-problems, cut-
(CP.2) ─ no──► off frequency of the encoder is too small, │
minus slip ? wrong encoder line number (CP.20) ┘
Yes
│
Initial start-up successful !

GB - 31
 Start-up

6. Adjustment Speed Controller

1. Open control release (terminal X2A.16). => frequency inverter in status „noP“
2. Select closed loop operation => Parameter CP.10 = 4

GB

Problem Very long transient process Problem Very long speed overshoot
Solution Increase KP speed (CP.30); eventually Solution Increase KP speed (CP.30);
reduce KI speed (CP.31) eventually reduce KI speed (CP.31)

Problem Sustained oscillation short billowy, Problem Transient too slow / remaining system
noises, vibes deviation
Solution Decrease KP speed (CP.30) Solution Increase KI speed (CP.31)

Problem Overshoot too long, strong speed Problem Sustained oscillation long billowy
decreases at load change

Solution Increase KI speed (CP.31) Solution Reduce KI speed (CP.31) and / or

reduce KP speed (CP.30)

GB - 32
Quick Reference

7. Quick Reference
Parameter Setting range Resolution ↵ Customer setting
CP.00 Password Input 0…9999 1 —
CP.01 Encoder 1 speed — 0.125 rpm —
CP.02 Setpoint display — 0.125 rpm —
GB
CP.03 Inverter state — 1 —
CP.04 Apparent current — 0.1 A —
CP.05 Peak apparent current — 0.1 A —
CP.06 Actual torque — 0,01 Nm —
CP.07 Actual DC voltage — 1V —
CP.08 Peak DC voltage — 1V —
CP.09 Output voltage — 1V —
CP.10 Speed control configuration 0 (off)…5 1
CP.11 DASM Rated speed 0…64000 rpm 1 rpm
CP.12 DASM rated frequency 0.0…1600.0 Hz 0.1 Hz
CP.13 DASM rated current 0.0…710.0 A 0.1 A
CP.14 DASM Rated voltage 120…500 V 1V
CP.15 DASM Rated cos (phi) 0.50…1.00 0.01
CP.16 DASM Rated power 0.35…400.00 kW 0.01 kW
CP.17 Load motor dependent parameter 0…2 1
CP.18 Boost 0.0…25.5 % 0.1 %
CP.19 rated frequency 0…400 Hz 0.0125 Hz
CP.20 Encoder 1 (inc/r) 1…16383 inc. 1 inc.
CP.21 Encoder 1 rotation 0…19 1 x
CP.22 Maximum speed 0…4000 rpm 0.125 rpm
CP.23 Step value 1 +4000 rpm 0.125 rpm
CP.24 Step value 2 +4000 rpm 0.125 rpm
CP.25 Acceleration time 0.00…300.00 s 0.01 s
CP.26 Deceleration time -0.01…300.00 s 0.01 s
CP.27 S-curve time 0.00 (off)…5.00 s 0.01 s
CP.28 Torque reference source 0…5 1 x
CP.29 Absolute torque reference +10000.00 Nm 0,01 Nm
CP.30 KP speed 0…32767 1
CP.31 KI speed 0…32767 1
CP.32 Switching frequency 2/4/8/12/16 kHz — x
CP.33 Relay output 1 / Function 0…84 1 x
CP.34 Relay output 2 / Function 0…84 1 x
CP.35 Reaction to limit switch 0…6 1
CP.36 Reaction to external fault 0…6 1

GB - 33
 Notes

GB

GB - 34
Passwords

8. Passwords

Read only Read/Write Drive mode

100 200 500

GB - 34
 Karl E. Brinkmann GmbH
Försterweg 36-38 • D-32683 Barntrup
fon: +49 5263 401-0 • fax: +49 5263 401-116
net: www.keb.de • mail: [email protected]

KEB Antriebstechnik GmbH & Co. KG KEB (UK) Ltd.

Wildbacher Str. 5 • D–08289 Schneeberg 6 Chieftain Buisiness Park, Morris Close
fon: +49 3772 67-0 • fax: +49 3772 67-281 Park Farm, Wellingborough GB-Northants, NN8 6 XF
mail: [email protected] fon: +44 1933 402220 • fax: +44 1933 400724
net: www.keb-uk.co.uk • mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH
Ritzstraße 8 • A-4614 Marchtrenk KEB Italia S.r.l.
fon: +43 7243 53586-0 • fax: +43 7243 53586-21 Via Newton, 2 • I-20019 Settimo Milanese (Milano)
net: www.keb.at • mail: [email protected] fon: +39 02 33535311 • fax: +39 02 33500790
net: www.keb.it • mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik
Herenveld 2 • B-9500 Geraadsbergen KEB Japan Ltd.
fon: +32 5443 7860 • fax: +32 5443 7898 15–16, 2–Chome, Takanawa Minato-ku
mail: [email protected] J–Tokyo 108-0074
fon: +81 33 445-8515 • fax: +81 33 445-8215
KEB Power Transmission Technology (Shanghai) Co. mail: [email protected]
Ltd – Office Room 401
No. 665 North Songwei Road (New Husong Road), KEB Korea Seoul
Songjiang District, CHN-201613 Shanghai, P.R. China Room 1709, 415 Missy 2000
fon: +86 21 51095995 • fax: +86 21 54450115 725 Su Seo Dong, Gang Nam Gu
net: www.keb.cn • mail: [email protected] ROK-135-757 Seoul/South Korea
fon: +82 2 6253 6771 • fax: +82 2 6253 6770
KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH mail: [email protected]
Organizační složka
K. Weise 1675/5 • CZ-370 04 České Budějovice KEB RUS Ltd.
fon: +420 387 699 111 • fax: +420 387 699 119 Dolgorukovskaja str. 33, building 8
net: www.keb.cz • mail: [email protected] RUS-127006 Moscow
fon: +007 499 972 3162 • fax: +007 499 978 9573
KEB España mail: [email protected]
C/ Mitjer, Nave 8 - Pol. Ind. LA MASIA
E-08798 Sant Cugat Sesgarrigues (Barcelona) KEB Sverige
fon: +34 93 897 0268 • fax: +34 93 899 2035 Box 265 (Bergavägen 19)
mail: [email protected] S-43093 Hälsö
fon: +46 31 961520 • fax: +46 31 961124
Société Française KEB mail: [email protected]
Z.I. de la Croix St. Nicolas • 14, rue Gustave Eiffel
F-94510 LA QUEUE EN BRIE KEB America, Inc.
fon: +33 1 49620101 • fax: +33 1 45767495 5100 Valley Industrial Blvd. South
net: www.keb.fr • mail: [email protected] USA-Shakopee, MN 55379
fon: +1 952 224-1400 • fax: +1 952 224-1499
net: www.kebamerica.com • mail: [email protected]
10/2007
00.F5.MEB-K320
© KEB
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

EDK82MVXXX
!N;*

Ä!N;*ä Hinweise für den Betreiber

der Maschine/Anlage

Global Drive
Frequenzumrichter
8200 motec
0,25 ... 7,5 kW
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Diese Dokumentation ist gültig für Antriebsregler 8200 motec ab dem Gerätestand

E82MV xxx _ x B001 XX Vx 2x

Typ

Leistung
(z. B. 551 = 55 × 101 W = 0,55 kW)
(z. B. 752 = 75 × 102 W = 7,5 kW)

Spannungsklasse
2 = 230 V
4 = 400 V/500 V

Hardwarestand

Softwarestand

ã 2002 Lenze AG
Diese Dokumentation enthält alle Informationen, die der Maschinenbediener
benötigt, um die in Ihrer Maschine/Anlage eingebauten Antriebsregler der Reihe
8200 motec zu bedienen.
Alle Informationen in dieser Dokumentation können Sie ohne Rücksprache mit
Lenze weiterverwenden, wenn Sie den Inhalt nicht verändern.
Die notwendige Information für die Projektierung einer Maschine/Anlage finden Sie in der
Montageanleitung und in der Betriebsanleitung für die Frequenzumrichter 8200 motec.
Die Montageanleitung ist Teil des Lieferumfangs, die Betriebsanleitung können Sie bei Ih-
rem Lenze-Vertriebspartner bestellen.
Die Lenze-Dokumentation können Sie sich im Internet als Adobe Acrobat  Datei herunter-
laden:
http://www.lenze.de

1.0 03/2002 TD00

Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Sicherheitshinweise
Lenze-Antriebsregler

1 Sicherheitshinweise

1.1 Allgemeine Sicherheits- und Anwendungshinweise für

Lenze-Antriebsregler
(gemäß Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG)
1. Allgemein
Lenze-Antriebsregler (Frequenzumrichter, Servo-Umrichter, Stromrichter) können während des Betriebs - ihrer Schutzart entsprechend - spannungsführende, auch beweg-
liche oder rotierende Teile haben. Oberflächen können heiß sein.
Bei unzulässigem Entfernen der erforderlichen Abdeckung, bei unsachgemäßem Einsatz, bei falscher Installation oder Bedienung besteht die Gefahr von schweren Perso-
nen- oder Sachschäden.
Weitere Informationen entnehmen Sie der Dokumentation.
Alle Arbeiten zum Transport, zur Installation, zur Inbetriebnahme und zur Instandhaltung darf nur qualifiziertes Fachpersonal ausführen (IEC 364 bzw. CENELEC HD 384
oder DIN VDE 0100 und IEC-Report 664 oder DIN VDE 0110 und nationale Unfallverhütungsvorschriften beachten).
Qualifiziertes Fachpersonal im Sinne dieser grundsätzlichen Sicherheitshinweise sind Personen, die mit Aufstellung, Montage, Inbetriebsetzung und Betrieb des Produkts
vertraut sind und die über die ihrer Tätigkeit entsprechenden Qualifikationen verfügen.
2. Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Antriebsregler sind Komponenten, die zum Einbau in elektrische Anlagen oder Maschinen bestimmt sind. Sie sind keine Haushaltsgeräte, sondern als Komponenten aus-
schließlich für die Verwendung zur gewerblichen Nutzung bzw. professionellen Nutzung im Sinne der EN 61000-3-2 bestimmt. Die Dokumentation enthält Hinweise zur
Einhaltung der Grenzwerte nach EN 61000-3-2.
Bei Einbau der Antriebsregler in Maschinen ist die Inbetriebnahme (d. h. die Aufnahme des bestimmungsgemäßen Betriebs) solange untersagt, bis festgestellt wurde, daß
die Maschine den Bestimmungen der EG-Richtlinie 98/37/EG (Maschinenrichtlinie) entspricht; EN 60204 beachten.
Die Inbetriebnahme (d. h. die Aufnahme des bestimmungsgemäßen Betriebs) ist nur bei Einhaltung der EMV-Richtlinie (89/336/EWG) erlaubt.
Die Antriebsregler erfüllen die Anforderungen der Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG. Die harmonisierten Normen der Reihe EN 50178/DIN VDE 0160 werden für die
Antriebsregler angewendet.
Die technischen Daten und die Angaben zu Anschlußbedingungen entnehmen Sie dem Leistungsschild und der Dokumentation. Halten Sie sie unbedingt ein.
Warnung: Die Antriebsregler sind Produkte mit eingeschränkter Erhältlichkeit nach EN 61800-3. Diese Produkte können im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen. In
diesem Fall kann es für den Betreiber erforderlich sein, entsprechende Maßnahmen durchzuführen.
3. Transport, Einlagerung
Beachten Sie die Hinweise für Transport, Lagerung und sachgemäße Handhabung.
Halten Sie die klimatischen Bedingungen nach EN 50178 ein.
4. Aufstellung
Sie müssen die Antriebsregler nach den Vorschriften der zugehörigen Dokumentation aufstellen und kühlen.
Sorgen Sie für sorgfältige Handhabung und vermeiden Sie mechanische Überlastung. Verbiegen Sie bei Transport und Handhabung weder Bauelemente noch ändern Sie
Isolationsabstände. Berühren Sie keine elektronischen Bauelemente und Kontakte.
Antriebsregler enthalten elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauelemente, die Sie durch unsachgemäße Handhabung leicht beschädigen können. Beschädigen oder zerstören Sie
keine elektrischen Komponenten, da Sie dadurch Ihre Gesundheit gefährden können!
5. Elektrischer Anschluß
Beachten Sie bei Arbeiten an unter Spannung stehenden Antriebsreglern die geltenden nationalen Unfallverhütungsvorschriften (z. B. VBG 4).
Führen Sie die elektrische Installation nach den einschlägigen Vorschriften durch (z. B. Leitungsquerschnitte, Absicherungen, Schutzleiteranbindung). Zusätzliche Hinweise
enthält die Dokumentation.
Die Dokumentation enthält Hinweise für die EMV-gerechte Installation (Schirmung, Erdung, Anordnung von Filtern und Verlegung der Leitungen). Beachten Sie diese Hin-
weise ebenso bei CE-gekennzeichneten Antriebsreglern. Der Hersteller der Anlage oder Maschine ist verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der durch die EMV-Gesetzgebung
geforderten Grenzwerte.
6. Betrieb
Sie müssen Anlagen mit eingebauten Antriebsreglern ggf. mit zusätzlichen Überwachungs- und Schutzeinrichtungen gemäß den jeweils gültigen Sicherheitsbestimmungen
ausrüsten (z. B. Gesetz über technische Arbeitsmittel, Unfallverhütungsvorschriften). Sie dürfen die Antriebsregler an Ihre Anwendung anpassen. Beachten Sie dazu die
Hinweise in der Dokumentation.
Nachdem der Antriebsregler von der Versorgungsspannung getrennt ist, dürfen Sie spannungsführende Geräteteile und Leistungsanschlüsse nicht sofort berühren, weil
Kondensatoren aufgeladen sein können. Beachten Sie dazu die entsprechenden Hinweisschilder auf dem Antriebsregler.
Halten Sie während des Betriebs alle Schutzabdeckungen und Türen geschlossen.
Hinweis für UL-approbierte Anlagen mit eingebauten Antriebsreglern: UL warnings sind Hinweise, die nur für UL-Anlagen gelten. Die Dokumentation enthält spezielle
Hinweise zu UL.
7. Sicherer Halt
Die Variante V004 der Antriebsregler 9300 und 9300 vector, die Variante Bx4x der Antriebsregler 8200 vector und der Achsregler ECSXA064 unterstützten die Funktion
”Sicherer Halt”, Schutz gegen unerwarteten Anlauf, nach den Anforderungen von Anhang I Nr. 1.2.7 der EG-Richtlinie ”Maschinen” 98/37/EG, DIN EN 954-1 Kategorie 3
und DIN EN 1037. Beachten Sie unbedingt die Hinweise zur Funktion ”Sicherer Halt” in der Dokumentation zu den Varianten.
8. Wartung und Instandhaltung
Beachten Sie die Dokumentation des Herstellers.
Beachten Sie die produktspezifischen Sicherheits- und Anwendungshinweise in dieser Anleitung!

L EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 3
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Sicherheitshinweise
Lenze-Niederspannungsmaschinen

1.2 Allgemeine Sicherheits - und Anwendungshinweise für

Lenze-Niederspannungsmaschinen
(gemäß Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG)
1. Allgemein
Niederspannungsmaschinen haben gefährliche, spannungsführende und rotierende Teile sowie möglicherweise heiße Oberflächen. Alle Arbeiten zu Transport, Anschluß,
Inbetriebnahme und Instandhaltung sind von qualifiziertem, verantwortlichem Fachpersonal auszuführen (EN 50110-1 (VDE 0105-100); IEC 60364 beachten). Unsachgemä-
ßes Verhalten kann schwere Personen- und Sachschäden verursachen.
Bei Synchronmaschinen werden bei drehender Maschine auch an den offenen Klemmen Spannungen induziert.
2. Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Diese Niederspannungsmaschinen sind für gewerbliche Anlagen bestimmt. Sie entsprechen den harmonisierten Normen der Reihe EN 60034 (VDE O53O). Der Einsatz im
Ex-Bereich ist verboten, sofern nicht ausdrücklich hierfür vorgesehen (Zusatzhinweise beachten).
Schutzarten ≤ IP23 nicht ohne besondere Schutzmaßnahmen im Freien verwenden. Luftgekühlte Ausführungen sind für Umgebungstemperaturen von -15 °C bzw. -10 °C
bis +40 °C und Aufstellungshöhen ≤ 1000 m üNN bemessen, von -20 °C bis +40 °C ohne Bremse oder mit Federkraftbremse, unbelüftet oder mit Eigenlüfter, von -15 °C
bis +40 °C mit Permanentmagnetbremse und von -10 °C bis +40 °C mit Fremdlüfter. Abweichende Angaben auf dem Leistungsschild unbedingt beachten. Die Bedingun-
gen am Einsatzort müssen allen Leistungsschildangaben entsprechen.
Niederspannungsmaschinen sind Komponenten zum Einbau in Maschinen im Sinne der Maschinenrichtlinie 98/37/EG. Die Inbetriebnahme ist solange untersagt, bis die
Konformität des Endprodukts mit dieser Richtlinie festgestellt ist (u. a. EN 60204-1 beachten).
Die eingebauten Bremsen sind keine Sicherheitsbremsen. Es ist nicht auszuschließen, daß durch nicht zu beeinflussende Störfaktoren, z. B. Öleintritt durch Versagen des
A-seitigen Wellendichtrings, eine Drehmomentreduzierung auftreten kann.
3. Transport, Einlagerung
Nach der Auslieferung festgestellte Beschädigungen dem Transportunternehmen sofort mitteilen; die Inbetriebnahme ist ggf. auszuschließen. Eingeschraubte Transportö-
sen fest anziehen. Sie sind für das Gewicht der Niederspannungsmaschine ausgelegt, keine zusätzlichen Lasten anbringen. Wenn notwendig, ausreichend bemessene
Transportmittel (z. B. Seilführungen) verwenden.
VorhandeneTransportsicherungenvorInbetriebnahmeentfernen.FürweitereTransporteerneutverwenden.WerdenNiederspannungsmaschineneingelagert,aufeinetrok-
kene, staubfreie und schwingungsarme (veff ≤ 0.2 mm/s) Umgebung achten (Lagerstillstandsschäden). Vor Inbetriebnahme Isolationswiderstand messen. Bei Werten
≤ 1 kΩ je Volt Bemessungsspannung Wicklung trocknen.
4. Aufstellung
Auf plane Auflage, gute Fuß- bzw. Flanschbefestigung und genaue Ausrichtung bei direkter Kupplung achten. Aufbaubedingte Resonanzen mit der Drehfrequenz und der
doppelten Speisefrequenz vermeiden. Läufer von Hand drehen, auf ungewöhnliche Schleifgeräusche achten. Drehrichtung im ungekuppelten Zustand kontrollieren (Abschn.
5 beachten).
Riemenscheiben und Kupplungen nur mit geeigneten Vorrichtungen auf- bzw. abziehen (Erwärmen!) und mit einem Berührschutz abdecken. Unzulässige Riemenspannun-
gen vermeiden (Techn. Liste).
Die Maschinen sind mit halber Paßfeder gewuchtet. Die Kupplung muß ebenfalls mit halber Paßfeder gewuchtet sein. Überstehenden, sichtbaren Paßfederanteil abarbeiten.
Eventuell erforderliche Rohranschlüsse herstellen. Bauformen mit Wellenende nach oben bauseits mit einer Abdeckung ausrüsten, die verhindert, daß Fremdkörper in den
Lüfter hineinfallen. Die Belüftung darf nicht behindert werden und die Abluft - auch benachbarter Aggregate - nicht unmittelbar wieder angesaugt werden.
5. Elektrischer Anschluß
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal an der stillstehenden Niederspannungsmaschine im freigeschalteten und gegen Wiedereinschalten gesicherten
Zustand vorgenommen werden. Das gilt auch für Hilfsstromkreise (z. B. Bremse, Geber, Fremdlüfter).
Spannungsfreiheit prüfen!
Überschreiten der Toleranzen in EN 60034-1; IEC 34 (VDE 0530-1) - Spannung ±5 %, Frequenz ±2 %, Kurvenform, Symmetrie - erhöht die Erwärmung und beeinflußt
die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit.
Schaltungshinweise, Angaben auf dem Leistungsschild und Anschlußschema im Anschlußkasten beachten.
Der Anschluß muß so erfolgen, daß eine dauerhaft sichere, elektrische Verbindung aufrecht erhalten wird (keine abstehenden Drahtenden); zugeordnete Kabelendbestük-
kung verwenden. Sichere Schutzleiterverbindung herstellen. Steckverbinder bis zum Anschlag festschrauben.
Die kleinsten Luftabstände dürfen zwischen blanken, spannungsführenden Teilen und gegen Erde folgende Werte nicht unterschreiten: 8 mm bei UN ≤ 550 V, 10 mm bei
UN ≤ 725 V, 14 mm bei UN ≤ 1000 V.
Der Anschlußkasten muß frei sein von Fremdkörpern, Schmutz und Feuchtigkeit. Nicht benötigte Kabeleinführungsöffnungen und den Kasten selbst staub- und wasserdicht
verschließen. Für den Probebetrieb ohne Abtriebselemente Paßfeder sichern. Bei Niederspannungsmaschinen mit Bremse vor der Inbetriebnahme die einwandfreie Funk-
tion der Bremse prüfen.
6. Betrieb
Schwingstärken veff ≤ 3.5 mm/s (PN ≤ 15 kW) bzw. 4.5 mm/s (PN > 15 kW) sind in gekuppeltem Betrieb unbedenklich. Bei Veränderungen gegenüber dem Normalbetrieb,
z. B. erhöhte Temperaturen, Geräusche, Schwingungen, Ursache ermitteln, ggf. Rücksprache mit dem Hersteller. Im Zweifelsfall Niederspannungsmaschine abschalten.
Bei starkem Schmutzanfall Luftwege regelmäßig reinigen.
Schutzeinrichtungen auch im Probebetrieb nicht außer Funktion setzen.
Eingebaute Temperaturfühler sind kein Vollschutz der Maschine, ggf. Maximalstrom begrenzen. Funktionsblockverschaltung mit Abschaltung nach einigen Sekunden Be-
trieb mit I > IN vornehmen, insbesondere bei Gefahr des Blockierens.
Wellendichtringe und Wälzlager haben eine begrenzte Lebensdauer.
Lagerungen mit Nachschmiereinrichtung bei laufender Niederspannungsmaschine nachfetten. Verseifungsart beachten. Wenn Fettaustrittsbohrungen mit Stopfen ver-
schlossen sind (IP54 Abtriebsseite; IP23 Abtriebs-und Nichtabtriebsseite), vor Inbetriebnahme Stopfen entfernen. Bohrungen mit Fett verschließen. Lagerwechsel bei Dauer-
schmierung (2Z-Lager) nach ca. 10.000 h - 20.000 h, spätestens jedoch nach 3 - 4 Jahren bzw. nach Herstellerangaben.

4 EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 l
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Sicherheitshinweise
Restgefahren, Gestaltung der Sicherheitshinweise

1.3 Restgefahren
Personen- • Schalten Sie den motec spannungslos, bevor Sie Arbeiten daran durchführen oder das Gehäuse öffnen. Warten Sie mindestens 3 Minuten, da
schutz nach dem Netzabschalten die Leistungsklemmen U, V, W; BR0, BR1, BR2 und die Pins der Schnittstelle FIF gefährliche Spannung führen.
– Überprüfen Sie nach dem Öffnen des motec, ob die Leistungsklemmen L1, L2, L3; U, V, W; BR0, BR1, BR2, die Relaisausgänge K11, K12,
K14 und die Pins der Schnittstelle FIF spannungslos sind.
– Auch bei vom Netz getrenntem motec können die Relaisausgänge K11, K12, K14 gefährliche Spannung führen!
• Wenn Sie die nicht drahtbruchsichere Funktion “Drehrichtungsvorgabe” über das digitale Signal DCTRL1-CW/CCW verwenden
(C0007 = -0- ... -13-, C0410/3 ≠ 255):
– Bei Drahtbruch oder bei Ausfall der Steuerspannung kann der Antrieb die Drehrichtung wechseln.
• Wenn Sie die Funktion ”Fangschaltung” (C0142 = -2-, -3-) bei Maschinen mit geringem Massenträgheitsmoment und geringer Reibung ver-
wenden:
– Nach Reglerfreigabe im Stillstand kann der Motor kurzzeitig anlaufen oder kurzzeitig die Drehrichtung wechseln.
• Der Kühlkörper des motec hat eine Betriebstemperatur > 60 °C:
– Hautkontakt mit dem Kühlkörper führt zu Verbrennungen.
Geräteschutz • 8200 motec 3 ... 7,5 kW (E82MV302_4B, E82MV402_4B, E82MV552_4B, E82MV752_4B):
– Zyklisches Ein- und Ausschalten der Versorgungsspannung des Antriebsreglers an L1, L2, L3 kann die Eingangsstrombegrenzung überlasten
und zerstören!
– Bei zyklischem Netzschalten über einen längeren Zeitraum müssen zwischen zwei Einschaltvorgängen mindestens drei Minuten vergehen!
• Bei bestimmten Einstellungen der Antriebsregler kann der angeschlossene Motor überhitzt werden:
– Z. B. längerer Betrieb der Gleichstrombremse.
– Längerer Betrieb eigenbelüfteter Motoren bei kleinen Drehzahlen.
Überdrehzah- • Antriebe können gefährliche Überdrehzahlen erreichen (z. B. Einstellung hoher Ausgangsfrequenzen bei dafür ungeeigneten Motoren und Ma-
len schinen):
– Die Antriebsregler bieten keinen Schutz gegen solche Betriebsbedingungen. Setzen Sie dafür zusätzliche Komponenten ein.

1.4 Gestaltung der Sicherheitshinweise

Alle Sicherheitshinweise in dieser Anleitung sind einheitlich aufgebaut:

Signalwort (kennzeichnet die Schwere der Gefahr)

Hinweistext (beschreibt die Gefahr, gibt Hinweise, wie sie vermieden werden kann)

verwendete Piktogramme Signalwörter

Warnung vor Perso- Warnung vor gefährli- Gefahr! Warnt vor unmittelbar drohender Gefahr.
nenschäden cher elektrischer Folgen bei Mißachtung:
Spannung Tod oder schwerste Verletzungen
Warnung vor einer all- Warnung! Warnt vor einer möglichen, sehr gefährlichen Situation.
gemeinen Gefahr Mögliche Folgen bei Mißachtung:
Tod oder schwerste Verletzungen
Vorsicht! Warnt vor einer möglichen, gefährlichen Situation.
Mögliche Folgen bei Mißachtung:
leichte oder geringfügige Verletzungen
Warnung vor Sach- Stop! Warnt vor möglichen Sachschäden.
schäden Mögliche Folgen bei Mißachtung:
Beschädigung des Antriebsreglers/Antriebssystems oder seiner Umgebung
Sonstige Hinweise Tip! Kennzeichnet einen allgemeinen, nützlichen Tip.
Wenn Sie ihn befolgen, erleichtern Sie sich die Handhabung des Antriebs-
reglers/Antriebssystems.

l EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 5
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Parametrierung
Parametrieren mit dem Keypad

2 Parametrierung

2.1 Parametrieren mit dem Keypad

Das Keypad ist als Zubehör erhältlich. Die vollständige Beschreibung des Keypad finden Sie im Falt-
blatt, das jedem Keypad beiliegt.
0 Funktionstasten
1 Statusanzeigen
2 Bargraph-Anzeige
3 Funktionsleiste 1
4 Funktionsleiste 2
5 Parametersatz
6 Codenummer Änderung möglich, wenn
7 Subcodenummer Anzeige blinkt
8 Parameterwert mit Einheit

2.1.1 Menüstruktur
Alle Parameter, mit denen Sie den Antriebsregler parametrieren oder überwachen können, sind in
sogenannten Codes gespeichert, in den Menüs User und all. Die Codes sind numeriert 6 und im
Text mit einem ”C” gekennzeichnet. In einigen Codes sind die Parameter in numerierten “Subco-
des” 7 gespeichert, damit die Parametrierung übersichtlich bleibt (Beispiel: C0517 Menü User).
• Das Menü User
– ist aktiv nach jedem Netzschalten oder nach dem Aufstecken des Keypad während des
Betriebs.
– enthält werkseitig alle Codes, um eine Standardanwendung mit linearer
U/f-Kennliniensteuerung in Betrieb zu nehmen.
– können Sie in C0517 nach Ihren Wünschen zusammenstellen.
• Im Menü all
– sind alle Codes enthalten.
– sind die Codes numerisch aufsteigend sortiert.
• Wie Sie zwischen User und all wechseln und wie Sie die Parameter in den Codes ändern, ist
auf den nächsten Seiten beschrieben.

6 EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 L
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Parametrierung
Parametrieren mit dem Keypad

2.1.2 Das Menü User - Die 10 wichtigsten Antriebsparameter auf einen Blick
Nach jedem Netzschalten oder nach dem Aufstecken des Keypad während des Betriebs stehen so-
fort die 10 Codes zur Verfügung, die im Menü User (Code C0517) festgelegt wurden.
Werkseitig enthält das Menü User alle Codes, um eine Standardanwendung mit linearer U/f-Kennli-
niensteuerung in Betrieb zu nehmen:
Code Bezeichnung Lenze-Einstellung
C0050 Ausgangsfrequenz Anzeige: Ausgangsfrequenz ohne Schlupfkompensation
C0034 Bereich Sollwertvorgabe -0-
0 Standard-I/O X3/8: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA
X3/1U: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
Application-I/O
X3/2U: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
C0007 Feste Konfiguration digitale Eingänge -0-
0 E4 E3 E2 E1
CW/CCW DCB JOG2/3 JOG1/3
Rechtslauf/Linkslauf Gleichstrombremse Auswahl Festsollwerte
C0010 minimale Ausgangsfrequenz 0.00 Hz
C0011 maximale Ausgangsfrequenz 50.00 Hz
C0012 Hochlaufzeit Hauptsollwert 5.00 s
C0013 Ablaufzeit Hauptsollwert 5.00 s
C0015 U/f-Nennfrequenz 50.00 Hz
C0016 Umin-Anhebung abhängig von Umrichter-Typ
C0002 Parametersatz-Transfer/Lieferzustand her- siehe Codetabelle
stellen

Tip!
Über C0002 ”Parametersatz-Transfer/Lieferzustand herstellen” können Sie bequem Konfiguratio-
nen von Antriebsregler zu Antriebsregler transferieren oder wieder den Lieferzustand herstellen, in-
dem Sie die Lenze-Einstellung laden (z. B. wenn Sie beim Parametrieren ’den roten Faden’ verloren
haben).

L EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 7
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Parametrierung
Parametrieren mit dem Keypad

2.1.3 Wechsel zwischen den Menüs USEr und ALL

ALL
USEr
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS
‚m n op

Hi
Lo
q r

000
0988 000
Hz
1

‚m n op
0002 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 6 000
‚m n op

000
q r
d c b e a
~5 s d c b e aHz
Hi
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
001 5 000
‚m n op ‚m n op
001 0 000
000
q r

000
q r
z

vt
u s
Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz
d c b e a Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 y Lo
Œj g f k i h PS
0050 000
1 001 3 000
‚m n op

000
‚m n op q r

5 000
q r d
Hi c b e aHz
Hi Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 2 000
Hz
Lo ‚m n op

000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
0007 000
Œj Lo g f k i h PS
001 1 000
‚m n op ‚m n op

z 000
q r

000
q r
z
vt

vt
u s
u s

Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz

w x Œj Lo g f k i h PS
‚m n op
001 0 000
1 y Lo

y 000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0007 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0034 000 ‚m n op
0002 000
000 1
q r

000 1
q r

d c b e a
Hi Hz d c b e a Hi
Lo
Hz
Lo
Œj g f k i h PS Œj g f k i h PS
0001 000
z
0050 000
vt
u s

w x ‚m n op ‚m n op

000
q r

000
y q r
Hi Hz
Hi Hz
Lo Lo

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s
w x w x
y y

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s

w x w x
y y
z
vt
u s

w x
y

d c b e a d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
m n op
0050 000 m n op
0050 000
us e r AL L
q r q r
Hi Hz Hi Hz
Lo Lo
z
vt
u s

w x
y

8200vec075

2.1.4 Parameter in den Menüs ändern

Schritt Tastenfolge Display Bemerkung Beispiel

1. Regler sperren s dc Nur notwendig, wenn Sie Codes ändern wollen, die in der Codeta-
belle mit “[ ]” gekennzeichnet sind, z. B. [C0002].
Alle anderen Parameter können Sie während des Betriebs ändern.
2. Parameter ein- wx f C0012 ((Hochlaufzeit))
3. stellen z XXXX Code auswählen 0012 von 5.00 s auf 1.00 s
Für Codes ohne Subcodes: Sprung zu i (weiter mit 6.) verringern
4. x k
001
5. yz XXX Subcode auswählen
6. x i 5.00 s
7. yz XXXXX Parameter einstellen 1.00 s
8. v STOre Eintrag bestätigen, wenn p blinkt
w Eintrag bestätigen, wenn p nicht blinkt; v ist inaktiv
9. ”Schleife” wieder bei 2. beginnen, um weitere Parameter einzu-
stellen

8 EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 L
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Fehlersuche und Störungsbeseitigung

Fehlverhalten des Antriebs

3 Fehlersuche und Störungsbeseitigung

3.1 Fehlverhalten des Antriebs

Fehlverhalten Ursache Abhilfe
Motor dreht Zwischenkreisspannung zu niedrig Netzspannung prüfen
nicht (Rote LED blinkt im 0.4 s Takt;
Anzeige Keypad: LU)
Antriebsregler gesperrt Reglersperre aufheben, Reglersperre kann über mehrere Quel-
(Grüne LED blinkt, Anzeige Keypad: c) len gesetzt sein
Automatischer Start gesperrt (C0142 = 0 oder 2) LOW-HIGH-Flanke an X3/28
Evtl. Startbedingung (C0142) korrigieren
Gleichstrombremsung (DCB) aktiv Gleichstrombremse deaktivieren
Mechanische Motorbremse ist nicht gelöst Mechanische Motorbremse manuell oder elektrisch lösen
Quickstop (QSP) aktiv (Anzeige Keypad: c) Quickstop aufheben
Sollwert = 0 Sollwert vorgeben
JOG-Sollwert aktiviert und JOG-Frequenz = 0 JOG-Sollwert vorgeben (C0037 ... C0039)
Störung aktiv Störung beseitigen
Falscher Parametersatz aktiv Auf richtigen Parametersatz über Klemme umschalten
Betriebsart C0014 = -4-, -5- eingestellt, aber keine Motorparameter-Identifizie- Motorparameter identifizieren (C0148)
rung durchgeführt
Belegung mehrerer, sich ausschließender Funktionen mit einer Signalquelle in Konfiguration in C0410 korrigieren
C0410
Interne Spannungsquelle X3/20 verwendet bei den Funktionsmodulen Standard- Klemmen brücken
I/O, INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP oder LECOM-B (RS485):
Brücke zwischen X3/7 und X3/39 fehlt
Motor dreht unun- Motorleitung defekt Motorleitung prüfen
gleichmäßig Maximalstrom zu gering eingestellt (C0022, C0023) Einstellungen an die Anwendung anpassen
Motor unter- bzw. übererregt Parametrierung kontrollieren (C0015, C0016, C0014)
C0084, C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091 und/oder C0092 nicht an die Manuell anpassen oder Motorparameter identifizieren (C0148)
Motordaten angepaßt
Motor nimmt Einstellung von C0016 zu groß gewählt Einstellung korrigieren
zuviel Strom auf Einstellung von C0015 zu klein gewählt Einstellung korrigieren
C0084, C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091 und/oder C0092 nicht an die Manuell anpassen oder Motorparameter identifizieren (C0148)
Motordaten angepaßt
Motor dreht, Mit der Funktion j des Keypad wurde ein Sollwert vorgegeben Sollwert auf ”0” setzen mit C0140 = 0
Sollwerte sind
“0”
Motorparame- Motor ist zu klein im Verhältnis zur Geräte-Nennleistung
ter Identifizie
ter-Identifizie-
rung bricht ab Gleichstrombremse (DCB) über Klemme aktiv
mit Fehler LP1
Antriebsverhal- verschiedene Vector-Regelung optimieren
ten bei Vector-
Regelung nicht
zufriedenstel-
lend

L EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 9
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Fehlersuche und Störungsbeseitigung

Störungsmeldungen

3.2 LED’s am Antriebsregler (Betriebszustandsanzeigen)

LED Betriebszustand
grün rot
ein aus Antriebsregler freigegeben
ein ein Netz eingeschaltet und automatischer Start gesperrt
blinkt aus Antriebsregler gesperrt
aus blinkt im 1-Sekunden-Takt Störung aktiv, Kontrolle in C0161
aus blinkt im 0,4-Sekunden-Takt Unterspannungsabschaltung
blinkt aus Motorparameter-Identifizierung wird durchgeführt
schnell

3.3 Störungsmeldungen am Keypad oder im Parametrierprogramm

Global Drive Control
Anzeige Störung Ursache Abhilfe
Key- PC
pad 1)

noer 0 keine Störung - -

ccr 71 Systemstörung
y g starke Störeinkopplungen auf Steuerleitungen Steuerleitung abgeschirmt verlegen
a Masse- oder Erdschleifen in der Verdrahtung
ce0 61 Kommunikationsfehler an AIF Übertragung von Steuerbefehlen über AIF ist gestört Kommunikationsmodul fest in das Handterminal stecken
a
ce1 62 Kommunikationsfehler an CAN- CAN-IN1-Objekt empfängt fehlerhafte Daten oder • Steckverbindung Busmodul ó FIF prüfen
a IN1 bei Sync-Steuerung Kommunikation ist unterbrochen • Sender überprüfen
• evtl. Überwachungszeit in C0357/1 erhöhen
ce2 63 Kommunikationsfehler an CAN- CAN-IN2-Objekt empfängt fehlerhafte Daten oder • Steckverbindung Busmodul ó FIF prüfen
a IN2 Kommunikation ist unterbrochen • Sender überprüfen
• evtl. Überwachungszeit in C0357/2 erhöhen
ce3 64 Kommunikationsfehler an CAN- CAN-IN1-Objekt empfängt fehlerhafte Daten oder • Steckverbindung Busmodul ó FIF prüfen
a IN1 bei Ereignis- bzw. Kommunikation ist unterbrochen • Sender überprüfen
Zeitsteuerung • evtl. Überwachungszeit in C0357/3 erhöhen
ce4 65 BUS-OFF Antriebsregler hat zu viele fehlerhafte Telegramme • Prüfen, ob Busabschluß vorhanden
a (viele Kommunikationsfehler über Systembus empfangen und sich vom Bus abge- • Schirmauflage der Leitungen prüfen
aufgetreten) koppelt • PE-Anbindung prüfen
• Busbelastung prüfen, ggf. Baud-Rate reduzieren
ce5 66 CAN Time-Out Bei Fernparametrierung über Systembus (C0370): • Verdrahtung des Systembus prüfen
a Slave antwortet nicht. Kommunikations-Überwa- • Systembus-Konfiguration prüfen
chungszeit überschritten
Bei Betrieb mit Modul auf FIF: Rücksprache mit Lenze erforderlich
Interner Fehler
ce6 67 Funktionsmodul Systembus CAN Controller meldet Zustand ”Warnung” oder • Prüfen, ob Busabschluß vorhanden
a (CAN) auf FIF ist im Zustand ”BUS-OFF” • Schirmauflage der Leitungen prüfen
”Warnung” oder ”BUS-OFF” • PE-Anbindung prüfen
(wird nur generiert, wenn C0128 • Busbelastung prüfen, ggf. Baud-Rate reduzieren
= 1)
EEr 91 Externe Störung (TRIP-SET) Ein mit der Funktion TRIP-Set belegtes digitales Si- Externen Geber überprüfen
a gnal ist aktiviert
H05 105 Interne Störung Rücksprache mit Lenze erforderlich
a
id1 140 Fehlerhafte Parameter-Identifi- Motor nicht angeschlossen Motor anschließen
a zierung
LP1 32 Fehler in Motorphase • Ausfall einer/mehrerer Motorphasen • Motorzuleitungen prüfen
a (Wird nur generiert, wenn • Zu geringer Motorstrom • Umin-Anhebung prüfen,
C0597 = 1) • Motor
oto mitt eentsprechender
tsp ec e de Leistung
e stu g aanschließen
sc e e odeoder mitt
LP1 182 Fehler in Motorphase C
C0599 Motor anpassen
(Wird nur generiert, wenn
C0597 = 2)

10 EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 l
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Fehlersuche und Störungsbeseitigung

Störungsmeldungen

Anzeige Störung Ursache Abhilfe

Key- PC
pad 1)

LU 103 Zwischenkreis-Unterspannung
p g Netzspannung zu niedrig Netzspannung prüfen
c 0 Spannung im DC-Verbund zu niedrig Versorgungsmodul prüfen
400 V-Antriebsregler an 240 V-Netz angeschlossen Antriebsregler an richtige Netzspannung anschließen
OC1 11 Kurzschluß Kurzschluß • Kurzschlußursache suchen; Motorleitung prüfen
a • Bremswiderstand prüfen
Kapazitiver Ladestrom der Motorleitung zu hoch Kürzere/kapazitätsärmere Motorleitung verwenden
OC2 12 Erdschluß Eine Motorphase hat Erdkontakt Motor überprüfen; Motorleitung prüfen
a Kapazitiver Ladestrom der Motorleitung zu hoch Kürzere/kapazitätsärmere Motorleitung verwenden
Erdschlußerkennung kann zu Prüfzwecken deaktiviert
werden
OC3 13 Überlast Antriebsregler im Zu kurz eingestellte Hochlaufzeit (C0012) • Hochlaufzeit verlängern
a Hochlauf oder Kurzschluß • Antriebsauslegung prüfen
Defekte Motorleitung Verdrahtung überprüfen
Windungsschluß im Motor Motor überprüfen
OC4 14 Überlast Antriebsregler im Ab- Zu kurz eingestellte Ablaufzeit (C0013) • Ablaufzeit verlängern
a lauf • Auslegung des externen Bremswiderstands prüfen
OC5 15 Überlast Antriebsregler im sta- Häufige und zu lange Überlast Antriebsauslegung prüfen
a tionären Betrieb
OC6 16 Überlast Motor ((I2 x t - Überlast)) Motor thermisch überlastet durch z. B.
a • unzulässigen Dauerstrom • Antriebsauslegung prüfen
• häufige oder zu lange Beschleunigungsvorgänge • Einstellung von C0120 prüfen
OH 50 Kühlkörpertemperatur > +85 °C Umgebungstemperatur Tu > +60 °C • Antriebsregler abkühlen lassen und für eine bessere
a Belüftung sorgen
• Umgebungstemperatur überprüfen
OH - Kühlkörpertemperatur
p p > +80 °C Kühlkörper stark verschmutzt Kühlkörper reinigen
e Unzulässig hohe Ströme oder häufige und zu lange • Antriebsauslegung überprüfen
Beschleunigungsvorgänge • Last überprüfen, ggf. schwergängige, defekte Lager
auswechseln
OH3 53 PTC-Überwachung (TRIP) Motor zu warm durch unzulässig hohe Ströme oder Antriebsauslegung prüfen
a ((wird nur ggeneriert,, wenn häufige und zu lange Beschleunigungsvorgänge
C0119 = 1 oder
d 4) Kein PTC angeschlossen PTC anschließen oder Überwachung abschalten
OH4 54 Übertemperatur Antriebsregler Innenraum des Antriebsreglers zu warm • Belastung des Antriebsreglers senken
a • Kühlung verbessern
• Lüfter im Antriebsregler prüfen
OH51 203 PTC-Überwachung Motor zu warm durch unzulässig hohe Ströme oder Antriebsauslegung prüfen
((wird nur ggeneriert,, wenn häufige und zu lange Beschleunigungsvorgänge
C0119 = 2 oder
d 5)) Kein PTC angeschlossen PTC anschließen oder Überwachung abschalten
OU 102 Zwischenkreis-Überspannung
p g Netzspannung zu hoch Versorgungsspannung kontrollieren
c 0 Bremsbetrieb • Ablaufzeiten verlängern.
• Bei Betrieb mit externem Bremswiderstand:
– Dimensionierung, Anschluß und Zuleitung des Brems-
widerstands prüfen
– Ablaufzeiten verlängern
Schleichender Erdschluß auf der Motorseite Motorzuleitung und Motor auf Erdschluß prüfen (Motor vom
Umrichter trennen)
Pr 75 Parameter-Übertragung mit dem Alle Parametersätze sind defekt Vor Reglerfreigabe unbedingt den Datentransfer wiederho-
a Keypad fehlerhaft len oder die Lenze-Einstellung laden
Pr1 72 PAR1 mit dem Keypad falsch PAR1 ist defekt
a übertragen
Pr2 73 PAR2 mit dem Keypad falsch PAR2 ist defekt
a übertragen
Pr3 77 PAR3 mit dem Keypad falsch PAR3 ist defekt
a übertragen
Pr4 78 PAR4 mit dem Keypad falsch PAR4 ist defekt
a übertragen

l EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 11
Lesezeichen ein-/ausblenden

Fehlersuche und Störungsbeseitigung

Störungsmeldungen

Anzeige Störung Ursache Abhilfe

Key- PC
pad 1)

Pr5 79 Interne Störung Rücksprache mit Lenze erforderlich

a
Pt5 81 Zeitfehler bei Parametersatz- Datenfluß vom Keypad oder vom PC unterbrochen, z. Vor Reglerfreigabe unbedingt den Datentransfer wiederho-
a Transfer B. Keypad wurde während der Datenübertragung len oder Lenze-Einstellung laden.
abgezogen
rSt 76 Fehler bei Auto-TRIP-Reset Mehr als 8 Fehlermeldungen in 10 Minuten Abhängig von der Fehlermeldung
a
sd5 85 Drahtbruch am Analogeingang Strom am Analogeingang < 4 mA Stromkreis am Analogeingang schließen
a (Sollwertbereich 4 ... 20 mA)

1) LECOM-Fehlernummer

12 EDK82MVXXX DE 1.0 l
Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDB82MV752
!N|õ

Ä!N|õä Operating Instructions

Global Drive
8200 motec frequency
inverters
0.25 kW ... 7.5 kW
Show/Hide Bookmarks

This documentation applies to 8200 motec inverters as of version

E82MV xxx _ x B001 XX Vx 1x

Type

Power
(e. g. 152 = 15 × 102 W = 1.5 kW)
(e. g. 113 = 11 × 103 W = 11 kW)

Voltage class
2 = 240 V
4 = 400 V/500 V

Hardware version

Software version

Please observe:
o Application
pp o I/O Frequency inverter 8200 motec
The application
pp I/O is compatible
p up to E82MV ... Vx04 as of E82MV ... Vx11
with the following software
version of the 8200 motec
E82 ... XXVB01 ü —
frequency inverter: E82 ... XXVC10 — ü

If 8200 motec frequency inverters are used together with Lenze motors of the series MDXMA or Lenze geared
motors of the G-motion programme these Instructions only apply together with the Instructions for the
corresponding motors or geared motors.
In the event of service, please state the type. The functin module used can be identified either with the keypad,
PC or the nameplate attached to the carrier housing. In addition, every function module is unambiguously identified
by a label (e. g. “STANDARD” for standard I/O).

What is new / what has changed ?

Material No. Edition Important Contents

00402783 1.0 07/98 TD00 1st edition First edition for preseries
00404604 2.0 11/98 TD00 2nd edition Complete editorial revision
Replaces 402783 All chapters: Revised
00422543 3.0 09/01 TD02 3rd edition Extended by frequency inverter: 0.25 kW/0.37 kW,
Replaces 404604 Extended by frequency inverter: 3 kW ... 7.5 kW,
Chapter 3 “Technical data”: Extended by 0.25/0.37 kW
Chapter 3 “Technical data”: Extended by 3 ... 7.5 kW
Chapter 5 “Commissioning”: Step by step commissioning
Chapter 12 “Accessories”: Additional accessories and update
All chapters have been updated, corrected and revised.
00459196 4.0 11/02 TD01 4th edition Change of company name
Replaces 422543

E 2002 Lenze Drive Systems GmbH

No part of this documentation may be reproduced or made accessible to third parties without written consent by Lenze Drive Systems GmbH.
All indications given in these Operating instructions have been selected carefully and comply with the hardware and software described. Nevertheless,
deviations cannot be ruled out. We do not take any responsibility or liability for damages which might possibly occur. We will include necessary corrections
in subsequent editions.

Version 4.0 11/2002

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

1 Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 The 8200 motec frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 About these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 General safety and and application notes for Lenze low-voltage machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 General data/application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Rated data for a mains voltage of 230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.1 Operation with rated power (normal operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2 Operation with increased rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Rated data for a mains voltage of 400/500 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.1 Operation with rated power (normal operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2 Operation with increased rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1.2 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1.3 Mains types/mains conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1.4 Operation at a public mains (EN 61000-3-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1.5 Operation with e.l.c.bs (earth-leakage circuit breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.1.6 Interactions with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.1.7 Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Installation according to EMC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2.3 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2.4 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2.5 Radio interference suppression according to EN 55011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.3 Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.4 Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.4.1 Mounting/dismounting of I/O function momodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.4.2 Terminal assignment - Standard I/O E82ZAFS001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.4.3 Terminal assignment - Application I/O E82ZAFA001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.4.4 Wiring - Bus function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 i
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Parameter setting using the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 The menu User - The 10 most important drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.3 Change between the menus USEr and ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.4 Parameter change in menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Selection of the correct control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Commissioning - V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Commissioning without function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.2 Commissioning with standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5 Commissioning - vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5.1 Commissioning without function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5.2 Commissioning with standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.3 Vector control optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

6 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Parameter setting with the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 General data/application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Installation/commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.3 Displays and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.4 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.5 Changing and storing parameters with the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.6 Change of parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.7 Remote parameter setting for system bus devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.8 Change entries in the user menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.9 Activation of password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3 Parameter setting using the communication module LECOM-A (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.1 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.1.1 General data/application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.1.2 Communication times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.2 Wiring to the host (PC or PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3.2.1 Notes for precut PC system cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3.2.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.3 Parameter setting with LECOM-A (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.4 Addition codes for LECOM-A (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.5 Error detection and elimination - LECOM-A (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

ii EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

7 Function library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 V/f characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.2.1 V/f rated frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.2.2 Vmin boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 Running optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.3.1 Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.3.2 Chopper frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.3.3 Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.3.4 Skip frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.1.4 Behaviour in the event of mains switching, mains failure or controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.4.1 Start conditions/flying-restart circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.4.2 Controlled deceleration after mains failure/mains switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.4.3 Controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2 Limit value setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.1 Speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.2 Current limit values (Imax limit values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.3 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.3.1 Acceleration and deceleration times, S-ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.3.2 Quick stop (QSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.3 Change of direction of rotation (CW/CCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.4 Braking without brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3.4.1 DC-injection brake (DCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3.4.2 AC-motor braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.4 Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.4.1 Setpoint source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.4.2 Analog setpoints via terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.4.3 Digital setpoints via frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.4.4 Setpoints via function ”Motor potentiometer” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.4.5 Setpoints via JOG frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4.6 Setpoints via keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.4.7 Setpoints via a bus system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.4.8 Setpoint changeover (manual/remote changeover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.5 Motor data entry/automatic detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.6 Process controller, current limitation controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.6.1 PID controller as process controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.6.1.1 Setpoint selection for the process controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.6.1.2 Actual value selection for the process controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.6.1.3 Integral action component switch-off (PCTRL1-I-OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.6.1.4 Process controller switch-off (PCTRL1-OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.6.1.5 Process controller stop (PCTRL1-STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.6.2 Current limitation controller (Imax controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 iii

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

7.7 Free connection of analog signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7.7.1 Free configuration of analog input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.7.2 Free configuration of analog output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7.7.2.1 Configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7.7.2.2 Free configuration of analog process data output words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.8 Free connection of digital signals, message output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.8.1 Free configuration of digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.8.2 Free configuration of digital output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.8.2.1 Configuration digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.8.2.2 Free configuration of digital process data output words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.9 Thermal motor monitoring, error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.9.1 Thermal motor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.9.1.1 I2 x t monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.9.1.2 PTC motor monitoring/earth fault detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.9.2 Error detection (DCTRL1-TRIP-SET/DCTRL1-TRIP-RESET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.10 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.10.1 Display of operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.10.1.1 Display values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.10.1.2 Display value calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.10.2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.11 Parameter set management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.11.1 Parameter set transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.11.2 Parameter set changeover (PAR, PAR2/4, PAR3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.12 Individual grouping of drive parameters - The menu USEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Operating status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Error analysis with history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Maloperation of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3 Error messages at the keypad or in the parameter setting program Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.4 Error message reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

iv EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

9 Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Function module system bus (CAN) E82ZAFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2.1 General data and application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2.2 Communication times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3.1 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3.2 Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.4 Commissioning with function module system bus (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.1.5 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.5.1 Parameter channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.5.2 Process data channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.5.3 Parameter addressing (code/index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.5.4 Configuration of the system bus network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.6 Communication profile of the system bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.6.1 Data description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.6.2 Controller addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.6.3 The three communication phases of a CAN network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.1.6.4 Parameter data structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.6.5 Process data structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.2 Automation with the function modules INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, LECOM-B (RS485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

10 DC-bus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11 Braking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 Braking operation without additional measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Braking operation with three-phase AC brake motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.3 Braking operation with external brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3.1 Number of brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3.2 Rated data for the integrated brake transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3.3 Rated data for Lenze brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

12 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.3 Type-specific accessories - mains voltage 230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.4 Type-specific accessories - mains voltage 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 v
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

13 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 Pressure regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Operation with medium-frequency motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3 Dancer position control (line drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.4 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.5 Group drive (operation with several motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.6 Sequential circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.7 Setpoint summation (basic and additional load operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.8 Power control (torque limitation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Signal flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1.1 Controller with standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1.1 Overview over signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1.2 Process controller and setpoint processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.1.1.3 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.1.2 Controller with application I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.1.2.1 Overview over signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.1.2.2 Process controller and setpoint processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.1.2.3 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.2 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3 Attribute table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
14.3.1 Attribute table for controllers with standard I/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
14.3.2 Attribute table for controllers with application I/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46

15 Table of keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

vi EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1 Preface and general information

1.1 The 8200 motec frequency inverter

Decentralised drive solutions require a flexible combination of motor/geared motor and frequency
inverter.
The concept of the 8200 motec frequency inverter is therefore based on a modular system of
matching components. Together with a Lenze geared motor or a Lenze three-phase AC motor the
8200 motec is a highly functional electronic variable speed drive.
As compact drives they can be used for adjusting speeds in different application, such as material
handling, HVAC technology, automation, etc. A free combination of input and output signals and
parallel operation of two interfaces ensure an individual solution for your drive task.
The 8200 motec frequency inverter is directly mounted onto the motor. Wall mounting of the 8200
motec is also possible.

1.2 About these Operating Instructions ...

• These Operating Instructions are intended for all persons who install, set-up and adjust the 8200
motec frequency inverter.
• A chapter informs entirely about a subject:
– You therefore only have to read the chapters you are interested in at the moment.
– The Index helps you to find all information about a certain topic.
• These Instructions are meant as addition to the Mounting Instructions which are part of the
delivery package:
– The features and funtions are described in detail.
– Examples describe how to set the parameters for typical applications.
– In case of doubt, the Mounting Instructions delivered together with the 8200 motec
frequency inverter apply.
• The Mounting Instructions do not inform about the use together with Lenze geared motors
and Lenze motors. The most important data are listed on the nameplates. If necessary,
Operating Instructions can always be ordered from Lenze.

1.3 Terminology used

Term In the following text used for
Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter or DC controller
motec Frequency inverter 8200 motec
Drive 8200 motec in combination with a geared motor, a three-phase AC motor and other Lenze drive components
AIF AutomationInterF ace: Interface for a communication module. Accessible from the outside at the heatsink of the motec.
FIF F unctionInterF ace: Interface for a function module. Is inside the motec.
Cxxxx/y Subcode y of code Cxxxx (e.g. C0517/3 = subcode 3 of code C0517)
Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e. g. X3/28 = terminal 28 on terminal strip X3)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 1-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.4 Legal regulations

Labellingg Nameplate CE-identification Manufacturer
Lenze controllers are unambiguously Conforms to the EC Low Voltage Directive Lenze Drive Systems GmbH
designated by the contents of the nameplate. Postfach 10 13 52
D-31763 Hameln
Application as 8200 motec frequency inverter and accessories
directed • must only be operated under the conditions prescribed in these Operating Instructions.
• are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with asynchronous standard motors, reluctance motors, PM synchronous
motors with asynchronous damping cage.
– for installation into a machine
– used for assembly together with other components to form a machine.
• comply with the requirements of the EC Low-Voltage Directive.
• are not machines for the purpose of the EC Machinery Directive.
• are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.
Drives with 8200 motec frequency inverters
• meet the EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive if they are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.
• can be used
– for operation on public and non-public mains
– for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
• The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!
Liability • The information, data, and notes in these instructions met the state of the art at the time of printing. Claims referring to drive systems
which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information, illustrations, and descriptions given in these Operating
Instructions.
• The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these instructions are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific
application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit proposals.
• The specifications in these Instructions describe the product features without guaranteeing them.
• Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference caused by:
– disregarding the operating instructions
– unauthorized modifications to the controller
– operating errors
– improper working on and with the controller
Warranty • Warranty conditions: see Sales and Delivery Conditions of Lenze Drive Systems GmbH.
• Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the deficiency or fault.
• The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
Disposal
p Material recycle dispose
Metal D -
Plastic D -
Assembled PCBs - D

1-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information
Lenze controllers

2 Safety information

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

(according to Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
Lenze controllers (frequency inverters, servo inverter, DC controllers) can carry a voltage or parts of the controllers can rotate during operation. Surfaces can be hot.
If the required cover is removed, the controllers are used inappropriately or installed or operated incorrectly, severe damage to persons or material assets can occur.
For more information please see the documentation.
All operations concerning transport, installation, and commissioning as well as maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled personnel (IEC 364 and CENELEC HD
384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national regulations for the prevention of accidents must be observed).
According to this basic safety information qualified, skilled personnel are persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation, commissioning, and operation of the
product and who have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
2. Intended use
Drive controllers are components which are designed for the installation into electrical systems or machinery. They are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only
for industrial purposes according to EN 61000-3-2. The documentation contains information about the compliance of the limit values to EN 61000-3-2.
When installing controllers into machines, commissioning of the drive controllers (i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine
corresponds to the regulations of the EC Directive 98/37/EG (Machinery Directive); EN 60204 (VDE 0113) must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only allowed when there is compliance with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC).
The drive controllers meet the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC. The harmonised standards EN 50178/DIN VDE 0160 apply to the controllers.
The technical data as well as the connection conditions can be obtained from the nameplate and the documentation. The instructions given must be strictly observed.
Warning: Controllers are products with restricted availability according to EN 61800-3. These products can cause interferences in residential premises. If controllers are
used in residential premises, corresponding measures are required.
3. Transport, storage
The notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be observed.
Climatic conditions according to EN 50178 apply.
4. Installation
The controllers must be installed and cooled according to the regulations given in the corresponding Instructions.
Ensure careful handling and avoid mechanical overload. Do not bend any components and do not change the insulation distances during transport and storage. Electronic
components and contacts must not be touched.
Controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components which can easily be damaged by inappropriate handling. Do not damage or destroy any electrical components
since this could mean hazards for your health!
5. Electrical connection
When working on live controllers, the valid national regulations for the prevention of accidents (e. g. VBG 4) must be observed.
The electrical installation must be carried out in compliance with the corresponding regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE connection). Additional notes and
information can be obtained from the corresponding Instructions.
The Instructions contain notes concerning wiring according to EMC regulations (shielding, earthing, filters and cable routing). These notes must also be observed when
using CE-marked controllers. The compliance with limit values required by the EMC legislation is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the machine or system.
6. Operation
If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional monitoring and protection devices according to the applying safety regulations (e.g. regulation
for technical equipment, regulation for the prevention of accidents). The controller can be adapted to your application. Please observe the corresponding information given
in the Instructions.
After a controller has been disconnected from the voltage supply, all live components and power connections must not be touched immediately because capacitors can
still be charged. Please observe the corresponding stickers on the controller.
All protection covers and doors must be shut during operation.
Note for UL-approved systems with integrated controllers: UL warnings are notes which only apply to UL systems. The Instructions give UL-related information.
7. Safe standstill
The variant V004 of 9300 and 9300 vector, and the variant Bx4x of 8200 vector controllers support the function ”Safe standstill”, protection against unexpected start,
according to the requirements of Annex I No. 1.2.7 of the EC Directive ”Machinery” 98/37/EG, DIN EN 954-1 category 3 and DIN EN 1037. Please observe the notes on
the function ”Safe standstill” given in the corresponding Instructions.
8. Maintenance and service
Please observe the Instructions given by the manufacturer.
Please observe the product-specific safety and application notes in these Instructions.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 2-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information
Lenze low-voltage machinery

2.2 General safety and and application notes for Lenze low-voltage
machinery
(in conformity with the Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
Low-voltage machines have dangerous, live and rotating parts as well as possibly hot surfaces. All operations serving transport, connection, commissioning and
maintenance are to be carried out by skilled, responsible technical personnel (observe EN 50110-1 (VDE 0105-100); IEC 60364). Improper handling can cause severe injuries
or damages.
Synchronous machines induce voltages at open terminals during operation.
2. Application as directed
These low-voltage machines are intended for industrial and commercial installations. They comply with the harmonized standards of the series EN 60034 (VDE O53O).
Their use in hazardous areas is prohibited unless they are expressly intended for such use (follow additional instructions).
The enclosures ≤ IP23 are by no means intended for outdoor use. Air-cooled designs are rated for ambient temperatures between -15 °C and -10 °C and +40 °C and altitudes
≤ 1000 m a.m.s.l., from -20 °C to +40 °C without brake or with spring-operated brake, with separate ventilation or self ventilation, from -15 °C to +40 °C with permanent
magnet brake and from -10 °C to +40 °C with separate fan. Check indications on the nameplate and if they are different, observe them. The conditions on site must
correspond to all nameplate data.
Low-voltage machines are components for the installation into machines as defined in the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Commissioning is prohibited until the conformity
of the end product with this Directive has been established (follow a.o. EN 60204-1).
The integrated brakes cannot be used as safety brakes. It cannot be ruled out that factors which cannot be influenced, such as oil ingression because of a defective A-side
shaft seal, cause a torque reduction.
3. Transport, storage
The forwarder must be informed directly after receipt of the goods about all damages or deficiencies; if necessary, commissioning must be stopped. Tighten screwed-in
ring bolts before transport. They are designed for the weight of the low-voltage machine, do not apply extra loads. If necessary, use suitable and adequately dimensioned
means of transport (e.g. rope guides).
Remove the shipping brace before commissioning. Reuse it for further transports. For storage of low-voltage machines ensure a dry, dust-free and low-vibration
(vrms ≤ 0.2 mm/s) environment (danger of bearing damage at rest). Measure the insulation resistance before commissioning. If the values are ≤ 1 kΩ per volt of rated
voltage, dry the winding.
4. Installation
Ensure an even surface, solid foot or flange mounting and exact alignment if a direct clutch is connected. Avoid resonances with the rotational frequency and double mains
frequency which may be caused by the assembly. Turn rotor by hand, listen for unusual slipping noises. Check the direction of rotation when the clutch is not active (observe
section 5).
Use appropriate tools to mount or remove belt pulleys and clutches (heat generation!) and cover them with a touch guard. Impermissible belt tensions must be avoided
(technical list).
The machines are half-key balanced. The clutch must be half-key balanced, too. The visibly protruding part of the key must be removed.
If required, provide pipe connections. Mounting positions with shaft end at top must be protected with a cover which avoids the ingression of foreign particles into the fan.
Free circulation of the cooling air must be ensured. The exhaust air - also the exhaust air of other machines next to the drive system - must not be immediately taken in
again.
5. Electrical connection
All operations must be carried out only by qualified and skilled personnel when the low-voltage machine is at standstill and when the machine is de-energized and protected
against unintentional restart. This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. brake, encoder, separate fan).
Check safe isolation from the supply!
If the tolerances in EN 60034-1; IEC 34 (VDE 0530-1) - voltage ±5 %, frequency ±2 %, waveform, symmetry - are exceeded, more heat will be generated and the
electromagnetic compatibility will be influenced.
Observe the indications on the nameplate, operating notes, and the connection diagram in the terminal box.
The connection must ensure a continuous and safe electrical supply (no loose wire ends); use appropriate cable terminals. The connection to the PE conductor must be
safe. The plug-in connector must be screwed up tightly (to stop).
The clearances between bare, live parts and earth must not fall below: 8 mm at Vrated ≤ 550 V, 10 mm at Vrated ≤ 725 V, 14 mm at Vrated ≤ 1000 V.
The terminal box must be clean and dry; foreign particles, dirt and moisture affect operation. All unused cable entries and the box itself must be sealed against dust and
water. For the trial run without output elements, lock the key. Check brake operation before the commissioning of low-voltage machines with brakes.
6. Operation
Vibration severities vrms ≤ 3.5 mm/s (Prated ≤ 15 kW) or 4.5 mm/s (Prated > 15 kW) are acceptable when the clutch is activated. If deviations from normal operation occur,
e.g. increased temperature, noise, vibration, find the cause and, if necessary, contact the manufacturer. Switch-off the machine in problematic situations.
If the drive is exposed to dirt, clean it regularly.
Do not switch-off the protection devices, not even for trial runs.
Integrated temperature sensors do not provide full protection. If necessary, limit the maximum current. Connect the function blocks to the option switch-off after several
seconds of operation at I > Irated, especially if blocking may occur.
Shaft seals and bearings have a limited service life.
Regrease the bearings using the relubrication facility while the low-voltage machine is running. Observe the saponification number. If the grease drain hole is sealed with
a plug (IP54 drive end; IP23 drive end and non-drive end), remove the plug before commissioning. Seal the bore holes with grease. Replace the prelubricated bearings
(2Z-bearings) after approx. 10.000 h - 20.000 h, at the latest however after 3 - 4 years. Observe the manufacturer’s instructions.

2-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information
Residual hazards, Layout of the safety instructions

2.3 Residual hazards

Protection of • Disconnect the controller before you start working on it/open it and wait for at least 3 minutes since the power terminals U, V, W; BR0, BR1,
persons BR2 and pins of the FIF interface remain live for this time.
– After you have opened the motec check whether the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W; BR0, BR1, BR2, relay outputs K11, K12, K14 and
pins of the FIF interface are not live any more.
– Even if the controller is disconnected from the mains, the relay outputs K11, K12, K14 can carry dangerous voltage!
• If you use the not open-circuit protected function “Selection of direction of rotation” via the digital signal DCTRL1-CW/CCW
(C0007 = -0- ... -13-, C0410/3 ≠ 255):
– In the event of an open circuit or failure of the control voltage, the drive can change its direction of rotation.
• If you use the function ”Flying-restart circuit” (C0142 = -2-, -3-) with machines with a low moment of inertia and a minimum friction:
– After controller enable in standstill, the motor can start for a short time or change its direction of rotation for a short time.
• The motec heatsink temperature is > 60 °C:
– Direct skin contact with the heatsink results in burnings.
Controller • 8200 motec 3 ... 7.5 kW (E82MV302_4B, E82MV402_4B, E82MV552_4B, E82MV752_4B):
protection – Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage with L1, L2, L3 can exceed and destroy the input current limiter!
– Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection!
• Depending on the controller settings, the connected motor can be overheated:
– For instance, longer DC-braking operations.
– Longer operation of self-ventilated motors at low speed.
Overspeeds • Drives can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting of inappropriately high field frequencies):
– The controllers do not offer any protection against these operating conditions. For this, use additional components.

2.4 Layout of the safety information

All safety information given in these Operating Instructions has the same layout:

Signal word (characterises the severity of danger)

Note (describes the danger and gives information how to avoid it)

Icons used Signal words

Warning of danger Warning of hazardous Danger! Warns of impending danger.
to persons electrical voltage Consequences if disregarded:
Death or most severe injuries
Warning of a general Warning! Warns of potential, very hazardous situations.
danger Possible consequences if disregarded:
Death or most severe injuries
Caution! Warns of potential, hazardous situations.
Possible consequences if disregarded:
Light or minor injuries
Warning of damage Stop! Warns of potential damage to material.
to material Possible consequences if disregarded:
Damage of the controller/drive system or its environment
More information Tip! Designates a general, useful note.
If you observe it, handling of the controller/drive system is made easier.

l ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 2-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information
Residual hazards, Layout of the safety instructions

2-4 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM l

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
General data / application conditions

3 Technical data

3.1 General data/ application conditions

Standards and application conditions
Conformity CE Low-Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
EMC Directive (93/68/EEC)
Approvals UL 508C Underwriter Laboratories (File-No. E132659)
Power Conversion Equipment
Vibration resistance Acceleration resistant up to 2g (Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions)
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN 50178 (without condensation, average relative humidity 85 %)
Degree of pollution VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2
Packaging (DIN 4180) Dust packaging
Permissible temperature
p range
g Transport -25 °C...+70 °C
Storage -25 °C...+60 °C
Operation -20 °C...+60 °C
reduce the rated output current by 2.5%/°C above +40 °C
Permissible installation height 0 ... 4000 m amsl
above 1000 m amsl the rated output current is to be reduced by 5 %/1000 m
Mounting positions Any mouning position is possible
Free space
p above 100 mm
to the sides 100 mm
DC group drives not possible

Mechanical design
Housing Carrier housing: glas-fibre reinforced plastic, heatsink: aluminium-cast iron
Cable E82MV251K2B, E82MV371K2B 4 x M20/ 2 x M16 (thread length 10 mm, without counter nut)
connections
i E82MV551K4B, E82MV751K4B 2 x M25/ 4 x M16 (thread length 10 mm, without counter nut)
1 x M20 for motor cable used for wall mounting (EMC cable connector, thread length 10 mm, with counter nut)
E82MV152K4B, E82MV222K4B 2 x M25/1 x M20/4 x M16 (thread length 10 mm, without counter nut)
1 x M20 for motor cable used for wall mounting (EMC cable connector, thread length 10 mm, with counter nut)
E82MV302K4B, E82MV402K4B, 3 x M25/4 x M16 (thread length 10 mm, without counter nut)
E82MV552K4B, E82MV752K4B

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 3-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
General data / application conditions

General technical data

EMC Compliance with EN 61800-3/A11
Noise emission Motor mounting Compliance with limit value classes A and B to EN 55011
Wall mounting Compliance with limit value class A to EN 55011
(up to 10 m shielded motor cable)
Compliance with limit value class B to EN 55011
(up to 1 m shielded motor cable)
Noise immunityy Requirement to EN 61800-3 incl. A11
Requirements Standard Severities
ESD EN 61000-4-2 3, i.e. 8 kV with air discharge,
6 kV with contact discharge
high frequency in cables EN 61000-4-6 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1kHz)
RF interference (enclosure) EN 61000-4-3 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1kHz)
Burst EN 61000-4-4 3/4, i. e. 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge EN 61000-4-5 3, d. h. 1.2/50 µs,
(Surge on mains cable) 1 kV phase-phase, 2 kV phase-PE
Insulation strength Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
Discharge current to PE (to EN 50178) > 3.5 mA
Type of protection IP55/IP65
Protection measure against Short circuit, earth fault (earth-fault protected during operation, limited earth-fault protection during power up),
motor stalling, motor overtemperature (input for PTC or thermal contact, I 2t monitoring)
Insulation of control circuits Safe mains disconnection:
Double/reinforced insulation to EN 50178
Operation in public supply networks Total power connected to the mains Compliance with the requirements 1)
((Limitation of harmonic currents accordingg 0.25 kW ... 1 kW With mains choke
to EN 61000-3-2) > 1 kW without additional measures

1) The additional measures described only ensure that the controllers meet the requirements of the EN 61000-3-2. The machine/system
manufacturer is responsible for the compliance with the regulations of the machine!

3-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
General data / application conditions

Control
Control types V/f characteristic control (linear/square-law), vector control, troque selection
Chopper frequency 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 16 kHz optional
Torque
q Maximum torque 1.8 x Mr for 60s if rated motor power = rated controller power
characteristic
h i i Setting range 1 : 10 over the speed range of 3 ... 50 Hz, accuracy < 8 %
Torque-speed
characteristic M/MN

2.0

1.8

1.0

500 1000 1500 n [min-1]

Sensorless speed Minimum output 1.0 Hz (0 ... Mr)
control frequency
Setting range 1 : 50 Ref. to 50 Hz and Mr
Accuracy ± 0.5 %
over the speed range 3 ... 50 Hz
Smooth running ± 0.1 Hz
Output
p frequency
q y Field - 480 Hz ... + 480 Hz
Absolute resolution 0.02 Hz
Normalised resolution Parameter data: 0.01 %, process data: 0.006 % (= 214)
Digital setpoint Accuracy ± 0.005 Hz (= ±100 ppm)
selection
Analogg setpoint
p Linearity ± 0.5 % Signal level: 5 V or 10 V
selection Temperature + 0.3 % 0 ... 60 °C
sensitivity
Offset ±0%

Inputs and outputs

Analog with standard I/O 1 input, optionally bipolar
p p
inputs/outputs 1 output
with application I/O 2 inputs, optionally bipolar
2 outputs
Digital with standard I/O 4 inputs, optionally 1 frequency input single-track 0 ... 10 kHz; 1 input for controller inhibit
p p
inputs/outputs 1 output
with application I/O 6 inputs, optionally 1 frequency input single track/two tracks 0 ... 100 kHz; 1 input for controller inhibit
2 outputs, 1 frequency output 50 Hz ... 10 kHz
Cycle
y times Digital inputs 1 msec
Digital outputs 4 ms
Analog inputs 2 msec
Analog outputs 4 ms (smoothing time: τ = 10 ms)
Relay output Converter, AC 250 V/3 A, DC 24 V/2 A ... 240 V/0,22 A
Operation in generator mode Integrated brake transistor
(internally monitored) External brake resistors: (^ 11-3)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 3-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 230 V mains voltage

3.2 Rated data for a mains voltage of 230 V

3.2.1 Operation with rated power (normal operation)

Motor power Pr [kW] 0.25 0.37
Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 0.34 0.5
8200 motec Type E82MV251_2B
E82MV251 2B E82MV371 2B
E82MV371_2B
Mains voltage VUmainsi [V] 1/N/PE AC 180 V - 0 % ... 264 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 1/N/PE AC 230 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 3.4 5.0
Output power U,
U V,
V W Sr88 [kVA] 00.68
68 10
1.0
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper
h frequency
f IN24 [A] 2) 20
2.0 29
2.9
4 kHz
8 kHz Ir8 [A] 1.7 2.4
16 kHz Ir16 [A] 1.1 1.6
Max. permissible
p output
p 2 kHz
current for
f 60 s at Imax24 [A] 25
2.5 36
3.6
4 kHz
chopper frequency 1)
8 kHz Imax8 [A] 2.5 3.6
16 kHz Imax16 [A] 1.6 1.4
Output voltage VUM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with Ir8) Pv [W] 30 40
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 190 x 138 x 100
Weight m [kg] 1.8 1.8
Printed in bold = Data for operation at 8 kHz copper frequency (Lenze setting)
1) Currents for periodic load change: 1 min overcurrent with I
max and 2 min basic load with 75 % Irx
2) With different application conditions for other types possible: Operation with increased rated output current and the same load change
(^ 3-5)

Fuses and cable cross-sections

8200 motec Normal operation
Installation to EN 60204-1 Installation to UL 1)
Type Mains Fuse E.l.c.b. L1, L2, L3, PE Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE FI
[kW] [mm2] [AWG]
E82MV251_2B 0.25 1/N/PE AC M10 A C10 A 1.0 10 A 18
180 ... 264 V; ≥ 30 mA 2)
E82MV371_2B 0.37 45 ... 65 Hz M10 A C10 A 1.5 10 A 16

1) Use UL-approved cables, fuses and fuse holders only.

UL fuse: 240 V voltage, tripping characteristic ”H” or ”K5”
2) Pulse-current or universal-current sensitive earth leakage circuit breaker

Observe national and regional regulations (e. g. VDE 0113, EN 60204)

3-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 230 V mains voltage

3.2.2 Operation with increased rated power

Under the application conditions described here the controller can be operated in continuous
operation with a motor of higher performance. The overload capacity is reduced to 120 % .
• Typical applications:
– Pums with square-law load characteristic
– Fans
• Operation permitted only
– in the mains voltage areas stated
– with 2 or 4 kHz chopper frequency
– with the fuses and cable cross-sections prescribed
Motor power Pr [kW] 0.37 0.55
Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 0.5 0.75
8200 motec Type E82MV251_2B
E82MV251 2B E82MV371 2B
E82MV371_2B
Mains voltage VUmains [V] 1/N/PE AC 180 V - 0 % ... 264 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 1/N/PE AC 230 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 4.1 6.0
Output power U, V, W SN24 [kVA] 0.8 1.2
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper
h frequency
f IN24 [A] 20
2.0 29
2.9
4 kHz
Max. permissible output 2 kHz
current for 60 s at Imax24 [A] 25
2.5 36
3.6
chopper frequency 1) 4 kHz
Output voltage VUM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with IN24) Pv [W] 30 40
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 190 x 138 x 100
Weight m [kg] 1.8 1.8
1) Currents for periodic load change: 1 min overcurrent with Imax and 2 min basic load with 75 % Irx

Fuses and cable cross-sections

8200 motec Operation with increased rated power
Installation to EN 60204-1 Installation to UL 1)
Type Mains Fuse E.l.c.b. L1, L2, L3, PE Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE FI
[kW] [mm2] [AWG]
E82MV251_2B 0.37 1/N/PE AC M10 A C10 A 1.0 10 A 18
180 ... 264 V; ≥ 30 mA 2)
E82MV371_2B 0.55 45 ... 65 Hz M10 A C10 A 1.5 10 A 16

1) Use UL-approved cables, fuses and fuse holders only.

UL fuse: 240 V voltage, tripping characteristic ”H” or ”K5”
2) Pulse-current or universal-current sensitive earth leakage circuit breaker

Observe national and regional regulations (e. g. VDE 0113, EN 60204)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 3-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 400/500 V mains voltage

3.3 Rated data for a mains voltage of 400/500 V

3.3.1 Operation with rated power (normal operation)

Motor power Pr [kW] 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2

Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 0.75 1.0 2.0 3.0
8200 motec Type E82MV551_4B
E82MV551 4B E82MV751 4B
E82MV751_4B E82MV152 4B
E82MV152_4B E82MV222 4B
E82MV222_4B
Mains voltage Umains [V] 3/PE AC 320 V - 0 % ... 550 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 3/PE AC 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 1.8 1.4 2,4 1.9 3.8 3.0 5.5 4.5
Output power U, V, W Sr8 [kVA] 1.3 1.7 2.7 3.9
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper frequency
f Ir24 [A] 2) 21
2.1 18
1.8 29
2.9 24
2,4 46
4.6 39
3.9 67
6.7 56
5.6
4 kHz
8 kHz Ir8 [A] 1.8 1.6 2,4 2.1 3.9 3.5 5.6 5.0
16 kHz Ir16 [A] 1.2 1.1 1.6 1.4 2.5 2.3 3.6 3.2
Max. permissible
p output
p 2 kHz
current for
f 60 s at Imax24 [A] 27
2.7 24
2,4 36
3.6 32
3.2 58
5.8 52
5.2 84
8.4 76
7.6
4 kHz
chopper frequency 1)
8 kHz Imax8 [A] 2.7 2,4 3.6 3.2 5.8 5.2 8.4 7.6
16 kHz Imax16 [A] 1.8 1.6 2.4 2.1 3.9 3.5 5.3 4.8
Output voltage VM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with Ir8) Ploss [W] 35 45 70 95
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 202 x 156 x 151 230 x 176 x 167
Weight m [kg] 2.8 2.8 4.1 4.1

Motor power Pr [kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5

Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 4.1 5.4 7.5 10.2
8200 motec Type E82MV302_4B
E82MV302 4B E82MV402 4B
E82MV402_4B E82MV552 4B
E82MV552_4B E82MV752 4B
E82MV752_4B
Mains voltage Umains [V] 3/PE AC 320 V - 0 % ... 550 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 3/PE AC 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 9.5 7.6 12,3 9.8 16.8 13.4 21.5 17.2
Output power U, V, W Sr8 [kVA] 5.1 6.6 9.0 11.4
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper
h frequency
f Ir24 [A] 2) 88
8.8 70
7.0 11 4
11.4 92
9.2 15 6
15.6 12 5
12.5 16 5
16.5 13 2
13.2
4 kHz
8 kHz Ir8 [A] 7.3 5.8 9.5 7.6 13.0 10.4 16.5 13.2
16 kHz Ir16 [A] 4.7 4.2 6.1 5.5 8.4 7.6 10.7 9.6
Max. permissible
p output
p 2 kHz
current for
f 60 s at Imax24 [A] 11 0
11.0 87
8.7 14 2
14.2 11 4
11.4 19 5
19.5 15 6
15.6 24 8
24.8 19 8
19.8
4 kHz
chopper frequency 1)
8 kHz Imax8 [A] 11.0 8.7 14.2 11.4 19.5 15.6 24.8 19.8
16 kHz Imax16 [A] 7.1 6.4 9.1 8.2 12.7 11.4 16.1 14.5
Output voltage VM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with Ir8) Ploss [W] 140 180 230 290
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 325 x 211 x 163 (223**)
Weight m [kg] 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7

Printed in bold = Data for operation at 8 kHz copper frequency (Lenze setting)
1) Currents for periodic load change: 1 min overcurrent with Imax and 2 min basic load with 75 % Irx
2) With different application conditions for other types possible: Operation with increased rated output current and the same load change
(^ 3-8)
** For wall mounting or with additional module (E82ZMV)

3-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 400/500 V mains voltage

Fuses and cable cross-sections

8200 motec Normal operation
Installation to EN 60204-1 Installation to UL 1)
Type Mains Fuse E.l.c.b. L1, L2, L3, PE Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE FI
[kW] [mm2] [AWG]
E82MV551_4B 0.55 M6 A B6 A 1 5A 18
E82MV751_4B 0.75 M6 A B6 A 1 5A 18
E82MV152_4B 1.5 M6 A B6 A 1 5A 18
3/PE AC
E82MV222_4B 2.2 M10 A B10 A 1.5 10 A 16
320 ... 550 V; ≥ 300 mA 2)
E82MV302_4B 3.0 M16 A B16 A 2.5 15 A 14
45 ... 65 Hz
E82MV402_4B 4.0 M20 A B20 A 4.0 20 A 12
E82MV552_4B 5.5 M25 A B25 A 4.0 25 A 10
E82MV752_4B 7.5 M32 A B32 A 6.0 35 A 8

1) Use UL-approved cables, fuses and fuse holders only.

UL fuse: 500 ... 600 V voltage, tripping characteristic ”H” or ”K5”
2) All-current sensitive e.l.c.b.

Observe national and regional regulations (e. g. VDE 0113, EN 60204)

Current reduction
Depending on the application conditions and the use of the 8200 motec, it can be necessary to
reduce the rated output current of the types E82MV302_4B to EMV752_4B in continuous operation.
8200 motec mounted at... Current reduction
...Lenze motor/geared motor - forced ventilation not required
...Lenze motor/geared motor - self ventilation see figure below
...Lenze motor/geared motor (self ventilated) with additional module E82ZMV not required
...not Lenze motor/geared motor Þ additional module E82ZMV always required not required
...the wall (wall mounting) Þ additional module E82ZMV always required not required

I/IN

0,9
B
_4
02
0,8
MV3
2
E8 B
0,7 _4
02
V4
2M
0,6 E8 B
_4
52
V5
B

0,5 2M
_4

E8
52
V7
2M

0,4
E8

0,3

0,2

0,1

10 20 30 40 50 f [Hz]

Fig. 3-1 Reduction of rated output current in continuous operation at 40°C ambient temperature and a chopper frequency of 4 kHz
and at 35°C and 8 kHz
I Reduced output current - 8200 motec
Ir Rated output current - 8200 motec at chopper frequency 4 kHz or 8 kHz
f Output frequency 8200 motec [Hz]

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 3-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 400/500 V mains voltage

3.3.2 Operation with increased rated power

Under the application conditions described here the controller can be operated in continuous
operation with a motor of higher performance. The overload capacity is reduced to 120 % .
• Typical applications:
– Pums with square-law load characteristic
– Fans
• Operation permitted only
– in the mains voltage areas stated
– with 2 or 4 kHz chopper frequency
– with the fuses and cable cross-sections prescribed
Motor power Pr [kW] 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0
Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 1.0 1.5 3.0 4.0
8200 motec Type E82MV551_4B
E82MV551 4B E82MV751 4B
E82MV751_4B E82MV152_4B
E82MV152 4B E82MV222 4B
E82MV222_4B
Mains voltage Umains [V] 3/PE AC 320 V - 0 % ... 440 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 3/PE AC 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 2.2 2.8 4.6 6.6
Output power U, V, W Sr24 [kVA] 1.5 2.0 3.2 4.6
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper
h frequency
f Ir24 [A] 21
2.1 29
2.9 46
4.6 67
6.7
4 kHz
Max. permissible output 2 kHz
current for 60 s at Imax24 [A] 27
2.7 36
3.6 58
5.8 84
8.4
chopper frequency 1) 4 kHz
Output voltage UM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with Ir8) Ploss [W] 35 45 70 95
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 202 x 156 x 151 230 x 176 x 167
Weight m [kg] 2.8 2.8 4.1 4.1

Motor power Pr [kW] 4 5.5 7.5

Three phase AC asynchronous
Three-phase
motor (4 pole) Pr [hp] 5.4 7.5 10.2
8200 motec Type E82MV302_4B
E82MV302 4B E82MV402 4B
E82MV402_4B E82MV552 4B
E82MV552_4B
Mains voltage Umains [V] 3/PE AC 320 V - 0 % ... 440 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65Hz + 0 %
Data for operation with 3/PE AC 400 V 400 V 400 V
Rated mains current Imains [A] 11.4 14.8 20.2
Output power U, V, W Sr24 [kVA] 6.0 7.9 10.8
Rated output
p current at 2 kHz
chopper
h frequency
f Ir24 [A] 88
8.8 11 4
11.4 15 6
15.6
4 kHz
Max. permissible output 2 kHz
current for 60 s at Imax24 [A] 11 0
11.0 14 2
14.2 19 5
19.5
chopper frequency 1) 4 kHz
Output voltage UM [V] 3~ 0 ... V mains / 0 ... 480 Hz
Power loss (operation with Ir8) Ploss [W] 140 180 230
Dimensions L x W x H [mm] 325 x 211 x 163 (223**)
Weight m [kg] 9.7 9.7 9.7

Printed in bold = Data for operation at 8 kHz copper frequency (Lenze setting)
1) Currents for periodic load change: 1 min overcurrent with I
max and 2 min basic load with 75 % Irx
** For wall mounting or with additional module (E82ZMV)

3-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 400/500 V mains voltage

Fuses and cable cross-sections

8200 motec Operation with increased rated power
Installation to EN 60204-1 Installation to UL 1)
Type Mains Fuse E.l.c.b. L1, L2, L3, PE Fuse L1, L2, L3, PE FI
[kW] [mm2] [AWG]
E82MV551_4B 0.75 M6 A B6 A 1 5A 18
E82MV751_4B 1.1 M6 A B6 A 1 5A 18
E82MV152_4B 2.2 3/PE AC M10 A B10 A 1.5 10 A 16
E82MV222_4B 3.0 320 ... 440 V; M10 A B10 A 1.5 10 A 16 ≥ 300 mA 2)
E82MV302_4B 4.0 45 ... 65 Hz M16 A B16 A 2.5 15 A 14
E82MV402_4B 5.5 M20 A B20 A 4.0 20 A 12
E82MV552_4B 7.5 M32 A B32 A 6.0 25 A 10

1) Use UL-approved cables, fuses and fuse holders only.

UL fuse: 500 ... 600 V, tripping characteristic ”H” or ”K5”
2) All-current sensitive e.l.c.b.

Observe national and regional regulations (e. g. VDE 0113, EN 60204)

Current reduction
Depending on the application conditions and the use of the 8200 motec, it can be necessary to
reduce the rated output current of the types E82MV302_4B to EMV552_4B in continuous operation.
8200 motec mounted at... Current reduction
...Lenze motor/geared motor - forced ventilation not required
...Lenze motor/geared motor - self ventilation see figure below
...Lenze motor/geared motor (self ventilated) with additional module E82ZMV not required
...not Lenze motor/geared motor Þ additional module E82ZMV always required not required
...the wall (wall mounting) Þ additional module E82ZMV always required not required

I/IN

0,9
4B
2_
0,8 V 30
2M
E8 B
0,7 _4
02
V4
2M
0,6 E8 B
_4
52
V5
0,5 2M
E8
0,4

0,3

0,2

0,1

10 20 30 40 50 f [Hz]

Fig. 3-2 Reduction of rated output current in continuous operation at 40°C ambient temperature and a chopper frequency of 4 kHz
I Reduced output current - 8200 motec
Ir Rated output current - 8200 motec at chopper frequency 4 kHz
f Output frequency 8200 motec [Hz]

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 3-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical data
Rated data at 400/500 V mains voltage

3-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Mechanical installation - Important notes

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical installation

4.1.1 Important notes

• The 8200 motec frequency inverter can be used in all operating positions.
• Free space:
– Allow a free space of 100 mm above and below the inverter.
– Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air.

Tip!
The installation of compact drives, mechanical motor mounting or wall mounting is described in the
corresponding Mounting Instructions.

4.1.2 Mechanical design

Type Cable connections Weight
E82MV251_2B
_ 4 M20
E82MV371_2B 2 M16 (thread length 10 mm,
mm without counter nut) 1.8
1 8 kg

E82MV551_4B
_ 2 M25
E82MV751_4B 4 M16 (thread length 10 mm,
mm without counter nut)
2 8 kg
2.8
1 M20 for motor cable used for wall mounting (EMC cable connection)
(thread length 10 mm, with counter nut)
E82MV152_4B
_ 1 M20
E82MV222_4B 2 M25 (thread length 10 mm, without counter nut)
4 M16 4.1 kgg
1 M20 for motor cable used for wall mounting (EMC cable connection)
(thread length 10 mm, with counter nut)
E82MV302_4B
E82MV402_4B 3 M25
(thread length 10 mm,
mm without counter nut) 9.7
9 7 kg
E82MV552_4B 4 M16
E82MV752_4B

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Mechanical installation - Dimensions

4.1.3 Dimensions

8200mot001

Fig. 4-1 Dimensions 0.25 ... 2.2 kW

a [mm] b [mm] c [mm] d [mm] [mm] f [mm]

E82MV251_2B
138 100 90 190 7 12
E82MV371_2B
E82EV551_4B
156 151 135 202 15 26
E82EV751_4B
E82EV152_4B
176 167 151 230 15 26
E82EV222_4B

82mot443

Fig. 4-2 Dimensions 3 ... 7.5 kW

Type a [mm] b [mm] c [mm] d [mm] [mm]

E82MV302_4B
E82MV402_4B
211 163 (223**) 148 325 15
E82MV552_4B
E82MV752_4B

** for wall mounting or with fan module (type E82ZMV, dimensions L x W x H [mm]: 325 x 211 x 60), see also Instructions enclosed in the fan
module.

4-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Important notes

4.2 Electrical installation

4.2.1 Important notes

Stop!
The controller does not contain any electrostatically dangerous components!
Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of electrostatic charge.

4.2.1.1 Protection of persons

Danger!
Before working on the controller check that no voltage is applied to the power terminals, the relay
output and the pins of the FIF interface.
• because the power terminals U, V, W, BR0, BR1, BR2 and the pins of the FIF interface
remain live for at least 3 minutes after mains switch-off.
• because the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W und BR0, BR1, BR2 and the pins of the FIF
interface remain live when the motor is stopped.
• because the relay outputs K11, K12, K14 can remain live when the controller is disconnected
from the mains.

Use of e.l.c.bs (^ 4-5)

Pluggable terminal strips

All pluggable connection terminals must only be connected or disconnected when no voltage is
applied!

Replace defective fuses

Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied.

Disconnect controller from the mains

Make a safety connection/disconnection between the controller and the mains only via a contactor
on the input side.

4.2.1.2 Motor protection

• Almost entire protection against overload:
– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring
– We recommend PTC thermistors or thermal contacts to monitor the motor temperature.
(Lenze three-phase AC motors are all equipped with thermal contacts (NC contacts)
– PTCs or thermal contacts can be connected to the controller.
• Only use motors with an insulation suitable for inverter operation:
– Insulation resistance: min. û = 1,5 kV, min. dv/dt = 5 kV/ms
– Lenze-three-phase AC motors are designed for inverter operation.
– If you want to use motors with an unknown insulation resistance, please contact your motor
supplier.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Important notes

4.2.1.3 Mains types/ mains conditions

Please observe the restrictions of each mains type!
mains Operation of the controllers Notes
with earthed neutral No restrictions Observe controller ratings
(TT/TN mains)
with insulated neutral Possible, if the controller is protected in the event of an earth fault in the In the event of an earth fault at the
(IT mains) mains supply inverter output, safe operation
• by suitable equipment for detecting an earth fault and cannot be guaranteed.
• the controller is disconnected directly from the mains

4.2.1.4 Operation at a public mains (EN 61000-3-2)

The European Standard EN 61000-3-2 stipulates limit values for harmonic currents. Non-linear
consumption (e.g. by frequency inverters) causes harmonic currents which ’interfere’ the supplying
mains. The standard helps to ensure the high quality of public mains systems and reduce mains
load.

Tip!
The standard only applies to public mains systems. Mains systems which have their own
transformer station as common in industry are not public. The standard does not apply to them.
If a machine or system consists of several components, the limit values apply to the entire machine
or system.

If you observe all measures stated, the controllers do not exceed the limit values according to EN
61000-3-2. The machine/system manufacturer is responsible for the compliance with the
regulations of the machine:
Connection voltage Power Measure
8200 motec [V] [kW]
E82MV251_2B 0.25
1/N/PE AC 230 V Use mains choke type ELN1-0900H005
ELN1 0900H005
E82MV371_2B 0.37
E82MV551_4B 0.55
3/PE AC 400 V Use mains choke type EZN3A1500H003
E82MV751_4B 0.75

4-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Important notes

4.2.1.5 Operation with e.l.c.bs (earth-leakage circuit breakers)

Danger!
The controllers are equipped with an internal mains rectifier. In the event of a short-circuit to frame,
a DC fault current can prevent the activation of the AC-sensitive or pulse-current sensitive ELCB
and thus block the protective function for all electrical equipment operated on this ELCB.

• We recommend the following to protect persons and animals (DIN VDE 0100):
– Pulse-current sensitive e.l.c.bs in machines where controllers are connected to a
single-phase mains (L1/N).
– All-current sensitive e.l.c.bs in machines where controllers are connected to a three-phase
mains (L1/L2/L3).
• E.l.c.bs must only be installed between mains supply and controller.
• E.l.c.bs can be activated although not wanted by
– capacitive leakage currents of the cable shields during operation (especially with long,
shielded motor cables),
– simultaneous connection of several controllers to the mains supply,
– use of additional RFI filters.
• The speciations for e.l.c.bs given in the chapter ”Technical data” apply to low-capacity and
shielded motor cables (rough value).

4.2.1.6 Interactions with compensation equipment

• Controllers only consume a very small fundamental reactive power from the AC mains.
A compensation is therefore not necessary.
• If you operate the controllers at a mains with compensation equipment, the compensation
equipment must be equipped with chokes.
– Please consult the supplier of the compensation equipment.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Important notes

4.2.1.7 Cable specifications

Power connections
• The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the application (e.g. UL).
• Use low-capacity motor cables. Capacitance per unit length:
– Core/core ≤ 75 pF/m
– Core/shield ≤ 150 pF/m
• Max. permissible motor cable length without additional measures.
– unshielded: 10 m
– shielded: 10 m

Control connection
• Control cables must always be shielded to avoid interference.

Shielded cables
The efficiency of shielded cables is determined by
• a good shield connection
– a contact surface as large as possible
• a low resistance:
– Only use screens with tin-plated or nickel-plated copper braids!
– Shields of steel braid are not suitable.
• For the overlapping degree of the shield braid:
– Min. 70 to 80 % with overlapping angle of 90°.

4-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Installation according to EMC requirements

4.2.2 Installation according to EMC requirements

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of a machine depends on the type of installation and care
taken.
If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will operate without any
EMC problems caused by the drive system.

4.2.2.1 Assembly
• Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.
• Do not use the same terminal strip for mains input and motor output.
• Cable guides as close as possible to the reference potential. Unguided cables have the same
effect as aerials.

4.2.2.2 Filters
• Only use RFI filters and main chokes assigned to the devices:
– RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a permissible value.
– Mains chokes reduce the r.m.s. current consumption of the inverter at the mains.

4.2.2.3 Shielding
• Use shielded, low-capacity motor cables. Capacitance per unit length:
– Core/core ≤ 75 pF/m
– Core/shield ≤ 150 pF/m
• Connect the shield to the shield plates in the motec with a surface as large as possible.
• Connect the shield with PE in the motor terminal box:
– Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a good connection of the shield and the
motor housing.
• If you use a brake resistor:
– Connect the shield of the brake resistor cable to the mounting plate with a surface as large
as possible.
• Shield the control cables:
– Connect both shield ends of the control cables.

4.2.2.4 Earthing
• Earth all components (controller, RFI filter, motor filter, mains choke) using suitable cables
connected to a central point (PE).
• Do not exceed the defined minimum cross-sections:
– For EMC the cable surface and the contact are important, i.e. use large cross-sections
(surfaces).

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 4-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Installation according to EMC requirements

4.2.2.5 Radio interference suppression according to EN 55011

Internal switching processes in controllers cause interferences which can impair the functionality of
other devices.
The EN 55011 stipulates limit values for interferences depending on the application site.
Limit value class A The limit value class is often required for industrial mains systems which are separated from mains
systems in residential areas.
Limit value class B If frequency inverters are operated in residential areas, other devices can be interfered (e.g. radios,
(comprises limit value class A) television sets). These applications often require limit value class B, EN 55011. The values are much
lower than for limit value class A.

The RFI filters are integrated into the 8200 motec.

Maximum permissible motor cable length
Limit value class A B
8200 motec mains Power
E82MVxxx_2B 230 V 0.25 ... 0,37 kW
10 m 1m
E82MVxxx_4B 400 V 0.55 ... 7.5 kW

4-8 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

4.2.3 Power connections

See the corresponding Mounting Instructions

4.2.4 Control connections

The basic controller version is not equipped with control terminals. The controllers can be equipped
with control terminals by using different I/O function module for the FIF interface.

4.2.4.1 Mounting/ dismounting of I/ O function momodules

See the corresponding Mounting Instructions

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

4.2.4.2 Terminal assignment - Standard I/ O E82ZAFS001

Stop!
Shield control cables to avoid interferences!

Internal voltage supply X3/20 (+20 V DC, max. 40 mA) External voltage supply + 24 V DC
(+12 V DC - 0 % ... +30 V DC + 0 %, max. 120 mA)

STANDARD S GND2 GND2

GND1 GND1 GND1 GND1

+5V +20V +5V +20V

X3 62 7 8 9 7 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39 A1 59 X3 62 7 8 9 7 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39 A1 59

AOUT1 AIN1 DIGOUT1 AOUT1 AIN1 DIGOUT1

7 8 9 7 8 9

0 … +5 V
0 … +5 V

ON
_ +
1k … 10k
1k … 10k
24 V ext.
12345
(+12 V DC - 0 %
...
+30 V DC + 0 %,
max. 120 mA)
62 7 8 9 7 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39 A1 59

Min. wiring required for operation

Screw terminal data

Max. cable cross-sections Tightening torques
rigid flexible

1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) 1.0 mm2 (AWG 18)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)
(4.4 .. 5.3 lb-in)
lb in)
0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)

Configuration of analog signals via DIP switch

Signal
g to X3/8 Switch position C0034
1 2 3 4 5
0 ... +5 V OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 0
0 ... +10 V (Lenze setting) OFF OFF ON OFF ON 0
0 ... 20 mA OFF OFF ON ON OFF 0
4 ... 20 mA OFF OFF ON ON OFF 1
4 ... 20 mA Open-circuit monitoring OFF OFF ON ON OFF 3
-10 V ... +10 V ON ON OFF OFF OFF 2

Tip!
• DIP switch and C0034 must be set for the same range, otherwise the controller cannot
interprete the analog signal to X3/8 correctly.
• If a setpoint potentiometer is internally supplied through X3/9, the DIP switch must be set for
a voltage range of 0 ... 5 V. Otherwise not the whole speed range can be provided.

4-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

Terminal assignment
X3 Signal type Function (bold = Lenze setting) level Technical data
8 Analog input Act. or setpoint input 0 ... +5 V Resolution: 10 bit
(Use DIP switch and C0034 to change the 0 ... +10 V Linearity error: ±0.5 %
range!) -10 V ... +10 V 1) Temperature error: 0.3 % (0 ... +60°C)
0 ... +20 mA Input resistance:
+4 ... +20 mA • Voltage signal: > 50 kê
+4 ... +20 mA (open-circuit • Current signal: 250 ê
monitored)
62 Analog output Output frequency 0 ... +10V Resolution: 10 bit
Linearity error: ±0.5 %
Temperature error: 0.3 % (0 ... +60°C)
Load capacity: max. 2 mA
28 Controller inhibit (CINH) 1 = START
E1 2) Activation of JOG values E1 E2
JOG1 = 20 Hz JOG1 1 0 p resistance: 3.3 kΩ
Input
E2 JOG2 = 30 Hz
H JOG2 0 1
JOG3 = 40 Hz
Digital
g inputs
p JOG3 1 1
1 = HIGH (+12 ... +30 V)
E3 DC-injection brake (DCB) 1 = DCB active 0 = LOW (0 ... +3 V)
E4 Change
g of direction of rotation E4 (PLC level, HTL)
CW/CCW rotation CW 0
CCW 1
A1 Digital output Ready for operation Load capability:
0/+20 V at DC internal 10 mA
0/+24 V at DC external 50 mA
9 - Internal, stabilised DC voltage supply for +5.2 V (ref.: X3/7) Load capacity: max. 10 mA
setpoint potentiometer
20 - Internal DC voltage supply for control of digital +20 V (ref.: X3/7) Load capacity: max. 70 mA
inputs and output (sum of all output currents)
59 - DC supply
pp y for A1 +20 V (internal, bridge to X3/20)
+24 V (external)
7 - GND1, reference potential for analog signals - isolated to GND2
39 - GND2, reference potential for digital signals - isolated to GND1

1) Offset (C0026) and gain (C0027) must be adjusted separately for every function module.
Repeat the adjustment if the function module has been exchanged or the default setting has been loaded
2) or frequency input 0 ... 10 kHz, configuration under C0425

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

4.2.4.3 Terminal assignment - Application I/ O E82ZAFA001

Stop!
Shield control cables to avoid interferences!

Internal voltage supply X3/20 (+20 V DC, max. 70 mA) Supply via external voltage source + 24 V DC
(+12 V DC - 0 % ... +30 V DC + 0 %, max. 200 mA)
APPLICATION A
1U 9 1U 9

0 … +5 V
+5 V +5 V

X3 1U 1I 2U 2I 62 63 9 0 … +5 V X3 1U 1I 2U 2I 62 63 9
1k … 10k 1k … 10k

AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2 7 AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2 7

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10 GND GND
GND GND +20 V +20 V

1U 1I 2U 2I 62 63 9 X3 A1 A2 7 7 A4 59 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 X3 A1 A2 7 7 A4 59 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6

DIGOUT1 DIGOUT2 DFOUT1

DIGOUT1 DIGOUT2 DFOUT1
_
A1 A2 7 7 A4 59 20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 +
1 3 5 7 9
24 V ext.
(+12 V DC - 0 % ... +30 V DC + 0 %,
C A
D B E82ZAFA001 max. 200 mA) E82ZAFA002
2 4 6 8 10 E82ZAFA004 Min. wiring required for operation

Screw terminal data

Max. cable cross-sections Tightening torques
rigid flexible

1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) 1.0 mm2 (AWG 18)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)
(4.4 .. 5.3 lb
lb-in)
in)
0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)

Configuration of analog signals via jumper

Possible levels 1)
Analog inputs 0 ... +5 V 0 ... +10 V -10 V ... +10 V
X3/1U Jumper A 7 - 9: free 7-9 7-9
(Voltage input 1, AIN1) Code C0034/1 = 0 C0034/1 = 0 C0034/1 = 1
X3/2U Jumper B 8 - 10: free 8 - 10 8 - 10
(Voltage input 2, AIN2) Code C0034/2 = 0 C0034/2 = 0 C0034/2 = 1

0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA (open-circuit monitored)

X3/1I Jumper A, B optional optional optional
(Current input 1, AIN1) Code C0034/1 = 2 C0034/1 = 3 C0034/1 = 4
X3/2I Jumper A, B optional optional optional
(Current input 2, AIN2) Code C0034/2 = 2 C0034/2 = 3 C0034/2 = 4

Analog outputs 0 ... +10 V 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA

X3/62 Jumper C 1-3 3-5 3-5
(Analog output 1, AOUT1) Code C0424/1 = 0 C0424/1 = 0 C0424/1 = 1
X3/62 Jumper D 2-4 4-6 4-6
(Analog output 2, AOUT2) Code C0424/2 = 0 C0424/2 = 0 C0424/2 = 1

1) Printed in bold: Status as delivered

4-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

Tip!
• Jumper and C0034 must be set for the same range, otherwise the controller cannot
interprete the analog signal to AIN1 and AIN2 correctly.
• If a setpoint potentiometer is internally supplied via X3/9, set the jumper for a voltage range
between 0 and 5 V. Otherwise not the whole speed range can be provided.

Terminal assignment
X3/ Signal type Function (bold = Lenze setting) level Technical data
1U/2U Analog inputs Actual or setpoint inputs (master voltage) 0 ... +5 V Resolution: 10 bit
User jumper and C0034 to change range 0 ... +10 V Linearity fault: ± 0.5 %
-10 V ... +10 V Temperature error: 0.3 %
1I/2I Actual or setpoint inputs (master current) 0 ... +20 mA (0 ... +60 °C)
User jumper and C0034 to change range +4 ... +20 mA Input resistance
+4 ... +20 mA (open-circuit • Voltage signal: > 50 k Ω
monitored) • Current signal: 250 Ω
62 Analog outputs Output frequency 0 ... +10 V Resolution: 10 bit
0 ... +20 mA Linearity error: ±0.5 %
4 ... +20 mA Temperature error: 0.3 %
63 Motor current (0 ... +60 °C)
Load capacity (0 ... +10 V): max. 2 mA
R L (0/4... 20 mA) ≤ 500 Ω
28 Controller inhibit (CINH) 1 = START
E11) Activation of JOG values E1 E2
JOG1 = 20 Hz JOG1 1 0
E21) JOG2 = 30 Hz H p resistance: 3 kΩ
Input
JOG2 0 1
JOG3 = 40 Hz
JOG3 1 1
E3 Digital inputs DC-injection brake (DCB) 1 = DCB
1 = HIGH (+12 ... +30 V)
E4 Change
g of direction of rotation E4 0 = LOW (0 ... +3 V)
CW/CCW rotation CW 0 (PLC level, HTL)
CCW 1
E5 not prefabricated -
E6 not prefabricated -
A1 Digital outputs Ready for operation Load capability:
0/+20 V at DC internal 10 mA
A2 not prefabricated
0/+24 V at DC external 50 mA
A4 Frequency output DC bus voltage HIGH: +18 V ... +24 V (HTL) 50 Hz ...10 kHz
LOW: 0 V Load capacity: max. 8 mA
9 - Internal, stabilised DC voltage supply for +5.2 V Load capacity: max. 10 mA
setpoint potentiometer
20 - Internal DC voltage supply for control of digital +20 V Load capacity: max. 70 mA
inputs and output
59 - DC supply
pp y for X3/A1 and X3/A2 +20 V (internal, bridge to X3/20)
+24 V (external)
7 - GND, reference potential -

1) or frequency input 0 ... 100 kHz, single or two track, configuration via C0425

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 4-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation
Electrical installation - Connections

4.2.4.4 Wiring - Bus function module

• System bus (CAN): (^ 9-2)
• For all other bus function modules (e. g. PROFIBUS-DP, INTERBUS, ...) see the
corresponding Mounting and Operating Instructions.

4-14 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Before you start

5 Commissioning

5.1 Before you start

Tip!
• The controller is default set to drive the following matching four-pole asynchronous standard
motors:
– 230/400 V, 50 Hz
– 280/480 V, 60 Hz
– 400 V, 50 Hz
• Keep to the switch-on sequence. (^ 5-7)
• In the event of faults or errors during commissiong, see chapter ”Troubleshooting and fault
elimination”: (^ 8-1)

Check ...

... before connecting the controller to the voltage supply

• Check the wiring for completeness, short circuit and earth fault
• If you do not use a function module (as delivered):
– Is the FIF cover mounted?
• If you use the internal voltage source X3/20 of the standard I/O:
– Are the terminals X3/7 and X3/39 bridged?

... the setting of the main drive parameters before enabling the controller
• Is the V/f rated frequency adapted to the motor connection? (^ 7-4)
• Is the configuration of the analog inputs and outputs adapted to the wiring? (^ 7-36)
• Is the configuration of the digital inputs and outputs adapted to the wiring? (^ 7-43)
• Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
If necessary, use the keypad or PC to adapt them. (^ 6-1 ff)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Parameter setting using the keypad

5.2 Parameter setting using the keypad

The keypad is available as accessory. A full description can be obtained from the information
included in the keypad delivery.
0 Function keys
1 Status display
2 Bargraph display
3 Function bar 1
4 Function bar 2
5 Parameter set
6 Code number Changes possible when
7 Subcode number lamp is blinking
8 Parameter value with unit

5.2.1 Menu structure

All parameters for controller setting or monitoring are saved in codes under the menus User and all.
The codes have numbers 6 and are abbreviated in the text with a ”C” before the number. Some codes
store the parameters in numerical “subcodes” 7 to ensure that parameter setting is clearly structured
(example: C0517 menu User).
• The menu User
– is active after every mains switching or keypad attachment during operation.
– contains all codes for a standard application with linear V/f characteristic control (Lenze
setting).
– can be modified as required under C0517.
• The menu all
– contains all codes.
– shows a list of all codes in ascending order.
• The change between User and all and how to change parameters in the codes is described on
the following pages.

5-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Parameter setting using the keypad

5.2.2 The menu User - The 10 most important drive parameters

After mains switching or plugging in the keypad during operation, the 10 codes defined to be the most
important in the user menu User (Code C0517) are available immediately.
In default setting the menu contains User all codes required for a standard application with linear V/f
characteristic control.
Code Name Lenze setting
C0050 Output frequency Display: Output frequency without slip compensation
C0034 Setpoint selection range -0-
0 Standard I/O X3/8: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA
X3/1U: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
Application I/O
X3/2U: 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
C0007 Fixed configuration of digital inputs -0-
0 E4 E3 E2 E1
CW/CCW DCB JOG2/3 JOG1/3
CW/CCW rotation DC-injection brake Selection of fixed setpoints
C0010 Minimum output frequency 0.00 Hz
C0011 Maximum output frequency 50.00 Hz
C0012 Acceleration time main setpoint 5.00 sec
C0013 Deceleration time main setpoint 5.00 sec
C0015 V/f rated frequency 50.00 Hz
C0016 Umin boost depending on the inverter type
C0002 Parameter set transfer/reset see code table (^ 14-9)

Tip!
Use C0002 ”Parameter set transfer” to easily transfer configurations from one controller to the other
or to reset the controller to Lenze settings.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Parameter setting using the keypad

5.2.3 Change between the menus USEr and ALL

ALL
USEr
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS
‚m n op

Hi
Lo
q r

000
0988 000
Hz
1

‚m n op
0002 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 6 000
‚m n op

000
q r
d c b e a
~5 s d c b e aHz
Hi
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
001 5 000
‚m n op ‚m n op
001 0 000
000
q r

000
q r
z

vt
u s
Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz
d c b e a Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 y Lo
Œj g f k i h PS
0050 000
1 001 3 000
‚m n op

000
‚m n op q r

5 000
q r d
Hi c b e aHz
Hi Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 2 000
Hz
Lo ‚m n op

000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
0007 000
Œj Lo g f k i h PS
001 1 000
‚m n op ‚m n op

z 000
q r

000
q r
z
vt

vt
u s
u s

Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz

w x Œj Lo g f k i h PS
‚m n op
001 0 000
1 y Lo

y 000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0007 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0034 000 ‚m n op
0002 000
000 1
q r

000 1
q r

d c b e a
Hi Hz d c
Hi
Lo
b e aHz
Lo
Œj g f k i h PS Œj g f k i h PS
0001 000
z
0050 000
vt
u s

w x ‚m n op ‚m n op

000
q r

000
y q r
Hi Hz
Hi Hz
Lo Lo

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s

w x w x
y y

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s

w x w x
y y
z
vt
u s

w x
y

d c b e a d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
m n op
0050 000 m n op
0050 000
us e r AL L
q r q r
Hi Hz Hi Hz
Lo Lo
z
vt
u s

w x
y

8200vec075

5.2.4 Parameter change in menus

Step Keys Display Note Example

1. Controller inhibit s dc Only necessary if you want to change codes marked with “[ ]” in
the code table, e. g. [C0002].
All other parameters can be changed during operation.
2. Set parameters
p wx f Reduce C0012
3. z XXXX Select code 0012 (acceleration time)
For codes without subcodes: Jump to i (and then 6.) from 5.00
5 00 s to 11.00
00 s
4. x k
001
5. yz XXX Select subcode
6. x i 5.00 s
7. yz XXXXX Set parameters 1.00 s
8. v STOre Acknowledge entry if p blinking
w Acknowledge entry if p is not blinking; v is not active
9. Restart the ”loop” at 2. to set other parmeters.

5-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Selection of the correct control mode

5.3 Selection of the correct control mode

The following table helps you to find the correct control mode for standard applications. You can
choose between V/f characteristic control, vector control and sensor torque control:
V/f characteristic control is the classic control mode for standard applications.
The vector control provides better control features than the V/f characteristic control because of:
• a higher torque over the whole speed range
• higher speed accuracy and smooth running features
• higher efficiency
M  V/f characteristic control
‚ Vector control
‚

MN

nN n

Tip!
The parameters for the corresponding control mode are to be set as follows:
• for linear V/f characteristic control in menu USEr
• for square-law V/f characteristic control, vector control or sensorless torque in menu ALL

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Selection of the correct control mode

Application Operating mode

C0014
Stand-alone drives recommended alternatively
with extremely alternating loads -4- -2-
with heavy start conditions -4- -2-
with speed control (speed feedback) -2- -4-
with high dynamic response (e. g. positioning and infeed drives) -2- -
with torque setpoint -5- -
with torque limitation (power control) -2- -4-
three-phase AC reluctance motors -2- -
three-phase sliding rotor motors -2- -
three-phase motors with fixed frequency-voltage characteristic -2- -
Pump and fan drives with square-law load characteristic -3- -2- / -4-
Group drives
(several motors connected to controller)
identical motors and identical loads -2- -
different motors and/or changing loads -2- -

C0014 = -2-: linear V/f characteristic control

C0014 = -3-: square-law V/f characteristic control
C0014 = -4-: vector control
C0014 = -5-: sensorless torque control

5-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
V/f characteristic control

5.4 Commissioning - V/f characteristic control

5.4.1 Commissioning without function module

Stop!
• The controller can only be used when the FIF cover is mounted!
– If the FIF cover is missing, the green LED will be blinking (keypad: dc). The controller is
inhibited.
– The FIF cover is mounted when the inverter is delivered. It is under the blind cover (see
fold-out page).
• Since the controller does not provide any control terminals when the function module is not
attached, starting and stopping during operation is possible by switching the mains.
– Allow a break of three minutes between two switch-on procedures for cyclic mains
switching!
• Function j stores the setpoint at the time when operation is interrupted by switching the
mains or mains failures. The drive restarts automatically as soon as the mains connection is
built up again.
• If the drive does not start in step 12. ( c is not off), press U to enable the controller

Switch-on sequence Note

1. Attach the keypad
2. Switch on the mains

3. The keypad is in “Disp” mode after approx. 2 s and indicates the d c b e a The menu USEr is active
output frequency (C0050) Œj g f k i h
‚m n o p
PS
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

4. Change to the fmode to configure the basic settings for your w

z
x
d c b
Œj g f k i h PS
e a Blinking on the display: 0050
drive y ‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

5.
6.
7.
Like step 88. to step 13
13. on page 5-8
58
8.
9.
10.
11. If you want to change the settings, please go to the menu ALL . E.g. JOG frequencies (C0037, The most important codes listed in the menu ALL
(^ 5-4) C0038, C0039), deceleration are explained in the code table. (^ 14-9)
time for quick stop (QSP)
(C0105) or motor temperature
monitoring (C0119)
When you are ready with parameter setting:
12. Select the setpoint via the function j
A j activate gwj
B CW rotation: z c Off
Th display
The di l shows
h th
the output
t t ffrequency.
C CCW rotation y

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
V/f characteristic control

5.4.2 Commissioning with standard I/O

The following instructions apply to controllers equipped with a Standard-I/O module and a
three-phase AC motor which has been selected accordingly
Switch-on sequence Note
1. Attach the keypad
2. Ensure that controller inhibit is active after mains connection. Terminal X3/28 = LOW
3. Switch on the mains

4. The keypad is in “Disp” mode after approx. 2 s and indicates the d c b e a The menu USEr is active
Œj g f k i h PS
output frequency (C0050) ‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

5. Change to the fmode to configure the basic settings for your w

z
x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a Blinking on the display: 0050
drive y ‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

6. Adapt the voltage range/current range to the analog setpoint z

w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a Set the DIP switch on the standard-I/O to the same
‚m n o p
(C0034) y Hi
q r
Hz
range (see Mounting Instructions for the
Lenze setting: -0-, (0 ... 5 V/0 ... 10 V/0 ... 20 mA) Lo
standard-I/O)
7. Adapt the terminal configuration to the wiring (C0007) z
w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a
‚m n o p
Lenze setting: -0-, i. e. y Hi
q r
Hz

E1: JOG1/3 JOG frequency selection Lo

E2: JOG2/3
E3: DCB DC brake
E4: CW/CCW operation
8. Set the minimum output frequency (C0010) [f]
C0011
Lenze setting: 0.00 Hz

9. Set the maximum output frequency (C0011)

Lenze setting: 50.00 Hz C0010

0% 100 %

10. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) f [H z ] T = t ⋅

C0011
ir ir f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s C 0 0 1 1 2 1
f2
t ir = acceleration time wanted
f1
11. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) 0 T = t ⋅
C0011
t ir t if t
if if f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s T ir T if 2 1
t if = deceleration time wanted

12. Set the V/f-rated frequency (C0015) Uout

100%
Lenze setting: 50.00 Hz

13. Set the Vmin boost (C0016) Umin

The Lenze setting is suitable for all common
Lenze settings: Depending on the controller type applications
0
0 C0015 f

14. If you want to change the settings, please go to the menu ALL . E.g. JOG frequencies (C0037, The most important codes listed in the menu ALL
(^ 5-4) C0038, C0039), deceleration are explained in the code table. (^ 14-9)
time for quick stop (QSP)
(C0105) or motor temperature
monitoring (C0119)
When you are ready with parameter setting:
15. Setpoint selection E.g. via potentiometer at
terminals 7, 8, 9
16. Enable the controller. Terminal X3/28 = HIGH
17. The drive should now be running at e.g. 30 Hz d c
Œj g f k i h
b e a
PS If the drive does not start, press u in addition
‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

5-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Vector control

5.5 Commissioning - vector control

5.5.1 Commissioning without function module

Stop!
• The controller can only be used when the FIF cover is mounted!
– If the FIF cover is missing, the green LED will be blinking (keypad: dc). The controller is
inhibited.
– The FIF cover is mounted when the inverter is delivered. It is under the blind cover (see
fold-out page).
• Since the controller does not provide any control terminals when the function module is not
attached, starting and stopping during operation is possible by switching the mains.
– Allow a break of three minutes between two switch-on procedures for cyclic mains
switching!
• Function j stores the setpoint at the time when operation is interrupted by switching the
mains or mains failures. The drive restarts automatically as soon as the mains connection is
built up again.
• If the drive does not start in step 14. ( c is not off), press U to enable the controller

Switch-on sequence Note

1. Attach the keypad
2. Switch on the mains

3. The keypad is in “Disp” mode after approx. 2 s and indicates the d c b e a The menu USEr is active
output frequency (C0050) Œj g f k i h
‚m n o p
PS
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

4. Change to the menu ALL (^ 5-4) The most important codes listed in the menu ALL
are explained in the code table. (^ 14-9)

5. Change to the fmode to configure the basic settings for your w

z
x
d c b
Œj g f k i h PS
e a Blinking on the display: 0001
drive y ‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

6.
7.
8. Like step 8. to step 12. on page 5-10
5 10
9.
10.
11.
Like step 14
14. to step 15
15. on page 5-10
5 10
12.
13. If necessary, adjust more parameters E. g. JOG frequencies (C0037,
C0038, C0039), deceleration
time for quick stop (QSP)
(C0105) or motor temperature
monitoring (C0119)
After parameter setting:
14. Select the setpoint via the function j
A j activate gwj
B CW rotation: z c Off
Th display
The di l shows
h th
the output
t t ffrequency.
C CCW rotation y

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Vector control

5.5.2 Commissioning with standard I/O

The following Instructions apply to controllers equipped with a Standard-I/O function module and a
three-phase AC motor which has been selected accordingly.
Switch-on sequence Note
1. Attach the keypad
2. Ensure that controller inhibit is active after mains connection. Terminal X3/28 = LOW
3. Switch on the mains

4. The keypad is in “Disp” mode after approx. 2 s and indicates the d c b e a The menu USEr is active
output frequency (C0050) Œj g f k i h
‚m n o p
PS
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

5. Change to the menu ALL (^ 5-4) The most important codes listed in the menu ALL
are explained in the code table. (^ 14-9)

6. Change to the fmode to configure the basic settings for your w

z
x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a Blinking on the display: 0001
drive y ‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

7. Adapt the terminal configuration to the wiring (C0007) z

w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a
‚m n o p
Lenze setting: -0-, i. e. y Hi
q r
Hz

E1: JOG1/3 JOG frequency selection Lo

E2: JOG2/3
E3: DCB DC brake
E4: CW/CCW operation
8. Set the minimum output frequency (C0010) [f]
C0011
Lenze setting: 0.00 Hz

9. Set the maximum output frequency (C0011)

Lenze setting: 50.00 Hz C0010

0% 100 %

10. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) f [H z ] T = t ⋅

C0011
ir ir f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s C 0 0 1 1 2 1
f2
t ir = acceleration time wanted
f1
11. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) 0 T = t ⋅
C0011
t ir t if t
if if f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s T ir T if 2 1
t if = deceleration time wanted

12. Set the control mode ”Vector control” (C0014 = 4) z

w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a
‚m n o p
Lenze setting: Linear V/f characteristic control (C0014 = 2) y Hi
q r
Hz
Lo

13. Adapt the voltage/current range to the analog setpoint (C0034) z

w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a Set the DIP switch on the standard-I/O to the same
‚m n o p
Lenze setting: -0-, (0 ... 5 V/0 ... 10 V/0 ... 20 mA) y Hi
q r
Hz
range (see Mounting Instructions for the
Lo
standard-I/O)
14. Enter the motor data See motor nameplate
A Rated motor speed (C0087)
Lenze setting: 1390 rpm
B Rated motor current (C0088) Enter the value for the motor connection type
Lenze setting: Depending on the controller (star/delta) selected!
C Rated motor frequency (C0089)
Lenze setting: 50 Hz
D Rated motor voltage (C0090) Enter the value for the motor connection type
Lenze setting: Depending on the controller (star/delta) selected!
E Motor-cosϕ (C0091)
Lenze setting: Depending on the controller

5-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Vector control

Switch-on sequence Note

15. Motor parameter identification (C0148) z
w x
d c
Œj g f k i h PS
b e a
‚m n o p
y Hi
q r
Hz
Lo

A Ensure that the controller is inhibited

(terminal X3/28 = LOW)
B Set C0148 = 1
v in addition
C Enable the controller The motor makes a Identification starts, the segment c is off.
(terminal X3/28 = HIGH) high-pitched tone. The motor
does not rotate!
D If the segment becomes active after approx. 30 s, c controller Calculated and stored: Identification is completed.
inhibit must be activated. • V/f rated frequency (C0015)
(terminal X3/28 = LOW) • Slip compensation (C0021)
• Motor stator inductance
(C0092)
Measured and stored:
• Motor stator resistance
(C0084) = Total resistance
of motor cable and motor
16. If necessary, adjust more parameters E. g. JOG frequencies (C0037,
C0038, C0039), deceleration
time for quick stop (QSP)
(C0105) or motor temperature
monitoring (C0119)
After parameter setting:
17. Setpoint selection E.g. via potentiometer at
terminals 7, 8, 9
18. Enable the controller. Terminal X3/28 = HIGH
19. The drive should now be running at e.g. 30 Hz d c b
Œj g f k i h
e a
PS If the drive does not start, press u in addition
‚m n o p
q r
Hi Hz
Lo

5.5.3 Vector control optimisation

The vector control is usually ready for operation after the motor parameter identification. Vector
control must only be optimised for the following drive performance:
Drive response Remedy Note
Rough motor run and motor current (C0054) > 60 % 1. Reduction of motor inductance (C0092) by 10 % Reduce C0092 by max. 20 %!
rated motor current in idle running (stationary 2. Check of motor current under C0054
operation) 3. If the motor current is (C0054) > approx. 50 % of the rated motor
current, reduce C0092 until approx. 50 % rated motor current is
reached.
Torque too low for frequencies f < 5 Hz (starting Increase of motor resistance (C0084) or increase of motor inductance
torque) (C0092)
Poor constant speed at high loads (setpoint and Increase of slip compensation (C0021) Overcompensation results in drive
motor speed are not proportional). instability!
Error messages OC1, OC3, OC4 or OC5 for Change readjustment time of the Imax controller (C0078):
acceleration times (C0012) < 1 s (controller can no • Reduction of C0078 = Imax controller becomes quicker (more
longer follow the dynamic processes) dynamic)
• Increase of C0078 = Imax controller becomes slower (”smoother”)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 5-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning
Vector control

5-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
General information

6 Parameter setting

6.1 General information

• The controller can be adapted to your application by setting parameters. A detailed
description of the function can be found in the function library. (^ 7-1 ff.)
• The function parameters are stored as numerical codes:
– Codes are marked in the text with a ”C”.
– The code table gives you a quick overview over all codes. The codes are sorted according
to their numbers and can be used as reference. (^ 14-9)
The parameters are set using a keypad or PC or via the parameter channel of a bus system:

Parameter setting with keypad or PC

• For more detailed information about parameter setting with the keypad see (^ 6-2)
• For more detailed information about parameter setting using the PC see (^ 6-9)
• Keypad and PC can also be used to
– control your controller (e. g. inhibit and enable)
– select setpoints
– display operating data
– transfer parameter sets to other controllers

Parameter setting with a bus system

• For more information about the function module “System bus (CAN)” see (^ 9-1)
• More detailed information about other bus modules can be found in the corresponding
Operating Instructions.

Tip!
• The signal flow charts give an overview over all configurable signals. (^ 14-1)
• If you get confused while you set the parameters for your drive, reload the factory setting with
C0002 and start again.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2 Parameter setting with the keypad

The parameters are set using the hand terminal.
The hand terminal can be connected to the AIF interface with different cable lengths.

Tip!
The hand terminal can be attached or detached and parameters can be set during operation.

6.2.1 General data/application conditions

Insulation voltage to 50 V AC
reference earth/PE
Type of protection IP20
IP55 with hand terminal
Ambient temperature during operation: -10 ... +60 °C
during transport: -25 ... +70 °C
during storage: -25 ... +60 °C
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN 50178 (without condensation, average relative humidity 85 %)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 74 mm x 60 mm x 17 mm

6.2.2 Installation/commissioning
With hand terminal Basic principle
1. Insert the keypad into the hand terminal and tighten the screws (only with
E82ZBC).
2. Remove the plug screw at the heatsink.
3. Connect the hand terminal to the AIF interface using a connection cable.

The communication module is ready for operation as soon as the mains voltage is
switched on.
You can communicate with the drive.

8200mot031

6-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.3 Displays and functions

0
1 Function keys

3 d c b e a
5 1 Status display
j g f k i h PS 8 6 2 Bar-graph display
4 ‚m n op
8888 888 7
88888
q r
m
3 Function bar 1
2
Hi
Lo
Hz V A
%sh °C
rpm 8
4 Function bar 2
0 5 For changing active parameter sets
z
vt
u s
6 Code number
w x The value can be
changed if it is blinking.
y 7
8
Subcode number

Parameter value with unit

0 Function keys
Press key Function Explanation
u Enable controller X3/28 must be at HIGH level.
s Inhibit controller (CINH) or quick stop (QSP) Configuration in C0469.
t Change to function bar 1 ↔ Function bar 2
xw To right/left in active function bar. Current function will be framed.
zy Increase/decrease value. Only blinking values can be changed.
Quick change: Keep key pressed.
v Parameters can be stored if p is blinking.
Acknowledgement by STOre in the display
1 Status display
Description of error messages: (^ 8-1 ff)
Display Meaning Explanation
d Ready for operation
c Pulse inhibit Power outputs inhibited
b Set current limit exceeded C0022 (motor mode) or C0023 (generator mode)
e Warning active
a Error active
2 Bar-graph display
Value set under C0004 in %. Display range: - 180 % ... + 180 % (every bar = 20 %)
(Lenze setting: Controller load C0056).
3 Function bar 1
Function Meaning Explanation
j Setpoint selection via yz Not possible when password protection is active (display = ”loc”)
g Display function: Active after every main connection
• User menu, memory location 1 (C0517/1), display
• Display active parameter set
f Code selection Display of active code in 4-digit display 6
k Subcode selection Display of active subcode number in 3-digit display 7
i Change of parameter value of a (sub)code Display of current value in 5-digit display 8
h Display of values longer than 5 digits
H: higher value locations Display ”HI”
L: lowervalue locations Display ”lo”
4 Function bar 2
Function Meaning Explanation
m Select parameter set 1 ... parameter set 4 for changing • Display, e.g. PS 2 ( 5)
• Parameter sets can only be activated with digital signals
(configuarion under C0410).
n Selection of system bus (CAN) devices The selected device can be parameterised by the current drive.
r = function active
o Select menu user List of codes in the user menu (C0517)
User menu is active after mains switching. If necessary all to all List of all codes
address all codes. funci Only specific codes for bus function modules, e.g. INTERBUS,
PROFIBUS-DP and LECOM-B

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.4 Menu structure

All parameters for controller setting or monitoring are saved in codes under the menus User and all.
The codes have numbers 6 and are abbreviated in the text with a ”C” before the number. Some codes
store the parameters in numerical “subcodes” 7 to ensure that parameter setting is clearly structured
(example: C0517 menu User).
• The menu User
– is active after every mains switching or keypad attachment during operation.
– contains all codes for a standard application with linear V/f characteristic control (Lenze
setting).
– can be modified as required under C0517.
• The menu all
– contains all codes.
– shows a list of all codes in ascending order.
• The change between User and all and how to change parameters in the codes is described on
the following pages.

Change between the menus USEr and ALL

ALL
USEr
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1
d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS
‚m n op

Hi
Lo
q r

000
0988 000
Hz
1

‚m n op
0002 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 6 000
‚m n op

000
q r
d c b e a
~5 s d c b e aHz
Hi
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
001 5 000
‚m n op ‚m n op
001 0 000
000
q r

000
q r
z
vt
u s

Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz
d c b e a Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1 y Lo
Œj g f k i h PS
0050 000
1 001 3 000
‚m n op

000
‚m n op q r

5 000
q r d
Hi c b e aHz
Hi Œj
Lo g f k i h PS 1
001 2 000
Hz
Lo ‚m n op

000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
0007 000
Œj
Lo g f k i h PS
‚m n op
001 1 000 ‚m n op

z 000
q r

000
q r
z
vt

vt
u s
u s

Hi
d
Hi c b e aHz w x Hz

w x Œj Lo g f k i h PS
‚m n op
001 0 000
1 y Lo

y 000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0007 000
000
q r
d
Hi c b e aHz d c b e a
Œj Lo g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
‚m n op
0034 000 ‚m n op
0002 000
000 1
q r

000 1
q r

d c b e a
Hi Hz d c
Hi
Lo
b e aHz
Lo
Œj g f k i h PS Œj g f k i h PS
0001 000
z
0050 000
vt
u s

w x ‚m n op ‚m n op

000
q r

000
y q r
Hi Hz
Hi Hz
Lo Lo

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s

w x w x
y y

z z
vt

vt
u s

u s

w x w x
y y
z
vt
u s

w x
y

d c b e a d c b e a
Œj g f k i h PS 1 Œj g f k i h PS 1
m n op
0050 000 m n op
0050 000
us e r AL L
q r q r
Hi Hz Hi Hz
Lo Lo
z
vt
u s

w x
y

8200vec075

6-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.5 Changing and storing parameters with the keypad

Tip!
User menu is active after mains switching. Change to the menu all to address all codes.

Action Keys Result Note Example

1. Plug in the g Function g is activated. The first code in the user menu will be
keypad xx.xx Hz displayed (C0517/1, Lenze setting: C0050 = output frequency).
2. If necessaryy t  Change to function bar 2
change
h to
t the
th o
3.
menu ”ALL”
wx
4. yz all Select menu ”ALL” (list of all codes)
5. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
6. Inhibit s dc Only necessary if you want to change C0002, C0148, C0174 and/or
controller C0469
7. Set wx f C0412,, assign
g 3 to subcode 3.
parameters
t
8. yz XXXX Select code 0412
9. x k For codes without subcodes: Jump automatically to i
001
10. yz XXX Select subcode 003
11. x i
12. yz XXXXX Set parameters 3
13. v STOre Confirm entry if p blinking
w Confirm entry if p is not blinking; v is not active
14. Restart the ”loop” at 7. to set other parmeters.

6.2.6 Change of parameter sets

Tip!
The keypad can only be used to go to parameter sets to be changed. You have to use digital signals
to activate a parameter set for operation (configuration under C0410)!
The presently active parameter set can also be indicated by the function g .

Action Keys Result Note Example

1. Selection t  Change to function bar 2 Select parameter
p set 2.
f ti
function m
2. wx
3. Select yz 1 ... 4 Select parameter set to be changed 2
parameter
t sett
4. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
5. Set As described in chapter 6.2.5
parameters

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.7 Remote parameter setting for system bus devices

Tip!
Instead of using function n the system bus device can also be selected under C0370.

Action Keys Result Note Example

1. Selection t  Change to function bar 2 Remote pparameter settingg of
f ti
function system
t bbus ddevice
i 3232.
2. wx n
3. Select the yz 1 ... 63 Select device’s address.( ^ 9-5 ff) 32
d i ’
device’s
4.
address.
t ΠConfirm the address and change to function bar 1.
r The remote parameter setting of the device is not completed.
5. Set As described in chapter 6.2.5
parameters All settings are diverted to the selected device.

6.2.8 Change entries in the user menu

Tip!
For more detailed information about the user menu see (^ 7-56)

Action Keys Result Note Example

1. Change
g to the t  Change to function bar 2
menu ”ALL”
2. wx o
3. yz all Select menu ”ALL” (list of all codes)
4. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
5. Select user x f Enter C0014 (control
( mode)) on
menu l ti 2 iin th
location the user menu.
6. z 0517 Code for user menu 0517 The existing settings will be
7. Select wx k The code stored under C0517/1 is displayed. overwritten.
memory 001 (Lenze setting: Output frequency C0050)
location
8. z 001 ... 010 Select subcode 002
9. Change
g entryy x i
10. yz XXXXX Enter code number 14
It is not checked whether the code number exists.
”0” to delecte entry.
11. v STOre Confirm entry
12. Restart the ”loop” at 7. to change other memory locations.

6-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.9 Activation of password protection

(Available as of version E82 ... Vx11 together with the keypad, version E82B ... Vx10)

Tip!
• If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999) only the user menu can be freely
accessed.
• All other functions require the correct password.
• Please observe that also the password protected parameters will be overwritten when
parameter sets are transferred. The password will not be transferred.
• Do not forget your password! If you cannot remember the password, it can only be reset via
PC or a bus system.

6.2.9.1 Activation of password protection

Action Keys Result Note Example
1. Change
g to the t  Change to function bar 2
menu ”ALL”
2. wx o
3. yz all Select menu ”ALL” (list of all codes)
4. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
5. Password x f Enter and activate ppassword
entry
t 123
6. z 0094 Password code 0094
7. x i
8. z XXXX Password setting 1 23
9. v STOre Password confirmation
10. Activate t  Change to function bar 2
passwordd by
b
11.
changing to
wx o
12. the user menu yz user Select user menu
13. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
q The key symbol indicates that the password protection is active.

6.2.9.2 Calling up a password protected function

Action Keys Result Note Example
1. Calling up a various pass You tried to call up a password protected function. Temporarily deactivate
password 0 0 blinking password 123
protected q
function
2. Temporarily z pass Password setting 123
deactivate xxxx
password q
protection
3. v store Password confirmation
q Off
4. Free access to various All functions can be freely accessed.
all functions
5. Reactivate t  Change to function bar 2
passwordd
6.
protection by
wx o
7. changing to yz user Select user menu
8. the user menu t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
q The password protection is active again.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With keypad

6.2.9.3 Continuous deactivation of password protection

Action Keys Result Note Example
1. Change to the t
pass 0 blinking Continuous deactivation of
menu ”ALL” 0 password 123
q
2. z pass Password setting 123
xxxx
q
3. v store Password confirmation
q Off
4. t  Change to function bar 2
5. wx o
6. yz all Select menu ”ALL” (list of all codes)
7. t ΠConfirm selection and change to function bar 1
8. Continuous x f
d ti ti off
deactivation
9.
password
z 0094 Password code 0094
10. protection x i
11. z 0 Delete password 0
12. v store Confirm entry
You can freely access all functions.

6-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

6.3 Parameter setting using the communication module

LECOM-A (RS232)
The communication module LECOM-A (RS232) connects the controller with a host (e.g. PC) via the
RS232 interface.
You need the following accessories for using the communication module:
• Parameter setting software “Global Drive Control (GDC)”, version 3.2 or higher
• PC system cable
• Connection cable

6.3.1 Technical data

6.3.1.1 General data/application conditions

Communication module type E82ZBL
Communication medium RS232 (LECOM-A)
Communication protocol LECOM-A/B V2.0
Character format 7E1: 7 bit ASCII, 1 stop bit, 1 start bit, 1 parity bit (even)
Baud rate [bit/s] 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
LECOM-A device Slave
Network topology Point-to-point
Max. number of devices 1
Max. cable length 15 m
Communication time See table
PC connection 9-pole Sub-D connector
DC voltage supply Internal
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE 50 V AC
Type of protection IP20
Ambient temperature during operation: 0 ... +55 °C
during transport: -25 ... +70 °C
during storage -25 ... +60 °C
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN 50178 (without condensation, average relative humidity 85 %)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 75 mm x 62 mm x 23 mm

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

6.3.1.2 Communication times

The time required for the communication with the drive can be subdivided into subsequential
intervals. The communication times depend on the baud rate set under C0125:
Interval Active component Action
t0 User program in host Starts controller request
t1 Software driver in host Converts request data into the LECOM-A/B protocol and starts the transmission
t2 Communication (= serial transmission) with controller (telegram time)
t3 Controller Processes the request and starts the response
t4 Communication response not transmitted (telegram time)
t5 Software driver in host Evaluates response and converts it into the format of the user program
t6 User program in host Result:

Telegram
g time ((t2 + t4)) [[ms]] Baud rate [bits/s] (adjustable under C0125)
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
Telegram
g type
yp SEND t2Standard (Parameter value = 9 digits) 150 75 37.5 18.8 9.4
(Send data to drive) In addition for extended addressing 41.6 20.8 10.4 5.2 2.6
Telegram
g type
yp RECEIVE t4Standard (Parameter value = 9 digits) 166.7 83.3 41.7 20.8 10.4
(Read data from drive) In addition for extended addressing 83.3 41.7 20.8 10.4 5.2
Time required for single digit 1) per digit [ms] 8.4 4.2 2.1 1 0.52

Processing time in the controller (t3) t3 [ms]

Code writing 20
Code reading 20

1) If a telegram contains more or less than 9 characters, the transmission time changes accordingly.

6-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

6.3.2 Wiring to the host (PC or PLC)

Pin assignment 9-pole SubD connector Installation/commissioning
o o o g
Pin Name Input (I) / Explanation
output (O)
1 - - not assigned

2 RxD I Cable “Receive data”

3 TxD O Cable “Send data”

4 DTR O Send control

5 GND - Reference potential

6 DSR I not assigned

7 - - not assigned

8 - - not assigned

9 GND Reference potential for T/R (A), T/R (B) and +5 V

 = PC system cable The parameter setting software Global Drive

‚ = Connection cable Control must be installed on your PC.
ƒ = Plug screw 1. Remove the plug screw at the heatsink.
2. Connect the communication module to the AIF
interface using a connection cable.
3. Connect the communication module to the PC
using the PC system cable.
The communication module is ready for operation
as soon as the mains voltage is switched on. You
can communicate with the drive.

Tip!
• The controller has a double basic insulation to VDE 0160. An additional mains insulation is not
required.
• Use Lenze accessories for wiring.

6.3.2.1 Notes for precut PC system cables

Specification
p o for
o RS232 Cable type LIYCY 4 x 0.25 mm2 shielded
i
interface
f cable
bl Cable resistance ≤ 100 Ω/km
Capacitance per unit ≤ 140 nF/km
length
Specification for SubD Only use metallic SubD housings.
connector Connect the shields with both sides of the housing.
Pin assignment
g must be connected to the PC or similar with
at communication module 9-pole SubD connector pin 25-pole SubD connector pin
2 (RxD) 3 (TxD) 2 (TxD)
99-pole
pole SubD
S bD male 3 (TxD) 2 (RxD) 3 (RxD)
connector pin
5 (GND) 5 (GND) 7 (GND)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

6.3.2.2 Accessories
Host Name Order no. Explanation
accessories
Software Global Drive Control (GDC) ESP-GDC2 PC program for programming the drive (version 3.2 or higher)
System requirements: IBM AT compatible PC
LECOM-PC - LECOM-A/B communication driver for PC systems in C/C++ (source code).
Easy modification for other target systems.
Hardware PC system cable 0.5 m EWL0048 System
y cable between PC (9-pole
( p connector)) and communication module
PC system cable 5 m EWL0020
PC system cable 10 m EWL0021

6.3.3 Parameter setting with LECOM-A (RS232)

All codes can be accessed via LECOM-A:
• Controller codes (code table: ^ 14-9 ff.).
– These codes are automatically stored as non-volatile data.
– Exception: Process data, such as control words or setpoints.
• Module specific codes (access only via communication module: ^ 6-12).

• The Online help for Global Drive Control gives detailed information on parameter setting using
LECOM-A.

6.3.4 Addition codes for LECOM-A (RS232)

How to read the code table:
Column Entry Meaning
Code
o No. Code number (Codes with a “*” are the same in all parameter sets.)
Name Name of the code
LECOM format Interpretation of response telegram
VH = hexadecimal; VD = decimal; VS = ASCII string; VO = octet
Parameter Settings/possible selections Parameter values and settings (bold printing = Lenze setting)
Important Important additional information

6-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

Code Parameter IMPORTANT

No. Name LECAM Settings/possible selections
format
C0068* Operating
p g status VH Bit Assignment
3|2|1|0 TRIP error number Submission of the 10th digit of the LECOM error number.
Example: TRIP OH (LECOM-No. 50) = 0110 (5)
7|6|5|4 Last communication error
0000 No fault
0001 Check sum error
0010 Protocol frame error
0011 Reserved
0100 Invalid code number
0101 Invalid variable
0110 No access permission
0111 Telegram processing interrupted by
new telegram
1111 General fault
8 Controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH)
0 Controller inhibited
1 Controller enabled
9 Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
0 not reached
1 reached
10 Direction of rotation (NSET1/CW/CCW)
0 CW rotation:
1 CCW rotation
11 Pulse inhibit (DCTRL1-IMP)
0 Power outputs inhibited
1 Power outputs enabled
12 Quick stop (DCTRL1-QSP)
0 not active
1 active
13 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
(C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint)
0 not reached
1 reached
14 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
0 false
1 true
15 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP)
0 not active
1 active
C0248* LECOM input VD 0 0000 ... 0255 • Compatibility with LECOM-A/B drivers V1.0 which do not support
selection direct addressing of subcodes (array parameter).
• C0248 determines the subcode (array element) to be accessed.
• The access of codes without subcodes when C0248 > 0 leads to
trip because the address does not exist.
• LECOM-A/B drivers as of version V2.0 support direct addressing of
subcodes. Do not use C0248 together with these drivers!
• C0248 is set to 0 after every mains connection.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

Code Parameter IMPORTANT

No. Name LECAM Settings/possible selections
format
C0249* LECOM code VD Code bank Addressable codes • For compatibility
p y to LECOM-A/B drivers V1.0 (highest
( g possible
p code
b k
bank 0 0000 ... 0255 number
b 255).
2 )
• With the code bank
bank, an offset of 250 is added to the code number
number.
1 0250 ... 0505
• Together with LECOM-A/B drivers as of version V2.0
V2 0 C0249 is not
2 0500 ... 0755 effective
3 0750 ... 1005 • C0249 is set to 0 when switching on the unit.
4 1000 ... 1255
5 1250 ... 1505
6 1500 ... 1755
7 1750 ... 2005
8 2000 ... 2255
9 2250 ... 2505
10 2500 ... 2755
11 2750 ... 3005
12 3000 ... 3255
13 3250 ... 3505
14 3500 ... 3755
15 3750 ... 4005
C1810* SW VS 33S2102I_xy000 Software identification (x = main version, y = subversion)
identification
C1811* SW generation VS Date of software generation
C1920 Status at start VD 0 QSP (quick stop) After mains switching the drive is set to “QSP”.
1 CINH (controller inhibit) After mains switching the drive is set to “CINH”.
Writing of C0040 =1 Þ Enable
C1921 Shortened VD 0 not active C1921 = 1:
response time • A write telegram (send) is checked for transmission errors:
– A faultless telegram is positively acknowledged (ACK), a faulty
telegram negatively (NAK).
1 active – The value will only be transmitted to the controller after the
acknowledgement.
• It cannot be ensured that the controller accepts the value correctly.
• The communication module can only be addressed after 50 ms.
C1922 Response
p of VD 0 not active • Use C1922 and C1923 to monitor the communication connection to
communication
i ti 1 CINH (controller inhibit) th h t
the host.
monitoring • If the host does not send a telegram to the communication module
2 QSP (quick stop) within the monitoring time set under C1923, the action set under
C1923 Monitoring time 50 {ms} 65535 C1922 will be executed.

6-14 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

Code Parameter IMPORTANT

No. Name LECAM Settings/possible selections
format
C1962 Extended error 0 No error
N
No. 1 Invalid service identification Internal error
2 Invalid call recognition
3 Invalid data type User error in host
4 Invalid subcode number
5 Invalid code number
6 Invalid parameter - general
7 Operating status, e. g. controller inhibit Access error
8 Operating mode C0001 wrong
9 Parameter can only be read
10 General
11 Data block too long Limit value exceeded
12 Collision with other parameter values
13 Leave value range
14 General limit value exceeding
17 General internal error Internal error
32 General Communication error in communication module ↔ Controller
33 Time exceeded
34 Frame error
35 Parity error
36 Overflow
37 Handshake
38 Block memory overflow
208 Frame error Communication error in controller ↔ Communication module
209 Overflow error
210 Check sum error in communication
module
211 Telegram interrupt
212 Invalid data
213 Invalid service
214 Parity error

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 6-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Parameter setting
With communication module LECOM-A (RS232)

6.3.5 Error detection and elimination - LECOM-A (RS232)

Three LEDs at communication module LECOM-A (RS232) inform about status:
LED green (Vcc) LED yellow (RxD) LED yellow (TxD)
Blinking Communication module not initialised yet. Telegram is being received. Response is being sent.
On Communication module is connected to - -
voltage supply, no fault.
Off Communication module is not connected No telegrams are being received. No responses are being sent.
to voltage supply.

Fault Cause Remedy

No communication Controller is switched off: Controller is connected to voltage supply.
with the controller. • Operating status is not indicated.
• Green LED Vcc is off.
Communication module is not supplied with voltage: Check controller connection.
• Green LED Vcc is off.
Communication module has not been initialised with the
controller.
Controller does not receive telegrams. If the yellow LED RxD is not blinking:
Test: Let the host send telegrams cyclically (e. g. with GDC • Check wiring to the host.
in online operation). • Check whether host sends telegrams and uses the
correct interface.
Controller does not send telegrams. If the yellow LED TxD is not blinking:
Test: Let the host send telegrams cyclically (e. g. with GDC • Check LECOM baud rate (C0125) for both devices and
in online operation). set them the same.
• Do not use the addresses 00, 10, ..., 90.
If the yellow LED TxD is blinking:
• Check wiring to the host.
Controller does not • Controller sends negative acknowledgement (NAK
execute write job
j response):
– No write access to C0044, C0046 because of Set C0412/1, C0412/2 = 0.
incorrect setting of C0412.
– Attempt to write in a code type “read only”. In general, write job not possible.
• Controller sends positive acknowledgement (ACK
response):
– Controller uses a different parameter set. Parameter set changeover.

6-16 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Important notes

7 Function library
The function library gives all information needed to adapt your controller to your application. The
chapter is subdivided into the following sections:
• Select control mode, optimise operating behaviour
• Limit value setting
• Acceleration, decleration, braking, stopping
• Configuration of analog and digital setpoints
• Motor data entry/automatic detection
• Process controller Imax controller
• Free connection of analog signals
• Free connection of digital signals, message output
• Thermal motor monitoring , error detection
• Display of operating data, diagnostics
• Parameter set management
• Individual grouping of drive parameters - The user menu

Tip!
• Signal flow charts show how codes are integrated into signal processing. (^ 14-1 ff.)
• The code table lists all codes in numerical order and explains them briefly. (^ 14-9 ff.)
For free signal configuration:
• Select the source from the targets point of view:
– Ask yourself “Where does the signal come from?”
– That makes it easy to find the correct entry for a code.
• A source can have several targets:
– It is thus possible that double assignment occur when targets are assigned to sources.
– For instance, the assignment of E1 remains the same even if the frequency input E1 is
activated (Lenze setting: ”JOG1 activation!). The previous assignment must be deleted with
C0410/1 = 255 to ensure trouble-free operation.
– Ensure that only the targets wanted are assigned to a source.
• A target can have one source only.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1 Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.1 Control mode

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0014¿ Control mode -2- -2- V/f characteristic control V ~ f • Commissioning without motor parameter ^ 7-2
(Linear characteristic with constant Vmin boost) identification possible
• Benefit of identification with C0148:
-3- V/f characteristic control V ~ f2 – Improved smooth running at low speed
(Square-law characteristic with constant Vmin – V/f rated frequency (C0015) and slip
boost) (C0021) are calculated and do not
have to be entered
-4- Vector control Identifyy the motor
o o pparameters before
o
-5- Sensorless torque control with speed limitation commissioning
i i i with i h C0148!
• Torque setpoint via C0412/6 Otherwise commissioning is not
• Speed limitation via setpoint 1 (NSET1-N1), if possible!
C0412/1 is assigned, if not via max. frequency
(C0011)

Function Under C0014 you can set the control mode and the voltage characteristic. It is also possible to adapt your drive to different
load characteristics:
• Linear characteristic for drives with a load torque squared in relation to the speed.
• Square-law characteristic for drives with a load torque squared in relation to the speed.
– Square-law V/f characteristics are mainly used for centrifugal pump and fan drives. It is however necessary to check
whether your individual pump or fan application can be driven with this control mode.
– If your pump or fan drive is not suitable for operation with a square-law V/f characteristic, select control mode
C0014 = -2- or -4-.

V/f characteristic control with Vminboost

Select the classical V/f-control with constant Vminboost (C0016) for operation of the following drives:
• Multi-motor application (several motors are connected to a controller)
• Three-phase AC reluctance motors
• Three-phase sliding rotor motors
• Operation with special motors with assigned frequency-voltage characteristic
• Positioning and infeed drives with high dynamic response
• Hoists
C0014 = -2- C0014 = -3-
Linear characteristic Square-law (quadratic) characteristic (e.g. for pumps, blowers)

Vout Vout
100% 100%

Vmin
Vmin
0 0
0 C0015 f 0 C0015 f

7-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

Vector control
Compared with the V/f characteristic control the vector control offers considerably higher torque and lower current
consumption during idle running. The vector control is an improved motor current control following the Lenze FTC technology.
Select vector control for operation of the following drives:
• Single drives with extremely changing loads
• Single drives with heavy start conditions
• Sensorless speed control of three-phase standard motors together with slip compensation (C0021)

Sensorless torque control with speed limitation

The setpoint (C0412/6) is interpreted as torque setpoint. Actual values are not required.
Application with, for instance, winding drives.

Adjustment V/f characteristic control (C0014 = -2- or C0014 = -3-):

1. Selection of V/f rated frequency C0015.
2. Vmin boost (C0016) selection.

Vector control (C0014 = -4-):

• Parameters must be identified!( ^ 7-29 )
• The control mode C0014 = -4- should only be used with slip compensation (C0021). The ”sensorless speed control” is
thus optimised for the process.
• The power code of the connected motor should not be more the two classes lower than the one of the motor assigned to
the controller.

Important • Only change from V/f characteristic control to vector control and vice versa when the controller is inhibited.
• Do not use the control mode ”Toque control” (C0014 = 5) for application with power control! ^ 13-16
• Optimum drive behaviour in process controller applications, e.g. with speed control or dancer position control C0014 = 2 or
C0014 = 4.
– If you need a high torque at low speed we recommend the control mode “Vector control” (C0014 = 4)

Special features C0014 = -3-

• High inertias result in a reduced acceleration of the drive.
– This response can be avoided by changing the parameter sets (e.g. acceleration with C0014 = -2-).
C0014 = -4-
• Not possible if
– drives with different loads are connected to an inverter.
– drives with different rated powers are connected to an inverter.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.2 V/f characteristic

7.1.2.1 V/f rated frequency
Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0015 V/f rated frequency 50.00 7.50 {0.02 Hz} 960.00 Setting applies to all mains voltages ^ 7-4
permitted

Function at C0014 = -2-, -3- The V/f rated frequency determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable influence on the current, torque
and power performance of the motor.

Function at C0014 = -4- The V/f rated frequency influences the internal parameters of a motor model when using the control mode ”Vector control”.
Adjustment V = 400 V for types E82xVxxxK4B
V [V] V = 230 V for types E82xVxxxK2B
C0015 [Hz] = ⋅ f [Hz] VM Rated motor voltage depending on type of connection, see nameplate
V M [V] M
fM Rated motor frequency according to nameplate
Examples for 230 or 400 V mains C0014 = -2- C0014 = -3-
voltage Linear characteristic Square-law (quadratic) characteristic (e.g. for pumps, fans)

Vout Vout
100% 100%

Vmin
Vmin
0 0
0 C0015 f 0 C0015 f

Examples
p foro 400 V controllers
o o Motor C0015 settingg
Voltage Frequency Connection
230/400 V 50 Hz Y 50 Hz Tip:
• 4-pole asynchronous motors which are designed for a rated frequency
220/380 V 50 Hz Y 52.6 Hz of 50 Hz in star connection, can be operated in delta connection if the
constant excitement does not exceed 87 Hz.
Hz
280/480 V 60 Hz Y 50 Hz
– The motor current and the motor power are then increased by the
factor ü3 = 1.73.
400/690 V 50 Hz F 50 Hz – Th
The fifield
ld weakening
k i range starts
t t above
b 87 Hz.
H
400 V 50 Hz • Advantages:
– Higher speed-setting range
230/400 V 50 Hz F 87 Hz – 73 % higher power efficiency with standard motors.
280/480 V 60 Hz • In principle, this method can also be used with higher-pole motors
400 V 87 Hz (6,8,...).
– Observe the mechanical limit speed when using 2-pole
220/380 V 50 Hz F 90.9 Hz asynchronous motors.

Examples
p foro 230 V controllers
o o Motor C0015 settingg
Voltage Frequency Connection
230/400 V 50 Hz F 50 Hz
220/380 V 50 Hz F 52.3 Hz

Important • An internal mains compensation compensates fluctuations in the mains during operation. Therefore they do not have to be
considered for the setting of C0015.
• The motor parameter identification automatically assigns C0015.
• Depending on the settings under C0015, it can be necessary to adapt the maximum output frequency under C0011 to
ensure that the entire speed range will be used.

7-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.2.2 Vmin boost

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0016 Vmin boost à 0.00 {0.2 %} 40.0 à Depending on the controller ^ 7-5
Setting applies to all mains voltages
permitted

Function with V/f characteristic Load independent motor voltage boost in the output frequency range below V/f rated frequency. You can thus optimise the
control torque performance of the inverter drive.
C0014 = -2-, -3-

Adjustment C0016 must always be adapted to the asynchronous motor used. Otherwise, the motor can be destroyed or damaged by
overtemperature or the inverter can be supplied with overcurrent.
1. Operate the motor in idle running at approx. slip frequency (f ≈ 5 Hz).
Calculate the slip frequency n rsyn − n r fs Slip frequency
fs = fr ⋅ n fr Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]
rsyn
nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
f ⋅ 60 nr Rated speed to motor nameplate [min-1]
nrsyn = r p p Number of pole pairs

2. Increase Vmin , until the following motor current is reached:

– Motor in short-term operation at 0 Hz ≤ f ≤ 25 Hz:
Motor with integrated ventilation: Imotor ≤ Ir motor
Motor with forced ventilation: Imotor ≤ Ir motor
– Motor in continuous operation at 0 Hz ≤ f ≤ 25 Hz:
Motor with integrated ventilation: Imotor ≤ 0.8 ¡ Ir motor
Motor with forced ventilation: IMotor ≤ Ir motor

Important Please observe the thermal behaviour of the connected asynchronous motor at low output frequencies when adjusting it:
• Experience shows that standard asynchronous motors of insulation class B can be operated for a short time at rated
current over the speed range of 0 Hz ≤ f ≤ 25 Hz.
• Contact the motor manufacturer for exact setting values for the max. permissible motor current in the lower frequency
range of internally ventilated motors.

Function with vector or torque Vmin is not effective.

control
C0014 = -4-, -5-

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.3 Running optimisation

7.1.3.1 Slip compensation

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0021 Slip compensation 0.0 -50.0 {0.1 %} 50.0 ^ 7-6

Function Under load, the speed of an asynchronous machine is reduced. This load dependent speed drop is called slip. The slip can be
partly compensated by setting C0021 accordingly. The slip compensation is effective for all control modes (C0014).
• Slip increase with C0021 < 0 (at C0014 = -2-, -3-)
– “Smoother” drive behaviour at strong shocks or applications with several motors.
• In the frequency range of 5 Hz ... 50 Hz (87 Hz), the deviation from the rated speed is ≤ 0.5 % (guide value). The error
becomes bigger in the field weakening range.

j
Adjustment 1. Rough setting by means of the motor data:
n Nsyn − nN s Slip constant (C0021) [%]
s= n ⋅ 100 % nNsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
Nsyn
nr Rated speed to motor nameplate [min-1]
f N ⋅ 60 fr Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]
nNsyn = p p No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

2. Empirical precise setting of the slip compensation:

– Correct C0021 until no load-dependent speed drop occurs in the required speed range between idle running of max.
motor load.

Example with motor data: 4 kW / 1435 min-1 / 50 Hz

nNsyn = 50Hz ⋅ 60 = 1500 min −1
2

s = 1500 min −1435 min

−1 −1
⋅ 100 % = 4.33 %
1500 min −1

Preset C0021 = 4.3 %

Important • If C0021 is set too high, overcompensation can occur and lead to an instability of the drive.
• Set C0021 = 0.0 for speed control with internal process controller.
• The motor parameter identification with C0148 automatically assigns C0021.

7-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.3.2 Chopper frequency

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
¿ Chopper
C0018¿ pp frequency
q y -2- -0- 2 kHz ^ 7-7
-1- 4 kHz
-2- 8 kHz
-3- 16 kHz
C0144¿ Chopper frequency -1- -0- No temperature-depending chopper frequency ^ 7-7
deratingg derating
-1- Automatic chopper frequency derating at
Jmax - 5 °C

Function C0018 With this function you set the chopper frequency of the inverter. With Lenze setting, the chopper frequency is 8 kHz. Reasons
for other parameter settings may be:
• 2 kHz, 4 kHz:
– Improved running performance at low output frequencies
• 16 kHz:
– Reduced noise emission in the connected motor
– Good shine wave of the motor current for applications with outputs frequencies > 150 Hz, e. g. middle frequency drives.

Important With chopper frequency 16 kHz, the device suffers power losses which must be compensated by derating the output current.
( ^ 3-4 )

Function C0144 • C0144 = -0-

– With chopper frequency 8 kHz or 16 kHz ánd if the max. permissible heatsink temperature is exceeded (ϑmax ) the
inverter will be inhibited, TRIP will be indicated and the motor idles.
• C0144 = -1- (automatic chopper frequency derating):
– With chopper frequency 8 kHz or 16 kHz and if the controller exceeds the permissible heatsink temperature of
ϑmax - 5 °C, the controller derates the chopper frequency automatically to 4 kHz and thus ensures operation.
– After the heatsink has cooled down, the copper frequency is automatically increased again.

Important • The current limitation under C0022/C0023 is not automatically influenced by the selected chopper frequency.
• The chopper frequency is automatically set to its optimum value depending on the apparent motor current and output
frequency to ensure troublefree operation.
– The noise emission changes.
– The function cannot be modified by the user.

7.1.3.3 Oscillation damping

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0079 Oscillation damping 2 0 {1} 80 Depending on the controller ^ 7-7

Function Suppression of idling oscillations when:

• a drive does not match, i.e. rated controller power - motor
e.g. operation at high chopper frequency and the related power derating
• Operation of higher-pole motors
• Operation of special motors
Compensation of resonances in the drive
• Some asynchronous motors can show this behaviour when being operated with a chopper frequency of
approx. 20 Hz ... 40 Hz. As a result, operation can be instable (current and speed fluctuations).

Adjustment 1. Approach with speed oscillations.

2. Reduce the oscillations by changing C0079 step-by-step.
– Indicators for smooth running can be a uniform motor current or the reduction of mechanical vibrations in the bearing
seat.

Important Compensate resonances in speed-controlled operation by means of the speed controller parameters.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.3.4 Skip frequencies

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0625* Skip frequency 1 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 ^ 7-8
C0626* Skip frequency 2 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0627* Skip frequency 3 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0628* Bandwidth of skip 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Applies to C0625, C0626, C0627
frequencies

Function With certain output frequencies, mechanical resonances might occur in the drive (e.g. fan). The skip frequencies suppress
these unwanted output frequencies. The bandwidth (nf) determines the skip frequency range.
With skip frequency = 480.00 Hz, the function is not active.
The function is in the block NSET1 before the ramp function generator.

Adjustment • Set skip frequencies under C0625, C0626, C0627.

• C0628 defines the bandwidth for skip frequenies.
– Calculation of bandwidth (Ff) for skip frequencies:

C0628 [%] fs Skip frequency

∆f [Hz] = f s [Hz] ⋅
100 %
Important • Skip frequencies only effect main setpoings.
• C0625, C0626, C0627, C0628 are the same for all parameter sets.

f2

C0625 C0626 C0627 f1

C0628 C0628 C0628
Ff Ff Ff

Fig. 7-1 Skip frequencies and their bandwidth (nf)

7-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.4 Behaviour in the event of mains switching, mains failure or controller inhibit

7.1.4.1 Start conditions/flying-restart circuit

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0142¿ Start condition -1- -0- Automatic start inhibited Start after LOW-HIGH level change at X3/28 ^ 7-9
Flying restart not active
-1- Automatic start, if X3/28 = HIGH
Flying restart not active
-2- Automatic start inhibited Start after LOW-HIGH level change at X3/28
Flying-restart circuit active
-3- Automatic start, if X3/28 = HIGH
Flying-restart circuit active
¿ Selection of
C0143*¿ -0- -0- Max. output frequency (C0011) ... 0 Hz Motor speed
p selected for the indicated range
g
fl i
flying-restart -1- Last output frequency ... 0 Hz
-2- Frequency setpoint addition (NSET1-NOUT) The corresponding
p g value is input
p after
-3- Act. process controller value (C0412/5) addition controller
ll enable.
bl
(PCTRL1-ACT)

Function Determines the controller behaviour afer a restart after controller inhibit, mains switching or a mains failure. With activated
flying-restart circuit, the controller automatically synchronises to a coasting motor or adds a setpoint signal after mains
disconnection.
• C0143 = -0-, -1- (find motor speed)
– The controller calculates the output frequency required for the current speed of the idling motor, is connected and
accelerates the motor until it reaches its setpoint.
– Advantage: Steady and smooth acceleration/deceleration
– Disadvantage: ”Real starting” not before the current motor speed has been found. Fast ”real starting” is possible if you
use the function ”Controlled deceleration after mains failure/mains switch-off”. (^ 7-10)
• C0143 = -2-, -3- (set signal)
– The controller sets the output frequency required for the frequency setpoint or actual process controller value.

Drive performance Start options with flying-restart circuit

• C0142 = -0-
– The drive does not restart after a mains disconnection before a LOW/HIGH level change at the input CINH (X3/28).
• C0142 = -1-
– The drive automatically decelerates after a mains disconnection if a HIGH level is applied to the input CINH (X3/28). The
controller simultaneously sets all integrators to zero and enables them again.

Start options with flying-restart circuit

• C0142 = -2-
– Restart with flying-restart circuit after a LOW/HIGH level change at the input CINH (X3/28).
• C0142 = -3-
– Atuomatic restart with flying-restart circuit if a HIGH level is applied to the input CINH (X3/28).
• Determine under C0143 whether the motor speed is to be found or a signal set.

Important
C0143 = -0-, -1- • The flying-restart circuit must not be used, if several motors with different inertias are connected to a controller.
• The flying-restart circuit does only search the selected direction of rotation for synchronisation.
• The flying restart works properly for drives with high moments of inertia.
• With machines with low moments of inertial and small friction, the motor can restart for a short time or reverse after
controller enable.

C0143 = --3- • The actual process controller value must only be set if a speed-proportional signal is available in C0412/5!

Tip If the flying-restart circuit is not required for every drive start, but only after mains reconnection:
• Bridge X3/28 with HIGH level and start the controller using the function “QSP” (C0142 = -3- and C0106 = 0 s).
• The flying-restart circuit is now only activated for the first mains connection.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.4.2 Controlled deceleration after mains failure/mains switch-off

Stop!
This function cannot be used with a 8200 motec!

7-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Selection of control mode, optimisation of operating behaviour

7.1.4.3 Controller inhibit

Caution!
Do not use controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH) as emergency off. Controller inhibit (CINH) only inhibits
the power outputs and does not disconnect the controller from the mains.

Function • Power output inhibit.

– The drive idles to standstill without torque.
– Keypad status display: c (Pulse inhibit)
– The green LED of the controller is blinking.

Activation • LOW level at X3/28 (cannot be inverted)

• C0410/10 ≠ 0: LOW level at signal source for CINH (level can be inverted under 0411)
• With C0469 = 1: s press
– Restart with u

Important • X3/28, C0410/10 and u have the same effect as an AND operation.
• A restart takes place at an output frequency of 0 Hz.
– Rotating masses can cause overload, if the flying-restart circuit (C0142) is not active.

Tip!
It is also possible to inhibit and enable the controller under C0040 or read the status of controller
inhibit.
If you set parameters via the parameter channel in bus operation, controller inhibit can also be set
under C0040.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Limit value setting

7.2 Limit value setting

7.2.1 Speed range

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0010 Minimum output 0.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • C0010 is not effective with bipolar ^ 7-12
frequency à 14.5 Hz setpoint selection (-10 V ... + 10 V)
• C0010 has no effect on AIN2
à Speed setting range 1 : 6 for Lenze
C0011 Maximum output 50.00 7.50 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 geared motors: Setting absolutely
frequency à 87 Hz required for operation with Lenze geared
motors.
C0236 Acceleration time - 0.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Ref. to C0011
(A) minimum frequency Minimum frequency limitation = C0239
limitation
C0239 Lowest frequency -480.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • The value does not fall below limit ^ 7-12
limit = not active independently of the setpoint.
• If the minimum frequency limitation is
active, the automatic DC-injection brake
(auto DCB) must be deactivated
(C0019 = 0 or C0106 = 0).

Function The speed setting range required for the application can be set via the selection of output frequencies:
• C0010 corresponds to the speed at 0 % speed setpoint selection.
• C0011 corresponds to the speed at 100 % speed setpoint selection.
• C0239 sets the speed. Independently of the setpoint, the value cannot fall below this speed (e.g. for fans, dancer position
control or dry running protection for pumps).

Adjustment Relation between output frequency and synchronous speed of the motor:
nNsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
nNsyn = C0011p ⋅ 60
C0011 Max. output frequency [Hz]
p No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)
Example: 4 pole asynchronous motor:
p = 2, C0011 = 50 Hz nNsyn = 50 ⋅ 60 = 1500 min−1
2
Important • The setting C0010 > C0011 limits to C0011.
• C0011 has the same effect as a limitation when selecting [f]
setpoints via JOG values. C0011
• C0011 is an internal normalisation variable.
– Bigger changes should only be made when the controller is
inhibited.
• C0010 has no effect
– on AIN2 of the application I/O
– when the setpoint is selected via frequency input
• Observe the maximum speed of the motor! C0010

Special features • With output frequencies > 300 Hz:

0%
– Avoid chopper frequencies < 8 kHz. 100 %
• The display values of C0010 and C0011 can be related to a
process variable under C0500 and C0501.
• C0239 = 0.00 Hz only allows one direction of rotation.
• C0010 is approached via the acceleration ramp!
• When using standard I/O, C0239 is approached without
acceleration ramp (jolt!). When using application I/O, C0236
can be used to set an acceleration time for C0239.

7-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Limit value setting

7.2.2 Current limit values (Imax limit values)

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0022 Imax limit (motor 150 30 {1 %} 150 ^ 7-13
mode)
C0023 Imax-limit in the 150 30 {1 %} 150 C0023 = 30 %: Function not active if C0014
generator mode = -2-, -3-:

Function The controllers are equipped with a current-limit control which determines the dynamic response under load. The
measured load is compared with the limit values set under C0022 for motor load and C0023 for generator load. If the
current limits are exceeded, the controller changes its dynamic behaviour.
• C0023 = 30 %
– Current limit controller for generator mode not active (only for V/f characteristic control C0014 = -2-, -3-).
( ^ 7-2 ).
– Can be useful for applications with medium frequency asynchronous motors and fault detection of motor or
generator mode.

Adjustment • Set the acceleration and deceleration times so that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching Imax of the
controller.
• Note the current derating at a chopper frequency of 16 kHz.(^ 3-4)

Controller performance when a limit • During acceleration:

value is reached – Increase of the acceleration ramp
• During deceleration:
– Increase of the deceleration ramp:
• With increasing load and constant speed:
– When the current limit of the motor mode is reached:
Output frequency derating to 0 Hz.
– When the current limit in the generator mode is reached:
Increase of output frequency to max. frequency (C0011).
– Stopping of output frequency change if the load falls below the limit value.
– If suddenly a load is applied to the motor shaft (e.g. drive is blocked), the overcurrent switch-off can be activated
(error message OCX).
• With C0023 = 30 % and C0014 = -2-, -3-:
– With motor and generator overload (C0054 > C0022):
Output frequency derating to 0 Hz.
– Stopping of output frequency change if the load falls below the limit value.

Important • A correct current control in generator mode is only possible with a brake resistor.
• C0022 and C0023 refer to the rated output current at a chopper frequency of 8 kHz. (^ 3-4)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

7.3 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

7.3.1 Acceleration and deceleration times, S-ramps

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0012 Acceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Reference: frequency change 0 Hz ... C0011 ^ 7-14
main setpoint • Additional setpoint ð C0220
• Acceleration times to be activated via
digital signals ð C0101
C0013 Deceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Reference: frequency change C0011 ... 0 Hz
main setpoint • Additional setpoint ð C0221
• Deceleration times to be activated via
digital signals ð C0103
C0101 Acceleration times ^ 7-14
(A) main setpoint
1 C0012 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Binaryy codingg of the digital
g signal
g sources
2 Tir 1 2.50 assigned
i d under d C0410/27
C0410/2 andd C0410/28
determines active time pair
3 Tir 2 0.50
4 Tir 3 10.00
C0103 Deceleration times C0410/27 C0410/28 active
(A) main setpoint LOW LOW C0012;; C0013
1 C0013 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 HIGH LOW T ir 1; Tif 1
LOW HIGH T ir 2;
2 Tif 2
2 Tif 1 2.50
HIGH HIGH T iri 3; Tif 3
3 Tif 2 0.50
4 Tif 3 10.00
C0182* Integration time 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 50.00 • C0182 = 0.00: Linear ramp function ^ 7-14
S–ramps generator operation
• C0182 > 0.00: S-shaped ramp function
generator (smooth)
C0220* Acceleration time - 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Main setpoint ð C0012 ^ 7-14
additional setpoint C0220 individually adjustable in every
(PCTRL1-NADD) parameter set when using application-I/O
C0221* Deceleration time - 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Main setpoint ð C0013
additional setpoint C0221 individually adjustable in every
(PCTRL1-NADD) parameter set when using application-I/O

Function The acceleration and deceleration times determine the controller response after a setpoint change.
An adjustable transmission element (PT1) is connected after the ramp function generator (NSET1-RFG1). It is thus possible
to set a s-shaped reaction of the frequency setpoint. This function ensures absolutely smooth drive starts:
• C0182 = 0.00: Linear ramp function generator operation
• C0182 > 0.00: S-shaped ramp function generator operation (smooth)
Another 3 acceleration and deceleration times are available via terminals.

7-14 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

Adjustment • The acceleration and deceleration times refer to an output frequency change from 0 Hz to the max. output frequency
set under C0011.
• Calculate the times Tir and Tif which must be set under C0012 and C0013.
– t ir and tif are the times desired for the change between f1 and f2:

Tir = t ir ⋅ C0011 Tif = t if ⋅ C0011

f2 − f1 f2 − f1

Important • Under unfavourable operating conditions, too short acceleration and deceleration times can lead to the deactivation of
the controller with the indication of TRIP OC5. In these cases, the acceleratin and deceleration times should be short
enough that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching I max of the controller.
• C0182 is the same in all parameter sets.
• C0182 does not effect the additional setpoint (PCTRL1-NADD)
• Application example for S-ramps: ^ 13-15, setpoint summation (basic and additional load operation)

Special features • The ramp function generator input of the main setpoint can be set to 0 under C0410/6. The main setpoint decelerates
to 0 Hz along the deceleration ramp (C0013) as long as the function is active.
– With setpoint summation or in controlled operation the drive can continue to run.
• The ramp function generator of the main setpoint can be stopped under C0410/5 (NSET1-RFG1-STOP). The value of the
ramp function generator output remains the same as long as the function is active.

Linear ramp function generator S-shaped ramp function generator

f [H z ]

C 0 0 1 1
f2

f1
0
t ir t if t

T ir T if

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

7.3.2 Quick stop (QSP)

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0105 Deceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill ^ 7-16
quick stop (QSP) according to the deceleration time set under
C0105. If the output frequency falls below
the threshold C0019, the DC-injection brake
(DCB) will be activated.
Exception:
Lower frequency limit C0239 > 0 Hz:
Quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill
according to the deceleration time set under
C0105.

Function Quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill according to the deceleration time set under C0105.
If f falls below the threshold C0019, the DC-injection brake (DCB) will be activated. After the holding time (C0106) the
controller sets pulse inhibit (display: c). (^ 7-17)

Activation • C0410/4 ≠ 0:
– LOW level at signal source for QSP (invert level under C0411)
• C0469 = -2-: s must be pressed.
– Restart with u
• C0007 = -14- ... -22-, -34-, -47-:
– LOW level at X3/E3 and X3/E4
– HIGH level at X3/E3 and X3/E4 when switching the mains
• C0007 = -46-, -49-:
– LOW level at X3/E2
• C0007 = -2-, -4-, -8-, -9-, -13-, -30-, -31-, -32-, -36-, -37-, -40-, -43-, -45-:
– LOW level at X3/E3
• C0007 = -33-, -42-:
– LOW level at X3/E4

Important • Quick stop effects the mains setpoint and the additional setpoint.
• Quick stop does not effect the process controller.

7.3.3 Change of direction of rotation (CW/CCW)

Function Change of direction of motor rotation via digital control signals. The time required depends on the ramp times set for the
mains setpoint (deceleration time C0013, acceleration time C0012, and acceleration time S-ramps C0182).

Not failsafe change of the direction of rotation

Activation • C0007 = -0- ... -13-, -23-, -43-, -45-: Change via X3/E4.
• C0410/3 ≠ 0: Change via freely configurable signal source.
If all connections are correct in phase and all inputs are HIGH active, the result will be a
• CW rotation field at LOW level and a CCW rotation field at HIGH level.

Important • The drive can reverse the direction of rotation in the event of a control-voltage failure or an open circuit.
• Changes are only possible in the main setpoint.
Failsafe change of the direction of rotation
Activation • C0007 = -14- ... -22-, -34-, -47-: Failsafe change of direction of rotation via X3/E3, X3/E4.
• C0410/22 ≠ 0 and C0410/23 ≠ 0: Failsafe change via freely configurable signal source.
If all connections are correct in phase and all inputs are HIGH active, the result will be a
Function Signal source
Level for CW/QSP Level for CCW/QSP
CCW rotation LOW HIGH
CW rotation HIGH LOW
Quick stop LOW LOW
unchanged HIGH HIGH

Important • HIGH level at CW/QSP and CCW/QSP: The direction of rotation results from the signal active first.
• HIGH level when switching the mains on at CW/QSP and CCW/QSP: The controller activates quick stop (QSP).
• Changes are only possible in the main setpoint.

7-16 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

7.3.4 Braking without brake resistor

7.3.4.1 DC-injection brake (DCB)

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
¿ DC injection
C0035*¿ j brake -0- -0- Brake voltage selection under C0036 Holdingg time ð C0107 ^ 7-17
(DCB) controll mode
d -1- Brake current selection under C0036
C0036 Voltage/current à 0 {0.02 %} 150 % à depending on the controller
DCB • Reference Mr, Ir
• Setting applies to all mains voltages
permitted
C0107 Holding time DCB 999.00 1.00 {0.01 s} 999.00 Holding time, if DCB is activated via an ^ 7-17
= ∞ external terminal or control word.
¿ Activation of
C0196*¿ -0- -0- Auto-DCB active, if PCTRL1-SET3 < C0019 ^ 7-17
auto–DCB
DCB -1- Auto-DCB active, if PCTRL1-SET3 < C0019 and
NSET1-RFG1-IN < C0019
C0019 Threshold for 0.10 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Holding time ð C0106 ^ 7-17
automatic = not active Deactivate the automatic DC injection brake
DC-injection brake when the minimum frequency limit C0239 is
(Auto DCB) active!
C0106 Holding time auto 0.50 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.00 Holding time, if DCB is activated because the ^ 7-17
DCB = auto DCB not active = ∞ value falls below the setting in C0019.

Function The DC-injection brake enables quick deceleration of the drive to standstill without using an external brake resistor. The
DC-injection brake can be activated via terminal or automatically.
• The brake torque is lower than for braking in generator mode with external brake resistors.
– Possible brake torque: approx. 20 % ... 30 % of the rated motor torque.
• A brake voltage or a brake current can be selected.
• C0196 improves the motor starting behaviour when the automatic DC-injection brake is activated (e.g. for operation of
hoists).

Adjustment 1. Select under C0035 whether you want to use a brake voltage or brake current.
2. Enter the brake voltage or brake current in per cent under C0036.
– If C0035 = -0- the value indicated refers to the rated controller voltage.
– If C0035 = -1- the value indicated refers to the rated controller current.
3. Select how to activate the DC-injection brake:
– Via digital input signal (configuration with C0410/15)
– Automatically when the value falls below the threshold set under C0019 (condition: C0106 > 0.00 s)

Activation via input signal HIGH active inputs

Code HIGH level at Function
C0007 -17- X3/E1 DCB is active until X3/E1 = LOW.
-3-, -7-, -14-, 19 X3/E2 DCB is active until X3/E2 = LOW.
8215 / 8216 / 8217 / X3/E3 DCB is active until X3/E3 = LOW.
8218
-31-, -36-, -51- X3/E4 DCB is active until X3/E4 = LOW.
C0410/15 ≠0 Signal source DCB is active until signal source = LOW.
After the holding time (C0107) the controller sets pulse inhibit (display: c).
Automatic activation 1. Select the holding time >0.00 s under C0106:
– Automatic DC-injection brake is active for the time set. Afterwards, the controller sets pulse inhibit (display: c).
2. Select the input condition for automatic DC-injection braking under C0196:
– C0196 = -0-: DCB active if C0050 < C0019
– C0196 = -1-: DCB active if C0050 < C0019 and setpoint < C0019
3. Set the threshold under C0019:
– The threshold indicates when the DC-injection brake is activated.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping

Important • C0035 = -1-

– The DC brake current is directly set under C0036 (ref. to rated controller current).
• C0035 = -0-
– The DC brake current is indirectly set under C0036 (ref. to rated voltage) eingestellt.
• In the event of excessively long operation at high DC brake current the connected can be overheated!

Special features • Use C0019 to adjust the deadband in the setpoint. If you do not want the DC-injection to be activated for this, set C0106 =
0.00 s.
• C0019 can be related to a process variable ( ^ 7-52 ).

7.3.4.2 AC-motor braking

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0988* DC-bus voltage 0 0 {1 %} 200 • C0988 = 0 % ^ 7-10
threshold for – Parameter set changeover via DC-bus ^ 7-18
DC-bus voltage voltage deactivated
control • Changeover always between PAR1 and
PAR2
• Parameter set changeover via terminal,
bus or PC is not possible if C0988 > 0!

Function With the parameter set changeover in dependence of the DC-bus voltage, the AC motor braking can be used as alternative for
DC braking.
• The AC motor braking is a braking method without external brake resistor for the control mode “V/f-characteristic control
with linear characteristic” (C0014 = -2-)”.
• With mains voltages up to approx. AC 400 V shorter braking times can be reached as with the DC-injection brake.
• The braking times for braking via external brake resistor are approx. 33% shorter than for AC motor braking.

Configuration of the parameter Code PAR1 setting PAR2 setting Note

sets (active in normal (active in braking operation)
operation)
C0013/ Braking time required for AC Deceleration time of the drive with max. load • C0013 for braking along the
C0105 braking without getting the message OU (overvoltage) main setpoint ramp
during deleration. • C0105 for braking along the
QSP ramp
C0015 Value adapted to the drive, Depending on the drive power up to min. 25 % Thus the energy in the motor is
e.g. V/f vertex = 50 Hz of the value under C015 in PAR1: decreased by overexcitation in
• Rule of thumb: 2.2 kW ð 50 % PAR2.
• Decrease for lower drive power, increase for
higher drive power.
C0016 Value adapted to the drive, Depending on the drive power up to 500 % of Thus also in the lower speed
e.g. Vmin = 5 % the value under C0016 in PAR1: range, the energy in the motor is
• Rule of thumb: 2.2 kW ð factor 3 decreased by overexcitation in
• For lower drive power increse the factor, for PAR2.
higher power decrease it.
C0988 Threshold
Setting according to the mains voltage:
230 V, 400 V ð 112 %
440 V ð 123 %
460 V ð 129 %
480 V ð 134 %
500 V ð 140 %
Important • AC motor braking can only be used together with the control mode “V/f-characteristic control with linear characteristic”
(C0014 = -2-).
• Parameter set changeover is not possible via terminal, bus or PC if C988 > 0!
• The higher the mains voltage, the longer the deceleration time for AC braking must be set in PAR1, to fulfill the
requirements stated above. It is therefore possible to achieve shorter deceleration times with the DCB if the mains voltage
is high.
• C0988 is the same in all parameter sets.

7-18 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4 Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.1 Setpoint source selection

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0001↵ Setpoint source -0- • C0001 = 0 ... 3: The device can be ^ 7-19
selection (operating Setpoint source controlled via terminals or PC/keypad
mode) -0- Other sources as parameter channel/process data • Check the assignment of setpoint source
channel of AIF and analog signal under C0412
• AIF bus modules areare, for instance,
instance
-1- Parameter channel of an AIF bus module INTERBUS 2111, PROFIBUS-DP 2133,
System bus (CAN) 2171
2171, LECOM A/B/LI
-2- Other sources as parameter channel/process data 2102
channel of AIF
C0001 = 3 must be set to select a
-3- Process data channel of an AIF bus module setpoint
t i t viai a process ddatat channel
h l off an
AIF bus module! Otherwise the process
(AIF-IN.W1 or AIF-IN.W2)
data will not be evaluated!

Function Fixed setpoint source selection.

• C0001 = -0-, -2-: Setpoint source as described in the following. The setpoint source is assigned to the internal analog
signal under C0412.
• C0001 = -1-: Setpoint source is parameter channel of AIF. The freely configurable signals are “switched off” (C0412/x = 0
or 255). The setpoint must be written to the codes which are assigned to the signals (see signal flow charts or description
of C0412).
• C0001 = -3-: Setpoint source is parameter data channel of AIF. The setpoint is written to an AIF input word (AIF-IN.W1 or
AIF-IN.W2) geschrieben. The AIF input word must be assigned to the internal analog signal under C0412.

Important • With C0001 = -0-, -1- or -2- operation can start after the controller has been enabled.
• C0001 = 3 must be set to select a setpoint via a process data channel of an AIF bus module! Otherwise the process data
will not be evaluated.
• With C0001 = -3- quick stop (QSP) is set after mains switch-o.!
– PC: Deactivate QSP using the control word C0135, bit 3 = 0.
– Keypad: Set C0469 = -2-. u must be pressed.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.2 Analog setpoints via terminal

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0026* Offset analog input 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 • Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I ^ 7-20
1 (AIN1–OFFSET) • The max. limit of the setpoint value range
of C0034 equals 100 %
• C0026 and C0413/1 are identical
C0027* Gain analog input 1 100.0 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 • Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
(AIN1-GAIN) • 100.0 % = Gain 1
• Inverse setpoint selection by negative
gain and negative offset
• C0027 and C0414/1 are identical
C0034*¿ Setpoint selection Observe the switch position of the function ^ 7-20
range
g module!
S
Standard–I/O
/O (X3/8)
/ -0- -0- 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA
-1- 4 ... 20 mA
-2- -10 V ... +10 V • Minimum output frequency (C0010) not
effective
• Individual adjustment of offset and gain
-3- 4 ... 20 mA Open-circuit monitoring TRIP Sd5, if I < 4 mA
C0034*¿ Setpoint selection Observe the jumper setting of the function ^ 7-20
range module!
(A) Application I/O
1 X3/1U, X3/1I -0- -0- Voltage unipolar 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
2 X3/2U, X3/2I -1- Voltage bipolar -10 V ... +10 V Minimum output frequency (C0010) not
effective
-2- Current 0 ... 20 mA
-3- Current 4 ... 20 mA
-4- Current 4 ... 20 mA open-circuit monitored TRIP Sd5 if I < 4 mA
C0413* Offset analog inputs The max. limit of the setpoint value range of ^ 7-20
C0034 equals 100 %
1 AIN1-OFFSET 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
C0413/1 and C0026 are identical
2 AIN2-OFFSET 0.0 Setting for X3/2U, X3/2I
(application I/O only)
C0414* Gain analog inputs • 100.0 % = Gain 1
• Inverse setpoint selection by negative
gain and negative offset
1 AIN1-GAIN 100.0 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
C0414/1 and C0027 are identical
2 AIN2-GAIN 100.0 Setting for X3/2U, X3/2I
(application I/O only)

Function Selection and adjustment of analog signals via terminal as setpoint or actual value.

Activation configured Select a configuration suitable for the application under C0005.

Activation freely configured Assign an analog input terminal to the setpoint or actual value under C0412 (C0412/x = 1 or 4).

Adjustment 1. Selt the setpoint range under C0034.

2. Set the switch and jumper at the function module for the same range. Otherwise the setpoint signal cannot be interpreted
correctly.
– The setpoint signal is only evaluated in the setpoint range set (C0034), independently of the gain.
– The minimum output frequency (C0010) corresponds to 0 % setpoint signal.
– With offset ≠ 0 % and/or inverse setpoint selection the value can fall below the value set under C0010.
3. If necessary, adjust the gain (C0414)
– The gain always effects setpoint signal and offset.
– 100 % equals gain factor = 1.
4. If necessary, adjust the offset (C0413).
– An offset shifts the characteristic ( ^ 7-21 ).
– A deadband can be created using offset and C0239 (min. frequency limit).

7-20 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

Adjustment
Unipolar setpoint selection
f
Dead band
C0011

%
% 00
0 =1
20 in
= , Ga
n
ai 0%
G t=
fse
Of

%
= 50
Gain
Setpoint
0V 5V signal
Offset 0/4 mA 10 V
= +10 %
20 mA
10 kHz

Offset = -50 %

Inverse setpoint selection f

Deadband
C0011
Off
set
Of < -1
fse 00
t= %,
-10 gai
0% n>
,g -10
ain 0%
=-
O

10
ffs

0%
et
>
-1
00
%
,g
ai
n
<

0V
-1

Setpoint
00

0/4 mA signal
%

5V
10 V
20 mA
10 kHz

Bipolar setpoint selection f

C0011

%
0
10
=
ain
,g
%
0
t=
fse
Offset > 0 % Of

Setpoint
-10 V 10 V signal

Ga
in
<0
%
Dead-
band

-C0011

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

Example A dead band of + 2 V (= 20 %) is to be set for an inverset setpoint selection (0 ... +10 V). The output frequency is to be
inversed the higher the setpoint signal and is to reach - 30 % at setpoint +10 V.
Tip:
• P1 and P2 can be any point on a line.
• Please consider the signs in front of a value.
Gain calculation
f (P 2) − f (P 1)
Gain [%] = ⋅ 100 % = − 30 % − 100 % ⋅ 100 % = − 162.5 %
V (P 2) − V (P 1) 100 % − 20 %

Offset calculation
f (P2) [%]
Offset (P 2) [%] = ⋅ 100 % − V (P 2) [%] = − 30 % ⋅ 100 % − 100 % = − 81.5 %
gain [%] − 162.5 %

f
Deadband
C0011
(100 %) P1

0V Setpoint
(0 %) signal
+2V + 10 V
(20 %) (100 %)

-30 % P2

Calibration when using a process If, for instance, the control range of a pressure control is to be limited to a value lower than the rated sensor value Pr, the
controller effective pressure setpoint can be proportionally reduced under C0027, C0414).
Example:
• Actual pressure value via pressure sensor (Pr = 0 - 200 mbar) at X3/2U (C0412/5 = 4).
• Analog pressure setpoint via X3/1U (C0412/4 = 1).
• The maximum pressure is to be limited to 120 mbar. Reduce the effective pressure setpoint via the gain of the analog
input:
P1
C0414∕1 = ⋅ 100 % = 120 mbar ⋅ 100 % = 60 %
Pr 200 mbar

Important C0026, C0027, C0413 and C0414 are identical in all parameter sets.

7-22 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.3 Digital setpoints via frequency input

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
¿ Configuration
C0425¿* g -2- fr ∆fmin t fmax • fr = Normalisation frequency
q y ^ 7-23
f
frequency input
i -0- 100 Hz 1/200 1s 300 Hz – fr corresponds to C0011
single track X3/E1
-1- 1 kHz 1/200 100 msec 3 kHz
• ∆fmin = Resolution
R l ti
(DFIN1) • t = Scanning rate
-2- 10 kHz 1/200 10 msec 10 kHz – The lower the scanning rate the higher
-3- 10 kHz 1/1000 50 msec 10 kHz the dynamical response.
-4- 10 kHz 1/10000 500 msec 10 kHz • fmax = Maximum frequency
q y which can be
-5- (A) 100 kHz 1/400 2 msec 100 kHz processedd iindependently
d d tl off C0425
– Set C0425 that the frequency coming
-6- (A) 100 kHz 1/1000 5 msec 100 kHz from the encoder is lower than f max
-7- (A) 100 kHz 1/2000 10 msec 100 kHz at maximum motor speed
• Activate frequency
q y input
p with C0410/24
Configuration
g -10- (A) 100 Hz 1/200 1s 300 Hz =1
f
frequency input
i two • Adjust frequency input under C0426 and
-11- (A) 1 kHz 1/200 100 msec 3 kHz C0427
tracks X3/E1,
X3/E1 X3/E2
(DFIN1) -12- (A) 10 kHz 1/200 10 msec 10 kHz
-13- (A) 10 kHz 1/1000 50 msec 10 kHz
-14- (A) 10 kHz 1/10000 500 msec 10 kHz
-15- (A) 100 kHz 1/400 2 msec 100 kHz
-16- (A) 100 kHz 1/1000 5 msec 100 kHz
-17- (A) 100 kHz 1/2000 10 msec 100 kHz
C0426* Gain frequency 100 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 f (C0425) C0011 − f s
input X3/E1, X3/E2 C0426 = n r ⋅ ⋅ 100 %
max C0011
((A)) (DFIN1-GAIN)
( ) ⋅ inc∕rev
60 s

• nmax = Maximum process speed of motor

in min-1
• fs = Slip frequency in Hz
C0427* Offset frequency 0.0 -100.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
input X3/E1, X3/E2
(A) (DFIN1-OFFSET)
C0428* Gain frequency 100 0.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0
(A) output
(DFOUT1-OUT)
C0435*¿ Automatic 0 0 {1} 4096 • Only require for speed control with digital
adjustment = not active feedback via HTL encoder
(A) frequency input • Calculates the gain C0426, depending on
C0425 and C0011
• C0426 will be recalculated after every
change of C0011 or C0425.
• Always enter number of increments
divided by number of pole pairs of the
motor!
– Example: Encoder increments = 4096,
motor 4 poles
– C0435 = 2048

Function Selection and adjustment of a digital frequency as setpoint or actual value.

• 0 Hz ... 10 kHz at X3/E1 for operation with standard I/O
• 0 Hz ... 100 kHz at X3/E1 (single track) or at X3/E1 and X3/E2 (two tracks) for operation with application I/O

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

Activation configured 1. C0007 = -28- ... -45-, -48-, -49-, -50-, -51- configures X3/E1 as frequency input.
2. Selection configuration which evaluates the frequency input under C0005 (C0005 = -2-, -3-, -5-, -6-, -7-).

Activation freely configured 1. Assign the signal source ”frequency input” to the required setpoint or actual value under C0412 (C0412/x = 2).
2. Activate the frequency input under C0410/24 = 1.

Adjustment 1. Enter frequency, resolution, scanning time and type (single track, two tracks) of the setpoint signal (C0425).
2. Set the gain and ensure that the input frequency corresponds to the normalisation frequency at maximum process speed of
the motor (C0426).
– The gain always effects setpoint signal and offset.
– 100 % equals gain factor = 1( ^ 7-21 ).

Gain calculation f r (C0425) C0011 − f s fr (C0425) Normalisation frequency from C0425

C0426 = n max ⋅ ⋅ 100 % n Maximum process speed of the motor in min-1
⋅ inc∕rev C0011 max
60 s fs Slip frequency in Hz
inc/rev Pulses/revolution (encoder)
Calculate the slip frequency n rsyn − n r fr Rated frequency according to motor nameplate [Hz]
fs = fr ⋅ n rsyn nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
nr Rated speed to motor nameplate [min-1]
f r ⋅ 60 p Number of pole pairs
nrsyn = p

3. If necessary, adjust the offset (C0427).

– An offset shifts the characteristic ( ^ 7-21 ).

Tip • For higher accuracy requirements, select a higher resolution under C0425 taking into account the scanning time.
• The direction of rotation of the motor can be evaluated with a two track frequency signal.

Important • If you use X3/E1 or X3/E1 and X3/E2 as frequency inputs, you must ensure that the inputs are not connected to other digial
signals. These connections must be disconnected under C0410, otherwise the controller cannot interprete the setpoint
signal correctly. (^ 14-1 ff)
• C0010 (minimum output frequency) is not effective.

7-24 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.4 Setpoints via function ”Motor potentiometer”

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
¿ Configuration
C0265*¿ g motor -3- -0- Start value = power off • Start value: output
p frequency
q y which is ^ 7-25
potentiometer
t ti t -1- Start value = C0010 approached
h d with
ith Tir
Ti (C0012) when
h the
th
mains is switched on and the motor
-2- Start value = 0 potentiometer is activated:
-3- Start value = power off – ”Power off” = act. value if mains is off
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW – ”C0010”: min. output frequency from
C0010
-4- Start value = C0010
– ”0” = output frequency 0 Hz
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW
• C0265 = -3-
-3-, -4-,
-4- -5-:
-5- Start value = 0 – QSP reduces the motor potentiometer
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW along the QSP ramp (C0105)

Function Setpoint selection via two digital signals (UP/DOWN), which are controlled by means of,for instance, simple pushbuttons.
The output frequency in changed via the acceleration and deceleration times set for the main setpoint (C0012/C0013) or for
the additional setpoint (C0220/C0221).

Activation configured C0007 = -10-, -11-, -12-, -13-, -21-, -23-, -24-, -25-, -26-, -27-, -44-

Activation freely configured 1. UP and DOWN linked with external signal sources: C0410/7 (UP) ≠ 0 and C0410/8 (DOWN) ≠ 0
2. Assign the signal source ”Motor potentiometer” to the required setpoint under C0412 (C0412/x = 3). (^ 7-36)

Function UP DOWN
Decelerate setpoint to 0 Hz along QSP ramp LOW LOW
Decelerate the setpoint along the main setpoint ramp (C0013) LOW HIGH
to minimum output frequency (C0010).
(Setpoint must have been higher than value set under C0010)
Accelerate the setpoint along the main setpoint acceleration HIGH LOW
ramp (C0012) to maximum output frquency (C0011)
Setpoint remains constant HIGH HIGH

Examples Activation of the function “Motor potentiometer”, e. g. via NC contacts

E1 = ”DOWN”: Configuration with C0410/8 = 1
E2 = ”UP”: Configuration with C0410/7 = 2

E1 E2 E3 E4 20

STOP = LOW

Important • The function ”Motor potentiometer” usually requires an I/O module. It can however also be ussed with digital bus signals.
• Proceed as follows if the setpoint selection via motor potentiometer is used together with the function module standard I/O:
– Link the output signal MPOT1-OUT only with the signals NSET1-N1, NSET1-N2 or PCTRL1-NADD under C0412.
– Otherwise the setpoint will jump!
• JOG frequencies have priority over the function “Motor potentiometer”.
• The setpoint is saved
– when switching the mains (see C0265),
– when the controller is inhibited (CINH),
– when error messages occur
• C0265 = -3-, -4-, -5-:
– Activation of the QSP funcation at C0410/4 resets the motor potentiometer to 0 Hz along the QSP ramp (C0105).
• The additional setpoint is added when using the motor potentiometer function.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.5 Setpoints via JOG frequencies

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0037 JOG1 20.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 JOG = Setpoint
p ^ 7-26
C0038 JOG2 30.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Additional JOG frequencies ð C0440
C0039 JOG3 40.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0440 Additional JOG JOG = Setpoint ^ 7-26
(A) values Activation via configuration under C0410
1 JOG 1 20.00 -650.00 {0.02 Hz 650.00 C04401/1 and C0037 are the same
2 JOG 2 30.00 C04401/2 and C0038 are the same
3 JOG 3 40.00 C04401/3 and C0039 are the same
4 JOG 4 15.00
5 JOG 5 25.00
6 JOG 6 35.00
7 JOG 7 45.00

Function You can store up to three fixed setpoints per parameter set and retrieve them using digital input signals.
With the application I/O 7 fixed setpoints are available per parameter set.

Activation of 3 JOG values • Fixed configuration, activation via digital inputs:

– C0007 = -0- ... -6-, -9-, -14-, -15-, -16-, -20-, -22-, -28-, -29-, -30-, -35-, -37- ... -41-, -46-, -47-, -49-, -50-
• Free configuration, activation via digital input signals
– C0410/1 ≠ 0 and/or C0410/2 ≠ 0

HIGH active inputs

Setpoint input via Level at
NSET1-JOG1/3 NSET1-JOG2/3
other setpoint source LOW LOW
JOG 1 HIGH LOW
JOG 2 LOW HIGH
JOG 3 HIGH HIGH

Activation of 7 JOG values with • Free configuration, activation via digital input signals
application I/O – C0410/1 ≠ 0 and/or C0410/2 ≠ 0 and/or C0410/33 ≠ 0

HIGH active inputs

Setpoint input via Level at
NSET1-JOG1/3/5/7 NSET1-JOG2/3/6/7 NSET1-JOG4/5/6/7
other setpoint source LOW LOW LOW
JOG 1 HIGH LOW LOW
JOG 2 LOW HIGH LOW
JOG 3 HIGH HIGH LOW
JOG 4 LOW LOW HIGH
JOG 5 HIGH LOW HIGH
JOG 6 LOW HIGH HIGH
JOG 7 HIGH HIGH HIGH

Important • The setting under C0011 also limits the output frequency for JOG values.
• The setting under C0010 is not effective if the setpoints are selected through JOG values.
• JOG values have priority over NSET1-N1 and NSET1-N2.

Special features • You can relate the display value of the parameter to a process value. ( ^ 7-52 )
• The additional setpoint is added to JOG frequencies.

7-26 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.6 Setpoints via keypad

Function Setpoints can be selected using the keypad.

Adjustment 1. With w or x jump to j .

2. Set the setpoint using y or z
– If the controller is enabled, the changed setpoint has a direct effect on the drive.
– The setpoint is saved when the controller is inhibited. After the controller has been enabled, the drive accelerates or
decelerates to the setpoint set last.
– The keypad setpoint can be read and selected under C0140.

Important • Setpoints selected by means of the keypad are stored when the controller is disconnected from the mains or operation is
interrupted.
• The keypad setpoint is added to the main setpoint.
• Setpoint selection via j also influences NSET1-N1 and NSET1-N2.
– Setpoints can be individually set for NSET1-N1 and NSET-N2 under C0046 and C0044.
Set C0412/1 = 0 and C0412/2 = 0.
• Set C0140 = 0 if the setpoint is not selected under j .
• The drive can start again after controller enable!
• Observe the start conditions under C0142 ( ^ 7-9 ).

7.4.7 Setpoints via a bus system

Function Setpoints or actual values can be preselected for FIF by means of a bus function module or AIF by means of a bus module.
Detailed descriptions can be found in the corresponding Instructions.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-27

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Configuration of analog and digital setpoints and actual values

7.4.8 Setpoint changeover (manual/remote changeover)

Function • Changeover between the setpoints NSET1-N1 and NSET1-N2 (signal flow charts: ^ 14-1 ff).
• With manual/remote changeover (H/Re) it is for instance possible to change from remote operation to manual operation in
the event of setting or service at the drive.
– The remote source does not have to be changed for manual operation.
– In manual operation the setpoint is selected via potentiometer, motor potentiometer or keypad/PC.
• Examples for setpoint changeovers:
– Bus operation ó Keypad or PC
– Bus operation ó Analog setpoint via terminal
– Keypad or PC ó Analog setpoint via terminal
– Function “Motor potentiometer” ó Analog setpoint via terminal
– Analog setpoint via terminal ó Setpoint via frequency input
– Analog input 1 ó Analog input 2 (application I/O only)

Activation • Setpoint assignment for remote operation C0412/1.

• Setpoint assignment for manual operation C0412/2.
• C0410/17 (H/Re) signal source assignment.
• HIGH active inputs
– Manual operation active if signal source for H/Re = HIGH

Activation of ”bus operation ó 1. Internally invert a digital input (E5 or E6) not used with Lenze setting under C0411.
keypad or PC” 2. Assign this input C0410/17 (H/Re) to activate manual operation.
3. If the inversion of the digital input reset (C0411 = 0), remote operation will be active again.
Example:
• Invert X3/E6 with C0411 = -32-.
• Assign X3/E6 to the subcode C0410/17 with C0410/17 = 6.
• The setpoint can be selected under C0044 using the keypad or PC

Important • The safety functions controller inhibit (CINH) and quick stop (QSP) set in remote operation will be reset when manual
operation is being activated. Check whether the master system reactivates these functions after a changeover.
• JOG frequency are not effected by a manual/remote changeover.
• j Keypad changes effect NSET1-N1 and NSET-N2.
– Use C0046 (NSET1-N1) and C0044 (NSET1-N2) for separated setpoint selection.
• The keypad key s is not active in manual operation!

7-28 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Motor data entry/automatic detection

7.5 Motor data entry/automatic detection

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0084 Motor stator 0.000 0.000 {0.001 Ω} 64.000 ^ 7-29
resistance
C0087 Rated motor speed 1390 300 {1 rpm} 16000
C0088 Rated motor à 0.0 {0.1 A} 480.0 à depending on the controller
current 0.0 ... 2.0 x rated output current of the
controller
C0089 Rated motor 50 10 {1 Hz} 960
frequency
C0090 Rated motor à 50 {1 V} 500 à 230 V with 230 V controllers,
voltage 400 V with 400 V controllers
C0091 Motor cos j à 0.40 {0.1} 1.0 à depending on the controller

C0092 Motor stator 0.0 0.0 {0.1 mH} 2000.0

inductance
[C0148]* Motor parameter -0- -0- Ready Only when the motor is cold! ^ 7-29
identification 1. Inhibit controller, wait until drive is in
standstill
2 Enter the correct motor data under
2.
-1- Start identification C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
• V/f rated frequency (C0015), slip (see motor nameplate).
compensation (C0021) and motor stator 3. C0148 = set 1 by v
inductivity (C0092) are calculated and saved. 4. Enable controller
• The motor stator resistance (C0084) = total The identification
resistance of motor cable and motor is – starts, c Off
measured and saved – takes approx. 30 s
– is completed when c is on again
5. Controller inhibit

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-29

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Motor data entry/automatic detection

Function Entire detection of motor data and motor cable influences.

Must be done before the first commissioning of vector control (C0014 = -4-) or sensorless torque control (C0014 = -5-).
Otherwise commissioning is not possible.

Adjustment 1. Inhibit the controller. And wait until the drive is in standstill.
2. Enter C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090 and C0091 of your motor (see nameplate):
– It is absolutely necessary to enter correct data since important parameters such as slip compensation, idle running
current and I 2t monitoring are based on these values.
– Enter rated motor current (C0088) and rated motor voltage (C0090) according to the connection type (star or delta).
3. Select C0148 = -1- and confirm with v.
4. Enable controller. Identification starts (green controller LED blinking quickly).
– The motor stator resistance is measured and stored under C0084.
– The motor stator inductance is calculated from the data entered and stored under C0092.
– The V/f rated frequency is calculated and stored under C0015.
– The slip is calculated and stored under C0021.
– The identification takes approx. 30 s.
– Identification is completed when the green controller LED comes on (keypad, GDC: c is active).
5. Inhibit the controller.

Important • Ensure that the motor is cold when the identification is started!
– During identification current flow via the controller outputs U, V.
– The load machine can remain connected. Holding brakes can remain in their braking position.
– With idling motors a small angle shift can occur at the motor shaft.
• The motor data are corrected automatically during operation (max. ±25 %) to compensate for temperature fluctuations.
– The values under C0084 and C0092 calculated by C0148 become active after mains switching.
• The values under C0084 and C0092 can be manually entered or corrected.
• Only the parameter set activated via the digital input signals will be identified.
– If you want to detect motor data for any other parameter set, this parameter set must be activated via digital input
signals before it can be identified.

Tip The motor parameter identification influences the smooth running behaviour. The smooth running behaviour at low speeds can
be improved with the control mode V/f characteristic control with constant V min boost (C0014 = -2- or -3-).

7-30 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Process controller, current limitation controller

7.6 Process controller, current limitation controller

7.6.1 PID controller as process controller

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0070 Process controller 1.00 0.00 {0.01} 300.00 ^ 7-31
gain = P component not
active
C0071 Process controller 100 10 {1} 9999
readjustment time = I component not
active
C0072 Differential 0.0 0.0 {0.1} 5.0
component of = D component not
process controller active
C0074 Process controller 0.0 0.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
influence
¿ Frequency
C0238¿ q y -2- -0- No precontrol (only process controller) Process controller has full influence ^ 7-31
precontroll -1- Precontrol (total setpoint + process controller) Process controller has limited influence ^ 7-33
-2- No precontrol (only total setpoint) Process controller has no influence (not
active)
Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) = Main
setpoint + additional setpoint

Function Control of pressure, temperature, flow rate, humidity, level, dancer position, speed ...
The process controller requires a setpoint and an actual value (e.g. from a sensor). If setpoint and actual value are selected as
analog values (potiometer, PLC), the controller must be equipped with an application I/O to build up a control circuit.

Adjustment C0071 Resulting readjustment time Tr

10 ... 5000 10 ms ... 5000 ms
5000 ... 6000 5 s ... 10 s
6000 ... 7000 10 s ... 100 s
7000 ... 8000 100 s ... 1000 s
8000 ... 9998 1000 s ... 9998 s

The values in the following table are to be understood as guide values. Fine adjustment is always necessary.
Set C0070, C0071 and C0072 that the target value is
• reached quickly
• with minimum overshooting
when the setpoints and actual values are changed

Guide values for pressure control • The differential component KD (C0072) is usually not required for pressure and flow rate control (C0072 = 0).
and flow rate • Set the influence (C0074) to 100 %.
• Deactivate the frequency precontrol (C0238 = -0-)
Code Gases Liquids
C0070 (KP) 0.1 0.02 ... 0.1
C0071 (Tr) 5000 200 ... 1000
(Tr = 5 s) (Tr = 0.2 s ... 1 s)
C0072 (KD ) 0 0

Guide values for speed control See the application example “Speed control” ( ^ 13-9 ).

Code
C0070 (KP) 5
C0071 (Tr) 100
(Tr = 0.1 s)
C0072 (KD ) 0

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-31

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Process controller, current limitation controller

PID controller influence (C0074) When you use process control with frequency precontrol (C0238 = -1-), e. g. speed control, the control factor is important.
• The control factor is calculated from the difference of the values under C0050 (output frequency) and C0051 (actual
process controller value).
• The control factor determines the influence (C0074) of the process controller
• The influence (C0074) refers to the maximum output frequency (C0011).
• C0074 influences the control circuit stability. C0074 should be set to a value as low as possible.

Calculate influence C0074 [%]:

Influence [%] = C0050 − C0051 ⋅ 100 %
C0011
Example:
The influence is to be calculated for the following values:
C0011 = 50 Hz, C0050 = 53 Hz, C0051 = 50 Hz

6 % = 53 Hz − 50 Hz ⋅ 100 %
50 Hz
• Set the influence that the process controller output covers the calculated value in every operating point.
– With this example (influence = 6 %) set C0074 = 10 %. This is a guide value including tolerances which must always be
taken into consideration.
• If the influence (C0074) is too high, the control circuit can become unstable.
Additive influence of the pprocess Conditions: Example: Dancer control with additive influence of the process controller
controller
ll • C0051 = Positive actual value Function:
• C0181 = Select positive setpoint V1 V2 1. The dancer deflects to the
• C0238 = -1- (with frequency bottom. The dancer voltage
precontrol) (VT ) becreases.
• Potentiometer connections of the 2. V2 increases.
dancer
– End (E) = +10 V
– Beginning (A) = GND +10 V I
The direction of control action of the S
process controller is added to the main M
setpoint. O 3~
VT
3

8200
0 V ... 10 V
~ V1

Subtractive influence of pprocess Conditions: Example: Dancer control with substractive influence of the process controller
controller
ll • C0051 = Positive actual value Function:
• C0181 = Select positive setpoint V1 V2 1. The dancer deflects to the
• C0238 = -1- (with frequency bottom. The dancer voltage
precontrol) (VT ) increases.
• Potentiometer connections of the 2. V1 decreases.
dancer
– End (E) = +10 V
– Beginning (A) = GND O
The direction of control action of the S
process controller output is subtracted M
from the main setpoint. 3~ I +10 V

3 VT

8200
0 V ... 10 V
~ V2

7-32 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Process controller, current limitation controller

7.6.1.1 Setpoint selection for the process controller

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0138* Process controller 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection if C0412/4 = FIXED-FREE ^ 7-33
setpoint 1 • Display if C0412/4 ≠ FIXED-FREE
(PCTRL1-SET1) The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0181* Process controller 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 ^ 7-33
setpoint 2
(PCTRL1-SET2)
¿ Process controller
C0145*¿ -0- -0- Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) Main setpoint + additional setpoint ^ 7-33
setpoint
i source -1- C0181 (PCTRL1-SET2) • Setpoint selection not possible via
– JOG values
– j function of the keypad
– C0044, C0046 and C0049
– in connection with manual/remote
-2- C0412/4 (PCTRL1-SET1) changeover, skip frequencies, ramp
function generator, additional setpoint
• Activate the automatic DC-injection brake
(auto DCB) with C0019 = 0 or C0106 = 0

Function Selection of a frequency setpoint, e.g. for

• the dancer position for a dancer control in a line drive,
• the pressure setpoint in a pressure control.

Activation C0145 = -0-

• ^ 7-19 ff., possible setpoint selections
– Process controller setpoint = Precontrol value PCTRL1-SET3
C0145 = -1-
• Setpoint for process controller = Value under C0181.
– Applications are e.g. dancer controls, pressure and flow rate controls
C0145 = -2-
• Setpoint for process controller = Freely configured signal via C0412/4.
– The setpoint directly effects the process controller
– Selection also possible under C0138 (like C0181)

Tip Select C0145 = 0 if the setpoint is to be selected via:

• JOG values
• j function of the keypad
• in connection with manual/remote changeover, skip frequencies, ramp function generator, additional setpoint
• C0044, C0046 and C0049.

Important • Select C0145 = 0 if the setpoint is to be selected via:

– JOG values
– j function of the keypad
– C0044, C0046 and C0049.
– in connection with manual/remote changeover, skip frequencies, ramp function generator, additional setpoint
• C0145 = -1- or -2-:
– Activate the automatic DC-injection brake (auto DCB) with C0019 = 0 or C0106 = 0
• C0181 is the same in all parameter sets.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-33

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Process controller, current limitation controller

7.6.1.2 Actual value selection for the process controller

Function The actual value is the process feedback signal (e. g. from a pressure or speed encoder).

Activation C0412/5 ≠ 0 C0051

Freely configured signal = Act. process controller value Actual process controller value display (PCTRL1-ACT)

7.6.1.3 Integral action component switch-off (PCTRL1-I-OFF)

Function The process controller output sends the difference between setpoint and actual value, if necessary use gain VP.
• Thus overcontrolled starting and stopping can be avoided. When the controller is operating normally, the integral action
component KI can be connected.
• Application: e.g. dancer position control
Activation via terminal C0007 = -28- ... -34-, -48-, -50-, -51-: C0410/18 ≠ 0:
HIGH level at X3/E2 HIGH level at C0410/18.
The signal level is indicated for not inverted input signals.

Activation via frequency C0184 > 0.0 Hz

threshold

7.6.1.4 Process controller switch-off (PCTRL1-OFF)

Function The process controller output does not send signals as long as this function is active.

Activation C0007 = -48-, -49-, -50-: C0410/19 ≠ 0:

HIGH level at X3/E4 HIGH level at C0410/19.
The signal level is indicated for not inverted input signals.

7.6.1.5 Process controller stop (PCTRL1-STOP)

Function The process controller output value is frozen when the function is activated. The value remains unchanged as long as the
function is not active.

Activation C0410/21 ≠ 0:
HIGH level at C0410/21.
The signal level is indicated for not inverted input signals.

7-34 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Process controller, current limitation controller

7.6.2 Current limitation controller (Imax controller)

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0077* Gain Imax controller 0.25 0.00 {0.01} 16.00 ^ 7-35
= P component not
active
C0078* Integral action time 65 12 {1 ms} 9990
Imax controller = I component not
active

Function The Imax controller is adjustable for controlling high moments of inertia.

Adjustment The Imax controller is factory set to stability.

Settings for controlling high moment of inertia:
• C0014 = -2- or C0014 = -3- (V/f characteristic control)
• V P (C0077): ≈ 0.06
• T i (C0078): ≈ 750 ms

Important C0077 and C0078 are the same for all parameter sets.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-35

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

7.7 Free connection of analog signals

7.7.1 Free configuration of analog input signals

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0412↵ Free configuration A selection made under C0005, C0007 ^ 7-36
of analog input Connection between external analog signal will be copied to the corresponding
signals sources and internal analog signals subcode of C0412. A change of C0412
Analog signal source sets C0005 = -255-, C0007 = -255-!
1 Setpoint 1 1 0 not assigned (FIXED-FREE) or selection via Either NSET1-N1 or Parameter
(NSET1–N1) 255 keypad or parameter channel of an AIF bus NSET1-N2 active channel:
module Changeover with C0410/17 C0046
2 Setpoint 2 1 1 X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I (AIN1-OUT) Parameter
(NSET1-N2) channel:
C0044
3 Additional setpoint 255 2 Frequency input (DFIN1-OUT) Is added to NSET1-N1, NSET1-N2, JOG
(PCTRL1-NADD) (Observe C0410/24, C0425, C0426, C0427) values and the function j of the keypad
Parameter channel: C0049
4 Process controller 255 3 Motor potentiometer (MPOT1-OUT)
setpoint 1 4 X3/2U, X3/2I (AIN2-OUT, application I/O only)
(PCTRL1-SET1)
5 Act. process 255 5 ... 9 Input signal = constantly 0 (FIXED0) Parameter channel: C0051, if C0238 = 1, 2
controller value
(PCTRL1-ACT)
6 Torque setpoint or 255 10 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Observe C0014! Actual Parameter
torque limit value 11 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) torque values not required. channel:
(MCTRL1-MSET) (Only evaluated if C0001 =3!) 16384 ≡ 100 % torque C0047
setpoint
Condition for selection via
terminal (C0412/6 = 1, 2
oder 4): Analog input gain is
set to
C0414/x, C0426 =
32768/C0011 [%]
7 Reserved 255 20 ... 23 CAN-IN1.W1 ... W4/FIF-IN.W1 ... W4
Word 1 (20) ... word 4 (23)
8 MCTRL1-VOLT-ADD 255 30 ... 33 CAN-IN2.W1 ... W4 Only for special applications. Modifications
Word 1 (24) ... word 4 (27) onlyy when agreed
g on byy Lenze!
9 MCTRL1-PHI-ADD 255 200 Word-by-word assignment of signals from the
function module INTERBUS or PROFIBUS to FIF
(see C0005)

Function • Internal analog signals can be freely assigned to external analog signal sources:
– Analog inputs (X3/8, X3/1U, X3/2U, X3/1I, X3/2I)
– Frequency input
– Function “Motor potentiometer”
– Analog process data input words
• Examples:
– C0412/1 = 2: Signal source for setpoint 1 (NSET1-N1) is the frequency input
– C0412/5 = 23: Signal source for the actual process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT) is CAN-IN1/word 4
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets.

Important • The process data input words CAN-IN1.W1, CAN-IN1.W2, CAN-IN2.W1 and CAN-IN2.W2 can be defined as analog
word or as digital word (16 bit). If you link them with internal analog signals (C0412/x = 20, 21 or 30, 31), they
must be defined as analog input words. Otherwise the controller cannot interprete the signal correctly.
• C0412 can be different for the parameter sets.

Special features Use C0005 to configure some of the signal sources for analog inputs. The corresponding subcodes of C0412 will be adapted
automatically.

7-36 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

7.7.2 Free configuration of analog output signals

7.7.2.1 Configuration of analog outputs

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0419¿ Free configuration Analog signal output to terminal • The selection made under C0111 is ^ 7-37
of analog outputs copied to C0419/1. A change of
C0419/1 sets C0111 = 255!
• C0419/2, C0419/3 only active in
operation with application–I/O
Analog signal source • DFOUT1: 50 ... 10 kHz
1 X3/62 (AOUT1-IN) 0 0 Output frequency (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
2 X3/63 (AOUT2-IN) 2 1 Controller load (MCTRL1-MOUT) 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated motor torque
with vector control (C0014 = 4), otherwise
rated active inverter current (active
current/C0091)
3 X3/A4 (DFOUT1-IN) 3 2 Apparent motor current (MCTRL1-IMOT) 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated inverter current
3 DC-bus voltage (MCTRL1-DCVOLT) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ DC 1000 V
(400 V- mains
6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ DC 380 V
(230 V mains)
4 Motor power 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated motor power
5 Motor voltage (MCTRL1-VOLT) 4.8 V/9.6 mA/4.68 kHz ≡ Rated motor
voltage
6 1/output frequency (1/C0050) (MCTRL1-1/NOUT) 2 V/4 mA/1.95 kHz ≡ 0.5 × C0011
7 Output frequency with limits 0 V/0 mA/4 mA/0 kHz ≡ f = fmin (C0010)
(NSET1-C0010...C0011) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ f = fmax (C0011)
8 Operation with process controller (C0238 = 0, 1): 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
Operation without process controller (C0238 = 2):
Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
9 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY) Selection -9- ... -25- corresponds
p to the
10 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP) digital functions of the relay output K1
(C0008) or the digital output A1 (C0117):
11 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
LOW = 0 V/0 mA/4 mA/ 0 kHz
12 Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW) HIGH = 10 V/20 mA/10 kHz
13 Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
14 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
15 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
16 Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
17 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
18 Overtemperature (Jmax - 5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
19 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) active
(DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP)
20 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
23 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
24 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
25 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-37

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0419¿ Free configuration
g Analog signal output to terminal ^ 7-37
of analog outputs Analog signal source
( t)
(cont.) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
27 Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
28 Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
29 Process controller setpoint (PCTRL1-SET1) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
30 Process controller output (PCTRL1-OUT)
31 Ramp function generator input (NSET1-RFG1-IN)
32 Ramp function generator output (NSET1-NOUT)
33 (A) PID controller output (PCTRL1-PID-OUT)
34 (A) Process controller output (PCTRL1-NOUT)
35 Input signal at X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I, 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ Maximum value
evaluated with gain (C0414/1 or C0027) and analog input signal (5 V, 10 V, 20 mA,
offset (C0413/1 or C0026) (AIN1-OUT) 10 kHz))
36 Input signal at frequency input X3/E1, C diti Gain
Condition: G i off analog
l input
i t or frequency
f
input set to:
evaluated with gain (C0426) and offset (C0427)
(DFIN1-OUT) C0414/x, C0426 = 100 %
37 Motor potentiometer output (MPOT1-OUT)
38 Input signal at X3/2U, X3/2I,
evaluated with gain (C0414/2) and offset
(C0413/2) (AIN2-OUT)
40 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Setpoint to drive from communication
module to AIF
41 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) 10 V/20 mA/10 kHz ≡ 1000
50 ... 53 CAN-IN1.W1 ... 4 oder FIF-IN.W1 ... FIF-IN.W4 Setpoints to drive from function module to
Word 1 (50) ... word 4 (53) FIF
60 ... 63 CAN-IN2.W1 ... 4 10 V/20
/ mA/10 / kHz ≡ 1000
Word 1 (60) ... word 4 (63)
255 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE)
C0108* Gain analog output 128 0 {1} 255Standard I/O: C0108 and C0420 are the ^ 7-37
X3/62 same
(AOUT1-GAIN) Application I/O: C0108 and C0420/1 are the
same
C0109* Offset analog 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 Standard I/O: C0109 and C0422 are the
output X3/62 same
(AOUT1-OFFSET) Application I/O: C0109 and C0422/1 are the
same
C0420* Gain analog output 128 0 {1} 255 128 ≡ Gain 1 ^ 7-37
X3/62 C0420 and C0108 are the same
(AOUT1-GAIN)
Standard I/O
C0420* Gain analog outputs 128 ≡ Gain 1
Application I/O
(A)
1 X3/62 128 0 {1} 255 C0420/1 and C0108 are the same
(AOUT1-GAIN)
2 X3/63
(AOUT2-GAIN)
C0422* Offset analog 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 C0422 and C0109 are the same ^ 7-37
output X3/62
(AOUT1-OFFSET)
Standard I/O
C0422* Offset analog
outputs
(A) Application I/O
1 X3/62 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 C0422/1 and C0109 are the same
(AOUT1-OFFSET)
2 X3/63
(AOUT2-OFFSET)

7-38 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0424*¿ Output signal range Observe the jumper setting of the function
- analog outputs module!
(A) Application–I/O ((as of version application-I/O
pp
1 X3/62 (AOUT1) -0- -0- 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA E82ZAFA ... VVx11)
11)
2 X3/63 (AOUT2) -0- -1- 4 ... 20 mA

Function • Analog process or monitoring signals can be freely assigned to the analog outputs (X3/62, X3/63) and the frequency output
(X3/A4).
• Currents can also be output when using the application I/O.
– Range: 0 ... 20 mA, as of software version 1.1 also 4 ... 20 mA
– Seting via jumper at module and C0424
• Examples:
– C0419/1 = 51: Assigns X3/62 to the process data word CAN-IN2/word 2.
– C0419/3 = 14: Assigns X3/A4 to the monitoring message “Output frequency = 0”.
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets.

Adjustment C0108 or C0420:

• 128 equals an output signal of 6 V or 12 mA (Lenze setting) at X3/62 or X3/63.

Level with Lenze setting Selection Signal Level

0 Output frequency 6 V, if output frequency = C0011
1 Controller load 3 V, if C0056 = 100 %
2 Apparent motor current 3 V, if C0054 = rated controller current
3 DC-bus voltage 6 V at 1000 V DC (with 3 AC/400 V)
4 Motor power 3 V at rated power, Pr = C0052 * C0056
5 Motor voltage 4.8 V at C0052 = 400 V (with 3 AC/400 V)
6 1/output frequency 2.5 V, if C0011 = 50 Hz, C0050 = 20 Hz
7 C0010 ... C0011 Ausgangsspannung [V] = 6, 00 V ⋅ f − C0011
C0011 − C0010
8 Actual process controller value 6 V, if C0051 = max. output frequency

Important • The process data input words CAN-IN1.W1/FIF-IN.W1, CAN-IN1.W2/FIF-IN.W2, CAN-IN2.W1 and CAN-IN2.W2 can
be defined as analog word or digital word (16 bit). If you link them with analog outputs (C0419/x = 50, 51 or 60,
61), they must be defined as analog input words. Otherwise the output signal would be incorrect.
• Selection 0 and 7: Output with slip compensation
• Selection 8:
– Output frequency without slip compensation (C0412/5 = 0), e.g. with setpoint cascades
– Actual process controller value (C0412/5 ≠ 0)
• C0419 can be different for the parameter sets.

Special features • Use C0111 to assign monitoring messages to the analog output X3/62. C0419/1 is automatically adapted.
• Selection 9 ... 25 corresponds to the relay output functions of C0008:
– LOW = 0 V or 0/4 mA
– HIGH = 10 V or 20 mA

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-39

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

Tip for selection 6 The analog signal is reciprocal to the output frequency. This signal can be used for the time indication (e.g. machining time of
a product).

Example: Output signal = 0 ... 10 V

C0011 [Hz]
Output voltage [V] = 1.00 V ⋅ ⋅ C0108
C0050 [Hz] 128
6.00

5.00

4.00 C0108 or C0420 = 128

Output voltage [V]

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
f [Hz]

7-40 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

7.7.2.2 Free configuration of analog process data output words

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0421¿ Free configuration • With Lenze setting, CAN-OUT1.W1 and ^ 7-41
analog process FIF-OUT.W1 are defined as digital
data output words outputs and the 16-bit controller
status word 1 (C0417) is assigned to
them.
• If you want to output analog values
(C0421/3 ≠ 255), the digital
assignment must be deleted
Output of analog signals on bus (C0417/x = 255)! Otherwise the output
Analog signal source signal would be incorrect.
1 AIF-OUT.W1 8 0 Output frequency with slip (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP) 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
2 AIF-OUT.W2 0 1 Controller load (MCTRL1-MOUT) 16383 ≡ Rated motor torque with vector
control (C0014 = 4), otherwise rated active
inverter current (active current/C0091)
3 CAN-OUT1.W1 / 255 2 Apparent motor current (MCTRL1-IMOT) 16383 ≡ Rated inverter current
FIF-OUT.W1
4 CAN-OUT1.W2 / 255 3 DC-bus voltage (MCTRL1-DCVOLT) 16383 ≡ 1000 VDC at 400 V mains
FIF-OUT.W2 16383 ≡ 380 VDC at 230 V mains
5 CAN-OUT1.W3 / 255 4 Motor power 285 ≡ Rated motor power
FIF-OUT.W3
6 CAN-OUT1.W4 / 255 5 Motor voltage (MCTRL1-VOLT) 16383 ≡ Rated motor voltage
FIF-OUT.W4
7 CAN-OUT2.W1 255 6 1/output frequency (1/C0050) (MCTRL1-1/NOUT) 195 ≡ 0.5 × C0011
8 CAN-OUT2.W2 255 7 Output
p frequency
q y with limits 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
(NSET1 C0010 C0011)
(NSET1-C0010...C0011)
0 ≡ f < C0010
24000 ⋅ (f − C0010)
≡ f ≥ C0010
480 Hz
9 CAN-OUT2.W3 255 8 Operation with process controller (C0238 = 0, 1): 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
10 CAN-OUT2.W4 255 Operation without process controller (C0238 = 2):
Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
9 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY) Selection -9- ... -25- corresponds
p to the
10 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP) di i l functions
digital f i off the
h relay
l output K1
(C0008) or the digital output A1 (C0117):
11 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
LOW = 0 V/0 mA/4 mA
12 Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW) HIGH = 10 V/20 mA
13 Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
14 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
15 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
16 Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
17 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
18 Overtemperature (Jmax -5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
19 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) (DCTRL1-IMP)
20 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
23 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
24 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-41

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of analog signals

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0421¿ Free configuration Output of analog signals on bus ^ 7-41
analogg pprocess Analog signal source
(cont.) data
d t output
t t words
d 25 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)
27 Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT) 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
28 Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
29 Process controller setpoint (PCTRL1-SET1)
30 Process controller output (PCTRL1-OUT)
31 Ramp function generator input (NSET1-RFG1-IN)
32 Ramp function generator output (NSET1-NOUT)
33 (A) PID controller output (PCTRL1-PID-OUT)
34 (A) Process controller output (PCTRL1-NOUT)
35 Input signal at X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I, 1000 ≡ Maximum value analog input signal
evaluated with gain (C0414/1 or C0027) and (5 V, 10 V, 20 mA, 10 kHz)
offset (C0413/1 or C0026) (AIN1-OUT) Condition: Gain of analogg input
p or frequency
q y
36 Input signal at frequency input X3/E1, i t sett to:
input t
evaluated with gain (C0426) and offset (C0427) C0414/x, C0426 = 20/C0011 [%]
(DFIN1-OUT)
37 Motor potentiometer output (MPOT1-OUT)
38 Input signal at X3/2U, X3/2I,
evaluated with gain (C0414/2) and offset
(C0413/2) (AIN2-OUT)
40 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Setpoint to drive from communication
module to AIF
41 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) Normalisation via AIF
50 ... 53 CAN-IN1.W1 ... 4 oder FIF-IN.W1 ... FIF-IN.W4 Setpoints to controller from CAN or function
Word 1 (50) ... word 4 (53) module to FIF
60 ... 63 CAN-IN2.W1 ... 4 Normalisation via CAN
C or FIF
Word 1 (60) ... word 4 (63)
255 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE)

Function • Analog process or monitoring signals can be freely assigned to the analog output words.
• Examples:
– C0421/3 = 5: Assigns CAN-OUT1/word1 to the monitoring signal “Motor voltage” zu.
– C0421/8 = 61: Assigns CAN-OUT2/word 2 to the process data input word CAN-IN2/word 2.
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets.

Important • The process data output words CAN-OUT1.W1/FIF-OUT.W1, CAN-OUT2.W1 and FIF-OUT.W2 can also be assigned to
C0417 and C0418 with 16-bit status information each:
– If digitally configured under C0417 or C0418 not simultaneous analog assignment with C0421 (C0421/x = 255)!
– With analog configuration under C0421 no simultaneous digital assignment with C0417 and C0418
(C0417/x = 255, C0418/x = 255)!
– Otherwise the output signal would be incorrect.
• The process data input words CAN-IN1.W1/FIF-IN.W1, CAN-IN1.W2/FIF-IN.W2, CAN-IN2.W1 and CAN-IN2.W2 can
be defined as analog word or digital word (16 bit). If you link them with analog process data output words
(C0421/x = 50, 51 oder 60, 61), they must be defined as analog input words. Otherwise the output signal would
be incorrect.
• C0421 can be different for the parameter sets.

7-42 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

7.8 Free connection of digital signals, message output

7.8.1 Free configuration of digital input signals

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0410¿ Free configuration • A selection made under C0007 is ^ 7-43
of digital input Linkage of external signal sources to internal copied to the corresponding subcode
signals digital signals of C0410. A change of C0410 sets
Digital signals source C0007 = -255-!
1 NSET1-JOG1/3 1 0 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE) Selection of fixed setpoints
NSET1-JOG1/3/5/7 255 C0410/1 C0410/2 active
(A) C0410/33 C0046
LOW LOW LOW JOG1
2 NSET1-JOG2/3 2 1 ... 6 Digital inputs X3/E1 ... X3/E6 (DIGIN1 ... 6) HIGH LOW LOW JOG2
NSET1-JOG2/3/6/7 X3/E1 (1) ... X3/E6 (6) LOW HIGH LOW ...
(A) E5, E6 only application I/O ... ... ... JOG7
HIGH HIGH HIGH
3 DCTRL1-CW/CCW 4 7 PTC input (X2.2/T1, X2.2/T2) CW = CW rotation LOW
CCW = CCW rotation HIGH
4 DCTRL1-QSP 255 10 ... 25 AIF control word (AIF-CTRL)
( ) Quick stop (via terminal LOW active)
5 NSET1-RFG1-STOP 255 Bit 0 (10) ... bit 15 (25) Ramp function generator main setpoint stop
6 NSET1-RFG1-0 255 30 ... 45 CAN-IN1.W1/FIF-IN.W1 Ramp function generator input must be set
Bit 0 (30) ... bit 15 (45) ”0” for mains setpoint
7 MPOT1-UP 255 Motor ppotentiometer functions
8 MPOT1-DOWN 255 50 ... 65 CAN-IN1.W2/FIF-IN.W2
9 Reserved 255 Bit 0 (50) ... bit 15 (65)
10 DCTRL1-CINH 255 Controller inhibit (via terminal LOW active)
11 DCTRL1-TRIP-SET 255 70 ... 85 CAN-IN2.W1 External error (via terminal LOW active)
12 DCTRL1-TRIP-RESE 255 Bit 0 (70) ... bit 15 (85) Error reset
T
13 DCTRL1-PAR2/4 255 90 ... 105 CAN-IN2.W2 Parameter set changeover
Bit 0 (90) ... bit 15 (105) (if C0988 = 0)
if C0410/13 and C0410/14 use the same
source in all parameter sets. Otherwise it
is not possible to change between the
parameter sets.
14 DCTRL1-PAR3/4 255 C0410/13 C0410/14 active
LOW LOW PAR1
HIGH LOW PAR2
LOW HIGH PAR3
HIGH HIGH PAR4
15 MCTRL1-DCB 3 200 Bit-by-bit
y assignment
g of the FIF control words DC-injection brake
16 (A) PCTRL1-RFG2- 255 (FIF CTRL1 FIF-CTRL2)
(FIF-CTRL1, FIF CTRL2) from
f the
h function
f i module
d l Actual process controller value
LOADI INTERBUS or PROFIBUS-DP (see C0005) (PCTRL1-ACT) must be connected to process
controller ramp function generator
(PCTRL1-RFG2)
17 DCTRL1-H/Re 255 Manual/remote changeover
18 PCTRL1-I-OFF 255 Switch off I-component of the process
controller
19 PCTRL1-OFF 255 Process controller switch off
20 Reserved 255
21 PCTRL1-STOP 255 Process controller stop (value ”frozen”)
22 DCTRL1-CW/QSP 255 Failsafe change
g of the direction of rotation
23 DCTRL1-CCW/QSP 255
24 DFIN1-ON 255 0 = Frequency input not active
1 = Frequency input active
Frequency input configuration under C0425
and C0426

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-43

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0410¿ Free configuration • A selection made under C0007 is
(cont.) of digital input Linkage of external signal sources to internal copied to the corresponding subcode
signals digital signals of C0410. A change of C0410 sets
Digital signals source C0007 = -255-!
25 (A) PCTRL1-FOLL1-0 255 Compensator at reset ramp C0193 to ”0”
26 (A) Reserved 255
27 (A) NSET1-TI1/3 255 Activate acceleration times
28 (A) NSET1-TI2/3 255 C0410/27 C0410/28 active
LOW LOW C0012; C0013
HIGH LOW T ir 1; Tif 1
LOW HIGH T ir 2; Tif 2
HIGH HIGH T ir 3; Tif 3
29 (A) PCTRL1-FADING 255 Process controller output on (LOW)/ off
(HIGH)
30 (A) PCTRL1-INV-ON 255 Process controller output inversion
31 (A) PCTRL1-NADD-OFF 255 Switch off additional setpoint
32 (A) PCTRL1-RFG2-0 255 Decelerate process controller ramp function
generator input to ”0” along ramp C0226
33 (A) NSET1-JOG4/5/6/7 255
C0411¿ Level inversion -0- E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 • The binary value of the selected number ^ 7-43
digital
g inputsp 25 24 23 22 21 20 determines the input
p levels:
E1 ... E6 -0- 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 00: Ex
E is
i not iinvertedd (HIGH active)
i )
– 1: Ex is inverted (LOW active)
-1- 0 0 0 0 0 1
• C0114 and C0411 are identical
-2- 0 0 0 0 1 0 • E5, E6 only application I/O
-3- 0 0 0 0 1 1 The function ”Parameter
Parameter set
... ... changeover”
g cannot be inverted!
-63- 1 1 1 1 1 1

Function • Digital functions can be freely assigned to the digital inputs (X3/E1 ... X3/E6) and software inputs (process data input
words). It is thus possible to achieve a freely configured controller control.
• Example:
– C0410/10 = 2: Signal source for “CINH (controller inhibit)” is X3/E2.
– C0410/15 = 32: Signal source for “DCB (DC-injection brake)” is CAN-IN1 word1, bit 3.
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets. Please ensure reasonable assignments. Otherwise it is possible to
activate functions which cannot be operated together (e.g. QSP and DCB assigned to X3/E3 at the same time).

Important • The process data input words CAN-IN1.W1, CAN-IN1.W2, CAN-IN2.W1 and CAN-IN2.W2 can be defined as analog
word or as digital word (16 bit).If you link internal digital signals (C0410/x = 30 ... 105), they must be defined as
digital input words. Otherwise the controller would interprete the bit control information incorrectly.
• Level:
– Hardware inputs (X3/E1 ... X3/E6): HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V; LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
– Software inputs (process data input words): HIGH = bit logic 1; LOW = bit logic 0
– For level inversion see code table C0114/C0411.
• Response times: 1.5 ... 2.5 ms
• C0410 can be different for the parameter sets.

Special features Use C0007 to configure terminals X3/E1 ... X3/E4 block-by-block. The corresponding subcodes of C0410 will be adapted
automatically.

7-44 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

7.8.2 Free configuration of digital output signals

7.8.2.1 Configuration digital outputs

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0415¿ Free configuration Output of digital signals to terminals • A selection under C0008 will be ^ 7-45
of digital outputs copied
p to C0415/1. A changeg of
1 Relay output K1 25 0 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE) C0415/1 sets
t C0008 = -255-!
255 !
((RELAY)) 255 • A selection under C0117 will be
copied to C0415/2.
C0415/2 A changef of
1 PAR-B0 active (DCTRL1-PAR-B0) C0415/2 sets C0117 = -255-!
2 Pulse inhibit active (DCTRL1-IMP) • C0415/3 only application
application–I/O
I/O
2 Digital output X3/A1 16 3 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
((DIGOUT1)) (C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached)
4 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
3 Digital output X3/A2 255 5 Ramp functin generator 1: Input = output RFG1 = Ramp function generator main
(DIGOUT2) (NSET1-RFG1-I=O) setpoint
6 Qmin threshold higher (PCTRL1-QMIN) active PAR-B1 PAR-B0
7 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0) PAR1 LOW LOW
PAR2 LOW HIGH
8 Controller inhibit active (DCTRL1-CINH) PAR3 HIGH LOW
9...12 Reserved PAR4 HIGH HIGH
13 Overtemperature (Jmax -5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
14 DC-bus overvoltage (DCTRL1-OV)
15 CCW rotation (DCTRL1-CCW)
16 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY)
17 PAR-B1 active (DCTRL1-PAR-B1)
18 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) active
(DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP)
19 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
20 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) Apparent
pp motor current = C0054
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
23 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
24 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)
25 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP)
26 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
27 Motor is running/CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW)
28 Motor is running/CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
29 Process controller input = process controller
output (PCTRL1-SET=ACT)
30 Reserved
31 Apparent motor current > current threshold and Overload monitoring
ramp function generator 1: Input = output Apparent motor current = C0054
(DCTRL1-(IMOT>ILIM)-RFG-I=0) Current threshold = C0156
32 ... 37 X3/E1 (32) ... X3/E6 (37) Digital input terminals

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-45

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0415¿¿ Free configuration
g Output of digital signals to terminals ^ 7-45
(cont.) off digital
di i l outputs 40...55 AIF control word (AIF-CTRL) Bits of fieldbus input words
Bit 0 (40) ... bit 15 (55) Assigned
g bits of AIF-CTRL:
60...75 CAN-IN1.W1 or FIF-IN.W1 Bit 3: QSP
Bit 0 (60) ... bit 15 (75) Bit 7: CINH
Bit 10: TRIP-SET
10 TRIP SET
80...95 CAN-IN1.W2 or FIF-IN.W2
Bit 0 (80) ... bit 15 (95) Bit 11: TRIP-RESET
100...115 CAN-IN2.W1, bit 0 (100) ... bit 15 (115)
120...135 CAN-IN2.W2, bit 0 (120) ... bit 15 (135)
140...172 Status application I/O Onlyy active when usingg application
pp I/O
140 Torque threshold 1 reached
(MSET1=MACT)
141 Torque threshold 2 reached
(MSET2=MACT)
142 Process controller output limit
reached (PCTRL1-LIM)
143 ... 172 Reserved
¿ Level inversion
C0416¿ 0 X3/A2 X3/A1 Relay K1 • 0: Output
p not inverted ((HIGH-aktiv)) ^ 7-45
di i l outputs
digital -0- 0 0 0 • 1: Output inverted(LOW-aktiv)
-1- 0 0 1
• X3/A2 only
l application
li ti I/O
-2- 0 1 0
-3- 0 1 1
-4- 1 0 0
-5- 1 0 1
-6- 1 1 0
-7- 1 1 1
C0423* Delay digital 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital outputs ^ 7-45
(A) outputs ((as of version application-I/O
pp E82ZAFA ...
1 Relay output K1 0.000 V 11)
Vx11)
(RELAY) • Switches the digital output if the linked
signal is still active after the time set
set.
2 Digital output X3/A1 0.000
• Digital output reset with delay
(DIGOUT1)
3 Digital output X3/A2 0.000
(DIGOUT2)

Function • Digital signals can be freely assigned to the digital outputs (X3/A1, X3/A2, realy output K1).
• Examples:
– C0415/2 = 15: The monitoring message “CCW rotation” is output to A1.
– C0415/1 = 60: Bit 1 of the process data word CAN-IN1/Wort 1 is output to K1.
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets.

7-46 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

Switchingg conditions
o o Selection under C0415 Relays/digital output (not inverted)
1 Picks up/HIGH, if PAR2 or PAR4 active
2 Picks up/HIGH if s, controller inhibit (CINH), overvoltage, undervoltage
3 Picks up/HIGH if motor current = C0022 or C0023
4 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency = frequency setpoint
5 Picks up/HIGH if condition met
6 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency > C0017 (related to setpoint)
7 Picks up/HIGH, because
• frequency setpoint = 0 Hz, tif over
• DCB aktiv
• controller inhibited (CINH)
8 Picks up/HIGH, if controller is inhibited by
• X3/28 = LOW
• C0410/10 = active
• s
13 Picks up/HIGH at a heatsink temperature of ≥ ϑmax -5 °C
14 Picks up/HIGH, when permissible voltage threshold is reached
15 Picks up/HIGH with CCW rotation
16 Picks up/HIGH, if controller is ready for operation
Drops out/LOW if
• TRIP fault message
• undervoltage/overvoltage
17 Picks up/HIGH, if PAR3 or PAR4 active
18 Drops out/LOW, if at least one of the three conditions (selection 25 or 6 or 2) is met
19 Drops out/LOW, if motor overtemperature is indicated by thermostat or PTC
20, 21, 22, 23 Picks up/HIGH if condition met
24 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency > C0010
25 Picks up/HIGH with TRIP error message
26 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency ≠ 0 Hz
27 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency > 0 Hz
28 Picks up/HIGH if output frequency < 0 Hz
29 Picks up/HIGH, if condition met
30 Reserved
31 Picks up/HIGH, if condition met
32 ... 37 Picks up/HIGH, if HIGH level is applied to the corresponding digital input
40 ... 135 Picks up/HIGH, if HIGH level is applied to the corresponding bit
140 ... 142 Picks up/HIGH, if condition met

Important • The process data input words CAN-IN1.W1/FIF-IN.W1, CAN-IN1.W2/FIF-IN.W2, CAN-IN2.W1 and CAN-IN2.W2 can
be defined as analog word or digital word (16 bit). If you link digital outputs (C0415/x = 60 ... 135), they must be
defined as digital input words. Otherwise the output signal would be incorrect.
• C0415 can be different for the parameter sets.
• Use C0416 to invert digital outputs.
• Monitoring signals 20, 21, 22
– The display value (C0054) is smoothened with a ring memory with 500 ms.
– The value set under C0156 corresponds to a percentage of the rated controller current Ir.
– If you use the control mode “Square characteristic” (C0014 = -3-), C0156 will be adapted internally via the output
frequency:
f 2 [Hz2]
C0156 intern [%] = C0156 [%] ⋅
C0011 2 [Hz2]
– This function monitors e.g. a belt.

Special features • Use C0008 to assign monitoring messages to the relay output K1. C0415/1 is automatically adapted.
• Use C0117 to assign monitoring messages to the digital output X3/A1. C0415/2 is automatically adapted.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-47

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Free connection of digital signals, message output

7.8.2.2 Free configuration of digital process data output words

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0417*¿ Free configuration • The assignment is mapped to the ^ 7-48
of controller status – Controller status word 1 (C0150)
messages (1) Output of digital signals to bus – AIF status word (AIF STAT)
(AIF-STAT)
1 Bit 0 1 Digital signal sources like C0415 – FIF output
p word 1 ((FIF-OUT.W1))
2 Bit 1 2 –OOutput
t t wordd 1 iin th
the CAN object
bj t 1
à
(CAN-OUT1.W1)
3 Bit 2 3
4 Bit 3 4 à Fixed assignment
g too AIF in operation
op o
5 Bit 4 5 with
i h communication
i i modules:
d l
INTERBUS 2111
2111, PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS-DP
DP 2131 or
6 Bit 5 6 LECOM-A/B/LI 2102. Modifications are
7 Bit 6 7 not allowed!
à If you use function modules system bus
8 Bit 7 8 (CAN), INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP to FIF, all
à bits are freely configurable.
9 Bit 8 9 11|10|9|8 controller status
à 0000 Controller initialization
10 Bit 9 10 0010 S it h
Switch-on iinhibit
hibit
à 0011 Operation inhibited
0100 Flying restart circuit active
Flying-restart
11 Bit 10 11 0101 DC-injection brake active
à
0110 Operation enabled
12 Bit 11 12 0111 Message active
à 1000 Active fault
13 Bit 12 13
à
14 Bit 13 14
à
15 Bit 14 15
16 Bit 15 16
C0418*¿ Free configuration Output of digital signals to bus • The assignment is mapped to the ^ 7-48
of controller status – Controller status word 2 (C0151)
messages (2) – FIF output word 2 (FIF OUT.W2)
(FIF-OUT.W2)
1 Bit 0 255 Digital signal sources like C0415 – Output
p word 1 in the CAN object
j 2
... ... (CAN OUT2 W1)
(CAN-OUT2.W1)
• All bits can be freely configured
16 Bit 15 255

Function • Digital signals can be summarised as status information which will be automatically assigned to status word bits.
• Examples:
– C0417/4 = 16: Assigns bit 3 to the monitoring function “Ready for operation”.
– C0418/15 = 101: Assigns bit 14 to bit 2 of CAN-IN2.W1.
• A signal source can be assigned to several targets.

Important • The process data output words CAN-OUT1.W1/FIF-OUT.W1, CAN-OUT2.W1 and FIF-OUT.W2 can also be assigned
as analog word under C0421:
– If digitally configured under C0417 or C0418 not simultaneous analog assignment with C0421 (C0421/x = 255)!
– With analog configuration under C0421 no simultaneous digital assignment with C0417 and C0418
(C0417/x = 255, C0418/x = 255)!
– Otherwise the status information would be incorrect.
• The configuration under C0417 is mapped to the AIF status word 1 (C0150), FIF output word 1 (FIF-OUT.W1) and output
word 1 of the CAN object 1 (CAN-OUT1.W1).
• The configuration under C0418 is mapped to the AIF status word 2 (C0151), FIF output word 2 (FIF-OUT.W2) and output
word 1 of the CAN object 2 (CAN-OUT2.W1).
• C0417 and C0418 can be different for the parameter sets.

7-48 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Thermal motor monitoring, error detection

7.9 Thermal motor monitoring, error detection

7.9.1 Thermal motor monitoring

7.9.1.1 I2 ñ t monitoring
Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0120 I2t switch-off 0 0 {1 %} 200 Reference: Apparent motor current (C0054) ^ 7-49
= not active

Function With the I2 × t monitoring, self-ventilated three-phase AC motors can be thermally monitored without using sensors.

Adjustment • Enter an individual load limit for the motor connected.

– If this values is exceeded for a longer period of time, the controller will set the fault OC6 and switch-off (see chart).
• The current limits C0022 and C0023 only have indirect influence on the I2 × t calculation:
– The settings of C0022 and C0023 can make the operation with maximum controller load (C0056) impossible.
• When selecting a drive which does not match (output current much higher than rated motor current):
– Reduce C0120 by the factor of the mismatch.

Trip time [s]

360

f = 0 Hz 20 Hz >40 Hz
300

240

180

120

60

0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 C0056 / C0120

Example:
With C0120 = 100 % and a load of C0056 = 150 %, the devices switches off at f > 40 Hz after 60 s or sooner at f < 40 Hz.

Important • The setting 0 % deactivates the function.

• This monitoring does not fully protect the motor since the calculated motor temperature is set to ”0” after every mains
connection or disconnection. The connected motor can be overheated if
– it is already hot and is still overloaded.
– the cooling-air stream is interrupted or the air is too hot.
• Full motor protection can be achieved using a PTC thermistor or thermostat in the motor.
• To prevent motors with forced ventilation from starting too early, this function can be deactivated.
• If you want to monitor power-adapted motors at < 100 % load, C0120 must also be reduced accordingly.
• If the controller operates at increased rated power, the I2 ¡ t switch-off can be activated if C0120 is set to ≤ 100 %.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-49

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Thermal motor monitoring, error detection

7.9.1.2 PTC motor monitoring/earth fault detection

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
¿ Configuration
C0119¿ g PTC -0- -0- PTC input not active Earth fault detection • Signal
g outputp configuration
g under C0415 ^ 7-50
i
input / earthh fault
f l -1- PTC input active, active
i • Deactivate the earth fault detection if it is
detection TRIP set activated unintentionally
-2- PTC input active,
Warning set
-3- PTC input not active Earth fault detection
-4- PTC input active,
TRIP set
-5- PTC input active,
Warning set

Function Input for the connection of PTC resistors to DIN44081 and DIN44082. The motor temperatur can be detected and integrated in
the drive monitoring.
This input can also be used for the connection of a thermostat (normally-close)-
We recommend to always activate the PTC input for operation with motors equipped with PTC resistors or thermostats. By this
you prevent the motor from overheating.

Activation 1. Connect the monitoring circuit of the motor to X2/T1 and X2/T2.
2. Parameter setting for the evaluation of the PTC signal:
If the PTC evalution detects an overtemperature, it can be evaluated in three ways:
– C0119 = -0-, -3-: PTC not active
– C0119 = -1-, -4-: TRIP error message (display = OH3 a, LECOM error number = 53)
– C0119 = -2-, -5-: Warning (display = OH51 e, LECOM error number = 203)

Important • The controller can only evaluate a motor-PTC system.

– It is not allowed to connect several motor PTC systems in parallel or in series.
• If you connect several motors to an inverter, use thermistors (normally close) to monitor the motor temperature.
– Thermostats must be connected in series for evaluation.
• The error or warning message is indicated at approx. R ≤ 1.6 kΩ.
• If, for a functionality test, the PTC input is assigned to a variable resistor, the following occurs:
– R > 2 kΩ no error or warning message.
– R < 250 Ω no message.
• All Lenze three-phase AC motors are equipped with thermostats.

7.9.2 Error detection (DCTRL1-TRIP-SET/DCTRL1-TRIP-RESET)

Function If the function DCTRL1-TRIP-SET is activated, external error can be detected and thus be integrated into the monitoring
system. The controller indicates the fault EEr and sets controller inhibit.

Activation of fixed configurations HIGH active inputs

C0007 X3/E1 X3/E2 X3/E3 X3/E4
-7-, -8-, -18-, -19- LOW
-5-, -6-, -9-, -20-, -38- ... -43- LOW
10-, -27- LOW
-32- LOW

Activation freely configured • C0410/11 (DCTRL1-TRIP-SET) signal source assignment.

• HIGH active inputs
– Signal source for DCTRL1-TRIP-SET = LOW activates the function.

Important Error message reset: ^ 8-6.

7-50 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Display of operating data, diagnostics

7.10 Display of operating data, diagnostics

7.10.1 Display of operating data

7.10.1.1 Display values

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0004*¿ Bar-graph display 56 All codes possible • Bargraph display indicates the selected in
56 = controller load (C0056) % after power on
• Range -180 % ... +180 %
C0044* Setpoint 2 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/2 = FIXED-FREE
(NSET1-N2) • Display, if C0412/2 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0046* Setpoint 1 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/1 = FIXED-FREE
(NSET1-N1) • Display, if C0412/1 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0047* Torque setpoint or 0 {1 %} 400 Control mode ”Sensorless torque control”
torque
q limit value (C0014 = 5):
(MCTRL1 MSET)
(MCTRL1-MSET) Ref.: Rated motor torque detected by motor parameter • Torque setpoint selection, if
identification C0412/6 = FIXED-FREE
• Torque setpoint display, if
C0412/6 ≠ FIXED-FREE
Control mode ”V/f characteristic control” or
”Vector control” (C0014 = 2, 3, 4):
• Torque limit value display,
if C0412/6 ≠ FIXED-FREE
• Function not active (C0047 = 400), if
C0412/6 = FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0049* Additional setpoint -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/3 = 0
(PCTRL1-NADD) • Display, if C0412/3 ≠ 0
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0050* Output frequency -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Only display: Output frequency without slip
(MCTRL1-NOUT) compensation
C0051* Output frequency -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Operation without process controller ^ 7-34
with slip (C0238 = 2):
compensation • Display only: Output frequency with slip
(MCTRL1-NOUT compensation (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP)
+SLIP) or Operation with process controller
Act. process (C0238 = 0, 1):
controller value • Selection, if C0412/5 = FIXED-FREE
(PCTRL1-ACT) • Display, if C0412/5 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0052* Motor voltage 0 {1 V} 1000 Only display
(MCTRL1-VOLT)
C0053* DC-bus voltage 0 {1 V} 1000 Only display
(MCTRL1-DCVOLT)
C0054* Apparent motor 0.00 {0.01 A} 400.00 Only display
current
(MCTRL1-IMOT)
C0056* Controller load -255 {1 %} 255 Only display
(MCTRL1-MOUT)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-51

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Display of operating data, diagnostics

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0061* Heat sink 0 {1 °C} 255 Only display
temperature • If > +85 °C:
– Controller sets warning OH
– Chopper frequency reduced if
C0144 = 1
• If > +90 °C:
– Controller sets TRIP OH
C0138* Process controller 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection if C0412/4 = FIXED-FREE ^ 7-33
setpoint 1 • Display if C0412/4 ≠ FIXED-FREE
(PCTRL1-SET1) The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!

Function Some parameters measured during operation can be displayed on the keypad or PC.

7.10.1.2 Display value calibration

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0500* Calibration of 2000 1 {1} 25000 • The codes C0010, C0011, C0017, ^ 7-52
numerator variable C0019, C0037, C0038, C0039, C0044,
C0046, C0049, C0050, C0051, C0138,
C0139,, C0140,, C0181,, C0239,, C0625,,
C0501* Calibration of 10 1 {1} 25000 C0626 C0627
C0626, C062 can be b calibrated
lib d ini a way
denominator that the keypad indicates a process
process variable variable.
• If C0500/C0501 remain unchanged, the
unit ”Hz” will no longer be displayed.
C0500* Calibration of 2000 1 {1} 25000 • The codes C0037, C0038, C0039,
(A) numerator variable C0044,, C0046,, C0049,, C0051,, C0138,,
C0501* Calibration of 10 1 {1} 25000 C0139 C0140
C0139, C0140, C0181 can bbe calibrated
lib t d
denominator in a way that the keypad indicates a
(A)
process variable process variable with the unit selected
under C0502.
C0502
C0502* Process variable 0 0: — 6: rpm 13: % 18: Ω • Frequency-related codes (C0010, C0011,
(A) unit 1: ms 9: °C 14: kW 19: hex C0017, C0019, C0050, C0239, C0625,
2: s 10: Hz 15: N 34: m C0626, C0627) are always indicated in
4: A 11: kVA 16: mV 35: h ”Hz”.
5: V 12: Nm 17: mΩ 42: mH

Function Absolute or relative selection and display of process variables (e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate, humidity, speed)

Calibration Calibrated values are calculated from:

C0xxx = C0011 ⋅ C0500

200 C0501

Example:
A pressure setpoint is to be selected as relative and absolute value.
Values: Pset = 5 bar at C0011 = 50 Hz

a) Relative calibration in %

100 % = 50 ⋅ C0500 = 50 ⋅ 4000

200 C0501 200 10
E.g. C0500 = 4000, C0501 = 10

b) Absolute calibration in bar

5.00 bar = 50 ⋅ C0500 = 50 ⋅ 200

200 C0501 200 10
E.g. C0500 = 200, C0501 = 10

Important • The calibration always effects all selected codes.

Only for operation with standard • After the calibration, the output frequency [Hz] (C0050) can only be calculated via C0500 and C0501.
I/O

7-52 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Display of operating data, diagnostics

7.10.2 Diagnostics
Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0093* Controller type xxxy Only display
• xxx = Power taken from nameplate
(e. g. 551 = 550 W)
• y = Voltage class (2 = 240 V, 4 = 400 V)
C0099* Software version x.y Only display
x = Main version, y = Index
C0161* Actual fault Display
p y historyy buffer contents ^ 8-1
C0162* Last fault • Keypad: three-digit, alpha numerical fault ^ 8-3
detection
C0163* Last but one fault
• 9371BB keypad: LECOM fault number
C0164* Last but two fault
C0168* Actual fault
C0178* Operating time Total time CINH = HIGH {h} Only display
C0179* Power-on time Total time power-on {h} Only display
C0183* Diagnostics
g 0 No fault Onlyy display
p y
102 TRIP active
104 Message ”Overvoltage ( OU)” or
”Undervoltage ( LU)” active
142 Pulse inhibit
151 Quick stop active
161 DC-injection brake active
250 Warning active
C0200* Software ID number Only PC display
C0201* Software Only PC display
generation date
C0202* Software ID number Only keypad display
1 Output to keypad as string in 4 parts à 4
... characters
4
C0304 Service codes Modifications
o o oonlyy byy Lenze Service!
...
C0309
C0518 Service codes Modifications
o o oonlyy byy Lenze Service!
C0519
C0520
C01500* Software number Only PC display
application I/O
C1501* Software creation Only PC display
date application I/O
C1502 Software number Output to keypad as string in 4 parts à 4
(A) application I/O characters
1 Part 1
... ...
4 Part 4
C1504 Service codes Modifications
o o oonlyy byy Lenze Service!
... application
li i I/O
C1507

Function Display codes for diagnostics

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-53

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Parameter set management

7.11 Parameter set management

7.11.1 Parameter set transfer

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
[[C0002]*
] Parameter set -0- -0- Function executed ^ 7-54
transfer Parameter sets of the controller
-1- Lenze setting ð PAR1 Overwrite the selected pparameter set with
-2- Lenze setting ð PAR2 the settings stored as default settings.
-3- Lenze setting ð PAR3
-4- Lenze setting ð PAR4
-10- Keypad ð PAR1 ... PAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets with the keypad
data
-11- Keypad ð PAR1 Overwrite one pparameter set with the
-12- Keypad ð PAR2 keypad data
-13- Keypad ð PAR3
-14- Keypad ð PAR4
-20- PAR1 ... PAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets to the keypad
Parameter sets of a function module to FIF Not for standard I/O or system bus (CAN)
-31- Lenze setting ð FPAR1 Overwrite the selected pparameter set of the
-32- Lenze setting ð FPAR2 function module with the settings stored as
default setting
setting.
-33- Lenze setting ð FPAR3
-34- Lenze setting ð FPAR4
-40- Keypad ð FPAR1 ... FPAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets of the function
module with the keypad data
-41- Keypad ð FPAR1 Overwrite one pparameter set of the function
-42- Keypad ð FPAR2 module with the keypad data
-43- Keypad ð FPAR3
-44- Keypad ð FPAR4
-50- FPAR1 ... FPAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets of the function
module to the keypad
Parameter sets of controller + function module to FIF Not for standard I/O or system bus (CAN)
If you use an application I/O the
parameter sets of controller and
application I/O must always be
transferred together!
-61- Lenze setting ð PAR1 + FPAR1 Overwrite some pparameter sets with the
-62- Lenze setting ð PAR2 + FPAR2 settings stored as default settings
-63- Lenze setting ð PAR3 + FPAR3
-64- Lenze setting ð PAR4 + FPAR4
-70- Keypad ð PAR1 ... PAR4 + FPAR1 ... FPAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets with the keypad
data
-71- Keypad ð PAR1 + FPAR1 Overwrite some pparameter sets with the
-72- Keypad ð PAR2 + FPAR2 keypad data
-73- Keypad ð PAR3 + FPAR3
-74- Keypad ð PAR4 + FPAR4
-80- PAR1 ... PAR4 + FPAR1 ... FPAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets to the keypad
C0003*¿ Non-volatile -1- -0- Do not save parameter in EEPROM Data loss after mains disconnection
parameter saving -1- Always save parameter in EEPROM • Active after every main connection
• Cyclic parameter changes via bus module
are not allowed.

7-54 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Parameter set management

Function Parameter set management with the keypad:

• The Lenze setting can be activated again.
• Transfer of parameter sets from the keypad to the controller or vice versa. The settings can thus be easily copied between
controllers.

Loading of Lenze settings 1. Plug in the keypad

2. Inhibit the controller with s or terminal (X3/28 = LOW)
3. Select the selection number under C0002 and confirm with v
– E. g. C0002 = 1: Parameter set 1 of the controller is overwritten with the Lenze setting
4. If store is off, the Lenze setting is loaded again

Parameter set transfer from the 1. Plug in the keypad

controller to the keypad 2. Inhibit the controller with s or terminal (X3/28 = LOW)
3. Set C0002 = 20 or 50 or 80 and confirm with v
4. If saue is off, all parameter sets have been transferred to the keypad

Transfer of parameter sets from 1. Plug in the keypad

the keypad to the controller 2. Inhibit the controller with s or terminal (X3/28 = LOW)
3. Select the selection number under C0002 and confirm with v
– E. g. C0002 = 10: All parameter sets of the controller are overwritten with the keypad settings
– E. g. C0002 = 11: Parameter set 1 of the controller is overwritten with the keypad settings
4. If load is off, the parameter sets have been transferred to the controller

Important • Do not disconnect the keypad as long as store, save or load is indicated (= transfer)!
– If you disconnect it during transfer, the error Fehler ”Prx” or ”PT5” will be set. (^ 8-3)
• The parameter set transfer also changes password-protected codes!

7.11.2 Parameter set changeover (PAR, PAR2/ 4, PAR3/ 4)

Function • Switches between the four parameter sests of the controller during operation (ONLINE). Thus 9 additional JOG values or
additional acceleration and deceleration times are available.
• The function PAR switches between parameter sets 1 and 2.
• The functions PAR-B0 and PAR-B1 enable the changeover between all 4 parameter sets of the controller.

PAR activation HIGH active inputs

C0007 Active parameter set X3/E2 X3/E3
-4-,
4 , -8-,
8 , -15-,
15 , -17,
17, -18-,
18 , -35-,
35 , -36-,
36 , -37-,
37 , -44-,
44 , PAR1 LOW
-45- PAR2 HIGH
-1-,
1 , -3-,
3 , -6-,
6 , -7-,
7 , -12-,
12 , -24-,
24 , -33-,
33 , -38-,
38 , -46-,
46 , PAR1 LOW
-51- PAR2 HIGH

PAR-B0, PAR-B1 activation Assign signal sources to C0410/13 (PAR-B0) and C0410/14 (PAR-B1).
HIGH active inputs

Signal source Active parameter set

Level for PAR-B0 Level for PAR-B1
LOW LOW PAR1
HIGH LOW PAR2
LOW HIGH PAR3
HIGH HIGH PAR4

Important • The parameter set changeover via terminal is not possible if the automatic changeover via DC-bus voltage is
active (C0988 ≠ 0)!
• With Lenze setting, the controller uses PAR1.
• If you switch between the parameter sets via terminals, PAR and PAR-B0 and PAR-B1 must be assigned to the same
terminals of all parameter sets.
• The codes marked with * in the code table are the same for all parameter sets.
• The active parameter set is displayed in the keypad when using the function g (e. g. PS 2).

Special features If the control mode (C0014) is different for the parameter sets, you should only switch between the parameter sets when the
controller is inhibited (CINH).

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 7-55

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Function library
Individual grouping of drive parameters - The menu USEr

7.12 Individual grouping of drive parameters - The menu USEr

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Lenze Selection
C0517*¿ User menu • After mains switching or when using the ^ 7-56
function g the code from C0517/1 will
1 Memory 1 50 C0050 Output frequency (MCTRL1-NOUT) b displayed.
be di l d
• In Lenze setting
setting, the user menu contains
2 Memory 2 34 C0034 Analog setpoint selection range the most important codes for setting up
3 Memory 3 7 C0007 Fixed configuration - digital input signals the control mode ”V/f
V/f characteristic
4 Memory 4 10 C0010 Minimum output frequency control with linear characteristic”
5 Memory 5 11 C0011 Maximum output frequency • When
Wh th the passwordd protection
t ti iis
activated only the codes entered under
activated,
6 Memory 6 12 C0012 Acceleration time main setpoint C0517 are freely accessible.
7 Memory 7 13 C0013 Deceleration time main setpoint • Enter the required code numbers in the
8 Memory 8 15 C0015 V/f rated frequency subcodes.
9 Memory 9 16 C0016 Vmin boost
10 Memory 10 2 C0002 Parameter set transfer

Function • Fast access to 10 codes

• Individual combination of 10 codes most important for your application.

Important • The user menu is active after mains switching or keypad attachment.
• Adapt the user menu using the keypad: (^ 6-6)
• Setting-up a password protection: (^ 6-7)

Tip!
• Use the user menu to select ”tailored” codes for your application to be used by your
personnel if the password protection is activated additionally. Your personnel can only
change codes listed in the user menu.
• Example: The personnel operating a transportation system shall be able to change the speed
of the conveyor using the keypad (yz). The current speed is to be set and indicated in ”rpm”.
– Assign C0140 to memory 1 of the user menu (C0517/1 = 140)
– Delete all other entries from the user menu (C0517/2 ... C0517/10 = 0)
– Convert the value indicated under C0140 into ”rpm” using C0500/C0501 (^ 7-52)
– Activate the password protection (C0094 > 0)
– The current conveyor speed will be indicated after the keypad has been attached or power
on.
– Select x to activate the function i and to change the speed during operation using the
yz keys. The speed set last wirll be stored when the mains is switched off.

7-56 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Troubleshooting

8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination

The controller LEDs and the status information at the keypad immidiately indicate errors or operation
problems. (^ 8-1)
You can analyse an error using the history buffer. The list “Error messages” helps you to eliminate
the error. (^ 8-3)

8.1 Troubleshooting

8.1.1 Operating status display

During operation, the operating status of the controller is indicated by means of two LEDs.
LED Operating status
green red
on off Controller enabled
on on Mains switched on and automatic start inhibited
blinking off Controller inhibited
off blinking every second Fault active, check under C0161
off blinking every 0.4 seconds Undervoltage or overvoltage
fast blinking off Motor parameter identification

8.1.2 Error analysis with history buffer

The history buffer is used to trace errors. Error messages are stored in the history buffer in the order
of their occurrence.
The memory locations can be retrieved via the codes.
Structure of the history buffer
Code Memory unit Entry Note
C0161 Memory unit 1 Active fault If the fault is no longer active or has been acknowledged:
• The contents of the memory locations 1-3 1 3 will be saved in a
C0162 Memory unit 2 Last fault higher location.
”higher”
C0163 Memory unit 3 Last but one fault • The contents of the memory location 4 will be eliminated from the
history buffer and cannot be read any longer.
longer
C0164 Memory unit 4 Last but two fault • Memory location 1 will be deleted (= no active fault).

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 8-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Maloperation of the drive

8.2 Maloperation of the drive

Fault Cause Remedy
Motor does not rotate DC-bus voltage too low Check mains voltage
(Red LED is blinking every 0.4 s;
keypad display LU)
Controller inhibited Remove the controller inhibit, controller inhibit can ^ 7-11
(Green LED is blinking, keypad display: c) be set through several sources
Automatic start inhibited (C0142 = 0 or 2) LOW-HIGH signal at X3/28
If necessary, correct start condition (C0142)
DC injection brake active (DCB) Deactivate DC-injection brake ^ 7-17
Mechanical motor brake is not released Manual or electrical release of mechanical motor
brake
Quick stop (QSP) active (keypad display: c) Remove quick stop ^ 7-16
Setpoint = 0 Setpoint selection ^ 7-19 ff
JOG setpoint activated and JOG frequency = 0 JOG setpoint selection (C0037 ... C0039) ^ 7-26
Active fault Eliminate fault ^ 8-3
Wrong parameter set active Change to correct parameter set via terminal ^ 7-17
Control mode C0014 = -4-, -5-, but no motor parameter Motor parameter identification (C0148) ^ 7-29
identification ^ 7-2
Under C0410 several functions, which exclude each other, are Correct configuration in C0410 ^ 7-43
assigned to the same signal source.
Use internal voltage source X3/20 for function modules Bridge terminals
Standard-I/O, INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP or LECOM-B (RS485):
Bridge between X3/7 and X3/39 is missing
Motor does not rotate Defective motor cable Check motor cable
smoothly Maximum current set too low (C0022, C0023) Adaptation to the application ^ 7-13
Motor underexcited or overexcited Check parameter setting (C0015, C0016, C0014) ^ 7-2 ff
C0084, C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091 and/or C0092 are Manual adaptation or identification of motor ^ 7-29
not adapted to the motor data parameters (C0148)
Current consumption of Setting of C0016 too high Correct setting ^ 7-5
motor too high Setting of C0015 too low Correct setting ^ 7-4
C0084, C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091 and/or C0092 are Manual adaptation or identification of motor ^ 7-29
not adapted to the motor data parameters (C0148)
Motor rotates, setpoints are With the function j of the keypad a setpoint has been Set the setpoint to ”0” by C0140 = 0 ^ 7-27
“0” selected.
Motor parameter Motor phase failure detection active (C0597 = 1) Deactivate with C0597 = 0 before identification;
identification stops with reactivate after identification (C0597 = 1)
error LP1 Motor too small compared with rated power
DC injection brake is active (terminal assigned)
Unacceptable drive response various Vector control optimisation ^ 5-11
with vector control

8-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Error messages

8.3 Error messages at the keypad or in the parameter setting

program Global Drive Control
The controller reacts differently to the three possible error types: TRIP, message and warning:
TRIP (keypad: a)
• Applies high resistance to the power outputs U, V, W until TRIP will be reset.
• Entry into the history buffer as ”current error” under C0161.
• The drive coasts to standstill without being controlled!
• After TRIP-RESET (^ 8-6) :
– The drive accelerates to its setpoint along a set ramp.
– The error is entered into C0162 as ”last error” and deleted from C0161.
Message (keypad: c)
• Applies high resistance to the power outputs U, V, W.
• The drive coasts to standstill without being controlled as long as the error is active!
• After the error has been eliminated, the drive restarts.
Warning ”Heatsink overtemperature” (keypad: OH e)
• The drive continues controlled operation!
• The warning message comes off as soon as the error has been eliminated.
Warning ”Error in motor phase” (keypad: LP1)
Warning ”PTC monitoring” (keypad: OH51)
• The drive continues controlled operation!
• Entry into the history buffer as ”current error” under C0161.
• After TRIP-RESET the error is entered into C0162 as ”last error” and deleted from C0161.
The following table shows the possible error messages, their causes and remedies.
Display Fault Cause Remedy
Keypad PC 1)
noer 0 No fault - -
ccr 71 System
y fault Strong interferences on control cables Shield control cables
a Ground or earth loops in the wiring
ce0 61 Communication error to AIF Transmission of control commands via AIF is Plug the communication module firmly into the hand
a interfered terminal
ce1 62 Communciation error at CAN-IN1 object receives faulty data or • Plug-in connection for bus module ó Check FIF
a CAN-IN1 with sync control communication interrupted • Check transmitter
• Increase monitoring time under C0357/1 if necessary
ce2 63 Communication error at CAN-IN2 object receives faulty data or • Plug-in connection for bus module ó Check FIF
a CAN-IN2 communication is interrupted • Check transmitter
• Increase monitoring time under C0357/2 if necessary
ce3 64 Communication error to CAN-IN1 object receives faulty data or • Plug-in connection for bus module ó Check FIF
a CAN-IN1 with event or time communication interrupted • Check transmitter
control • Increase monitoring time under C0357/3 if necessary
ce4 65 BUS-OFF Controller has received too many faulty telegrams • Check whether the bus is terminated
a (many communication errors via system bus and has been disconnected from the • Check screen contact of the cables
occurred) bus • Check PE conection
• Check the bus load, if necessary, reduce the baud rate
ce5 66 CAN Time-Out With remote parameter setting via system bus • Check wiring of the system bus
a (C0370): • Check system bus configuration
Slave does not respond. Communication monitoring
time exceeded
Operation with module on FIF: Contact Lenze
Internal error

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 8-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Error messages

Display Fault Cause Remedy

Keypad PC 1)
ce6 67 Function module system bus CAN controller sends ”Warning” or ”BUS-OFF” • Check whether the bus is terminated
a (CAN) is set to ”Warning” or • Check screen contact of the cables
”BUS-OFF” • Check PE conection
(only generated if C0128 = 1) • Check the bus load, if necessary, reduce the baud rate
EEr 91 External error (TRIP-SET) A digital signal used for the function TRIP set has Check external encoder
a been activated.
H05 105 Internal fault Contact Lenze
a
id1 140 Faulty parameter identification Motor not connected Connect motor
a
LP1 32 Error in motor phase • Failure of one/several motor phase(s) • Check motor cables
a (only generated if C0597 = 1) • Motor current too low • Check Vmin boost
182 Error in motor phase
• Connect
C t motor
t accordingly
di l or adapt
d t motor
t under
d C0599
LP1
(only generated if C0597 = 2)
LU 1030 DC-bus undervoltageg Mains voltage too low Check mains voltage
c DC-bus voltage too low Check supply module
400 V connectroller connected to 240 V mains Connect the controller to the appropriate mains voltage
OC1 11 Short-circuit Short-circuit • Find reason for short circuit; check motor cables
a • Check brake resistor
Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor Use shorter/low-capacity motor cables
cable
OC2 12 Earth fault Earthed motor phase Check motor, check motor cable
a Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor Use shorter/low-capacity motor cables
cable
Earth fault detection can be deactivated for checking
OC3 13 Overload inverter during Acceleration time (C0012) too short • Increase acceleration time
a acceleration or short circuit • Check drive selection
Defective motor cable Check wiring
Interturn fault in the motor Check motor
OC4 14 Overload controller during Deceleration time too short (C0013) • Allow longer deceleration time
a deceleration • Check the external brake resistor selection
OC5 15 Controller overload in stationary Long and frequent overload periods Check drive selection
a operation
OC6 16 Motor overload ((I2 x t overload))
Motor thermally overloaded by for instance
a • impermissible continuous current • Check drive selection
• frequent or too long acceleration processes • Check setting under C0120
OH 50 Heatsink temperature > +85 °C Ambient temperature Tamb > +60 °C • Allow controller to cool and ensure ventilation
a • Check ambient temperature
OH - Heatsink temperature
p > +80 °C Heat sink very dirty Clean heat sink
e Impermissible high current or frequent and long • Check drive selection
acceleration processes • Check load, if necessary replace defective bearings
OH3 53 PTC monitoring (TRIP) Motor too hot because of impermissibly high current Check drive selection
a ((onlyy generated
g if C0119 = 1 or or frequent and long acceleration processes
4) PTC not connected Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring (C0585=3)
OH4 54 Controller overtemperature Controller inside too hot • Reduce controller load
a • Improve cooling
• Check fan in the controller
OH51 203 PTC monitoring Motor too hot because of impermissibly high current Check drive selection
((onlyy generated
g if C0119 = 2 or or frequent and long acceleration processes
5)) PTC not connected Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring (C0585=3)

8-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Error messages

Display Fault Cause Remedy

Keypad PC 1)
OU 1020 DC-bus overvoltage
g Mains voltage too high Check voltage supply
c Braking operation • Prolong deceleration times.
• For operation with external brake resistor:
– Check selection, supply and connection of brake
resistor
– Increase the deceleration times
Earth leakage on the motor side Check motor cable and motor for earth fault (disconnect
motor from inverter)
Pr 75 Parameter transfer with keypad All parameter sets are faulty It is absolutely necessary to repeat the data transfer or
a faulty load the factory setting before the controller is enabled.
Pr1 72 Faulty transmission of PAR1 PAR1 is faulty.
a using the keypad
Pr2 73 Faulty transmission of PAR2 PAR2 is faulty.
a using the keypad
Pr3 77 Faulty transmission of PAR3 PAR3 is faulty.
a using the keypad
Pr4 78 Faulty transmission of PAR4 PAR4 is faulty.
a using the keypad
Pr5 79 Internal fault Contact Lenze
a
Pt5 81 Time error during parameter set Data flow interrupted by keypad or PC, e. g. keypad It is absolutely necessary to repeat the data transfer or
a transfer disconnected during data transmission. load the factory setting before the controller is enabled.
rSt 76 Faulty auto-TRIP reset More than 8 fault messages in 10 minutes Depends on the fault message
a
sd5 85 Open wire at analog input Current at analog input < 4 mA Close circuit at analog input
a (setpoint range 4 ... 20 mA)

1) LECOM error number

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 8-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Error message reset

8.4 Error message reset

TRIP
Pulse inhibit will only be reset after the error has been eliminated and the error message has been
acknowledged.

Tip!
A TRIP can have several reasons. An error message can only be acknowledged after all TRIP reasons
have been eliminated.

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0043 TRIP reset -0- No current error Reset active error with C0043 = 0
-1- Active error
C0170¿ Configuration TRIP -0- -0- TRIP reset by mains switching, s, LOW–signal at • TRIP reset via function module or
reset X3/28, via function module (exception: LECOM-B) or communication module with C0043,
communication module C0410/12 or C0135 bit 11.
-1- like -0- and additional auto TRIP reset • Auto TRIP reset automatically resets all
errors after the time set under C0171.
C0171
-2- TRIP reset by mains switching, LOW–signal at X3/28
or via function module (except LECOM–B)
-3- TRIP reset by mains switching
C0171 Delay for auto-TRIP 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 60.00
reset

Function You can select whether error are to be reset manually or automatically.

Important • Every mains switching results in a TRIP reset.

• With more than 8 Auto-TRIP resets within 10 minutes, the controller sets TRIP and indicates rST.
• TRIP reset also resets the auto TRIP counter.

8-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9 Automation

9.1 Function module system bus (CAN) E82ZAFC

9.1.1 Description
The function module system bus (CAN) is a component for the frequency inverters 8200 motec and
8200 vector, which connects the controllers to the serial communication system CAN (Controller
Area Network).
The controllers can also be retrofitted.
The function module extends the controller functionality, e.g. by:
• Parameter preselection/remote parameter setting
• Data exchange between controllers
• Connection with
– external control and master systems
– Decentralised terminal extensions
– Operating units

9.1.2 Technical data

9.1.2.1 General data and application conditions

Communication profile based on CANopen
Communication medium DIN ISO 11898
Network topology Line (terminated at both ends with 120 Ω)
System bus participants Master or slave
Max. number of participants 63
Baud rate [kbit/s] 20 50 125 250 500
Max. bus length [m] 2500 980 480 230 80
Electrical connection Screw terminals, isolated terminal for controller inhibit (CINH)
DC voltage supply internal (in the event of failure of the controller the bus system will continue operation)
Insulation voltages for bus systems:
• to PE 50 V AC (mains isolation)
• external supply (terminal 39/59) - (no mains isolation)
• power stage of the 8200 vector 270 V AC (double basic insulation)
• to control terminals:
– 8200 vector (internal supply) - (no mains isolation)
– 8200 vector (external supply) 100 V AC (basic insulation)
• bus system - external - (no mains isolation)
Ambient temperature Operation: -20 ... +60 °C
during transport: -25 ... +70 °C
during storage -25 ... +60 °C
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN 50178 (without condensation, average relative humidity 85 %)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.2.2 Communication times

The system bus communciation times depend on
• Data priority
• Bus load
• Baud rate
• Processing time in the controller
Telegram run times Processing times in the controller
Baud rate [kBits/s] Parameter channel Process data
20 50 125 250 500
Run time/processing time [ms] 6.5 2.6 1.04 0.52 0.26 < 20 1 ... 2

9.1.3 Installation

9.1.3.1 Mechanical installation

See Mounting Instructions

9.1.3.2 Electrical installation

Terminal assignment
Supply of terminal 28 (controller inhibit) via internal voltage source Supply of terminal 28 (controller inhibit) via external voltage source

+20V +20V
GND2 GND1 GND2 GND1

X3 39 28 39 28 7 LO HI 7 LO HI 7 7 20 20
X3 39 28 39 28 7 LO HI 7 LO HI 7 7 20 20
CAN-GND
_
CAN-LOW 24V CAN-GND
ext. + CAN-LOW
CAN-HIGH
CAN-HIGH

E82ZAFC035 E82ZAFC031

Fig. 9-1 Terminal assignment of the function module

Terminal Explanation
X3/39 GND2 Reference potential 2 (only for X3/28)
X3/28 CINH Controller inhibit
• Start = HIGH (+12 V ... +30 V)
• Stop = LOW (0 V ... +3 V)
X3/7 GND1 Reference potential 1
X3/LO CAN-LOW System bus LOW (data cable)
X3/HI CAN-HIGH System bus HIGH (data cable)
X3/20 + 20 V internal for CINH (reference: X3/7)

Screw terminal data

Max. cable cross-sections Tightening torques
rigid flexible

1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) 1.0 mm2 (AWG 18)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)
(4.4 .. 5.3 lb
lb-in)
in)
0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)

9-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Wiring of the system bus network

Basic principle

A1 A2 A3

7 LO HI 7 LO HI 7 LO HI 7 LO HI GND LOW HIGH

120

120

Fig. 9-2 Principle structure of a system bus network

A1 Controller 1
A2 Controller 2
A3 PLC/PC, system bus compatible

Specification for system bus cable

Total length ó 300 m ó 1000 m
Cable type LIYCY 2 x 2 x 0,5 mm2 CYPIMF 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2
(twisted in pairs with shield) (twisted in pairs with shield)
Cable resistance ≤ 40 ê/km ≤ 40 ê/km
Capacitance per unit length ≤ 130 nF/km ≤ 60 nF/km
Connection Pair 1 (white/brown): CAN-LOW and CAN-HIGH
Pair 2 (green/yellow): CAN-GND

Tip!
A terminating resistance of 120 Ω must be connected between the terminals CAN-LOW and
CAN-HIGH at the first and last device connected to the system bus.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.4 Commissioning with function module system bus (CAN)

Stop!
Before switching on the mains voltage, check the wiring for completeness, earth fault and short
circuit.

First switch-on of a system bus network with higher-level master (e.g. PLC)
1. Switch on the mains voltage. The green LED of the controller is blinking.
2. If necessary, adjust the baud rate (system bus baud rate) (C0351) using the keypad or PC.
– Lenze setting: 500 kBaud
– Changes will only be accepted when the command “Reset node” (C0358 = 1) has been set.
3. With several controllers in a network:
– System bus controller address (C0350) must be set for every controller using the keypad or
PC. Every address in the network can be used only once.
– Lenze setting: 1
– Changes will only be accepted when the command “Reset node” (C0358 = 1) has been set.
4. Communication with the drive is now possible, i.e. all codes can be read and changeable
codes and be overwritten.
– If necessary, adapt the codes to your application.
5. Configure the setpoint source:
– C0412/1 = 20 ... 23: Setpoint source is a word of the sync controlled process data channel
1 (CAN1)
– E.g. C0412/1 = 21: Setpoint source is CAN-IN1.W2.
6. Master sets system bus (CAN) to ”OPERATIONAL”.
7. Setpoint selection:
– Send setpoint via CAN word selected (e.g. CAN-IN1.W2).
8. Send sync telegram.
– Sync telegrams can only be received if C0360 = 1 (sync control) is set.
9. Enable the controller via terminal (HIGH signal at X3/28).
The drive should be running now.

9-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.5 Parameter setting

If the controller parameters are set via the function module system bus (CAN), use a PC, PLC or other
operating and input devices. More information can be found in the corresponding software
documentation.

9.1.5.1 Parameter channels

Parameters are values stored as codes in Lenze controllers. Parameters are changed for e.g.
individual settings or when the material being processed by a machine is changed.
The 2 parameter channels (SDO = Service Data Object)in the function bus module system bus (CAN)
enable the connection of 2 different parameter setting devices, e.g., PC and other operating unit
connected at the same time.
Parameters are transferred at low priority.

Controller

Parameter channel 1 Parameter channel 2

têáíÉ têáíÉ

oÉ~Ç oÉ~Ç

Parameter
Parameter (Code)
(Code)

léÉê~íáåÖ ìåáí m`
póëíÉã Äìë Åçãé~íáÄäÉ póëíÉã Äìë Åçãé~íáÄäÉ

Fig. 9-3 Connection of parameter setting devices via two parameter channels

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.5.2 Process data channels

Process data (e.g. setpoints and actual values) are transferred and processed at higher priority and
high speed. The function module system bus (CAN) provides the following:
A cyclic, synchronised process data channel (CAN1) for communication with a host
(process data objects CAN-IN1 and CAN-OUT1)

Process data channel 1

Cyclic process data
(Setpoints and actual values)

`^kJfkN
Controller

`^kJlrqN

eçëí

Fig. 9-4 Process data objects CAN-IN1 and CAN-OUT1 for communication with higher-level master systems

Event-controlled process data channel (CAN2) for controller communication (process

data objects CAN-IN2 and CAN-OUT2)
Decentralised input and output terminals and higher-level master systems can use CAN2, too.

Process data channel 2

Event-controlled process data

`^kJfkO `^kJlrqO
Controller 1 Controller 2

`^kJlrqO `^kJfkO

Fig. 9-5 Event-controlled process data channel for controller communication

Tip!
• CAN1 can be used for event control or time control like CAN2 (selection under C0360).
• Output data of event-controlled process data channels can be cyclically transferred and the
times can be adjusted (setting under C0356)

9.1.5.3 Parameter addressing (code/ index)

Controller parameters are addressed via an index. The index for Lenze codes ranges between
16567 (40C0hex) and 24575 (5FFFhex)
Conversion formula: Index = 24575 - Lenze code

9-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.5.4 Configuration of the system bus network

Selection of a master for the network C0352

C0352 Value Note

0 Slave (Lenze setting) • One controller must be selected as master if you want to transfer data between
controllers connected to the system bus network without having a higher-level host.
• The master functionality is only required for the initialisation phase of the drive system.
1 Master • The master changes its status from pre-operational to operational.
• Data can only be exchanged via process data objects when the status operational is set.
• It is possible to set a boot-up time for the master for the initialisation phase (^ 9-8).

General addressing C0350

C0350 Value Note

1 (Lenze setting) ... 63 • C0350 enables addressing of all data objects (parameter and process data channels).
• Communication between the system bus participants via event-controlled process data
channel:
– If all controllers have addresses in rising order and no one is missing, the switching of
event-controlled data objects allows communication between the controllers.
Example:
– Controller 1: C0350 = 1
Controller 2: C0350 = 2
Controller 3: C0350 = 3
– Assign the data objects as follows:
CAN-OUT2 controller 1 ® CAN-IN2 controller 2
CAN-OUT2 controller 2 ® CAN-IN2 controller 3
• Communication between system bus devices via cyclic, synchronised process data
channel:
– Sychronised process data CAN-IN1 and CAN-OUT1 (C0360 = 1) can be exchanged
between controller if a system bus device can send the sync telegram (e.g. Lenze
9300 servo inverter).
• Changes will only be accepted after one of the following actions:
– Mains switching
– Command ”Reset node” via the bus system
– Reset node via C0358

Selective addressing of individual process data objects C0353

C0353 Value Note

C0353/1 0 Addresses from C0350 If data cannot be distributed as wanted with code C0350, ever process data object can
((Address (Lenze setting) have its own address from C0354. The data input p objects
j to be addressed must be identical
selection with
ith th
the id
identifiers
tifi off th
the ddata
t output
t t object.
bj t The
Th identifier
id tifi is i a CAN-specific
CAN ifi assignment
i t
1 Address for CAN-IN1 from
CAN1 with aspect for a message. If you use devices such as decentralised digital inputs and outputs,
C0354/1
sync observe the resulting identifiers.
Address for CAN-OUT1
control)
from C0354/2
• Changes will only be accepted after one of the following actions:
– Mains switching
C0353/2 0 Addresses from C0350 – Command ”Reset node” via the bus system
((Address (Lenze setting) – Reset node via C0358
selection 1 Address for CAN-IN2 from • The resulting identifiers can be retrieved under C0355.
CAN2) C0354/3
Address for CAN-OUT2
from C0354/4
C0353/1 0 Addresses from C0350
(Address (Lenze setting)
selection
CAN1 for 1 Address for CAN-IN1 from
event or C0354/5
time Address for CAN-OUT1
control) from C0354/6

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Time settings for the system bus C0356

C0356 Value Note
C0356/1 3000 ms (Lenze setting) Time setting for the boot-up of the master (only valid if C0352 = 1)
(Boot-up) Usually the Lenze setting is enough.
If the network comprises several controllers without having a higher-level host which
control the initialisation of the CAN network, one of the controllers must be selected as
master and carry out the initialisation. For this the master activates the entire CAN network
and starts process data transfer. (Status change from preoperation to operation).
In C0356 it is determined when the CAN network is initialised after power-on.
C0356/2 0 Event-controlled • Event-controlled process data transfer
((Cycle
y time p
– The process p object
data output j will onlyy be sent if a value of the output
p object
j
C O
CAN-OUT2) >0 Cyclic changes.
• Cyclic process data transfer
C0356/3 0 Event-controlled – The process data output object is sent according to the cycle time set here.
((Cycle
y time • C0356/3 is only active if C0360 = 0
C O
CAN-OUT1) >0 Cyclic
C0356/4 Delay time Cyclic sending starts after the boot-up and delay time.
(CAN delay)

Monitoring times C0357

C0357 Display Note
C0357/1 Monitoring time CAN-IN1 Monitors the process data input objects for telegrams received within the time defined
C0357/3 here:
• If a telegram is received within the time set, the corresponding monitoring time will be
reset and started again.
• If no telegram is received within the time set,
set the controller sets trip CE1/CE3 (CAN-IN1)
C0357/2 Monitoring time CAN-IN2 or CE2 (CAN-IN2).
• If the controller receives too many faulty telegrams it disconnects itself from the bus
and sets trip CE4 (bus off).

Reset node C358

C0358 Value Note
0 Not active/reset node carried out • Changes of baud rate, addresses of process data objects or controller addresses will
only become effective after a reset node.
• A reset node can also be set by
1 Start reset node – repeated mains switching
– Reset node via the bus system

9-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.6 Communication profile of the system bus

9.1.6.1 Data description

NN Äáí áÇÉåíáÑáÉê U ÄóíÉ ìëÉê Ç~í~

Fig. 9-6 Principle structure of a CAN telegram

Identifier The identifier determines the priority of a message. CANopen also codes:
• Controller address
• The user data object to be transferred.
User data User data can be used for:
• Initialisation (communication via system bus)
• Parameter setting of controllers (with Lenze controllers: reading and writing of codes)
• Process data (for fast, often cyclical processes such as setpoint/act. value transfer)

9.1.6.2 Controller addressing

The CAN bus system is message and device oriented. Every message has its unambiguous
identifier. CANopen ensures device orientation by having just one sender per message. The
identifiers are automatically calculated from the addresses entered in the controller. Exception:
Network management identifiers
Message Identifier for C0353/x = 0 Identifier for C0353/x = 1
(System bus address source is C0350) (System bus address source is C0354/x)
Network management 0
Sync telegram 128
Parameter channel 1 to drive 1536 + address in C0350
Parameter channel 2 to drive 1600 + address in C0350
Parameter channel 1 from drive 1408 + address in C0350
Parameter channel 2 from drive 1472 + address in C0350
Process data Sync-controlled (C0360 = 1) 512 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/1
channel to drive
(CAN-IN1) Time-controlled (C0360 = 0) 768 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/5

Process-data Sync-controlled (C0360 = 1) 384 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/2

channel from drive
(CAN-OUT1) Time-controlled (C0360 = 0) 769 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/6

Process data channel from drive (CAN-IN2) 640 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/3
Process data channel from drive (CAN-OUT2) 641 + address in C0350 384 + address in C0354/4

Tip!
The identifiers can be retrieved under C0355.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.6.3 The three communication phases of a CAN network

NN Äáí áÇÉåíáÑáÉê O ÄóíÉ ìëÉê Ç~í~

Fig. 9-7 Telegram to change between communication phases

Telegrams with the identifier 0 and 2 byte user data enable a change between the communication
phases.
Status Explanation
a ”Initialisation”
The drive does not take part in data transfer on the bus. This status is reached after the controller has been switched on. It is also
possible to repeat parts of the initialisation or the complete initialisation by sending different telegrams. All parameters already
set will be overwritten with its standard values. After initialisation has been completed, the drive automatically sets the status
”preoperational”.
b ”Preoperational”
The drive can receive parameter setting data. Process data are ignored.
c ”Operational”
The drive can receive parameter setting and process data.

The change between communication phases is controlled by the network master and applies to the
entire network. A normal device can be defined as master under C0352.
The master sends a telegram with a delay after power on (time adjustable under C0356/1)which sets
the entire network into the operational status.
Telegrams to change between communication phases
from to Data (hex) Note
Pre-operational Operational 01xx Process and parameter setting data active • xx = 00hex:
Operational Pre-operational 80xx Only parameter setting data active – The
Th telegram
t l addresses
dd allll bbus
devices
devices.
Operational Initialisation 81xx Resets the drive; all parameters
p are – The status of all bus participants
overwritten
itt withith standard
t d d values
l is changed at the same time.
Pre-operational Initialisation 81xx
• xx = Controller address:
Operational Initialisation 82xx Resets the drive; onlyy communication-relevant – Only the status of the selected
parameters
t will ill be
b resett device will be changed.
Pre-operational Initialisation 82xx

Tip!
Communication via process data is only possible when the status “Operational” is active.

9-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.6.4 Parameter data structure

Parameters can be set via two software channels. They are preselected by the controller address.
The telegram for parameter setting is structured as follows:

NN Äáí áÇÉåíáÑáÉê U ÄóíÉ ìëÉê Ç~í~

Command Index Index Sub–index

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
code Low–byte High–byte

Fig. 9-8 Telegram structure parameter setting

Command code
The command code contains services for reading and writing parameters and information about the
user data length:
Command code structure:
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Note
(MSB) (LSB)
Service Command Specifier (cs) 0 Length e s Coding of user data length in
bit 2 and bit 3:
Write request 0 0 1 0 x x 1 1
• 00 = 4 byte
Write response 0 1 1 0 x x 0 0 • 01 = 3 byte
• 10 = 2 byte
Read request 0 1 0 0 x x 0 0
• 11 = 1 byte
Read response 0 1 0 0 x x 1 1
Error response 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Example:
The most common parameters are data with 4 byte (32 bit) and 2 byte (16 bit) data length:
Services 4 byte (32 bit) data 2 byte (16 bit) data Meaning
hex dec hex dec
Write request 23hex 35 2Bhex 43 Send parameters to drive
Write response 60hex 96 60hex 64 Controller response to write request (acknowledgement)
Read request 40hex 64 40hex 64 Request to read a controller parameter
Read response 43hex 67 4Bhex 75 Response to read request with current value
Error response 80hex 128 80hex 128 The controller indicates a communication error

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Index LOW byte, index HIGH byte

Lenze codes are selected with these two bytes according to the formula:
Index = 24575 - Lenze code - 2000 × (parameter set - 1)
Example:
Index of C0012 (acceleration time) in parameter set 1 = 24575 - 12 - 0 = 24563 = 5FF3hex
The entries following the left-justified Intel data format look as described in the following:
Index LOW byte = F3hex
Index HIGH byte = 5Fhex

Subindex
A subcode is addressed via the subindex. For codes without subcodes the subindex must always
be 0.
Example:
Subindex of C0417/4 = 4hex

Data 1 to data 4
Value to be transferred with up to 4 byte length.
Controller parameters are stored in all different formats. The most common format is Fixed-32. This
is a format with 4 decimal codes. The parameters must be multiplied by 10.000.
Error message (Command code = 128 = 80hex)
In the event of an error the drive generates an error response. A 6 is transferred in the user data
section in data 4 and an error code in data 3.
Possible error codes:
Command code Data 3 Data 4 Meaning
80hex 6 6 Index wrong
80hex 5 6 Subindex wrong
80hex 3 6 Access denied

9-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Example: Write parameter

The acceleration time C0012 of the controller with address 1 is to be changed from 1 to 20 s via the
parameter channel.
• Identifier calculation:
– Identifier parameter channel 1 to controller =
1536 + controller address = 1536 + 1 = 1537
• Command code = Write request (send parameter to drive) = 23hex
• Index calculation:
– Index = 24575 - code number = 24575 - 12 = 24563 = 5FF3hex
Subindex for C0012 = 0
• Calculation of acceleration time value:
– 20 s * 10.000 = 200.000 = 00030D40hex
• Telegram to drive:

Command Index Index Sub–

Identifier Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
code LOW–byte HIGH–byte index

1537 23 F3 5F 00 40 0D 03 00

fåÇÉñ Z Rc cP s~äìÉ Z MM MP Ma QM

Fig. 9-9 Telegram to drive (write parameter)

• Telegram from drive when execution incorrect:

Command Index Index Sub–

Identifier Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
code LOW–byte HIGH–byte index

1409 60 F3 5F 00 00 00 00 00

Fig. 9-10 Controller response when execution incorrect

Identifier parameter channel 1 from controller: 1408 + controller address = 1409

Command code = Write response (controller response (acknowledgement)) = 60hex

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Example: Read parameter

The heatsink temperature C0061 (43 °C) of the controller with address 5 is to be read via parameter
channel 1.
• Identifier calculation:
– Identifier of parameter channel 1 to controller =
1536 + controller address = 1536 + 5 = 1541
• Command code = Read request (read controller parameter) = 40hex
• Index calculation:
– Index = 24575 - code number = 24575 - 61 = 24514 = 5FC2hex
• Telegram to drive:

Command Index Index Sub–

Identifier Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
code LOW–byte HIGH–byte index

1541 40 C2 5F 00 00 00 00 00

Fig. 9-11 Telegram to drive (read parameter)

• Telegram from drive:

Command Index Index Sub–

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
Identifier LOW–byte HIGH–byte index
code

1413 43 C2 5F 00 B0 8F 06 00

Fig. 9-12 Telegram from drive

Identifier parameter channel 1 from controller = 1408 + controller address = 1413

Command code = Read response (response to read request with current value) = 43hex
Index of read response = 5FC2hex
Subindex = 0 (no subindex for C0061)
Data 1 to data 4 = 43 °C * 10.000 = 430.000 = 00068FB0hex

9-14 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

9.1.6.5 Process data structure

For fast data exchange between the controllers or between controller and host the system provides
two process data objects for input information (CAN-IN1, CAN-IN2) and two process data objects
for output information (CAN-OUT1, CAN-OUT2).
It is thus also possible to transfer binary signals such as input terminal status or data in format 16
bit such as analog signals.
• Cyclic, synchronised process data (process data channel CAN1)
– For fast cyclic data exchange the system provides a process data object for input signals
(CAN-IN1) and a process data object for output signals (CAN-OUT1) with 8 byte user data
each.
– These data are for communication with the higher-level host (e.g. PLC).
– CAN1 can also be used with event control (setting under C0360).
• Event-controlled process data (process data channel CAN2)
– For event-controlled data exchange the system provides a process data object for input
signals (CAN-IN2) and a process data object for output signals (CAN-OUT2) with 8 byte
user data each.
– Output data are transferred whenever a value is changed in the user data.
– This process data channel is especially suitable for data exchange between controllers and
decentralised terminal extension. It can also be used by a host.

Cyclic process data

Reading and accepting of cyclic process data by the controller requires a sync telegram.
The sync telegram is the trigger point for data acceptance and activates the sending process. For
cyclic process data processing the sync telegram must be generated accordingly by the host.
Synchronisation of cyclic process data

Sync telegram Sync telegram

Process data from the controller Process data to the controller

Fig. 9-13 Sync telegram (asynchronous data not considered)

Cyclic process data will be sent from the controller after a sync telegram. Afterwards the data will
be transferred to the controllers. The sync telegrams ensure data acceptance.
All other telegrams, such asparameters or event-controlled process data, are accepted
asynchronously after they have been transferred.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Structure of process data telegrams in cyclic process data channels (C0360 = 1)

Identifier Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

User data assignment

Byte Word assignment (16 bit) Bit assignment Internal signal assignment via
Cyclic process data telegram 1 CAN-IN1.W1 (LOW byte) CAN-IN1.B0 ¼ C0410 (digital)
to drive CAN-IN1 C0412 (analog)
2 CAN-IN1.W1 (HIGH byte) CAN-IN1.B15
3 CAN-IN1.W2 (LOW byte) CAN-IN1.B16 ¼ C0410 (digital)
C0412 (analog)
4 CAN-IN1.W2 (HIGH byte) CAN-IN1.B31
5 CAN-IN1.W3 (LOW byte)
C0412
6 CAN-IN1.W3 (HIGH byte)
7 CAN-IN1.W4 (LOW byte)
C0412
8 CAN-IN1.W4 (HIGH byte)
Configuration via
Cyclic process data telegram 1 CAN-OUT1.W1 (LOW byte) CAN-OUT1.B0 ¼ C0417 (digital)
from drive CAN–OUT1 C0421/3 (analog)
2 CAN-OUT1.W1 (HIGH byte) CAN-OUT1.B15
3 CAN-OUT1.W2 (LOW byte)
C0421/4
4 CAN-OUT1.W2 (HIGH byte)
5 CAN-OUT1.W3 (LOW byte)
C0421/5
6 CAN-OUT1.W3 (HIGH byte)
7 CAN-OUT1.W4 (LOW byte)
C0421/6
8 CAN-OUT1.W4 (HIGH byte)

9-16 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
System bus (CAN)

Event-controlled process data optionally with adjustable cycle time

8 bytes are available per data object.
Output data are transferred when a value of these 8 bytes changes or according to the cycle time
set under C0356/2 for CAN-OUT2 or C0356/3 for CAN-OUT1.
Structure of process data telegrams in event-controlled process data channels

Identifier Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

User data assignment

Byte Word assignment (16 bit) Bit assignment Internal signal assignment via
Process data telegram to 1 CAN-IN2.W1 (LOW byte) CAN-IN2.B0 ¼
drive CAN-IN2 (accepts C0410 (digital)
system bus device 2 CAN-IN2.W1 (HIGH byte) C0412 (analog)
CAN-IN2.B15
immediatel )
immediately)
3 CAN-IN2.W2 (LOW byte) CAN-IN2.B16 ¼
C0410 (digital)
4 CAN-IN2.W2 (HIGH byte) C0412 (analog)
CAN-IN2.B31
5 CAN-IN2.W3 (LOW byte)
C0412
6 CAN-IN2.W3 (HIGH byte)
7 CAN-IN2.W4 (LOW byte)
C0412
8 CAN-IN2.W4 (HIGH byte)
Configuration via
Event-controlled process 1 CAN-OUT2.W1 (LOW byte) CAN-OUT2.B0 ¼
data telegram from drive C0418 (digital)
CAN-OUT2 2 CAN-OUT2.W1 (HIGH byte) C0421/7 (analog)
CAN-OUT2.B15
3 CAN-OUT2.W2 (LOW byte)
C0421/8
4 CAN-OUT2.W2 (HIGH byte)
5 CAN-OUT2.W3 (LOW byte)
C0421/9
6 CAN-OUT2.W3 (HIGH byte)
7 CAN-OUT2.W4 (LOW byte)
C0421/10
8 CAN-OUT2.W4 (HIGH byte)

Tip!
The structure of process data telegrams is similar for process data channel CAN1, if this channel
is used with event control (C0360 = 0).

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 9-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation
Function modules: INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, LECOM-B (RS485)

9.2 Automation with the function modules INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP,

LECOM-B (RS485)
Automation with the function modules INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, LECOM-B (RS485) is described
in the Operating Instructions “Fieldbus function modules for 8200 motec /8200 vector frequency
inverters”.

9-18 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10 DC-bus connection
8200 motec frequency inverters are not suitable for DC-bus connection.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 10-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

11 Braking operation

11.1 Braking operation without additional measures

For smaller loads the functions ”DC-injection brake DCB” or ”AC-motor braking” can be set.
• DC-injection brake: (^ 7-17)
• AC-motor braking: (^ 7-18)

11.2 Braking operation with three-phase AC brake motors

Lenze three-phase AC motors and G-motion geared motors can be equipped with spring-operated
brakes. Brake rectifiers are required to supply spring-operated brakes (180 VDC, 205 VDC).
The selection of brake rectifiers depends on the input voltage AC and the rated voltage of the brake
coil (Vcoil):
Brake rectifier selection
Type/Order Max. input Output voltage Max. output Example
No. voltage VAC VDC current
Bridge rectifier E82ZWBR1 270 V + 0 % UDC = 0.9 x VAC 0.75 A Ucoil = 205 VDC ≡
6-pole UDC at VAC = 230 V
Half-wave recitifier E82ZWBR3 460 V + 0 % UDC = 0.45 x VAC 0.75 A Ucoil = 180 VDC ≡
6-pole UDC at VAC = 400 V

Tip!
Lenze geared motors with brake motor and Lenze three-phase AC brake motors are delivered as
standard with 4-pole brake rectifiers. These brake rectifiers are for AC switching of the brake.

Brake control
The brake can be switched on the DC and the AC side. With DC switching the delay times are
considerably shorter. It is thus possible to build up a switch-off positioning system with
reproduceable braking path. DC switching requires a spark suppressor to protect the contract and
the coil. The spark suppressor is integrated in 6 pole brake rectifiers.
The relay output of the controller can be used for brake switching. Alternatively, the brake can be
switched via an external control contact (e.g. PLC).
The following table shows the control possibilities for Lenze spring-operated brakes. The indications
made refer to a rated mains voltage of 230 V ±10 % or 400 V ±10 % :
Brake motor
Brake size 06 08 10 12 14 16
Brake torque 4 Nm 8 Nm 16 Nm 32 Nm 60 Nm 80 Nm
Motor frame size 063/071 080/090 090/100 100 112/132 132/160
Ucoil Rectifier Switching via controller relay output
180 V Half wave AC switching (ü) (ü)
DC switching or direct DC switching (ü) ( ü)
205 V Bridge
g AC switching ü ü
DC switching or direct DC switching ü ü
24 V Not necessary Direct DC switching ü ( ü)

ü Permissible
(ü) Only permissible with additional relay

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 11-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

Wiring
DC switching (quick brake reaction) AC switching (delayed brake reaction)

f < C0017 f ≥ C0017 AC 230 V f < C0017 f ≥ C0017 AC 230 V

X1 K11 K12 K14 X1 K11 K12 K14

E82ZMBR1 E82ZMBR1
- ~~+ - ~~+

M M
3~ 3~ 205 V
205 V

Parameter setting
If you want to control the electro-mechanical motor brake via the controller relay output, the relay
must be programmed.
Example: Activation/deactivation of the brake (205 V) when a certain threshold is exceeded. The
braking process can be activated by a digital signal which decelerates to quick stop:
• Configure the relay output for brake control
– Signal “Value below Qmin threshold ” must be assigned to the relay output by setting
C0008 = 7
• Set the frequency threshold Qmin under C0017
– The brake is activated when the setpoint falls below Qmin
– The brake is released when the setpoint exceeds Qmin

f[Hz]
fmax
(C0011)

Qmin
(C0017)

STOP STOP

82ZMBR1003

11-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

11.3 Braking operation with external brake resistor

Larger moments of inertia or longer generator-mode operation require an external brake resistor. It
converts mechanical energy into heat.
The brake transistor integrated in the controller switches the external brake resistor in addition when
the DC-voltage exceeds a threshold. It can thus be avoided that the controller sets ”overvoltage”
and pulse inhibit and forces the drive to coast to standstill. Extneral brake resistors ensure braking
operation at any time.

11.3.1 Number of brake resistors

The Lenze brake resistors recommended in the tables are selected for the corresponding controllers
(ref. to 150 % power in generator mode). They are suitable for most applications.
For special applications such as centrifuges, hoists, etc., the brake resistor must meet the following
conditions:
Brake resistor Application
Criteria with active load with passive load
Peak brake power [W] t1 P max ⋅ η e ⋅ η m t 1
≥ P max ⋅ η e ⋅ η m ⋅ ≥ ⋅
t cycl 2 t cycl

Thermal capacity [Ws]

≥ P max ⋅ η e ⋅ η m ⋅ t 1 P max ⋅ η e ⋅ η m
≥ ⋅ t1
2
Resistance [W] 2
UDC
Rmin ≤ R ≤
P max ⋅ η e ⋅ η m

Active load Can move without being influenced by the controller

(e.g. hoists, unwinders)
Passive load Decelerates to standstill without influence of the controller
(e.g. horizontal traversing drives, centrifuges, fans)
UDC [V] Brake transistor threshold from C0174
Pmax [W] Max. brake power determined by the application
η Electrical efficiency (controller + motor)
Guide values: 0.54 (0.25 kW) ... 0.85 (11 kW)
ηm Mechanical efficiency (gearbox, machine)
t 1 [s] Braking time
t cycl [s] Cycle time = Time between two braking processes (= t1 + break)
R min [W] Smallest permissible brake resistor (see rated data for the integrated brake transistor)

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 11-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

11.3.2 Rated data for the integrated brake transistor

8200 motec, 230 V

Brake transistor 8200 motec, 230 V

E82MV251_2B E82MV371_2B

Threshold VDC [V DC] 380 (fixed

Peak brake current Î [A DC] 0.85
Max. continuous current [A DC] 0.85
Smallest permissible brake [W] 470
resistor Rmin
Current reduction 2.5 %/°C derating above 40 ° C peak brake current
5 %/1000 m derating above 1000 m a.m.s.l.
Switch-on cycle Max. 60 s at peak brake current, then at least 60 s break
Recommended Lenze brake Order ERBM470R110W
resistor no.

8200 motec, 400 V

Brake transistor 8200 motec, 400 V

E82MV551_4B E82MV751_4B E82MV152_4B E82MV222_4B

Threshold VDC [V DC] 790 (fixed)

Peak brake current Î [A DC] 1.8 4.0
Max. continuous current [A DC] 1.0 2.5
Smallest permissible brake [W] 450 200
resistor (VDC =790 V)
Current reduction 2.5 %/°C derating above 40 °C peak brake current
5 %/1000 m derating above 1000 m a.m.s.l.
Switch-on cycle Max. 60 s at peak brake current, then at least 60 s break
Recommended Lenze brake Order ERBM470R100W ERBM240R220W
resistor no.

Brake transistor 8200 motec, 400 V

E82MV302_4B E82MV402_4B E82MV552_4B E82MV752_4B

Threshold VDC [V DC] 790 (fixed)

Peak brake current Î [A DC] 7.8 7.8 11.4 16.5
Max. continuous current [A DC] 3.9 5.1 7.0 9.6
Smallest permissible brake [W] 100 100 68 47
resistor (VDC=790 V)
Current reduction 2.5 %/°C derating above 40 °C peak brake current
5 %/1000 m derating above 1000 m a.m.s.l.
Switch-on cycle Max. 60 s at peak brake current, then at least 60 s break
Recommended Lenze brake Order ERBD180R300W ERBD100R600W ERBD100R600W ERBD047R01K2
resistor no.

11-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

11.3.3 Rated data for Lenze brake resistors

Lenze brake resistors (IP20)

Type of R Continuous Thermal capacity Switch-on cycle Cable Weight

protection power* cross-section

Order number [Ω] [kW] [kWs] [mm2] AWG [kg]

ERBM470R110W IP55 470 0.11 16.5 1.5 16 0.8

1:10
ERBM240R220W IP55 240 0.22 33 Braking for max. 15 s, 1.5 16 1.3
ERBD180R300W IP20 180 0.3 45 then at least 150 s 1 18 2.0
break
ERBD100R600W 100 0.6 90 1 18 3.1
ERBD047R01K2 47 1.2 180 2.5 14 4.9

* The continuous power is a value important for the selection of brake resistors. Braking at peak brake power (V 2DC/R)
Observe national and regional regulations (e. g. VDE 0113, EN 60204)

Tip!
• All brake resistors are equipped with a thermostat (isolated NC contact).
• If necessary, several brake resistors can be connected in series or in parallel. (Caution: Do
not have values below the lowest permissible value!)

Installation
• Brake resistors can become very hot, they can even burn. Therefore brake resistors must be
mounted in a way that the high temperatures can not damage anything.
• Provide a safety switch-off in the event the brake resistor overheats.
• Use temperature contacts of the brake resistor (e. g. T1 / T2) as control contacts to
disconnect the controller from the mains.

Tip!
Shielding of cables is only required to comply with existing regulations (e. g. VDE 0160, EN 50178).

Connection to E82MV251_2B, E82MV371_2B

Procedure Connection diagram

The brake resisistor RB is connected to the
terminal strip X1 of the motec.
1. Open the motec.
2. Mount the cable connector for the cable
gland.
3. Unscrew the terminal strip X1 and remove
it from its support.
4. Connect the brake resistor to BR2 and
BR1.
5. Reconnect the terminal strip X1.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 11-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Braking operation

Connection to E82MV551_4B, E82MV751_4B, E82MV152_4B, E82MV152_4B

Procedure Connection diagram
The brake resisistor RB is connected to the
terminal strip X1 of the motec.
1. Open the motec.
2. Mount the cable connector for the cable
gland.
3. Unscrew the terminal strip X1 and remove
it from its support.
4. Remove the bridge between BR1 and BR0.
5. Connect the brake resistor to BR2 and
BR1.
6. Reconnect the terminal strip X1.
If the external resistor is disconnects, BR1
and BRO must be bridged again.
Otherwise, the motec can be destroyed.

Connection to E82MV302_4B, E82MV402_4B, E82MV552_4B, E82MV752_4B

Procedure Connection diagram
The brake resisistor RB is connected to the
terminal strip X2 of the motec.
1. Open the motec. X2 BR1 BR2 U V W PE2 T1 T2
2. Mount the cable connector for the cable
gland. PES
3. Connect the brake resistor to BR2 and
BR1.
T1 T2
L≤8m

RB ϑ>

PES

11-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories
Accessories/documentation

12 Accessories

12.1 Accessories
Accessories Name Order number
Function modules Standard I/O E82ZAFS001
(varnished version) Application I/O E82ZAFA001
Bus I/O for motec 0.25/0.37 kW, 230 V E82ZMFB001
Bus I/O for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZAFB001
System bus (CAN) E82ZAFC001
LECOM-B (RS485) E82ZAFL001
INTERBUS E82ZAFI001
PROFIBUS-DP E82ZAFP001
DeviceNet/CANopen E82ZAFD001
AS interface (in preparation) E82ZAFF001
Communication modules Keypad (can only be used with mounting kit for control cabinet and connection cable) E82ZBC
Hand terminal = Keypad with handheld (additional connection cable required) E82ZBB
Handheld with PC interface RS232 (PC system cable not additionally required) E82ZBL
Switch/potentiometer Switch/potentiometer unit E82ZBU
Wiring
g terminals Mains bus connector for motec 0.25/0.37 kW, 230 V E82ZWKN2
Mains bus connector for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZWKN4
System terminal for motec 0.25/0.37 kW, 230 V E82ZMKS
System terminal for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZWKS
Fan connection terminal for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZWKL
Accessories for braking
g Bridge rectifier for motec 0.25/0.37 kW, 230 V E82ZMBR1
operation
i Bridge rectifier for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZWBR1
Half-wave rectifier for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V E82ZWBR3
Others Mounting kit for control cabinet (additional connection cable required) E82ZBHT
Connection cable 2.5 m E82ZWL025
5m E82ZWL050
10 m E82ZWL100
Parameter setting software “Global Drive Control (GDC)” ESP-GDC2
Parameter setting software “Global Drive Control (GDCeasy)” ESP-GDC2-E
PC system
y cable RS232 0.5 m EWL0048
5m EWL0020
Current limitation module for motec 0.25/0.37 kW, 230 V E82ZJ004
Current limitation module for motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW, 400 V EZN3A0150H024
AS-i ribbon cable connection E82ZMFF

12.2 Documentation

Documentation Order number

German English French
Operating
p g Instructions Global Drive frequency inverters 8200 motec 0.25 ... 7,5 kW EDB82MVD EDB82MVU EDB82MVF
Fieldbus function modules PROFIBUS-DP, INTERBUS, LECOM-B (RS485) E82ZAD E82ZAU E82ZAF
Mountingg Instructions in 8200 motec 0.25/0.37 kW EDK82MV371
three languages 8200 motec 0.55 ... 2.2 kW EDK82MV222
8200 motec 3 ... 7.5 kW EDK82MV752
Catalogs Catalog ”Geared motors with integrated frequency inverter” Please contact your Lenze representative

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 12-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories
Type-specific accessories - 230 V mains voltage

12.3 Type-specific accessories - mains voltage 230 V

Mains connection, single phase, 1/N/PE AC 230 V

8200 motec type

E82MV251_2B E82MV371_2B

Accessories Order number

E.l.c.b. EFA1C10A EFA1C10A

Fuse EFSM-0100ASB EFSM-0100ASB
Fuse holder EFH10001
Mains choke ELN1-0900H005
Current-limiting module E82ZJ004
Brake resistor ERBM470R110W (IP55)

12-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories
Type-specific accessories - 400 V mains voltage

12.4 Type-specific accessories - mains voltage 400 V

Mains connection 3/PE AC 400 V

8200 motec type

E82MV551_4B E82MV751_4B E82MV152_4B E82MV222_4B

Accessories Order number

E.l.c.b. EFA3B06A EFA3B06A EFA3B06A EFA3B10A

EFA3B10A 1)
Fuse EFSM-0060AWE EFSM-0060AWE EFSM-0060AWE EFSM-0100AWE
EFSM-0100AWE 1)
Fuse holder EFH10001
Mains choke EZN3A1500H003 -
Current-limiting module EZN3A0150H024 or 3 x E82ZJ004
Brake resistor ERBM470R110W (IP55) ERBM240R220W (IP55)

Mains connection 3/PE AC 400 V

8200 motec type

E82MV302_4B E82MV402_4B E82MV552_4B E82MV752_4B

Accessories Order number

E.l.c.b. EFA3B16A EFA3B20A EFA3B25A EFA3B32A

EFA3B32A 1)
Fuse EFSM-0160AWE EFSM-0200AWE EFSM-0250AXH EFSM-0320AWH
EFSM-0320AWH 1)
Fuse holder EFH10001 EFH10002
Fan module E82ZMV

1) Operation with increased rated power

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 12-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories
Type-specific accessories - 400 V mains voltage

12-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Pressure regulation

13 Application examples

13.1 Pressure regulation

A centrifugal pump (square load characteristic)hold the pressure in a pipe system at a constant level
(e.g. water supply of households or industrial premises).

Conditions
• Operation with a PLC (pressure setpoint selection, night reduction).
• Setting up operation at site possible.
• The pressure is lowered during the night. The pump works in an uncontrolled mode at low
and constant speed.
• The output frequency must never fall below 10 kHz (dry running).
• Avoid pressure peaks in the system.
• Avoid mechanical resonances at approx. 30 Hz output frequency.
• Overheat motor protection.
• Error message to PLC.
• At site display of operating status and actual pressure value.
• At site pump stop.

Functions used
• Internal process controller for pressure control
– Pressure setpoint from PLC (4 ... 20 mA)
– Actual pressure value from sensor (0 ... 10 V)
• Manual/remote changeover for setting-up operation at site
– Manual: Pressure setpoint via pushbutton with motor potentiometer function (UP/DOWN)
– Remote: Pressure setpoint from PLC
• JOG speed for night reduction (activated via PLC).
• Dry-running protection (setpoint-independent min. speed).
• Smooth start along S ramp.
• Suppression of mechanical resonance with a skip frequency.
• PTC motor monitoring.
• Trip error message via digital output.
• Ready for operation via relay output.
• Configurable analog output for actual pressure value.
• Electrical controller inhibit (CINH).

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Pressure regulation

Application-specific configuration
• Motor parameter identification. (^ 7-29)
Code Settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Value Meaning
C0014¿ Operating mode 3 V/f characteristic control V ~ f Square-law characteristic with constant Vmin
boost
C0410 Digital signal source
8 DOWN 1 E1 Inputs
p of pushbuttons
p “UP” and “DOWN”
7 UP 2 E2
1 JOG1/3 3 E3 JOG speed for night reduction Activation of the JOG speed
p deactivates the
19 PCTRL1-OFF 3 E3 Process controller deactivation process controller.
ll
17 H/Re 4 E4 Changeover PLC/setting up operation at site
C0412 Analog signal source
1 Setpoint 1 1 X3/2I Pressure setpoint (manual)
(NSET1-N1)
2 Setpoint 2 3 MPOT1-OUT Motor potentiometer function Pressure setpoint (remote)
(NSET1-N2)
5 Act. process 4 X3/1U Actual pressure value
controller value
(PCTRL1-ACT)
C0145 Process controller 0 Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) Main setpoint + additional setpoint
setpoint source
C0070 Process controller à If necessary, adapt to process
gain à More information: ^ 7-31 ff.
C0071 Process controller à
readjustment time
C0072 Differential à
component of
process controller
C0074 Process controller 100.0 0.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
influence
C0238¿ Frequency precontrol -0- -0- No precontrol (only process controller) Process controller has full influence

C0419 Free configuration of Analog signal source

analog outputs
1 X3/62 (AOUT1-IN) 8 Actual process controller value
C0037 JOG1 17 Derating to approx. 1/3 of rated motor speed
C0239¿ Minimum frequency 10.00 Setpoint-independent minimum speed
limitation
C0182* Integration time 0.50 s Smooth start
S-ramps
C0625* Skip frequency 1 30.00 Hz
C0628* Bandwidth of skip 10.00 % ref. to C0625
frequencies
C0119¿ Configuration PTC 4 PTC input active, TRIP set
input/earth fault
detection
C0415 Free configuration of
digital outputs
1 Relay output K1 16 Ready for operation
2 Digital output X3/A1 25 Trip error message

13-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Pressure regulation

Jumper positions at application I/ O

• Jumper A in position 7-9 (actual pressure value 0 ... 10 V at X3/1U)
• Remove jumper B (setpoint selection via master current at X3/2I), (see C0034)
• Jumper C in position 3-5 (actual pressure value output as current signal at X3/62)
• Jumper D in position 2-4 or 4-6, since X3/63 is not assigned.

Tip!
• With this example, the controller must be equipped with an application-I/O , because it
required two analog inputs.
• If the pressure setpoint is selected via PC, keypad or JOG value instead of PLC, a standard
I/O will be enough.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Pressure regulation

‡
0 ... +10 V
0 ... +10 V

†
„

+
+

-
2

2
+

-
~

~
-

ƒ
ƒ

0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA

1U
62

U 1 V1 W 1
W 2 U 2 V2
GND
JOG1
SPS

PE
TRIP
4 ... 20 mA
DOWN
CINH
UP
H/Re

4
2
E1
E2
E5
E6

E3
E4

A4

A1
59

A2
20
28

7
7
+5V
1U 1I 2U 2I 62 63 9
X3

PE


PE

PE
U

F1
K1
‚
T1 T2 PE W V

L3
PE

L2
BR0
BR1
BR2
K11
K12
K14

L1

L3
L2

L1
X1
X2

N
ˆ

 Metallic cable glands „ External power supply ‡ Pump

‚ Mains contactor 2 conductor pressure sensor ˆ Light on = ready for
ƒ Analog display for actual pressure value † 3 conductor pressure sensor operation
, †: use one pressure sensor only
Fig. 13-1 Principle wiring of a pressure regulation

13-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Operation with medium-frequency motors

13.2 Operation with medium-frequency motors

Medium-frequency asynchronous motors are used for high and controllable speeds. Possible
applications are hobbing mills for wood machining, fans, vacuum pumps, concrete machinery,
polishing drives.

Selection
• If the motor is to be braked quickly an external brake resistor is required to brake high
moments of inertia. (^ 11-3)
• Set the speed setting range in a way that motors with self ventilation will always be sufficiently
cooled (setting range as load function).

Application-specific configuration
Code Name Setting Note
C0011 Max. output frequency Set to the value indicated on the motor nameplate, but not higher than
400 Hz.
C0012 Acceleration time main Setting must ensure acceleration below the current limit.
setpoint
C0013 Deceleration time main Setting must ensure that braking is still possible with or without an external
setpoint brake resistor without getting the error message “Overvoltage (OU)”.
C0014 Operating mode -2- Linear characteristic (best operating behaviour for medium-frequency motors)
C0015 V/f rated frequency ^ 7-4
C0016 Umin boost Setting depends on load at low frequencies.
Recommendation: 0 %
C0018 Chopper frequency -3- 16 kHz (smooth running only at 16 kHz)
Observe power derating ^ 3-4
C0021 Slip compensation 0% Usually not required.
C0022 Imax limit (motor mode) Set to rated motor current.
150 % with short acceleratin times and high moments of inertia.
C0023 Imax-limit in the generator 150 % Lenze setting
mode
C0106 Holding time for DCB 0s DC-injection brake must be off!
C0144 Chopper-frequency derating -0- No derating

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Dancer position control

13.3 Dancer position control (line drive)

The dancer position controls the material tension while the machine is running. The example
describes the synchronisation of material web speed v2 to line speed v1. This application requires
an application-I/O.

Functions used
• Internal process controller as position controller.
• Selection of the line speed v1 via X3/1U.
• Actual dancer position value of dancer potentiometer via X3/2U.
• Setting-up speed via X3/E3 as JOG value.
• Dancer position controller switch off via X3/E4 (external) or internally via Qmin (C0017) and
C0415/1 = 6.

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
• Motor parameter identification. (^ 7-29)
• If necessary, calibration of setpoints and actual values to process variables. (^ 7-52)
Code Settings IMPORTANT
No. Name Value Meaning
C0410 Digital signal source
1 JOG1/3 3 X3/E3 Setpoint setting
4 QSP 2 X3/E2 Quick stop activation
19 PCTRL1-OFF 4 X3/E4 Dancer position controller switch off
C0412 Analog signal source
1 Setpoint 1 1 X3/1U Line speed v1
(NSET1-N1)
5 Act. process 4 X3/2U Actual dancer position value
controller value
(PCTRL1-ACT)
C0037 JOG1 20.00 Fixed set-up speed v1 for material guidance,
individually adjustable.
C0070 Process controller 1.00 Adaptation to process
gain More information: ^ 7-31
C0071 Process controller 100
readjustment time
C0072 Differential 0.0
component of
process controller
C0074 Process controller 10.0 %
influence
C0105 Deceleration time approx. 1 s E.g. as emergency stop function. The settings
QSP must ensure braking of the controller to
standstill within a very short time. Check
whether the application needs an external
brake resistor.
C0145 Process controller -1- C0181 (PCTRL1-SET2)
setpoint source
C0181* Process controller Value of Position the dancer as required, C0051 = read actual dancer C0181 should not be set to “0”, because the
setpoint 2 C0051 position value. position setpoint would be generated from the
(PCTRL1-SET2) mains setpoint.
C0239¿ Lowest frequency 0.00 Hz Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the
limit process controller.
C0238¿ Frequency precontrol -1- Precontrol (total setpoint + process controller) Process controller has limited influence.
Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) = Main setpoint + additional
setpoint

13-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Dancer position control

Adjustment
Set C0070, C0071, C0072 in a way that if the dancer changes its actual position, its original position
can be reached quickly and without excessive overshooting.
1. X3/E4 = HIGH (process controller stop), C0072 = 0 (no influence).
2. Set C0070.
3. X3/E4 = LOW, C0072 = 0 (no influence).
4. Set C0071.
5. Set C0072.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Dancer position control
V2

FG
S

„
+5 V

A
R1
E
V1

U 1 V1 W 1
W 2 U 2 V2

PE
CINH
JOG1/3
QSP
PCTRL1-OFF

4
2
E1
E2
E5
E6

E3
E4

A4

A1
59

A2
20
28

7
7

0 ...+10 V
+5V
1U 1I 2U 2I 62 63 9
X3

ƒ
PE


PE

L1 L2 L3 PE
U
T1 T2 PE W V
PE

BR0
BR1
BR2

‚
K11
K12
K14

K1
L1

L3
L2

F1
X1
X2

 Metallic cable glands ƒ Main setpoint ~V1

‚ Mains contactor „ Dancer potentiometer
Fig. 13-2 Principle wiring of a dancer position control

13-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Speed control

13.4 Speed control

Tip!
Lenze three-phase AC motors and Lenze geared motors are available with Lenze pulse encoder
ITD21 (512/2048 increments, HTL output signals). Thus a two-track speed feedback (tracks A and
B) can be used with the application I/O function module.

Example
Speed control with inductive, single track 3-conductor sensor
The speed control is to compensate the difference between actual speed and speed setpoint
caused by load (motor and generator mode).
The motor speed is detected by an inductive sensor (e.g. gear, metalic fan wheel, cam). The sensor
can detect the speed either directly at the motor or in the machine.
Q
8 2 0 0

S ta n d a rd -I/O
G N D 1 G N D 1 G N D 2
3
+ 5 V + 2 0 V

6 2 7 8 9 7 2 0 2 8 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 3 9 A 1 5 9

M
3 ~
R

Fig. 13-3 Speed control with 3-conductor sensor

 Setpoint 8200: 8200 motec oder 8200 vector

‚ 3-conductor sensor

Speed sensor requirements

• The maximum frequency of inductive sensors is usually between 1 and 6 kHz, depending on its design.
• At the detection point, the number of attenuation cams per revolution must ensure an output frequency of the sensor as high as possible.
• The control dynamics will be sufficient if the output frequency (f act.) is > 0.5 kHz at rated speed.
• If the current consumption of the sensor is not higher than the value permitted at X3/20, a 3-conductor sensor can be directly connected to
the controller.
Output frequency calculation
z = Number of cams per revolution
f ist= z ⋅ n
60 n = Speed at detection point in [min-1]
fact. = Output frequency of the sensor in [Hz]
Permissible pulse shapes at X3/E1
U E 1 • Te = on (HIGH)
• Ta = off (LOW)
1 5 V Permissible level range:
• LOW: 0 ... +3 V
• HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
Permissible range of the scanning ratio:
• Te : Ta = 1 : 1 to Te : Ta = 1 : 5
0
T e T a t
0 Tip!
Every digital speed sensor which meets the requirements can be used.
T ³ 1 0 0 m s

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Speed control

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
Code Settings IMPORTANT
Value Meaning
C0410 Free configuration Configuration frequency input X3/E1
of digital input
signals
24 DFIN1-ON -1-
C0412 Free configuration Analog signal source
of analog input
signals
5 Actual process -2-
controller value
(PCTRL1-ACT)
C0011 Maximum output C0074 [%] p p = No. of pole pairs
frequency (1 + ) ⋅ ⋅ n max nmax = Max. speed [min-1]
100 60
C0014¿ Operating mode -2 V/f-characteristic control Dynamics in control mode “vector control” to
low
C0019 Operating threshold approx. 0.5 Hz Adaptation to the application
of auto DCB
C0021 Slip compensation 0% No slip compensation with controlled
compensation
C0035*¿ Selection DCB -1- Brake current selection under C0036

C0036 Voltage/current DCB 50 ... 100 % Adaptation to the application

C0070 Process controller 1 ... 15 5 = typical
gain
C0071 Process controller 50 ... 500 ms 100 ms = typical
readjustment time
C0072 Differential 0 not active
component of
process controller
C0074 Process controller 2 ... 10 % Example • Adaptation to the application
influence n −n 1500 − 1400 • 200% rated motor slip (2 * Sr) adjustment
S N= 0 n N S N=
1500
= 6.67 %
0
C0106 Holding time auto 1s • Guide value
DCB • Afterwards the controller sets controller
inhibit
C0181* Process controller • Adaptation to the application
setpoint 2 • Selection with keypad or PC
(PCTRL1-SET2) • ^ 7-33: More possibilities for setting the
setpoint
C0196*¿ Activation of -1- DCB active at C0050 < C0019 and setpoint < C0019
auto–DCB
C0238¿ Frequency -1- With frequency precontrol
precontrol
C0239¿ Lowest frequency 0 Hz Unipolar, no change of direction of rotation
limit
C0425¿* Configuration Set C0425 that the frequency coming from the
frequency input encoder is lower than f max
X3/E1 (DFIN1)
C0426* Gain frequency 100 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 f r (C0425) C0011 − f s
input X3/E1, X3/E2 C0426 = n ⋅ ⋅ 100 %
max C0011
((A)) (DFIN1-GAIN)
( ) ⋅ inc∕rev
60 s
• nmax = Maximum process speed of motor
in min-1
• fs = Slip frequency in Hz

13-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Speed control

Adjustment (see example in Fig. 13-3)

Conditions
• A 4-pole motor is to be operated up to nmax = 1500 min-1. The motor has the following data:
– Rated speed nr = 1390 min-1
– Rated frequency fr = 50 Hz
– Slip sr = 7.3 %
– Slip frequency fs = 3.7 Hz
• The pulse encoder delivers 6 increments/revolution (inc/rev).
– The maximum frequency at X3/E1 at maximum speed is:
1500 ⋅ 6 = 150 Hz
60 s

• Process controller influence (C0074) setting to 200 % rated slip:

– C0074 = 14.6 %
• Calculation of maximum output frequency (C0011):

1 + C0074
100
[% ]
 ⋅
p
60
⋅ n max [min −1] = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 1500 = 57.5 Hz
60

Adjustment of frequency input X3/E1

• C0425 = -0-
– Normalisation frequency =100 Hz
– Maximum frequency = 300 Hz
• Activation of frequency input with C0410/24 = 1.
– Ensure that no other digital signal is assigned to E1 (no double assignment)!
• Assign the actual process controller value to the frequency input under C0412 (C0412/5 = 2)
• Gain C0426
– The input frequency at X3/E1 is normalised to the value of the preselected frequency
(100 Hz), i.e. internally 100 Hz correspond to the output frequency set under C0011.
– C0426 must be recalculated after every change of C0011.
f (C0425) C0011 − f s
C0426 = N
n max ⋅ ⋅ 100 % = 100 ⋅ 57.5 − 3.7 ⋅ 100 % = 62.4 %
⋅ inc∕rev C0011 150 57.5
60 s

Tip!
If the number of increments per revolution is not known, you have to find out the gain to be set by
experiment:
1. Set C0238 = 0 or 1.
2. Set the drive to the maximum required output frequency. The output frequency is now
determined by the frequency precontrol.
3. Use C0426 to set the gain in a way that the actual value (C0051) equals the setpoint (C0050).

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Group drive

13.5 Group drive (operation with several motors)

Several motors can be connected to the controller in parallel. The sum of the individual motor
currents must not exceed the rated controller current.

Installation
• The motor cable is wired in e.g. a terminal box.
• Every motor must be equipped with a thermostat (NC contact). The series connection must
be connected to X2/T1 and X2/T2 using a separate cable.
• Only use shielded cables (^ 4-6). Connect the shield with PE with a surface as large as
possible.
• Resulting cable lengths:
l res = Sum of all motor cable lengths × No. of motor cables

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
• Control mode C0014 = -2- evtl. -4-. (^ 7-2)
• PTC input C0119 = -1-. (^ 7-50)

T1
8200
T2

Terminal strip/
terminal box

Motor 1 Motor 2

J> J>

Fig. 13-4 Basic structure of a group drive

Tip!
You can monitor motor cables and operating elements using the motor phase failure detection.
(^ 14-40, C0597)

13-12 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Sequential circuit

13.6 Sequential circuit

Two refrigeration compressors supply several refrigeration devices which are switched on and off
in irregular intervals.

Tip!
With the function module application I/O it is not necessary to use the external time delay element
of Fig. 13-5. The time delay for the relay output K1 is set under C0423/1. The time delay avoids that
compressor 2 is switched on when the actual value fluctuates just a little bit.

Conditions
• Compressor 1 is controlled by means of a 8200 motec or 8200 vector.
• Compressor 2 is connected to the mains and is switched on and off depending on the
consumption.
• The pressure setpoint of the process is selected as fixed value.

Functions used
• Controller enable/inhibit to start and stop
• Process controller
• Fixed frequency
• Programmable relay output
• Adjustable thresholds
• Parameter set changeover

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
• Process controller configuration:
– Process controller optimisation (^ 7-31)
– Process controller has full influence: C0238 = -0-, C0074 = 100 %
– Process controller setpoint source = Total setpoint: C0145 = -0-
– Process setpoint = JOG frequency JOG1 (in PAR1 and PAR2 continuously active via X3/E1):
C0037 = 50 Hz
• Adaption of parameter set 1 (PAR1) to application:
– Continuous activation of X3/E1 (LOW active): C0411 = -1-
– Threshold for compressor 2: C0017 = 45 Hz.
– Connection of compressor 2 via relay: C0415/1 = 6.
• Adaptation of parameter set 2 (PAR2) to application:
– Continuous activation of X3/E1 (LOW active): C0411 = -1-
– Threshold for disconnection of compressor 2: C0010 = 15 Hz (minimum frequency).
– Disconnection of compressor 2 via relay: C0415/1 = 24.
– Relay output inversion: C0416 = -1-.
• PAR changeover (PAR1 ⇔ PAR2) via X3/E2: C0410/13 = 2.

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Sequential circuit

P re s s u re s e n s o r

C o m p re s s o r 1 C o m p re s s o r 2

A c t. p r e s s u r e v a lu e 0 ... 1 0 V
8 2 0 0

R e la y K 1
E x te rn a l
c o n n e c tio n

M a in s

K 1 S ta n d a rd -I/O
G N D 1 G N D 1 G N D 2

X 1 K 1 1 K 1 2 K 1 4 X 3 6 2 7 8 9 7 2 0 2 8 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 3 9 A 1 5 9

A c t. p r e s s u r e v a lu e S ta rt/s to p
0 ... 1 0 V

Fig. 13-5 Principle of sequential circuits

8200: 8200 motec oder 8200 vector

Function: Fig. 13-5

1.Activate the threshold 45 Hz K1 in PAR1.
2.If K1 remains picked up, K2 is connected.
3.Compressor 2 is connected via K3. At the same time the parameter set is changed via X3/E2 (process controller is not affected)-
4.K1 picks up when the minimum frequency is reached (depending on load). After time K1T is over, K2 picks up again.
5.Compressor 2 is switched off. The parameter set is changed backed to PAR1.
• K1T debounces the switching point of compressor 2 (adapt dely time to process).

13-14 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Setpoint summation

13.7 Setpoint summation (basic and additional load operation)

Conveyors, pumps, etc. are often operated at a speed which is increased if necessary.
The speed is set by selection of a main and additional setpoint. The setpoints can have different
sources (e.g. PLC or setpoint potentiometer). The controller adds both analog setpoints and
increases the motor speed accordingly.
For smooth acceleration, acceleration and deceleration ramps of both setpoints can be adjusted.
The main setpoint ramps can have a S-shape.

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
• Setpoint summation configuration: Assign the setpoints to be added to C0412/1 and
C0412/3. (^ 7-36)
• If necessary, adjust the main setpoint ramps under C0182. (^ 7-14)

Tip!
• Possible ways to select a setpoint: (^ 7-19 ff)
• The additional setpoint can be displayed under C0049 (alternatively: C0412/3 = 0).
• With controllers with standard I/O, the main setpoint must be selected via PC, keypad, JOG
frequency or the function ”Motor potentiometer” because there is only one analog input
available.
• If you use an application I/O, the additional setpoint can be switched on and off during
operation ( (C0410/31 ≠ 0)

Main
Monitor
outputs S-ramps

n_act
Monitor motor speed
outputs

K35.82M001

Fig. 13-6 Principle of setpoint summation

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 13-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples
Power control

13.8 Power control (torque limitation)

The power control (torque limitation) generates a constant mass flow when moving masses which
change their specific weight, usually air exposed to different temperatures.
Torque limit and speed setpoint are selected for the controller. The torque limit will not be exceeded
because the speed is automatically adapted if the specific weight changes. The speed setpoint
must be set in a way that it does not limit the speed adaption.
Control mode ”Sensorless torque control” (C0014 = 5):
With sensorless torque contro, a constant torque is preselected. A defined speed limit must not be
exceeded (speed limitation).

Application-specific configuration
• Basic settings. (^ 5-2)
• Control mode selection: C0014 ≠ 5! (^ 7-2)
• Torque limit value configuration: Assign C0412/6.
• Speed setpoint configuration: Assign C0412/1.

Tip!
• Set the max. output frequency C0011 for the max. permissible speed. Thus the speed does
not have a limiting effect, the drive is constantly running at the set torque limit.
• The torque limit can be indicated under C0047.
• Possibilities to select speed and torque limits: (^ 7-19 ff)
• With standard I/O, the speed setpoint must be selected via PC, keypad, JOG frequency or
the function ”Motor potentiometer” because there is only one analog input available.
• Acceleration time and moment of inertia require a torque reserve.
• Power control should not be used with group drives.

M
motec
f

cold heavy mass

air/discharge Fan flow

warm light m = const.

Fig. 13-7 Power control principle example: Fan

8200: 8200 motec oder 8200 vector

13-16 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Standard I/O

14 Appendix

14.1 Signal flow charts

How to read signal flow charts

Symbol Meaning
Signal connection in Lenze setting

Fixed signal connection

Analog input can be freely connected with an analog output which has the same labelling
labelling.

Analog output

Analog input to be used to connect the motor potentiometer output

Motor potentiometer output

Digital input can be freely connected with a digital output which has the same labelling.
labelling

Digital output

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-1

 INPUT OUTPUT
X3 AOUT1 X3
NSET 1

14-2
AIN1 AOUT1-IN + AOUT1-OUT
A 2 C0419/1 62
+

Fig. 14-1
C0412/1 NSET1-N1 NSET1-RFG1-IN

14.1.1
8 + AIN1-OUT 2
D 2 AOUT1-OFFSET
7 + C0422/1
C0412/2 NSET1-N2 NSET1-NOUT

14.1.1.1
AIN1-OFFSET 2
C0413/1
C0010 NSET1-C0010...C0011 AOUT1-GAIN
C0034 2 C0420/1
C0410/1 NSET1-JOG1/3
AIN1-GAIN
C0414/1
C0410/2 NSET1-JOG2/3 NSET1-RFG1-I=O 2
C0410/5 NSET1-RFG1-STOP

C0410/6 NSET1-RFG1-0
Show/Hide Bookmarks

C0410/24 DFIN1
0 Norm
1 Offset Gain
+ DFIN1-OUT
+ 2
PCTRL1
Appendix

C0425 C0427 C0426 C0412/3 PCTRL1-NADD PCTRL1-OUT 2

C0412/4 PCTRL1-SET1 PCTRL1-ACT 2
0 ... 10 kHz
C0412/5 PCTRL1-ACT PCTRL1-SET1 2
X3 C0410/18 PCTRL1-I-OFF PCTRL1-NOUT
E1 DIGIN1 2 C0410/19 PCTRL1-OFF
E2 PCTRL1-QMIN 2 2
2 C0410/21 PCTRL1-STOP AIF-OUT
C0411: 1...63 STAT1
E3 C0114: 1...63 PCTRL1-NMIN 2 2
2 STAT1.B0
C0417/1 AIFSTAT.B0
PCTRL1-SET=ACT 2 STAT1.B1
0 DCTRL1-IMP AIFSTAT.B1
E4 2 STAT1.B2
1 C0417/3 AIFSTAT.B2
1 STAT1.B3
C0417/4 AIFSTAT.B3
STAT1.B4
C0417/5 AIFSTAT.B4
Controller with standard I/O

STAT1.B5
C0417/6 AIFSTAT.B5

PCTRL1-SET3
STAT1.B6
DCTRL1-NOUT=0 AIFSTAT.B6
STAT1.B7
DCTRL1-CINH AIFSTAT.B7
STAT1.B8
Signal flow charts - Standard-I/O

DCTRL1-STAT*1 AIFSTAT.B8 AIF

16 Bit

STAT1.B9

Overview over signal processing with standard-I/O

AIF-STAT

DCTRL1-STAT*2 AIFSTAT.B9
STAT1.B10
Overview over signal processing

MPOT1 DCTRL1-STAT*4 AIFSTAT.B10

STAT1.B11
MPOT1-UP C0011 DCTRL1-STAT*8 AIFSTAT.B11
MCTRL1 MCTRL1-NOUT 2 STAT1.B12
C0410/7 MPOT1-OUT DCTRL1-OH-WARN AIFSTAT.B12
MPOT1-DOWN MPOT 2 STAT1.B13
C0410/8 C0010 MCTRL1-MOUT 2 DCTRL1-OV AIFSTAT.B13
QSP INIT MPOT1-QSP C0412/6 MCTRL1-MSET STAT1.B14
C0417/15 AIFSTAT.B14
C0265=3,4,5 C0265=3,4,5 MCTRL1-IMOT 2 STAT1.B15
MCTRL1-VOLT-ADD C0417/16 AIFSTAT.B15
C0412/8
C0265 MCTRL1-DCVOLT 2
C0412/9 MCTRL1-PHI-ADD AIF-OUT.W1
MCTRL1-VOLT 2 2 C0421/1 16 Bit

EDB82MV752 EN 4.0
Byte 3,4

C0410/15 MCTRL1-DCB MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP 2

MCTRL1-Imax 2 2 AIF-OUT.W2
2 C0421/2 16 Bit
AIF-IN MCTRL1-(1 / C0050) 2
Byte 5,6

AIFCTRL.B0 2
AIFCTRL.B1 2
AIFCTRL.B2 2
DCTRL
AIFCTRL.B3 QSP

AIFCTRL.B4
DCTRL1
2 DCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT 2 2
...
C0410/3 DCTRL1-CW/CCW DCTRL1-NOUT=0 2 2 DIGOUT1
AIFCTRL.B8 2

16 Bit
DCTRL DCTRL1-QSP DCTRL1-RUN 2 2
C0410/4 C0416

AIF-CTRL
AIFCTRL.B9 CINH DCTRL1-RUN-CW
C0410/17 DCTRL1-H/Re 2 2 X3
AIFCTRL.B10 TRIP-SET DCTRL1-RUN-CCW 0
C0410/10 DCTRL1-CINH
2 2 2 C0415/2 1 A1
AIFCTRL.B11 TRIP-RESET DCTRL1-CCW 1
AIF
2
C0410/11 DCTRL1-TRIP-SET
AIFCTRL.B12 DCTRL1-PAR-B0 2
2 C0410/12 DCTRL1-TRIP-RESET
... DCTRL1-PAR-B1 2
AIFCTRL.B15 2 DCTRL1-IMP
C0410/13 DCTRL1-PAR 2/4 2
nur bei C0988=0
DCTRL1-CINH
AIF-IN.W1 C0410/14 DCTRL1-PAR 3/4
} 2
16 Bit 2 DCTRL1-OH-WARN 2 2

Byte 3,4
C0410/22 DCTRL1-CW/QSP
DCTRL1-OV 2
C0410/23 DCTRL1-CCW/QSP DCTRL1-RDY 2 2
AIF-IN.W2
16 Bit 2 DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP 2 2

Byte 5,6
DCTRL1-PTC-WARN 2 2
DCTRL1-LP1-WARN 2 2 RELAY
DCTRL1-TRIP 2 2 C0416
K11
DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM 2 2 0
K12
DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN 2 2 2 C0415/1 1
1
DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=O K14
2 2
DCTRL1-(IMOT>ILIM)-RFG-I=O 2

L
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Standard-I/O

14.1.1.2 Process controller and setpoint processing

S p e e d s e tp o in t c o n d itio n in g
N S E T 1

C 0 1 3 5 .B 4
H /R e C W /C C W Q S P C IN H
N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -S T O P
C 0 4 1 0 /5 > 1
N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -0
C 0 4 1 0 /6 > 1

C 0 1 3 5 .B 5
C 0 1 4 1
a b s o lu te
± 4 8 0 H z
S -s h a p e
C 0 0 4 6 n o r m a liz e d m a in s e tp o in t
± 1 0 0 % º ± C 0 0 1 1 0 S k ip N S E T 1 -R F G 1
N o r m a liz e d s e tp o in t s e le c tio n 0 1 C 0 0 1 1 fr e q u e n c ie s
1 0
C 0 1 2 7 N S E T 1 -N O U T
C 0 0 3 7 + 1
M a in s e tp o in t C 0 0 3 8 *-1
C 0 0 3 9 -C 0 0 1 1
C 0 0 4 6 a b s o lu te
N S E T 1 -N 1 ± 2 4 0 0 0 º ± 4 8 0 H z 0 C 0 1 4 0 C 0 6 2 5
C 0 4 1 2 /1 C 0 0 1 2 C 0 1 8 2
1 N S E T 1 -N A D D C 0 6 2 6
C 0 6 2 7 C 0 0 1 3
n o r m a liz e d C 0 6 2 8 C 0 1 0 5
C 0 0 4 4
N S E T 1 -N 2 ± 2 14 º ± C 0 0 1 1 N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN = N S E T 1 -N O U T ?
C 0 4 1 2 /2
N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -I= O
C 0 1 3 5 .B 0
J O G 1 ...3
N S E T 1 -J O G 1 /3 C 0 1 8 5
C 0 4 1 0 /1 > 1 0
1
N S E T 1 -J O G 2 /3 3 N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN
C 0 4 1 0 /2 > 1 3
C 0 1 3 5 .B 5

P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r a n d p r o c e s s in g o f s p e e d s e tp o in t
Q S P C IN H
P C T R L 1
P C T R L 1 -S E T 3

P C T R L 1 -N M IN

C 0 0 1 0
N S E T 1 -N O U T
L in k b e tw e e n m a in a n d
P C T R L 1 -R F G 1 P C T R L 1 -Q M IN
P C T R L 1 -N A D D +
a d d itio n a l s e tp o in t
C 0 4 1 2 /3 C 0 0 5 1
P C T R L 1 -S E T 3 C 0 0 1 7
C 0 0 4 9 0 , 1
2
C 0 2 2 0 C 0 2 3 8
C 0 2 2 1 P C T R L 1 -S E T = A C T
C 0 1 0 5
P C T R L 1 -A C T
P C T R L 1 -S E T

P C T R L 1 -A C T C 0 0 7 0
C 0 4 1 2 /5 C 0 0 7 2
P C T R L 1 -S E T 2 0 C 0 0 7 1
C 0 0 7 4
C 0 1 8 1 1 2
+ C 0 0 1 1
1 P C T R L 1 -N O U T
C 0 4 1 2 /4 2
0
P C T R L 1 -S E T 1 C 0 1 3 8 C 0 2 3 9 -C 0 0 1 1
C 0 1 4 5
S T O P
> 1 C 0 2 3 8
Im a x ,
P C T R L 1 -I-O F F A u to -D C B ,
C 0 4 1 0 /1 8 L U , O U

P C T R L 1 -S T O P R E S E T 0 1
C IN H ,D C B
C 0 4 1 0 /2 1
> 1
P C T R L 1 -O F F
C 0 4 1 0 /1 9

P C T R L 1 -O U T

C 0 1 8 4

Fig. 14-2 Process controller and setpoint processing with standard I/O

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Standard-I/O

14.1.1.3 Motor control

M C T R L 1 -V O L T -A D D
C 0 4 1 2 /8 M C T R L 1
M C T R L 1 -P H I-A D D
C 0 4 1 2 /9
A u to -D C B
P C T R L 1 -S E T 3 ³ 1
C 0 1 0 7 C 0 0 1 9
M C T R L 1 -D C B C 0 1 0 6 C 0 0 5 0
C 0 4 1 0 /1 5 0 t M C T R L 1 -N O U T

N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN M C T R L 1 -R F G 1 = N O U T

C 0 0 1 4
M C T R L 1 -M S E T = M A C T
C 0 1 8 5
5
M C T R L 1 -IM A X
2 , 3 , 4

C 0 0 5 1
2 0 , 1
C 0 2 3 8
C 0 0 1 4 = -2 -, -3 -: V /f-c h a r a c te r is tic c o n tr o l
C 0 0 1 4 = -4 -, -5 -: V e c to r c o n tro l M C T R L 1 -N O U T + S L IP
M C T R L 1 -M S E T
C 0 4 1 2 /6 5 C 0 0 5 2 M C T R L 1 -V O L T
4 V e c to r-C o n tro l
C 0 0 4 7
C 0 0 4 7 3 P W M C 0 0 5 3 M C T R L 1 -D C V O L T
P C T R L 1 -N O U T 2
-C 0 0 4 7
Im a x V /f-c h a r a c te r is tic C 0 0 5 4 M C T R L 1 -IM O T
C 0 0 1 4
4 , 5 C 0 0 5 6 M C T R L 1 -M O U T
3 M C T R L 1 -M A C T
2
C 0 0 4 7 C 0 0 2 1 C 0 0 1 1 C 0 0 1 8
C 0 0 2 2 C 0 0 1 4 C 0 1 4 4
-C 0 0 4 7 C 0 0 2 3 C 0 0 1 5 C 0 1 4 8
C 0 0 7 7 C 0 0 3 5 C 0 0 7 9
C 0 0 7 8 C 0 0 3 6
C 0 0 8 8
C 0 0 8 9
C 0 0 9 0

Fig. 14-3 Motor control with standard I/O

14-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

 Fig. 14-4
14.1.2

L
INPUT OUTPUT

14.1.2.1
X3 AOUT1 X3
AIN1 NSET 1 AOUT1-IN + AOUT1-OUT
1U A 2 C0419/1 62
+
Show/Hide Bookmarks

1I + AIN1-OUT C0412/1 NSET1-N1 NSET1-RFG1-IN 2

D 2 AOUT1-OFFSET
7 + C0422/1
C0412/2 NSET1-N2 NSET1-NOUT 2
C0430 AIN1-OFFSET C0424/1
C0431/1 C0431/2 C0413/1
C0010 NSET1-C0010...C0011 AOUT1-GAIN
C0034/1 2 C0420/1
C0410/1 NSET1-JOG1/3/5/7
P1 (X / Y) 0 AIN1-GAIN
OFFSET C0414/1
1 C0410/2 NSET1-JOG2/3/6/7 NSET1-RFG1-I=O
X3 2
GAIN
P2 (X / Y) AIN2 C0410/5 NSET1-RFG1-STOP AOUT2 X3
2 2U A AOUT2-IN + AOUT2-OUT
2I + AIN2-OUT C0410/6 NSET1-RFG1-0 2 C0419/2 63
C0432/1 C0432/2 2 +
7 D + AOUT2-OFFSET
AIN2-OFFSET C0410/27 NSET1-TI1/3 C0422/2
C0413/2 C0424/2
C0034/2 C0410/28 NSET1-TI2/3
AOUT2-GAIN
AIN2-GAIN C0410/33 NSET1-JOG4/5/6/7 C0420/2
C0414/2

C0410/24 Norm
DFIN1 DFOUT1
0 Gain
1 Offset
0 + DFIN1-OUT X3
1 2 DFOUT1-AN-IN DFOUT1-OUT
+ PCTRL1 C0419/3
2 A4
C0425 C0427 C0426 C0412/3 PCTRL1-NADD PCTRL1-OUT 2
0 ... 7 C0412/4 PCTRL1-SET1 PCTRL1-ACT 2
0 ... 100 kHz C0428
10 ... 17 C0412/5 PCTRL1-ACT PCTRL1-SET1 2
X3 C0410/18 PCTRL1-I-OFF PCTRL1-NOUT 2
E1 DIGIN1 2 PCTRL1-PID-OUT 2
C0410/19 PCTRL1-OFF
PCTRL1-QMIN
E2 2 C0410/21 PCTRL1-STOP 2 2
C0411: 1...63 STAT1
AIF-OUT
C0114: 1...63 C0410/16 PCTRL1-RFG2-LOAD-I PCTRL1-NMIN 2 2
E3 2 STAT1.B0
C0417/1 AIFSTAT.B0
PCTRL1-SET=ACT 2 STAT1.B1
0 C0410/31 PCTRL1-NADD-OFF DCTRL1-IMP AIFSTAT.B1
E4 2 STAT1.B2
1 PCTRL1-LIM 2 C0417/3 AIFSTAT.B2
1 C0410/32 PCTRL1-RFG2-0 STAT1.B3
E5 2 C0417/4 AIFSTAT.B3
STAT1.B4
C0410/29 PCTRL1-FADING C0417/5 AIFSTAT.B4
STAT1.B5
E6 2 C0417/6 AIFSTAT.B5

PCTRL1-SET3
C0410/30 PCTRL1-INV-ON STAT1.B6
DCTRL1-NOUT=0 AIFSTAT.B6
STAT1.B7
Controller with application I/O

DCTRL1-CINH AIFSTAT.B7
C0410/25 PCTRL1-FOLL1-0 STAT1.B8
DCTRL1-STAT*1 AIFSTAT.B8 AIF
16 Bit

STAT1.B9
AIF-STAT

DCTRL1-STAT*2 AIFSTAT.B9
STAT1.B10
Overview over signal processing

MPOT1 DCTRL1-STAT*4 AIFSTAT.B10

Overview over signal processing with application I/O

STAT1.B11
MPOT1-UP (C0011) DCTRL1-STAT*8 AIFSTAT.B11
MCTRL1 MCTRL1-NOUT 2 STAT1.B12
C0410/7 MPOT1-OUT DCTRL1-OH-WARN AIFSTAT.B12
MPOT1-DOWN MPOT 2 STAT1.B13
C0410/8 (C0010) MPOT1-QSP
MCTRL1-MOUT 2 DCTRL1-OV AIFSTAT.B13
QSP INIT C0412/6 MCTRL1-MSET STAT1.B14
MCTRL1-IMOT C0417/15 AIFSTAT.B14
C0265=3,4,5 C0265=3,4,5 2 STAT1.B15
MCTRL1-VOLT-ADD C0417/16 AIFSTAT.B15
C0412/8 MCTRL1-DCVOLT 2
C0265
C0412/9 MCTRL1-PHI-ADD AIF-OUT.W1
2 C0421/1 16 Bit
MCTRL1-VOLT 2
Byte 3,4

EDB82MV752 EN 4.0
C0410/15 MCTRL1-DCB MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP 2
MCTRL1-Imax 2 2
C0421/2 AIF-OUT.W2
2 16 Bit
AIF-IN MCTRL1-(1 / C0050) 2
Byte 5,6

AIFCTRL.B0 2 MCTRL1-MSET1=MOUT 2
AIFCTRL.B1 2 MCTRL1-MSET2=MOUT 2
AIFCTRL.B2
2
DCTRL
AIFCTRL.B3 QSP

AIFCTRL.B4
DCTRL1
2 DCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT 2 2
...
C0410/3 DCTRL1-CW/CCW DCTRL1-NOUT=0 2 2 DIGOUT1
AIFCTRL.B8 2

16 Bit
DCTRL DCTRL1-QSP DCTRL1-RUN 2 2
C0410/4 C0416

AIF-CTRL
AIFCTRL.B9 CINH DCTRL1-RUN-CW C0423/2
C0410/17 DCTRL1-H/Re 2 2 X3
AIFCTRL.B10 TRIP-SET DCTRL1-RUN-CCW 0
2 2 C0415/2 A1
C0410/10 DCTRL1-CINH 2 1
AIFCTRL.B11 TRIP-RESET DCTRL1-CCW 0 t 1
2
AIF C0410/11 DCTRL1-TRIP-SET
AIFCTRL.B12 DCTRL1-PAR-B0 2
...
2 C0410/12 DCTRL1-TRIP-RESET DCTRL1-PAR-B1 2
AIFCTRL.B15 DCTRL1-IMP DIGOUT2
2 C0410/13 DCTRL1-PAR 2/4 2
nur bei C0988=0
AIF-IN.W1
} DCTRL1-CINH 2 C0416
C0410/14 DCTRL1-PAR 3/4 C0423/3
16 Bit 2 DCTRL1-OH-WARN 2 2 0 X3

Byte 3,4
C0410/22 DCTRL1-CW/QSP
DCTRL1-OV 2 2 C0415/3 1 A2
0 t 1
C0410/23 DCTRL1-CCW/QSP DCTRL1-RDY
AIF-IN.W2 2 2
16 Bit 2 DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP 2 2

Byte 5,6
DCTRL1-PTC-WARN
Signal flow charts - Application I/O
Appendix

2 2
DCTRL1-LP1-WARN 2 2 RELAY
DCTRL1-TRIP 2 2 C0416
C0423/1 K11
DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM 2 2 0
K12
DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN 2 2 2 C0415/1 1
0 t 1 K14
DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=O 2 2
DCTRL1-(IMOT>ILIM)-RFG-I=O 2

14-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Application I/O

14.1.2.2 Process controller and setpoint processing

S p e e d s e tp o in t c o n d itio n in g
N S E T 1

C 0 1 3 5 .B 4
H /R e C W /C C W Q S P C IN H
N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -S T O P
C 0 4 1 0 /5 > 1
N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -0
C 0 4 1 0 /6 > 1

C 0 1 3 5 .B 5
C 0 1 4 1
a b s o lu te
± 4 8 0 H z
C 0 0 4 6 S -s h a p e
n o r m a liz e d m a in s e tp o in t
± 1 0 0 % º ± C 0 0 1 1 0 S k ip
0 1 fr e q u e n c ie s N S E T 1 -R F G 1
N o r m a liz e d s e tp o in t s e le c tio n 1 C 0 0 1 1
0 N S E T 1 -N O U T
C 0 1 2 7 C 0 0 3 7 +
C 0 0 3 8 *-1 1
M a in s e tp o in t
C 0 0 3 9 -C 0 0 1 1
C 0 0 4 6 a b s o lu te
N S E T 1 -N 1 ± 2 4 0 0 0 º ± 4 8 0 H z 0 C 0 1 4 0 C 0 6 2 5
C 0 4 1 2 /1 C 0 1 8 2
1 N S E T 1 -N A D D C 0 6 2 6
C 0 1 0 1 /1
C 0 6 2 7 C 0 1 0 5
n o r m a liz e d C 0 6 2 8
C 0 0 4 4
N S E T 1 -N 2 ± 2 14 º ± C 0 0 1 1 C 0 1 0 1 /4 N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN = N S E T 1 -N O U T ?
C 0 4 1 2 /2 C 0 1 0 3 /1 N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -I= O
C 0 1 3 5 .B 0 C 0 1 0 3 /4
J O G 1 ...3
N S E T 1 -J O G 1 /3 C 0 1 8 5
C 0 4 1 0 /1 > 1 0
1
N S E T 1 -J O G 2 /3 3 N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN
C 0 4 1 0 /2 > 1 3
C 0 1 3 5 .B 5
N S E T 1 -T I 1 /3
0
C 0 4 1 0 /2 7
1
N S E T 1 -T I 2 /3 3
C 0 4 1 0 /2 8 3

P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r a n d p r o c e s s in g o f s p e e d s e tp o in t
C 0 1 9 3 C 0 1 9 1
Q S P C IN H R e s e t C 0 1 9 2 P C T R L 1
P C T R L 1 -F O L L 1 -0
C 0 4 1 0 /2 5 P C T R L 1 -S E T 3

P C T R L 1 -N A D D -O F F P C T R L 1 -F O L L 1 P C T R L 1 -N M IN
C 0 4 1 0 /3 1 C 0 1 8 9
P C T R L 1 -F O L L -O U T
C 0 0 1 0
N S E T 1 -N O U T
L in k b e tw e e n m a in a n d
P C T R L 1 -R F G 1
1 x a d d itio n a l s e tp o in t P C T R L 1 -Q M IN
P C T R L 1 -N A D D - x + 0 + - *
C 0 4 1 2 /3 C 0 0 5 1
0 y / x /(1 -y ) P C T R L 1 -S E T 3
C 0 0 4 9 C 0 2 3 5 0 , 1 C 0 0 1 7
S E T C 0 2 3 4 2
C 0 2 2 0 C 0 2 4 3 C 0 1 9 0 C 0 2 3 8
C 0 2 2 1 P C T R L 1 -S E T = A C T
0 t
C 0 1 0 5
P C T R L 1 -R F G 2 -0 P C T R L 1 -A C T
C 0 4 1 0 /3 2
P C T R L 1 -R F G 2 -L o a d I P C T R L 1 -S E T
C 0 4 1 0 /1 6 P C T R L 1 -P ID -O U T
C 0 2 4 4
P C T R L 1 -A C T C 0 0 7 0 C 0 2 3 3
C 0 4 1 2 /5 C 0 0 7 2 P C T R L 1 -L IM
P C T R L 1 -S E T 2 0 Q S P C IN H C 0 0 7 1 0 t
C 0 0 7 4 C 0 2 4 0
C 0 1 8 1 1 0 2 C 0 0 1 1
0 + 1 P C T R L 1 -N O U T
C 0 4 1 2 /4 2 1
*-1 1 0
P C T R L 1 -S E T 1 C 0 1 3 8 P C T R L 1 -R F G 2 S E T ± 2 0 0 % -C 0 0 1 1
C 0 1 4 5
S T O P C 0 2 3 2 C 0 2 4 2 C 0 2 3 0
C 0 2 2 5 C 0 1 9 4 C 0 2 3 8 C IN H
> 1 C 0 1 9 5
In v e r s e C 0 2 3 1
C 0 2 2 6 Im a x , c h a r a c te r is tic
P C T R L 1 -I-O F F C 0 1 0 5 A u to -D C B ,
C 0 4 1 0 /1 8 L U , O U
C 0 2 4 1 C IN H C 0 2 3 9
P C T R L 1 -S T O P R E S E T 0 1
C IN H ,D C B 0 C 0 2 3 6
C 0 4 1 0 /2 1
> 1
P C T R L 1 -O F F 1
C 0 4 1 0 /1 9
P C T R L 1 -F A D IN G C 0 2 2 8 C 0 2 2 9
C 0 4 1 0 /2 9
O v e r la y
P C T R L 1 -IN V -O N
C 0 4 1 0 /3 0
P C T R L 1 -O U T

C 0 1 8 4

Fig. 14-5 Process controller and setpoing processing with application I/O

14-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Application I/O

14.1.2.3 Motor control

M C T R L 1 -V O L T -A D D
C 0 4 1 2 /8 M C T R L 1
M C T R L 1 -P H I-A D D
C 0 4 1 2 /9
A u to -D C B
P C T R L 1 -S E T 3 ³ 1
C 0 1 3 5 .B 1 4
C 0 0 1 9 C 0 1 0 7
M C T R L 1 -D C B C 0 1 0 6 C 0 0 5 0
C 0 4 1 0 /1 5 > 1 0 t M C T R L 1 -N O U T

N S E T 1 -R F G 1 -IN M C T R L 1 -R F G 1 = N O U T

C 0 0 1 4
M C T R L 1 -M S E T = M A C T
C 0 1 8 5
5
M C T R L 1 -IM A X
2 , 3 , 4

C 0 0 5 1
2 0 , 1
C 0 2 3 8
C 0 0 1 4 = -2 -, -3 -: V /f-c h a r a c te r is tic c o n tr o l
C 0 0 1 4 = -4 -, -5 -: V e c to r c o n tro l M C T R L 1 -N O U T + S L IP
M C T R L 1 -M S E T
C 0 4 1 2 /6 5 C 0 0 5 2 M C T R L 1 -V O L T
4 V e c to r c o n tro l
C 0 0 4 7
C 0 0 4 7 3 P W M C 0 0 5 3 M C T R L 1 -D C V O L T
P C T R L 1 -N O U T 2
-C 0 0 4 7
Im a x V /f-c h a r a c te r is tic
C 0 0 5 4 M C T R L 1 -IM O T
C 0 0 1 4
4 , 5 C 0 0 5 6 M C T R L 1 -M O U T
3 M C T R L 1 -M A C T
2
C 0 0 4 7 C 0 0 2 1 C 0 0 1 1 C 0 0 1 8
C 0 0 2 2 C 0 0 1 4 C 0 1 4 4
-C 0 0 4 7 C 0 0 2 3 C 0 0 1 5 C 0 1 4 8
C 0 0 7 7 C 0 0 3 5 C 0 0 7 9
C 0 0 7 8 C 0 0 3 6
C 0 0 8 8
C 0 0 8 9
C 0 0 9 0

C 0 2 4 5 C 0 2 5 2 C 0 2 5 4
0 M C T R L 1 -M S E T 1 = M A C T
M C T R L 1 -M S E T 1 1
0 t
C 0 2 5 0
C 0 2 5 3 C 0 2 5 5
M C T R L 1 -M S E T 2 M C T R L 1 -M S E T 2 = M A C T
C 0 2 5 1 0 t

Fig. 14-6 Motor control with application I/O

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Signal flow charts - Application I/O

14-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

14.2 Code table

Tip!
This code table also applies to the 8200 motec as of version E82MV ... Vx1x!

• The codes are sorted according to their numbers and can be used as reference.
• Some functions are freely configurable. We recommend the ”free configuration” since this
options guarantuees optimum flexibility in parameterisation.
• The cross references under “IMPORTANT” indicate where to find detailed code descriptions.
• How to read the code table:
Column Abbreviation Meaning
Code Cxxxx Code Cxxxx • The pparameter value of a code can be different in everyy
1 Subcode 1 of Cxxxx parameter set.
• Parameter value accespted immediately (ONLINE)
2 Subcode 2 of Cxxxx
Cxxxx* The parameter value of a code is the same in all parameter sets
Cxxxx¿ Changed parameters will be accepted after pressing v
[Cxxxx] Changed parameters will be accepted after pressing v if the controller is inhibited
(A) Code, subcode or selection are only available when using an application-I/O
Name Code name
Lenze Lenze setting (value set at delivery or after overwriting of C0002 with Lenze setting)
à Further information can be obtained from ”IMPORTANT”
Selection 1 {1 %} 99 Min. value {Steps/unit} Max. value
IMPORTANT - Brief, important explanations
^ Page x Indicates where to find more detailed information

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0001↵ Setpoint source -0- • C0001 = 0 ... 3: The device can be ^ 7-19
selection (operating Setpoint source controlled via terminals or PC/keypad
mode) -0- Other sources as parameter channel/process data • Check the assignment of setpoint source
channel of AIF and analog signal under C0412
• AIF bus modules are,
are for instance,
instance
-1- Parameter channel of an AIF bus module INTERBUS 2111, PROFIBUS-DP 2133,
System bus (CAN) 2171
2171, LECOM A/B/LI
-2- Other sources as parameter channel/process data 2102
channel of AIF
C0001 = 3 must be set to select a
-3- Process data channel of an AIF bus module setpoint
t i t viai a process ddatat channel
h l off
an AIF bus module! Otherwise the
(AIF-IN.W1 or AIF-IN.W2)
process data will not be evaluated!

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
[[C0002]*
] Parameter set -0- -0- Function executed ^ 7-54
transfer Parameter sets of the controller
-1- Lenze setting ð PAR1 Overwrite the selected pparameter set with
-2- Lenze setting ð PAR2 the settings stored as default settings.
-3- Lenze setting ð PAR3
-4- Lenze setting ð PAR4
-10- Keypad ð PAR1 ... PAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets with the keypad
data
-11- Keypad ð PAR1 Overwrite one pparameter set with the
-12- Keypad ð PAR2 keypad data
-13- Keypad ð PAR3
-14- Keypad ð PAR4
-20- PAR1 ... PAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets to the keypad
Parameter sets of a function module to FIF Not for standard I/O or system bus (CAN)
-31- Lenze setting ð FPAR1 Overwrite the selected pparameter set of the
-32- Lenze setting ð FPAR2 function module with the settings stored as
default setting
setting.
-33- Lenze setting ð FPAR3
-34- Lenze setting ð FPAR4
-40- Keypad ð FPAR1 ... FPAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets of the function
module with the keypad data
-41- Keypad ð FPAR1 Overwrite one pparameter set of the function
-42- Keypad ð FPAR2 module with the keypad data
-43- Keypad ð FPAR3
-44- Keypad ð FPAR4
-50- FPAR1 ... FPAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets of the function
module to the keypad
Parameter sets of controller + function module to FIF Not for standard I/O or system bus (CAN)
If you use an application I/O the
parameter sets of controller and
application I/O must always be
transferred together!
-61- Lenze setting ð PAR1 + FPAR1 Overwrite some pparameter sets with the
-62- Lenze setting ð PAR2 + FPAR2 settings stored as default settings
-63- Lenze setting ð PAR3 + FPAR3
-64- Lenze setting ð PAR4 + FPAR4
-70- Keypad ð PAR1 ... PAR4 + FPAR1 ... FPAR4 Overwrite all parameter sets with the keypad
data
-71- Keypad ð PAR1 + FPAR1 Overwrite some pparameter sets with the
-72- Keypad ð PAR2 + FPAR2 keypad data
-73- Keypad ð PAR3 + FPAR3
-74- Keypad ð PAR4 + FPAR4
-80- PAR1 ... PAR4 + FPAR1 ... FPAR4 ð Keypad Copy all parameter sets to the keypad
C0003*¿ Non-volatile -1- -0- Do not save parameter in EEPROM Data loss after mains disconnection
parameter saving -1- Always save parameter in EEPROM • Active after every main connection
• Cyclic parameter changes via bus module
are not allowed.
C0004*¿ Bar-graph display 56 All codes possible • Bargraph display indicates the selected in
56 = controller load (C0056) % after power on
• Range -180 % ... +180 %

14-10 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0005¿ Fixed configuration -0- • Change under C0005 will be copied to ^ 7-36
analog input signals the corresponding subcode of C0412.
Free configuration under C0412 sets
C0005 = 255!
• Configurations with X3/E1:
– Additionally activate the frequency with
C0410/24 = 1.
– Otherwise the frequency input will not
be evaluated!
-0- Setpoint for speed control via X3/8 or X3/1U,
X3/1I
-1- Setpoint for speed control via X3/8 with setpoint
summation via frequency input X3/E1
-2- Setpoint for speed control via frequency input
X3/E1 with setpoint summation via X3/8
-3- Setpoint for speed control via frequency input
X3/E1, torque limitation via X3/8 (power control)
-4- Setpoint for sensorless torque control via X3/8, Only active if C0014 = -5- (torque selection)
speed limitation via C0011
-5- Setpoint for sensorless torque control via X3/8,
speed limitation via frequency input X3/E1
-6- Controlled operation; setpoint via X3/8 with
digital feedback via X3/E1
-7- Controlled operation; setpoint via frequency input
X3/E1 with analog feedback via X3/8
-200- All digital and analog input signals come are sent Sets C0410/x = 200 and C0412/x = 200
via the bus function module to FIF (e.g.
INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP)
-255- Free configuration under C0412 Display only
Do not change C0005 since settings under
C0412 can be lost
C0007¿ Fixed configuration
g -0- E4 E3 E2 E1 ^ 7-43
of digital inputs -0- CW/CCW DCB JOG2/3 JOG1/3 • Change
g under C0007 will be copied
p to
-1- CW/CCW PAR JOG2/3 JOG1/3 the corresponding subcode off C C0410.
Free configuration under C0410 sets
-2- CW/CCW QSP JOG2/3 JOG1/3 C0007 = -255-!
-3- CW/CCW PAR DCB JOG1/3 • CW = CW rotation
-4- CW/CCW QSP PAR JOG1/3 • CCW = CCW rotation
-5- CW/CCW DCB TRIP set JOG1/3 • DCB
C = DC-injection
C brake
-6- CW/CCW PAR TRIP set JOG1/3
• PAR = Changeover (PAR1 ó PAR2)
PAR1 = LOW; PAR2 = HIGH
-7- CW/CCW PAR DCB TRIP set – The corresponding terminal must be
-8- CW/CCW QSP PAR TRIP set assigned
g to the function ”PAR” in
-9- CW/CCW QSP TRIP Set JOG1/3 PAR1 andd PAR2
PAR2.
– Configurations with ”PAR” are only
-10- CW/CCW TRIP Set UP DOWN
allowed if C0988 = -0-
-11- CW/CCW DCB UP DOWN • JOG1/3, JOG2/3 = Selection of fixed
-12- CW/CCW PAR UP DOWN setpoints
p
-13- CW/CCW QSP UP DOWN JOG1 JOG1/3 = HIGH
JOG1: HIGH, JOG2/3 = LOW
JOG2: JOG1/3 = LOW,
LOW JOG2/3 = HIGH
-14- CCW/QSP CW/QSP DCB JOG1/3 JOG3: JOG1/3 = HIGH, JOG2/3 = HIGH
-15- CCW/QSP CW/QSP PAR JOG1/3 • QSP = Quick stop
-16- CCW/QSP CW/QSP JOG2/3 JOG1/3 • TRIP set = external fault
-17- CCW/QSP CW/QSP PAR DCB • UP/DOWN = Motor
M potentiometer
i
functions
-18- CCW/QSP CW/QSP PAR TRIP set
• H/Re = Hand/remote changeover
-19- CCW/QSP CW/QSP DCB TRIP set • PCTRL1-I-OFF = Switch-off process
-20- CCW/QSP CW/QSP TRIP set JOG1/3 controller
co t o e I component
co po e t
-21- CCW/QSP CW/QSP UP DOWN • DFIN1-ON = Digital frequency input
0 ... 10 kHz
-22- CCW/QSP CW/QSP UP JOG1/3
• PCTRL1-OFF = Switch off process
-23- H/Re CW/CCW UP DOWN controller

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0007¿ Fixed configuration
g -0- -24- H/Re PAR UP DOWN • Change
g under C0007 will be copied
p to
of digital inputs -25- H/Re DCB UP DOWN the corresponding subcode off C C0410.
( t)
(cont.) Free configuration under C0410 sets
-26- H/Re JOG1/3 UP DOWN C0007 = -255-!
-27- H/Re TRIP set UP DOWN • CW = CW rotation
-28- JOG2/3 JOG1/3 PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON • CCW = CCW rotation
-29- JOG2/3 DCB PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON • DCB = DC-injection brake
-30- JOG2/3 QSP PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON • PAR = Changeover
Ch (PAR1 ó PAR2)
PAR1 = LOW; PAR2 = HIGH
-31- DCB QSP PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON – The corresponding terminal must be
-32- TRIP set QSP PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON assigned to the function ”PAR”
PAR in
-33- QSP PAR PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON PAR1 and PAR2.
-34- CW/QSP CCW/QSP PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON – Configurations
C fi ti with
ith ”PAR” are only
l
allowed if C0988 = -0-
-35- JOG2/3 JOG1/3 PAR DFIN1-ON • JOG1/3, JOG2/3 = Selection of fixed
-36- DCB QSP PAR DFIN1-ON setpoints
-37- JOG1/3 QSP PAR DFIN1-ON JOG1: JOG1/3 = HIGH, JOG2/3 = LOW
-38- JOG1/3 PAR TRIP set DFIN1-ON JOG2 JOG1/3 = LOW,
JOG2: LOW JOG2/3 = HIGH
JOG3: JOG1/3 = HIGH,
HIGH JOG2/3 = HIGH
-39- JOG2/3 JOG1/3 TRIP set DFIN1-ON • QSP = Quick stop
-40- JOG1/3 QSP TRIP set DFIN1-ON • TRIP set = external fault
-41- JOG1/3 DCB TRIP set DFIN1-ON • UP/DOWN = Motor potentiometer
p
-42- QSP DCB TRIP set DFIN1-ON f ti
functions
• H/Re = Hand/remote changeover
-43- CW/CCW QSP TRIP set DFIN1-ON
• PCTRL1-I-OFF = Switch-off process
-44- UP DOWN PAR DFIN1-ON controller I component
-45- CW/CCW QSP PAR DFIN1-ON • DFIN1-ON
DFIN1 ON = Digital frequency input
-46- H/Re PAR QSP JOG1/3 0 ... 10 kHz
-47- CW/QSP CCW/QSP H/Re JOG1/3 • PCTRL1 OFF = SSwitch
PCTRL1-OFF itch off process
controller
-48- PCTRL1- OFF DCB PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON
-49- PCTRL1- OFF JOG1/3 QSP DFIN1-ON
-50- PCTRL1- OFF JOG1/3 PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON
-51- DCB PAR PCTRL1-I-OFF DFIN1-ON
-255- Free configuration under C0410 Display only
Do not change C0007 since settings under
C0410 can be lost

14-12 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0008¿ Fixed configuration -1- Change under C0008 will be copied to ^ 7-45
of relay output K1 C0415/1. Free configuration under
((relay)
y) C0415/1 sets C0008 = -255-!
-0- Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY)
-1- TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP)
-2- Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
-3- Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW)
-4- Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
-5- Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
-6- Frequency setpoint reached (MCTRL-RFG1=NOUT)
-7- Qmin threshold higher (PCTRL1-QMIN)
-8- Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
-9- Overtemperature (Jmax -5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
-10- TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) (DCTRL1-IMP)
-11- PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
-12- Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
-13- Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
-14- Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG1=0)
-15- Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
-16- Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)
-255- Free configuration under C0415/1 Display only
Do not change C0008 since settings under
C0415/1 can be lost
C0009*¿ Controller address 1 1 {1} 99 For communcation module to AIF only:
LECOM-A (RS232), LECOM-A/B/LI 2102,
PROFIBUS-DP 2131, System bus (CAN)
2171/2172
C0010 Minimum output 0.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • C0010 is not effective with bipolar ^ 7-12
frequency à 14.5 Hz setpoint selection (-10 V ... + 10 V)
• C0010 has no effect on AIN2
à Speed setting range 1 : 6 for Lenze
C0011 Maximum output 50.00 7.50 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 geared motors: Setting absolutely
frequency à 87 Hz required for operation with Lenze geared
motors.
C0012 Acceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Reference: frequency change 0 Hz ... C0011 ^ 7-14
main setpoint • Additional setpoint ð C0220
• Acceleration times to be activated via
digital signals ð C0101
C0013 Deceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Reference: frequency change C0011 ... 0 Hz
main setpoint • Additional setpoint ð C0221
• Deceleration times to be activated via
digital signals ð C0103

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0014¿ Control mode -2- -2- V/f characteristic control V ~ f • Commissioning without motor parameter ^ 7-2
(Linear characteristic with constant Vmin boost) identification possible
• Benefit of identification with C0148:
-3- V/f-characteristic control V ~ f2 – Improved smooth running at low speed
(Square-law characteristic with constant Vmin – V/f rated frequency (C0015) and slip
boost) (C0021) are calculated and do not
have to be entered
-4- Vector control Identifyy the motor pparameters before
-5- Sensorless torque control with speed limitation commissioning with C C0148!
• Torque setpoint via C0412/6 Otherwise commissioning is not
• Speed limitation via setpoint 1 (NSET1-N1), if possible!
C0412/1 is assigned, if not via max. frequency
(C0011)
C0015 V/f rated frequency 50.00 7.50 {0.02 Hz} 960.00 Setting applies to all mains voltages ^ 7-4
permitted
C0016 Umin boost à 0.00 {0.2 %} 40.0 à depending on the controller ^ 7-5
Setting applies to all mains voltages
permitted
C0017 Frequency 0.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Programmable frequency threshold
threshold Qmin • Reference: Setpoint
• Signal output configuration under C0415
C0018¿ Chopper
pp frequency
q y -2- -0- 2 kHz ^ 7-7
-1- 4 kHz
-2- 8 kHz
-3- 16 kHz
C0019 Threshold for 0.10 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Holding time ð C0106 ^ 7-17
automatic = not active Deactivate the automatic DC injection brake
DC-injection brake when the minimum frequency limit C0239 is
(Auto DCB) active
C0021 Slip compensation 0.0 -50.0 {0.1 %} 50.0 ^ 7-6
C0022 Imax limit (motor 150 30 {1 %} 150 ^ 7-13
mode)
C0023 Imax-limit in the 150 30 {1 %} 150 C0023 = 30 %: Function not active if
generator mode C0014 = -2-, -3-:
C0026* Offset analog input 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 • Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I ^ 7-20
1 (AIN1–OFFSET) • The max. limit of the setpoint value range
of C0034 equals 100 %
• C0026 and C0413/1 are identical
C0027* Gain analog input 1 100.0 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 • Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
(AIN1-GAIN) • 100.0 % = Gain 1
• Inverse setpoint selection by negative
gain and negative offset
• C0027 and C0414/1 are identical
C0034*¿ Setpoint selection Observe the switch position of the function ^ 7-20
g
range module!
S
Standard–I/O
/O (X3/8)
/ -0- -0- 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA
-1- 4 ... 20 mA
-2- -10 V ... +10 V • Minimum output frequency (C0010) not
effective
• Individual adjustment of offset and gain
-3- 4 ... 20 mA Open-circuit monitoring TRIP Sd5, if I < 4 mA

14-14 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0034*¿ Setpoint selection Observe the jumper setting of the function ^ 7-20
(A) range module!
Application I/O
1 X3/1U, X3/1I -0- -0- Voltage unipolar 0 ... 5 V / 0 ... 10 V
2 X3/2U, X3/2I -1- Voltage bipolar -10 V ... +10 V Minimum output frequency (C0010) not
effective
-2- Current 0 ... 20 mA
-3- Current 4 ... 20 mA
-4- Current 4 ... 20 mA open-circuit monitored TRIP Sd5 if I < 4 mA
C0035*¿ DC injection
j brake -0- -0- Brake voltage selection under C0036 Holdingg time ð C0107 ^ 7-17
(DCB)
C control mode -1- Brake current selection under C0036
C0036 Voltage/current à 0 {0.02 %} 150 % à Depending on the controller
DCB • Reference Mr, Ir
• Setting applies to all mains voltages
permitted
C0037 JOG1 20.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 JOG = Setpoint
p ^ 7-26
C0038 JOG2 30.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Additional JOG values ð C0440
C0039 JOG3 40.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0040*¿ Controller inhibit -0- Controller inhibited (CINH) Controller can onlyy be enabled if
-1- Controller enabled (CINH) X3/28
/ = HIGH G
C0043*¿ TRIP reset -0- No current error Reset active error with C0043 = 0
-1- Active error
C0044* Setpoint 2 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/2 = FIXED-FREE
(NSET1-N2) • Display, if C0412/2 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0046* Setpoint 1 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/1 = FIXED-FREE
(NSET1-N1) • Display, if C0412/1 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0047* Torque setpoint or 0 {1 %} 400 Control mode ”Sensorless torque control”
q limit value
torque (C0014 = 5):
(MCTRL1 MSET)
(MCTRL1-MSET) Ref.: Rated motor torque detected by motor parameter • Torque setpoint selection, if
identification C0412/6 = FIXED-FREE
• Torque setpoint display, if
C0412/6 ≠ FIXED-FREE
Control mode ”V/f characteristic control” or
”Vector control” (C0014 = 2, 3, 4):
• Torque limit value display, if
C0412/6 ≠ FIXED-FREE
• Function not active (C0047 = 400), if
C0412/6 = FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0049* Additional setpoint -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection, if C0412/3 = 0
(PCTRL1-NADD) • Display, if C0412/3 ≠ 0
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0050* Output frequency -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Only display: Output frequency without slip
(MCTRL1-NOUT) compensation
C0051* Output frequency -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Operation without process controller ^ 7-34
with slip (C0238 = 2):
compensation • Display only: Output frequency with slip
(MCTRL1-NOUT compensation (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP)
+SLIP) or Operation with process controller
actual process (C0238 = 0, 1):
controller value • Selection, if C0412/5 = FIXED-FREE
(PCTRL1-ACT) • Display, if C0412/5 ≠ FIXED-FREE
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0052* Motor voltage 0 {1 V} 1000 Only display
(MCTRL1-VOLT)
C0053* DC-bus voltage 0 {1 V} 1000 Only display
(MCTRL1-DCVOLT)
C0054* Apparent motor 0.00 {0.01 A} 400.00 Display only
current
(MCTRL1-IMOT)
C0056* Controller load -255 {1 %} 255 Only display
(MCTRL1-MOUT)
C0061* Heat sink 0 {1 °C} 255 Only display
temperature • If > +85 °C:
– Controller sets warning OH
– Chopper frequency reduced if
C0144 = 1
• If > +90 °C:
– Controller sets TRIP OH
C0070 Process controller 1.00 0.00 {0.01} 300.00 ^ 7-31
gain = P component not
active
C0071 Process controller 100 10 {1} 9999
readjustment time = I component not
active
C0072 Differential 0.0 0.0 {0.1} 5.0
component of = D component not
process controller active
C0074 Process controller 0.0 0.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
influence
C0077* Gain Imaxcontroller 0.25 0.00 {0.01} 16.00 ^ 7-35
= P component not
active
C0078* Integral action time 65 12 {1 ms} 9990
Imaxcontroller = I component not
active
C0079 Oscillation damping 2 0 {1} 80 depending on the controller ^ 7-7
C0084 Motor stator 0.000 0.000 {0.001 Ω} 64.000 ^ 7-29
resistance
C0087 Rated motor speed 1390 300 {1 rpm} 16000
C0088 Rated motor à 0.0 {0.1 A} 480.0 à depending on the controller
current 0.0 ... 2.0 x rated output current of the
controller
C0089 Rated motor 50 10 {1 Hz} 960
frequency
C0090 Rated motor à 50 {1 V} 500 à 230 V with 230 V controllers,
voltage 400 V with 400 V controllers
C0091 Motor cos j à 0.40 {0.1} 1.0 à Depending on the controller

C0092 Motor stator 0.0 0.0 {0.1 mH} 2000.0

inductance
C0093* Controller type xxxy Display only
• xxx = Power taken from nameplate
(e. g. 551 = 550 W)
• y = Voltage class (2 = 240 V, 4 = 400 V)
C0094* User password 0 {1} 9999 0 = No password protection ^ 6-7
1 ... 9999 = Free access to user menu only
C0099* Software version x.y Only display
x = Main version, y = Index

14-16 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0101 Acceleration times ^ 7-14
(A) main setpoint
1 C0012 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Binaryy codingg of the digital
g signal
g sources
2 T ir 1 2.50 assigned under C0410/27
C / and CC0410/28
/
determines active time pair
3 T ir 2 0.50
4 T ir 3 10.00
C0103 Deceleration times C0410/27 C0410/28 active
(A) main setpoint LOW LOW C0012;; C0013
1 C0013 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 HIGH LOW T ir 1; Tif 1
LOW HIGH T ir 2;
2 Tif 2
2 T if 1 2.50
HIGH HIGH T iri 3; Tif 3
3 T if 2 0.50
4 T if 3 10.00
C0105 Deceleration time 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill ^ 7-16
quick stop (QSP) according to the deceleration time set under
C0105. If the output frequency falls below
the threshold C0019, the DC-injection brake
(DCB) will be activated.
Exception:
Lower frequency limit C0239 > 0 Hz:
Quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill
according to the deceleration time set under
C0105.
C0106 Holding time auto 0.50 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.00 Holding time, if DCB is activated because the ^ 7-17
DCB = auto DCB not active = ∞ value falls below the setting in C0019.
C0107 Holding time DCB 999.00 1.00 {0.01 s} 999.00 Holding time, if DCB is activated via an ^ 7-17
= ∞ external terminal or control word.
C0108* Gain analog output 128 0 {1} 255 Standard I/O: C0108 and C0420 are the ^ 7-37
X3/62 same
(AOUT1-GAIN) Application I/O: C0108 and C0420/1 are the
same
C0109* Offset analog 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 Standard I/O: C0109 and C0422 are the
output X3/62 same
(AOUT1-OFFSET) Application I/O: C0109 and C0422/1 are the
same

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0111¿ Configuration Analog signal output to terminal Change of C0111 is copied to C0419/1. ^ 7-37
analog output Free configuration in C0419/1 sets C0111
X3/62 ((AOUT1-IN)) = -255-!
-0- -0- Output frequency with slip (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP) 6 V/12 mA ≡ C0011
-1- Controller load (MCTRL1-MOUT) 3 V/6 mA ≡ Rated motor torque with vector
control (C0014 = 4), otherwise rated active
inverter current (active current/C0091)
-2- Apparent motor current (MCTRL1-IMOT) 3 V/6 mA ≡ Rated inverter current
-3- DC-bus voltage (MCTRL1-DCVOLT) 6 V/12 mA ≡ DC 1000 V (400 V mains)
6 V/12 mA ≡ DC 380 V (240 V mains)
-4- Motor power 3 V/6 mA ≡ Rated motor power
-5- Motor voltage (MCTRL1-VOLT) 4.8 V/9.6 mA ≡ Rated motor voltage
-6- 1/output frequency (1/C0050) (MCTRL1-1/NOUT) 2 V/4 mA ≡ 0.5 × C0011
-7- Output frequency with limits 0 V/0 mA/4 mA ≡ f = fmin (C0010)
(NSET1-C0010...C0011) 6 V/12 mA ≡ f = fmax (C0011)
-8- Operation with process controller (C0238 = 0, 1): 6 V/12 mA ≡ C0011
Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
Operation without process controller (C0238 = 2):
Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
-9- Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY) Selection -9- ... -25- corresponds
p to the
-10- TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP) digital functions of the relay output K1
(C0008) or the digital output A1 (C0117):
-11- Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
LOW = 0 V/0 mA/4 mA
-12- Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW) HIGH = 10 V/20 mA
-13- Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
-14- Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
-15- Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
-16- Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
-17- Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
-18- Overtemperature (Jmax - 5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
-19- TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) active
(DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP)
-20- PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
-21- Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) Apparent
pp motor current = C0054
-22- Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
-23- Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
-24- Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
-25- Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)
-255- Freely configured under C0419/1 Only display
Do not change C0111 since settings under
C0419/1 can be lost

14-18 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0114¿ Level inversion -0- E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 • The binary value of the selected number
g inputs
digital p 25 24 23 22 21 20 p levels:
determines the input
E1 ... E6 -0- 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 0: Ex is not inverted (HIGH
G active)
– 1: Ex is inverted (LOW active)
-1- 0 0 0 0 0 1
• C0114 and C0411 are identical
-2- 0 0 0 0 1 0 • E5, E6 only application I/O
-3- 0 0 0 0 1 1 The function ”Parameter
Parameter set changeover
changeover”
... ... cannot be inverted!
-63- 1 1 1 1 1 1
C0117¿ Fixed configuration -0- Changes of C0117 will be copied to ^ 7-45
of digital output A1 C0415/2. Free configuration under
((DIGOUT1)) C0415/2 sets C0117 = -255-!
-0- ... see C0008
-16-
-255- Free configuration under C0415/2 Only display
Do not change C0117 since settings under
C0415/2 can be lost
C0119¿ Configuration
g PTC -0- -0- PTC input not active Earth fault detection • Signal
g outputp configuration
g under C0415 ^ 7-50
input / earth fault -1- PTC input active, active • Deactivate the earth fault detection if it is
detection TRIP set activated unintentionally
-2- PTC input active,
Warning set
-3- PTC input not active Earth fault detection
-4- PTC input active,
TRIP set
-5- PTC input active,
Warning set
C0120 I2t switch-off 0 0 {1 %} 200 Reference: Apparent motor current (C0054) ^ 7-49
= not active
C0125*¿ LECOM baud rate -0- -0- 9600 baud Onlyy for LECOM-A (RS232)
( )
-1- 4800 baud
-2- 2400 baud
-3- 1200 baud
-4- 19200 baud
C0126*¿ Response in the -2- -0- No TRIP when stopping the communication in the Monitors the process data channel of the AIF
event of process data channel AIF interface and communication via the FIF
communication No TRIP when stopping the communication interface
errors between controller and function module on FIF
-1- TRIP (CEO) when stopping the communication in
the process data channel AIF
No TRIP when stopping the communication
between controller and function module on FIF
-2- No TRIP when stopping the communication in the
process data channel AIF
TRIP (CE5) when stopping the communication
between controller and function module on FIF
-3- TRIP (CEO) when stopping the communication in
the process data channel AIF
TRIP (CE5) when stopping the communication
between controller and function module on FIF
C0127¿ Setpoint selection -0- -0- Absolute setpoint selection in Hz via C0046 or
process data channel
-1- Setpoint selection normalised via C0141
(0... 100 %) or process channel (±16384 =
C0011)
C0128*↵ Monitoringg CAN -0- -0- not active Does not monitor the AIF interface
communication on -1- TRIP (CE6), if CAN controller sends ”Warning” or
FIF ”BUS-OFF”

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0135* Controller control • Control via parameter channel. The most
word (parameter important control commans are grouped
channel) as bit commands.
• C0135 cannot be changed using the
Bit Assignment keypad
1|0 JOG1, JOG2, JOG3 or C0046 (NSET1-JOG1/3,
NSET1-JOG2/3)
00 C0046 active
01 JOG1 (C0037) active
10 JOG2 (C0038) active
11 JOG3 (C0039) active
2 Current direction of rotation (DCTRL1-CW/CCW)
0 not inverted
1 inverted
3 Quick stop (DCTRL1-QSP)
0 not active
1 active
4 Stop ramp function generator
0 (NSET1-RFG1-STOP)
1 not active
active
5 Ramp function generator input = 0 RFG1 = Ramp function generator main
0 (NSET1-RFG1-0) setpoint
1 not active
active (deceleration to C0013)
6 UP function motor potentiometer (MPOT1-UP)
0 not active
1 active
7 DOWN function motor potentiometer
0 (MPOT1-DOWN)
1 not active
active
8 Reserved
9 Controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH)
0 Controller enabled
1 Controller inhibited
10 TRIP set (DCTRL1-TRIP-SET) Sets ”external error” ( EEr , LECOM No. 91)
(^ 8-3)
11 TRIP reset (DCTRL1-TRIP-RESET)
0 Þ 1 Edge causes TRIP reset
13|12 Parameter set changeover (DCTRL1-PAR2/4,
DCTRL1-PAR3/4)
00 PAR1
01 PAR2
10 PAR3
11 PAR4
14 DC injection brake (MTCRL1-DCB)
0 not active
1 active
15 Reserved
C0138* Process controller 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection if C0412/4 = FIXED-FREE ^ 7-33
setpoint 1 • Display if C0412/4 ≠ FIXED-FREE
(PCTRL1-SET1) The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0140* Additive frequency 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • Selection via function j of the keypad
setpoint or the parameter channel
(NSET1-NADD) • Is added to main setpoint
• Value is stored when switching the mains
or removing the keypad

14-20 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0141* Setpoint 0.00 -100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 • Only effective if C0127 = 1
normalisation • Reference: C0011
The value set will be lost when switching
the mains!
C0142¿ Start condition -1- -0- Automatic start inhibited Start after LOW-HIGH level change at X3/28 ^ 7-9
Flying restart not active
-1- Automatic start, if X3/28 = HIGH
Flying restart not active
-2- Automatic start inhibited Start after LOW-HIGH level change at X3/28
Flying-restart circuit active
-3- Automatic start, if X3/28 = HIGH
Flying-restart circuit active
C0143*¿ Selection of -0- -0- Max. output frequency (C0011) ... 0 Hz Motor speed
p selected for the indicated range
g
flying-restart -1- Last output frequency ... 0 Hz
-2- Frequency setpoint addition (NSET1-NOUT) The corresponding
p g value is input
p after
-3- Act. process controller value (C0412/5) addition controller enable.
(PCTRL1-ACT)
C0144¿ Chopper frequency -1- -0- No temperature depending chopper frequency ^ 7-7
deratingg derating
-1- Automatic chopper frequency derating at
Jmax - 5 °C
C0145*¿ Process controller -0- -0- Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) Main setpoint + additional setpoint ^ 7-33
setpoint source -1- C0181 (PCTRL1-SET2) • Setpoint selection not possible via
– JOG values
– j function of the keypad
– C0044, C0046 and C0049
– in connection with manual/remote
-2- C0412/4 (PCTRL1-SET1) changeover, skip frequencies, ramp
function generator, additional setpoint
• Activate the automatic DC-injection brake
(auto DCB) with C0019 = 0 or C0106 = 0
[C0148]* Motor parameter -0- -0- Ready Only when the motor is cold! ^ 7-29
identification 1. Inhibit controller, wait until drive is in
standstill
2 Enter the correct motor data under
2.
-1- Start identification C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
• V/f-rated frequency (C0015), slip (see motor nameplate).
compensation (C0021) and motor stator 3. C0148 = set 1 by v
inductivity (C0092) are calculated and saved. 4. Enable controller
• The motor stator resistance (C0084) = total The identification
resistance of motor cable and motor is – starts, c Off
measured and saved – takes approx. 30 s
– is completed when c is on again
5. Controller inhibit

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0150* Controller status Bit Assignment • Scan of the controller status via
word 1 (parameter 0 Mapping of C0417/1 parameter channel. The most important
channel) status information are grouped as bit
1 Pulse inhibit (DCTRL1-IMP) pattern.
0 Power outputs enabled • Some bits can be freely assigned to
1 Power outputs inhibited internal digital signals
2 Mapping of C0417/3 • Configuration in C0417
3 Mapping of C0417/4
4 Mapping of C0417/5
5 Mapping of C0417/6
6 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
0 false
1 true
7 Controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH)
0 Controller enabled
1 Controller inhibited
11|10|9|8 controller status
0000 Controller initialization
0010 Switch-on
Switch on inhibit
0011 Operation inhibited
0100 Flying-restart
Flying restart circuit active
0101 DC-injection brake active
0110 Operation enabled
0111 Message active
1000 Active fault
12 Overheat warning (DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
0 No warning
1 ϑmax - 5 °C reached
13 DC-bus overvoltage (DCTRL1-OV)
0 No overvoltage
1 Overvoltage
14 Mapping of C0417/15
15 Mapping of C0417/16
C0151* Controller status Bit Assignment • The bits can be freely assigned to
word 2 (parameter internal digital signals
channel) 0 ... 15 Mapping of C0418/1 ... C0418/16 • Configuration in C0418
C0156* Current threshold 0 0 {1 %} 150 Programmable current threshold
Signal output configuration under C0008 or
C0415
C0161* Actual fault Display
p y historyy buffer contents ^ 8-1
C0162* Last fault • Keypad: three-digit, alpha numerical fault ^ 8-3
detection
C0163* Last but one fault
• 9371BB keypad: LECOM fault number
C0164* Last but two fault
C0168* Actual fault
C0170¿ Configuration TRIP -0- -0- TRIP reset by mains switching, s, LOW–signal • TRIP reset via function module or ^ 8-6
reset at X3/28, via function module or communication communication module with C0043,
module C0410/12 or C0135 bit 11.
-1- like -0- and additional auto TRIP reset • Auto TRIP reset after the time set under
C0171
C0171.
-2- TRIP reset through mains switching, via function
module or communication module
-3- TRIP reset by mains switching
C0171 Delay for auto-TRIP 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 60.00
reset

14-22 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
[[C0174]*
] Brake transistor 100 78 {1 %} 110 Not active with 8200 motec and 240 V ^ 11-3
threshold Recommended setting controller 8200 vector
(fixed threshold 380 V)
Vmains C0174 VDC
• 100 % = Threshold DC 790 V
[3/PE AC xxx V] [%] [V DC]
• 110 % = Brake transistor switched off
380 78 618
• VDC = Threshold in V DC
400 81 642
• The recommended setting allows max.
415 84 665 10 % mains overvoltage
440 89 704
460 93 735
480 97 767
500 100 790
C0178* Operating time Total time CINH = HIGH {h} Only display
C0179* Power-on time Total time power-on {h} Only display
C0181* Process controller 0.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 ^ 7-33
setpoint 2
(PCTRL1-SET2)
C0182* Integration time 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 50.00 • C0182 = 0.00: Linear ramp function ^ 7-14
S–ramps generator operation
• C0182 > 0.00: S-shaped ramp function
generator (smooth)
C0183* Diagnostics
g 0 No fault Onlyy display
p y
102 TRIP active
104 Message ”Overvoltage ( OU)” or
”Undervoltage ( LU)” active
142 Pulse inhibit
151 Quick stop active
161 DC-injection brake active
250 Warning active
C0184* Frequency 0.0 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 25.0 • If the output frequency i < C0184, the I ^ 7-33
threshold component of the process controller will
PCTRL1-I-OFF be switched off
• 0.0 Hz = Function not active
C0185* Switching window 0 0 {1 %} 80 • C0415/x = 4 and C0415/x = 5 are active
for ”Frequency within a window around NSET1-RFG1-IN
setpoint reached • Window in C0185 = 0%:
(C0415/x = 4)” and ± 0,5 % ref. to C0011
”NSET1-RFG1-I=O • Window in C0185 > 0%:
(C0415/x = 5)” ± C0185 ref. to NSET1-RFG1-IN
C0189* Output signal -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 Only display
(A) compensator Compensator = PCTRL1-FOLL1
(PCTRL1-FOLL
1-OUT)
C0190*¿ Main and additional -1- -0- X+0 Mathematical addition of mains setpoint
p
(A) setpoint
i -1- X+Y (NSET1 NOUT) andd additional
(NSET1-NOUT) ddi i l setpoint
i
(PCTRL1 ARITH1)
(PCTRL1-ARITH1) (PCTRL1 NADD)
(PCTRL1-NADD)
-2- X-Y
The result is in Hz
-3- X ⋅ Y X = NSET1-NOUT
C0011 Y = PCTRL1-NADD
-4- X ⋅ C0011
Y 100
-5- X ⋅ C0011
C0011 − Y
C0191 Compensator 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Ref. to change 0 Hz ... C0011
(A) acceleration time
C0192 Compensator 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Ref. to change C0011 ... 0 Hz
(A) deceleration time
C0193 Compensator reset 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Ref. to change C0011 ... 0 Hz
(A) Decelerate compensator to ”0”

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0194 Min. compensator -200.00 -200.00 {0.01 %} 200.00 Ref. to C0011
(A) activation threshold If the value falls below C0194:
Compensator ”runs” at C0191 or C0192
direction -C0011
C0195 Max. compensator 200.00 -200.00 {0.01 %} 200.00 Ref. to C0011
(A) activation threshold If C0195 is exceeded:
Compensator ”runs” at C0191 or C0192
direction +C0011
C0196*¿ Activation of -0- -0- Auto-DCB active, if PCTRL1-SET3 < C0019 ^ 7-17
auto–DCBC -1- Auto-DCB active, if PCTRL1-SET3 < C0019 and
NSET1-RFG1-IN < C0019
C0200* Software ID Only PC display
number
C0201* Software Only PC display
generation date
C0202* Software ID Only keypad display
number
1 Output to keypad as string in 4 parts à 4
... characters
4
C0220* Acceleration time - 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Main setpoint ð C0012 ^ 7-14
additional setpoint C0220 individually adjustable in every
(PCTRL1-NADD) parameter set when using application-I/O
C0221* Deceleration time - 5.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Main setpoint ð C0013
additional setpoint C0221 individually adjustable in every
(PCTRL1-NADD) parameter set when using application-I/O
C0225 Acceleration time 0.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Acceleration encoder for process controller
(A) process controller setpoint = PCTRL1-RFG2
setpoint
(PCTRL1-SET1)
C0226 Deceleration time 0.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00
(A) process controller
setpoint
(PCTRL1-SET1)
C0228 Unhide time 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 32.000 0.000 = Process controller output is
(A) process controller transferred without unhiding
C0229 Hide time process 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 32.000 0.000 = “Fading-off” switched off (C0241)
(A) controller
C0230 Min. limit process -100.00 -200.00 {0.01 %} 200.00 Asymmetric limit of process controller output
(A) controller output ref. to C0011
• If value falls below C0230 or exceeds
C0231:
C0231 Max. limit process 100.00 -200.00 {0.01 %} 200.00 – Output signal PCTRL1-LIM = HIGH
(A) controller output after time set under C0233
• Set C0231 > C0230
C0232 Offset inverse 0.00 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 Ref. to C0011
(A) characteristic
process controller
C0233* Delay 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital output signal
(A) PCTRL1-LIM=HIGH PCTRL1-LIM (limit for process controller
output exceeded)
• Sets PCTRL1-LIM = HIGH if the following
still applies after time set:
– Value below C0230 or higher than
C0231
• Transition HIGH ð LOW without delay

14-24 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0234* Delay 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital output signal
(A) PCTRL1-SET=ACT PCTRL1-SET=ACT (process controller
setpoint = process controller actual value)
• Sets PCTRL1-SET=ACT = HIGH if the
following still applies after time set:
– Difference between PCTRL1-SET and
PCTRL1-ACT is below threshold under
C0235
• Transition HIGH ð LOW without delay
C0235* Difference 0.00 0.00 {0.01 Hz} 480.00 Threshold for the digital output signal
(A) threshold PCTRL1-SET=ACT (process controller
PCTRL1-SET=ACT setpoint = process controller actual value)
• Difference between PCTRL1-SET and
PCTRL1-ACT is within limits under
C0235:
– PCTRL1-SET=ACT = HIGH after time
set under C0234
C0236 Acceleration time - 0.00 0.00 {0.02 s} 1300.00 Ref. to C0011 ^ 7-12
(A) minimum frequency Minimum frequency limitation = C0239
limitation
C0238¿ Frequency
q y -2- -0- No precontrol (only process controller) Process controller has full influence ^ 7-31
precontrol -1- Precontrol (total setpoint + process controller) Process controller has limited influence ^ 7-33
-2- No precontrol (only total setpoint) Process controller has no influence
(not active)
Total setpoint (PCTRL1-SET3) = Main
setpoint + additional setpoint
C0239 Lowest frequency -480.00 -480.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 • The value does not fall below limit ^ 7-12
limit = not active independently of the setpoint.
• If the minimum frequency limitation is
active, the automatic DC-injection brake
(auto DCB) must be deactivated
(C0019 = 0 or C0106 = 0).
C0240¿ Process controller -0- -0- Not inverted Set digital signal PCTRL1-INV-ON
output inversion (process controller output inversion) via
(A) (PCTRL1-INV-ON) keypad/PC or parameter channel
(parameter -1- Inverted
channel)
C0241¿ Process controller -0- -0- Process controller unhiding Set digital signal PCTRL1-FADING (process
unhiding/hiding controller hiding/unhiding) via keypad/PC or
(A) (PCTRL1-FADING) parameter channel
(parameter -1- Process controller hiding
channel)
C0242¿ Activation of -0- -0- Normal control Act. value increases ð Output frequency
pprocess controller increases
(A) i
inverse control
t l -1- Inverse control Act. value increases ð Output frequency
decreases
C0243¿ Deactivation of -0- -0- PCTRL1-NADD active Set digital signal PCTRL1-NADD-OFF
additional setpoint (deactivation of additional setpoint) via
(A) (PCTRL keypad/PC or parameter channel
1-NADD-OFF) -1- PCTRL1-NADD not active
(parameter
channel)
C0244¿ Root function -0- -0- not active
actual process -1- Internal calculation
controller value  | PCTRL1-ACT |
(A) 1. Storing sign of PCTRL1-ACT
2. Extraction of the root of the absolute
value
3. Mulitply the result with the sign

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0245*¿ Comparison value -0- -0- MCTRL1-MSET (C0412/6 or C0047) Selection of a comparison value for setting
for MSET1=MACT the digital output signal MSET1=MACT
(A) (torque threshold 1 = actual torque value)
• If the difference between
-1- Value under C0250 MCTRL1-MSET1 and MCTRL1-MACT or
C0250 is within C0252:
– MSET1=MACT = HIGH after time set
under C0254
C0250* Torque threshold 1 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 Related to rated motor torque
(A) (MCTRL1-MSET1)
C0251* Torque threshold 2 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 Related to rated motor torque
(A) (MCTRL1-MSET2) Comparison value for setting the digital
output signal MSET2=MACT (torque
threshold 2 = actual torque value)
• If the difference between
MCTRL1-MSET2 and MCTRL1-MACT is
within C0253:
– MSET2=MACT = HIGH after time set
under C0255
C0252* Difference 0.0 0.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
(A) threshold for
MSET1=MACT
C0253* Difference 0.0 0.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
(A) threshold for
MSET2=MACT
C0254* Delay 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital output signals
(A) MSET1=MACT MSET1=MACT
• Sets MSET1=MACT = HIGH if the
following still applies after time set:
– Difference between MCTRL1-MSET1
and MCTRL1-MACT or C0250 is within
the threshold under C0252
• Transition HIGH ð LOW without delay
C0255* Delay 0.000 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital output signals
(A) MSET2=MACT MSET2=MACT
• Sets MSET2=MACT = HIGH if the
following still applies after time set:
– Difference between MCTRL1-MSET2
and MCTRL1-MACT is within values
set under C0253
• Transition HIGH ð LOW without delay
C0265*¿ Configuration
g motor -3- -0- Start value = power off • Start value: outputp frequency
q y which is ^ 7-25
potentiometer
t ti t -1- Start value = C0010 approached
h d with
ith Tir
Ti (C0012) when
h ththe
mains is switched on and the motor
-2- Start value = 0 potentiometer is activated:
-3- Start value = power off – ”Power off” = act. value if mains is off
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW – ”C0010”: min. output frequency from
C0010
-4- Start value = C0010
– ”0” = output frequency 0 Hz
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW
• C0265 = -3-,-3- -4-
-4-, -5-:
-5- Start value = 0 – QSP reduces the motor potentiometer
QSP, if UP/DOWN = LOW along the QSP ramp (C0105)
C0304 Service codes Modifications onlyy byy Lenze Service!
...
C0309

14-26 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0350*¿ System bus node 1 1 {1} 63 Changes will become effective after the ^ 9-7
address command ”reset node”
C0351*¿ System
y bus baud -0- -0- 500 kbit/s Changes
g will become effective after the
rate -1- 250 kbit/s command ”reset node”
-2- 125 kbit/s
-3- 50 kbit/s
-4- 1000 kbit/s (presently not supported)
-5- 20 kbit/s
C0352*¿ Configuration
g of -0- -0- Slave Changes
g will become effective after the ^ 9-7
system bus devices -1- Master command ”reset node”
C0353*¿ System bus Address source for system bus process data ^ 9-7
address source channels
1 CAN1 (sync) -0- -0- C0350 is source Effective with sync control (C0360 = 1)
2 CAN2 -0- -1- C0354 is the source
3 CAN1 (time) -0- Effective with event and time control
(C0360 = 0)
C0354*¿ Selective system 0 {1} 513 Individual addressing of system bus process ^ 9-9
bus address data objects
1 CAN-IN1 (sync) 129 Effective with sync
y control (C0360
( = 1))
2 CAN-OUT1 (sync) 1
3 CAN-IN2 257
4 CAN-OUT2 258
5 CAN-IN1 (time) 385 Effective with event and time control
6 CAN-OUT1 (time) 386 (C0360
C = 0)
C0355*¿ System bus 0 {1} 2047 Only display
identifier
1 CAN-IN1 Identifier of CAN1 with sync
y control
2 CAN-OUT1 (C0360
C = 1)
3 CAN-IN2
4 CAN-OUT2
5 CAN-IN1 Identifier of CAN1 with event or time control
6 CAN-OUT1 (C0360
C = 0)
C0356*¿ System bus time ^ 9-8
settings
1 Boot up 3000 0 {{1 ms}} 65000 Required for CAN network without master
2 Cycle time 0 0 = event-controlled process data transfer
CAN-OUT2 > 0 = cyclic process data transfer
3 Cycle time 0 0 and C0360 = 0: event-controlled process
CAN-OUT1 data transfer
> 0 and C0360 = 1: cyclic process data
transfer
4 CAN delay 20 Waiting time until cyclic sending after
boot-up
C0357*¿ System bus ^ 9-8
monitoring times
1 CAN-IN1 (sync) 0 0 {{1 ms}} 65000 valid with C0360 = 1
2 CAN-IN2 0 = monitoring not
active
3 CAN-IN1 (time) 0 valid with C0360 = 0
C0358*¿ Reset node -0- -0- Without function System
y bus reset node set-upp ^ 9-8
-1- System bus reset
C0359*¿ System
y bus status -0- Operational Onlyy display
p y
-1- Pre-operational
-2- Warning
-3- Bus off
C0360*¿ Control of pprocess -1- -0- Event or time control
data channel C CAN1 -1- Sync control

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-27

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0370*¿ Activation of -0- Deactivated Can only be read when using bus function
remote pparameter modules on FIF
setting
tti -1-...-63- Activates corresponding CAN address -1- = CAN address 1
-63- = CAN address 63
-255- No system bus (CAN) Only display
C0372* Function module -0- No function module Onlyy display
p y
identification -1- Standard I/O or AS-i
-2- System bus (CAN)
-6- Other function module on FIF e.g. application I/O, INTERBUS, ...
-10- No valid recognition
C0395*¿ LONGWORD Bit 0..15 Controller word (mapping to C0135) For bus operation only
process input data Sending of control word and main setpoint in
Bit 16...31 Setpoint 1 (NSET1-N1) (mapping to C0046) a telegram to controller
C0396*¿ LONGWORD Bit 0...15 Controller status word 1 For bus operation only
pprocess output
p data (mapping of C0150) Readingg of status word and output
p frequency
q y
Bit 16...31 Output frequency (MCTRL1-NOUT) in a telegram from controller
(mapping of C0050)

14-28 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0410¿ Free configuration • A selection made under C0007 is ^ 7-43
of digital input Linkage of external signal sources to internal copied to the corresponding subcode
signals digital signals of C0410. A change of C0410 sets
Digital signal source C0007 = -255-!
1 NSET1-JOG1/3 1 0 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE) Selection of fixed setpoints
NSET1-JOG1/3/5/7 255 C0410/1 C0410/2C active
(A) 0410/33 C0046
LOW LOW LOW JOG1
2 NSET1-JOG2/3 2 1 ... 6 Digital inputs X3/E1 ... X3/E6 (DIGIN1 ... 6) HIGH LOW LOW JOG2
NSET1-JOG2/3/6/7 X3/E1 (1) ... X3/E6 (6) LOW HIGH LOW ...
(A) E5, E6 only application I/O ... ... ... JOG7
HIGH HIGH HIGH
3 DCTRL1-CW/CCW 4 7 PTC input (X2.2/T1, X2.2/T2) CW = CW rotation LOW
CCW = CCW rotation HIGH
4 DCTRL1-QSP 255 10 ... 25 AIF control word (AIF-CTRL)
( ) Quick stop (via terminal LOW active)
5 NSET1-RFG1-STOP 255 Bit 0 (10) ... bit 15 (25) Ramp function generator main setpoint stop
6 NSET1-RFG1-0 255 30 ... 45 CAN-IN1.W1/FIF-IN.W1 Ramp function generator input must be set
Bit 0 (30) ... bit 15 (45) ”0” for mains setpoint
7 MPOT1-UP 255 Motor potentiometer
p functions
8 MPOT1-DOWN 255 50 ... 65 CAN-IN1.W2/FIF-IN.W2
9 Reserved 255 Bit 0 (50) ... bit 15 (65)
10 DCTRL1-CINH 255 Controller inhibit (via terminal LOW active)
11 DCTRL1-TRIP-SET 255 70 ... 85 CAN-IN2.W1 External error (via terminal LOW active)
12 DCTRL1-TRIP-RESE 255 Bit 0 (70) ... bit 15 (85) Error reset
T
13 DCTRL1-PAR2/4 255 90 ... 105 CAN-IN2.W2 Parameter set changeover
Bit 0 (90) ... bit 15 (105) (if C0988 = 0)
if C0410/13 and C0410/14 use the same
source in all parameter sets. Otherwise it
is not possible to change between the
parameter sets.
14 DCTRL1-PAR3/4 255 C0410/13 C0410/14 active
LOW LOW PAR1
HIGH LOW PAR2
LOW HIGH PAR3
HIGH HIGH PAR4
15 MCTRL1-DCB 3 200 Bit-by-bit
y assignment
g of the FIF control words DC-injection brake
16 (A) PCTRL1-RFG2- 255 (FIF-CTRL1,
C FIF-CTRL2)
C from the function module Actual process controller value
LOADI INTERBUS or PROFIBUS-DP (see C0005) (PCTRL1-ACT) must be connected to process
controller ramp function generator
(PCTRL1-RFG2)
17 DCTRL1-H/Re 255 Manual/remote changeover
18 PCTRL1-I-OFF 255 Switch off I-component of the process
controller
19 PCTRL1-OFF 255 Process controller switch off
20 Reserved 255
21 PCTRL1-STOP 255 Process controller stop (value ”frozen”)
22 DCTRL1-CW/QSP 255 Failsafe change
g of the direction of rotation
23 DCTRL1-CCW/QSP 255
24 DFIN1-ON 255 0 = Frequency input not active
1 = Frequency input active
Frequency input configuration under C0425
and C0426

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-29

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0410¿ Free configuration • A selection made under C0007 is
(cont.) of digital input Linkage of external signal sources to internal copied to the corresponding subcode
signals digital signals of C0410. A change of C0410 sets
Digital signal source C0007 = -255-!
25 (A) PCTRL1-FOLL1-0 255 Compensator at reset ramp C0193 to ”0”
26 (A) Reserved 255
27 (A) NSET1-TI1/3 255 Activate acceleration times
28 (A) NSET1-TI2/3 255 C0410/27 C0410/28 active
LOW LOW C0012; C0013
HIGH LOW T ir 1; Tif 1
LOW HIGH T ir 2; Tif 2
HIGH HIGH T ir 3; Tif 3
29 (A) PCTRL1-FADING 255 Process controller output on (LOW)/ off
(HIGH)
30 (A) PCTRL1-INV-ON 255 Process controller output inversion
31 (A) PCTRL1-NADD-OFF 255 Switch off additional setpoint
32 (A) PCTRL1-RFG2-0 255 Decelerate process controller ramp function
generator input to ”0” along ramp C0226
33 (A) NSET1-JOG4/5/6/7 255
C0411¿ Level inversion -0- E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 • The binary value of the selected number ^ 7-43
g inputs
digital p 25 24 23 22 21 20 p levels:
determines the input
E1 ... E6 -0- 0 0 0 0 0 0 – 0: Ex is not inverted (HIGH
G active)
– 1: Ex is inverted (LOW active)
-1- 0 0 0 0 0 1
• C0114 and C0411 are identical
-2- 0 0 0 0 1 0 • E5, E6 only application I/O
-3- 0 0 0 0 1 1 The function ”Parameter
Parameter set changeover
changeover”
... ... cannot be inverted!
-63- 1 1 1 1 1 1

14-30 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0412↵ Free configuration A selection made under C0005, C0007 ^ 7-36
of analog input Connection between external analog signal will be copied to the corresponding
signals sources and internal analog signals subcode of C0412. A change of C0412
Analog signal source sets C0005 = -255-, C0007 = -255-!
1 Setpoint 1 1 0 not assigned (FIXED-FREE) or selection via Either NSET1-N1 or Parameter
(NSET1–N1) 255 keypad or parameter channel of an AIF bus NSET1-N2 active channel:
module Changeover with C0410/17 C0046
2 Setpoint 2 1 1 X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I (AIN1-OUT) Parameter
(NSET1-N2) channel:
C0044
3 Additional setpoint 255 2 Frequency input (DFIN1-OUT) Is added to NSET1-N1, NSET1-N2, JOG
(PCTRL1-NADD) (Observe C0410/24, C0425, C0426, C0427) values and the function j of the keypad
Parameter channel: C0049
4 Process controller 255 3 Motor potentiometer (MPOT1-OUT)
setpoint 1 4 X3/2U, X3/2I (AIN2-OUT, application I/O only)
(PCTRL1-SET1)
5 Act. process 255 5 ... 9 Input signal = constantly 0 (FIXED0) Parameter channel: C0051, if C0238 = 1, 2
controller value
(PCTRL1-ACT)
6 Torque setpoint or 255 10 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Observe C0014! Actual Parameter
torque limit value 11 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) torque values not required. channel:
(MCTRL1-MSET) (Only evaluated if C0001 =3!) 16384 ≡ 100 % torque C0047
setpoint
Condition for selection via
terminal
(C0412/6 = 1, 2 oder 4):
Analog input gain is set to
C0414/x, C0426 =
32768/C0011 [%]
7 Reserved 255 20 ... 23 CAN-IN1.W1 ... W4/FIF-IN.W1 ... W4
Word 1 (20) ... word 4 (23)
8 MCTRL1-VOLT-ADD 255 30 ... 33 CAN-IN2.W1 ... W4 Only for special applications. Modifications
Word 1 (24) ... word 4 (27) onlyy when agreed
g on byy Lenze!
9 MCTRL1-PHI-ADD 255 200 Word-by-word assignment of signals from the
function module INTERBUS or PROFIBUS to FIF
(see C0005)
C0413* Offset analog inputs The max. limit of the setpoint value range of ^ 7-20
C0034 equals 100 %
1 AIN1-OFFSET 0.0 -200.0 {0.1 %} 200.0 Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
C0413/1 and C0026 are identical
2 AIN2-OFFSET 0.0 Setting for X3/2U, X3/2I
(application I/O only)
C0414* Analog input gain • 100.0 % = Gain 1
• Inverse setpoint selection by negative
gain and negative offset
1 AIN1-GAIN 100.0 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 Settings for X3/8 and X3/1U, X3/1I
C0414/1 and C0027 are identical
2 AIN2-GAIN 100.0 Setting for X3/2U, X3/2I
(application I/O only)

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-31

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0415¿ Free configuration Output of digital signals to terminals • A selection under C0008 will be ^ 7-45
of digital outputs p
copied g of
to C0415/1. A change
1 Relay output K1 25 0 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE) C0415/1 sets
t C0008 = -255-!
255 !
((RELAY)) 255 • A selection under C0117 will be
copied to C0415/2.
C0415/2 A changef of
1 PAR-B0 active (DCTRL1-PAR-B0) C0415/2 sets C0117 = -255-!
2 Pulse inhibit active (DCTRL1-IMP) • C0415/3 only application–I/O
application I/O
2 Digital output 16 3 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
X3/A1 ((DIGOUT1)) (C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached)
4 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
3 Digital output 255 5 Ramp functin generator 1: Input = output RFG1 = Ramp function generator main
X3/A2 (DIGOUT2) (NSET1-RFG1-I=O) setpoint
6 Qmin threshold higher (PCTRL1-QMIN) active PAR-B1 PAR-B0
7 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0) PAR1 LOW LOW
PAR2 LOW HIGH
8 Controller inhibit active (DCTRL1-CINH) PAR3 HIGH LOW
9...12 Reserved PAR4 HIGH HIGH
13 Overtemperature (Jmax -5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
14 DC-bus overvoltage (DCTRL1-OV)
15 CCW rotation (DCTRL1-CCW)
16 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY)
17 PAR-B1 active (DCTRL1-PAR-B1)
18 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) active
(DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP)
19 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
20 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
23 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
24 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)
25 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP)
26 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
27 Motor is running/CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW)
28 Motor is running/CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
29 Process controller input = process controller
output (PCTRL1-SET=ACT)
30 Reserved
31 Apparent motor current > current threshold and Overload monitoring
ramp function generator 1: Input = output Apparent motor current = C0054
(DCTRL1-(IMOT>ILIM)-RFG-I=0) Current threshold = C0156
32 ... 37 X3/E1 (32) ... X3/E6 (37) Digital input terminals

14-32 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0415¿ Free configuration
g Output of digital signals to terminals ^ 7-45
(cont.) of digital outputs 40...55 AIF control word (AIF-CTRL) Bits of fieldbus input words
Bit 0 (40) ... bit 15 (55) g
Assigned bits of AIF-CTRL:
60...75 CAN-IN1.W1 or FIF-IN.W1 Bit 3: QSP
Bit 0 (60) ... bit 15 (75) Bit 7: CINH
Bit 10:
10 TRIP-SET
TRIP SET
80...95 CAN-IN1.W2 or FIF-IN.W2
Bit 0 (80) ... bit 15 (95) Bit 11: TRIP-RESET
100...115 CAN-IN2.W1, bit 0 (100) ... bit 15 (115)
120...135 CAN-IN2.W2, bit 0 (120) ... bit 15 (135)
140...172 Status application I/O Onlyy active when usingg application
pp I/O
140 Torque threshold 1 reached
(MSET1=MACT)
141 Torque threshold 2 reached
(MSET2=MACT)
142 Process controller output limit
reached (PCTRL1-LIM)
143 ... 172 Reserved
C0416¿ Level inversion 0 X3/A2 X3/A1 Relay K1 • 0: Output
p not inverted ((HIGH-aktiv)) ^ 7-45
digital outputs -0- 0 0 0 • 1: Output inverted(LOW-aktiv)
-1- 0 0 1
• X3/A2 only
l application
li ti I/O
-2- 0 1 0
-3- 0 1 1
-4- 1 0 0
-5- 1 0 1
-6- 1 1 0
-7- 1 1 1

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-33

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0417*¿ Free configuration • The assignment is mapped to the ^ 7-48
of controller status – Controller status word 1 (C0150)
messages (1) Output of digital signals to bus – AIF status word (AIF
(AIF-STAT)
STAT)
1 Bit 0 1 Digital signal sources like C0415 – FIF output
p word 1 (FIF-OUT.W1)
( )
2 Bit 1 2 – Output
O wordd 1 iin the
h CAN object
bj 1
à
(CAN-OUT1.W1)
3 Bit 2 3
4 Bit 3 4 à Fixed assignment
g to AIF in operation
p
5 Bit 4 5 with communication modules:
INTERBUS 2111
2111, PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS-DP
DP 2131 or
6 Bit 5 6 LECOM-A/B/LI 2102. Modifications are
7 Bit 6 7 not allowed!
à If you use function modules system bus
8 Bit 7 8 (CAN), INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP to FIF, all
à bits are freely configurable.
9 Bit 8 9 11|10|9|8 controller status
à 0000 Controller initialization
10 Bit 9 10 0010 S i h
Switch-on iinhibit
hibi
à 0011 Operation inhibited
0100 Flying restart circuit active
Flying-restart
11 Bit 10 11 0101 DC-injection brake active
à
0110 Operation enabled
12 Bit 11 12 0111 Message active
à 1000 Active fault
13 Bit 12 13
à
14 Bit 13 14
à
15 Bit 14 15
16 Bit 15 16
C0418*¿ Free configuration Output of digital signals to bus • The assignment is mapped to the ^ 7-48
of controller status – Controller status word 2 (C0151)
messages (2) – FIF output word 2 (FIF-OUT.W2)
(FIF OUT.W2)
1 Bit 0 255 Digital signal sources like C0415 – Output
p word 1 in the CAN object
j 2
... ... (CAN OUT2 W1)
(CAN-OUT2.W1)
• All bits can be freely configured
16 Bit 15 255

14-34 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0419¿ Free configuration Analog signal output to terminal • The selection made under C0111 is ^ 7-37
of analog outputs copied to C0419/1. A change of
C0419/1 sets C0111 = 255!
• C0419/2, C0419/3 only active in
operation with application–I/O
Analog signal source • DFOUT1: 50 ... 10 kHz
1 X3/62 (AOUT1-IN) 0 0 Output frequency (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
2 X3/63 (AOUT2-IN) 2 1 Controller load (MCTRL1-MOUT) 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated motor torque
with vector control (C0014 = 4), otherwise
rated active inverter current
(active current/C0091)
3 X3/A4 (DFOUT1-IN) 3 2 Apparent motor current (MCTRL1-IMOT) 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated inverter current
3 DC-bus voltage (MCTRL1-DCVOLT) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ DC 1000 V
(400 V- mains
6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ DC 380 V
(230 V mains)
4 Motor power 3 V/6 mA/2.925 kHz ≡ Rated motor power
5 Motor voltage (MCTRL1-VOLT) 4.8 V/9.6 mA/4.68 kHz ≡ Rated motor
voltage
6 1/output frequency (1/C0050) (MCTRL1-1/NOUT) 2 V/4 mA/1.95 kHz ≡ 0.5 × C0011
7 Output frequency with limits 0 V/0 mA/4 mA/0 kHz ≡ f = fmin (C0010)
(NSET1-C0010...C0011) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ f = fmax (C0011)
8 Operation with process controller (C0238 = 0, 1): 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
Operation without process controller (C0238 = 2):
Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
9 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY) Selection -9- ... -25- corresponds
p to the
10 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP) digital functions of the relay output K1
(C0008) or the digital output A1 (C0117):
11 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
LOW = 0 V/0 mA/4 mA/ 0 kHz
12 Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW) HIGH = 10 V/20 mA/10 kHz
13 Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
14 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
15 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
16 Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
17 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
18 Overtemperature (Jmax - 5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
19 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) active
(DCTRL1-TRIP-QMIN-IMP)
20 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
23 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
24 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
25 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-35

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0419¿ Free configuration
g Analog signal output to terminal ^ 7-37
of analog outputs Analog signal source
( t)
(cont.) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
27 Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
28 Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
29 Process controller setpoint (PCTRL1-SET1) 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ C0011
30 Process controller output (PCTRL1-OUT)
31 Ramp function generator input (NSET1-RFG1-IN)
32 Ramp function generator output (NSET1-NOUT)
33 (A) PID controller output (PCTRL1-PID-OUT)
34 (A) Process controller output (PCTRL1-NOUT)
35 Input signal at X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I, 6 V/12 mA/5.85 kHz ≡ Maximum value
evaluated with gain (C0414/1 or C0027) and analog input signal
offset (C0413/1 or C0026) (AIN1-OUT) ((5 V, 10 V, 20 mA, 10 kHz))
36 Input signal at frequency input X3/E1, C diti Gain
Condition: G i off analog
l input
i t or frequency
f
input set to:
evaluated with gain (C0426) and offset (C0427)
(DFIN1-OUT) C0414/x, C0426 = 100 %
37 Motor potentiometer output (MPOT1-OUT)
38 Input signal at X3/2U, X3/2I,
evaluated with gain (C0414/2) and offset
(C0413/2) (AIN2-OUT)
40 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Setpoint to drive from communication
module to AIF
41 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) 10 V/20 mA/10 kHz ≡ 1000
50 ... 53 CAN-IN1.W1 ... 4 oder FIF-IN.W1 ... FIF-IN.W4 Setpoints to drive from function module to
Word 1 (50) ... word 4 (53) FIF
60 ... 63 CAN-IN2.W1 ... 4 10 V/20
/ mA/10 / kHz ≡ 1000
Word 1 (60) ... word 4 (63)
255 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE)
C0420* Gain analog output 128 0 {1} 255 128 ≡ Gain 1
X3/62 C0420 and C0108 are the same
(AOUT1-GAIN)
Standard I/O
C0420* Gain analog outputs 128 ≡ Gain 1
Application I/O
(A)
1 X3/62 128 0 {1} 255 C0420/1 and C0108 are the same
(AOUT1-GAIN)
2 X3/63
(AOUT2-GAIN)

14-36 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0421¿ Free configuration • With Lenze setting, CAN-OUT1.W1 and ^ 7-41
analog process FIF-OUT.W1 are defined as digital
data output words outputs and the 16-bit controller
status word 1 (C0417) is assigned to
them.
• If you want to output analog values
(C0421/3 ≠ 255), the digital
assignment must be deleted (C0417/x
Output of analog signals on bus = 255)! Otherwise the output signal
Analog signal source would be incorrect.
1 AIF-OUT.W1 8 0 Output frequency with slip (MCTRL1-NOUT+SLIP) 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
2 AIF-OUT.W2 0 1 Controller load (MCTRL1-MOUT) 16383 ≡ Rated motor torque with vector
control (C0014 = 4), otherwise rated active
inverter current (active current/C0091)
3 CAN-OUT1.W1 / 255 2 Apparent motor current (MCTRL1-IMOT) 16383 ≡ Rated inverter current
FIF-OUT.W1
4 CAN-OUT1.W2 / 255 3 DC-bus voltage (MCTRL1-DCVOLT) 16383 ≡ 1000 VDC at 400 V mains
FIF-OUT.W2 16383 ≡ 380 VDC at 230 V mains
5 CAN-OUT1.W3 / 255 4 Motor power 285 ≡ Rated motor power
FIF-OUT.W3
6 CAN-OUT1.W4 / 255 5 Motor voltage (MCTRL1-VOLT) 16383 ≡ Rated motor voltage
FIF-OUT.W4
7 CAN-OUT2.W1 255 6 1/output frequency (1/C0050) (MCTRL1-1/NOUT) 195 ≡ 0.5 × C0011
8 CAN-OUT2.W2 255 7 Output
p frequency
q y with limits 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
(NSET1-C0010...C0011)
S C C
0 ≡ f < C0010
24000 ⋅ (f − C0010)
≡ f ≥ C0010
480 Hz
9 CAN-OUT2.W3 255 8 Operation with process controller (C0238 = 0, 1): 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
10 CAN-OUT2.W4 255 Operation without process controller (C0238 = 2):
Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT)
9 Ready for operation (DCTRL1-RDY) Selection -9- ... -25- corresponds
p to the
10 TRIP fault message (DCTRL1-TRIP) digital functions of the relay output K1
(C0008) or the digital output A1 (C0117):
11 Motor is running (DCTRL1-RUN)
LOW = 0 V/0 mA/4 mA
12 Motor is running / CW rotation (DCTRL1-RUN-CW) HIGH = 10 V/20 mA
13 Motor is running / CCW rotation
(DCTRL1-RUN-CCW)
14 Output frequency = 0 (DCTRL1-NOUT=0)
15 Frequency setpoint reached
(MCTRL1-RFG1=NOUT)
16 Qmin threshold reached (PCTRL1-QMIN)
17 Imax limit reached (MCTRL1-IMAX)
C0014 = -5-: Torque setpoint reached
18 Overtemperature (Jmax -5 °C)
(DCTRL1-OH-WARN)
19 TRIP or Qmin or pulse inhibit (IMP) (DCTRL1-IMP)
20 PTC warning (DCTRL1-PTC-WARN)
21 Apparent motor current < current threshold Belt monitoring
(DCTRL1-IMOT<ILIM) pp
Apparent motor current = C0054
22 Apparent motor current < current threshold and Current threshold = C0156
Qmin threshold reached
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-QMIN)
23 Apparent motor current < current threshold and
RFG 1: Input = output
(DCTRL1-(IMOT<ILIM)-RFG-I=0)
24 Warning motor phase failure
(DCTRL1-LP1-WARN)
25 Minimum output frequency reached
(PCTRL1-NMIN)

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-37

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0421¿ Free configuration Output of analog signals on bus ^ 7-41
analogg pprocess Analog signal source
(cont.) data
d t output
t t words
d 27 Output frequency without slip (MCTRL1-NOUT) 24000 ≡ 480 Hz
28 Act. process controller value (PCTRL1-ACT)
29 Process controller setpoint (PCTRL1-SET1)
30 Process controller output (PCTRL1-OUT)
31 Ramp function generator input (NSET1-RFG1-IN)
32 Ramp function generator output (NSET1-NOUT)
33 (A) PID controller output (PCTRL1-PID-OUT)
34 (A) Process controller output (PCTRL1-NOUT)
35 Input signal at X3/8 or X3/1U, X3/1I, 1000 ≡ Maximum value analog input signal
evaluated with gain (C0414/1 or C0027) and (5 V, 10 V, 20 mA, 10 kHz)
offset (C0413/1 or C0026) (AIN1-OUT) Condition: Gain of analogg input
p or frequency
q y
36 Input signal at frequency input X3/E1, i t sett to:
input t
evaluated with gain (C0426) and offset (C0427) C0414/x, C0426 = 20/C0011 [%]
(DFIN1-OUT)
37 Motor potentiometer output (MPOT1-OUT)
38 Input signal at X3/2U, X3/2I,
evaluated with gain (C0414/2) and offset
(C0413/2) (AIN2-OUT)
40 AIF input word 1 (AIF-IN.W1) Setpoint to drive from communication
module to AIF
41 AIF input word 2 (AIF-IN.W2) Normalisation via AIF
50 ... 53 CAN-IN1.W1 ... 4 oder FIF-IN.W1 ... FIF-IN.W4 Setpoints to controller from CAN or function
Word 1 (50) ... word 4 (53) module to FIF
60 ... 63 CAN-IN2.W1 ... 4 Normalisation via CAN
C or FIF
Word 1 (60) ... word 4 (63)
255 Not assigned (FIXED-FREE)
C0422* Offset analog 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 C0422 and C0109 are the same ^ 7-37
output X3/62
(AOUT1-OFFSET)
Standard I/O
C0422* Offset analog
outputs
(A) Application I/O
1 X3/62 0.00 -10.00 {0.01 V} 10.00 C0422/1 and C0109 are the same
(AOUT1-OFFSET)
2 X3/63
(AOUT2-OFFSET)
C0423* Digital output delay 0.000 {0.001 s} 65.000 ”Debouncing” of digital outputs ^ 7-45
(A) ((as of version application-I/O
pp E82ZAFA ...
1 Relay output K1 0.000 Vx11)
(RELAY) • Switches the digital output if the linked
signal is still active after the time set
set.
2 Digital output 0.000
• Digital output reset with delay
X3/A1 (DIGOUT1)
3 Digital output 0.000
X3/A2 (DIGOUT2)
C0424*¿ Output signal range Observe the jumper setting of the function ^ 7-37
- analog outputs module!
(A) Application–I/O ((as of version application-I/O
pp E82ZAFA ...
1 X3/62 (AOUT1) -0- -0- 0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA V 11)
Vx11)
2 X3/63 (AOUT2) -0- -1- 4 ... 20 mA

14-38 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0425¿* Configuration
g -2- fr ∆fmin t fmax • fr = Normalisation frequency
q y ^ 7-23
frequency input -0- 100 Hz 1/200 1s 300 Hz – fr corresponds to C0011
single track X3/E1
-1- 1 kHz 1/200 100 msec 3 kHz
• ∆fmin = Resolution
R l ti
(DFIN1) • t = Scanning rate
-2- 10 kHz 1/200 10 msec 10 kHz – The lower the scanning rate the higher
-3- 10 kHz 1/1000 50 msec 10 kHz the dynamical response.
-4- 10 kHz 1/10000 500 msec 10 kHz • fmax = Maximum frequency
q y which can be
-5- (A) 100 kHz 1/400 2 msec 100 kHz processedd iindependently
d d tl off C0425
– Set C0425 that the frequency coming
-6- (A) 100 kHz 1/1000 5 msec 100 kHz from the encoder is lower than f max
-7- (A) 100 kHz 1/2000 10 msec 100 kHz • Activate frequency input with
C0410/24 = 1
Configuration
g -10- (A) 100 Hz 1/200 1s 300 Hz • Adjust frequency input under C0426 and
frequency input two C0427
-11- (A) 1 kHz 1/200 100 msec 3 kHz
tracks X3/E1,
X3/E1 X3/E2
(DFIN1) -12- (A) 10 kHz 1/200 10 msec 10 kHz
-13- (A) 10 kHz 1/1000 50 msec 10 kHz
-14- (A) 10 kHz 1/10000 500 msec 10 kHz
-15- (A) 100 kHz 1/400 2 msec 100 kHz
-16- (A) 100 kHz 1/1000 5 msec 100 kHz
-17- (A) 100 kHz 1/2000 10 msec 100 kHz
C0426* Gain frequency 100 -1500.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0 f N (C0425) C0011 − f s
input X3/E1, X3/E2 C0426 = n ⋅ ⋅ 100 %
max C0011
((A)) (DFIN1-GAIN)
( ) ⋅ inc∕rev
60 s
• nmax = Maximum process speed of motor
in min-1
• fs = Slip frequency in Hz
C0427* Offset frequency 0.0 -100.0 {0.1 %} 100.0
input X3/E1, X3/E2
(A) (DFIN1-OFFSET)
C0428* Gain frequency 100 0.0 {0.1 %} 1500.0
(A) output
(DFOUT1-OUT)
C0430*¿ Automatic analogg -0- -0- not active Gain and offset are calculated byy two ppoints ^ 7-22
input adjustsment -1- Input point for X3/1U, X3/1I from the setpoint characteristic. C
Choose two
(A) points distant from each other to increase
-2- Input points for X3/2U, X3/2I the calculation accuracy.
C0431*¿ Coordinates point 1 -100.0 {0.1 %} 100.0 1. Select and input under C0430 which you
want to calculate gain and offset for
(A) 2. Enter point 1 under C0431 X value
1 X (P1) -100.0 Analog setpoint of P1 (setpoint) and Y value (output frequency)
100 % = max. input value (5 V, 10 V or 20 mA) 3. Enter ppoint 2 under C0432 X value
( t i t) andd Y value
(setpoint) l ((output
t t frequency)
f )
2 Y (P1) -100.0 Output frequency of P1
100 % = C0011 4. Calculated values are automatically
entered under C0413 (offset) and C0414
C0432*¿ Coordinates point 2 -100.0 {0.1 %} 100.0 (gain)

(A)
1 X (P2) 100.0 Analog setpoint of P1
100 % = max. input value (5 V, 10 V or 20 mA)
2 Y (P2) 100.0 Output frequency of P1
100 % = C0011
C0435*¿ Automatic 0 0 {1} 4096 • Only require for speed control with digital
frequency input = not active feedback via HTL encoder
(A) adjustment • Calculates the gain C0426, depending on
C0425 and C0011
• C0426 will be recalculated after every
change of C0011 or C0425.
• Always enter number of increments
divided by number of pole pairs of the
motor!
– Example: Encoder increments = 4096,
motor 4 poles
– C0435 = 2048

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-39

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0440 Additional JOG JOG = Setpoint ^ 7-26
(A) values Activation via configuration under C0410
1 JOG 1 20.00 -650.00 {0.02 Hz 650.00 C04401/1 and C0037 are the same
2 JOG 2 30.00 C04401/2 and C0038 are the same
3 JOG 3 40.00 C04401/3 and C0039 are the same
4 JOG 4 15.00
5 JOG 5 25.00
6 JOG 6 35.00
7 JOG 7 45.00
[C0469]* Function of key -1- -0- not active Determines the function which is activated
s of the keypad when pressing s.
-1- CINH (controller inhibit)
Changes will only be active after mains
-2- QSP (quick stop) switching!
C0500* Calibration of 2000 1 {1} 25000 • The codes C0010, C0011, C0017, C0019, ^ 7-52
numerator variable C0037, C0038, C0039, C0044, C0046,
C0049, C0050, C0051, C0138, C0139,
C0140 C0181,
C0140, C0181 C0239,
C0239 C0625,
C0625 C0626,
C0626
C0501* Calibration of 10 1 {1} 25000 C0627 can be calibrated in a way that
denominator the keypad indicates a process variable.
process variable • If C0500/C0501 remain unchanged, the
unit ”Hz” will no longer be displayed.
C0500* Calibration of 2000 1 {1} 25000 • The codes C0037, C0038, C0039, C0044,
(A) numerator variable C0046,, C0049,, C0051,, C0138,, C0139,,
C0501* Calibration of 10 1 {1} 25000 C0140 C0181 can bbe calibrated
C0140, lib t d iin a way
denominator that the keypad indicates a process
(A)
process variable variable with the unit selected under
C0502
C0502.
C0502* Process variable 0 0: — 6: rpm 13: % 18: Ω • Frequency-related codes (C0010, C0011,
(A) unit 1: ms 9: °C 14: kW 19: hex C0017, C0019, C0050, C0239, C0625,
2: s 10: Hz 15: N 34: m C0626, C0627) are always indicated in
4: A 11: kVA 16: mV 35: h ”Hz”.
5: V 12: Nm 17: mΩ 42: mH
C0517*¿ User menu • After mains switching or when using the ^ 7-56
function g the code from C0517/1 will
1 Memory 1 50 C0050 Output frequency (MCTRL1-NOUT) b displayed.
be di l d
• In Lenze setting
setting, the user menu contains
2 Memory 2 34 C0034 Analog setpoint selection range the most important codes for setting up
3 Memory 3 7 C0007 Fixed configuration - digital input signals the control mode ”V/f
V/f characteristic
4 Memory 4 10 C0010 Minimum output frequency control with linear characteristic”
5 Memory 5 11 C0011 Maximum output frequency • When
Wh th the passwordd protection
t ti iis
activated only the codes entered under
activated,
6 Memory 6 12 C0012 Acceleration time main setpoint C0517 are freely accessible.
7 Memory 7 13 C0013 Deceleration time main setpoint • Enter the required code numbers in the
8 Memory 8 15 C0015 V/f rated frequency subcodes.
9 Memory 9 16 C0016 Umin boost
10 Memory 10 2 C0002 Parameter set transfer
C0518 Service codes Modifications onlyy byy Lenze Service!
C0519
C0520
C0597*¿ Configuration of -0- Deactivate it before motor parameter
motor phase failure identification. Otherwise the identification
detection will be stopped with the error message LP1
Configuration of
motor phase failure -0- not active Error messages:
detection
g
Configuration of -1- TRIP is indicated Keypad: LP1, bus: 32
motor
t phase
h ffailure
il -2- Warning Keypad: LP1, bus: 182
detection
C0599*¿ Current limit value 5 1 {1 %} 50 • Threshold for C0597
for motor phase • Reference: Rated controller current
failure detection

14-40 ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Code table

Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0625* Skip frequency 1 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00 ^ 7-8
C0626* Skip frequency 2 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0627* Skip frequency 3 480.00 0.00 {0.02 Hz} 480.00
C0628* Bandwidth of skip 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Applies to C0625, C0626, C0627
frequencies
C0988* DC-bus voltage 0 0 {1 %} 200 • C0988 = 0 % ^ 7-10
threshold for – Parameter set changeover via DC-bus ^ 7-18
DC-bus voltage voltage deactivated
control • Changeover always between PAR1 nd
PAR2
• Parameter set changeover via terminal,
bus or PC is not possible if C0988 > 0!
C01500* Software number Only PC display
application I/O
C1501* Software creation Only PC display
date application I/O
C1502 Software number Output to keypad as string in 4 parts à 4
(A) application I/O characters
1 Part 1
... ...
4 Part 4
C1504 Service codes Modifications onlyy byy Lenze Service!
... application I/O
/O
C1507

L ba_UOjsTRO bk QKM 14-41

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

14.3 Attribute table

For writing programs it is necessary to have the data given in the attribute table. The table contains
all information required for the parameter communication with the controller.

How to read the attribute table:

Column Meaning Entry
Code Name of the Lenze code Cxxxx
Index dec Index for parameter addressing. Anly required for control via INTERBUS,
The subindex for array variables corresponds to the PRAFIBUS-DP or system bus (CAN).
(CAN)
hex Lenze subcode number
Data DS Data structure I Single variable (one parameter element only)
A Array variable (several parameter elements)
DA No. of array elements (subcodes) xx
DT Data type
yp B8 1 byte bit coded
B16 2 byte bit coded
B32 4 byte bit coded
FIX32 32 bit value with sign;
decimal with 4 decimal codes
I32 4 byte with sign
U32 4 byte without sign
VS ASCII string
DL Data length in byte
Format LECAM format VD ASCII decimal format
VH ASCII hexadecimal format
VS String format
VA Actett string format for data blocks
Access LCM-R/W Access ppermission for LECAM Ra Reading always allowed
Wa Writing always allowed
W Writing only under condition
Condition Condition for writing CINH Writing only allowed when the controller is inhibited

14-42 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

14.3.1 Attribute table for controllers with standard I/A

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0001 24574dec 5FFEhex I 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0002 24573dec 5FFDhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/W CINH
C0003 24572dec 5FFChex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0004 24571dec 5FFBhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0005 24570dec 5FFAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0007 24568dec 5FF8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0008 24567dec 5FF7hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0009 24566dec 5FF6hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0010 24565dec 5FF5hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0011 24564dec 5FF4hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0012 24563dec 5FF3hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0013 24562dec 5FF2hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0014 24561dec 5FF1hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0015 24560dec 5FF0hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0016 24559dec 5FEFhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0017 24558dec 5FEEhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0018 24557dec 5FEDhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0019 24556dec 5FEChex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0021 24554dec 5FEAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0022 24553dec 5FE9hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0023 24552dec 5FE8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0026 24549dec 5FE5hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0027 24548dec 5FE4hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0034 24541dec 5FDDhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0035 24540dec 5FDChex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0036 24539dec 5FDBhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0037 24538dec 5FDAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0038 24537dec 5FD9hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0039 24536dec 5FD8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0040 24535dec 5FD7hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0043 24532dec 5FD4hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0044 24531dec 5FD3hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0046 24529dec 5FD1hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0047 24528dec 5FD0hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0049 24526dec 5FCEhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0050 24525dec 5FCDhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0051 24524dec 5FCChex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0052 24523dec 5FCBhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0053 24522dec 5FCAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0054 24521dec 5FC9hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0056 24519dec 5FC7hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0061 24514dec 5FC2hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0070 24505dec 5FB9hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0071 24504dec 5FB8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0072 24503dec 5FB7hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0074 24501dec 5FB5hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0077 24498dec 5FB2hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0078 24497dec 5FB1hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0079 24496dec 5FB0hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0084 24491dec 5FABhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0087 24488dec 5FA8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0088 24487dec 5FA7hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0089 24486dec 5FA6hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0090 24485dec 5FA5hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0091 24484dec 5FA4hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0092 24483dec 5FA3hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0093 24482dec 5FA2hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0094 24481dec 5FA1hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0099 24476dec 5F9Chex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0105 24470dec 5F96hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-43

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0106 24469dec 5F95hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0107 24468dec 5F94hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0108 24467dec 5F93hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0109 24466dec 5F92hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0111 24464dec 5F90hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0114 24461dec 5F8Dhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0117 24458dec 5F8Ahex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0119 24456dec 5F88hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0120 24455dec 5F87hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0125 24450dec 5F82hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0126 24449dec 5F81hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0127 24448dec 5F80hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0135 24440dec 5F78hex E 1 2 B16 VH Ra
C0138 24437dec 5F75hex I 1 4 FEX32 VD Ra
C0139 24436dec 5F74hex I 1 4 FEX32 VD Ra
C0140 24435dec 5F73hex I 1 4 FEX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0141 24434dec 5F72hex I 1 4 FEX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0142 24433dec 5F71hex I 1 4 FEX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0143 24432dec 5F70hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0144 24431dec 5F6Fhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0145 24430dec 5F6Ehex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0148 24427dec 5F6Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/W CINH
C0150 24425dec 5F69hex E 1 2 B16 VH Ra
C0151 24424dec 5F68hex E 1 2 B16 VH Ra
C0155 24420dec 5F64hex E 1 2 B16 VH Ra
C0156 24419dec 5F63hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0161 24414dec 5F5Ehex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0162 24413dec 5F5Dhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0163 24412dec 5F5Chex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0164 24411dec 5F5Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0165 24410dec 5F5Ahex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0168 24407dec 5F57hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0170 24405dec 5F55hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0171 24404dec 5F54hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0174 24401dec 5F51hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/W CINH
C0178 24397dec 5F4Dhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0179 24396dec 5F4Chex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0181 24394dec 5F4Ahex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0182 24393dec 5F49hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0183 24392dec 5F48hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0184 24391dec 5F47hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0185 24390dec 5F46hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0196 24379dec 5F3Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0200 24375dec 5F37hex E 1 14 VS VS Ra
C0201 24374dec 5F36hex I 1 17 VS VS Ra
C0202 24373dec 5F35hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0220 24355dec 5F23hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0221 24354dec 5F22hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0238 24337dec 5F11hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0239 24336dec 5F10hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0265 24310dec 5EF6hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0304 24271dec 5ECFhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0305 24270dec 5ECEhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0306 24269dec 5ECDhex E 1 2 U16 VH Ra/Wa
C0307 24268dec 5ECChex I 1 2 U16 VH Ra/Wa
C0308 24267dec 5ECBhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0309 24266dec 5ECAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0350 24225dec 5EA1hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0351 24224dec 5EA0hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0352 24223dec 5E9Fhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0353 24222dec 5E9Ehex A 3 4 FEX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0354 24221dec 5E9Dhex A 6 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa

14-44 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0355 24220dec 5E9Chex A 6 4 FEX32 VD Ra
C0356 24219dec 5E9Bhex A 4 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0357 24218dec 5E9Ahex A 3 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0358 24217dec 5E99hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0359 24216dec 5E98hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0360 24215dec 5E97hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0370 24205dec 5E8Dhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0372 24203dec 5E8Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0395 24180dec 5E74hex E 1 4 B32 VH Ra
C0396 24179dec 5E73hex E 1 4 B32 VH Ra
C0410 24165dec 5E65hex A 25 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0411 24164dec 5E64hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0412 24163dec 5E63hex A 9 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0413 24162dec 5E62hex A 2 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0414 24161dec 5E61hex A 2 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0415 24160dec 5E60hex A 3 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0416 24159dec 5E5Fhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0417 24158dec 5E5Ehex A 16 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0418 24157dec 5E5Dhex A 16 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0419 24156dec 5E5Chex A 3 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0420 24155dec 5E5Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0421 24154dec 5E5Ahex A 10 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0422 24153dec 5E59hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0425 24150dec 5E56hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0426 24149dec 5E55hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0427 24148dec 5E54hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0469 24106dec 5E2Ahex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/W CINH
C0500 24075dec 5E0Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0501 24074dec 5E0Ahex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0517 24058dec 5DFAhex A 10 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0518 24057dec 5DF9hex A 250 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0519 24056dec 5DF8hex A 250 4 FIX32 VD Ra
C0597 23978dec 5DAAhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0599 23976dec 5DA8hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0625 23950dec 5D8Ehex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0626 23949dec 5D8Dhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0627 23948dec 5D8Chex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0628 23947dec 5D8Bhex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa
C0988 23587dec 5C23hex E 1 4 FIX32 VD Ra/Wa

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-45

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

14.3.2 Attribute table for controllers with application I/A

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0001 24574dec 5FFEhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0002 24573dec 5FFDhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/W CINH
C0003 24572dec 5FFChex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0004 24571dec 5FFBhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0005 24570dec 5FFAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0007 24568dec 5FF8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0008 24567dec 5FF7hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0009 24566dec 5FF6hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0010 24565dec 5FF5hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0011 24564dec 5FF4hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0012 24563dec 5FF3hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0013 24562dec 5FF2hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0014 24561dec 5FF1hex E 1 FEX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0015 24560dec 5FF0hex I 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0016 24559dec 5FEFhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0017 24558dec 5FEEhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0018 24557dec 5FEDhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0019 24556dec 5FEChex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0021 24554dec 5FEAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0022 24553dec 5FE9hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0023 24552dec 5FE8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0026 24549dec 5FE5hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0027 24548dec 5FE4hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0034 24541dec 5FDDhex A 2 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0035 24540dec 5FDChex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0036 24539dec 5FDBhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0037 24538dec 5FDAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0038 24537dec 5FD9hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0039 24536dec 5FD8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0040 24535dec 5FD7hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0043 24532dec 5FD4hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0044 24531dec 5FD3hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0046 24529dec 5FD1hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0047 24528dec 5FD0hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0049 24526dec 5FCEhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0050 24525dec 5FCDhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0051 24524dec 5FCChex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0052 24523dec 5FCBhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0053 24522dec 5FCAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0054 24521dec 5FC9hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0056 24519dec 5FC7hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0061 24514dec 5FC2hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0070 24505dec 5FB9hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0071 24504dec 5FB8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0072 24503dec 5FB7hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0074 24501dec 5FB5hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0077 24498dec 5FB2hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0078 24497dec 5FB1hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0079 24496dec 5FB0hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0084 24491dec 5FABhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0087 24488dec 5FA8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0088 24487dec 5FA7hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0089 24486dec 5FA6hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0090 24485dec 5FA5hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0091 24484dec 5FA4hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0092 24483dec 5FA3hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0093 24482dec 5FA2hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0094 24481dec 5FA1hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0099 24476dec 5F9Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0101 24474dec 5F9Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa

14-46 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0103 24472dec 5F98hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0105 24470dec 5F96hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0106 24469dec 5F95hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0107 24468dec 5F94hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0108 24467dec 5F93hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0109 24466dec 5F92hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0111 24464dec 5F90hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0114 24461dec 5F8Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0117 24458dec 5F8Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0119 24456dec 5F88hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0120 24455dec 5F87hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0125 24450dec 5F82hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0126 24449dec 5F81hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0127 24448dec 5F80hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0135 24440dec 5F78hex E 1 B16 2 VH Ra
C0138 24437dec 5F75hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0139 24436dec 5F74hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0140 24435dec 5F73hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0141 24434dec 5F72hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0142 24433dec 5F71hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0143 24432dec 5F70hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0144 24431dec 5F6Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0145 24430dec 5F6Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0148 24427dec 5F6Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/W CINH
C0150 24425dec 5F69hex E 1 B16 2 VH Ra
C0151 24424dec 5F68hex E 1 B16 2 VH Ra
C0152 24423dec 5F67hex E 1 B16 2 VH Ra
C0155 24420dec 5F64hex E 1 B16 2 VH Ra
C0156 24419dec 5F63hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0161 24414dec 5F5Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0162 24413dec 5F5Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0163 24412dec 5F5Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0164 24411dec 5F5Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0165 24410dec 5F5Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0168 24407dec 5F57hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0170 24405dec 5F55hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0171 24404dec 5F54hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0174 24401dec 5F51hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/W CINH
C0178 24397dec 5F4Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0179 24396dec 5F4Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0181 24394dec 5F4Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0182 24393dec 5F49hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0183 24392dec 5F48hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0184 24391dec 5F47hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0185 24390dec 5F46hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0189 24386dec 5F42hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0190 24385dec 5F41hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0191 24384dec 5F40hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0192 24383dec 5F3Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0193 24382dec 5F3Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0194 24381dec 5F3Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0195 24380dec 5F3Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0196 24379dec 5F3Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0200 24375dec 5F37hex E 1 VS 14 VS Ra
C0201 24374dec 5F36hex E 1 VS 17 VS Ra
C0202 24373dec 5F35hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0220 24355dec 5F23hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0221 24354dec 5F22hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0225 24350dec 5F1Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0226 24349dec 5F1Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0228 24347dec 5F1Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0229 24346dec 5F1Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-47

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0230 24345dec 5F19hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0231 24344dec 5F18hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0232 24343dec 5F17hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0233 24342dec 5F16hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0234 24341dec 5F15hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0235 24340dec 5F14hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0236 24339dec 5F13hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0238 24337dec 5F11hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0239 24336dec 5F10hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0240 24335dec 5F0Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0241 24334dec 5F0Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0242 24333dec 5F0Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0243 24332dec 5F0Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0244 24331dec 5F0Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0245 24330dec 5F0Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0250 24325dec 5F05hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0251 24324dec 5F04hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0252 24323dec 5F03hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0253 24322dec 5F02hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0254 24321dec 5F01hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0255 24320dec 5F00hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0265 24310dec 5EF6hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0304 24271dec 5ECFhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0305 24270dec 5ECEhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0306 24269dec 5ECDhex E 1 U16 2 VH Ra/Wa
C0307 24268dec 5ECChex E 1 U16 2 VH Ra/Wa
C0308 24267dec 5ECBhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0309 24266dec 5ECAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0350 24225dec 5EA1hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0351 24224dec 5EA0hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0352 24223dec 5E9Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0353 24222dec 5E9Ehex A 3 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0354 24221dec 5E9Dhex A 6 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0355 24220dec 5E9Chex A 6 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0356 24219dec 5E9Bhex A 4 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0357 24218dec 5E9Ahex A 3 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0358 24217dec 5E99hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0359 24216dec 5E98hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0360 24215dec 5E97hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0370 24205dec 5E8Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0372 24203dec 5E8Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0395 24180dec 5E74hex E 1 B32 4 VH Ra
C0396 24179dec 5E73hex E 1 B32 4 VH Ra
C0410 24165dec 5E65hex A 32 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0411 24164dec 5E64hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0412 24163dec 5E63hex A 9 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0413 24162dec 5E62hex A 2 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0414 24161dec 5E61hex A 2 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0415 24160dec 5E60hex A 3 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0416 24159dec 5E5Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0417 24158dec 5E5Ehex A 16 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0418 24157dec 5E5Dhex A 16 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0419 24156dec 5E5Chex A 3 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0420 24155dec 5E5Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0421 24154dec 5E5Ahex A 10 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0422 24153dec 5E59hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0423 24152dec 5E58hex A 3 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0424 24151dec 5E57hex A 2 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0425 24150dec 5E56hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0426 24149dec 5E55hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0427 24148dec 5E54hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0428 24147dec 5E53hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa

14-48 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DL DT Format LCM-R/W Condition
C0430 24145dec 5E51hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0431 24144dec 5E50hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0432 24143dec 5E4Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0435 24140dec 5E4Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0469 24106dec 5E2Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/W CINH
C0500 24075dec 5E0Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0501 24074dec 5E0Ahex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0502 24073dec 5E09hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0517 24058dec 5DFAhex A 10 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0518 24057dec 5DF9hex A 250 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0519 24056dec 5DF8hex A 250 FIX32 4 VD Ra
C0597 23978dec 5DAAhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0599 23976dec 5DA8hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0625 23950dec 5D8Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0626 23949dec 5D8Dhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0627 23948dec 5D8Chex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0628 23947dec 5D8Bhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C0988 23587dec 5C23hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C1500 23075dec 5A23hex E 1 VS 14 VS Ra
C1501 23074dec 5A22hex E 1 VS 17 VS Ra
C1504 23071dec 5A1Fhex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C1505 23070dec 5A1Ehex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/Wa
C1506 23069dec 5A1Dhex E 1 U16 2 VH Ra/Wa
C1507 23068dec 5A1Chex E 1 U16 2 VH Ra/Wa
C1550 23025dec 59F1hex E 1 FIX32 4 VD Ra/W CINH

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 14-49

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Appendix
Attribute table

14-50 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

15 Table of keywords
87 Hz technology, 7-4 Analog outputs, Configuration, 7-37
Analog process data output words, Configuration, 7-41
A Appendix, 14-1
AC-motor braking, 7-18 Application as directed, 1-2
Acceleration, 7-14 Application datum, Display, 7-52
Acceleration time Application examples, 13-1
Additional setpoint , 7-14, 14-24 Application I/O
Minimum frequency limitation, 7-12, 14-25
Acceleration times main setpoint, 7-14, 14-17
Process controller setpoint, 14-24
Additional JOG values, 7-26, 14-40
Acceleration times, 7-14 Automatic adjustment frequency input, 7-23
Accessories, 12-1 Automatic analog input adjustment, 14-39
Automatic frequency input adjustment , 14-39
Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-12
Calibration of process variable, 7-52, 14-40
Documentation, 12-1
Deceleration main setpoint, 7-14
External brake resistor, 11-3
Deceleration times main setpoint, 14-17
Overview, 12-1
Delay digital outputs, 7-46, 14-38
Type-specific - 230 V mains, 12-2
Main and additional setpoint, 14-23
Type-specific, 400 V mains, 12-3
Motor control, 14-7
Acknowledgement Offset analog outputs, 7-38, 14-38
negative, 6-16 Output signal range - analog outputs, 7-39, 14-38
positive, 6-16 Overview over signal processing, 14-5
Actual value, Digital supply, 7-23 Process controller and setpoint processing, 14-6
Setpoint selection range, 7-20, 14-15
Actual value selection, 7-19
Terminal assignment, 4-12
PID controller, 7-34
Applicationexamples
Adjustment
Dancer position control, 13-6
Bipolar setpoint, 7-21
Group drive, 13-12
Inverse setpoint, 7-21
Operation of medium-frequency motors, 13-5
Unipolar setpoint, 7-21
Power control, 13-16
AIF, 1-1 Pressure regulation, 13-1
Analog input 1 Sequential circuit, 13-13
Setpoint summation, 13-15
Gain, 7-20, 14-14
Speed control, 13-9
Offset, 7-20, 14-14
Analog input signals, 7-36 Approvals, 3-1
Asynchronous standard motors, 1-2
Analog inputs
Automatic adjustment, 14-39 Attribute table
Gain, 7-20, 14-31 Application I/A, 14-46
Offset, 7-20, 14-31 How to read the, 14-42
Standard I/A, 14-43
Analog output 1
Gain, 7-38, 14-17 Auto-TRIP reset, 8-6
Offset, 7-38, 14-17 Automation, 9-1
Analog output signals, 7-37 with INTERBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, LECOM-B (RS485), 9-18

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 15-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

B Changeover, Setpoints, 7-28

Character format, 6-9
Bar-graph display, 6-3
Check, before commissioning, 5-1
Baud rate
Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-10 Chopper frequency derating, 7-7
Function module system bus (CAN). Siehe Baud rate Chopper frequency of inverter, 7-7
Bipolar setpoint, Adjustment, 7-21 noise optimised, 7-7

Brake Code, 6-1

Control, 11-1 Code bank, 6-14
Relay output parameter setting, 11-2
Wiring, 11-2
Code table
Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-12
Brake rectifier, 11-1 Explanation of, 14-9
Brake resistor, 11-5 Code table for controllers, 14-9
Selection, 11-3
Commissioning, 5-1
Brake transistor, 11-4
Check before, 5-1
Threshold, 14-23
Function module system bus (CAN), 9-4
Brakes, 11-1 V/f characteristic control, 5-7
with standard I/O, 5-8
Braking, 7-14 without function module, 5-7
Braking operation, 11-1 Vector control, 5-9
with standard I/O, 5-10
Brake control, 11-1 without function module, 5-9
Brake rectifier, 11-1 Vector control optimisation, 5-11
Brake wiring, 11-2
Communication error, Reaction to, 14-19
Relay output parameter setting, 11-2
With external brake resistor, 11-3 Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-9
With three-phase AC brake motors, 11-1 Accessories, 6-12
without additional measures, 11-1 Baud rate, 6-9, 6-10
Bus function module, Terminal assignment, 4-14 Code table, 6-12
Communication medium, 6-9
Bus systems, Setpoint selection, 7-27
Communication monitoring, 6-14
Communication time, 6-9
C Communication times, 6-10
Parameter setting, 6-12
Cable cross-sections Precut PC system cable, 6-11
Operation at rated power, 230 V, 3-4 Shorten response time, 6-14
Operation with increased rated power Technicaldata, 6-9
230 V, 3-5
400 V/500 V, 3-9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination, 6-16
Operation with rated power, 400 V/500 V, 3-7 Wiring to the host, 6-11

Cable specifications, 4-6 Communication monitoring, Function module LECOM-A

(RS485), 6-14
Calibration, Application datum, 7-52
Communication profile DS 301, 9-9
Calling up a protected function, 6-7
Communication times
CAN bus, FIF communciation monitoring, 14-19
Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-10
CAN bus identifier, 14-27 Function module system bus (CAN), 9-2
CAN bus node address, 14-27 Compensation equipment, Interactions with , 4-5

15-2 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

Configuration Controller protection, 2-3

Acceleration and deceleration times, 7-14
Current limitation controller, 7-35
Actual value selection, 7-19
Analog input signals, 7-36 Current limits, 7-13
Analog output signals, 7-37 Current reduction
Analog outputs, 7-37 Operation with increased rated power, 400 V/500 V, 3-9
Analog process data output words, 7-41
Operation with rated power, 400 V/500 V, 3-7
Change of direction of rotation, 7-16
Chopper frequency of inverter, 7-7 Cyclic mains switching, 5-7, 5-9
Code table, 14-9
Control mode, 7-2
D
Controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH), 7-11
Current limitation controller, 7-35 Dancer position control, 13-6
Current limits, 7-13
DC group drives, 3-1
DC brake (DCB), 7-17
Digital input signals, 7-43 DC-bus connection, 10-1
Digital output signalsn, 7-45 Several drives, 10-1
Digital outputs, 7-45
DC-injection brake, 7-17
Display functions, 7-51
Function library, 7-1 Dead band
Function module system bus (CAN), 9-7 Settings with auto-DCB, 7-18
Manual / remote operation, 7-28 With analog setpoint selection, 7-20
Maximum field frequency, 7-12
Debouncing
Minimum field frequency, 7-12
Digital output signal ”Torque threshold reached”, 14-26
Monitoring functions, 7-49
Digital output signal PCTRL1-LIM, 14-24
Motor data detection, 7-29
Digital output signal PCTRL1-SET=ACT, 14-25
Oscillation damping, 7-7
Digital outputs, 7-46, 14-38
Parameter set changeover, 7-55
Process data output words, 7-48 Deceleration, 7-14
Quick stop (QSP), 7-16
Deceleration time
Relay output, 7-45
Additional setpoint, 7-14, 14-24
Setpoint selection, 7-19
Process controller setpoint, 14-24
Setpoint source selection, 7-19
Slip compensation, 7-6 Deceleration times, 7-14
Speed limit values, 7-12 Definitions, Terms, 1-1
Start conditions/flying-restart circuit, 7-9
Thermal motor monitoring, 7-49 Degree of pollution, 3-1
TRIP set, 7-50 Delay digital outputs, Application I/O, 7-46, 14-38
V/f rated frequency, 7-4
Vmin boost, 7-5
Derating, 7-7, 7-13

Conformity, 3-1 Design, mechanical, 4-1

Control connection, 4-9 Diagnostics, 7-53, 14-23

Terminal assignment - application I/O, 4-12 Digital input signals, 7-43
Terminal assignment - bus function module, 4-14
Terminal assignment - standard I/O, 4-10
Digital inputs, Level inversion, 7-44, 14-19, 14-30

Control mode, 7-2, 14-14 Digital output signals, 7-45

Select, 7-2 Digital outputs
Selection, 5-5 Configuration, 7-45
Control word, 14-20 Level inversion, 7-46, 14-33

Controlled deceleration after mains failure, 7-10 Dimensions, 4-2

Controller Direction of rotation
Application as directed, 1-2 Failsafe change, 7-16
Labelling, 1-2 Not failsafe change, 7-16

Controller inhibit, Operating behaviour, 7-11 Dismounting, Function module, 4-9

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 15-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

Display Frequency, Skipping, 7-8

Application datum, 7-52 Frequency input
Bar-graph, 6-3 Automatic adjustment, 7-23, 14-39
Keypad, 6-3 Digital, 7-23
Operating status, 8-1 Frequency precontrol, 7-33
Software version, 7-53, 14-16
Frequency setpoint reached, Switching window, 14-23
Status, 6-3
Type, 7-53, 14-16 Function keys, Keypad, 6-3

Display functions, 7-51 Function library, 7-1

Possible values, 7-51 Function module
Mounting/dismounting, 4-9
Display of operating data, 7-51
Response in the event of communication errors, 14-19
Display values, 7-51 Function module system bus (CAN), 9-1
Cablibration, 7-52 Baud rate, 9-1
Siehe auch Baud rate
Documentation, 12-1
Commissioning, 9-4
Dry running protection, 7-12, 13-1 Communication medium, 9-1
Communication profile DS301 (CANopen), 9-9
Communication phases, 9-10
E Controller addressing, 9-9
Cyclic process data objects, 9-15
Earth fault, Detection, 7-50 Data description, 9-9
Event-controlled process data objects, 9-17
Earth fault detection, 7-50 Identifier, 9-9
Index LOW/HIGH byte, 9-12
ELCB, 4-5 Nutzdaten, 9-9
Parameter structure, 9-11
Operation with, 4-5
Process data structure, 9-15
ELCBs, 4-5 Communication times, 9-2
Operation with, 4-5 Configuration, 9-7
Description, 9-1
Electrical installation , 4-3
General addressing, 9-7
According to EMC, 4-7 Installation, 9-2
Control connection, 4-9 Monitoring times, 9-8
Function module system bus (CAN), 9-2 Parameter addressing, 9-6
Important notes, 4-3 Parameter channels, 9-5
Power connections, 4-9 Parameter setting, 9-5
Process data channels, 9-6
EMC, 3-2
Processing times, 9-2
Emergency off, Controller inhibit, 7-11 Read parameter (example), 9-14
Reset node, 9-8
EN 55011, 4-8
Selection of a master, 9-7
EN 61000-3-2, 4-4 Selective addressing, 9-7
Technicaldata, 9-1
Error analysis, 8-1
Telegram run times, 9-2
Error message Terminal assignment, 9-2
External, 7-50 Time settings, 9-8
Reset, 8-6 Wiring, 9-3
Wiring information, 9-3
Error messages, 8-3 Wiring to the host, Structure in principle, 9-3
Write parameter (example), 9-13
F Functions, Keypad, 6-3
Fuses
Fault elimination, 8-1
Operation at rated power
Field frequency 230 V, 3-4
230 V (UL), 3-4, 3-5
minimum, 7-12
Operation with increased rated power
maximum, 7-12 230 V, 3-5
400 V/500 V, 3-9
FIF, 1-1
400 V/500V (UL), 3-9
Flying-restart circuit, 2-3, 7-9 Operation with rated power
400 V/500 V, 3-7
Free space, 3-1 400 V/500V (UL), 3-7

15-4 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

G K
Gain Keypad, 6-2
Analog input 1, 7-20, 14-14 Activation of password protection, 6-7
Analog inputs, 7-20, 14-31 Bar-graph display, 6-3
Analog output 1, 7-38, 14-17 Calling up a protected function, 6-7
Imax controller, 7-35, 14-16 Change parameter set, 6-5
Change/store parameters, 6-5
General data, 3-1 Continuous deactivation of password protection, 6-8
Group drive, 13-12 Displays and functions, 6-3
Function keys, 6-3
Installation, 6-2
H Menu structure, 6-4
Remote parameter setting, 6-6
Hide time, Process controller, 14-24 Setpoint selection, 7-27
History buffer, 8-1 Status display, 6-3
Assembly, 8-1 Technicaldata, 6-2
User menu, 6-6
Humidity class, 3-1

L
I Labelling, Controller, 1-2
I2xt monitoring, 7-49 LECAM format, 6-12
Imax controller LECOM baud rate, 14-19
Gain, 7-35, 14-16 LECOM code bank. Siehe Code bank
Integral action time, 7-35, 14-16
LECOM-B, Operating status, 6-13
Input signals
LED display, 8-1
Analog, Configuration, 7-36
Digital, Configuration, 7-43 LEDs, 8-1

Inputs Legal regulations, 1-2

Digital, Response times, 7-43 Level inversion
PTC, 7-50 Digital inputs, 7-44, 14-19, 14-30
Installation Digital outputs, 7-46, 14-33

electrical, 4-3 Liability, 1-2

Function module system bus (CAN), 9-2 Limit value, 7-12
Keypad, 6-2 Setting, 7-12
mechanical, 4-1
Wiring via system bus, 9-3
M
Installation according to EMC requirements, 4-7
Main and additional setpoint, Application I/O, 14-23
Installation height, 3-1
Mains conditions, 4-4
Insulation of circuits, 3-2
Mains switching, Cyclic, 5-7, 5-9
Insulation strength, 3-2
Mains types, 4-4
Integral action time, Imax controller, 7-35, 14-16 Mains-voltage compensation, 7-4
Interactions with compensation equipment, 4-5 Maloperation of the drive, 8-2
Inverse setpoint, Adjustment, 7-21 Manual / remote operation, 7-28
Manufacturer, 1-2
J Max. limit process controller output, 14-24

JOG frequencies, 7-26 Maximum motor cable length, 4-6

Additional, 7-26, 14-40 Mechanical design, 4-1
Jumper, Analog signal selection, 7-20 Mechanical installation, 4-1

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 15-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

Menu O
”ALL”, 6-4
Offset
”User”, 6-4 Analog input 1, 7-20, 14-14
Keypad structure, 6-4 Analog inputs, 7-20, 14-31
Analog output 1, 7-38, 14-17
Analog outputs application I/O, 7-38, 14-38
Min. limit process controller output, 14-24
Inverse characteristic process controller, 14-24

Minimum frequency limitation, Acceleration time, 7-12, Operating behaviour, Optimise, 7-2
14-25 Operating conditions, 3-1
Operating status
Monitoring CAN communication on FIF, 14-19
Display, 8-1
LECOM-B, 6-13
Monitoring functions, 7-49
Operating time, 7-53, 14-23

motec, Description, 1-1 Operation, noise optimised, 7-7

operation
Motor at a public mains, 4-4
ELCBs, 4-5
Phase failure, 14-40
Operation of medium-frequency motors, 13-5
Thermal monitoring
sensorless, 7-49 Oscillation damping, 7-7
With PTC resistor, 7-50
Reduction of speed oscillations, 7-7
Output sginal analog outputs, Field, 7-39, 14-38
Motor cable length, Maximum permissible, 4-6
Output signals
Motor control Analog, Configuration, 7-37
Digital, Configuration, 7-45
Application I/O, 14-7
Outputs
Standard I/O, 14-4 Analog, 7-37
Digital, 7-45
Motor data detection, 7-29
Overpeeds, 2-3

Motor monitoring, 7-49 Overview over signal processing

Application I/O, 14-5
Standard I/O, 14-2
Motor potentiometer, 7-25

Motor protection, 4-3 P

Packaging, 3-1
Mounting, Function module, 4-9
Parameter
Change/store using LECOM-A (RS232), 6-12
Mounting positions, 3-1
Change/store with keypad, 6-5
Non-volatile saving, 7-54, 14-10
Multi-motor drive, 13-12
Parameter addressing, Function module system bus (CAN),
9-6
Parameter channels, Function module system bus (CAN),
9-5
N Parameter set
Change with keypad, 6-5
Noise emission, 3-2 Transfer, 7-54
Parameter set changeover
Noise immunity, 3-2 AC-motor braking, 7-18
Controlled deceleration after mains failure, 7-10
Noise optimised operation, 7-7 Parameter set transfer, 7-54, 14-10

15-6 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

Parameter sets Process controller , Stop, 7-34

changeover, 7-55
Process controller and setpoint processing
Management, 7-54
Application I/O, 14-6
Parameter setting, 6-1 Standard I/O, 14-3
Basics, 6-1
Process controller setpoint
Code, 6-1
Acceleration time, 14-24
Function module system bus (CAN), 9-5
Deceleration time, 14-24
Using the communication module LECOM A (RS232), 6-9
with bus system, 6-1 Process data channels, Function module system bus (CAN),
with keypad, 6-2 9-6
with keypad or PC, 6-1 Process data output words, Free configuration, 7-48
Password Process variable, Calibration of application I/O, 7-52, 14-40
Delete, 6-8
entry, 6-7
Processing times, Function module system bus (CAN), 9-2

Password protection, 6-7, 14-16 Protection measures, 3-2

activate, 6-7 Protection of persons, 2-3, 4-3
Calling up a protected function, 6-7 with ELCBs, 4-5
Continuous deactivation, 6-8
PTC motor monitoring, 7-50
PID controller, 7-31
Public mains, EN 61000-3-2, 4-4
Actual value selection, 7-34
Integral component, Switch-off, 7-34
Setpoint precontrol, 7-33 Q
Setpoint selection, 7-33
Setting, 7-31 Quick stop, 7-16
PM synchronous motors, 1-2
Power connections, 4-9 R
Power control, 13-16 Radio interference suppression, 4-8
Power-on time, 7-53, 14-23 Ratings
Pressure regulation, Dry running protection, 13-1 Brake resistors, 11-5
Integrated brake transistor, 11-4
Process controller
Rated data 230 V
”Debouncing” of digital output signal PCTRL1-LIM, 14-24 Operation at rated power, 3-4
”Debouncing” of digital output signal PCTRL1-SET=ACT , 14-25 Operation with increased rated power, 3-5
Activation of inverse control, 14-25 Rated data 400/500 V
Current reduction, 3-7, 3-9
Actual root function value, 14-25
Operation with increased rated power, 3-8
Delay PCTRL1-LIM=HIGH, 14-24 Operation with rated power, 3-6
Delay PCTRL1-SET=ACT, 14-25
Relay output, Configuration, 7-45
Difference threshold PCTRL1-SET=ACT, 14-25
Hide time, 14-24 Reluctance motors, 1-2
hiding/unhiding, 14-25 Remote parameter setting, with keypad, 6-6
Max. limit output, 14-24
Min. limit output, 14-24 Reset, Error message, 8-6
Offset inverse characteristic, 14-24 Residual hazards, 2-3
Output inversion, 14-25
Response times of digital inputs, 7-43
Switch-off, 7-34
Unhide time, 14-24 Running optimisation, 7-6

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 15-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

S Skip frequency, 7-8

Slip compensation, 7-6
S-ramps, Smooth acceleration/deceleration, 7-14
Smooth acceleration/deceleration, 7-14
Safety information, 2-1
Layout, 2-3 Software version, 7-53, 14-16
Other notes, 2-3
Warning of damage to material, 2-3 Special motors, Operation of, 7-7
Warning of danger to persons, 2-3
Speed control, 13-9
Selection, Control mode, 5-5
Speed oscillations, 7-7
Selection Setpoint selection, 14-19
Standard I/O
Sensor compensation
Motor control, 14-4
Acceleration time, 14-23
Deceleration time, 14-23 Overview over signal processing, 14-2
Max. activation threshold, 14-24 Process controller and setpoint processing, 14-3
Min. activation threshold, 14-24 Setpoint selection range, 7-20, 14-14
Output signal, 14-23 Terminal assignment, 4-10
Reset, 14-23 Start options, 7-9
Sequential circuit, 13-13 Status word, 14-22
Setpoint changeover, 7-28
Stopping, 7-14
Setpoint selection, 7-19
Switching window, Frequency setpoint reached, 14-23
Bipolar, 7-21
Field, 7-20, 14-14 System bus, Remote parameter setting using the keypad,
Inverse, 7-21 6-6
Normalisation, 14-21
PID controller, 7-33
Selection, 14-19
T
unipolar, 7-21 Technical data, 3-1
via bus systems, 7-27
via JOG frequencies, 7-26 Technicaldata
via motor potentiometer, 7-25 Communication module LECOM-A (RS3232), 6-9
with keypad, 7-27 Function module system bus (CAN), 9-1
Setpoint selection range General data/application conditions, 3-1

Application I/O, 7-20, 14-15 Keypad, 6-2

Standard I/O, 7-20, 14-14 Rated data 230 V
Operation at rated power, 3-4
Setpoint source, Selection, 7-19 Operation with increased rated power, 3-5
Rated data 400/500 V
Setpoint source selection, 7-19 Operation with increased rated power, 3-8
Setpoint summation, 13-15 Operation with rated power, 3-6

Setting range, 7-12, 14-13 Telegram run times, Function module system bus (CAN),
9-2
Shorten response time, Function module LECOM-B (RS485),
6-14 Temperature range, 3-1

Signal flow charts, 14-1 Terminal assignment

Explanations, 14-1 Application I/O, 4-12
Motor control Bus function module, 4-14
Application I/O, 14-7 Standard I/O, 4-10
Standard I/O, 14-4
Overview over signal processing Terms
Application I/O, 14-5 Controller, 1-1
Standard I/O, 14-2
Definitions, 1-1
Process controller and setpoint processing
Application I/O, 14-6 Drive, 1-1
Standard I/O, 14-3 motec, 1-1
Signal selection, Analog, 7-20 Thermal monitoring, Motor
Jumper position, 7-20 Sensorless, 7-49
Signal selection , Digital, 7-23 With PTC resistor, 7-50

15-8 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

Threshold U
Auto DCB, 7-17, 14-14
Brake transistor, 14-23
Unhide time, Process controller, 14-24
Qmin, 14-14 Unipolar setpoint, Adjustment, 7-21

Time, display of, 7-40 Use, as directed, 1-2

User menu, 6-6, 7-56, 14-40
Torque control, Sensorless with speed limitation, 7-3 Change entries, 6-6
Torque limitation, 13-16 User password, 14-16

Torque speed characteristic, 3-3

V
Torque thresholds
V/f characteristic, 7-4
Comparison value, 14-26
87 Hz technology, 7-4
Delay MSET1=MACT, 14-26
Delay MSET2=MACT, 14-26
V/f characteristic control
Commissioning, 5-7
Difference threshold for MSET1=MACT, 14-26
with Vmin boost, 7-2
Difference thresholds MSET2=MACT, 14-26
V/f rated frequency, 7-4
Threshold 1, 14-26
Threshold 2, 14-26 Vector control, 7-3
Commissioning, 5-9
TRIP, 8-6 Optimise, 5-11

TRIP set, 7-50 Vibration resistance, 3-1

Vmin setting, 7-5
Troubleshooting, 8-1
Error analysis with history buffer, 8-1
Error message reset, 8-6 W
Fault indications, 8-3 Warranty, 1-2
LED display, 8-1
Waste disposal, 1-2
Maloperation of the drive, 8-2
Wiring
TRIP, 8-6
Application I/O, 4-12
Troubleshooting and fault elimination, Communication Bus function module, 4-14
module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-16 Communication module LECOM-A (RS232), 6-11
Function module system bus (CAN), 9-3
Type, 7-53, 14-16 Standard I/O, 4-10
Type of protection, 3-2 Wiring information, Function module LECOM-B (RS485), 9-3

L EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 15-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords
abc

15-10 EDB82MV752 EN 4.0 L

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Inhaltsverzeichnis

Sicherheit .............................................................................................................. 3
Diese Bestimmungen dienen Ihrer Sicherheit .......................................................... 4
Warnung vor unbeabsichtigtem Anlaufen ................................................................ 4

Kurzanleitung ..................................................................................................... 6

Einleitung .............................................................................................................. 9
Erhältliche Literatur ................................................................................................. 10

Technische Daten .......................................................................................... 11

Allgemeine technische Daten ................................................................................ 11
Elektrische Daten ................................................................................................... 16
Sicherungen ........................................................................................................... 38
Maße, Dimensionen .............................................................................................. 40

Installation ........................................................................................................ 43
EMV-gemäße elektrische Installation ...................................................................... 54
Anwendung EMV-gemäßer Kabel ......................................................................... 56
Erdung umflochtener, abgeschirmter Steuerkabel ................................................ 57
Netzanschluß ........................................................................................................ 58
Sicherheitserdung ................................................................................................. 58
Zusätzlicher Schutz (RCD) .................................................................................... 58
Funkentstörschalter ............................................................................................... 60
Einbau der Motorkabel .......................................................................................... 63
Motoranschluß ...................................................................................................... 63
Installation des Bremskabels ................................................................................. 64
Installation der Relaisklemmen .............................................................................. 64
Installation der externen 24-Volt-DC-Versorgung .................................................. 64
Installation der Zwischenkreiskopplung ................................................................. 65
Installation des Bremswiderstands-Temperaturschalters ....................................... 65
Busanschluß ......................................................................................................... 65
Installation der Steuerkabel ................................................................................... 66

Hinweise zum Betrieb des VLT-Frequenzumrichters .................. 68

Hinweise zum Bedienfeld ...................................................................................... 68
Das Display ........................................................................................................... 68
LEDs ..................................................................................................................... 69
Bedientasten ......................................................................................................... 69
Schnellkonfiguration mit Hilfe des Schnellmenüs .................................................. 72
Parameterwahl ...................................................................................................... 73
Menümodus .......................................................................................................... 73
Manuelle Initialisierung .......................................................................................... 75

Anwendung Konfiguration ........................................................................ 77

Einstellen der Parameter ....................................................................................... 77

Sonderfunktionen .......................................................................................... 83
Wechsel zwischen Ort-Betrieb und Fernbedienung .............................................. 83

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 1

 VLT® Serie 5000

Steuerung mit Bremsfunktion ................................................................................ 84

Verarbeitung von Einzelsollwerten ......................................................................... 86
Verarbeitung von Multisollwerten .......................................................................... 88
Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA ................................................................... 90
Steuerung der mechanischen Bremse .................................................................. 94
PID für die Prozeßregelung ................................................................................... 97
PID für die Drehzahlregelung ................................................................................ 98
Schnellentladung (Quick discharge) ...................................................................... 99
Motorfangschaltung ............................................................................................ 101
Normale/Hohe Übermomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung ........................... 103
Programmieren von Momentgrenze und Stopp .................................................. 103

Programmierung .......................................................................................... 105

Betrieb und Display .............................................................................................. 105
Last und Motor .................................................................................................... 112
Sollwerte und Grenzwerte .................................................................................... 123
Ein- und Ausgänge .............................................................................................. 131
Sonderfunktionen ................................................................................................. 147
Serielle Kommunikation ........................................................................................ 161
Technische Funktionen ........................................................................................ 167

Sonstiges ......................................................................................................... 175

Maßnahmen zur Fehlerbeseitigung ....................................................................... 175
Zustandsmeldungen ........................................................................................... 176
Liste der Warn- und Alarmmeldungen ................................................................ 179
Warnungen ......................................................................................................... 180

2 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

175ZA438.13
VLT Serie 5000

Sicherheit
Produkthandbuch
Software-Version: 3.6x

Dieses Produkthandbuch ist auf die VLT Serie 5000

Frequenzumrichter mit Software-Versionsnummer 3.6x
anwendbar. Software-Versionsnummer: siehe Parameter
624. CE- und C-Häkchen- Kennzeichnungen gelten nicht für
die Geräte VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 3

 VLT® Serie 5000

Der Frequenzumrichter steht bei Netz-

anschluß unter lebensgefährlicher 6. Die Stecker für die Motor- und Netzversorgung
Spannung. Durch unsachgemäße Instal- dürfen nicht entfernt werden, wenn der
lation des Motors oder des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Frequenzumrichter an die Netzversorgung
können ein Ausfall des Gerätes, schwere Personen- angeschlossen ist. Vergewissern Sie sich,
schäden oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen verursacht daß die Netzversorgung unterbrochen und die
werden. Befolgen Sie daher stets die Anweisungen erforderliche Zeit verstrichen ist, bevor Sie die
in diesem Handbuch sowie die jeweils gültigen Motor- und Netzstecker entfernen.
nationalen bzw. internationalen Vorschriften 7. Beachten Sie bitte, daß der -Frequenzumrichter
und Sicherheitsbestim mungen. außer den Spannungseingängen L1, L2 und
L3 noch weitere Spannungseingänge wie
■ Diese Bestimmungen dienen Ihrer Sicherheit DC-Zwischenkreiskopplung bzw. externe
1. Bei Reparaturen muß die Stromversorgung 24 V-DC-Versorgung haben kann, wenn
des Frequenzumrichters abgeschaltet werden. diese installiert sind. Kontrollieren Sie,
Vergewissern Sie sich, daß die Netzversorgung daß vor Beginn der Reparaturarbeiten alle
unterbrochen und die erforderliche Zeit verstrichen Spannungseingänge abgeschaltet sind und die
ist, bevor Sie die Motor- und Netzstecker entfernen. erforderliche Zeit verstrichen ist.
2. Die Taste [STOP/RESET] auf dem Bedienfeld
des Frequenzumrichters unterbricht nicht ■ Warnung vor unbeabsichtigtem Anlaufen
das Versorgungsnetz und darf deshalb nicht 1. Der Motor kann mit einem digitalen Befehl, einem
als Notschalter bzw. Reparaturschalter Bus-Befehl, einem Sollwert oder "Ort-Stop"
verwendet werden. angehalten werden, obwohl der Frequenzumrichter
3. Es ist dafür Sorge zu tragen, daß gemäß weiter unter Netzspannung steht. Ist ein
den örtlichen und nationalen Vorschriften eine unbeabsichtigtes Anlaufen des Motors ge-mäß
ordnungsgemäße Erdung des Gerätes erfolgt, der den Bestimmungen zur Personensicherheit
Benutzer gegen Leitungsspannung geschützt und jedoch unzulässig, so sind die oben genannten
der Motor gegen Überlastung abgesichert ist. Stoppfunktionen nicht ausreichend.
4. Der Ableitstrom gegen Erde ist höher als 3,5 mA. 2. Während der Programmierung des
5. Ein Überlastungsschutz des Motors ist in VLT-Frequenzumrichters kann der Motor
der Werkseinstellung nicht enthalten. Wenn ohne Vorwarnung anlaufen. Daher immer die
diese Funktion gewünscht wird, Parameter Stopp-Taste [STOP/RESET] betätigen, bevor
128 auf den Datenwert ETR Abschaltung oder Datenwerte geändert werden.
Datenwert ETR Warnung einstellen. 3. Ist der Motor abgeschaltet, so kann er
Achtung: Diese Funktion wird bei 1,16 x automatisch wieder anlaufen, sofern die
Motor-nennstrom und Motornennfrequenz Elektronik des Frequenzumrichters defekt ist
initialisiert. Für den nordamerikanischen oder falls eine kurzfristige Überlastung oder ein
Markt: Die ETR-Funktionen beinhalten Fehler in der Versorgungsspannung bzw. am
Motorüberlastungsschutz der Klasse 20 Motoranschluß beseitigt wurde.
gemäß NEC.

4 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

175ZA439.12
Warnung:
Das Berühren spannungsführender Teile - auch nach der Trennung vom
Netz - ist lebensgefährlich.
Achten Sie außerdem darauf, daß andere Spannungseingänge, wie z.B.
24 V DC, Zwischenkreiskoppelung (Zusammenschalten eines DC-

Sicherheit
Zwischenkreises) sowie der Motoranschluß beim kinetischen Speicher
ausgeschaltet sind.
Bei VLT 5001 - 5006, 200-240 V :mindestens 4 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5001 - 5006, 380-500 V : mindestens 4 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5008 - 5052 , 200-240 V: mindestens 15 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5008 - 5500 , 380-500 V: mindestens 15 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5001 - 5005, 550-600 V : mindestens 4 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5006 - 5022, 550-600 V : mindestens 15 Minuten warten
Bei VLT 5027 - 5250, 550-600 V : mindestens 30 Minuten warten

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 5

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kurzanleitung

■ Einführung in die Kurzanleitung

Diese Kurzanleitung weist Ihnen den Weg
zur ordnungsgemäßen EMV-Installation des
Frequenzumrichters über den Anschluss
der Stromversorgung, des Motors und der
Steuerkabel (Abb. 1). Der Motor wird über
den Schalter gestartet/gestoppt.
Beim VLT 5075 - 5500 380 - 500 V, VLT 5032
- 5052 200 - 240 V AC and VLT 5075 - 5250
550 - 600 V siehe Betriebsanleitung für die
mechanische und elektrische Installation.
Abb. 1

■ 1. Mechanische Installation

Frequenzumrichter VLT 5000 können seitlich nebeneinander installiert werden. Die erforderliche Kühlung
verlagt einen freien Luftdurchlass von 10 cm über und unter dem Frequenzumrichter(5016-5062 380-500 V,
5008-5027 200-240 V und 5016-5062 550-600 V müssen 20 cm haben).
Alle Bohrungen müssen unter Verwendung der in der Tabelle angegeben Maße angebracht werden.
Achten Sie bitte auf die unterschiedlichen Gerätespannungen. Bringen Sie den Frequenzumrichter an
der Wand an. Ziehen Sie alle vier Schrauben fest.
Alle nachstehenden Angaben in mm.

VLT-Typ A B C a b
Buchformat IP 20, 200–240 V, (Abb. 2)
5001 - 5003 395 90 260 384 70
5004 - 5006 395 130 260 384 70
Buchformat IP 20, 380–500 V (Abb. 2)
5001 - 5005 395 90 260 384 70
5006 - 5011 395 130 260 384 70
Kompaktformat IP 54, 200–240 V
(Abb. 3)
5001 - 5003 460 282 195 260 258
5004 - 5006 530 282 195 330 258
5008 - 5011 810 350 280 560 326 Abb. 2
5016 - 5027 940 400 280 690 375
Kompaktformat IP 54, 380–500 V
(Abb. 3)
5001 - 5005 460 282 195 260 258
5006 - 5011 530 282 195 330 258
5016 - 5027 810 350 280 560 326
5032 - 5052 940 400 280 690 375
Kompaktformat IP 20, 200–240 V
(Abb. 4)
5001 - 5003 395 220 160 384 200 Abb. 3
5004 - 5006 395 220 200 384 200
5008 560 242 260 540 200
5011 - 5016 700 242 260 680 200
5022 - 5027 800 308 296 780 270
Kompaktformat IP 20, 380–500 V
(Abb. 4)
5001 - 5005 395 220 160 384 200
5006 - 5011 395 220 200 384 200
5016 - 5022 560 242 260 540 200
5027 - 5032 700 242 260 680 200
5042 - 5052 800 308 296 780 270 Abb. 4

6 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ 2. Elektrische Installation, Stromanschluss

ACHTUNG! Bei den Geräten VLT 5001 - 5006, 200 - 240 V, VLT 5001 - 5011, 380 - 500 V und VLT 5001
- 5011, 550 - 600 V sind die Klemmen abnehmbar.
Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an die Netzklemmen L1, L2, L3 des Frequenzumrichters und an den
Erdanschluss an (Abb. 5-9). Für Buchformat-Geräte ist eine Kabelentlastung an der Wand montiert. Bauen
Sie das abgeschirmte Motorkabel an die Motorklemmen U, V, W und PE des Frequenzumrichters. Stellen
Sie sicher, dass die Abschirmung elektrisch an den Antrieb angeschlossen ist.

Kurzanleitung
Abb. 5 Abb. 6 Abb. 7
Buchformat IP 20 Kompaktformat IP 20 Kompaktformat IP 20
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5016 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5016 - 5062 550 - 600 V

Abb. 8 Abb. 9
Buchformat IP 20 Kompaktformat IP 20
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5016 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5016 - 5062 550 - 600 V

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 7

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ 3. Elektrische Installation, Steuerkabel

Vordere Abdeckung unter dem Bedienfeld mit
einem Schraubendreher abbauen.
HINWEIS: Die Klemmen sind abnehmbar.
Schließen Sie zwischen Klemme 12 und 27
(Abb. 10) eine Überbrückung an.

Befestigen Sie das abgeschirmte Kabel am externen

Start/Stopp der Steuerklemmen 12 und 18.
Abb. 10

■ 4. Programmierung Frequenzintervall und Rampenzeiten ein-

Der Frequenzumrichter wird über das stellen (Abb. 11)
Bedienfeld programmiert.
Minimaler Sollwert Parameter 204
Taste QUICK MENU drücken. Das "Quick Menu" Max. Sollwert Parameter 205
erscheint auf dem Bildschirm. Parameter werden Rampe auf Parameter 207
über die Pfeiltasten (nach oben und unten) Rampe ab Parameter 208
ausgewählt. Taste CHANGE DATA zum Ändern
eines Parameterwerts drücken. Datenwerte werden
Betriebsart einstellen, Parameter 002 für Ort-Betrieb.
mit Hilfe der Pfeiltasten (nach oben und unten)
geändert. Zum Bewegen des Cursors die Tasten
"links" oder "rechts" drücken. Drücken Sie OK und
speichern Sie die Parametereinstellung.

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Sprache im Parameter

001 ein. Sie haben sechs Möglichkeiten:
Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch, Dänisch,
Spanisch und Italienisch.

Motorparameter entsprechend des Motortyp-

schilds einstellen:

Motorleistung Parameter 102

Motorspannung Parameter 103
Motorfrequenz Parameter 104
Motorstrom Parameter 105 Abb. 11
Motornenndrehzahl Parameter 106

■ 5. Motorstart Eine weitere Bescheibung der AMA ist in Abschnitt

Taste START zum Starten des Motors drücken. Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA zu finden.
Motordrehzahl in Parameter 003 einstellen. Prüfen, ob
Drehrichtung der Anzeige auf dem Display entspricht. Taste START zum Starten der automatischen
Die Drehrichtung kann durch Vertauschen von zwei Motoranpassung (AMA) drücken.
Phasen des Motorkabels geändert werden. Zum Verlassen des Quick Menu Taste
Taste STOP zum Stoppen des Motors drücken. DISPLAY/STATUS drücken.

Vollstädige oder reduzierte automatische

Motoranpassung (AMA) in Parameter 107auswählen.

8 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Einleitung

Die vorliegende Betriebsanleitung ist als Werkzeug für denjenigen gedacht, der den VLT Serie 5000 zu
installieren, zu bedienen oder zu programmieren hat.
Technische Publikationen speziell für die Serie VLT 5000: eine Betriebsanleitung, ein Projektierungshandbuch
und eine Kurzanleitung.

Betriebsanleitung: Ein Handbuch mit Hinweisen für optimale Installation, Inbetriebnahme

und Wartung.

Projektierungshandbuch: Enthält alle nützlichen Informationen für die Projek- tierung und
vermittelt gute Einblicke in die Techno- logie, das Produktprogramm,
die technischen Daten usw.

Kurzanleitung: Eine Hilfe, die es den meisten Benutzern ermög- lichen wird, ihren VLT
der Serie 5000 zu installieren und in Betrieb zu nehmen.

Betriebsanleitung und Kurzanleitung werden mit dem Gerät mitgeliefert.

Beim Lesen der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung werden Sie auf verschiedene Symbole stoßen, bei denen
besondere Aufmerksamkeit geboten ist:
Es handelt sich um folgende Symbole:

Bezeichnet eine allgemeine Warnung

ACHTUNG!:

Einleitung
Bezeichnet einen wichtigen Hinweis

Bezeichnet eine Warnung vor

Hochspannung

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 9

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Erhältliche Literatur
Nachfolgend eine Übersicht der für den VLT Serie 5000
erhältlichen Literatur. Bitte beachten Sie, daß sich von
Land zu Land Abweichungen ergeben können.

Im Lieferumfang des Geräts sind enthalten:

Betriebsanleitung .............................................................................................................................. MG.51.AX.YY
VLT 5300 - 5500 Installationsanleitung ............................................................................................. MG.56.AX.YY

Kommunikation für VLT Serie 5000:

VLT 5000 Profibus-Handbuch .......................................................................................................... MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 DeviceNet Handbuch ....................................................................................................... MG.50.HX.YY
VLT 5000 LonWorks-Handbuch ...................................................................................................... MG.50.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Modbus-Handbuch ......................................................................................................... MG.10.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Interbus-Handbuch .......................................................................................................... MG.10.OX.YY

Anwendungsoptionen für VLT Serie 5000:

VLT 5000 SyncPos-Handbuch ......................................................................................................... MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 Positionierungsregler-Handbuch ...................................................................................... MG.50.PX.YY
VLT 5000 Synchronisationsregler-Handbuch .................................................................................... MG.10.NX.YY
Ring spinning option (nur in englischer Sprache) ................................................................................. MI.50.Zx.02
Wobble function option (nur in englischer Sprache) ............................................................................. MI.50.JX.02
Winder and Tension control option (Nur in englischer Sprache) ....................................................... MG.50.KX.02

Anleitungen für VLT Serie 5000:

Loadsharing (nur in englischer Sprache) ............................................................................................. MI.50.NX.02
VLT 5000 Bremswiderstände (nur in englischer, deutscher und dänischer Sprache) ......................... MI.50.DX.YY
Bremswiderstände für waagerechte Anwendungen (VLT 5001 - 5011) (Nur in englischer und deutscher
Sprache) ............................................................................................................................................. MI.50.SX.YY
LC-Filter .............................................................................................................................................. MI.56.DX.YY
Umrichter für Codierer-Eingänge (5V TTL bis 24 V DC) (Nur in kombinierter englischer/deutscher
Sprache) ............................................................................................................................................... MI.50.IX.51
Back Plate to VLT 5000 Series (Nur in englischer Sprache) .............................................................. MN.50.XX.02

Diverse Literatur für VLT Serie 5000:

Projektierungshandbuch ................................................................................................................... MG.51.BX.YY
Datenblatt ......................................................................................................................................... MD.50.AX.YY
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S5 system (Nur in englischer Sprache) .................. MC.50.CX.02
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S7 system (Nur in englischer Sprache) ................... MC.50.AX.02
Hoist and the VLT 5000 series (Nur in englischer Sprache) ............................................................... MN.50.RX.02

Miscellaneous (Nur in englischer Sprache):

Schutz gegen elektrische Gefahren .................................................................................................. MN.90.GX.02
Wahl der Vorsicherungen ................................................................................................................. MN.50.OX.02
VLT im IT-Netz ................................................................................................................................. MN.90.CX.02
Filtern harmonischer Ströme .............................................................................................................. MN.90.FX.02
Handhabung aggressiver Umgebungen ............................................................................................. MN.90.IX.02
CI-TITM Schütze - VLT® Frequenzumrichter ....................................................................................... MN.90.KX.02
VLT® Frequenzumrichter und UniOP-Bedientafeln ............................................................................ MN.90.HX.02

X = Nummer der Ausgabe

YY = Sprachversion

10 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Allgemeine technische Daten

Netzversorgung (L1, L2, L3):

Versorgungsspannung 200-240-V-Geräte ....................................................... 3 x 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%
Versorgungsspannung 380-500-V-Geräte ................................................ 3 x 380/400/415/440/460/500 V ±10%
Versorgungsspannung 550-600-V-Geräte ..................................................................... 3 x 550/575/600 V ±10%
Versorgungsfrequenz ................................................................................................................... 48/62 Hz +/- 1%
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V und 550-600 V
und VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V ............................................................... ±2,0% der Versorgungsnennspannung
VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V und 550-600 V
und VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V ............................................................... ±1,5% der Versorgungsnennspannung
VLT 5075-5500, 380-500 V und VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V .................. ±3,0% der Versorgungsnennspannung
VLT 5075-5250, 550-600 V ...................................................................................................................................
Leistungsfaktor (λ) ...................................................................................................................... 0,90 bei Nennlast
Grundschwingungs-Verschiebungsfaktor (cos ϕ) .................................................................... Nahe Einheit (>0,98)
Anzahl Schaltungen am Versorgungseingang L1, L2, L3 ......................................................... ca. 1 x pro 2 Min.
Max. Kurzschlußstrom .......................................................................................................................... 100.000 A
Siehe Abschnitt "Besondere Bedingungen" im Projektierungshandbuch.

VLT-Ausgangsdaten (U, V, W):

Ausgangsspannung ......................................................................................... 0-100% der Versorgungsspannung
Ausgangsfrequenz ........................................................................................................... 0 - 132 Hz, 0 - 1000 Hz
Motor-Nennspannung, 200-240-V-Geräte ....................................................................... 200/208/220/230/240 V
Motor-Nennspannung, 380-500-V-Geräte ......................................................... 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 V
Motor-Nennspannung, 550-600-V-Geräte ............................................................................................. 550/575 V
Motor-Nennfrequenz ................................................................................................................................ 50/60 Hz
Schalten am Ausgang .......................................................................................................................... unbegrenzt
Rampenzeiten .............................................................................................................................. 0,05 - 3600 sek.

Drehmomentkennlinien:
Startmoment, VLT 5001-5027, 200-240 V und VLT 5001-5062, 380-500 V ............................... 160% für 1 Min.
Startmoment, VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V und VLT 5075-5500, 380-500 V ............................... 150% für 1 Min.
Startmoment, VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V ................................................................................... 160% für 1 Min.
Startmoment ............................................................................................................................. 180% für 0,5 sek.
Beschleunigungsmoment ............................................................................................................................. 100%
Übermoment, VLT 5001-5027, 200-240 V und VLT 5001-5062, 380-500 V und VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 Technische Daten
V ................................................................................................................................................................... 160%
Übermoment, VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V und VLT 5075-5500, 380-500 V ............................................... 150%
Haltemoment bei 0 U/Min. (mit Istwertrückführung) ..................................................................................... 100%
Die Angaben bzgl. der Drehmomentkennlinien gelten, wenn der Frequenzumrichter mit hohem Übermoment
(160%) arbeitet. Bei normalem Übermoment (110%) sind die Werte niedriger.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 11

 VLT® Serie 5000

Steuerkarte, digitale Eingänge:

Anzahl programmierbarer digitaler Eingänge ........................................................................................................ 8
Klemmennummern ................................................................................................. 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33
Spannungsniveau ................................................................................................. 0-24 V DC (PNP positive Logik)
Spannungsniveau, logisch ’0’ .................................................................................................................. < 5 V DC
Spannungsniveau, logisch ’1’ ................................................................................................................. >10 V DC
Max. Spannung am Eingang .................................................................................................................... 28 V DC
Eingangswiderstand, Ri ................................................................................................................................. 2 k
Abfragezeit je Eingang .................................................................................................................................... 3 ms
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Alle digitalen Eingänge sind von der Versorgungsspannung (PELV)
galvanisch getrennt, ausgenommen VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V. Die digitalen Eingänge können außerdem
von den übrigen Klemmen der Steuerkarte getrennt werden, indem eine externe 24 -V-DC-Versorgung
angeschlossen und Schalter 4 geöffnet wird. Siehe unter "Installation der Steuerkabel".

Steuerkarte, Analogeingänge:
Anzahl programmierbarer analoger Spannungseingänge/Thermistoreingänge ...................................................... 2
Klemmennummern ...................................................................................................................................... 53, 54
Spannungsniveau ........................................................................................................... 0 - ±10 V DC (skalierbar)
Eingangswiderstand, Ri ............................................................................................................................... 10 k
Anzahl programmierbarer analoger Stromeingänge ............................................................................................ 1
Klemmennummer ............................................................................................................................................... 60
Strombereich .................................................................................................................. 0/4 - ±20 mA (skalierbar)
Eingangswiderstand, Ri ............................................................................................................................... 200
Auflösung .............................................................................................................................. 10 Bits + Vorzeichen
Genauigkeit am Eingang .................................................................................... max. Fehler 1% der Gesamtskala
Abfragezeit je Eingang .................................................................................................................................... 3 ms
Klemmennr. Erde ............................................................................................................................................... 55
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Alle Analogeingänge sind von der Versorgungsspannung (PELV), ausgenommen
VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V, sowie anderen Ein- und Ausgängen galvanisch getrennt.

Steuerkarte, Puls/Drehgeber-Eingang:
Anzahl programmierbarer Puls/Drehgeber-Eingänge ............................................................................................ 4
Klemmennummern .......................................................................................................................... 17, 29, 32, 33
Max. Frequenz an Klemme 17 ..................................................................................................................... 5 kHz
Max. Frequenz an Klemme 29, 32, 33 ...................................................................... 20 kHz (PNP open collector)
Max. Frequenz an Klemme 29, 32, 33 .................................................................................... 65 kHz (Gegentakt)
Spannungsniveau ................................................................................................. 0-24 V DC (PNP positive Logik)
Spannungsniveau, logisch ’0’ .................................................................................................................. < 5 V DC
Spannungsniveau, logisch ’1’ ................................................................................................................. >10 V DC
Max. Spannung am Eingang .................................................................................................................... 28 V DC
Eingangswiderstand, Ri ................................................................................................................................. 2 k
Abfragezeit je Eingang .................................................................................................................................... 3 ms
Auflösung .............................................................................................................................. 10 Bits + Vorzeichen
Genauigkeit (100-1 kHz), Klemme 17, 29, 33 ............................................... max. Fehler: 0,5% der Gesamtskala
Genauigkeit (1-5 kHz), Klemme 17 ................................................................ max. Fehler: 0,1% der Gesamtskala
Genauigkeit (1-65 kHz), Klemme 29, 33 ........................................................ max. Fehler: 0,1% der Gesamtskala
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Alle Puls/Drehgeber-Eingänge sind von der Versorgungsspannung (PELV)
galvanisch getrennt, ausgenommen VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V. Die Puls/Drehgeber-Eingänge können
außerdem von den übrigen Klemmen der Steuerkarte getrennt werden, indem eine externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung
angeschlossen und Schalter 4 geöffnet wird. Siehe Abschnitt "Kontrollkabel".

12 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Steuerkarte, Digital/Puls- und Analogausgänge:

Anzahl programmierbarer Digital- und Analogausgänge ....................................................................................... 2
Klemmennummern ...................................................................................................................................... 42, 45
Spannungsniveau am Digital/Puls-Ausgang ........................................................................................ 0 - 24 V DC
Min. Belastung gegen Erde (Klemme 39) am Digital-/Pulsausgang ............................................................. 600
Frequenzbereiche (Digitalausgang dient als Pulsausgang) ....................................................................... 0-32 kHz
Strombereich am Analogausgang ....................................................................................................... 0/4 - 20 mA
Max. Belastung gegen Erde (Klemme 39) am Analogausgang .................................................................... 500
Genauigkeit am Analogausgang ..................................................................... max. Fehler 1,5% der Gesamtskala
Auflösung am Analogausgang ...................................................................................................................... 8 Bits
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Alle Digital- und Analogausgänge sind von der Versorgungsspannung (PELV)
sowie anderen Ein- und Ausgängen galvanisch getrennt, ausgenommen VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V.

Steuerkarte, 24-V-DC-Versorgung:
Klemmennummern ...................................................................................................................................... 12, 13
Max. Belastung (kurzschlußgeschützt) ...................................................................................................... 200 mA
Klemmennummern Erde .............................................................................................................................. 20, 39
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Die 24-V-DC-Versorgung ist von der Versorgungsspannung (PELV), ausgenommen
VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V, galvanisch getrennt, hat jedoch das gleiche Potential wie die Analogausgänge.

Steuerkarte, RS 485 serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle:

Klemmennummern .................................................................................................... 68 (TX+, RX+), 69 (TX-, RX-)
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Vollständige galvanische Isolierung.

Relaisausgänge:
Anzahl programmierbarer Relaisausgänge ............................................................................................................ 2
Klemmennummern, Steuerkarte ...................................................................................................... 4-5 (Schließer)
Max. Klemmenbelastung (AC) an 4-5, Steuerkarte ............................................................... 50 V AC, 1 A, 60 VA
Max. Klemmenbelastung (DC) an 4-5, Steuerkarte ................................................................ 75 V DC, 1 A, 30 W
Max. Klemmenbelastung (DC) an 4-5, Steuerkarte bei UL-/cUL-Anwendungen .... 30 V AC, 1 A / 42.5 V DC, 1A
Klemmennummern, Powerkarte .................................................................................. 1-3 (Öffner), 1-2 (Schließer)
Max. Klemmenbelastung (AC) an 1-3, 1-2, Powerkarte und Relaiskarte ............................. 240 V AC, 2 A, 60 VA
Max. Klemmenbelastung an 1-3, 1-2, Powerkarte und Relaiskarte .................................................. 50 V DC, 2 A
Min. Klemmenbelastung an 1-3, 1-2, Powerkarte und Relaiskarte .................. 24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 100 mA

Bremswiderstandsklemmen (nur SB- und EB-Geräte): Technische Daten

Klemmennummern ...................................................................................................................................... 81, 82

Externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung:
Klemmennummern ...................................................................................................................................... 35, 36
Spannungsbereich ......................................................................... 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V DC, 10 Sek. lang)
Max. Spannungsrippel ............................................................................................................................... 2 V DC
Leistungsaufnahme ........................................................................ 15-50 W (50 W beim Einschalten, 20 ms lang)
Min. Vorsicherung ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Amp
Sichere galvanische Trennung: Vollständige galvanische Trennung, sofern die externe
24-V-DC-Versorgung auch Typ PELV ist.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 13

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kabellängen und -querschnitte:

Max. Motorkabellänge, abgeschirmtes Kabel ............................................................................................. 150 m
Max. Motorkabellänge, nicht-abgeschirmtes Kabel .................................................................................... 300 m
Max. Motorkabellänge, abgeschirmtes Kabel VLT 5011, 380-500 V .......................................................... 100 m
Max. Bremskabellänge, abgeschirmtes Kabel .............................................................................................. 20 m
Max. Zwischenkreiskopplung Kabellänge, abgeschirmtes Kabel ...... 25 m vom Frequenzumrichter zur DC-Leiste
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung, siehe nächsten Abschnitt
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung .......................................................... 4.0 mm2/10 AWG
Max. Querschnitt für Steuerleitungen ........................................................................................ 1.5 mm2/16 AWG
Max. Querschnitt für serielle Kommunikation ........................................................................... 1.5 mm2/16 AWG

Genauigkeit der Displayanzeige (Parameter 009-012):

Motorstrom [6] 0-140 % Belastung ............................... max. Ungenauigkeit: ± 2,0 % des Ausgangsnennstroms
Drehmoment % [7], -100 140 % Belastung ......... max. Ungenauigkeit: Max. Fehler: ± 5% der Motornenngröße
Leistung [8], Leistung PS [9], 0-90 % Belastung .............. max. Ungenauigkeit: ± 5 % der Ausgangsnennleistung

Steuer- und Regelgenauigkeit:

Frequenzbereich ................................................................................................................................. 0 - 1000 Hz
Auflösung der Ausgangsfrequenz .......................................................................................................... ±0.003 Hz
Systemantwortzeit .......................................................................................................................................... 3 ms
Drehzahl Steuerbereich (ohne Istwertrückführung) ..................................................... 1:100 der Synchrondrehzahl
Drehzahl Steuerbereich (mit Istwertrückführung) ...................................................... 1:1000 der Synchrondrehzahl
Drehzahlgenauigkeit (ohne Istwertrückführung) ....................................... < 1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler ±7,5 U/Min.
>1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler 0,5% der Istdrehzahl
Drehzahlgenauigkeit (mit Istwertrückführung) .......................................... < 1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler ±1,5 U/Min.
>1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler 0,1% der Istdrehzahl
Drehmoment Steuergenauigkeit (ohne Istwertrückführung) ........................................................................... 0-150
U/Min.: max. Fehler ±20% des Nenndrehmoments
150-1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler ±10% des Nenndrehmoments
>1500 U/Min.: max. Fehler ±20% des Nenndrehmoments
Drehmoment Steuergenauigkeit (mit Drehzahlrückführung) ................... max. Fehler ±5% des Nenndrehmoments
Alle Angaben basieren auf einem vierpoligen Asynchronmotor.

14 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Umgebung:
Gehäuse ..................................................................................................................... IP 00, IP 20, Nema 1, IP 54
Schwingungstest .......... 0,7 g RMS 18-1000 Hz ungeordnet. 3 Richtungen 2 Stunden lang (IEC 68-2-34/35/36)
Max. relative Feuchtigkeit .................................................................... 93 % (IEC 68-2-3) bei Lagerung/Transport
Max. relative Feuchtigkeit ................................. 95 % nicht-kondensierend (IEC 721-3-3; Klasse 3K3) bei Betrieb
Aggressive Umgebung (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) ...................................................................... Unbeschichtet Klasse 3C2
Aggressive Umgebung (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) .......................................................................... Beschichtet Klasse 3C3
Umgebungstemperatur IP 20/Nema 1 (hohes Übermoment 160%) ........................................................................
Max. 45 C (24-Stunden Durchschnitt max. 40 C)
Umgebungstemperatur IP 20/Nema 1 (normales Übermoment 110%) ........................................................... Max.
40 C (24-Stunden Durchschnitt max. 35 C)
Umgebungstemperatur IP 54 (hohes Übermoment 160%) ... Max. 40 C (24-Stunden Durchschnitt max. 35 C)
Umgebungstemperatur IP 54 (normales Übermoment 110%) Max. 40 C (24-Stunden Durchschnitt max. 35 C)
Umgebungstemperatur IP 20/54 VLT 5011 500 V ............... Max. 40 C (24-Stunden Durchschnitt max. 35 C)
Leistungsreduzierung bei erhöhter Umgebungstemperatur, siehe Projektierungshandbuch
Min. Umgebungstemperatur bei Vollast ......................................................................................................... 0 C
Min. Umgebungstemperatur bei reduzierter Leistungsfähigkeit .................................................................. -10 C
Temperatur bei Lagerung/Transport ............................................................................................. -25 - +65/70 C
Max. Höhe ü. d. Meeresspiegel ............................................................................................................... 1000 m
Leistungsreduzierung bei erhöhtem Luftdruck, siehe Projektierungshandbuch
Angewandte EMV-Standards, Emission ................................. EN 50081-1/2, EN 61800-3, EN 55011, EN 55014
Angewandte EMV-Standards, Immunität ................... EN 50082-2, EN 61000-4-2, IEC 1000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5, ENV 50140, ENV 50141, VDE 0160/1990.12
Siehe Abschnitt "Besondere Bedingungen" im Projektierungshandbuch.
VLT 5001-5250, 550 - 600 V entsprechen nicht der EMV- oder der Niederspannungs-Richtlinie.

VLT Serie 5000, Schutzvorrichtungen:

• Ein elektronischer thermischer Motorschutz bewahrt den Motor vor Überlastung.
• Eine Temperaturüberwachung des Kühlkörpers sorgt dafür, daß der Frequenzumrichter abschaltet,
wenn die Temperatur 90 C erreicht (gilt für IP 00, IP 20 und Nema 1). Bei IP 54 wird
bei 80 C abgeschaltet. Ein Übertemperaturzustand kann erst quittiert werden, nachdem
die Kühlkörpertemperatur 60 C wieder unterschritten hat.
• Der Frequenzumrichter ist an den Motorklemmen U, V und W gegen Kurzschluß geschützt.
• Der Frequenzumrichter ist an den Motorklemmen U, V und W gegen Erdschluß geschützt.
• Eine Überwachung der Zwischenkreisspannung gewährleistet, daß der Frequenzumrichter bei
zu niedriger und zu hoher Zwischenkreisspannung abschaltet. Technische Daten
• Bei einer fehlenden Motorphase schaltet der Frequenzumrichter ab, siehe Parame-
ter 234 Motorphasenüberwachung.
• Bei Netzstörungen kann der Frequenzumrichter eine kontrollierte Rampenreduzierung vornehmen.
• Bei fehlender Netzphase schaltet der Frequenzumrichter ab, wenn der Motor belastet wird.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 15

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Daten

■ Buchformat und Kompakt: Netzspannung

3 x 200-240 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] 3.7 5.4 7.8 10.6 12.5 15.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] 5.9 8.6 12.5 17 20 24.3
Leistung (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 1.5 2.2 3.2 4.4 5.2 6.3
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [PS] 1 1.5 2 3 4 5
Wellenleistung
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskupplung [mm 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
2]/[AWG]2)

Eingangsnennstrom (200 V)IL,N [A] 3.4 4.8 7.1 9.5 11.5 14.5
Max. Kabel-
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
querschnitt [mm2]/[AWG] 2 )
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 16/10 16/10 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Wirkungsgrad3) 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Gewicht IP 20 EB
[kg] 7 7 7 9 9 9.5
Buchformat
Gewicht IP 20 EB
[kg] 8 8 8 10 10 10
Kompakt
Gewicht IP 54
[kg] 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
Kompakt
Verlustleistung bei
[W] 58 76 95 126 172 194
max. Last
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Gehäuse
IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.

16 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 200-240 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5008 5011 5016 5022 5027

Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] 32 46 61,2 73 88
IVLT, MAX (60
35,2 50,6 67,3 80,3 96,8
s) [A]
Leistung (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 13,3 19,1 25,4 30,3 36,6
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 7,5 11 15 18,5 22
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 10 15 20 25 30

Hohes Übermoment (160 %):

Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] 25 32 46 61,2 73
IVLT, MAX (60
40 51,2 73,6 97,9 116,8
s) [A]
Leistung (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 10 13 19 25 30
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 5,5 7,5 11 15 18,5
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 7,5 10 15 20 25
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung
IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
[mm2/AWG] 2)5)

Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse

10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6
und Zwischenkreiskopplung 4) [mm2/AWG]2)

Eingangsnennstrom (200 V) IL,N [A] 32 46 61 73 88

Max. Kabelquerschnitt, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
Netz [mm2]/[AWG]2)5) IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 50 60 80 125 125
Vorsicherung SMPS [-]/UL 6) [A] 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0
Wirkungsgrad3) 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 21 25 27 34 36
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 38 40 53 55 56
Verlustleistung bei max. Last
- hohes Übermoment [W]
340 426 626 833 994
(160 %)
- normales Übermoment [W]
426 545 783 1042 1243
(110 %)
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Schutzart Technische Daten
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der gemäß IP 20 an die Klemmen montiert
werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Aluminiumkabel mit Querschnitten über 35 mm2 müssen mit einem AI-Cu-Stecker angeschlossen
werden.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Ferras Shawmut Typ
Y85443, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 612Z1182 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 17

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 200-240V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5032 5042 5052

Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 115 143 170
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 127 158 187
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 104 130 154
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (231240 V) 115 143 170
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (200230 V) 41 52 61
SVLT,N [kVA] (231240 V) 41 52 61
Typische Wellenleistung (200-240 V) PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45
Typische Wellenleistung (200-240 V) PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60
Hohes Übermoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 88 115 143
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 132 173 215
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 80 104 130
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (231-240 V) 120 156 195
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (200-230 V) 32 41 52
SVLT,N [kVA] (231-240 V) 32 41 52
Typische Wellenleistung (200-240 V) PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37
Typische Wellenleistung (200-240 V) PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung (200-240) [mm2]5) 70 90 120
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung (200-240) [mm2]5) 95 95 120
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung (200-240) [AWG]2) 5) 1/0 3/0 4/0
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor,
250 300
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung (200-240) [AWG]2) 5) 3/0
mcm mcm
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5) 10/8 10/8 10/8

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.

18 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 200-240 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5032 5042 5052
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (230 V) 110% 101,3 126,6 149,9
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (230 V) 150% 77,9 101,3 126,6
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor
70 90 120
(200-240 V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor
95 95 120
(200-240 V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor
1/0 3/0 4/0
(200-240 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor
3/0 250 mcm 300 mcm
(200-240 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung4) 10/8 10/8 10/8
[mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz)[-]/UL 1) [A] 150 200 250
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen
15/15 15/15 15/15
(Softcharge-Kreislauf) [-]/UL 6) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen
(Softcharge-Widerstände) [-]/UL 7) 12/12 12/12 12/12
[A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL
5/5
8) [A]
Wirkungsgrad3) 0,96-0,97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 90 90 90
Gewicht Nema 1 (IP
[kg] 101 101 101
20) EB
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 104 104 104
Verlustleistung bei max. Last [W] 1089 1361 1613
Schutzart IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)/ IP 54 / Nema 1 mit Klemmen

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8. Technische Daten
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1147 verwendet werden.
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1192 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann KTK-5,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 19

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Buch- und Kompaktformat, Netzspannung

3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5001 5002 5003 5004

Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 2,2 2,8 4,1 5,6
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 3,5 4,5 6,5 9
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 1,9 2,6 3,4 4,8
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 3 4,2 5,5 7,7
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 1,7 2,1 3,1 4,3
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 1,6 2,3 2,9 4,2
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 1 1,5 2 3
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskupplung [mm2]/[AWG]2)

Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (380 V) 2,3 2,6 3,8 5,3

IL,N [A] (460 V) 1,9 2,5 3,4 4,8
Max. Kabelquerschnitt, Netz [mm2]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 16/6 16/6 16/10 16/10
Wirkungsgrad3) 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
Gewicht IP 20 EB Buchformat [kg] 7 7 7 7,5
Gewicht IP 20 EB Kompaktformat [kg] 8 8 8 8,5
Gewicht IP 20 Kompaktformat [kg] 11,5 11,5 11,5 12
Verlustleistung bei max. [W]
55 67 92 110
Last
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Schutzart
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.

20 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Buch- und Kompaktformat, Netzspannung

3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5005 5006 5008 5011

Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 7,2 10 13 16
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 11,5 16 20,8 25,6
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 6,3 8,2 11 14,5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 10,1 13,1 17,6 23,2
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 5,5 7,6 9,9 12,2
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 5,5 7,1 9,5 12,6
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 3,0 4,0 5,5 7,5
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7,5 10
Wellenleistung
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskupplung [mm2]/[AWG]2)

Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (380 V) 7 9,1 12,2 15,0

IL,N [A] (460 V) 6 8,3 10,6 14,0
Max. Kabelquerschnitt, Netz [mm2]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Wirkungsgrad3) 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
Gewicht IP 20 EB Buchformat [kg] 7,5 9,5 9,5 9,5
Gewicht IP 20 EB Kompaktformat [kg] 8,5 10,5 10,5 10,5
Gewicht IP 20 EB Kompaktformat [kg] 12 14 14 14
Verlustleistung bei [W]
139 198 250 295
max. Last
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Schutzart
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
Technische Daten
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 21

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5016 5022 5027
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 32 37,5 44
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 35,2 41,3 48,4
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 27,9 34 41,4
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 30,7 37,4 45,5
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 24,4 28,6 33,5
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 24,2 29,4 35,8
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 15 18,5 22
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 24 32 37,5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 38,4 51,2 60
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 21,7 27,9 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 34,7 44,6 54,4
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 18,3 24,4 28,6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 18,8 24,2 29,4
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18,5
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2]/[AWG]2) 4) IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2]/[AWG] 10/8 10/8 10/8
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (380 V) 32 37,5 44
IL,N [A] (460 V) 27,6 34 41
Max. Kabelquerschnitt, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
Netz [mm2]/[AWG] IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 63/40 63/50 63/60
Vorsicherung SMPS [-]/UL 5) [A] 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0 4,0/4,0
Wirkungsgrad 0,96 0,96 0,96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 21 22 27
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 41 41 42
Verlustleistung bei max. Last
- hohes Übermoment (160 %) [W] 419 559 655
- normales Übermoment (110 [W]
559 655 768
%)
IP 20/IP IP 20/IP IP 20/IP
Schutzart
54 54 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der gemäß IP 20 an die Klemmen montiert
werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Ferraz Shawmut FA
Y85443, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 612Z1182 verwendet werden.

22 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5032 5042 5052 5062
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 61 73 90 106
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 67,1 80,3 99 117
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 54 65 78 106
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 59,4 71,5 85,8 117
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 46,5 55,6 68,6 80,8
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 46,8 56,3 67,5 91,8
55
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45 75 @
500 V
75
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60 100 @
500 V
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 44 61 73 90
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 70,7 97,6 116,8 135
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 41,4 54 65 80
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 66,2 86 104 120
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 33,5 46,5 55,6 68,6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 35,9 46,8 56,3 69,3
45
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37 55 @
500 V
60
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50 75 @
500 V
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2]/[AWG]2)5) IP20 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor,
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2]/[AWG] 10/8 10/8 16/6 16/6
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (380 V) 60 72 89 104
IL,N [A] (460 V) 53 64 77 104
Max. Kabelquerschnitt IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Netz [mm2]/[AWG]2) 5) IP 20 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL 1) [A] 80/80 100/100 125/125 150/150
4,0/ 4,0/ 4,0/ 4,0/
Vorsicherung SMPS [-]/UL 6) [A]
4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0
Wirkungsgrad 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 28 41 42 43
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 54 56 56 60
Verlustleistung bei max. Last
Technische Daten
- hohes Übermoment (160 [W]
768 1065 1275 1571
%)
- normales Übermoment [W]
1065 1275 1571 1851
(110 %)
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP20/
Schutzart
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der gemäß IP 20 an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen
Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Aluminiumkabel mit Querschnitten über 35 mm2 müssen mit einem AI-Cu-Stecker angeschlossen werden.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Ferraz Shawmut FA Y85443, Danfoss-Bestellnummer
612Z1182 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 23

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5075 5100 5125

Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 147 177 212
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 162 195 233
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 130 160 190
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 143 176 209
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 102 123 147
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 113 139 165
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 110
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 90 110 132
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 125 150 200
Hohes Übermoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 106 147 177
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 159 221 266
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 106 130 160
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 159 195 240
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 73,0 102 123
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 92,0 113 139
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 55 75 90
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 75 100 125
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 110
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
95 120 2 x 70
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) [mm2] 5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
70 95 2 x 70
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) [mm2] 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
120 150 2 x 70
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) [mm 2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
90 120 2 x 70
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
3/0 4/0 2 x 1/0
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
2/0 3/0 2 x 1/0
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
250 mcm 300 mcm 2 x 2/0
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG] 2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
4/0 250 mcm 2 x 2/0
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und
10/8 10/8 10/8
Zwischenkreiskopplung 4) [mm2AWG]2) 5)

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.

24 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5075 5100 5125
Max. Eingangsstrom 110% IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 145 174 208
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 128 158 185
Max. Eingangsstrom 150% IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 103 145 174
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 103 128 158
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5) 95 120 2 x 70
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5) 70 95 2 x 70
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (380-440 V) [mm2]5) 120 150 2 x 70
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5) 90 120 2 x 70
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3/0 4/0 2 x 1/0
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 2/0 3/0 2 x 1/0
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 250 mcm 300 mcm 2 x 2/0
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 4/0 250 mcm 2 x 2/0
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung 4)
10/8 10/8 10/8
[mm2AWG]2) 5)
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz) [-]/UL 1) [A] 250/220 250/250 300/300
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Kreislauf) [-]/UL 6) [A] 15/15 15/15 30/30
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Widerstände) [-]/UL 7) [A] 12/12 12/12 12/12
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL 8) [A] 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0
Wirkungsgrad 0,96-0,97 0,96-0,97 0,96-0,97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 109 109 146
Gewicht Nema 1 (IP 20) EB [kg] 121 121 161
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 124 124 177
Verlustleistung bei max. Last [W] 1970 2380 2860
IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)/ IP 54 / Nema 1 mit
Schutzart
Klemmen

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die
nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1147
verwendet werden.
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD, Danfoss-Bestellnummer
176F1192 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann KTK-5, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437
verwendet werden.
Technische Daten

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 25

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5150 5200 5250
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 260 315 368
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 286 347 405
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 240 302 361
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 264 332 397
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 180 218 255
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 208 262 313
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 200 250 300
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 160 200 250
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 250 300 350
Hohes Übermoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 212 260 315
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 318 390 473
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 190 240 302
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 285 360 453
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 147 180 218
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 165 208 262
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 110 132 160
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 150 200 250
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 200 150 300
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) [mm2] 5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) [mm2] 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 150
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) [mm 2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 150
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 2/0 2 x 3/0 2 x 250 mcm
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 1/0 2 x 3/0 2 x 4/0
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 4/0 2 x 250 mcm 2 x 350 mcm
Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 3/0 2 x 250 mcm 2 x 300 mcm
Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung
10/8 16/6 16/6
4) [mm2AWG]2) 5)

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die
nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.

26 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5150 5200 5250
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 256 317 363
110%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 236 304 356
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 206 256 318
150%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 185 236 304
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (380-440
2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (441-500
2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
V) [mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (380-440 V)
2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 150
[mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (441-500 V)
2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 150
[mm2]5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (380-440
2 x 2/0 2 x 3/0 2 x 250 mcm
V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor (441-500
2 x 1/0 2 x 3/0 2 x 4/0
V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (380-440 V)
2 x 4/0 2 x 250 mcm 2 x 350 mcm
[AWG]2) 5)
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor (441-500 V)
2 x 3/0 2 x 250 mcm 2 x 300 mcm
[AWG]2) 5)
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und
10/8 10/8 16/6
Zwischenkreiskopplung 4) [mm2AWG]2) 5)
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz) [-]/UL 1 ) [A] 350/350 450/400 500/500
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Kreislauf)
30/30 30/30 30/30
[-]/UL 6) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Widerstände)
12/12 12/12 12/12
[-]/UL 7) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL 8) [A] 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0
Wirkungsgrad 0,96-0,97 0,96-0,97 0,96-0,97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 146 146 146
Gewicht Nema 1 (IP 20)
[kg] 161 161 161
EB
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 177 177 177
Verlustleistung bei max. Last [W] 3810 4770 5720
IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)/ IP 54 / Nema 1 mit
Schutzart
Klemmen
Technische Daten
1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.
2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die
nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1148
verwendet werden.
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD, Danfoss-Bestellnummer
176F1192 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann KTK-5, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437
verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 27

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5300 5350 5450 5500
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 480 600 658 745
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 528 660 724 820
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 443 540 590 678
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 487 594 649 746
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 333 416 456 516
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 384 468 511 587
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 250 315 355 400
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 300 350 450 500
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 315 355 400 500
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 350 450 500 600
Hohes Übermoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 395 480 600 658
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 593 720 900 987
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 361 443 540 590
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 542 665 810 885
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 274 333 416 456
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 313 384 468 511
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 200 250 315 355
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 300 350 450 500
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 250 315 355 400
Typische Wellenleistung (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 350 450 500 600
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440) [mm2]5) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse 2 x 120 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 300
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500) [mm2]5) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 95 3 x 120
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440) [mm2]5) 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185 3 x 185
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500) [mm2]5) 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185
2 x 250 2 x 350 2 x 400 2 x 500
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
mcm mcm mcm mcm
3 x 250
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5) 3 x 2/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0
mcm
2 x 300 2 x 350 2 x 500
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse 2 x 4/0
mcm mcm mcm
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5) 31/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0
2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x 600 2 x 700
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse
mcm mcm mcm mcm
3 x 250 3 x 300 3 x 350
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5) 3 x 4/0
mcm mcm mcm
2 x 300 2 x 400 2 x 500 2 x 600
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse
mcm mcm mcm mcm
3 x 250 3 x 300
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5) 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0
mcm mcm

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die
nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 2 x M12/3 x M12.

28 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompaktformat, Netzspannung 3 x 380-500 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5300 5350 5450 5500
Eingangsnennstrom
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 467 584 648 734
110%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 431 526 581 668
Eingangsnennstrom
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 389 467 584 648
150%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 356 431 526 581
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
für Motor (380-440 V) [mm 2]5) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel 2 x 120 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 300
für Motor (441-500 V) [mm 2]5) 3 x 70 3 x 95 3 x 95 3 x 120
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
für Motor (380-440 V) [mm 2]5) 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185 3 x 185
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel 2 x 150 2 x 185 2 x 240
für Motor (441-500 V) [mm 2]5) 3 x 95 3 x 120 3 x 150 3 x 185
2 x 250 2 x 350 2 x 500
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel 2 x 400 mcm
mcm mcm mcm
3 x 250
für Motor (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3 x 2/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0
mcm
2 x 300 2 x 500
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel 2 x 4/0 2 x 350 mcm
mcm mcm
für Motor (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 31/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0
2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x 700
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel 2 x 600 mcm
mcm mcm mcm
3 x 250 3 x 350
für Motor (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3 x 4/0 3 x 300 mcm
mcm mcm
2 x 300 2 x 400 2 x 600
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel 2 x 500 mcm
mcm mcm mcm
3 x 300
für Motor (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3 x 3/0 3 x 4/0 3 x 250 mcm
mcm
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz) [-]/UL 1 ) [A] 630/600 700/700 800/800 800/800
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-
15/15 15/15 15/15 30/30
Kreislauf) [-]/UL 6) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-
12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12
Widerstände) [-]/UL 7) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL 8) [A] 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0 5,0/5,0
Wirkungsgrad 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 480 515 560 585
Gewicht Nema 1 [kg] 595 630 675 700
Gewicht IP 54 [kg] 605 640 685 710
Verlustleistung bei max. Last [W] 7500 9450 10650 12000 Technische Daten
Schutzart IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54

1. Sicherungstyp siehe Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die
nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Anschlußstift 2 x M12/3 x M12.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3489
verwendet werden.
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD, Danfoss-Bestellnummer
176F1147 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann KTK-5, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437
verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 29

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5001 5002 5003 5004

Normales Übermoment (110 %):

Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [HP] 1.5 2 3 4
Wellenleistung
Hohes Übermoment (160%):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.6 2.9 4.1
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 4.2 4.6 6.6
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.7 3.8 4.3 6.2
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 1.7 2.5 2.8 3.9
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3
Wellenleistung
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskupplung [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normales Übermoment (110 %):

Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 4.0 5.1
IL,N [A] (600 V) 2.2 2.5 3.6 4.6
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.5 2.8 4.0
IL,N [A] (600 V) 1.6 2.2 2.5 3.6
Max. Kabel-
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
querschnitt [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)
Max.
[-]/UL1) [A] 3 4 5 6
Vorsicherungen
Wirkungsgrad3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Verlustleistung bei
[W] 63 71 102 129
max. Last
Schutzart IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.

30 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5005 5006 5008 5011

Normales Übermoment (110 %):

Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 6.4 9.5 11.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 7.0 10.5 12.7 12.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 6.7 9.9 12.1 12.1
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10.0 10.0
Wellenleistung
Hohes Übermoment (160%):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 5.2 6.4 9.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 8.3 10.2 15.2 18.4
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 7.8 9.8 14.4 17.6
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 5.0 6.1 9.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
Typische
PVLT,N [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5
Wellenleistung
Typische
PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7.5 10
Wellenleistung
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskupplung [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normales Übermoment (110 %):

Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 6.2 9.2 11.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 5.7 8.4 10.3 10.3
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 5.1 6.2 9.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 4.6 5.7 8.4 10.3
Max. Kabel-
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
querschnitt [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)
Max.
[-]/UL1) [A] 8 10 15 20 Technische Daten
Vorsicherungen
Wirkungsgrad3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Verlustleistung bei
[W] 160 136 288 288
max. Last
Schutzart IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 31

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5016 5022 5027

Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 23 28 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 25 31 37
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 22 27 32
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 24 30 35
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 22 27 32
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 22 27 32
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 15 18.5 22
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 18 23 28
IVLT, (60 s) [A] (550 V)
MAX 29 37 45
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 17 22 27
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 27 35 43
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 17 22 27
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 17 22 27
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, 16 16 35
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4) 6 6 2
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, 0.5 0.5 10
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2]/[AWG] 20 20 8
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 22 27 33
IL,N [A] (600 V) 21 25 30
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 18 22 27
IL,N [A] (600 V) 16 21 25
Max. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor 16 16 35
Netz [mm2 ]/[AWG] 6 6 2
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL1) [A] 30 35 45
Wirkungsgrad 0.96 0.96 0.96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 23 23 30
Power loss at max. load. 576 707 838
Schutzart IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der gemäß IP 20 an die Klemmen montiert
werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Aluminiumkabel mit Querschnitten über 35 mm2 müssen mit einem AI-Cu-Stecker angeschlossen
werden.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Ferraz Shawmut FA
Y85443, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 612Z1182 verwendet werden.

32 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5032 5042 5052 5062
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 43 54 65 81
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 47 59 72 89
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 45 57 68 85
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 41 51 62 77
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45 55
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60 75
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 34 43 54 65
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 54 69 86 104
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 51 66 83 99
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 32 41 51 62
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37 45
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50 60
Max. cable cross-section to motor, 35 50 50 50
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2
2 1/0 1/0 1/0
]/[AWG]2)5)
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, 10 16 16 16
Bremse und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ]/[AWG] 8 6 6 6
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 42 53 63 79
IL,N [A] (600 V) 38 49 58 72
Hohes Übermoment (160 %):
Eingangsnennstrom IL,N [A] (550 V) 33 42 53 63
IL,N [A] (600 V) 30 38 49 58
Max. cable cross-section 35 50 50 50
power[mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 5) 2 1/0 1/0 1/0
Max. Vorsicherungen [-]/UL1) [A] 60 75 90 100
Wirkungsgrad 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Gewicht IP 20 EB [kg] 30 48 48 48
Power loss at max. load. 1074 1362 1624 2016
Schutzart IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 Technische Daten

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der gemäß IP 20 an die Klemmen montiert
werden kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. Aluminiumkabel mit Querschnitten über 35 mm2 müssen mit einem AI-Cu-Stecker angeschlossen
werden.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Ferraz Shawmut FA
Y85443, Danfoss-Bestellnummer 612Z1182 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 33

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5075 5100 5125

Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 104 131 151
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 114 144 166
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 99 125 144
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 109 128 158
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 99 125 144
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 99 124 143
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 11
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
Hohes Übrmoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 81 104 131
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 130 166 210
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 77 99 125
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 123 158 200
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 77 99 125
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 77 99 124
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 55 75 90
Typische Wellenleistung (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 75 100 125
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
120 120 120
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (380-440 V) [mm2 ]
4/0 4/0 4/0
[AWG]
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
185 185 185
und Zwischenkreiskopplung (441-500 V) [mm2 ]
300 mcm 300 mcm 300 mcm
[AWG]
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und 6 6 6
Zwischenkreiskopplung4) [mm2/ AWG] 8 8 8

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. 4. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.

34 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5075 5100 5125
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 101 128 147
110%
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 92 117 134
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 79 101 128
150%
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 72 92 117
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor [mm2 ] 120 120 120
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
185 185 185
Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ]
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor[AWG] 4/0 4/0 4/0
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
300 mcm 300 mcm 300 mcm
Zwischenkreiskopplung[AWG]
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und
10/8 10/8 10/8
Zwischenkreiskopplung4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 125 175 200
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Kreislauf)
15/15 15/15 15/15
[-]/UL6) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Widerstände)
12/12 12/12 12/12
[-]/UL7) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5 5 5
Wirkungsgrad 0.960.97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 109 109 109
Gewicht Nema 1 (IP 20)
[kg] 121 121 121
EB
Verlustleistung bei max.Last [W] 2560 3275 3775
Schutzart IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. 4. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1147 verwendet werden. Technische Daten
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1192 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann Typ KTK-5,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 35

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5150 5200 5250
Normales Übermoment (110 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 201 253 289
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 221 278 318
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 192 242 289
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 211 266 318
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 191 241 275
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 191 241 288
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 200 250 300
Hohes Übrmoment (150 %):
Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 151 201 253
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 242 322 405
IVLT,N [A] (575V) 144 192 242
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 230 307 387
Leistung SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 144 191 241
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 143 191 241
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [kW] 110 132 160
Typische Wellenleistung PVLT,N [HP] 150 200 250
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse
2x120 2x120 2x120
und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ]
2x4/0 2x4/0 2x4/0
AWG
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor, Bremse 2x185 2x185
2x185
und Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ] 2x300 2x300
2x300 mcm
AWG mcm mcm
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und
2x6 2x6 2x6
Zwischenkreiskopplung4) [mm2 ]
2x8 2x8 2x8
AWG

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. 4. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.

36 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompakt, Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V

Laut internationalen Anforderungen VLT-Typ 5150 5200 5250
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 196 246 281
110%
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 179 226 270
Max. Eingangsstrom
IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 147 196 246
150%
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 134 179 226
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor [mm2 ] 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 120
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und
2 x 185 2 x185 2 x 185
Zwischenkreiskopplung [mm2 ]
Max. Querschnitt Kupferkabel für Motor[AWG] 2 x4/0 2 x4/0 2 x4/0
Max. Querschnitt Alukabel für Motor, Bremse und 2 x 300 2 x 300 2 x 300
Zwischenkreiskopplung[AWG] mcm mcm mcm
Min. Kabelquerschnitt für Motor, Bremse und
10/8 10/8 10/8
Zwischenkreiskopplung4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. Vorsicherungen (Netz) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 250 350 400
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Kreislauf)
30/30 30/30 30/30
[-]/UL6) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (Softcharge-Widerstände)
12/12 12/12 12/12
[-]/UL7) [A]
Eingebaute Vorsicherungen (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5 5 5
Wirkungsgrad 0.960.97
Gewicht IP 00 [kg] 146 146 146
Gewicht Nema 1 (IP 20)
[kg] 161 161 161
EB
Verlustleistung bei max.Last [W] 5030 6340 7570
Schutzart IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

2. American Wire Gauge = Amerikanisches Drahtmaß
3. Gemessen mit 30 m abgeschirmtem Motorkabel bei Nennlast und Nennfrequenz.
4. Der Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt ist der kleinste Kabelquerschnitt, der an die Klemmen montiert werden
kann. Befolgen Sie stets die nationalen und örtlichen Vorschriften für den Mindest-Kabelquerschnitt.
5. 4. Anschlußstift 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs AC Littelfuse KLK,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1147 verwendet werden. Technische Daten
7. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs DC Littelfuse KLKD,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 176F1192 verwendet werden.
8. Wenn UL/cUL eingehalten werden sollen, müssen Vorsicherungen des Typs Bussmann Typ KTK-5,
Danfoss-Bestellnummer 175L3437 verwendet werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 37

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Sicherungen
UL-Übereinstimmung
Um den UL/cUL-Zulassungen zu entsprechen, müssen Vorsicherungen gemäß nachstehender Tabelle
verwendet werden.
200-240 V

VLT Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

5001 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 oder A2K-10R
5002 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 oder A2K-10R
5003 KTN-R25 5017906-016 KLN-R15 ATM-R15 oder A2K-10R
5004 KTN-R20 5017906-020 KLN-R20 ATM-R20 oder A2K-20R
5005 KTN-R25 5017906-025 KLN-R25 ATM-R25 oder A2K-25R
5006 KTN-R30 5017906-032 KLN-R30 ATM-R30 oder A2K-30R
5008 KTN-R50 5017906-050 KLN-R50 A2K-50R
5011 KTN-R60 5017906-063 KLN-R60 A2K-60R
5016 KTN-R85 5017906-080 KLN-R80 A2K-80R
5022 KTN-R125 5017906-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5027 KTN-R125 5017906-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5032 KTN-R150 5017906-150 L25S-150 A25X-150
5042 KTN-R200 5017906-200 L25S-200 A25X-200
5052 KTN-R250 5017906-250 L25S-250 A25X-250

380-500 V
Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut
5001 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 oder A6K-6R
5002 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 oder A6K-6R
5003 KT-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 oder A6K-10R
5004 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 oder A6K-10R
5005 KTS-R15 5017906-016 KLS-R16 ATM-R16 oder A6K-16R
5006 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 oder A6K-20R
5008 KTS-R25 5017906-025 KLS-R25 ATM-R25 oder A6K-25R
5011 KTS-R30 5012406-032 KLS-R30 A6K-30R
5016 KTS-R40 5017906-040 KLS-R40 A6K-40R
5022 KTS-R50 5014006-050 KLS-R50 A6K-50R
5027 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R60 A6K-60R
5032 KTS-R80 2028220-100 KLS-R80 A6K-180R
5042 KTS-R100 2028220-125 KLS-R100 A6K-100R
5052 KTS-R125 2028220-125 KLS-R125 A6K-125R
5062 KTS-R150 2028220-160 KLS-R150 A6K-150R
5060 FWH-R150 2028220-125 L50S-150 A50-P150
5075 FWH-R220 2028220-200 L50S-225 A50-P225
5100 FWH-R250 2028220-224 L50S-250 A50-P250
5125 FWH-R300 2028220-315 L50S-300 A50-P300
5150 FWH-R350 2028220-315 L50S-350 A50-P350
5200 FWH-R400 206xx32-400 L50S-400 A50-P400
5250 FWH-R500 206xx32-500 L50S-500 A50-P500
5300 FWH-R600 206xx32-600 L50S-600 A50-P600
5350 FWH-R700 206xx32-700 L50S-700 A50-P700
5450 FWH-R800 206xx32-800 L50S-800 A50-P800
5500 FWH-R800 206xx32-800 L50S-800 A50-P800

Für VLT 50015250, 550600 V wenden Sie sich bitte an Danfoss.

KTS-Sicherungen von Bussmann können KTN-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.

FWH-Sicherungen von Bussmann können FWX-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.

KLSR-Sicherungen von LITTEL FUSE können KLNR-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.
L50S-Sicherungen von LITTEL FUSE können L50S-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.

A6KR-Sicherungen von FERRAZ SHAWMUT können A2KR-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.
A50X-Sicherungen von FERRAZ SHAWMUT können A25X-Sicherungen für 240 V-Antriebe ersetzen.

38 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Keine UL-Übereinstimmung

Wenn keine Übereinstimmung mit UL/cUL bestehen soll, empfehlen wir die oben angegebenen Sicherungen
oder:

VLT 5001-5027 200-240 V Typ gG

VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V Typ gG
VLT 5001-5062 550-600 V Typ gG
VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V Typ gR
VLT 5075-5500 380-500 V Typ gR
(VLT 5075-5250) 550-600 V Typ gR

1. Den Sicherungstyp finden Sie in Abschnitt Sicherungen.

Technische Daten

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 39

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Maße, Dimensionen
Alle nachstehenden Angaben in mm.
VLT-Typ A B C D a b ab/be Typ
Buchformat IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 90 260 384 70 100 A
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
395 130 260 384 70 100 A
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Kompaktformat IP 00
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V 800 370 355 780 270 225 B
5075 - 5125 550 - 600 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V
1400 420 400 1380 350 225 B
5150 - 5250 550 - 600 V
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 1896 1099 494 1847 1065 4001) I
Kompaktformat IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 220 160 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V 395 220 200 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V (IP 20 und Nema 1)
5008 200 - 240 V
5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V 560 242 260 540 200 200 D
5016 - 5022 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V
5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V 700 242 260 680 200 200 D
5027 - 5032 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5042 - 5062 380 - 500 V 800 308 296 780 270 200 D
5042 - 5062 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
Kompaktformat Nema 1 mit Klemmen
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
1004 370 335 780 270 225 E
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V 1582 420 400 1380 350 225 E
Kompaktformat Nema 1/IP 20
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V 1532 420 400 1380 350 225 E
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V 954 370 335 780 270 225 E
5075 - 5125 550 - 600 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V
1554 420 400 138 350 225 E
5150 - 5250 550 - 600 V
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 2060 1200 600 - - 4001) H
Kompaktformat IP 54
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
460 282 195 85 260 258 100 F
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
530 282 195 85 330 258 100 F
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
810 355 280 70 560 330 200 F
5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V
5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V
940 400 280 70 690 375 200 F
5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
937 495 421 - 830 374 225 G
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V 1572 495 425 - 1465 445 225 G
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 2010 1200 600 - - - 4001) H

ab: Mindestabstand über dem Gehäuse

be: Mindestabstand unter dem Gehäuse
1: Nur über dem Gehäuse (ab) IP 00 bei Einbau in Rittal-Schrank.

40 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Maße, Dimensionen (Forts.)

Technische Daten

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 41

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Typ H, Nema 1, IP 54

■ Typ I, IP 00

42 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Mechanische Installation Projektierungshandbuch zu reduzieren, da ansonsten

mit einer Verringerung der Lebensdauer des
Beachten Sie die für Einbau und Frequenzumrichters gerechnet werden muß.
Türeinbau geltenden Anforderungen
(siehe nachstehende Übersicht). Diese
sind zur Vermeidung von schweren Personen- ■ Einbau
und Sachschäden einzuhalten, insbesondere bei
der Installation größerer Gerätetypen. IP 00 IP 20/Nema 1 IP 54
Buchformat - OK -
Der Frequenzumrichter muß senkrecht
Kompaktformat OK OK OK
montiert werden.

Der Frequenzumrichter wird durch Luftzirkulation ■ Montage außerhalb des Schaltschranks

gekühlt. Damit das Gerät seine Kühlluft abgeben
kann, ist auf einen freien Mindestabstand IP 00 IP 20 / IP 54
sowohl über als auch unter dem Gerät gemäß Nema 1
Zeichnung unten zu achten. Buchformat - Nein -
Kompaktformat Nein Nein OK
Damit das Gerät nicht zu warm wird, ist zu
gewährleisten, daß die Umgebungstemperatur
Kompaktformat m. IP 4x
die für den Frequenzumrichter angegebene
Oberabdeckung
max. Temperatur nicht überschreitet, und daß
VLT 5001-5006 200 V - OK OK
auch der 24-Std.-Durchschnittstemperaturwert
VLT 5001-5011 500 V - OK OK
nicht überschritten wird. Max. Temperatur und VLT 5001-5011 575V - OK -
24-Std.-Durchschnitt entnehmen Sie bitte den
Allgemeinen technischen Daten. Kompaktformat m. IP 20
Bei Installation des Frequenzumrichters auf Klemmenabdeckung
unebenen Flächen, z.B. auf einem Rahmen, bitte VLT 5008-5027 200 V - OK OK
Anleitung MN.50.XX.YY beachten. VLT 5016-5052 500 V - OK OK
Bei Umgebungstemperaturen im Bereich 45 VLT 5016-5062 575 V - OK -
C 55 C ist die Leistung des VLT 5000
gemäß dem Leistungsreduktionsdiagramm im

Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 43

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Installation des VLT 5001-5250

Alle VLT-Frequenzumrichter müssen so installiert
Seite an Seite/Flansch an Flansch
werden, dass eine ausreichende Kühlung
gewährleistet ist. Alle VLT-Frequenzumrichter können Seite an
Seite/Flansch an Flansch montiert werden.
Kühlung

Alle Geräte im Buch- und Kompaktformat

erfordern einen Mindestfreiraum über und
unter dem Schutzgehäuse.

d [mm] Kommentare
Buchformat
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100 Installation auf einer ebenen, vertikalen Oberfläche (keine
VLT 5001-5011, 280-500 V 100 Abstandshalter)

Kompakt (alle Gehäusetypen)

VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100
Installation auf einer ebenen, vertikalen Oberfläche (keine
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V 100
Abstandshalter)
VLT 5001-5011, 550-600 V 100

VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V 200

Installation auf einer ebenen, vertikalen Oberfläche (keine
VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V 200
Abstandshalter)
VLT 5016-5062, 550-600 V 200

5032-5052, 200-240 V 225 Installation auf einer ebenen, vertikalen Oberfläche (keine
5075-5250, 380-500 V 225 Abstandshalter)
5075-5250, 550-600 V 225 IP 54-Filtermatten müssen bei Verschmutzung ersetzt
werden.

44 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Installation von VLT 5300-5500 380-500 V,

Kompaktformat Nema 1 (IP 20) und IP 54
Kühlung Seitlich nebeneinander

Kompaktformat Nema 1 (IP 20) und IP 54

Alle Nema-1- (IP-20-) und IP-54-Geräte der o.g.

Baureihen können ohne Zwischenräume seitlich
nebeneinander installiert werden, da die Geräte
keine seitliche Kühlung erfordern..

Alle Kompaktgeräte der o.g. Baureihen erfordern

mindestens 400 mm Freiraum über dem
Schutzgehäuse und müssen auf einer ebenen Fläche
montiert werden. Dies gilt sowohl für Geräte des Typs
Nema 1 (IP 20) als auch für Baureihe IP 54.
Für den Zugang zum VLT 5300-5500 ist
mindestens ein Freiraum von 605 mm vor dem
Frequenzumrichter erforderlich.

Schmutzige Filtermatten in Geräten des Typs

IP 54 sind auszutauschen.

■ IP 00 VLT 5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V Schrankeinbau ausgelegt. Bitte beachten Sie, dass die
IP 00 ist bei Installation gemäß VLT 5300 - gleichen Bedingungen wie für Nema 1 / IP 54 gelten.
5500 Installationsanleitung (MG.56.AX.YY) für den
Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 45

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation Alle Steuerleitungsklemmen befinden sich unter

der Abdeckplatte des Frequenzumrichters. Die
Der Frequenzumrichter steht bei Abdeckplatte kann mit Hilfe eines Schraubendrehers
Netzanschluß unter gefährlicher Spannung. o.ä. entfernt werden (siehe Abb.).
Eine unsachgemäße Installation des
Motors oder des Frequenzumrichters kann schwere
Sach- und Körperschäden oder sogar tödliche
Verletzungen verursachen. Befolgen Sie daher
stets die Anweisungen in diesem Handbuch
sowie die örtlichen und nationalen Vorschriften
und Sicherheitsbestimmungen.
Das Berühren elektrischer Teile - auch nach der
Trennung vom Netz - kann lebensgefährlich sein.
Bei VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V und 380-500
V mindestens 4 Minuten warten.
Bei VLT 5008-5052, 200-240 V mindestens
15 Minuten warten.
Bei VLT 5008-5500, 380-500 V mindestens
15 Minuten warten.
Bei VLT 5001-5005, 550-600 V mindestens
4 Minuten warten.
Bei VLT 5006-5022, 550-600 V mindestens
15 Minuten warten.
Bei VLT 5027-5250, 550-600 V mindestens
30 Minuten warten. Nach dem Entfernen der Abdeckplatte kann
mit der eigentlichen EMV-gemäßen elektrischen
ACHTUNG!: Installation begonnen werden. Siehe Zeichnungen
Der Betreiber bzw. Elektroinstallateur ist im Abschnitt EMV-gemäße Installation.
für eine ordnungsgemäße Erdung und die
Einhaltung der jeweils gültigen nationalen und
örtlichen Sicherheitsbestimmungen verantwortlich.

46 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation, Leistungskabel

Kompaktformat IP 20
/Nema 1
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V
VLT 5001-5011, 550-600 V

Buchformat IP 20
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V

Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V

Buchformat
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Installation

Kompaktformat IP 20 Nema 1/IP 54

VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
VLT 5001-5011 550-600 V

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 47

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation, Leistungskabel

Kompaktformat 54
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 550-600 V

Kompaktformat IP 54
Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 550-600 V

48 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation, Leistungskabel

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V
VLT 5075-5125 550-600 V VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V
Installation

VLT 5075-5125 550-600 V VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 49

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation, Schutzarten

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V
VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V
VLT 5150-5250 550-600 V

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V Compact IP 54
VLT 5150-5250 550-600 V VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V

50 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Nema 1 mit Klemmen und Erdung

VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V
VLT 5075-5250, 380-500 V

■ Elektrische Installation, Leistungskabel

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/IP 54

ohne Trennschalter und Netzsicherungen
VLT 5300 -5500 380 -500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 51

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/IP 54

mit Trennschalter und Netzsicherungen
VLT 5300 -5500 380 -500 V

52 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation, Schutzarten

Kompaktformat IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/IP 54

VLT 5300-5500, 380-500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 53

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ EMV-gemäße elektrische Installation • Bei Geräten des Typs IP54 ist eine
Nachstehend sind Hinweise für eine ordnungsgemäße unterbrechungsfreie Hochfrequenzverbindung
EMV-gemäße Installation von Frequenzumrichtern zwischen dem Frequenzumrichter und der
aufgeführt. Diese Vorgehensweise wird empfohlen, Motoreinheit erforderlich.
wenn eine Einhaltung der EN 50081, EN 55011
oder EN 61800-3 Erstumgebung gefordert ist. Bei Die Zeichnung unten zeigt eine EMV-gemäße
Einbau in einer EN 61800-3 Zweitumgebung sind elektrische Installation eines Frequenzumrichters des
Abweichungen von der dargestellten Vorgehensweise Typs IP 20, bei der der Frequenzumrichter mit einem
zulässig. Von abweichenden Verfahren wird jedoch Ausgangsschütz in einem Schaltschrank montiert und
abgeraten. Siehe auch CE-Zeichen, Emission und an eine in einem separaten Schaltschrank installierte
EMV-Prüfergebnisse unter "Besondere Bedingungen" SPS angeschlossen ist. Bei IP 54-Geräten und
im Projektierungshandbuch. VLT 5075-5250, 380-500 V und VLT 5032-5052,
200-240 VAC im Nema 1/IP20-Gehäuse werden
Ordnungsgemäße EMV-gerechte elektrische unter Verwendung von EMV-Installationsröhren
Installation: abgeschirmte Kabel angeschlossen, um eine
EMV-gemäße Funktion zu gewährleisten. Siehe
• Nur umflochtene abgeschirmte Motorkabel
Abbildung. Mit anderen Vorgehensweisen kann
und umflochtene abgeschirmte Steuerleitungen
ggf. eine ebenso gute EMV-Leistung erzielt
verwenden. Die Schirmabdeckung muß mindestens
werden, sofern die vorstehenden Hinweise für eine
80% betragen. Das Abschirmungsmaterial muß
ordnungsgemäße Installation befolgt werden.
aus Metall - in der Regel Kupfer, Aluminium,
Stahl oder Blei - bestehen. Für das Netzkabel Bitte beachten Sie: Wenn die Installation nicht
gelten keine speziellen Anforderungen. entsprechend dieser Hinweise erfolgt oder wenn
• Bei Installationen mit starren Metallrohren sind unabgeschirmte Kabel und Steuerkabel verwendet
keine abgeschirmten Kabel erforderlich; das werden, sind bestimmte Anforderungen hinsichtlich
Motorkabel muß jedoch in einem anderen der Emission nicht erfüllt, obwohl die Anforderungen
Installationsrohr als die Steuer- und Netzkabel an die Immunität erfüllt sind. Näheres siehe unter
installiert werden. Ein voller Anschluß der Leitung EMV-Prüfergebnisse im Projektierungshandbuch.
vom Frequenzumrichter bis zum Motor ist
erforderlich. Die EMV-Leistungsfähigkeit flexibler
Installationsrohre variiert sehr stark; hier sind
entsprechende Herstellerangaben einzuholen.
• Abschirmung/Installationsrohr bei Motor- und
Steuerkabeln beidseitig erden. Siehe auch
Erdung abgeschirmter Steuerkabel.
• Verzwirbelte Abschirmlitzen (sog. Pigtails)
vermeiden. Sie erhöhen die Hochfrequenzimpedanz
der Abschirmung und beeinträchtigen so den
Abschirmeffekt bei hohen Frequenzen. Statt
dessen Kabelbügel oder Stopfbüchsen mit
geringer Impedanz verwenden.
• Auf einwandfreien elektrischen Kontakt von der
Montageplatte über die Montageschrauben zum
Metallgehäuse des Frequenzumrichters achten.
Dies gilt jedoch nicht für die zur Wandmontage
bestimmten Geräte des Typs IP54 sowie den
VLT5075-5500, 380-500 V AC und VLT5032-5052,
200-240 V AC mit IP20/Nema-1-Gehäuse.
• Zahnscheiben und galvanisch leitfähige
Montageplatten verwenden, um einwandfreien
elektrischen Kontakt für IP00- und
IP20-Installationen zu gewährleisten.
• Nach Möglichkeit in Schaltschränken ebenfalls nur
abgeschirmte Motor- und Steuerkabel verwenden.

54 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 55

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Anwendung EMV-gemäßer Kabel

Um die EMV-Immunität der Steuerkabel und
Die Transfer-Impedanz (ZT) kann aufgrund folgender
die EMV-Emission von den Motorkabeln zu
Faktoren beurteilt werden:
optimieren, empfiehlt sich die Verwendung
- Leitfähigkeit des Abschirmungsmaterials.
umflochtener abgeschirmter Kabel.
- Kontaktwiderstand zwischen den einzelnen
Die Fähigkeit eines Kabels, ein- und ausstrahlende Schirmleitern.
elektrische Störgeräusche zu reduzieren, richtet sich - Schirmabdeckung, d.h. die physische Fläche
nach der Transfer-Impedanz (ZT). Die Abschirmung des Kabels, die durch den Schirm abgedeckt
von Kabeln ist normalerweise darauf ausgelegt, ist wird häufig in Prozent angegeben.
die Übertragung elektrischer Störgeräusche zu - Art der Abschirmung (geflochten oder gewunden).
mindern, wobei allerdings Abschirmungen mit
Alu-ummantelt mit Kupferdraht.
niedrigerer Transfer-Impedanz (ZT) wirksamer sind als
Abschirmungen mit höherer Transfer-Impedanz (ZT). Gewundener Kupferdraht oder bewehrtes
Stahldrahtkabel.

Kupferdraht einlagig, geflochten, mit prozentual

unterschiedlicher Schirmabdeckung.
Dies ist das typische Danfoss-Referenzkabel.

Kupferdraht zweilagig, geflochten.

Kupferdraht zweilagig, geflochten, mit magnetisch

abgeschirmter Zwischenlage.

In Kupfer- oder Stahlrohr geführtes Kabel.

Bleikabel mit 1,1 mm Wandstärke.

Die Transfer-Impedanz (ZT) wird von den

Kabelherstellern nur selten angegeben.
Durch Sichtprüfung und Beurteilung der
mechanischen Eigenschaften des Kabels läßt sich die
Transferimpedanz (ZT) jedoch einigermaßen schätzen.

56 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Erdung umflochtener, abgeschirmter Steuerkabel

Generell müssen Steuerkabel abgeschirmt und die Richtiges Erden
Abschirmung beidseitig mittels Kabelbügel mit dem Steuerkabel und Kabel der seriellen Kommunikationss-
Metallgehäuse des Gerätes verbunden sein. chnittstelle beidseitig mit Kabelbügeln montieren, um
bestmöglichen elektrischen Kontakt zu gewährleisten.
Die Zeichnung unten zeigt, wie eine korrekte
Erdung durchzuführen ist, und was in Zweifelsfällen Falsches Erden
getan werden kann. Verzwirbelte Abschirmlitzen (sog. Pigtails)
vermeiden, da diese die Schirmimpedanz bei
höheren Frequenzen vergrößern.

Sicherung des Erdpotentials zwischen

SPS und VLT
Besteht zwischen dem Frequenzumrichter und der
SPS (etc.) ein unterschiedliches Erdpotential, so
können elektrische Störgeräusche auftreten, die
das gesamte System stören können. Das Problem
kann durch Anbringen eines Ausgleichskabels gelöst
werden, das neben das Steuerkabel gelegt wird.
Kabelquerschnitt mindestens 16 mm2

Bei 50/60-Hz-Erdfehlerschleifen
Bei Verwendung sehr langer Steuerkabel können
50/60-Hz-Erdfehlerschleifen auftreten. Diesem
Problem kann durch Verbinden des einen
Schirmendes an Erde über einen 100-nF-Kondensator
(bei möglichst kurzen Leitungen) abgeholfen werden.

Kabel für die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle

Niederfrequente Störströme zwischen zwei
Frequenzumrichtern können eliminiert werden, indem
das eine Ende der Abschirmung mit Klemme 61
verbunden wird. Dieser Eingang ist über ein internes
RC-Glied mit Erde verbunden. Es empfiehlt sich die
Verwendung eines paarweise gewundenen (twisted
pair) Kabels, um die Differentialsignalinterferenz
zwischen den Leitern zu reduzieren.
Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 57

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Anzugsmomente und Schraubengrößen

Die Tabelle zeigt, mit welchem Moment die Klemmen
des VLT-Frequenzumrichters montiert werden müssen.
Bei VLT 5001-5027 200-240 V und VLT 5001-5062
380-500 V und 550-600 V werden die Kabel mit
Schrauben befestigt. Bei VLT 5032-5052 200-240
V und VLT 5075-5500 380-500 V, VLT 5075-5250
■ Hochspannungsprüfung
550-600 V erfolgt die Befestigung mit Bolzen.
Eine Hochspannungsprüfung kann durch
Diese Zahlen gelten für folgende Klemmen:
Kurzschließen der Anschlüsse U, V, W, L1, L2 und L3
Netzklemmen Nr. 91, 92, 93 und 1 Sekunde langes Anlegen von max. 2,15 kV DC
zwischen diesem Kurzschluß und der Masse erfolgen.
L1,L2, L3

Motorklemmen Nr. 96, 97, 98 ACHTUNG!:

U, V, W Der Funkentstörschalter muß beim
Hochspannungstest geschlossen sein (Position
Erdungsklemmen Nr. 94, 95, 99 ON) (siehe Abschnitt Funkentstörschalter).
Bremswiderstandsklemmen 81, 82 Netz- und Motoranschluß müssen bei einem
Hochspannungstest der gesamten Anlage
Zwischenkreiskopplung 88, 89 evtl. unterbrochen werden, wenn die
Ableitströme zu hoch sind.

VLT-Typ Anzugs- Schrauben-

3 x 200-240 V moment größe ■ Sicherheitserdung
VLT 5001-5006 0,5 0,6 Nm M3
VLT 5008-5011 1,8 Nm M4 ACHTUNG!:
VLT 5016-5022 3,0 Nm M5
VLT 5027 4,0 Nm M6 Der Frequenzumrichter weist hohe Ableitströme
VLT 5032-50521) 11,3 Nm M8 auf und ist deshalb aus Sicherheitsgründen
vorschriftsmäßig zu erden. Benutzen Sie
VLT-Typ Anzugs- Schrauben- die Erdungsklemme (siehe Abschnitt Elektrische
3 x 380-500 V moment Bolzengröße Installation, Leistungskabel), die einen verstärkten
VLT 5001-5011 0,5 0,6 Nm M3
VLT 5016-5027 1,8 Nm M4 Anschluß an Erde ermöglicht.
VLT 5032-5042 3,0 Nm M5 Beachten Sie die nationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften.
VLT 5052-5062 4,0 Nm M6
VLT 5075-51001) 11,3 Nm M8
VLT 5125-5250 11,3 Nm M8 ■ Thermischer Motorschutz
VLT 5300-55002) 42 Nm M12
Das elektronische Thermorelais in UL-zugelassenen
VLT-Typ Anzugs- Schrauben- Frequenzumrichtern ist für Einzelmotorschutz
3 x 550-600 V moment Bolzengröße UL-zugelassen, wenn Parameter 128 auf Abschaltung
VLT 5001-5011 0,5 0,6 Nm M3 gesetzt ist, und Parameter 105 auf den Nennstrom
VLT 5016-5022 1,8 Nm M4
des Motors programmiert wurde (dem Typenschild
VLT 5027-5032 3,0 Nm M5
VLT 5042-5062 4,0 Nm M6 des Motors zu entnehmen).
VLT 5075-51251) 11,3 Nm M8
VLT 5150-5250 11,3 Nm M8
1) An den Klemmen für den Bremswiderstand ■ Zusätzlicher Schutz (RCD)
beträgt das Anzugsmoment 3,0 Nm; die Fehlstromschutzschalter, Nullung oder Erdung können
Bolzengröße ist M6. ein zusätzlicher Schutz sein, vorausgesetzt, die
2) An den Klemmen für den Bremswiderstand
örtlichen Sicherheitsnormen werden eingehalten.
beträgt das Anzugsmoment 42 Nm; die
Bolzengröße ist M8. Bei Erdungsfehlern können Gleichspannungsanteile
im Fehlstrom entstehen.

Fehlstromschutzschalter sind ggf. gemäß den

■ Netzanschluß
örtlichen Vorschriften anzuwenden. Die Schutzschalter
Der Anschluß an die Netzspannung erfolgt mit drei
müssen zum Schutz von dreiphasigen Geräten mit
Phasen an die Klemmen L1, L2, L3.

58 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Gleichrichterbrücke und für kurzzeitiges Ableiten von

Impulsstromspitzen im Einschaltmoment geeignet sein.

Sehen Sie bitte auch den Abschnitt "Besondere

Bedingungen" im Produkthandbuch.

Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 59

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Funkentstörschalter VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V

Ungeerdete Netzversorgung: VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Wird der Frequenzumrichter von einem isolierten Netz
(IT-Netz) versorgt, so kann der Funkentstörschalter auf
OFF (AUS) gestellt werden. In der Position OFF sind die
internen Funkentstörkapazitäten (Filterkondensatoren)
zwischen Rahmen und Zwischenkreis abgeschaltet,
um Schäden am Zwischenkreis zu vermeiden und die
Erdkapazität (gemäß IEC 61800-3) zu verringern.

ACHTUNG!:
Den Funkentstörschalter nicht bedienen,
wenn das Gerät an das Netz angeschlossen
ist. Vergewissern Sie sich bitte, daß die
Netzversorgung unterbrochen ist, bevor Sie den
Funkentstörschalter betätigen.
Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
ACHTUNG!:
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
Ein offener Funkentstörschalter ist nur bei VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
werkseingestellten Taktfrequenzen zulässig. VLT 5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V

ACHTUNG!:
Mit dem Funkentstörschalter werden die
Kondensatoren zur Erdung galvanisch getrennt.

Die roten Schalter werden z.B. mit einem

Schraubendreher betätigt. In Position OFF sind
die Schalter herausgezogen, in Position EIN sind
die Schalter gedrückt (siehe Zeichnung unten).
Die Werkseinstellung ist ON.

Geerdete Netzversorgung:
Der Funkentstörschalter muß auf ON (EIN)
gestellt werden, damit der Frequenzumrichter
die EMV-Anforderungen erfüllt.

Buchformat IP 20

60 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5008 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V
Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5016 - 5022 550 - 600 V
VLT 5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
VLT 5042 - 5062 380 - 500 V
VLT 5042 - 5062 550 - 600 V

Kompaktformat IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V
VLT 5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V
Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5027 - 5032 550 - 600 V
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 61

 VLT® Serie 5000

Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V

Kompaktformat IP 54
VLT 5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V
VLT 5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V

62 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Einbau der Motorkabel

ACHTUNG!:
Bei Verwendung von nicht-abgeschirmtem
Kabel werden bestimmte EMV-Anforderungen
nicht eingehalten, siehe Produkthandbuch.
Zur Einhaltung der EMV-Spezifikationen bzgl. Emission
muß das Motorkabel abgeschirmt sein, soweit für das
betreffende Funkentstörfilter nicht anders angegeben.
Um Störpegel und Ableitströme auf ein Minimum Kleinere Motoren (200/400 V, /Y) werden
zu reduzieren, ist es wichtig, daß das Motorkabel üblicher-weise in Stern, größere Motoren.
so kurz wie möglich gehalten wird. (400/690 V, /Y) in Dreieck geschaltet.
Die Abschirmung des Motorkabels mit dem
Metallgehäuse des Frequenzumrichters und dem
des Motors verbinden. Die Abschirmungen ■ Drehrichtung des Motors
über eine möglichst große Oberfläche verbinden
(Kabelbügel). Dies wird durch unterschiedliche
Montagevorrichtungen in den verschiedenen
Frequenzumrichtern ermöglicht.

Eine Montage mit verzwirbelten Abschirmlitzen (sog.

Pigtails) ist zu vermeiden, da dies die Wirkung der
Abschirmung bei höheren Frequenzen zunichte macht.
Ist eine Unterbrechung der Abschirmung, etwa zur
Montage eines Motorschutzes oder Motorrelais,
erforderlich, so muß die Abschirmung anschließend mit
möglichst niedriger HF-Impedanz weitergeführt werden.

Der Frequenzumrichter ist mit einer bestimmten

Kabellänge und einem bestimmten Kabelquerschnitt
getestet worden. Wird der Kabelquerschnitt erhöht, so
erhöht sich auch der kapazitive Widerstand des Kabels
- und damit der Ableitstrom - so daß die Kabellänge
dann entsprechend verringert werden muß. Aus der Werkseinstellung ergibt sich
eine Rechtsdrehung, wenn der Ausgang
Wenn VLT 5000-Frequenzumrichter zusammen mit des VLT-Frequenzumrichters wie folgt
LC-Filter verwendet werden, um Störgeräusche von angeschlossen wurde:
einem Motor zu reduzieren, muss die Taktfrequenz
entsprechend der LC-Filteranleitung in Parameter 411 Klemme 96 an U-Phase
eingestellt werden. Wenn die Taktfrequenz höher als Klemme 97 an V-Phase
3 KHz eingestellt wird, so wird der Ausgangsstrom Klemme 98 an W-Phase
im SFAWM-Modus verringert.Durch Ändern von
Die Drehrichtung kann durch Vertauschen zweier
Parameter 446 auf 60 AVM-Moudus wird die
Phasen des Motorkabels umgekehrt werden.
Frequenz, bei der der Strom verringert wird, nach
oben verlagert. Siehe Projektierungshandbuch.
Installation

■ Motoranschluß
Mit dem VLT Serie 5000 können alle dreiphasigen
Standardmotoren eingesetzt werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 63

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Parallelschaltung von Motoren Kabelbügeln am VLT-Frequenzumrichter und dem

Metallgehäuse des Bremswiderstandes zu verbinden.
Der Querschnitt des Bremskabels ist entsprechend
dem Bremsmoment zu bemessen. Weitere Hinweise
zur sicheren Installation siehe auch Bremsanleitung
MI.50.DX.YY sowie MI.50.SX.YY.

ACHTUNG!:
Beachten Sie bitte, daß an den Klemmen
Spannungen bis zu 850 V DC auftreten können.

■ Installation der Relaisklemmen

Anzugsmoment: 0,5 - 0,6 Nm
Schraubengröße: M3
Die VLT Serie 5000 kann mehrere parallelgeschaltete
Motoren steuern. Wenn die Motoren verschiedene Nr. Funktion
Drehzahlen haben sollen, dann müssen Motoren 1-3 Relaisausgang, 1+3 (Öffner), 1+2
mit unterschiedlichen Nenndrehzahlen eingesetzt (Schließer) Siehe Parameter 323 in
werden. Da sich die Drehzahl der Motoren gleichzeitig der Betriebsanleitung. Siehe auch
ändert, bleibt jeweils das Verhältnis zwischen den Allgemeine technische Daten.
Nenndrehzahlen im gesamten Bereich gleich.
4, 5 Relaisausgang, 4+5 (Schließer)
Der Gesamtstromverbrauch der Motoren darf Siehe Parameter 326 in der
den maximalen Nenn-Ausgangsstrom IVLT,N des Betriebsanleitung.
VLT-Frequenzumrichters nicht übersteigen. Siehe auch. Allgemeine technische
Daten.
Bei sehr unterschiedlichen Motorgrößen können beim
Anlaufen und bei niedrigen Drehzahlen Probleme
■ Installation der externen 24-Volt-DC-Versorgung
auftreten. Das rührt daher, daß der relativ hohe
(Nur erweitert mit Bremse).
ohmsche Widerstand im Stator kleiner Motoren
eine höhere Spannung beim Anlaufen und bei Anzugsmoment: 0,5 0,6 Nm
niedrigen Drehzahlen erfordert. Schraubengröße: M3

Bei Systemen mit parallelgeschalteten Motoren Nr. Funktion

kann der elektronische Motorschutzschalter (ETR) 35, 36 Externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung
des VLTFrequenzumrichters nicht als Motorschutz
für einzelne Motoren eingesetzt werden. Deshalb
Die externe 24-Volt-Gleichspannung dient als
ist ein zusätzlicher Motorschutz, z.B. in jedem
Niederspannungsversorgung der Steuerkarte
Motor ein Thermistor (oder individuelle thermische
sowie etwaiger eingebauter Optionskarten. Dies
Schutzschalter) erforderlich, der zur Verwendung
ermöglicht den vollen Betrieb des Bedienfeldes
mit Frequenzumwandlern geeignet ist.
(einschl. Parametrierung) ohne Anschluß der
Beachten Sie bitte, daß die Motorkabel jedes Motors Netzversorgung. Bitte beachten Sie, daß die
einzeln addiert werden müssen und die zulässige Meldung "Spannung niedrig" ausgegeben wird,
Gesamtkabellänge nicht überschritten werden darf. wenn 24 V DC angeschlossen sind; es erfolgt
jedoch keine Abschaltung. Wenn die externe
24-V-Gleichspannungsversorgung gleichzeitig mit der
Netzversorgung angeschlossen bzw. eingeschaltet
■ Installation des Bremskabels wird, muß in Parameter 120 Startverzögerung eine
(Nur Standard mit Bremse und erweitert mit Zeit von mindestens 200 ms eingestellt werden.
Bremse, Typecode: SB, EB). Zum Schutz der externen 24-V-DC-Versorgung kann
Nr. Funktion eine träge Vorsicherung von min. 6 Amp. montiert
81, 82 Bremswiderstandsklemmen werden. Die Leistungsaufnahme von 15-50 W hängt
von der Belastung der Steuerkarte ab.

Das Anschlußkabel für den Bremswiderstand muß

abgeschirmt sein. Die Abschirmung ist mittels

64 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Installation des Bremswiderstands-

ACHTUNG!:
Temperaturschalters
Zur Aufrechterhaltung der sicheren
Anzugsmoment: 0,5 - 0,6 Nm
galvanischen Trennung (Typ PELV) an den
Schraubengröße: M3
Steuerklemmen des VLT Frequenzumrichters
muß die angeschlossene 24-V-DC-Versorgung Nr. Funktion
vom Typ PELV sein. 106, 104, Bremswiderstands-
105 Temperaturschalter

■ Installation der Zwischenkreiskopplung

(Nur erweiterte Version, Typecode: EB, EX, DE, DX). ACHTUNG!:
Nr. Funktion Diese Funktion gibt es nur bei VLT 5032-5052,
88, 89 Zwischenkreiskopplung 200-240 V, VLT 5075-5500, 380-500 V
und VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V.
Wenn die Temperatur im Bremswiderstand zu
Das Anschlußkabel muß abgeschirmt sein;
hoch wird und der Klixon-Schalter abfällt, hört der
max. Länge zwischen VLT-Frequenzumrichter
Frequenzumrichter zu bremsen auf. Anschließend
und DC-Leiste: 25 Meter.
läuft der Motor im Freilauf aus.
Die Zwischenkreiskopplung ermöglicht einen Lastaus-
Es muß ein Klixon-Schalter installiert werden, der
gleich beim Zusammenschalten mehrer Frequenzum-
entweder ’normal geschlossen’ oder ’normal offen’
richter über die Gleichspannungszwischenkreise.
sein kann. Wenn die Funktion nicht benutzt wird, muß
ACHTUNG!: zwischen 106 und 104 ein Kurzschluß bestehen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daß an den Klemmen
Spannungen bis zu 850 V DC auftreten können.
Die Zwischenkreiskopplung ist nur mit
Sonderausstattung möglich. Näheres hierzu siehe die
Anleitung für Zwischenkreiskopplung MI.50.NX.XX.

■ Busanschluß
Die serielle Busverbindung gemäß der Norm RS 485
(zwei Leiter) wird an die Klemmen 68/69 (Signal
P und N) des Frequenzumrichters angeschlossen.
■ Lüfterversorgung Signal P ist das positive Potential (TX+, RX+),
Drehmoment 0,5-0,6 Nm Signal N das negative (TX-, RX-).
Schraubengröße: M3
Wenn an denselben Master mehrere
Frequenzumrichter angeschlossen werden
sollen, hat dies in Parallelschaltung zu erfolgen.

Nur für Geräte des Typs IP54 im Leistungsbereich

Installation

VLT5016-5062, 380-500 V sowie VLT5008-5027,

200-240 V AC. Falls der Frequenzumwandler über
den DC-Bus versorgt wird (Zwischenkreiskopplung),
werden die integrierten Lüfter nicht mit Wechselstrom
versorgt. In diesem Fall ist eine externe Versorgung
mit Wechselstrom notwendig.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 65

 VLT® Serie 5000

Zur Vermeidung von Potentialausgleichsströmen

in der Abschirmung kann die Kabelabschirmung
über Klemme 61 geerdet werden, die über ein
RC-Glied an Masse verbunden ist.

Busabschluß
Der Bus muß an jedem seiner Endpunkte
durch ein Widerstandsnetzwerk abgeschlossen
Nr. Funktion
werden. Hierzu sind die Schalter 2 und 3 auf 12, 13 Spannungsversorgung für Digitaleingänge.
der Steuerkarte auf "ON" zu setzen. Damit die 24-V-Gleichspannung für die
Digitaleingänge verwendbar ist, muß
Schalter 4 auf der Steuerkarte geschlossen
■ DIP Schalter 1-4 sein (EIN).
Der Dipschalter befindet sich auf der Steuerkarte.
16-33 Digitale Eingänge/Drehgeber-Eingänge
Er wird in Zusammenhang mit serieller Kommunikation,
Klemme 68 und 69, benutzt. 20 Erde für digitale Eingänge
Die gezeigte Schalterstellung entspricht der
39 Erde für analoge/digitale Ausgänge
Werkseinstellung.

42, 45 Analog-/Digitalausgang zur Anzeige

von Frequenz, Sollwert, Strom und
Drehmoment
Schalter 1 hat keine Funktion.
Schalter 2 und 3 dienen zum Zu- bzw. Abschalten 50 Versorgungsspannung für Potentiometer
von Abschluß widerständen für die serielle und Thermistor 10 V DC
Kommunikation (RS 485).
53, 54 Analoger Sollwerteingang, Spannung 0 -
Schalter 4 dient zur Trennung des Massepotentials
± 10 V
der internen 24-V DC-Versorgung vom Massepotential
einer externen 24-V DC-Versorgung zur Ansteuerung 55 Erde für analoge Sollwerteingänge
der VLT-Digitaleingänge.

ACHTUNG!: 60 Analoger Sollwerteingang, Strom 0/4-20

Beachten Sie bitte, daß in der Stellung Aus des mA
Schalters 4 eine externe 24-V DC-Versorgung
61 Abschluß für serielle Kommunikation. Siehe
zur Ansteuerung der VLT-Digitaleingänge
Abschnitt Busanschluß. Dieser Anschluß
galvanisch vom Frequenzumrichter getrennt ist.
wird normalerweise nicht benutzt.

68, 69 Schnittstelle RS 485, serielle

■ Installation der Steuerkabel Kommunikation. Wird der
Anzugsmoment: 0,5 -0,6 Nm VLT-Frequenzumrichter an einen Bus
Schraubengröße: M3 angeschlossen, so müssen am ersten und
Siehe Abschnitt Erdung abgeschirmter Steuerkabel. letzten VLT-Frequenzumrichter die Schalter
2 und 3 (Schalter 1- 4) geschlossen sein.
Bei den übrigen VLT-Frequenzumrichtern
müssen die Schalter 2 und 3 offen sein.
Die Werkseinstellung ist die geschlossene
Position ("EIN").

66 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Elektrische Installation

Installation

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 67

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Hinweise zum Bedienfeld

An der Vorderseite des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
befindet sich ein Bedienfeld, LCP (Local Control Panel),
das eine komplette Schnittstelle für die Bedienung und
Programmierung des VLT Serie 5000 darstellt.
Das Bedienfeld ist abnehmbar und kann mit Hilfe
eines zugehörigen Montagebausatzes alternativ auch
bis zu 3 m vom VLT-Frequenzumrichter entfernt, z.B.
in einer Schaltschranktür, angebracht werden. Das
Bedienfeld ist in drei Gruppen aufgeteilt:

• Display
• Tasten zum Ändern der Programmparameter
• Tasten für Ort-Betrieb

Alle Datenanzeigen erfolgen über ein vierzeiliges

alphanumerisches Display, das im Normalbetrieb
ständig vier Betriebsvariablen und drei
Betriebszustände anzeigen kann. Während
des Programmiervorgangs werden alle Informationen
angezeigt, die für eine schnelle und effektive
Einstellung des Frequenzumrichters erforderlich
sind. Als Ergänzung zum Display gibt es drei
Leuchtanzeigen, und zwar für Spannungswert (Netz
oder 24 V extern), Warnung und Alarm.
Alle Programmparameter des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
sind unmittelbar über das Bedienfeld änderbar,
es sei denn, diese Funktion wurde über den
Parameter 018 gesperrt.

■ Das Display
Die 2. Zeile zeigt unabhängig vom Zustand (außer bei
Das Display ist hintergrundbeleuchtet, mit insgesamt
Alarm oder Warnung) ständig eine Betriebsvariable
vier alphanumerischen Zeilen und einem Feld
mit der entsprechenden Einheit an.
zum Anzeigen der Drehrichtung (Pfeil) sowie des
aktuellen Parametersatzes (Setup), außerdem
Anzeige des Parametersatzes, in dem der
Anwender evt. programmiert.
175ZA443.10

1. Zeile 12345678901234567890

2. Zeile

2. Zeile
12345678
12345678901234567890
SETUP

3. Zeile 12345678901234567890

Die 1. Zeile zeigt im normalen Betriebszustand

ständig bis zu drei Meßwerte bzw. einen Text
zur Erläuterung der 2. Zeile an.

68 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Unter den Leuchtanzeigen befinden sich die

Tasten für Ort-Betrieb.
Die 3. Zeile ist normalerweise leer und dient
im Menümodus zur Anzeige der gewählten
Parameternummer oder Parametergruppennnummer
und -namen.

VLT-Frequenzumrichters
Die 4. Zeile dient im Betriebszustand zur Anzeige

Hinweise zum Betrieb

eines Zustandstextes oder im Datenänderungsmodus
zur Anzeige des Zustandes oder Wertes des ■ Funktion der Bedientasten
gewählten Parameters.

des
[DISPLAY / STATUS] dient zur Wahl der
Die Drehrichtung des Motors wird durch einen Pfeil Displayanzeigeart oder zum Zurückwechseln
angezeigt. Außerdem Anzeige des in Parameter auf Displaymodus, entweder aus dem
004 als aktiv gewählten Parametersatzes. Bei Schnellmenümodus oder dem Menümodus.
Programmierung eines anderen Satzes als dem [QUICK MENU] dient zum Programmieren der
aktiven Satz, wird die Nummer des programmierten zum Schnellmenümodus gehörigen Parameter.
Satzes rechts angezeigt. Diese zweite Satznummer Es kann direkt zwischen Schnellmenümodus und
wird blinkend angezeigt. Menümodus gewechselt werden.
[MENU] dient zum Programmieren sämtlicher
Parameter. Es kann direkt zwischen Menümodus
und Schnell-menümodus gewechselt werden.
■ LEDs [CHANGE DATA] dient zum Ändern des im
Ganz unten im Bedienfeld gibt es eine rote Menümodus oder Schnellmenümodus gewählten
Alarmleuchte und eine gelbe Warnleuchte sowie eine Parameters.
grüne Leuchte zur Anzeige der Spannung. [CANCEL] wird benutzt, wenn eine Änderung des
gewählten Parameters nicht ausgeführt werden
soll.
[OK] dient zum Bestätigen einer Änderung eines
Bei Überschreitung bestimmter Grenzwerte wird die
gewählten Parameters.
Alarm- und/oder Warnleuchte zusammen mit einem
[+/-] dient zur Wahl des Parameters sowie zur
Zustands- und Alarmtext im Bedienfeld aktiviert.
Änderung des gewählten Parameters bzw. zum
Die Versorgungsspannungsdiode leuchtet, wenn am Ändern der Sichtanzeige in Zeile 2.
VLT-Frequenzumrichter Spannung oder eine externe
24-V-Versorgung anliegt; gleichzeitig ist auch die
Hintergrundbeleuchtung des Displays eingeschaltet.

■ Bedientasten
Die Bedientasten sind nach Funktionen aufgeteilt,
wobei die Tasten zwischen dem Display und den
Leuchtanzeigen für alle Parametereinstellungen
einschl. der Auswahl der Displayanzeige im
Normalbetrieb benutzt werden.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 69

 VLT® Serie 5000

[<>] dient zur Wahl der Parametergruppe sowie

bei Änderung numerischer Parameter. VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3
[STOP / RESET] dient zum Anhalten des
angeschlossenen Motors oder zum Quittieren VAR 2 SETUP

1
(Reset) des VLT-Fre-quenzumrichters nach einer
Störung (Trip). Kann über Parameter 014 aktiv STATUS
oder inaktiv geschaltet werden. Bei Aktivierung der
Stoppfunktion blinkt Zeile 2, und es muß [START]
betätigt werden.
[JOG] hebt die Ausgangsfrequenz zugunsten einer ■ Displaymodus – Wahl des Anzeigezustandes
voreingestellten Frequenz auf, während die Taste Im Zusammenhang mit der Wahl des Anzeigezustandes
gedrückt gehalten wird. Kann über Parameter 015 im Displaymodus gibt es drei Möglichkeiten: I, II und
aktiv oder inaktiv geschaltet werden. III. Die Wahl des Anzeigezustandes bestimmt die
[FWD / REV] dient zum Wechseln der Drehrichtung Wahl der ausgegebenen Betriebsvariablen.
des Motors. Diese wird durch den Pfeil im Display
Anzeigezus- I: II: III:
angezeigt, jedoch nur im Ort-Betrieb. Kann
tand:
über Parameter 016 aktiv oder inaktiv geschaltet
werden. Zeile 1 Parameter- Datenwert für Parameter-

[START] dient zum Starten des VLT- name für Be- 3 Betriebsvari- name für 3

Frequenzumrichters oder zum Anhalten über die triebsvariable in able in Zeile 1 Betriebsvari-

[Stop]-Taste. Ist immer aktiv, kann jedoch einen Zeile 2 able in Zeile 1

über die Klemm- reihe erteilten Stoppbefehl nicht

aufheben. Die nachstehende Übersicht gibt an, welche
Einheiten den Variablen in der ersten und zweiten
ACHTUNG!: Zeile des Displays zugeordnet sind.
Wenn die Tasten für Ort-Steuerung aktiv
geschaltet wurden, sind sie sowohl aktiv, wenn
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter auf Ort-Betrieb
eingestellt ist, als auch wenn er über Parameter 002
auf Fernbedienung eingestellt ist, ausgenommen
[FWD/REV], der nur im Ort-Betrieb aktiv ist.

ACHTUNG!:
Wenn keine externe Stoppfunktion gewählt und
die [STOP]-Taste inaktiv geschaltet wurde, kann
der Motor gestartet und nur durch Unterbrechen
der Spannung zum Motor angehalten werden.

■ Anzeigezustände des Displays

Das Display hat mehrere verschiedene
Anzeigezu-stände - siehe Liste unten - je nachdem,
ob der VLT-Frequenzumrichter im Normalbetrieb
arbeitet oder sich im Programmiermodus befindet.

■ Displaymodus
Im Normalbetrieb können nach Wahl bis zu
vier ver-schiedene Betriebsvariablen angezeigt
werden, 1,1 und 1,2 und 1,3 und 2, sowie in
Zeile 4 der augen-blickliche Betriebszustand oder
eingetretene Alarm- und Warnzustände.

70 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Betriebsvariable: Einheit:
Sollwert [%] • Anzeigezustand I:
Sollwert [Einheit] Dieser Anzeigezustand ist Standard nach
Istwert [Einheit] Inbetriebnahme oder Initialisierung.
Frequenz [Hz]

VLT-Frequenzumrichters
Frequenz x Skalierung [-] FREQUENZ

Hinweise zum Betrieb

Motorstrom [A]
Drehmoment [%] 50.0 Hz
Leistung [kW]

des
Leistung [PS] BETRIEB
Ausgangsenergie [kWh]
Motorspannung [V]
Hier erscheint in Zeile 2 der Datenwert der
Zwischenkreisspannung [V]
Betriebsvariablen mit der dazugehörigen Einheit. In
Thermische Belastung des Motors [%] Zeile 1 erscheint ein Text zur Erläuterung von Zeile 2,
Thermische Belastung des VLT [%] vgl. Übersicht. Im Beispiel wurde über Parameter 009
Betriebsstunden [Stunden] die Frequenz als Variable gewählt. Im Normalbetrieb
Zustand digitaler Eingang [Binärcode] kann eine andere Variable durch Betätigen der Tasten
Zustand analoger Eingang, Klemme 53 [V] [+/-] unmittelbar ausgegeben werden.
Zustand analoger Eingang, Klemme 54 [V]
• Anzeigezustand II:
Zustand analoger Eingang, Klemme 60 [mA]
Wechsel zwischen Anzeigezustand I und II durch
Pulssollwert [Hz] Betätigen der Taste [DISPLAY / STATUS].
Ext. Sollwert [%]
Zustandswort [Hex]
24,3% 30,2% 13,8A
Bremsleistung/2 min [kW]
Bremsleistung/s
Kühlkörpertemp.
[kW]
[ºC]
50.0 Hz
Alarmwort [Hex] BETRIEB
Steuerwort [Hex]
Warnwort 1 [Hex]
Erweitertes Zustandswort [Hex] In diesem Zustand erscheinen sämtliche Datenwerte
Kommunikationsoptionskarte Warnung [Hex]
für vier Betriebsvariablen mit der dazugehörigen
Einheit, vgl. Übersicht. Im Beispiel wurden jeweils
UPM [min-1 ]
Sollwert, Drehmoment und Strom und Frequenz als
Upm x Skalierung [ - ]
Variablen in der ersten und zweiten Zeile gewählt.

Betriebsvariable 1.1, 1.2 und 1.3 in der ersten Zeile • Anzeigezustand III:
und Betriebsvariable 2 in der zweiten Zeile werden Dieser Anzeigezustand wird aufgerufen, solange die
über Parameter 009, 010, 011 und 012 gewählt. Taste [DISPLAY / STATUS] gedrückt gehalten wird.
Bei Loslassen der Taste erfolgt ein Wechsel zurück
auf Anzeigezustand II, es sei denn, die Taste wurde
kürzer als ca. 1 Sek. lang gehalten - in diesem Fall
wird immer auf Anzeigezustand I zurückgewechselt.

REF% MOMENT% STROM

50.0 Hz SETUP

BETRIEB

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 71

 VLT® Serie 5000

Hier werden die Parameterbezeichnungen und ■ Struktur des Schnellmenümodus gegenüber

Einheiten der Betriebsvariablen in der ersten dem Menümodus
und zweiten Zeile ausgegeben. Betriebsvariable Außer einer Bezeichnung - einem Namen - ist
2 bleibt unverändert. jedem Parameter eine Nummer zugeordnet, die
• Anzeigezustand IV: unabhängig von der Programmierungsart immer
Dieser Anzeigezustand kann während des gleich ist. Im Menümodus sind die Parameter
Betriebs aufgerufen werden, wenn in einem in Gruppen aufgeteilt, wobei die 1. Stelle der
anderen Parametersatz Änderungen vorgenommen Parameternummer (von links) die Gruppennummer
werden müssen, ohne den Frequenzumrichter des betreffenden Parameters angibt.
anzuhalten. Die Funktion wird in Parameter 005 • Das Schnellmenü führt den Benutzer durch eine
Parametersatz Programm aktiviert. Anzahl Parameter, die in vielen Anwendungsfällen
ausreichen, um einen einwandfreien Motorbetrieb
24,3% 30,2% 13,8A zu gewährleisten. Alle übrigen Parameter befinden
sich in der Werkseinstellung bzw. müssen ggf.
50.0 Hz nach einer vorherigen Änderung wieder auf die
Werkseinstellung programmiert werden.
BETRIEB • Der Menümodus ermöglicht die Anwahl und
Änderung sämtlicher Parameter nach eigener Wahl.
Allerdings werden je nach gewählter Konfiguration
Die Nummer des gewählten Programmiersatzes (Parameter 100) einige Parameter "ausgeblendet".
blinkt rechts vom aktiven Satz.

■ Schnellkonfiguration mit Hilfe des Schnellmenüs

■ Parametersatzwahl Das Schnellmenü wird durch Betätigen der
Die VLT Serie 5000 kann praktisch für alle Taste [QUICK MENU] gestartet, woraufhin im
anfallen-den Aufgaben eingesetzt werden, weshalb Display folgendes erscheint:
die An-zahl der Parameter auch recht hoch ist. Aus
diesem Grund besteht die Möglichkeit, zwischen
QUICK MENU 1von 13
zwei Pro-grammierungsarten zu wählen: einem
Menümodus und einem Schnellmenümodus.
Beim Menümodus besteht Zugriff auf sämtliche
50.0 HZ
001 SPRACHE
Parameter. Der Schnellmenümodus führt den
DEUTSCH
Benutzer durch die Parameter, die es ihm nach der
Parametersatzwahl in den meisten Fällen ermöglichen,
den VLT-Frequenzumrichter in Betrieb zu nehmen. In der untersten Zeile werden Parameterbezeichnung
Unabhängig von der Programmierungsart wird und -nummer sowie Status / Wert des ersten
die Änderung eines Parameters durchgehend Parameters beim Schnellmenü angezeigt. Bei
und damit sowohl im Menümodus als auch im erstmaligem Betätigen der [Schnellmenü-]Taste
Schnellmenü- menümodus wirksam sein. nach dem Einschalten des Gerätes beginnen
die Sichtanzeigen stets mit der Pos. 1 -
siehe Tabelle unten.

72 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Gruppennr. Parametergruppe:
■ Parameterwahl
0 Bedienung und Anzeige
Diese erfolgt mit Hilfe der Tasten [+/-]. Folgende
1 Motoranpassung
Parameter sind verfügbar:
2 Soll- und Grenzwerte
Pos.: Nr.: Parameter: Ein- 3 Ein- und Ausgänge
heit:

VLT-Frequenzumrichters
4 Sonderfunktionen

Hinweise zum Betrieb

1 001 Sprache
5 Serielle Kommunikation
2 102 Motorleistung [kW]]
6 Technische Funktionen
3 103 Motorspannung [V]
7 Anwendungsoptionen

des
4 104 Motorfrequenz [Hz]
8 Feldbusprofil
5 105 Motorstrom [A]
9 Feldbuskommunikation
6 106 Motornenndrehzahl [U/Min]
7 107 Automatische Motoranpassung,
Nachdem die gewünschte Parametergruppe gewählt
AMA
wurde, kann jeder einzelne Parameter mit den
8 204 Minimaler Sollwert [Hz]
[+ / -] Tasten gewählt werden:
9 205 Maximaler Sollwert [Hz]
10 207 Rampenzeit auf 1 [Sek]
FREQUENZ
11 208 Rampenzeit ab 1 [Sek]
12
13
002
003
Ort-/Fernbedienung
Sollwert Ort
50.0 Hz SETUP

1
001 SPRACHE
DEUTSCH

■ Menümodus In der dritten Zeile des Displays erscheinen

Dieser wird durch Betätigen der Taste [MENU] Parameternummer und bezeichnung; der
gestartet, woraufhin im Display folgendes erscheint: Status bzw. Wert des gewählten Parameters
erscheint in der vierten Zeile.
FREQUENZ

50.0 Hz SETUP

1 ■ Ändern von Daten

0 VOR ORT/ANZEIGE Unabhängig davon, ob ein Parameter im Schnell-
oder im normalen Menümodus aufgerufen
wurde, ist die Vorgehensweise zum Ändern von
Daten die gleiche. Durch Betätigen der Taste
In der 3. Zeile des Displays werden [CHANGE DATA] wird die Änderung des gewählten
Parametergrup-pennummer und -name angezeigt. Parameters ermöglicht, woraufhin der Unterstrich
des Parameters in Zeile 4 blinkt.
Die Vorgehensweise bei der Datenänderung hängt
■ Parameterwahl davon ab, ob der gewählte Parameter einen
Im Menümodus sind die Parameter nach Gruppen numerischen Datenwert oder einen Textwert enthält.
aufgeteilt. Die Wahl der Parametergruppe
erfolgt mit den Tasten [<>].
Folgende Parametergruppen sind verfügbar: ■ Ändern eines Textwertes
Handelt es sich bei dem gewählten Parameter
um einen Textwert, so ist dieser Textwert über
die Tasten [+ / -] änderbar.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 73

 VLT® Serie 5000

FREQUENZ FREQUENZ

50.0 Hz SETUP

1 50.0 Hz SETUP

1
001 SPRACHE 130 START FREQ
DEUTSCH 10,0 HZ

In der untersten Zeile des Displays erscheint Der gewählte Datenwert (ziffer) wird blinkend
der Textwert, der beim Quittieren mit [OK] angezeigt. In der untersten Displayzeile erscheint
abgespeichert wird. der Datenwert, der eingelesen (gespeichert) wird,
wenn mit [OK] quittiert wird.

■ Ändern einer Gruppe numerischer Datenwerte

Stellt der gewählte Parameter einen numerischen ■ Stufenweises Ändern eines Datenwertes
Datenwert dar, so ist der gewählte Datenwert Bestimmte Parameter lassen sich stufenweise
mit den Tasten [+ / -] zu ändern: und stufenlos ändern. Dies gilt für Motorleistung
(Parameter 102), Motorspannung (Parameter 103),
und Motorfrequenz (Parameter 104).
FREQUENZ
Anders ausgedrückt: Diese Parameter sind sowohl

50.0 HZ
102 MOTORLEISTUNG
als Gruppe numerischer Datenwerte als auch als
numerischer Datenwert - stufenlos - änderbar.

0,37 kW

FREQUENZ

50.0 HZ
102 MOTORLEISTUNG
0,55 kW

Der gewählte Datenwert wird blinkend angezeigt.

In der untersten Displayzeile erscheint der
Datenwert, der eingelesen (gespeichert) wird,
wenn mit [OK] quittiert wird.

■ Stufenloses Ändern eines numerischen

Datenwertes
Stellt der gewählte Parameter einen numerischen
Datenwert dar, so ist zunächst eine Ziffer mit
den Tasten [< >] zu wählen.

FREQUENZ

50.0 Hz
130 START FREQ
09,0 HZ

und danach die gewählte Ziffer mit den

Tasten [+ / -] zu ändern:

74 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Anzeige und Programmierung indizierter Parameter

Parameter werden indiziert, wenn sie in einen
durchlaufenden Stapel gestellt werden.
Die Parameter 615 bis 617 umfassen ein Protokoll
früherer Daten, die ausgelesen werden können.
Dazu den aktuellen Parameter auswählen, die Taste

VLT-Frequenzumrichters
[CHANGE DATA] drücken und mit den Tasten [+]

Hinweise zum Betrieb

und [-] durch das Werte-Protokoll blättern. Beim
Auslesen blinkt Zeile 4 der Anzeige.

des
Wenn eine Busoption integriert ist, muß die
Programmierung der Parameter 915 - 916 wie
folgt durchgeführt werden:

Den aktuellen Parameter auswählen, die Taste

[CHANGE DATA] drücken und mit den Tasten [+] und
[-] durch die verschiedenen indzierten Werte blättern.
Zum Ändern des Parameterwerts den indizierten
Wert auswählen und die Taste [CHANGE DATA]
drücken. Beim Drücken der Tasten [+] und [-] blinkt
der zu ändernde Wert. Die neue Einstellung mit [OK]
bestätigen; zum Abbrechen auf [CANCEL] drücken.

■ Manuelle Initialisierung
Unterbrechen Sie die Netzspannung und halten
Sie die folgenden Tasten gedrückt:

[Display/Status]
[Change data]
[OK]

Gleichzeitig die Netzspannung wieder einschalten.

Tasten loslassen; der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist nun
in der Werkseinstellung programmiert.

Folgende Parameter werden bei der manuellen

Initialisierung nicht auf Null zurückgesetzt:
Parameter 600, Betriebsstunden
601, Motorlaufstunden
602, kWh-Zähler
603, Anzahl Netzeinschaltungen
604, Anzahl Übertemperaturen
605, Anzahl Überspannungen

Eine Initialisierung über Parameter 620 ist

ebenfalls möglich.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 75

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Displaymodus

DISPLAYMODUS

VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3

▲
VAR 2 SETUP

STATUS

▲ ▲

MENÜMODUS SCHNELLMENÜMODUS

FREQUENZ QUICK MENU 1von 13

50.0 HZ SETUP

1 50.0 HZ SETUP

1
▲

0 VOR ORT/ANZEIGE 001 SPRACHE

DEUTSCH

Wahl des Wahl der

Parameters Gruppe
DATENMODUS

FREQUENZ

50.0 HZ
001 SPRACHE
SETUP

DEUTSCH
▲ ▲

▲
DATENÄNDERUNGSMODUS DATENÄNDERUNGSMODUS

FREQUENZ QUICK MENU 1von 13

50.0 HZ
001 SPRACHE
SETUP

1 50.0 HZ
001 SPRACHE
SETUP

DEUTSCH Wahl des DEUTSCH

Datenwertes

175ZA446.11

76 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Anwendung Konfiguration
Mit diesem Parameter kann die Konfiguration Es kann zwischen folgenden Konfigurationen
(Einstellung) des VLT-Frequenzumrichters gewählt gewählt werden:
werden, die für die jeweilige Anwendung des
VLT-Frequenzumrichters geeignet ist. - Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung
- Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung
ACHTUNG!: - Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Zuvor müssen die Typenschilddaten des Motors - Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung
in Parameter 102-106 eingestellt werden. - Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung
Die Wahl der besonderen Motorkennlinien kann mit den
Konfigurationen aller Anwendungen kombiniert werden.

■ Einstellen der Parameter Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in der genannten

Wählen Sie Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung, Reihenfolge ein:
wenn eine normale Drehzahlsteuerung ohne externes

Anwendung Konfiguration
Istwertsignal (jedoch mit Schlupfausgleich) vom
Motor oder der Anlage gewünscht wird.

Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung:

Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehzahlregelung, [0]
Istwertrückführung
200 Ausgangsfrequenzbereich/-
richtung
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig Nur falls [0] oder [2] in Param.
200
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
204 Minimaler Sollwert Nur falls [0] in Par. 203
205 Maximaler Sollwert

Wählen Sie Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung,

wenn die Anwendung ein Istwertsignal beinhaltet
und die Genauigkeit von Drehzahlregelung ohne
Istwertrückführungnicht ausreichend ist oder volles
Haltemoment gewünscht wird.
Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in der genannten
Reihenfolge ein:

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 77

 VLT® Serie 5000

Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung (PID):

Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehzahlregelung mit [1]
Istwertrückführung
200 Ausgangsfrequenzbereich/- Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig
richtung
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
414 Minimaler Istwert Nur wenn [0] oder [2] in Param.
200
415 Maximaler Istwert
204 Minimaler Sollwert Nur falls [0] in Par. 203
205 Maximaler Sollwert
417 Drehzahl PID Proportionalver-
stärkung
418 Drehzahl PID Integrationszeit
419 Drehzahl PID Differentiationszeit
420 Drehzahl PID Diff.verstärk.grenze
421 Drehzahl PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit

Achten Sie bitte darauf, dass die Encoder-

Verlustfunktion (Parameter 346) aktiv ist, wenn
Parameter 100 auf Drehzahlregelung und
Istwertrückführung eingestellt ist.

78 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Wählen Sie Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung, sondern zu einer anderen Einheit hat, z.B. Temperatur,
wenn die Anwendung ein Istwertsignal hat, das Druck o.ä. Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in
keinen direkten Bezug zur Motordrehzahl (rpm/Hz), der angegebenen Reihenfolge ein:

Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung (Prozeß PID):

Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Prozeßregelung mit [3]
Istwertrückführung
200 Ausgangsfrequenzbereich/-
richtung
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
414 Minimaler Istwert Nur wenn [0] oder [2] in Param.
200

Anwendung Konfiguration
415 Maximaler Istwert
204 Minimaler Sollwert Nur falls [0] in Par. 203
205 Maximaler Sollwert
416 Prozeßeinheiten
437 Prozeß PID normal/invers
Regelung
438 Prozeß PID Anti Windup
439 Prozeß PID Startfrequenz
440 Prozeß PID Proportionalver-
stärkung
441 Prozeß PID Integrationszeit
442 Prozeß PID Differentiationszeit
443 Prozeß PID Diff. verstärk.grenze
444 Prozeß PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit

Wählen Sie Drehmomentregelung ohne

Istwertrückführung, wenn eine PI-Regelung
Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung , ist
gewünscht wird, die zur Aufrechterhaltung
zu wählen, wenn die Drehzahlrichtung während
des Drehmomentsollwertes (Nm) die
des Betriebs nicht geändert werden soll, d.h. es
Motorfrequenz ändert (Nm).
wird konstant mit einem positiven oder negativen
Dies ist bei Anwendungen relevant, bei denen
Drehmomentsollwert gefahren.
aufgerollt (winders) und extrudiert (extruders) wird.
Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in der genannten
Reihenfolge ein:

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 79

 VLT® Serie 5000

Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung:

Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehmomentregelung ohne [4]
Istwertrückführung
200 Ausgangsfrequenzbereich/-
richtung
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
204 Minimaler Sollwert Nur falls [0] in Par. 203
205 Maximaler Sollwert
414 Minimaler Istwert
415 Maximaler Istwert
433 Moment-Proportionalverstärkung
434 Moment-Integrationszeit

80 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung

ist zu wählen, wenn ein Drehgeberistwertsignal
Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung ist zu
generiert werden soll. Dies ist bei Anwendungen
wählen, wenn die Drehzahlrichtung bei gleichzeitiger
relevant, bei denen aufgerollt (Wickler) bzw.
Beibehaltung des Drehmomentsollwertes
extrudiert (Extruder) wird.
änderbar sein soll.
Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in der genannten
Reihenfolge ein:

Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung:

Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehmomentregelung mit [5]
Drehzahlrückführung
200 Ausgangsfrequenzbereich/-
richtung

Anwendung Konfiguration
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
204 Minimaler Sollwert Nur falls [0] in Par. 203
205 Maximaler Sollwert
414 Minimaler Istwert
415 Maximaler Istwert
306 Istwert Drehgeber, Eingang B [24]
307 Istwert Drehgeber, Eingang A [25]
329 Sollwert Endcoder Puls/Umdreh.
421 Drehzahl PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit
448 Drehzahlverhältnis
447 Drehmomentregelung mit
Drehzahlrückführung
449 Reibungsverlust

Nach dem Einrichten von Drehmomentregelung mit 2. Motor mit positivem Drehmomentsollwert
Drehzahlrückführung ,sollte der VLT-Frequenzumrichter und positiver Drehrichtung anfahren lassen.
kalibriert werden, so daß das aktuelle Drehmoment Drehmomentmesser ablesen.
dem des VLT-Frequenzumrichters entspricht. Dies 3. Mit dem gleichen Drehmomentsollwert die
erfordert die Montage eines Drehmomentmessers an Drehrichtung in negativ ändern. Drehmoment
der Welle, damit Parameter 447 Drehmomentausgleich ablesen und auf das gleiche Moment einstellen
, und Parameter 449, Reibungsverlust exakt wie bei positivem Drehmomentsollwert und
eingestellt werden können. Es empfiehlt sich, positiver Drehrichtung. Dies kann mit Hilfe des
vor der Drehmomentkalibrierung eine AMA Parameters 449 Reibungsverlust erfolgen.
durchzuführen. Führen Sie vor Inbetriebnahme der 4. Bei warmem Motor und ca. 50% Last, Parameter
Anlage bitte folgende Schritte durch: 447, Drehmomentausgeleich so einstellen, dass er
mit dem Drehmomentmesser übereinstimmt. Der
1. Drehmomentmesser an der Welle montieren. VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist nun betriebsbereit.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 81

 VLT® Serie 5000

Besondere Motorkennlinien Sondermotormodus) sind Stellen Sie folgende Parameter in der genannten
zu wählen, wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter für Reihenfolge ein:
Synchronmotoren oder Parallelmotorbetrieb angepaßt
werden soll. Der Schlupfausgleich ist nicht aktiv.

Besondere Motorkennlinien:
Parame- Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
101 Drehmomentkennlinie Besondere Motorkennlinien [5] oder [15]
432 + 431 F5 Frequenz/U5 Spannung
430 + 429 F4 Frequenz/U4 Spannung
428 + 427 F3 Frequenz/U3 Spannung
426 + 425 F2 Frequenz/U2 Spannung
424 + 423 F1 Frequenz/U1 Spannung
422 U0 Spannung

82 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Wechsel zwischen Ort-Betrieb und Fernbedienung Nachfolgend eine Übersicht über die Möglichkeiten
Es gibt für den VLT-Frequenzumrichter zwei (die Tasten des Bedienfeldes, Eingabe über
verschiedene Bedienungsmöglichkeiten: Ort-Betrieb die digitalen Eingänge oder über die serielle
oder Fernbedienung. Kommunikationsschnittstelle).

Bei Einstellung von Parameter 002 auf Ort [1]:

Auf dem Bedienfeld können folgende Bedientasten für Ort-Betrieb benutzt werden:
Taste: Parameter: Datenwert:

[STOP] 014 [1] Enable

[JOG] 015 [1] Enable
[RESET] 017 [1] Enable
[FWD/REV] 016 [1] Enable

Parameter 013 auf Ort ohne Schlupf [1] oder Ort Betrieb/wie Parameter 100 [3] einstellen:

1.Sollwert Ort in Parameter 003 einstellen; ist mit den Tasten "+/-" änderbar.
2. Reversierung ist über die Taste [Fwd/Rev] möglich.

Parameter 013 auf Ort digitale Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation [2] oder digitalen Ort Betrieb/wie Parameter
100 [4] einstellen:

Bei obiger Parametereinstellung kann der 9. Quittieren und Freilaufstopp über digitale
VLT-Frequenzumrichter nun über folgende Klemme 27.
Digitaleingänge gesteuert werden 10. Freilaufstopp über digitale Klemme 27.

Sonderfunktionen
Digitaleingänge: 11. Reversierung über digitale Klemme 19.
12. Parametersatzwahl msb/Drehzahl auf über
1. Sollwert Ort in Parameter 003 einstellen; ist digitale Klemme 32.
mit den Tasten "+/-" änderbar. 13. Parametersatzwahl lsb/Drehzahl ab über
2. Quittieren über digitale Klemme 16, 17, digitale Klemme 33.
29, 32 oder 33.
3. Stopp invers über digitale Klemme 16, 17, Die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle:
27, 29, 32 oder 33.
4. Parametersatzwahl lsb über digitale Klemme 1. Rampe 2
16, 29 oder 32. 2. Quittieren
5. Parametersatzwahl msb über digitale 3. Parametersatzwahl, lsb
Klemme 17, 29 oder 33. 4. Parametersatzwahl, msb
6. Rampe 2 über digitale Klemme 16, 17, 5. Relais 01
29, 32 oder 33. 6. Relais 04
7. Schnellstopp über digitale Klemme 27.
8. DC-Bremse über digitale Klemme 27.

Bei Einstellung von Parameter 002 auf Fern [0]:

Taste: Parameter: Datenwert:

[STOP] 014 [1]

[JOG] 015 [1]
[RESET] 017 [1]

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 83

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Steuerung mit Bremsfunktion

Aufgabe des integrierten Bremschoppers (Option) ist Der AZ des Widerstandes wird wie folgt berechnet:
es, die Spannung im VLT-Zwischenkreis zu begrenzen,
wenn der Motor als Generator arbeitet. Dies ist z.B.
dann der Fall, wenn die Last den Motor antreibt und
Spannung in den VLT-Zwischenkreis zugeführt wird
(z.b. bei Hub- und Senkanwendungen). wobei t2-t1 = Zyklusdauer in Sekunden und tb ist die
Für den Betrieb des Bremschoppers muß ein Bremszeit in Sekunden (von der Zyklusdauer).
externer Bremswiderstand angeschlossen werden.
Die maximal zulässige Belastung des
Die externe Anordnung des Bremswiderstandes
Bremswiderstandes wird als Leistungsspitze
bietet folgende Vorteile:
bei einem gegebenen AZ ausgedrückt. Daher müssen
- Der Bremswiderstand kann aufgrund der jeweiligen die Leistungsspitze des Bremswiderstandes und
Anwendung gewählt werden. der Widerstands- wert bestimmt werden.
- Die Bremsleistung (Wärme) wird außerhalb des Folgendes Beispiel einschl. Formel ist nur auf VLT
Schaltschrankes abgegeben (bei externer Montage Serie 5000 anwendbar: Die Spitzenlast läßt sich
z.b. auf dem Schaltschrankdach). nur aufgrund des höchsten Bremswiderstandes, mit
- Die Elektronik des VLT-Frequenzumrichters wird im dem gebremst werden soll, berechnen:
Falle einer Überlastung des Bremswiderstandes
PSPITZE = PMOTOR x MBR(%) x ηMOTOR x ηVLT [W]
nicht überlastet.
, wobei MBR(%) als prozentualer Wert des
Der Bremschopper wird auf Kurzschluß überwacht.
Nenndrehmoments ausgedrückt ist.
Die Relais bzw. digitalen Ausgänge können so
Der Bremswiderstand wird wie folgt berechnet:
programmiert werden, daß bei einer Überlastung des
Bremswiderstandes eine Meldung erfolgt.
Die Bremsfunktion ermöglicht außerdem die
Ausgabe der augenblicklichen Bremsleistung und
der durchschnittlichen Bremsleistung während
der letzten 120 Sekunden; außerdem läßt sich Man erkennt, daß der Bremswiderstand von der
überwachen, ob die Bremsleistung die in Parameter Zwischenkreisspannung (UDC) abhängig ist.
402 programmierbare Überwachungsgrenze Bei VLT Serie 5000 Frequenzwandler mit einer
überschreitet. In Parameter 403 wird die Funktion Versorgungsspannung von 3 x 200 -240 Volt, wird die
gewählt, die ausgeführt werden soll, wenn die Bremse bei 397 Volt (UDC) aktiv. Bei VLT Serie 5000
Leistungsübertragung an den Bremswiderstand die in Frequenzumrichtern mit einer Netzspannung von 3 x
Parameter 402 festgelegte Grenze überschreitet. 380-500 V wird die Bremse bei 822 V (UDC) aktiv; bei
Frequenzumrichtern mit einer Netzspannung von 3
ACHTUNG!: x 550-600 V geschieht dies bei 943 V (UDC).
Die Überwachung der Bremsleistung stellt
keine Sicherheitsfunktion dar. Hierfür ist ACHTUNG!:
ein Thermoschutzschalter erforderlich. Prüfen Sie, ob Ihr Bremswiderstand eine
Der Bremswiderstandskreis ist nicht gegen Spannung von 850 V bzw. 430 V aushält, wenn
Erdableitströme geschützt. Sie keine Danfoss-Bremswiderstände einsetzen.

RREC ist der von Danfoss empfohlene

■ Wahl des Bremswiderstandes Bremswiderstand, bei dem der Anwender sicher sein
Die Auswahl des richtigen Bremswiderstandes kann, daß der Frequenzumrichter mit dem höchsten
setzt eingehende Kenntnisse über die Anwendung Bremsmoment (Mbr ) von 160% abbremsen kann.
voraus, d.h. man muß wissen, wie häufig und mit ηmotor liegt normalerweise bei 0,90, ηVLT hingegen
welcher Leistung gebremst werden soll. normalerweise bei 0,98. Bei 200 V, 500 V und 600
V VLT-Frequenzumrichtern kann RREC bei 160%
Der von den Motorlieferanten zur Angabe der Bremsmoment wie folgt berechnet werden:
zulässigen Belastung häufig benutzte AZ des
Widerstandes gibt den Arbeitszyklus an, mit
dem der Widerstand arbeitet.

84 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

ACHTUNG!:
Der ausgewählte, maximale Bremswiderstand
muss einen Ohmwert haben, der max. 10%
niedriger als der von Danfoss empfohlene
Wert liegt. Wird ein Bremswiderstand mit
einem höheren Ohmwert gewählt, so wird kein
Bremsmoment von 160% erzielt, und es kann
passieren, daß der VLT 5000 aus Sicherheitsgründen
abschaltet. Für weitere Angaben wird auf die
Bremsinstruktion MI.50.Dx.xx verwiesen.

ACHTUNG!:
Wenn es im Bremstransistor zu einem
Kurzschluß kommt, kann ein Leistungsverlust
im Bremswiderstand nur verhindert werden,
indem ein Netzschalter oder Schütz zur Unterbrechung
der Netzversorgung zum VLT benutzt wird. (Der
Schütz kann vom VLT gesteuert werden).

Sonderfunktionen

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 85

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Verarbeitung von Einzelsollwerten

Bei Einzelsollwerten ist nur ein aktives Sollwertsignal
angeschlossen entweder als externes oder als U/l an Klemme 53,
Festsollwertsignal (intern). 54 oder 60 f (Puls)
Extern können sein: Spannung, Strom Frequenz an Klemme 17 oder
(Puls) oder binär über die serielle Schnittstelle. 29 binär (serielle
Im folgenden werden zwei Beispiele gezeigt, die / Extern Schnittstelle).
verdeutlichen, wie die Einzelsollwerte vom VLT
Einzelsollw.
Serie 5000 verarbeitet werden.
\ Festsollwerte (Par. 215-218)
Beispiel 1:
Externes Sollwertsignal = 1 V (min) - 5 V (max)
Sollwert = 5 Hz - 50 Hz
Konfiguration (Parameter 100) - Drehzahlregelung
ohne Istwertrückführung.

Einstellung:
Parame-
Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung [0]
308 Funktion Analogeing. Sollwert [1]
309 Min. Sollwertsignal Min. 1V
310 Max. Sollwertsignal Max. 5V
203 Sollwertbereich Sollwertbereich Min - Max [0]
204 Mindestsollwert Sollwert min. 5 (Hz)
205 Höchstsollwert Sollwert max. 50 (Hz)
- Frequenzkorrektur AUF/AB über digitalen Eingang kl. 16,17, 29, 32
Anschließend können benutzt werden:
oder 33
- Sollwert speichern über digitalen Eingang kl. 16,17, 29, 32 oder 33

Beispiel 2:
Externes Sollwertsignal = 0 V (min) - 10 V (max)
Sollwert = 50 Hz Linkslauf - 50 Hz Rechtslauf
Konfiguration (Parameter 100) =Drehzahlregelung
ohne Istwertrückführung.

86 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Einstellung:
Parame-
Einstellung: Datenwert:
ter:
100 Konfiguration Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung [0]
308 Funktion Analogeing. Sollwert [1]
309 Min. Sollwertsignal Min. 0V
310 Max. Sollwertsignal Max. 10 V
- Max - + Max
203 Sollwertbereich Sollwertbereich
[1]
205 Sollwert max. 100 Hz
214 Sollwertart Summe [0]
215 Festsollwert -50%
200 Ausgangsfrequenz Bereich/Richtung 0-132 Hz, beide Richtungen [1]
- Frequenzkorrektur AUF/AB über digitalen Eingang kl. 16,17,
Anschließend können benutzt werden:
29, 32 oder 33
- Sollwert speichern über digitalen Eingang kl. 16,17, 29 , 32
oder 33

Sonderfunktionen

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 87

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Verarbeitung von Multisollwerten

Bei Multisollwert sind zwei oder mehr Sollwertsignale
angeschlossen entweder als externe oder als
Festsollwertsignale. Diese können über Parameter
214 auf drei verschiedene Arten verarbeitet
bzw. angepaßt werden.
/ Addierend zum Sollwert
Sollwert- Erhöhung des Sollwertes - relativ
funkt.
\ Externe Anwahl

Nachfolgend wird jede Sollwertart (Addierend

zum Sollwert, Erhöhung des Sollwertes - relativ
und Externe Anwahl) gezeigt:

Addierend zum Sollwert

88 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Erhöhung des Sollwertes - relativ

Externe Anwahl

Sonderfunktionen

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 89

 VLT® Serie 5000

Übersicht über die Sollwertfunktion

■ Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA an den benutzten Motor optimieren möchte.

Die automatische Motoranpassung ist ein Dies kommt insbesondere dann zum Tragen,
Testalgorithmus, der die elektrischen Motorparameter wenn die Werkseinstellung zur optimalen
bei Stillstand des Motors mißt. Dies bedeutet, daß Motorregelung nicht ausreicht.
AMA selbst kein Drehmoment erzeugt. Es gibt in der automatischen Motoranpassung zwei
AMA läßt sich vorteilhaft bei der Initialisierung primäre Motorparameter: den Statorwiderstand Rs und
von Anlagen einsetzen, bei denen der Anwender die Induktanz bei normalem Magnetisierungsniveau
die Anpassung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Xs. Über Parameter 107 kann gewählt werden, ob

90 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

eine automatische Motoranpassung mit Bestimmung Im Rahmen der automatischen Motoranpassung

von sowohl Rs als auch Xs oder aber lediglich eine werden nun vier Tests durchgeführt (bei reduzierter
reduzierte automatische Motoranpassung, bei der nur AMA lediglich die ersten beiden Tests). Die
Rs angepaßt wird, vorgenommen werden soll. einzelnen Tests werden auf dem Display in
Eine vollständige automatische Motoranpassung kann Form von Punkten nach dem Text WORKING
von wenigen bis zu etwa zehn Minuten dauern, je in Parameter 107 angezeigt:
nach Leistungsgröße des eingesetzten Motors. 1. Erste Fehlerprüfung auf Typenschilddaten
und physikalische Fehler. Im Display
Einschränkungen und Bedingungen:
erscheint WORKING.
• Damit die AMA die Motorparameter 2. DC-Test zur Prüfung des Statorwiderstands.
optimal bestimmen kann, müssen die Im Display erscheint WORKING..
korrekten Typenschilddaten des an den 3. Transiententest zur Prüfung der Ableitinduktivität.
VLT-Frequenzumrichter angeschlossenen Motors Im Display erscheint WORKING...
in Parameter 102 bis 106 eingegeben werden. 4. AC-Test zur Prüfung der Statorinduktanz. Im
• Zur besten Anpassung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Display erscheint WORKING....
empfiehlt es sich, die AMA an einem kalten Motor ACHTUNG!:
durchzuführen. Wiederholter AMA-Betrieb kann zu AMA kann nur durchgeführt werden,
einer Erwärmung des Motors führen, was wiederum wenn während der Optimierung keine
eine Erhöhung des Statorwiderstands Rs bewirkt. Alarme auftreten.
• AMA ist nur durchführbar, wenn der
Motornennstrom mindestens 35% des Abbruch der automatischen Motoranpassung
Ausgangsnennstroms des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
beträgt. Die AMA ist bei bis zu einem Motor Wenn die automatische Motoranpassung abgebrochen
in Übergröße möglich. werden soll, die Taste [STOP/RESET] drücken oder
• Wenn zwischen VLT-Frequenzumrichter und Klemme 18 von Klemme 12 trennen.
Motor ein LC-Filter geschaltet ist, kann nur ein

Sonderfunktionen
Nach Abschluß der automatischen Motoranpassung
reduzierter Test durchgeführt werden. Soll eine
erscheint im Display eine der folgenden Meldungen:
Kompletteinstellung vorgenommen werden, so
kann das LC-Filter ausgebaut werden, während Warn- und Alarmmeldungen
eine vollständige AMA durchgeführt wird. Nach
Abschluß der AMA das LC-Filter wieder einbauen. ALARM 21
• Bei parallelgeschalteten Motoren höchstens Auto-Optimierung OK
eine reduzierte AMA durchführen. Taste [STOP/RESET] drücken oder Klemme 18
• Bei Synchronmotoren ist lediglich eine von Klemme 12 trennen. Dieser Alarm zeigt
reduzierte AMA möglich. an, daß die AMA ok und der Frequenzumrichter
• Lange Motorkabel können die AMA-Funktion korrekt auf den Motor abgestimmt ist.
beeinflussen, wenn ihr Widerstand größer als ALARM 22
der Statorwiderstand des Motors ist. Auto-Optimierung nicht OK
[OPTIMIERUNG OK]
Vorgehensweise bei der Durchführung einer
automatischen Motoranpassung Während der automatischen Motoranpassung ist ein
Fehler aufgetreten. Taste [STOP/RESET] drücken oder
1. [STOP/RESET]-Taste drücken. Klemme 18 von Klemme 12 trennen. Auf mögliche
2. Motorleistung gemäß Motortypenschilddaten Fehlerursachen gemäß Alarmmeldung prüfen. Die
einstellen (Parameter 102 bis 106). Zahl nach dem Text angezeigte Zahl zeigt den
3. Bestimmen, ob eine vollständige [FREIGABE Fehlercode, der im Fehlerprotokoll in Parameter 615
(RS,XS)] oder eine reduzierte [FREIGABE abgelesen werden kann. Bei der automatischen
RS] Motoranpassung ausgeführt werden Motoranpassung werden die Parameter nicht
soll (Parameter 107). aktualisiert. Wahlweise kann auch eine reduzierte
4. Klemme 12 (24 V DC) mit Klemme 27 der automatische Motoranpassung durchgeführt werden.
Steuerkarte verbinden.
5. [START]-Taste drücken oder Klemme 18 (Start)
mit Klemme 12 (24 V DC) verbinden, um die
automatische Motoranpassung zu starten.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 91

 VLT® Serie 5000

PRUEFE P.103 & P.105 [0] der Warnung mit der AMA weiter fortgefahren
[OPTIMIERUNG NICHT OK] Parameter 102, 103 werden soll, oder Taste [STOP/RESET] drücken
oder 105 falsch eingestellt. Einstellung korrigieren bzw. Klemme 18 von Klemme 12 trennen, um die
und mit der AMA neu beginnen. automatische Motoranpassung abzubrechen.

UNTERER GRENZWERT [1] WARNUNG: 39

Der Motor ist für die Durchführung einer AMA zu PRUEFE P.104 & P.106
klein. Für die AMA ist es Voraussetzung, daß der Parameter 102, 104 oder 106 wahrscheinlich
Motornennstrom (Parameter 105) höher als 35% des falsch eingestellt. Einstellung kontrollieren und mit
Ausgangsnennstroms des VLT-Frequenzumrichters ist. "Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.

ASYMMETRISCHE IMPEDANZ [2] WARNUNG: 40

Bei der AMA wurde eine asymmetrische Impedanz PRUEFE P.103 & P.105
im angeschlossenen Motor festgestellt. Der Parameter 102, 103 oder 105 wahrscheinlich
Motor ist möglicherweise defekt. falsch eingestellt. Einstellung kontrollieren und mit
"Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.
MOTOR ZU GROSS [3]
Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung WARNUNG: 41
einer AMA zu groß. Die Einstellung in Parameter 102 MOTOR ZU GROSS
stimmt nicht dem angeschlossenen Motor überein. Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung
einer AMA wahrscheinlich zu groß. Die Einstellung
MOTOR ZU KLEIN [4] in Parameter 102 stimmt möglicherweise nicht dem
Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung angeschlossenen Motor überein. Motor kontrollieren
einer AMA zu klein. Die Einstellung in Parameter 102 und mit "Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.
stimmt nicht dem angeschlossenen Motor überein.
WARNUNG: 42
TIMEOUT [5] MOTOR ZU KLEIN
AMA aufgrund störungsbehafteter Meßsignale Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung
erfolglos. Starten Sie die AMA evtl. mehrmals neu, einer AMA wahrscheinlich zu klein. Die Einstellung
bis sie erfolgreich verläuft. Bitte beachten Sie, daß in Parameter 102 stimmt möglicherweise nicht dem
wiederholter AMA-Betrieb zu einer Erwärmung des angeschlossenen Motor überein. Motor kontrollieren
Motors führen kann, was wiederum eine Erhöhung und mit "Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.
des Statorwiderstands Rs bewirkt. Im Regelfall ist
dies jedoch kein kritischer Umstand.

ABBRUCH DURCH ANWENDER [6]

Die AMA wurde vom Anwender abgebrochen.

INTERNER FEHLER [7]

Im VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist ein interner
Fehler aufgetreten. Bitte wenden Sie sich
Ihren Danfoss-Lieferanten.

GRENZWERT FEHLER [8]

Die gefundenen Parameterwerte des Motors liegen
außerhalb der zulässigen Grenzen, bei denen der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter arbeiten kann.

MOTOR DREHT [9]

Die Motorwelle dreht. Stellen Sie sicher, daß die
Last kein Drehen der Motorwelle bewirken kann.
Anschließend die AMA neu starten.

WARNUNG 39 - 42
Bei der automatischen Motoranpassung wurde
ein Fehler festgestellt. Mögliche Fehlerursachen
gemäß Warnmeldung prüfen. Taste [CHANGE
DATA] drücken und "Weiter" wählen, wenn trotz

92 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA über

VLT Software Dialog
Die automatische Motoranpassung kann auch
über VLT Software Dialog aktiviert werden. Dieses
kann vor Ort (local) oder im Fernbetrieb (remote)
mit Hilfe eines Modems erfolgen.

Vorgehensweise bei der Durchführung einer automatischen Motoranpassung über VLT Software Dialog:
1. Parametersatzwahl starten und "Neuen Satz einrichten" wählen.
2. VLT-Typ und Spannung wählen. Danach "Off-line" wählen.
3. "Assistent"-Funktion starten. Der Assistent richtet schnell die relevanten Motorparameter ein.
4. Nach Abschluß der "Assistent"-Funktion ist in Parameter 107 zu wählen, ob eine vollständige oder eine reduzierte
automatische Motoranpassung erfolgen soll.
5. Parametersatzdatei speichern und die Parametersatzwahl beenden.
6. Parametersatzwahl erneut starten und "Vorhandene Einstellung öffnen" wählen.
7. Gespeicherte Datei öffnen und "On-line" wählen.
8. Datei an den oder die Frequenzumrichter senden, bei dem/denen eine automatische Motoranpassung erfolgen soll.
9. Parametereinstellung abschließen.

Start einer automatischen Motoranpassung, AMA:

1. Testlauf starten.
2. Nach VLT-Frequenzumrichtern abfragen und den aktuellen Frequenzumrichter auswählen, der für eine eine
automatische Motoranpassung vorbereitet ist.
3. Im Testlaufbetrieb die [START]-Taste drücken, um die automatische Motoranpassung zu aktivieren.

Sonderfunktionen
Nach normalem Ablauf und Abschluß:
1. Störmeldung abwarten.
2. Danach im Testlaufbetrieb die [RESET]-Taste drücken.
3. AMA ist damit beendet; der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist betriebsbereit.

Bei Alarm erscheint im Display: ALARM 22:

1. [RESET]-Taste drücken.
2. Mögliche Fehlerursachen gemäß Alarmmeldung prüfen.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 93

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Steuerung der mechanischen Bremse

Bei Hub- und Senkanwendungen muß eine steuerbare
elektromagnetische Bremse vorhanden sein.
Zur Steuerung der Bremse wird ein Relaisausgang (01
oder 04) benötigt. Dieser Ausgang muß während der
Zeit geschlossen (spannungsfrei) gehalten werden,
in der der VLT-Frequenzumrichter den Motor nicht
"halten" kann, z.B. aufgrund einer zu hohen Belastung.
In Parameter 323 oder 326 (Relaisausgänge 01, 04)
ist bei Anwendungen mit elektromagnetischer Bremse
Mechanische Bremskontrolle [32] oder Erweiterte
mechanische Bremskontrolle [34] zu wählen.
Bei Start/Stopp und Rampe ab wird der
Ausgangsstrom überwacht. Wird Mechanische
Bremskontrolle [32] gewählt und liegt der Strom unter
dem in Parameter 223 Warnung: Strom unterer
Grenzwert gewählten Wert, so wird die mechanische
Bremse geschlossen (spannungsfrei).
Als Ausgangspunkt kann ein Stromwert gewählt
werden, der etwa 70 % des Magnetisierungsstroms
beträgt. Parameter 225 Warnung: Frequenz
unterer Grenzwert gibt an, bei welcher Frequenz
im Rampe-ab-Betrieb die mechanische Bremse
wieder geschlossen werden soll.

Wird Erweiterte mechanische Bremskontrolle [34]

gewählt, so wird die mechanische Bremse beim Start
geschlossen (spannungsfrei), bis der Ausgangsstrom
den in Parameter 223 Warnung: Strom unterer
Grenzwert gewählten Wert übersteigt.
Beim Stopp wird die mechanische Bremse gelöst, bis
die Frequenz unter den in Parameter 225 Warnung:
Frequenz unterer Grenzwert gewählten Wert sinkt.
Beachten Sie bei Erweiterte mechanische
Bremskontrolle [34], daß die Bremse nicht
schließt, wenn der Ausgangsstrom den in
Parameter 223 Warnung: Strom unterer Grenzwert
gewählten Wert unterschreitet.
Es erscheint auch keine entsprechende Warnung.

Tritt am VLT-Frequenzumrichter ein Alarmzustand,

ein Überstrom oder eine Überspannung ein, so wird
umgehend die mechanische Bremse zugeschaltet.

ACHTUNG!:
Die beschriebene Anwendung ist nur
für Hub- und Senkanwendungen ohne
Gegengewicht vorgesehen.

94 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Sonderfunktionen

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 95

 VLT® Serie 5000

Steuerung der mechanischen Bremse:

Parameter: Einstellung: Datenwert:
323 Relais 01 od. Par. 326 Relais 04 Mechanische Bremskontrolle [32]
323 Relais 01 od. Par. 326 Relais 04 Erweiterte mechanische Bremskontrolle [34]
223 Warnung: Unterstrom ca. 70% des Magnetisierungsstroms1)
225 Warnung: Unterfrequenz 3-5 Hz2)
122 Funktion bei Stopp Vormagnetisierung [3]
120 Anlaufverzögerungszeit 0,1 -0,3 s
121 Startfunktion Startfrequenz/-spannung Rechtslauf3) [3]
130 Startfrequenz Auf Schlupffrequenz einstellen
131 Zusätzliche Anlaufspannung Auf Motornennstrom I einstellenM,N (nicht über 160 % von IM,N )
1. Bei Anlauf und Betrieb bestimmt die Stromgrenze 3. Es ist sicherzustellen, daß der Motor in der korrekten
in Parameter 223 das Schaltniveau. Drehrichtung anläuft (Heben), da sonst der
2. Dieser Wert gibt an, bei welcher Frequenz im VLT-Frequenzumrichter die Last verlieren könnte.
Rampe-ab-Betrieb die mechanische Bremse Tauschen Sie evtl. die Anschlüsse U, V, W.
wieder geschlossen werden soll. Dies setzt voraus,
daß ein Stopp-Signal gegeben wurde.

96 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ PID für die Prozeßregelung Sollwerttyp Klemme Parameter

Istwert Puls 17 oder 29 301 oder 305
Das Istwertsignal muß an eine Klemme am Spannung 53 oder 54 308, 309, 310
Frequenzumrichter angeschlossen werden. Legen oder
Sie anhand nachstehender Liste fest, welche 311, 312, 313
Klemme verwendet und welche Parameter Strom 60 314, 315, 316
programmiert werden sollen.
Istwerttyp Klemme Parameter Es können auch relative Sollwerte programmiert
Puls 33 307 werden. Ein relativer Sollwert ist ein prozentualer
Spannung 53 308, 309, 310 Wert (Y) der Summe der externen Sollwerte (X).
Strom 60 314, 315, 316 Dieser prozentuale Wert wird zur Summe der
externen Sollwerte addiert, wodurch sich der aktive
Des weiteren sind Mindest- und Höchstwert Sollwert (X + XY) ergibt. Siehe den Abschnitt
(Parameter 414 und 415) auf einen Wert in einer Verarbeitung mehrerer Sollwerte .
Prozeßeinheit einzustellen, der dem Mindest- und Damit die relativen Sollwerte benutzt werden können,
Höchstwert an der Klemme entspricht. muß Parameter 214 auf Relativ [1] eingestellt
Prozeßeinheit in Parameter 416 auswählen. werden. Damit werden die Festsollwerte relativ. Es
kann außerdem Relativer Sollwert [4] an Klemme
Sollwert 54 und/oder 60 programmiert werden. Wird ein
Es kann ein Mindest- und ein Höchstsollwert eingestellt externer relativer Sollwert gewählt, so wird das
werden (Parameter 204 und 205), um die Summe Signal am Eingang ein prozentualer Wert des vollen
aller Sollwerte zu begrenzen. Der Sollwertbereich Klemmenintervalls sein. Die relativen Sollwerte
kann den Istwertbereich nicht überschreiten. werden mit Vorzeichen addiert.
Wenn ein oder mehrere Festsollwerte gewünscht
werden, so lassen sich diese am einfachsten direkt ACHTUNG!:
in den Parametern 215 bis 218 einstellen. Die Wahl Für nicht benutzte Klemmen empfiehlt sich

Sonderfunktionen
zwischen den eingestellten Festsollwerten erfolgt die Einstellung Ohne Funktion [0].
durch Verbinden von Klemme 16, 17, 29, 32 und/oder
33 mit Klemme 12. Welche Verbindung herzustellen Inverse Regelfunktion
ist, hängt von der Wahl in den Parametern der Wird eine Regelfunktion mit erhöhter Motordrehzahl
jeweiligen Klemmen ab (Parameter 300, 301, 305, und ansteigendem Istwert benötigt, muß in
306 und/oder 307). Die Auswahl von Festsollwerten Parameter 437 Invers gewählt werden. Bei
kann anhand der nachstehenden Tabelle erfolgen. normaler Steuerung nimmt die Motordrehzahl bei
ansteigendem Istwertsignal ab.
Festsollwert Festsollwert
msb lsb Anti-Windup
Festsollwert 1 (Par. 0 0 Der Prozeßregler ist ab Werk mit aktiver
215) Anti-Windup-Funktion eingestellt. Diese Funktion
Festsollwert 2 (Par. 0 1 bewirkt, daß im Falle des Erreichens einer Frequenz-
216) oder Momentgrenze der Integrator auf eine Verstärkung
Festsollwert 3 (Par. 1 0 entsprechend der aktuellen Frequenz initialisiert
217) wird. So wird vermieden, daß bei einem Fehler
Festsollwert 4 (Par. 1 1 noch integriert wird, der mit einer Drehzahländerung
218) ohnehin nicht auszugleichen wäre. Die Funktion
kann in Parameter 438 deaktiviert werden.
Wenn ein externer Sollwert gewünscht wird, kann
dieser entweder ein Analog- oder ein Pulssollwert Anlaufverhältnisse
sein. Wenn Strom als Istwertsignal verwendet wird, In einigen Anwendungen wird eine optimale Einstellung
kann als Analogsollwert nur Spannung verwendet des Prozeßreglers dazu führen, daß bis zum Erreichen
werden. Legen Sie anhand der folgenden Liste des gewünschten Prozeßwertes eine unangemessen
fest, welche Klemme verwendet und welche lange Zeit vergeht. Bei solchen Anwendungen kann
Parameter programmiert werden sollen. es von Vorteil sein, eine Motorfrequenz festzulegen,

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 97

 VLT® Serie 5000

auf die der Frequenzumrichter den Motor hochregeln das Istwertsignal gleichmäßig zu schwingen
soll, bevor der Prozeßregler aktiviert wird. Dies beginnt. Die Integrationszeit erhöhen, bis sich
erfolgt durch Programmieren einer Prozeß-PID das Istwertsignal stabilisiert und anschließend
-Startfrequenz in Parameter 439. um 15-50% erhöhen.
4. Parameter 442 wird nur bei sehr schnellen
Differentiator-Verstärkungsgrenze Systemen verwendet (Differentiationszeit). Der
Kommt es in einer Anwendung zu sehr schnellen typische Wert ist das Vierfache der eingestellten
Änderungen des Soll- oder Istwertes und damit zu Integrationszeit. Der Differentiator sollte nur
raschen Änderungen der Regelabweichung - kann benutzt werden, wenn Proportionalverstärkung
der Differentiator schnell zum Überschwingen neigen. und Integrationszeit optimal eingestellt sind.
Er reagiert auf Änderungen der Regelabweichung.
Je schneller sich die Regelabweichung ändert, desto ACHTUNG!:
höher fällt auch die Verstärkung des Differentiators Bei Bedarf kann Start/Stopp mehrfach aktiviert
aus. Die Verstärkung des Differentiators kann werden, um eine konstante Schwankung
daher begrenzt werden, so daß sowohl eine des Istwertsignal zu erzielen.
vernünftige Differentiationszeit bei langsamen
Änderungen als auch eine angemessene Verstärkung Siehe auch die Anschlußbeispiele im
bei schnellen Änderungen eingestellt werden Projektierungshandbuch.
kann. Dies erfolgt in Parameter 443 Prozeß PID
Differentiator Verstärkungsgrenze .
■ PID für die Drehzahlregelung
Tiefpaßfilter
Istwert
Sofern beim Istwertsignal Rippelströme bzw.
Das Istwertsignal muß an eine Klemme des
spannungen auftreten, können diese mit Hilfe
Frequenzumrichters angeschlossen werden. Anhand
eines Tiefpaßfilters gedämpft werden. Für das
der nachstehenden Übersicht kann entschieden
Tiefpaßfilter muß eine passende Zeitkonstante
werden, welche Klemme zu benutzen ist und welche
eingestellt werden. Diese Zeitkonstante ist ein
Parameter zu programmieren sind.
Ausdruck für eine Eckfrequenz der Rippel, die
beim Istwertsignal auftreten. Ist das Tiefpaßfilter Istwertart Klemme Parameter
auf 0,1 s eingestellt, so beträgt die Eckfrequenz Puls 32 306
10 RAD/s entsprechend (10 / 2 x p) = 1,6 Hz. Puls 33 307
Dies bedeutet, daß alle Ströme/Spannungen, die Istwert Puls/U/Min 329
um mehr als 1,6 Schwingungen pro Sekunde Spannung 53 308, 309, 310
schwanken, herausgefiltert werden. Mit anderen
Strom 60 314, 315, 316
Worten wird nur ein Istwertsignal geregelt, das mit
einer Frequenz von weniger als 1,6 Hz schwankt. Desweiteren sind Mindest- und Höchstistwert
Die passende Zeitkonstante ist in Parameter 444, (Parameter 414 und 415) auf einen Wert in einer
Prozeß PID Tiefpassfilter zu wählen. Prozeßeinheit einzustellen, der dem Mindest-
und Höchstwert an der Klemme entspricht.
Optimierung des Prozeßreglers Der Mindestistwert kann nicht auf einen Wert
Die Grundeinstellungen sind nun vorgenommen unter 0 eingestellt werden. Die Einheit ist in
worden, so daß jetzt nur noch eine Optimierung der Parameter 416 zu wählen.
Proportionalverstärkung, der Integrationszeit und der
Differentiationszeit (Parameter 440, 441, 442) aussteht. Sollwert
Dies kann bei den meisten Prozessen durch Befolgen Es kann ein Mindest- und ein Höchstsollwert eingestellt
der nachstehenden Anweisungen geschehen. werden (Parameter 204 und 205), um die Summe
aller Sollwerte zu begrenzen. Der Sollwertbereich
1. Motor starten. kann den Istwertbereich nicht überschreiten.
2. Parameter 440 (Proportionalverstärkung) auf Wenn einer oder mehrere Festsollwerte gewünscht
0,3 einstellen und anschließend erhöhen, bis werden, so lassen sich diese am einfachsten direkt
das Istwertsignal gleichmäßig zu schwingen in den Parametern 215 bis 218 einstellen. Die
beginnt. Danach den Wert verringern, bis Wahl zwischen den eingestellten Festsollwerten
das Istwertsignal stabilisiert ist. Dann die erfolgt durch Verbinden von Klemme 16, 17, 29, 32
Proportionalverstärkung um 40-60% senken. und/oder 33 mit Klemme 12. Welche Verbindung
3. Parameter 441 (Integrationszeit) auf 20 s einstellen herzustellen ist, hängt von der Wahl in den Parametern
und den Wert anschließend herabsetzen, bis

98 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

der jeweiligen Klemmen ab (Parameter 300, 301, daß sowohl eine vernünftige Differentiationszeit bei
305, 306 und/oder 307). Die Entscheidung kann langsamen Änderungen als auch eine angemessene
aufgrund der nachstehenden Tabelle über die Wahl Verstärkung bei schnellen Änderungen eingestellt
der Festsollwerte getroffen werden. werden kann. Dies erfolgt im Parameter 443 Prozeß
PID Differentiator Verstärkungsgrenze.
Festsollw. Fest-
msb sollw. lsb Tiefpaßfilter
Festsollw. 1 (Par. 215) 0 0 Sofern beim Istwertsignal Rippelströme bzw.
Festsollw. 2 (Par. 216) 0 1 -spannungen auftreten, können diese mit Hilfe
Festsollw. 3 (Par. 217) 1 0
eines Tiefpaßfilters gedämpft werden. Für das
Festsollw. 4 (Par. 218) 1 1
Tiefpaßfilter muß eine passende Zeitkonstante
eingestellt werden. Diese Zeitkonstante ist ein
Wenn ein Festsollwert gewünscht wird, kann dieser Ausdruck für eine Eck Frequenz der Rippel, die
entweder ein Analog- oder ein Pulssollwert sein. beim Istwertsignal auftreten. Ist das Tiefpaßfilter
Wenn Strom als Istwertsignal benutzt wird, kann als auf 0,1 Sek. eingestellt, so ist die Eckfrequenz
Analogsollwert nur Spannung benutzt werden. Anhand 10 RAD/Sek., was (10/2 x π) = 1,6 Hz entspricht.
der nachstehenden Übersicht kann entschieden Dies führt dazu, daß alle Ströme/Spannungen,
werden, welche Klemme zu benutzen ist und welche die um mehr als 1,6 Schwingungen pro Sekunde
Parameter zu programmieren sind. schwanken, herausgefiltert werden. Es wird mit
Sollwertart Klemme Parameter anderen Worten nur ein Istwertsignal geregelt, das
Puls 17 oder 29 301 oder 305 mit einer Frequenz von unter 1,6 Hz schwankt.
Spannung 53 oder 54 308, 309, 310 Die passende Zeitkonstante ist in Parameter 421,
oder Drehzahl PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit zu wählen.
311, 312, 313
Strom 60 314, 315, 316
■ Schnellentladung (Quick discharge)

Sonderfunktionen
Es können auch relative Sollwerte programmiert Diese Funktion erfordert einen Frequenzumrichter
werden. Unter einem relativen Sollwert ist ein des Typs EB. Die Funktion dient zur Entladung
prozentualer Wert (Y) der Summe der externen der Kondensatoren im Zwischenkreis nach
Sollwerte (X) zu verstehen. Dieser prozentuale Wert Unterbrechung der Netzversorgung. Die Funktion
wird zur Summe der externen Sollwerte addiert, kann nützlich sein, wenn am Frequenzumrichter
wodurch sich der aktive Sollwert (X + XY) ergibt. und/oder der Motorinstallation Wartungsarbeiten
Siehe Zeichnung Seite 62 und 63. ausgeführt werden sollen. Der Motor muß angehalten
Damit die relativen Sollwerte benutzt werden können, haben, bevor die Schnellentladung aktiviert wird.
muß Parameter 214 auf Relativ [1] eingestellt Bei Rückkoppelungsbetrieb des Motors ist eine
werden. Es kann außerdem Relativer Sollwert [4] Schnellentladung nicht durchführbar.
an Klemme 54 und/oder 60 programmiert werden.
Wird ein externer relativer Sollwert gewählt, so wird Die Schnellentladefunktion kann über Parameter
das Signal am Eingang ein prozentualer Wert des 408 gewählt werden und startet, wenn die
vollen Bereiches der Klemme sein. Die relativen Zwischenkreisspannung auf einen bestimmten
Sollwerte werden mit Vorzeichen addiert. Wert gefallen ist und der Wechselrichter gestoppt
ist. Um eine Schnellentladung zu ermöglichen,
ACHTUNG!: muß der Frequenzumrichter an Klemme 35 und
Für nicht benutzte Klemmen empfiehlt sich 36 mit einer externen 24-V-DC-Versorgung sowie
die Einstellung Ohne Funktion [0]. an Klemme 81 und 82 mit einem geeigneten
Bremswiderstand versehen sein.
Differentiator Verstärkungsgrenze
Bzgl. der Auslegung des Entladewiderstandes für
Kommt es in einer Anwendung zu sehr schnellen
die Schnellentladung wird auf die Bremshinweise
Änderungen des Soll- oder Istwertes, so kann
MI.50.DX.XX verwiesen.
der Differentiator schnell zum Überschwingen
neigen. Je schneller sich die Regelabweichung
ändert, desto höher fällt auch die Verstärkung
des Differentiators aus. Die Verstärkung des
Differentiators kann daher begrenzt werden, so

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 99

 VLT® Serie 5000

Parameter 408 = [1]

ACHTUNG!:
Die Schnellentladung ist nur möglich, wenn
Schnellentladung
der Frequenzumrichter mit einer externen 24-V aktiviert

DC-Versorgung versehen und ein externer ABSCHALT (RESET)

Brems-/Entladewiderstand angeschlossen ist. Externe 24-V DC-
Versorgung prüfen Keine externe
24-V DC-Versorgung
ALARM:33
Vor Wartungsarbeiten an der Installation SCHN.ENTLDG. FEHLER
(Frequenzumrichter + Motor) ist zu Externe 24-V DC-
Versorgung OK
kontrollieren, daß die Zwischenkreis- ABSCHALT (RESET)

spannung unter 60 V DC liegt. Dies erfolgt durch

Messung an den Klemmen 88 und 89 (Zwischenkreis).
Start
Schnellentladung
Timeout ALARM:33
SCHN.ENTLDG. FEHLER

ACHTUNG!: Entladung

Bei der Schnellentladung ist die

Leistungsüberwachungsfunktion für den Brems- Entladung beendet

bzw. Entladewiderstand unwirksam. Dies ist bei ENTLADUNG BEENDET

der Bemessung des Widerstandes zu berücksichtigen.
175ZA447.10

■ Netzfehler/Schnellentladung mit Netzfehler invers und zwar durch Auswahl von Netzfehler invers
Die erste Spalte in der Übersicht zeigt Netzfehler, an einer der Steuerklemmen (16, 17, 29, 32, 33).
Auswahl in Parameter 407. Wird Ohne Funktion Netzfehler invers ist bei logisch ’0’ aktiv.
gewählt, so wird die Netzfehlerprozedur nicht
durchgeführt. Wird z.B. Rampe ab [1]gewählt, ACHTUNG!:
so fährt der VLT-Frequenzumrichter den Motor Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann
auf 0 Hz herunter. Wurde in Parameter durch wiederholtes Ausführen der
408 Wirksam [1] gewählt, so wird nach dem Schnellentladefunktion über einen der
Anhalten des Motors eine Schnellentladung der digitalen Eingänge zerstört werden, wenn die
Zwischenkreisspannung vorgenommen. Netzspannung angeschlossen ist.

Mit Hilfe eines digitalen Eingangs ist es möglich,

Netzfehler und/oder Schnellentladung zu wählen,

Netzfehler Par. Schnellentladung Par. 408 Netzfehler invers digitaler Funktion

407 Eingang
Ohne Funktion [0] Blockiert [0] Logisch ’0’ 1
Ohne Funktion [0] Blockiert [0] Logisch ’1’ 2
Ohne Funktion [0] Wirksam [1] Logisch ’0’ 3
Ohne Funktion [0] Wirksam [1] Logisch ’1’ 4
[1]-[4] Blockiert [0] Logisch ’0’ 5
[1]-[4] Blockiert [0] Logisch ’1’ 6
[1]-[4] Wirksam [1] Logisch ’0’ 7
[1]-[4] Wirksam [1] Logisch ’1’ 8

Funktion Nr. 1
Netzfehler und Schnellentladung nicht aktiv.
Funktion Nr. 3
Funktion Nr. 2 Der digitale Eingang aktiviert die Schnellentladefunktion
Netzfehler und Schnellentladung nicht aktiv. unabhängig vom Niveau der Zwischenkreisspannung
und davon, ob der Motor läuft oder nicht.

100 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion Nr. 4
Die Schnellentladung wird aktiviert, wenn die
Zwischenkreisspannung auf einen bestimmten Wert
abgefallen ist und die Wechselrichter abgeschaltet
haben, siehe Prozedur auf der Vorseite.

Funktion Nr. 5
Der digitale Eingang aktiviert die Netzfehlerfunktion
unabhängig davon, ob eine Versorgungsspannung
zum Gerät anliegt oder nicht. Siehe die verschiedenen
Funktionen in Parameter 407.

Funktion Nr. 6
Die Netzfehlerfunktion wird aktiviert, wenn die 2. Motorfangschaltung aktiv.
Zwischenkreisspannung auf einen bestimmten Wert
abgefallen ist. Die Funktion im Falle von Netzfehlern
ist in Parameter 407 zu wählen.

Funktion Nr. 7
Der digitale Eingang aktiviert sowohl die Schnellentlade-
als auch die Netzfehlerfunktion, unabhängig vom
Niveau der Zwischenkreisspannung und davon, ob
der Motor läuft oder nicht. Die Netzfehlerfunktion ist
als erste aktiv, danach die Schnellentladefunktion.

Funktion Nr. 8
Schnellentlade- und Netzfehlerfunktion werden
aktiviert, wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung auf

Sonderfunktionen
Die Suchsequenz für den drehenden Motor ist
einen bestimmten Wert abfällt.
abhängig von der Drehzahl, Frequenz/Richtung
Die Netzfehlerfunktion ist als erste aktiv, danach
(Parameter 200). Wird nur Eine Richtung gewählt, so
die Schnellentladefunktion.
sucht der VLT-Frequenzumrichter zunächst ab der
Höchstfrequenz (Parameter 202) bis 0 Hz. Findet
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter den drehenden Motor
■ Motorfangschaltung im Verlauf der Suchsequenz nicht, so wird er eine
Diese Funktion ermöglicht das Abfangen’ eines DC-Bremsung einleiten, um zu versuchen, die Drehzahl
Motors, der nicht länger vom VLT-Frequenzumrichter des drehenden Motors auf 0 U/Min zu bringen. Dies
gesteuert wird. Die Funktion kann über Parameter setzt voraus, daß die Gleichspannungsbremse über
445 zu- und abgeschaltet werden. Parameter 125 und 126 aktiviert wurde. Bei Wahl von
Beide Richtungen ermittelt der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
Wenn Motorfangschaltung gewählt wurde, dann
zunächst die Drehrichtung des Motors und sucht
wird die Funktion bei Eintreten von einer der
danach die Frequenz. Findet er den Motor nicht,
folgenden vier Situationen aktiviert:
so wird davon ausgegangen, daß der Motor
1. Nach Motorfreilauf über Klemme 27 nicht oder nur mit geringer Drehzahl läuft. Der
2. Nach Einschalten der Netzversorgung VLT-Frequenzumrichter läßt den Motor dann nach
3. Wenn sich der VLT-Frequenzumrichter in dem Suchvorgang normal anlaufen.
einem Abschaltzustand (Trip) befindet und ein
3. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter schaltet aufgrund
Quittiersignal gegeben wurde
einer Störung ab; Motorfangschaltung aktiv.
4. Wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter z.B. den Motor
aufgrund eines Fehlerzustandes losläßt, der Fehler
aber vor der Abschaltung wieder verschwindet.
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter wird in diesem Fall den
Motor abfangen und ihn zum Sollwert zurückführen

1. Motorfangschaltung aktiv.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 101

 VLT® Serie 5000

4. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter läßt den Motor

kurzzeitig los; die Motorfangschaltung wird
aktiviert und fängt den Motor ab.

102 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Normale/Hohe Übermomentregelung ohne Beachten Sie bitte, daß der Motor nicht der
Istwertrückführung Rampe-Ab-Zeit folgt, da Klemme 27 auf
Diese Funktion ermöglicht es, daß der Motorfreilauf [0] oder Quittieren + Motorfreilauf
Frequenzumrichter auch bei einem Motor in Übergröße [1] programmiert werden muß.
ein Drehmoment von konstant 100% erzeugt.
Die Wahl, ob eine normale oder eine hohe
Überlastungsmomentkennlinie gewünscht wird,
■ Programmieren von Momentgrenze und Stopp
erfolgt in Parameter 101.
Bei Anwendungen mit externer elektromechanischer
Hier wählt man auch eine hohe/normale konstante Bremse, z.B. Hub/Senk-Anwendungen, besteht die
Momentkennlinie (CT) oder eine hohe/normale Möglichkeit, den VLT-Frequenzumrichter über einen
quadratische Momentkennlinie (VT). ’normalen’ Stoppbefehl anzuhalten und gleichzeitig die
externe elektromechanische Bremse zu aktivieren.
Wird eine hohe Momentkennlinie gewählt, so können Das Anschlußbeispiel zeigt, wie der VLT-
mit einem nominellen Motor für den Frequenzumrichter Frequenzumrichter programmiert wird. Die externe
1 Min. lang bis zu 160% Drehmoment bei konstantem Bremse kann an Relais 01 oder 04 angeschlossen
sowie quadratischem Moment erzielt werden. werden, siehe Steuerung der mechanischen Bremse ,
Wird eine normale Momentkennlinie gewählt, so Seite 66. Klemme 27 wird auf Motorfreilauf [0] oder
können mit einem Motor in Übergröße 1 Min. Quittieren + Motorfreilauf [1], programmiert, Klemme
lang bis zu 110% Drehmoment bei konstantem 42 auf Momentgrenze und Stopp [27].
sowie quadratischem Moment erzielt werden.
Diese Funktion wird besonders bei Pumpen und Beschreibung:
Lüftern benutzt, da bei derartigen Anwendungen Ist ein Stoppbefehl über Klemme 18 aktiv,
kein Übermoment erforderlich ist. ohne daß der VLT-Frequenzumrichter sich im
Momentgrenzzustand befindet, so wird der Motor
Der Vorteil bei Anwahl einer normalen über die Rampenfunktion auf 0 Hz herunterfahren.
Moment-kennlinie, bei Anschluß eines Motors in Befindet sich der VLT-Frequenzumrichter im

Sonderfunktionen
Übergröße, besteht darin, daß der Frequenzumrichter Momentgrenzzustand, und wird ein Stoppbefehl
Konstant 100% Drehmoment erzielen kann. Es ist aktiviert, so wird Klemme 42 Ausgang (auf
keine Leistungsreduzierung erforderlich. Momentgrenze und Stopp programmiert) aktiv. Das
Signal an Klemme 27 wechselt damit von ’logisch 1’
ACHTUNG!:
auf ’logisch 0’, und der Motor läuft im Freilauf aus.
Bei VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V und
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 Volt ist diese
Funktion nichtt wählbar.

■ Interner Stromgrenzenregler
Die VLT Serie 5000 hat einen integrierten
Stromgrenzenregler, der aktiviert wird, wenn
der Motorstrom und somit das Drehmoment
die in Parameter 221 und 222 eingestellten
Drehmomentgrenzen überschreitet. Bei Erreichen
der generatorischen oder motorischen Stromgrenze
versucht der Frequenzumrichter schnellstmöglich,
die eingestellten Drehmomentgrenzen wieder
zu unterschreiten, ohne die Kontrolle über
den Motor zu verlieren.
Solange der Stromgrenzenregler aktiv ist, kann
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter nur über Klemme 27
angehalten werden, wenn sie auf Motorfreilauf
[0] oder Quittieren + Motorfreilauf [1] eingestellt
wird. Ein Signal an den Klemmen 16-33 wird
nicht aktiv sein, bevor der Frequenzumrichter sich
außerhalb der Stromgrenze befindet.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 103

 VLT® Serie 5000

- Start/Stopp mit Klemme 18

Parameter 302 = Start [1].
- Schnellstopp mit Klemme 27
Parameter 304 = Motorfreilauf [0].
- Klemme 42 Ausgang
Parameter 319 = Momentgrenze und Stopp [27].
- Klemme 01 Relaisausgang
Parameter 323 = Mechanische Bremskontrolle [32].

104 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Betrieb und Display 3. die Taste [FWD/REV], sofern dies in Parameter

016 aktiviert und in Parameter 013 [1]
001 Sprachauswahl oder [3] gewählt wurde.
(SPRACHAUSWAHL) 4. Über Parameter 003 kann der Ortsollwert
mittels der Tasten "Pfeil nach oben" und "Pfeil
Wert:
nach unten" gesteuert werden.
✭Englisch (ENGLISH) [0]
5. einen externen Steuerbefehl, der an Klemme
Deutsch (DEUTSCH) [1]
16, 17, 19, 27, 29, 32 oder 33 angeschlossen
Französisch (FRANCAIS) [2]
werden kann. In Parameter 013 muß jedoch
Dänisch (DANSK) [3]
[2] oder [4] ausgewählt werden.
Spanisch (ESPAÑOL) [4]
Italienisch (ITALIANO) [5] Siehe auch unter Wechsel zwischen Ort-
und Fernsteuerung.
Funktion:
Mit der Auswahl dieses Parameters wird festgelegt,
welche Sprache im Display erscheinen soll.
003 Ort Sollwert
Beschreibung der Auswahl: (ORT SOLLWERT)
Zur Auswahl stehen die Sprachen Englisch Wert:
[0], Deutsch [1], Französisch [2], Dänisch [3], Par. 013 eingestellt auf [1] oder [2]
Spanisch [4] und Italienisch [5]. 0 - fMAX ✭ 000.000

002 Ort-/Fernsteuerung Par. 013 eingestellt auf [3] oder [4] und
(BETRIEBSART) Par. 203 eingestellt auf [0]:
RefMIN - RefMAX ✭ 000.000
Wert:
✭Fernsteuerung (FERN) [0]
Ortsteuerung (ORT) [1]
Par. 013 eingestellt auf [3] oder [4] und
Funktion: Par. 203 eingestellt auf [1]:
Der Frequenzumrichter kann auf zwei Arten -RefMAX bis + RefMAX ✭ 000.000
gesteuert werden.
Funktion:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: In diesem Parameter kann der gewünschte Sollwert
Ist Fernsteuerung [0] gewählt, so kann der manuell angegeben werden (Drehzahl oder Sollwert
Frequenzumrichter gesteuert werden über: der oben gewählten Konfiguration, abhängig von der
Wahl in Parameter 013). Die Einheit wird gemäß
Programmierung
1. die Steuerklemmen oder die serielle Schnittstelle.
2. die Taste [START]. Dadurch können Stoppbefehle der in Parameter 100 gewählten Konfiguration
(auch "Start nicht möglich"), die über die automatisch eingestellt, sofern Prozeßregelung mit
Digitaleingänge oder die serielle Schnittstelle Istwertrückführung [3] oder Drehmomentregelung
eingegeben wurden, jedoch nicht nicht ohne Istwertrückführung [4] gewählt wurde.
überlagert werden. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
3. die Tasten [STOP], [JOG] und [RESET], sofern
Es muß in Parameter 002 Ort [1] gewählt werden,
aktiv (siehe Parameter 014, 015 und 017).
um diesen Parameter benutzen zu können.
Wird Ortsteuerung [1] gewählt, so kann der Der eingestellte Wert wird bei einem Spannungsausfall
Frequenzumrichter gesteuert werden über: gespeichert, siehe Parameter 019. In diesem
1. die Taste [START]. Dadurch können Stoppbefehle Parameter wird der Datenänderungsmodus (nach
an den digitalen Klemmen (falls in Parameter einem Timeout) nicht automatisch verlassen.
013 [2] oder [4] gewählt wurde), jedoch Der Ort-Sollwert kann nicht über die serielle
nicht überlagert werden. Kommunikationsschnittstelle eingestellt werden.
2. die Tasten [STOP], [JOG] und [RESET], sofern
aktiv (siehe Parameter 014, 015 und 017).

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 105
 VLT® Serie 5000

Warnung: Da der eingestellte Wert nach Funktion:

einer Unterbrechung der Stromversor- In diesem Parameter wird festgelegt, in welchem
gung gespeichert bleibt, kann der Motor Parametersatz Datenwerte geändert werden
bei Wiedereinschalten der Netzspannung ohne (Programmierung). Die Programmierung über die
Vorwarnung anlaufen, wenn Parameter 019 auf Tastatur bzw. die serielle Schnittstelle RS 485
Auto-Neustart, " [0] geändert wird. ist unabhängig davon, welcher Parametersatz in
Parameter 004 angewählt wurde.
004 Aktiver Parametersatz
(PAR-SATZ BETRIEB) Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wert: Werkseinstellung [0] enthält die ab Werk eingestellten
Werkseinstellung (WERKSEINSTELLUNG) [0] Daten. Sie kann als Datenquelle benutzt werden,
✭Parametersatz 1 (SATZ 1) [1] um die übrigen Parametersätze in einen bekannten
Parametersatz 2 (SATZ 2) [2] Zustand zurückzuversetzen.
Parametersatz 3 (SATZ 3) [3] Parametersatz 1-4 [1]-[4] sind vier einzelne Sätze,
Parametersatz 4 (SATZ 4) [4] die nach Bedarf anwählbar sind. Diese können
Externe Anwahl (EXTERNE ANWAHL) [5] unabhängig davon programmiert werden, welcher
Satz als aktiver Satz gewählt wurde, und damit die
Funktion: Funktionen des Frequenzumrichters bestimmt.
In diesem Parameter wird die Parametersatznummer,
die nach Wunsch des Benutzers die Funktionen des ACHTUNG!:
Frequenzumrichters bestimmen soll, gewählt. Werden Daten im aktiven Satz geändert,
Alle Parameter können in vier einzelnen bzw. in diesen hineinkopiert, so werden
Parametersätzen, (Satz 1 bis 4) programmiert werden. die Änderungen sofort wirksam.
Darüber hinaus gibt es unter der Bezeichnung
Werkseinstellung noch einen vorprogrammierten
006 Kopieren von Parametersätzen
Satz, der nicht geändert werden kann.
(KOPIER FUNKTION)
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wert:
Werkseinstellung [0] enthält die ab Werk eingestellten ✭Keine Kopie (KEINE KOPIE) [0]
Daten. Sie kann als Datenquelle benutzt werden, Kopie in Parametersatz 1 von # (SATZ 1 VON #) [1]
um die übrigen Parametersätze in einen bekannten Kopie in Parametersatz 2 von # (SATZ 2 VON #) [2]
Zustand zurückzuversetzen. Über Parameter 005 und Kopie in Parametersatz 3 von # (SATZ 3 VON #) [3]
006 kann ein Parametersatz auf einen oder mehrere Kopie in Parametersatz 4 von # (SATZ 4 VON #) [4]
andere Parametersätze kopiert werden. Kopie in Parametersatz alle von #
Parametersatz 1-4 [1]-[4] sind vier einzelne Sätze, (KOPIE AUF ALLE VON #) [5]
die nach Bedarf anwählbar sind.
Externe Anwahl [5]wird benutzt, wenn mittels # = der in Parameter 005 gewählte Satz
Fernbedienung zwischen mehreren Parametersätzen
gewechselt werden soll. Für den Wechsel zwischen Funktion:
den Sätzen können die Klemme 16, 17, 29, 32, 33 Kopieren von dem in Parameter 005 gewählten
sowie die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle Satz auf einen der anderen Sätze oder alle anderen
benutzt werden. Sätze. Die Parameter 001, 004, 005, 500 und
501 werden nicht mittels der Funktion kopieren
von Parametersätzen kopiert.

005 Parametersatz, Programm Es kann nur im Stoppmodus kopiert werden (Der

(PAR-SATZ PROGRAM) Motor wird durch einen Stoppbefehl angehalten).
Wert:
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Werkseinstellung (WERKSEINSTELLUNG) [0]
Der Kopiervorgang beginnt, nachdem die gewünschte
Parametersatz 1 (SATZ 1) [1]
Kopierfunktion eingegeben und durch Betätigen
Parametersatz 2 (SATZ 2) [2]
der [OK]-Taste bestätigt wurde. Der Kopiervorgang
Parametersatz 3 (SATZ 3) [3]
wird im Display angezeigt.
Parametersatz 4 (SATZ 4) [4]
✭Aktueller Parametersatz (AKT. SATZ = PAR. 4) [5]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

106 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

007 Bedienfeldkopie 009 Displayzeile 2 (DISPLAY ZEILE 2)

(BEDIENFELD KOPIE) Wert:
Wert: Sollwert [%] (SOLLWERT [%]) [1]
✭Keine Kopie (KEINE KOPIE) [0] Sollwert [Einheit] (SOLLWERT [EINHEIT]) [2]
Upload alle Parameter (UPLOAD ALLE PAR.) [1] Istwert [Einheit] (ISTWERT [EINHEIT]) [3]
Download alle Parameter ✭Frequenz [Hz] (FREQUENZ [HZ]) [4]
(DOWNLOAD ALLE PAR.) [2] Frequenz x Skalierung [-]
Download Funktions-Parameter (FREQUENZ X SKAL.) [5]
(DOWNLOAD FKT. PAR.) [3] Motorstrom [A] (MOTORSTROM [A]) [6]
Drehmoment [%] (MOMENT [%]) [7]
Funktion: Leistung [kW] (LEISTUNG [KW]) [8]
Parameter 007 wird eingesetzt, wenn der Anwender Leistung [PS] (LEISTUNG [HP]) [9]
die eingebaute Kopiefunktion des Bedienfeldes nut-zen Ausgangsenergie [kWh]
möchte, und zwar, wenn ein bestimmter Parametersatz (AUSGANGSLEIST. [KWH]) [10]
von einem Frequenzumrichter durch Umsetzen des Motorspannung [V] (MOTORSPANNUNG [V]) [11]
Bedienfeldes auf einen anderen kopiert werden soll. Zwischenkreisspannung [V]
(DC-SPANNUNG [V]) [12]
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Therm. Belast. Motor [%]
Upload alle Parameter [1]ist zu wählen,
(TH. MOTORSCHUTZ [%]) [13]
wenn alle Parameterwerte auf das Bedienfeld
Therm. Belast. VLT [%]
übertragen werden sollen.
(TH. VLT-SCHUTZ [%]) [14]
Download alle Parameter [2] ist zu wählen,
Motorlaufstunden [Stunden]
wenn alle übertragenen Parameterwerte auf den
(BETRIEBSSTUNDEN) [15]
Frequenzumrichter kopiert werden sollen, auf
Digitaler Eingang [Binärcode]
dem das Bedienfeld montiert ist.
(DIGITALEINGAENGE) [16]
Download Funktions-Parameter [3]ist zu wählen,
Analoger Eingang 53 [V]
wenn nur ein Download der leistungsunabhängigen
(ANALOGEING. 53 [V]) [17]
Parameter gewünscht wird. Diese Funktion
Analoger Eingang 54 [V]
wird benutzt, wenn ein Download auf einen
(ANALOGEING. 54 [V]) [18]
Frequenzumrichter erfolgen soll, der eine
Analoger Eingang 60 [mA]
andere Nennleistung hat als der, von dem der
(ANALOGEING. 60 [MA]) [19]
Parametersatz stammt. Beachten Sie bitte, daß die
Pulssollwert [Hz] (PULSSOLLWERT [HZ]) [20]
leistungsabhängigen Parameter 102-P106 nach einem
Ext.-Sollwert [%] (EXT. SOLLWERT [%]) [21]
Kopiervorgang programmiert werden müssen.
Zustandswort [Hex] (STATUSWORT [HEX]) [22]
ACHTUNG!: Bremsleistung Mittelwert über 2 Min. [kW]

Programmierung
Uploads/Downloads können nur im (BREMSLEIST ./2 MIN.) [23]
Stoppmodus vorgenommen werden. Bremsleistung aktuell [kW] (BREMSLEIST ./S) [24]
Kühlkörpertemp. [ C] (TEMP.KUEHLKOE. [ C]) [25]
Alarmwort [Hex] (ALARMWORT [HEX]) [26]
008 Displayskalierung der Motorfrequenz Steuerwort [Hex]
(SKAL. MOTORFREQ.) (STEUERWORT [HEX]) [27]
Warnwort 1 [Hex]
Wert:
(WARNWORT 1 [HEX]) [28]
0.01 - 500.00 ✭ 1
Erweitertes Zustandswort 2 [Hex]
Funktion: (ERW ZUSTANDSWORT 2 [HEX]) [29]
In diesem Parameter wird der Faktor gewählt, Kommunikations-Optionskarte, Warnung
der mit der Motorfrequenz fM ,multipliziert und im (COMM OPT WARN [HEX]) [30]
Display angezeigt wird, wenn Parameter 009-012 RPM [min-1 ] (MOTOR RPM [RPM]) [31]
auf Frequenz x Skalierung [5] eingestellt sind. RPM x Skalierung [-]
(MOTOR RPM X SKAL) [32]
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Skalierungsfaktor ein. Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann der Datenwert gewählt
werden, der in der 2. Zeile des Displays erscheinen
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 107
 VLT® Serie 5000

soll. In den Parametern 010 - 012 können Analoger Eingang 54 [V] gibt den Signalwert
weitere drei Datenwerte gewählt werden, die von Klemme 54 an.
in der 1. Zeile erscheinen. Analoger Eingang 60 [mA] gibt den Signalwert
von Klemme 60 an.
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Pulssollwert [Hz] gibt eine etwaige an eine
Sollwert [%] ist gleich dem Gesamtsollwert (der der Klemmen 17 oder 29 angeschlossene
Sum-me aus Digital-/Analog-/Voreingest./Bus/Sollw. Pulsfrequenz in Hz an.
halten/Beschleun./Verlangs.). Externer Sollwert [%] gibt die Summe der externen
Sollwert [Einheit] gibt den Zustandswert an Sollwerte in % (Summe aus Analog/Puls/ Bus) an.
Klemme 17/29/53/54/60 in der Einheit an, die Zustandswort [Hex] gibt das über die serielle
sich aus der Wahl der Konfiguration in Parameter Schnittstelle im Hex-Code vom VLT-Frequenzumrichter
100 (Hz, Hz und U/Min.) ergibt. übermittelte Zustandswort an.
Istwert [Einheit] gibt den Zustandswert der Klemmen Bremsleistung/2 min. [kW] gibt die an einen externen
33/53/60 mit der in Parameter 414, 415 und 416 Bremswiderstand übertragene Bremsleistung an. Der
gewählten Einheit/Skalierung an. Mittelwert wird laufend für die letzten 120 Sekunden
Frequenz [Hz] gibt die Motorfrequenz, d.h. die berechnet. Es wird vorausgesetzt, daß in Parameter
Aus-gangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequenzumrichters, an. 401 ein Widerstandswert eingegeben worden ist.
Frequenz x Skalierung [-] ist gleich der aktuellen Bremsleistung/sec. [kW] gibt die derzeitige
Mo-torfrequenz fM (ohne Resonanzdämpfung), an einen externen Bremswiderstand übertragene
multipli-ziert mit einem im Parameter 008 Bremsleistung an. Die Angabe erfolgt in Form
eingestellten Faktor (Skalierung). eines augenblicklichen Wertes.
Motorstrom [A] gibt den Phasenstrom des Motors Es wird vorausgesetzt, daß in Parameter 401 ein
als gemessenen Effektivwert an. Widerstandswert eingegeben worden ist.
Drehmoment [%] gibt die aktuelle Motorbelastung Kühlkörpertemp. [ C] gibt die aktuelle
im Verhältnis zum Motornennmoment an. Kühlkörper-temperatur des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
Leistung [kW] gibt die aktuelle Leistungsaufnahme an. Die Ab-schaltgrenze liegt bei 90 ± 5 C, die
des Motors in kW an. Wiedereinschaltgrenze bei 60 ± 5 C.
Leistung [PS] gibt die aktuelle Leistungsaufnahme Alarmwort [Hex] gibt einen oder mehrere Alarme in
des Motors in PS an. einem Hex-Code an. Weitere Angaben Seite 160.
Ausgangsenergie [kWh] gibt die Energie an, Steuerwort [Hex] gibt das Steuerwort für
die der Motor seit dem letzten in Parameter 618 den VLT-Frequenzumrichter an. Siehe Serielle
vorgenommenen Reset aufgenommen hat. Kommunikation im Produkthandbuch.
Motorspannung [V] gibt die dem Motor Warnwort 1 [Hex] gibt eine oder mehrere Warnungen
zugeführte Spannung an. in einem Hex-Code an. Weitere Angaben Seite 160.
Zwischenkreisspannung [V] gibt die Zwischenkreis- Erweitertes Zustandswort [Hex] gibt einen
spannung im VLT-Frequenzumrichter an. oder mehrere Zustände in Hex-Code an. Weitere
Thermische Belast. Motor [%] gibt die berechnete Informationen s. S. 160.
bzw. geschätzte thermische Belastung des Motors Kommunikations-Optionskarte Warnung
an. 100% ist die Abschaltgrenze. [Hex] gibt ein Warnwort im Fall eines Fehlers
Thermische Belast. VLT [%] gibt die am Kommunikationsbus. Nur aktiv, wenn
berechnete bzw. geschätzte thermische Kommunikationsoptionen installiert sind. Ohne
Belastung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters an. Kommunikationsoptionen wird 0 Hex angezeigt.
100% ist die Abschaltgrenze. RPM [min ] gibt die Motordrehzahl an. Bei
Motorlaufstunden [Stunden] gibt die Anzahl Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung wird die
der Stunden an, die der Motor seit dem letzten Drehzahl gemessen. In den anderen Modi wird der
Reset in Parameter 619 gelaufen ist. Wert auf Basis des Motorschlupfes gemessen.
Digitaler Eingang [Binärcode] gibt den Signalstatus RPM x Skalierung [-] gibt die Motordrehzahl
der acht digitalen Klemmen (16, 17, 18, 19, multipliziert mit einem in Parameter 008
27, 29, 32 und 33) an. Eingabe 16 entspricht eingestellten Wert an.
dem Bit am weitesten links. ’0’ = kein Signal,
’1’ = angeschlossenes Signal.
Analoger Eingang 53 [V] gibt den Signalwert
von Klemme 53 an.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

108 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

010 Displayzeile 1,1 (DISPLAY ZEILE 1,1) einstellbar sein soll, und der VLT-Frequenzumrichter in
011 Displayzeile 1,2 (DISPLAY ZEILE 1,2) Parameter 002 auf Ort Steuerung [1] eingestellt wurde.
012 Displayzeile 1.3 (DISPLAY ZEILE 1,3)
Wenn Parameter 100 nicht auf Drehzahlregelung ohne
Wert: Istwertrückführung [0] eingestellt wurde, wechseln Sie
Siehe Parameter 009. zu Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung [0].

Funktion: Ort digitale Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation

In den Parametern 010 - 012 können drei verschiedene funktioniert wie Ort Steuerung ohne
Datenwerte gewählt werden, die auf dem Display Schlupfkompensation [1]. Einziger Unterschied:
in Zeile 1, Position 1, Zeile 1, Position 2 und Wenn Parameter 002 auf Ort [1] eingestellt ist,
Zeile 1, Position 3 angezeigt werden. wird der Motor gemäß der Liste im Abschnitt
Die Ausgabe auf dem Display erfolgt mit der Wechsel zwischen Ort- und Fernsteuerung über
Taste [DISPLAY/STATUS]. die digitalen Eingänge gesteuert.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Ort digitale Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 [3] ist
Zur Auswahl stehen 32 verschiedene Datenwerte, zu wählen, wenn der Sollwert über Parameter
siehe Parameter 009. 003 eingestellt werden soll.

Die Werkseinstellung der einzelnen Parameter lautet: Ort digitale Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 [4]
funktioniert wie Ort Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 [3].
Par. 010 Sollwert [%]
Allerdings kann der Motor, wenn Parameter 002 auf
Par. 011 Motorstrom [A]
Ort [1] eingestellt wurde, über die digitalen Eingänge
Par. 012 Leistung [kW]
gemäß der Liste im Abschnitt Wechsel zwischen
Ort- und Fernsteuerung gesteuert werden.

ACHTUNG!:
013 Ort Steuerung/Konfiguration wie Wechsel von Fern auf Ort digitale Steuerung
Parameter 100 ohne Schlupfkompensation:
(SOLLW. ORT MODUS)
Wert: Aktuelle Motorfrequenz und Drehrichtung sind
Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0] beizubehalten. Entspricht die aktuelle Drehrichtung
Ort Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation nicht dem Reversierungssignal (negativer Sollwert),
(ORT OHNE SCHLUPF) [1] so wird die MotorfrequenzM auf 0 Hz gesetzt.
Ort digitale Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation
(ORT+EXT. ST./O.S.) [2] Wechsel von Ort digitale Steuerung ohne
Ort Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 Schlupfkompensation auf Fern:
(ORT/WIE P100) [3] Die gewählte Konfiguration (Parameter 100)

Programmierung
✭Ort digitale Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 ist aktiv. Wechsel werden ohne abrupte
( ORT+ EXT.ST./P100) [4] Bewegungen ausgeführt.

Wechsel von Fern auf Ort Steuerung/wie Parameter

Funktion:
100 oder Ort digitale Steuerung/wie Parameter 100.
Wahl der gewünschten Funktion, wenn in Parameter
Der aktuelle Sollwert wird beibehalten. Ist das
002 Ort-Betrieb gewählt wurde.
Sollwertsignal negativ, wird der Ort-Sollwert
Siehe auch Beschreibung des Parameters 100.
auf 0 gesetzt.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wechsel von Ort Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 oder
Bei Auswahl von Blockiert [0] wird die Einstellung
Ort digitale Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 auf Fern.
eines Ort-Sollwertes über Parameter 003 gesperrt.
Der Sollwert wird durch das aktive Sollwertsignal
Ein Wechsel auf Blockiert [0] ist nur aus einer der
für Fernbedienung ersetzt.
anderen Einstellmöglichkeiten in Parameter 013
möglich, wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter über
Parameter 002 auf Fern [0] eingestellt wurde.

Ort Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation [1] ist zu

wählen, wenn die Drehzahl (in Hz) über Parameter 003

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 109
 VLT® Serie 5000

014 Taster Stopp Siehe Parameter 200.

(TASTER STOP)
Wert:
Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0] 017 Taster Reset (TASTER RESET)
✭Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1] Wert:
Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0]
Funktion:
✭Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1]
In diesem Parameter kann die Funktion Taster Stop
auf dem Bedienfeld blockiert oder freigegeben werden. Funktion:
Die Taste kann benutzt werden, wenn Parameter In diesem Parameter kann die Funktion Reset auf
002 auf Fern [0] oder Ort [1] eingestellt ist. der Tastatur gewählt bzw. abgewählt werden. Die
Taste kann benutzt werden, wenn Parameter 002
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
auf Fern [0] oder Ort [1] eingestellt ist.
Wird in diesem Parameter Blockiert [0] gewählt,
so ist die [STOP]-Taste nicht aktiv. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wird in diesem Parameter Blockiert [0] gewählt, so
ACHTUNG!:
ist die Taste [RESET] (Quittierung) nicht aktiv.
Wird Wirksam programmiert und die [Stop]
Taste betätigt, so hat diese oberste Priorität ACHTUNG!:
vor ext.Startbefehlen. Blockiert [0] nur dann wählen, wenn
über die digitalen Eingänge ein externes
Reset-Signal angeschlossen ist.
015 Taster JOG Festdrehzahl (TASTER JOG.)
Wert:
✭Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0] 018 Eingabesperre
Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1] (EINGABESPERRE)
Wert:
Funktion:
✭Dateneingabe wirksam
Mit diesem Parameter wird die Festdrehzahlfunktion
(DATENEING. WIRKSAM) [0]
des LCP aktiviert/deaktiviert.
Die Taste wird benutzt, wenn Parameter 002 auf Dateneingabe gesperrt
Fern [0] oder Ort [1] eingestellt ist. (DATENEING. GESPERRT) [1]

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Funktion:

In diesem Parameter kann die Bedienung
Wird in diesem Parameter Blockiert [0] gewählt,
’gesperrt’ werden, so daß keine Datenänderungen
so ist die Taste [JOG] nicht aktiv.
über das Bedienfeld (jedoch weiterhin über
die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle)
vorgenommen werden können.
016 Taster Reversierung
(TASTER REVERS.) Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wert: Bei Auswahl von Dateieingabe gesperrt [1] können

✭Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) keine Daten-änderungen vorgenommen werden.
[0]
Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1]

Funktion: 019 Netz-ein-Modus beim Einschalten,

Mit diesem Parameter wird die Reversierungsfunktion Ort-Betrieb
auf dem LCP aktiviert/deaktiviert. (NETZ-EIN-MODUS)
Die Taste kann nur benutzt werden, wenn
Wert:
Parameter 002 auf Ort [1] und Parameter 013
Automatischer Wiederanlauf mit gespeichertem
auf Ort Steuerung [3] eingestellt ist.
Ort-Sollwert (AUTO NEUSTART) [0]
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ✭Stopp, Ort-Sollwert wurde gespeichert
Wird in diesem Parameter Blockiert [0] gewählt, (ORT=STOPP) [1]
so ist die Taste [FWD/REV] nicht aktiv. Stopp, Ort-Sollwert wurde auf 0 gesetzt

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

110 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

(ORT=STOPP+SOLLW.=0) [2]

Funktion:
Einstellen des gewünschten Betriebszustandes beim
Zuschalten der Netzspannung Die Funktion ist nur
zusammen mit Ort-Betrieb [1] in Parameter 002 aktiv.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Automatischer Wiederanlauf mit gespeichertem
Ort-Sollwert [0]ist zu wählen, wenn das Gerät mit einem
Ort-Sollwert betrieben wird (einstellbar in Parameter
003) und nach Netz-Aus und wieder Zuschalten
wieder mit dem vorherigen Sollwert weiterlaufen soll.
Stopp, Ort-Sollwert wurde gespeichert [1] ist zu
wählen, wenn das Gerät beim Einschalten der
Versorgungsspannung zunächst gestoppt bleiben
soll. Nach Betätigen der Taste [START] wird
der VLT mit dem in Parameter 003 eingestellten
Ort-Sollwert wieder anlaufen.
Stopp, Ort-Sollwert wurde auf 0 gesetzt [2] ist
zu wählen, wenn das Gerät beim Einschalten der
Versorgungsspannung gestoppt bleiben und der
Ort-Sollwert auf 0 gesetzt werden soll (Parameter 003).

ACHTUNG!:
Bei Betrieb mit Fernbedienung (Parameter
002) hängt der Start/Stopp-Zustand
bei Netzanschluß von den externen
Steuersignalen ab. Wird in Parameter 302
Puls-Start [2] gewählt, so bleibt der Motor nach
dem Netzanschluß zunächst gestoppt.

027 Zeile für die Warnanzeige

(WARNANZEIGE)
Wert:
✭Warnung in Zeile 1/2 ()
Programmierung
[0]
Warnung in Zeile 3/4 () [1]

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird entschieden, in welcher
Zeile die Warnung im Anzeigemodus erscheinen
soll. Im Programmiermodus (Menu oder Quick
menu) erscheint die Warnung in Zeile 1/2, um eine
Störung der Programmierung zu vermeiden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wählen Sie die Zeile aus.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 111
 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Last und Motor erfolgt ohne Istwertsignal, da der VLT Serie

5000 das Drehmoment präzise auf der Basis
100 Konfiguration der Strommessung berechnet. (Siehe auch das
(KONFIGURATION) Anschlußbeispiel im Projektierungshandbuch.)
Wert: Wird Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung [5]
✭Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung gewählt, so muß ein Drehgeber-Drehzahlrückführsignal
(MIT SCHLUPFKOMP.) [0] an eine der digitalen Klemmen 32/33
Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung angeschlossen werden.
(MIT RUECKFUEHR.-PID) [1]
Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung Parameter 205 Maximaler Sollwert und Parameter
(PID-PROZESS) [3] 415 Maximaler Istwert müssen bei Wahl von [1], [3],
Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung [4] und [5] der Anwendung angepaßt werden.
(DREHMOMENT-REGELUNG) [4]
Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung
(DREHMOM. GESCHW.) [5] 101 Drehmomentkennlinie
(MOMENTKENNL.)
Funktion:
Wert:
In diesem Parameter kann der VLT den jeweiligen
Bedingungen angepaßt werden. Dies vereinfacht ✭Hoch-konstantes Moment (H-KONST.MOMENT) [1]
die Anpassung an eine gegebene Anwendung. Alle Hoch-variables Moment niedrig
Parameter, die für die angewählte Konfiguration (H-QUADR.: NIEDRIG) [2]
nicht benötigt werden, sind ausgeblendet (nicht Hoch-variables Moment mittel
aktiv). Durch Wechseln zwischen den verschiedenen (H-QUADR.: MITTEL) [3]
Anwendungskonfigurationen wird eine stoßfreie Hoch-variables Moment mittel
Übertragung (nur Frequenz) gewährleistet. (H-QUADR.: HOCH) [4]
Hoch-spezielle Motorkennlinie
Beschreibung der Auswahl: (H-SONDERMOTOR MO.) [5]
Bei Auswahl von Drehzahlregelung ohne Hohes variables Drehmoment mit niedrigem
Istwertrückführung [0] ergibt sich eine normale Anlaufmoment
Drehzahlsteuerung (ohne Istwertsignal) mit (H-QUADR.TIEF-CTSTART) [6]
automatischem Schlupfausgleich, so daß bei variabler Hohes variables Drehmoment mit mittlerem
Belastung die Drehzahl konstant gehalten wird. Anlaufmoment
Die Ausgleichsfunktionen sind aktiv, können aber nach (H-QUADR.MITT-CTSTART) [7]
Bedarf in Parametergruppe 100 abgewählt werden. Hohes variables Drehmoment mit hohem
Anlaufmoment
Bei Auswahl von Drehzahlregelung mit (H-QUADR.HOCH-CTSTART) [8]
Istwertrückführung [1] werden volles Haltemoment Normal-konstantes Moment
bei 0 U/Min sowie eine höhere Drehzahlgenauigkeit (N-KONST.MOMENT) [11]
erreicht. Es muß ein Istwertsignal vorhanden und Normal-variables Moment niedrig
der PID-Regler eingestellt sein. (Siehe auch das (N-QUADR. NIEDRIG) [12]
Anschlußbeispiel im Projektierungshandbuch). Normal-variables Moment mittel
Bei Wahl von Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung (N-QUADR.. MITTEL) [13]
[3] wird der interne Prozeßregler aktiviert, der eine Normal-variables Moment hoch
präzise Regelung eines Prozesses im Verhältnis zu (N-QUADR.: HOCH) [14]
einem gegebenen Prozeßsignal ermöglicht. Das Normal-spezielle Motorkennlinie
Prozeßsignal kann in der jeweiligen Prozeßeinheit (N-SONDERMOTORMO) [15]
oder in Prozent eingestellt werden. Es muß ein Normal-variables Moment mit niedrigem
Istwertsignal vom Prozeß zugeführt werden, und der konstantem Anlaufmoment (H-QUADR.TIEF-CTSTART)
[16]
Prozeßregler muß eingestellt werden. (Siehe auch das Normal-variables Moment mit mittlerem
Anschlußbeispiel im Projektierungshandbuch). konstantem Anlaufmoment
Anlaufmoment (H-QUADR.MITT-CTSTART) [17]
Bei Wahl von Drehmomentregelung ohne Normal-variables Moment mit hohem
Istwertrückführung [4] wird die Drehzahl geregelt Anlaufmoment (N-QUADR.HOCH-CTSTART) [18]
und das Drehmoment konstant gehalten. Dies
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

112 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion: Die Auswahl der entsprechenden Drehmomentkennlinie

In diesem Parameter kann das Prinzip sollte im Hinblick auf problemlosen Betrieb,
für die Anpassung der U/f-Kennlinie des geringstmöglichen Energieverbrauch und möglichst
VLT-Frequenzumrichters an die Drehmomentkennlinie niedriges Geräuschniveau erfolgen.
der Belastung gewählt werden. Durch Wechseln Wählen Sie Spezielle Motorkennlinie, wenn eine
zwischen den verschiedenen Drehmomentkennlinien besondere U/f-Einstellung erforderlich ist, um eine
wird eine stoßfreie Übertragung (nur Spannung) Anpassung an spezielle Motoren zu ermöglichen. Die
gewährleistet. Eckpunkte werden in Parameter 422-432 eingestellt.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: ACHTUNG!:

Die Schlupfausgleichsfunktion ist bei Betrieb
ACHTUNG!: mit variablem Drehmoment oder spezieller
Bei VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V und VLT Motorkennlinie Sondermotormodul nicht aktiv.
5001-5011, 380-500 V und VLT 5011,
550-600 V ist nur eine Momentkennlinie
von [1] bis [8] wählbar. 102 Motorleistung (MOTORLEISTUNG)
Wert:
Wird eine hohe Momentkennlinie [1]-[5] gewählt, 0,18 kW (0,18 KW) [18]
so kann der VLT-Frequenzumrichter 160% 0,25 kW (0,25 KW) [25]
Drehmoment erzeugen. Wird eine normale 0,37 kW (0,37 KW) [37]
Momentkennlinie [11]-[15] gewählt, so kann der 0,55 kW (0,55 KW) [55]
VLT-Frequenzumrichter 110% Drehmoment erzeugen. 0,75 kW (0,75 KW) [75]
Der Normalmodus wird bei Motoren in Übergröße 1,1 kW (1,10 KW) [110]
benutzt. Siehe Beschreibung Seite 74. 1,5 kW (1,50 KW) [150]
Beachten Sie, daß das Drehmoment in Parameter
2,2 kW (2,20 KW) [220]
221 begrenzt werden kann.
3 kW (3,00 KW) [300]
Bei der Auswahl Konstantes Drehmoment ergibt sich 4 kW (4,00 KW) [400]
eine belastungsabhängige U/f-Kennlinie, bei der mit 5,5 kW (5,50 KW) [550]
steigender Belastung (Strom) die Ausgangsspannung 7,5 kW (7,50 KW) [750]
höher wird, um eine konstante Magnetisierung des 11 kW (11,00 KW) [1100]
Motors aufrechtzuerhalten und um Motorverluste 15 kW (15,00 KW) [1500]
während des Anlaufens auszugleichen. 18,5 kW (18,50 KW) [1850]
Quadratisches Drehmoment niedrig, Quadratisches 22 kW (22,00 KW) [2200]
Drehmoment mittel oder Quadratisches Drehmoment 30 kW (30,00 KW) [3000]
hoch ist z.B. bei Kreiselpumpen und Lüftern mit 37 kW (37,00 KW) [3700]
quadratischer Belastung zu wählen. 45 kW (45,00 KW) [4500]

Programmierung
Hohes variables Drehmoment mit niedrigem [6], 55 kW (55,00 KW) [5500]
mittlerem [7] oder hohem [8] Anlaufmoment ist 75 kW (75,00 KW) [7500]
zu wählen, wenn ein höheres Losbrechmoment 90 kW (90,00 KW) [9000]
benötigt wird, als mit den drei vorherigen 110 kW (110,00 KW) [11000]
quadratischen Kennlinien ([2], [3] oder [4]) erreicht 132 kW (132,00 KW) [13200]
werden kann, siehe Abb. unten. 160 kW (160,00 KW) [16000]
200 kW (200,00 KW) [20000]
250 kW (250,00 KW) [25000]
280 kW (280,00 KW) [28000]
315 kW (315,00 KW) [31500]
355 kW (355,00 KW) [35500]
400 kW (400,00 KW) [40000]
450 kW (450,00 KW) [45000]
500 kW (500,00 KW) [50000]

Abhängig vom Gerät

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 113
 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wählt den KW-Wert aus, der der Nennleistung Wählen Sie ungeachtet der Netzspannung des
des Motors entspricht. VLTFrequenzumrichters einen Wert, der den Angaben
Ein eingestellter KW-Wert wurde vom Werk auf dem Typenschild des Motors entspricht.
ausgewählt, der von der Gerätegröße abhängt. Außerdem besteht die Möglichkeit der stufenlosen
Einstellung der Motorspannung.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Der eingestellte Wert ändert automatisch die
Wählen Sie einen Wert, der den Angaben auf Motor-datenwerte in den Parametern 108-118
dem Typenschild des Motors entspricht. 4 Für 87-Hz-Betrieb bei 230/400-V-Motoren
Untergrößen oder eine Übergröße sind im Verhältnis die Typenschilddaten für 230 V einstellen.
zur Werkseinstellung programmierbar. Parameter 202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch und
Außerdem besteht die Möglichkeit der stufenlosen Parameter 205 Maximaler Sollwert müssen der
Einstellung des Wertes für die Motorleistung. 87-Hz-Anwendung angepaßt werden.
Der eingestellte Wert ändert automatisch die
Motordatenwerte in den Parametern 108-118. ACHTUNG!:
Bei Dreieckschaltungen muß die
ACHTUNG!: Motornennspannung für die Dreieckschaltung
Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109 gewählt werden.
geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn ACHTUNG!:
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird, Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
102-109 den Parameter 422. in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird,
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern
103 Motorspannung (MOTORSPANNUNG) 102-109 den Parameter 422.
Wert:
200 V [200]
208 V [208] 104 Motorfrequenz
220 V [220] (MOTORFREQUENZ)
230 V [230] Wert:
240 V [240] ✭50 Hz (50 HZ) [50]
380 V [380] 60 Hz (60 HZ) [60]
400 V [400]
415 V [415] Max. Motorfrequenz: 1000 Hz
440 V [440]
460 V [460] Funktion:
480 V [480] Einstellung der Nennfrequenz fM,N des Motors (nach
500 V [500] den Angaben auf dem Typenschild).

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Abhängig vom Gerät.
Hinweis: Motorspannungen von 500 und 575 Wählen Sie einen Wert, der den Angaben auf dem
V müssen manuell programmiert werden - Typenschild des Motors entspricht.
Voreinstellungen sind nicht verfügbar. Außerdem besteht die Möglichkeit der stufenlosen
Einstellung des Wertes für die Motorfrequenz.
Funktion: Wird ein Wert abweichend von 50 Hz oder 60 Hz
Wählen Sie einen Wert, der den Angaben auf dem eingestellt, so ist eine Korrektur der Parameter
Typenschild des Motors entspricht. 108 und 109 erforderlich.
Für 87-Hz-Betrieb bei 230/400-V-Motoren
ACHTUNG!: die Typenschilddaten für 230 V einstellen.
Der Motor wird stets die der angeschlossenen Parameter 202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch und
Versorgungsspannung entsprechende Parameter 205 Maximaler Sollwert müssen der
Pulsspannung erkennen. Bei 87-Hz-Anwendung angepaßt werden.
Rückkoppelungsbetrieb wird die Spannung
jedoch höher sein.
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

114 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

ACHTUNG!:
Bei Dreieckschaltungen muß die Die Motornenndrehzahl nM,N dient u.a. zur Ermittlung
Motornennfrequenz für die Dreieckschaltung des optimalen Schlupfausgleichs.
gewählt werden. ACHTUNG!:
Die Eingabe eines korrekten Wertes ist wichtig,
ACHTUNG!:
da dieser Bestandteil der VVCplus Steuerung
Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109
ist. Der Maximalwert ist gleich fM,N x 60. Die
geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
Einstellung von fM,N erfolgt in Parameter 104.
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird, ACHTUNG!:
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109
102-109 den Parameter 422. geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird,
105 Motorstrom (MOTORSTROM)
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern
Wert:
102-109 den Parameter 422.
0.01 - IVLT,MAX [0,01 - XXX.X]

Hängt von der Wahl des Motors ab. 107 Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA
(MOTORANPASSUNG)
Funktion:
Der Nennstrom des Motors IM,N wird bei der vom Wert:
VLT-Frequenzumrichter durchgeführten Berechnung ✭Motoranpassung aus (AUS) [0]
u.a. des Drehmomentes und des thermischen Motoranpassung ein, RS and XS
Motorschutzes berücksichtigt . (ANPASSUNG (RS,XS)) [1]
Motoranpassung ein, RS (ANPASSUNG (RS)) [2]
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion:
Wählen Sie einen Wert, der den Angaben auf dem
Wird diese Funktion benutzt, so stellt der
Typenschild des Motors entspricht.
Der Wert ist in Ampere (A) einzugeben. VLT-Frequenzumrichter bei Motorstillstand
automatisch die notwendigen Steuerparameter
ACHTUNG!: (Parameter 108/109) ein. Eine automatische
Die Eingabe eines korrekten Wertes ist wichtig, Motoranpassung ermöglicht eine optimale
da dieser Bestandteil der VVCplus Steuerung ist. Ausnutzung des Motors.
Zur bestmöglichen Anpassung des VLT-
ACHTUNG!: Frequenzumrichters empfiehlt es sich, die AMA

Programmierung
Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109 an einem kalten Motor durchzuführen.
geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
Die AMA-Funktion wird mit der [START]-Taste aktiviert,
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn
nachdem [1] oder [2] gewählt wurde.
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird,
Siehe auch den Abschnitt Automatische
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern
Motoranpassung .
102-109 den Parameter 422.
Der Abschnitt Automatische Motoranpassung,
AMA, über VLT Software Dialog zeigt, wie die
106 Motornenndrehzahl automatische Motoranpassung mit Hilfe von VLT
(MOTOR NENNDREHZ .) Software Dialog aktiviert werden kann. Verläuft
Wert: die Motoranpassung normal, erscheint im Display
100 - 60000 rpm (U/MIN) "ALARM 21". Drücken Sie die [STOP/RESET]-Taste.
[100 - 60000]
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist nun betriebsbereit.

Hängt von der Wahl des Motors ab. Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Funktion: Wählen Sie Motoranpassung ein, RS und XS [1],

wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter eine automatische
Hier ist die Motornenndrehzahl nM,N (auf dem
Motor-typenschild ablesen) einzugeben.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 115
 VLT® Serie 5000

Motoranpassung sowohl des Statorwiderstandes RS ermittelt werden. Ist RPHASE-PHASE weniger als 1-2
als auch der Statorinduktanz XS vornehmen soll. Ohm (typisch Motoren >4-5,5 kW, 400 V), so sollte
ein spezielles Ohmmeter (Thomson Brücke o.ä.)
Wählen Sie Motoranpassung ein, RS [2], wenn ein eingesetzt werden. RS = 0,5 x RPHASE-PHASE
reduzierter Test durchgeführt werden soll, bei dem nur
der ohmsche Widerstand im System ermittelt wird. 4. Benutzung der Werkseinstellungen von RS , die
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter selbst aufgrund der
ACHTUNG!: Daten auf dem Motortypenschild wählt.
Es ist wichtig, daß die Motorparameter
102-106 korrekt eingestellt sind, da sie in den ACHTUNG!:
AMA-Algorithmus einfließen. Für die meisten Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109
Anwendungen ist eine korrekte Eingabe der Parameter geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118
102-106 ausreichend. Für eine optimale dynamische in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn
Motoranpassung ist eine AMA notwendig. eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird,
Die Motoranpassung kann bis zu 10 Minuten beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern
dauern; die Zeit richtet sich nach der Leistungsgröße 102-109 den Parameter 422.
des eingesetzten Motors.

ACHTUNG!: 109 Statorreaktanz

Während der automatischen Motoranpassung (STATORREAKT.)
darf der Motor nicht angetrieben werden Wert:
(generatorischer Betrieb). ✭Abhängig von der Wahl des Motors

ACHTUNG!: Funktion:
Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109 Nach dem Einstellen der Motordaten in den
geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118 Parametern 102-106 erfolgt automatisch eine Reihe
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn von Einstellungen diverser Parameter, darunter des
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird, Statorwiderstandes XS . Die Wellenleistung läßt
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern sich durch Einstellen von RS und XS verbessern;
102-109 den Parameter 422. Vorgehensweise nachstehend beschrieben.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

108 Statorwiderstand (STATORWIDERSTAND) XS kann wie folgt eingestellt werden:
Wert:
1. Automatische Motoranpassung - hier nimmt
✭Abhängig von der Wahl des Motors
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter Messungen am
Funktion: Motor vor. Alle Ausgleichsfunktionen werden
Nach dem Einstellen der Motordaten in den auf 100% zurückgestellt.
Parametern 102-106 erfolgt automatisch eine Reihe 2. Die Werte werden vom Motorlieferanten angegeben.
von Einstellungen diverser Parameter, darunter des 3. Die Werte ergeben sich durch manuelles
Statorwiderstandes RS . Eine manuelle Eingabe von Durchmessen:
RS solte bei kaltem Motor erfolgen. Die Wellenleistung - XS ergibt sich durch Anschließen eines Motors
läßt sich durch Einstellen von RS und XS verbessern; ans Netz und Messen der Phase-Phase Spannung
Vorgehensweise nachstehend beschrieben. UL sowie des Leerlaufstroms I .
Alternativ können diese Werte auch bei
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Leerlaufbetrieb mit Motornennfrequenz fM,N
R2 kann wie folgt eingestellt werden: Schlupfausgleich (Par. 115) = 0% sowie
1. Automatische Motoranpassung - hier nimmt Lastausgleich bei hoher Drehzahl (Par. 114)
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter Messungen am = 100% abgelesen werden.
Motor vor. Alle Ausgleichsfunktionen werden
auf 100% zurückgestellt.
2. Die Werte werden vom Motorlieferanten angegeben.
3. Die Werte ergeben sich durch manuelles
Durchmessen: 4. Benutzung der Werkseinstellungen von XS , die
- RS kann durch Messen des Widerstandes der VLT-Frequenzumrichter selbst aufgrund der
RPHASE-PHASE zwischen zwei Phasenklemmen Daten auf dem Motortypenschild wählt.
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

116 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

ACHTUNG!: 113 Lastausgleich bei niedriger Drehzahl

Wird die Einstellung der Parameter 102-109 (LASTAUSGL. TIEF)
geändert, so kehren die Parameter 110-118 Wert:
in die Werkseinstellung zurück. Wenn 0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
eine besondere Motorkennlinie benutzt wird,
beeinflußt eine Änderung in den Parametern Funktion:
102-109 den Parameter 422. Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters kann ein Ausgleich
der Spannung in Abhängigkeit von der Last
vorgenommen werden, wenn der Motor mit
110 Motormagnetisierung bei 0 U/min
niedriger Drehzahl arbeitet.
(MOT.MAGN.0 U/MIN)
Wert: Beschreibung der Auswahl:
0 - 300 % ✭ 100 % Es wird eine optimale U/f-Kennlinie und damit
ein Lastausgleich bei niedriger Drehzahl erzielt.
Funktion: Der Frequenzbereich, in dem der Lastausgleich
Dieser Parameter kann benutzt werden, wenn aufgrund bei niedriger Drehzahl aktiv ist, hängt von
eines Betriebs mit niedriger Drehzahl eine andere der Motorgröße ab.
thermische Belastung des Motors gewünscht wird. Die Funktion ist aktiv bei::
Der Parameter wird zusammen mit Parameter
Motorgröße Frequenz
111 benutzt.
(Changeover)
0,5 kW - 7,5 kW < 10 Hz
11 kW - 45 kW < 5 Hz
55 kW - 355 kW < 3-4 Hz

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Eingabe eines Wertes als Prozentsatz des
Magne-tisierungsnennstroms.
Eine zu niedrige Einstellung kann ein reduziertes
Drehmoment an der Motorwelle bewirken.

111 Eckfrequenz für Motormagnetisierung

Programmierung
bei 0 U/min
(FREQ.MAG.0 U/MIN)
Wert: 114 Lastausgleich bei hoher Drehzahl
0,1 - 10,0 Hz ✭ 1,0 Hz (LASTAUSGL. HOCH)
Funktion: Wert:
Der Parameter wird zusammen mit Parameter 110 0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
benutzt. Siehe auch die Zeichnung in Parameter 110.
Funktion:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters kann ein Ausgleich der
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein Spannung in Abhängigkeit von der Last vorgenommen
(Eckpunkt). Wenn die Frequenz niedriger als die werden, wenn der Motor mit hoher Drehzahl arbeitet.
Schlupffrequenz des Motors ist, haben Parameter
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
110 und 111 keine Bedeutung.
Mit der Wahl Lastausgleich bei hoher Drehzahl kann
ein Ausgleich der Last ab der Frequenz, bei der

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 117
 VLT® Serie 5000

Lastausgleich bei niedriger Drehzahl zu wirken aufhört, 117 Resonanzdämpfung

bis zur Höchstfrequenz herbeigeführt werden. (RESONANZ DAEMPF.)

Die Funktion ist aktiv bei: Wert:

0 - 500 % ✭ 100 %
Motorgröße Frequenz
(Changeover) Funktion:
0,5 kW - 7,5 kW >10 Hz Hochfrequente Resonanzprobleme können durch
11 kW - 45 kW >5 Hz Einstellen der Parameter 117 und 118 beseitigt werden.
55 kW - 355 kW >3-4 Hz Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wenn weniger Resonanzschwankungen gewünscht
werden, muß der Wert in Parameter 118
erhöht werden.
115 Schlupfausgleich
(SCHLUPFAUSGLEICH)
Wert:
118 Zeitkonstante für Resonanzdämpfung
-500 - 500 % ✭ 100 %
(ZEITKONST. DAEMPF.)
Funktion: Wert:
Der Schlupfausgleich wird automatisch u.a. aufgrund 5 - 50 ms ✭ 5 ms
der Motornenndrehzahl nM,N errechnet.
Im Parameter 115 kann eine Feineinstellung des Funktion:
Schlupfausgleichs vorgenommen werden, was einen Hochfrequente Resonanzprobleme können durch
Ausgleich von Toleranzen des nM,N -Wertes erlaubt. Einstellen der Parameter 117 und 118 beseitigt werden.
Die Funktion ist bei Variablem Moment (Parameter 101
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
- variable Drehmomentkurven), Drehmomentregelung
Wählen Sie die Zeitkonstante, die die beste
mit Drehzahlrückführung und Besonderer
Dämp-fung ergibt.
Motorkennlinie nicht aktiv.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Geben Sie einen prozentualen Wert der 119 Hohes Startmoment
Motornennfrequenz (Parameter 104) ein. (STARTMOMENT HOCH)
Wert:
0,0 - 0,5 Sek. ✭ 0,0 Sek.
116 Zeitkonstante für Schlupfausgleich
Funktion:
(SCHLUPF-ZEITKONS)
Zur Gewährleistung eines hohen Anlaufmoments
Wert:
sind ca. 2 x IVLT,N max. 0,5 Sekunden lang erlaubt.
0,05 - 5,00 Sek. ✭ 0,50 Sek.
Allerdings wird der Strom durch die Schutzgrenze des
Funktion: VLT-Frequenzumrichters (Wechselrichter) begrenzt.
Dieser Parameter bestimmt die Reaktions- Beschreibung der Auswahl:
geschwindigkeit des Schlupfausgleichs.
Stellen Sie die notwendige Zeit ein, in der ein hohes
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Startmoment beim Anlauf gewünscht wird.
Ein hoher Wert führt zu einer langsamen
Reaktion. Umgekehrt bewirkt ein niedriger
Wert eine schnelle Reaktion. 120 Startverzögerung (STARTVERZOEGER.)
Wenn niederfrequente Resonanzprobleme auftreten, Wert:
muß die Zeitspanne verlängert werden. 0,0 - 10,0 Sek. ✭ 0,0 Sek.

Funktion:
Dieser Parameter ermöglicht ein Verzögern des
Anlaufzeitpunktes. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter beginnt
mit der in Parameter 121 gewählten Anlauffunktion.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

118 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl: in Parameter 131. Diese Funktion wird typisch in

Stellen Sie die nötige Zeit ein, die vergehen soll, Hub-/Senkanwendungen verwendet.
bis die Beschleunigung eingeleitet wird. Dies wird besonders bei Anwendungen mit
Verschiebeankermotor benutzt, bei denen in
Vorwärtsrichtung gestartet und anschließend in
der Sollrichtung gefahren werden soll.
121 Startfunktion (STARTFUNKTION)
Wert: Startfunktion wie vorgewählte Drehrichtung
Zeitverzögerung DC-Halten [4] ist zu wählen, um die Parameter 130 und
(ZEITVERZ. DC-HALTEN) [0] 131 für die Startverzögerungszeit beschriebene
Zeitverzögerung DC-Bremse Funktion zu erzielen. Der Motor wird immer in
(ZEITVERZ. DC-BREMSE) [1] der vorgewählten Drehrichtung laufen.
✭Zeitverzögerung Motorfreilauf Ist das Sollwertsignal gleich Null (0), so wird Parameter
(ZEITVERZ. MOTORFR.) [2] 130 Startfrequenz ignoriert, und die Ausgangsfrequenz
Startfunktion Rechtslauf ist gleich Null (0). Die Ausgangsspannung
(START FUNKT. RECHTS) [3] entspricht der Einstellung der Startspannung in
Startfunktion wie vorgewählte Drehrichtung Parameter 131 Startspannung .
(START FUNKT.WIE REF.) [4]
VVCplus Rechtslauf [5] ist zu wählen, um während
VVCplus Rechtslauf
der Startverzögerungszeit nur die in Parameter 130
(VVC+ RECHTS) [5]
Startfrequenz beschriebene Funktion zu erhalten.
Funktion: Die Startspannung wird automatisch berechnet.
Auswahl des gewünschten Zustandes in der Beachten Sie, daß diese Funktion nur während der
Startverzögerungszeit (Parameter 120). Startverzögerungszeit nur die Startfrequenz verwendet.
Unabhängig vom Wert, den das Sollwertsignal
Beschreibung der Auswahl: annimmt, entspricht die Ausgangsfrequenz der
Zeitverzögerung DC-Halten [0] ist zu wählen, um Einstellung der Startfrequenz in Parameter 130.
dem Motor während der Startverzögerungszeit
einen Gleichspannungshaltestrom (Parameter
124) zuzuführen. 122 Stoppfunktion
Zeitverzögerung DC-Bremse [1] ist zu wählen, um (STOPPFUNKTION)
dem Motor während der Startverzögerungszeit Wert:
einen Gleichspannungsbremsstrom (Parameter ✭Motorfreilauf (MOTORFREILAUF) [0]
125) zuzuführen. DC-Haltebremse (DC-HALT) [1]
Bei Wahl von Zeitverzögerung Motorfreilauf [2] wird Motortest (MOTORTEST) [2]
der Motor während der Zeitverzögerung nicht durch Vormagnetisierung (VORMAGNET.) [3]
Programmierung
den Frequenzumrichter gesteuert (Wechselrichter aus).
Funktion:
Startfunktion Rechtslauf [3] und VVCplus Rechtslauf Hier kann die Funktion des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
[5] werden typisch in Hub-/Senkanwendungen nach einem Stoppbefehl und nach Abwärtsrampen
verwendet. Startfunktion wie vorgewählte der Frequenz auf 0 Hz gewählt werden. Aktivierung
Drehrichtung [4] wird besonders bei Anwendungen dieses Parameters auch wenn ein Stoppbefehl
mit Gegengewicht verwendet.. aktiv ist, siehe Parameter 123.

Startfunktion Rechtslauf [3] ist zu wählen, um Beschreibung der Auswahl:

die in Parameter 130 und 131 beschriebene Motorfreilauf [0] ist zu wählen, wenn der
Funktion in der Startverzögerungszeit zu VLT-Frequenzumrichter den Motor ’loslassen’ soll
erzielen. Die Ausgangsfrequenz entspricht (Wechselrichter ausgeschaltet).
der Einstellung der Startfrequenz in Parameter DC-Haltebremse [1] ist zu wählen, wenn ein
130, und die Ausgangsspannung entspricht in Parameter 124 eingestellter DC-Haltestrom
der Einstellung der Startspannung in Parameter aktiviert werden soll.
131. Unabhängig vom Wert des Sollwertsignals Motortest [2] ist zu wählen, wenn der
entspricht die Ausgangsfrequenz der Einstellung VLT-Frequenzumrichter prüfen soll, ob ein
der Startfrequenz in Parameter 130 und die Motor angeschlossen ist oder nicht.
Ausgangsspannung der Einstellung der Startspannung
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 119
 VLT® Serie 5000

Vormagnetisierung [3] ist zu wählen, wenn im Motor 125 Gleichspannungsbremsstrom

ein Feld aufgebaut werden soll, damit der Motor so (DC-BREMSSTROM)
schnell wie möglich ein Drehmoment erzeugt. Das Wert:
Feld wird bei haltendem Motor aufgebaut. Es muß
✭ 50 %
jedoch eine Spannung am Motor anliegen.
Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Gleichspannungs-
123 Mindestfrequenz zur Aktivierung der bremsstrom eingestellt, der durch einen Stoppbefehl
Stoppfunktion ausgelöst wird, wenn die in Parameter 127 eingestellte
Gleichspannungsbremsfrequenz erreicht oder die
(FREQ. STOPPFUNKT.)
umgepolte Gleichspannungsbremsung über Klemme
Wert:
27 oder die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle
0,0 - 10,0 Hz ✭ 0,0 Hz aktiv ist. Danach ist der Gleichspannungs-
Funktion: bremsstrom in der in Parameter 126 eingestellten
Gleichspannungsbremszeit aktiv.
In diesem Parameter wird die Frequenz eingestellt,
bei der die in Parameter 122 gewählte Funktion ACHTUNG!:
aktiviert werden soll. Der Maximalwert hängt vom Motornennstrom
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ab. Ist der Gleichspannungsbremsstrom
aktiv, so beträgt die Taktfrequenz des
Geben Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein.
VLT-Frequenzumrichters 4,5 kHz.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

124 Gleichspannungshaltestrom Die Einstellung ist als prozentualer Wert des
(DC-HALTESTROM) Motor-nennstroms IM,N in Parameter 105 einzugeben.
100% Gleichspannungsbremsstrom entspricht IM,N .
Wert:
✭ 50 % Warnung: Werden 100% des
Motor- nennstromes IM,N zugeführt,
Funktion:
so ist sicherzustellen, daß dieser
Dieser Parameter dient zum Halten des Motors
nur solange fließen kann, daß der Motor nicht
(Haltemoment) oder zum Vorwärmen des Motors.
beschädigt oder zerstört wird.
ACHTUNG!:
Der Maximalwert hängt vom Motornennstrom
126 Gleichspannungsbremszeit
ab. Ist der Gleichspannungshaltestrom
aktiv, so beträgt die Taktfrequenz des (DC-BREMSZEIT)
VLT-Frequenzumrichters 4 kHz. Wert:
0,0 (AUS) - 60,0 Sek. ✭ 10,0 Sek.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Der Parameter ist nur anwendbar, wenn in Parameter Funktion:
121 Zeitverz. DC-Bremse [1] oder in Parameter 122 In diesem Parameter wird die Gleichspannungsbrem-
DC-Haltebremse [1] gewählt wurde. Die Einstellung szeit eingestellt, während der der Gleichspannungs-
erfolgt als prozentualer Wert des Motornennstroms bremsstrom (Parameter 125) aktiv sein soll.
IM,N , der in Parameter 105 eingestellt wird. 100%
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Gleichspannungshaltestrom entspricht IM,N.
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Zeit ein.
Warnung: Werden 100% des Motor-
nennstromes IM,N zugeführt, so ist sicher-
zustellen, daß dieser nur solange fließen
kann, daß der Motor nicht beschädigt oder zerstört wird.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

120 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

127 Einschaltfrequenz der Gleichspan- ETR-Funktionen beinhalten Motorüberlastungsschutz

nungsbremse der Klasse 20 gemäß NEC.
(DC-BR. STARTFREQ)
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wert:
Kein Motorschutz [0] ist zu wählen, wenn
0,0 - Parameter 202 ✭ 0,0 Hz (AUS)
Warnung oder Abschaltung (Trip) bei überlastetem
Funktion: Motor nicht erfolgen sollen.
In diesem Parameter wird die Einschaltfrequenz für Warnung Thermistor ist zu wählen, wenn eine Warnung
die Gleichspannungsbremse eingestellt, bei der der ausgegeben werden soll, wenn der angeschlossene
Gleichspannungsbremsstrom (Parameter 125) in Thermistor und damit der Motor zu warm wird.
Zusammenhang mit einem Stoppbefehl aktiv sein soll. Abschaltung Thermistor ist zu wählen, wenn
eine Abschaltung (Trip) erfolgen soll, wenn
Beschreibung der Auswahl: der angeschlossene Thermistor und damit
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein. der Motor zu warm wird.

ETR Warnung 1-4 ist zu wählen, wenn bei durch

den VLT berechneter Überlastung des Motors eine
128 Thermischer Motorschutz Warnung im Display erscheinen soll.
(THERM. MOTORSCHU.) ETR Abschaltung 1-4 ist zu wählen, wenn
Wert: bei berechneter Überlastung des Motors eine
✭Kein Motorschutz (KEIN MOTORSCHUTZ) [0] Abschaltung erfolgen soll.
Warnung Thermistor Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann auch so
(WARNUNG THERMISTOR ) [1] program-miert werden, daß er über einen der digitalen
Abschaltung Thermistor Ausgänge ein Warnsignal abgibt, das Signal wird
(ABSCHALT THERMISTOR) [2] sowohl bei Warnung als auch bei Abschaltung
ETR Warnung 1 (ETR WARN. 1) [3] (thermische Warnung) gegeben.
ETR Abschaltung 1 (ETR ABSCHALT. 1) [4]
ETR Warnung 2 (ETR WARN. 2) [5]
ETR Abschaltung 2 (ETR ABSCHALT. 2) [6]
ETR Warnung 3 (ETR WARN. 3) [7]
ETR Abschaltung 3 (ETR ABSCHALT. 3) [8]
ETR Warnung 4 (ETR WARN. 4) [9]
ETR Abschaltung 4 (ETR ABSCHALT. 4) [10]

Funktion:
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann die Motortemperatur

Programmierung
auf zweierlei Art überwachen:
129 Externe Motorbelüftung
- über einen zwischen Klemme 50 und den
(EXT.MOTORLUEFTER)
Analogeingängen Klemme 53 bzw. Klemme 54
angeschlossenen Thermistorfühler. (Parameter 308 Wert:
bzw. 311 auf Thermistor programmieren). ✭Nein (KEIN EXT. LUEFTER) [0]
- durch Berechnung der thermischen Belastung, Ja (MIT EXT. LUEFTER) [1]
basierend auf der aktuellen Belastung und der Zeit.
Funktion:
Dies wird verglichen mit dem Motornennstrom
In diesem Parameter kann für den VLT-
IM,N und der Motornennfrequenz fM,N. Bei den
Frequenzumrichter angegeben werden, ob
Berechnungen wird der Bedarf nach niedrigerer
der Motor mit einem extern versorgten Lüfter
Last bei niedrigeren Drehzahlen aufgrund
(Fremdbelüftung) versehen ist, und dementsprechend
herabgesetzter Lüftung berücksichtigt.
keine Leistungsreduzierung bei niedrigen
Die ETR Funktionen 1-4 beginnen erst dann mit der Drehzahlen erforderlich ist.
Lastermittlung, wenn in den Satz gewechselt wird,
in denen sie angewählt wurden. Dies ermöglicht Beschreibung der Auswahl:
auch dann die Nutzung der ETR Funktion, wenn Bei Auswahl von Ja [1] wird der Kurve in unten
zwischen zwei oder mehr Motoren gewechselt stehender Zeichnung gefolgt, wenn die Motorfrequenz
wird. Für den nordamerikanischen Markt: Die
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 121
 VLT® Serie 5000

geringer ist. Wenn sie höher ist, wird die Zeit gleichwohl 120 eine Startverzögerungszeit eingestellt wurde.
reduziert, als wenn kein Lüfter montiert wäre. Außerdem muß ein Sollwertsignal vorhanden sein.

130 Startfrequenz (STARTFREQUENZ)

Wert:
0,0 - 10,.0 Hz ✭ 0,0 Hz

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann die Ausgangsfrequenz
eingestellt werden, mit der der Motor anlaufen soll. Die
Ausgangsfrequenz ’springt’ zu dem eingestellten Wert.
Der Parameter kann z.B. für Hub- und
Senkanwen-dungen (Verschiebeankermotoren)
benutzt werden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Startfrequenz ein.
Voraussetzung ist, daß die Startfunktion in Parameter
121 auf [3] oder [4] und daß in Parameter 120 eine
Startverzögerungszeit eingestellt wurde. Außerdem
muß ein Sollwertsignal vorhanden sein.

131 Startspannung (STARTSPANNUNG)

Wert:
0,0 - Parameter 103 ✭ 0,0 Volt

Funktion:
Bestimmte Motoren, z.B. Verschiebeankermotoren,
benötigen zum Anlaufen eine zusätzliche Spannung
bzw. Startfrequenz (Boost), um die mechanische
Bremse auszuschalten.
Hierzu werden die Parameter 130/131 benutzt.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein, der zum
Ausschalten der mechanischen Bremse erforderlich
ist. Voraussetzung ist, daß die Anlauffunktion in
Parameter 121 auf [3] oder [4] und daß in Parameter

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

122 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Sollwerte und Grenzwerte

200 Ausgangsfrequenz Bereich/Richtung

(FREQ.BER.+DREHR.)
Wert:
0-132 Hz, Eine Richtung
( 132 HZ EINE RICHT.) [0]
0-132 Hz, beide Richtungen
(132 HZ BEIDE RICHT.) [1]
0-1000 Hz, eine Richtung
( 1000 HZ EINE RICHT.) [2]
0-1000 Hz, beide Richtungen
(1000 HZ BEIDE RICHT.) [3]
Linkslauf 0 -132 Hz (132 HZ LINKSLAUF ) [4] Parameter 200 Ausgangsfrequenz Bereich/Richtung
Linkslauf 0 -1000 Hz (1000 HZ LINKSLAUF) [5] = Beide Richtungen.
Funktion:
Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters kann man sich gegen eine
unbeabsichtigte Drehrichtungsumkehr (Reversierung) 201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig (FMIN)
absichern. Außerdem kann eine höchstzulässige (MIN. FREQUENZ)
Ausgangsfrequenz gewählt werden, die unabhängig Wert:
von der Einstellung anderer Parameter gelten soll. 0,0 - fMAX ✭ 0,0 Hz
ACHTUNG!:
Funktion:
Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-
In diesem Parameter kann für die Motorfrequenz
Frequenzumrichters kann niemals einen Wert
eine Mindestgrenze gewählt, d.h. die geringste
höher als 1/10 der Taktfrequenz annehmen.
Frequenz bestimmt werden, mit der der Motor
Wird nicht to be used together withProcess laufen soll. Die Mindestfrequenz kann die maximale
control, closed loop (parameter 100) zusammen Frequenz fMAX niemals übersteigen. Wenn in
mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung Parameter 200 Beide Richtungen gewählt wurde,
(Parameter 100) benutzt. ist die Mindestfrequenz ohne Bedeutung.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Richtung und die Einstellbar ist ein Wert von 0,0 Hz bis zu der in
Aus-gangsfrequenz ein. Parameter 202 gewählten Höchstfrequenz (fMAX).

Programmierung
Beachten Sie, daß bei Auswahl von Eine
Richtung, 0-132 Hz [0],Eine Richtung, 0-1000
Hz [2], Linkslauf 0-132 Hz [4],Linkslauf 0-1000 202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch (FMAX)
Hz [5] die Ausgangsfrequenz auf den Bereich (MAX. FREQUENZ)
fMIN - fMAX begrenzt wird.
Wert:
Bei Auswahl von Beide Richtungen, 0-132 Hz [1]
FMIN - 132/1000 Hz (Parameter 200)
oder Beide Richtungen, 0-1000 Hz [3] wird die
✭ abhängig vom Gerät
Ausgangsfrequenz auf den Bereich ± f MAX begrenzt
(die Mindestfrequenz ist ohne Bedeutung). Funktion:
Beispiel: In diesem Parameter kann eine maximale
Motorfrequenz gewählt, d.h. die höchste Frequenz
bestimmt werden, mit der der Motor laufen soll.
Die Werkseinstellung ist 132 Hz für VLT 5001-5062
380-500 V, VLT 5001-5062 550-600 V und
5001-5027 200-240 V. Bei VLT 5075-5250 380-500
V, VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V und 5032-5052
200-240 V ist die Werkseinstellung 66 Hz.

Siehe auch Parameter 205.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 123
 VLT® Serie 5000

Die Einheit richtet sich nach der in Parameter

ACHTUNG!:
100 gewählten Konfiguration.
Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-
Frequenzumrichters kann niemals einen Wert Drehzahlregelung ohne Hz
höher als 1/10 der Taktfrequenz annehmen. Istwertrückführung
Drehzahlregelung mit U/Min.
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Istwertrückführung
Wählbar ist ein Wert von fMIN bis zu dem in Drehmomentregelung ohne Nm
Parameter 200 gewählten Wert. Istwertrückführung
ACHTUNG!:
Drehmomentregelung mit Nm
Drehzahlrückführung
Wird eine Motorhöchstfrequenz über 500 Hz
eingestellt, so muß Parameter 446 auf 60 Prozeßregelung mit Prozeßein-
AVM [0] Schaltmuster eingestellt werden. Istwertrückführung heiten
(Par. 416)

203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich
Die über Parameter 101 aktivierte spezielle
(SOLL-ISTW-BER.)
Motorkennlinie folgt der in Parameter 100
Wert: gewählten Einheit.
✭Min - Max (MIN - MAX) [0]
- Max - + Max (-MAX-+MAX) [1]

Funktion: 205 Maximaler Sollwert

In diesem Parameter wird festgelegt, ob das (MAX-SOLLWERT)
Sollwertsignal und das Istwertsignal positiv sein sollen Wert:
oder sowohl positiv als auch negativ sein können. SOLLW.MIN - 100.000,000 ✭ 50,000
Die Mindestgrenze kann ein negativer Wert sein, es
sei denn, in Parameter 100 wurde Drehzahlregelung Funktion:
mit Istwertrückführung [1] programmiert. Der Maximale Sollwert kann durch die Summe aller
Es sollte Min bis Max [0] gewählt werden, Sollwerte nicht überschritten werden. Wurde in
wenn in Parameter 100 Prozeßregelung mit Parameter 100 mit Istwertrückführung gewählt, so
Istwertrückführung gewählt wurde. kann der Maximale Sollwert nicht höher als der Max.
Istwert (Parameter 415) eingestellt werden.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Bereich. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
Die Einheit richtet sich nach der in Parameter
100 gewählten Konfiguration.
204 Minimaler Sollwert
(MIN-SOLLWERT) Drehzahlregelung ohne Hz
Wert: Istwertrückführung
-100.000,000 - RefMAX ✭ 0,000 Drehzahlregelung mit U/Min.
Hängt von Parameter 100 ab. Istwertrückführung
Drehmomentregelung ohne Nm
Funktion: Istwertrückführung
Der Minimale Sollwert kann durch die Summe aller Drehmomentregelung mit Nm
Sollwerte (ggf. Minussollwerte) nicht unterschritten Drehzahlrückführung
werden. Mindestsollwert ist nur aktiv, wenn Prozeßregelung mit Prozeßeinheiten
in Parameter 203 Min bis Max [0] eingestellt Istwertrückführung
wurde, jedoch immer aktiv bei Prozeßregelung mit
(Par. 416)
Istwertrückführung (Parameter 100).

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Nur aktiv, wenn Parameter 203 auf Min bis
Max [0] eingestellt ist..
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

124 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Die über Parameter 101 aktivierte spezielle Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Motorkennlinie folgt der in Parameter 100 Programmieren Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit auf.
gewählten Einheit.

208 Rampenzeit Ab 1
206 Rampentyp (RAMPENVERLAUF) (RAMPE AB 1)
Wert: Wert:
✭Linear (LINEAR) [0] 0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät
Sinusförmig (SINUS - FORM) [1]
Sinus2 förmig (SINUS 2- FORM) [2] Funktion:
Sinus3 förmig (SINUS 3- FORM) [3] Die Rampenzeit Ab 1 ist die Verzögerungszeit
von der Motornennfrequenz fM,N (Parameter 104)
Funktion: bis 0 Hz oder von der Motornenndrehzahl nM,N ,
Es stehen vier Rampentypen zur Auswahl. vorausgesetzt, es entsteht im Wechselrichter keine
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Überspannung aufgrund von generatorischem Betrieb
des Motors bzw. wenn der zurückgespeiste Strom die
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Rampentyp
Momentgrenze erreicht (Einstellung in Parameter 222).
abhängig von den Anforderungen an den
Beschleunigungs-/Verlangsamungsvorgang. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Programmieren Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit ab.

209 Rampenzeit Auf 2

(RAMPE AUF 2)
Wert:
0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät

Funktion:
Siehe Beschreibung von Parameter 207.

207 Rampenzeit Auf 1 Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(RAMPE AUF 1) Programmieren Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit auf.
Der Wechsel von Rampe 1 auf Rampe 2 erfolgt
Wert:
über das Signal am Digitaleingang Klemme
0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät
16, 17, 29, 32 oder 33.

Programmierung
Funktion:
Die Rampenzeit auf ist die Beschleunigungszeit von 0
Hz bis zur Motornennfrequenz fM,N (Parameter 104) 210 Rampenzeit Ab 2
bzw. Motornenndrehzahl nM,N (sofern in Parameter (RAMPE AB 2)
100 Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Wert:
gewählt wurde). Es wird vorausgesetzt, daß der
0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät
Ausgangsstrom nicht die Momentgrenze erreicht
(Einstellung in Parameter 221). Funktion:
Siehe Beschreibung von Parameter 208.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Programmieren Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit ab.
Der Wechsel von Rampe 1 auf Rampe 2 erfolgt
über das Signal am Digitaleingang Klemme
16, 17, 29, 32 oder 33.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 125
 VLT® Serie 5000

211 Rampenzeit Festdrehzahl - Jog 213 Frequenz Festdrehzahl - Jog

(RAMPE JOG) (FREQUENZ JOG)
Wert: Wert:
0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät 0,0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10,0 Hz

Funktion: Funktion:
Die Rampe-Jog-Zeit ist die Beschleunigungs- Mit der Festdrehzahlfrequenz fJOG kann eine feste
/Verlangsamungszeit von 0 Hz bis zur Ausgangsfrequenz eingestellt werden. Nach Anwahl
Motornennfrequenz fM,N (Parameter 104). Es wird der Festdrehzahl läuft der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
vorausgesetzt, daß der Ausgangsstrom nicht höher als mit dieser Frequenz.
die (in Parameter 221 eingestellte) Momentgrenze ist.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein.

214 Sollwert-Funktion
(SOLLWERT-FUNKT.)
Wert:
✭Addierend zum Sollwert (ADD.ZUM SOLLWERT) [0]
Erhöhung des Sollwertes-Relativ
(ERHOEH. SOLLWERT REL.) [1]
Externe Anwahl (EXTERNE ANWAHL) [2]
Die Rampenzeit der Festdrehzahl beginnt mit
der Aktivierung der Festdrehzahl über das Funktion:
Bedienfeld oder über die digitalen Eingänge Hier kann definiert werden, wie voreingestellte
bzw die serielle Schnittstelle. Sollwerte zu den übrigen Sollwerten hinzuaddiert
werden sollen. Dazu Addierend zum Sollwert oder
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Erhöhung des Sollwertes-Relativ verwenden. Mit
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit ein.
der Funktion Externe Anwahl kann auch festgelegt
werden, ob ein Wechsel zwischen externen Sollwerten
und voreingestellten Sollwerten erfolgen soll.
212 Rampenzeit Ab, Schnellstopp
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
(RAMPE Q-STOPP)
Bei Auswahl von Addieren zum Sollwert [0] wird
Wert:
einer der voreingestellten Sollwerte (Parameter
0,05 - 3600 Sek. ✭ abhängig vom Gerät
215-218) als ein prozentualer Wert des maximal
Funktion: möglichen Sollwerts hinzugefügt.
Die Rampenzeit Ab, Schnellstopp ist die Bei Auswahl von Addieren zum Sollwert [1] wird einer
Verzöge-rungszeit von der Motornennfrequenz der voreingestellten Sollwerte (Parameter 215-218)
fM,N bis 0 Hz, vorausgesetzt, es entsteht im als ein prozentualer Wert des tatsächlichen Sollwerts
Wechselrichter keine Überspannung aufgrund von zu den externen Sollwerten hinzugefügt.
generatorischem Betrieb des Motors bzw. wenn Außerdem kann in Parameter 308 gewählt werden,
der zurückgespeiste Strom die Momentgrenze ob die Signale der Klemmen 54 und 60 zur Summe
überschreitet (Einstellung in Parameter 222). der aktiven Sollwerte addiert werden sollen.
Schnellstopp wird mit Hilfe des Signals am Bei Externe Anwahl [2] kann über eine der Klemmen
Digitaleingang Klemme 27 oder über die serielle 16, 17, 29, 32 oder 33 (Parameter 300, 301, 305,
Kommunikationsschnittstelle aktiviert. 306 oder 307) zwischen externen und voreingestellen
Sollwerten gewechselt werden. Die Festsollwerte sind
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ein prozentualer Wert des Sollwertbereichs.
Programmieren Sie die gewünschte Rampenzeit ab. Externer Sollwert ist die Summe der Analogsollwerte,
der Puls- und Bussollwerte. Siehe auch

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

126 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

die Zeichnungen im Abschnitt Verarbeitung Das Beispiel zeigt, wie die Ausgangsfrequenz
mehrerer Sollwerte. berechnet wird, wenn Festsollwerte zusammen
mit Addierend und Relativ in Parameter 214
ACHTUNG!: verwendet werden.
Bei Auswahl von Addieren zum Sollwert Parameter 205 Maximaler Sollwert ist auf
oder Erhöhen des Sollwertes-Relativ ist einer 50 Hz eingestellt.
der Festsollwerte immer aktiv. Sollen die
Festsollwerte keine Auswirkung haben, sollten sie
auf 0 % (Werkseinstellung) eingestellt werden.
Par. 204 Anstieg Frequenz Par. 215 Par. 214 Sollwert- Par. 214 Sollwert-
Minimaler [Hz/V] bei 4,0 V Festsollwert art = Addierend [0] art = Relativ [1]
Sollwert
1) 0 5 20 Hz 15 % Ausgangsfrequenz Ausgangsfrequenz
00+20+7,5 = 27,5 Hz 00+20+3 = 23,0 Hz
2) 10 4 16 Hz 15 % 10+16+6,0 = 32,0 Hz 10+16+2,4 = 28,4 Hz
3) 20 3 12 Hz 15 % 20+12+4,5 = 36,5 Hz 20+12+1,8 = 33,8 Hz
4) 30 2 8 Hz 15 % 30+8+3,0 = 41,0 Hz 30+8+1,2 = 39,2 Hz
5) 40 1 4 Hz 15 % 40+4+1,5 = 45,5 Hz 40+4+0,6 = 44,6 Hz

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

hinzuaddiert. Programmieren Sie den/die
Festsollwert(e), die wählbar sein sollen.

Zur Verwendung der Festsollwerte muß zunächst

an Klemme 16, 17, 29, 32 oder 33 "Freigabe
Festsollwert" gewählt werden.
Die Auswahl zwischen Festsollwerten erfolgt durch
Aktivierung der Klemmen 16, 17, 29, 32 oder
33 siehe nachstehende Tabelle.
Klemmen 17/29/33 Klemmen 16/29/32
Festsollwert msb Festsollwert lsb
0 0 Festsollwert
215 Festsollwert 1 (FESTSOLLWERT 1)
1
216 Festsollwert 2 (FESTSOLLWERT 2)
0 1 Festsollwert
217 Festsollwert 3 (FESTSOLLWERT 3) 2

Programmierung
218 Festsollwert 4 (FESTSOLLWERT 4) 1 0 Festsollwert
Wert: 3
-100,00 % - +100,00 % ✭ 0,00% 1 1 Festsollwert
des Sollwertbereichs/externen Sollwertes 4

Funktion:
In den Parametern 215-218 können vier Festsollwerte
programmiert werden. Siehe die Zeichnungen im Abschnitt Verarbeitung
Der Festsollwert kann als prozentualer Wert des Werts mehrerer Sollwerte .
SollwertMAX oder als prozentualer Wert der übrigen
externen Sollwerte eingegeben werden, je nachdem,
welche Wahl in Parameter 214 getroffen wurde. Wenn
ein SollwertMIN ≠ 0 programmiert wurde, wird der
Festsollwert als Prozentwert anhand der Differenz
zwischen SollwertMAX und SollwertMIN berechnet.
Anschließend wird der Wert zu SollwertMIN

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 127
 VLT® Serie 5000

219 Frequenzkorrektur Auf/Ab

(ANPASSUNGSWERT-%)
Wert:
0,00-100% des jeweiligen Sollwertes ✭ 0,00%

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann ein prozentualer
Wert (relativ) eingegeben werden, der dem
Festsollwertsignal entweder hinzuaddiert oder
von diesem abgezogen wird.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wenn über eine der Klemmen 16, 29 oder 32 Beschreibung der Auswahl:
(Parameter 300, 305 und 306) Frequenzkorrektur
Näheres siehe auch Parameter 409.
auf gewählt wurde, dann wird der in Parameter
219 festgelegte prozentuale Wert (relativ) dem Um den Motor gegen "Kippen" abzusichern, ist die
Gesamtsollwert hinzuaddiert. Werkseinstellung auf 1,6 x Motornenndrehmoment
Wenn über eine der Klemmen 17, 29 oder 33 eingestellt (berechneter Wert).
(Parameter 301, 305 und 307) Frequenzkorrektur Bei Einsatz von Synchronmotoren muß die
ab gewählt wurde, dann wird der in Parameter Momentgrenze im Verhältnis zur Werkseinstellung
219 festgelegte prozentuale Wert (relativ) vom erhöht werden.
Gesamtsollwert abgezogen. Etwaiges Ändern einer Einstellung in
Parameter101-106 führt nicht automatisch
zur Rückführung von Parameter 221/222
221 Momentgrenze für motorischen Betrieb zur Werkseinstellung.
(MOM.GRENZE MOT.)
Wert:
0,0 % - xxx,x % von TM,N ✭ 160 % von TM,N 222 Momentgrenze für generatorischen Betrieb
(MOM.GRENZE GEN.)
Funktion:
Wert:
Diese Funktion ist für alle Anwendungskon-
0,0 % - xxx,x % von TM,N ✭ 160 %
figurationen relevant: Drehzahl-, Prozeß- und
Das maximale Drehmoment hängt vom Gerät
Drehmomentregelung.
und der gewählten Motorgröße ab.
Hier wird die Momentgrenze für motorischen Betrieb
eingestellt. Die Momentgrenze ist in Frequenzbereichen Funktion:
bis zur Motornennfrequenz (Parameter 104) wirksam. Diese Funktion ist für alle Anwendungskon-
Im übersynchronen Bereich, in dem die Frequenz figurationen relevant: Drehzahl-, Prozeß- und
höher als die Motornennfrequenz ist, dient die Drehmomentregelung.
Funktion als Strombegrenzungsfunktion. Hier wird die Momentgrenze für generatorischen
Siehe Abb. unten. Betrieb eingestellt. Die Momentgrenze ist in
Frequenzbereichen bis zur Motornennfrequenz
(Parameter 104) wirksam.
Im übersynchronen Bereich, in dem die Frequenz
höher als die Motornennfrequenz ist, dient die
Funktion als Strombegrenzungsfunktion.
Näheres ist der Abb. zu Parameter 221 sowie
Parameter 409 zu entnehmen.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wurde in Parameter 400 Mit Bremswiderstand
[1] gewählt, so ändert sich die Momentgröße in
1,6 x Motornenndrehmoment.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

128 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

223 Warnung: Strom unterer Grenzwert 225 Warnung: Frequenz unterer Grenzwert
(I-MIN GRENZE) (F-MIN GRENZE)
Wert: Wert:
0,0 - Parameter 224 ✭ 0,0 A 0,0 - Parameter 226 ✭ 0,0 Hz

Funktion: Funktion:
Fällt der Motorstrom unter die in diesem Parameter Fällt die Motorfrequenz unter die in diesem
programmierte Grenze IMIN-GRENZE ab, so erscheint Parameter programmierte Grenze fMIN-GRENZE ab,
im Display I-MIN-GRENZE. so erscheint im Display F-MIN-GRENZE.
Die Signalausgänge können so programmiert werden, Die Signalausgänge können so programmiert werden,
daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über
Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321, Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321,
323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben. 323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Die untere Motorstrom-Warngrenze IMIN-GRENZE ist Die untere Motorfrequenz-Warngrenze fMIN-GRENZE
innerhalb des normalen Betriebsbereichs von 0 - I ist innerhalb des normalen Betriebsbereichs des
VLTmax des Frequenzumrichters zu programmieren. Fre-quenzumrichters zu programmieren.
Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 223.

226 Warnung: Frequenz oberer Grenzwert

(F-MAX GRENZE)
Wert:
Parameter 225 - Parameter 202 ✭ 132,0 Hz

Funktion:
Übersteigt die Motorfrequenz die in diesem
Parameter programmierte Grenze fMAX-GRENZE, so
erscheint im Display F-MAX-GRENZE.
Die Signalausgänge können so programmiert werden,
daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über
Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321,
224 Warnung: Strom oberer Grenzwert 323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben.
(I-MAX GRENZE)
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Programmierung
Wert:
Die obere Motorfrequenz-Warngrenze fMAX-GRENZE
Parameter 223 - IVLT,MAX ✭ IVLT,MAX
ist innerhalb des normalen Betriebsbereichs des
Funktion: Fre-quenzumrichters zu programmieren.
Übersteigt der Motorstrom die in diesem Parameter Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 223.
programmierte Grenze IMAX-GRENZE, so erscheint
im Display I MAX-GRENZE.
Die Signalausgänge können so programmiert werden, 227 Warnung: Istwert unterer Grenzwert
daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über (ISTW.-MIN GRENZE)
Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321,
Wert:
323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben.
-100.000,000 - Parameter 228. ✭ -4000,000
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion:
Die obere Motorstrom-Warngrenze IMAX-GRENZE
Fällt das angeschlossene Istwertsignal unter den
ist innerhalb des normalen Betriebsbereichs des
in diesem Parameter eingestellten Wert ab, so
Frequenzumrichters zu programmieren. Siehe
können die Signalausgänge so programmiert werden,
Zeichnung zu Parameter 223.
daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 129
 VLT® Serie 5000

Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321, 230 Frequenzausblendung 1 (F1-

323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben. AUSBLENDUNG)
231 Frequenzausblendung 2 (F2-
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
AUSBLENDUNG)
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
232 Frequenzausblendung 3 (F3-
AUSBLENDUNG)
233 Frequenzausblendung 4 (F4-
228 Warnung: Istwert oberer Grenzwert AUSBLENDUNG)
(ISTW.-MAX. GRENZE) Wert:
Wert: 0,0 - Parameter 200 ✭ 0,0 Hz
Parameter 227 - 100.000,000 ✭ 4000,000
Funktion:
Funktion: Bei einigen Systemen ist es aufgrund von
Übersteigt das angeschlossene Istwertsignal den in Resonanz-problemen in der Anlage erforderlich,
diesem Parameter eingestellten Wert, so können bestimmte Ausgangsfrequenzen zu vermeiden.
die Signalausgänge so programmiert werden,
daß sie über Klemme 42 oder 45 sowie über Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Relaisausgang 01 oder 04 (Parameter 319, 321, Geben Sie die auszublendenden Frequenzen ein.
323 oder 326) ein Zustandssignal abgeben. Siehe auch Parameter 229.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
234 Motorphasenüberwachung
(MOTOR PH.UEBERW)
Wert:
229 Frequenzausblendung, Bandbreite
✭Aktiv (WIRKSAM) [0]
(BANDBR.FREQ. AUSB) Nicht aktiv (BLOCKIERT) [1]
Wert:
0 (AUS) - 100% ✭ 0 (AUS) % Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann die Überwachung der
Funktion: Motorphasen eingestellt werden.
Bei einigen Systemen ist es aufgrund von
Resonanz-problemen in der Anlage erforderlich, Beschreibung der Auswahl:
bestimmte Ausgangsfrequenzen zu vermeiden. Wird Aktiv gewählt, so reagiert der Frequenzumrichter
In den Parametern 230-233 kann ein Überspringen auf eine fehlende Motorphase mit einem
(Ausblenden) dieser Ausgangsfrequenzen Alarm 30, 31; 32.
programmiert werden. In diesem Parameter (229) Wird Nicht aktiv gewählt, wird bei einer fehlenden
kann für alle Frequenzausblendungen eine Bandbreite Motorphase kein Alarm gegeben. Der Motor kann
definiert werden. Die Frequenzausblendungsfunktion bei Betrieb an nur zwei Phasen beschädigt/überhitzt
ist nicht aktiv, wenn in Par. 002 Ort und Par. 013 Ort werden. Aus diesem Grund wird empfohlen, diese
Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation bzw. Ort digitale Funktion immer AKTIV eingestellt zu lassen.
Steuerung ohne Schlupfkompensation gewählt wurde.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Die Ausblendungsbandbreite wird als prozentualer Wert
der in Par. 230-233 gewählten Ausblendungsfrequenz
eingestellt. Die Ausblendungsbandbreite gibt die
maximale Schwankung der Ausblendungsfrequenz an.

Beispiel: Es wird eine Ausblendungsfrequenz von 100

Hz und eine Ausblendungsbandbreite von 1% gewählt.
In dem Fall kann die Ausblendungsfrequenz von 99,5
Hz bis 100,5 Hz schwanken, d.h. 1% von 100 Hz.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

130 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Ein- und Ausgänge

Digitale Eingänge Klemmennummer 16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33

Parameter 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307
Wert:
Ohne Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]
Quittieren (QUITTIEREN) [1]* [1] [1] [1] [1]
Motorfreilauf invers (FREILAUF INVERS) [0]*
Quittierung und Motorfreilauf invers (FREIL. &QUITT. INVERS) [1]
Schnell-Stop, invers (Q-STOPP INVERS) [2]
Gleichsspannungsbremse invers (DC-BREMSE INVERS) [3]
Stop invers (STOP INVERS) [2] [2] [4] [2] [2] [2]
Start (START) [1]*
Pulsstart (PULSSTART) [2]
Reversierung (REVERSIERUNG) [1]*
Start Reversierung (START REVERSIERUNG) [2]
Nur Start rechts wirksam, ein (STARTFREIGABE RE.) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Nur Start links wirksam, ein (STARTFREIGABE REV.) [3] [3] [4] [3]
Jog (FESTDREHZAHL (Jog)) [4] [4] [5]* [4] [4]
Festsollwert, ein (FESTSOLLW. EIN) [5] [5] [5] [5] [5]
Festsollwert, lsb (FESTSOLLW.ANWAHL, LSB) [5] [7] [6]
Externer Sollwert, msb (FESTSOLLW. MSB) [6] [8] [6]
Sollwert speichern (SOLLWERT SPEICHERN) [7] [7]* [9] [7] [7]
Ausgang speichern (AUSGANG SPEICHERN) [8] [8] [10] [8] [8]
Drehzahl auf (DREHZAHL AUF) [9] [11] [9]
Drehzahl ab (DREHZAHL AB) [9] [12] [9]
Satzwahl, lsb (PAR.SATZ ANWAHL LSB) [10] [13] [10]
Parametersatzwahl, msb (PAR.SATZ ANWAHL MSB) [10] [14] [10]
Parametersatzwahl, msb/Drehzahl auf (PARAMETERSATZ [11]*
MSB/DREHZAHL AUF)
Parametersatzwahl, lsb/Drehzahl ab (PARAMETERSATZ [11]*
LSB/DREHZAHL AB)
Frequenzkorrektur auf (FREQ.-KORREKTUR AUF) [11] [15] [12]
Frequenzkorrektur ab (FREQ.-KORREKTUR AB) [11] [16] [12]
Programmierung
Rampe 2 (RAMPE 2) [12] [12] [17] [13] [13]
Netzausfall invertiert (NETZAUSFALL INVERS) [13] [13] [18] [14] [14]
Pulssollwert (PULS SOLLWERT) [23] [28]1
Puls-Istwert, Puls-Sollwert (PULS ISTW.) [24]
Istwert inkrementaler Drehgeber, (ENCODER 2 EING. [25]
Eingang A
Istwert inkrementaler Drehgeber, (ENCODER 2 EING. [24]
Eingang B
Sicherheitsverriegelung (SICHERHEITSVER- [24] [5]
RIEGELUNG)

1)Bei Auswahl dieser Funktion für Klemme 29 wird die gleiche Funktion für Klemme 17 nicht aktiv sein, auch wenn sie
angewählt wurde.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 131
 VLT® Serie 5000

300 Klemme 16, Eingang ACHTUNG!:

(EING. 16 DIGITAL) Beachten Sie bitte, daß ein im
Funktion: Drehmomentgrenzzustand befindlicher
In diesem und den nachfolgenden Parametern VLT-Frequenzumrichter, dem ein Stoppbefehl
gegeben wird, nur dann anhält, wenn Klemme 42,
können verschiedene Funktionen für die Eingänge
der Klemmen 16-33 angewählt werden. 45, 01 oder 04 mit Klemme 27 verbunden ist.
Diese Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind in einer Übersicht An Klemme 42, 45, 01 oder 04 ist die Datenwahl
Momentgrenze und Stopp [27] vorzunehmen.
auf Seite 111 dargestellt. Die max. Frequenz für
Klemme 16, 17, 18 und 19 beträgt 5 kHz. Die max. Start ist zu wählen, wenn ein Start/Stopp-Befehl
Frequenz für Klemme 29, 32 und 33 beträgt 65 kHz.
(Betriebsbefehl, Gruppe 2) gewünscht wird. Logisch
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ’1’ = Start, logisch ’0’ = Stopp.
Ohne Funktion ist zu wählen, wenn der 002
VLT-Frequenzumrichter auf die der Klemme
zugeführten Signale nicht reagieren soll.

Quittierung stellt nach einem Alarm den

VLT-Frequenzumrichter wieder auf Null, wobei jedoch
nicht alle Alarme quittiert werden können.

Motorfreilauf invers dient dazu, den Motor bis

zum Stopp frei auslaufen zu lassen. Logisch ’0’
bewirkt Freilaufstopp und Quittierung. Pulsstart: wird mindestens 3 ms lang ein Impuls
angelegt, so läuft der Motor an, sofern kein
Quittierung und Motorfreilauf invers dient Stoppbefehl (Betriebsbefehl, Gruppe 2) gegeben
zum Aktivieren von Freilaufstopp gleichzeitig wurde. Der Motor wird durch kurzes Aktivieren
mit einer Quittierung. Logisch 0’ bewirkt von Stopp invers angehalten.
Freilaufstopp und Quittierung.
Reversierung wird zur Umkehr der Motordrehrichtung
Schnellstopp invers wird zum Anhalten des Motors verwendet. Logisch ’0’ bewirkt keine
gemäß der Schnellstopprampe (eingestellt in Parameter Drehrichtungsumkehr. Mit logisch ’1’ erfolgt eine
212) verwendet. Logisch ’0’ führt zu Schnellstopp. Reversierung. Das Reversierungssignal ändert nur die
Drehrichtung, aktiviert jedoch nicht die Startfunktion.
Gleichspannungsbremse invers dient zum Anhalten
Reversierung setzt voraus, daß in Parameter 200
des Motors durch Anlegen einer Gleichspannung über
Beide Richtungen gewählt wurde.
einen bestimmten Zeitraum, siehe Parameter 125-127.
Nicht aktiv bei Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Beachten Sie, daß die Funktion nur aktiv ist, wenn
oder Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung.
der Wert in den Parametern 126 und 127 nicht 0 ist.
Logisch ’0’ bewirkt Gleichspannungsbremsung. Start Reversierung dient für Start/Stopp
(Betriebsbefehl, Gruppe 2) und Reversierung
Stopp invers wird durch Unterbrechung der
mit demselben Signal. Es darf nicht gleichzeitig
Spannung zur Klemme aktiviert. Wenn also die
ein Signal an Klemme 18 anliegen. Funktioniert
Klemme spannungslos ist, kann der Motor nicht laufen.
wie Pulsstart Reversierung, wenn für Klemme
Der Stoppvorgang erfolgt gemäß der gewählten
18 Pulsstart gewählt wurde.
Rampe (Parameter 207/208/209/210).
Nicht aktiv bei Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung.
Keiner der o.a. Stoppbefehle (Start blockiert)
Nur Start rechts wirksam ist zu wählen, wenn
darf für Reparaturzwecke benutzt werden.
die Motorwelle beim Start nur vorwärts rotieren
In solchen Fällen den Frequenzumrichter
können soll (Rechtslauf).
immer vom Versorgungsnetz trennen.
Nicht anwenden bei Prozeßregelung mit
Istwertrückführung.

Nur Start links wirksam ist zu wählen, wenn

die Motorwelle beim Start nur rückwärts rotieren
können soll (Linkslauf).

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

132 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Nicht anwenden bei Prozeßregelung mit

Drehzahl auf und Drehzahl ab sind zu wählen,
Istwertrückführung.
wenn eine digitale Steuerung der Drehzahl auf/ab
Festdrehzahl (Jog) dient dazu, die Ausgangsfrequenz gewünscht wird (Motorpotentiometer). Diese Funktion
der in Parameter 213 eingestellten Festdrehzahl ist nur aktiv, wenn Sollwert speichern oder Ausgang
aufzuheben. Die Rampenzeit kann in Parameter speichern gewählt wurde. Solange an der gewählten
211 eingestellt werden. Die Festdrehzahl ist Klemme für "Drehzahl auf" logisch "1" anliegt, erhöht
nicht aktiv, wenn ein Stoppbefehl (Start blockiert) sich der Sollwert oder die Ausgangsfrequenz. Folgt
gegeben wurde. Die Festdrehzahl setzt Stopp Rampe 2 (Parameter 209) im Intervall 0 - fMIN .
außer Kraft (Betriebsbefehl, Gruppe 2).
Solange an der gewählten Klemme für "Drehzahl
Festsollwert ein dient zum Wechsel zwischen ab" logisch "1" anliegt, verringert sich der Sollwert
externem Sollwert und Festsollwert. Voraussetzung oder die Ausgangsfrequenz. Folgt Rampe 2
ist, daß Parameter 214 auf Externe Anwahl [2] (Parameter 210) im Intervall 0 - fMIN.
programmiert wurde. Logisch ’0’ = externe Sollwerte Ein Puls (logisch "1", Minimum hoch, 3 ms,
aktiv, logisch ’1’ = einer der vier Festsollwerte und eine Minimum-Pausenzeit von 3 ms) führt
aktiv gemäß nachstehender Tabelle. zu einer Drehzahländerung von 0,1% (Sollwert)
bzw. 0,1 Hz (Ausgangsfrequenz).
Festsollwertanwahl, lsb und Festsollwertanwahl,
msb ermöglicht die Auswahl eines der vier Beispiel:
Festsollwerte gemäß nachstehender Tabelle. Klemme Sollw. speichern/
Festsollwert msb Festsollwert lsb (16) (17) Ausgang speichern
Festsollwert 1 0 0 Keine 0 0 1
Festsollwert 2 0 1 Drehz.änderung

Festsollwert 3 1 0 Drehzahl ab 0 1 1

Festsollwert 4 1 1 Drehzahl auf 1 0 1

Drehzahl ab 1 1 1

Sollwert speichern speichert den aktuellen Sollwert.

Der gespeicherte Wert ist jetzt der Ausgangspunkt Der mit Hilfe des Bedienfeldes gespeicherte
bzw. die Bedingung für Drehzahl auf und Drehzahl ab. Drehzahlsollwert kann auch bei gestopptem
Wird Drehzahl auf/ab benutzt, so richtet sich die VLT-Frequenzumrichter geändert werden. Der
Drehzahländerung immer nach Rampe 2 (Parameter "gehaltene" Sollwert bleibt bei Unterbrechung
209/210) im Intervall 0 - RefMAX. der Netzversorgung gespeichert.

Ausgang speichern speichert die aktuelle Parametersatzwahl, lsb und Parametersatzwahl,

Ausgangsfrequenz (in Hz). Die gespeicherte msb ermöglichen die Auswahl eines von vier

Programmierung
Motorfrequenz ist nun der Ausgangspunkt Parametersätzen; Bedingung ist jedoch, daß
bzw. die Bedingung für die Verwendung von Parameter 004 auf Externe Anwahl eingestellt wurde.
Drehzahl auf und Drehzahl ab.
Parametersatzwahl, msb/Drehzahl auf und
Wird Drehzahl auf/ab benutzt, so richtet sich die
Parametersatzwahl, lsb/Drehzahl ab ermöglichen
Drehzahländerung immer nach Rampe 2 (Parameter
zusammen mit der Funktion Sollwert speichern
209/210) im Intervall 0 - fM,N.
oder Ausgang speichern eine Erhöhung oder
ACHTUNG!: Verringerung der Drehzahl.
Ist Ausgang speichern aktiv, so kann der
Die Parametersatzwahl richtet sich nach der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter nicht über die
nachfolgenden Tabelle:
Klemmen 18 und 19, sondern lediglich
über Klemme 27 (programmiert auf Motorfreilauf
invers [0] oder Quittierung und Motorfreilauf
invers [1]) gestoppt werden.

Nach Ausgang speichern werden die

PID-Integratoren wieder auf Null gestellt.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 133
 VLT® Serie 5000

Parametersatzwahl Sollwert speichern/

Istwertrückführung" oder "Drehmomentregelung mit
Drehzahlrückführung" gewählt wurde. Puls/Upm
(32) msb (33) lsb Ausgang speichern
wird in Parameter 329 eingestellt.
Parametersatz 1 0 0 0
Parametersatz 2 0 1 0 Drehgeber Istwert, Eingang B ist zu wählen,
Parametersatz 3 1 0 0 wenn Drehgeber Istwert mit 90 -Puls zur Erfassung
Parametersatz 4 1 1 0 der Drehrichtung benutzt werden soll.
Keine 0 0 1
Sicherheitsverriegelung hat die gleichen
Drehz.änderung
Funktionen wie Motorfreilaufstopp, invers, aber
Drehzahl ab 0 1 1 Sicherheitsverriegelung generiert die Alarmmeldung
Drehzahl auf 1 0 1 "externer Fehler" auf dem Bildschirm, wenn
Drehzahl ab 1 1 1 die ausgewählte Klemme losgisch "0" ist. Die
Alarmmeldung ist auch über die digitalen Ausgänge
Frequenzkorrektur auf/ab ist zu wählen, wenn der 42/45 und Relaisausgänge 01/04 aktiv, wenn diese
Sollwert um einen in Parameter 219 eingestellten für die Sicherheitsverriegelung programmiert sind. Der
Prozentsatz erhöht oder verringert werden soll. Alarm kann unter Verwendung eines digitalen Eingangs
oder der Taste [OFF/STOP] zurückgesetzt werden.
Frequenzkorrek- Frequenzkor-
tur ab rektur auf

301 Klemme 17, Eingang

Keine Drehz.änderung 0 0
(EING.17 DIGITAL)
Reduziert um %-Wert 1 0
Wert:
Erhöht um %-Wert 0 1
Siehe Parameter 300.
Reduziert um %-Wert 1 1
Funktion:
Rampe 2 ist zu wählen, wenn zwischen Rampe In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
1 (Parameter 207-208) und Rampe 2 (Parameter verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
209-210) gewechselt werden soll. Logisch ’0’ bewirkt 17 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind
Rampe 1, logisch ’1’ bewirkt Rampe 2. in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt.
Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 17 beträgt 5 kHz.
Netzfehler invers ist zu wählen, wenn Parameter
407 Netzfehler und/oder Parameter 408 Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Schnellentladung aktiviert werden soll. Netzfehler Siehe Parameter 300.
invers ist bei logisch ’0’ aktiv.
Siehe ggf. auch unter Netzfehler/Schnellentladung
auf Seite 66.
302 Klemme 18, Eingang
ACHTUNG!: (EING. 18 DIGITAL)
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann Wert:
durch wiederholtes Ausführen der Siehe Parameter 300.
Schnellentladefunktion über den digitalen
Eingang zerstört werden, wenn Netzspannung Funktion:
am System anliegt. In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
Puls-Sollwerteingabe ist zu wählen, wenn eine 18 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten
Pulssequenz (Frequenz) von 0 Hz gemäß RefMIN sind in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt. Die
(Parameter 204) verwendet wird. Die in Parameter maximale Frequenz für Klemme 18 beträgt 5 kHz.
327 eingestellte Frequenz entspricht RefMAX.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Puls-Istwerteingabe ist zu wählen, wenn als Siehe Parameter 300.
Istwertsignal eine Pulssequenz (Frequenz) benutzt wird.

Drehgeber Istwert, Eingang A ist zu wählen,

wenn Drehgeber Istwert benutzt werden soll,
wenn in Parameter 100 "Drehzahlregelung mit
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

134 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

303 Klemme 19, Eingang 29 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind

(EING. 19 DIGITAL) in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt.
Wert: Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 29 beträgt 65 kHz.
Siehe Parameter 300. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion: Siehe Parameter 300.
In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
19 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind 306 Klemme 32, Eingang
in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt. (EING. 32 DIGITAL)
Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 19 beträgt 5 kHz.
Wert:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Siehe Parameter 300.
Siehe Parameter 300. Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
304 Klemme 27, Eingang 32 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind
(EING. 27 DIGITAL) in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt.
Wert: Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 32 beträgt 65 kHz.
Siehe Parameter 300. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion: Siehe Parameter 300.
In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
27 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind 307 Klemme 33, Eingang
in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt. (EING. 33 DIGITAL)
Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 27 beträgt 5 kHz.
Wert:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Siehe Parameter 300.
Siehe Parameter 300.
Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme
305 Klemme 29, Eingang 33 gewählt werden. Die Funktionsmöglichkeiten sind
(EING. 29 DIGITAL) in einer Übersicht auf Seite 102 dargestellt.
Wert: Die maximale Frequenz für Klemme 33 beträgt 65 kHz.

Programmierung
Siehe Parameter 300. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion: Siehe Parameter 300.
In diesem Parameter kann zwischen den
verschiedenen Funktionsmöglichkeiten der Klemme

Analogeingänge Klemme Nr. 53 (Spannung) 54 60 (Strom)

(Spannung)
Parameter 308 311 314
Wert:
Ohne Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0] [0]✭ [0]
Sollwert (SOLLWERT) [1] ✭ [1] [1] ✭
Istwertsignal (ISTWERT) [2] [2]
Momentgrenze (UEBERW.MOM.GRENZE) [3] [2] [3]
Thermistor (THERMISTOR) [4] [3]
Relativer Sollwert (ADDIEREND (REL.)) [4] [4]
Max. Momentfrequenz (MAX.FREQ.MOMENTR.) [5]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 135
 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion: Parameter 128 muß auf Warnung Thermistor [1] oder

In diesem Parameter kann die gewünschte Option Abschaltung Thermistor [2] programmiert werden.
an Klemme 53 gewählt werden. Relativer Sollwert ist zu wählen, wenn eine relative
Die Skalierung des Eingangssignals erfolgt in Anpassung der Sollwertsumme erfolgen soll.
Parameter 309 und 310. Die Funktion ist nur aktiv, wenn Erhöhen des Sollwerts
Relativ gewählt wurde (Parameter 214). Der relative
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Sollwert an Klemme 54/60 ist ein prozentualer
Ohne Funktion Ist zu wählen, wenn der Wert des vollen Bereichs der betreffenden Klemme.
VLT-Frequenzumrichter nicht auf die an diese Klemme Dieser wird zur Summe der übrigen Sollwerte
angeschlossenen Signale reagieren soll. addiert. Wurden mehrere relative Sollwerte gewählt
Sollwert Wird gewählt, um den Sollwert mit Hilfe eines (Festsollwert 215-218, 311 und 314), so werden diese
analogen Sollwertsignals ändern zu können. zuerst addiert, und anschließend wird diese Summe
Wenn über weitere Eingänge Sollwertsignale zur Summe der aktiven Sollwerte addiert.
vorgegeben werden, werden diese mit
Vorzeichen addiert. ACHTUNG!:
Istwertsignal ist zu wählen, wenn Regulierung Wenn an mehr als einer Klemme Sollwert
mit Istwertrückführung mit einem Analogsignal oder Istwertsignal gewählt wurde, werden
benutzt wird. diese Signale mit Vorzeichen addiert.
Momentgrenze ist zu wählen, wenn mit Hilfe eines
Max. Momentfrequenz . Wird nur bei
Analogsignals der in Parameter 221 eingestellte
Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung
Momentgrenzwert geändert werden soll.
(Parameter 100) zur Begrenzung der
Thermistor ist zu wählen, wenn ein im Motor
Ausgangsfrequenz benutzt. Zu wählen, wenn
eingebauter Thermistor den VLT-Frequenzumrichter
die maximale Ausgangsfrequenz mit einem
bei Überhitzung des Motors anhalten soll. Der
analogen Eingangssignal gesteuert werden soll. Der
Abschaltwert liegt bei >3 kOhm. Der Thermistor
Frequenzbereich reicht von Ausgangsfrequenz unterer
wird an Klemme 50 angeschlossen und der aktuelle
Grenzwert (Parameter 201) bis zu Ausgangsfrequenz
Eingang gewählt (53 oder 54).
oberer Grenzwert (Parameter 202).
ACHTUNG!:
Wenn die Motortemperatur durch einen
Thermistor über den VLT-Frequenzumrichter 309 Klemme 53, min. Skalierung
verwendet wird, ist folgendes zu beachten:
(EIN.53 SKAL-MIN)
Bei Kurzschlüssen zwischen Motorwicklung
Wert:
und Thermistor wird PELV nicht eingehalten.
Zur Einhaltung von PELV muß der Thermistor 0,0 - 10,0 Volt ✭ 0,0 Volt
extern eingesetzt werden.
Funktion:
Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert
eingestellt, der dem maximalen Sollwert (Einstellung
in Parameter 204) entspricht.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Spannungswert ein.
Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung.

310 Klemme 53, max. Skalierung

(EIN.53 SKAL-MAX)
Wert:
Wenn ein Motor statt dessen einen 0,0 - 10,0 Volt ✭ 10,0 Volt
KLIXON-Thermoschalter hat, kann dieser
ebenfalls am Eingang angeschlossen werden. Funktion:
Beim Betrieb parallelgeschalteter Motoren können Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert
die Thermistoren/Thermistorschalter in Serie eingestellt, der dem maximalen Sollwert (Einstellung
geschaltet werden (Gesamtwiderstand < 3 kOhm). in Parameter 205) entspricht.
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

136 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl: 314 Klemme 60, Analogeingang Strom

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Spannungswert ein. (EING.60 ANALOG)
Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung . Wert:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 308. ✭ Sollwert

Funktion:
311 Klemme 54, Analogeingang Spannung
In diesem Parameter können die verschiedenen
(EING.54 ANALOG)
Funktionsmöglichkeiten des Eingangs Klemme
Wert: 60 gewählt werden.
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 308. Die Skalierung des Eingangssignals erfolgt in
✭ Ohne Funktion Parameter 315 und 316.

Funktion: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

In diesem Parameter können die verschiedenen Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 308.
Funktionsmöglichkeiten des Eingangs Klemme
54 gewählt werden.
Die Skalierung des Eingangssignals erfolgt in
Parameter 312 und 313. 315 Klemme 60, min. Skalierung
(EIN.60 SKAL-MIN)
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wert:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 308. 0,0-20,0 mA ✭ 0,0 mA

Funktion:
Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert
312 Klemme 54, min. Skalierung
eingestellt, der dem minimalen Sollwert (Einstellung
(EIN.54 SKAL-MIN)
in Parameter 204) entspricht.
Wert: Soll von der Funktion Zeit nach Sollwertfehler
0,0 - 10,0 Volt ✭ 0,0 Volt (Parameter 317) Gebrauch gemacht werden, so
ist der Wert auf >2 mA einzustellen.
Funktion:
Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert Beschreibung der Auswahl:
eingestellt, der dem minimalen Sollwert (Einstellung Stellen Sie den gewünschten Stromwert ein.
in Parameter 204) entspricht. Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung .
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Spannungswert ein.
Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung . 316 Klemme 60, max. Skalierung

Programmierung
(EIN.60 SKAL-MAX)
Wert:
313 Klemme 54, max. Skalierung 0,0-20,0 mA ✭ 20,0 mA
(EIN.54 SKAL-MAX)
Funktion:
Wert: Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert
0,0 - 10,0 Volt ✭ 10,0 Volt eingestellt, der dem maximalen Sollwert (Einstellung
in Parameter 205) entspricht.
Funktion:
Mit diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert Beschreibung der Auswahl:
eingestellt, der dem maximalen Sollwert (Einstellung Stellen Sie den gewünschten Stromwert ein.
in Parameter 205) entspricht. Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung .
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Spannungswert ein.
Siehe auch den Abschnitt Sollwertverarbeitung .

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 137
 VLT® Serie 5000

317 Zeit nach Sollwertfehler

(ZEITN.SOLLW.FEHL)
Wert:
0 - 99 Sek. ✭ 10 Sek.

Funktion:
Fällt das an den Eingang Klemme 60 angeschlossene
Sollwertsignal länger als die in Parameter 317
eingestellte Zeitdauer unter 50% des in Parameter
315 eingestellten Wertes ab, so wird die in Parameter
318 gewählte Funktion aktiviert.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Zeit ein.

318 Funktion nach Sollwertfehler

(FUNKT.N.SOLLWF.)
Wert:
✭Aus (AUS) [0]
Ausgangsfrequenz speichern (SPEICHERN) [1]
Stopp (STOPP) [2]
Festdrehzahl (FESTDREHZAHL (JOG)) [3]
Max. Drehzahl (MAXIMALE DREHZAHL) [4]
Stopp und Abschaltung
(STOPP+ABSCHALTUNG) [5]

Funktion:
Hier kann gewählt werden, welche Funktion aktiviert
werden soll, wenn das Eingangssignal an Klemme 60
unter 2 mA abfällt, sofern Parameter 315 höher als
2 mA eingestellt wurde, und die eingestellte Zeit für
das Timeout (Parameter 317) überschritten ist.

Treten gleichzeitig mehrere Auszeiten auf, so gibt

der Frequenzumrichter der Auszeit-Funktion
folgende Priorität:
1. Parameter 318 Funktion nach Sollwertfehler
2. Parameter 346 Funktion nach Encoderverlust
3. Parameter 514 Bus-Time-Out Funktion

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequen-
zumrichters kann:
- auf dem aktuellen Wert "eingefroren"
(gespeichert) werden,
- bis zum Stopp fahren,
- bis zur Festdrehzahlfrequenz fahren,
- bis zur maximalen Frequenz fahren,
- bis zum Stopp mit anschließender
Abschaltung fahren.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

138 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ausgänge Klemme Nr. 42 45 01(Re- 04

lais) (Relais)
Parameter 319 321 323 326
Wert:
Ohne Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Steuerung bereit (STEUERUNG BEREIT) [1] [1] [1] [1]
VLT bereit (VLT BEREIT) [2] [2] [2] [2]
Bereit - Fernsteuerung (VLT+STEUERUNG OK) [3] [3] [3] [3] ✭
Freigabe, keine Warnung (FREIG.KEINE WARNUNG) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Motor dreht (VLT DREHT) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Motor dreht, keine Warnung (MOTOR DREHT K. WARN.) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Betrieb innerhalb der Grenzwerte, keine (LIMIT OK KEINE WARN.) [7] [7] [7] [7]
Warnung
Sollwert entspricht Motordrehzahl, (SOLLW. OK KEINE WARN.) [8] [8] [8] [8]
keine Warnung
Störung (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9]
Störung oder Warnung (ALARM OD.WARNUNG) [10] [10] [10] [10]
Momentgrenze (MOMENT-GRENZE) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Außerhalb des Strombereiches (AUSSERH.STROMGRENZE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Über minimalem Warnstrom (UEBER MIN. WARNSTROM) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Unter maximalem Warnstrom (UNTER MAX. WARNSTROM) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich (AUSSERH.F-GRENZE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Über minimaler Warnfrequenz (UEBER MIN.WARNFREQ.) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Unter maximaler Warnfrequenz (UNTER MAX.WARNFREQ.) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Außerhalb des Istwertbereiches (AUS.ISTWERT-BEREICH) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Über minimalem Istwert (UEBER MIN.ISTWERT-B.) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Unter maximalem Istwert (UNTER MAX.ISTWERT-B.) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Warnung Übertemperatur (WARNUNG UEBERTEMP) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Bereit keine thermische Warnung (BEREIT & KEINE UEBERT.) [22] [22] [22] ✭ [22]
Bereit Fernbedienung, keine (BER.FERNBED. & K.UEBERT) [23] [23] [23] [23]
Übertemperatur
Bereit, keine Unter-/Überspannung (BER. KEINE U./UEBSP.) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversierung (REVERSIERUNG) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus OK (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26] Programmierung
Momentgrenze und Stopp (MOMENT-GRENZE UND STOPP) [27] [27] [27] [27]
(Bremse OK, keine Warnung) (BREMSUNG OK-K.WARN.) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Bremse OK, kein Fehler (BREMSE OK, K.FEHLER) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Störung Bremse - IGBT (STOERUNG BREMS - IGBT) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relais 123 (RELAIS 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanische Bremskontrolle (STEUERUNG MECH. BREMSE) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Steuerwort Bit 11/12 (STR-WORT BIT 11/12) [33] [33]
Erweiterte mechanische Bremskontrolle (EXT. MECH. BREMSE) [34] [34] [34] [34]
Sicherheitsverriegelung (SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG) [35] [35] [35] [35]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 139
 VLT® Serie 5000

Ausgänge Klemme Nr. 42 45 01(Re- 04

lais) (Relais)

Parameter 319 321 323 326

Wert:
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 0-20 mA) [36] [36]
0-100 Hz ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 4-20 mA) [37] [37]
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-100 Hz = 0-32000P) [38] [38]
0 - fMAX ⇒ 0 - 20 mA (0-FMAX = 0-20 mA) [39] [39] ✭
0 - fMAX ⇒ 0 - 20 mA (0-FMAX = 4-20 mA) [40] [40]
0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-FMAX = 0-32000P) [41] [41]
SOLLW.MIN - SOLLW.MAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (SOLLW. =0-20 mA) [42] [42]
SOLLW.MIN - SOLLW.MAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (SOLLW. =4-20 mA) [43] [43]
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (SOLLW. MIN-MAX = [44] [44]
0-32000P)
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 0-20 mA) [45] [45]
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 4-20 mA) [46] [46]
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (ISTWERT. MIN-MAX = [47] [47]
0-32000P)
0 - IMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-IMAX = 0-20 mA) [48] ✭ [48]
0 - IMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-IMAX = 4-20 mA) [49] [49]
0 - IMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-IMAX = 0-32000P) [50] [50]
0 - MWARN ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-M WARN = 0-20 mA) [51] [51]
0 - MWARN ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-M WARN = 4-20 mA) [52] [52]
0 - TLIM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-M WARN = 0-32000P) [53] [53]
0 - MNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-M NOM = 0-20 mA) [54] [54]
0 - MNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-M NOM = 4-20 mA) [55] [55]
0 - TNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-M NOM = 0-32000P) [56] [56]
0 - P-NOM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-P-NOM = 0-20 mA) [57] [57]
0 - P-NOM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-P-NOM = 4-20 mA) [58] [58]
0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-P-NOM = 0-32000P) [59] [59]
0 - SynchRPM ⇒? 0-20 mA (0 - SynchRPM = 0-20 mA) [60] [60]

4 - SynchRPM ⇒? 0-20 mA (0 - SynchRPM = 4-20 mA) [61] [61]

0 - SynchRPM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0 - SynchRPM = 0-32000 p) [62] [62]
0 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0 - RPMFMAX = 0-20 mA) [63] [63]
4 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0 - RPMFMAX = 4-20 mA) [64] [64]
0 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0 - RPMFMAX = 0-32000 p) [65] [65]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

140 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion:
Außerhalb des Frequenzbereiches , die
Dieser Ausgang kann als digitaler oder als analoger
Ausgangsfrequenz liegt außerhalb des in Parameter
Ausgang dienen. Bei Verwendung als Digitalausgang
225 und 226 programmierten Frequenzbereiches.
(Datenwert [0]-[65]) kann ein 24-V-DC-Signal anstehen;
bei Verwendugn als Analogausgang kann entweder Über minimaler Warnfrequenz, die Ausgangsfrequenz
ein 0-20-mA-Signal, ein 4-20-mA-Signal anstehen hat den in Parameter 225 eingestellten Wert
oder es kann ein Pulsausgang gegeben sein. überschritten.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Unter maximaler Warnfrequenz, die Ausgangsfrequenz

Steuerung bereit, der VLT-Frequenzumrichter hat den in Parameter 226 eingestellten Wert
ist betriebsbereit und an der Steuerkarte liegt unterschritten.
die Versorgungsspannung an.
Außerhalb des Istwertbereiches, das Istwertsignal
VLT bereit, an der Steuerkarte des VLT- liegt außerhalb des in Parameter 227 und 228
Frequenzumrichters liegt die Versorgungsspannung programmierten Bereiches.
an; der Frequenzumrichter ist betriebsbereit.
Über minimalem Istwert, das Istwertsignal hat den in
VLT und externe Ansteuerung bereit, an der Parameter 227 eingestellten Wert überschritten.
Steuerkarte des VLT-Frequenzumrichters liegt
die Versorgungsspannung an; Parameter 002 Unter "Istwert hoch" ist das Istwertsignal niedriger
ist auf Fern eingestellt. als der in Parameter 228 festgelegte Wert.

Freigabe, keine Warnung, der VLT-Frequenzum-richter Warnung Übertemperatur, Motor, VLT-

ist betriebsbereit, es wurde kein Anlauf- oder Frequenzumrichter, Bremswiderstand oder
Stoppbefehl gegeben (Start blockiert). Keine Warnung. Thermistor liegen über Temperaturlimit.

Motor dreht, es wurde ein Startbefehl gegeben. Bereit, keine Übertemperatur, der VLT-
Frequenzumrichter ist betriebsbereit, an der
Motor dreht, keine Warnung, die Ausgangsfrequenz Steuerkarte liegt die Versorgungsspannung an.
ist höher als die in Parameter 123 eingestellte An den Eingängen liegen keine Steuersignale
Frequenz oder es wurde ein Anlaufbefehl an. Keine Übertemperatur.
gegeben. Keine Warnung.
Bereit Fernbedienung, keine Übertemperatur, der
Betrieb innerhalb der Grenzwerte, keine Warnung, VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist betriebsbereit und auf
Betrieb innerhalb der in Parameter 223-226 Fernbedienung programmiert. An der Steuerkarte liegt
programmierten Strom- bzw. Frequenzbereiche. die Versorgungsspannung an. Keine Übertemperatur.

Sollwert entspricht Motordrehzahl, keine Warnung, Bereit, keine Unter-/Überspannung, der

Programmierung
Drehzahl entspricht den Sollwerten. Keine Warnung. VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist betriebsbereit, an
der Steuerkarte liegt die Versorgungsspannung
Störung, Ausgang wird durch eine Störung aktiviert. an. An den Eingängen liegen keine Steuersignale
Störung oder Warnung, der Ausgang wird durch an. Die Netzspannung liegt innerhalb der
eine Störung oder eine Warnung aktiviert. Spannungsgrenzen (siehe Abschnitt 8).

Momentgrenze, die Momentgrenze in Parameter Reversierung. Logisch ¶1¶= Relais aktiviert, 24 V

221 wurde überschritten. DC am Ausgang, wenn der Motor vorwärts dreht.
Logisch ’0’ = Relais nicht aktiviert, kein Signal am
Außerhalb des Strombereiches, der Motorstrom Ausgang, wenn der Motor rückwärts dreht.
liegt außerhalb des in Parameter 223 und 224
programmierten Bereiches. Bus OK, aktive Kommunikation (kein Time out) über
die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle.
Über minimalem Warnstrom, der Motorstrom hat den
in Parameter 223 eingestellten Wert überschritten. Momentgrenze und Stopp wird im Zusammenhang
mit Freilaufstopp (Klemme 27) benutzt, wo ein
Unter maximalem Warnstrom, der Motorstrom hat den Stoppbefehl gegeben werden kann, obwohl sich
in Parameter 224 eingestellten Wert unterschritten. der VLT-Frequenzumrichter im Momentgrenzzustand

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 141
 VLT® Serie 5000

befindet. Das Signal ist invers, d.h. logisch ’0’, wenn

FBMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA und ⇒
dem VLT-Frequenzumrichter ein Stoppsignal erteilt
FBMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA und
wurde und er sich im Momentgrenzzustand befindet.
FBMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, es wird ein
Bremse, keine Warnung, die Bremse ist aktiv, Ausgangssignal erzeugt, das proportional zum Istwert
es liegen keine Warnungen vor. im Intervall FBMIN -FBMAX (Parameter 414/415) ist.

Bremse bereit, keine Warnung ,die Bremse ist 0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 0-20 mA oder
betriebsbereit, es liegen keine Fehler vor. 0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 4-20 mA und
0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 0-32000 p , es wird ein Ausgangssignal
Bremsfehler, der Ausgang ist logisch "1", wenn der erzeugt, das proportional zum Ausgangsstrom im
Brems-IGBT einen Kurzschluß hat. Die Funktion Intervall 0 - IVLT,MAX ist. IVLT,MAX hängt von der
dient zum Schutz des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Einstellung in Parameter 101 und 103 ab und kann den
im Fall eines Bremsmodulfehlers. Um einen Technischen Daten entnommen werden (IVLT,MAX (60 s).
möglichen Brand im Bremswiderstand zu vermeiden,
kann der Ausgang/das Relais dazu benutzt 0 - MLIM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
werden, den VLT-Frequenzumrichter von der 4 - MLIM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Versorgungsspannung zu trennen. 0 - MLIM ⇒ 0-32000 p, es wird ein Ausgangssignal
erzeugt, das proportional zum Ausgangsdrehmoment
Relais 123. Wenn in Parameter 512 Feldbusprofil im Intervall 0 - TLIM (Parameter 221) ist. 20 mA
[0] gewählt wurde, spricht das Relais an. entspricht dem in Parameter 221 eingestellten Wert.
Wenn entweder OFF1, OFF2 oder OFF3 (Bit
im Steuerwort) logisch ’1’ ist. 0 - MNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
4 - MNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Mechanische Bremskontrolle, ermöglicht das 0 - MNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p, es wird ein Ausgangssignal
Steuern einer externen mechanischen Bremse, erzeugt, das proportional zum Ausgangsmoment
siehe Beschreibung in Kapitel 7. des Motors ist. 20 mA entsprechen dem
Nenndrehmoment des Motors.
Steuerwort Bit 11/12: Relais wird über Bit 11/12
im seriellen Steuerwort gesteuert. Bit 11 bezieht 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
sich auf Relais 01 und Bit 12 auf Relais 04. Wenn 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Parameter 514 Bus-Time-Out-Funktion aktiv ist, 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p, 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p,
werden Relais 01 und 04 spannungslos. es ergibt sich ein Ausgangssignal, das proportional
Siehe Abschnitt über serielle Kommunikation zur Motornennleistung ist. 20 mA entspricht dem
im Projektierungshandbuch. in Parameter 102 eingestellten Wert.
Sicherheitsverriegelung Der Ausgang ist aktiv, 0 - SynchRPM ⇒ 0-20 mA und
wennSicherheitsverriegelung an einem Eingang 0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 4-20 mA und
gewählt wurde und der Eingang logisch "1"ist. 0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 0-32000 p, ergeben ein
zur Motorsynchrondrehzahl proportionales
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Ausgangssignal.
4-100 Hz ⇒ 0-20 mA und
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-32000 p , es wird ein analoges 0 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Ausgangssignal erzeugt, das proportional zur 4 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA und
Ausgangsfrequenz im Intervall 0-100 Hz ist. 0 - RPM bei FMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, ergeben ein
zur Motorsynchrondrehzahl bei FMAX (Parameter
0-fMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA und
202) proportionales Ausgangssignal.
0-fMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA und
0-fMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, es wird analoges Ausgangssignal
erzeugt, das proportional zur Ausgangsfrequenz
im Intervall 0 - fMAX (Parameter 202) ist.

RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA und

RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA und
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, es wird ein
Ausgangssignal erzeugt, das proportional zum Sollwert
im Intervall RefMIN - RefMAX (Parameter 204/205) ist.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

142 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

320 Klemme 42 Ausgang, Pulsskalierung Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(AUS.42 PULS-SKAL) Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
Wert:
1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz
323 Relais 01, Ausgang
Funktion:
(AUSG. 1-3 RELAIS)
In diesem Parameter kann das Pulsausgangssignal
skaliert werden. Wert:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein. Funktion:
Dieser Ausgang aktivert einen Relaisschalter. Der
Relaisausgang 01 kann für Zustandsangaben
und Warnungen benutzt werden. Das Relais
wird aktiviert, wenn die Bedingungen für die
entsprechenden Datenwerte erfüllt sind. Aktivierung
bzw. Deaktivierung können in Parameter 324 bzw.
in Parameter 325 verzögert werden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319.
Anschlüsse, siehe nachstehende Zeichnung.

321 Klemme 45, Ausgang

(AUS.45 D. ODER A)
Wert:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319.
324 Relais 01, Anzugsverzögerung
Funktion:
(RELAIS ANZ VERZ.L)
Dieser Ausgang kann als digitaler und als analoger
Ausgang dienen. Bei Anwendung als digitaler Wert:
Aus-gang (Datenwert [0] - [35]) wird ein 24-V-Signal 0,00 - 600,00 ✭ 0,00 Sek.
(max. 40 mA) erzeugt; bei den analogen Ausgängen
Funktion:
(Datenwert [36] - [59]) können 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA oder
In diesem Parameter kann der Einschaltzeitpunkt für
Programmierung
ein skalierbarer Pulsausgang gewählt werden.
das Relais 01 (Klemme 01-02) verzögert werden.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319.
Geben Sie den gewünschten Wert ein (in
0,02-Sek.-Sprüngen einstellbar).

322 Klemme 45, Ausgang, Pulsskalierung

(AUS.45 PULS-SKAL) 325 Relais 01, Abfallverzögerung
Wert: (RELAIS ABF VERZ.)
1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz
Wert:
Funktion: 0,00 - 600,00 ✭ 0,00 Sek.
In diesem Parameter kann das Pulsausgangssignal
Funktion:
skaliert werden.
In diesem Parameter kann der Ausschaltzeitpunkt für
das Relais 01 (Klemme 01-03) verzögert werden.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 143
 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl: 328 Pulsistwert, max. Frequenz

Geben Sie den gewünschten Wert ein (in (PULSE ISTW. MAX)
0,02-Sek.-Sprüngen einstellbar). Wert:
100 - 65000 Hz an Klemme 33 ✭ 25000 Hz

Funktion:
326 Relais 04, Ausgang
Hier erfolgt die Einstellung des Istwertes, der dem
(AUSG. 4-5 RELAIS)
maximalen Istwert entsprechen soll.
Wert:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Istwert ein.
Funktion:
Dieser Ausgang aktivert einen Relaisschalter. Der
Relaisausgang 04 kann für Zustandsangaben
und Warnungen benutzt werden. Das Relais 329 Inkrem. Drehgeber Puls/Umdreh.
wird aktiviert, wenn die Bedingungen für die (PULSE ENCODER)
entsprechenden Datenwerte erfüllt sind. Wert:
128 Pulse/Umdreh. (128) [128]
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
256 Pulse/Umdreh. (256) [256]
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 319. 512 Pulse/Umdreh. (512) [512]
Anschlüsse, siehe nachstehende Zeichnung. ✭1024 Pulse/Umdreh. (1024) [1024]
2048 Pulse/Umdreh. (2048) [2048]
4096 Pulse/Umdreh. (4096) [4096]

Der Wert kann auch stufenlos zwischen 1-4096

Pulse/Umdrehung eingestellt werden.

Funktion:
327 Pulssollwert, max. Frequenz Hier werden die Pulse des inkrementalen Drehgebers
(PULSE SOLLW. MAX) entsprechend der Motordrehzahl eingestellt.
Wert: Dieser Parameter ist nur bei Drehzahlregelung mit
100 - 65000 Hz an Klemme 29 Istwertrückführung und Drehmomentregelung mit
100 -5000 Hz an Klemme 17 ✭ 5000 Hz Drehzahlrückführung (Parameter 100) verfügbar.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Signalwert so eingestellt, Lesen Sie am inkrementalen Drehgeber den
dass er dem in Parameter 205 festgelegten maximalen korrekten Wert ab. Beachten Sie die Begrenzung
Sollwert entspricht. Die Einstellung dieses Parameters der Drehzahl (U/Min.) für eine gegebene Anzahl
hat Auswirkungen auf eine interne Filterkonstante, z.B. Pulse/Umdrehungen, vgl. nachstehende Zeichnung.
bei 100 Hz = 5 s.; 1 kHz = 0,5 s und bei 10 kHz = 50
ms. Um eine zu lange Filterzeitkonstante bei niedriger
Pulsauflösung zu vermeiden, können der Sollwert
(Parameter 205) und dessen Parameter mit dem
gleichen Faktor multipliziert werden und auf diesem
Wege den niedrigeren Sollwertbereich verwenden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Pulssollwert ein.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

144 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Der eingesetzte inkrementale Drehgeber muß vom Typ Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Open Collector PNP 0/24 V DC (max. 20 kHz) oder Gewünschte Zeit einstellen.
eine Gegentaktkopplung 0/24 V DC (max. 65 kHz) sein.

346 Funktion nach Encoderverlust

330 Sollwert speichern/Ausgangsfunktion (ENC.VERL.FUNKT.)
(SPEIC.SOLLW/AUS) Wert:
Wert: ✭Aus (OHNE FUNKTION) [0]
✭Keine Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0] Ausgangsfrequenz konstant halten
Sollwert speichern (SOLLW.SPEICHERN) [1] (SOLLW. SPEICHERN) [1]
Ausgang speichern (AUSG. SPEICHERN) [2] Festdrehzahl (FESTDREHZAHL) [3]
Max. Drehzahl (MAX.DREHZAHL) [4]
Funktion: Stopp und Abschaltung (STOPP+ABSCH.) [5]
Dieser Parameter ermöglicht es, entweder den Setup 4 wählen (WAHL SETUP 4) [7]
Sollwert oder den Ausgang zu speichern.
Funktion:
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
In diesem Parameter kann die Funktion aktiviert
Sollwert speichern [1] speichert den aktuellen werden, die bei Unterbrechung des Encodersignals
Sollwert. Der gespeicherte Sollwert stellt die Basis an den Klemmen 32 bzw. 33 wirksam wird.
für Drehzahl Auf und Drehzahl Ab dar.
Ausgang speichern [2] speichert die aktuelle Treten gleichzeitig mehrere Auszeiten auf, so gibt
Motorfrequenz (Hz). Die gespeicherte Frequenz stellt der Frequenzumrichter der Auszeit-Funktion
die Basis für Drehzahl Auf und Drehzahl Ab dar. folgende Priorität:
1. Parameter 318 Funktion nach Sollwertfehler
ACHTUNG!: 2. Parameter 346 Funktion nach Encoderverlust
Wenn Ausgang speichern aktiv ist, kann der 3. Parameter 514 Bus-Time-Out Funktion.
Frequenzumrichter nicht über die Klemmen
18 und 19 gestoppt werden, sondern nur Beschreibung der Auswahl:
über Klemme 27 (auf Freilaufstopp, invers [0] oder Die Ausgangsfrequenz des Frequenzumrichters
Quittieren und Freilaufstopp invers [1]). kann festgelegt werden auf:
- konstanter aktueller Wert,
Nach Ausgang speichern werden die PID-Regler - Festdrehzahl,
zurückgesetzt. - Maximalfrequenz,
- Stopp mit anschließender Abschaltung,
- Setup 4
345 Auszeit nach Encoderverlust
(ENC.VERL.AUSZEIT) Programmierung
Wert: 357 Klemme 42, Ausgang Mindestskalierung
0 - 60 Sek. ✭ 1 Sek. (AUS 42 SKAL-MIN)

Funktion: 359 Klemme 45, Ausgang Mindestskalierung

Wird das Encodersignal an Klemme 32 bzw. (AUS 45 SKAL-MIN)
33 unterbrochen, so wird die in Parameter 346 Wert:
gewählte Funktion aktiviert. Unterscheidet sich das 000 - 100% ✭ 0%
Encoderistwertsignal um +/- 3x Nenn-Motorschlupf
von der Ausgangsfrequenz, so wird die Funktion Funktion:
nach Encoderverlust aktiviert. Eine Auszeit nach In diesen Parametern kann der Mindestausgang
Encoderverlust kann auch auftreten, wenn der des gewählten Analogsignals an den Klemmen
Encoder normal funktioniert. Motorparametergruppe 42 und 45 skaliert werden.
100 prüfen, wenn am Encoder kein Fehler gefunden
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
wird. Die Funktion nach Encoderverlust ist nur in
Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung [1] und Der Mindestwert ist als Prozentsatz des maximalen
Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung [5] Signalwerts zu skalieren. Wird 0mA (oder 0 Hz) bei
aktiv, siehe Parameter 100 Konfiguration.
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 145
 VLT® Serie 5000

25% des maximalen Ausgangswerts gewünscht,

so wird 25% programmiert.
Der Wert kann keinesfalls höher als die entsprechende
Einstellung für Ausgang Höchstskalierung sein,
wenn dieser Wert unter 100% beträgt.

Eine ähnliche Skalierung ist am Pulsausgang

möglich. Der Wert (Puls-Skalierwert) in Parameter
320 (Ausgang 42) und 321 (Ausgang 45) ist die
Basis der Skalierung. Wenn der Puls-Skalierwert
der gewünschte Ausgang mit einem Wert
zwischen 0 - 100% des Gesamtausgangs ist,
programmieren Sie den Prozentsatz, z.B. 50%,
als Puls-Skalierwert bei 50% Leistung.
358 Klemme 42, Ausgang Höchstskalierung Wenn eine Pulsfrequenz zwischen 0,2 x
(AUS 42 SKAL-MAX) Puls-Skalierwert und Puls-Skalierwert liegt, wird
360 Klemme 45, Ausgang Höchstskalierung der Prozentsatz wie folgt ausgerechnet:
(AUS 45 SKAL-MAX)
Wert:
000 - 500% ✭ 100%

Funktion:
In diesen Parametern kann der Höchstausgang
des gewählten analogen Pulssignals an den
Klemmen 42 und 45 skaliert werden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie den Wert auf den gewünschten Höchstwert
des Stromsignalausgangs ein.

Höchstwert:

Der Ausgang kann so skaliert werden, daß beim

Skalenendwert ein Strom unter 20 mA bzw. bei
einem Ausgang von unter 100 % des maximalen
Signalwerts 20 mA erzielt werden.
Wenn der gewünschte Ausgangsstrom bei einem
Wert zwischen 0 und 100 % des Gesamtausgangs
20 mA ist, programmieren Sie in dem Parameter den
entsprechenden Prozentsatz, z.B. 50 % = 20 mA.
Wenn bei maximalen Ausgang (100%) ein Strom
zwischen 4 und 20 mA gewünscht ist, wird der zu
programmierende Prozentwert wie folgt berechnet:

Z.B.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

146 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Sonderfunktionen wird. Wenn die Überspannungssteuerung aktiv

ist, wird der VLTFrequenzumrichter bei einem
400 Bremsfunktion/Überspannungssteuerung Stoppbefehl nicht anhalten.
(BREMSFUNKTION) Überspannungssteuerung und Stopp [3] ist zu
wählen, wenn die Funktion Überspannungssteuerung
Wert:
beim Herunterfahren der Rampe nach Betätigen
✭Aus (AUS) [0]
von STOP gewünscht wird.
Mit Bremswiderstand (WIDERSTAND) [1]
Überspannungssteuerung Warnung: Wird Überspannungssteuerung
(ÜBERSPANNUNGSTEUERUNG) [2] [2] benutzt, während gleichzeitig
Überspannungssteuerung und Stopp die Versorgungs- spannung des
(ÜBERSP.-STEUER. &STOPP) [3] Frequenzumrichters sich der Höchstgrenze nähert
oder diese sogar überschritten hat, so besteht das
Funktion:
Risiko einer sich weiter erhöhenden Motorfrequenz,
Die Werkseinstellung ist Aus [0] für VLT 5001-5027
so daß in dem Fall der Frequenz- umrichter den
200-240 V, VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V und 550-600
Motor auch dann nicht anhalten wird, wenn [STOP]
V. Für VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V, 5075-5250
gedrückt wird. Ist die Versorgungsspannung
380-500 V und VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V ist die
höher als 264 V bei 200-240-V-Geräten bzw.
Werkseinstellung Überspannungssteuerung [2].
höher als 550 V bei 380-500-V-Geräten bzw.
Mit Bremswiderstand [1] dient dazu, den
höher als 660 V bei 550-600 V-Geräten, so sollte
Frequenzumrichter im Hinblick auf den Anschluss
Überspannungssteuerung und Stopp [3] gewählt
eines Bremswiderstandes zu programmieren.
werden, so daß der Motor angehalten werden kann.
Bei angeschlossenem Bremwiderstand ist beim
Bremsen (generatorischer Betrieb) eine höhere
Zwischenkreisspannung zulässig. 401 Bremswiderstand, Ohm
Die Funktion Mit Bremswiderstand [1] ist nur (BREMSWIDERST.OHM)
bei Geräten mit eingebautem Bremschopper
Wert:
(SB- und EB-Geräte) aktiv.
Abhängig vom Gerät ✭ Abhängig vom Gerät
Alternativ kann auch die Funktion
Funktion:
Überspannungssteuerung (ohne Bremwiderstand)
In diesem Parameter wird der Ohm-Wert eines
gewählt werden. Diese Funktion ist für alle
Bremswiderstandes angegeben. Dieser Wert
Geräte aktiv (ST, SB und EB).
dient zur Überwachung der Leistungsabgabe
Diese Funktion stellt sicher, dass bei Anstieg im Bremswiderstand, wenn diese Funktion in
der Zwischenkreisspannung eine Abschaltung Parameter 403 gewählt wurde.
verhindert werden kann. Dies geschieht durch
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Programmierung
Anheben der Ausgangsfrequenz zur Begrenzung
der Zwischenkreisspannung. Dies ist eine sehr Stellen Sie den aktuellen Widerstandswert ein.
nützliche Funktion, z.B. wenn die Rampe-ab-Zeit zu
kurz ist, da ein Abschalten des Frequenzumrichters
vermieden wird. In dieser Situation wird die 402 Bremsleistungsgrenze, kW
Rampe-ab-Zeit überschritten. (BR.W.LEIST.GRENZ.)
ACHTUNG!: Wert:
Bitte beachten Sie, da bei der Funktion Abhängig vom Gerät ✭ Abhängig vom Gerät
Überspannungssteuerung die Rampe-ab-Zeit
Funktion:
verlängert wird, was bei bestimmten
Der Parameter gibt die Überwachungsgrenze für die
Anwendungen u.U. nicht sinnvoll sein kann.
Leistungsübertragung im Bremswiderstand an.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wählen Sie Bremswiderstand [1], wenn ein
Die Überwachungsgrenze wird bestimmt als Produkt
Bremswiderstand angeschlossen ist.
des maximalen Arbeitszyklus (120 Sek.) und als
Überspannungssteuerung [2] ist zu wählen, wenn
maximale Leistung des Bremswiderstandes bei diesem
die Funktion Überspannungssteuerung in jedem
Arbeitszyklus, und zwar gemäß folgender Formel:
Fall - auch wenn STOP gedrückt wird - gewünscht
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 147
 VLT® Serie 5000

Bei 200-240-V-Geräten: P = Abschaltung (ABSCHALTUNG) [2]

Bei 380 - 500- V-Geräten: P = Funktion:

In diesem Parameter kann eine Test- und
Bei 550 -600- V-Geräten: P =
Überwachungsfunktion angewählt werden, die
eine Warnung oder einen Alarm ausgibt. Bei
Einschalten des Netzstroms wird geprüft, ob der
403 Leistungsüberwachung Bremswiderstand unterbrochen ist. Der Test, ob der
(BR.W. TH.SCHUTZ) Bremswiderstand kurzgeschlossen ist, erfolgt während
Wert: des Bremsvorgangs; der Test auf IGBT-Kurzschluß
Aus (AUS) [0] erfolgt, wenn nicht gebremst wird. Durch eine
✭Warnung (WARNUNG) [1] Warnung oder Abschaltung wird die Bremsfunktion
Abschaltung (ABSCHALTUNG) [2] abgeschaltet. Testsequenz wie folgt:
1. Wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung höher
Funktion: als die Bremsanlaufspannung ist, wird der
Dieser Parameter ermöglicht das Zuschalten Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen.
einer Überwachung der auf den Bremswiderstand 2. Wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung instabil ist, wird
übertragenen Leistung. Die Berechnung der Leistung der Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen.
erfolgt aufgrund des Ohm-Wertes des Widerstandes 3. Es erfolgt ein Bremsfunktionstest.
(Parameter 401), der Zwischenkreisspannung sowie 4. Wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung niedriger
der Betriebszeit des Widerstandes. Überschreitet die als die Anlaufspannung ist, wird der
über 120 Sek. als Mittelwert berechnete Leistung Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen.
100% der Überwachungsgrenze (Parameter 402), 5. Wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung instabil ist, wird
und wurde Warnung [1] gewählt, so erscheint der Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen.
im Display eine Warnung. Fällt die Leistung auf 6. Wenn die Bremsleistung höher als 100% ist, wird
unter 80%, so verschwindet die Warnung wieder. der Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen.
Steigt die berechnete Leistung auf über 100% der 7. Wenn die Zwischenkreisspannung höher
Überwachungsgrenze, und wurde Abschaltung [2] als die Zwischenkreisspannung abzgl. 2%
in Parameter 403 Leistungsüberwachung gewählt, vor dem Bremsfunktionstest ist, wird der
so schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ab und zeigt Bremsfunktionstest abgebrochen, und es erfolgt
einen Alarm an. Wurde die Leistungsüberwachung eine Warn- oder Alarmmeldung.
auf Aus [0] oder Warnung [1] eingestellt, so verbleibt 8. Bremsfunktionstest O.K.
die Bremsfunktion auch bei Überschreitung der
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Überwachungsgrenze aktiv. Dies kann zu einer
Überlastung des Bremswiderstandes führen. Eine Bei Wahl von Aus [0] wird weiterhin eine Warnung
Meldung über Relais bzw. die digitalen Ausgänge ist ausgegeben, wenn Bremswiderstand oder
ebenfalls möglich. Die typische Meßgenauigkeit für die Brems-IGBT kurzgeschlossen sind. Es wird nicht
Leistungsüberwachung hängt von der Genauigkeit des geprüft, ob der Bremswiderstand unterbrochen ist.
ohmschen Widerstandes ab (besser als ± 20%). Bei Wahl von Warnung [1] werden Bremswiderstand
und Brems-IGBT auf etwaigen Kurzschluß überwacht.
ACHTUNG!: Außerdem wird bei Einschalten des Netzstroms
Bei der Schnellentladung ist die geprüft, ob der Bremswiderstand unterbrochen ist.
Leistungsüberwachungsfunktion unwirksam.
ACHTUNG!:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Eine Warnung bei Aus [0] oder Warnung [1]
kann nur durch Aus- und Wiedereinschalten
Wählen Sie Funktion aktiv ( Warnung/Alarm)
der Netzspannung gelöscht werden -
oder nicht aktiv ( Aus ).
vorausgesetzt, der Fehler ist behoben worden.
Beachten Sie bitte, daß bei Aus [0] oder Warnung [1]
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter auch dann weiterläuft,
404 Bremsfunktionstest wenn ein Fehler gefunden wurde.
(BREMS-W.-TEST)
Wert: Bei Abschaltung [2] schaltet der VLT-Frequen-
✭Aus (AUS) zumrichter mit einem Alarm (Abschaltblockierung)
[0]
ab, wenn der Bremswiderstand kurzgeschlossen
Warnung (WARNUNG) [1]
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

148 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

oder unterbrochen oder wenn der Brems-IGBT soll. Voraussetzung ist, daß in Parameter 405
kurzgeschlossen ist. Automatisch Quittieren gewählt wurde.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Zeit ein.
405 Quittierfunktion (QUITTIERUNGSART)
Wert:
✭Manuell quittieren (MANUELL TASTER O.KL.) [0]
407 Netzausfall
1 x automatisch quittieren (1 X AUTOMATISCH) [1]
(NETZAUSFALL)
2 x automatisch quittieren (2 X AUTOMATISCH) [2]
3 x automatisch quittieren (3 X AUTOMATISCH) [3] Wert:
4 x automatisch quittieren (4 X AUTOMATISCH) [4] ✭Ohne Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0]
5 x automatisch quittieren (5 X AUTOMATISCH) [5] Kontrolliertes Verringern der Rampe
6 x automatisch quittieren (6 X AUTOMATISCH) [6] (RAMPE AB) [1]
7 x automatisch quittieren (7 X AUTOMATISCH) [7] Kontrolliertes Verringern der Rampe und
8 x automatisch quittieren (8 X AUTOMATISCH) [8] Abschaltung (RAMPE AB + STOPP) [2]
9 x automatisch quittieren (9 X AUTOMATISCH) [9] Motorfreilauf (MOTORFREILAUF) [3]
10 x automatisch quittieren Kinetischer Speicher
(10 X AUTOMATISCH) [10] (KINETISCHER SPEICHER) [4]
Kontrollierte Alarmunterdrückung
Funktion: (ALARMUNTERDR. ) [5]
In diesem Parameter kann die Quittierfunktion
gewählt werden, die nach einer Abschaltung gelten Funktion:
soll. Nach dem Quittieren ist ein Wiedereinschalten Mit Hilfe der Netzausfallfunktion ist es möglich, die
des VLT-Frequenzumrichters möglich. Rampenbelastung auf 0 Hz herunterzufahren, wenn
die Netzversorgung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ausfallen sollte.
Wenn Manuell Quittieren [0] gewählt wird, muß In Parameter 450 Netzspannung bei Netzausfall ist
das Quittieren über die [RESET]-Taste oder die der Spannungsgrenzwert einzustellen, wobei die
digitalen Eingänge erfolgen. Funktion Netzausfall aktiv sein muß.
Wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter nach einer Die Funktion kann außerdem durch Anwahl
Abschaltung die Quittierung automatisch von Netzfehler invers an einem digitalen
durchführen soll (1 x bis 10 x), dann ist Eingang aktiviert werden.
Datenwert [1] - [10] zu wählen. Wenn Kinetischer Speicher [4] gewählt wurde, ist die
Rampenfunktion in Parameter 206-212 ausgeschaltet.
ACHTUNG!: Die Leistung von "Kontrolliertes Verringern der
Das Zählwerk für die AUTOMATISCHE Rampe" und "Kinetischer Speicher" sind bei
Programmierung
RÜCKSTELLUNG wird 10 Minuten, nachdem über 70 % Last eingeschränkt.
die erste AUTOMATISCHE RÜCKSTELLUNG
erfolgte, zurückgesetzt. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wählen Sie Ohne Funktion [0], wenn diese Funktion
Warnung: Der Motor kann ohne
nicht erforderlich ist. Bei Auswahl von Kontrolliertes
Vorwarnung anlaufen.
Verringern der Rampe [1] führt der Motor die
Rampenfunktion über die Schnellstopprampe
durch, die in Parameter 212 eingestellt wird.
Sollte die Versorgungsspannung während des
406 Automatische Wiedereinschaltzeit
Rampe-ab-Vorgangs wiederhergestellt werden,
(MAX. WIEDEREIN-Z)
so läuft der VLT-Frequenzumrichter wieder an.
Wert: Bei Auswahl von Kontrolliertes Verringern der
0 - 10 Sek. ✭ 5 Sek. Rampe und Abschaltung [2] führt der Motor die
Rampenfunktion über die Schnellstopprampe durch,
Funktion:
die in Parameter 212 eingestellt wird.
In diesem Parameter wird die Zeit eingestellt, die
Bei 0 Hz schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
zwischen dem Auftreten einer Störung und der
ab (ALARM 36, Netzfehler). Sollte die
Einleitung der automatischen Quittierfunktion vergehen

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 149
 VLT® Serie 5000

Versorgungsspannung während des Rampe-ab- 409 Zeitverzögerung Momentgrenze

Vorgangs wiederhergestellt werden, so fährt der (ZEITVERZ.MOM GR)
VLT-Freqeunzumrichter mit der Schnellstopprampe Wert:
fort und schaltet dann ab. Wenn Motorfreilauf [3] 0 - 60 Sek. (AUS) ✭ AUS
gewählt wird, schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter die
Wechselrichter ab, woraufhin der Motor im Freilauf läuft. Funktion:
Parameter 445 Motorfangschaltung muß aktiv sein, Wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter registriert, daß das
so daß der VLT-Frequenzumrichter bei etwaiger Ausgangsmoment die Momentgrenzen (Parameter
Wiederherstellung der Versorgungsspannung den 221 und 222) während der eingestellten Zeit erreicht
Motor abfangen und erneut anlaufen kann. hat, schaltet das Gerät nach Ablauf der Zeit ab.
Wenn Kinetischer Speicher [4] gewählt wird,
versucht der VLT-Frequenzumrichter, die durch die Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Last erzeugte Energie zur Aufrechterhaltung einer Geben Sie ein, wie lange der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
konstanten Zwischenkreisspannung zu nutzen. Bei mit der Momentgrenze laufen soll, bevor er
Wiederherstellung der Versorgungsspannung läfut abschaltet. 60 Sek. = AUS bedeutet unendliche
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter wieder an. Zeit, wobei die thermische VLT-Überwachung
Wenn Kontrollierte Alarmunterdrückung [5] ausgewählt jedoch weiterhin aktiv ist.
wird, schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter bei
einem Netzausfall ab, und das Gerät wird durch
OFF1, OFF2 oder OFF3 über den Profibus nicht 410 Abschaltverzögerung bei Überspannung
gestoppt. Nur aktiv, wenn Feldbusprofil (Par. 512)
(ZEITVERZ.WR-FEHL)
ausgewählt und Profibus installiert ist.
Wert:
0 - 35 Sek. ✭ Abhängig vom Gerät

408 Schnellentladung Funktion:

(SCHNELLENTLADUNG) Wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter während der
Wert: einge-stellten Zeit eine Überspannung feststellt, so
✭Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0] schaltet er nach Ablauf der Zeit ab.
Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1] Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion: Geben Sie ein, wie lange der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
Option zum schnellen Entladen der Zwischenkreiss- mit Überspannung laufen soll, bevor er abschaltet.
pannung mit Hilfe eines externen Widerstands.
ACHTUNG!:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wird dieser Wert genüber der Werkseinstellung
reduziert, so kann es vorkommen,
Die Funktion ist nur bei erweiterten Geräten
daß das Gerät beim Einschalten der
aktiv, da sie eine Anschlußmöglichkeit für 24 V
Netzversorgung eine Störung meldet.
DC extern sowie einen Bremswiderstand oder
Entladewiderstand erfordert. Andernfalls ist die
Datenwahhl auf Blockiert [0] begrenzt. 411 Taktfrequenz
Die Funktion kann durch Anwahl eines digitalen
(TAKTFREQUENZ)
Eingangssignals für Netzfehler invers aktiviert
werden. Wählen Sie Blockiert , wenn die Wert:
Funktion nicht gewünscht wird. Bei Wahl von ✭Abhängig vom Gerät
Wirksam extern 24 V DC und einen Brems- bzw.
Funktion:
Entladewiderstand anschließen.
Der eingestellte Wert bestimmt die Taktfrequenz
Siehe den Abschnitt Schnellentladung.
des Wechselrichters. Durch eine Änderung der
Taktfrequenz können falls erforderlich akustische
Störgeräusche vom Motor verringert werden.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

150 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

ACHTUNG!:
Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequenz- Aus bedeutet, daß keine Übermodulation
umrichters kann niemals einen Wert höher der Ausgangsspannung erfolgt und damit
als 1/10 der Taktfrequenz annehmen. ein Drehmoment-Rippel an der Motorwelle
vermieden wird. Dies kann beispielsweise bei
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Schleifmaschinen ein Vorteil sein.
Bei laufendem Motor wird im Parameter 411 die Ein bedeutet, daß eine Ausgangsspannung
Takt-frequenz eingestellt, bis eine Frequenz mit erzielt werden kann, die größer als die
möglichst niedrigem Motorgeräusch erreicht ist. Siehe Netzspannung ist (bis zu 15%).
auch Parameter 446 - Schaltmuster. Näheres zur
Leistungsreduzierung im Projektierungshandbuch.
414 Minimaler Istwert
ACHTUNG!:
(MIN. ISTWERT)
Taktfrequenzen über 3/3,5 kHz (4,5 kHz
für 60 AVM) führen automatisch zu einer Wert:
Reduzierung der maximalen Ausgangsleistung -100.000,000 - Max. Istwert ✭ 0,000
des VLT- Frequenzumrichters.
Funktion:
Parameter 414 und 415 dienen zum Skalieren der
412 Ausgangsfrequenzabhängige Taktfrequenz Displayanzeige, so daß diese das Istwertsignal in der
korrekten Einheit proportional zum Eingangssignal
(VAR. TAKTFREQENZ)
anzeigt. Der Wert sollte ca. 10% höher als Parameter
Wert:
205 Maximaler Sollwert sein, um zu vermeiden,
✭Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0]
daß der VLT-Frequenzumrichter wegen eines evt.
Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1] Kompensationsfehlers integriert.
Funktion: Der Wert wird ausgegeben, wenn in einem der
Parameter 009-012 und im Anzeigemodus Istwert
Diese Funktion ermöglicht ein Anheben der
[Einheit] [3] gewählt wurde. Eine Einheit für das
Taktfre-quenz bei fallender Ausgangsfrequenz.
Istwertsignal kann in Parameter 416 gewählt werden.
Sie wird bei Anwendungen mit quadratischer
Zusammen mit Drehzahlregelung mit
Drehmomentkenn-linie benutzt (z.B. Kreiselpumpen
Istwertrückführung, Prozeßregelung mit
und Ventilatoren), bei denen der Abfall der Belastung
Istwertrückführung und Drehmomentregelung mit
von der Aus-gangsfrequenz abhängig ist. Die
Drehzahlrückführung (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
maximale Taktfre-quenz wird jedoch durch die
Einstellung in Parameter 411 festgelegt. Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Nur aktiv, wenn Parameter 203 auf Min-Max

Programmierung
[0] eingestellt wurde.
Blockiert [0] ist zu wählen, wenn eine feste
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein, der im
Takt-frequenz gewünscht wird.
Display angezeigt werden soll, wenn an dem
Die Einstellung der Taktfrequenz erfolgt in Parameter
gewählten Istwerteingang der Min. Istwert erreicht
411. Bei Auswahl von Wirksam [1] fällt die
ist (Parameter 308 oder 314).
Taktfrequenz mit steigender Ausgangsfrequenz ab.
Der Minimale Istwert kann durch die Wahl
der Konfiguration (Parameter 100) und den
Soll-/Istwertbereich (Parameter 203) begrenzt sein.
413 Übermodulationsfaktor Wurde in Parameter 100 Drehzahlregelung mit
(FAKTOR UEBERMOD.) Istwertrückführung [1] gewählt, so kann der Min.
Wert: Istwert nicht unter 0 eingestellt werden.
Aus (AUS) [0]
✭Ein (EIN) [1]

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann die Übermodulationsfunktion
der Ausgangsspannung angeschlossen werden.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 151
 VLT® Serie 5000

415 Maximaler Istwert gal/ST [33]

(MAX. ISTWERT) ft3 /ST [34]
Wert: lb/s [35]
Min. Istwert - 100.000,000 ✭ 1.500,000 lb/min [36]
lb/ST [37]
Funktion: lb ft [38]
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 414. ft/s [39]
ft/min [40]
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein, der im Funktion:
Display angezeigt werden soll, wenn an dem Möglichkeit zur Auswahl verschiedener Einheiten,
gewählten Istwerteingang der Maximale Istwert die im Display angezeigt werden sollen.
erreicht ist (Parameter 308 oder 314). Der Max. Die Einheit wird auch bei Prozeßregelung mit
Istwert kann durch die Wahl der Konfiguration Istwertrückführung direkt als Einheit für den Min./Max.
begrenzt werden. (Parameter 100). Sollwert (Par. 204/205) und den Min./Max.
Istwert (Par. 414/415) benutzt.
Par. 002 Ort/Fern.
416 Anzeigewert Par. 013 Ort-Steuerung/Konfig. wie in Par. 100.
Par. 100 Konfiguration.
(SOL-ISTW-EINHEIT)
Wert: Parameter 002 auf Fern eingestellt.
KEINE [0] Wurde in Parameter 100 Drehzahlregelung ohne
✭% [1] Istwertrückführung oder Drehmomentregelung
PPM [2] ohne Istwertrückführung gewählt, so kann die
RPM [3] in Parameter 416 gewählte Einheit bei der
bar [4] Displayanzeige (Par. 009-12 Istwert [Einheit]) der
TAKTE/mi [5] Prozeßparameter benutzt werden.
Puls/s [6]
Der Prozeßparameter, der angezeigt werden soll,
EINH./s [7]
kann als externes Analogsignal an Kl. 53 (Par.
EINH./mi [8]
308: Istwertsignal ) oder an Kl. 60 (Par. 314:
EINH./St. [9]
Istwertsignal ) sowie als Pulssignal an Kl. 33 (Par.
C [10]
307: Puls-Istwert) angeschlossen werden.
Pa [11]
Hinweis: Der Sollwert kann nur in Hz (
l/s [12]
Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung) oder
m3 /s [13]
Nm (Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwertrückführung)
l/min [14]
angezeigt werden.
m3 /min [15]
Wird in Parameter 100 Drehzahlregelung mit
l/ST. [16] Istwertrückführung, gewählt, so ist Parameter 416
m3 /ST. [17] nicht aktiv, da sowohl der Sollwert als auch der
kg/s [18] Istwert immer als U/Min. dargestellt werden.
kg/min [19] Wird in Parameter 100 Prozeßregelung mit
kg/ST [20] Istwertrückführung gewählt, so wird die in Parameter
t/min [21] 416 gewählte Einheit bei der Displayanzeige
t/ST [22] des Sollwertes (Par. 009-12: Sollwert [Einheit])
m [23] wie auch des des Istwertes (Par. 009-12:
N m [24] Istwert [Einheit]) angewandt.
m/s [25] Die Skalierung der Displayanzeige als Funktion
m/min [26] des gewählten Bereiches (Par. 309/310, 312/313,
F [27] 315/316, 327 und 328) für das angeschlossene
in wg [28] externe Signal erfolgt bzgl. des Sollwertes in
gal/s [29] Parameter 204 und 205 und für den Istwert
ft3 /s [30] in Parameter 414 und 415.
gal/min [31]
ft3 /min [32] Parameter 002 auf Ort eingestellt.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

152 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Wird Parameter 013 auf Ort Steuerung ohne Integrationszeit führt zu einer Verzögerung des
Schlupfkompensation oder Ort digitale Steuerung Signals und damit zu einer Dämpfung. Zusammen
ohne Schlupfkompensation eingestellt, so erscheint mit Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung
die Anzeige in Hz - unabhängig von der Wahl in (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Parameter 416. Ein an Klemme 53, 60 oder 33
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
(Puls) angeschlossenes Istwert- oder Prozeßsignal
wird jedoch in Form der in Parameter 416 gewählten Eine schnelle Regelung wird bei kurzer
Einheit angezeigt. Wird Parameter 013 auf Ort Integrationszeit erreicht.
Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 oder Ort digitale Ist die Zeit jedoch zu kurz, so kann der
Steuerung/wie Parameter 100 eingestellt, so Prozeß instabil werden.
entspricht die Einheit der obigen Beschreibung Ist die Integrationszeit lang, so kann es zu großen
unter Parameter 002 auf Fern eingestellt. Abweichungen vom gewünschten Sollwert kommen,
da der Prozeßregler lange braucht, um die vorliegende
ACHTUNG!: Regelabweichung auszuregeln.
Die obigen Ausführungen gelten für die
Anzeige von Sollwert [Einheit] und Istwert
[Einheit]. Wird Sollwert [%] oder Istwert
419 Drehzahl PID Differentiationszeit
[%] gewählt, so wird der Wert in Prozent des
(DRZ DIFF.-ZEIT)
gewählten Bereiches angezeigt.
Wert:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: 0,00 (AUS) - 200,00 ms ✭ 30 ms
Wählen Sie die gewünschte Einheit für das
Funktion:
Sollwert- bzw. Istwertsignal.
Der Differentiator reagiert auf eine konstante
Regelabweichung nicht. Er erzeugt nur dann eine
Verstärkung, wenn sich die Regelabweichung ändert.
417 Drehzahl PID Proportionalverstärkung Je schneller sich die Regelabweichung ändert, desto
(DRZ P-VERSTAERKN) kräftiger die Verstärkung seitens des Differentiators.
Wert: Die Verstärkung ist proportional zur Geschwindigkeit,
0,000 (AUS) - 0,150 ✭ 0,015 mit der sich die Regelabweichung ändert. Zusammen
mit Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Funktion: (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Die Proportionalverstärkung gibt an, um wieviel
die Regelabweichung (Abweichung zwischen Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Istwert-signal und Sollwert) verstärkt werden soll. Eine schnelle Regelung wird bei einer langen
Zusammen mit Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführun Differentiationszeit erreicht. Wird sie jedoch
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden. zu lang, so kann der Prozeß instabil werden.
Programmierung
Wenn die Differentiationszeit 0 ms beträgt, ist
Beschreibung der Auswahl: die D-Funktion nicht aktiv.
Eine schnelle Regelung wird bei hoher Verstärkung
erreicht. Ist die Verstärkung jedoch zu hoch, so kann
der Prozeß durch Übersteuerung instabil werden.
420 Drehzahl PID Diff.verstärk.grenze
(DRZ BEGR.D-VERST)
Wert:
418 Drehzahl PID Integrationszeit
5,0 - 50,0 ✭ 5,0
(DRZ INTEGR. ZEIT)
Wert: Funktion:
2,00 - 999,99 ms (1000 = AUS) ✭ 8 ms Es kann bezüglich der Verstärkung des Differentiators
eine Grenze eingestellt werden. Da die D-Verstärkung
Funktion: bei höheren Frequenzen erfolgt, kann eine Begrenzung
Die Integrationszeit ist dafür maßgebend, wie lange der Verstärkung sinnvoll sein.
der PID-Regler zum Ausgleichen der Regelabweichung Hierdurch läßt sich ein reines D-Glied bei niedrigen
braucht. Je größer die Regelabweichung, desto Frequenzen und ein konstantes D-Glied bei
schneller der Anstieg der Verstärkung. Die hohen Frequenzen erzielen.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 153
 VLT® Serie 5000

Zusammen mit Drehzahlregelung mit mit einer Frequenz von über 1,6 Hz schwingt,
Istwertrückführung (Parameter 100) anzuwenden. wird der PID-Regler nicht reagieren.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wählen Sie die gewünschte Grenze für die Verstärkung.
422 U0-Spannung bei 0 Hz
(U0 SPANNUNG-0HZ)
Wert:
421 Drehzahl PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit
0,0 - Parameter 103 ✭ 20,0 Volt
(DRZ FILTER ZEIT)
Wert: Funktion:
5 - 200 ms ✭ 10 ms Die Parameter 422-432 können zusammen mit
der speziellen Motorkennlinie benutzt werden
Funktion: (Par.101) Es kann aufgrund von sechs einstellbaren
Welligkeiten (Rippel) des Istwertsignals werden durch Spannungen und Frequenzen eine U/f-Kennlinie
das Tiefpaßfilter gedämpft, um ihren Einfluß auf die gebildet werden. Die Änderung von Daten auf
Regelung zu mindern. Dies kann u.a. dann ein dem Motortypschild (Parameter 102 - 106) hat
Vorteil sein, wenn das Signal mit vielen Funkstörungen Auswirkungen auf Parameter 422.
behaftet ist. Siehe Zeichnung. Wird in Verbindung
mit Drehzahlregelung mit Istwertrückführung und Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Drehmomentregelung mit Drehzahlrückführung Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein,
(Parameter 100) angewendet. die bei 0 Hz gelten soll.
Siehe nachfolgende Zeichnung.

423 U1-Spannung
(U1-SPANNUNG)
Wert:
0,0 - UVLT,MAX Werkseinstellung für Par. 103

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Y-Wert des
1. Eckpunktes eingestellt.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein, die bei der
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
in Parameter 424 eingestellten F1-Frequenz gelten soll.
Wird z.B. eine Zeitkonstantet (τ) von 100 ms Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.
programmiert, so ist die Eckfrequenz des Tiefpaßfilters
1/0,1 = 10 RAD/Sek., was (10 / 2 x π) = 1,6
Hz. entspricht. Der PID-Regler wird daher nur ein
Istwertsignal regeln, das mit einer Frequenz von
unter 1,6 Hz schwingt. Wenn das Istwertsignal

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

154 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

424 F1-Frequenz Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(F1-FREQUENZ) Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein, die bei der
Wert: in Parameter 428 eingestellten F3-Frequenz gelten soll.
0,0 - Par. 426 Werkseinstellung für Par. 104 Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der X-Wert des
428 F3-Frequenz
1. Eckpunktes eingestellt.
(F3-FREQUENZ)
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wert:
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein, die bei der in Par. 426 - Par. 430 Werkseinstellung für Par. 104
Parameter 423 eingestellten U1-Spannung gelten soll.
Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422. Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der X-Wert des
3. Eckpunktes eingestellt.

425 U2-Spannung Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(U2-SPANNUNG) Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein, die bei der in
Wert: Parameter 427 eingestellten U3-Spannung gelten soll.
0,0 - UVLT, MAX Werkseinstellung für Par. 103 Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Y-Wert des
429 U4-Spannung
2. Eckpunktes eingestellt.
(U4-SPANNUNG)
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wert:
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein, die bei der 0,0 - UVLT,MAX Werkseinstellung für Par. 103
in Parameter 426 eingestellten F2-Frequenz gelten soll.
Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422. Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Y-Wert des
4. Eckpunktes eingestellt.

426 F2-Frequenz Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(F2-FREQUENZ) Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein, die bei der
Wert: in Parameter 430 eingestellten F4-Frequenz gelten soll.
Par. 424 - Par. 428 Werkseinstellung für Par. 104 Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.

Programmierung
Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der X-Wert des
430 F4-Frequenz
2. Eckpunktes eingestellt.
(F4-FREQUENZ)
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Wert:
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein, die bei der in Par. 428 - Par. 432 Werkseinstellung für Par. 104
Parameter 425 eingestellten U2-Spannung gelten soll.
Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422. Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der X-Wert des
4. Eckpunktes eingestellt.

427 U3-Spannung Beschreibung der Auswahl:

(U3-SPANNUNG) Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein, die bei der in
Wert: Parameter 429 eingestellten U4-Spannung gelten soll.
0,0 - UVLT,MAX Werkseinstellung für Par. 103 Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Y-Wert des
3. Eckpunktes eingestellt.
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 155
 VLT® Serie 5000

431 U5-Spannung 434 Drehmomentregelung ohne

(U5-SPANNUNG) Istwertrückführung, Integrationszeit
Wert: (MOM-ST. INT.ZEIT)
0,0 - UVLT, MAX Werkseinstellung für Par. 103 Wert:
0,002 - 2,000 Sek. ✭ 0,02 Sek.
Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird der Y-Wert des Funktion:
5. Eckpunktes eingestellt. Der Integrator bewirkt eine steigende Verstärkung
bei konstanter Regelabweichung zwischen Sollwert-
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
und Istwertsignal. Je größer die Abweichung,
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Spannung ein, die bei der desto schneller der Anstieg der Verstärkung. Die
in Parameter 432 eingestellten F5-Frequenz gelten soll. Integrationszeit ist die Zeit, die der Integrator
braucht, um die gleiche Verstärkung wie die
Proportionalverstärkung zu erzielen.
432 F5-Frequenz Zusammen mit Drehmomentregelung ohne
(F5-FREQUENZ) Istwertrückführung (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.

Wert: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Par. 430 - 1000 Hz Werkseinstellung für Par. 104 Bei kurzer Integrationszeit wird eine schnelle
Regelung erreicht. Die Zeit kann jedoch auch zu
Funktion:
kurz werden, was zu einer Instabilität des Prozeßes
In diesem Parameter wird der X-Wert des
bei Übersteuerung führen kann.
5. Eckpunktes eingestellt.
Dieser Parameter ist durch Parameter 200
nicht begrenzt.
437 Prozeß PID normal/invers Regelung
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
(PID NORM./INVERS)
Stellen Sie die gewünschte Frequenz ein, die bei der in
Wert:
Parameter 431 eingestellten U5-Spannung gelten soll.
✭Normal (NORMAL) [0]
Siehe Zeichnung zu Parameter 422.
Invers (INVERS) [1]

Funktion:
433 Drehmomentregelung ohne Istwert- Es kann hier gewählt werden, ob der Prozeßregler die
rückführung Proportionalverstärkung Ausgangsfrequenz bei Regelabweichung zwischen
(MOM-ST. P-VERST.) Sollwert- und Istwertsignal erhöhen/verringern soll.
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Wert:
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
0 (Aus) - 500% ✭ 100%
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Funktion:
Normal [0] ist zu wählen, wenn der
Die Proportionalverstärkung gibt an, um wieviel
VLT-Frequenzumrichter im Falle eines Anstiegs des
Mal der Fehler (Abweichung zwischen Istwertsignal
Istwertsignals die Ausgangsfrequenz verringern soll.
und Sollwert) verstärkt werden soll.
Invers [1] ist zu wählen, wenn der VLT-
Zusammen mit Drehmomentregelung ohne
Frequenzumrichter im Falle eines Anstiegs des
Istwertrückführung (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Istwertsignals die Ausgangsfrequenz erhöhen soll.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Bei hoher Verstärkung wird eine schnelle Regelung
erreicht. Ist die Verstärkung jedoch zu hoch, so kann 438 Prozeß PID anti windup
der Prozeß bei Übersteuerung instabil werden. (PID ANTI WINDUP)
Wert:
Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0]
✭Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

156 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Funktion:
ACHTUNG!:
Hier kann gewählt werden, ob der Prozeßregler
Wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter vor
weiterhin mit dem Ausregeln einer Regelabweichung
Erreichen der gewünschten Startfrequenz die
fortfahren soll, obwohl eine Erhöhung bzw.
Stromgrenze erreicht, wird der Prozeßregler
Verringerung der Ausgangsfrequenz nicht möglich ist.
nicht aktiviert. Um den Regler dennoch aktivieren
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
zu können, muß die Startfrequenz auf die aktuelle
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Ausgangsfrequenz gesenkt werden. Dies kann
Beschreibung der Auswahl: im Betriebszustand erfolgen.
Die Werkseinstellung ist Wirksam [1], was dazu
führt, daß das Integrationsglied im Verhältnis zur
440 Prozeß PID Proportionalverstärkung
aktuellen Ausgangsfrequenz initialisiert wird, wenn
(PID P-VERSTAERK.)
entweder die Stromgrenze oder die maximale bzw.
minimale Frequenz erreicht ist. Der Prozeßregler Wert:
wird erst dann wieder zuschalten, wenn die 0,00 - 10,00 ✭ 0,01
Regelabweichung entweder Null ist oder sich
Funktion:
sein Vorzeichen geändert hat.
Die Proportionalverstärkung gibt an, um wieviel
Blockiert [0] ist zu wählen, wenn der Integrator
Mal die Regelabweichung zwischen Sollwert- und
weiterhin wegen der Regelabweichung integrieren soll,
Istwertsignal verstärkt werden soll.
obwohl dieser sich nicht ausregulieren läßt.
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
ACHTUNG!: (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Eine Wahl von Blockiert [0] führt dazu,
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
daß im Falle einer Vorzeichenänderung der
Regelabweichung der Integrator erst von einem Bei hoher Verstärkung wird eine schnelle Regelung
Niveau herabintegrieren muß, das durch eine frühere erreicht. Ist die Verstärkung jedoch zu hoch, so kann
Regelabweichung erreicht worden war. Erst danach der Prozeß durch Übersteuerung instabil werden.
erfolgt eine Änderung der Ausgangsfrequenz.

441 Prozeß PID Integrationszeit

439 Prozeß PID Startfrequenz
(PID INTEGR. ZEIT)
(PID-START FREQ.)
Wert:
Wert:
0,01 - 9999,99 Sek. (AUS) ✭ AUS
✭ Parameter 201
fMIN -fMAX (Parameter 201 und 202)
Funktion:
Funktion:
Der Integrator bewirkt eine steigende Verstärkung

Programmierung
Bei einem Startsignal wird der Frequenzumrichter als
bei einer konstanten Regelabweichung zwischen
Drehzahlregelung ohne Istwertrückführung reagieren
Sollwert- und Istwertsignal. Je größer die Abweichung,
und erst bei Erreichen der programmierten
desto schneller der Anstieg der Verstärkung. Die
Startfrequenz auf Prozeßregelung mit
Integrationszeit ist die Zeit, die der Integrator
Istwertrückführung wechseln. Dies ermöglicht
braucht, um die gleiche Verstärkung wie die
das Einstellen einer Frequenz entsprechend der
Proportionalverstärkung zu erzielen.
Drehzahl, mit der der Prozeß normalerweise
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
abläuft. Auf diese Weise läßt sich der gewünschte
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Prozeßzustand schneller erreichen.
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung Beschreibung der Auswahl:
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden. Bei kurzer Integrationszeit wird eine schnelle
Regelung erreicht. Die Zeit kann jedoch auch zu
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
kurz werden, was zu einer Instabilität des Prozesses
Stellen sie die gewünschte Startfrequenz ein.
bei Übersteuerung führen kann.
Ist die Integrationszeit lang, so kann es zu großen
Abweichungen vom gewünschten Sollwert kommen,

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 157
 VLT® Serie 5000

da der Prozeßregler lange braucht, um eine 444 Prozeß PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit

Regelabweichung auszuregeln. (PID FILTER ZEIT)
Wert:
0,01 - 10,00 ✭ 0,01 Sek.
442 Prozeß PID Differentiationszeit
(PID DIFF. ZEIT) Funktion:
Welligkeiten (Rippel) des Istwertsignals werden
Wert:
durch das Tiefpaßfilter gedämpft, um ihren Einfluß
0,00 (AUS) - 10,00 Sek. ✭ 0,00 Sek.
auf die Prozeßregelung zu mindern. Dies kann
Funktion: u.a. dann ein Vorteil sein, wenn das Signal mit
Der Differentiator reagiert auf einer konstanten vielen Funkstörungen behaftet ist.
Regelabweichung nicht. Er erzeugt nur dann eine Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
Verstärkung, wenn sich die Regelabweichung ändert. (Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
Je schneller sich die Regelabweichung ändert, desto
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
kräftiger die Verstärkung seitens des Differentiators.
Wählen Sie die gewünschte Zeitkonstante (τ). Wird
Die Verstärkung ist proportional zur Geschwindigkeit,
z.B. eine Zeitkonstante (τ) von 100 ms programmiert,
mit der sich die Regelabweichung ändert.
so ist die Eckfrequenz des Tiefpaßfilters 1/0,1 = 10
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
RAD/Sek., was (10 / 2 x π) = 1,6 Hz entspricht.
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden.
PID-Regler wird daher nur ein Istwertsignal regeln, das
Beschreibung der Auswahl: mit einer Frequenz von unter 1,6 Hz schwingt. Wenn
Bei langer Differentiationszeit wird eine schnelle das Istwertsignal mit einer Frequenz von über 1,6 Hz
Regelung erreicht. Die Zeit kann jedoch auch zu schwingt, wird der PID-Regler nicht reagieren.
lang werden, was zu einer Instabilität des Prozesses
bei Übersteuerung führen kann.
445 Motorfangschaltung
(FANGSCHALTUNG)
443 Prozeß PID Diff.verstärk.grenze Wert:
(PID DIFF. VERST.) ✭Blockiert (BLOCKIERT) [0]
Wert: Wirksam (WIRKSAM) [1]
5,0 - 50,0 ✭ 5.0
Funktion:
Funktion: Diese Funktion ermöglicht das ’Abfangen’ eines Motors,
Es besteht die Möglichkeit, für die Verstärkung der aufgrund eines Stromausfalls unkontrolliert läuft.
des Differentiators eine Grenze einzustellen.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Die Verstärkung des Differentiators steigt bei
Blockiert wählen, wenn die Funktion nicht
schnellen Änderungen, weshalb eine Begrenzung
gewünscht wird.
der Verstärkung nützlich sein kann. Auf diese
Wirksam wählen, wenn der Frequenzumrichter
Weise wird eine reale Differentiatorverstärkung
einen drehenden Motor abfangen’ und sich
bei langsamen Änderungen und eine konstante
auf ihn aufschalten soll.
Differentiatorverstärkung bei schnellen Änderungen
der Regelabweichung erreicht.
Zusammen mit Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung
(Parameter 100) anzuwenden. 446 Schaltmuster
(SCHALTMUSTER)
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Wert:
Gewünschte Grenze für die Differentiatorver- 60 AVM (60 AVM) [0]
stärkung wählen.
✭SFAVM (SFAVM) [1]

Funktion:
Es kann zwischen zwei verschiedenen Schaltmustern
gewählt werden: 60 AVM und SFAVM.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

158 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

60 AVM ist zu wählen, wenn die Möglichkeit bestehen Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
soll, mit einer Taktfrequenz bis zu 14/10 kHz zu
arbeiten. Eine Reduzierung des Ausgangsnennstroms
IVLT.N erfolgt ab einer Taktfrequenz von 4,5 kHz.
449 Drehmoment, Drehzahlrückführung
SFAVM ist zu wählen, wenn die Möglichkeit bestehen
Reibungsverlust
soll, mit einer Taktfrequenz bis zu 5/10 kHz zu
(MOM-FB-REIB. VERL)
arbeiten. Eine Reduzierung des Ausgangsnennstroms
IVLT.N erfolgt ab einer Taktfrequenz von 3,0 kHz. Wert:
0,00 50,00% des Motor-
Nenndrehmoments ✭ 0,00%

447 Drehmoment, Drehzahlrückführung Funktion:

Drehmomentausgleich Dieser Parameter ist nur anzuwenden, wenn
(MOM-FB-ANPASSUNG) in Parameter 100 Drehmomentregelung mit
Wert: Drehzahlrückführung [5] gewählt wurde.
-100 - 100% ✭ 0%
Der Reibungsverlust ist als fester prozentualer Verlust
Funktion: bezogen auf das Nenndrehmoment einzustellen.
Dieser Parameter ist nur anzuwenden, wenn Der Reibungsverlust wird bei motorischem Betrieb
in Parameter 100 Drehmomentregelung mit zum Drehmoment hinzuaddiert, bei generatorischem
Drehzahlrückführung [5] gewählt wurde. Der Betrieb jedoch vom Drehmoment abgezogen.
Drehmomentausgleich wird bei der Kalibrierung des Siehe den Abschnitt Einstellung der Parameter,
VLT-Frequenzumrichters benutzt. Durch Einstellen Drehmomentregelung, Drehzahlrückführung.
des Parameters 447 Drehmomentausgleich wird die Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Kalibrierung des Ausgangsdrehmoments ermöglicht.
Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
Siehe den Abschnitt Einstellung der Parameter,
Drehmomentregelung, Drehzahlrückführung.

Beschreibung der Auswahl: 450 Netzspannung bei Netzausfall

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein. (NETZAUSFALL VOLT)
Wert:
180 - 240 V bei 200-240-V-Geräten ✭ 180
448 Drehmoment, Drehzahlrückführung 342 - 500 V bei 380-500-V-Geräten ✭ 342
Getriebeübersetzung mit Drehgeber 495 - 600 V bei 550-600-V-Geräten ✭ 495
(MOM-FB-GETR.FAKT)
Programmierung
Funktion:
Wert:
Hier wird das Spannungsniveau dafür eingestellt, wann
0,001 - 100,000 ✭ 1,000
Parameter 407 Netzausfall aktiviert werden soll.
Funktion: Das Spannungsniveau zur Aktivierung
Dieser Parameter ist nur anzuwenden, wenn der Netzausfallfunktionen muß unter
in Parameter 100 Drehmomentregelung mit der Netznennspannung liegen, die dem
Drehzahlrückführung [5] gewählt wurde. Wenn an VLT-Frequenzumrichter zugeführt wird. Als Faustregel
der Getriebewelle ein Drehgeber montiert wurde, gilt, daß Parameter 450 10% niedriger als die
muß ein Wert für die Übersetzung eingegeben Netznennspannung eingestellt werden kann.
werden, weil sonst der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
die Ausgangsfrequenz nicht richtig berechnen
Stellen Sie das Niveau zur Aktivierung der
kann. Bei einem Übersetzungsverhältnis von
Netzausfallfunktionen ein.
1:10 (Reduktion der Motordrehzahl auf 1/10)
ist der Parameterwert auf 10 einzustellen. Ist
der Drehgeber direkt an der Getriebewelle
montiert, so muß als Übersetzungsverhältnis der
Wert 1,00 eingestellt werden.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 159
 VLT® Serie 5000

455 Frequenzbereichüberwachung
ACHTUNG!:
(FREQ.BER.UEBERW)
Wird dieser Wert zu hoch eingestellt, so kann es
passieren, daß die in Parameter 407 eingestellte Wert:
Netzausfallfunktion auch dann aktiviert werden Blockiert [0]
kann, wenn die Netzversorgung gegeben ist. ✭Wirksam [1]

Funktion:
453 Drehzahlverhältnis mit Istwertrückführung Dieser Parameter wird verwendet, wenn Warnung
35 Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich bei
(DREHZ.VERHÄLTN.)
Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung in der Anzeige
Wert:
abgeschaltet werden muß. Dieser Parameter
0,01 100,00 ✭ 1,00 beeinflußt nicht das Warnwort 2.
Funktion: Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Dieser Parameter wird nur verwendet, wenn
Wirksam [1] wählen, um die Anzeige im Display
in Parameter 100 Drehzahlregelung mit
zu aktivieren, wenn Warnung 35 Regelabweichung
Istwertrückführung [1] gewählt wurde.
Frequenzbereich auftritt. Blockiert [0]wählen, um die
Stammt das Istwertsignal von der Motorwelle,
Anzeige im Display zu deaktivieren, wenn Warnung
so muß ein Drehzahlverhältnis eingestellt werden,
35 Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich auf tritt.
da andernfalls der Frequenzumrichter einen
Encoderverlust nicht erkennen kann.
Für ein Drehzahlverhältnis von 1:10 (Untersetzung)
den Parameter auf den Wert 10 einstellen. 457 Phasenfehlerfunktion
Ist der Encoder direkt auf der Motorwelle montiert, so (PHASENFEHLERFUNKT)
ist das Drehzahlverhältnis auf 1,00 einzustellen. Wert:
Bitte beachten Sie: Dieser Parameter hat lediglich ✭Abschaltung (ABSCHALTUNG) [0]
Einfluß auf die Encoderverlustfunktion. Warnung (WARNUNG) [1]

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Funktion:

Stellen Sie den gewünschten Wert ein. Wählen Sie die bei zu hohem Netzungleichgewicht
oder fehlender Phase zu aktivierende Funktion aus.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

454 Pausenzeit-Kompensation
Bei Abschaltung [0] hält der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
(PAUSENZ.KOMP.) den Motor innerhalb weniger Sekunden an (je
Wert: nach Größe des Frequenzumrichters).
Aus (AUS) [0] Bei Warnung [1] wird im Falle eines Netzausfalls
✭Ein (EIN) [1] lediglich eine Warnung exportiert, in schweren
Fällen können andere Extrembedingungen jedoch
Funktion: zu einer Abschaltung führen.
Die aktive Pausenzeit-Kompensation des
Wechselrichters, die zum Steueralgorithmus des VLT ACHTUNG!:
5000 (VCC+) gehört, bewirkt Instabilität im Stand, Bei Auswahl von Warnung ist die
wenn Istwertrückführung eingestellt ist. Mit diesem Lebenserwartung des Frequenzumrichters bei
Parameter wird die aktive Pausenzeit-Kompensation anhaltendem Netzausfall reduziert.
abgeschaltet, um Instabilität zu vermeiden.
ACHTUNG!:
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Bei einem Phasenfehler können die internen
Aus [0] wählen, um die Pausenzeit-Kompensation Gebläse bestimmter Modelle nicht mit Strom
zu deaktivieren. versorgt werden. Um eine Überhitzung zu
Ein [1] wählen, um die Pausenzeit-Kompensation vermeiden, kann eine externe Stromversorgung an VLT
zu aktivieren. 5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V, VLT 5075 - 5250 550 - 600
V und VLT 5075 - 5500 380 - 500 V angeschlossen
werden, siehe unter Elektrische Installation.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

160 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Serielle Kommunikation die eingestellte Baudrate bestimmt wird, ist nur ein
Teil der gesam-ten Kommunikationszeit.
500 Adresse
(BUS ADRESSE)
Wert: 502 Motorfreilauf
1 - 126 ✭ 1 (MOTORFREILAUF)
503 Schnellstop
Funktion:
In diesem Parameter kann für jeden (SCHNELL-STOPP)
VLT-Frequenzumrichter die Adresse angegeben 504 Gleichspannungsbremse
werden, die für einen SPS- bzw. PC-Anschluß (DC-BREMSUNG)
benutzt wird. 505 Start
(START)
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
507 Parametersatzwahl
Dem einzelnen VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann eine
(PARAM.SATZ ANW.)
Adresse zwischen 1 und 126 zugeordnet werden.
Die Adresse 0 kann genutzt werden, wenn ein 508 Festdrehzahlwahl-Jog
Telegramm von einem Master (SPS, PLC oder PC) an (ANWAHL FESTDREHZ)
sämtliche an die serielle Schnittstelle angeschlossene Wert:
VLT-Frequenzumrichter gesendet und von den VLT́s Klemme (KLEMME) [0]
gleichzeitig empfangen werden soll. In diesem Fall Bus (BUS) [1]
werden die VLT-Frequenzumrichter den Empfang Bus und Klemme (BUS UND KLEMME) [2]
des Telegramms nicht mit einer Rückmeldung ✭Bus oder Klemme (BUS ODER KLEMME) [3]
quittieren. Wenn die Anzahl der angeschlossenen
Einheiten (VLT-Frequenzumrichter + Master) höher Funktion:
ist als 31, muß ein Verstärker (Repeater) eingesetzt In den Parametern 502-508 kann man anwählen ob
werden. Parameter 500 kann nicht über die serielle der VLT-Frequenzumrichter über die Klemmen (digitale
Kommunikationsschnittstelle gewählt werden. Eingabe) und/oder den Bus gesteuert werden soll.
Bei Wahl von Bus und Klemme oder Bus läßt
sich der entsprechende Befehl nur über die
serielle Schnittstelle aktivieren. Bei Bus und
501 Baudrate
Klemme muß zusätzlich einer der entsprechenden
(BAUD-RATE)
digitalen Ein-gänge aktiviert werden.
Wert:
300 Baud (300 BAUD) [0] Beschreibung der Auswahl:
600 Baud (600 BAUD) [1] Klemme [0] ist zu wählen, wenn der betreffende

Programmierung
1200 Baud (1200 BAUD) [2] Steuerbefehl nur über einen digitalen Eingang
2400 Baud (2400 BAUD) [3] aktivierbar sein soll.
4800 Baud (4800 BAUD) [4] Bus [1] ist zu wählen, wenn der betreffende
✭9600 Baud (9600 BAUD) [5] Steuerbefehl nur über ein Bit im Steuerwort (serielle
Kommunikation) aktivierbar sein soll.
Funktion:
Bus und Klemme [2] ist zu wählen, wenn der
Mit diesem Parameter wird die Geschwindigkeit
betref- fende Steuerbefehl nur dann aktiviert
eingestellt, mit der die Daten über die serielle
werden soll, wenn ein Signal (aktives Signal =
Schnittstelle übertragen werden. Dies wird
1) sowohl über das Steuerwort als auch über
als Anzahl Bits definiert, die pro Sekunde
einen digitalen Eingang erfolgt.
übertragen werden (Baud).

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Die Übertragungsgeschwindigkeit des
VLT-Frequenzumrichters ist so zu programmieren,
daß sie der Übertragungsgeschwindigkeit des
PC/PLC entspricht. Parameter 501 kann über den
seriellen Bus RS 485 nicht gewählt werden. Die
eigentliche Zeit für die Datenübertragung, die durch
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert
MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 161
 VLT® Serie 5000

Digitaler Bus Steuerbefehl Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Eingang Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 502.
505-508
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0 509 Bus-Festdrehzahl 1
1 1 1 (BUS JOGDREHZ.)
Wert:
Bus oder Klemme [3] ist zu wählen, wenn der 0,0 - Parameter 202 ✭ 10,0 Hz
betref-fende Steuerbefehl aktiviert werden soll, wenn
Funktion:
ein Signal (aktives Signal = 1) entweder über das
Hier kann eine Festdrehzahl (Jog) eingestellt werden,
Steuer-wort oder einen digitalen Eingang erfolgt.
die über die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle
Digitaler Bus Steuerbefehl aktiviert wird.
Eingangut Es handelt sich um die gleiche Funktion
505-508 wie in Parameter 213.
0 0 0
0 1 1 Beschreibung der Auswahl:
1 0 1 Die Festdrehzahlfrequenz fJOG kann zwischen
1 1 1 fMIN (Parameter 201) und fMAX (Parameter
202) gewählt werden.
ACHTUNG!:
Die Parameter 502-504 betreffen
Stoppfunk-tionen, vgl. Beispiel über Parameter 510 Bus-Festdrehzahl 2
502 (Freilauf). Aktiver Stoppbefehl ’0’. (BUS JOGDREHZ. 2)

Parameter 502 = Bus und Klemme Wert:

0,0 - Parameter 202 ✭ 10,0 Hz
Digitaler Bus Steuerbefehl
Eingang Funktion:
0 0 1 Leerlauf Hier kann eine Festdrehzahl (Jog) eingestellt wer-den,
0 1 0 Motor läuft die über die serielle Kommunikationsschnitt-stelle
1 0 0 Motor läuft aktiviert wird.
1 1 0 Motor läuft Es handelt sich um die gleiche Funktion
wie in Parameter 213.
Parameter 502 = Bus oder Klemme
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Digitaler Bus Steuerbefehl Die Festdrehzahlfrequenz fJOG kann zwischen
Eingang fMIN (Parameter 201) und fMAX (Parameter
0 0 1 Leerlauf
202) gewählt werden.
0 1 1 Leerlauf
1 0 1 Leerlauf
1 1 0 Motor läuft
512 Telegrammprofil
506 Drehrichtung (TELEGRAMM PROFIL)
(DREHRICHTUNG) Wert:
Wert: Feldbusprofil (FELDBUSPROFIL) [0]
✭Klemme (KLEMME) [0] ✭FC Drive (FC DRIVE) [1]
Bus (BUS) [1]
Funktion:
Bus und Klemme (BUS UND KLEMME) [2]
Es kann zwischen zwei verschiedenen
Bus oder Klemme (BUS ODER KLEMME) [3]
Steuerwortprofilen gewählt werden.
Funktion:
Siehe Beschreibung zu Parameter 502.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

162 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Beschreibung der Auswahl: Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Wählen Sie das gewünschte Steuerwortprofil. Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequenzumrichters
Weitere Informationen zu Steuerwortprofilen siehe kann auf dem aktuellen Wert oder dem Sollwert
Serielle Kommunikation im Projektierungshandbuch. ’ein-gefroren’ (gespeichert) werden, bis zum Stop
Weiterführende Informationen sind den fortfahren, bis zur Festdrehzahlfrequenz (Parameter
Feldbus-Handbüchern zu entnehmen. 213) fortfahren, bis zur maximalen Ausgangsfrequenz
(Parameter 202) fortfahren oder aber anhalten
und eine Abschaltung auslösen.
513 Bus-Time-Out Zeit
(BUS TIMEOUT ZEIT)
Wert:
1 - 99 Sek. ✭ 1Sek.

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter wird die voraussichtlich
maximale Zeit eingestellt, die zwischen zwei
aufeinander-folgenden Telegrammen vergehen
wird. Wird diese Zeit überschritten, so
wird ein Ausfall der seriellen Kommunikation
angenommen, wobei die entsprechende Reaktion
in Parameter 514 einzustellen ist.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Stellen Sie die gewünschte Zeit ein.

514 Bus-Time-Out Funktion

(BUS TIMEOUT FUNK)
Wert:
Aus (AUS) [0]
Ausgang speichern (AUSGANG SPEICHERN) [1]
Stop (STOP) [2]
Festdrehzahl (FESTDREHZAHL(JOG) [3]
Max. Drehzahl (MAX. DREHZAHL) [4]
Stop und Abschaltung
Programmierung
(STOPP UND ABSCHALT.) [5]

Funktion:
In diesem Parameter bestimmt der Benutzer die
Reaktion des VLT-Frequenzumrichters im Falle
eines Überschreitens der für den Bus-Timeout
eingestellten Zeit (Parameter 513).
Bei Aktivierung von Wahl [1] bis [5] werden Relais
01 und Relais 04 deaktiviert.

Treten gleichzeitig mehrere Auszeiten auf, so gibt

der Frequenzumrichter der Auszeit-Funktion
folgende Priorität:
1. Parameter 318 Funktion nach Sollwertfehler
2. Parameter 346 Funktion nach Encoderverlust
3. Parameter 514 Bus-Time-Out Funktion

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 163
 VLT® Serie 5000

Parameter Beschreibung Anzeige- Einheit Aktualisie-

Nr. text rungs-
intervall
515 Sollwert % (SOLLWERT) % 80 ms
516 Sollwert Einheit (SOLLWERT [EINH.]) Hz, Nm oder 80 ms
Upm
517 Istwert (FEEDBACK) Auswahl über 80 ms
Par. 416
518 Frequenz (FREQUENZ) Hz 80 ms
519 Frequenz x Skalierung (FREQUENZ X SKAL.) - 80 ms
520 Strom (MOTORSTROM) A x 100 80 ms
521 Drehmoment (MOMENT) % 80 ms
522 Leistung, kW (LEISTUNG (kW)) kW 80 ms
523 Leistung, HP (LEISTUNG (HP)) HP (USA) 80 ms
524 Motorspannung (MOTORSPANNUNG) V 80 ms
525 Zwischenkreisspan- (DC-SPANNUNG) V 80 ms
nung
526 Motortemp. (TH.MOTORSCHUTZ) % 80 ms
527 Temp. VLT TH. VLT-SCHUTZ) % 80 ms
528 Digitaler Eingang (DIGITALEINGAENGE) Binärcode 2 ms
529 Klemme 53, (ANALOGEING. 53) V 20 ms
Analogeingang
530 Klemme 54, (ANALOGEING. 54) V 20 ms
Analogeingang
531 Klemme 60, (ANALOGEING. 60) mA 20 ms
Analogeingang
532 Pulssollwert (PULS SOLLWERT) Hz 20 ms
533 Ext. Sollwert % (ERW. SOLLWERT) 20 ms
534 Zustandswort (STATUSWORT [HEX]) Hex-Code 20 ms
535 Bremsleistung/2 min (BR.LEISTUNG/2 MIN) kW
536 Bremsleistung/s (BREMSLEIST/S) kW
537 Kühlkörpertemperatur (TEMP. KUEHLKOE.) C 1,2 s
538 Alarmwort (ALARMWORT [HEX]) Hex-Code 20 ms
539 VLT-Steuerwort (STEUERWORT [HEX]) Hex-Code 2 ms
540 Warnwort 1 (WARN. WORT 1) Hex-Code 20 ms
541 Erweitertes (ERW. ZUSTANDSWORT ) Hex-Code 20 ms
Zustandswort Hex
557 Motor Upm (MOTOR UPM) UPM 80 ms
558 Motor Upm x Skalierung (MOTOR UPM X SKAL.) - 80 ms

Funktion: U/Min.) bzw. in Parameter 14 ergibt. Siehe

Diese Parameter können über die serielle Schnittstelle ggf. auch Parameter 205 und 416.
und im Displaymodus über das Display ausgelesen
Istwert, Parameter 517:
werden, siehe auch Parameter 009 - 012.
Gibt den Statuswert an Klemme 33/53/60
Beschreibung der Auswahl: der/des in Parameter 414, 416 und 416
Sollwert %, Parameter 515: gewählten Einheit/Intervalls an.
Der angezeigte Wert entspricht dem Gesamtsollwert
Frequenz, Parameter 518:
(Summe aus Digital/Analog/Voreingest./Bus/Sollwert
Der angezeigte Wert entspricht der aktuellen
halten/Beschleun./Verlangs).
Motorfrequenz fM (ohne Resonanzdämpfung).
Sollwert Einheit, Parameter 516:
Frequenz x Skalierung, Parameter 519:
Gibt den aktuellen Wert an Klemme 17/29/53/54/60
Der angezeigte Wert entspricht der aktuellen
in der Einheit an, die sich aus der Wahl der
Motorfrequenz fM (ohne Resonanzdämpfung)
Konfiguration in Parameter 100 (Hz, Nm oder

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

164 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

multipliziert mit einem in Parameter 008 Der Wert wird gefiltert, d.h. zwischen der Änderung
eingestellten Faktor. eines Eingabewerts und der Änderung des
Anzeigewerts können ca. 1,3 s liegen.
Motorstrom, Parameter 520:
Der angezeigte Wert entspricht dem gegebenen Motortemperatur, Parameter 526:
Motorstrom gemessen als Mittelwert IRMS.
Der Wert wird gefiltert, d.h. zwischen der Änderung VLT-Temperatur, Parameter 527:
eines Eingabewerts und der Änderung des Es werden nur ganze Zahlen angezeigt.
Anzeigewerts können ca. 1,3 s liegen. Digitaler Eingang, Parameter 528:
Drehmoment, Parameter 521: Der angezeigte Wert gibt den Signalzustand
Der angezeigte Wert ist das der Motorwelle zugeführte der acht digitalen Eingänge (16, 17, 18, 19,
Drehmoment mit Vorzeichen. Der Wert wird als 27, 29, 32 und 33) an.
Prozentsatz des Nenndrehmoments angegeben. Die Anzeige ist binär. Die Ziffer ganz links entspricht
Es besteht keine exakte Linearität zwischen 160% dem Status von Klemme 16, während die Ziffer ganz
Motorstrom und Drehmoment im Verhältnis zum rechts dem Status von Klemme 33 entspricht.
Nennmoment. Bei manchen Motoren ist das Klemme 53, analoger Eingang, Parameter 529:
Drehmoment höher. Entsprechend hängen Mindest- Der angezeigte Wert gibt den Signalwert
und Höchstwert vom maximalen Motorstrom an Klemme 53 an.
sowie vom eingesetzten Motor ab. Die Skalierung (Parameter 309 und 310) hat
Der Wert wird gefiltert, d.h. zwischen der Änderung keinen Einfluß auf die Anzeige. Minimum und
eines Eingabewerts und der Änderung des Maximum werden durch die Abweichungs und
Anzeigewerts können ca. 1,3 s liegen. Verstärkungsanpassung des AD-Umrichters bestimmt.
ACHTUNG!: Klemme 54, analoger Eingang, Parameter 530:
Falls die Einstellung der Motorparameter nicht Der angezeigte Wert gibt den Signalwert
mit dem eingesetzten Motor übereinstimmt, an Klemme 54 an.
sind die Anzeigewerte ungenau und können Die Skalierung (Parameter 312 und 313) hat
negativ sein, auch wenn der Motor nicht läuft oder keinen Einfluß auf die Anzeige. Minimum und
ein positives Drehmoment erzeugt. Maximum werden durch die Abweichungs und
Verstärkungsanpassung des AD-Umrichters bestimmt.
Leistung (kW), Parameter 522:
Der angezeigte Wert wird auf Grundlage der Klemme 60, analoger Eingang, Parameter 531:
aktuellen Motorspannung und des aktuellen Der angezeigte Wert gibt den Signalwert
Motorstroms berechnet. an Klemme 60 an.
Der Wert wird gefiltert, d.h. zwischen der Änderung Die Skalierung (Parameter 315 und 316) hat
eines Eingabewerts und der Änderung des keinen Einfluß auf die Anzeige. Minimum und

Programmierung
Anzeigewerts können ca. 1,3 s liegen. Maximum werden durch die Abweichungs und
Verstärkungsanpassung des AD-Umrichters bestimmt.
Leistung (HP), Parameter 523:
Der angezeigte Wert wird auf Grundlage der Pulssollwert, Parameter 532:
aktuellen Motorspannung und des aktuellen Der angezeigte Wert gibt einen etwaigen an einen der
Motorstroms berechnet. digitalen Eingänge angeschlossenen Pulssollwert an.
Der Wert wird in PS angezeigt.
Der Wert wird gefiltert, d.h. zwischen der Änderung Externer Sollwert %, Parameter 533:
eines Eingabewerts und der Änderung des Der angezeigte Wert gibt die Summe der externen
Anzeigewerts können ca. 1,3 s liegen. Sollwerte in % an (Summe aus Analog/Bus/Puls).

Motorspannung, Parameter 524: Zustandswort, Parameter 534:

Der Anzeigewert ist ein berechneter Wert Gibt das über die serielle Schnittstelle im
für die Motorsteuerung. Hex-Code vom VLT-Frequenzumrichter übermittelte
Zustandswort an. Siehe Projektierungshandbuch.
Zwischenkreisspannung, Parameter 525:
Der angezeigte Wert ist ein Meßwert. Bremsleistung/2 min, Parameter 535:

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 165
 VLT® Serie 5000

580–582 Definierte Parameter

Gibt die an einen externen Bremswiderstand
(DEFIN. PARAM.)
übertragene Bremsleistung an. Der Mittelwert wird
laufend für die letzten 120 Sekunden berechnet. Wert:
Nur Lesen
Bremsleistung/s, Parameter 536:
Gibt die gegebene, an einen externen Bremswiderstand Funktion:
übertragene Bremsleistung an. Die Angabe erfolgt Die drei Parameter enthalten eine Liste aller im
in Form eines Augenblickswerts. VLT definierter Parameter. Jeder Parameter
enthält bis zu 116 Elemente (Parameternummern).
Kühlkörpertemperatur, Parameter 537: Die Nummer der im Gebrauch befindlichen
Gibt die aktuelle Kühlkörpertemperatur des Parameter (580, 581 und 582) hängt von der
VLT-Frequenzumrichters an. Die Abschaltgrenze entsprechenden VLT-Konfiguration ab. Wenn eine 0
beträgt 90 ± 5 C, die Wiedereinschaltgrenze als Parameternummer verwendet wird, endet die Liste.
60 ± 5 C.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Alarmwort, Parameter 538:
Gibt Alarme des VLT-Frequenzumrichters in einem
Hex-Code an. Weitere Informationen siehe Abschnitt
Warnwort 1, Erweitertes Zustandswort und Alarmwort.

VLT-Steuerwort, Parameter 539:

Gibt das über die serielle Schnittstelle im Hex-Code an
den VLT-Frequenzumrichter übermittelte Steuerwort
an. Siehe auch Projektierungshandbuch.

Warnwort 1, Parameter 540:

Gibt Warnungen für den VLT-Frequenzumrichter in
Form eines Hex-Codes an. Weitere Informationen
siehe Abschnitt Warnwort 1, Erweitertes
Zustandswort und Alarmwort.

Erweitertes Zustandswort (Hex), Parameter 541:

Gibt Warnungen für den VLT-Frequenzumrichter
in Form eines Hex-Codes an.

Weitere Informationen siehe Abschnitt Warnwort 1,

Erweitertes Zustandswort und Alarmwort.

Motor Upm, Parameter 557:

Der angezeigte Wert entspricht der aktuellen
Motordrehzahl. Bei Prozeßregelung mit oder
ohne Istwertrückführung wird die Motordrehzahl
geschätzt. Bei Drehzahl-Istwertrückführung
wird die Drehzahl gemessen.

Motor Upm x Skalierung, Parameter 558:

Der angezeigte Wert entspricht der aktuellen
Motordrehzahl (Skalierung) multipliziert mit einem
in Parameter 008 eingestellten Faktor.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

166 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Technische Funktionen

Parameter Nr. Beschreibung Anzeigetext Einheit Bereich

Betriebsdaten
600 Betriebsstunden (BETRIEBSSTUN- Stunden 0 130.000,0
DEN)
601 Betriebsstunden (MOTORLAUFSTUN- Stunden 0 130.000,0
DEN)
602 KWh-Zähler (KWh-ZÄHLER) Nr. 0 - 9999
603 Anzahl d. (NETZEINSCHALT) Nr. 0 - 9999
Einschaltungen
604 Anzahl d. (UEBERTEMPER- Nr. 0 - 9999
Übertemperaturen ATUR)
605 Anzahl d. (UEBERSPANNUN- Nr. 0 - 9999
Überspannungen GEN)

Funktion:
Diese Parameter können über die serielle
Schnittstelle und über das Display in den
Parametern ausgelesen werden.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

Betriebsstunden, Parameter 600:
Angabe der Anzahl Stunden, die der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter in Betrieb war.
Der Wert wird im VLT-Frequenzumrichter
jede Stunde aktualisiert und beim Abschalten
des Geräts gespeichert.

Motorlaufstunden, Parameter 601:

Angabe der Anzahl Stunden, die der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter seit dem letzten Reset
in Parameter 619 in Betrieb war.
Der Wert wird im VLT-Frequenzumrichter
jede Stunde aktualisiert und beim Abschalten
des Geräts gespeichert.

Programmierung
kWh-Zähler, Parameter 602:
Angabe des kW-Verbrauchs des Motors
(Durchschnittswert während 1 Stunde) seit dem
Reset in Parameter 618.

Anzahl d. Einschaltungen, Parameter 603:

Angabe der Anzahl Einschaltungen der
Versorgungspannung, die am VLT-Frequenzumrichter
erfolgt sind.

Anzahl d. Übertemperaturen, Parameter 604:

Angabe der Anzahl von Übertemperaturen, die am
VLT-Frequenzumrichter aufgetreten sind.

Anzahl d. Überspannungen, Parameter 605:

Angabe der Anzahl Überspannungen, die am
VLT-Frequenzumrichter aufgetreten sind.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 167
 VLT® Serie 5000

Parameter Nr. Beschreibung Anzeigetext Einheit Bereich

Datenprotokoll
606 Digitale Eingänge (SP. DIGITALEING) Dezimale 0 - 255
607 Steuerwort (SP. STEUERWORT) Dezimale 0 - 65535
608 Zustandswort (SP. ZUS- Dezimale 0 - 65535
TANDSWORT)
609 Sollwert (SP. SOLLWERT) % 0 - 100
610 Istwert (SP. ISTWERT) Par. 416 999,999.99 -
999,999.99
611 Ausgangsfrequenz (SP. MOTORFREQ.) Hz 0.0 - 999.9
612 Ausgangsspannung (SP. MOTORSPAN- Volt 50 - 1000
NUN)
613 Ausgangsstrom (SP. MOTORSTROM) A 0.0 - 999.9
614 Zwischenkreisspannung (SP. DC Volt 0.0 - 999.9
SPANNUNG)

Funktion:
Über diesen Parameter können bis zu 20
Datenprotokolle eingesehen werden, wobei EXT. SOLLWERT, %
[0] der neueste und [19] der älteste Eintrag
ist. Jeder Protokolleintrag wird alle 160 ms
aktualisiert, solange ein Startsignal anliegt. Erfolgt
ein Stopp-Signal, so werden die letzten 20
Protokolleinträge gespeichert, und die entsprechenden
63.0%
606 LOG: DIG. EING.
Werte können im Display angesehen werden.
[0] 40
Nützlich ist diese Funktion beispielsweise bei
Wartungsarbeiten nach einer Störung.
Dieser Parameter kann über die serielle
Kommunikationsschnittstelle und über das Steuerwort, Parameter 607:
Display ausgelesen werden. Der Wert des Steuerworts wird als Dezimalzahl
im Bereich 0-65535 angegeben.
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Zustandswort, Parameter 608:
Die Datenprotokollnummer erscheint in eckigen
Der Wert des Bus-Zustandsworts wird als Dezimalzahl
Klammern: [1]. Der Dateineintrag wird eingeforen,
im Bereich 0-65535 angegeben.
wenn eine Störung eintritt, und wieder freigegeben,
wenn der VLT-Frequenzumrichter rückgesetzt wird.
Die Datenprotokollierung ist aktiv, während
der Motor läuft.

Der Dateneintrag wird eingefroren, wenn eine

Störung eintritt, und wieder freigegeben, wenn
der VLT-Frequenzumrichter rückgesetzt wird. Die
Datenprotokollierung ist aktiv, wenn der Motor läuft.

Digitale Eingänge, Parameter 606:

Der Wert der digitalen Eingänge wird als Dezimalzahl
im Bereich 0-255 angegeben.
Die Datenprotokollnummer erscheint in
eckigen Klammern: [1]

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

168 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

(Abschaltung) ablesen. Es werden 10 (0-10)

Protokollwerte ausgegeben.
Sollwert, Parameter 609:
Die niedrigste Protokollnummer (1) enthält den
Der Festsollwert wird in % im Bereich 0-100
neuesten/zuletzt gespeicherten Datenwert und die
% angegeben.
höchste Protokollnummer (10) den ältesten Datenwert.
Istwert, Parameter 610:
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Der Wert wird als parametrierter Istwert angegeben.
Anzeige als Option.
Ausgangsfrequenz, Parameter 611: Anzeigebereich: 0,0 9999,9.
Der Wert der Motorfrequenz wird als Frequenz im Ein Reset des Fehlerprotokolls kann nach einer
Bereich 0,0 999,9 Hz angegeben. manuellen Initialisierung erfolgen.

Ausgangsspannung, Parameter 612:

Der Wert der Motorspannung wird in Volt im
Bereich 50 -1000 V angegeben. 617 Fehlerprotokoll: Wert
(F-SP. WERT)
Ausgangsstrom, Parameter 613:
Wert:
Der Wert des Motorstroms wird in Ampere im
[Index 1 - 10]
Bereich 0,0 -999,9 A angegeben.
Funktion:
Zwischenkreisspannung, Parameter 614:
Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters läßt sich erkennen,
Der Wert der Zwischenkreisspannung wird in Volt
bei welchem Strom bzw. welcher Spannung eine
im Bereich 0,0 -999,9 V angegeben.
Störung (Abschaltung) eingetreten ist.

Beschreibung der Auswahl:

615 Fehlerprotokoll: Fehlercode Anzeige als Zahlenwert.
(F-SP. FEHLERCODE) Anzeigebereich: 0,0 999,9.
Ein Reset des Fehlerprotokolls kann nach einer
Wert:
manuellen Initialisierung erfolgen.
[Index 1 - 10] Fehlercode 0 - 44

Funktion:
Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters läßt sich die Ursache 618 Rückstellen des kWh-Zählers
für eine Störung (Abschaltung) ermitteln. (RESET KWH-ZAEHL)
Es werden 10 (0-10) Protokollwerte ausgegeben.
Wert:
Die niedrigste Protokollnummer (1) enthält den
Keine Rückstellung (KEIN RESET) [0]
neuesten/zuletzt gespeicherten Datenwert und die
Rückstellung (RESET) [1]
höchste Protokollnummer (10) den ältesten Datenwert.
Funktion: Programmierung
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
kWh-Zähler auf Null zurückstellen. (Parameter 602)
Angabe als Zahlencode, wobei die Alarmnummer
sich auf einen Alarmcode bezieht, der in einer Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Übersicht auf Seite 143 zu sehen ist. Bei Auswahl von Rückstellung [1] und bei
Ein Reset des Fehlerprotokolls kann nach einer Betätigen der Taste [OK] wird der kWh-Zähler des
manuellen Initialisierung erfolgen. VLT-Fre-quenzumrichters auf Null zurückgestellt.
Dieser Parameter kann über die serielle Schnittstelle
RS 485 nicht gewählt werden.
616 Fehlerprotokoll: Zeit
ACHTUNG!:
(F-SP. ZEIT) Mit der Betätigung der Taste "OK" wird
Wert: die Nullstellung ausgeführt.
[Index 1 - 10]

Funktion:
Mit Hilfe dieses Parameters läßt sich die
Gesamtzahl der Betriebsstunden vor einer Störung

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 169
 VLT® Serie 5000

619 Rückstellen des Betriebsstundenzählers

1. Wählen Sie Steuerkartentest. .
(RUECK STD. ZAEHL)
2. Netzspannung unterbrechen und warten, bis
Wert: die Displaybeleuchtung erlischt.
Keine Rückstellung (KEIN RESET) [0] 3. Prüfstecker einsetzen (siehe unten).
Rückstellung (RESET) [1] 4. Netzspannung wieder einschalten.
5. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter erwartet ein
Funktion:
Betätigen der Taste [OK] (falls kein
Betriebsstundenzähler auf Null stellen. (Parameter 601)
Bedienfeld, auf Normalbetrieb schalten.
Beschreibung der Auswahl: Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter läuft dann normal an).
Wenn Rückstellung [1] gewählt wurde, und 6. Es laufen verschiedene Tests ab.
die [OK]-Taste gedrückt wurde, wird der 7. [OK]-Taste drücken.
Betriebsstundenzähler des VLT-Frequenzumrichters 8. Parameter 620 wird automatisch auf
auf Null gestellt. Dieser Parameter kann über die Normalbetrieb eingestellt.
serielle Schnittstelle RS 485 nicht gewählt werden. Wenn ein Test mißlingt, geht der VLT-
Frequenzumrichter in eine Endlosschleife. Die
ACHTUNG!: Steuerkarte muß ausgetauscht werden.
Mit der Betätigung der [OK]-Taste wird
die Nullstellung ausgeführt. Prüfstecker (folgende Klemmen sind miteinander
zu verbinden).
4 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 27 - 29 - 32 - 33
620 Betriebsart 5 - 12
(BETRIEBSART) 39 - 20 - 55
42 - 60
Wert:
45 - 53 - 54
✭Normale Funktion (NORMAL BETRIEB) [0]
Funktion mit deaktiviertem Wechselrichter
(INVERTER BLOCKIERT) [1]
Steuerkartentest (STEUERKARTEN TEST) [2]
Initialisierung (INITIALISIEREN) [3]

Funktion:
Dieses Parameter kann außer für die normale
Funktion für zwei verschiedene Tests benutzt
werden. Außerdem beinhaltet es die Möglichkeit
zu einer Initialisierung aller Parameter (außer
Parameter 603-605).
Die Funktion ist erst dann aktiv, wenn die
Netzversorgung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters aus-
Initialisierung [3] ist zu wählen, wenn eine
und wieder eingeschaltet worden ist.
Werksein-stellung des Gerätes gewünscht wird,
Beschreibung der Auswahl: ohne daß ein Reset der Parameter 500, 501
Normale Funktion [0] dient zum Normalbetrieb mit + 600-605 + 615-617 erfolgt.
einem Motor in der gewählten Anwendung. ACHTUNG!:
Funktion mit deaktiviertem Wechselrichter [1] ist zu Vor der Intitialisierung muß der VLT gestoppt
wählen, wenn der Einfluß des Steuersignals auf die werden und der Motor stehen.
Steuerkarte und deren Funktionen kontrolliert werden
soll, ohne daß der Wechselrichter den Motor antreibt. Vorgehensweise bei Initialisierung:
Steuerkartentest [2] ist zu wählen, wenn die analogen
und digitalen Eingänge, die analogen und digitalen 1. Funktion Initialisierung.
Relaisausgänge sowie die Steuerspannung von +10 2. [OK]-Taste drücken.
V kontrolliert werden sollen. Dieser Test erfordert den 3. Netzspannung unterbrechen und warten, bis
Anschluß eines Prüfsteckers mit internen Anschlüssen. die Displaybeleuchtung erlischt.
4. Netzspannung wieder einschalten.
Gehen Sie beim Steuerkartentest folgendermaßen vor:
Durch Gedrückthalten von drei Tasten bei
gleichzeitigem Einschalten der Netzspannung
✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

170 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

kann eine manuelle Initialisierung vorgenommen 2. Die Tasten [DISPLAY/STATUS] + [MENU] +

werden. Eine manuelle Initialisierung bewirkt, [OK] gleichzeitig gedrückt halten und dabei die
daß alle Parameter auf Werkseinstellung gestellt Netzspannung einschalten. Im Display erscheint
werden; ausgenommen Par. 600-605. ganz kurz die Meldung MANUAL INITIALIZE.
Die Vorgehensweise bei der manuellen 3. Wenn im Display UNIT READY erscheint, ist die
Initialisierung ist wie folgt: Initialisierung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters beendet.

1. Netzspannung unterbrechen und warten, bis die

Displaybeleuchtung abgeschaltet hat.

Parameter Nr. Beschreibung Anzeigetext

Typenschild
621 VLT-Typ (VLT TYP)
622 Leistungsteil (LEISTUNGSTEIL)
623 VLT-Bestellnummer (VLT-BESTELL NR.)
624 Software-Version Nr. (SOFTWARE VERSION)
625 LCP-Identifikationsnummer (LCP VERSION)
626 Datenbank-Identifikationsnummer (DATENBANK ID-NR)
627 Leistungsteil-Identifikationsnummer (LEISTUNGST.ID-NR)
628 Anwendungsoption, Typ (OPTION 1 TYP)
629 Anwendungsoption, Bestellnummer (OPTION 1 BEST.NR)
630 Kommunikationsoption, Typ (OPTION 2 BEST.NR)
631 Kommunikationsoption, Bestellnummer (OPTION 2 BEST.NR)

Funktion:
Anzeige der Hauptdaten über das Display oder die
Datenbank-Identifikationsnummer, Parameter 626:
serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle.
Anzeige der Hauptdaten über das Display oder die
Beschreibung der Auswahl: serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle.
VLT-Typ, Parameter 621: Beispiel: ID 1.14.
VLT-Typ gibt an, um welche Gerätegröße und Leistungsteil-Identifikationsnummer,
Grundfunktion es sich handelt. Parameter 627:
Beispiel: VLT 5008, 380-500 V. Anzeige der Hauptdaten über das Display oder die
Leistungsteil, Parameter 622: serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle.
Der Wert Leistungsteil gibt an, welches Leistungsteil Beispiel: ID 1.15.
aktuell eingesetzt wird. Anwendungsoption, Typ, Parameter 628:
Beispiel: Erweitert mit Bremse. Anzeige des Typs der Anwendungsoptionen
VLT-Bestellnummer, Parameter 623: des VLT-Frequenzumrichters. Programmierung
Mit der Funktion "Bestellnummer" kann die Anwendungsoption, Bestellnummer,
Bestellnummer des betreffenden VLT-Typs Parameter 629:
angezeigt werden. Anzeige der Bestellnummer für die Anwendungsoption.
Beispiel: 175Z0072.
Kommunikationsoption, Typ, Parameter 630:
Software-Version Nr., Parameter 624:
Anzeige des Typs der Kommunikationsoptionen
Mit der Funktion "Software-Version" kann die des VLT-Frequenzumrichters.
Versionsnummer angezeigt werden.
Beispiel: V 3.10 Kommunikationsoption, Bestellnummer,
Parameter 631:
LCP-Identifikationsnummer, Parameter 625:
Anzeige der Bestellnummer für die Kom-
Anzeige der Hauptdaten über das Display oder die munikationsoption.
serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle.
Beispiel: ID 1.42, 2 kB.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 171
 VLT® Serie 5000

ACHTUNG!: 702 Relais 6, AUS Verzögerung

Die Parameter 700-711 für die Relaiskarte (RELAY6 OFF DELAY)
werden nur dann aktiviert, wenn eine 705 Relais 7, AUS Verzögerung
Relaisoptionskarte im Frequenzumrichter
(RELAY7 OFF DELAY)
installiert ist.
708 Relais 8, AUS Verzögerung
700 Relais 6, Funktion (RELAY8 OFF DELAY)
(RELAY6 FUNCTION) 711 Relais 9, AUS Verzögerung
703 Relais 7, Funktion (RELAY9 OFF DELAY)
(RELAY7 FUNCTION) Wert:
706 Relais 8, Funktion 0 - 600 Sek. ✭ 0 Sek.
(RELAY8 FUNCTION)
Funktion:
709 Relais 9, Funktion
Dieser Parameter ermöglicht die Verzögerung der
(RELAY9 FUNCTION)
Einschaltzeit der Relais 6/7/8/9 (Klemmen 1-2).
Funktion:
Der Ausgang aktiviert einen Relaisschalter. Die Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Relaisausgänge 6/7/8/9 können zur Status- und Geben Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.
Warnungsanzeige verwendet werden. Das Relais
wird aktiviert, wenn die Bedingungen für die
relevanten Datenwerte erfüllt sind.
■ Elektrische Installation der Relaiskarte
Die Aktivierung/Deaktivierung kann in den Parametern
Die Relais werden wie nachfolgend gezeigt
701/704/707/710 Relais 6/7/8/9, EIN Verzögerung
angeschlossen.
und den Parametern 702/705/708/711 Relais 6/7/8/9,
AUS Verzögerung programmiert werden. Relais 6-9:
A-B Schließer, A-C Öffner
Beschreibung der Auswahl:
Max. 240 V AC, 2 A
Datenauswahl und Anschlüsse siehe
Parameter 319 - 326.

701 Relais 6, EIN Verzögerung

(RELAY6 ON DELAY)
704 Relais 7, EIN Verzögerung
(RELAY7 ON DELAY)
707 Relais 8, EIN Verzögerung
(RELAY8 ON DELAY)
710 Relais 9, EIN Verzögerung
(RELAY9 ON DELAY)
Wert:
0 - 600 Sek. ✭ 0 Sek.

Funktion:
Dieser Parameter ermöglicht die Verzögerung der
Einschaltzeit der Relais 6/7/8/9 (Klemmen 1-2).
Für doppelte Isolation muß die Kunststoffolie gemäß
Beschreibung der Auswahl: der nachfolgenden Zeichnung montiert werden.
Geben Sie den gewünschten Wert ein.

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

172 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Programmierung

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 173
 VLT® Serie 5000

Ausgänge Klemme Nr. Relais Relais Relais Relais

06 07 08 09
Parameter 700 703 706 709
Wert:
Ohne Funktion (OHNE FUNKTION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Steuerung bereit (STEUERUNG BEREIT) [1] [1] [1] [1]
VLT bereit (VLT BEREIT) [2] ✭ [2] [2] [2]
VLT und externe Ansteuerung bereit (VLT+STEUERUNG OK) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Freigabe, keine Warnung (FREIG.KEINE WARNUNG) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Motor dreht (MOTOR DREHT) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Motor dreht, keine Warnung (MOTOR DREHT K. WARN.) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Betrieb innerhalb der Grenzwerte, (LIMIT OK KEINE WARN.) [7] [7] [7] [7]
keine Warnung
Sollwert entspricht Motordrehzahl, keine Warnung (SOLLW.=MOTORDRZ. [8] [8] [8] [8]
K.WA)
Störung (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9] ✭
Störung oder Warnung (ALARM OD.WARNUNG) [10] [10] [10] [10]
Momentgrenze (MOMENT-GRENZE) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Außerhalb des Strombereiches (AUSSERH.STROMGRENZE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Über minimalem Warnstrom (UEBER MIN. WARNSTROM) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Unter maximalem Warnstrom (UNTER MAX. WARNSTROM) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Außerhalb des Frequenzbereiches (AUSSERH.F-GRENZE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Über minimaler Warnfrequenz (UEBER MIN.WARNFREQ.) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Unter maximaler Warnfrequenz (UNTER MAX.WARNFREQ.) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Außerhalb des Istwertbereiches (AUS.ISTWERT-BEREICH) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Über minimalem Istwert (UEBER MIN.ISTWERT-B.) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Unter maximalem Istwert (UNTER MAX.ISTWERT-B.) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Warnung Übertemperatur (WARNUNG UEBERTEMP) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Bereit, keine Übertemperatur (BEREIT KEINE UEBERT.) [22] [22] [22] [22]
Bereit Fernbedienung, keine Übertemperatur (BER.FERNBED.K.UEBERT) [23] [23] [23] [23]
Bereit, keine Unter-/Überspannung (BER. KEINE U./UEBSP.) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversierung (REVERSIERUNG) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus OK (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26]
Momentgrenze und Stopp (MOM. GRENZE+STOPP) [27] [27] [27] [27]
Bremse: Keine Bremswarnung (BREMSUNG OK-K.WARN.) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Bremse OK, kein Fehler (BREMSE OK, K.FEHLER) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Störung Bremse - IGBT (StOERUNG BREMS - IGBT) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relais 123 (RELAIS 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanische Bremskontrolle (STEUERUNG MECH.BR.) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Steuerwort Bit 11/12 (KONTR-WORT BIT 11/12) [33] [33] [33] [33]
Netz EIN (NETZSCHÜTZ EIN) [50] [50] [50] ✭ [50]
Motor dreht (MOTOR LÄUFT) [51] [51] ✭ [51] [51]

Funktion:
Motor dreht [51] hat die gleiche logische Funktion
Beschreibung der Auswahl: wie Mechanische Bremsenkontrolle [32].
Beschreibung der Auswahl siehe Parameter 319.

Netz EIN [50] hat die gleiche logische Funktion

wie Motor dreht [5].

✭ = Werkseinstellung. () = Displaytext. [] = bei Kommunikation über serielle Schnittstelle benutzter Wert

174 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Maßnahmen zur Fehlerbeseitigung

Symptom Vorgehensweise
1. Motor läuft unrund Unrunder Motorlauf ohne Anzeige einer Fehlermeldung kann durch
eine falsche Einstellung des Frequenzumrichters bedingt sein.
Die Einstellungen der Motordaten korrigieren.
Falls trotz Korrektur keine Besserung eintritt, wenden Sie sich bitte
an Danfoss.

2. Motor läuft nicht Kontrollieren Sie, ob das Display beleuchtet ist.

Falls ja, prüfen Sie, ob eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt wird. Falls ja,
siehe im Abschnitt "Warnungen"; anderfalls siehe Symptom 5.
Wenn das Display nicht beleuchtet ist, prüfen Sie, ob der
Frequenzumrichter an die Netzspannung angeschlossen ist. Falls
ja, siehe Symptom 4.

3. Motor bremst nicht Siehe hierzu Abschnitt Steuerung mit Bremsfunktion .

4. Keine Fehlermeldung bzw. kein Kontrollieren Sie, ob die Vorsicherungen des VLT-
Licht im Display Frequenzumrichters durchgebrannt sind.
Falls ja, wenden Sie sich bitte an Danfoss.
Falls nein, prüfen Sie, ob die Steuerkarte überlastet ist.
Wenn dies der Fall ist, lösen Sie alle Steuersignal-Stecker auf der
Steuerkarte und prüfen Sie, ob die Fehlermeldung verschwindet.
Falls ja, kontrollieren Sie, daß kein Kurzschluß der 24-V-Versorgung
vorliegt.
Falls nein, wenden Sie sich bitte an Danfoss.

5. Motor stehengeblieben. Licht im Frequenzumrichter durch Drücken der [START]-Taste auf dem
Display, aber keine Fehlermeldung Bedienfeld starten.
Prüfen, ob das Display blockiert, d.h. nicht änderbar oder
unleserlich ist.
Falls ja, prüfen Sie, ob abgeschirmte Kabel verwendet wurden und
ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen sind.
Falls nein, prüfen Sie, ob der Motor angeschlossen ist und alle
Motorphasen in Ordnung sind.
Frequenzumrichter mit Ort-Sollwerten laufen lassen:
Parameter 002 = Ort-Betrieb
Parameter 003 = gewünschter Sollwert
24 V DC an Klemme 27 anschließen.
Den Sollwert mit den Tasten "+" und "-" ändern.
Läuft der Motor?
Falls ja, prüfen Sie, ob die Steuersignale zur Steuerkarte in Ordnung
sind.
Falls nein, wenden Sie sich bitte an Danfoss.
Sonstiges

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 175

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Zustandsmeldungen
Zustandsmeldungen erscheinen in der 4. Zeile
Ausgangsstrom hoch (STROM HOCH):
des Displays, siehe nachstehendes Beispiel.
Der Ausgangsstrom überschreitet den in Parameter
Eine Zustandsmeldung bleibt ca. 3 Sekunden
224 eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung erscheint
lang im Display sichtbar.
nur, wenn der Motor läuft.

Ausgangsstrom niedrig (STROM NIEDRIG):

FREQUENZ Der Ausgangsstrom unterschreitet den in Parameter
223 eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung erscheint

20.0Hz SETUP

1
nur, wenn der Motor läuft.

Maximale Bremsleistung (BREMSUNG MAX):

Die Bremse ist in Betrieb.
Bei Überschreitung des Wertes in Parameter 402
MOTORANPASSUNG Leistungsgrenze kW wird maximal gebremst.

Bremsung (BREMSUNG):
Start vorwärts/rückwärts Die Bremse ist in Betrieb.
(START VORW/RÜCK): Rampenbetrieb (FERN/RAMPENBETRIEB):
Eingaben an digitalen Eingängen und Parameterdaten In Parameter 002 wurde Fernbedienung gewählt;
widersprechen sich. die Ausgangsfrequenz ändert sich gemäß den
Frequenzkorrektur ab (SLOW DOWN): eingestellten Rampenzeiten.
Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Rampenbetrieb (ORT/RAMPENBETRIEB):
wird um den in Parameter 219 gewählten In Parameter 002 wurde Ort gewählt; die
Prozentwert verringert. Ausgangsfrequenz ändert sich gemäß den
Frequenzkorrektur auf (CATCH UP): eingestellten Rampenzeiten.
Die Ausgangsfrequenz des VLT-Frequenzumrichters Betrieb, Ortsteuerung (ORT/BETRIEB OK):
wird um den in Parameter 219 gewählten In Parameter 002 wurde "Ort" gewählt, und an
Prozentwert erhöht. Klemme 18 (START oder PULS-START in Parameter
Istwert hoch (ISTWERT HOCH): 302) bzw. Klemme 19 (START RÜCKWÄRTS in
Der Istwert überschreitet den in Parameter 228 Parameter 303) wird ein Startbefehl gegeben.
eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung erscheint Betrieb, Fernsteuerung (FERN/BETRIEB OK):
nur, wenn der Motor läuft. In Parameter 002 wurde "Fern" gewählt, und an
Istwert niedrig (ISTWERT NIEDRIG): Klemme 18 (START oder PULS-START in Parameter
Der Istwert unterschreitet den in Parameter 227 302) bzw. Klemme 19 (START RÜCKWÄRTS in
eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung erscheint Parameter 303) oder über die serielle Schnittstelle
nur, wenn der Motor läuft. wird ein Startbefehl gegeben.

Ausgangsfrequenz hoch (FREQUENZ HOCH): VLT bereit, Fernsteuerung (FERN/VLT BEREIT):

Die Ausgangsfrequenz überschreitet den in In Parameter 002 wurde Fern, in Parameter
Parameter 226 eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung 304 Motorfreilauf invers gewählt; an Klemme
erscheint nur, wenn der Motor läuft. 27 liegen 0 V an.

Ausgangsfrequenz niedrig (FREQUENZ NIEDRIG): VLT bereit, Ortsteuerung (ORT/VLT BEREIT):

Die Ausgangsfrequenz unterschreitet den in In Parameter 002 wurde Ort , in Parameter
Parameter 225 eingestellten Wert. Diese Meldung 304 Motorfreilauf invers gewählt; an Klemme
erscheint nur, wenn der Motor läuft. 27 liegen 0 V an.

Schnellstopp, Fernsteuerung (FERN/SCHNELL-

STOPP):
In Parameter 002 wurde Fern gewählt; der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde mittels eines

176 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Schnellstoppsignals an Klemme 27 (oder über die

Festdrehzahl, Fernsteuerung
serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten.
(FERN/BETR. FESTDREHZ):
Schnellstopp, Ortsteuerung (ORT/SCHNELL- In Parameter 002 wurde Fern und in Parameter
STOPP): 300, 301, 305, 306 oder 307 Festdrehzahl
In Parameter 002 wurde Ort gewählt; der gewählt; die jeweilige Klemme (16, 17, 29, 32
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde mittels eines oder 33) wurde aktiviert (evtl. über die serielle
Schnellstoppsignals an Klemme 27 (oder über die Kommunikationsschnittstelle).
serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten.
Festdrehzahl, Ort-Betrieb (ORTBETR.
DC-Stopp, Fernsteuerng (FERN/DC STOPP): FESTDREHZAHL):
In Parameter 002 wurde Fern gewählt; der In Parameter 002 wurde Ort und in Parameter 300,
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde mittels eines 301, 306 und 307 Festdrehzahl gewählt; die jeweilige
DC-Stoppsignals am digitalen Eingang (oder über die Klemme (16, 17, 29, 32 oder 33) wurde aktiviert (evtl.
serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten. über die serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle).

DC-Bremsung, Ortsteuerung (ORT/DC STOPP): Überspannungssteuerung (ÜBERSP.

In Parameter 002 wurde Ort gewählt; der STEUERUNG):
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde mittels eines Die Zwischenkreisspannung des VLT-
DC-Bremssignals an Klemme 27 (oder über die serielle Frequenzumrichters ist zu hoch. Der
Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten. Frequenzumrichter versucht, durch Erhöhen
der Ausgangsfrequenz ein Abschalten zu verhindern.
Stopp, Fernsteuerng (FERN/STOPP): Die Funktion wird über Parameter 400 aktiviert.
In Parameter 002 wurde Fern gewählt; der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde über das Bedienfeld Automatische Motoranpassung (MO-
bzw. einen digitalen Eingang (oder über die serielle TORANPASSUNG):
Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten. Die automatische Motoranpassung läuft.

Stopp, Ortsteuerung (ORT/STOPP): Bremskontrolle beendet (BREMSKON-

In Parameter 002 wurde Ort gewählt; der TROLLE OK):
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde über das Bedienfeld Bremskontrolle des Bremswiderstands und
bzw. einen digitalen Eingang (oder über die serielle Bremstransistor erfolgreich geprüft.
Kommunikationsschnittstelle) angehalten.
Schnellentladung beendet (SCHNEL-
LCP Stopp, Fernsteuerung (FERN/LCP STOPP): LENTLADUNG OK):
In Parameter 002 wurde "Fern" gewählt; der Die Schnellentladung wurde erfolgreich abgeschlossen.
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde über das Bedienfeld
Exceptions XXXX (EXCEPTIONS XXXX):
angehalten. Das Freilaufsignal an Klemme 27 ist hoch.
Der Mikroprozessor der Steuerkarte ist ausgefallen;
LCP Stopp, Ortsteuerung (ORT/LCP STOPP): der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist außer Betrieb.
In Parameter 002 wurde "Ort" gewählt; der Ursache hierfür können Störungen in den Netz-,
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wurde über das Bedienfeld Motor- oder Steuerkabeln sein, die zum Ausfall des
angehalten. Das Freilaufsignal an Klemme 27 ist hoch. Steuerkarten-Mikroprozessors geführt haben.
Überprüfen Sie den EMV-gerechten Anschluß
Stand by (STAND BY): dieser Kabel.
In Parameter 002 wurde Fern gewählt. Der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter läuft an, nachdem ihm Rampenstopp im Feldbus-Modus (OFF1):
vom digitalen Eingang (oder von der seriellen OFF1 bedeutet, daß der Frequenzumrichter mittels
Kommunikationsschnittstelle) ein Startsignal "Rampe ab" gestoppt wurde. Der Stopp-Befehl wurde
Sonstiges

zugeführt worden ist. über eine Feldbus- oder die serielle Schnittstelle
RS485 erteilt (in Parameter 512 Feldbus wählen).
Ausgang speichern (AUSGANG SPEICHERN):
In Parameter 002 wurde Fern und in Parameter Motorfreilauf invers im Feldbus-Modus (OFF2):
300, 301, 305, 306 oder 307 Sollwert speichern OFF2 bedeutet, daß der Frequenzumrichter mittels
gewählt; die jeweilige Klemme (16, 17, 29, 32 "Motorfreilauf" gestoppt wurde. Der Stopp-Befehl
oder 33) wurde aktiviert (evtl. über die serielle wurde über eine Feldbus- oder die serielle Schnittstelle
Kommunikationsschnittstelle). RS485 erteilt (in Parameter 512 Feldbus wählen).

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 177

 VLT® Serie 5000

Schnellstopp im Feldbus-Modus (OFF3):

OFF3 bedeutet, daß der Frequenzumrichter mittels
"Schnellstopp" gestoppt wurde. Der Stopp-Befehl
wurde über eine Feldbus- oder die serielle Schnittstelle
RS485 erteilt (in Parameter 512 Feldbus wählen).

Start nicht möglich (START GESPERRT):

Der Frequenzumrichter befindet sich im
Feldbusprofilmodus. OFF1, OFF2 oder OFF3 wurde
aktiviert. OFF1 muß gekippt werden, um starten zu
können (OFF1 ist von 1 auf 0 auf 1 zu setzen).

Nicht betriebsbereit (VLT NICHT BEREIT):

Der Frequenzumrichter befindet sich im
Feldbusprofilmodus (Parameter 512). Der VLT
ist nicht betriebsbereit, da Bit 00, 01 oder 02
im Steuerwort gleich "0" ist, eine Abschaltung
erfolgt ist oder keine Netzversorgung erfolgt (nur
bei Geräten mit 24-V-DC-Versorgung).

Betriebsbereit (STEUERUNG BEREIT):

Der VLT ist betriebsbereit. Bei erweiterten Geräten
mit 24-V-DC-Versorgung wird diese Meldung auch
bei fehlender Netzversorgung angezeigt.

Bus-Festdrehzahl, Fernsteuerung (FERN/BUS-

FESTDREHZ1):
In Parameter 002 wurde "Fern" und in Parameter 512
"Feldbus" gewählt. Bus-Festdrehzahl wurde über den
Feldbus oder die serielle Schnittstelle gewählt.

Bus-Festdrehzahl, Fernsteuerung (FERN/BUS-

FESTDREHZ2):
In Parameter 002 wurde "Fern" und in Parameter 512
"Feldbus" gewählt. Bus-Festdrehzahl wurde über den
Feldbus oder die serielle Schnittstelle gewählt.

178 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Liste der Warn- und Alarmmeldungen

In der Tabelle sind die verschiedenen Warn- und Wenn sowohl Warnung als auch Alarm angekreuzt
Alarmmeldungen aufgeführt. Außerdem ist angegeben, sind, kann dies bedeuten, daß vor dem Alarm eine
ob der jeweilige Fehler zu einer Abschaltblockierung Warnmeldung ausgegeben wird. Es kann auch
des VLT-Frequenzumrichters führt. Nach einer bedeuten, daß man selbst programmieren kann, ob
Abschaltungblockierung muß die Netzversorgung ein bestimmter Fehler durch eine Warnmeldung oder
unterbrochen und der Fehler behoben werden. durch eine Alarmmleldung angezeigt werden soll.
Danach die Netzversorgung wieder einschalten und Dies ist z.B. in Parameter 404 Bremsfunktionstest
ein Reset des VLT-Frequenzumrichters durchführen. möglich. Nach einer Abschaltung blinken Alarm und
Anschließend ist das Gerät wieder betriebsbereit. Warnung. Wenn jedoch der Fehler verschwindet,
blinkt nur die Alarmanzeige. Nach einem Reset ist der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter wieder betriebsbereit.
Nr. Beschreibung Warnung Alarm Abschalt-
block
1 Unter 10 Volt (10 VOLT NIEDRIG) X
2 Sollwertfehler (SOLLWERTFEHLER) X X
3 Kein Motor (KEIN MOTOR) X
4 Phasenfehler (NETZPHASENFEHLER) X X X
5 Spannung oberer Grenzwert (DC SPANNUNG HOCH) X
6 Spannung unterer Grenzwert (DC SPANNUNG NIEDRIG) X
7 Überspannung (DC ÜBERSPANNUNG) X X
8 Unterspannung (DC UNTERSPANNUNG) X X
9 Wechselrichter überlastet (WECHSELRICHTER ZEIT) X X
10 Motor überlastet ( MOTOR, ZEIT) X X
11 Motorthermistor (MOTORTHERMISTOR) X X
12 Momentgrenze (MOMENTGRENZE) X X
13 Überstrom (ÜBERSTROM) X X X
14 Erdungsfehler (ERDUNGSFEHLER) X X
15 Schaltmodusfehler (SCHALTMODUSFEHLER) X X
16 Kurzschluß (KURZSCHLUSS) X X
17 Standard-Bus-Timeout (STD BUSTIMEOUT) X X
18 HPFB-Bus-Timeout (HPFB BUSTIMEOUT) X X
19 EEprom-Fehler Leistungskarte (EE FEHLER LEIST.K.) X
20 EEprom-Fehler Steuerkarte (EE FEHLER STEUER- K.) X
21 Auto-Optimierung OK (OPTMIERUNG OK) X
22 Auto-Optimierung nicht OK (OPTMIERUNG NICHT OK) X
23 Fehler während des Bremstests (BREMSTESTFEHLER) X X
25 Bremswiderstand kurzgeschlossen (BREMSWIDERSTANDSFEHLER) X
26 Bremswiderstandsleistung 100% (BREMS LEISTUNG 100%) X X
27 Bremstransistor kurzgeschlossen (BREMSEN-IGBT-FEHLER) X
29 Kühlkörper Übertemperatur (KÜHLKÖRPER ÜBERTEMP.) X X
30 Motorphase U fehlt (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE U) X
31 Motorphase V fehlt (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE V) X
32 Motorphase W fehlt (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE W) X
33 Schnellentladung nicht OK (FEHLER SCHNELLENTL) X X
34 Profibus-Kommunikationsfehler (PROFIBUS FEHLER) X X
35 Außerhalb Frequenzbereich (AUSSERH.D.BEREICH) X
36 Netzfehler (NETZAUSFALL) X X
Sonstiges

37 Wechselrichterfehler (WECHSELR. FEHLER) X X

39 Parameter 104 und 106 prüfen (PRUEFE P.104 & P.106) X
40 Parameter 103 und 105 prüfen (PRUEFE P.103 & P.105) X
41 Motor zu groß (MOTOR ZU GROSS) X
42 Motor zu klein (MOTOR ZU KLEIN) X
43 Bremse Fehler (BREMSE FEHLER) X X
44 Encoder-Verlust (ENCODER FEHLER) X X

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 179

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Warnungen Alarmmeldungen
Das Display blinkt zwischen Normalzustand und Der Alarm erscheint in der 2. und 3. Zeile des
Warnung. Warnungen erscheinen in der 1. und 2. Displays, siehe nachstehendes Beispiel:
Zeile des Displays. Siehe nachstehende Beispiele:

ABSCHALT. (RESET)
KEIN MOTOR

WARN. 3 SETUP

1
ALARM:12 1 SETUP

MOMENTGRENZE

WARNUNG 1
Unter 10 Volt (10 VOLT NIEDRIG):
WARNUNG 6
Die 10-Volt-Spannung von Klemme 50 an der
Spannungswarnung niedrig (DC SPAN-
Steuerkarte liegt unter 10 Volt.
NUNG NIEDRIG):
Verringern Sie die Last an Klemme 50, da
Die Zwischenkreisspannung (DC) liegt unter dem
die 10-Volt-Versorgung überlastet ist. Max.
Spannungsgrenzwert des Steuersystems. Der
17 mA/min. 590 .
VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist weiterhin aktiv.
WARNUNG/ALARM 2
WARNUNG/ALARM 7
Sollwertfehler (SOLLWERTFEHLER):
Überspannung (DC ÜBERSPANNUNG):
Das Stromsignal an Klemme 60 liegt unter
Hat die Zwischenkreisspannung (DC) die
50% des in Parameter 315 eingestellten Werts.
Überspannungesgrenze des Wechselrichters
Klemme 60, min. Skalierung.
überschritten (siehe Tabelle), so schaltet der
WARNUNG/ALARM 3 VLT-Frequenzumrichter nach der in Parameter
Kein Motor (KEIN MOTOR): 410 eingestellten Zeit ab.
Die Funktion Motorprüfung (siehe Parameter Außerdem wird die Spannung im Display
122) ergibt, daß an den Ausgang des angezeigt. Der Fehler kann durch Anschließen eines
VLT-Frequenzumrichters kein Motor angeschlossen ist. Bremswiderstandes (sofern der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
über einen integrierten Bremschopper EB oder SB
WARNUNG/ALARM 4 verfügt) oder durch Verlängern der Zeit in Parameter
Phasenfehler (NETZPHASENFEHLER): 410 behoben werden. Außerdem kann in Parameter
Versorgungsseitiger Phasenausfall oder zu hohes 400 Bremsfunktion/Überspannungssteuerung
Ungleichgewicht in der Netzspannung. aktiviert werden.
Diese Meldung erscheint ggf. auch bei einem Fehler
am Eingangsgleichrichter des VLT-Frequenzumrichters.
Kontrollieren Sie die Versorgungsspannung und die
Versorgungsströme zum VLT-Frequenzumrichter.

WARNUNG 5
Spannungswarnung hoch
(DC-SPANNUNG HOCH):
Die Zwischenkreisspannung (DC) liegt oberhalb der
Überspannungsgrenze des Steuersystems. Der
VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist weiterhin aktiv.

180 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Alarm-/Warn- WARNUNG/ALARM 10
grenzen: Motor überlastet (MOTOR ZEIT):
VLT Serie 3 x 3 x Der Motor ist gemäß der elektronischen thermischen
5000 200-240 380-500 Schutzfunktion (ETR) überhitzt. In Parameter 128
V V kann gewählt werden, ob der VTL-Frequenzumrichter
eine Warnung oder einen Alarm ausgeben soll, wenn
[VDC] [VDC] der Zähler 100% erreicht. Der Fehler besteht darin,
Unterspan- 211 402 daß der Motor zu lange Zeit mit mehr als 100%
nung belastet worden ist. Prüfen, ob die Motorparameter
Span- 222 423 102-106 korrekt eingestellt sind.
nungswar-
nung niedrig WARNUNG/ALARM 11
Span- 384/405 801/840 (o. Motorthermistor (MOTORTHERMISTOR):
nungswar- Bremse Der Thermistor bzw. die Verbindung zum Thermistor
nung hoch m. ist unterbrochen. In Parameter 128 kann gewählt
Bremse) werden, ob der VTL-Frequenzumrichter eine Warnung
Überspan- 425 855 oder einen Alarm ausgeben soll. Kontrollieren Sie, ob
nung der Thermistor korrekt zwischen den Klemmen 53
oder 54 (analoger Spannungseingang) und Klemme
Bei den Angaben zur Spannung handelt es 50 (+ 10-V-Versorgung) angeschlossen ist.
sich um die Zwischenkreisspannung des
VLT-Frequenzumrichters mit einer Toleranz von WARNUNG/ALARM 12
± 5 %. Die entsprechende Netzspannung ist die Momentgrenze (MOMENTGRENZE):
Zwischenkreisspannung geteilt durch 1,35. Das Drehmoment ist höher als der Wert in Parameter
221 (bei motorischem Betrieb) bzw. in Parameter
222 (bei generatorischem Betrieb).
WARNUNG/ALARM 8
Unterspannung (DC UNTERSPANNUNG): WARNUNG/ALARM 13
Hat die Zwischenkreisspannung (DC) die Überstrom (ÜBERSTROM):
Unterspannungsgrenze des Wechselrichters Die Spitzenstromgrenze des Wechselrichters (ca.
unterschritten (siehe Tabelle auf der Vorseite), 200% des Ausgangsnennstroms) ist überschritten. Die
so erfolgt eine Prüfung, ob eine externe Warnung bleibt etwa 1-2 s bestehen, danach erzeugt
24-V-Versorgung angeschlossen ist. der VLT-Frequenzumrichter einen Alarm und schaltet
Wenn keine externe 24-V-Versorgung angeschlossen ab. Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus und
ist, schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter nach einer prüfen Sie, ob sich die Motorwelle drehen läßt und die
festgelegten Zeit (geräteabhängig) ab. Motorgröße zum VLT-Frequenzumrichter paßt.
Außerdem wird die Spannung im Display angezeigt.
Prüfen Sie, ob die Versorgungsspannung zum ALARM: 14
VLT-Frequenzumrichter paßt, vgl. Technische Daten. Erdungsfehler (ERDUNGSFEHLER):
Es ist ein Erdschluß zwischen den Ausgangsphasen
WARNUNG/ALARM 9 und Erde entweder im Kabel zwischen
Wechselrichter überlastet (WECHSEL- Frequenzumrichter und Motor oder im
RICHTER ZEIT): Motor vorhanden.
Der elektronische thermische Wechselrichterschutz Den VLT-Frequenzumrichter ausschalten und
meldet, daß der Frequenzumrichter aufgrund den Erdschluß beseitigen.
von Überlastung (zu hoher Strom über zu lange
Zeit) kurz davor ist, abzuschalten. Der Zähler für ALARM: 15
elektronischen thermischen Wechselrichterschutz Schaltmodusfehler (SCHALTMODUSFEHLER):
Sonstiges

gibt bei 98% eine Warnung und schaltet bei 100% Fehler im Schaltnetzteil (interne ± 15-V-
mit einem Alarm ab. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter Stromversorgung).
kann erst dann zurückgesetzt werden, wenn Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihre Danfoss-Vertretung.
der Zählerwert unter 90% fällt.
ALARM: 16
Der Fehler liegt darin, daß der VLT-Frequenzumrichter
Kurzschluß (KURZSCHLUSS):
zu lange Zeit mit mehr als 100 % belastet worden ist.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 181

 VLT® Serie 5000

Es liegt ein Kurzschluß an den Motorklemmen (OPTIMIERUNG NICHT OK)

oder im Motor vor. Während der automatischen Motoranpassung ist
Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus ein Fehler aufgetreten. Der im Display erscheinende
und beheben Sie den Kurzschluß. Text gibt eine Fehlermeldung an. Die Zahl nach dem
Text zeigt den Fehlercode, der im Fehlerprotokoll in
WARNUNG/ALARM 17
Parameter 615 abgelesen werden kann.
Standard-Bus-Timeout (STD BUSTIMEOUT)
Es besteht keine Kommunikation zum PRUEFE P.103 & P.105 [0]
VLT-Frequenzumrichter. Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
Die Warnung ist nur aktiv, wenn Parameter 514 auf passung, AMA.
einen anderen Wert als AUS eingestellt ist.
Ist Parameter 514 auf Stopp und Abschaltung UNTERER GRENZWERT [1]
eingestellt, so wird erst eine Warnung ausgegeben, Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
dann die Rampe heruntergefahren und dann eine passung, AMA.
Abschaltung mit Alarm erfolgen. ASYMMETRISCHE IMPEDANZ [2]
Parameter 513 Bus-Zeitintervall kann eventuell Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoranpassung.
erhöht werden.
MOTOR ZU GROSS [3]
WARNUNG/ALARM 18 Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
HPFB-Bus-Timeout (HPFB BUSTIMEOUT ) passung, AMA.
Es besteht keine Kommunikation zum
VLT-Frequenzumrichter. MOTOR ZU KLEIN [4]
Die Warnung ist nur aktiv, wenn Parameter 804 auf Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
einen anderen Wert als AUS eingestellt ist. passung, AMA.
Ist Parameter 804 auf Stopp und Abschaltung
TIMEOUT [5]
eingestellt, so wird erst eine Warnung ausgegeben,
Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
dann die Rampe heruntergefahren und dann eine
passung, AMA.
Abschaltung mit Alarm erfolgen.
Parameter 803 Bus-Zeitintervall kann eventuell ABBRUCH DURCH ANWENDER [6]
erhöht werden. Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoranpassung.
WARNUNG 19 INTERNER FEHLER [7]
EEprom-Fehler Leistungskarte Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
(EE FEHLER LEIST.K.) passung, AMA.
Es besteht ein EEPROM-Fehler auf der Leistungskarte.
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann weiterhin GRENZWERT FEHLER [8]
funktionieren, wird beim nächsten Einschalten jedoch Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoranpassung.
wahrscheinlich den Dienst versagen. Bitte wenden
MOTOR DREHT [9]
Sie sich an Ihre Danfoss-Vertretung.
Siehe den Abschnitt Automatische Motoran-
WARNUNG 20 passung, AMA.
EEprom-Fehler Steuerkarte
ACHTUNG!:
(EE FEHLER STEUERK.)
AMA kann nur durchgeführt werden,
Es besteht ein EEPROM-Fehler auf der Steuerkarte.
wenn während der Optimierung keine
Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann weiterhin
Alarme auftreten.
funktionieren, wird beim nächsten Einschalten jedoch
wahrscheinlich den Dienst versagen. Bitte wenden WARNUNG/ALARM 23
Sie sich an Ihre Danfoss-Vertretung. Fehler während des Bremstests (BREM-
ALARM 21 STESTFEHLER):
Auto-Optimierung OK Der Bremstest wird nur nach dem Einschalten
(OPTIMIERUNG OK) durchgeführt. Wenn in Parameter 404 Warnung
Die automatische Motoranpassung ist OK; der gewählt wurde, wird eine Warnung ausgegeben, wenn
VLT-Frequenzumrichter ist jetzt betriebsbereit. beim Bremstest ein Fehler gefunden wird.
Wenn in Parameter 404 Abschaltung gewählt wurde,
ALARM: 22 schaltet der VLT-Frequenzumrichter ab, wenn beim
Auto-Optimierung nicht OK Bremstest ein Fehler gefunden wurde.

182 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Für Fehler während des Bremstests kann es Bei Schutzart IP 00 oder IP 20 liegt die Abschaltgrenze
folgende Ursachen geben: für die Kühlkörpertemperatur bei 90 C. Bei
Kein Bremswiderstand angeschlossen bzw. Fehler IP 54 beträgt sie 80 C.
in den Anschlüssen; Bremswiderstand oder Die Toleranz liegt bei ± 5 C. Der Temperaturfehler
Bremstransistor defekt. Die Warnung bzw. der Alarm kann erst dann quittiert werden, wenn die
führt dazu, daß die Bremsfunktion weiterhin aktiv ist. Kühlkörpertemperatur 60 C wieder unterschritten hat.
Folgendes kann den Fehler hervorgerufen haben:
WARNUNG 25 - Umgebungstemperatur zu hoch
Fehler im Bremswiderstand
- Motorkabel zu lang
(BREMSWIDERST.FEHLER): - Taktfrequenz zu hoch eingestellt
Während des Betriebs wird der Bremswiderstand
überwacht. Bei einem Kurzschluß wird die ALARM: 30
Bremsfunktion abgeschaltet und die Warnung Motorphase U fehlt
ausgegeben. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE U):
kann weiterhin betrieben werden, allerdings Motorphase U zwischen VLT-Frequenzumrichter
ohne Bremsfunktion. Schalten Sie den und Motor fehlt.
VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus und tauschen Sie Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus
den Bremswiderstand aus. und prüfen Sie Motorphase U.

ALARM/WARNUNG 26 ALARM: 31
Bremswiderstandsleistung 100% Motorphase V fehlt
(BREMS LEIST WARN 100%): (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE V):
Die auf den Bremswiderstand übertragene Leistung Motorphase V zwischen VLT-Frequenzumrichter
wird als Mittelwert für die letzten 120 Sekunden und Motor fehlt.
anhand des Widerstandswertes des Bremswiderstands Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus
(Parameter 401) und der Zwischenkreisspannung in und prüfen Sie Motorphase V.
Prozent ermittelt. Die Warnung ist aktiv, wenn die
ALARM: 32
übertragene Bremsleistung höher als 100% ist. Wurde
in Parameter 403 Abschaltung [2] gewählt, so schaltet Motorphase W fehlt
der Frequenzumrichter ab und zeigt diesen Alarm an. (FEHLENDE MOT.PHASE W):
Motorphase W zwischen VLT-Frequenzumrichter
WARNUNG 27 und Motor fehlt.
Bremstransistorfehler Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus
(BREMSE IGBT FEHLER): und prüfen Sie Motorphase W.
Während des Betriebs wird der Bremstransistor
überwacht. Bei einem Kurzschluß wird die ALARM: 33
Bremsfunktion abgeschaltet und die Warnung Schnellentladung nicht OK
ausgegeben. Der VLT-Frequenzumrichter kann (FEHLER SCHNELLENTL):
weiterhin betrieben werden, aufgrund des Prüfen Sie, ob eine externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung
Kurzschlusses wird jedoch eine hohe Leistung und ein externer Brems-/Entladewiderstand
an den Bremswiderstand abgegeben, auch angeschlossen ist.
wenn dieser nicht aktiv ist. WARNUNG/ALARM: 34
Schalten Sie den VLT-Frequenzumrichter aus und Profibus-Kommunikationsfehler
bauen Sie den Bremswiderstand aus. (FEHLER PROFIBUS-KOM.):
Warnung: Bei einem Kurzschluß des Der Profibus auf der Kommunikationsoptionskarte
Bremstransistors besteht das Risiko ist ausgefallen.
einer erheblichen Leistungsübertragung WARNUNG: 35
Sonstiges

an den Bremswiderstand. Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich

(FREQ.BER.+DREHR.):
ALARM: 29
Die Warnung ist aktiv, wenn die Ausgangsfrequenz
Kühlkörper Übertemperatur
Ausgangsfrequenz unterer Grenzwert (Parameter 201)
(KÜHLKÖRPER ÜBERTEMP):

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 183

 VLT® Serie 5000

bzw. Ausgangsfrequenz oberer Grenzwert (Parameter MOTOR ZU KLEIN

202) erreicht hat. Ist der VLT-Frequenzumrichter auf Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung
Prozeßregelung mit Istwertrückführung (Parameter einer AMA wahrscheinlich zu klein. Die Einstellung
100) eingestellt, so ist die Warnung im Display in Parameter 102 stimmt möglicherweise nicht dem
aktiv. Befindet sich der VLT-Frequenzumrichter in angeschlossenen Motor überein. Motor kontrollieren
einem anderen Zustand als Prozeßregelung mit und mit "Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.
Istwertrückführung, so ist Bit 008000 Regelabweichung
Frequenzbereich in Warnwort 2 aktiv, die Warnung ALARM: 43
Bremse Fehler (BREMSE FEHLER)
wird jedoch nicht im Display angezeigt.
An der Bremse ist ein Fehler aufgetreten. Der im
WARNUNG/ALARM: 36 Display erscheinende Text gibt eine Fehlermeldung
Netzfehler (NETZFEHLER): an. Die Zahl nach dem Text zeigt den Fehlercode
Diese Warnung/Alarmmeldung ist nur aktiv, wenn die an, der im Fehlerprotokoll in Parameter 615
Versorgungsspannung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters abgelesen werden kann.
ausfällt und wenn Parameter 407 Netzfehler auf
einen anderen Wert als AUS eingestellt ist. Bremsprüfung nicht erfolgreich (BREM-
Ist Parameter 407 auf Rampe ab + Stopp [2] STESTFEHLER) [0]
eingestellt, gibt der VLT-Frequenzumrichter zunächst Die beim Einschalten erfolgte Bremsprüfung
eine Warnung aus, fährt danach die Rampe herunter zeigt an, daß die Bremse ausgefallen ist. Prüfen
und schaltet dann mit einem Alarm ab. Prüfen Sie Sie, ob die Bremse richtig angeschlossen
die Sicherungen zum VLT-Frequenzumrichter. und nicht abgeschaltet ist.

ALARM: 37 Bremswiderstand kurzgeschlossen

Wechselrichterfehler (WECHSELR. FEHLER): (BREMSWIDERSTANDSFEHLER) [1]
IGBT oder Leistungskarte defekt. Bitte wenden Der Bremsausgang ist kurzgeschlossen.
Sie sich an Ihre Danfoss-Vertretung. Bremswiderstand austauschen.
Warnungen bzgl. Auto-Optimierung Bremsen-IGBT kurzgeschlossen
Die automatische Motoranpassung ist unterbrochen, (BREMEN-IGBT-FEHLER) [2]
weil wahrscheinlich einige Parameter falsch eingestellt Der Bremsen-IGBT ist kurzgeschlossen. Dieser Fehler
sind oder der angeschlossene Motor zur Durchführung bedeutet, daß das Gerät nicht in der Lage ist, die
der AMA zu groß oder zu klein ist. Drücken Sie Bremse abzuschalten, und daß somit konstant eine
zunächst [CHANGE DATA] und anschließend "Weiter" Leistungsübertragung im Widerstand stattfindet.
+ [OK] oder aber "Stopp" + [OK].
Sind Parameteränderungen erforderlich, wählen Sie WARNUNG/ALARM: 44
"Stopp" und beginnen Sie die AMA neu. Encoder-Verlust (ENCODER FEHLER)
Das Encodersignal an den Klemmen 32 oder 33
WARNUNG: 39 ist unterbrochen. Anschlüsse prüfen.
PRUEFE P.104 & P.106
Parameter 102, 104 oder 106 wahrscheinlich
falsch eingestellt. Einstellung kontrollieren und mit
"Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.

WARNUNG: 40
PRUEFE P.103 & P.105
Parameter 102, 103 oder 105 wahrscheinlich
falsch eingestellt. Einstellung kontrollieren und mit
"Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.

WARNUNG: 41
MOTOR ZU GROSS
Der angeschlossene Motor ist für die Durchführung
einer AMA wahrscheinlich zu groß. Die Einstellung
in Parameter 102 stimmt möglicherweise nicht dem
angeschlossenen Motor überein. Motor kontrollieren
und mit "Weiter" fortfahren oder "Stopp" wählen.

WARNUNG: 42

184 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Warnwort 1, erweitertes Zustandswort Bit (Hex) Erweitertes Zustandswort

und Alarmwort (Parameter 541)
Warnwort 1, erweitertes Zustandswort und Alarmwort 000001 Rampenbetrieb
erscheinen auf dem Display im Hex-Format. Bestehen 000002 Automatische Motoranpassung
mehrere Warnungen oder Alarme, so wird eine 000004 Start vorwärts/rückwärts
Summe aller Warnungen oder Alarme angezeigt. 000008 Frequenzkorrektur ab
Warnwort 1, erweitertes Zustandswort und Alarmwort 000010 Frequenzkorrektur auf
können auch mit dem seriellen Bus in Parameter 000020 Istwert hoch
540, 541 und 538 ausgelesen werden.
000040 Istwert niedrig
000080 Strom hoch
Bit (Hex) Warnwort 1 (Parameter 540) 000100 Strom niedrig
000001 Bremstestfehler 000200 Frequenz hoch
000002 EEprom Steuerkartenfehler 000400 Frequenz niedrig
000004 EEprom Steuerkarte 000800 Bremstest erfolgreich
000008 HPFP-Bus-Timeout 001000 Bremsung max.
000010 Standard-Bus-Timeout 002000 Bremsung
000020 Überstrom 004000 Schnellentladung OK
000040 Momentgrenze 008000 Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich
000080 Motorthermistor
000100 Motor überlastet Bit (Hex) Alarmwort 1 (Parameter 538)
000200 Wechselrichter überlastet 000001 Bremstestfehler
000400 Unterspannung 000002 Abschaltung blockiert
000800 Überspannung 000004 Automatische Motoranpassung
001000 Spannungswarnung niedrig nicht erfolgreich
002000 Spannungswarnung hoch 000008 Automatische Motoranpassung
004000 Phasenfehler erfolgreich
008000 Kein Motor 000010 Einschaltfehler
010000 Sollwertfehler 000020 ASIC-Fehler
(4-20 mA Stromsignal niedrig) 000040 HPFP-Bus-Timeout
020000 10 Volt niedrig 000080 Standard-Bus-Timeout
040000 000100 Kurzschluß
080000 Bremswiderstand 100% 000200 Schaltmodus-Fehler
100000 Bremstransistorfehler 000400 Erdungsfehler
200000 Bremstransistorfehler 000800 Überstrom
400000 Regelabweichung Frequenzbereich 001000 Momentgrenze
800000 Feldbus-Kommunikationsfehler 002000 Motorthermistor
1000000 004000 Motor überlastet
2000000 Netzausfall 008000 Wechselrichter überlastet
4000000 Motor zu klein 010000 Unterspannung
8000000 Motor zu groß 020000 Überspannung
10000000 P. 103 und P. 105 prüfen 040000 Phasenfehler
20000000 P. 104 und P. 106 prüfen 080000 Sollwertfehler (4-20 mA
40000000 Encoder-Verlust Stromsignal niedrig)
100000 Kühlkörper Übertemperatur
200000 Motorphase W fehlt
400000 Motorphase V fehlt
800000 Motorphase U fehlt
1000000 Schnellentladung nicht erfolgreich
2000000 Feldbus-Kommunikationsfehler
Sonstiges

4000000 Netzausfall
8000000 Wechselrichterfehler
10000000 Bremsleistungsfehler
20000000 Encoder-Verlust

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 185

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Worterklärung Gruppe 1 Quittieren, Freilaufstopp,

VLT:
Quittieren und Freilaufstopp,
IVLT,MAX Schnellstopp, DC-Bremse,
Der maximale Ausgangsstrom. Stopp und "Stop"-Taste
Gruppe 2 Start, Pulsstart, Reversierung,
IVLT,N Start Reversierung, Festdrehzahl
Der Ausgangsnennstrom, den der VLT- und Ausgang speichern
Frequenzumrichter liefern kann.

UVLT MAX Gruppe 1 wird auch als Einschaltsperrbefehle

Die maximale Ausgangsspannung. bezeichnet.Der Unterschied zwischen Gruppe
1 und Gruppe 2 besteht darin, daß in Gruppe
Ausgang: 1 alle Stoppsignale aufgehoben sein müssen,
damit der Motor anlaufen kann. Daraufhin kann
lM
der Motor durch ein einzelnes Startsignal der
Der dem Motor zugeführte Strom.
Gruppe 2 gestartet werden.
UM Ein als Gruppe 1 abgegebener Stoppbefehl
Die dem Motor zugeführte Spannung. ergibt die Displayanzeige STOP.
Ein als Gruppe 2 abgegebener fehlender Startbefehl
fM ergibt die Displayanzeige STAND BY.
Die dem Motor zugeführte Frequenz.
Einschaltsperrbefehl:
fJOG Ein Stoppbefehl, der der Gruppe 1 der Betriebsbefehle
Die dem Motor zugeführte Frequenz, wenn die angehört, siehe dieses.
Festdrehzahlfunktion (über die digitalen Klemmen
oder die Tastatur) aktiviert wird. Stoppbefehl
Siehe Betriebsbefehle.
fMIN
Die dem Motor zugeführte Minimalfrequenz. Motor:

fMAX IM,N
Die dem Motor zugeführte Maximalfrequenz. Nennstrom des Motors (Typenschildangaben).

Kippmoment: fM,N
Nennfrequenz des Motors (Typenschildangaben).

UM,N
Nennspannung des Motors (Typenschildangaben).

PM,N
Nennleistung, die der Motor aufnimmt
(Typenschildangaben).

ηVLT nM,N
Der Wirkungsgrad des VLT Frequenzumrichters ist Nenndrehzahl des Motors (Typenschildangaben).
definiert als das Verhältnis zwischen Leistungsabgabe
und Leistungsaufnahme. TM,N
Das Nenndrehmoment (Motor)
Eingang:
Betriebsbefehle: Sollwerte:
Mit Hilfe des LCP (= Local Control Panel = Festsollwert:
Bedienfeld) und der digitalen Eingänge kann der Ein fest definierter Sollwert, der von -100% bis
angeschlossene Motor gestartet und gestoppt +100% des Sollwertbereichs eingestellt werden
werden. Die Funktionen sind in zwei Gruppen kann. Es gibt vier Festsollwerte, die über die
mit folgenden Prioritäten aufgeteilt: digitalen Klemmen wählbar sind.

186 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Analogsollwert: Initialisierung:
Ein den Eingängen 53, 54 oder 60 zugeführtes Signal. Durch Vornahme einer Initialisierung wird
Spannung (Klemme 53, 54) oder Strom (Klemme 60). der VLT-Frequenzumrichter wieder auf
Werkseinstellung gebracht.
Pulssollwert:
Ein den digitalen Eingängen (Klemme 17 oder Setup (Parametersätze):
29) zugeführtes Signal. Es gibt vier Setups, in denen Parameter hinterlegt
werden können. Es kann zwischen den vier
Binärsollwert: Parametersätzen hin- und hergewechselt werden,
Der seriellen Kommunikationsschnittstelle und man kann einen Satz editieren (bearbeiten),
zugeführtes Signal. während ein anderer Satz aktiv ist.
RefMIN LCP:
Der niedrigste Wert, den das Sollwertsignal haben Das Bedienfeld, welches eine komplette Schnittstelle
kann. Einstellung in Parameter 204. zur Bedienung und Programmierung des VLT Serie
RefMAX 5000 darstellt. Das Bedienfeld ist abnehmbar und
Der höchste Wert, den das Sollwertsignal haben kann mit Hilfe eines zugehörigen Montagebausatzes
kann. Einstellung in Parameter 205. bis zu 3 m vom VLT-Frequenzumrichter entfernt, z.B.
in einer Schalttafelfront, angebracht werden.
Sonstiges:
VVCplus
ELCB: Im Vergleich zu herkömmlichen Spannungs- bzw.
Erdschlußtrennschalter. Frequenzverhältnissen bietet VVCplus eine verbesserte
Dynamik und Stabilität bei der Änderung von
lsb:
Drehzahlsollwerten und Belastungsmomenten.
Niedrigstwertiges Bit.
Wird für die serielle Kommunikation benutzt. Schlupfausgleich:
Normalerweise wird die Drehzahl des Motors
msb
von der Belastung beeinflußt. Eine solche
Höchstwertiges Bit.
Belastungsabhängigkeit ist nicht wünschenswert,
Wird für die serielle Kommunikation benutzt.
weshalb der VLT-Frequenzumrichter den
PID: Schlupf ausgleicht, indem er die Frequenz
Der PID-Regler sorgt durch Anpassung der unter Berücksichtigung des gemessenen
Ausgangsfrequenz an wechselnde Belastungen Effektivstroms erhöht.
für die Aufrechterhaltung der gewünschten
Thermistor:
Prozeßleistung (Druck, Temperatur usw.).
Ein temperaturabhängiger Widerstand, angeordnet
Abschaltung: an einem Ort, wo man die Temperatur überwachen
Ein Zustand, der in verschiedenen Situationen eintritt, möchte (VLT oder Motor).
z.B. bei Überlastung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters.
Analoge Eingänge:
Eine Abschaltung kann durch Betätigen von
Analoge Eingänge können zur Programmierung
Reset aufgehoben werden. In einigen Fällen
bzw. Steuerung diverser Funktionen eines
erfolgt die Aufhebung automatisch.
VLT-Frequenzumrichters benutzt werden.
Abschaltsperre: Es gibt zwei Arten von analogen Eingängen:
Ein Zustand, der in verschiedenen Situationen eintritt, Stromeingang, 0 - 20 mA
z.B. bei Überlastung des VLT-Frequenzumrichters. Spannungseingang, 0 - 10 V DC.
Sonstiges

Eine Abschaltsperre kann durch Unterbrechen

Analoge Ausgänge:
der Netzversorgung und erneutes Starten des
Es gibt zwei analoge Ausgänge, die ein Signal
VLT-Frequenzumrichters aufgehoben werden.
von 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA oder ein skalierbares
Signal liefern können.

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 187

 VLT® Serie 5000

Digitale Eingänge:
Digitale Eingänge können zur Programmierung
CT-Kennlinie:
bzw. Steuerung diverser Funktionen eines
Konstante Drehmomentkennlinie; wird für
VLT-Frequenzumrichters benutzt werden.
alle Anwendungen, z.B. Förderbänder und
Digitale Ausgänge: Krananwendungen eingesetzt. Die CT-Kennlinie wird
Es gibt vier digitale Ausgänge, von denen zwei einen nicht bei Pumpen und Lüftern benutzt.
Relaisschalter aktivieren. Die Ausgänge können ein
MCM:
24-V-DC-Signal (max. 40 mA) liefern.
Steht für Mille Circular Mil, d.h. die amerikanische
Bremswiderstand: Maßeinheit für den Kabelquerschnitt. 1
Der Bremswiderstand kann die bei generatorischer MCM ≡ 0.5067 mm2.
Bremsung erzeugte Bremsleistung aufnehmen.
Diese generatorische Bremsleistung erhöht die
Zwischenkreisspannung. Ein Bremschopper
sorgt für die Abgabe der Leistung an den
Bremswiderstand beim Überschreiten eines
bestimmten Zwischenkreisspannungslevels.

Impulsgeber:
Ein externer, digitaler Impulsgeber, der für
Rückmeldungen, z.B. der Motordrehzahl, benutzt
wird. Der Geber wird für Anwendungen eingesetzt,
bei denen eine sehr hohe Genauigkeit der
Drehzahlsteuerung verlangt wird.

AWG:
Bedeutet American Wire Gauge (amerikanische
Maßeinheit für Kabelquerschnitt).

Manuelle Initialisierung:
Tasten [CHANGE DATA] + [MENU] + [OK]
gleichzeitig gedrückt halten, um eine manuelle
Initialisierung vorzunehmen.

60 AVM
Schaltmuster unter der Bezeichnung 60 A
synchrone V ektor M odulation.

SFAVM
Schaltmuster unter der Bezeichnung S tator F lux
orientierte A synchrone V ektor M odulation.

Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA:

Automatischer Motoranpassungsalgorithmus,
der die elektrischen Parameter für den Motor
im Stillstand bestimmt.

On-line/off-line Parameter:
Online-Parameter werden sofort nach Änderung des
Datenwertes aktiviert. Offline-Parameter werden
erst dann aktiviert, wenn an der Bedieneinheit
OK eingegeben wurde.

VT-Kennlinie:
Variable Drehmomentkennlinie; wird für Kreiselpumpen
und Lüfter angewandt.

188 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

■ Werkseinstellungen

PNU Parameter Werkseinstellung Bereich Änderungen 4-Setup Konvertierung Daten-

# beschreibung während des Betriebs Index Typ

001 Sprachauswahl Englisch Ja Nein 0 5

002 Betriebsart (Ort/Fern) Fernsteuerung Ja Ja 0 5
003 Ort Sollwert 000.000 Ja Ja -3 4
004 Aktiver Parametersatz Parametersatz 1 Ja Nein 0 5
005 Par-Satz Programm Aktiver Parametersatz Ja Nein 0 5
006 Kopieren von Parametersätzen Keine Kopie Nein Nein 0 5
007 Bedienfeldkopie Keine Kopie Nein Nein 0 5
008 Displayskalierung der 1 0,01 - 500,00 Ja Ja -2 6
Motorfrequenz
009 Displayzeile 2 Frequenz [Hz] Ja Ja 0 5
010 Displayzeile 1.1 Sollwert [%] Ja Ja 0 5
011 Displayzeile 1.2 Motorstrom [A] Ja Ja 0 5
012 Displayzeile 1.3 Leistung [kW] Ja Ja 0 5
013 Sollwert ORT Modus Ort digitale Ja Ja 0 5
Steuerung/wie Par.
100
014 Taster Stopp Wirksam Ja Ja 0 5
015 Taster JOG Festdrehzahl Blockiert Ja Ja 0 5
016 Taster Reversierung Blockiert Ja Ja 0 5
017 Taster Reset Wirksam Ja Ja 0 5
018 Eingabesperre Wirksam Ja Ja 0 5
019 Betriebszustand bei Netzeinschal- Zwangsstopp mit Ja Ja 0 5
tung, Ortsteuerung gespeichertem
Sollwert
027 Warnanzeige Warnung in Zeile 1/2 Ja Nein 0 5

Änderungen während des Betriebs:

Bei "Ja" sind Parameteränderungen während des
Betriebs des Frequenzumrichters möglich. Bei "Nein" Konv. Index: Konvertierungsfaktor
74 0,1
muß der Frequenzumrichter angehalten werden, bevor
2 100
Änderungen vorgenommen werden können. 1 10
0 1
4-Par.sätze: -1 0,1
"Ja" bedeutet, daß der Parameter in jedem der vier -2 0,01
Parametersätze individuell programmiert werden kann, -3 0,001
-4 0,0001
d.h., der gleiche Parameter kann vier verschiedene
Datenwerte haben. "Nein" bedeutet, daß der
Datentyp:
Datenwert in allen vier Parametersätzen gleich ist. Anzeige des Typs und der Länge des Telegramms.
Datentyp Beschreibung
Konvertierungsindex: 3 Ganzzahl 16
Die Zahl bezieht sich auf eine Umrechnungszahl, 4 Ganzzahl 32
5 Ohne Vorzeichen 8
die beim Schreiben oder Lesen mit einem
6 Ohne Vorzeichen 16
Frequenzumrichter benutzt werden muß. 7 Ohne Vorzeichen 32
9 Textblock
Sonstiges

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 189

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände-

rung 4 P.-Sätze

PNU Parameter- Werkseinstellung Bereich während änderbar Konvertier. Daten-

# beschreibung des Betriebs Index typ

100 Konfiguration Drehzahlregelung ohne Nein Ja 0 5

Istwertrückführung
101 Drehmomentkennlinie Hoch-konstantes Moment Ja Ja 0 5
102 Motorleistung Abhängig vom Gerät 0,18-600 kW Nein Ja 1 6
103 Motorspannung Abhängig vom Gerät 200 - 600 V Nein Ja 0 6
104 Motorfrequenz 50 Hz / 60 Hz Nein Ja 0 6
105 Motorstrom Abhän. von Wahl des 0,01-IVLT,MAX Nein Ja -2 7
Motors
106 Motornenndrehzahl Abhän. von Wahl des 100-60000 rpm Nein Ja 0 6
Motors
107 Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA Motoranpassung aus Nein Nein 0 5
108 Statorwiderstand Abhän. von Wahl des Nein Ja -4 7
Motors
109 Statorinduktanz Abhän. von Wahl des Nein Ja -2 7
Motors
110 Motormagnetisierung bei 0 tr/mn 100 % 0 - 300 % Ja Ja 0 6
111 Eckfrequenz für Motormagnetisierung 1,0 Hz 0,1 - 10,0 Hz Ja Ja -1 6
bei 0 U/min
112
113 Lastausgleich bei niedriger Drehzahl 100 % 0 - 300 % Ja Ja 0 6
114 Lastausgleich bei hoher Drehzahl 100 % 0 - 300 % Ja Ja 0 6
115 Schlupfausgleich 100 % -500 - 500 % Ja Ja 0 3
116 Zeitkonstante für Schlupfausgleich 0,50 Sek. 0,05 - 1,00 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
117 Resonanzdämpfung 100 % 0 - 500 % Ja Ja 0 6
118 Zeitkonstante für Resonanzdämpfung 5 ms 5 - 50 ms Ja Ja -3 6
119 Hohes Startmoment 0,0 Sek. 0,0 - 0,5 Sek. Ja Ja -1 5
120 Startverzögerung 0,0 Sek. 0,0 - 10,0 Sek. Ja Ja -1 5
121 Startfunktion Zeitverzögerung Ja Ja 0 5
Motorfreilauf
122 Stoppfunktion Motorfreilauf Ja Ja 0 5
123 Mindestfrequenz zur Aktivierung der 0,0 Hz 0,0 - 10,0 Hz Ja Ja -1 5
Stoppfunktion
124 Gleichspannungshaltestrom 50 % 0 - 100 % Ja Ja 0 6
125 Gleichspannungsbremsstrom 50 % 0 - 100 % Ja Ja 0 6
126 Gleichspannungsbremszeit 10,0 Sek. 0,0 - 60,0 Sek. Ja Ja -1 6
127 Einschaltfrequenz der Gleichspannungs- AUS 0,0-Par. 202 Ja Ja -1 6
bremse
128 Thermischer Motorschutz Kein Motorschutz Ja Ja 0 5
129 Externe Motorbelüftung Nein Ja Ja 0 5
130 Startfrequenz 0,0 Hz 0,0-10,0 Hz Ja Ja -1 5
131 Startspannung 0,0 V 0,0-Par. 103 Ja Ja -1 6

190 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände-

rung 4 P.-Sätze

PNU Parameter- Werkseinstellung Bereich während änderbar Konvertier. Daten-

# beschreibung des Betriebs Index typ

200 Ausgangsfrequenz Bereich/Richtung 0-132 Hz,Eine Nein Ja 0 5

Richtung
201 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze niedrig 0,0 Hz 0,0 - fMAX Ja Ja -1 6
202 Ausgangsfrequenzgrenze hoch 66 / 132 Hz fMIN - Par. 200 Ja Ja -1 6
203 Sollwert-/Istwertbereich Min bis Max Ja Ja 0 5
204 Minimaler Sollwert 0,000 -100.000,000-Sollw.MAX Ja Ja -3 4
205 Maximaler Sollwert 50,000 Sollw.MIN -100.000,000 Ja Ja -3 4
206 Rampentyp Linear Ja Ja 0 5
207 Rampenzeit Auf 1 Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
208 Rampenzeit Ab 1 Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
209 Rampenzeit Auf 2 Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
210 Rampenzeit Ab 2 Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
211 Rampenzeit Festdrehzahl - Jog Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
212 Rampenzeit Ab, Schnellstopp Abhängig vom Gerät 0,05 - 3600 Ja Ja -2 7
213 Frequenz Festdrehzahl - Jog 10,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 202 Ja Ja -1 6
214 Sollwert-Funktion Addierend zum Ja Ja 0 5
Sollwert
215 Festsollwert 1 0,00 % - 100,00 - 100,00 % Ja Ja -2 3
216 Festsollwert 2 0,00 % - 100,00 - 100,00 % Ja Ja -2 3
217 Festsollwert 3 0,00 % - 100,00 - 100,00 % Ja Ja -2 3
218 Festsollwert 4 0,00 % - 100,00 - 100,00 % Ja Ja -2 3
219 Frequenzkorrektur Auf/Ab 0,00 % 0,00 - 100 % Ja Ja -2 6
220
221 Torque limit for motor mode 160 % von TM,N 0,0 % - xxx % Ja Ja -1 6
222 Momentgrenze für motorischen Betrieb 160 % 0,0 % - xxx % Ja Ja -1 6
223 Warnung: Strom unterer Grenzwert 0,0 A 0,0 - Par. 224 Ja Ja -1 6
224 Warnung: Strom oberer Grenzwert IVLT,MAX Par. 223 - IVLT,MAX Ja Ja -1 6
225 Warnung: Frequenz unterer Grenzwert 0,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 226 Ja Ja -1 6
226 Warnung: Frequenz oberer Grenzwert 132,0 Hz Par. 225 - Par. 202 Ja Ja -1 6
227 Warnung: Istwert unterer Grenzwert -4000,000 -100.000,000 - Par. 228 Ja -3 4
228 Warnung: Istwert oberer Grenzwert 4000,000 Par. 227 - 100.000,000 Ja -3 4
229 Frequenzausblendung, Bandbreite 0 % 0 - 100 % Ja Ja 0 6
230 Frequenzausblendung 1 0,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 200 Ja Ja -1 6
231 Frequenzausblendung 2 0,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 200 Ja Ja -1 6
232 Frequenzausblendung 3 0,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 200 Ja Ja -1 6
233 Frequenzausblendung 4 0,0 Hz 0,0 - Par. 200 Ja Ja -1 6
234 Motorphasenüberwachung Aktiv Ja Ja 0 5
Sonstiges

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 191

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände- Konvertie-

PNU Parameter Werkseinstellung Bereich rungen 4-Setup rungs- Daten-

# beschreibung während des Betriebs index typ

300 Klemme 16, Eingang Quittieren, Reset Ja Ja 0 5

301 Klemme 17, Eingang Sollwert speichern Ja Ja 0 5
302 Klemme 18 Start, Eingang Start Ja Ja 0 5
303 Klemme 19, Eingang Reversierung Ja Ja 0 5
304 Klemme 27, Eingang Motorfreilauf invers Ja Ja 0 5
305 Klemme 29, Eingang Festdrehzahl Jog Ja Ja 0 5
306 Klemme 32, Eingang Parametersatzwahl, Ja Ja 0 5
msb/Drehzahl auf
307 Klemme 33, Eingang Parametersatzwahl, lsb/Drehzahl Ja Ja 0 5
ab
308 Klemme 53, Analogeingang Spannung Sollwert Ja Ja 0 5
309 Klemme 53, min. Skalierung 0,0 V 0,0 -10,0 V Ja Ja -1 5
310 Klemme 53, max. Skalierung 10,0 V 0,0 -10,0 V Ja Ja -1 5
311 Klemme 54, Analogeingang Spannung Ohne Funktion Ja Ja 0 5
312 Klemme 54, min. Skalierung 0,0 V 0,0 -10,0 V Ja Ja -1 5
313 Klemme 54, max. Skalierung 10,0 V 0,0 -10,0 V Ja Ja -1 5
314 Klemme 60, Analogeingang Strom Sollwert Ja Ja 0 5
315 Klemme 60, min. Skalierung 0,0 mA 0,0-20,0 mA Ja Ja -4 5
316 Klemme 60, max. Skalierung 20,0 mA 0,0-20,0 mA Ja Ja -4 5
317 Sollwertfehler 10 s 1 - 99 s Ja Ja 0 5
318 Funktion nach Sollwertfehler Aus Ja Ja 0 5
319 0-IMAX &THORN; 0-20 mA Ja Ja 0 5
320 Klemme 42, Ausgang, 5000 Hz 1-32000 Hz Ja Ja 0 6
Impulsskalierung
321 Klemme 45, Ausgang 0 - fMAX &THORN; 0-20 mA Ja Ja 0 5
322 Klemme 45, Ausgang, 5000 Hz 1 -32000 Hz Ja Ja 0 6
Impulsskalierung
323 Relais 01, Ausgang Bereit keine thermische Warnung Ja Ja 0 5
324 Relais 01, EIN-Verzögerung 0,00 s 0,00 - 600 s Ja Ja -2 6
325 Relais 01, AUS-Verzögerung 0,00 s 0,00 - 600 s Ja Ja -2 6
326 Relais 04, Ausgang Bereit - Fernsteuerung Ja Ja 0 5
327 Pulssollwert, max. Frequenz 5000 Hz Ja Ja 0 6
328 Pulsistwert, max. Frequenz 25000 Hz Ja Ja 0 6
329 Sollwert Endcoder Puls/Umdreh. 1024 Pulse/Umdreh. 1 4096 Ja Ja 0 6
Pulse/Umdreh.
330 Sollwert speichern/Ausgangsfunktion Ohne Funktion Ja Nein 0 5
345 Timeout nach Encoder-Verlust 1 s 0 - 60 s Ja Ja -1 6
346 Encoder-Verlustfunktion AUS Ja Ja 0 5
357 Klemme 42, Ausgang 0 % 000 - 100% Ja Ja 0 6
Mindestskalierung
358 Klemme 42, Ausgang 100% 000 - 500% Ja Ja 0 6
Höchstskalierung
359 Klemme 45, Ausgang 0 % 000 - 100% Ja Ja 0 6
Mindestskalierung
360 Klemme 45, Ausgang 100% 000 - 500% Ja Ja 0 6
Höchstskalierung

192 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände- Konver-

PNU Parameter Werkseinstellung Bereich rungen 4-Setup tierungs- Daten-

# beschreibung während des index typ

Betriebs

400 Bremsfunktion/Überspannungssteuerung Aus Ja Nein 0 5

401 Bremswiderstand, Ohm Abhängig vom Gerät Ja Nein -1 6
402 Bremsleistungsgrenze, kW Abhängig vom Gerät Ja Nein 2 6
403 Leistungsüberwachung Ein Ja Nein 0 5
404 Bremsfunktionstest Aus Ja Nein 0 5
405 Quittierfunktion Manuell quittieren Ja Ja 0 5
406 Automatische Wiedereinschaltzeit 5 s 0 - 10 s Ja Ja 0 5
407 Netzausfall Ohne Funktion Ja Ja 0 5
408 Schnellentladung Blockiert Ja Ja 0 5
409 Zeitverzögerung Momentgrenze Aus 0 - 60 s Ja Ja 0 5
410 Zeitverzögerung Wechselrichter Abhängig vom Gerätetyp 0 - 35 s Ja Ja 0 5
411 Taktfrequenz Abhängig vom Gerätetyp 3 - 14 kHz Ja Ja 2 6
412 Ausgangsfrequenzabhängige Taktfrequenz Blockiert Ja Ja 0 5
413 Übermodulationsfaktor Ein Ja Ja -1 5
414 Minimaler Istwert 0,000 -100.000,000 - IstwMAX Ja Ja -3 4
415 Maximaler Istwert 1500,000 IstwMIN - 100.000,000 Ja Ja -3 4
416 Prozeßeinheit % Ja Ja 0 5
417 Drehzahl PID Proportionalverstärkung 0,015 0,000 0,150 Ja Ja -3 6
418 Drehzahl PID Integrationszeit 8 ms 2,00 -999,99 ms Ja Ja -4 7
419 Drehzahl PID Differentiationszeit 30 ms 0,00 - 200,00 ms Ja Ja -4 6
420 Drehzahl PID Diff.verstärkungsgrenze 5,0 5,0 50,0 Ja Ja -1 6
421 Drehzahl PID Tiefpaßfilter 10 ms 5 -200 ms Ja Ja -4 6
422 U0-Spannung bei 0 Hz 20,0 V 0,0 - Parameter 103 Ja Ja -1 6
423 U1-Spannung Parameter 103 0,0 - UVLT, MAX Ja Ja -1 6
424 F1-Frequenz Parameter 104 0,0 - Parameter 426 Ja Ja -1 6
425 U2-Spannung Parameter 103 0,0 - UVLT, MAX Ja Ja -1 6
426 F2-Frequenz Parameter 104 Par. 424 - Par. 428 Ja Ja -1 6
427 U3-Spannung Parameter 103 0,0 - UVLT, MAX Ja Ja -1 6
428 F3-Frequenz Parameter 104 Par. 426 - Par. 430 Ja Ja -1 6
429 U4-Spannung Parameter 103 0,0 - UVLT, MAX Ja Ja -1 6

Sonstiges

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 193

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände- Konvertie-

PNU Parameter Werkseinstellung Bereich rungen 4-Setup rungs- Daten-

# beschreibung während des Betriebs index typ

430 F4-Frequenz Parameter 104 Par. 426 - Par. 432 Ja Ja -1 6

431 U5-Spannung Parameter 103 0,0 - UVLT, MAX Ja Ja -1 6
432 F5-Frequenz Parameter 104 Par. 426 - 1000 Hz Ja Ja -1 6
433 Moment-Proportionalverstärkung 100% 0 (Aus) - 500% Ja Ja 0 6
434 Moment-Integrationszeit 0,02 s 0,002 2,000 s Ja Ja -3 7
437 Prozeß PID normal/invers Regelung Normal Ja Ja 0 5
438 Prozeß PID Anti Windup Ein Ja Ja 0 5
439 Prozeß PID Startfrequenz Parameter 201 fmin - fmax Ja Ja -1 6
440 Prozeß PID Proportionalverstärkung 0,01 0,00 10,00 Ja Ja -2 6
441 Prozeß PID Integrationszeit 9999,99 s (AUS) 0,01 - 9999,99 s Ja Ja -2 7
442 Prozeß PID Differentiationszeit 0,00 s (AUS) 0,00 - 10,00 s Ja Ja -2 6
443 Prozeß PID Diff. verstärk.grenze 5,0 5,0 50,0 Ja Ja -1 6
444 Prozeß PID Tiefpaßfilterzeit 0,01 0,01 10,00 Ja Ja -2 6
445 Abfangen eines drehenden Motors Blockiert Ja Ja 0 5
446 Schaltmuster SFAVM Ja Ja 0 5
447 Drehmomentausgleich 100% -100 - +100% Ja Ja 0 3
448 Drehzahlverhältnis 1 0,001 100,000 Nein Ja -2 4
449 Reibungsverlust 0% 0 - 50% Nein Ja -2 6
450 Netzspannung bei Netzausfall Abhängig vom Gerät Abhängig vom Gerät Ja Ja 0 6
453 Drehzahlverhältnis mit Istwertrückführung 1 0,01-100 Nein Ja 0 4
454 Pausenzeit-Kompensation Ein Nein Nein 0 5
455 Frequenzbereichüberwachung Wirksam 0 5
457 Phasenfehlerfunktion Abschaltung Ja Ja 0 5

194 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

PNU Parameter Werkseinstellung Bereich Änderungen 4-Setup Konvertierung Daten-

# beschreibung während des Betriebs Index Typ
500 Adresse 1 0 - 126 Ja Nein 0 6
501 Baudrate 9600 Baud Ja Nein 0 5
502 Motorfreilauf Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
503 Schnellstopp Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
504 Gleichspannungsbremse Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
505 Start Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
506 Reversierung Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
507 Parametersatzwahl Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
508 Festdrehzahlwahl-Jog Bus oder Ja Ja 0 5
Klemme
509 Bus-Festdrehzahl 1 10,0 Hz 0,0 - Parameter 202 Ja Ja -1 6
510 Bus-Festdrehzahl 2 10,0 Hz 0,0 - Parameter 202 Ja Ja -1 6
511
512 Telegrammprofil FC-Antrieb Nein Ja 0 5
513 Bus-Time-Out Zeit 1 s 1 -99 s Ja Ja 0 5
514 Bus-Time-Out Funktion Aus Ja Ja 0 5
515 Datenanzeige: Sollwert % Nein Nein -1 3
516 Datenanzeige: Sollwert Einheit Nein Nein -3 4
517 Datenanzeige: Istwert Nein Nein -3 4
518 Datenanzeige: Frequenz Nein Nein -1 6
519 Datenanzeige: Frequenz x Skalierung Nein Nein -2 7
520 Datenanzeige: Strom Nein Nein -2 7
521 Datenanzeige: Drehmoment Nein Nein -1 3
522 Datenanzeige: Leistung, kW Nein Nein -1 7
523 Datenanzeige: Leistung, HP Nein Nein -2 7
524 Datenanzeige: Motorspannung Nein Nein -1 6
525 Datenanzeige: Zwischenkreisspannung Nein Nein 0 6
526 Datenanzeige: Motortemp. Nein Nein 0 5
527 Datenanzeige: Temp. VLT Nein Nein 0 5
528 Datenanzeige: Digitaler Eingang Nein Nein 0 5
529 Datenanzeige: Klemme 53, Analoger Nein Nein -2 3
Eingang
Spannung
530 Datenanzeige: Klemme 54 Nein Nein -2 3
analoger Eingang
531 Datenanzeige: Klemme 60 Nein Nein -5 3
analoger Eingang
532 Datenanzeige: Pulssollwert Nein Nein -1 7
533 Datenanzeige: Ext. Sollwert % Nein Nein -1 3
534 Datenanzeige: Zustandswort, binär Nein Nein 0 6
535 Datenanzeige: Bremsleistung/2 min Nein Nein 2 6
536 Datenanzeige: Bremsleistung/s Nein Nein 2 6
537 Datenanzeige: Kühlkörpertemperatur Nein Nein 0 5
538 Datenanzeige: Alarmwort, binär Nein Nein 0 7
539 Datenanzeige: VLT-Steuerwort, binär Nein Nein 0 6
540 Datenanzeige: Warnwort 1 Nein Nein 0 7
541 Datenanzeige: Erweitertes Zustandswort Nein Nein 0 7
557 Datenanzeige: Motor Upm Nein Nein 0 4
Sonstiges

558 Datenanzeige: Motor Upm x Skalierung Nein Nein -2 4

580 Definierter Parameter Nein Nein 0 6
581 Definierter Parameter Nein Nein 0 6
582 Definierter Parameter Nein Nein 0 6

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 195

 VLT® Serie 5000

Ände- Konver-

PNU Parameter- Werks- Bereich rung während 4 P.-Sätze tier. Daten-

# beschreibung einstellung des Betriebs änderbar Index typ

600 Betriebsdaten: Betriebsstunden Nein Nein 74 7

601 Betriebsdaten: Motorlaufstunden Nein Nein 74 7
602 Betriebsdaten: kWh-Zähler Nein Nein 1 7
603 Betriebsdaten: Anzahl d. Einschaltungen Nein Nein 0 6
604 Betriebsdaten: Anzahl d. Übertemperaturen Nein Nein 0 6
605 Betriebsdaten: Anzahl Überspannungen Nein Nein 0 6
606 Datenprotokoll: Digitaler Eingang Nein Nein 0 5
607 Datenprotokoll: Busbefehle Nein Nein 0 6
608 Datenprotokoll: Busstatuswort Nein Nein 0 6
609 Datenprotokoll: Sollwert Nein Nein -1 3
610 Datenprotokoll: Istwert Nein Nein -3 4
611 Datenprotokoll: Motorfrequenz Nein Nein -1 3
612 Datenprotokoll: Motorspannung Nein Nein -1 6
613 Datenprotokoll: Motorstrom Nein Nein -2 3
614 Datenprotokoll: Zwischenkreisspannung Nein Nein 0 6
615 Fehlerprotokoll: Fehlercode Nein Nein 0 5
616 Fehlerprotokoll: Zeit Nein Nein -1 7
617 Fehlerprotokoll: Wert Nein Nein 0 3
618 Rückstellen des kWh-Zählers Keine Rückstellung Ja Nein 0 5
619 Rückstellen des Betriebsstundenzählers Keine Rückstellung Ja Nein 0 5
620 Betriebsart Normale Funktion Nein Nein 0 5
621 Typenschild: VLT-Typ Nein Nein 0 9
622 Typenschild: Leistungsteil Nein Nein 0 9
623 Typenschild: VLT-Bestellnummer Nein Nein 0 9
624 Typenschild: Software-Version Nr. Nein Nein 0 9
625 Typenschild: LCP-Identifikationsnummer Nein Nein 0 9
626 Typenschild: Datenbank-Identifikationsnummer Nein Nein -2 9
627 Typenschild: Leistungsteil-Identifikationsnummer Nein Nein 0 9
628 Typenschild: Anwendungsoption, Typ Nein Nein 0 9
629 Typenschild: Anwendungsoption, Bestell Nr. Nein Nein 0 9
630 Typenschild: Kommunikationsoption, Typ Nein Nein 0 9
631 Typenschild:Kommunikationsoption, Bestell Nr. Nein Nein 0 9

196 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Änderung
Daten-
PNU Parameter- Werks- Bereich während 4 P.-Sätze Konvertier.

# beschreibung einstellung des Betriebs änderbar Index typ

700 Relais 6, Funktion VLT bereit Ja Ja 0 5

701 Relais 6, EIN Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
702 Relais 6, AUS Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
703 Relais 7, Funktion Motor dreht Ja Ja 0 5
704 Relais 7, EIN Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
705 Relais 7, AUS Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
706 Relais 8, Funktion Netz EIN Ja Ja 0 5
707 Relais 8, EIN Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
708 Relais 8, AUS Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
709 Relais 9, Funktion Störung Ja Ja 0 5
710 Relais 9, EIN Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6
711 Relais 9, AUS Verzögerung 0 Sek. 0,00-600 Sek. Ja Ja -2 6

Sonstiges

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 197

 VLT® Serie 5000

A Funkentstörschalter ....................................................... 60
Aktiver Parametersatz ................................................... 106 Funktion der Bedientasten .............................................. 69
Allgemeine technische Daten............................ 11, 12, 13, 14
Allgemeine Warnung........................................................ 4
Anwendung EMV-gemäßer Kabel ..................................... 56 G
Anwendung Konfiguration ............................................... 77 Genauigkeit der Displayanzeige (Parameter009-012): ........... 14
Anzeige und Programmierung indizierterParameter .............. 75 Genauigkeitder Displayanzeige (Parameter 009-012): ........... 14
Anzeigezustände des Displays ......................................... 70
Anzugsmomente und Schraubengrößen ............................ 58
Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA ............................... 90
H
Hochspannungsprüfung ................................................. 58
Automatische Motoranpassung, AMA über VLTSoftware
Dialog ........................................................................ 93

I
B Installation der externen 24-Volt-DC-Versorgung ................. 64
Installation der Relaisklemmen ......................................... 64
Bedienfeld ................................................................... 68
Installation der Steuerkabel ............................................. 66
Bedienfeldkopie ........................................................... 106
Installation der Zwischenkreiskopplung .............................. 65
Bedientasten ............................................................... 69
Installation des Bremskabels ........................................... 64
Brake resistor terminals (only sb and eb units): ................... 13
Installation des Bremswiderstands-Temperaturschalters ........ 65
Bremswiderstandsklemmen (nur SB- und EB-Geräte): .......... 13
Interner Stromgrenzenregler ........................................... 103
Busanschluß ................................................................ 65

C K
Kabellängen und -querschnitte: ....................................... 14
Cable lengths and cross-sections: .................................... 14
Konfiguration .............................................................. 112
Control card, digital/pulse and analogue outputs: ................ 13
Kopieren von Parametersätzen ....................................... 106
Control card, rs 485 serial communication: ........................ 13

D L
Diese Bestimmungen dienen Ihrer Sicherheit ........................ 4
Lüfterversorgung .......................................................... 65
LEDs.......................................................................... 69
DIP Schalter 1-4 ........................................................... 66
Liste der Warn- und Alarmmeldungen .............................. 179
Display ....................................................................... 68
Displaymodus ......................................................... 70, 76
Displaymodus Wahl des Anzeigezustandes ....................... 70
M
Drehmomentkennlinien: .................................................. 11
Maße, Dimensionen ...................................................... 40
Drehrichtung des Motors ................................................ 63
Manuelle Initialisierung................................................... 75
Mechanische Installation................................................. 43

E Menümodus ................................................................ 73
Montage außerhalb des Schaltschranks ............................ 43
Einbau ........................................................................ 43
Motoranschluß ............................................................. 63
Einbau der Motorkabel ................................................... 63
Motorfangschaltung ..................................................... 101
Eingabesperre .............................................................110
Einleitung ...................................................................... 9
Einstellen der Parameter ................................................ 77
N
Elektrische Installation ............................................... 46, 67
Netz- undMotoranschluß ................................................ 58
Elektrische Installation, Leistungskabel .................... 47, 48, 51
Netz-ein-Modus ..........................................................110
Elektrische Installation, Schutzarten ............................. 49, 53
Netzanschluß ............................................................... 58
Erdung umflochtener, abgeschirmter Steuerkabel ................ 57
Netzfehler/Schnellentladung mit Netzfehler invers ...............100
External 24 volt dc supply: ............................................. 13
Netzspannung 3 x 200-240V ..................................... 17, 18
Externe 24-V-DC-Versorgung: ......................................... 13
Netzspannung 3 x 380-500V ..................... 22, 24, 27, 28, 29
Netzspannung 3 x 550-600 V ............................... 30, 32, 34

F Netzspannung3 x 200-240 V .......................................... 16

Netzspannung3 x 380-500 V .......................................... 20
Frequenzkorrektur Auf/Ab .............................................. 128

198 MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss

 VLT® Serie 5000

Netzversorgung (L1, L2, L3): ........................................... 11 Verarbeitung von Multisollwerten ...................................... 88

Normale/Hohe Übermomentregelung ohne Istwertrück- Vlt output data (u, v, w): ................................................. 11
führung......................................................................103 VLT Serie 5000, Schutzvorrichtungen:.......................... 15, 15
VLT-Ausgangsdaten (U, V, W): ........................................ 11

P
Parallelschaltung von Motoren ......................................... 63 W
Parametersatz, Programm ............................................. 106 Wahl des Bremswiderstandes ......................................... 84
Parametersatzwahl ........................................................ 72 Warnung vor unbeabsichtigtem Anlaufen ............................. 4
Parameterwahl ........................................................ 73, 73 Warnungen ................................................................180
PID für die Drehzahlregelung ........................................... 98 Warnwort 1, erweitertes Zustandswortund Alarmwort .......... 185
PID für die Prozeßregelung ............................................. 97 Wechsel zwischen Ort-Betrieb und Fernbedienung .............. 83
Programmieren von Momentgrenze und Stopp .................. 103 Worterklärung ............................................................. 186

R Z
Relaisausgänge: ........................................................... 13 Zustandsmeldungen ..................................................... 176
Relay outputs: .............................................................. 13 Zusätzlicher Schutz (RCD) .............................................. 58

S Ä
Schnellentladung (Quick discharge) .................................. 99 Ändern einer Gruppe numerischer Datenwerte .................... 74
Schnellkonfiguration mit Hilfe des Schnellmenüs .................. 72 Ändern eines Textwertes ................................................ 73
Sicherheitserdung ......................................................... 58 Ändern von Daten ......................................................... 73
Sollwert speichern/Ausgangsfunktion ............................... 145
Sprachauswahl ........................................................... 105
Steuer- und Regelgenauigkeit: ......................................... 14
Steuerkarte, 24-V-DC-Versorgung: ................................... 13
Steuerkarte, Analogeingänge: .......................................... 12
Steuerkarte, Digital/Puls- und Analogausgänge: .................. 13
Steuerkarte, digitale Eingänge: ................................... 12, 12
Steuerkarte, Puls/Drehgeber-Eingang: .......................... 12, 12
Steuerkarte, RS 485 serielle Kommunikationsschnittstelle: ..... 13
Steuerung der mechanischen Bremse ............................... 94
Steuerung mit Bremsfunktion .......................................... 84
Struktur des Schnellmenümodus gegenüberdem Menümodus 72
Stufenloses Ändern eines numerischen Datenwertes ............ 74
Stufenweises Ändern eines Datenwertes............................ 74

T
Taster JOG Festdrehzahl ............................................... 110
Taster Reversierung .....................................................110
Taster Stopp..............................................................109
Thermischer Motorschutz ............................................... 58
Torque characteristics: ................................................... 11
Sonstiges

U
Umgebung: ............................................................ 15, 15

V
Verarbeitung von Einzelsollwerten ..................................... 86

MG.51.A2.03 - VLT ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Danfoss 199

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Contents

Safety ...................................................................................................................... 3
Safety regulations ................................................................................................... 4
Warning against unintended start ........................................................................... 4

Quick Setup ......................................................................................................... 6

Introduction ......................................................................................................... 9
Available literature .................................................................................................. 10

Technical data ................................................................................................. 11

General technical data .......................................................................................... 11
Electrical data ........................................................................................................ 16
Fuses ..................................................................................................................... 38
Mechanical dimensions ......................................................................................... 40

Installation ........................................................................................................ 43
EMC-correct electrical installation .......................................................................... 54
Use of EMC-correct cables .................................................................................. 56
Earthing of braided screened/armouredcontrol cables .......................................... 57
Connection of mains ............................................................................................. 58
Safety earthing ...................................................................................................... 58
Extra protection (RCD) .......................................................................................... 58
RFI switch ............................................................................................................. 60
Installation of motor cables ................................................................................... 63
Connection of motor ............................................................................................. 63
Installation of brake cable ..................................................................................... 64
Installation of relay terminals: ................................................................................ 64
Installation of 24 Volt external DC supply: ............................................................ 64
Installation of loadsharing ...................................................................................... 64
Installation of brake resistor temperatureswitch .................................................... 65
Bus connection ..................................................................................................... 65
Installation of control cables .................................................................................. 66

Operation of the VLT frequency converter ....................................... 68

Control panel ........................................................................................................ 68
Display .................................................................................................................. 68
LEDs ..................................................................................................................... 68
Control keys ......................................................................................................... 69
Quick Setup via Quick menu ................................................................................ 72
Parameter selection .............................................................................................. 72
Menu mode .......................................................................................................... 72
Manual initialisation ............................................................................................... 74

Application configuration ......................................................................... 76

Setting of parameters ........................................................................................... 76

Special functions ........................................................................................... 80

Shift between local and remote control ................................................................ 80

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control with brake function ................................................................................... 81

Handling of single references ................................................................................ 83
Handling of multi-references ................................................................................. 85
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA ....................................................................... 88
Control of mechanical brake ................................................................................. 91
PID for process control ......................................................................................... 94
PID for speed control ............................................................................................ 95
Quick discharge .................................................................................................... 96
Flying start ............................................................................................................ 99
Normal/high overload torque control,open loop .................................................... 99
Programming of Torque limit and stop ............................................................... 100

Programming ................................................................................................. 101

Operation and Display .......................................................................................... 101
Load and motor ................................................................................................... 107
References and limits ........................................................................................... 117
Inputs and outputs ............................................................................................... 125
Special functions .................................................................................................. 141
Serial communication ........................................................................................... 154
Technical functions .............................................................................................. 159

Miscellaneous ............................................................................................... 167

Trouble-shooting .................................................................................................. 167
Status messages ................................................................................................ 168
List of warnings and alarms ................................................................................ 170
Warnings ............................................................................................................. 172

2 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

175ZA438.13
VLT 5000 Series

Safety
Operating instructions
Software version: 3.6x

These operating instructions can be used for all VLT 5000

Series frequency converters with software version 3.6x.
The software version number can be seen from parameter 624.
CE and C-tick labelling do not cover VLT 5001-5250,
550-600 V units.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

 VLT® 5000 Series

The voltage of the frequency converter

is dangerous whenever the equipment ■ Warning against unintended start
is connected to mains. Incorrect 1. The motor can be brought to a stop by
installation of the motor or the frequency converter means of digital commands, bus commands,
may cause damage to the equipment, serious references or a local stop, while the frequency
personal injury or death. converter is connected to mains.
Consequently, the instructions in this manual, If personal safety considerations make it necessary
as well as national and local rules and safety to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these
regulations, must be complied with. stop functions are not sufficient.
2. While parameters are being changed, the
■ Safety regulations motor may start. Consequently, the stop key
1. The frequency converter must be disconnected [STOP/RESET] must always be activated, following
from mains if repair work is to be carried which data can be modified.
out. Check that the mains supply has been 3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults
disconnected and that the necessary time has occur in the electronics of the frequency converter,
passed before removing motor and mains plugs. or if a temporary overload or a fault in the supply
2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the control panel of mains or the motor connection ceases.
the frequency converter does not disconnect
the equipment from mains and is thus not
to be used as a safety switch.
3. Correct protective earthing of the equipment
must be established, the user must be protected
against supply voltage, and the motor must be
protected against overload in accordance with
applicable national and local regulations.
4. The earth leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is not included
in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
set parameter 128 to data value ETR trip
or data value ETR warning.
Note: The function is initialised at 1.16 x rated
motor current and rated motor frequency. For
the North American market: The ETR functions
provide class 20 motor overload protection
in accordance with NEC.
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and mains
supply while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
passed before removing motor and mains plugs.
7. Please note that the frequency converter has
more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when
loadsharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit) and
external 24 V DC have been installed. Check
that all voltage inputs have been disconnected
and that the necessary time has passed before
repair work is commenced.

4 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

175ZA439.12
War ning:
arning:
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment
has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected,
such as external 24 V DC, load-sharing (linkage of DC intermediate
circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic back-up.

Safety
Using VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5001-5006, 380-500 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5008-5052, 200-240 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5008-5500, 380-500 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5001-5005, 550-600 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5006-5022, 550-600 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5027-5250, 550-600 V: wait at least 30 minutes

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Quick Setup

■ Introduction to Quick Setup

This Quick Setup will guide you through EMC correct
installation of the frequency converter by connecting
power, motor and control wiring (fig. 1). Start/stop
of motor is to be done with the switch.
For VLT 5075 - 5500 380 - 500 V, VLT 5032 -
5052 200 - 240 V AC and VLT 5075 - 5250 550
- 600 V, please refer to the Operating Instructions
regarding mechanical and electrical installation.

Fig. 1

■ 1. Mechanical Installation

VLT 5000 frequency converters allow side-by-side mounting. The necessary cooling demands a free air
passage of 10 cm above and below the frequency converter (5016-5062 380-500 V, 5008-5027 200-240
V and 5016-5062 550-600 V must have 20 cm).
Drill all holes by using the measurements stated in the table. Please note the difference in unit voltage.
Place the frequency converter on the wall. Tighten up all four screws.
All the below listed measurements are in mm

VLT type A B C a b
Bookstyle IP 20, 200–240 V, (Fig. 2)
5001 - 5003 395 90 260 384 70
5004 - 5006 395 130 260 384 70
Bookstyle IP 20, 380–500 V (Fig. 2)
5001 - 5005 395 90 260 384 70
5006 - 5011 395 130 260 384 70
Compact IP 54, 200–240 V (Fig. 3)
5001 - 5003 460 282 195 260 258
5004 - 5006 530 282 195 330 258
5008 - 5011 810 350 280 560 326
5016 - 5027 940 400 280 690 375
Fig. 2
Compact IP 54, 380–500 V (Fig. 3)
5001 - 5005 460 282 195 260 258
5006 - 5011 530 282 195 330 258
5016 - 5027 810 350 280 560 326
5032 - 5062 940 400 280 690 375
Compact IP 20, 200–240 V (Fig. 4)
5001 - 5003 395 220 160 384 200
5004 - 5006 395 220 200 384 200
5008 560 242 260 540 200 Fig. 3
5011 - 5016 700 242 260 680 200
5022 - 5027 800 308 296 780 270
Compact IP 20, 380–500 V (Fig. 4)
5001 - 5005 395 220 160 384 200
5006 - 5011 395 220 200 384 200
5016 - 5022 560 242 260 540 200
5027 - 5032 700 242 260 680 200
5042 - 5062 800 308 296 780 270

Fig. 4

6 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ 2. Electrical Installation, power

NOTE: The terminals are detachable on VLT 5001 - 5006, 200 - 240 V, VLT 5001 - 5011, 380 - 500
V and VLT 5001 - 5011, 550 - 600 V
Connect the mains supply to the mains terminals L1, L2, L3 of the frequency converter and to the earth
connection (fig. 5-9). Cable relief fitting is placed on the wall for Bookstyle units. Mount screened motor
cable to the motor terminals U, V, W, PE of the frequency converter. Make sure, the screen is connected
electrically to the drive.

Quick Setup
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Bookstyle IP 20 Compact IP 20 Compact IP 20
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5016 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5016 - 5062 550 - 600 V

Fig. 8 Fig. 9
Bookstyle IP 20 Compact IP 20
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5016 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V 5016 - 5062 550 - 600 V

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ 3. Electrical installation, control leads

Use a screw driver to remove the front cover
under the control panel.
NOTE: The terminals are detachable. Connect a
jumber between terminals 12 and 27 (Fig. 10)

Mount screened cable to external start/stop of

control terminals 12 and 18.

Fig. 10

■ 4. Programming
Min. reference Parameter 204
The frequency converter is programmed
Max. reference Parameter 205
over the control panel.
Ramp up time Parameter 207
Press the QUICK MENU button. The Quick Menu Ramp down time Parameter 208
appears in the display. You choose parameters by
means of arrow up and arrow down. Press the
Set Operation site, Parameter 002 for Local.
CHANGE DATA button to change parameter value.
Data values are changed using the up and down
arrows. Press the left or right buttons to move the
cursor. Press OK to save your parameter setting.

Set the desired language in parameter 001. You

have six possibilities: English, German, French,
Danish, Spanish and Italian.

Set the motor parameters according to the motorplate:

Motor power Parameter 102

Motor voltage Parameter 103
Motor frequency Parameter 104
Motor current Parameter 105
Rated motor speed Parameter 106
Fig. 11

Set frequency interval and ramp times (Fig. 11)

■ 5. Motor Start
Select total or reduced Automatic Motor Adaption
Press the START button to start the motor. Set motor
(AMA) in Parameter 107. For further description of
speed in Parameter 003. Check if the direction of
AMA, see section Automatic Motor Adaption, AMA.
rotations is as shown in the display. It can be changed
by swapping two phases of the motor cable. Press the START button to start the Automatic
Motor Adaption (AMA).
Press the STOP button to stop the motor.
Press the DISPLAY/STATUS button to leave
the Quick Menu.

8 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Introduction

These Operating Instructions are a tool intended for persons who are to install, operate and program
the VLT 5000 Series.
Specific technical publications on the VLT 5000 Series: Operating Instructions, Design Guide and Quick
Setup.

Operating Instructions: Gives instructions in optimum installation, commissioning and service.

Design Guide: Gives all required information for design purposes, and gives a good
insight into the technology, product range, technical data, etc.

Quick Setup: Helps the great majority of users to quickly get their VLT 5000 Series
unit installed and running.

The Operating Instructions and the Quick Setup are delivered with the unit.
When reading these Operating Instructions, you will come across different symbols that require special
attention.
The symbols used are the following:

Indicates a general warning

NB!:
Indicates something to be noted by the reader

Introduction
Indicates a high-voltage warning

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Available literature
Below is a list of the literature available for VLT
5000. It must be noted that there may be deviations
from one country to the next.

Supplied with the unit:

Operating instructions ....................................................................................................................... MG.51.AX.YY
VLT 5300 - 5500 Installation Guide .................................................................................................. MG.56.AX.YY

Communication with VLT 5000:

VLT 5000 Profibus manual ............................................................................................................... MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 DeviceNet manual ............................................................................................................ MG.50.HX.YY
VLT 5000 LonWorks manual ........................................................................................................... MG.50.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Modbus manual .............................................................................................................. MG.10.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Interbus manual ............................................................................................................... MG.10.OX.YY

Application options for VLT 5000:

VLT 5000 SyncPos option manual ................................................................................................... MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 Positioning controller manual ........................................................................................... MG.50.PX.YY
VLT 5000 Synchronising controller manual ....................................................................................... MG.10.NX.YY
Ring spinning option ............................................................................................................................ MI.50.ZX.02
Wobble function option ....................................................................................................................... MI.50.JX.02
Winder and Tension control option ................................................................................................... MG.50.KX.02

Instructions for VLT 5000:

Loadsharing ........................................................................................................................................ MI.50.NX.02
VLT 5000 Brake resistors (Only in English, German and Danish) ....................................................... MI.50.DX.YY
Brake resistors for horisontal applications (VLT 5001 - 5011) (Only in English and German) .............. MI.50.SX.YY
LC filter modules ................................................................................................................................ MI.56.DX.YY
Converter for encoder inputs (5V TTL to 24 V DC) (Only in combined English/German) ...................... MI.50.IX.51
Back Plate to VLT 5000 Series ......................................................................................................... MN.50.XX.02

Various literature for VLT 5000:

Design Guide .................................................................................................................................... MG.51.BX.YY
Data sheet ........................................................................................................................................ MD.50.AX.YY
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S5 system .............................................................. MC.50.CX.02
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S7 system ............................................................... MC.50.AX.02
Hoist and the VLT 5000 series .......................................................................................................... MN.50.RX.02

Miscellaneous (only in English):

Protection against electrical hazards ................................................................................................ MN.90.GX.02
Choice of prefuses ........................................................................................................................... MN.50.OX.02
VLT on IT mains ............................................................................................................................... MN.90.CX.02
Filtering of harmonic currents ............................................................................................................ MN.90.FX.02
Handling aggresive environments ....................................................................................................... MN.90.IX.02
CI-TITM contactors - VLT® frequency converters ................................................................................ MN.90.KX.02
VLT® frequency converters and UniOP operator panels ................................................................... MN.90.HX.02

X = version number
YY = language version

10 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ General technical data

Mains supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage 200-240 V units ...................................................................... 3 x 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%
Supply voltage 380-500 V units ............................................................... 3 x 380/400/415/440/460/500 V ±10%
Supply voltage 550-600 V units .................................................................................... 3 x 550/575/600 V ±10%
Supply frequency ......................................................................................................................... 48/62 Hz +/- 1%
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V and 550-600 V and VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V ....... ±2.0% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V and 550-600 V and VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V ....... ±1.5% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5075-5500, 380-500 V and VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V ................................ ±3.0% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5075-5250, 550-600 V .................................................................................. ±3.0% of rated supply voltage
True Power factor (λ) .................................................................................................... 0.90 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos ϕ) ............................................................................................ near unity (>0.98)
No. of switches on supply input L1, L2, L3 ....................................................................... approx. 1 time/2 min.
Max. shortcircuit rating .......................................................................................................................... 100,000 A
See the section on special conditions in the Design Guide

VLT output data (U, V, W):

Output voltage ............................................................................................................... 0-100% of supply voltage
Output frequency ............................................................................................................. 0 - 132 Hz, 0 - 1000 Hz
Rated motor voltage, 200-240 V units ............................................................................ 200/208/220/230/240 V
Rated motor voltage, 380-500 V units .............................................................. 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 V
Rated motor voltage, 550-600 V units .................................................................................................. 550/575 V
Rated motor frequency ............................................................................................................................ 50/60 Hz
Switching on output ................................................................................................................................ Unlimited
Ramp times .................................................................................................................................... 0.05-3600 sec.

Torque characteristics:
Starting torque, VLT 5001-5027, 200 - 240 V and VLT 5001-5062, 380 - 500 V ....................... 160% for 1 min.
Starting torque, VLT 5032 - 5052, 200 - 240 V and VLT 5075-5500, 380 - 500 V ..................... 150% for 1 min.
Starting torque, VLT 5001 - 5250, 550 - 600 V ........................................................................... 160% for 1 min.
Starting torque .......................................................................................................................... 180% for 0.5 sec.
Acceleration torque ...................................................................................................................................... 100%
Overload torque, VLT 5001-5027, 200 - 240 V and VLT 5001 - 5062, 380 - 500 V
and VLT 5001 - 5250, 550 - 600 V ............................................................................................................. 160%
Overload torque, VLT 5032 - 5052, 200 - 240 V and VLT 5075-5500, 380 - 500 V ................................... 150% Technical data
Arresting torque at 0 rpm (closed loop) ........................................................................................................ 100%
The torque characteristics given are for the frequency converter at the high overload torque level
(160%). At the normal overload torque (110%), the values are lower.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control card, digital inputs:

Number of programmable digital inputs ............................................................................................................... 8
Terminal nos. .......................................................................................................... 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33
Voltage level ......................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)
Voltage level, logical ’0’ ........................................................................................................................... < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logical ’1’ .......................................................................................................................... >10 V DC
Maximum voltage on input ....................................................................................................................... 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................................ 2 k
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................ 3 msec.
Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) except VLT
5001-5250, 550-600 V. In addition, the digital inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card
by connecting an external 24 V DC supply and opening switch 4. See section on Installation of control cables.

Control card, analogue inputs:

No. of programmable analogue voltage inputs/thermistor inputs ......................................................................... 2
Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................................................... 53, 54
Voltage level ...................................................................................................................... 0 - ±10 V DC (scalable)
Input resistance, Ri ...................................................................................................................................... 10 k
No. of programmable analogue current inputs ................................................................................................... 1
Terminal no. ....................................................................................................................................................... 60
Current range ................................................................................................................... 0/4 - ±20 mA (scalable)
Input resistance, Ri ...................................................................................................................................... 200
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + sign
Accuracy on input ........................................................................................................ Max. error 1% of full scale
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................ 3 msec.
Terminal no. ground ........................................................................................................................................... 55
Reliable galvanic isolation: All analogue inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV)
except VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V as well as other inputs and outputs.

Control card, pulse/encoder input:

No. of programmable pulse/encoder inputs ......................................................................................................... 4
Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................... 17, 29, 32, 33
Max. frequency on terminal 17 ..................................................................................................................... 5 kHz
Max. frequency on terminals 29, 32, 33 ................................................................... 20 kHz (PNP open collector)
Max. frequency on terminals 29, 32, 33 ................................................................................... 65 kHz (Push-pull)
Voltage level ......................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)
Voltage level, logical ’0’ ........................................................................................................................... < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logical ’1’ .......................................................................................................................... >10 V DC
Maximum voltage on input ....................................................................................................................... 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................................ 2 k
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................ 3 msec.
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + sign
Accuracy (100-1 kHz), terminals 17, 29, 33 ............................................................. Max. error: 0.5% of full scale
Accuracy (1-5 kHz), terminal 17 ............................................................................... Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Accuracy (1-65 kHz), terminals 29, 33 ..................................................................... Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Reliable galvanic isolation: All pulse/encoder inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), except
VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V. In addition, pulse and encoder inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the
control card by connecting an external 24 V DC supply and opening switch 4. See section on Control cables.

12 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control card, digital/pulse and analogue outputs:

No. of programmable digital and analogue outputs ............................................................................................. 2
Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................................................... 42, 45
Voltage level at digital/pulse output .................................................................................................... 0 - 24 V DC
Minimum load to ground (terminal 39) at digital/pulse output ...................................................................... 600
Frequency ranges (digital output used as pulse output) .......................................................................... 0-32 kHz
Current range at analogue output ...................................................................................................... 0/4 - 20 mA
Maximum load to ground (terminal 39) at analogue output ......................................................................... 500
Accuracy of analogue output .................................................................................... Max. error: 1.5% of full scale
Resolution on analogue output. ....................................................................................................................... 8 bit
Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital and analogue outputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV), except VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V, as well as other inputs and outputs.

Control card, 24 V DC supply:

Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................................................... 12, 13
Max. load (short-circuit protection) ............................................................................................................ 200 mA
Terminal nos. ground .................................................................................................................................. 20, 39
Reliable galvanic isolation: The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV),
except VLT 5001-5250, 550-600 V, but has the same potential as the analogue outputs.

Control card, RS 485 serial communication:

Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................. 68 (TX+, RX+), 69 (TX-, RX-)
Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation.

Relay outputs:
No. of programmable relay outputs ..................................................................................................................... 2
Terminal nos., control card .................................................................................................................... 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC) on 4-5, control card ........................................................................ 50 V AC, 1 A, 60 VA
Max. terminal load (DC) on 4-5, control card ......................................................................... 75 V DC, 1 A, 30 W
Max. terminal load (DC) on 4-5, control card for UL/cUL applications ................... 30 V AC, 1 A / 42.5 V DC, 1A
Terminal nos., power card .................................................................................................. 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC) on 1-3, 1-2, power card ................................................................ 240 V AC, 2 A, 60 VA
Max. terminal load on 1-3, 1-2, power card .................................................................................... 50 V DC, 2 A
Min. terminal load on 1-3, 1-2, power card .................................................... 24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 100 mA
Technical data
Brake resistor terminals (only SB and EB units):
Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................................................... 81, 82

External 24 Volt DC supply:

Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................................................... 35, 36
Voltage range ..................................................................................... 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V DC for 10 sec.)
Max. voltage ripple ..................................................................................................................................... 2 V DC
Power consumption ........................................................................... 15 W - 50 W (50 W for start-up, 20 msec.)
Min. pre-fuse ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Amp
Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation if the external 24 V DC supply is also of the PELV type.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 13

 VLT® 5000 Series

Cable lengths, cross-sections and connectors:

Max. motor cable length, screened cable ................................................................................................... 150 m
Max. motor cable length, unscreened cable ............................................................................................... 300 m
Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 5011 380-500 V ................................................................. 100 m
Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 5011 550-600 V and VLT 5008, normal overload mode, 550-600
V .................................................................................................................................................................... 50 m
Max. brake cable length, screened cable ...................................................................................................... 20 m
Max. loadsharing cable length, screened cable ................................. 25 m from frequency converter to DC bar.
Max. cable cross-section for motor, brake and loadsharing, see next section
Max. cable cross-section for 24 V external DC supply ........................................................... 4.0 mm2 /10 AWG
Max. cross-section for control cables ...................................................................................... 1.5 mm2 /16 AWG
Max. cross-section for serial communication .......................................................................... 1.5 mm2 /16 AWG
If UL/cUL is to be complied with, cable with temperature class 60/75 C must be used
(VLT 5001 - 5062 380 - 500 V, 550 - 600 Vand VLT 5001 - 5027 200 - 240V).
If UL/cUL is to be complied with, cable with temperature class 75 C must be used
(VLT 5075 - 5500 380 - 500 V, VLT 5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V, VLT 5075 - 5250 550 - 600 V).
Connectors are for use of both copper and aluminium cables, unless other is specified.

Accuracy of display readout (parameters 009-012):

Motor current [6] 0-140% load ............................................................ Max. error: ±2.0% of rated output current
Torque % [7], -100 - 140% load .................................................................. Max. error: ±5% of rated motor size
Output [8], power HP [9], 0-90% load ................................................................. Max. error: ±5% of rated output

Control characteristics:
Frequency range ................................................................................................................................ 0 - 1000 Hz
Resolution on output frequency ............................................................................................................. ±0.003 Hz
System response time ............................................................................................................................... 3 msec.
Speed, control range (open loop) .................................................................................... 1:100 of synchro. speed
Speed, control range (closed loop) ................................................................................ 1:1000 of synchro. speed
Speed, accuracy (open loop) ........................................................................... < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 7.5 rpm
>1500 rpm: max. error of 0.5% of actual speed
Speed, accuracy (closed loop) ........................................................................ < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 1.5 rpm
>1500 rpm: max. error of 0.1% of actual speed
Torque control accuracy (open loop) ............................................. 0- 150 rpm: max. error ±20% of rated torque
150-1500 rpm: max. error ±10% of rated torque
>1500 rpm: max. error ±20% of rated torque
Torque control accuracy (speed feedback) ........................................................... Max. error ±5% of rated torque
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor

14 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Externals:
Enclosure ................................................................................................................... IP 00, IP 20, Nema 1, IP 54
Vibration test ................................ 0.7 g RMS 18-1000 Hz random. 3 directions for 2 hours (IEC 68-2-34/35/36)
Max. relative humidity ............................................................................... 93 % (IEC 68-2-3) for storage/transport
Max. relative humidity ............................................. 95 % non condensing (IEC 721-3-3; class 3K3) for operation
Aggresive environment (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) ................................................................................ Uncoated class 3C2
Aggresive environment (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) ................................................................................... Coated class 3C3
Ambient temperature IP 20/Nema 1(high overload torque 160%) ...... Max. 45 C (24-hour average max. 40 C)
Ambient temperature IP 20/Nema 1(normal overload torque 110%) ... Max. 40 C (24-hour average max. 35 C)
Ambient temperature IP 54 (high overload torque 160%) ................... Max. 40 C (24-hour average max. 35 C)
Ambient temperature IP 54 (normal overload torque 110%) ................ Max. 40 C (24-hour average max. 35 C)
Ambient temperature IP 20/54 VLT 5011 500 V ................................ Max. 40 C (24-hour average max. 35 C)
Derating for high ambient temperature, see the Design Guide
Min. ambient temperature in full operation ..................................................................................................... 0 C
Min. ambient temperature at reduced performance ................................................................................... -10 C
Temperature during storage/transport .......................................................................................... -25 - +65/70 C
Max. altitude above sea level .................................................................................................................... 1000 m
Derating for high air altitude, see the Design Guide
EMC standards applied, Emission .......................................... EN 50081-1/2, EN 61800-3, EN 55011, EN 55014
EMC standards applied, Immunity ............................. EN 50082-2, EN 61000-4-2, IEC 1000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5, ENV 50140, ENV 50141, VDE 0160/1990.12
See section on special conditions in the Design Guide
VLT 5001-5250, 550 - 600 V do not comply with EMC or Low Voltage Directives.

VLT 5000 Series protection:

• Electronic motor thermal protection against overload.
• Temperature monitoring of heat-sink ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if the temperature reaches
90 C for IP 00, IP 20 and Nema 1. For IP 54, the cut-out temperature is 80 C. An overtemperature
can only be reset when the temperature of the heat-sink has fallen below 60 C.
• The frequency converter is protected against short-circuiting on motor terminals U, V, W.
• The frequency converter is protected against earth fault on motor terminals U, V, W.
• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if
the intermediate circuit voltage gets too high or too low.
• If a motor phase is missing, the frequency converter cuts out, see parameter 234 Motor phase monitor.
• If there is a mains fault, the frequency converter is able to carry out a controlled deramping.
• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter will cut out when a load is placed on the motor. Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 15

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical data

■ Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3 x 200 - 240V

According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006
Output current IVLT,N [A] 3.7 5.4 7.8 10.6 12.5 15.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] 5.9 8.6 12.5 17 20 24.3
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 1.5 2.2 3.2 4.4 5.2 6.3
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3 4 5
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )
Rated input current (200 V)IL,N [A] 3.4 4.8 7.1 9.5 11.5 14.5
Max. cable
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
cross-section power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/10 16/10 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Efficiency3) 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Weight IP 20 EB
[kg] 7 7 7 9 9 9.5
Bookstyle
Weight IP 20 EB
[kg] 8 8 8 10 10 10
Compact
Weight IP 54 Compact [kg] 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
Power loss at
[W] 58 76 95 126 172 194
max. load.
IP 20 IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
/IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

16 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5008 5011 5016 5022 5027
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] 32 46 61.2 73 88
IVLT, MAX (60
35.2 50.6 67.3 80.3 96.8
s) [A]
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 13.3 19.1 25.4 30.3 36.6
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 10 15 20 25 30

High overload torque (160 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] 25 32 46 61.2 73
IVLT, MAX (60
40 51.2 73.6 97.9 116.8
s) [A]
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 10 13 19 25 30
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 7.5 10 15 20 25
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
brake and loadsharing [mm2 /AWG]2)5) IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake
10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6
and loadsharing4) [mm2 /AWG]2)

Rated input current (200 V) IL,N [A] 32 46 61 73 88

Max. cable cross-section, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 50 60 80 125 125
Pre-fuse SMPS [-]/UL6) ) [A] 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0
Efficiency3) 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 21 25 27 34 36
Weight IP 54 [kg] 38 40 53 55 56
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque [W]
340 426 626 833 994
(160 %)
- normal overload torque [W]
426 545 783 1042 1243
(110 %)
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54
Technical data

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to
comply with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Ferras Shawmut type Y85443, Danfoss ordering no. 612Z1182
must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 17

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 115 143 170
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 127 158 187
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 104 130 154
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (231240 V) 115 143 170
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (200230 V) 41 52 61
SVLT,N [kVA] (231240 V) 41 52 61
Typical shaft output (200-240 V) PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45
Typical shaft output (200-240 V)PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 88 115 143
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 132 173 215
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 80 104 130
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (231-240 V) 120 156 195
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (200-230 V) 32 41 52
SVLT,N [kVA] (231-240 V) 32 41 52
Typical shaft output (200-240 V) PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37
Typical shaft output (200-240 V) PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor,
brake and loadsharing (200-240) [mm2 ]5) 70 90 120
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
brake and loadsharing (200-240) [mm2 ]5) 95 95 120
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor,
brake and loadsharing (200-240) [AWG]2) 5) 1/0 3/0 4/0
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
brake and loadsharing (200-240) [AWG]2) 5) 3/0 250mcm 300mcm
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5) 10/8 10/8 10/8

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.

18 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052
Rated input current IL,N [A] (230 V) 110% 101.3 126.6 149.9
Rated input current IL,N [A] (230 V) 150% 77.9 101.3 126.6
Max. cross-section of copper cable to
70 90 120
power (200-240 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
95 95 120
power (200-240 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to
1/0 3/0 4/0
power (200-240 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
3/0 250mcm 300mcm
power (200-240 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
10/8 10/8 10/8
brake and loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. pre-fuses (mains)[-]/UL1) [A] 150 200 250
Integral pre-fuses, (softcharge circuit)
15/15 15/15 15/15
[-]/UL6) [A]
Integral pre-fuses, (softcharge resistors)
12/12 12/12 12/12
[-]/UL7) [A]
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5/5
Efficiency3) 0.96-0.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 90 90 90
Weight Nema 1 (IP
[kg] 101 101 101
20) EB
Weight IP 54 [kg] 104 104 104
Power loss at max. load [W] 1089 1361 1613
Enclosure IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54 / Nema 1 with terminals

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1147 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1192 must be
used. Technical data
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 19

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 2.2 2.8 4.1 5.6
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 3.5 4.5 6.5 9
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 1.9 2.6 3.4 4.8
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 3 4.2 5.5 7.7
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 1.7 2.1 3.1 4.3
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 1.6 2.3 2.9 4.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )

Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 2.3 2.6 3.8 5.3
IL,N [A] (460 V) 1.9 2.5 3.4 4.8
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/6 16/6 16/10 16/10
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB Bookstyle [kg] 7 7 7 7.5
Weight IP 20 EB Compact[kg] 8 8 8 8.5
Weight IP 20 Compact [kg] 11.5 11.5 11.5 12
Power loss at max. load [W] 55 67 92 110
IP 20 IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
/IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

20 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5005 5006 5008 5011

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 7.2 10 13 16
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 11.5 16 20.8 25.6
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 6.3 8.2 11 14.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 10.1 13.1 17.6 23.2
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 5.5 7.6 9.9 12.2
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 5.5 7.1 9.5 12.6
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7.5 10
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )

Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 7 9.1 12.2 15.0

IL,N [A] (460 V) 6 8.3 10.6 14.0
Max. cable cross-section power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB Bookstyle [kg] 7.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Weight IP 20 EB Compact [kg] 8.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Weight IP 20 EB Compact [kg] 12 14 14 14
Power loss at max. [W]
139 198 250 295
load.
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 21

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5016 5022 5027

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 32 37.5 44
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 35.2 41.3 48.4
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 27.9 34 41.4
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 30.7 37.4 45.5
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 24.4 28.6 33.5
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 24.2 29.4 35.8
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 24 32 37.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 38.4 51.2 60
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 21.7 27.9 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 34.7 44.6 54.4
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 18.3 24.4 28.6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 18.8 24.2 29.4
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4) IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing [mm2]/[AWG] 10/8 10/8 10/8
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 32 37.5 44
IL,N [A] (460 V) 27.6 34 41
Max. cable cross-section, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
power [mm2 ]/[AWG] IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 63/40 63/50 63/60
Pre-fuse SMPS [-]/UL5) [A] 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0
Efficiency 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 21 22 27
Weight IP 54 [kg] 41 41 42
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque [W]
419 559 655
(160 %)
- normal overload [W]
559 655 768
torque (110 %)
IP IP
IP 20/IP
Enclosure 20/IP 20/IP
54
54 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to
comply with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Ferraz shawmut type FA Y85443, Danfoss ordering no. 612Z1182
must be used.

22 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052 5062
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 61 73 90 106
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 67.1 80.3 99 117
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 54 65 78 106
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 59.4 71.5 85.8 117
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 46.5 55.6 68.6 80.8
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 46.8 56.3 67.5 91.8
55
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45 75 @
500 V
75
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60 100 @
500 V
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 44 61 73 90
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 70.7 97.6 116.8 135
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 41.4 54 65 80
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 66.2 86 104 120
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 33.5 46.5 55.6 68.6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 35.9 46.8 56.3 69.3
45
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37 55 @
500 V
60
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50 75 @
500 V
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) IP20 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG] 10/8 10/8 16/6 16/6
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 60 72 89 104
IL,N [A] (460 V) 53 64 77 104
Max. cable cross-section IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
power[mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 5) IP 20 35/2 35/2 50/0 50/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 80/80 100/100 125/125 150/150
4.0/
Pre-fuse SMPS [-]/UL6) [A] 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0 4.0/4.0
4.0
Efficiency 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 28 41 42 43
Weight IP 54 [kg] 54 56 56 60
Power loss at max. load.
Technical data
- high overload torque [W]
768 1065 1275 1571
(160 %)
- normal overload torque [W]
1065 1275 1571 1851
(110 %)
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply with IP
20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Ferraz shawmut type FA Y85443, Danfoss ordering no. 612Z1182 must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 23

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5075 5100 5125

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 147 177 212
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 162 195 233
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 130 160 190
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 143 176 209
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 102 123 147
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 113 139 165
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 110
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 90 110 132
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 125 150 200
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 106 147 177
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 159 221 266
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 106 130 160
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 159 195 240
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 73.0 102 123
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 92.0 113 139
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 55 75 90
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 75 100 125
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 110
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
95 120 2x70
and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
70 95 2x70
and loadsharing (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
120 150 2x70
brake and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
90 120 2x70
brake and loadsharing (441-500) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
3/0 4/0 2x1/0
and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2/0 3/0 2x1/0
and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
250mcm 300mcm 2x2/0
motor,brake and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
4/0 250mcm 2x2/0
brake and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 10/8 10/8
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.

24 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5075 5100 5125

Max input current 110% IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 145 174 208
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 128 158 185
Max input current 150% IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 103 145 174
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 103 128 158
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power (380-440
95 120 2x70
V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power (441-500
70 95 2x70
V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power
120 150 2x70
(380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power
90 120 2x70
(441-500 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power (380-440
3/0 4/0 2x1/0
V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power (441-500
2/0 3/0 2x1/0
V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power
250mcm 300mcm 2x2/0
(380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power
4/0 250mcm 2x2/0
(441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 10/8 10/8
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 250/220 250/250 300/300
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge circuit) [-]/UL6) [A] 15/15 15/15 30/30
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge resistors) [-]/UL7) [A] 12/12 12/12 12/12
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0
Efficiency 0.96-0.97 0.96-0.97 0.96-0.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 109 109 146
Weight Nema 1 (IP 20)
[kg] 121 121 161
EB
Weight IP 54 [kg] 124 124 177
Power loss at max. load [W] 1970 2380 2860 Technical data
IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54 /
Enclosure
Nema 1with terminals

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1147 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1192 must be
used.
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 25

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5150 5200 5250
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 260 315 368
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 286 347 405
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 240 302 361
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 264 332 397
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 180 218 255
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 208 262 313
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 200 250 300
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 160 200 250
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 250 300 350
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 212 260 315
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 318 390 473
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 190 240 302
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 285 360 453
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 147 180 218
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 165 208 262
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 110 132 160
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 150 200 250
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 200 150 300
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2x70 2x95 2x120
and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2x70 2x95 2x120
and loadsharing (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
2x120 2x120 2x150
brake and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
2x95 2x120 2x150
brake and loadsharing (441-500) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcm
and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2x1/0 2x3/0 2x4/0
and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
2x4/0 2x250mcm 2x350mcm
brake and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor,
2x3/0 2x250mcm 2x300mcm
brake and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 16/6 16/6
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.

26 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5150 5200 5250

Max input current
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 256 317 363
110%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 236 304 356
Max input current
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 206 256 318
150%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 185 236 304
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power
2x70 2x95 2x120
(380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power
2x70 2x95 2x120
(441-500 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
2x120 2x120 2x150
power (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
2x95 2x120 2x150
power (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power
2x2/0 2x3/0 2x250mcm
(380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power
2x1/0 2x3/0 2x4/0
(441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
2x4/0 2x250mcm 2x350mcm
power (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to
2x3/0 2x250mcm 2x300mcm
power (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 10/8 16/6
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 350/350 450/400 500/500
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge circuit) [-]/UL6) [A] 30/30 30/30 30/30
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge resistors) [-]/UL7)
12/12 12/12 12/12
[A]
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0
Efficiency 0.96-0.97 0.96-0.97 0.96-0.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 146 146 146
Weight Nema 1 (IP 20)
[kg] 161 161 161
EB
Weight IP 54 [kg] 177 177 177
Power loss at max. load [W] 3810 4770 5720 Technical data
IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54 / Nema 1
Enclosure
with terminals

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1148 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1192 must be
used.
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 27

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5300 5350 5450 5500

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 480 600 658 745
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 528 660 724 820
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 443 540 590 678
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 487 594 649 746
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 333 416 456 516
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 384 468 511 587
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 250 315 355 400
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 300 350 450 500
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 315 355 400 500
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 350 450 500 600
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 395 480 600 658
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 593 720 900 987
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 361 443 540 590
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 542 665 810 885
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 274 333 416 456
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 313 384 468 511
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 200 250 315 355
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 300 350 450 500
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [kW] 250 315 355 400
Typical shaft output (441-500 V) PVLT,N [HP] 350 450 500 600
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake 2x150 2x185 2x240 2x300
and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x70 3x95 3x120 3x150
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake 2x120 2x150 2x185 2x300
and loadsharing (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x70 3x95 3x95 3x120
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor, brake 2x185 2x240 2x300
and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x120 3x150 3x185 3x185
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor, brake 2x150 2x185 2x240
and loadsharing (441-500) [mm2 ]5) 3x95 3x120 3x150 3x185
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake 2x250mcm 2x350mcm 2x400mcm 2x500mcm
and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5) 3x2/0 3x3/0 3x4/0 3x250mcm
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake 2x4/0 2x300mcm 2x350mcm 2x500mxm
and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5) 31/0 3x3/0 3x3/0 3x4/0
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor, brake 2x350mcm 2x500mcm 2x600mcm 2x700mcm
and loadsharing (380-440 V) AWG]2) 5) 3x4/0 3x250mcm 3x300mcm 3x350mcm
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to motor, brake 2x300mcm 2x400mcm 2x500mcm 2x600mcm
and loadsharing (441-500 V) AWG]2) 5) 3x3/0 3x4/0 3x250mcm 3x300mcm

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 2 x M12/3 x M12.

28 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5300 5350 5450 5500

Rated input current
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 467 584 648 734
110%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 431 526 581 668
Rated input current
IL,MAX [A] (400 V) 389 467 584 648
150%
IL,MAX [A] (460 V) 356 431 526 581
Max. cross-section of copper cable 2x150 2x185 2x240 2x300
to power (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x70 3x95 3x120 3x150
Max. cross-section of copper cable 2x120 2x150 2x185 2x300
to power (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x70 3x95 3x95 3x120
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable 2x185 2x240 2x300
to power (380-440 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x120 3x150 3x185 3x185
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable 2x150 2x185 2x240
to power (441-500 V) [mm2 ]5) 3x95 3x120 3x150 3x185
Max. cross-section of copper cable 2x250mcm 2x350mcm 2x400mcm 2x500mcm
to power (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3x2/0 3x3/0 3x4/0 3x250mcm
Max. cross-section of copper cable 2x4/0 2x300mcm 2x350mcm 2x500mcm
to power (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 31/0 3x3/0 3x3/0 3x4/0
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable 2x350mcm 2x500mcm 2x600mcm 2x700mcm
to power (380-440 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3x4/0 3x250mcm 3x300mcm 3x350mcm
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable 2x300mcm 2x400mcm 2x500mcm 2x600mcm
to power (441-500 V) [AWG]2) 5) 3x3/0 3x4/0 3x250mcm 3x300mcm
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 630/600 700/700 800/800 800/800
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge circuit)
15/15 15/15 15/15 30/30
[-]/UL6) [A]
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge resistors)
12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12
[-]/UL7) [A]
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0 5.0/5.0
Efficiency 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 480 515 560 585
Weight Nema 1 [kg] 595 630 675 700
Weight IP 54 [kg] 605 640 685 710
Power loss at max. load [W] 7500 9450 10650 12000
Enclosure IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54

Technical data
1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.
2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 2 x M12/3 x M12.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3489 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1147 must be
used.
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 29

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1.5 2 3 4
Highl overload torque (160%):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.6 2.9 4.1
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 4.2 4.6 6.6
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.7 3.8 4.3 6.2
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 1.7 2.5 2.8 3.9
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 4.0 5.1
IL,N [A] (600 V) 2.2 2.5 3.6 4.6
High overload torque ( 160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.5 2.8 4.0
IL,N [A] (600 V) 1.6 2.2 2.5 3.6
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 3 4 5 6
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Power loss at max.
[W] 63 71 102 129
load.
Enclosure IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

1. For type of fuses see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

30 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5005 5006 5008 5011

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 6.4 9.5 11.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 7.0 10.5 12.7 12.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 6.7 9.9 12.1 12.1
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10.0 10.0
Highl overload torque (160%):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 5.2 6.4 9.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 8.3 10.2 15.2 18.4
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 7.8 9.8 14.4 17.6
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 5.0 6.1 9.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7.5 10
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 6.2 9.2 11.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 5.7 8.4 10.3 10.3
High overload torque ( 160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 5.1 6.2 9.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 4.6 5.7 8.4 10.3
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 8 10 15 20
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Power loss at max.
[W] 160 136 288 288
load.
Enclosure IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Technical data

1. For type of fuses see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 31

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5016 5022 5027

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 23 28 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 25 31 37
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 22 27 32
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 24 30 35
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 22 27 32
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 22 27 32
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 18 23 28
IVLT, (60 s) [A] (550 V)
MAX 29 37 45
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 17 22 27
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 27 35 43
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 17 22 27
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 17 22 27
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. coppercable cross-section to motor, 16 16 35
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4) 6 6 2
Min. cable cross-section to motor, 0.5 0.5 10
brake and loadsharing [mm2]/[AWG] 20 20 8
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 22 27 33
IL,N [A] (600 V) 21 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 18 22 27
IL,N [A] (600 V) 16 21 25
Max. cable cross-section, 16 16 35
power [mm2 ]/[AWG] 6 6 2
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 30 35 45
Efficiency 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 23 23 30
Power loss at max. load. 576 707 838
Enclosure IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to
comply with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Ferraz shawmut type FA Y85443, Danfoss ordering no. 612Z1182
must be used.

32 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052 5062
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 43 54 65 81
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 47 59 72 89
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 45 57 68 85
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 41 51 62 77
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45 55
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60 75
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 34 43 54 65
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 54 69 86 104
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 51 66 83 99
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 32 41 51 62
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37 45
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50 60
Max. cable cross-section to motor, 35 50 50 50
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) 2 1/0 1/0 1/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor, 10 16 16 16
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG] 8 6 6 6
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 42 53 63 79
IL,N [A] (600 V) 38 49 58 72
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 33 42 53 63
IL,N [A] (600 V) 30 38 49 58
Max. cable cross-section 35 50 50 50
power[mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 5) 2 1/0 1/0 1/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 60 75 90 100
Efficiency 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 30 48 48 48
Power loss at max. load. 1074 1362 1624 2016
Enclosure IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP20
Technical data
1. For type of fuse see section Fuses
2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to
comply with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Ferraz shawmut type FA Y85443, Danfoss ordering no. 612Z1182
must be used.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 33

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5075 5100 5125

Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 104 131 151
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 114 144 166
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 99 125 144
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 109 128 158
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 99 125 144
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 99 124 143
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 75 90 11
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 100 125 150
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 81 104 131
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 130 166 210
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 77 99 125
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 123 158 200
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 77 99 125
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 77 99 124
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [kW] 55 75 90
Typical shaft output (380-440 V) PVLT,N [HP] 75 100 125
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
120 120 120
and loadsharing (380-440 V) [mm2 ]
4/0 4/0 4/0
[AWG]
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
185 185 185
and loadsharing (441-500 V) [mm2 ]
300 mcm 300 mcm 300 mcm
[AWG]
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and 6 6 6
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG] 8 8 8

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.

34 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5075 5100 5125
Max input current 110% IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 101 128 147
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 92 117 134
Max input current 150% IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 79 101 128
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 72 92 117
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power [mm2 ] 120 120 120
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power [mm2 ] 185 185 185
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power[AWG] 4/0 4/0 4/0
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power[AWG] 300 mcm 300 mcm 300 mcm
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 10/8 10/8
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 125 175 200
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge circuit) [-]/UL6) [A] 15/15 15/15 15/15
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge resistors) [-]/UL7) [A] 12/12 12/12 12/12
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5 5 5
Efficiency 0.960.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 109 109 109
Weight Nema 1EB [kg] 121 121 121
Power loss at max. load [W] 2560 3275 3775
Enclosure IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1147 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1192 must be
used.
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 35

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5150 5200 5250
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 201 253 289
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 221 278 318
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 192 242 289
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 211 266 318
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 191 241 275
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 191 241 288
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 132 160 200
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 200 250 300
High overload torque (150 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 151 201 253
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 242 322 405
IVLT,N [A] (575V) 144 192 242
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 230 307 387
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 144 191 241
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 143 191 241
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 110 132 160
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 150 200 250
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake
2x120 2x120 2x120
and loadsharing [mm2 ]
2x4/0 2x4/0 2x4/0
AWG
Max. cross-section of copper cable to motor, brake 2x185 2x185
2x185
and loadsharing [mm2 ] 2x300 2x300
2x300 mcm
AWG mcm mcm
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
2x6 2x6 2x6
loadsharing4) [mm2 ]
2x8 2x8 2x8
AWG

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.

36 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5150 5200 5250
Max input current 110% IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 196 246 281
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 179 226 270
Max input current 150% IL,MAX [A] (550 V) 147 196 246
IL,MAX [A] (575 V) 134 179 226
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power [mm2 ] 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 120
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power [mm2 ] 2 x 185 2 x185 2 x 185
Max. cross-section of copper cable to power[AWG] 2 x4/0 2 x4/0 2 x4/0
2 x 300 2 x 300 2 x 300
Max. cross-section of aluminium cable to power[AWG]
mcm mcm mcm
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake and
10/8 10/8 10/8
loadsharing4) [mm2/ AWG]2) 5)
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL1 ) [A] 250 350 400
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge circuit) [-]/UL6) [A] 30/30 30/30 30/30
Integral pre-fuses (softcharge resistors) [-]/UL7) [A] 12/12 12/12 12/12
Integral pre-fuses (SMPS) [-]/UL8) [A] 5 5 5
Efficiency 0.960.97
Weight IP 00 [kg] 146 146 146
Weight Nema 1EB [kg] 161 161 161
Power loss at max. load [W] 5030 6340 7570
Enclosure IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20)

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Always
comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Connection stud 1 x M8/2 x M8.
6. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, AC Littelfuse type KLK, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1147 must be used.
7. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, DC Littelfuse type KLKD, Danfoss ordering no. 176F1192 must be
used.
8. If UL/cUL is to be complied with, Bussmann type KTK-5, Danfoss ordering no. 175L3437 must be used.

Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 37

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Fuses
UL compliance
To comply with UL/cUL approvals, pre-fuses according to the table below must be used.

200-240 V

VLT Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

5001 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 or A2K-10R
5002 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 or A2K-10R
5003 KTN-R25 5017906-016 KLN-R15 ATM-R15 or A2K-15R
5004 KTN-R20 5017906-020 KLN-R20 ATM-R20 or A2K-20R
5005 KTN-R25 5017906-025 KLN-R25 ATM-R25 or A2K-25R
5006 KTN-R30 5017906-032 KLN-R30 ATM-R30 or A2K-30R
5008 KTN-R50 5017906-050 KLN-R50 A2K-50R
5011 KTN-R60 5017906-063 KLN-R60 A2K-60R
5016 KTN-R85 5017906-080 KLN-R80 A2K-80R
5022 KTN-R125 5017906-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5027 KTN-R125 5017906-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5032 KTN-R150 5017906-150 L25S-150 A25X-150
5042 KTN-R200 5017906-200 L25S-200 A25X-200
5052 KTN-R250 5017906-250 L25S-250 A25X-250

380-500 V
Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut
5001 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 or A6K-6R
5002 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 or A6K-6R
5003 KT-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 or A6K-10R
5004 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 or A6K-10R
5005 KTS-R15 5017906-016 KLS-R16 ATM-R16 or A6K-16R
5006 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 or A6K-20R
5008 KTS-R25 5017906-025 KLS-R25 ATM-R25 or A6K-25R
5011 KTS-R30 5012406-032 KLS-R30 A6K-30R
5016 KTS-R40 5017906-040 KLS-R40 A6K-40R
5022 KTS-R50 5014006-050 KLS-R50 A6K-50R
5027 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R60 A6K-60R
5032 KTS-R80 2028220-100 KLS-R80 A6K-180R
5042 KTS-R100 2028220-125 KLS-R100 A6K-100R
5052 KTS-R125 2028220-125 KLS-R125 A6K-125R
5062 KTS-R150 2028220-160 KLS-R150 A6K-150R
5075 FWH-R220 2028220-200 L50S-225 A50-P225
5100 FWH-R250 2028220-224 L50S-250 A50-P250
5125 FWH-R300 2028220-315 L50S-300 A50-P300
5150 FWH-R350 2028220-315 L50S-350 A50-P350
5200 FWH-R400 206xx32-400 L50S-400 A50-P400
5250 FWH-R500 206xx32-500 L50S-500 A50-P500
5300 FWH-R600 206xx32-600 L50S-600 A50-P600
5350 FWH-R700 206xx32-700 L50S-700 A50-P700
5450 FWH-R800 206xx32-800 L50S-800 A50-P800
5500 FWH-R800 206xx32-800 L50S-800 A50-P800

For VLT 5001-5250; 550-600 V please contact Danfoss.

38 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V drives.

FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V drives.

KLSR fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute KLNR fuses for 240 V drives.
L50S fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute L50S fuses for 240 V drives.

A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V drives.
A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V drives.

Non UL compliance
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, we recommend the above mentioned fuses or:

VLT 5001-5027 200-240 V type gG

VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V type gG
VLT 5001-5062 550-600 V type gG
VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V type gR
VLT 5075-5500 380-500 V type gR
VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V type gR

1. Not following the recommendation may result in unnecessary damage of the drive in case of malfunction. Fuses must be designed
for protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100000 Arms (symmetrical), 500 V maximum.

Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 39

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical dimensions
All the below listed measurements are in mm.
A B C D a b ab/be Type
Bookstyle IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 90 260 384 70 100 A
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
395 130 260 384 70 100 A
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Compact IP 00
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V 800 370 355 780 270 225 B
5075 - 5125 550 - 600 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V
1400 420 400 1380 350 225 B
5150 - 5250 550 - 600 V
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 1896 1099 494 1847 1065 4001) I
Compact IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 220 160 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V 395 220 200 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V (IP 20 and Nema 1)
5008 200 - 240 V
5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V 560 242 260 540 200 200 D
5016 - 5022 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V
5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V 700 242 260 680 200 200 D
5027 - 5032 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5042 - 5062 380 - 500 V 800 308 296 780 270 200 D
5042 - 5062 550 - 600 V (Nema 1)
Compact Nema 1 with terminals
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
1004 370 335 780 270 225 E
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V 1604 420 400 1380 350 225 E
Compact Nema 1/IP20
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V 954 370 335 780 270 225 E
5075 - 5125 550 - 600 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V
1554 420 400 1380 350 225 E
5150 - 5250 550 - 600 V
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 2060 1200 600 - - 4001 H
Compact IP 54
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
460 282 195 85 260 258 100 F
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
530 282 195 85 330 258 100 F
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
810 350 280 70 560 326 200 F
5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V
5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V
940 400 280 70 690 375 200 F
5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V
937 495 421 - 830 374 225 G
5075 - 5100 380 - 500 V
5125 - 5250 380 - 500 V 1572 495 425 - 1465 445 225 G
5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V 2010 1200 600 - - - 4001) H

ab: Minimum space above enclosure

be: Minimum space below enclosure
1: Only above enclosure (ab) IP 00 when built in a Rittal cabinet.

40 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical dimensions, cont.

Technical data

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 41

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Type H, Nema 1, IP 54

■ Type I, IP 00

42 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Mechanical installation ■ Field mounting

IP 00 IP 20 / IP 54
Please pay attention to the requirements
Nema 1
that apply to integration and field mounting
Bookstyle - No -
kit, see the below list. The information
Compact No No OK
given in the list must be observed to avoid serious
damage or injury, especially when installing large units. Compact w/IP 4x top
cover
The frequency converter must be installed vertically.
VLT 5001-5006 200 V - OK OK
The frequency converter is cooled by means of air VLT 5001-5011 500 V - OK OK
circulation. For the unit to be able to release its VLT 5001-5011 575 V - OK -
cooling air, the minimum distance over and below the
Compact w/IP 20 terminal cover
unit must be as shown in the illustration below.
VLT 5008-5027 200 V - OK OK
To protect the unit from overheating, it must
VLT 5016-5052 500 V - OK OK
be ensured that the ambient temperature does
VLT 5016-5062 575 V - OK -
not rise above the max. temperature stated for
the frequency converter and that the 24-hour
average temperature is not exceeded. The max.
temperature and 24-hour average can be seen
from the General Technical section.
When installing the frequency converter on a
non flat surface, i.e. a frame, please consult
the instruction, MN.50.XX.YY.
If the ambient temperature is in the range of 45
C - 55 C, derating of the frequency converter will
be required in accordance with the diagram in the
Design Guide. The service life of the frequency
converter will be reduced if no allowance is made
for the derating for ambient temperature.

■ Enclosure type

IP 00 IP 20/Nema 1 IP 54
Bookstyle - OK -
Compact OK OK OK Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 43

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Installation of VLT 5001-5250

All VLT frequency converters must be installed in
Side by side/flange by flange
a way that ensures proper cooling.
All VLT frequency converters can be mounted
Cooling
side by side/flange by flange.

All Bookstyle and Compact units require a minimum

space above and below the enclosure.
d [mm] Comments
Bookstyle
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100
Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5001-5011, 280-500 V 100

Compact (all enclosure types)

VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V 100 Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5001-5011, 550-600 V 100

VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V 200

VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V 200 Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5016-5062, 550-600 V 200

5032-5052, 200-240 V 225

Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
5075-5250, 380-500 V 225
IP 54 filter mats must be changed when they are dirty.
5075-5250, 550-600 V 225

44 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Installation of VLT 5300-5500 380-500 V Compact

Nema 1 (IP 20) andIP 54
Side-by-side
Cooling

Compact Nema 1 (IP 20) and IP 54

All Nema 1 (IP 20) and IP 54 units in the

above-mentioned series can be installed side by
side without any space between them, since these
units do not require cooling on the sides.

All units in the above-mentioned series require a

minimum space of 400 mm above the enclosure
and must be installed on a plane floor. This applies
to both Nema 1 (IP 20) and IP 54 units.
Gaining access to the VLT 5300-5500 requires
a minimum space of 605 mm in front of
the frequency converter.

Filter mats in IP 54 units have to be changed

when they are dirty.

■ IP 00 VLT 5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V VLT 5300 - 5500 Installation Guide, MG.56.AX.YY.
The IP 00 unit is designed for installation in a cabinet Please note, that the same conditions as for
when installed according to the instructions in the Nema 1 / IP 54 must be fulfilled.
Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 45

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation All terminals for the control cables are located under
the protective cover of the frequency converter. The
The voltage on the frequency converter is protective cover (see drawing) can be removed by
dangerous when the unit is connected to means of a pointed object - a screwdriver or similar.
mains. Incorrect installation of the motor or
the frequency converter may lead to material damage
or serious injury or it may be fatal. Consequently, the
instructions in this manual as well as national and local
rules and safety regulations must be complied with.
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal, even after
the mains supply has been disconnected.
Using VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V and 380-500
V: wait at least 4 minutes.
Using VLT 5008-5052, 200-240 V: wait
at least 15 minutes.
Using VLT 5008-5500, 380-500 V: wait
at least 15 minutes.
Using VLT 5001-5005, 550-600 V: wait
at least 4 minutes.
Using VLT 5006-5022, 550-600 V: wait
at least 15 minutes.
Using VLT 5027-5250, 550-600 V: wait
at least 30 minutes.

NB!: Once the protective cover has been removed,

It is the user’s or certified electrician’s the actual EMC-correct installation can start. See
responsibility to ensure correct earthing and drawings in the section, EMC correct installation.
protection in accordance with applicable
national and local norms and standards.

46 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Compact IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V
VLT 5001-5011, 550-600 V

Bookstyle IP 20
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V

Compact IP 54
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V

Bookstyle
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Installation

Compact IP 20 Nema 1/IP 54

VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
VLT 5001-5011 550-600 V

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 47

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Compact IP 54
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
Compact IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 550-600 V

Compact IP 54
Compact IP 20/Nema 1
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 550-600 V

48 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V Compact IP 54
VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V
VLT 5075-5125 550-600 V VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V Compact IP 54
VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V
Installation

VLT 5075-5125 550-600 V VLT 5075-5100 380-500 V

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 49

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

Compact IP 54
VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V
VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V
VLT 5150-5250 550-600 V

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V Compact IP 54
VLT 5150-5250 550-600 V VLT 5125-5250 380-500 V

50 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Nema 1 with terminals and grounding bar

VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V
VLT 5075-5250, 380-500 V

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/IP 54

without disconnector and mains fuses
VLT 5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 51

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/IP 54

with disconnector and mains fuses
VLT 5300 - 5500 380 - 500 V

52 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, enclosures

Compact IP 00/Nema 1 (IP 20)/ IP 54

VLT 5300-5500, 380-500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 53

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ EMC-correct electrical installation • An uninterrupted high frequency connection

The following is a guideline to good engineering between the frequency converter and the motor
practice, when installing drives. Following these units is required for IP54 units.
guidelines is advised, where compliance with EN
50081, EN 55011 or EN 61800-3 First environment The illustration shows an example of an EMC-correct
is required. If the installation is in EN 61800-3 electrical installation of an IP 20 frequency converter;
Second environment, then it is acceptable to the frequency converter has been fitted in an
deviate from these guidelines. It is however not installation cabinet with an output contactor and
recommended. See also CE labelling, Emission connected to a PLC, which in this example is
and EMC test results under special conditions in installed in a separate cabinet. In IP 54 units and
the Design Guide for further details. VLT 5075-5250, 380-500 V and VLT 5032-5052,
200-240 VAC in Nema 1/IP20 enclosure screened
Good engineering practice to ensure EMC-correct cables are connected by using EMC conduits to
electrical installation: ensure proper EMC performance. See illustration.
Other ways of making the installation may have as
• Use only braided screened/armoured motor
good an EMC performance, provided the above guide
cables and braided screened/armoured control
lines to engineering practice are followed.
cables. The screen should provide a minimum
coverage of 80%. The screen material must Please note, that when the installation is not carried
be metal, not limited to but typically copper, through according to the guideline as well as when
aluminium, steel or lead. There are no special unscreened cables and control wires are used, some
requirements for the mains cable. emission requirements are not complied with, although
• Installations using rigid metal conduits are not the immunity requirements are fulfilled. See the section
required to use screened cable, but the motor EMC test results in the Design Guide for further details.
cable must be installed in conduit separate from
the control and mains cables. Full connection
of the conduit from the drive to the motor is
required. The EMC performance of flexible
conduits varies a lot and information from the
manufacturer must be obtained.
• Connect the screen/armour/conduit to earth
at both ends for motor cables as well as for
control cables. See also Earthing of braided
screened/armoured control cables.
• Avoid terminating the screen/armour with twisted
ends (pigtails). Such a termination increases the
high frequency impedance of the screen, which
reduces its effectiveness at high frequencies. Use
low impedance cable clamps or glands instead.
• It is important to ensure good electrical contact
between the mounting plate on which the
frequency converter is installed and the metal
chassis of the frequency converter. This however
does not apply to IP54 units as they are
designed for wall mounting and VLT5075-5500,
380-500 VAC and VLT5032-5052, 200-240
VAC in IP20/Nema1 enclosure.
• Use starwashers and galvanically conductive
installation plates to secure good electrical
connections for IP00 and IP20 installations.
• Avoid using unscreened/unarmoured motor
or control cables inside cabinets housing the
drive(s), whenever this can be avoided.

54 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 55

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Use of EMC-correct cables

Braided screened/armoured cables are recommended
Transfer impedance (ZT ) can be assessed on
to optimise EMC immunity of the control cables and
the basis of the following factors:
the EMC emission from the motor cables.
- The conductibility of the screen material.
The ability of a cable to reduce the in- and outgoing - The contact resistance between the individual
radiation of electric noise depends on the transfer screen conductors.
impedance (ZT ). The screen of a cable is normally - The screen coverage, i.e. the physical area
designed to reduce the transfer of electric noise; of the cable covered by the screen - often
however, a screen with a lower transfer impedance stated as a percentage value.
(ZT ) value is more effective than a screen with - Screen type, i.e. braided or twisted pattern.
a higher transfer impedance (ZT ).
Aluminium-clad with copper wire.

Twisted copper wire or armoured steel wire cable.

Single-layer braided copper wire with varying

percentage screen coverage.
This is the typical Danfoss reference cable.

Double-layer braided copper wire.

Twin layer of braided copper wire with a magnetic,

screened/armoured intermediate layer.

Cable that runs in copper tube or steel tube.

Lead cable with 1.1 mm wall thickness.

Transfer impedance (ZT ) is rarely stated by

cable manufacturers, but it is often possible to
estimate transfer impedance (ZT ) by assessing
the physical design of the cable.

56 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Earthing of braided screened/armoured-

control cables Correct earthing
Generally speaking, control cables must be braided Control cables and cables for serial communication
screened/armoured and the screen must be must be fitted with cable clamps at both ends to
connected by means of a cable clamp at both ensure the best possible electrical contact
ends to the metal cabinet of the unit.
Wrong earthing
The drawing below indicates how correct earthing is Do not use twisted cable ends (pigtails), since these
carried out and what to be done if in doubt. increase the screen impedance at high frequencies.

Protection with respect to earth potential

between PLC and VLT
If the earth potential between the frequency converter
and the PLC (etc.) is different, electric noise may
occur that will disturb the whole system. This
problem can be solved by fitting an equalising
cable, to be placed next to the control cable.
Minimum cable cross-section: 16 mm2

For 50/60 Hz earth loops

If very long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz earth
loops may occur. This problem can be solved by
connecting one end of the screen to earth via a
100nF capacitor (keeping leads short).

Cables for serial communication

Low-frequency noise currents between two frequency
converters can be eliminated by connecting one end of
the screen to terminal 61. This terminal is connected
to earth via an internal RC link. It is recommended
to use twisted-pair cables to reduce the differential
mode interference between the conductors.

Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 57

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Tightening-up torques and screw sizes

The table shows the torque required when fitting
terminals to the VLT frequency converter. For VLT
5001-5027 200-240 V, VLT 5001-5062 380-500
V and 550-600 V the cables must be fastened
with screws. For VLT 5032 - 5052 200-240 V,
VLT 5075-5500 380-500 V, 5075-5250 550-600
■ High voltage test
V the cables must be fastened with bolts.
A high voltage test can be carried out by short-
These figures apply to the following terminals:
circuiting terminals U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3 and
Mains terminals Nos 91, 92, 93 energizing by max. 2.15 kV DC for one second
L1, L2, L3
between this short-circuit and the chassis.
Motor terminals Nos 96, 97, 98
U, V, W NB!:
The RFI switch must be closed (position
Earth terminal No 94, 95, 99 ON) when high voltage tests are carried
out (see section RFI Switch).
Brake resistor terminals 81, 82
The mains and motor connection must be interrupted
Loadsharing 88, 89 in the case of high voltage tests of the total installation
if the leakage currents are too high.

VLT type Tightening-up Screw

3 x 200-240 V torque size ■ Safety earthing
VLT 5001-5006 0.5 - 0.6 Nm M3
VLT 5008-5011 1.8 Nm M4 NB!:
VLT 5016-5022 3.0 Nm M5 The frequency converter has a high leakage
VLT 5027 4.0 Nm M6
VLT 5032-50521) 11.3 Nm M8 current and must be earthed appropriately
for safety reasons. Use earth terminal
VLT type Tightening-up Screw (see section Electrical installation, power cables),
3 x 380-500 V torque Bolt size which enables reinforced earthing.
VLT 5001-5011 0.5 - 0.6 Nm M3
Apply national safety regulations.
VLT 5016-5027 1.8 Nm M4
VLT 5032-5042 3.0 Nm M5
VLT 5052 - 5062 4.0 Nm M6
VLT 5075-51001) 11.3 Nm M8 ■ Motor thermal protection
VLT 5125-5250 11.3 Nm M8 The electronic thermal relay in UL-approved frequency
VLT 5300-55002) 42 Nm M12 converters has received the UL-approval for single
VLT type Tightening-up Screw motor protection when parameter 128 has been set for
3 x 550-600 V torque Bolt size ETR Trip and parameter 105 has been programmed
VLT 5001-5011 0.5 - 0.6 Nm M3 to the rated motor current (see motor nameplate).
VLT 5016-5022 1.8 Nm M4
VLT 5027-5032 3.0 Nm M5
VLT 5042 - 5062 4.0 Nm M6
VLT 5075-51251) 11.3 Nm M8 ■ Extra protection (RCD)
VLT 5150-5250 11.3 Nm M8
ELCB relays, multiple protective earthing or earthing
can be used as extra protection, provided that local
1) For the brake terminals, the tightening-up torque is safety regulations are complied with.
3.0 Nm and the bolt size M6.
2) For the brake terminals, the tightening-up torque is 42 In the case of an earth fault, a DC content may
Nm and the bolt size M8. develop in the faulty current.

If ELCB relays are used, local regulations must be

observed. Relays must be suitable for protection
■ Connection of mains
of 3-phase equipment with a bridge rectifier and
Connect the three mains phases to terminals L1, L2, L3.
for a brief discharge on power-up.

58 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

See also the section Special Conditions in

the Design Guide.

Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 59

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ RFI switch
Mains supply isolated from earth:
If the frequency converter is supplied from an isolated
mains source (IT mains), the RFI switch can be
turned off (OFF). In OFF position, the internal RFI
capacities (filter capacitors) between the chassis and
the intermediate circuit are cut off to avoid damage
to the intermediate circuit and to reduce the earth
capacity currents (according to IEC 61800-3).

NB!:
The RFI switch is not to be operated with
mains connected to the unit. Check that
the mains supply has been disconnected
before operating the RFI switch.

NB!: Bookstyle IP 20
Open RFI switch is only allowed at factory VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
set switching frequencies. VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V

NB!:
The RFI switch disconnects the capacitors
galvanically to ground.

The red switches are operated by means of e.g. a

screwdriver. They are set in the OFF position when
they are pulled out and in ON position when they are
pushed in (see drawing below). Factory setting is ON.

Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
Mains supply connected to earth:
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
The RFI switch must be in ON position in order for the
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
frequency converter to comply with the EMC-standard.
VLT 5001 - 5011 550 - 600 V

60 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5008 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V
VLT 5016 - 5022 550 - 600 V
Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
VLT 5042 - 5062 380 - 500 V
VLT 5042 - 5062 550 - 600 V

Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V
VLT 5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V
VLT 5027 - 5032 550 - 600 V
Compact IP 54
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 61

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 54
VLT 5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V

Compact IP 54
VLT 5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V
VLT 5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V

62 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Installation of motor cables Normally, small motors are star-connected

(200/400 V, /Y).
NB!: Large motors are delta-connected (400/690 V, /Y).
If an unscreened cable is used, some
EMC requirements are not complied with,
see the Design Guide.
If the EMC specifications regarding emission are ■ Direction of motor rotation
to be complied with, the motor cable must be
screened, unless otherwise stated for the RFI filter
in question. It is important to keep the motor cable
as short as possible so as to reduce the noise level
and leakage currents to a minimum.
The motor cable screen must be connected to the
metal cabinet of the frequency converter and to the
metal cabinet of the motor. The screen connections
are to be made with the biggest possible surface
(cable clamp). This is enabled by different installation
devices in the different frequency converters.

Installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails) is

to be avoided, since these spoil the screening
effect at higher frequencies.
If it is necessary to break the screen to install a motor
isolator or motor contactor, the screen must be
continued at the lowest possible HF impedance. The factory setting is for clockwise rotation with the VLT
frequency transformer output connected as follows.
The frequency converter has been tested with a given
length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. Terminal 96 connected to U-phase
If the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance Terminal 97 connected to V-phase
and thus the leakage current increases, and the Terminal 98 connected to W-phase
cable length must be reduced correspondingly.
The direction of rotation can be changed by switching
When VLT 5000 frequency converters are used two phases in the motor cable.
together with LC filters to reduce the acoustic noise
from a motor, the switching frequency must be set
according to the LC filter instruction in Parameter ■ Parallel coupling of motors
411. When setting the switching frequency higher
than 3 kHz, the output current is derated in SFAWM
mode. By changing Parameter 446 to 60 AVM
mode, the frequency at which the current is derated
is moved upwards. Please see Design Guide.

■ Connection of motor
All types of 3-phased asynchronous standard motors
can be used with the VLT 5000 Series.
Installation

VLT 5000 Series is able to control several motors

connected in parallel. If the motors are to have different
rpm values, the motors must have different rated
rpm values. Motor rpm is changed simultaneously,
which means that the ratio between the rated rpm
values is maintained across the range.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 63

 VLT® 5000 Series

The total current consumption of the motors is

■ Installation of relay terminals:
not to exceed the maximum rated output current
Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
IVLT,N for the VLT frequency converter.
Screw size: M3
Problems may arise at the start and at low rpm values No. Function
if the motor sizes are widely different. This is because
1-3 Relay output, 1+3 break, 1+2 make
the relatively high ohmic resistance in small motors calls
See parameter 323 of the Operating
for a higher voltage at the start and at low rpm values.
Instructions. See also General
In systems with motors connected in parallel, the technical data.
electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the VLT frequency 4, 5 Relay output, 4+5 make See
converter cannot be used as motor protection parameter 326 of the Operating
for the individual motor. Consequently, additional Instructions.
motor protection is required, such as thermistors See also General technical data.
in each motor (or individual thermal relays) suitable
for frequency converter use.

Please note that the individual motor cable for each ■ Installation of 24 Volt external DC supply:
motor must be summed and is not to exceed the (Only extended versions. Typecode: EB, EX, DE, DX).
total motor cable length permitted.
Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Screw size: M3
■ Installation of brake cable No. Function
(Only standard with brake and extended with 35, 36 24 V external DC supply
brake. Typecode: SB, EB).
No. Function External 24 V DC supply can be used as low-voltage
81, 82 Brake resistor terminals supply to the control card and any option cards
installed. This enables full operation of the LCP
(incl. parameter setting) without connection to mains.
The connection cable to the brake resistor must
Please note that a warning of low voltage will be
be screened. Connect the screen by means of
given when 24 V DC has been connected; however,
cable clamps to the conductive back plate at
there will be no tripping. If 24 V external DC supply
the VLT frequency converter and to the metal
is connected or switched on at the same time as
cabinet of the brake resistor.
the mains supply, a time of min. 200 msec. must
Size the brake cable cross-section to match
be set in parameter 120 Start delay.
the brake torque. See also Brake instructions,
A pre-fuse of min. 6 Amp, slow-blow, can be
MI.50.DX.YY and MI.50.SX.YY for further information
fitted to protect the external 24 V DC supply.
regarding safe installation.
The power consumption is 15-50 W, depending
NB!: on the load on the control card.
Please note that voltages up to 850 V DC
NB!:
may occur on the terminals.
Use 24 V DC supply of type PELV to ensure
correct galvanic isolation (type PELV) on the
control terminals of the frequency converter.

■ Installation of loadsharing
(Only extended with typecode EB, EX, DE, DX).
No. Function
88, 89 Loadsharing

The connection cable must be screened and

the max. length from the frequency converter
to the DC bar is 25 metres.

64 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Load sharing enables linking of the DC intermediate NB!:

circuits of several frequency converters. This function is only available on VLT 5032-5052
200-240 V, VLT 5075-5500 380-500 V and
NB!: VLT 5075-5250, 550-600 V.
Please note that voltages up to 850 V DC If the temperature of the brake resistor gets
may occur on the terminals. too high and the KLIXON switch drops out,
Load sharing calls for extra equipment. the frequency converter will stop braking. The
For further information please consult Loadsharing motor will start coasting.
Instructions MI.50.NX.XX. A KLIXON switch must be installed that can either be
normally closed’ or normally open’. If this function is not
used, 106 and 104 must be short-circuited together.

■ Fan Supply
Torque 0,5-0,6Nm
Screwsize: M3

■ Bus connection
The serial bus connection in accordance with the RS
485 (2-conductor) norm is connected to terminals
68/69 of the frequency converter (signals P and N).
Signal P is the positive potential (TX+,RX+), while
signal N is the negative potential (TX-,RX-).

If more than one frequency converter is to be

connected to a given master, use parallel connections.

Only for IP54 units in the powerrange VLT5016-5062,

380-500V and VLT5008-5027, 200-240 VAC. If the
drive is supplied by the DC bus (loadsharing), the
internal fans are not supplied with AC power. In this
case they must be supplied with an external AC supply.

■ Installation of brake resistor temperatureswitch

Torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
Screw size: M3
In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the
No. Function
screen, the cable screen can be earthed via terminal
106, 104, Brake resistor temperature switch.
61, which is connected to the frame via an RC-link.
105
Bus termination
The bus must be terminated by a resistor network
at both ends. For this purpose, set switches 2
Installation

and 3 on the control card for "ON".

■ DIP Switches 1-4

The dipswitch is located on the control card.
It is used for serial communication, terminals 68 and 69.
The switching position shown is the factory setting.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 65

 VLT® 5000 Series

No. Function
12, 13 Voltage supply to digital inputs
For the 24 V DC to be usable
Switch 1 has no function. for the digital inputs, switch 4 on
Switches 2 and 3 are used for terminating an RS the control card must be closed.
485 interface, serial communication. position "ON".
Switch 4 is used for separating the common potential
for the internal 24 V DC supply from the common 16-33 Digital inputs/encoder inputs
potential of the external 24 V DC supply.
20 Ground for digital inputs
NB!:
Please note that when Switch 4 is
in position "OFF", the external 24 V 39 Ground for analogue/digital
DC supply is galvanically isolated from outputs
the frequency converter.
42, 45 Analogue/digital outputs for
indicating frequency, reference,
■ Installation of control cables current and torque
Tightening-up torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
Screw size: M3
50 Supply voltage to potentiometer
See section earthing of braided screened/armoured
and thermistor 10 V DC
control cables.

53, 54 Analogue reference input, voltage

0 - ±10 V

55 Ground for analogue reference

inputs

60 Analogue reference input, current

0/4-20 mA

61 Termination for serial

communication. See section
Bus connection. This terminal is
normally not to be used.

68, 69 RS 485 interface, serial

communication. Where the
VLT frequency converter is
connected to a bus, switches
2 and 3 (switches 1- 4) must
be closed on the first and the
last VLT frequency converter.
On the remaining VLT frequency
converters, switches 2 and 3
must be open. The factory
setting is closed (position "ON").

66 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation

Installation

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 67

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control panel
The front of the VLT frequency converter features
a control panel - LCP (Local Control Panel), which
makes up a complete interface for operation and
monitoring of the VLT 5000 Series.
The control panel is detachable and can - as an
alternative - be installed up to 3 metres away from
the VLT frequency converter, e.g. on a front panel,
by means of a mounting kit option.
The functions of the control panel can be
divided into three groups:

• display
• keys for changing program parameters
• keys for local operation

All data are indicated by means of a 4-line

alpha-numeric display, which in normal operation
is able to show 4 measurements and 3 operating
conditions continuously. During programming, all the
information required for quick, effective parameter
Setup of the VLT frequency converter will be displayed.
As a supplement to the display, there are three LEDs
for voltage (power or 24 V external), warning and alarm.
All program parameters of the VLT frequency
converter can be changed immediately from
the control panel, unless this function has been
blocked via parameter 018.

■ Display
3rd line is normally blank and is used in the menu
The LCD-display has rear lighting and a total of 4
mode to show the selected parameter number or
alpha-numeric lines together with a box that shows
parameter group number and name.
the direction of rotation (arrow) and the chosen
Setup as well as the Setup in which programming 4th line is used in operating status for showing a
is taking place if that is the case. status text or in data change mode for showing the
mode or value of the selected parameter.
175ZA443.10

1st line 12345678901234567890 An arrow indicates the direction of rotation of the

motor. Furthermore, the Setup which has been
2nd line

3rd line
12345678
12345678901234567890
SETUP

1
selected as the Active Setup in parameter 004 is
shown. When programming another Setup than
the Active Setup, the number of the Setup which
4th line 12345678901234567890 is being programmed will appear to the right. This
second Setup number will flash.

1st line shows up to 3 measurements continuously

in normal operating status or a text which ■ LEDs
explains the 2 nd line. At the bottom of the control panel is a red
alarm LED and a yellow warning LED, as well
2nd line shows a measurement with related
as a green voltage LED.
unit continuously, regardless of status (except
in the case of alarm/warning).

68 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

[OK] is used for confirming a change of the

If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm parameter selected.
and/or warning LED lights up together with a status [+/-] is used for selecting parameter and for
and alarm text on the control panel. changing the chosen parameter or for changing
the read out in line 2.
The voltage LED is activated when the VLT frequency [<>] is used for selecting group and to move the

Operation of the VLT

frequency converter
converter receives voltage, or 24 V external supply; at cursor when changing numerical parameters.
the same time the rear lighting of the display will be on. [STOP / RESET] is used for stopping the motor
connected or for resetting the VLT frequency
converter after a drop-out (trip). Can be selected
■ Control keys via parameter 014 to be active or inactive. If stop
The control keys are divided into functions. This is activated, line 2 will flash, and [START] must
means that the keys between display and indicator be activated.
lamps are used for parameter Setup, including choice [JOG] overrides the output frequency to a preset
of display indication during normal operation. frequency while the key is kept down. Can be
selected via parameter 015 to be active or inactive.
[FWD / REV] changes the direction of rotation of
the motor, which is indicated by means of the
arrow on the display although only in Local. Can
be selected via parameter 016 to be active or
inactive.
[START] is used for starting the VLT frequency
converter after stop via the "Stop" key. Is always
active, but cannot override a stop command given
via the terminal strip.
Keys for local control are found under the
indicator LEDs. NB!:
If the keys for local control have been selected
as active, they will remain active both when
the VLT frequency has been set for Local
Control and for Remote Control via parameter
002, although with the exception of [Fwd/rev],
which is only active in Local operation.
■ Control key functions
NB!:
[DISPLAY / STATUS] is used for selecting the
If no external stop function has been selected
mode of display or for changing back to Display
and the [Stop] key has been selected as
mode from either the Quick menu mode or the
inactive, the motor can be started and can only
Menu mode.
be stopped by disconnecting the voltage to the motor.
[QUICK MENU] is used for programming the
parameters that belong under the Quick menu
mode. It is possible to switch directly between ■ Display read-out state
Quick menu mode and Menu mode. The display read-out state can be varied -
[MENU] is used for programming all parameters. see the list below - depending on whether the
It is possible to switch directly between Menu VLT frequency converter is in normal operation
mode and Quick menu mode. or is being programmed.
[CHANGE DATA ] is used for changing the
parameter selected either in the Menu mode or
the Quick menu mode.
[CANCEL] is used if a change of the selected
parameter is not to be carried out.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 69

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Display mode Operating variable: Unit:

In normal operation, up to 4 different operating Reference [%]
variables can be indicated continuously: 1.1 and 1.2 Reference [unit]
Feedback [unit]
and 1.3 and 2, and in line 4 the present operating
Frequency [Hz]
status or alarms and warnings that have arisen. Frequency x scaling [-]

VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3 Motor current [A]

Torque [%]
VAR 2 SETUP

1
Power
Power
[kW]
[HP]
Output energy [kWh]
STATUS Motor voltage [V]
DC-link voltage [V]
Motor thermal load [%]
VLT thermal load [%]
Hours run [Hours]
■ Display mode - selection of read-outstate Input status, dig. Input [Binary code]
Input status, analogue terminal 53 [V]
There are three options in connection with the choice Input status, analogue terminal 54 [V]
of read-out state in the Display mode - I, II and Input status, analogue terminal 60 [mA]
III. The choice of read-out state determines the Pulse reference [Hz]
number of operating variables read out. External reference [%]
Status word [Hex]
Read-out state: I: II: III: Brake effect/2 min. [kW]
Line 1 Description Data value for Description for Brake effect/sec. [kW]
for operating 3 operating 3 operating
Heat sink temp. [ºC]
Alarm word [Hex]
variable in line variables in line variables in line
Control word [Hex]
2 1 1 Warning word 1 [Hex]
Extended status word [Hex]
Communication option card warning [Hex]
The table below gives the units linked to the variables RPM [min-1 ]
in the first and second line of the display. RPM x scaling [ -]

Operating variables 1.1 and 1.2 and 1.3 in the first

line, and operating variable 2 in the second line are
selected via parameter 009, 010, 011 and 012.

70 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

This is where parameter names and units for operating

• Read-out state I: variables in the first and second line are given -
This read-out state is standard after starting operating variable 2 remains unchanged.
up or after initialisation.
• Display state IV:
This display state can be produced during operation if
FREQUENCY
another setup is to be changed without stopping the

Operation of the VLT

frequency converter
50.0 Hz VLT frequency converter. This function is activated
in parameter 005, Programming Setup.

MOTOR IS RUNNING
24.3% 30.2% 13.8A

Line 2 gives the data value of an operating variable 50.0 Hz

with related unit, and line 1 provides a text which
explains line 2, cf. table. In the example, Frequency MOTOR IS RUNNING
has been selected as variable via parameter 009.
During normal operation another variable can
immediately be read out by using the [+/-] keys. The selected programming setup number will
flash to the right of the active setup.
• Read-out state II:
Switching between read-out states I and II is effected
by pressing the [DISPLAY / STATUS] key.
■ Parameter Setup
The VLT 5000 Series can be used for practically
24.3% 30.2% 13.8A all assignments, which is why the number of
parameters is quite large. Also, this series offers
50.0 Hz a choice between two programming modes - a
Menu mode and a Quick menu mode.
MOTOR IS RUNNING The former provides access to all parameters. The
latter takes the user through a few parameters
which make it possible in most cases to start
In this state, data values for four operating values operating the VLT frequency converter.
are shown at the same time, giving the related Regardless of the mode of programming, a change
unit, cf. table. In the example, Reference, Torque, of a parameter will take effect and be visible both in
Current and Frequency are selected as variables the Menu mode and in the Quick menu mode.
in the first and second line.

• Read-out state III:

This read-out state can be held as long as the ■ Structure for the Quick menu mode versus
[DISPLAY/STATUS] key is pressed. When the the Menu mode
key is released, the system switches back to In addition to having a name, each parameter is linked
Read-out state II, unless the key is pressed for up with a number which is the same regardless of
less that approx. 1 sec., in which case the system the programming mode. In the Menu mode, the
always reverts to Read-out state I. parameters are divided into groups, with the first digit
of the parameter number (from the left) indicating the
group number of the parameter in question.
REF% TORQUE CURR A

50.0 Hz SETUP

1
• The quick menu takes the user through a number
of parameters that may be enough to get the
motor to run nearly optimally, if the factory setting
MOTOR IS RUNNING for the other parameters takes the desired control

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 71

 VLT® 5000 Series

functions into account, as well as the configuration ■ Menu mode

of signal inputs/outputs (control terminals). The Menu mode is started by pressing the [MENU] key,
• The Menu mode makes it possible to select which produces the following read-out on the display:
and change all parameters at the user’s
option. However, some parameters will
FREQUENCY
be "missing", depending on the choice of
configuration (parameter 100), e.g. open loop
hides all the P.I.D. parameters.
50.0 Hz
0 KEYB.&DISPLAY

■ Quick Setup via Quick menu

The Quick Setup starts with pressing the [QUICK Line 3 on the display shows the parameter
MENU] key, which brings out the following group number and name.
read-out on the display:

QUICK MENU 1 OF 13 ■ Parameter selection

In the Menu mode the parameters are divided
50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
into groups. Selection of parameter group is
effected by means of the [<>] keys.
ENGLISH The following parameter groups are accessible:

Group no. Parameter group:

0 Operation & Display
At the bottom of the display, the parameter number
and name are given together with the status/value 1 Load & Motor

of the first parameter under Quick Setup. The first 2 References & Limits
time the [Quick Menu] key is pressed after the 3 Inputs & Outputs
unit has been switched on, the read-outs always 4 Special functions
start at pos. 1 - see table below. 5 Serial communication
6 Technical functions
7 Application Options
■ Parameter selection 8 Fieldbus Profile
The selection of parameter is effected by means of the 9 Fieldbus Communication
[+/-] keys. The following parameters are accessible:

Pos.: No.: Parameter: Unit: When the desired parameter group has been
1 001 Language selected, each parameter can be chosen by
2 102 Motor output [kW]] means of the [+/-] keys:
3 103 Motor voltage [V]
4 104 Motor frequency [Hz] FREQUENCY
5
6
105
106
Motor current
Rated motor speed
[A]
[rpm]
50.0 Hz
7 107 Automatic motor adaptation, 001 LANGUAGE
AMA ENGLISH
8 204 Minimum reference [Hz]
9 205 Maximum reference [Hz]
The 3rd line of the display shows the parameter
10 207 Ramp-up time 1 [sec.] number and name, while the status/value of the
11 208 Ramp-down time 1 [sec.] selected parameter are shown in line 4.
12 002 Local/remote control
13 003 Local reference

■ Changing data
Regardless of whether a parameter has been selected
under the Quick menu or the Menu mode, the
procedure for changing data is the same.

72 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Pressing the [CHANGE DATA] key gives access to

changing the selected parameter, following which the FREQUENCY
underlining in line 4 will flash on the display.
The procedure for changing data depends on
whether the selected parameter represents a
50.0 Hz SETUP

1
130 START FREQUENCY
numerical data value or a text value. 09.0 HZ

Operation of the VLT

frequency converter
■ Changing a text value Then the chosen digit is changed infinitely variably
If the selected parameter is a text value, the text by means of the [+/-] keys:
value is changed by means of the [+/-] keys.
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
50.0 Hz SETUP

1
50.0 Hz 130 START FREQUENCY
10.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
The chosen digit is indicated by the digit flashing. The
bottom display line shows the data value that will be
The bottom display line shows the text value that will be entered (saved) when signing off with [OK].
entered (saved) when acknowledgement is given [OK].

■ Changing of data value, step-by-step

■ Change of group of numeric data values Certain parameters can be changed step by step
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric or infinitely variably. This applies to Motor power
data value, the chosen data value is changed (parameter 102), Motor voltage (parameter 103)
by means of the [+/-] keys. and Motor frequency (parameter 104).
The parameters are changed both as a group
of numeric data values and as numeric data
FREQUENCY
values infinitely variably.

50.0 HZ
102 MOTOR POWER
SETUP

0.37 KW ■ Read out and programming of indexed parameters

Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Parameter 615 - 617 contain a historical log which
can be read out. Choose the actual parameter,
FREQUENCY press the [CHANGE DATA] key and use the [+] and
[-] keys to scroll through the log of values. During
50.0 HZ
102 MOTOR POWERSETUP
SETUP

1 the read out line 4 of the display will flash.

1 If a bus option is mounted in the drive, the

0.55 KW
programming of parameter 915 - 916 needs to be
carried through in the following way:

The chosen data value is indicated by the digit flashing. Choose the actual parameter, press the [CHANGE
The bottom display line shows the data value that will DATA] key and use the [+] and [-] keys to scroll
be entered (saved) when signing off with [OK]. through the different indexed values. To change the
value of the parameter, select the indexed value and
press the [CHANGE DATA] key. Using the [+] and [-]

■ Infinitely variable change of numericdata value

If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data
value, a digit is first selected by means of the [<>] keys.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 73

 VLT® 5000 Series

keys the value to be changed will flash. To accept the

new setting, press [OK], to abort, press [CANCEL].

■ Manual initialisation
Disconnect from mains and hold the following
keys down:

[Display/status]
[Change data]
[OK]

while at the same time reconnecting the mains supply.

Release the keys; the VLT frequency converter has
now been programmed for the factory setting.

The following parameters are not zeroed by

means of manual initialisation:
parameter 600, Operating hours
601, Hours run
602, kWh counter
603, Number of power-ups
604, Number of overtemperatures
605, Number of overvoltages

It is also possible to carry out initialisation

via parameter 620.

74 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Menu structure
DISPLAY MODE

VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3

VAR 2
▲

Operation of the VLT

frequency converter
STATUS

▲ ▲

MENU MODE QUICK MENU MODE

FREQUENCY QUICK MENU 1 OF 13

50.0 HZ 50.0 HZ
▲

0 KEYB.&DISPLAY 001 LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

Choice of Choice of
parameter group

DATA MODE

FREQUENCY

50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
▲ ▲

▲
DATA CHANGE MODE DATA CHANGE MODE

FREQUENCY QUICK MENU 1 OF 13

50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH Choice of
ENGLISH
data value

175ZA446.11

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 75

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Application configuration There is a choice of the following configurations:

Using this parameter enables the choice of a
configuration (setting) of the frequency converter - Speed control, open loop
that fits the application in which the frequency - Speed control, closed loop
converter is to be active. - Process control, closed loop
- Torque control, open loop
NB!: - Torque control, speed feedback
First, the motor nameplate date must be The selection of special motor characteristics can be
set in parameters 102-106. combined with any application configuration.

■ Setting of parameters signals is required (the internal slip compensation

Select Speed control, open loop if a normal is operating) from motor or unit.
speed adjustment without external feedback Set the following parameters in order shown:
Speed control, open loop:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
200 Output frequency range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit Only if [0] or [2] in par. 200
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference

Select Speed control, closed loop if the application Set the following parameters in order shown:
has a feedback signal and the accuracy in
Speed control, open loop is not sufficient or a
full holding torque is required.
Speed control, closed loop (PID):
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Speed control, closed loop [1]
200 Output frequency range/direction Output frequency low limit
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
414 Minimum feedback Only if [0] or [2] in par. 200
415 Maximum feedback
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
417 Speed PID proportional gain
418 Speed PID integration time
419 Speed PID differentiation time
420 Speed PID diff. gain limit
421 Speed PID lowpass filter time

Please be aware that the encoder loss function

(parameter 346) will be active when parameter 100
is set to Speed control, closed loop.

76 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Select Process control, closed loop if the application as temperature, pressure, etc. Set the following
has a feedback signal that is not directly related to parameters in the order shown:
motor speed (rpm/Hz), but some other unit, such
Process control, closed loop (Process PID):
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Process control, closed loop [3]
200 Output frequency range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
414 Minimum feedback Only if [0] or [2] in par. 200
415 Maximum feedback
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
416 Process units
437 Process PID normal/inverse
438 Process PID anti-windup

configuration
439 Process PID start frequency

Application
440 Process PID proportional gain
441 Process PID integration time
442 Process PID differentiation time
443 Process PID diff. gain limit
444 Process PID lowpass filter

Select Torque control, open loop if PI control is

required, to change the motor frequency in order
Torque control, open loop, is to be selected if
to maintain the torque reference (Nm).
the speed direction is not to be changed during
This is relevant for winding and extrusion applications.
operation; this means that either a positive or a
negative torque reference is used at all times.
Set the following parameters in order shown:
Torque control, open loop:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Torque control, open loop [4]
200 Output frequency range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
414 Minimum feedback
415 Maximum feedback
433 Torque proportional gain
434 Torque integration time

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 77

 VLT® 5000 Series

Select Torque control, speed feedback, if an encoder

feedback signal is to be generated. This is relevant
Torque control, speed feedback, is selected if it is to
in winder and extruder applications.
be possible to change the speed direction, while at
the same time maintaining the torque reference.
Set the following parameters in order shown:
Torque control, speed feedback:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Torque control, speed feedback [5]
200 Output frequency, range/direction
201 Output frequency, low limit
202 Output frequency, high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
414 Minimum feedback
415 Maximum feedback
306 Encoder feedback, input B [24]
307 Encoder feedback, input A [25]
329 Encoder feedback, pulse/rev
421 Speed PID low-pass filter time
448 Gear ratio
447 Torque regulation, speed
feedback
449 Friction loss

After Torque control, speed feedback, has been 2. Start the motor with a positive torque
selected, the VLT frequency converter should be reference and a positive direction of rotation.
calibrated to ensure that the current torque equals Read the torque gauge.
the torque of the VLT frequency converter. For this 3. Using the same torque reference, change the
to be ensured, a torque gauge must be fitted to direction of rotation from positive to negative.
the shaft so as to enable accurate adjustment of Read the torque and adjust it to the same
parameter 447, Torque compensation, and parameter level as for the positive torque reference and
449, Friction loss. It is recommended to run an direction of rotation. This can be done by means
AMA before torque calibration. Proceed as follows of parameter 449, Friction loss.
before beginning to use the system: 4. Using a warm motor and approx. 50% load,
set parameter 447, Torque compensation, to
1. Fit a torque gauge to the shaft. match the torque gauge. The VLT frequency
converter is now ready for operation.

78 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Select Special motor characteristics if the VLT Set the following parameters in order shown:
frequency converter is to be adapted to a
synchronous motor, parallel motor operation or
if slip- compensation is not required.
Special motor characteristics:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
101 Torque characteristics Special motor characteristics [5] or [15]
432 + 431 F5 frequency/U5 voltage
430 + 429 F4 frequency/U4 voltage
428 + 427 F3 frequency/U3 voltage
426 + 425 F2 frequency/U2 voltage
424 + 423 F1 frequency/U1 voltage
422 U0 voltage

configuration
Application

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 79

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Shift between local and remote control via the control panel, the digital inputs or the serial
The VLT can be operated manually or remotely. The communication port in the two situations (modes).
following is a list of the functions/commands given

If parameter 002 is set to Local [1]:

On the LCP, the following keys can be used for local control:
Key: Parameter: Data value:

[STOP] 014 [1] Enable

[JOG] 015 [1] Enable
[RESET] 017 [1] Enable
[FWD/REV] 016 [1] Enable

Set parameter 013 for LCP control and open loop [1] or LCP control as parameter 100 [3]:

1. Local reference is set in parameter 003; can be changed via the "+/-" keys.
2. Reversing can be effected by means of the [FWD/REV] key.

Set parameter 013 for LCP digital control and open loop [2] or LCP digital control as parameter 100 [4]:

For the above parameter setting, it is now possible to 10. Motor coasting stop via digital terminal 27.
control the VLT frequency converter as follows: 11. Reversing via digital terminal 19.
Digital inputs: 12. Choice of Setup, msb/speed up via
digital terminal 32.
1. Local reference set in parameter 003 can be 13. Choice of Setup, lsb/speed down via
changed via the "+/-" keys. digital terminal 33.
2. Reset via digital terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
3. Stop inverse via digital terminal 16, 17, The serial communication port:
27, 29, 32 or 33.
4. Choice of Setup, lsb via digital terminal 16, 29 or 32. 1. Ramp 2
5. Choice of Setup, msb via digital terminal 2. Reset
17, 29 or 33. 3. Choice of Setup, lsb
6. Ramp 2 via digital terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33. 4. Choice of Setup, msb
7. Quick-stop via digital terminal 27. 5. Relay 01
8. DC braking via digital terminal 27. 6. Relay 04
9. Reset and motor coasting stop via digital
terminal 27.

If parameter 002 is set to Remote control [0]:

Key: Parameter: Data value:
[STOP] 014 [1]
[JOG] 015 [1]
[RESET] 017 [1]

80 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control with brake function

The maximum permissible load on the brake resistor
The function of the brake is to limit the voltage in
is stated as a peak power at a given ED. That
the intermediate circuit when the motor is acting
is why the peak power for the brake resistor and
as a generator. This occurs, for example, when
the resistor value must be determined.
the load drives the motor and the power enters the
The following example and formula apply to VLT 5000
intermediate circuit. The brake is built up in the
only. The peak power can be calculated on the basis
form of a chopper circuit with the connection of an
of the highest brake resistance required for braking:
external brake resistor. Placing the brake resistor
externally offers the following advantages: PPEAK = PMOTOR x MBR(%) x ηMOTOR x ηVLT [W]

- The brake resistor can be selected on the where MBR(%) is expressed as a percentage
basis of the application in question. of the rated torque.
- The brake energy is dissipated outside the control The brake resistance is calculated as follows:
panel, i.e. where the energy can be utilized.
- The electronics of the VLT frequency converter will
not be overheated if the brake resistor is overloaded.

The brake is protected against short-circuiting of the

brake resistor, and the brake transistor is monitored to
As can be seen, the brake resistance depends on
ensure that short-circuiting of the transistor is detected.
the intermediate circuit voltage (UDC).
By using a relay/digital output, the latter can be used
With VLT 5000 frequency converter that have a mains
for protecting the brake resistor against overloading in
voltage of 3 x 200-240 Volts, the brake will be active
connection with a fault in the VLT frequency converter.
at 397 Volts (UDC). If the frequency converters has
In addition, the brake makes it possible to read
a mains voltage of 3 x 380-500 Volts, the brake will
out the momentary power and the mean power
be active at 822 Volts (UDC), and if the frequency
for the latest 120 seconds, as well as to monitor
converter has a mains voltage of 3 x 550-600 Volts,
that the power energizing does not exceed a
the brake will be active at 943 Volts (VDC).

Special functions
monitoring limit selected via parameter 402. In
parameter 403 select the function to be carried out NB!:
when the power transmitted to the brake resistor Remember to check whether the brake
exceeds the limit set in parameter 402. resistor used is able to cope with a voltage
of 430 Volts, 850 Volts or 930 Volts - unless
NB!:
Danfoss brake resistors are used.
Monitoring of the brake power is not a
safety function; a thermal switch is required RREC is the brake resistance recommended by
for that purpose. The brake resistor circuit Danfoss, i.e. one that guarantees the user that
is not earth leakage protected. the frequency converter is able to brake at the
highest braking torque (Mbr ) of 160%.
ηmotor is typically at 0.90, while ηVLT is typically
■ Selection of brake resistor
at 0.98. For 200 V, 500 V and 600 V VLT
In order to select the right brake resistor, the
frequency converters, respectively, RREC at 160%
application must be known through-and-through,
braking torque can be written as:
i.e. it must be known how often to brake and by
how much power braking is effected.

The resistor ED, which is often used by motor suppliers

when stating the permissible load, is an indication of
the duty cycle at which the resistor is working.

The resistor ED is calculated as follows:

in which t2-t1 = cycle time in seconds and tb is the

braking time in seconds (of the cycle time).

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 81

 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!:
The max. brake resistance selected should
have an ohmic value max. 10% lower than
that recommended by Danfoss. If a brake
resistor with a higher ohmic value is selected, the
160% braking torque will not be achieved and
there is a risk that the VLT 5000 Series will cut out
for safety reasons. For further information, please
consult Brake Instructions MI.50.Dx.xx.

NB!:
If a short circuit in the brake transistor occurs,
power dissipation in the brake resistor can
only be prevented by using a mains switch
or contactor to disconnect the mains for the VLT.
(The contactor can be controlled by the VLT).

82 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Handling of single references

Using a single reference, only one active reference
signal is connected, either in the form of an external U/f on terminal 53,
or in the form of a preset (internal) reference. 54 or 60. f (pulse)
The external reference can be voltage, current, on terminal 17 or 29
frequency (pulse) or binary via the serial port. Two / External binary (serial port).
examples are given below of the way the single
Single ref.
references are handled by VLT 5000 Series.
\ Preset references (par.215-218)
Example 1:
External reference signal = 1 V (min) - 5 V (max)
Reference = 5 Hz - 50 Hz
Configuration (parameter 100) - Speed
control, open loop.

Setting:
Parameter: Setting: Data value:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
308 Funct. of analogue input Reference [1]
309 Min. reference signal Min. 1 V
310 Max. reference signal Max. 5 V
203 Reference range Reference range Min - Max [0]

Special functions
204 Minimum reference Min. reference 5 (Hz)
205 Maximum reference Max. reference 50 (Hz)
The following can be used: - Catch-up/slow-down via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33
- Freeze reference via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 83

 VLT® 5000 Series

Example 2:
External reference signal = 0 V (min) - 10 V (max)
Reference = -50 Hz ccw - 50 Hz cw
Configuration (parameter 100) =Speed
control, open loop.

Setting:
Parameter: Setting: Data value:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
308 Funct. of analogue input Reference [1]
309 Min. reference signal Min. 0 V
310 Max. reference signal Max. 10 V
203 Reference range Reference range - Max - + Max [1]
205 Max. reference 100 Hz
214 Reference type Sum [0]
215 Preset reference -50%
200 Output frequency range/direction Both directions, 0-132 Hz [1]
- Catch-up/slow-down via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32
The following can be used:
or 33
- Freeze reference via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33.

84 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Handling of multi-references
If the multi-reference is used, two or more reference
signals are connected, either in the form of external
or preset reference signals. Via parameter 214 these
can be combined in three different ways:

/ Sum
Multi-ref. Relative
\ External/preset

In the following, each reference type (sum, relative

and external/preset) is shown:

SUM

Special functions

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 85

 VLT® 5000 Series

RELATIVE

EXTERNAL/PRESET

86 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

List of handling of multi-references

Special functions

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 87

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA

Automatic motor adaptation is a test algorithm How to perform an AMA
that measures the electrical motor parameters
at a motor standstill. This means that AMA 1. Press the [STOP/RESET] key
itself does not supply any torque. 2. Set motor nameplate data in parameters 102 to 106
AMA is useful when commissioning systems, where 3. Select whether a total [ENABLE (RS,XS)]or
the user wants to optimise the adjustment of the VLT a reduced [ENABLE RS] AMA is required
frequency converter to the motor applied. This feature in parameter 107
is used in particular where the factory setting does 4. Connect terminal 12 (24 VDC) to terminal
not adequately cover the motor in question. 27 on the control card
There are two motor parameters that are of primary 5. Press the [START] key or connect terminal
significance in automatic motor adaptation: the 18 (start) to terminal 12 (24 VDC) to start the
stator resistance, Rs, and the reactance at normal automatic motor adaptation.
magnetising level, Xs. Parameter 107 allows a choice Now the automatic motor adaptation goes through
of automatic motor adaptation, with determination four tests (for reduced AMA only the first two tests).
of both Rs and Xs, or reduced automatic motor The different tests can be followed in the display as
adaptation with determination of only Rs. dots after the text WORKING in parameter 107:
The duration of a total automatic motor adaptation 1. Initial error check where nameplate data
varies from a few minutes on small motors to and physical errors are checked. Display
more than 10 minutes on large motors. shows WORKING.
2. DC test where the stator resistance is estimated.
Limitations and preconditions:
Display shows WORKING..
• For AMA to be able to determine the motor 3. Transient test where the leakage inductance is
parameters optimally, the correct nameplate estimated. Display shows WORKING...
data for the motor connected to the VLT 4. .AC test where the stator reactance is estimated.
frequency converter must be entered in Display shows WORKING....
parameters 102 to 106.
NB!:
• For the best adjustment of the VLT frequency
AMA can only be carried out if there are
converter, it is recommended to carry out AMA
no alarms during tuning.
on a cold motor. Repeated AMA runs may lead
to a heating of the motor that will result in an
Discontinue AMA
increase of the stator resistance, Rs.
• AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor If the automatic motor adaptation is to be
current is minimum 35% of the rated output discontinued, press the [STOP/RESET] key or
current of the VLT frequency converter. AMA can disconnect terminal 18 from terminal 12.
be carried out up to one oversize motor.
• If a LC filter is inserted between the VLT The automatic motor adaptation ends up with one
frequency converter and the motor, it will only of the following messages after the test:
be possible to carry out a reduced test. If an
Warnings and alarm messages
overall setting is required, remove the LC filter
while running a total AMA. After completion ALARM 21
of the AMA reinsert the LC filter. Auto-optimisation OK
• If motors are coupled in parallel only use Press the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect terminal 18
reduced AMA if any. from terminal 12. This alarm indicates that the AMA is
• When using synchronous motors it is only OK and that the drive is correctly adapted to the motor.
possible to make a reduced AMA.
• Long motor cables can have an effect on ALARM 22
the implementation of the AMA function if Auto-optimisation not OK
their resistance is bigger than the stator [AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK]
resistance of the motor. A fault has been found during automatic motor
adaptation. Press the [STOP/RESET] key or
disconnect terminal 18 from terminal 12. Check
the possible cause to the fault related to the alarm
message given. The figure after the text is the
error code, which can be seen in the fault log in

88 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

parameter 615. Automatic motor adaptation does

not update parameters. You may choose to run a
WARNING 39 - 42
reduced automatic motor adaptation.
A fault have been encountered during automatic
CHECK P.103,105 [0] motor adaptation. Check the possible fault causes
[AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL] Parameter 102, in accordance with the warning message. Press
103 or 105 has a wrong setting. Correct the the [CHANGE DATA key and select "CONTINUE"
setting and start AMA all over. if AMA is to continue despite the warning or press
the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect terminal 18
LOW P.105 [1] from terminal 12 to discontinue AMA.
The motor is too small for AMA to be carried out.
If AMA is to be enabled, the rated motor current WARNING: 39
(parameter 105) must be higher than 35% of the rated CHECK P.104,106
output current of the VLT frequency converter. The setting of parameter 102, 104 or 106
is probably wrong. Check the setting and
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE [2] choose Continue’ or Stop’.
AMA has detected an asymmetrical impedance
in the motor connected to the system. The WARNING: 40
motor could be defective. CHECK P.103,105
The setting of parameter 102, 103 or 105
MOTOR TOO BIG [3] is probably wrong. Check the setting and
The motor connected to the system is too big for choose Continue’ or Stop’.
AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter
102 does not match the motor used. WARNING: 41
MOTOR TOO BIG
MOTOR TOO SMALL [4] The motor used is probably too big for AMA to
The motor connected to the system is too small for be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter may not match the motor. Check the motor

Special functions
102 does not match the motor used. and choose Continue’ or Stop’.
TIME OUT [5] WARNING: 42
AMA fails because of noisy measuring signals. MOTOR TOO SMALL
Try to start AMA all over a number of times, until The motor used is probably too small for AMA
AMA is carried out. Please note that repeated to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
AMA runs may heat the motor to a level where may not match the motor. Check the motor
the stator resistance RS is increased. In most and choose Continue’ or Stop’.
cases, however, this is not critical.

INTERRUPTED BY USER [6]

AMA has been interrupted by the user.

INTERNAL FAULT [7]

An internal fault has occurred in the VLT frequency
converter. Contact your Danfoss supplier.

LIMIT VALUE FAULT [8]

The parameter values found for the motor are
outside the acceptable range within which the VLT
frequency converter is able to work.

MOTOR ROTATES [9]

The motor shaft rotates. Make sure that the
load is not able to make the motor shaft rotate.
Then start AMA all over.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 89

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Automatic motor adaptation, AMA, via

VLT Software Dialog
Automatic motor adaptation can also be activated by
means of the VLT Software Dialog. This can be done
locally or in the form of remote-control via a modem.

Procedure for automatic motor adaptation via VLT Software Dialog:

1. Start Parameter Setup and select "Start new setting".
2. Select VLT type and voltage. Then choose "Off-line".
3. Start "Wizard", which quickly sets up relevant motor parameters.
4. When "Wizard" has been completed, select total or reduced motor adaptation in parameter 107.
5. Save the parameter setup file and finish the parameter setup.
6. Start Parameter Setup again and select "Open existing setting".
7. Open the saved file and select "On-line".
8. Send the file to the VLT frequency converter(s) that is/are to run the automatic motor adaptation programme.
9. End Parameter Setup.

Start of automatic motor adaptation, AMA:

1. Start Test-run.
2. Scan for VLT frequency converters and select the relevant frequency converter that has been prepared for
automatic motor adaptation.
3. Press the "Start" button in Test-run mode. Automatic motor adaptation is now in progress.

After normal cycle and completion:

1. Wait until a trip message appears.
2. Press the [RESET] button in the Test-run mode.
3. AMA has now been completed and the VLT frequency converter is ready for operation.

If Alarm is given, the display shows: ALARM 22

1. Press the [RESET] button.
2. Check for possible fault causes in accordance with the alarm message.

90 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control of mechanical brake

For hoisting applications, it is necessary to be able
to control an electro-magnetic brake.
For controlling the brake, a relay output (01 or
04) is required. This output must be kept closed
(voltage-free) during the time when the VLT frequency
converter is not able to hold’ the motor, e.g. because
of too high load. In parameter 323 or 326 (relay
outputs 01, 04), select Mechanical brake control
[32] or Extended mechanical brake control [34] for
applications with an electro-magnetic brake.
During start/stop and ramp-down, the output
current is monitored. If Mechanical brake control
[32] is selected and the current is below the level
selected in parameter 223 Warning: Low current,
the mechanical brake is closed (voltage-free).
As a point of departure, a current can be selected
which is approx. 70% of the magnetising current.
Parameter 225 Warning: Low frequency states
the frequency during ramp-down at which the
mechanical brake is to close again.

If Extended mechanical brake control [34] is selected

the mechanical brake is closed (voltage-free) during
start until the output current is above the level selected
in parameter 223 Warning: Low Current.
During stop mechanical brake is released until the

Special functions
frequency is below the level selected in parameter
225 Warning: Low frequency.
Notice by Extended mechanical brake control [34] that
the brake does not close if the output current gets
under parameter 223 Warning: Low current.
Nor does a current low level warning appear.

If the VLT frequency converter is brought into an alarm

condition or an overcurrent or overvoltage situation,
the mechanical brake will immediately cut in.

NB!:
The application shown is only for hoisting
without counterweight.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 91

 VLT® 5000 Series

92 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control of mechanical brake:

Parameter: Setting: Data value:
323 Relay 01 or par. 326 relay 04 Mechanical brake control [32]
323 Relay 01 or par. 326 relay 04 Extended mechanical brake control [34]
223 Warning: Low current approx. 70% of magnetising current1)
225 Warning: Low frequency 3-5 Hz2)
122 Function at stop Pre-magnetisation [3]
120 Start delay time 0.1-0.3 sec.
121 Start function Start frequency/voltage clockwise3) [3]
130 Start frequency Set to slip frequency
131 Extra voltage at start Set to rated motor current IM,N (not higher than 160% of IM,N )
1. During start and stop, the current limit in parameter 3. It must be ensured that the motor starts clockwise
223 decides the switching level. (hoist), since otherwise the VLT frequency
2. This value indicates the frequency during ramp-down converter may drop the load. Switch U, V,
at which the mechanical brake is to be closed again. W connections, if required.
This assumes that a stop signal has been given.

Special functions

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 93

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ PID for process control Relative references can be programmed. A relative

Feedback reference is a percentage value (Y) of the sum of
The feedback signal must be connected to a terminal the external references (X). This percentage value
on the frequency converter. Use the list below is added to the sum of the external references,
to decide which terminal is to be used and which which produces the active reference (X + XY). See
parameters are to be programmed. section Handling of multi references.
If relative references are to be used, parameter 214
Feedback type Terminal Parameters
is to be set to Relative [1]. This makes the preset
Pulse 33 307
Voltage 53 308, 309, 310 references relative. Furthermore, Relative reference [4]
Current 60 314, 315, 316 can be programmed on terminal 54 and/or 60. If an
external relative reference is selected, the signal on the
input will be a percentage value of the full range of the
Furthermore, the minimum and maximum feedback
terminal. The relative references are added with signs.
(parameters 414 and 415) must be set to a value in
the process unit that corresponds to the minimum NB!:
and maximum value on the terminal. Terminals that are not in use should preferably
Select process unit in parameter 416. be set to No function [0].

Reference
Inverse control
A minimum and a maximum reference can be set (204
If the drive has to react with increasing speed on
and 205), which limit the sum of all references. The
and increasing feedback, Inverse must be selected in
reference range cannot exceed the feedback range.
parameter 437. Normal control means that the motor
If one or several setpoint references are required,
speed decreases when the feedback signal increases.
the simplest way is to set such reference directly
in parameters 215 to 218. Select between the Anti Windup
preset references by connecting terminals 16, 17, The process controller comes with the anti windup
29, 32 and/or 33 to terminal 12. Which terminals function in active position. This function ensures
that are used depends on the choice made in the that when either a frequency limit or a torque limit
parameters of the various terminals (parameters is reached, the integrator will be set to a gain that
300, 301, 305, 306 and/or 307). Use the table corresponds to the actual frequency. This avoids
below when selecting preset references. integrating on an error that cannot in any case be
Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb compensated for by means of a speed change. This
Preset ref. 1 0 0 function can be disabled in parameter 438.
(par. 215)
Start-up conditions
Preset ref. 2 0 1
In some applications, optimum setting of the process
(par. 216)
controller will mean that it takes an excessive time
Preset ref. 3 1 0
for the desired process value to be reached. In
(par. 217)
such applications it might be an advantage to fix a
Preset ref. 4 1 1
motor frequency to which the frequency converter is
(par. 218)
to bring the motor before the process controller is
activated. This is done by programming a Process
If an external reference is required, this can either PID start frequency in parameter 439.
be an analogue or a pulse reference. If current
is used as a feedback signal, only voltage can
be used as an analogue reference. Use the
following list to decide which terminal to use and
which parameters to program.
Reference type Terminal Parameters
Pulse 17 or 29 301 or 305
Voltage 53 or 54 308, 309, 310 or
311, 312, 313
Current 60 314, 315, 316

94 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Differentiator gain limit

NB!:
If there are quick changes in reference or feedback
If necessary, start/stop can be activated
in a given application - which means that the error
a number of times in order to provoke a
changes swiftly - the differentiator may soon become
variation of the feedback signal.
too dominant. This is because it reacts to changes
in the error. The quicker the error changes, the See also the examples of connection given
stronger the differentiator gain is. The differentiator in the Design Guide.
gain can thus be limited to allow setting of the
reasonable differentiation time for slow changes and a
suitably quick gain for quick changes. This is done in
parameter 443, Process PID Differentiator gain limit. ■ PID for speed control
Feedback
Lowpass filter Use the list below to decide which terminal to use for
If there are oscillations of the current/voltage feedback the feedback signal and which parameters to program.
signal, these can be dampened by means of a lowpass
Feedback type Terminal Parameters
filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter time constant. Pulse 32 306
This time constant represents the limitfrequency of Pulse 33 307
the ripples occurring on the feedback signal. If the Feedback 329
lowpass filter has been set to 0.1s, the limit frequency pulse/rev.
will be 10 RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = Voltage 53 308, 309, 310
1.6 Hz. This will mean that all currents/voltages that Current 60 314, 315, 316
vary by more than 1.6 oscillations per second will be
removed by the filter. In other words, control will only
Furthermore, the minimum and maximum feedback
be carried out on a feedback signal that varies by a
(parameters 414 and 415) are to be set to values
frequency of less than 1.6 Hz. Choose a suitable time
in the process unit that correspond to the actual
constant in parameter 444, Process PID Lowpass filter.
minimum and maximum process feedback values and

Special functions
Optimisation of the process controller units. The minimum feedback cannot be set to a
The basic settings have now been made; all that value lower than 0. Choose unit in parameter 416.
needs to be done is to optimise the proportional
Reference
gain, the integration time and the differentiation time
A minimum and a maximum reference can be set (204
(parameters 440, 441, 442). In most processes, this
and 205) which limit the sum of all references. The
can be done by following the guidelines given below.
reference range cannot exceed the feedback range.
1. Start the motor If one or several preset references are required,
2. Set parameter 440 (proportional gain) to 0.3 and the simplest way of doing this is by setting such
increase it until the feedback signal again begins references directly in parameters 215 to 218. Choose
to vary continuously. Then reduce the value until between the preset references by connecting terminals
the feedback signal has stabilised. Now lower 16,17,29,32 and/or 33 to terminal 12. Which of them
the proportional gain by 40-60%. that are to be used depends on the choice in the
3. Set parameter 441 (integration time) to 20s parameters of the terminals in question (parameters
and reduce the value until the feedback signal 300, 301, 305, 306 and/or 307). The table below
again begins to vary continuously. Increase the can be used to select the preset references.
integration time until the feedback signal stabilises, Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb
followed by an increase of 15-50%. Preset ref. 1 0 0
4. Only use parameter 442 for very fast-acting (par. 215)
systems only (differentiation time). The typical Preset ref. 2 0 1
value is four times the set integration time. The (par. 216)
differentiator should only be used when the Preset ref. 3 1 0
setting of the proportional gain and the integration (par. 217)
time has been fully optimised. Preset ref. 4 1 1
(par. 218)

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 95

 VLT® 5000 Series

If an external reference is required, this can either by an than 1.6 Hz. Choose a suitable time constant in
analogue reference or a pulse reference. If current is parameter 421, Speed PID Lowpass filter.
used as a feedback signal, voltage can be used as an
analogue reference. Use the list below to decide which
terminal to use and which parameters to program.
■ Quick discharge
Reference type Terminal Parameters This function calls for a frequency converter of
Pulse 17 or 29 301 or 305 type EB. This function is used for discharging the
Voltage 53 or 54 308, 309, 310 or capacitors in the intermediate circuit after the mains
311, 312, 313 supply has been interrupted. This is a useful function
Current 60 314, 315, 316 for servicing the frequency converter and/or the motor
installation. The motor must be stopped before
Relative references can be programmed. A relative quick discharge is activated. If the motor acts as
reference is a percentage value (Y) of the sum of a generator, quick discharge is not possible.
the external references (X). This percentage value
The quick discharge function can be selected
is added to the sum of the external references,
via parameter 408. The function starts when the
which produces the active reference (X + XY).
intermediate circuit voltage has dropped to a given
See drawing on pages 62 and 63.
value and the rectifier has stopped.
If relative references are to be used, parameter 214
In order to obtain the possibility of a quick discharge,
is to be set to Relative [1]. This makes the preset
the frequency converter requires an external 24 V DC
references relative. Furthermore, Relative reference [4]
supply to terminals 35 and 36, as well as a suitable
can be programmed on terminal 54 and/or 60. If an
brake resistor on terminals 81 and 82.
external relative reference is selected, the signal on the
input will be a percentage value of the full range of the For sizing of the discharge resistor for quick discharge,
terminal. The relative references are added with signs. see Brake Instructions MI.50.DX.XX.

NB!: NB!:
Terminals that are not in use should preferably Quick discharge is only possible if the
be set to No function [0]. frequency converter has 24 Volts external
DC supply and if an external brake/discharge
Differentiator gain limit resistor has been connected.
If there are quick changes in reference or feedback
in a given application - which means that the error Before servicing the installation (frequency
changes swiftly - the differentiator may soon become converter + motor), it must be checked
too dominant. This is because it reacts to changes that the intermediate circuit voltage
in the error. The quicker the error changes, the is below 60 V DC. This is done by measuring
stronger the differentiator gain is. The differentiator terminals 88 and 89, load-sharing.
gain can thus be limited to allow setting of the
NB!:
reasonable differentiation time for slow changes and a
The power dissipation during quick discharge
suitably quick gain for quick changes. This is done in
does not form part of the power monitoring
parameter 420, Speed PID Differentiator gain limit.
function, parameter 403. When sizing resistors,
Lowpass filter this fact should be taken into consideration.
If are oscillations of the current/voltage on the
feedback signal, these can be dampened by means
of a lowpass filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter
time constant. This time constant represents the
limit frequency of the ripples occurring on the
feedback signal. If the lowpass filter has been set
to 0.1s, the break frequency will be 10 RAD/sec.,
corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. This will mean
that all currents/voltages that vary by more than 1.6
oscillations per second will be removed by the filter.
In other words, control will only be carried out on a
feedback signal that varies by a frequency of less

96 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Parameter 408 = [1]

Quick discharge
activated

TRIP (RESET)
Check 24 Volts
external DC supply
No 24 Volts external
DC supply
ALARM:33
Q.DISCHARGING FAILED
24 Volts external
DC supply OK

TRIP (RESET)
Start
Quick discharge
Timeout ALARM:33
Q.DISCHARGING FAILED
Discharge

Discharge completed

POWER IS DISCHARGED
175ZA447.10

■ Mains failure/quick discharge with mains- selecting Mains failure inverse on one of the control
failure inverse terminals (16, 17, 29, 32, 33). Mains failure inverse
The first column in the table shows Mains failure, is active in the logical ’0’ situation.
which is selected in parameter 407. If no function
is selected, the mains failure procedure will not be NB!:
carried out. If Controlled ramp-down [1] is selected, The VLT frequency converter can be

Special functions
the VLT frequency converter will take the motor down completely damaged if the Quick-discharge
to 0 Hz. If Enable [1] has been selected in parameter function is repeated, using the digital
408, a quick discharge of the intermediate circuit input while mains voltage is on.
voltage will be carried out after the motor has stopped.

Using a digital input, it is possible to activate mains

failure and/or quick discharge. This is done by

Mains failure par. Quick discharge par. 408 Mains failure inverse digital Function
407 input
No function [0] Disable [0] Logical ’0’ 1
No function [0] Disable [0] Logical ’1’ 2
No function [0] Enable [1] Logical ’0’ 3
No function [0] Enable [1] Logical ’1’ 4
[1]-[4] Disable [0] Logical ’0’ 5
[1]-[4] Disable [0] Logical ’1’ 6
[1]-[4] Enable [1] Logical ’0’ 7
[1]-[4] Enable [1] Logical ’1’ 8

Function no. 1
Mains failure and quick discharge are not active.
Function no. 3
Function no. 2 The digital input activates the quick discharge function,
Mains failure and quick discharge are not active. regardless of the intermediate circuit voltage level and
regardless of whether the motor is running.

Function no. 4
Quick discharge is activated when the intermediate
circuit voltage has dropped to a given value and

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 97

 VLT® 5000 Series

the inverters have stopped. See procedure

on previous page.

Function no. 5
The digital input activates the mains failure function,
regardless of whether the unit receives any supply
voltage. See the different functions in parameter 407.

Function no. 6
The mains failure function is activated when the
intermediate circuit voltage has dropped to a given
value. The selected function in case of mains
failure is selected in parameter 407.

Function no. 7
The digital input activates both the quick discharge
and the mains failure function, regardless of the
intermediate circuit voltage level and regardless
of whether the motor is running. First the mains
failure function will be active; subsequently there
will be a quick discharge.

Function no. 8
Quick discharge and mains failure function
are activated when the intermediate circuit
level drops to a given level.
First the mains failure function will be active;
subsequently there will be a quick discharge.

98 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Flying start selected, the VLT frequency converter will first find out
This function makes it possible to "catch" a motor in which direction the motor rotates and then search
that is spinning freely and for the VLT to take for the frequency. If the motor is not found, the system
control of the motor speed. This function can be assumes that the motor is at a standstill or is rotating
enabled or disabled via parameter 445. at a low speed, and the VLT frequency converter will
start the motor in the normal way after searching.
If flying start has been selected, there will be four
situations in which the function is activated: 3. The VLT frequency converter trips and
Flying start is active.
1. After a coast has been given via terminal 27.
2. After power-up.
3. If the VLT frequency converter is in a trip state
and a reset signal has been given.
4. If the VLT frequency converter releases the motor
because of a fault state and the fault disappears
before a trip, the VLT frequency converter will
catch the motor and go back to the reference.

1. Flying start is active.

4. The VLT frequency converter momentarily

releases the motor. Flying start is activated
and catches the motor again.

Special functions
2. Flying start is active.

■ Normal/high overload torque control,open loop

This function enables the frequency converter
to perform a constant 100% torque, using
an oversize motor.
The choice between a normal or a high overload
torque characteristic is made in parameter 101.

The search sequence for the spinning motor depends This is also where to choose between a high/normal
on Rotation, frequency/direction (parameter 200). constant torque characteristic (CT) or a high/normal
If only clockwise is selected, the VLT frequency VT torque characteristic
converter will start looking from Maximum frequency
(parameter 202) down to 0 Hz. If the VLT frequency If a high torque characteristic is chosen, a rated
converter does not find the spinning motor during the motor with the frequency converter obtains up to
search sequence, it will carry out a DC braking so as 160% torque for 1 min. in both CT and VT. If a
to try to bring the speed of the spinning motor down normal torque characteristic is chosen, an oversize
to 0 rpm. This requires that the DC brake is active motor allows up to 110% torque performance for
via parameters 125 and 126. If Both directions is

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 99

 VLT® 5000 Series

up to 1 min. in both CT and VT. This function

is used mainly for pumps and fans, since these
Description:
applications do not require an overload torque.
If a stop command is active via terminal 18 and
The advantage of choosing a normal torque the VLT frequency converter is not at the torque
characteristic for an oversize motor is that the limit, the motor will ramp down to 0 Hz.
frequency converter will be able constantly If the VLT frequency converter is at the torque limit
to yield 100% torque, without derating as a and a stop command is activated, terminal 42 Output
result of a bigger motor. (programmed to Torque limit and stop [27]) will be
activated. The signal to terminal 27 will change from
NB!: ’logic 1’ to ’logic 0’ and the motor will start coasting.
This function cannot be chosen for VLT
5001-5006, 200-240 Volts, and VLT
5001-5011, 380-500 Volts.

■ Internal current regulator

The VLT 5000 features an integral current limit
regulator which is activated when the motor current,
and thus the torque, is higher than the torque
limits set in parameter 221 and 222.
When VLT 5000 Series is at the current limit
during motor operation or regenerative operation,
the frequency converter will try to get below
the preset torque limits as quickly as possible
without losing control of the motor.
While the current regulator is active, the frequency
converter can only be stopped by means of terminal
27 if set to Coasting stop, inverse [0] or Reset and
coasting stop, inverse [1]. A signal on terminals
16-33 will not be active until the frequency converter
has moved away from the current limit.
Please note that the motor will not use the
ramp-down time, since terminal 27 must be
- Start/stop via terminal 18.
programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or
Parameter 302 = Start [1].
Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1].
- Quickstop via terminal 27.
Parameter 304 = Coasting stop, inverse [0].
- Terminal 42 Output
■ Programming of Torque limit and stop Parameter 319 = Torque limit and stop [27].
In applications with an external electro-mechanical - Terminal 01 Relay output
brake, such as hoisting applications, it is possible Parameter 323 = Mechanical brake control [32].
to stop the VLT frequency converter via a standard’
stop command, while at the same time activating
the external electro-mechanical brake.
The example given below illustrates the programming
of VLT frequency converter connections.
The external brake can be connected to relay 01
or 04, see Control of mechanical brake on page
66. Program terminal 27 to Coasting stop, inverse
[0] or Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1], as well
as terminal 42 to Torque limit and stop [27].

100 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Operation and Display 5. An external control command that can be

connected to terminal 16, 17, 19, 27, 29,
001 Language 32 or 33. However, [2] or [4] must be
(LANGUAGE) selected in parameter 013.
Value: See also section Shift between local and
✭English (ENGLISH) [0] remote control.
German (DEUTSCH) [1]
French (FRANCAIS) [2]
Danish (DANSK) [3]
003 Local reference
Spanish (ESPAÑOL) [4]
(LOCAL REFERENCE)
Italian (ITALIANO) [5]
Value:
Function: Par 013 set for [1] or [2]:
The choice in this parameter defines the language 0 - fMAX ✭ 000.000
to be used on the display.

Description of choice:
Par 013 set for [3] or [4] and par. 203 = [0] set for:
There is a choice of English [0], German [1], French RefMIN - RefMAX ✭ 000.000
[2], Danish [3], Spanish [4] and Italian [5].

Par 013 set for [3] or [4] and par. 203 = [1] set for:
002 Local/remote control -RefMAX - + RefMAX ✭ 000.000
(OPERATION SITE)
Function:
Value:
This parameter allows manual setting of the
✭Remote control (REMOTE) [0]
desired reference value (speed or reference for
Local control (LOCAL) [1]
the selected configuration, depending on the
Function: choice made in parameter 013).
The unit follows the configuration selected in parameter
There is a choice of two methods of controlling
the frequency converter. 100, provided Process control, closed loop [3] or
Torque control, open loop [4] has been selected.
Description of choice:
Description of choice:
If Remote control [0] is selected, the frequency
converter can be controlled via: Local [1] must be selected in parameter 002
1. The control terminals or the serial for this parameter to be used.
The set value is saved in the case of a voltage
communication port.
Programming
2. The [START] key. However, this cannot overrule drop-out, see parameter 019.
Stop commands (also start-disable) entered via the In this parameter Data Change Mode is not
exited automatically (after time out).
digital inputs or the serial communication port.
3. The [STOP], [JOG] and [RESET] keys, provided that Local reference cannot be set via the serial
these are active (see parameter 014, 015 and 017). communication port.

If Local control [1] is selected, the frequency

converter can be controlled via:
Warning: Since the value set is
1. The [START] key. However, this cannot override
remembered after the power has been
Stop commands on the digital terminals (if [2] or
cut, the motor may start without warning
[4] has been selected in parameter 013).
when the power is reinstated; if parameter 019 is
2. The [STOP], [JOG] and [RESET] keys, provided that
changed to Auto restart, use saved ref. [0].
these are active (see parameter 014, 015 and 017).
3. The [FWD/REV] key, provided that this has been
activated in parameter 016 and that in parameter
013 a choice of [1] or [3] has been made.
4. Via P003 the local reference can be controlled by
means of the "Arrow up" and "Arrow down" keys.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 101
 VLT® 5000 Series

004 Active Setup Setups 1-4 [1]-[4] are individual Setups which can
(ACTIVE SETUP) be used as required. They can be programmed
Value: freely, regardless of the Setup selected as the
Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP) active Setup and thus controlling the functions
[0]
of the frequency converter.
✭Setup 1 (SETUP 1) [1]
Setup 2 (SETUP 2) [2] NB!:
Setup 3 (SETUP 3) [3] If a general change of data or a copying to
Setup 4 (SETUP 4) [4] the active Setup is effected, this immediately
MultiSetup (MULTI SETUP) [5] affects the functioning of the unit.

Function:
This parameter defines the Setup number to control 006 Copying of Setups
the functions of the frequency converter. (SETUP COPY)
All parameters can be programmed in four individual
Value:
parameter Setups, Setup 1 - Setup 4. In addition,
✭No copying (NO COPY) [0]
there is a Factory Setup, which cannot be modified.
Copy to Setup 1 from # (COPY TO SETUP 1) [1]
Description of choice: Copy to Setup 2 from # (COPY TO SETUP 2) [2]
Factory Setup [0] contains the data set at the works. Copy to Setup 3 from # (COPY TO SETUP 3) [3]
Can be used as a data source if the other Setups Copy to Setup 4 from # (COPY TO SETUP 4) [4]
are to be returned to a known state. Copy to Setup all from # (COPY TO ALL) [5]
Parameter 005 and 006 allow copying from one
Setup to one or all the other Setups. # = the Setup selected in parameter 005
Setups 1-4 [1]-[4] are four individual Setups
that can be selected individually. Function:
Multi-Setup [5] is used by remote-switching A copy is made from the Setup selected in parameter
between Setups. Terminals 16/17/29/32/33 as 005 to one of the other Setups or to all the other
well as the serial communication port can be Setups simultaneously. The setup copying function
used for switching between Setups. does not copy parameter 001, 004, 005, 500 and 501.

Copying is only possible in Stop Mode (motor

stopped on a Stop command).
005 Programming Setup
Description of choice:
(EDIT SETUP)
The copying starts when the desired copying
Value:
function has been entered and confirmed by
Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP) [0]
pressing the [OK] key.
Setup 1 (SETUP 1) [1]
The display indicates when copying is in progress.
Setup 2 (SETUP 2) [2]
Setup 3 (SETUP 3) [3]
Setup 4 (SETUP 4) [4]
✭Active Setup (ACTIVE SETUP) [5] 007 LCP copy
(LCP COPY)
Function: Value:
The choice is of the Setup in which programming ✭No copying (NO COPY) [0]
(change of data) is to occur during operation Upload all parameters (UPLOAD ALL PARAM) [1]
(applies both via the control panel and via the Download all parameters (DOWNLOAD ALL) [2]
serial communication port). The 4 Setups can be Download power-independent par.
programmed independently of the Setup selected as (DOWNLOAD SIZE INDEP.) [3]
the active Setup (selected in parameter 004).
Function:
Description of choice:
Parameter 007 is used if it is desired to use the
The Factory Setup [0] contains the data set at the integrated copying function of the control panel. The
works and can be used as a data source if the other
Setups are to be returned to a known state.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

102 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

control panel is detachable. You can therefore easily Thermal load, motor [%]
copy parameter value(s) from one to another. (MOTOR THERMAL [%]) [13]
Thermal load, VLT [%] (VLT THERMAL [%]) [14]
Description of choice:
Hours run [Hours] (RUNNING HOURS) [15]
Select Upload all parameters [1] if all parameter values Digital input [Binary code]
are to be transmitted to the control panel. (DIGITAL INPUT [BIN]) [16]
Select Download all parameters [2] if all Analogue input 53 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 53 [V]) [17]
transmitted parameter values are to be copied Analogue input 54 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 54 [V]) [18]
to the frequency converter on which the control Analogue input 60 [mA]
panel has been mounted. (ANALOG INPUT 60 [MA]) [19]
Select Download power-independent par. [3] if only the Pulse reference [Hz] (PULSE REF. [HZ]) [20]
power-independent parameters are to be downloaded. External reference [%] (EXTERNAL REF [%]) [21]
This is used if downloading to a frequency converter Status word [Hex] (STATUS WORD [HEX]) [22]
that has a different rated power that the one from Brake effect/2 min. [KW]
where the parameter Setup originates. (BRAKE ENERGY/2 MIN) [23]
Please note that the power-dependent parameter Brake effect/sec. [kW] (BRAKE ENERGY/S) [24]
102-106 must be programmed after copying.
Heat sink temp. [ C] (HEATSINK TEMP [ C] ) [25]
NB!: Alarm word [Hex] (ALARM WORD [HEX]) [26]
Uploading/Downloading can only be carried Control word [Hex]
out in the Stop mode. (CONTROL WORD [HEX]) [27]
Warning word 1 [Hex]
(WARNING WORD 1 [HEX]) [28]
008 Display scaling of motor frequency Warning word 2 [Hex]
(WARNING WORD 2 [HEX]) [29]
(FREQUENCY SCALE)
Communication option card warning
Value:
(COMM OPT WARN [HEX]) [30]
0.01 - 500.00 ✭ 1 RPM [min-1 ] (MOTOR RPM [RPM]) [31]
Function: RPM x scaling [- ] (MOTOR RPM X SCALE) [32]
This parameter chooses the factor to be multiplied Function:
by the motor frequency, fM , for presentation in
This parameter allows a choice of the data value
the display, when parameters 009-012 have been
to be displayed in line 2 of the display.
set for Frequency x Scaling [5].
Parameters 010-012 enable the use of three additional
Description of choice: data values to be displayed in line 1.
Set the desired scaling factor. Description of choice:
Reference [%] corresponds to the total reference
Programming
(sum of digital/analogue/preset/bus/freeze
009 Display line 2 (DISPLAY LINE 2) ref./catch-up and slow-down).
Value: Reference [unit] gives the status value of terminals
Reference [%] (REFERENCE [%]) [1] 17/29/53/54/60 using the unit stated on the basis of
Reference [unit] (REFERENCE [UNIT]) [2] configuration in parameter 100 (Hz, Hz and rpm).
Feedback [unit] (FEEDBACK [UNIT]) [3] Feedback [unit] gives the status value of
✭Frequency [Hz] (FREQUENCY [HZ]) [4] terminal 33/53/60 using the unit/scale selected
Frequency x Scaling [-] in parameter 414, 415 and 416.
(FREQUENCY X SCALE) [5] Frequency [Hz] gives the motor frequency, i.e. the
Motor current [A] (MOTOR CURRENT [A]) [6] output frequency from the VLT frequency converter.
Torque [%] (TORQUE [%]) [7] Frequency x Scaling [-] corresponds to the present
Power [kW] (POWER [KW]) [8] motor frequency fM (without resonance dampening)
Power [HP] (POWER [HP] [US]) [9] multiplied by a factor (scaling) set in parameter 008.
Output energy [kWh] Motor current [A] states the phase current of the
(OUTPUT ENERGY [KWH]) [10] motor measured as effective value.
Motor voltage [V] (MOTOR VOLTAGE [V]) [11] Torque [%] gives the current motor load in
DC link voltage [V] (DC LINK VOLTAGE [V]) [12] relation to the rated motor torque.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 103
 VLT® 5000 Series

Power [kW] states the actual power consumed Control word. [Hex] indicates the control word
by the motor in kW. for the VLT frequency converter. See Serial
Power [HP] states the actual power consumed communication in the Design Guide.
by the motor in HP. Warning word 1. [Hex] indicates one or
Output energy [kWh] states the energy more warnings in a Hex code. See page
consumed by the motor since the latest reset 160 for further information.
was made in parameter 618. Warning word 2. [Hex] indicates one or
Motor voltage [V] states the voltage supplied more status states in a Hex code. See page
to the motor. 160 for further information.
DC link voltage [V] states the intermediate circuit Communication option card warning [Hex]
voltage in the VLT frequency converter. gives a warning word if there is a fault on the
Thermal load, motor [%] states the communication bus. Is only active if communication
calculated/estimated thermal load on the options have been installed. Without communication
motor. 100% is the cut-out limit. options, 0 Hex is displayed.
Thermal load, VLT [%] states the calculated/es- RPM [min ] indicates the motor speed. In speed
timated thermal load on the VLT frequency closed loop, the value is measured. In other modes
converter. 100% is the cut-out limit. the value is calculated based on the motor slip.
Hours run [Hours] states the number of hours that the RPM x scaling [-] indicates the motor RPM multiplied
motor has run since the latest reset in parameter 619. by a factor set in parameter 008.
Digital input [Binary code] states the signal states
from the 8 digital terminals (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29,
32 and 33) Input 16 corresponds to the bit at the
010 Display line 1.1 (DISPLAY LINE 1.1)
far left. ’0’ = no signal, ’1’ = connected signal.
011 Display line 1.2 (DISPLAY LINE 1.2)
Analogue input 53 [V] states the signal
value on terminal 53. 012 Display line 1.3 (DISPLAY LINE 1.3)
Analogue input 54 [V] states the signal Value:
value on terminal 54. See parameter 009.
Analogue input 60 [V] states the signal
Function:
value on terminal 60.
Parameter 010 - 012 enable a choice of three different
Pulse reference [Hz] states the possible frequency
data values to be shown on the display, line 1 position
in Hz connected to the terminals 17 or 29.
1, line 1 position 2 and line 1 position 3, respectively.
External reference [%] gives the sum of the
For display read-outs, press the [DIS-
external reference as a percentage (the sum
PLAY/STATUS] button.
of analogue/pulse/bus).
Status wor d [Hex] gives the status word sent Description of choice:
via the serial communication port in Hex code
There is a choice of 32 different data values,
from the VLT frequency converter.
see parameter 009.
Brake power/2 min. [KW] states the brake
power transferred to an external brake resistor. The factory setting for each parameter is the following:
The mean power is calculated continuously
Par. 010 Reference [%]
for the latest 120 seconds.
Par. 011 Motor current [A]
It is assumed that a resistor value has been
Par. 012 Power [kW]
entered in parameter 401.
Brake power/sec. [kW] states the present brake
power transferred to an external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value. 013 Local Control/Configuration as
It is assumed that a resistor value has been
parameter 100
entered in parameter 401.
(LOCAL CTRL/CONFIG.)
Heat sink temp. [ C] states the present heat
sink temperature of the VLT frequency converter. Value:
The cut-out limit is 90 ± 5 C; cutting back Local not active (DISABLE) [0]
in occurs at 60 ± 5 C. LCP control and open loop.
Alarm word [Hex] indicates one or several alarms in (LCP CTRL/OPEN LOOP) [1]
a Hex code. See page 160 for further information. LCP digital control and open loop.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

104 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

(LCP+DIG CTRL/OP.LOOP) [2] The selected configuration (parameter 100)

LCP control/as parameter 100. will be active. Shifts are effected without
(LCP CTRL/AS P100) [3] any abrupt movement.
✭LCP digital control/as parameter 100.
Shift from Remote control to LCP control/as parameter
(LCP+DIG CTRL/AS P100) [4]
100 or LCP digital control/as parameter 100.
Function: The present reference will be maintained. If
This is where the desired function is to be selected if the reference signal is negative, the local
Local control has been chosen in parameter 002. reference will be set at 0.
See also the description of parameter 100.
Shift from LCP control/as parameter 100 or LCP
Description of choice: remote control as parameter 100 to Remote control.
If Local not active [0] is selected, a possible setting of The reference will be replaced by the active reference
Local reference via parameter 003 is blocked. signal from the remote control.
It is only possible to change to Local not active [0]
from one of the other setting options in parameter
013, when the VLT frequency converter has been 014 Local stop
set to Remote control [0] in parameter 002. (LOCAL STOP)
LCP control and open loop [1] is used when the Value:
speed is to be adjustable (in Hz) via parameter 003, Disable (DISABLE) [0]
when the VLT frequency converter has been set ✭Enable (ENABLE) [1]
to Local control [1] in parameter 002.
Function:
If parameter 100 has not been set to Speed control This parameter disables/enables the local stop
open loop [0], switch to Speed control open loop [0] function from the LCP.
This key is used when parameter 002 has been
LCP digital control and open loop [2] functions as set for Remote control [0] or Local [1].
LCP control and open loop [1], the only difference
being that when parameter 002 has been set to Description of choice:
Local operation [1], the motor is controlled via the If Disable [0] is selected, the [STOP] key will be inactive.
digital inputs, according to the list in section Shift
between local and remote control. NB!:
If Enable is selected, the [STOP] key
LCP control/as parameter 100 [3] is selected if the overrules all Start commands.
reference is to be set via parameter 003.

LCP digital control/as parameter 100 [4] functions as

015 Local jog (LOCAL JOGGING)
Programming
LCP control/as parameter 100 [3], although, when
Value:
parameter 002 has been set to Local operation
[1], the motor may be controlled via the digital ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
inputs in accordance with the list in section Shift Possible (ENABLE) [1]
between local and remote control.
Function:
NB!: This parameter enables/disables the jog
Shift from Remote control to LCP digital function on the LCP.
control and open loop: The key is used when parameter 002 has been
set for Remote control [0] or Local [1].
The present motor frequency and direction of rotation Description of choice:
must be maintained. If the present direction of rotation
If Disable [0] is selected, the [JOG] key will be inactive.
does not correspond to the reversing signal (negative
reference), the motor frequency fM will be set at 0 Hz.

Shift from LCP digital control and open loop

to Remote control:

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 105
 VLT® 5000 Series

016 Local reversing 019 Operating state at Power up , local control

(LOCAL REVERSING) (POWER UP ACTION)
Value: Value:
✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0] Auto restart, use saved ref. (AUTO RESTART) [0]
Possible (ENABLE) [1] ✭Forced stop, use saved ref. (LOCAL=STOP) [1]
Forced stop, set ref. to 0
Function: (LOCAL=STOP, REF=0) [2]
This parameter enables/disables the reversing
function on the LCP. Function:
This key can only be used if parameter 002 has Setting of the operating mode when the mains
been set to Local operation [1] and parameter voltage is reconnected.
013 to LCP control [3]. This function can only be active in connection with
Local control [1] in parameter 002.
Description of choice:
If Disable [0] is selected, the [FWD/REV] Description of choice:
key will be inactive. Auto restart, use saved ref. [0] is selected if the unit
See parameter 200. is to start up with the same local reference (set in
parameter 003) and the same start/stop conditions
(given via the [START/STOP] keys) that the frequency
017 Local reset of trip (LOCAL RESET) converter had before it was switched off.
Forced stop, use saved ref. [1] is used if the
Value:
unit is to remain stopped when the mains voltage
Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
is connected, until the [START] key is pressed.
✭Possible (ENABLE) [1]
After the start command, the local reference
Function: used is set in parameter 003.
In this parameter, the reset function can be Forced stop, set ref. to 0 [2] is selected if the unit is to
selected/removed from the keyboard. remain stopped when the mains voltage is connected.
This key can be used when parameter 002 has been Local reference (parameter 003) is reset.
set for Remote control [0] or Local control [1]. NB!:
Description of choice: In remote controlled operation (parameter
002), the start/stop condition at power up
If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the
will depend on the external control signals.
[RESET] key will be inactive.
If Pulse start [2] is selected in parameter 302, the
NB!: motor will remain stopped at power-up.
Only select Disable [0] if an external reset signal
has been connected via the digital inputs.
027 Warning readout line
(WARNING READOUT)
018 Lock for data change Value:
(DATA CHANGE LOCK) ✭Warning in line 1/2 () [0]
Warning in line 3/4 () [1]
Value:
✭Not locked (NOT LOCKED) [0] Function:
Locked (LOCKED) [1] In this parameter it is decided in which line the warning
is to appear in display mode. In programming mode
Function:
(Menu or Quick menu) the warning will appear in line
In this parameter, the software can "lock" the
1/2 to avoid disturbance of the programming.
control, which means that data changes cannot
be made via LCP (however, this is still possible Description of choice:
via the serial communication port).
Select the readout line.
Description of choice:
If Locked [1] is selected, data changes cannot be made.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

106 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Load and motor

If Torque control, speed feedback [5] is selected,
an encoder speed feedback signal must be
100 Configuration
connected to the digital terminals 32/33.
(CONFIG. MODE)
Value: Parameter 205 Maximum reference and parameter
✭Speed control, open loop 415 Maximum feedback must be adapted to the
(SPEED OPEN LOOP) [0] application if [1], [3], [4] or [5] is selected.
Speed control, closed loop
(SPEED CLOSED LOOP) [1]
Process control, closed loop 101 Torque characteristics
(PROCESS CLOSED LOOP) [3] (TORQUE CHARACT)
Torque control, open loop
Value:
(TORQUE OPEN LOOP) [4]
✭High-constant torque (H-CONSTANT TORQUE) [1]
Torque control, speed feedback
High-variable torque low (H-VAR.TORQ.: LOW) [2]
(TORQUE CONTROL SPEED) [5]
High-variable torque medium
Function: (H-VAR.TORQ.: MEDIUM) [3]
This parameter is used for selecting the configuration High-variable torque high
to which the VLT frequency converter is to be adapted. (H-VAR.TORQ.: HIGH) [4]
This makes adaptation to a given application simple, High-special motor characteristics
because the parameters that are not used in the given (H-SPEC.MOTOR CHARACT) [5]
configuration are covered up (not active). By changing High-variable torque with low starting torque
between the different application configurations, (H-VT LOW W. CT-START) [6]
bumpless transfer (frequency only) is ensured. High-variable torque with medium starting torque
(H-VT MED W. CT-START) [7]
Description of choice: High-variable torque with high starting torque
If Speed control, open loop [0] is selected, a normal (H-VT HIGH W. CT-START) [8]
speed control (without feedback signal) is obtained, Normal-constant torque
but with automatic slip compensation, ensuring a (N-CONSTANT TORQUE) [11]
nearly constant speed at varying loads. Normal-variable torque low
Compensations are active, but may be disabled (N-VAR.TORQ.: LOW) [12]
as required in parameter group 100. Normal-variable torque medium
(N-VAR.TORQ.: MEDIUM) [13]
If Speed control, closed loop [1] is selected, a full Normal-variable torque high
holding torque is obtained at 0 rpm, in addition to (N-VAR.TORQ.: HIGH) [14]
increased speed accuracy. A feedback signal must Normal-special motor characteristics
be provided and the PID regulator must be set. (See
also connection examples in the Design Guide).
(N-SPEC.MOTOR CHARACT) [15] Programming
Normal-variable torque with low constant
If Process control, closed loop [3] is selected, the starting torque (N-VT LOW W. CT-START) [16]
internal process regulator will be activated, thereby Normal-variable torque with medium constant
enabling accurate control of a process with respect to starting torque (N-VT MED W. CT-START) [17]
a given process signal. The process signal can be set Normal-variable torque with high constant
using the actual process unit or as a percentage. A starting torque (N-VT HIGH W. CT-START) [18]
feedback signal must be supplied from the process,
Function:
and the process setpoint must be adjusted (See also
In this parameter, the principle for adjusting the U/f
connection examples in the Design Guide).
characteristics of the VLT frequency converter to the
If Torque control, open loop [4] is selected, the torque characteristics of the load is selected. By
speed is regulated and the torque is kept constant. changing between the different torque characteristics,
This is done without a feedback signal, since VLT bumpless transfer (voltage only) is ensured.
5000 accurately calculates the torque on the basis
of the current measurement (See also connection
examples in the Design Guide).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 107
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 102 Motor power (MOTOR POWER)

Value:
NB!: 0.18 kW (0.18 KW) [18]
For VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V, VLT 0.25 kW (0.25 KW) [25]
5001-5011, 380-500 V, and VLT 5011, 0.37 kW (0.37 KW) [37]
550-600 V it is only possible to choose 0.55 kW (0.55 KW) [55]
torque characteristics from [1] to [8]. 0.75 kW (0.75 KW) [75]
1.1 kW (1.10 KW) [110]
If a high torque characteristic [1]-[5] is selected, the
VLT frequency converter is able to provide 160% 1.5 kW (1.50 KW) [150]
torque. If a normal torque characteristic [11]-[15] 2.2 kW (2.20 KW) [220]
is selected, the VLT frequency converter is able to 3 kW (3.00 KW) [300]
provide 110% torque. The normal mode is used for 4 kW (4.00 KW) [400]
oversize motors. See description on page 74. 5.5 kW (5.50 KW) [550]
Please note that the torque can be limited 7.5 kW (7.50 KW) [750]
in parameter 221. 11 kW (11.00 KW) [1100]
15 kW (15.00 KW) [1500]
If Constant torque is selected, a load-dependent U/f 18.5 kW (18.50 KW) [1850]
characteristic is obtained in which the output voltage 22 kW (22.00 KW) [2200]
is increased in the case of an increasing load (current) 30 kW (30.00 KW) [3000]
so as to maintain constant magnetisation of the motor. 37 kW (37.00 KW) [3700]
Select Variable torque low, Variable torque 45 kW (45.00 KW) [4500]
medium or Variable torque high if the load is 55 kW (55.00 KW) [5500]
variable (centrifugal pumps, fans). 75 kW (75.00 KW) [7500]
Select High-variable torque with low [6], medium 90 kW (90.00 KW) [9000]
[7] or high [8] starting torque if a higher breakaway 110 kW (110.00 KW) [11000]
torque is required than that obtainable with the three 132 kW (132.00 KW) [13200]
first-mentioned characteristics, see fig. below. 160 kW (160.00 KW) [16000]
200 kW (200.00 KW) [20000]
250 kW (250.00 KW) [25000]
280 kW (280.00 KW) [28000]
315 kW (315.00 KW) [31500]
355 kW (355.00 KW) [35500]
400 kW (400.00 KW) [40000]
450 kW (450.00 KW) [45000]
500 kW (500.00 KW) [50000]

Depends on the unit

Function:
Choose the torque characteristics giving the most Selects the kW value that corresponds to the
reliable operation, the lowest possible energy rated power of the motor.
consumption and the lowest acoustic noise. A rated kW value has been selected from the
Select Special motor characteristics if a special U/f factory that depends on the unit size.
setting is required to match the motor in question. Description of choice:
Set the break points in parameters 422-432.
Select a value that equals the nameplate data on
NB!: the motor. There are 4 possible undersizes or 1
Slip compensation is not active if a variable oversize in comparison with the factory setting.
torque or special motor characteristics are used. Also, alternatively it is possible to set the value for
motor power as an infinitely variable value.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

108 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

The set value automatically changes the values of

NB!:
the motor parameters in parameter 108-118.
If a delta connection is used, the rated
NB!: motor frequency for the delta connection
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, must be selected.
parameter 110-118 will return to factory setting.
NB!:
If using special motor characteristics a change
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
103 Motor voltage (MOTOR VOLTAGE) change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
Value:
200 V [200]
104 Motor frequency
208 V [208]
(MOTOR FREQUENCY)
220 V [220]
230 V [230] Value:
240 V [240] ✭50 Hz (50 HZ) [50]
380 V [380] 60 Hz (60 HZ) [60]
400 V [400]
415 V [415] Max. motor frequency 1000 Hz.
440 V [440]
Function:
460 V [460]
This is where the rated motor frequency fM,N
480 V [480]
is selected (nameplate data).
500 V [500]
Description of choice:
Depends on the unit. Select a value that equals the nameplate
Note: 500 and 575 V motor voltages must be data on the motor.
manually programmed - pre-sets are not available. Alternatively it is also possible to set the value for motor
frequency infinitely variably , see procedure on page 53.
Function:
If a value different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, it
Select a value that equals the nameplate
is necessary to correct parameters 108 and 109.
data on the motor.
For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set
NB!: the nameplate data for 230 V. Adapt parameter
The motor will always see the peak voltage, 202 Output frequency high limit and parameter 205
corresponding to the connected supply Maximum reference to the 87 Hz application.
voltage, in case of regenerative operation,
NB!:
the voltage can be higher.
If a delta connection is used, the rated Programming
Description of choice: motor frequency for the delta connected
must be selected.
Select a value that equals the nameplate data
on the motor, regardless of the mains voltage NB!:
of the VLT frequency converter. Furthermore, If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
alternatively it is possible to set the value of the the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
motor voltage infinitely variably . setting. If using special motor characteristics a
The value set automatically changes values for the change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
motor parameters in parameters 108-118.
For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set
the nameplate data for 230 V. Adapt parameter
202 Output frequency high limit and parameter 205
Maximum reference to the 87 Hz application.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 109
 VLT® 5000 Series

105 Motor current (MOTOR CURRENT) 107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMA
Value: (AUTO MOTOR ADAPT)
0.01 - IVLT,MAX [0.01 - XXX.X] Value:
✭Adaptation off (OFF) [0]
Depends on the choice of motor. Adaptation on, RS and XS (ENABLE (RS,XS)) [1]
Adaptation on, RS (ENABLE (RS)) [2]
Function:
The rated motor current IM,N forms part of the Function:
VLT frequency converter calculations i.a. of torque If this function is used, the VLT frequency
and motor thermal protection. converter automatically sets the necessary control
parameters (parameters 108/109) with the motor
Description of choice:
stationary. Automatic motor adaptation ensures
Select a value that equals the nameplate optimum use of the motor.
data on the motor. For the best possible adaptation of the VLT
Enter the value in Ampere. frequency converter, it is recommended to
NB!: run AMA on a cold motor.
It is important to enter the correct value, since The AMA function is activated by pressing the
this forms part of the VVCplus control feature. [START] key after selecting [1] or [2].
See also section Automatic motor adaptation.
NB!: The section Automatic motor adaption, AMA, via
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, VLT software dialog shows how automatic motor
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory adaptation can be activated by means of VLT Software
setting. If using special motor characteristics a Dialog. After a normal sequence, the display will read
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422. "ALARM 21". Press the [STOP/RESET] key. The VLT
frequency converter is now ready for operation.
106 Rated motor speed Description of choice:
(MOTOR NOM. SPEED) Select Enable, RS and XS [1] if the VLT frequency
Value: converter is to be able to carry out automatic
100 - 60000 rpm (RPM) [100 - 60000] motor adaptation of both the stator resistance
RS and the stator reactance XS.
Depends on the choice of motor.
Select Optimisation on, RS [2] if a reduced test
Function: is to be carried out, in which only the ohmic
This is where the value is selected that corresponds resistance in the system is determined.
to the rated motor speed nM,N, which can be
NB!:
seen from the nameplate data.
It is important to set motor parameters
Description of choice: 102-106 correctly, since these form part of
The rated motor speed nM,N is used i.a. for the AMA algorithm. In most applications,
calculating the optimal slip compensation. correct entering of motor parameters 102-106 is
sufficient. For optimum dynamic motor adaptation,
NB!: an AMA must be carried out.
It is important to enter the correct value, Motor adaptation may take up to 10 minutes,
since this forms part of the VVCplus control depending on the output of the motor in question.
feature. The max. value equals fM,N x
60. Set fM,N in parameter 104. NB!:
There must not be any externally generating
NB!: torque during automatic motor adaptation.
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

110 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!: XS. The shaft performance can be improved by

If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, fine-tuning RS and XS, see procedure below.
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
setting. If using special motor characteristics a Description of choice:
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422. XS can be set as follows:

1. Automatic motor adaptation, where the VLT

108 Stator resistor (STATOR RESIST) frequency converter measures on the motor
to determine the value. All compensations
Value:
are reset to 100%.
✭Depends on the choice of motor
2. The values are stated by the motor supplier.
Function: 3. These values are obtained by means of
After setting motor data in parameters 102-106, a manual measurements:
number of adjustments of various parameters are - XS can be calculated by connecting a motor to
made automatically, including the stator resistance mains and measuring the phase-to-phase voltage
RS. A manually entered RS must apply to a cold UL as well as the idling current I .
motor. The shaft performance can be improved by Alternatively, these values can be recorded
fine-tuning RS and XS, see procedure below. during operation in idle running state at the
rated motor frequency fM,N, slip compensation
Description of choice: (par. 115) = 0% and load compensation at
RS can be set as follows: high speed (par. 114) = 100%.
1. Automatic motor adaptation, where the VLT
frequency converter measures on the motor
to determine the value. All compensations
are reset to 100%.
2. The values are stated by the motor supplier. 4. The factory settings of XS, selected by the VLT
3. The values are obtained by means of frequency converter itself on the basis of the
manual measurements: motor nameplate data, are used.
- RS can be calculated by measuring the
resistance RPHASE-to-PHASE between two phase NB!:
terminals. If RPHASE-to-PHASE is lower than 1-2 ohm If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
(typically motors >4-5.5 kW, 400 V), a special the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
ohm-meter should be used (Thomson bridge or setting. If using special motor characteristics a
similar). RS = 0.5 x RPHASE-to-PHASE change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.

4. The factory settings of RS, selected by the VLT

frequency converter itself on the basis of the 110 Motor magnetizing, 0 rpm
motor nameplate data, are used. (MOT. MAGNETIZING) Programming
NB!: Value:
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, 0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
Function:
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
This parameter can be used if a different thermal load
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
on the motor is desired when running at low speed.
This parameter is used in connection with
109 Stator reactance parameter 111.
(STATOR REACT.)
Value:
✭depends on the choice of motor

Function:
After setting motor data in parameters 102-106, a
number of adjustments of various parameters are
made automatically, including the stator resistance

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 111
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
Enter a value stated as a percentage of the
rated magnetizing current.
Too low setting may lead to a reduced torque
on the motor shaft.

111 Min. frequency normal magnetizing

(MIN FR NORM MAGN)
Value:
0.1 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 1.0 Hz

Function:
This parameter is used in connection with parameter 114 Load compensation at high speed
110. See drawing in parameter 110. (HI SPD LOAD COMP)
Description of choice: Value:
Set the required frequency (for normal magnetizing 0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
current). If the frequency is set lower than
Function:
the motor slip frequency, parameters 110 and
This parameter enables compensation of
111 are of no significance.
voltage in relation to load when the motor
is running at high speed.

113 Load compensation at low speed Description of choice:

(LO SPD LOAD COMP) In Load compensation at high speed it is possible
to compensate for the load from the frequency
Value:
where Load compensation at low speed stopped
0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
working to max. frequency.
Function:
This function is active for:
This parameter enables compensation of voltage in
relation to load when the motor is running at low speed. Motor size Change-over
0.5 kW - 7.5 kW >10 Hz
Description of choice:
11 kW - 45 kW >5 Hz
Optimum U/f characteristics are obtained, i.e.
55 kW - 355 kW >3-4 Hz
compensation for the load at low speed. The
frequency range within which Load compensation at
low speed is active, depends on the motor size.
This function is active for:
115 Slip compensation
Motor size Change-over (SLIP COMPENSAT.)
0.5 kW - 7.5 kW < 10 Hz Value:
11 kW - 45 kW < 5 Hz -500 - 500 % ✭ 100 %
55 kW - 355 kW < 3-4 Hz
Function:
Slip compensation is calculated automatically, i.e.
on the basis of the rated motor speed nM,N.
In parameter 115, slip compensation can be
adjusted in detail, which compensates for
tolerances in the value of nM,N.
This function is not active together with Variable
torque (parameter 101 - variable torque graphs),
Torque control, Speed feedback and Special
motor characteristics.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

112 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 119 High starting torque

Enter a %-value of the rated motor frequency (HIGH START TORQ.)
(parameter 104). Value:
0.0 - 0.5 sec. ✭ 0.0 sec.

Function:
116 Slip compensation time constant
In order to secure a high starting torque, approx.
(SLIP TIME CONST.)
2 x IVLT,N for max. 0.5 sec. is allowed. However,
Value: the current is limited by the protection limit of the
0.05 - 5.00 sec. ✭ 0.50 sec. VLT frequency converter (inverter).

Function: Description of choice:

This parameter determines the slip compensation Set the necessary time in which a high
reaction speed. starting torque is desired.
Description of choice:
A high value results in slow reaction. Conversely,
a low value results in quick reaction. 120 Start delay (START DELAY)
If low-frequency resonance problems are encountered, Value:
the time set must be longer. 0.0 - 10.0 sec. ✭ 0.0 sec.

Function:
This parameter enables a delay of the starting time.
117 Resonance dampening
The VLT frequency converter begins with the start
(RESONANCE DAMP.) function selected in parameter 121.
Value:
0 - 500 % ✭ 100 % Description of choice:
Set the desired time until acceleration is to begin.
Function:
High-frequency resonance problems can be eliminated
by setting parameters 117 and 118.
121 Start function (START FUNCTION)
Description of choice: Value:
For less resonance oscillation, the value of DC hold in start delay time
parameter 118 must be increased. (DC HOLD/DELAY TIME) [0]
DC brake in start delay time
(DC BRAKE/DELAY TIME) [1]
✭Coasting in start delay time
118 Resonance dampening time constant
(COAST/DELAY TIME) [2] Programming
(DAMP.TIME CONST.) Start frequency/voltage clockwise.
Value: (CLOCKWISE OPERATION) [3]
5 - 50 ms ✭ 5 ms Start frequency/voltage in reference direction
(HORIZONTAL OPERATION) [4]
Function:
VVCplus clockwise
High-frequency resonance problems can be eliminated (VVC+ CLOCKWISE) [5]
by setting parameters 117 and 118.
Function:
Description of choice:
This is where the desired state during start delay
Choose the time constant that provides (parameter 120) is selected.
the best dampening.
Description of choice:
Select DC hold in the start delay time [0] so as
to energize the motor with a DC holding current
(parameter 124) in the start delay time.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 113
 VLT® 5000 Series

Motor check (MOTOR CHECK) [2]

Select DC brake in the start delay time [1] so as
Pre-magnetizing (PREMAGNETIZING) [3]
to energize the motor with a DC braking current
(parameter 125) in the start delay time. Function:
Select Coasting in the start delay time [2] and the Here it is possible to select the function of the
motor will not be controlled by the VLT frequency VLT frequency converter after a stop command
converter during the start delay time (inverter off). or when the frequency has been ramped down
to 0 Hz. See parameter 123 with respect to
Start frequency/voltage clockwise [3] and VVCplus
activation of this parameter regardless of whether
clockwise [5] is typically used in hoisting applications.
the stop command is active.
Start frequency/voltage in reference direction [4] is
used especially in applications with counterweight. Description of choice:
Select Start frequency/voltage clockwise [3] so Select Coasting [0] if the VLT frequency converter
as to have the function described in parameter is to ’let go’ of the motor (inverter closed).
130 and 131 in the start delay time. Select DC hold [1] when a DC holding current set
The output frequency will equal the setting of the in parameter 124 is to be activated.
start frequency in parameter 130, and the output Select Motor check [2] if the VLT frequency converter is
voltage will equal the setting of the start voltage in to check whether or not a motor has been connected.
parameter 131. Regardless of the value assumed Select Pre-magnetizing [3]. The magnetic field is
by the reference signal, the output frequency will built up in the motor while it remains stopped.
equal the setting of the start frequency in parameter This ensures that the motor can produce torque
130 and the output voltage will correspond to the as quickly as possible on starting.
setting of the start voltage in parameter 131.
This functionality is used typically in hoisting
applications. 123 Min. frequency for activating
This is used especially in applications with a cone function at stop
armature motor, where the start is to be clockwise, (MIN.F. FUNC.STOP)
followed by rotation in the reference direction.
Value:
Select Start frequency/voltage in reference direction [4] 0.0 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 0.0 Hz
in order to obtain the function described in parameters
Function:
130 and 131 during the start delay time. The motor
This parameter sets the frequency at which the
will always rotate in the reference direction.
function selected in parameter 122 is to be activated.
If the reference signal equals zero (0) parameter
130 Start frequency will be ignored and the output Description of choice:
frequency will equal zero (0). The output voltage
Enter the desired frequency.
will correspond to the setting of the start voltage
in parameter 131 Start voltage.

Select VVCplus clockwise [5] so as to have only the 124 DC holding current
function described in parameter 130 Start frequency (DC-HOLD CURRENT)
in the start delay time. The start voltage will be
Value:
calculated automatic. Notice that this function only
✭ 50 %
uses the start frequency in the start delay time.
Regardless of the value assumed by the reference Function:
signal, the output frequency will equal the setting This parameter is used to uphold the motor function
of the start frequency in parameter 130. (holding torque) or to pre-heat the motor.

NB!:
The maximum value depends on the rated
122 Function at stop
motor current. f the DC holding current
(FUNCTION AT STOP)
is active, the VLT frequency converter has
Value: a switching frequency of 4 kHz.
✭Coasting (COAST) [0]
DC hold (DC-HOLD) [1]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

114 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: Description of choice:

This parameter can only be used if DC hold [1] Set the desired time.
has been selected in parameter 121 or 122. Set
it as a percentage value in relation to the rated
motor current IM,N set in parameter 105.
127 DC brake cut-in frequency
100% DC holding current corresponds to IM,N.
(DC BRAKE CUT-IN)
Warning: 100 % supply for too long Value:
may damage the motor. 0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 0.0 Hz (OFF)

Function:
This parameter is for setting the DC brake cut-in
125 DC braking current frequency at which the DC braking current
(DC BRAKE CURRENT) (parameter 125) is to be active, in connection
with a stop command.
Value:
✭ 50 % Description of choice:
Set the desired frequency.
Function:
This parameter is used for setting the DC brake
current that is activated upon a stop when the DC
brake frequency set in parameter 127 has been 128 Motor thermal protection
reached, or if the DC brake inverse is active via digital (MOT.THERM PROTEC)
terminal 27 or via a serial communication port. The Value:
DC braking current will be active for the duration of ✭No protection (NO PROTECTION) [0]
the DC braking time set in parameter 126. Thermistor warning (THERMISTOR WARN) [1]
NB!: Thermistor trip (THERMISTOR TRIP) [2]
The maximum value depends on the rated ETR Warning 1 (ETR WARNING1) [3]
motor current. If the DC braking current ETR Trip 1 (ETR TRIP1) [4]
is active, the VLT frequency converter has ETR Warning 2 (ETR WARNING2) [5]
a switching frequency of 4.5 kHz. ETR Trip 2 (ETR TRIP2) [6]
ETR Warning 3 (ETR WARNING3) [7]
Description of choice: ETR Trip 3 (ETR TRIP3) [8]
To be set as a percentage value of the rated motor ETR Warning 4 (ETR WARNING 4) [9]
current IM,N set in parameter 105. ETR Trip 4 (ETR TRIP4) [10]
100% DC braking current corresponds to IM,N.
Function:
Warning: 100 % supply for too long The VLT frequency converter is able to monitor the Programming
may damage the motor. motor temperature in two different ways:

- Via a thermistor sensor connected to one

of the analogue inputs, terminals 53 and 54
126 DC braking time (parameters 308 and 311).
- Calculation of the thermal load, based on the
(DC BRAKING TIME)
current load and the time. This is compared with
Value: the rated motor current IM,N and the rated motor
0.0 (OFF) - 60.0 sec. ✭ 10.0 sec. frequency fM,N . The calculations made take into
account the need for a lower load at lower speeds
Function:
because of less cooling from the fan.
This parameter is for setting the DC braking time
for which the DC braking current (parameter ETR functions 1-4 do not start calculating the load
125) is to be active. until there is a switch-over to the Setup in which
they were selected. This enables the use of the
ETR function, even where two or several motors
alternate. For the North American market: The

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 115
 VLT® 5000 Series

ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload

protection in accordance with NEC.

Description of choice:
Select No protection if no warning or tripping is
required when the motor is overloaded.
Select Thermistor warning if a warning is desired when
the connected thermistor - and thus the motor
- gets too hot.
Select Thermistor trip if cutting out (trip) is desired
when the connected thermistor - and thus the motor
- overheats.

Select ETR Warning 1-4 , if a warning is to come

up on the display when the motor is overloaded 130 Start frequency (START FREQUENCY)
according to the calculations. Value:
Select ETR Trip 1-4 if tripping is desired when the 0.0 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 0.0 Hz
motor is overloaded according to the calculations.
The VLT frequency converter can also be programmed Function:
to give off a warning signal via one of the digital This parameter allows setting of the output frequency
outputs, in which case the signal is given both for at which the motor is to start.
warning and for trip (thermal warning). The output frequency ’leaps’ to the set value.
This parameter can be used e.g. for hoist
applications (cone rotor motors).

Description of choice:
Set the desired start frequency.
It is assumed that the start function in parameter
121 has been set to [3] or [4] and that a start
delay time has been set in parameter 120; also,
a reference signal must be present.

129 External motor fan 131 Initial voltage (INITIAL VOLTAGE)

(MOTOR EXTERN FAN) Value:
Value: 0.0 - parameter 103 ✭ 0.0 Volt
✭No (NO) [0]
Function:
Yes (YES) [1]
Some motors, such as cone rotor motors, need extra
Function: voltage/starting frequency (boost) when starting, so
This parameter informs the frequency converter as to disengage the mechanical brake.
whether the motor has an external separately supplied For this purpose use parameters 130/131.
fan on the motor (external ventilation), indicating
Description of choice:
that derating at low speed is unnecessary.
Set the desired value required to disengage
Description of choice: the mechanical brake.
If Yes [1] is selected, the graph below is followed It is assumed that the start function in parameter
if the motor frequency is lower. If the motor 121 has been set to [3] or [4] and that a start
frequency is higher, the time will still derate as delay time has been set in parameter 120; also,
if no fan had been installed. a reference signal must be present.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

116 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ References and limits

200 Output frequency range/direction

(OUT FREQ RNG/ROT)
Value:
✭Only clockwise, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ CLOCK WISE) [0]
Both directions, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ BOTH DIRECT.) [1]
Only clockwise, 0-1000 Hz
(1000 HZ CLOCK WISE) [2]
Both directions, 0-1000 Hz
(1000 HZ BOTH DIRECT.) [3]
Only counter clockwise, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ COUNTERCLOCK) [4] Parameter 200 Output frequency range/direction
Only counter clockwise, 0-1000 Hz = both directions.
(1000 HZ COUNTERCLOCK) [5]

Function:
This parameter guarantees protection against 201 Output frequency low limit (FMIN)
unwanted reversing. Furthermore, the maximum (OUT FREQ LOW LIM)
output frequency can be selected that is to apply, Value:
regardless of the settings of other parameters. 0.0 - fMAX ✭ 0.0 Hz
NB!:
Function:
The output frequency of the VLT frequency
In this parameter, a minimum motor frequency limit
converter can never assume a value
can be selected that corresponds to the minimum
higher than 1/10 of the switching
frequency at which the motor is to run.
frequency, see parameter 411.
The minimum frequency can never be higher
Is not to be used together with Process control, than the maximum frequency, fMAX.
closed loop (parameter 100). If Both directions has been selected in parameter 200,
the minimum frequency is of no significance.
Description of choice:
Description of choice:
Select the desired direction as well as output frequency.
Note that if Clockwise, 0-132 Hz [0], Clockwise, A value from 0.0 Hz to the max. frequency selected
0-1000 Hz [2], Counter clockwise, 0-132 Hz [4] or in parameter 202 (fMAX) can be chosen.
Counter clockwise, 0-1000 Hz [5] is selected, the Programming
output frequency will be limited to the range fMIN - fMAX.
If Both directions, 0-132 Hz [1] or Both directions, 202 Output frequency high limit (FMAX)
0-1000 Hz [3] is selected, the output frequency (OUT FREQ HI LIM)
will be limited to the range ± fMAX (the minimum
Value:
frequency is of no significance).
fMIN - 132/1000 Hz (parameter 200)
Example:
✭ depends on unit

Function:
In this parameter, a maximum motor frequency can be
selected that corresponds to the highest frequency at
which the motor is to run. The factory setting is 132
Hz for VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V, VLT 5001-5062
550-600 V and 5001-5027 200-240 V. For VLT
5075-5250 380-500 V, VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V
and 5032-5052 200-240 V the factory setting is 66 Hz.

See also parameter 205.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 117
 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!: Speed control, open loop: Hz

The output frequency of the VLT frequency Speed control, closed loop: rpm
converter can never assume a value higher Torque control, open loop: Nm
than 1/10 of the switching frequency. Torque control, speed feedback: Nm
Process control, closed loop: Process units
Description of choice:
(par. 416)
A value from fMIN to the choice made in
parameter 200 can be selected.
Special motor characteristics, activated in parameter
NB!: 101, use the unit selected in parameter 100.
If the maximum motor frequency is set at
more than 500 Hz, parameter 446 must be
set at 60 AVM [0] switching pattern.
205 Maximum reference
(MAX. REFERENCE)
203 Reference/feedback area Value:
(REF/FEEDB. RANGE) RefMIN - 100,000.000 ✭ 50.000
Value:
Function:
✭Min - Max (MIN - MAX) [0]
The Maximum reference gives the highest value that
- Max - + Max (-MAX-+MAX) [1]
can be assumed by the sum of all references. If
Function: closed loop has been selected in parameter 100,
This parameter decides whether the reference the maximum reference cannot be set higher than
signal and the feedback signal are to be positive the maximum feedback (parameter 415).
or can be both positive and negative.
Description of choice:
The minimum limit may be a negative value, unless
Set the desired value.
Speed control, closed loop has been selected
The unit follows the choice of configuration
(parameter 100).
in parameter 100.
Choose Min - Max [0] if Process control, closed
loop has been selected in parameter 100. Speed control, open loop: Hz
Speed control, closed loop: rpm
Description of choice:
Torque control, open loop: Nm
Choose the desired range.
Torque control, speed feedback: Nm
Process control, closed loop: Process units
(par. 416)
204 Minimum reference
(MIN. REFERENCE)
Special motor characteristics, activated in parameter
Value:
101, use the unit selected in parameter 100.
-100,000.000 - RefMAX ✭ 0.000
Depends on parameter 100.

Function: 206 Ramp type (RAMP TYPE)

The Minimum reference gives the minimum value Value:
that can be assumed by the sum of all references. ✭Linear (LINEAR) [0]
Minimum reference is only active if Min - Max [0] has Sinusoidal (S1) [1]
been set in parameter 203; however, it is always
Sin2 (S2) [2]
active in Process control, closed loop (parameter 100).
Sin3 (S3) [3]
Description of choice:
Function:
Is only active when parameter 203 has been There is a choice of 4 different ramp types.
set to Min - Max [0].
Set the desired value. Description of choice:
The unit follows the choice of configuration Select the desired ramp type, depending on
in parameter 100. requirements concerning acceleration/deceleration.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

118 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
Program the desired ramp-down time.

209 Ramp-up time 2

(RAMP UP TIME 2)
Value:
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit

Function:
See description of parameter 207.
207 Ramp-up time 1
Description of choice:
(RAMP UP TIME 1)
Program the desired ramp-up time.
Value:
Switching from ramp 1 to ramp 2 is effected via a
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit signal on digital input terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
Function:
The ramp-up time is the acceleration time from 0 Hz
to the rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter 104) or 210 Ramp-down time 2
the rated motor speed nM,N (if Speed control, closed (RAMP DOWN TIME 2)
loop has been selected in parameter 100). This Value:
presupposes that the output current does not reach 0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit
the torque limit (to be set in parameter 221).
Function:
See description of parameter 208.

Description of choice:
Program the desired ramp-down time.
Switching from ramp 1 to ramp 2 is effected via a
signal on digital input terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.

211 Jog ramp time (JOG RAMP TIME)

Description of choice: Value:
Program the desired ramp-up time. 0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit
Programming
Function:
The jog ramp time is the acceleration/deceleration time
208 Ramp-down time 1 from 0 Hz to the rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter
(RAMP DOWN TIME 1) 104). It is assumed that the output current is not
Value: higher than the torque limit (set in parameter 221).
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit

Function:
The ramp-down time is the deceleration time from the
rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter 104) to 0 Hz or
from the rated motor speed nM,N , provided there is
no over-voltage in the inverter because of regenerative
operation of the motor, or if the generated current
reaches the torque limit (to be set in parameter 222).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 119
 VLT® 5000 Series

The jog ramp time starts if a jog signal is given select whether a shift between external references
via the control panel, the digital inputs or the and preset references is desired.
serial communication port.
Description of choice:
Description of choice: If Sum [0] is selected, one of the adjusted preset
Set the desired ramp time. references (parameters 215-218) is added as a
percentage of the maximum possible reference.
If Relative [1] is selected, one of the adjusted
preset references (parameters 215-218) is added
212 Quick stop ramp-down time
to the external references as a percentage
(Q STOP RAMP TIME)
of the actual reference.
Value: In addition, it is possible to use parameter 308 to
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit select whether the signals on terminals 54 and 60 are
to be added to the sum of the active references.
Function:
If External/preset [2] is selected, it is possible to shift
The ramp-down time is the deceleration time
between external references or preset references
from the rated motor frequency to 0 Hz, provided
via terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33 (parameter 300,
no over- voltage arises in the inverter because
301, 305, 306 or 307). Preset references will be
of generating operation of the motor or if the
a percentage value of the reference range.
generated current becomes higher than the
External reference is the sum of the analogue
torque limit (set in parameter 222).
references, pulses and bus references. See also
Quick-stop is activated by means of a signal on digital
drawings in section Handling of multi-references.
input terminal 27, or via the serial communication port.
NB!:
Description of choice:
If Sum or Relative is selected, one of the preset
Program the desired ramp-down time. references will always be active. If the preset
references are to be without influence, they
should be set to 0 % (as in the factory setting).
213 Jog frequency (JOG FREQUENCY)
The example shows how to calculate the output
Value:
frequency if using Preset references together with
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz
Sum and Relative in parameter 214.
Function: Parameter 205 Maximum reference has
The jog frequency fJOG is the fixed output frequency been set to 50 Hz.
at which the VLT frequency converter is running
when the jog function is activated.

Description of choice:
Set the desired frequency.

214 Reference function

(REF FUNCTION)
Value:
✭Sum. (SUM) [0]
Relative (RELATIVE) [1]
External/preset (EXTERNAL/PRESET) [2]

Function:
It is possible to define how the preset references
are to be added to the other references. For
this purpose, Sum or Relative is used. It is also
possible - by using the External/preset function - to

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

120 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Par. 204 Increase Frequency Par. 215 Par. 214 Reference Par. 214 Reference
Min. [Hz/V] by 4.0 V Preset ref. type = Sum [0] type = Relative [1]
reference
1) 0 5 20 Hz 15 % Output frequency Output frequency
00+20+7.5 = 27.5 Hz 00+20+3 = 23.0 Hz
2) 10 4 16 Hz 15 % 10+16+6.0 = 32.0 Hz 10+16+2.4 = 28.4 Hz
3) 20 3 12 Hz 15 % 20+12+4.5 = 36.5 Hz 20+12+1.8 = 33.8 Hz
4) 30 2 8 Hz 15 % 30+8+3.0 = 41.0 Hz 30+8+1.2 = 39.2 Hz
5) 40 1 4 Hz 15 % 40+4+1.5 = 45.5 Hz 40+4+0.6 = 44.6 Hz

Terminals 17/29/33 Terminals 16/29/32

preset ref. msb preset ref. lsb
0 0 Preset ref. 1
0 1 Preset ref. 2
1 0 Preset ref. 3
1 1 Preset ref. 4

See drawings in section Handling og multi-references.

219 Catch up /slow down value

(CATCH UP/SLW DWN)
215 Preset reference 1 (PRESET REF. 1) Value:
216 Preset reference 2 (PRESET REF. 2) 0.00-100% of the current reference ✭ 0.00%
217 Preset reference 3 (PRESET REF. 3)
Function:
218 Preset reference 4 (PRESET REF. 4)
This parameter enables the entry of a percentage
Value:
value (relative) which will either be added to or
-100.00 % - +100.00 % ✭ 0.00% deducted from the actual reference.
of the reference range/external reference
Description of choice:
Function:
If Catch up has been selected via one of the terminals
Four different preset references can be programmed
Programming
16, 29 or 32 (parameters 300, 305 and 306), the
in parameters 215-218.
percentage (relative) value selected in parameter
The preset reference is stated as a percentage of
219 will be added to the total reference.
the value RefMAX or as a percentage of the other
If Slow down has been selected via one of the
external references, depending on the choice made in
terminals 17, 29 or 33 (parameters 301, 305 and 307),
parameter 214. If a RefMIN ≠ 0 has been programmed,
the percentage (relative) value selected in parameter
the preset reference as a percentage will be calculated
219 will be deducted from the total reference.
on the basis of the difference between RefMAX and
RefMIN, following which the value is added to RefMIN.

Description of choice: 221 Torque limit for motor mode

Set the fixed reference(s) that is/are to be the options. (TORQ LIMIT MOTOR)

To use the fixed references, it is necessary to Value:

have selected Preset ref. enable on terminal 0.0 % - xxx.x % of TM,N ✭ 160 % of TM,N
16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
Function:
Choices between fixed references can be
This function is relevant for all application
made by activating terminal 16, 17, 29, 32
configurations; speed, process and torque control.
or 33 - see the table below.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 121
 VLT® 5000 Series

This is where to set the torque limit for motor operation. 222 Torque limit for generating operation
The torque limiter is active in the frequency range up (TORQ LIMIT GENER)
to the rated motor frequency (parameter 104). Value:
In the oversynchronous range, where the frequency 0.0 % - xxx.x % of TM,N ✭ 160 %
is higher than the rated motor frequency, this
The max. torque depends on the unit and
function acts as a current limiter.
the motor size selected.
See fig. below.
Function:
This function is relevant for all application
configurations; speed, process and torque control.
This is where to set the torque limit for generating
operation. The torque limiter is active in the frequency
range up to the rated motor frequency (parameter 104).
In the oversynchronous range, where the frequency
is higher than the rated motor frequency, this
function acts as a current limiter.
See fig. for parameter 221 as well as parameter
409 for further details.

Description of choice:
If Resistor brake [1] has been selected in
parameter 400, the torque limit is changed to
1.6 x the rated motor torque.

223 Warning: Low current

(WARN. CURRENT LO)
Value:
0.0 - parameter 224 ✭ 0.0 A

Function:
When the motor current is below the limit,
Description of choice: ILOW, programmed in this parameter, the display
indicates CURRENT LOW.
See also parameter 409 for further details.
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
In order to protect the motor from reaching status signal via terminal 42 or 45 as well as via relay
pull-out torque, the factory setting is 1.6 x the output 01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
rated motor torque (calculated value).
Description of choice:
If a synchronous motor is used, the torque limit must
The lower signal limit ILOW of the motor current
be increased in relation to the factory setting.
must be programmed within the normal working
If a setting in parameters 101-106 is changed,
range of the frequency converter.
parameters 221/222 are not automatically
reversed to the factory setting.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

122 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

226 Warning: High frequency

(WARN. FREQ. HIGH)
Value:
parameter 225 - parameter 202 ✭ 132.0 Hz

Function:
When the motor frequency is above the limit
programmed in this parameter, fHIGH, the display
will indicate FREQUENCY HIGH.
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).

Description of choice:
The upper signal limit of the motor frequency, fHIGH,
224 Warning: High current must be programmed within the normal working
range of the frequency converter.
(WARN. CURRENT HI)
See drawing at parameter 223.
Value:
Parameter 223 - IVLT,MAX ✭ IVLT,MAX

Function: 227 Warning: Low feedback

f the motor current gets above the limit (WARN. FEEDB. LOW)
programmed in this parameter, IHIGH, the display Value:
will indicate CURRENT HIGH. -100,000.000 - parameter 228. ✭ -4000.000
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output Function:
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326). If the connected feedback signal gets below the
value set in this parameter, the signal outputs can
Description of choice:
be programmed to transmit a status signal via
The upper signal limit of the motor current, IHIGH, must terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output 01 or 04
be programmed within the normal working range of the (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
frequency converter. See drawing at parameter 223.
Description of choice:
Set the desired value.
225 Warning: Low frequency
(WARN. FREQ. LOW)
228 Warning: High feedback Programming
Value:
0.0 - parameter 226 ✭ 0.0 Hz (WARN. FEEDB HIGH)
Value:
Function: parameter 227 - 100,000.000 ✭ 4000.000
When the motor frequency is below the limit
programmed in this parameter, fLOW, the display Function:
indicates FREQUENCY LOW. If the connected feedback signal gets above the
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a value set in this parameter, the signal outputs can
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output be programmed to transmit a status signal via
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326). terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output 01 or 04
(parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
Description of choice:
The lower signal limit of the motor frequency, fLOW, Description of choice:
is to be programmed within the normal working Set the desired value.
range of the frequency converter.
See drawing at parameter 223.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 123
 VLT® 5000 Series

229 Frequency bypass, bandwidth Function:

(FREQ BYPASS B.W.) In this parameter it is possible to select monitoring
Value: of the motor phases.
0 (OFF) - 100% ✭ 0 (OFF) % Description of choice:

Function: If Enable is selected, the frequency converter

Some systems call for some output frequencies to be will react on a missing motor phase which will
avoided because of resonance problems in the system. result in alarm 30, 31 or 32.
In parameters 230-233 these output frequencies can If Disable is selected, no alarm is given if a motor phase
be programmed for bypassing (Frequency bypass). is missing. The motor can be damaged/overheated if it
In this parameter (229), a bandwidth can be defined runs on only two phases. It is therefore recommended
on either side of these frequency bypasses. to keep the missing motor phase function ENABLED.
The frequency bypass function is not active if par.
002 is set to Local and par. 013 is set to LCP
ctrl/Open loop or LCP+dig ctrl/Open loop.

Description of choice:
The bypass bandwidth is set as a percentage
of the bypass frequency which is selected
in parameter 230-233.
The bypass bandwidth indicates max. variation
of the bypass frequency.

Example: A bypass frequency of 100 Hz and a

bypass bandwidth of 1% are selected. In this case
the bypass frequency can vary between 99.5 Hz
and 100.5 Hz i.e. 1% of 100 Hz.

230 Frequency bypass 1 (FREQ. BYPASS 1)

231 Frequency bypass 2 (FREQ. BYPASS 2)
232 Frequency bypass 3 (FREQ. BYPASS 3)
233 Frequency bypass 4 (FREQ. BYPASS 4)
Value:
0.0 - parameter 200 ✭ 0.0 Hz

Function:
Some systems call for some output frequencies to be
avoided because of resonance problems in the system.

Description of choice:
Enter the frequencies to be avoided.
See also parameter 229.

234 Motor phase monitor

(MOTOR PHASE MON)
Value:
✭Enable (ENABLE) [0]
Disable (DISABLE) [1]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

124 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Inputs and outputs

Digital inputs Terminal no. 16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33

parameter 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]
Reset (RESET) [1]* [1] [1] [1] [1]
Coasting stop, inverse (COAST INVERSE) [0]*
Reset and coasting stop, inverse (COAST & RESET INVERS) [1]
Quick-stop, inverse (QSTOP INVERSE) [2]
DC-braking, inverse (DCBRAKE INVERSE) [3]
Stop inverse (STOP INVERSE) [2] [2] [4] [2] [2] [2]
Start (START) [1]*
Latched start (LATCHED START) [2]
Reversing (REVERSING) [1]*
Start reversing (START REVERSE) [2]
Only start clockwise, on (ENABLE START FWD.) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Only start anti-clockwise, on (ENABLE START REV) [3] [3] [4] [3]
Jog (JOGGING) [4] [4] [5]* [4] [4]
Preset reference, on (PRESET REF. ON) [5] [5] [5] [5] [5]
Preset reference, lsb (PRESET REF. SEL. LSB) [5] [7] [6]
Preset reference, msb (PRESET REF. MSB) [6] [8] [6]
Freeze reference (FREEZE REFERENCE) [7] [7]* [9] [7] [7]
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [8] [8] [10] [8] [8]
Speed up (SPEED UP) [9] [11] [9]
Speed down (SPEED DOWN) [9] [12] [9]
Choice of Setup, lsb (SETUP SELECT LSB) [10] [13] [10]
Choice of Setup, msb (SETUP SELECT MSB) [10] [14] [10]
Choice of Setup, msb/speed up (SETUP MSB/SPEED UP) [11]*
Choice of Setup, lsb/speed down (SETUP LSB/SPEED DOWN) [11]*
Catch-up (CATCH UP) [11] [15] [12]
Slow-down (SLOW DOWN) [11] [16] [12]
Ramp 2 (RAMP 2) [12] [12] [17] [13] [13]
Mains failure inverted (MAINS FAILURE INVERSE) [13] [13] [18] [14] [14] Programming
Pulse reference (PULSE REFERENCE) [23] [28]1
Pulse feedback (PULSE FEEDBACK) [24]
Encoder feedback input, A (ENCODER INPUT 2A) [25]
Encoder feedback input, B (ENCODER INPUT 2B) [24]
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [24] [5]

1) If this function is selected for terminal 29, the same function for terminal 17 will not be valid, even if it has been
selected to be active.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 125
 VLT® 5000 Series

300 Terminal 16, input Start, is selected if a start/stop (operating

(DIGITAL INPUT 16) command, group 2) command is desired. Logic
Function: ’1’ = start, logic ’0’ = stop.
In this and the following parameters it is possible 002
to choose between the different possible functions
related to the inputs on terminals 16-33.
The function options are shown in the table on
page 111. The maximum frequency for terminal 16,
17, 18 and 19 is 5 kHz. The maximum frequency
for terminals 29, 32 and 33 is 65 kHz.

Description of choice:
No function is selected if the VLT frequency converter
Latched start - if a pulse is applied for min. 3 ms,
is not to react to signals transmitted to the terminal.
the motor will start, provided no stop command
Reset zeroes the VLT frequency converter after an (operating command, group 2). The motor stops
alarm; however, not all alarms can be reset. if Stop inverse is activated briefly.

Coasting stop inverse is used for making the Reversing is used for changing the direction of
VLT frequency converter let go of the motor to rotation of the motor shaft. Logic "0" will not lead
make it coast freely to stop. Logic ’0’ leads to reversing. Logic "1" will lead to reversing. The
to coasting stop and reset. reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation;
it does not activate the start function.
Reset and coasting stop inverse, is used for Reversing requires that Both directions has been
activating coasting stop at the same time as reset. selected in parameter 200.
Logic 0’ leads to coasting stop and reset Is not active if Process control, closed loop or Torque
control, speed feedback has been selected.
Quick-stop inverse is used for stopping the motor
in accordance with the quick-stop ramp (set in Start reversing, is used for start/stop (operating
parameter 212). Logic ’0’ leads to a quick-stop. command, group 2) and for reversing with the same
signal. No signal is allowed on terminal 18 at the
DC braking inverse is used for stopping the
same time. Acts as latch start reversing, provided
motor by energizing it with a DC voltage for a
latch start has been chosen for terminal 18.
given time, see parameters 125-127.
Is not active if Process control, closed loop
Please note that this function is only active if the
has been selected.
value of parameters 126-127 is different from
0. Logic ’0’ leads to DC braking. Start clockwise only, on is used if the motor shaft is
only to be able to rotate clockwise when starting.
Stop inverse is activated by interrupting the voltage
Should not be used with Process control, closed loop.
to the terminal. This means that if the terminal
has no voltage, the motor cannot run. The stop Start anti-clockwise only, is used if the motor shaft
will be effected in accordance with the selected is to rotate anti-clockwise when started.
ramp (parameters 207/208/209/210). Should not be used with Process control, closed loop .

None of the above-mentioned stop Jog is used for overriding the output frequency to the
commands (start-disable) are to be used jog frequency set in parameter 213. The ramp time
as disconnection switch in connection can be set in parameter 211. Jog is not active if a
with repairs. Cut mains instead. stop command has been given (start-disable). Jog
overrides stop (operating command, group 2).
NB!:
It must be noted that when the VLT frequency Preset reference, on is used for shifting between
converter is at the torque limit and has received external reference and preset reference. It is assumed
a stop command, it will only stop if terminal that External/preset [2] has been selected in parameter
42, 45, 01 or 04 has been connected to terminal 214. Logic ’0’ = external references active; logic
27. The data choice on terminal 42, 45, 01 or ’1’ = one of the four preset references is active
04 must be Torque limit and stop [27]. in accordance with the table below.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

126 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Preset reference, lsb and Preset reference, msb

enables a choice of one of the four preset references, Example:
in accordance with the table below. Terminal Freeze ref./
Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb (16) (17) Freeze output
Preset ref. 1 0 0 No speed change 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 Speed down 0 1 1
Preset ref. 3 1 0 Speed up 1 0 1
Preset ref. 4 1 1 Speed down 1 1 1

Freeze reference - freezes the actual reference. The The speed reference frozen via the control panel can
frozen reference is now the point of enable/condition be changed even if the VLT frequency converter has
for Speed up and Speed down to be used. stopped. The frozen reference will be remembered
If speed up/down is used, the speed change in case of a mains drop-out.
always follows ramp 2 (parameters 209/210)
Selection of Setup, lsb and Selection of Setup,
in the range 0 - RefMAX.
msb enables a choice of one of the four Setups;
Freeze output - freezes the actual motor however, this presupposes that parameter 004
frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is has been set at Multi Setup.
now the point of enable/condition for Speed up
Selection of Setup, msb/Speed up and Selection
and Speed down to be used.
of Setup, lsb/Speed down - together with
If speed up/down is used, the speed change
the use of Freeze reference or Freeze output -
always follows ramp 2 (parameters 209/210)
enable up/down speed change.
in the range 0 - fM,N.
The selection of Setup occurs in accordance
NB!:
with the below verification table:
If Freeze output is active, the VLT frequency
converter cannot be stopped via terminals Selection of Setup Freeze ref/
18 and 19, but only via terminal 27 (to (32)msb (33)lsb Freeze output
be programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or Setup 1 0 0 0

Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1]). Setup 2 0 1 0

Setup 3 1 0 0
After Freeze output, the PID integrators are reset. Setup 4 1 1 0
No speed change 0 0 1
Speed up and Speed down are selected if digital Speed down 0 1 1
control of the up/down speed is desired (motor Speed up 1 0 1
potentiometer). This function is only active if Freeze Speed down 1 1 1
reference or Freeze output has been selected. As long
as there is a logic 1 on the terminal selected for speed
Programming
Catch-up/Slow-down is selected if the reference
up, the reference or the output frequency will increase. value is to be increased or reduced by a programmable
Follow ramp 2 (parameter 209) in the range 0 - fMIN. percentage value set in parameter 219.
As long as there is a logic 1 on the terminal Slow-down Catch-up
selected for speed down, the reference or the
output frequency will be reduced. Follow ramp 2 Unchanged speed 0 0
(parameter 210) in the range 0 - fMIN. Reduced by %-value 1 0
Pulses (logic 1 minimum high for 3 ms and a minimum Increased by %-value 0 1
pause of 3 ms) will lead to a change of speed of Reduced by %-value 1 1

0.1% (reference) or 0.1 Hz (output frequency).

Ramp 2 is selected if a change between ramp
1 (parameters 207-208) and ramp 2 (209-210)
is desired. Logic ’0’ leads to ramp 1, while
logic ’1’ leads to ramp 2.

Mains failure inverted is to be selected if parameter

407 Mains failure and/or parameter 408 Quick
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 127
 VLT® 5000 Series

discharge is to be activated. Mains failure inverted 302 Terminal 18 Start, input

is active in the logical 0’ situation. (DIGITAL INPUT 18)
See also Mains fault/quick discharge on Value:
page 66, if required. See parameter 300.
NB!:
Function:
The VLT frequency converter can be totally
This parameter allows a choice between the different
damaged by repeating the Quick discharge
options on terminal 18. The enabled functions
function on the digital input with mains
are shown in the table on page 102.
voltage connected to the system.
Maximum frequency for terminal 18 is 5 kHz.
Pulse reference is selected if a pulse sequence
Description of choice:
(frequency) of 0 Hz is used, corresponding to
See parameter 300.
RefMIN, parameter 204. The frequency is set in
parameter 327, corresponding to RefMAX.

Pulse feedback is selected if a pulse sequence 303 Terminal 19, input

(frequency) is selected as a feedback signal.
(DIGITAL INPUT 19)
Select Encoder feedback, input A, if encoder Value:
feedback is to be used after choosing Speed control, See parameter 300.
closed loop or Torque control, speed feedback in
parameter 100. Set Pulse/rpm in parameter 329. Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the
Select Encoder feedback, input B, if encoder different options on terminal 19. The functions
feedback is to be used with a 90 pulse to are shown in the table on page 102.
register the direction of rotation. Maximum frequency for terminal 19 is 5 kHz.

Safety interlock has the same function as Coasting Description of choice:

stop, inverse, but Safety interlock generates the See parameter 300.
alarm message "external fault" on the display
when the selected terminal is logic "0". The alarm
message will also be active via digital outputs
304 Terminal 27, input
42/45 and relay outputs 01/04 if programmed for
Safety interlock. The alarm can be reset using a (DIGITAL INPUT 27)
digital input or the [OFF/STOP] key. Value:
See parameter 300.

Function:
301 Terminal 17, input This parameter allows a choice between the
(DIGITAL INPUT 17) different options on terminal 27.
Value: Functions are shown in the table on page 102.
See parameter 300. Maximum frequency for terminal 27 is 5 kHz.

Function: Description of choice:

This parameter allows a choice between the See parameter 300.
different options on terminal 17.
The functions are shown in the table on page 95.
Maximum frequency for terminal 17 is 5 kHz.

Description of choice:
See parameter 300.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

128 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

305 Terminal 29, input Maximum frequency for terminal 32 is 65 kHz.

(DIGITAL INPUT 29)
Description of choice:
Value:
See parameter 300.
See parameter 300.

Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the 307 Terminal 33, input
different options on terminal 29. The functions (DIGITAL INPUT 33)
are shown in the table on page 102.
Value:
Maximum frequency for terminal 29 is 65 kHz.
See parameter 300.
Description of choice:
Function:
See parameter 300.
This parameter allows a choice between the
different options on terminal 33. The functions
are shown in the table on page 102.
306 Terminal 32, input Maximum frequency for terminal 33 is 65 kHz.
(DIGITAL INPUT 32)
Description of choice:
Value:
See parameter 300.
See parameter 300.

Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the
different options on terminal 32. The functions
are shown in the table on page 102.

Analogue inputs terminal no. 53(voltage) 54(voltage) 60(current)

parameter 308 311 314
Value:
No operation (NO OPERATION) [0] [0]✭ [0]
Reference (REFERENCE) [1] ✭ [1] [1] ✭
Feedback signal (FEEDBACK) [2] [2]
Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT CTRL) [3] [2] [3]
Thermistor (THERMISTOR INPUT) [4] [3]
Relative reference (RELATIVE REFERENCE) [4] [4]
Max. torque frequency (MAX. TORQUE FREQ.) [5]
Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 129
 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: terminal 54/60 is a percentage of the full range of the

This parameter allows a choice of the desired terminal in question. This will be added to the sum of
option on terminal 53. the other references. If several relative references have
Scaling of the input signal is effected in been selected (preset reference 215-218, 311 and
parameters 309 and 310. 314), these will be added first, following which this
sum will be added to the sum of the active references.
Description of choice:
No operation. Is selected if the VLT frequency converter NB!:
is not to react to signals connected to the terminal. If Reference or Feedback signal has been
Reference. Is selected to enable change of reference selected on more than one terminal, these
by means of an analogue reference signal. signals will be added with signs.
If other inputs are connected, these are added
Max. torque frequency. This is only used in Torque
up, taking account of their signs.
control, open loop (parameter 100) for limiting the
Feedback-signal. Is selected if closed loop control
output frequency. Selected if the max. output
with an analogue signal is used.
frequency is to be controlled by an analogue input
Torque limit. Is used if the torque limit value
signal. The frequency range goes from Output
set in parameter 221 is to be changed by
frequency low limit (parameter 201) to Output
means of an analogue signal.
frequency high limit (parameter 202).
Thermistor. Is selected if a thermistor integrated in
the motor is to be able to stop the VLT frequency
converter in case of motor overtemperature. The
cut-out value is > 3 kohm. The thermistor is connected 309 Terminal 53, min. scaling
to terminal 50 and the actual input selected (53 or 54). (AI 53 SCALE LOW)

NB!: Value:
If the temperature of the motor is utilized 0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 0.0 Volt
through a thermistor via the VLT frequency
Function:
converter, the following most be noted:
This parameter is used for setting the signal
In case of short circuits between motorwinding
value that corresponds to the maximum reference
and thermistor, PELV is not complied with.
value set in parameter 204.
In order to comply with PELV, the thermistor
must be utilized externally. Description of choice:
Set the desired voltage value.
See also section Handling of single references.

310 Terminal 53, max. scaling

(AI 53 SCALE HIGH)
Value:
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 10.0 Volt

Function:
This parameter is used for setting the signal
value that corresponds to the maximum reference
If a motor features a KLIXON thermal switch instead, value set in parameter 205.
this can also be connected to the input. If motors
run in parallel, the thermistors/thermal switches Description of choice:
can be connected in series (total resistance < 3 Set the desired voltage value.
kohm). Parameter 128 must be programmed for See also section Handling of single references.
Thermistor warning [1] or Thermistor trip [2].
Relative reference is selected if a relative adjustment
of the reference sum is required.
This function is only active if Relative has been
selected (parameter 214). The relative reference on
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

130 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

311 Terminal 54, analogue input voltage Scaling of the input signal is effected in
(AI [V] 54 FUNCT.) parameters 315 and 316.
Value: Description of choice:
See description of parameter 308
See description of parameter 308.
Function:
This parameter chooses between the different
functions available for the input, terminal 54. 315 Terminal 60, min. scaling
Scaling of the input signal is effected in (AI 60 SCALE LOW)
parameters 312 and 313.
Value:
Description of choice: 0.0 - 20.0 mA ✭ 0.0 mA
See description of parameter 308.
Function:
This parameter determines the value of the reference
signal that is to correspond to the minimum
312 Terminal 54, min. scaling reference value set in parameter 204.
(AI 54 SCALE LOW) If the Time-out function of parameter 317 is to be
Value: used, the value must be set at >2 mA.
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 0.0 Volt Description of choice:
Function: Set the desired current value.
This parameter is used for setting the signal See also section Handling of single references.
value that corresponds to the minimum reference
value set in parameter 204.
316 Terminal 60, max. scaling
Description of choice:
(AI 60 SCALE HIGH)
Set the desired voltage value.
Value:
See also section Handling of single references.
0.0 - 20.0 mA ✭ 20.0 mA

Function:
313 Terminal 54, max. scaling This parameter sets the value of the reference
(AI 54 SCALE HIGH) signal that is to correspond to the maximum
Value: reference value set in parameter 205.
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 10.0 Volt Description of choice:
Function: Set the desired current value.
This parameter is used for setting the signal See also section Handling of single references . Programming
value that corresponds to the maximum reference
value set in parameter 205.
317 Time out
Description of choice:
(LIVE ZERO TIME O)
Set the desired voltage value.
Value:
See also section Handling of single references .
0 - 99 sec. ✭ 10 sec.

Function:
314 Terminal 60, analogue input current If the signal value of the reference signal connected
(AI [MA] 60 FUNCT) to the input, terminal 60, falls below 50% of the
value set in parameter 315 for a period longer than
Value:
the time set in parameter 317, the function selected
See description of parameter 308
in parameter 318 will be activated.
Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the different
functions available for the input, terminal 60.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 131
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
Set the desired time.

318 Function after time out

(LIVE ZERO FUNCT.)
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0]
Freeze output frequency (FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.)[1]
Stop (STOP) [2]
Jog (JOGGING) [3]
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) [4]
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]

Function:
This parameter allows a choice of the function to
be activated if the input signal on terminal 60 drops
below 2 mA, provided parameter 315 has been
set higher than 2 mA and that the preset time for
time-out (parameter 317) has been exceeded.

If more time-outs occur at the same time the

VLT frequency converter will give the following
priority to the time-out function:
1. Parameter 318 Function after time out
2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss
3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function

Description of choice:
The output frequency of the VLT frequency
converter can be:
- frozen at the present value
- overruled to stop
- overruled to jog frequency
- overruled to max. frequency
- overruled to stop with subsequent trip.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

132 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. 42 45 01(re- 04

lay) (relay)
parameter 319 321 323 326
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Control ready (CONTROL READY) [1] [1] [1] [1]
Ready signal (UNIT READY) [2] [2] [2] [2]
Ready - remote control (UNIT READY/REM CTRL) [3] [3] [3] [3] ✭
Enable, no warning (ENABLE/NO WARNING) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Running (VLT RUNNING) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Running, no warning (RUNNING/NO WARNING) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Running within range, no warning (RUN IN RANGE/NO WARN) [7] [7] [7] [7]
Running at reference value, no warning (RUN ON REF/NO WARN) [8] [8] [8] [8]
Fault (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9]
Fault or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [10] [10] [10] [10]
Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Out of current range (OUT OF CURRENT RANGE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Over I low (ABOVE CURRENT,LOW) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Under I high (BELOW CURRENT,HIGH) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Out of frequency range (OUT OF FREQ RANGE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Over f low (ABOVE FREQUENCY LOW) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Under f high (BELOW FREQUENCY HIGH) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Out of feedback range (OUT OF FDBK RANGE) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Over feedback low (ABOVE FDBK, LOW) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Under feedback high (BELOW FDBK, HIGH) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Ready - no thermal warning (READY & NOTHERM WARN) [22] [22] [22] ✭ [22]
Ready - remote control - no therm. (REM RDY & NO THERMWAR) [23] [23] [23] [23]
warn.
Ready - mains voltage within range (RDY NO OVER/UNDERVOL) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversing (REVERSE) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus ok (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26]
Torque limit and stop (TORQUE LIMIT AND STOP) [27] [27] [27] [27]
Brake, no brake warning (BRAKE NO BRAKE WARNING) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Brake ready, no fault (BRAKE RDY (NO FAULT)) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT (IGBT)) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanical brake control (MECH. BRAKE CONTROL) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Control word bit 11/12 (CTRL WORD BIT 11/12) [33] [33] Programming
Extended mechanical brake control (EXT. MECH. BRAKE) [34] [34] [34] [34]
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [35] [35] [35] [35]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 133
 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. 42 45 01(relay) 04

(relay)

parameter 319 321 323 326

Value:
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 0-20 mA) [36] [36]
0-100 Hz ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 4-20 mA) [37] [37]
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-100 Hz = 0-32000P) [38] [38]
0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-FMAX = 0-20 mA) [39] [39] ✭
0 - fMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-FMAX = 4-20 mA) [40] [40]
0 - fMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-FMAX = 0-32000P) [41] [41]
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (REF MIN-MAX = 0-20 mA) [42] [42]
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (REF MIN-MAX = 4-20 mA) [43] [43]
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (REF MIN-MAX = 0-32000P) [44] [44]
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 0-20 mA) [45] [45]
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 4-20 mA) [46] [46]
FBMIN - FBMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (FB MIN-MAX = 0-32000P) [47] [47]
0 - IMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-IMAX = 0-20 mA) [48] ✭ [48]
0 - IMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-IMAX = 4-20 mA) [49] [49]
0 - IMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-IMAX = 0-32000P) [50] [50]
0 - TLIM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-TLIM = 0-20 mA) [51] [51]
0 - TLIM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-TLIM = 4-20 mA) [52] [52]
0 - TLIM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-TLIM = 0-32000P) [53] [53]
0 - TNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-TNOM = 0-20 mA) [54] [54]
0 - TNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-TNOM = 4-20 mA) [55] [55]
0 - TNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-TNOM = 0-32000P) [56] [56]
0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-PNOM = 0-20 mA) [57] [57]
0 - PNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-PNOM = 4-20 mA) [58] [58]
0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-PNOM = 0-32000P) [59] [59]
0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-SYNCRPM = 0-20 mA) [60] [60]

0 -SyncRPM ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-SYNCRPM = 4-20 mA) [61] [61]

0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-0-SYNCRPM = 0-32000 p) [62] [62]
0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA (0-RPMFMAX = 0-20 mA) [63] [63]
0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA (0-RPMFMAX = 4-20 mA) [64] [64]
0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p (0-RPMFMAX = 0-32000 p) [65] [65]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

134 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Function:
Under f high, the output frequency is lower than
This output can act both as a digital and an analogue
the value set in parameter 226.
output. If used as a digital output (data value [0]-[65]),
a 24 V DC signal is transmitted; if used as an Out of feedback range, the feedback signal is outside
analogue output either a 0-20 mA signal, a 4-20 the range programmed in parameters 227 and 228.
mA signal or a pulse output is transmitted.
Over feedback low, the feedback signal is higher
Description of choice: than the value set in parameter 227.
Control ready, the VLT frequency converter is ready
for use; the control card receives supply voltage. Under feedback high, the feedback signal is lower
that the value set in parameter 228.
Ready signal, the VLT frequency converter control
card is receiving a supply signal and the frequency Thermal warning, above the temperature limit in
converter is ready for operation. either the motor, the VLT frequency converter,
the brake resistor or the thermistor.
Ready, remote control, the VLT frequency converter
control card is receiving a supply signal and parameter Ready - no thermal warning, the VLT frequency
002 has been set to remote control. converter is ready for use, the control card receives
supply voltage and there are no control signals
Enable, no warning, the VLT frequency converter on the inputs. No over-temperature.
is ready for use; no start or stop command has
been given (start/disable). No warning. Ready - remote control - no thermal warning,
the VLT frequency converter is ready for use and
Running, a start command has been given. set at remote control, the control card receives
supply voltage. No over-temperature.
Running, no warning , the output frequency is higher
than the frequency set in parameter 123. A start Ready - mains voltage within range, the VLT frequency
command has been given. No warning. converter is ready for use, the control card receives
supply voltage and there are no control signals
Runs in range, no warning, runs within the programmed on the inputs. The mains voltage is within the
current/frequency ranges set in parameters 223-226. permitted voltage range (see chapter 8).
Runs on reference, no warning, speed according Reversing. Logic ¶1¶ = relay activated, 24 V DC
to reference. No warning. on the output when the direction of rotation of the
Fault, output is activated by alarm. motor is clockwise. Logic ’0’ = relay not activated,
no signal on the output, when the direction of
Fault or warning, the output is activated rotation of the motor is anti-clockwise.
by alarm or warning.
Bus-ok, active communication (no time-out) via
Torque limit, the torque limit in parameter the serial communication port. Programming
221 has been exceeded.
Torque limit and stop is used in connection with
Out of current range, the motor current is outside the coasting stop (terminal 27), where it is possible to
range programmed in parameters 223 and 224. give a stop even if the VLT frequency converter is at
the torque limit. The signal is inverted, i.e. a logic
Over I low, the motor current is higher than
0’ when the VLT frequency converter has received
set in parameter 223.
a stop signal and is at the torque limit.
Under I high, the motor current is lower than
Brake, no brake warning, the brake is active
set in parameter 224.
and there are no warnings.
Out of frequency range, the output frequency
Brake ready, no fault, the brake is ready for
is outside the frequency range programmed
operation and there are no faults.
in parameters 225 and 226.
Brake fault, the output is a logical "1" when the brake
Over f low, the output frequency is higher than
IGBT has short-circuited. This function is used to
the value set in parameter 225.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 135
 VLT® 5000 Series

protect the VLT frequency converter if there is a fault 0 - MLIM ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output proportional
on the brake modules. To avoid a potential fire in the to the output torque in the interval 0 - TLIM
brake resistor, the output/relay can be used to cut out (parameter 221) is obtained. 20 mA corresponds
the supply voltage from the VLT frequency converter. to the value set in parameter 221.

Relay 123, if Fieldbus profile [0] has been selected in 0 - MNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA and
parameter 512, the relay is activated. If either OFF1, 0 - MNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA and
OFF2 or OFF3 (bit in the control word) is logic ’1’. 0 - MNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output signal proportional
to the output torque of the motor. 20 mA corresponds
Mechanical brake control, enables control of an to the rated torque for the motor.
external mechanical brake, see description in chapter 7.
0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-20 mA and
Control word bits 11/12, relay controlled via bits 11/12 0 - PNOM ⇒ 4-20 mA and
in serial control word. Bit 11 relates to relay 01 and 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000 p, 0 - PNOM ⇒ 0-32000
bit 12 to relay 04. If parameter 514 Bus time interval p, an output signal proportional to the rated
function is active, relays 01 and 04 will be voltage-free. motor output is obtained. 20 mA corresponds
See section on Serial communication in to the value set in parameter 102.
the Design Guide.
0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 0-20 mA and
Safety interlock The output is active when 0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 4-20 mA and
Safety interlock has been selected on an input 0 - SyncRPM ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output
and the input is a logic "1". signal proportional to the synchronous motor
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-20 mA and RPM is obtained.
0-100 Hz ⇒ 4-20 mA and 0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA and
0-100 Hz ⇒ 0-32000 p, a pulse output 0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA and
signal proportional to the output frequency 0 - RPM at FMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, n output signal
in the range 0-100 Hz. proportional to the synchronous motor RPM at
0-fMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA and FMAX (parameter 202) is obtained.
0-fMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA and
0-fMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output signal proportional
to the output frequency range in the range 320 Terminal 42, output, pulse scaling
0 - fMAX (parameter 202). (AO 42 PULS SCALE)
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA and Value:
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA and 1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz
RefMIN - RefMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output signal
Function:
proportional to the reference value in the interval
This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.
RefMIN - RefMAX (parameters 204/205) is obtained.
Description of choice:
BMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 0-20 mA and
FBMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 4-20 mA and Set the desired value.
FBMIN -FBMAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output signal
proportional to the feedback value in the interval FBMIN
-FBMAX (parameters 414/415) is obtained.

0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 0-20 mA or

0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 4-20 mA and
0 - IVLT, MAX ⇒ 0-32000 p, an output signal
proportional to the output current in the interval
0 - IVLT,MAX is obtained. IVLT,MAX depends on the
settings in parameter 101 and 103 and can be seen
from the Technical data (IVLT,MAX (60 s).

0 - MLIM ⇒ 0-20 mA and

0 - MLIM ⇒ 4-20 mA and

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

136 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

321 Terminal 45, output 324 Relay 01, ON delay

(AO 45 FUNCT.) (RELAY 1-3 ON DL)
Value: Value:
See description for parameter 319. 0.00 - 600.00. ✭ 0.00 sec.

Function: Function:
This output can function both as a digital and an This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time
analogue output. Used as a digital output (data value of relay 01 (terminals 01-02).
[0]-[35]) it generates a 24 V (max. 40 mA) signal; on the
analogue outputs (data value [36]-[59]) there is a choice Description of choice:
of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or a scalable pulse output. Enter the desired value (can be set at
intervals of 0.02 sec.).
Description of choice:
See description for parameter 319.
325 Relay 01, OFF delay
(RELAY 1-3 OFF DL)
322 Terminal 45, output, pulse scaling
Value:
(AO 45 PULS SCALE) 0.00 - 600.00 ✭ 0.00 sec.
Value:
1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz Function:
This parameter makes it possible to delay the
Function: cut-out time of relay 01 (terminals 01-03).
This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.
Description of choice:
Description of choice: Enter the desired value (can be set at
Set the desired value. intervals of 0.02 sec.).

323 Relay 01, output 326 Relay 04, output

(RELAY 1-3 FUNCT.) (RELAY 4-5 FUNCT.)
Value: Value:
See description of parameter 319. See description of parameter 319.

Function: Function:
This output activates a relay switch. This output activates a relay switch.
Relay switch 01 can be used for bringing status and Relay switch 04 can be used for bringing status and
warnings. The relay is activated when the conditions warnings. The relay is activated when the conditions Programming
for the relevant data values have been fulfilled. for the relevant data values have been fulfilled.
Activation/deactivation can be delayed in
parameter 324/325. Description of choice:
See description of parameter 319.
Description of choice: Connections - see the below drawing.
See description of parameter 319.
Connections - see the below drawing.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 137
 VLT® 5000 Series

327 Pulse reference, max. frequency Description of choice:

(PULSE REF MAX) Read the correct value from the encoder. Pay
Value: attention to the speed limitation (rpm) for a given
100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 29 number of pulses/rpm, see the drawing below:
100 - 5000 Hz at terminal 17 ✭ 5000 Hz

Function:
In this parameter, the signal value is set that
corresponds to the maximum reference value set
in parameter 205. Setting of this parameter affects
an internal filter constant, i.e. at 100 Hz = 5 sec;
1 kHz = 0.5 sec. and at 10 kHz = 50 msec. To
avoid a too long filter time constant at low pulse
resolution, the reference (parameter 205) and this
parameter can be multiplied by the same factor and
in this way use the lower reference range.
The encoder used is to be of the Open Collector
Description of choice:
PNP 0/24 V DC type (max. 20 kHz) or a Push-Pull
Set the desired pulse reference. circuit 0/24 V DC (max. 65 kHz).

328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency 330 Freeze reference/output function

(PULSE FEEDB MAX) (FREEZE REF/OUTP.)
Value: Value:
100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 33 ✭ 25000 Hz ✭No operation (NO OPERATION) [0]
Freeze reference (FREEZE REFERENCE) [1]
Function:
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [2]
This is where to set the feedback value that is to
correspond to the maximum feed back value. Function:
Description of choice: In this parameter it is possible to freeze either
the reference or the output.
Set the desired feedback value.
Description of choice:
Freeze reference [1] freezes the actual reference.
329 Encoder feedback pulse/rev. The frozen reference is now the basis for
(ENCODER PULSES) Speed up and Speed down.
Freeze output [2] freezes the actual motor frequency
Value:
(Hz). The frozen frequency is now the basis
128 pulses /rev. (128) [128]
for Speed up and Speed down.
256 pulses /rev. (256) [256]
512 pulses /rev. (512) [512] NB!:
✭1024 pulses /rev. (1024) [1024] If Freeze output is active, the frequency
2048 pulses /rev. (2048) [2048] converter cannot be stopped via terminals
4096 pulses /rev. (4096) [4096] 18 and 19, but only via terminal 27 (to
be programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or
This value can also be set between 1-4096 pulses/rev. Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1]).

Function: After Freeze output, the PID integrators are reset.

This is where to set the encoder pulses per revolution
that correspond to the motor rpm.
This parameter is only available in Speed control,
closed loop and in Torque control, speed
feedback (parameter 100).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

138 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

345 Encoder loss timeout 357 Terminal 42, Output minimum scaling
(ENC LOSS TIMEOUT) (OUT 42 SCAL MIN)
Value: 359 Terminal 45, Output minimum scaling
0 - 60 sec. ✭ 1 sec. (OUT 45 SCAL MIN)

Function: Value:
If the encoder signal is interrupted from terminal 000 - 100% ✭ 0%
32 or 33 the function selected in parameter
Function:
346 will be activated.
These parameters are to scale the minimum
If the encoder feedback signal is different from the
output of the selected analogue/pulse signal
output frequency +/- 3 x nominal motor slip the
on terminals 42 and 45.
encoder loss function will be activated.
An encoder loss timeout can occur even if the encoder Description of choice:
works all right. Check the motor parameter in group The minimum value is to be scaled as a percentage
100 if no error can be found on the encoder. of the maximum signal value, i.e. 0mA (or 0 Hz)
The Encoder loss function is only active in Speed is desired at 25% of the maximum output value,
control, closed loop [1] and Torque control, speed and then 25% is programmed.
feedback [5], see parameter 100 Configuration. The value can never be higher than the
Description of choice: corresponding setting of Output maximum scaling
if this value is below 100%.
Set the required time.

346 Encoder loss function

(ENC. LOSS FUNC)
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0]
Freeze output frequency (FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.)[1]
Jog (JOGGING) [3]
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) [4]
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]
Select Setup 4 (SELECT SETUP 4) [7]

Function:
In this parameter the function can be activated if the
encoder signal is disconnected from terminal 32 or 33. 358 Terminal 42, Output maximum scaling
(OUT 42 SCAL MAX) Programming
If more time-outs occur at the same time the
VLT frequency converter will give the following 360 Terminal 45, Output maximum scaling
priority to the time-out function: (OUT 45 SCAL MAX)
1. Parameter 318 Function after time out
Value:
2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss
000 - 500% ✭ 100%
3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function.
Function:
Description of choice:
These parameters are to scale the maximum
The output frequency of the VLT frequency
output of the selected analogue/pulse signal
converter can be:
on terminals 42 and 45.
- frozen at the present value
- overruled to jog frequency Description of choice:
- overruled to max. frequency Set the value to the desired maximum value
- overruled to stop with subsequent trip of the current signal output.
- overruled to Setup 4.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 139
 VLT® 5000 Series

Maximum value:

The output can be scaled to give a lower current

than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an output
below 100% of the maximum signal value.
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value
between 0 - 100% of the full-scale output, program the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA.
If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired at
maximum output (100%), the percentage value to
program in the drive is calculated as:

i.e.

A similar scaling is possible on the pulse output.

The value (pulse scale value) in parameter 320
(output 42) and 321 (output 45) is the basis of
the scaling. If the pulse scale value is the desired
output at a value between 0 - 100% of the full
scale output, program the percentage, i.e. 50%
for pulse scale value at 50% output.
If a pulse frequency between 0,2 x pulse scale
value and pulse scale value, the percentage
is calculated as follows:

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

140 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Special functions
Warning: If Overvoltage control [2] is used
at the same time as the supply voltage
400 Brake function/overvoltage control
to the frequency converter is close to or
(BRAKE FUNCTION) above the maximum limit, there is a risk that the
Value: motor frequency will increase and that, consequently,
✭Off (OFF) [0] the frequency converter will not stop the motor when
Resistor brake (RESISTOR) [1] stop is pressed. If the supply voltage is higher than
Overvoltage control (OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL) [2] 264 V for 200-240 V units, higher than 550 V for
Overvoltage control and stop 380-500 V units, or higher than 660 V for 550-600
(OVERVOLT CTRL. & STOP) [3] V units, Overvoltage control and stop[3] should be
selected so that the motor can be stopped.
Function:
The factory setting is Off [0] for VLT 5001-5027
200-240 V, VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V and 550-600 401 Brake resistor, ohm
V. For VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V, 5075-5250 (BRAKE RES. (OHM))
380-500 V and VLT 5075-5250 550-600 V the Value:
factory setting is Overvoltage control [2]. Depends on the unit ✭ Depends on the unit
Resistor brake [1] is used for programming the
frequency converter for connection of a brake resistor. Function:
The connection of a brake resistor allows This parameter gives the ohmic value of the brake
a higher intermediate circuit voltage during resistor. This value is used for monitoring the
braking (generating operation). power to the brake resistor provided this function
The Resistor brake [1] function is only active in units has been selected in parameter 403.
with an integral dynamic brake (SB and EB units).
Description of choice:
Overvoltage control (excl. brake resistor) can Set the present resistor value.
be selected as an alternative. This function is
active for all units (ST, SB and EB).

The function ensures that a trip can be avoided if the 402 Brake power limit, kW
intermediate circuit voltage increases. This is done by (BR.POWER. LIM.KW)
increasing the output frequency to limit the voltage Value:
from the intermediate circuit. This is a very useful Depends on the unit ✭ Depends on the unit
function, e.g. if the ramp-down time is too short,
since tripping of the frequency converter is avoided. Function:
In this situation, the ramp-down time is extended. This parameter gives the monitoring limit of the
power transmitted to the brake resistor.
NB!: Programming
Please note that the ramp-down time Description of choice:
is extended in the case of overvoltage The monitoring limit is determined as a product of
control, which in some applications the maximum duty cycle (120 sec.) that will occur
may not be appropriate. and the maximum power of the brake resistor at that
duty cycle according to the following formula.
Description of choice:
For 200 - 240 V units: P =
Select Resistor brake [1] if a brake resistor
is part of the system. For 380 - 500 V units: P =
Select Overvoltage control [2] if the overvoltage control
function is required in all cases - also if stop is pressed. For 550 - 600 V units: P =
The frequency converter will not stop in the case of a
stop command when the overvoltage control is active.
Select Overvoltage control and stop [3] if the
overvoltage control function is not required during
ramp-down after stop has been pressed.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 141
 VLT® 5000 Series

403 Power monitoring disconnected is carried out when there is no braking.

(POWER MONITORING) A warning or trip disconnects the brake function.
Value: The testing sequence is as follows:
Off (OFF) 1. If the intermediate circuit voltage is higher than the
[0]
brake starting voltage, discontinue the brake check.
✭Warning (WARNING) [1]
2. If the intermediate circuit voltage is unstable,
Trip (TRIP) [2]
discontinue the brake check.
Function: 3. Carry out a brake test.
This parameter allows monitoring of the power 4. If the intermediate circuit voltage is lower than the
transmitted to the brake resistor. The power is starting voltage, discontinue the brake check.
calculated on the basis of the resistor ohm value 5. If the intermediate circuit voltage is unstable,
(parameter 401), the intermediate circuit voltage and discontinue the brake check.
the resistor running time. If the power transmitted 6. If the braking power is higher than 100%,
over 120 sec. exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit discontinue the brake check.
(parameter 402) and Warning [1] has been selected, 7. If the intermediate circuit voltage is higher than
a warning will come up on the display. The warning the intermediate circuit voltage -2% before
will disappear if the power goes below 80%. If the the brake test, discontinue the brake check
calculated power exceeds 100% of the monitoring and give off a warning or alarm.
limit and Trip [2] has been selected in parameter 403 8. Brake check OK.
Power monitoring, the frequency converter will cut out
Description of choice:
while giving an alarm. If power monitoring has been
selected as Off [0] or Warning [1], the brake function If Off [0] is selected, this function will still monitor
will remain active, even if the monitoring limit has been whether the brake resistor and the brake IGBT
exceeded.This may lead to thermal overload of the short-circuit during operation, in which case it will
resis tor. It is also possible to have a warning via the give off a warning. If Warning [1] is selected, the
relay/digital outputs. The typical measuring accuracy brake resistor and brake IGBT will be monitored
of the power monitoring depends on the accuracy of with respect to short-circuiting. In addition, on
the resistor ohmic value (better than ± 20%). power-up it will be checked whether the brake
resistor has been disconnected.
NB!:
The power dissipation during quick NB!:
discharge does not form part of the A warning in connection with Off [0] or Warning
power monitoring function. [1] can only be removed by disconnecting the
mains supply and turning it back on, provided
Description of choice: the fault has been corrected. Please note that in
Select whether this function is to be active connection with Off [0] or Warning [1] the frequency
(Warning/Alarm) or inactive (Off). converter will continue even if a fault has been found.

In the case of Trip [2], the frequency converter will

cut out while giving an alarm (trip locked) if the brake
404 Brake check resistor has short-circuited or been disconnected
(BRAKE TEST) or if the brake IGBT has short-circuited.
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0]
Warning (WARNING) [1] 405 Reset function (RESET MODE)
Trip (TRIP) [2]
Value:
Function: ✭Manual reset (MANUAL RESET) [0]
In this parameter a testing and monitoring function Automatic reset x 1 (AUTOMATIC X 1) [1]
can be integrated which will give a warning or an Automatic reset x 2 (AUTOMATIC X 2) [2]
alarm. On power-up it will be tested whether the Automatic reset x 3 (AUTOMATIC X 3) [3]
brake resistor is disconnected. The test of whether Automatic reset x 4 (AUTOMATIC X 4) [4]
the brake resistor is disconnected is carried out Automatic reset x 5 (AUTOMATIC X 5) [5]
during braking, while the test of whether the IGBT is Automatic reset x 6 (AUTOMATIC X 6) [6]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

142 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Automatic reset x 7 (AUTOMATIC X 7) [7] Function:

Automatic reset x 8 (AUTOMATIC X 8) [8] Using the mains failure function, it is possible to
Automatic reset x 9 (AUTOMATIC X 9) [9] ramp down the load to 0 Hz if the mains supply
Automatic reset x 10 (AUTOMATIC X 10) [10] to the frequency converter fails.
In parameter 450 Mains voltage during mains
Function: fault, the voltage limit must be set at which the
This parameter makes it possible to select the Mains fault function is to be active.
reset function desired after tripping. This function can also be activated by selecting
After reset, the frequency converter can be restarted. Mains failure inverted on a digital input.
When Kinetic backup [4] is selected, the ramp
Description of choice:
function in parameter 206-212 is deactivated.
If Manual reset [0] is selected, reset must be effected
Controlled ramp down and kinetic back up have
via the [RESET] key or via the digital inputs.
limited perfomance above 70% load.
If the frequency converter is to carry out an
automatic reset (1-10 times) after tripping, Description of choice:
select data value [1]-[10]. Select No function [0] if this function is not required. If
Controlled ramp-down [1] is selected, the motor will
NB!:
ramp via the quick-stop ramp set in parameter 212. If
The internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter is
the supply voltage is re-established during ramp-down,
reset 10 minutes after the first AUTOMATIC
the frequency converter will start up again. If Controlled
RESET has occurred.
ramp-down and trip [2] is selected, the motor will
Warning: The motor may start ramp via the quick-stop ramp set in parameter 212.
without warning. At 0 Hz the frequency converter will trip (ALARM 36,
mains failure). If the supply voltage is re-established
during ramp-down, the frequency converter will
continue the quick-stop ramp and trip. If Coasting
406 Automatic restart time [3] is selected, the frequency converter will turn off
(AUT RESTART TIME) the inverters and the motor will start coasting.
Parameter 445 Flying motor must be active,
Value:
so that if the supply voltage is re-established,
0 - 10 sec. ✭ 5 sec.
the frequency converter will be able to catch
Function: the motor and start up again.
This parameter allows setting of the time from tripping If Kinetic back-up [4] is selected, the frequency
until the automatic reset function begins. converter will try to utilise the energy from the
It is assumed that automatic reset has been load to maintain a constant intermediate circuit
selected in parameter 405. voltage. If the supply voltage is re-established, the
frequency converter will start up again.
Description of choice: If Controlled alarm suppression [5] is selected, the Programming
Set the desired time. frequency converter will trip if there is a mains failure
and the unit is not stopped by OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
via the Profibus. Only active with Fieldbus profile
407 Mains failure (par. 512) selected and Profibus installed.
(MAINS FAILURE)
Value:
✭No function (NO FUNCTION) [0] 408 Quick discharge
Controlled ramp-down (QUICK DISCHARGE)
(CONTROL RAMP DOWN) [1] Value:
Controlled ramp-down and trip ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
(CTRL. RAMP DOWN-TRIP) [2] Possible (ENABLE) [1]
Coasting (COASTING) [3]
Kinetic back-up (KINETIC BACKUP) [4] Function:
Controlled alarm suppression The option is given of quickly discharging
(CTRL ALARM SUPP) [5] the intermediate circuit capacitors by means
of an external resistor.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 143
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 411 Switching frequency

This function is only active in extended units, since (SWITCH FREQ.)
it requires the connection of external 24 V DC and Value:
a brake resistor or discharge resistor; otherwise, ✭Depends on the unit output.
the data selection is limited to Disable [0].
This function can be activated by selecting a digital Function:
input signal for Mains failure inverted . Select The set value determines the switching frequency
Disable if this function is not required. Select of the inverter. If the switching frequency is
Enable and connect 24 V DC external supply changed, this may help to minimise possible
and a brake/discharge resistor. acoustic noise from the motor.
See section Quick discharge.
NB!:
The output frequency of the frequency
converter can never assume a value higher
409 Trip delay torque than 1/10 of the switching frequency.
(TRIP DELAY TORQ.)
Description of choice:
Value:
0 - 60 sec. (OFF) ✭ OFF When the motor is running, the switching
frequency is adjusted in parameter 411 until
Function: the frequency has been obtained at which the
When the frequency converter registers that the motor is as low-noise as possible.
output torque has increased up to the torque limits See also parameter 446 - switching pattern. See
(parameters 221 and 222) in the set time, cutting derating in the Design Guide.
out is effected when that time has passed.
NB!:
Description of choice: Switching frequencies higher than 3.0
Select how long the frequency converter is to be kHz (4.5 kHz for 60 C AVM) lead to
able to run at the torque limit before cutting out. 60 automatic derating of the maximum output
sec. = OFF means that the time is infinite; however, of the frequency converter.
the thermal monitoring will still be active.

412 Output frequency dependent switching

frequency
410 Trip delay-inverter (VAR CARRIER FREQ)
(INV.FAULT DELAY) Value:
Value: ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
0 - 35 sec. ✭ Depends on type of unit Possible (ENABLE) [1]

Function: Function:
When the frequency converter registers an This function makes it possible to increase the
overvoltage in the set time, cutting out is effected switching frequency at a falling output frequency.
after that time has passed. Used in applications with square torque characteristics
(centrifugal pumps and fans) in which the load declines
Description of choice:
depending on the output frequency. However,
Select how long the frequency converter is to be the maximum switching frequency is determined
able to run at overvoltage before cutting out. by the value set in parameter 411.
NB!: Description of choice:
If this value is reduced from the factory
Select Not possible [0] if a permanent switching
setting, the unit may report a fault when
frequency is desired.
the mains voltage is turned on.
Set the switching frequency in parameter 411. If
Possible [1] is selected the switching frequency will
decline at an increasing output frequency.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

144 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

413 Overmodulation function 415 Maximum feedback

(OVERMODUL) (MAX. FEEDBACK)
Value: Value:
Off (OFF) [0] Min. feedback - 100,000.000 ✭ 1,500.000
✭On (ON) [1]
Function:
Function: See description of parameter 414.
This parameter allows connection of the
overmodulation function for the output voltage. Description of choice:
Set the value to be shown on the display when
Description of choice: Maximum feedback is obtained on the selected
Off means that there is no overmodulation of the feedback input (parameter 308 or 314). The
output voltage, which means that torque ripple on maximum value can be limited by the choice
the motor shaft is avoided. This can be a good of configuration (parameter 100).
feature, e.g. on grinding machines.
On means that an output voltage can be obtained
which is greater than the mains voltage (up to 15%).
416 Reference/feedback unit
(REF/FEEDB. UNIT)
Value:
414 Minimum feedback NO UNIT [0]
(MIN. FEEDBACK) ✭% [1]
Value: PPM [2]
-100,000.000 - Max. feedback ✭ 0.000 RPM [3]
bar [4]
Function: CYCLE/min [5]
Parameters 414 and 415 are used to scale the display PULSE/s [6]
text to make it show the feedback signal as the actual UNITSS/s [7]
unit proportional to the signal on the input. This UNITS/min [8]
value should be 10% higher than, par. 205 Maximum
UNITS/h [9]
reference, to keep the frequency converter from
C [10]
integrating as a response to a possible offset fault.
Pa [11]
This value will be displayed if Feedback [unit] [3]
l/s [12]
has been selected in one of parameters 009-012
m3 /s [13]
and in the display mode. Choose the feedback
l/min [14]
signal unit in parameter 416.
m3 /min [15]
Used together with Speed control, closed loop;
l/h [16]
Process control, closed loop and Torque control
m3 /h [17] Programming
speed feedback, (parameter 100).
kg/s [18]
Description of choice: kg/min [19]
Is only active when parameter 203 has been kg/h [20]
set to Min-Max [0]. t/min [21]
Set the value to be shown on the display when t/h [22]
Minimum feedback is obtained on the selected m [23]
feedback input (parameter 308 or 314). N m [24]
The minimum value can be limited by the m/s [25]
choice of configuration (parameter 100) and m/min [26]
reference/feedback range (parameter 203). F [27]
If Speed control, closed loop [1] has been in wg [28]
selected in parameter 100, minimum feedback gal/s [29]
cannot be set under 0. ft3 /s [30]
gal/min [31]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 145
 VLT® 5000 Series

ft3 /min [32] choice made in parameter 416. A feedback or

gal/h [33] process signal connected to terminal 53, 60 or 33
ft3 /h [34] (pulse), will, however, be displayed in the form of the
lb/s [35] unit selected in parameter 416. If parameter 013 is
lb/min [36] chosen as LCP control/as par. 100 or LCP digital
lb/h [37] control/as par. 100 , the unit will be as described
lb ft [38] above under parameter 002, Remote-control.
ft/s [39]
NB!:
ft/min [40]
The above applies to display of Reference
Function: [unit] and Feedback [unit] . If Reference [%] or
Choose among different units to be shown Feedback [%] is selected, the value displayed
on the display. will be in the form of a percentage of the selected range.
This unit is also used directly in Process control,
Description of choice:
closed loop as a unit for Minimum/Maximum
reference (parameters 204/205) and i. Select the desired unit for the reference/feed-
The possibility of choosing a unit in parameter back signal.
416 will depend on the choices made in
the following parameters:
Par. 002 Local/remote control. 417 Speed PID proportional gain
Par. 013 Local control/config. as par. 100. (SPEED PROP GAIN)
Par. 100 Configuration.
Value:
Select parameter 002 as Remote control 0.000 (OFF) - 0.150 ✭ 0.015
If parameter 100 is selected as Speed control, open
Function:
loop or Torque control, open loop , the unit selected in
Proportional gain indicates how many times the
parameter 416 can be used in displays (par. 009-12
fault (deviation between the feedback signal and
Feedback [unit] ) of process parameters.
the setpoint) is to be amplified. Used together with
The process parameter to be displayed can be Speed control, closed loop (parameter 100).
connected in the form of an external analogue
Description of choice:
signal to terminal 53 (par. 308: Feedback signal
) or terminal 60 (par. 314: Feedback signal ), as Quick control is obtained at high amplification, but
well as in the form of a pulse signal on terminal if the amplification is too high, the process may
33 (par. 307: Pulse feedback ). become unstable in the case of overshooting.
Note: The reference can only be shown in Hz ( Speed
control, open loop ) or Nm ( Torque control, open loop ).
If par. 100 is selected as Speed control, closed loop 418 Speed PID integral time
, parameter 416 is not active, since both reference (SPEED INT. TIME)
and feedback are always shown as RPM.
Value:
If parameter 100 is selected as Process control,
2.00 - 999.99 ms (1000 = OFF) ✭ 8 ms
closed loop , the unit selected in parameter
416 will be used when displaying both reference Function:
(par. 009-12: Reference [unit] ) and feedbac k The integral time determines how long the PID
(par. 009-12: Feedback [unit] ). regulator takes to correct the error. The greater the
Scaling of the display indication as a function of the error, the quicker the gain increases. The integral
selected range (par. 309/310, 312/313, 315/316, time results in a delay of the signal and thus has
327 and 328) for a connected, external signal is a dampening effect. Used together with Speed
effected for a reference in parameters 204 and 205 control, closed loop (parameter 100).
and for feedback in parameters 414 and 415.
Description of choice:
Select parameter 002 as Local control
Quick control is obtained through a short integral time.
If parameter 013 is chosen as LCP control and
However, if this time is too short, it can make
open loop or LCP digital control and open loop ,
the process unstable.
the reference will be given in Hz, regardless of the

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

146 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

If the integral time is long, major deviations Used together with Speed control, closed loop and
from the required reference may occur, since Torque control, speed feedback (parameter 100).
the process regulator will take long to regulate
if an error has occurred.

419 Speed PID differential time

(SPEED DIFF. TIME)
Value:
0.00 (OFF) - 200.00 ms ✭ 30 ms

Function:
The differentiator does not react to a constant
error. It only provides a gain if the error changes.
The quicker the error changes, the stronger the
gain from the differentiator will be.
The gain is proportional to the speed at
which errors change.
Used together with Speed control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

Description of choice:
Select the desired gain limit.

Description of choice:
420 Speed PID D-gain limit
If a time constant (τ) e.g. of 100 ms is programmed,
(SPEED D-GAIN LIMIT) the cut-off frequency for the lowpass filter will be 1/0.1
Value: = 10 RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz.
5.0 - 50.0 ✭ 5.0 This means that the PID regulator will only regulate
a feedback signal that varies by a frequency of less
Function: than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback signal varies by a higher
It is possible to set a limit for the gain provided by the frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID regulator will not react.
differentiator. Since the D-gain increases at higher
frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful.
This enables obtaining a pure D-link at low frequencies
422 U 0 voltage at 0 Hz
and a constant D-link at higher frequencies.
(U0 VOLTAGE (0HZ)) Programming
Used together with Speed control, closed
loop (parameter 100). Value:
0.0 - parameter 103 ✭ 20.0 volt
Description of choice:
Select the desired gain limit. Function:
Parameters 422-432 can be used together with Special
motor characteristics (par. 101). It is possible to
make a U/f characteristic on the basis of six definable
421 Speed PID lowpass filter time
voltages and frequencies. Change of motor nameplate
(SPEED FILT. TIME)
data (parameter 102 - 106) affects parameter 422.
Value:
5 - 200 ms ✭ 10 ms Description of choice:
Set the desired voltage at 0 Hz.
Function: See the below drawing.
Oscillations on the feedback signal are dampened
by a lowpass filter so as to reduce their influence on
control. This might be an advantage, e.g. if there is a
great amount on noise on the system. See drawing.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 147
 VLT® 5000 Series

426 F 2 frequency
(F2 FREQUENCY)
Value:
par. 424 - par. 428 Factory setting of par. 104

Function:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 2nd break point.

Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U2 voltage
set in parameter 425.
See drawing for parameter 422.
423 U 1 voltage
(U1 VOLTAGE)
Value:
427 U 3 voltage
0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103
(U3 VOLTAGE)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 1st break point. 0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103
Description of choice: Function:
Set the voltage desired at the F1 frequency This parameter sets the Y-value of the 3rd break point.
set in parameter 424.
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the voltage desired at the F3 frequency
set in parameter 428.
See drawing for parameter 422.
424 F 1 frequency
(F1 FREQUENCY)
Value:
428 F 3 frequency
0.0 - par. 426 Factory setting of par. 104
(F3 FREQUENCY)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 1st break point. par. 426 - par. 430 Factory setting of par. 104
Description of choice: Function:
Set the frequency desired at the U1 voltage This parameter sets the X-value of the 3rd break point.
set in parameter 423.
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U3 voltage
set in parameter 427.
See drawing for parameter 422.
425 U 2 voltage
(U2 VOLTAGE)
Value:
429 U 4 voltage
0.0 - UVLT, MAX Factory setting of par. 103
(U4 VOLTAGE)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 2nd break point. 0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103
Description of choice: Function:
Set the voltage desired at the F2 frequency This parameter sets the Y-value of the 4th break point.
set in parameter 426.
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the voltage desired at the F4 frequency
set in parameter 430.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

148 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

See drawing for parameter 422. 433 Torque control, open loop proportional gain
(TOR-OL PROP. GAIN)
Value:
430 F 4 frequency 0 (Off) - 500% ✭ 100%
(F4 FREQUENCY)
Function:
Value:
The proportional gain indicates how many times
par. 428 - par. 432 Factory setting of par. 104
the error (the deviation between feedback signal
Function: and set point) is to be applied.
This parameter sets the X-value of the 4th break point Used together with Torque control, open
loop (parameter 100).
Description of choice:
Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U4 voltage
set in parameter 429. Fast control is obtained with a high gain, but if the
See drawing for parameter 422. gain is too high, the process may become unstable.

431 U 5 voltage 434 Torque control, open loop Integration time

(U5 VOLTAGE) (TOR-OL INT.TIME)

Value: Value:
0.0 - UVLT, MAX Factory setting of par. 103 0.002 - 2.000 sec. ✭ 0.02 sec.

Function: Function:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 5th break point. The integrator provides an increasing gain if there
is a constant error between reference and current
Description of choice: measuring signal. The greater the error, the
Set the voltage desired at the F5 frequency quicker the gain increases. The integral time is
set in parameter 432. the time required by the integrator to reach the
same gain as the proportional gain.
Used together with Torque control, open
loop (parameter 100).
432 F 5 frequency
(F5 FREQUENCY) Description of choice:
Value: Fast control is obtained if the integral time is short.
par. 430 - 1000 Hz Factory setting of par. 104 However, this time may become too short, in which
case the process may become unstable.
Programming
Function:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 5th break point.
This parameter is not limited by parameter 200.
437 Process PID Normal/inverse control
Description of choice: (PROC NO/INV CTRL)
Set the frequency desired at the U5 voltage Value:
set in parameter 431. ✭Normal (NORMAL) [0]
See drawing for parameter 422. Inverse (INVERSE) [1]

Function:
It is possible to choose whether the process
regulator is to increase/reduce the output frequency.
This is done by having a difference between the
reference signal and the feedback signal.
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 149
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 439 Process PID start frequency

If the frequency converter is to reduce the (PROC START VALUE)
output frequency in case the feedback signal Value:
increases, select Normal [0]. ✭ parameter 201
fMIN -fMAX (parameter 201 and 202)
If the frequency converter is to increase the
output frequency in case the feedback signal Function:
increases, select Inverse [1]. When the start signal comes, the frequency converter
will react in the form of Speed control, open loop
NB!: following the ramp. Only when the programmed start
If Disable [0] is selected, it will mean that when frequency has been obtained, will it change over to
the error changes its sign, the integrator will Process control, closed loop. In addition, it is possible
first have to integrate down from the level to set a frequency that corresponds to the speed at
obtained as a result of the former error, before any which the process normally runs, which will enable the
change to the output frequency occurs. required process conditions to be reached sooner.
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).
438 Process PID anti windup
(PROC ANTI WINDUP) Description of choice:
Value: Set the required start frequency.
Off (DISABLE) [0]
✭On (ENABLE) [1] NB!:
If the frequency converter is running at the
Function: current limit before the desired start frequency
It is possible to select whether the process regulator is obtained, the process regulator will not be
is to continue regulating on an error even if it is not activated. For the regulator to be activated anyway,
possible to increase/reduce the output frequency. the start frequency must be lowered to the required
Used together with Process control, closed output frequency. This can be done during operation.
loop (parameter 100).

Description of choice: 440 Process PID proportional gain

The factory setting is Enable [1], which means that (PROC. PROP. GAIN)
the integration link is adjusted in relation to the Value:
actual output frequency if either the current limit or 0.00 - 10.00 ✭ 0.01
the max./min. frequency has been reached. The
process regulator will not engage again until either Function:
the error is zero or its sign has changed. The proportional gain indicates the number of
Select Disable [0] if the integrator is to continue times the error between the set point and the
integrating on an error, even if it is not possible feedback signal is to be applied.
to remove the fault by such control. Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).
NB!:
If Disable [0] is selected, it will mean that when Description of choice:
the error changes its sign, the integrator will Quick control is obtained by a high gain, but if the
first have to integrate down from the level gain is too high, the process may become unstable.
obtained as a result of the former error, before any
change to the output frequency occurs.

441 Process PID integral time

(PROC. INTEGR. T.)
Value:
0.01 - 9999.99 sec. (OFF) ✭ OFF

Function:
The integrator provides an increasing gain at a constant
error between the set point and the feedback signal.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

150 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

The greater the error, the quicker the gain will increase. Description of choice:
The integral time is the time needed by the integrator Select a limit to differentiator gain as required.
to reach the same gain as the proportional gain.
The gain is proportional to the speed at
which the error changes.
444 Process PID lowpass filter time
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100). (PROC FILTER TIME)
Value:
Description of choice: 0.01 - 10.00 ✭ 0.01
Quick control is obtained at a short integral time.
However, this time may become too short, which Function:
can make the process unstable. Oscillations on the feedback signal are dampened
If the integral time is long, major deviations by the lowpass filter in order to reduce their impact
from the required set point may occur, since on the process control. This can be an advantage
the process regulator will take a long time to e.g. if there is a lot of noise on the signal.
regulate in relation to a given error. Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

Description of choice:
442 Process PID differentiation time Select the desired time constant (τ). If a time constant
(PROC. DIFF. TIME) (τ) of 100 ms is programmed, the break frequency
Value: for the lowpass filter will be 1/0.1 = 10 RAD/sec.,
0.00 (OFF) - 10.00 sec. ✭ 0.00 sec. corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz.
The process regulator will thus only regulate a feedback
Function: signal that varies by a frequency lower than 1.6 Hz.
The differentiator does not react to a constant If the feedback signal varies by a higher frequency
error. It only provides a gain when the error than 1.6 Hz, the Process regulator will not react.
changes. The quicker the error changes, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.
The gain is proportional to the speed at
which the error changes. 445 Flying start
Used together with Process control, closed (FLYING START)
loop (parameter 100). Value:
✭Off (DISABLE) [0]
Description of choice:
On (ENABLE) [1]
Quick control is obtained with a long differentiation
time. However, this time may become too long, Function:

Programming
which can make the process unstable. This function makes it possible to catch a motor,
which is spinning freely because of a mains drop-out.

Description of choice:
443 Process PID diff. gain limit
Select Disable if this function is not required. Select
(PROC. DIFF. GAIN) Enable if the frequency converter is to be able to
Value: catch’ and control a spinning motor.
5.0 - 50.0 ✭ 5.0

Function:
It is possible to set a limit for the differentiator gain. 446 Switching pattern
The differentiator gain will increase if there are fast (SWITCH PATTERN)
changes, which is why it can be beneficial to limit Value:
this gain, thereby obtaining a pure differentiator gain 60 AVM (60 AVM) [0]
at slow changes and a constant differentiator gain ✭SFAVM (SFAVM) [1]
where quick changes to the error occur.
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 151
 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: Description of choice:

Choose between two different switching patterns: Set the required value.
60 AVM and SFAVM.

Description of choice:
Select 60 AVM if the option of using a switching 449 Torque, speed feedback Friction loss
frequency up to 14/10 kHz is required. Derating (TOR-SF FRIC. LOSS)
of the rated output current IVLT.N is effected from Value:
a switching frequency of 4.5 kHz. 0.00 - 50.00% of rated motor torque ✭ 0.00%
Select SFAVM if the option of using a switching
frequency up to 5/10 kHz is required. Derating Function:
of the rated output current IVLT.N is effected from This parameter is only used if Torque control, speed
a switching frequency of 3.0 kHz. feedback [5] has been selected in parameter 100.

Set the friction loss as a fixed percentage loss of

rated torque. In motor operation, the friction loss
447 Torque, speed feedback Torque will be added to the torque, while in generating
compensation operation it will be deducted from the torque.
(TOR-SF COMP.) See section Setting of parameters, torque
Value: regulation, speed feedback.
-100 - 100% ✭ 0%
Description of choice:
Function: Set the required value.
This parameter is only used if Torque control,
speed feedback [5] has been selected in parameter
100. Torque compensation is used in connection 450 Mains voltage at mains fault
with calibration of the frequency converter. By (MAINS FAIL VOLT.)
adjusting parameter 447, Torque compensation,
Value:
the output torque can be calibrated.
180-240 V for 200-240 V units ✭ 180
See section Setting of parameters, torque
342-500 V for 380-500 V units ✭ 342
regulation, speed feedback.
495-600 V for 550-600 V units ✭ 495
Description of choice:
Function:
Set the required value.
This is where to set the voltage level at which
parameter 407 Mains fault is to be activated. The
voltage level for activating the mains fault functions
448 Torque, speed feedback Gear ratio must be lower than the rated mains voltage supplied to
with encoder the frequency converter. As a rule of thumb, parameter
(TOR-SF GEARRATIO) 450 can be set to 10% below the rated mains voltage.
Value:
Description of choice:
0.001 - 100.000 ✭ 1.000
Set the level for activating mains fault functions.
Function:
This parameter is only used if Torque control, speed NB!:
feedback [5] has been selected in parameter 100. If an If this value is set at too high a level, the mains
encoder has been fitted to the gearshaft, a gear ratio fault function set in parameter 407 can be
must be set - otherwise the frequency converter will activated, even if the mains voltage is present.
not be able to calculate the output frequency correctly.
For a gear ratio of 1:10 (gearing down of motor
rpm), set the parameter value to 10.
If the encoder has been fitted directly on the motor
shaft, set the gear ratio to 1.00.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

152 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

453 Speed closed loop gear ratio Description of choice:

(SPEED GEARRATIO) Select Enable [1] to enable the readout in the display
Value: if warning 35 Out of frequency range occurs. Select
0.01 - 100.00 ✭ 1.00 Disable [0] to disable the readout in the display if
warning 35 ut of frequency range occurs.
Function:
This parameter is only used if Speed control, closed
loop [1] has been selected in parameter
457 Phase loss function
100 Configuration.
(PHASE LOSS FUNCT)
If the feedback has been fitted to the gearshaft, a gear
Value:
ratio must be set - otherwise the frequency converter
✭Trip (TRIP) [0]
will not be able to detect an encoder loss.
For a gear ratio of 1:10 (gearing down of motor Warning (WARNING) [1]
rpm), set the parameter value to 10.
Function:
If the encoder has been fitted directly on the motor
Select the function which is to be activated if the mains
shaft, set the gear ratio to 1.00.
imbalance becomes too high or if a phase is missing.
Please note, that this parameter only has influence
on the encoder loss function. Description of choice:
At Trip [0] the frequency converter will stop the motor
Description of choice:
within a few seconds (depending on drive size).
Set the required value.
At Warning [1] only a warning will be exported when
a mains failure occurs, but in severe cases, other
extreme conditions might result in a trip.
454 Dead time compensation
NB!:
(DEADTIME COMP.)
If Warning has been selected, the life
Value: expectancy of the drive will be reduced
Off (OFF) [0] when the mains failure persists.
✭On (ON) [1]
NB!:
Function: At phase loss, the internal cooling fans of some
The active inverter dead time compensation drive types cannot be powered. In order to
which is part of the VLT 5000 control algorithm avoid overheating, an external power supply
(VCC+) is causing instability at standstill when can be connected to VLT 5032 - 5052 200 - 240
working in closed loop control. The purpose of V, VLT 5075 - 5500 380 - 500 V and VLT 5075 -
this parameter is switching off the active dead 5250 550 - 600 v, see Electrical installation.
time compensation to avoid instability.
Programming
Description of choice:
Select Off [0] to inactivate the dead time compensation.
Select On [1] to activate the dead time compensation.

455 Frequency range monitor

(MON. FREQ. RANGE)
Value:
Disable [0]
✭Enable [1]

Function:
his parameter is used if warning 35 Out of frequency
range must be turned off in the display in process
control closed loop. This parameter does not
affect the extended status word.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 153
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Serial communication 502 Coasting

(COASTING SELECT)
500 Address 503 Quick-stop
(BUS ADDRESS)
(Q STOP SELECT)
Value:
504 DC-brake
1 - 126 ✭ 1 (DC BRAKE SELECT)
Function: 505 Start
This parameter allows specification of the address (START SELECT)
of each frequency converter. This feature is used 507 Selection of Setup
in connection with PLC/PC connection. (SETUP SELECT)
Description of choice: 508 Selection of speed
The individual frequency converters can be given an (PRES.REF. SELECT)
address between 1 and 126. The address 0 is used Value:
if a master (PLC or PC) wishes to send a telegram Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]
that is to be received by all frequency converters Bus (SERIAL PORT) [1]
connected to the serial communication port at the Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2]
same time. In this case, the frequency converter ✭Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3]
will not acknowledge receipt. If the number of units
connected (frequency converters + master) exceeds Function:
31, a repeater is required. Parameter 500 cannot Parameters 502-508 allow a choice between
be selected via the serial communication port. controlling the frequency converter via the terminals
(digital input) and/or via the bus.
If Logic and or Bus is selected, the command
in question can only be activated if transmitted
501 Baudrate
via the serial communication port. In the case
(BAUDRATE) of Logic and, the command must additionally be
Value: activated via one of the digital inputs.
300 Baud (300 BAUD) [0]
600 Baud (600 BAUD) [1] Description of choice:
1200 Baud (1200 BAUD) [2] Digital input [0] is selected if the control command in
2400 Baud (2400 BAUD) [3] question is only to be activated via a digital input.
4800 Baud (4800 BAUD) [4] Bus [1] is selected if the control command in
✭9600 Baud (9600 BAUD) [5] question is only to be activated via a bit in the
control word (serial communication).
Function: Logic and [2] is selected if the control command
This parameter is for programming the speed in question is only to be activated when a signal
at which data is to be transmitted via the serial is transmitted (active signal = 1) via both a
connection. Baud rate is defined as the number control word and a digital input.
of bits transferred per second.

Description of choice:
Digital input Bus Control
The transmission speed of the VLT frequency
505-508 command
converter is to be set at a value that corresponds to
0 0 0
the transmission speed of the PLC/PC. Parameter 0 1 0
501 cannot be selected via the serial port, RS 1 0 0
485. The data transmission time proper, which 1 1 1
is determined by the set baud rate, is only part
of the total communication time.
Logic or [3] is selected if the control command in
question is to be activated when a signal is given (active
signal = 1) either via a control word or via a digital input.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

154 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Digital input Bus Control Description of choice:

505-508 command The jog frequency fJOG can be selected in
0 0 0 the range between fMIN (parameter 201) and
0 1 1 fMAX (parameter 202).
1 0 1
1 1 1
510 Bus jog 2
NB!: (BUS JOG 2 FREQ.)
Parameters 502-504 deal with stop functions
Value:
- see examples regarding 502 (coasting)
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz
below. Active stop command "0".
Function:
Parameter 502 = Logic and
This is where to set a fixed speed (jog) that is
Digital Bus Control command activated via the serial communication port.
input This function is the same as in parameter 213.
0 0 1 Coasting
0 1 0 Motor running Description of choice:
1 0 0 Motor running The jog frequency fJOG can be selected in
1 1 0 Motor running the range between fMIN (parameter 201) and
fMAX (parameter 202).
Parameter 502 = Logic or
Digital Bus Control command
input 512 Telegram profile
0 0 1 Coasting (TELEGRAM PROFILE)
0 1 1 Motor running Value:
1 0 1 Motor running
Fieldbus profile (FIELDBUS PROFILE) [0]
1 1 0 Motor running
✭FC Drive (FC DRIVE) [1]

506 Reversing Function:

(REVERSING SELECT) There is a choice of two different control word profiles.
Value: Description of choice:
✭Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]
Select the desired control word profile.
Bus (SERIAL PORT) [1]
See Serial communication , in the Design Guide for
Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2] further information about the control word profiles. See
Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3] also the dedicated fieldbus manuals for further details.
Programming
Function:
See description under parameter 502.
513 Bus time interval
Description of choice: (BUS TIMEOUT TIME)
See description under parameter 502.
Value:
1 - 99 sec. ✭ 1 sec.

509 Bus jog 1 Function:

(BUS JOG 1 FREQ.) This parameter sets the maximum time expected
to pass between the receipt of two consecutive
Value:
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, the serial
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz
communication is assumed to have stopped and
Function: the desired reaction is set in parameter 514.
This is where to set a fixed speed (jog) that is
activated via the serial communication port.
This function is the same as in parameter 213.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 155
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: If choices [1] to [5] are activated, relay 01 and

Set the desired time. relay 04 will be de-activated.

If more time-outs occur at the same time the

frequency converter will give the following priority
514 Bus time interval function to the time-out function:
(BUS TIMEOUT FUNC) 1. Parameter 318 Function after time out
Value: 2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss
Off (OFF) [0] 3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function.
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [1]
Description of choice:
Stop (STOP) [2]
Jogging (JOGGING) [3] The output frequency of the frequency converter
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) can: be frozen at the present value, be frozen at
[4]
the reference, go to stop, go to jogging frequency
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]
(parameter 213), go to max. output frequency
Function: (parameter 202) or stop and activate a trip.
This parameter selects the desired reaction of the
frequency converter when the set time for bus timeout
(parameter 513) has been exceeded.

Parameter Description Display Unit Updating

no. text interval
515 Reference % (REFERENCE) % 80 msec.
516 Reference Unit (REFERENCE [UNIT]) Hz, Nm or rpm 80 msec.
517 Feedback (FEEDBACK) To be selcected 80 msec.
via par. 416
518 Frequency (FREQUENCY) Hz 80 msec.
519 Frequency x Scaling (FREQUENCY X SCALE) - 80 msec.
520 Current (MOTOR CURRENT) Amp x 100 80 msec.
521 Torque (TORQUE) % 80 msec.
522 Power, kW (POWER (KW) kW 80 msec.
523 Power, HP (POWER (HP) HP (US) 80 msec.
524 Motor voltage (MOTOR VOLTAGE) V 80 msec.
525 DC link voltage (DC LNK VOLTAGE) V 80 msec.
526 Motor temp. (MOTOR THERMAL) % 80 msec.
527 VLT temp. (VLT THERMAL) % 80 msec.
528 Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) Binary code 2 msec.
529 Terminal 53, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 53) V 20 msec.
input
530 Terminal 54, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 54) V 20 msec.
input
531 Terminal 60, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 60) mA 20 msec.
input
532 Pulse reference (PULSE REFERENCE) Hz 20 msec.
533 External reference % (EXT. REFERENCE) 20 msec.
534 Status word (STATUS WORD [HEX]) Hex code 20 msec.
535 Brake power/2 min. (BR. ENERGY/2 MIN) kW
536 Brake power/sec. (BRAKE ENERGY/S) kW
537 Heat sink temperature (HEATSINK TEMP.) C 1.2 sec.
538 Alarm word (ALARM WORD [HEX]) Hex code 20 msec.
539 VLT control word (CONTROLWORD [HEX]) Hex code 2 msec.
540 Warning word, 1 (WARN. WORD 1) Hex code 20 msec.
541 Extended status word (EXT. STATUS WORD) Hex code 20 msec.
Hex
557 Motor RPM (MOTOR RPM) RPM 80 msec.
558 Motor RPM x scaling (MOTOR RPM X SCALE) - 80 msec.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

156 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: Power, (kW), parameter 522:

These parameters can be read out via the serial The value shown is calculated on the basis of the
communication port and via the display in Display actual motor voltage and motor current.
mode, see also parameters 009 - 012. The value is filtered, which means that it may take
approx. 1.3 seconds from an input value changes
Description of choice: until the data read-out changes values.
Reference %, parameter 515:
The value shown corresponds to rhe total Power (HP), parameter 523:
reference (sum of digital/analogue/preset/bus/freeze The value shown is calculated on the basis of the
ref./catch-up and slow-down). actual motor voltage and motor current.
The value is indicated in the form of HP.
Reference Unit, parameter 516: The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
Gives the present value of terminals 17/29/53/54/60 seconds may pass from an input value changes
in the unit resulting from the choice of configuration in until the data read-out changes values.
parameter 100 (Hz, Nm or rpm) or in parameter 416.
See also parameters 205 and 416, if required. Motor voltage, parameter 524:
The value shown is a calculated value used
Feedback, parameter 517: for controlling the motor.
Indicates the status value of terminals 33/53/60 at the
unit/scale selected in parameters 414, 416 and 416. DC link voltage, parameter 525:
The value shown is a measured value.
Frequency, parameter 518: The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
The value shown corresponds to the actual motor seconds may pass from an input value changes
frequency fM (without resonance dampening). until the data read-out changes values.

Frequency x scale, parameter 519: Motor temp., parameter 526:

The value shown corresponds to the actual motor
frequency fM (without resonance dampening) multiplied VLT temp., parameter 527:
by a factor (scaling) set in parameter 008. Only whole numbers are displayed.

Motor current, parameter 520: Digital input, parameter 528:

The value shown corresponds to the given motor The value shown indicates the signal status from the 8
current measured as a mean value IRMS. digital terminals (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33).
The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3 The read-out is binary and the digit at the extreme
seconds may pass from an input value changes left gives the status of terminal 16, while the digit at
until the data read-out changes values. the extreme right gives the status of terminal 33.

Torque, parameter 521: Terminal 53, analogue input, parameter 529:

The value shown is the torque, with sign, supplied The value shown indicates the signal value
to the motor shaft. The value is given as a on terminal 53. Programming
percentage of the rated torque. The scaling (parameters 309 and 310) does not
There is not exact linearity between 160% motor influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
current and torque in relation to the rated torque. Some by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter.
motors supply more torque than that. Consequently,
Terminal 54, analogue input, parameter 530:
the min. value and the max. value will depend on the
The value shown indicates the signal value
max. motor current as well as the motor used.
on terminal 54.
The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
The scaling (parameters 312 and 313) does not
seconds may pass from an input changes value
influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
until the data read-out changes values.
by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter.
NB!:
Terminal 60, analogue input, parameter 531:
If the setting of the motor parameters
The value shown indicates the signal value
does not match the motor applied, the
on terminal 60.
read-out values will be inaccurate and may
become negative, even if the motor is not running
or is producing a positive torque.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 157
 VLT® 5000 Series

The scaling (parameters 315 and 316) does not

influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
Motor RPM, parameter 557:
by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter.
The displayed value corresponds to the actual
Pulse reference, parameter 532: motor RPM. In open loop or closed loop process
The value shown indicates any pulse reference in control, the motor RPM is estimated. In speed
Hz connected to one of the digital inputs. closed loop modes, it is measured.

External reference %, parameter 533: Motor RPM x scaling, parameter 558:

The value stated gives, as a percentage, the sum of The displayed value corresponds to the actual
external references (sum of analogue/bus/pulse). motor RPM multiplied by a factor (scaling)
set in parameter 008.
Status word, parameter 534:
Indicates the status word transmitted via the serial
communication port in Hex code from the VLT
frequency converter. See the Design Guide. 580–582 Defined parameters
(DEFINED PARAM.)
Brake power/2min., parameter 535:
Value:
Indicates the brake power transmitted to an external Read only
brake resistor. The mean power is calculated on
Function:
an ongoing basis for the latest 120 sec.
The three parameters contain a list of all parameters
Brake power/sec., parameter 536: defined in the VLT. Each parameter contains up to
Indicates the given brake power transmitted 116 elements (parameter numbers). The number of
to an external brake resistor. Stated as an parameters that are in use (580, 581, 582) depends
instantaneous value. on the respective VLT configuration. When a 0 is
used as a parameter number, the list ends.
Heat sink temperature, parameter 537:
States the given heat sink temperature of the VLT Description of choice:
frequency converter. The cut-out limit is 90 ± 5 C,
while the unit cuts back in at 60 ± 5 C.

Alarm word, parameter 538:

States in Hex format whether there is an alarm
on the VLT frequency converter.See section
Warning word 1, Extended status word and
Alarm word for further information.

VLT control word, parameter 539:

Gives the control word sent via the serial
communication port in Hex code to the VLT frequency
converter. See the Design Guide for further information.

Warning word, 1, parameter 540:

States in Hex format whether there is a warning
on the VLT frequency converter. See section
Warning word 1, Extended status word and
Alarm word for further information.

Extended status word Hex, parameter 541:

States in Hex format whether there is a warning
on the VLT frequency converter.

See section Warning word 1, Extended status word

and Alarm word for further information

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

158 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Technical functions

Parameter no. Description Display text Unit Range

Operating data
600 Operating hours (OPERATING Hours 0 - 130,000.0
HOURS)
601 Hours run (RUNNING HOURS) Hours 0 - 130,000.0
602 kWh counter (KWH COUNTER) kWh 0 - 9999
603 No. of cut-ins (POWER UP’s) Nos. 0 - 9999
604 No. of overtemps (OVER TEMP’s) Nos. 0 - 9999
605 No. of overvoltages (OVER VOLT’S) Nos. 0 - 9999

Function:
kWh counter, parameter 602:
These parameters can be read out via the
serial communication port and via the display States the kW consumption of the motor as a mean
in the parameters. value over one hour, since the reset in parameter 618.

Description of choice: No. of cut-ins, parameter 603:

States the number of power-ups of the supply
Operating hours, parameter 600:
voltage to the frequency converter.
Indicates the number of hours in which the frequency
converter has been in operation. No. of overtemps, parameter 604:
The value is updated in the frequency converter every States the number of temperature faults there has
hour and saved when the unit is turned off. been on the frequency converter.

Hours run, parameter 601: No. of overvoltages, parameter 605:

Indicates the number of hours in which the States the number of overvoltages there has
frequency converter has been in operation been on the frequency converter.
since reset in parameter 619.
The value is updated in the frequency converter every
hour and saved when the unit is turned off.

Parameter no. Description Display text Unit Range

Data log
606 Digital inputs (LOG: DIGITAL INP) Decimal 0 - 255
607 Control word (LOG: CONTROL Decimal 0 - 65535
WORD Programming
608 Status word (LOG: BUS STAT Decimal 0 - 65535
WD)
609 Reference (LOG: REFERENCE) % 0 - 100
610 Feedback (LOG: FEEDBACK) Par. 416 999,999.99 -
999,999.99
611 Output frequency (LOG: MOTOR Hz. 0.0 - 999.9
FREQ.)
612 Output voltage (LOG: MOTOR VOLT) Volt 50 - 1000
613 Output current (LOG: MOTOR Amp 0.0 - 999.9
CURR.)
614 DC link voltage (LOG: DC LINK Volt 0.0 - 999.9
VOLT)

Function: as a start signal has been given. If a stop signal is

Via this parameter it is possible to see up to 20 given, the latest 20 data-logs will be saved and the
data-logs, where [0] is the latest log and [19] the values will be available on the display. This is useful,
oldest. Each data-log is made every 160 ms as long e.g. when carrying out service after a trip.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 159
 VLT® 5000 Series

This parameter can be read out via the serial 615 Fault log: Error code
communication port or via the display. (F.LOG: ERROR COD)

Description of choice: Value:

[Index 1 - 10] Error code 0 - 44
The data-log number is stated in square brackets: [1].
Data-logs are frozen if there is a trip and released Function:
when the frequency converter is subsequently reset. This parameter makes it possible to see the
Data-logging is active while the motor is running. reason why a trip occurs.
Free a data-log if there is a trip and release it when 10 (0-10) log values are stored.
resetting the frequency converter. Data-logging The lowest log number (1) contains the latest/most
recently saved data value; the highest log number
is active when the motor is running.
(10) contains the oldest data value.
Digital inputs, parameter 606:
Description of choice:
The value for the digital inputs is given as a decimal
figure within the range of 0-255. Given as a number code, in which the trip
The data-log number is stated in square brackets: [1] number refers to an alarm code that can be
seen from the table on page 143.
175ZA449.10

Reset the fault log after manual initialisation.

EXT. REFERENCE, %

63.0 %
606 DATALOG:DIGITALINPUT 616 Fault log: Time

[0] 40 (F.LOG: TIME)

Value:
[Index 1 - 10]
Control word, parameter 607:
The value for the control word is given as a decimal Function:
figure within the range of 0-65535. This parameter makes it possible to see the total
number of operating hours before the trip occurred.
Status word, parameter 608:
10 (0-10) log values are stored.
The value for the bus status word is given as a
The lowest log number [1] contains the latest/most
decimal figure within the range of 0-65535.
recently saved data value, while the highest log
Reference, parameter 609: number [10] contains the oldest data value.
The value of the reference is stated as a %
Description of choice:
in the interval 0 - 100%.
Read out as an option.
Feedback, parameter 610: Indication range: 0.0 - 9999.9.
The value is stated as the parameterised feedback. Reset the fault log after manual initialisation.

Output frequency, parameter 611:

The value of the motor frequency is stated as a
617 Fault log: Value
frequency in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 Hz.
(F.LOG: VALUE)
Output voltage, parameter 612: Value:
The value of the motor voltage is stated as [Index 1 - 10]
Volts in the interval 50 - 1000 V.
Function:
Output current, parameter 613:
This parameter makes it possible to see at what
The value for the motor current is stated as
current or voltage a given trip occurred.
Amps in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 A.
Description of choice:
DC link voltage, parameter 614:
Read out as one value.
The value of the DC link voltage is stated as
Indication range: 0.0 - 999.9.
Volts in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 V.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

160 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Reset the fault log after manual initialisation. Function:

In addition to its normal function, this parameter
can be used for two different tests.
618 Reset of kWh counter Also, all parameters (except parameters
603-605) can be initialised.
(RESET KWH COUNT)
This function will not become active until the
Value:
mains supply to the frequency converter has been
No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0]
turned off and then turned on again.
Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1]
Description of choice:
Function:
Normal function [0] is selected for normal operation
Reset to zero of kWh hour counter (parameter 602).
with the motor in the selected application.
Description of choice: Function with deactivated inverter [1] is selected if
control is desired over the influence of the control
If Reset [1] has been selected and when the [OK]
signal over the control card and its functions -
key is pressed, the kWh counter of the frequency
without the inverter driving the motor.
converter is reset. This parameter cannot be
Control card test [2] is selected if control of
selected via the serial port, RS 485.
the analogue and digital inputs, as well as the
NB!: analogue, digital relay outputs and the +10 V control
When the [OK] key has been activated, the voltage is desired. A test connector with internal
reset has been carried out. connections is required for this test.

Use the following procedure for the control card test:

619 Reset of hours-run counter 1. Select Control card test.
(RESET RUN. HOUR) 2. Cut off the mains supply and wait for the
Value: light in the display to go out.
No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0] 3. Insert the test plug (see below).
Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1] 4. Connect to mains.
5. The frequency converter expects the [OK] key to be
Function: pressed (if no LCP, set to Normal operation, when
Reset to zero of hours-run counter (parameter 601). the frequency converter will start up as usual).
6. Carry out various tests.
Description of choice:
7. Press the [OK] key.
If Reset [1] has been selected and when the
8. Parameter 620 is automatically set to
[OK] key is pressed, the hours-run counter of the
Normal operation.
frequency converter is reset. This parameter cannot
be selected via the serial port, RS 485. If a test fails, the frequency converter will move into
Programming
an infinite loop. Replace control card.
NB!:
When the [OK] key has been activated, the Test plugs (connect the following terminals
reset has been carried out. to each other):
4 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 27 - 29 - 32 - 33
5 - 12
620 Operating mode 39 - 20 - 55
(OPERATION MODE) 42 - 60
Value: 45 - 53 - 54
✭Normal function (NORMAL OPERATION) [0]
Function with de-activated inverter
(OPER. W/INVERT.DISAB) [1]
Control card test (CONTROL CARD TEST) [2]
Initialisation (INITIALIZE) [3]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 161
 VLT® 5000 Series

1. Select Initialisation.
2. Press the [OK] key.
3. Cut off the mains supply and wait for the
light in the display to go out.
4. Connect to mains.

Manual initialisation can be carried out by holding

down three keys at the same time as the mains
voltage is connected. Manual initialisation sets all
parameters to the factory setting, except 600-605.
The procedure for manual initialisation is as follows:

1. Disconnect the mains voltage and wait for the

Inialisation [3] is selected if the factory setting of light in the display to disappear.
the unit is desired without resetting parameters 2. Hold down [DISPLAY/STATUS]+[MENU]+[OK] while
500, 501 + 600 - 605 + 615 - 617. at the same time connecting the mains supply.
The display will now read MANUAL INITIALIZE.
NB!: 3. When the display reads UNIT READY, the
The motor must be stopped before frequency converter has been initialized.
initialisation can be carried out.

Procedure for initializing:

Parameter no. Description Display text

Nameplate
621 VLT type (VLT TYPE)
622 Power section (POWER SECTION)
623 VLT ordering number (VLT ORDERING NO)
624 Software version number (SOFTWARE VERSION)
625 LCP identification number (LCP ID NO)
626 Database identification number (PARAM DB ID)
627 Power section identification number (POWER UNIT DB ID)
628 Application option type (APP. OPTION)
629 Application option ordering number (APP. ORDER NO)
630 Communication option type (COM. OPTION)
631 Communication option ordering number (COM. ORDER NO)

Function:
Software version number, parameter 624:
The key data of the unit can be read out via the
Software version gives the version number.
display or the serial communication port.
For example: V 3,10.
Description of choice:
LCP identification number, parameter 625:
VLT type, parameter 621:
The key data of the unit can be read out via the
VLT Type indicates the unit size and basic display or the serial communication port.
function concerned. For example:ID 1,42 2 kB.
For example: VLT 5008 380-500 V.
Database identification number, parameter 626:
Power section, parameter 622:
The key data of the unit can be read out via the
The power section states the given power display or the serial communication port.
section being used. For example: ID 1,14.
For example: Extended with brake.
Power section identification number,
VLT ordering number, parameter 623: parameter 627:
Ordering number gives the ordering number The key data of the unit can be read out via the
of the VLT type in question. display or the serial communication port.
For example: 175Z0072.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

162 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

For example: ID 1,15.

Application option type, parameter 628:

This gives the type of application options fitted
with the frequency converter.

Application option ordering number,

parameter 629:
This gives the ordering number for the
application option.

Communication option type, parameter 630:

This gives the type of communication options
fitted with the frequency converter

Communication option ordering number,

parameter 631:
This gives the ordering number for the
communication option.

Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 163
 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!: 702 Relay 6, OFF delay

Parameters 700-711 for the relay card (RELAY6 OFF DELAY)
are only activatedif a relay option card is 705 Relay 7, OFF delay
installed in the VLT 5000.
(RELAY7 OFF DELAY)
700 Relay 6, function 708 Relay 8, OFF delay
(RELAY6 FUNCTION) (RELAY8 OFF DELAY)
703 Relay 7, function 711 Relay 9, OFF delay
(RELAY7 FUNCTION) (RELAY9 OFF DELAY)
706 Relay 8, function Value:
(RELAY8 FUNCTION) 0 - 600 sec. ✭ 0 sec.
709 Relay 9, function
Function:
(RELAY9 FUNCTION) This parameter is used to delay the cut-out time
Function: of relays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).
This output activates a relay switch. Relay outputs
6/7/8/9 can be used for showing status and warnings. Description of choice:
The relay is activated when the conditions for the Enter the required value.
relevant data values have been fulfilled.
Activation/deactivation van be programmed in
parameters 701/704/707/710 Relay 6/7/8/9, ■ Electrical installation of the relay card
ON delay and parameters 702/705/708/711 The relays are connected as shown below.
Relay 6/7/8/9, OFF delay.
Relay 6-9:
Description of choice: A-B make, A-C break
For data choice ande connections see Max. 240 V AC, 2 Amp.
parameter 319 - 326.

701 Relay 6, ON delay

(RELAY6 ON DELAY)
704 Relay 7, ON delay
(RELAY7 ON DELAY)
707 Relay 8, ON delay
(RELAY8 ON DELAY)
710 Relay 9, ON delay
(RELAY9 ON DELAY)
Value:
0 - 600 sec. ✭ 0 sec.

Function:
This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time
of relays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice: To achieve double isolation, the plastic foil must be

Enter the required value. mounted as shown in the drawing below.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

164 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 165
 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. Relay Relay Relay 08 Relay

06 07 09
parameter 700 703 706 709
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Control ready (CONTROL READY) [1] [1] [1] [1]
Ready signal (UNIT READY) [2] ✭ [2] [2] [2]
Ready - remote control (UNIT READY/REM CTRL) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Enable, no warning (ENABLE/NO WARNING) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Running (VLT RUNNING) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Running, no warning (RUNNING/NO WARNING) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Running within range, no warning (RUN IN RANGE/NO WARN) [7] [7] [7] [7]
Running at reference value, no warning (RUN ON REF/NO WARN) [8] [8] [8] [8]
Fault (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9] ✭

Fault or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [10] [10] [10] [10]

Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Out of current range (OUT OF CURRENT RANGE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Over I low (ABOVE CURRENT, LOW) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Under I high (BELOW CURRENT, HIGH) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Out of frequency range (OUT OF FREQ RANGE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Over f low (ABOVE FREQUENCY LOW) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Under f high (BELOW FREQUENCY HIGH) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Out of feedback range (OUT OF FDBK RANGE) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Over feedback low (ABOVE FDBK, LOW) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Under feedback high (BELOW FDBK, HIGH) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Ready - no thermal warning (READY &NOTHERM WARN) [22] [22] [22] [22]
Ready - remote control - no therm. warn. (REM RDY&NO THERMWAR) [23] [23] [23] [23]
Ready - mains voltage within range (RDY NO OVER/UNDERVOL) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversing (REVERSE) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus ok (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26]
Torque limit and stop (TORQUE LIMIT AND STOP) [27] [27] [27] [27]
Brake, no brake warning (BRAKE NO WARNING) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Brake ready, no fault (BRAKE RDY (NO FAULT)) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT (IGBT)) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanical brake control (MECH. BRAKE CONTROL) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Control word bit 11/12 (CTRL WORD BIT 11/12) [33] [33] [33] [33]
Mains ON (MAINS ON) [50] [50] [50] ✭ [50]
Motor running (MOTOR RUNNING) [51] [51] ✭ [51] [51]

Function:
Motor running [51], has the same logical function
Description of choice: as Mechanical brake control [32]
For description of choice please see parameter 319.

Mains ON [50], has the same logical function

as Running [5].

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

166 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Trouble-shooting

Symptom How to handle

1. Motor runs unevenly If the motor runs unevenly, but no fault is given, this may be
because the frequency converter has been wrongly set.
Adjust the motor data settings.
Contact Danfoss if the new setting does not make the motor run
evenly

2. Motor does not run Check if there is a backlight in the display.

If there is a backlight, please check if a fault message is displayed.
If yes, please consult the Warnings-section, if no, please refer to
symptom 5.
If there is no backlight, check if the frequency converter is
connected to mains supply. If yes, please refer to symptom 4.

3. Motor does not brake Please refer to Control with brake function.

4. No message or backlight in Check if the prefuses for the VLT have blown.
display If yes, call Danfoss for assistance.
If no, check if the control card is overloaded.
If so, disconnect all control signal plugs on the control card and
check if the fault disappears.
If yes, make sure that the 24 V supply is not short-circuited.
If no, call Danfoss for assistance.

5. Motor stopped, light in display, Start the frequency converter by pressing [START] on the control
but no fault report panel.
Check if the display is frozen, ie. the display cannot be changed
or is indefineable.
If yes, check if screened cables have been used and are connected
correctly.
If no, check that the motor is connected and that all motor phases
are OK.
The frequency converter must be set to run using local references:
Parameter 002 = Local operation
Parameter 003 = desired reference value
Connect 24 V DC to terminal 27.
The reference is changed by pressing ’+’ or ’-’.
Is the motor running?
If yes, check whether control signals to the control card are OK.
If no, call Danfoss for assistance.
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 167

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Status messages
Status messages appear in the 4th line of the display,
Output current low (CURRENT LOW):
see the below example. The status message will
The output current is lower than the value set
be on the display for approx. 3 seconds.
in parameter 223. This message is only shown
when the motor is running.

FREQUENCY Braking max. (BRAKING MAX):

The brake is functioning.

20.0Hz Optimum braking is effected when the value in

parameter 402 Braking power limit, KW is exceeded.

Braking (BRAKING):
The brake is functioning.
SLOW DOWN
Ramp operation (REM/ RAMPING):
Remote has been selected in parameter
Start clockwise/anti-clockwise 002 and the output frequency is changed in
(START FORW./REV): accordance with the ramps set.
Input on digital inputs and parameter data Ramp operation (LOCAL/ RAMPING):
are in conflict. Local has been selected in parameter 002 and
Slow-down (SLOW DOWN): the output frequency is changed in accordance
with the ramps set.
The output frequency of the frequency converter
is reduced by the percentage value chosen Running, local control (LOCAL/RUN OK):
in parameter 219. Local control has been selected in parameter 002
Catch-up (CATCH UP): and a start command is given on either terminal 18
(START or LATCHED START in parameter 302) or
The output frequency of the frequency converter
terminal 19 (START REVERSE parameter 303).
is increased by the percentage value chosen
in parameter 219. Running, remote control (REM/RUN OK):
Feedback high (FEEDBACK HIGH): Remote control has been selected in parameter
002 and a start command is given on either
The FB value is higher than the value set in
terminal 18 (START or LATCHED START in
parameter 228. This message is only shown
parameter 302), terminal 19 (START REVERSE
when the motor is running.
parameter 303) or via the serial bus.
Feedback low (FEEDBACK LOW):
VLT ready, remote control (REM/UNIT READY):
The FB value is lower than the value set in
Remote control has been selected in parameter
parameter 227. This message is only shown
002 and Coasting stop inverse in parameter 304,
when the motor is running.
and there is 0 V on terminal 27.
Output frequency high (FREQUENCY HIGH):
VLT ready, local control (LOCAL/ UNIT READY):
The output frequency is higher than the value
Local has been selected in parameter 002
set in parameter 226. This message is only
and Coasting inverse in parameter 304, and
shown when the motor is running.
there is 0 V on terminal 27.
Output frequency low (FREQUENCY LOW):
Quick-stop, remote control (REM/QSTOP):
The output frequency is lower than the value
Remote ontrol has been selected in parameter
set in parameter 225. This message is only
002 and the frequency converter has stopped via
shown when the motor is running.
a quick-stop signal on terminal 27 (or possibly
Output current high (CURRENT HIGH): via the serial communication port).
The output current is higher than the value set
in parameter 224. This message is only shown
when the motor is running.

168 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Quick-stop, local (LOCAL/ QSTOP): Jog operation, remote controlled

Local has been selected in parameter 002 (REM/RUN JOG):
and the frequency converter has stopped via a Remote control has been selected in parameter
quick-stop signal on terminal 27 (or possibly via 002 and Jog in parameter 300, 301, 305, 306
the serial communication port). or 307, and the terminal in question (16, 17,
29, 32 or 33) has been activated (or possibly
DC stop, remote control (REM/DC STOP): via the serial communication port).
Remote control has been selected in parameter
002 and the frequency converter has stopped via Jog operation, local (LOCAL/ RUN JOG):
a DC stop signal on a digital input (or possibly Local has been selected in parameter 002 and Jog in
via the serial communication port). parameter 300, 301, 305, 306 or 307, and the terminal
in question (16, 17, 29, 32 or 33) has been activated
DC braking, local (LOCAL/ DC STOP): (or possibly via the serial communication port).
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and
the frequency converter has stopped via a DC Overvoltage control (OVER VOLTAGE CONTROL):
braking signal on terminal 27 (or possibly via The intermediate circuit voltage of the frequency
the serial communication port). converter is too high. The frequency converter is trying
to avoid a trip by increasing the output frequency.
Stop, remote controlled (REM/STOP): This function is activated in parameter 400.
Remote control has been selected in parameter
002 and the frequency converter has stopped via Automatic Motor Adaptation (AUTO
the control panel or a digital input (or possibly MOTOR ADAPT):
via the serial communication port). Automatic Motor adaptation is running.

Stop, local (LOCAL/ STOP): Brake check finished (BRAKECHECK OK):

Local has been selected in parameter 002 and Brake check of brake resistor and brake
the frequency converter has stopped via the transistor tested successfully.
control panel or the digital input (or possibly via
the serial communication port). Quick Discharge finished (QUICK
DISCHARGE OK):
LCP stop, remote (REM/LCP STOP): Quick discharge has been completed successfully.
Remote has been selected in parameter 002 and
the frequency converter has via the control panel. Exceptions XXXX (EXCEPTIONS XXXX):
The coast signal on terminal 27 is high. The microprocessor of the control card has
stopped and the frequency converter is out of
LCP stop, local (LOCAL/LCP STOP): operation. The cause may be noise on the mains,
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and the motor or control cables, leading to a stop of
frequency converter has stopped via the control panel. the control card microprocessor.
The coast signal on terminal 27 is high. Check for EMC-correct connection of these cables.

Stand by (STAND BY): Ramp stop in fieldbus mode (OFF1):

Remote control has been selected in parameter OFF1 means that the drive is stopped by ramp
002. The frequency converter will start when down. The command to stop has been given
it receives a start signal via a digital input (or over a fieldbus or the RS485 serial port (select
the serial communication port). fieldbus in parameter 512).

Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT): Coast stop in fieldbus mode (OFF2):

Miscellaneous

Remote control has been selected in parameter OFF2 means that the drive is stopped by coast. The
002 together with Freeze reference in parameter command to stop has been given over a fieldbus or the
300, 301, 305, 306 or 307, and the terminal in RS485 serial port (select fieldbus in parameter 512).
question (16, 17, 29, 32 or 33) has been activated
(or possibly via the serial communication port).

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 169

 VLT® 5000 Series

Quick stop in fieldbus mode (OFF3):

OFF3 means that the drive is stopped by quick
Wherever a cross is placed under both Warning
stop. The command to stop has been given
and Alarm, this can mean that a warning precedes
over a fieldbus or the RS485 serial port (select
the alarm. It can also mean that it is possible to
fieldbus in parameter 512).
program whether a given fault is to result in a warning
Start not possible (START INHIBIT): or an alarm. This is possible, e.g. in parameter
The drive is in fieldbus profile mode. OFF1, OFF2 or 404 Brake check. After a trip, alarm and warning
OFF3 have been activated. OFF1 must be toggled will flash, but if the fault is removed, only alarm
to be able to start (OFF1 set from 1 to 0 to 1). will flash. After a reset, the frequency converter
will be ready to start operation again.
Not ready for operation (UNIT NOT READY):
The drive is in Fieldbus profile mode (parameter
512). The drive is not ready for operation as bit
00, 01 or 02 in the control word is "0", the drive
has tripped or there is no mains supply (only
seen on units with 24 V DC supply).

Ready for operation (CONTROL READY):

The drive is ready for operation. For extended units
supplied with a 24 V DC supply the message also
comes up when there is not mains supply.

Bus jog, remote controlled (REM/RUN BUS JOG1):

Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
and the Fieldbus has been selected in parameter 512.
Bus Jog has been selected by the fieldbus or serial bus.

Bus jog, remote controlled (REM/RUN BUS JOG2):

Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
and Fieldbus has been selected in parameter 512. Bus
Jog has been selected by the fieldbus or serial bus.

■ List of warnings and alarms

The table gives the different warnings and alarms
and indicates whether the fault locks the frequency
converter. After Trip locked, the mains supply
must be cut and the fault must be corrected.
Reconnect the mains supply and reset the frequency
converter before being ready.

170 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

No. Description Warning Alarm Trip

lockeds
1 10 Volts low (10 VOLT LOW) X
2 Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR) X X
3 No motor (NO MOTOR) X
4 Phase fault (MAINS PHASE LOSS) X X X
5 Voltage warning high (DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH) X
6 Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW) X
7 Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT) X X
8 Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT) X X
9 Inverter overladed (INVERTER TIME) X X
10 Motor overloaded (MOTOR TIME) X X
11 Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR) X X
12 Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) X X
13 Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT) X X X
14 Earth fault (EARTH FAULT) X X
15 Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT) X X
16 Short-circuit (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT) X X
17 Standard bus timeout (STD BUS TIMEOUT) X X
18 HPFB bus timeout (HPFB TIMEOUT) X X
19 Fault in EEprom on power card (EE ERROR POWER CARD) X
20 Fault in EEprom on conrol card (EE ERROR CTRL. CARD) X
21 Auto-optimisation OK (AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK) X
22 Auto-optimisation not OK (AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL) X
23 Brake test failed (BRAKE TEST FAILED) X X
25 Brake resistor short-circuited (BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT ) X
26 Brake resistor power 100% (BRAKE POWER 100%) X X
27 Brake transistor short-circuited (BRAKE IGBT FAULT) X
29 Heat-sink temperature too high (HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.) X X
30 Motor phase U missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE U) X
31 Motor phase V missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE V) X
32 Motor phase W missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE W) X
33 Quick discharge not OK (QUICK DISCHARGE FAIL) X X
34 Profibus communication fault (PROFIBUS COMM. FAULT) X X
35 Out of frequency range (OUT FREQ RNG/ROT LIM) X
36 Mains failure (MAINS FAILURE) X X
37 Inverter fault (INVERTER FAULT) X X
39 Check parameters 104 and 106 (CHECK P.104 & P.106) X
40 Check parameters 103 and 105 (CHECK P.103 & P.105) X
41 Motor too big (Motor too big) X
42 Motor too small (Motor too small) X
43 Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT) X X
44 Encoder loss (ENCODER FAULT) X X
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 171

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Warnings Alarm messages

The display flashes between normal state and warning. The alarm comes up in the 2. and 3. line of
A warning comes up on the first and second line of the display, see example below:
the display. See examples below. If parameter 027
is set to line 3/4, the warning will be shown in these
lines if the display is in read-out state 1-3. TRIP (RESET)

NO MOTOR ALARM:12
TORQUE LIMIT
SETUP

WARN. 3 SETUP

WARNING 1
Under 10 Volts (10 VOLT LOW):
WARNING 6
The 10 Volts voltage from terminal 50 on the
Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW):
control card is below 10 Volts.
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is below the
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10
undervoltage limit of the control system. The
Volts supply is overloaded. Max. 17 mA/min. 590 .
frequency converter is still active.
WARNING/ALARM 2
WARNING/ALARM 7
Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR):
Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT):
The current signal on terminal 60 is less than 50% of the
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) exceeds
value set in parameter 315 Terminal 60,min. scaling.
the inverter overvoltage limit (see table), the
WARNING/ALARM 3 frequency converter will trip after the time set
No motor (NO MOTOR): in parameter 410 has passed.
The motor check function (see parameter 122) Furthermore, the voltage will be stated in the display.
indicates that no motor has been connected to The fault can be eliminated by connecting a brake
the output of the frequency converter. resistor (if the frequency converter has an integral brake
chopper, EB or SB) or by extending the time chosen in
WARNING/ALARM 4 parameter 410. In addition, Brake function/overvoltage
Phase fault (MAINS PHASE LOSS): control can be activated in parameter 400.
A phase is missing on the supply side or the
mains voltage imbalance is too high.
This mesage can also appear if there is a fault in
the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Check the supply voltage and supply currents
to the frequency converter.

WARNING 5
Voltage warning high
(DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH):
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than
the overvoltage limit of the control system. The
frequency converter is still active.

172 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Alarm/warn- more than 100% for too long. Check that motor
ing limits: parameters 102-106 have been set correctly.
VLT 5000 3 x 200 - 3 x 380 - 3 x 550 -
WARNING/ALARM 11
Series 240 V 500 V 600 V
Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR):
The thermistor or the thermistor connection has been
[VDC] [VDC] [VDC]
disconnected. Parameter 128 allows a choice of
Undervoltage 211 402 557
Voltage 222 423 613 whether the frequency converter is to give a warning or
warning low an alarm. Check that the thermistor has been correctly
Voltage 384/405 801/840 943/965 connected between terminal 53 or 54 (analogue
warning high voltage input) and terminal 50 (+ 10 Volts supply).
(w/o brake - WARNING/ALARM 12
w/brake) Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT):
Overvoltage 425 855 975
The torque is higher than the value in parameter 221
(in motor operation) or the torque is higher than the
The voltages stated are the intermediate circuit
value in parameter 222 (in regenerative operation).
voltage of the frequency converter with a tolerance
of ± 5 %. The corresponding mains voltage is the WARNING/ALARM 13
intermediate circuit voltage divided by 1.35 Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT):
The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of
WARNING/ALARM 8 the rated current) has been exceeded. The warning
Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT): will last approx. 1-2 seconds, following which the
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops frequency converter will trip, while giving an alarm.
below the inverter lower voltage limit (see table Turn off the frequency converter and check whether
on previous page), it will be checked whether the motor shaft can be turned and whether the motor
24 V power supply is connected. size matches the frequency converter.
If no 24 V power supply is connected, the
ALARM: 14
frequency converter will trip after a given time
Earth fault (Earth fault):
that depends on the unit.
There is a discharge from the output phases to
Furthermore, the voltage will be stated in the display.
earth, either in the cable between the frequency
Check whether the supply voltage matches the
converter and the motor or in the motor itself.
frequency converter, see technical data.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove
WARNING/ALARM 9 the earth fault.
Inverter overload (INVERTER TIME):
ALARM: 15
The electronic, thermal inverter protection reports that
Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT):
the frequency converter is about to cut out because
Fault in the switch mode power supply
of an overload (too high current for too long). The
(internal ± 15 V supply).
counter for electronic, thermal inverter protection
Contact your Danfoss supplier.
gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100%, while
giving an alarm. The frequency converter cannot ALARM: 16
be reset until the counter is below 90%. Short-circuiting (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT):
The fault is that the frequency converter is overloaded There is short-circuiting on the motor terminals
by more than 100% for too long. or in the motor itself.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove
WARNING/ALARM 10
the short-circuit.
Miscellaneous

Motor overtemperature (MOTOR TIME):

According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR),
the motor is too hot. Parameter 128 allows a
choice of whether the frequency converter is to give
a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
100%. The fault is that the motor is overloaded by

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 173

 VLT® 5000 Series

text is the error code, which can be seen in

the fault log in parameter 615.
WARNING/ALARM 17
Standard bus timeout (STD BUS TIMEOUT)
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning will only be active when parameter 514
has been set to another value than OFF.
If parameter 514 has been set to stop and trip,
it will first give a warning and then ramp down
until it trips, while giving an alarm.
Parameter 513 Bus time interval could
possibly be increased.

WARNING/ALARM 18
HPFB bus timeout (HPFB BUS TIMEOUT )
There is no communication with the
frequency converter.
The warning will only be active when parameter 804
has been set to another value than OFF.
If parameter 804 has been set to Stop and trip,
it will first give a warning and then ramp down
until it trips, while giving an alarm.
Parameter 803 Bus time interval could
possibly be increased.

WARNING 19
Fault in the EEprom on the power card
(EE ERROR POWER CARD)
There is a fault on the power card EEPROM. The
frequency converter will continue to function, but
is likely to fail at the next power-up. Contact
your Danfoss supplier.

WARNING 20
Fault in the EEprom on the control card
(EE ERROR CTRL CARD)
There is a fault in the EEPROM on the control
card. The frequency converter will continue to
function, but is likely to fail at the next power-up.
Contact your Danfoss supplier.

ALARM 21
Auto-optimisation OK
(AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK)
The automatic motor tuning is OK and the frequency
converter is now ready for operation.

ALARM: 22
Auto-optimisation not OK
(AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL)
A fault has been found during automatic motor
adaptation. The text shown in the display
indicates a fault message. The figure after the

174 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

will still be able to work, although without the

brake function. Turn off the frequency converter
CHECK P.103,105 [0]
and replace the brake resistor.
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
ALARM/WARNING 26
LOW P.105 [1]
Brake resistor power 100%
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
(BRAKE PWR WARN 100%):
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE [2] The power transmitted to the brake resistor is
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. calculated as a percentage, as a mean value over the
last 120 sec., on the basis of the resistance value of
MOTOR TOO BIG [3] the brake resistor (parameter 401) and the intermediate
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. circuit voltage. The warning is active when the
dissipated braking power is higher than 100%. If Trip
MOTOR TOO SMALL [4]
[2] has been selected in parameter 403, the frequency
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
converter will cut out while giving this alarm.
TIME OUT [5]
WARNING 27
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
Brake transistor fault
INTERRUPTED BY USER [6] (BRAKE IGBT FAULT):
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. The brake transistor is monitored during operation and
if it short-circuits, the brake function is disconnected
INTERNAL FAULT [7] and the warning comes up. The frequency converter
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. will still be able to run, but since the brake transistor
has short-circuited, substantial power will be
LIMIT VALUE FAULT [8]
transmitted to the brake resistor, even if it is inactive.
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove
MOTOR ROTATES [9] the brake resistor.
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
Warning: There is a risk of substantial
NB!: power being transmitted to the brake resis-
AMA can only be carried out if there are tor if the brake transistor has short-circuited.
no alarms during tuning.
ALARM: 29
WARNING/ALARM 23 Heat sink temperature too high
Fault during brake test (BRAKE TEST FAILED): (HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.):
The brake test is only run after power-up. If Warning If the enclosure is IP 00 or IP 20/NEMA 1, the cut-out
has been selected in parameter 404, the warning temperature of the heat-sink is 90 C. If IP 54 is
will come when the brake test finds a fault. used, the cut-out temperature is 80 C.
If Trip has been selected in parameter 404, The tolerance is ± 5 C. The temperature fault
the frequency converter will trip when the cannot be reset, until the temperature of the
brake test finds a fault. heat-sink is below 60 C.
The brake test may fail for the following reasons: The fault could be the following:
No brake resistor connected or fault in the - Ambient temperature too high
connections; defective brake resistor or defective - Too long motor cable
brake transistor. A warning or alarm will mean - Too high switching frequency.
that the brake function is still active.
ALARM: 30
Miscellaneous

WARNING 25 Motor phase U missing

Brake resistor fault (MISSING MOT.PHASE U):
(BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT): Motor phase U between frequency converter
The brake resistor is monitored during operation and and motor is missing.
if it short-circuits, the brake function is disconnected Turn off the frequency converter and check
and the warning comes up. The frequency converter motor phase U.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 175

 VLT® 5000 Series

ALARM: 31
Motor phase V missing
(MISSING MOT.PHASE V):
Motor phase V between frequency converter
and motor is missing.
Turn off the frequency converter and check
motor phase V.

ALARM: 32
Motor phase W missing
(MISSING MOT.PHASE W):
Motor phase W between frequency converter
and motor is missing.
Turn off the frequency converter and check
motor phase W.

ALARM: 33
Quick discharge not OK
(QUICK DISCHARGE NOT OK):
Check whether a 24 Volt external DC supply
has been connected and that an external
brake/discharge resistor has been fitted.

WARNING/ALARM: 34
Profibus communication fault
(PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION FAULT):
The profibus on the communication option
card is not working.

WARNING: 35
Out of frequency range
(OUT OF FREQUENCY RANGE):
This warning is active if the output frequency has
reached its Output frequency low limit (parameter 201)
or Output frequency high limit (parameter 202). If
the frequency converter is in Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100), the warning will be active in the
display. If the frequency converter is in another mode
than Process control, closed loop, bit 008000 Out
of frequency range in extended status word will be
active, while there will be no warning in the display.

WARNING/ALARM: 36
Mains failure (MAINS FAILURE):
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage
to the frequency converter is lost and if parameter 407
Mains fault has been set to another value than OFF.
If parameter 407 has been set to Contr. ramp-down
trip [2], the frequency converter will first give a warning
and then ramp down and trip, while giving an alarm.
Check the fuses to the frequency converter.

176 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

ALARM: 37
Inverter fault (Inverter fault): Brake IGBT short-circuited
(BRAKE IGBT FAULT) [2]
IGBT or the power card is defective. Contact
your Danfoss supplier. The brake IGBT has short-circuited. This fault means
Auto-optimisation warnings that the unit is not able to stop the brake and that,
Automatic motor adaptation has stopped, since some consequently, the resistor is constant being energized.
parameters have probably been set wrongly, or the WARNING/ALARM: 44
motor used is too big/small for AMA to be carried out. Encoder loss (ENCODER FAULT)
A choice must thus be made by pressing [CHANGE The encoder signal is interrupted from terminal
DATA] and choosing Continue’ + [OK] or Stop’ + [OK]. 32 or 33. Check the connections.
If parameters need to be changed, select
Stop’; start up AMA all over.

WARNING: 39
CHECK P.104,106
The setting of parameter 102, 104 or 106
is probably wrong. Check the setting and
choose Continue’ or Stop’.

WARNING: 40
CHECK P.103,105
The setting of parameter 102, 103 or 105
is probably wrong. Check the setting and
choose Continue’ or Stop’.

WARNING: 41
MOTOR TOO BIG
The motor used is probably too big for AMA to
be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
may not match the motor. Check the motor
and choose Continue’ or Stop’.

WARNING: 42
MOTOR TOO SMALL
The motor used is probably too small for AMA
to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
may not match the motor. Check the motor
and choose Continue’ or Stop’.

ALARM: 43
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT)
A fault has arisen on the brake. The text shown
in the display indicates a fault message. The
figure after the text is the fault code that can be
seen in the fault log, parameter 615.

Brake check failed (BRAKE CHECK FAILED) [0]

The brake check carried out during power-up indicates
Miscellaneous

that the brake has been disconnected. Check

whether the brake has been connected correctly
and that it has not been disconnected.

Brake resistor short-circuited

(BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT) [1]
The brake output has short-circuited. Replace
the brake resistor.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 177

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Warning word 1, Extended status word Bit (Hex) Extended status word (parameter
and Alarm word 541)
WWarning word 1, extended status word and alarm 000001 Ramping
word are shown on the display in Hex format. If 000002 Automatic motor tuning
there are more than one warning or alarm, a sum 000004 Start clockwise/anti-clockwise
of all warnings or alarms will be shown. 000008 Slow down
Warning word 1, extended status word and alarm 000010 Catch-up
word can also be displayed using the serial bus 000020 Feedback high
in parameter 540, 541 and 538.
000040 Feedback low
000080 Output current high
Bit (Hex) Warning word 1 (parameter 540) 000100 Output current low
000001 Fault during brake test 000200 Output frequency high
000002 EE-prom power card fault 000400 Output frequency low
000004 EE-prom control card 000800 Brake test ok
000008 HPFP bus timeout 001000 Braking max.
000010 Standard bus timeout 002000 Braking
000020 Overcurrent 004000 Quick discharge OK
000040 Torque limit 008000 Out of frequency range
000080 Motor thermistor
000100 Motor overload Bit (Hex) Alarm word 1 (parameter 538)
000200 Inverter overload 000001 Brake test failed
000400 Undervoltage 000002 Trip locked
000800 Overvoltage 000004 AMA tuning not OK
001000 Voltage warning low 000008 AMA tuning OK
002000 Voltage warning high 000010 Power-up fault
004000 Phase fault 000020 ASIC fault
008000 No motor 000040 HPFP bus timeout
010000 Live zero fault 000080 Standard bus timeout
(4-20 mA current signal low) 000100 Short-circuiting
020000 10 Volts low 000200 Switchmode fault
040000 000400 Earth fault
080000 Brake resistor power 100% 000800 Overcurrent
100000 Brake resistor fault 001000 Torque limit
200000 Brake transistor fault 002000 Motor thermistor
400000 Out of frequency range 004000 Motor overload
800000 Fieldbus communication fault 008000 Inverter overload
1000000 010000 Undervoltage
2000000 Mains failure 020000 Overvoltage
4000000 Motor too small 040000 Phase fault
8000000 Motor too big 080000 Live zero fault (4 - 20 mA current
10000000 Check P. 103 and P. 105 signal low)
20000000 Check P. 104 and P. 106 100000 Heat sink temperature too high
40000000 Encoder loss 200000 Motor phase W missing
400000 Motor phase V missing
800000 Motor phase U missing
1000000 Quick discharge not ok
2000000 Fieldbus communication fault
4000000 Mains failure
8000000 Inverter fault
10000000 Brake power fault
20000000 Encoder loss
40000000 Safety interlock
80000000 Reserved

178 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Definitions Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and

VLT: Coasting stop, Quick-stop, DC
braking, Stop and the "Stop"
IVLT,MAX
key.
The maximum output current.
Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing,
IVLT,N Start reversing, Jog and Freeze
The rated output current supplied by the output
frequency converter.
Group 1 functions are called Start-disable commands.
UVLT MAX
The difference between group 1 and group 2 is that
The maximum output voltage.
in group 1 all stop signals must be cancelled for the
Output: motor to start. The motor can then be started by
means of a single start signal in group 2.
lM A stop command given as a group 1 command
The current transmitted to the motor. results in the display indication STOP.
A missing stop command given as a group 2
UM
command results in the display indication STAND BY.
The voltage transmitted to the motor.
Start-disable command:
fM
A stop command that belongs to group 1 of the
The frequency transmitted to the motor.
control commands - see this group.
fJOG
Stop command:
The frequency transmitted to the motor when the jog
See Control commands.
function is activated (via digital terminals or the keypad).
Motor:
fMIN
The minimum frequency transmitted to the motor. IM,N
The rated motor current (nameplate data).
fMAX
The maximum frequency transmitted to the motor. fM,N
The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
Break-away torque:
UM,N
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).

PM,N
The rated power delivered by the motor
(nameplate data).

nM,N
ηVLT The rated motor speed (nameplate data).
The efficiency of the frequency converter is
defined as the ratio between the power output TM,N
and the power input. The rated torque (motor).

Input: References:
Control command: preset ref.
By means of LCP and the digital inputs, it is possible A firmly defined reference which can be set
Miscellaneous

to start and stop the connected motor. from -100% to +100% of the reference range.
Functions are divided into two groups, with There are four preset references, which can be
the following priorities: selected via the digital terminals.

analogue ref.
A signal transmitted to input 53, 54 or 60.
Can be voltage or current.

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 179

 VLT® 5000 Series

pulse ref. LCP:

A signal transmitted to the digital inputs The control panel, which makes up a complete
(terminal 17 or 29). interface for control and programming of VLT 5000
Series. The control panel is detachable and may,
binary ref. as an alternative, be installed up to 3 metres away
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port. from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel,
RefMIN by means of the installation kit option.
The smallest value which the reference signal VVCplus
may have. Set in parameter 204. If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio
RefMAX control, VVCplus improves the dynamics and the
The maximum value which the reference signal stability, both when the speed reference is changed
may have. Set in parameter 205. and in relation to the load torque.

Miscellaneous: Slip compensation:

Normally, the motor speed will be affected by the
ELCB: load, but this load dependence is unwanted. The
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker. frequency converter compensates for the slip by
giving the frequency a supplement that follows
lsb:
the measured effective current.
Least significant bit.
Used in serial communication. Thermistor:
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
msb
temperature is to be monitored (VLT or motor).
Most significant bit.
Used in serial communication. Analogue inputs:
The analogue inputs can be used for controlling
PID:
various functions of the frequency converter.
The PID regulator maintains the desired speed
There are two types of analogue inputs:
(pressure, temperature, etc.) by adjusting the output
Current input, 0-20 mA
frequency to match the varying load.
Voltage input, 0-10 V DC.
Trip:
Analogue outputs:
A state which occurs in different situations, e.g.
There are two analogue outputs, which are able to
if the frequency converter is subjected to an
supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or a digital signal.
overtemperature. A trip can be cancelled by pressing
reset or, in some cases, automatically. Digital inputs:
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
Trip locked:
functions of the frequency converter.
A state which occurs in different situations, e.g. if the
frequency converter is subject to an overtemperature. Digital outputs:
A locked trip can be cancelled by cutting off mains There are four digital outputs, two of which activate
and restarting the frequency converter. a relay switch. The outputs are able to supply
a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
Initialising:
If initialising is carried out, the frequency converter Brake resistor:
returns to the factory setting. The brake resistor is a module capable of
absorbing the brake power that is generated in
Setup:
regenerative braking. This regenerative braking
There are four Setups, in which it is possible to
power increases the intermediate circuit voltage
save parameter settings. It is possible to change
and a brake chopper ensures that the power is
between the four parameter Setups and to edit
transmitted to the brake resistor.
one Setup, while another Setup is active.

180 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Pulse encoder:
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for
feeding back information on motor speed. The
encoder is used in applications where great
accuracy in speed control is required.

AWG:
Means American Wire Gauge, i.e. the American
measuring unit for cable cross-section.

Manual initialisation:
Press the [CHANGE DATA] + [MENU] + [OK] keys at
the same time to carry out manual initialisation.

60 AVM
Switching pattern called 60 A synchronous
V ector M odulation.

SFAVM
Switching pattern called S tator F lux oriented A
synchronous V ector M odulation.

Automatic motor adjustment, AMA:

Automatic motor adjustment algorithm, which
determines the electrical parameters for the
connected motor, at standstill.

On-line/off-line parameters:
On-line parameters are activated immediately after the
data value is changed. Off-line parameters are not
activated until OK has been entered on the control unit.

VT characteristics:
Variable torque characteristics, used for
pumps and fans.

CT characteristics:
Constant torque characteristics, used for all
applications, such as conveyor belts and cranes. CT
characteristics are not used for pumps and fans.

MCM:
Stands for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring
unit for cable cross-section. 1 MCM ≡ 0.5067 mm2.
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 181

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Factory Settings

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

001 Language English Yes No 0 5

002 Local/remote control Remote control Yes Yes 0 5
003 Local reference 000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
004 Active setup Setup 1 Yes No 0 5
005 Programming setup Active setup Yes No 0 5
006 Copying of setups No copying No No 0 5
007 LCP copy No copying No No 0 5
008 Display scaling of motor frequency 1 0.01 - 500.00 Yes Yes -2 6
009 Display linie 2 Frequency [Hz] Yes Yes 0 5
010 Display line 1.1 Reference [%] Yes Yes 0 5
011 Display line 1.2 Motor current [A] Yes Yes 0 5
012 Display line 1.3 Power [kW] Yes Yes 0 5
013 Local control/configura LCP digital control/as Yes Yes 0 5
par.100
014 Local stop Possible Yes Yes 0 5
015 Local jog Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
016 Local reversing Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
017 Local reset of trip Possible Yes Yes 0 5
018 Lock for data change Not locked Yes Yes 0 5
019 Operating state at power-up, local Forced stop, use Yes Yes 0 5
control saved ref.
027 Warning readout Warning in line 1/2 Yes No 0 5

Changes during operation:

"Yes" means that the parameter can be changed,
while the frequency converter is in operation. Conversion index Conversion factor
74 0.1
"No" means that the frequency converter must be
2 100
stopped before a change can be made. 1 10
0 1
4-Setup: -1 0.1
"Yes" means that the parameter can be programmed -2 0.01
individually in each of the four setups, i.e. the -3 0.001
-4 0.0001
same parameter can have four different data
values. "No" means that the data value will
Data type:
be the same in all four setups. Data type shows the type and length of the telegram.
Data type Description
Conversion index: 3 Integer 16
This number refers to a conversion figure to 4 Integer 32
5 Unsigned 8
be used when writing or reading by means
6 Unsigned 16
of a frequency converter. 7 Unsigned 32
9 Text string

182 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

100 Configuration Speed control, open loop No Yes 0 5

101 Torque characteristics High - constant torque Yes Yes 0 5
102 Motor power Depends on the unit 0.18-600 kW No Yes 1 6
103 Motor voltage Depends on the unit 200 - 600 V No Yes 0 6
104 Motor frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz No Yes 0 6
105 Motor current Depends on the unit 0.01-IVLT,MAX No Yes -2 7
106 Rated motor speed Depends on the unit 100-60000 rpm No Yes 0 6
107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMA Adaptation off No No 0 5
108 Stator resistor Depends on the unit No Yes -4 7
109 Stator reactance Depends on the unit No Yes -2 7
110 Motor magnetizing, 0 rpm 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
111 Min. frequency normal magnetizing 1.0 Hz 0.1 - 10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 6
112
113 Load compensation at low speed 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
114 Load compensation at high speed 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
115 Slip compensation 100 % -500 - 500 % Yes Yes 0 3
116 Slip compensation time constant 0.50 s 0.05 - 1.00 s Yes Yes -2 6
117 Resonance dampening 100 % 0 - 500 % Yes Yes 0 6
118 Resonance dampening time 5 ms 5 - 50 ms Yes Yes -3 6
constant
119 High starting torque 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 0.5 s Yes Yes -1 5
120 Start delay 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 10.0 s Yes Yes -1 5
121 Start function Coasting in start delay time Yes Yes 0 5
122 Function at stop Coasting Yes Yes 0 5
123 Min. frequency for activating 0.0 Hz 0.0 - 10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 5
function at stop
124 DC holding current 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
125 DC braking current 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
126 DC braking time 10.0 sec. 0.0 - 60.0 sec. Yes Yes -1 6
127 DC brake cut-in frequency Off 0.0-par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
128 Motor thermal protection No protection Yes Yes 0 5
129 External motor fan No Yes Yes 0 5
130 Start frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0-10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 5
131 Initial voltage 0.0 V 0.0-par. 103 Yes Yes -1 6
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 183

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

200 Output frequency range/direction Only clockwise, 0-132 No Yes 0 5

Hz
201 Output frequency low limit 0.0 Hz 0.0 - fMAX Yes Yes -1 6
202 Output frequency high limit 66 / 132 Hz fMIN - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
203 Reference/feedback area Min - max Yes Yes 0 5
204 Minimum reference 0.000 -100,000.000-RefMAX Yes Yes -3 4
205 Maximum reference 50.000 RefMIN -100,000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
206 Ramp type Linear Yes Yes 0 5
207 Ramp-up time 1 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
208 Ramp-down time 1 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
209 Ramp-up time 2 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
210 Ramp-down time 2 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
211 Jog ramp time Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
212 Quick stop ramp-down time Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
213 Jog frequency 10.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
214 Reference function Sum Yes Yes 0 5
215 Preset reference 1 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
216 Preset reference 2 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
217 Preset reference 3 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
218 Preset reference 4 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
219 Catch up/slow down value 0.00 % 0.00 - 100 % Yes Yes -2 6
220
221 Torque limit for motor mode 160 % 0.0 % - xxx % Yes Yes -1 6
222 Torque limit for regenerative 160 % 0.0 % - xxx % Yes Yes -1 6
operation
223 Warning: Low current 0.0 A 0.0 - par. 224 Yes Yes -1 6
224 Warning: High current IVLT,MAX Par. 223 - IVLT,MAX Yes Yes -1 6
225 Warning: Low frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 226 Yes Yes -1 6
226 Warning: High frequency 132.0 Hz Par. 225 - par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
227 Warning: Low feedback -4000.000 -100,000.000 - par. 228 Yes -3 4
228 Warning: High feedback 4000.000 Par. 227 - 100,000.000 Yes -3 4
229 Frequency bypass, bandwidth OFF 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
230 Frequency bypass 1 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
231 Frequency bypass 2 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
232 Frequency bypass 3 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
233 Frequency bypass 4 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
234 Motor phase monitor Enable Yes Yes 0 5

184 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

300 Terminal 16, input Reset Yes Yes 0 5

301 Terminal 17, input Freeze reference Yes Yes 0 5
302 Terminal 18 Start, input Start Yes Yes 0 5
303 Terminal 19, input Reversing Yes Yes 0 5
304 Terminal 27, input Coasting stop, inverse Yes Yes 0 5
305 Terminal 29, input Jog Yes Yes 0 5
306 Terminal 32, input Choice of setup, msb/speed up Yes Yes 0 5
307 Terminal 33, input Choice of setup, lsb/speed down Yes Yes 0 5
308 Terminal 53, analogue input voltage Reference Yes Yes 0 5
309 Terminal 53, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
310 Terminal 53, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
311 Terminal 54, analogue input voltage No operation Yes Yes 0 5
312 Terminal 54, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
313 Terminal 54, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
314 Terminal 60, analogue input current Reference Yes Yes 0 5
315 Terminal 60, min. scaling 0.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes -4 5
316 Terminal 60, max. scaling 20.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes -4 5
317 Time out 10 sec. 1 - 99 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
318 Function after time out Off Yes Yes 0 5
319 0 - IMAX Þ 0-20 mA Yes Yes 0 5
320 Terminal 42, output, pulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
321 Terminal 45, output 0 - fMAX Þ 0-20 mA Yes Yes 0 5
322 Terminal 45, output, pulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
323 Relay 01, output Ready - no thermal warning Yes Yes 0 5
324 Relay 01, ON delay 0.00 sec. 0.00 - 600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
325 Relay 01, OFF delay 0.00 sec. 0.00 - 600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
326 Relay 04, output Ready - remote control Yes Yes 0 5
327 Pulse reference, max. frequency 5000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency 25000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
329 Encoder feedback pulse/rev. 1024 pulses/rev. 1 - 4096 Yes Yes 0 6
pulses/rev.
330 Freeze reference/output function No operation Yes No 0 5
345 Encoder loss timeout 1 sec. 0 - 60 sec Yes Yes -1 6
346 Encoder loss function OFF Yes Yes 0 5
357 Terminal 42, Output minimum scaling 0 % 000 - 100% Yes Yes 0 6
358 Terminal 42, Output maximum scaling 100% 000 - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
359 Terminal 45, Output minimum scaling 0 % 000 - 100% Yes Yes 0 6
360 Terminal 45, Output maximum scaling 100% 000 - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 185

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

400 Brake function/overvoltage control Off Yes No 0 5

401 Brake resistor, ohm Depends on the unit Yes No -1 6
402 Brake power limit, kW Depends on the unit Yes No 2 6
403 Power monitoring On Yes No 0 5
404 Brake check Off Yes No 0 5
405 Reset function Manual reset Yes Yes 0 5
406 Automatic restart time 5 sec. 0 - 10 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
407 Mains Failure No function Yes Yes 0 5
408 Quick discharge Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
409 Trip delay torque Off 0 - 60 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
410 Trip delay-inverter Depends on type of unit 0 - 35 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
411 Switching frequency Depends on type of unit 3 - 14 kHz Yes Yes 2 6
412 Output frequency dependent switching Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
frequency
413 Overmodulation function On Yes Yes -1 5
414 Minimum feedback 0.000 -100,000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
- FBHIGH
415 Maximum feedback 1500.000 FBLOW - Yes Yes -3 4
100,000.000
416 Process unit % Yes Yes 0 5
417 Speed PID proportional gain 0.015 0.000 - 0.150 Yes Yes -3 6
418 Speed PID integration time 8 ms 2.00 - 999.99 Yes Yes -4 7
ms
419 Speed PID differentiation time 30 ms 0.00 - 200.00 Yes Yes -4 6
ms
420 Speed PID diff. gain ratio 5.0 5.0 - 50.0 Yes Yes -1 6
421 Speed PID low-pass filter 10 ms 5 - 200 ms Yes Yes -4 6
422 U 0 voltage at 0 Hz 20.0 V 0.0 - Yes Yes -1 6
parameter
103
423 U 1 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
424 F 1 frequency parameter 104 0.0 - Yes Yes -1 6
parameter
426
425 U 2 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, Yes Yes -1 6
MAX
426 F 2 frequency parameter 104 par.424- Yes Yes -1 6
par.428
427 U 3 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
428 F 3 frequency parameter 104 par.426 Yes Yes -1 6
-par.430
429 U 4 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6

186 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

430 F 4 frequency parameter 104 par.426-par.432 Yes Yes -1 6

431 U 5 voltage parameter 103 .0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
432 F 5 frequency parameter 104 par.426 - 1000 Hz Yes Yes -1 6
433 Torque proportional gain 100% 0 (Off) - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
434 Torque integral time 0.02 sec. 0.002 - 2.000 sec. Yes Yes -3 7
437 Process PID Normal/inverse control Normal Yes Yes 0 5
438 Process PID anti windup On Yes Yes 0 5
439 Process PID start frequency parameter 201 fmin - fmax Yes Yes -1 6
440 Process PID proportional gain 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 Yes Yes -2 6
441 Process PID integral time 9999.99 sec. (OFF) 0.01 - 9999.99 sec. Yes Yes -2 7
442 Process PID differentiation time 0.00 sec. (OFF) 0.00 - 10.00 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
443 Process PID diff. gain limit 5.0 5.0 - 50.0 Yes Yes -1 6
444 Process PID lowpass filter time 0.01 0.01 - 10.00 Yes Yes -2 6
445 Flying start Disable Yes Yes 0 5
446 Switching pattern SFAVM Yes Yes 0 5
447 Torque compensation 100% -100 - +100% Yes Yes 0 3
448 Gear ratio 1 0.001 - 100.000 No Yes -2 4
449 Friction loss 0% 0 - 50% No Yes -2 6
450 Mains voltage at mains fault Depends on unit Depends on unit Yes Yes 0 6
453 Speed closed loop gear ratio 1 0.01-100 No Yes 0 4
454 Dead time compensation On No No 0 5
455 Frequency range monitor Enable 0 5
457 Phase loss function Trip Yes Yes 0 5

Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 187

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

500 Address 1 0 - 126 Yes No 0 6

501 Baudrate 9600 Baud Yes No 0 5
502 Coasting Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
503 Quick-stop Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
504 DC-brake Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
505 Start Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
506 Reversing Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
507 Selection of setup Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
508 Selection of speed Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
509 Bus jog 1 10.0 Hz 0.0 - parameter 202 Yes Yes -1 6
510 Bus jog 2 10.0 Hz 0.0 - parameter 202 Yes Yes -1 6
511
512 Telegram profile FC Drive No Yes 0 5
513 Bus time interval 1 sec. 1 - 99 s Yes Yes 0 5
514 Bus time interval function Off Yes Yes 0 5
515 Data read-out: Reference % No No -1 3
516 Data read-out: Reference unit No No -3 4
517 Data read-out: Feedback No No -3 4
518 Data read-out: Frequency No No -1 6
519 Data read-out: Frequency x Scaling No No -2 7
520 Data read-out: Current No No -2 7
521 Data read-out: Torque No No -1 3
522 Data read-out: Power, kW No No -1 7
523 Data read-out: Power, HP No No -2 7
524 Data read-out: Motor voltage No No -1 6
525 Data read-out: DC link voltage No No 0 6
526 Data read-out: Motor temp. No No 0 5
527 Data read-out: VLT temp. No No 0 5
528 Data read-out: Digital input No No 0 5
529 Data read-out: Terminal 53, No No -2 3
analogue input
530 Data read-out: Terminal 54, No No -2 3
analogue input
531 Data read-out: Terminal 60, No No -5 3
analogue input
532 Data read-out: Pulse reference No No -1 7
533 Data read-out: External reference % No No -1 3
534 Data read-out: Status word, binary No No 0 6
535 Data read-out: Brake power/2 min. No No 2 6
536 Data read-out: Brake power/sec. No No 2 6
537 Data read-out: Heat sink temperature No No 0 5
538 Data read-out: Alarm word, binary No No 0 7
539 Data read-out: VLT control word, binary No No 0 6
540 Data read-out: Warning word, 1 No No 0 7
541 Data read-out: Extended status word No No 0 7
557 Data read-out: Motor RPM No No 0 4
558 Data read-out: Motor RPM x scaling No No -2 4
580 Defined parameter No No 0 6
581 Defined parameter No No 0 6
582 Defined parameter No No 0 6

188 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index ype

600 Operating data: Operating hours No No 74 7

601 Operating data: Hours run No No 74 7
602 Operating data: kWh counter No No 1 7
603 Operating data: Number of power-up’s No No 0 6
604 Operating data: Number of overtemperatures No No 0 6
605 Operating data: Number of overvoltages No No 0 6
606 Data log: Digital input No No 0 5
607 Data log: Bus commands No No 0 6
608 Data log: Bus status word No No 0 6
609 Data log: Reference No No -1 3
610 Data log: Feedback No No -3 4
611 Data log: Motor frequency No No -1 3
612 Data log: Motor voltage No No -1 6
613 Data log: Motor current No No -2 3
614 Data log: DC link voltage No No 0 6
615 Fault log: Error code No No 0 5
616 Fault log: Time No No -1 7
617 Fault log: Value No No 0 3
618 Reset of kWh counter No reset Yes No 0 5
619 Reset of hours-run counter No reset Yes No 0 5
620 Operating mode Normal function Normal function No No 0 5
621 Nameplate: VLT type No No 0 9
622 Nameplate: Power section No No 0 9
623 Nameplate: VLT ordering number No No 0 9
624 Nameplate: Software version no. No No 0 9
625 Nameplate: LCP identification no. No No 0 9
626 Nameplate: Database identification no. No No -2 9
627 Nameplate: Power section identification no. No No 0 9
628 Nameplate: Application option type No No 0 9
629 Nameplate: Application option ordering no. No No 0 9
630 Nameplate: Communication option type No No 0 9
631 Nameplate: Communication option ordering no. No No 0 9

Miscellaneous

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 189

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data type

# description during operation index

700 Relay 6, function Ready signal Yes Yes 0 5

701 Relay 6, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
702 Relay 6, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
703 Relay 7, function Motor running Yes Yes 0 5
704 Relay 7, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
705 Relay 7, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
706 Relay 8, function Mains ON Yes Yes 0 5
707 Relay 8, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
708 Relay 8, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
709 Relay 9, function Fault Yes Yes 0 5
710 Relay 9, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
711 Relay 9, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6

190 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

A Electrical installation, power cables .................... 47, 48, 49, 51

Accuracy of display readout (parameters 009-012): ............. 14 Enclosure type ............................................................. 43
Accuracy of display readout (parameters009-012): .............. 14 External 24 V DC supply ................................................ 64
Application configuration ................................................ 76 External 24 volt dc supply: ........................................ 13, 13
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA ................................... 88 Externals: ............................................................... 15, 15
Automatic motor adaptation, AMA, viaVLT Software Dialog ... 90 Extra protection (RCD) ................................................... 58

B F
Brake resistor terminals (only sb and eb units): ................... 13 Fan Supply .................................................................. 65
Brake resistor terminals (only SB andEB units): ................... 13 Field mounting ............................................................. 43
Bus connection ............................................................ 65 Flying start .................................................................. 99
Freeze reference/output ................................................ 138

C
Cable lengths, cross-sections and connectors: ................... 14 G
Catch up ...................................................................121 General technical data .................................... 11, 12, 13, 14
Change of group of numeric data values ........................... 73 General warning ............................................................. 4
Changing a text value .................................................... 73
Changing data ............................................................. 72
Changing of data value, step-by-step ............................... 73 H
Configuration ..............................................................107 Handling of multi-references............................................ 85
Connection of mains ..................................................... 58 Handling of single references .......................................... 83
Connection of motor ..................................................... 63 High voltage test .......................................................... 58
Control card, 24 V DC supply: ........................................ 13
Control card, analogue inputs: ......................................... 12
Control card, digital inputs: ........................................ 12, 12
I
Infinitely variable change of numericdatavalue ..................... 73
Control card, digital/pulse and analogue outputs: ................ 13
Installation of 24 Volt external DC supply: .......................... 64
Control card, digital/pulse and analogueoutputs: ................. 13
Installation of brake cable ............................................... 64
Control card, pulse/encoder input: .............................. 12, 12
Installation of brake resistor temperatureswitch ................... 65
Control card, rs 485 serial communication: ................... 13, 13
Installation of control cables ............................................ 66
Control characteristics: .................................................. 14
Installation of loadsharing ............................................... 64
Control key functions ..................................................... 69
Installation of motor cables ............................................. 63
Control keys ................................................................ 69
Installation of relay terminals: ........................................... 64
Control of mechanical brake ........................................... 91
Internal current regulator ............................................... 100
Control panel ............................................................... 68
Introduction ................................................................... 9
Control with brake function ............................................. 81

D L
Data change ...............................................................106
Language 127 ............................................................101
Definitions ..................................................................179
LCP copy ..................................................................102
LEDs.......................................................................... 68
DIP Switches 1-4 ......................................................... 65
List of warnings and alarms ........................................... 170
Direction of motor rotation .............................................. 63
Local jog ...................................................................105
Display ....................................................................... 68
Local reversing ............................................................ 106
Display mode ............................................................... 69
Local stop ..................................................................105
Miscellaneous

Display mode - selection of read-outstate .......................... 70

Display read-out state .................................................... 69

M
E Mains failure/quick discharge with mainsfailureinverse .......... 97
Mains supply (L1, L2, L3): .............................................. 11
Earthing of braided screened/armouredcontrolcables ........... 57
Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V .................................... 17, 18
Electrical installation ................................................. 46, 67
Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240V .......................................... 16
Electrical installation, enclosures ...................................... 53

MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 191

 VLT® 5000 Series

Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V .................... 22, 24, 27, 28, 29 V

Mains supply 3 x 550 - 600 V ............................... 30, 32, 34 VLT 5000 Series protection: ....................................... 15, 15
Mains supply 3x380 - 500 V ........................................... 20 Vlt output data (u, v, w): ............................................ 11, 11
Manual initialisation ....................................................... 74
Mechanical dimensions .................................................. 40
Mechanical installation ................................................... 43 W
Menu mode ................................................................. 72 Warning against unintended start ....................................... 4
Menu structure ............................................................. 75 Warning word 1, Extended status wordand Alarm word....... 178
Motor thermal protection ................................................ 58 Warnings ...................................................................172

N
Normal/high overload torque control,openloop .................... 99

P
Parallel coupling of motors ............................................. 63
Parameter selection ................................................. 72, 72
Parameter Setup .......................................................... 71
PID for process control .................................................. 94
PID for speed control .................................................... 95
Powerup ....................................................................106
Programming of Torque limit and stop ............................. 100
Programming Setup ..................................................... 102

Q
Quick discharge ........................................................... 96
Quick Setup via Quick menu ........................................... 72

R
Read out and programming of indexed parameters ............. 73
Relay outputs: ......................................................... 13, 13
RFI switch ................................................................... 60

S
Safety earthing ............................................................. 58
Safety regulations ........................................................... 4
Selection of brake resistor .............................................. 81
Setting of parameters .................................................... 76
Shift between local and remote control ............................. 80
Slow down ................................................................121
Status messages ......................................................... 168
Structure for the Quick menu mode versusthe Menu mode ... 71

T
Tightening-up torques and screw sizes ............................. 58
Torque characteristics: .............................................. 11, 11

U
Use of EMC-correct cables ............................................. 56

192 MG.51.A2.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Projekt: 71 EC­B 14kW PU
STROMLAUFPLAN 4005­22028_12_0
ESQUEMA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AMPERIMETRICOS
B B

GERÄTEANORDNUNG
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS

C C
SACHNUMMER 968493001
NUMERO DE OBJETO

BETRIEBSSPANNUNG 400V/440V 50/60HZ

TENSION DE SERVICIO
D D

STEUERSPANNUNG 115V 50/60HZ

TENSION DE MANDO 24V DC

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 Kugler Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK SCHALTSCHRANK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ARMARIO EL CTRICO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 0 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 14kW PU

A A
INDICE
Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name

/0 SCHALTSCHRANK 04.03.2005 /13 DREHWERK 04.03.2005

ARMARIO EL CTRICO MEC.DE GIRO
B B
/1 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 03.12.2008 /14 DREHWERK 04.03.2005
INDICE MEC.DE GIRO
/2 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 03.12.2008 /15 WINDFREISTELLUNG 04.03.2005
INDICE PUESTA EN VELETA
/3 EINSPEISUNG 04.03.2005 /16 FAHRWERK 04.03.2005
ALIMENTACIçN MEC.DE GRUA
C /4 EINSPEISUNG 03.12.2008 /17 FAHRWERK 04.03.2005 C

ALIMENTACIçN MEC.DE GRUA

/5 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /18 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/6 ZENTRALSCHMIERUNG 03.12.2008 /19 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
LUBRIFICACION CENTRALIZADA MEC.DE CARRO

D
/7 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /20 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005 D
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/8 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /21 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/9 STROMKREIS 04.03.2005 /22 RESERVE 04.03.2005
CIRCUITO EL CTRICO RISERVA
/10 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /23 ÜBERLAST 06.04.2005
E E
MEC.DE GIRO SOBRECARGA
/11 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /24 ÜBERLAST 06.04.2005
MEC.DE GIRO SOBRECARGA
/12 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /25 HUBWERK 04.03.2005
MEC.DE GIRO MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN

F F

Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH INDICE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 1 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 14kW PU

A A
INDICE
Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name

/26 HUBWERK 04.03.2005 /39 WINDWARNANLAGE 27.02.2009

MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
B B
/27 HUBWERK 04.03.2005
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
/28 HUBWERK 22.03.2005
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
/29 HUBWERK 06.04.2005
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
C /30 KLIMAANLAGE 29.10.2007 C

AIRE ACONDICIONADO
/31 EMS­MODUL 29.10.2007

/32 WINDWARNANLAGE 27.02.2009

SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO

D
/33 EMS­MODUL 29.10.2007 D

/34 STEUERSTAND 05.08.2005

PUESTO DE MANDO
/35 STEUERSTAND 26.04.2005
PUESTO DE MANDO
/36 GERÄTEANORDNUNG 05.08.2005
E E
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
/37 KLEMMENPLAN 08.06.2005
ESQUEMA DE BORNES
/38 STECKER 10.06.2005
ENCHUFE

F F

Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH INDICE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 2 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L1.1
/10.B1
L2.1
/10.B1
L3.1
/10.B1
A 10qmm A

X EINGESTELLT AUF X
AJUSTADO A
+A 1 3 5
6A
­Q3

I> I> I>

2 4 6

+A 1 3 5 1.13 +A 1 3 5
B ­Q1 ­Q2 L1.2
B
1.14 /5.A1
63A L2.2
I> I> I> I> I> I> /5.A1
­X1 89 L3.2
/5.A1
2 4 6 2 4 6 90
EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A
/8.B1

12A * *

PE1
PE2
­PE ­PE +A 1 +A 1 3N L1 L2 L3 11 21
/3.F5 /3.F5 ­F2 ­F7 +A
11 21
­F1 L1
2
I>
1 2 PE 1 2 PE 13A/30mA 2 4N L3 L2
C 12 14 22 24 C
+A +A
­E1 ­E2
12 14 22 24
095

98

80
81
82
89
89
90
90
92
95
95
97

PE
­X1 ­X1 ­X1

*
KLIMAANLAGE
AIRE ACONDICIONADO

BELEUCHTUNG
ALUMBRADO

PE3
­PE

PE5
PE4
­PE ­PE
=A * PE /3.F5
D /3.F5 =A /3.F5 L2 D

B:L1
B:L2
B:L3
*

B:PE
+A =A L1 L2 L3 N PE

2
1
PE
­W1 +A =A
+A
/16.D3 ­X1 * +A L1.1

1
2
­X2

PE
L1 L2 L3 N PE

R:L1
R:L2
R:L3
R:PE
­T20
400V 230V

L1 N

L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
LICHTTRANSFORMATOR +A +A +A
PE
PE
PE

* * TRANSFORM. DE ALUMBRADO ­X7 ­X1 ­X1

E EINSPEISUNG HEIZUNG * E
ALIMENTACIçN CALEFACCIçN
PE
PE
PE
PE8
PE9
PE10

KABINE ­PE
ABB CAMAROTE /3.F5 /3.F5 /3.F5
PE
PE
PE

SCHALTSCHRANK
ARMARIO EL CTRICO
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PE6
PE7
PE8
PE9
PE10
PE11
PE12
PE13
PE14
PE15
PE16
PE17
PE18
PE19
PE20
PE21
PE22
PE23
PE24
PE25
PE26
PE27

­PE

L1
L2
L3
PE
/5.B2
/3.E8
/3.E8
/3.E8
/5.B3
/5.B7

/3.C5
/3.C5
/3.D5
/3.D4
/3.D3
/7.D7
/15.E2
/30.E2

/10.E6
/18.B4
/18.B6
/25.D2

/10.D5
/10.D7
/18.C6
/25.D5
/25.D8
/26.C3

NICHT SERIENMAESSIG
PE *
F 400V/440V/50­60Hz NO EN SERIE F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EINSPEISUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ALIMENTACIçN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 3 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L1
A A

L2
L3
+A 1 3 5
­Q2

I> I> I>

2 4 6
EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A

B 14A B

89
­X1

90
PE PE
* +A 1 3 5 7N
1 2 PE 1 2 PE
­F7
+A +A
13A/30mA
­E1 ­E2 I>
2 4 6 8N

C C

80
81
82
89
89
90
90
92
93
94
96
97
98
095
99
95

­X1 ­X1 ­X1

*
BELEUCHTUNG
ALUMBRADO

D D

L1 L2 L3 PE
* =A PE
+A
­T21
10kVA
3x400V/3x400V

L1 L2 L3 N PE PE
E E

LICHTTRANSFORMATOR
* * NICHT SERIENMAESSIG
TRANSFORM. DE ALUMBRADO NO EN SERIE

F F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 03.12.2008 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EINSPEISUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ALIMENTACIçN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 4 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2
/3.B8
L2.2
/3.B8
L3.2
/3.B8

A 460 440 400 380 N A

Prim.: 380/400/440/460VAC
+A 2,57A 0 380 400 440 460
­T1 +A
PE ­T2
Sec. 1: 110VAC PE
4,5A

PE11
Sec. 2: 31­33­35VAC ­PE
15,2A

PE12
­PE
/3.F5
Pn = 1kVA 0 220 /3.F5
0 110 0 31 33 35

/29.B4
+A 1 12 14 23
/6.A2
­F4
B 2 11 B

PE6
­PE
/3.F5 +
+A
1 2 ­T3
+A
­X0 ~ ~

­
1 +A 1 3 5
+A
1 13 ­Q30
3 4 ­F3 +H
C ­F3 C
2 /8.E1 2 4 6
2 14
/7.A6
/7.B7

/29.B4
+A 33
­F10 +A 83
34 ­Q30
/7.C6
84
/8.F1
D D
110
110
111

­X1 ­X1
26
/16.A2

100
100
100
101
101
102
­X1 ­X1 ­X1 25
/6.B2
25
/16.A2

27
/15.A1
29
/15.A1
28
/15.A1

E E
3
/32.A1
3
/13.A1
6
/6.A2
6
/7.A1
6
/7.A1
N­20
N­20
/7.E1
N­20
/6.A2

1 =P1 1 N­21
/7.E1
F 1 F
+A
­X1

­X20
20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 5 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
N­20
/5.F8
6
/5.E8

23
/5.B8

* +P 1
­F1
2
B B
25
/5.D8

* ­X15 1 2 3 PE ­X15 4 5 6 PE ­X15 7 8

C C

blue
brown

black
blue
brown

black
* =P1

2
1
+Z
­X3

1/4
2 /4
=A
* =A+Z * +Z

2
3

1
PE

2
3

1
PE
­X1 ­X2
D
*=P1 X1 D
+Z
­P15

X2

E E
ZENTRALSCHMIERUNG
*
LUBRIFICACION CENTRALIZADA

F F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 03.12.2008 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK ZENTRALSCHMIERUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH LUBRIFICACION CENTRALIZADA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 6 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6
/5.E8 /15.A1
6 6
/5.E8 /8.A1
+A

2
­X1
+A

2
A A

3
­X1
+A 53

130
­X1 +A 13 +A 3

3
=P1 ­Q20
­Q20 ­Q30
­X20 2 54
* =X 14 4 /7.F6
/7.F6 /5.C6
+A 21

/13.A2
=P1 +A 5
­S2 =P1
+A 11 21 ­Q30
NOT­HALT
22 ­S12 ­X20 3
PARO DE 6
EMERGENCIA /5.C6
12 22

131
B NOT­HALT B
PARO DE 1 1 =P1 4
/12.A1
EMERGENCIA +A 43
+K +F ­K00
+A
7

­S2 ­S2 44 ­X1

132
­X1 /7.F2
7

/35.D2 /35.B2
* =X 2 2
+A 21

/5.D3
1 1
+A 21 =P1 ­Q20 =P1
­S1 +A 43 A1 Y10 Y11 Y21 Y33 Y43 13 23 33 41 51
+D +H 22 +A ­X20 7
­K04 /7.F6 +
22 ­S3 ­S3 ­F10
44
/7.F3 5
/35.D5 /35.B5 /17.A1
C 2 2 C

133
ON
=P1
+A 23
­SE3 NOT NOT AUS
PARADA DE EMERGENCIA
24 +A 71
HALT
/8.D7 ­
­Q30 A2 Y12 Y22 Y34 Y44 14 24 34 42 52 PE
72
/8.F1
=P1
PE13

­PE
/3.F6
­X20 4
D D
+A

4
­X1
=P1 =P1

4
+A A1 +A A1 +A A1
­K00 ­K04 ­Q20 KRANSCHALTER
A2 A2 A2 INTERRUPTOR DE GRUA
/7.E2 /7.E3
N­20 N­20
/5.F8 /8.E1
N­21 N­21
/5.F8 /8.E1

E =P1 =P1 E
+A +A
+A
­K00 ­K04
/7.D2 /7.D3 ­Q20
13 14 13 14 /7.D6
/8.B5 /8.B5 1 2
23 24 23 24
/8.C7 /8.C7 3 4
33 34 33 34 /10.A2
5 6
43 44 43 44
/7.B4 /7.C4 13 14
/7.A6
21 22
/7.C4
53 54
/7.A7
61 62
F F

20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
20061011 26.06.2006 KUGLER Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 7 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6
/7.A8 /9.A1
158 =P1 STEUERUNG
­X1 COMMANDO
+A 21
=A ­S2 AUS

B:6
A * +A DISINSERITO A
22
­W1
/16.D4 =P1 =P1

R:6
+A 13 TOTMANNSCHALTER +A 13

6
X5 ­K00 INTERRUPTOR DE ­S41
=A 14 HOMBRE MUERTO
+A /7.E2 14
­X5
17
=A
+A =P1 =P1
­X5 18 +A 13
+A 13 TOTMANNSCHALTER
­K04 INTERRUPTOR DE ­S42
B =S3 B
+F 14 HOMBRE MUERTO 14
TÜRENDSCHALTER ­X3 6 /7.E3

12
14
INTERRUPTOR DE PUERTA
+A
­F1 FAHRWERK =S3 =P1
11
/3.B8 MEC.DE GRUA +F +A 23
­S50 ­K00
24
=S3 /7.E2
+F =P1
­X3 12 =P1
­X20 5
+A 23
=S3

WENN OHNE FAHRWERK

CONECTAR EN PUENTE SI NO
TIENE MECANISMO DE
TRASLACIçN

ÜBERBRÜCKEN
­K04
C +F +A C

5
­X3 11 24
­X1 /7.E3

5
=S3 =P1
+F STEUERUNG +A 13 23 X1
­X3 7 COMMANDO ­SE3
EIN 14 24 X2
+A 13 INSERITO
/7.C4
/8.D7

STEUERUNG­EIN

7
/31.A1 X5 ­Q30
14 =P1
=A /8.F1 =P1

R:7
X1
* +A
­X20 6
+A
­W1 ­SE3
D /16.D5 GN D

B:7
+A
6

STEUERUNG /8.D7 X2
+A A1 ­X1
COMMANDO
6

­Q30
EIN ­X1
A2 159
INSERITO
N­20 N­20
/7.E8 /9.E1
N­21
/7.E8

+A
E E
­Q30
/8.D1
1 2
3 4
/5.C6
5 6
13 14
/8.D5
21 22
/15.B8
53 54 +A *
/21.C7 ­Q30
61 62
/15.A4 153 154
71 72
/7.D4 161 162
83 84 /15.B7
/5.D4
F F

20061011 26.06.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 8 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6
/8.A8 /13.A1

A A
=P1
ÜBERLAST
+A 13 SOBRECARGA
­S6
TEST
14 PRUEBA

=P1
B ­X20 8 B

+A

8
­X1

8
H
/23.D5

C C

­X1 104

=A
+A HORN
­P1 BOCINA

D D

­X1 105

N­20 N­20
/8.E8 /12.E2

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STROMKREIS 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH CIRCUITO EL CTRICO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 9 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2
/16.A2
L2.2
/16.A2
L3.2
/16.A2

A +D 1 3 5 A
+A 1 3 5 ­F1
­Q20 2 4 6 1 3 5
EINGESTELLT AUF +D 13 21
/7.F6 2 4 6 AJUSTADO A ­Q51
14 22
0,25A I> I> I>
L1 L2 L3 PE

/11.C4
+D 2 4 6
­V1
15.E4.T60­1001 +D
3x480VAC 30A ­K10
L1.1 1 3
/3.A8
L2.1 /13.C6
B /3.A8 B
L3.1
/3.A8
1 2 3 PE SH blau
DRW­FU­24V+
/11.A1
DRW­FU­0V
/11.E1

/11.D1
/11.D2
/11.D3
/11.D4
+D 1 3 5
L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23
­Q50
C +D C
/14.E3 2 4 6
­T1

­SOLLWERT
+SOLLWERT
24V AUSGANG

+10V AUSGANG
ANALOGMASSE
BREMSE OFFEN
SCHNELLSTOPP
20­30V EINGANG
DIGITALE MASSE
DIGITALE MASSE

SOLLWERT LINKS

FREIG. MAX. MOM.

REGLERFREIGABE

SOLLWERTSTUFE 2
SOLLWERTSTUFE 3

MAX. MOM. SOLLW.­

SOLLWERT RECHTS

MAX. MOM. SOLLW.+

INCREMENTALGEBER

FREQUENZUMRICHTER KEB COMBIVERT "F5­M" X3B

rd

gn
gy

bn
pk
bk

BN
WH

FU­BEREIT FU­BREMSE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SM
=A

ANALOG 1 (AKT. U/min)

ANALOG 2 (AKT. U/min)
ANALOGMASSE

TEMP.­ÛBERWACHUNG
TEMP.­ÛBERWACHUNG
MOM. GRENZE ERREICHT
NUR BREMSEN MÖGL.

BREMSMODUL
BREMSWIDERSTAND
BREMSWIDERSTAND
+U 0V A A B B N N SM
D +D D
270
271
272

U V W PE ­­ ++ PB T1 T2 5 6 8 24 25 26 27 28 29 18 19 PE DREHIMPULSGEBER
PE16

­G1 ­X1 ­PE

/3.F6

/11.B6
/11.B7
PE7

­PE
/3.F5

2,5qmm

274
275
­X1 +D
E ­R1 E
1 2
/15.E1 /14.C3 /15.E2 /15.E3 /15.B6 /10.F7 PE
=A U V W PE SH 1 2 PE TK TK P1 P2 M11 M12 M21 M22 C O S U V W PE
+D
PE15

­PE
­M1
BREMSWIDERSTAND /3.F6 =A
1 2 RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO U V W PE
M M +D
3~ PE 3~ 56 Ohm ­M1 M
ϑ EIN AUS /10.E5 3~
4p
HAUPT­ 24V DC THERMO­ MOTOR­ WIND­
MOTOR BREMSE KONTAKT VOLLSCHUTZ FREISTELLUNG LÜFTER

F F

20071066 25.06.2007 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 10 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DRW­FU­24V+
/10.B8

A A

25
24
28
27
+D 13 +D 13 +D 13 +D 12 14
­Q3 ­K2 ­K4 ­F1 +D +D
14 14 14 11 ­T1 26 ­T1 29
/13.E2 /12.F3 /12.F4
/10.D4 /10.D4

B +D 63 +D 23 +D 23 B
­Q3 ­K2 ­K4
64 24 24
/13.F2 /12.F3 /12.F4

+D 13
­Q51
C 14 C
/10.A7

12 14 15 16

+D +D +D +D
­T1 BREMSE OFFEN ­T1 SOLLWERT RECHTS ­T1 SOLLWERT LINKS ­T1 REGLERFREIGABE
D /10.C4 /10.C4 /10.C4 /10.C4 D
BREMSE RECHTS LINKS REGLER
FRENO DERECHA IZQUIERDA &#469;
FREIGABE
AUTORIZACION

+D A1 +D A1
DREHWERK ­K11 ­K12
MEC.DE GIRO
A2 A2

DRW­FU­0V
/10.B8
FREIGABE BREMSE
AUTORIZACION FRENO
E E
FREQUENZUMRICHTER
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

+D +D
­K11 ­K12
/11.D6 /11.D7
14 14
/12.A2 11 /13.C2 11
12 12
24 24
/13.C2 21 21
22 22

F F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 11 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/7.B8 /13.A1

+A

12
14
+D 43 +D 43

9
­X1
A ­K2 ­K4 +D A

9
44 44 ­K11 11
/12.F3 /12.F4
/11.F6
=P1
­X20 9

7 9 11 13 15 17
B B
5 5 5 5 5
+D +D +D +D 3 +D 4 +D
2
1
­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3
1
2
3 4
/35.D6 /35.D6 5 /35.D6 5 /35.D7 5 /35.D7 5 /35.D7 5
8 10 12 14 16 18

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1

­X20 10 ­X20 11 ­X20 12 ­X20 13 ­X20 14 ­X20 32

+A +A +A +A +A +A
32

10
11
12
13
14

C ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 C

11
32

12

10
13
14

­X1 226 ­X1 228

UMDREHUNGSBEGRENZUNG
FC VUELTAS GIRO
=A =A
* 21 * +D 21
9 +D 10 11 12 13 14
­S8 ­S7
D +D 22 22 +D +D +D +D +D D
RECHTS LINKS
­K10 DERECHA IZQUIERDA
­K10 ­K10 ­K10 ­K10 ­K10
/13.B6 ­X1 ­X1 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6
227 229

STUFE 1 DRW­RE DRW­LI STUFE 2 STUFE 3 STUFE 4 STUFE 5

/31.A1 /31.A1
ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN

+D A1 +D A1
­K2 ­K4
A2 A2

E N­20 N­20 E
/9.E8 /13.E1
RECHTS LINKS
DERECHA IZQUIERDA

+D +D
­K2 ­K4
/12.E4 /12.E4
13 14 13 14
/11.A2 /11.A3
23 24 23 24
/11.B4 /11.B5
33 34 33 34
43 44 43 44
/12.A1 /12.A2
03 04 03 04
/13.B3 /13.B3
F F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 12 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 3
/5.E8 /14.A2
4 4
/12.A8 /20.A1
6
/9.A8
=P1
+A 21
A NOT AUS A
­S12
PARADA DE EMERGENCIA
22
/7.A3
=P1
+D 11
BREMSE
FRENO
­S36
12

=P1
­X20 15 +D 03 +D 03
­K2 ­K4
B +A 04 04 B

15
/12.F3 /12.F4
­X1

15
/12.D2
/12.D5
/12.D6
/12.D7
/12.D7
/12.D8
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+D 5

0V
0V
+D
115V
­Q3 ­K10
6
/15.B2
Sollwerteingabe
4017­1117
+A 0 I .3

12
14
­S2 EINGANG 6 STUFEN 115V
+D MONTAGE AUSGANG 4­20mA / 0­10V
C C
­K12 .4 MONTAJE
11
/11.F7

GND
1 2 3 4 GND

22
24
+D
­K11 /10.B3
21
/11.F6
+D 21 +D 13
­K8 ­K8
22 14
D /15.E3 /15.E3 D

BREMSE
+D A1
FRENO
­Q3
DREHWERK
A2
MEC.DE GIRO
N­20 N­20
/12.E8 /14.E1

+D
­Q3
E E
/13.D2
1 2
3 4
/15.B1
5 6
13 14
/11.A2
21 22
/15.A7

+D
­Q3
53 54
/14.B2
63 64
/11.B4
F F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 13 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 3
/13.A8 /29.A1

A A

+D 53
­Q3
54
/13.F2

B B

276
277
­X1

TK TK

=A
+D
C ­M1 C
/10.E4 THERMO­
KONTAKT

VENTILATOR
VENTILADOR
DREHWERK
MEC.DE GIRO
EIN 70°C
INSERITO

D D

+D A1
+D A1
­K7 1,5 sek. ­Q50
A2
WINDFREISTELLUNG A2
PUESTA EN VELETA
N­20 N­20
/13.E8 /15.D1

E +D +D E
­K7 ­Q50
/14.D2 /14.D4
13 14 1 2
/15.B2
21 22 3 4
/10.C7
31 32 5 6
43 44 13 14
03 04 21 22

55 56
/15.B2
67 68

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 14 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
/7.A8
27 27
/5.E8 /25.A1
29 29
/5.E8 /25.A1
28 +A 61 +D 21
/5.E8
+D 03
­Q30 ­Q3
A ­K8 A
/8.F1 62 /13.F2 22
/15.F3 04 ­X1 280 ­X1 282
+D 55 +D 57
+D 1 3 5 ­X1 251 ­X1 259
­K7 ­K8 +A 161 * +A 21
­Q3 *
56 58 =A ­Q30 ­Q30
/14.F2 /15.F3

O
S
/13.E2 2 4 6 +D
=A 162 22

B:11
* +A ­M1 /8.F2 /8.F1

/13.C2
C
­W1 /10.E5
/16.D5 ­X1 260 +D 21 +D 43
+D 13

R:11
­K6 ­K6
­K7

13
X5 22 44
B 14 /15.E5 /15.F5 B
/14.E2
­X1 249
+A +A ­X1 281 ­X1 283

1
1
­X7 ­X8
­X3 1 WINDFREISTELLUNG =A

1
1
PUESTA EN VELETA +A B:13
=A 13 =X 13
* ­W1 Windfrei_L
/32.A1

2
+D +D BREMSE /16.D5
R:13
FRENO

U
­S1 14 ­S1 14

+D
­R2
15

X5

1
+A +A AUF +A +A

2
2
3
3

­X7 ­X8 ABIERTO ­X7 ­X8 WINDFREISTELLUNG

2
2
PUESTA EN VELETA

3
3

C C
­X3 2 =A =X
X1 X1 BREMSE
+D +D FRENO

14
X5 ­H1 ­H1
AUF

R12
X2 X2 ABIERTO
=A +A +A
4
4

* +A ­X7 ­X8
­W1
4
4

B:12
/16.D5
10
10

­X1 X5
252 *
R:10

=A

253
254
256
258
257
D D

255
­X1 +A
+D A1 +D A1 ­W1
­K8 ­K6 /16.D5
B:10

1.0 sek. *
A2 A2
­X1
N­20 250 N­20
/14.E8 /17.E1

PE17
­PE
/3.F6

E E
=A =A
=A M11 M21
+D +D
+D +D
+D ­K8 ­K6
­M1 ­M1 /15.D4 /15.D5
­M1 *
/10.E3 1 2 M12 M22 13 14 13 14
/10.E4 /10.E4 /13.D4
PE 21 22 21 22
/13.D2 /15.B7
31 32 31 32

AUS EIN 43 44 43 44
/15.B8
DISINSERITO INSERITO 03 04 03 04
/15.A5
BREMSE WINDFREISTELLUNG 57 58
FRENO PUESTA EN VELETA /15.B3
65 66

F F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDFREISTELLUNG 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH PUESTA EN VELETA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 15 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2 L1.2
/10.A8 /18.A1
L2.2 L2.2
/10.A8 /18.A1
L3.2 L3.2
/10.A8 /18.A1
PE PE
26 26
/5.D8 /18.A1
A 25 25 A
/5.D8 /18.A1

EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A
+F 1 3 5 13 21
FAHRWERK ­Q1
MEC.DE GRUA 14 22
I> I> I>
2 4 6

B B

153
154
155
156
157
­X1

*
=A

L
N
PE

B:1
B:2
B:3
B:4
B:5
B:6
B:7
B:8
B:9

B:L1
B:11
+A

B:L2
B:12

B:L3
B:10
B:13
B:14

B:PE
C ­W1 C

B:PE
B:PE
B:PE
PE

SCHLEIFRINGE
ANILLOS COLECTORES

R:PE
R:L1
R:L2
R:L3
R:1
R:2
R:3
R:4
R:5
R:6
R:7
R:8
R:9
R:10
R:11
R12
R:13
R:14

2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

PE
PE
PE
1
1
17
17
10
10
13
14
15
16
X5 X5

/8.A3
/8.D3
/17.C2
/15.B4

/17.C3
/15.D6
/15.D4
/15.C6

/3.D1
D PE D

E E
PE

* =F
+F
­X1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

F F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK FAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GRUA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 16 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 5
/7.C8 /20.A1

3 5
A A
+F +F 1
­S2 ­S2
1
/35.B2 /35.B3
4 6

=P1 =P1
­X20 16 ­X20 17
B B
+A +A

16
17
­X1 ­X1

16
17
­X1 160 ­X1 161

=A =A

B:8
B:9
* +A * +A
­W1 ­W1
/16.D5 /16.D5

R:8
R:9
C C

8
9
X5 X5

10
10
X5
D D

R:10
=A
* +A
­W1

B:10
­X1 162

N­20 N­20
/15.D8 /20.D1

VORWAERTS RÜCKWÄRTS
HACIA ADELANTE HACIA ATRAS
E E

F F

20082252 03.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK FAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GRUA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 17 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2 L1.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
L2.2 L2.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
L3.2 L3.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
26
/16.A8
25
/16.A8 BREMSE orange
A A
FRENO
X3­28
EINGESTELLT AUF /19.D1
X3­E1
AJUSTADO A 1 3 5 13 21 /19.E1
+K X3­E2
/19.E1
KATZFAHRWERK ­Q1 X3­E3
+K 1 3 5 /19.D1
MEC.DE CARRO 11...16A 14 22 X3­E4
­Q3 /19.D1
I> I> I>
2 4 6 X3­20

/21.A7
2 4 6 /20.F5 /19.A1
3kW ­> 16A
1,5kW ­> 11A

B +K +K +K B

2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
PE
1
PE
­X1 +K ­X2 ­X2

4
5
PE20
­X1 ­PE

1
1

2
2

3
3
4
5
6
7
/3.F6

PE
PE

4
5

PE18
­PE PE
/3.F6

C PE C

PE19
­PE
/3.F6

L1 L2 L3 PE ~ ~ 13 14 8 62 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 A1 9 20 59 7 7 39
=C
+K
­T1 1 2 3 4 5
ON
OFF X X X X X
D D

E82MV552­4B

motec ­ LENZE

U V W PE + ­ BR0BR1BR2 T1 T2 K11K14K12

E E

M
3~

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 18 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X3­20
/18.B8
A A

B B
12
14

+K 13 +K 03 +K 03 +K 13 +K 13
­Q3 ­K2 ­K4 ­K2 ­K4 +K
14 04 04 14 14 ­K22 11
/20.F5 /20.F2 /20.F3 /20.E2 /20.E3
/21.F3

C C

22
24
12
14

+K +K
­K22 21 ­K23 11
/21.F3 /21.F5

D D

orange
X3­28
/18.A8
X3­E4
/18.A8
X3­E3
/18.A8
X3­E1
/18.A8
X3­E2
/18.A8

REGLERSPERRE INNEN AUSSEN

BLOQUEO DEL REGULADOR INTERIOR EXTERIOR Festfrequenz Jog 1­3
E DREHZAHL E1 E2 E
&#470;
JOG 1 1 0
JOG 2 0 1
JOG 3 1 1

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 19 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 5
/17.A8 /21.A1
4 4
/13.A8 /21.A1
4
/29.A5
3 5
A A
+K +K 3
1
­S2 ­S2
1
3
/35.D2 /35.D3 +H 23
4 6
­K90
INNEN AUSSEN
INTERIOR EXTERIOR 24
/23.E2

+H 23
=P1 =P1
­K91
B ­X20 18 ­X20 19 24 B
/23.E3

+A +A +K 83 +K 43

18
19
­X1 ­X1 ­K2 ­K7

18
19
84 44
/20.F2 /20.F4
+K +K

10
12
­X2 ­X2

12

10
INNEN
INTERIOR
=C =C
C +K 13 +K 13 41 51 C
+K +K +K 83 +K 43
­K8 ­K7
­S7 ­S7 ­K4 ­K8
14 14
/20.F3 /20.F4 84 44
42 AUSSEN 52 /20.F3 /20.F3
EXTERIOR
+K 21 +K 21 +K +K

11
13
­K4 ­K2 ­X2 ­X2

11
13
22 22
/20.E3 /20.E2 +K 03
­K5
KAW­INNEN KAW­AUSSEN
/31.A1 /31.A1 04
/21.F7

D +K A1 +K A1 +K A1 +K A1 +K A1 D
­K2 ­K4 ­K8 ­K7 ­Q3
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

N­20 N­20
/17.E8 /21.E1
INNEN AUSSEN BREMSE
INTERIOR EXTERIOR FRENO

+K +K
E E
­K2 ­K4
/20.D2 /20.D3
13 14 13 14
/19.B6 /19.B6
21 22 21 22 +K +K +K
/20.D3 /20.D2
31 32 31 32 ­K8 ­K7 ­Q3
/21.D7 /21.D7
43 44 43 44 /20.D4 /20.D4 /20.D5
/21.C3 /21.B3
03 04 03 04 13 14 13 14 1 2
/19.B4 /19.B5 /20.C2 /20.C3
21 22 21 22 3 4
53 54 53 54 /18.B4
31 32 31 32 5 6
61 62 61 62
43 44 43 44 13 14
71 72 71 72 /20.C6 /20.B6 /19.B3
03 04 03 04 21 22
83 84 83 84
/20.B5 /20.C5
F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 20 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/20.A7 /23.A1
5 5
/20.A7 /27.A1

7 9
A A
+K 3 +K 3
+K 13
2
­S2 ­S2 ­Q1
2 14
3 3
/35.D3 /35.D3 /18.B4
8 ­X1 187 10

+K
+K 43

14
­X2
­K4

14
44
/20.F3
=P1 =P1
=S3 21
B ­X20 20 ­X20 31 B
+F
­S50

­X2
+K
+A ­X1 190 22 +A

20
31
­X1 15 15 ­X1

31

20
=S3 +A 53
+F ­Q30

KATZFAHRWERK
MEC.DE CARRO
­S50
54
32 /8.F1

ENDSCHALTER
INTERRUPTOR DE FIN DE CARRERA
+K

16
43 ­X2
+K

16
C ­K2 C
44
/20.F2 ­X1 193
+H 43
­K8
44
/24.F2
+K 31
­K2
32
/20.E2

D +K 31 +K 13 D
­K4 ­K5
32 14
/20.E3 /21.F7

+K A1 +K A1 +K A1
­K22 ­K23 ­K5
A2 A2 A2

E N­20 N­20 E
/20.D8 /23.E2
STUFE 2 STUFE 3 STÖRUNG
ESCALçN ESCALçN FALLA

+K
+K +K ­K5
­K22 ­K23 /21.E7
/21.E3 /21.E5 13 14
/21.D8
14 14 21 22
/19.B7 11 /19.C6 11
12 12 31 32
24 24 43 44
/19.C6 21 21
22 22 03 04
/20.D5
F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 21 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK RESERVE 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH RISERVA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 22 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/21.A8

530
530
530
530
530
530
­X1 4
/24.A1
A ­X1 540 A
TEMP

=D 21 13 PE =D 21 13 PE VORABSCHALTUNG
MOMENTEN

12
14
+H +H PREDESCONECCIçN
MOMENTO

12
14
+H BRÜCKE ­S11 ­S21 MOMENTEN
­K9 11 ÜBERLAST +H MOMENTO
SOBRECARGA 22 14 ­K09 11 22 14
/24.F5 LAST 90­97%
/23.E7 CARGA
TEMP
­X1 541
B B
+H 13
­X1 538

534
534
­K16 ­X1
14
/29.E5

22
24
542
­X1
+H
­K15 21 VORABSCHALTUNG
/29.F4 PREDESCONECCIçN
KONSTANTE =D 21 13 PE
=D 21 13 PE +H KONSTANTE
CONSTANTE
+H ­S22 CONSTANTE
C +H 61 ­S12 =A =A C
­Q4 ÜBERLAST +H X1 X1/1 LAST 90­97%
SOBRECARGA
+H 22 14 CARGA
62 22 14 ­H3 X2 ­E1
/28.F3

22
24
X2/1
+H ODER

532
532
­K14 ­X1 533 ­X1 O
21
/29.F3 87 ­X1 539
75 +H
+H ­K90
­K90
/23.F2 88
/23.F2 76
D D
87
+H 75 +H
­K91 ­K91
543

­X1
/23.F3 76 /23.F3 88
H
/9.C7

+H A1
+H A1 +H A1
­K09
­K90 ­K91
A2
A2 A2
N­20 N­20
/21.E8 /24.E1
E E
+H ÜBERLAST +H
­K90 SOBRECARGA ­K91 +H
/23.E2 /23.E3 ­K09
13 14 13 14 /23.E7
23 24 23 24 14
/20.B4 /20.B4 /23.B6 11
33 34 33 34 12
/28.C2 /28.C2
43 44 43 44 24
/29.C2 /29.C2 21
53 54 53 54 22
61 62 61 62
75 76 75 76
/23.D2 /23.D2
87 88 87 88
/23.D3 /23.D3
F F

20069721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK ÜBERLAST 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SOBRECARGA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 23 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/26.E1

A 4 ­X1 530 ­X1 530 A

/23.A8

ÜBERLAST =D 21 13 PE
SOBRECARGA +H
SCHNELLGANG ­S13
MARCHA RàPIDA =D 21 13 PE
STUFE 3 22 14
* +H
ESCALçN ­25°C ­S1
Abschaltung
­X1 535 >500kg 22 14
B B

­X1 537
+H 13 +H 21
­K8 ­Q3
14 22
/24.E2 /29.F1

C C

D D
ÜBERLAST
SOBRECARGA
+H A1
SCHNELLGANG
­K8 A1
* +H
MARCHA RàPIDA
­K9
A2
STUFE 3
A2
ESCALçN
N­20 N­20
/23.E8 /26.E1

­25°C
Abschaltung
E >500kg E

+H
­K8 +H
/24.D2 ­K9
13 14 /24.D5
/24.C2
21 22 14
/23.B3 11
31 32 12
43 44 24
/21.C5 21
03 04 22
/27.D4

F F

Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK ÜBERLAST 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SOBRECARGA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 24 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
27
/15.A8
29
/15.A8

L1.2
/18.A8
A L2.2 A
/18.A8
L3.2
/18.A8

+H 1 3 5 13 21 +H 1 3 5 +H 1 3 5
­Q51 ­Q2 ­Q4
14 22 +H 1 3 5
/28.E2 2 4 6 /28.E3 2 4 6 ­Q3
I> I> I>

/29.A4
2 4 6 /29.E1 2 4 6
B EINGESTELLT AUF B
AJUSTADO A
0,25A

+H 1 3 5 +H 1 3 5 +H 1 3 5 +H 1 3 5 +H 1 3 5
­Q5 ­Q9 ­Q6 ­Q8 ­Q7
C C
1 3 5 /28.E3 2 4 6 /28.E6 2 4 6 /28.E6 2 4 6 /28.E7 2 4 6 /28.E5 2 4 6
+H
­Q50
/29.E6 2 4 6
2
U

+H
­R2
1

D D

445
446
447
448
449

453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461

PE22
PE21
PE23

­X1 ­PE ­X1 ­X1 ­PE ­X1 ­X1 ­PE

/3.F6 /3.F6 /3.F6

=B
+A
­M1 2U 2V 2W PE
E 1W2 3U E
=B 1V2 M 3V =B
U V W PE 1U2 3~ 3W +H
+H
­E1 M ­M2
1W1
1V1
1U1

3~
4p
1 2
HUBWERK PE
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
VENTILATOR
MOTOR (EN)
VENTILADOR BREMSE
MOTORE (MOTORI)
FRENO

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 25 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 F
A

E
B

D
C

Änderungs­Nr.
1

1
Datum
/24.A8
/24.E8
4
N­20

Name
Geprüft
Freigabe
Gezeichnet

2
2

Datum
04.03.2005

Name
KUGLER
­T2
+H

Brücke
+
N

3
3

B1 B2

20090883
­
24VDC / 1A
L

115VAC
230VAC

­PE

PE24
/3.F6

Index: 12.0
4
4

­K10
+H

LIEBHERR
X1.1 0V DC X4.12

BIBERACH
-
FREI
X1.2 24V DC X4.11

Copyright (c)
X4.10
FREI
X4.9
X4.8
WIW­HEBEN /28.A2
FUTRONIC

X4.7

GmbH
WERK
Logikmodul

X4.6
WIW­SENKEN /28.A3

5
5

X4.5
X4.4
WIW­STUFE 1 /28.C4
X4.3
X2.1 0V~ X4.2
2.PH BREMSE 2­1 /28.C4
X2.2 115V~ X4.1
/27.E2 X3.1 WIW STUFE 2 X5.12
WIW­STUFE 2 /28.C6
/27.E4 X3.2 WIW STUFE 3 X5.11
/27.E5 X3.3 RM­HEBEN X5.10
WIW­STUFE 3 /28.C5

HUBWERK
/27.E5 X3.4 RM­SENKEN X5.9
X3.5 FREI X5.8
2.PH BREMSE 3­2 /28.B7

MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
X3.6 FREI X5.7
X3.7 FREI X5.6
FREI

6
6

X3.8 FREI X5.5

X3.9 DRW­STILL X5.4
DRW­BREMSE
/27.E6 X3.10 DRW­STILL X5.3
/27.E1 X3.11 WIW­HEBEN X5.2
WIW­BREMSE /29.B1

Type
/27.E2 X3.12 WIW­SENKEN X5.1

Zeich.­Nr.

7
7

71 EC­B 14kW PU
4005­22028_12_0
Blatt
Ort:
Anlage:

8
4
N­20
8

26 von 41
=S1
/27.A1
/28.E1

Artikel­Code: 968493001
F
A

E
B

D
C
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/26.E8 /28.A1
5 5
/21.A8 /29.A1

7 9 11 13
A A
4 4 4
+H +H +H 2
+H 3
1
­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3
1
2 3
4 4 4
/35.B6 /35.B6 /35.B6 /35.B7
8 10 12 14

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1

­X20 21 ­X20 22 ­X20 23 ­X20 24
+H 13 +H 13 +H 13 +H 13 +H 13 +H 13
B ­Q2 B
­Q4 ­Q5 ­Q6 ­Q7 ­Q8
+A +A +A +A

21
22
23
24
14 14 14 14 14 14
­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 /28.E2 /28.E3 /28.E3 /28.E6 /28.E5 /28.E7

21
22
23
24
+H 13
­Q9
­X1 435 14
/28.E6

=B
C +H +H 61 C
­S8 ­Q2
62
/28.F2

+H 03
­X1 438 ­K8
04
/24.F2

D D

+H 21 +H 31
­K13 ­K13
22 32
/29.E3 /29.F3

X3.11 X3.12 X3.1 X3.2 X3.3 X3.4 X3.10

E E
+H +H +H +H +H +H +H
­K10 WIW­HEBEN ­K10 WIW­SENKEN ­K10 WIW STUFE 2 ­K10 WIW STUFE 3 ­K10 RM­HEBEN ­K10 RM­SENKEN ­K10 WIW­BREMSE AUF
/26.D6 /26.D6 /26.D5 /26.D6 /26.D6 /26.D6 /26.D6

HEBEN SENKEN STUFE STUFE RÜCKMELDUNG RÜCKMELDUNG BREMSE

SUBIR BAJAR ESCALçN 2 ESCALçN 3 ACUSE DE RECIBO ACUSE DE RECIBO FRENO

HEBEN SENKEN
SUBIR BAJAR

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 27 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/27.A8 /29.A1

+H 21

WIW­HEBEN
WIW­SENKEN
A ­Q8 A
X4.8 X4.6 22

2.PH BREMSE 3­2

+H +H /28.E7
X5.8
­K10 X4.7 ­K10 X4.5
+H
/26.B5 /26.B5 ­K10 X5.7
/26.B6
­X1 436 ­X1 439
+H 21
+H 21 +H 21
=B ­Q6
­Q5 ­Q9
+H +H 13 +A .3 22
=B /28.E6 22 22
­S8.1 ­K13 ­S2 /28.E3 /28.E6
B +H B
14 .4 ­S7
HEBEN /29.E3
SUBIR MONTAGE
MONTAJE SENKEN
BAJAR +H 21
­Q7
­X1 437
22
­X1 440 /28.E5
WIW­STUFE 2
X5.12
+H 33 +H

WIW­STUFE 1
WIW­STUFE 3

2.PH BREMSE 2­1

­K90 ­K10 X5.11
C X4.4 X4.2 X5.10 C
34 /26.B6
/23.F2 +H +H +H
­K10 X4.3 ­K10 X4.1 ­K10 X5.9
+H 33
­K91 /26.B5 /26.B5 /26.B6
34
/23.F3

+H 21 +H 21
­Q4 ­Q2
22 22
/28.E3 /28.E2
WIW­HEBEN WIW­SENKEN
/31.A1 /31.A1

D D
+H A1 a +H A1 a +H A1 a +H A1 a +H A1 a +H A1 a +H A1 a
­Q2 ­Q4 ­Q5 ­Q7 ­Q9 ­Q6 ­Q8
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
b b b b b b b

N­20 N­20
/26.E8 /29.E1
HEBEN SENKEN STUFE 1 STUFE 3 STUFE 3 STUFE 2 2 PH. BREMSE
SUBIR BAJAR ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN FRENO

+H +H +H +H +H +H +H
­Q2 ­Q4 ­Q5 ­Q7 ­Q9 ­Q6 ­Q8
E /28.D2 /28.D3 /28.D4 /28.D5 /28.D6 /28.D6 /28.D7 E
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
/25.B3 /25.B6 /25.C3 /25.C6 /25.C4 /25.C4 /25.C5
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
/27.B5 /27.B5 /27.B6 /27.B7 /27.C7 /27.B7 /27.B7
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
/28.D3 /28.D2 /28.B6 /28.C7 /28.B7 /28.B4 /28.A4

+H +H
­Q2 ­Q4
53 54 53 54
/29.B2 /29.B2
61 62 61 62
/27.C3 /23.C2
F F

20060987 22.06.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 22.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 28 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/28.A8
3 3
/14.A7 /30.A1
5 4
/27.A8 /20.A7
3
A =P1 A
+H 13 +H +H 13
­S2 ­S3 ­Q51

WIW­BREMSE
14 /35.B5 14
X5.2 /25.B2
UMSCHEREN 4
+H CAMBIO DE
­K10 X5.1 RAMALES ­X1 520
+H 13
/26.B6
­F3
=P1 =P1 14
/5.C4
­X20 25 ­X20 26
B B
­X1 521
+A 12 14
+H 53 +H 53
­F4
­Q2 ­Q4 +A +A

25
26
­X1 ­X1 11
54 54 /5.B4
/28.F2 /28.F3

25
26
­X1 431 T1 T2

+H 43 =B
­K90 +H
­M1

12
14
12
14
44 THERMO­
/23.F2 KONTAKT
+H +H
C +H T1 A1 C
­K14 11 ­K15 11 ­K16 ϑ
/29.E3 /29.E4 T2 A2 VENTILATOR
+H 43
­K91 432 VENTILADOR

44 HUBWERK
/23.F3
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN

EIN 70°C
INSERITO
=B P1 P2
+H
­M1
D L D
a +H
+H A1 +H
* ϑ
­B1 h A1 A1 A1
­Q3 ­Q3 +H +H +H A1
MOTORVOLL­ +H
A2 N ­K13 ­K14 ­K15 SCHUTZ
b ­Q50
A2 A2 A2
A2
N­20 N­20
/28.E8 /30.F1

BREMSE UMSCHEREN NULLSTELLUNG STÖRUNG

FRENO CAMBIO DE PUESTA A CERO FALLA
RAMALES

E E
+H +H +H
+H +H +H
­K13 ­K16 ­Q50
­Q3 ­K14 ­K15
/29.D3 /29.D4 /29.D4 /29.C5 /29.D6
/29.D2 13 14 1 2
1 2 13 14 14 14 /23.B3
/28.B2 /29.C4 11 /29.C5 11 21 22 3 4
3 4 21 22 12 12 /25.C2
/25.B7 /27.D3 5 6
5 6 31 32 24 24
/27.D4 /23.D2 21 /23.C3 21 13 14
13 14 43 44 22 22
/32.B1 21 22
21 22 03 04
/24.C3

F F

Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 29 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
/29.A7
1 3 5
+A
*­Q31
A A
/30.C4 2 4 6

L1
L2
L3
EINGESTELLT AUF
* 3 AJUSTADO A
+A 0­60°C

89
­B2 ϑ 15°C ­X1

90
2 +A 1 3 5
­Q2 PE
PE

I> I> I>

* +A A1 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
2 4 6
­Q31 EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A
+A +A
B N­20 A2 ­E15 ­E14 B
14A

89
+A ­X1
­Q31

90
2 /30.B4
+A 1 2
3
­S1 3 4
/30.A7 * PE PE
35°C 5 6
1/L 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
13 14 mit / with
4/N
21 22 +A +A
heat pipe ­E1 ­E2
cabinet cooler
C C

095
90
89
89
98
90
90

­X1 ­X1

* ­X1 83 83 83 83
D 84 84 84 PE D

ODER
O

E
* E
+A

PE25
L N PE ­PE M
+A /3.F6 ­E11 M M M
M ~ ~ ~ ~
­E3
~
heat pipe
cabinet cooler
N­20
/29.E8

VENTILATOR
VENTILADOR

SCHALTSCHRANK
F ARMARIO EL CTRICO F

20090883 12.05.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KLIMAANLAGE 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH AIRE ACONDICIONADO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 30 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STEUERUNG­EIN
/8.D2
WIW­HEBEN
/28.D2
WIW­SENKEN
A /28.D3 A
DRW­LI
/12.D5
DRW­RE
/12.D4
KAW­AUSSEN
/20.D3
KAW­INNEN
/20.D2

N­20
B 115V AC B
=P2 1 =P2 2 =P2 3 =P2 4 =P2 5 =P2 6 =P2 10
+A +A +A +A +A +A +A
PE ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12
=P2 L N PE /31.D6 KAW­INNEN /31.D6 KAW­AUSSEN /31.D6 DRW­RE /31.D6 DRW­LI /31.D6 WIW­SENKEN /31.D6 WIW­HEBEN /31.D7 STEUERUNG­EIN
+A 115VAC
­T1

24VDC
+V +V ­V ­V

C N­20 C
/32.E1

PE
24V_DC
/32.A1

0V_DC
/32.E1

/32.C1
/32.B2
/32.B3
/31.B4
/31.B4
/31.B5
/31.B6
/31.B6
/31.B7
/31.B8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 =P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D +A D

0V
0V
GND
GND

FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI

COM1

DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DI 4
DI 5
DI 6
DI 7
DI 8
DO 1

GND
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
+24V
­KF12
DRW­LI

=P2
DRW­RE
FAHR­VOR

KAW­INNEN

+A
WIW­HEBEN

5V 5V
FAHR­RUECK

KAW­AUSSEN
WIW­SENKEN
TOTMANN­EIN

FUNK
­KF11 SD SD
STEUERUNG­EIN

COM3
COM2 DI DI
MDE­EMS­MODUL
RST RST
/31.E5

GND GND

MDE

/39.E1
COM3
COM3

EMS­2
24V 24V

EMS Modul
DISPLAY
MDE­EMS Modul

DO DO
COM3
CLK CLK
GND
GND

FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LD LD
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

MDE
/31.E3
SHIFT ENTER
E E
=P2 =P2
t +A +A
­KF11 ­KF12
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 /31.E2 /31.D7
/33.A1 /33.A2 /33.A4 /33.A5 /33.A6 /33.A7

F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EMS­MODUL 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#480;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 31 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 ­X05 102
/5.E8

12
14
Windfrei_L
/15.B8
A ­K10 A
/32.F3 11

24V_DC
/31.C4

12
14
12
14
12
14
­K11 ­K2 ­K1
WINDWARNSTUFE WINDWARNSTUFE
&#499; &#499; /32.F4 11 /32.F3 11 /32.F2 11
1 2

=P2 =P2
+A DO 1 +A DO 2
B B

670
670
671
671

­KF11 ­KF11 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05

+H 43 /31.D3 /31.D3
­K13 11 12

247
44 ­X05
/29.F3
=D =D =D =D

2
3
2

1
­X2 ­X2 ­X2 ­X3
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
=D =D =D =D
115V OFF X
+A +A +A +A
ON X X X X X X X
­P4 ­P4 ­P4 ­P5
OR RD
C C
=P2 5 N PE
+A =D =D
SIGNALSÄULE
­KF11

0
3

­X2 COLUMNA DE SENAL ­X3

/31.D2 DI 5 115V AC

STRANGUMSCHALTUNG
&#498;

A1 A1
D D
­K10 ­K11
A2 A2
A1 A1
­K1 ­K2
A2 A2

248
248
248
248

­X05 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05

0V_DC
/31.D4

N­20
/31.C8
E E
WINDFREISTELLUNG WINDWARNSTUFE
PUESTA EN VELETA &#499;

­K1 ­K2 ­K10 ­K11

/32.D2 /32.D3 /32.D4 /32.D4
14 14 14 14
/32.B5 11 /32.B5 11 /32.A4 11 /32.B4 11
12 12 12 12
F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDWARNANLAGE 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 32 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

=P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul
+A +A +A +A +A +A +A
A ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 A
/31.E2 /31.E2 /31.E2 /31.E2 /31.E3 /31.E3

GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
21 22 23 24 25 26 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

ODER
O

Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh

SH SH SH SH SH SH SH
B B

C C

D D

Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh

SH SH SH SH SH SH SH

A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D E F A B C D A B C D
SH SH SH SH SH SH SH

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V

0..360°

4­15mA

4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA

E E
t t

LAST LAST
CARGA ODER CARGA
O MESSACHSE
SENSOREN
SENSORES EJE DE MEDICION

F F

Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EMS­MODUL 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#480;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 33 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A A

B B

=P1
­A1
C Steuerstand KST 85 C

10032650 =P1
­B10

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1

LIEBHERR+H LIEBHERR
­S6 ­S2 ­SE3 ­S7 ­S2
D D
1 = Blindverschraubung I 0 17 = Leuchttaster (GN) Steuerung Ein
2 = Taster Horn Überlast =P1 =P1 =P1
GN
18 = Taster Horn Überlast
RD
3 = Taster Umscherung 19 = Taster Steuerung Aus
(1) ­S5 ­S8
20 = Taster Licht
4 = Blindverschraubung 21 = Taster Waschanlage
YE
5 = Blindverschraubung ­E5 22 = Lampe FU Bereit
(4) (5) (6) (22)
E
6 = Blindverschraubung E

+K +H
+D ­S3
­S2 ­S36 ­S41
=P1 +D Bremse Drehwerk Totmann =P1
Meisterschalter +F Meisterschalter
Dreh­ und Katzfahrt ­S3 ­S2 Hub­ und Fahrwerk

F F

=P1
=P1
­X10 =P1 =P1 =P1
­T1
KBSB117 KBSB118

7 = Blindverschraubung 0 YE 0
G 23 = Knebelschalter Ventilator, Heizung G
8 = Blindverschraubung 24 = Pilztaster Not ­ Halt
RD ­S9 ­S12 ­S11
9 = Blindverschraubung 25 = Knebelschalter Scheibenwischer
(7) (8) (9) (23) (24) (25)

=P1
­E10
­X20R
2
1
6
7

3
5
8
21
22
27

23
24
25
26
30

17
16

H H
­X20L =P1
A
B
C

661
661

652
662
682

653
663
663

2
1
4
6
7
7
7
7
7

3
3
5
8
8
9
11
12
17

10
13
14
15
16
M ­E9

A
B
C
=P1

21
31

22
27

20
23
24
25
26
32

30

18
19
­K00
J J

=P1

­X05

87
87
88
88
88
PE
PE

611
611

612
612
627
607

626
626
230
230

K K

L L

M M
Gezeichnet 05.08.2005 KUGLER Maßstab Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERSTAND Type 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort: +A
A1 : BIBERACH GMBH PUESTO DE MANDO
Freigabe Blatt 34 von 41
09/06/2009 11:25

Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 04­Steuerstand

Copyright(c) Zeich.­Nr. 4005­22028_12_0 Art.­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+F +H
­S2 ­S3 4 4 4 4
1 2 3
1

1
1 2 3
4
4 4 4

2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
B B

/7.B3
/7.C3
/27.A1

/17.A2
/27.A2

/17.A3
/29.A3
/27.A3
/27.A4

C C
1 3 5 7 9
+K 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
+D
­S2
3 3 3 ­S3 5 5 5 5 5 5
1 2 3 4
2
1 1
1
2
3 1 1
3 3 2
3 4
5 5 5 5 5 5
2 4 6 8 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

/7.B2
/20.A2
/20.A2
/21.A2
/21.A5
/7.C2
/12.B3
/12.B4
/12.B5
/12.B6
/12.B7
/12.B7

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 26.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERSTAND 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH PUESTO DE MANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 35 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A A

Verdrahtung

Pos. 101
DRW ­> 2,5qmm Abdeckblech
B KAW ­> 1,5qmm B
rechte Schrankseite mitte oben
FAW ­> 2,5qmm montieren!!
WIW ­> 4qmm

+H +D
655 ­R2 L3 L2 L1 PE
­R2 *
+A +A 546
­E3 +A ­S2 *
­T3
547 547 547

239
C 902 C
Pos. 706 1 2 3 4 5 6 +D +D +F +H +D +H
+A +D
933442401 604 +K ­F1 ­Q51 ­Q1 ­Q51 ­K6 ­B1
­Q1 236 ­S1 935 ­R1
Einstellanweisung 548 541 543 541 905 410 Pos. 705 Kabelschelle
­X3 506 35°C *
KEB­FU DRW 606 606 zur Leitungsführung

+D ­F1
in Schaltschranktüre innen +D "Widerstand" 703
­T1
ankleben! 700 anbringen!

in Türe montieren

D D
+K +K
+D +D +D +D +D +D +K +K Leitungslänge Widertstand
­K2 ­K4 ­Q3 ­Q50 ­K2 ­K8 ­K7
­K7 ­K8 ­K4 1,1m von Kabelschelle zu Kabelschelle
412 412 493 305 465 460 492 492 410 410
305 410 410 410

395 +D ­K11
410

395 +D ­K12
+D Leitungslänge Türerdung
­V1 702
RC­GLIED 1,1m
1 2 3 PE SH

E E
+K +K +H +H +H +H +H +D

+H ­K15
­Q3 ­K5 ­K90 ­K91 ­K8 ­Q3 ­K13 ­K10
305 410 450 450 410 496 410 695

510 +H ­K16

396 +K ­K22
396 +K ­K23
396 +H ­K14
396
151
301 301 301
F F
+H *

­Q2

+H +H +H +H +H +H
490 ­Q4 490 ­Q5 ­Q6 ­Q8 ­Q7 ­Q9
300 300 303 300 300 300
152
300 +H +H +H +H +H +H
­Q2 ­Q5 ­Q6 ­Q8 ­Q7 ­Q9
RC­GLIED RC­GLIED RC­GLIED RC­GLIED RC­GLIED RC­GLIED RC­GLIED

G G
151

* * +A
­Q20
PE
+K 1 +H +H 490 151

+H ­K9
16 32 +H
­X2 +A ­T2 ­K10 ­Q50
+A 721 720
806
­X1 ­X1 305
+A

908 *
H 396 +H ­K09 H

+A ­F2 220
16
801 802 302 ­Q1
1 17
PE PE
500
Klemmleiste

152

10
+K 811
6

­X1 ­X7
1
+A
+A

220
220
239
241
804 1
+A +A 601
J PE J
+A ­F1

+A
­Q30 ­Q2 ­Q3 ­F10 151

­F3
­F3
­F4
­F4
492 543 542 390

+A ­Q30 491
145 +A ­X0
904

305
+H
+A 152

+A
+A
+A
* ­T2

Ansicht SCHRANKAUSSENSEITE 216

K K

+A Heizungen auf Bolzen montiert!

­T1 siehe Blatt 30
600

L L

im Schrankboden eingebaut!

M M
20061856 09.11.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 05.08.2005 KUGLER Anlage: =S1
Maßstab LIEBHERR - WERK GERÄTEANORDNUNG
Geprüft
Type 71 EC­B 14kW PU Ort:
A1 : BIBERACH GMBH DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
Freigabe Blatt 36 von 41
09/06/2009 11:25

Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 05­Geräteanordnung

Copyright(c) Zeich.­Nr. 4005­22028_12_0 Art.­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
 F
A

E
B

D
C

20090175

Änderungs­Nr.
1

1
Datum
27.02.2009

Name
KUGLER
Geprüft
Freigabe
Gezeichnet

­X1
2
2

155

PE
­X1 PE
164

PE
Datum

­X1 80
­X1 81
08.06.2005
Pos. 215; 181; 182

­X1 82
­X1 89
Pos.

­X1 89
­X1 90
15.00

215

­X1 90
Name

­X1 92
KUGLER

­X1 95
­X1 95 606
181,182
176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176

­X1 97
­X1 101 100
­X1 101 100
215

­X1 102 100

3
­X1 104 105
175 175 175 175
3

­X1 110
­X1 110

20090883
176 176 176

­X1 111
­X1 130 131
175 175

­X1 132 133

­X1
163

153
­X1
163

154
­X1
+A
903

163

155
­E1

­X1
157
­X1 156
159 606 606
­X1 158
161
­X1 160
163
­X1 162
190

Index: 12.0
­X1 187
194
215

­X1 193
227
Heizung auf Abstand

­X1 226
229

4
­X1 228
4

keine thermische Kopplung

250
­X1 249
252
­X1 251
254
­X1 253
256
­X1 255
258
­X1 257
275.00

260
­X1 259
271

LIEBHERR
­X1 270
+A
903
­E2

­X1 272 273

BIBERACH
-
275
­X1 274

Copyright (c)
277 606
­X1 276
281
­X1 280
283
­X1 282 156 PE
432 PE ­X1
­X1 431
438 176 89 ­X1
­X1 435 90
437 176 ­X1

GmbH
216

WERK
­X1 436 PE
440 156
­X1 439 PE ­X1

5
446
5

305.00

­X1 445
448
­X1 447

175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
449 450
­X1

163
453
­X1
15.00

163
454
­X1

163
455
­X1

163
456
­X1

163
457
­X1

163
458
­X1

163
459
­X1

163
460

KLEMMENPLAN
­X1

163
­X1 461

ESQUEMA DE BORNES
­X1 521 520
530
­X1 531
530

6
6

­X1 532
530
­X1 532
530
­X1 533
530
­X1 534
530 ­K1 320
­X1 534
530 ­K2 320

Type
­X1 535
530 ­K10 330
­X1 535
536 ­K11 330

Zeich.­Nr.
­X1 537 PE
538
­X1 539
­X1 541 540
542
­X1 543

175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
545 544
­X1 PE

164
PE
­X1 PE

164
PE
*

­X1
PE

155

7
7

­X05

71 EC­B 14kW PU
4005­22028_12_0
WINDWARNANLAGE

PE
248 102
248
SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO

247
248 671

Blatt
Ort:
248 671
670

Anlage:
670
PE

8
8

37 von 41
=S1

Artikel­Code: 968493001
F
A

E
B

D
C
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

/18.B6 /3.E7 /3.E8

+K PE +A PE +A PE
­X2 ­X1 ­X1
/12.A4 9 1 /5.F6 /29.B3 25 17 /17.B3
9 1 /18.B5
/12.C4 10 2 /7.A2 /29.B4 26 18 /20.B2
/20.C4 10 2 /18.B5 /12.C4 11 /7.A3 27 19 /20.B3
3
/20.D4 11 3 /18.B5 /12.C5 12 4 /7.D4 28 20 /21.B2
B /20.C4 12 4 /18.B5 /12.C6 13 5 /8.C5 29 21 /27.B1 B
/20.D4 13 5 /18.B5 /12.C7 14 6 /8.D6 30 22 /27.B2
+K +A
/21.B4 14 6 /18.B5 /13.B2 15 7 /7.B7 /21.B5 31 23 /27.B3
­X2 ­X1
/17.B2 16 8 /9.B6 /12.C8 32 24 /27.B4
/21.B4 15 7 /18.B5
/21.C4 16 8

Anbaugehäuse Buchseneinsatz Buchseneinsatz

Anbaugehäuse 09 20 016 3111
09 30 016 0302 09 20 016 3101
09 20 032 0302
Buchseneinsatz
09 33 016 2702
C C

/18.B4

+K PE
D /3.E7 D
­X1
+A
6 1 /18.B4 ­X7
7 2 /18.B4 /15.D6 4 1 /15.B4
8 3 /18.B4 5 2
+K /15.C4
/18.B4 +A 6 3
9 4 ­X1 /15.C6
­X7
10 5 /18.B4

Buchseneinsatz
Anbaugehäuse 09 33 006 2702
E Anbaugehäuse E
Buchseneinsatz 09 30 010 0302
09 33 010 2702 09 30 006 0302

F F

Gezeichnet 10.06.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STECKER 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ENCHUFE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 38 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

WINDWARNANLAGE
SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
BLITZLICHT

+D
BLINKLICHT
&#558; +A
­P4
B HORN B
BOCINA

X05 202
am Halter Windmesser

SCHALTSCHRANK
ARMARIO EL CTRICO
S1
203 +D
C +A C
­P5
HORN
BOCINA

D D

DISPLAY EMS
GND PANTALLA EMS
RTS
=P2 CTS
Steuerleitung Display
+A +24V
­KF11 GND

EMS­2
COM2
/31.E2 N.C.

EMS Modul
RXD
TXD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+24V
E E

F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDWARNANLAGE 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 39 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT 71 EC­B 14kW PU

A ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT A

&#524;
Änderungs­Nr Index Datum Name Blatt Kommentar
1 20082252 10.0 03.12.2008 Kugler Manfred Optionen im Stromlaufplan

2 20090175 11.0 27.02.2009 Kugler Manfred Windwarnanlage

3 20090883 12.0 12.05.2009 Kugler Manfred 30 Heizung/Heatpipe

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 12.05.2009 Type Anlage:

LIEBHERR - WERK ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT 71 EC­B 14kW PU
Geprüft Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#524;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt A1 von 41
4005­22028_12_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 12.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Projekt: 71 EC­B 22kW FU
STROMLAUFPLAN 4005­22030_8_0
ESQUEMA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AMPERIMETRICOS
B B

GERÄTEANORDNUNG
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS

C C
SACHNUMMER 968493201
NUMERO DE OBJETO

BETRIEBSSPANNUNG 400V/440V 50/60HZ

TENSION DE SERVICIO
D D

STEUERSPANNUNG 115V 50/60HZ

TENSION DE MANDO 24V DC

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 Kugler Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK SCHALTSCHRANK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ARMARIO EL CTRICO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 0 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 22kW FU

A A
INDICE
Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name

/0 SCHALTSCHRANK 04.03.2005 /13 DREHWERK 04.03.2005

ARMARIO EL CTRICO MEC.DE GIRO
B B
/1 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 02.12.2008 /14 DREHWERK 04.03.2005
INDICE MEC.DE GIRO
/2 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 02.12.2008 /15 WINDFREISTELLUNG 04.03.2005
INDICE PUESTA EN VELETA
/3 EINSPEISUNG 04.03.2005 /16 FAHRWERK 04.03.2005
ALIMENTACIçN MEC.DE GRUA
C /4 EINSPEISUNG 02.12.2008 /17 FAHRWERK 04.03.2005 C

ALIMENTACIçN MEC.DE GRUA

/5 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /18 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/6 STEUERUNG 02.12.2008 /19 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO

D
/7 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /20 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005 D
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/8 STEUERUNG 04.03.2005 /21 KATZFAHRWERK 04.03.2005
COMMANDO MEC.DE CARRO
/9 STROMKREIS 04.03.2005 /22 RESERVE 04.03.2005
CIRCUITO EL CTRICO RISERVA
/10 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /23 ÜBERLAST 06.04.2005
E E
MEC.DE GIRO SOBRECARGA
/11 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /24 ÜBERLAST 06.04.2005
MEC.DE GIRO SOBRECARGA
/12 DREHWERK 04.03.2005 /25 HUBWERK 04.03.2005
MEC.DE GIRO MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN

F F

Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH INDICE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 1 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 22kW FU

A A
INDICE
Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name

/26 HUBWERK 04.03.2005 /39 STECKER 15.06.2005

MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN ENCHUFE
B B
/27 HUBWERK 03.05.2005 /40 WINDWARNANLAGE 27.02.2009
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
/28 HUBWERK 04.03.2005
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
/29 HUBWERK 22.03.2005
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
C /30 HUBWERK 06.04.2005 C

MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
/31 KLIMAANLAGE 29.10.2007
AIRE ACONDICIONADO
/32 EMS­MODUL 29.10.2007

D
/33 WINDWARNANLAGE 27.02.2009 D
SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
/34 EMS­MODUL 29.10.2007

/35 STEUERSTAND 08.08.2005

PUESTO DE MANDO
/36 STEUERSTAND 26.04.2005
E E
PUESTO DE MANDO
/37 GERÄTEANORDNUNG 08.08.2005
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
/38 KATZFAHRWERK 16.06.2005
MEC.DE CARRO

F F

Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH INDICE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 2 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L1.1
/10.B1
L2.1
/10.B1
L3.1
/10.B1
A A
EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A X
16qmm
6A +A 1 3 5
X
­Q3

I> I> I>

89
­X1
1 3 5 2 4 6
+A
EINGESTELLT AUF ­Q2

90
AJUSTADO A

PE4
PE5
B EINGESTELLT AUF ­PE ­PE B
80A I> I> I> L1.2
1 3 5 AJUSTADO A /3.F6 /3.F6 /5.A1
+A 1.13 2 4 6 1 2 PE 1 2 PE L2.2
/5.A1
­Q1 +A +A L3.2
12A /5.A1
1.14 ­E5 ­E4
I> I> I>
2 4 6

89
­X1
/8.B1

L1 L2 L3 11 21

90
+A

PE8
­PE 1 +A * 1 3N 11 21

PE6
­PE
/3.F6
*
+A ­F1 L1
/3.F6 ­F2 ­F7
1 2 PE 1 2 PE
C 2 I> L3 L2
C
+A +A 12 14 22 24
16qmm ­E1 ­E2 13A/30mA 2 4N
12 14 22 24

PHASENFOLGERELAIS

80
81
82
89
89
90
90
92
95
95
97
98
095

PE7
­X1 L1 L2 L3 ­PE ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 RELE DE SECUENCIA DE FASES
/3.F6

*
KLIMAANLAGE
AIRE ACONDICIONADO
PE9

­PE BELEUCHTUNG
D PE /3.F6 ALUMBRADO D
L2

PE19
PE10
­PE ­PE
* =A
* /3.F7 =A /3.F6 * L1.1
=A L1 L2 L3 N PE +A

2
1
PE
+A ­T20
+A 400V 230V
­X1

1
2
­X2

PE
*=A L1 L2 L3 N PE

B:L1
B:L2
B:L3
B:PE
+A L1 N
­W1
/16.D3 +A +A +A
PE
PE

R:L1
R:L2
R:L3
R:PE
PE

­X7 ­X1 ­X1

L1
L2
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
PE
PE

PE

E E

L1
L2
L3
PE
PE
PE
PE

*
PE1
PE2
PE3

EINSPEISUNG HEIZUNG
* ­PE
ALIMENTACIçN CALEFACCIçN /3.F5 /3.F5 /3.F5
KABINE
ABB

L1
L2
L3
PE
CAMAROTE
TRANSFORM. DE ALUMBRADO
* LICHTTRANSFORMATOR
SCHALTSCHRANK
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PE6
PE7
PE8
PE9
PE10
PE11
PE12
PE13
PE14
PE15
PE16
PE17
PE18
PE19
PE20
PE21
PE22
PE23
PE24
PE25
PE26
PE27

ARMARIO EL CTRICO
­PE
/5.B2

/3.E8
/3.E8
/3.E8
/3.B5
/3.B6
/3.D2
/5.B3
/5.B7

/3.C5
/3.C6
/3.D6
/3.D4
/5.D6
/7.D7
/3.D3
/26.D1
/31.E2

/10.E6
/15.D2
/18.B4
/18.B6

/10.D7
/18.C6
/25.D6
/25.D8

*
NICHT SERIENMAESSIG
PE
F 400V/440V/50­60Hz NO EN SERIE F

20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EINSPEISUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ALIMENTACIçN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 3 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L1
L2
L3
A A

89
­X1

90
+A 1 3 5
­Q2

PE
PE
I> I> I>
2 4 6 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A
+A +A
­E5 ­E4
14A

89
­X1
B B

90
PE PE
* +A 1 3 5 7N
1 2 PE 1 2 PE
­F7
+A +A
13A/30mA
­E1 ­E2 I>
2 4 6 8N

C C

80
81
82
89
89
90
90
92
93
94
96
97
98
095
99
95

­X1 ­X1 ­X1

*
BELEUCHTUNG
ALUMBRADO

D D
L1 L2 L3 PE
* =A PE
+A
­T21
10kVA
3x400V/3x400V

L1 L2 L3 N PE PE

E E

LICHTTRANSFORMATOR
* * NICHT SERIENMAESSIG
TRANSFORM. DE ALUMBRADO NO EN SERIE

F F

20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 02.12.2008 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EINSPEISUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ALIMENTACIçN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 4 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L1.2
/3.B8
L2.2
/3.B8
L3.2
/3.B8
A A
460 440 400 380 N
Prim.: 380/400/440/460VAC
+A 2,57A 0 380 400 440 460
­T1 +A
PE ­T2
Sec. 1: 110VAC PE
4,5A
Sec. 2: 31­33­35VAC
15,2A

PE12
PE13
­PE ­PE
Pn = 1kVA 0 220
0 110 0 31 33 35 /3.F6 /3.F6

+A 1 12 14 23
/6.A2
B ­F4 B
2 11

/30.C5

PE11
­PE
/3.F6 +
+A
+A 1 ­T3
1 2
­F3
+A ~ ~
­X0 2

­
C C
+H 1 13
3 4
­F3
2 14
+A 1 3 5

/30.B5
­Q30
+A 33 /8.E1 2 4 6
­F10
/7.A6
/7.B7

34 +A 83
/7.C6
­Q30
110
110
111

­X1 ­X1
84
/8.F1

101
101
102
D D

100
100
100
­X1 ­X1
PE14

­PE
/3.F6 26
/16.A2
25
/6.B2
25
/16.A2

27
/15.A1
29
/15.A1
28
/15.A1

E 3 E
/33.A1
3
/13.A1

1
/6.A2
1
/7.A1
1
/7.A1

N­20
/6.A2
N­20
/7.E1
N­20

1 =P1 1 N­21
/7.E1
F 1 F
+A
­X1

­X20
20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 5 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

N­20
/5.F8
1
/5.E8
A A

23
/5.B8

* +P 1
­F1
2

25
/5.D8
B B

* ­X10 1 2 3 PE ­X10 4 5 6 PE ­X10 7 8

blue
brown

black
blue
brown

black
C * =P1 C

2
1
+Z
­X3

1/4
2 /4
=A
* =A+Z * +Z

2
3

1
PE

2
3

1
PE
­X1 ­X2
*=P1 X1
+Z
­P15
D D
X2

ZENTRALSCHMIERUNG
*
LUBRIFICACION CENTRALIZADA
E E

F F

20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 02.12.2008 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 6 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1
/5.E8 /15.A1
1 6
/5.E8 /8.A1
+A

2
­X1
+A

2
A A

3
­X1
+A 53
+A 13 +A 3

3
=P1 ­Q20
­Q20 ­Q30
13 21 ­X20 2 54
+A 14 4 /7.F6
/7.F6 /5.D6
­S50

/13.A2
NOT­HALT =P1 +A 5
14 22 PARO DE +A 11 21 =P1 ­Q30
EMERGENCIA
­S12 ­X20 3 6
13 21 /5.D6
+W 12 22
­S50
14 22
B 4
B
1 1 /12.A1
=P1

130
­X1 +A 43
+K +F +A
­K00
7

­S2 ­S2 ­X1

44
/7.F3
7

*=X /36.D2 /36.B2

+A 21 2 2
+A 21

/5.D3
­S2 1 1
=P1 ­Q20 =P1
22 +A 43 A1 Y10 Y11 Y21 Y33 Y43 13 23 33 41 51
+D +H 22 +A ­X20 7
­K04 /7.F6 +
­S37 ­S3 ­F10
44
/7.F3 5
/36.D5 /36.B5 /17.A1

131
C 2 2 NOT­HALT C
NOT­HALT PARO DE
=P1 ON EMERGENCIA
PARO DE
EMERGENCIA +A 23

132
­X1 NOT
­SE3
24 HALT
/8.D7 +A 71
*=X
­Q30
­
A2 Y12 Y22 Y34 Y44 14 24 34 42 52 PE
+A 21
72
­S1 /8.F1
PE15

22 =P1 ­PE
/3.F6
­X20 4
D D

133
+A

4
­X1
=P1 =P1

4
+A A1 +A A1
+A A1
­K00 ­K04
­Q20
/7.E3 A2 /7.E3 A2
A2
N­20 N­20
/5.F8 /8.E1
N­21 N­21
/5.F8 /8.E1

KRANSCHALTER
INTERRUPTOR DE GRUA
E =P1 =P1 E
+A +A
+A
­K00 ­K04
/7.D3 /7.D3 ­Q20
13 14 13 14 /7.D6
/8.B5 /8.B5 1 2
23 24 23 24
/8.C7 /8.C7 3 4
33 34 33 34 /10.A2
5 6
43 44 43 44
/7.B4 /7.C4 13 14
/7.A6
21 22
/7.C4
53 54
/7.A7
61 62
F F

20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
20061011 26.06.2006 KUGLER Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 7 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6
/7.A8 /9.A1
=P1
­X1 158
+A 21 STEUERUNG
=A ­S2 COMMANDO

B:6
A * +A 22 AUS A
­W1 DISINSERITO
/16.D4

12
14
R:6
=P1 =P1
+A +A 13 TOTMANNSCHALTER +A 13

6
X5 INTERRUPTOR DE
­F1 11 ­K00 ­S41
HOMBRE MUERTO
14 14
/3.C8 =A /7.E3
+A
­X5
17
=A =P1 =P1
+A +A 13 TOTMANNSCHALTER +A 13
­X5 18 ­K04 INTERRUPTOR DE ­S42
B HOMBRE MUERTO B
14 14
TÜRENDSCHALTER =S3 /7.E3
INTERRUPTOR DE PUERTA +F
­X3 6
FAHRWERK =P1
MEC.DE GRUA =S3 +A 23
+F
* ­S50 ­K00
24
/7.E3
=P1
=S3 =P1
+F ­X20 5 +A 23

WENN OHNE FAHRWERK

CONECTAR EN PUENTE SI NO
TIENE MECANISMO DE
TRASLACIçN

ÜBERBRÜCKEN
­X3 12
­K04
C =S3 +A 24 C

5
+F /7.E3
­X1
­X3 11

5
=P1
=S3
+F STEUERUNG +A 13 23 X1
­X3 7 COMMANDO ­SE3
EIN 14 24 X2
STEUERUNG­EIN +A 13 INSERITO
/32.A1
/7.C4
/8.D7

=A ­Q30

B:7
+A =P1
STEUERUNG 14
* ­W1 /8.E1 =P1
COMMANDO ­X20 6 X1
/16.D5 +A

R:7
EIN ­SE3
D INSERITO GN D

7
X5 +A
6

/8.D7 X2
+A A1 ­X1
6

­Q30 ­X1
159
A2

N­20 N­20
/7.E8 /9.E1
N­21 N­21
/7.E8 /27.D1

+A
­Q30
/8.D2
E 1 2 E
3 4
/5.D6
5 6
13 14
/8.D5
21 22
/15.B8
53 54
/21.C7
61 62
/15.A3
71 72
/7.D4
83 84
/5.D4
153 154
161 162
F /15.B7 F

20061011 26.06.2006 KUGLER

* 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1
Gezeichnet
LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH COMMANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 8 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6
/8.A8 /13.A1

A A
=P1
+A 13
­S6 TEST
PRUEBA
14

=P1
B ­X20 8 B

+A

8
­X1

8
H
/23.D5

C C

­X1 104

=A
+A HORN
­P1 BOCINA

D D

­X1 105

N­20 N­20
/8.E8 /12.E2

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STROMKREIS 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH CIRCUITO EL CTRICO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 9 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2
/16.A2
L2.2
/16.A2
L3.2
/16.A2

A +D 1 3 5 A
+A 1 3 5 ­F1
­Q20 EINGESTELLT AUF
2 4 6 +D 1 3 5 13 21
2 4 6 AJUSTADO A
/7.F6 ­Q51
0,25A 14 22
I> I> I>
L1 L2 L3 PE

/11.C4
+D 2 4 6
­V1
15.E4.T60­1001 +D
3x480VAC 30A ­K10
L1.1 1 3
/3.A8
L2.1 /13.C6
B /3.A8 B
L3.1
/3.A8
1 2 3 PE SH
blau
DRW­FU­24V+
/11.A1
DRW­FU­0V
/11.D1

/11.D1
/11.D2
/11.D3
/11.D4
L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23
C +D C
­T1
+D 1 3 5

­SOLLWERT
+SOLLWERT
24V AUSGANG
­Q50

+10V AUSGANG
ANALOGMASSE
BREMSE OFFEN
SCHNELLSTOPP
20­30V EINGANG
DIGITALE MASSE
DIGITALE MASSE

SOLLWERT LINKS

FREIG. MAX. MOM.

REGLERFREIGABE

SOLLWERTSTUFE 2
SOLLWERTSTUFE 3
2 4 6

MAX. MOM. SOLLW.­

SOLLWERT RECHTS

MAX. MOM. SOLLW.+

INCREMENTALGEBER /14.E4
FREQUENZUMRICHTER KEB COMBIVERT "F5­M" X3B
rd

gn
gy

bn
pk
bk

BN
WH

FU­BEREIT FU­BREMSE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SM
=A

ANALOG 1 (AKT. U/min)

ANALOG 2 (AKT. U/min)
ANALOGMASSE

TEMP.­ÛBERWACHUNG
TEMP.­ÛBERWACHUNG
MOM. GRENZE ERREICHT
NUR BREMSEN MÖGL.

BREMSMODUL
BREMSWIDERSTAND
BREMSWIDERSTAND
+U 0V A A B B N N SM
D U V W PE ­­ ++ PB T1 T2 5 6 8 24 25 26 27 28 29 18 19 PE +D DREHIMPULSGEBER
D
­G1
270
271
272
PE17

­X1
­PE
/3.F7

/11.B6
/11.B7
2,5qmm

274
275
­X1
E +D E
­R1 =A
U V W PE
1 2 +D
/15.E1 /14.C3 /15.E2 /15.E3 /15.B6 /10.E7 PE ­M1 M
=A U V W PE SH 1 2 PE TK TK P1 P2 M11 M12 M21 M22 C O S U V W PE /10.E5 3~
4p
PE16

+D ­PE
­M1 /3.F6

M 1 2 M BREMSWIDERSTAND
3~ PE 3~ RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO
ϑ EIN AUS

HAUPT­ 24V DC THERMO­ MOTOR­ WIND­ 56 Ohm

MOTOR BREMSE KONTAKT VOLLSCHUTZ FREISTELLUNG LÜFTER
F F

20071066 25.06.2007 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 10 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DRW­FU­24V+
/10.B6

A A

25
24
28
27
+D 13 +D 13 +D 13 +D 12 14
­Q3 ­K2 ­K4 ­F1 +D +D
14 14 14 11 ­T1 26 ­T1 29
/13.E2 /12.F3 /12.F4
/10.D4 /10.D4

+D 63 +D 23 +D 23
B ­Q3 ­K2 ­K4 B
64 24 24
/13.F2 /12.F3 /12.F4

+D 13
­Q51
14
/10.A7
C C

12 14 15 16

+D BREMSE OFFEN
+D SOLLWERT RECHTS
+D SOLLWERT LINKS
+D REGLERFREIGABE
­T1 ­T1 ­T1 ­T1
+D A1 +D A1
/10.C4 /10.C4 /10.C4 /10.C4 ­K11 ­K12
D BREMSE RECHTS LINKS FREIGABE D
FRENO DERECHA IZQUIERDA AUTORIZACION A2 A2

DRW­FU­0V
/10.B6
FREIGABE BREMSE
AUTORIZACION FRENO

FREQUENZUMRICHTER
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

E E

+D +D
­K11 ­K12
/11.D6 /11.D7
14 14
/12.A2 11 /13.C2 11
12 12
24 24
/13.C2 21 21
22 22

F F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 11 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/7.B8 /13.A1

+A

12
14
+D 43 +D 43

9
­X1
A ­K2 ­K4 +D A

9
44 44 ­K11 11
/12.F3 /12.F4
/11.E6
=P1
­X20 9

7 9 11 13 15 17
B B
5 5 5 5 5
+D +D +D +D 3 +D 4 +D
2
1
­S37 ­S37 ­S37 ­S37 ­S37 ­S37
1
2
3 4
/36.D6 /36.D6 5 /36.D6 5 /36.D7 5 /36.D7 5 /36.D7 5
8 10 12 14 16 18

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1

­X20 10 ­X20 11 ­X20 12 ­X20 13 ­X20 14 ­X20 32

+A +A +A +A +A +A
32

10
11
12
13
14

C ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 C

11
32

12

10
13
14

­X1 226 ­X1 228

UMDREHUNGSBEGRENZUNG
FC VUELTAS GIRO

=A =A
* +D 21 * +D 21
9 10 11 12 13 14
­S8 ­S7
D +D 22 22 +D +D +D +D +D D
RECHTS LINKS
­K10 DERECHA IZQUIERDA
­K10 ­K10 ­K10 ­K10 ­K10
/13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6 /13.B6
STUFE 1 ­X1 ­X1 STUFE 2 STUFE 3 STUFE 4 STUFE 5
ESCALçN 227 229 ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN ESCALçN
DRW­RE DRW­LI
/32.A1 /32.A1

+D A1 +D A1
­K2 ­K4
A2 A2
N­20 N­20
/9.E8 /13.E1
E E
RECHTS LINKS
DERECHA IZQUIERDA

+D +D
­K2 ­K4
/12.E4 /12.E4
13 14 13 14
/11.A2 /11.A3
23 24 23 24
/11.B4 /11.B5
33 34 33 34
43 44 43 44
/12.A1 /12.A2
03 04 03 04
/13.A3 /13.A3
F F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 12 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 3
/5.E8 /14.A2
4 4
/12.A8 /20.A1
6
/9.A8
=P1
NOT­HALT +A 21
A A
PARO DE ­S12
EMERGENCIA /7.A3 22 +D 03 +D 03
­K2 ­K4
=P1
+D 11 04 04
BREMSE /12.F3 /12.F4
FRENO ­S36
12

=P1
­X20 15
B +A B

15
­X1

15
/12.D2
/12.D5
/12.D6
/12.D7
/12.D7
/12.D8
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+D 5

0V
0V
+D
115V
­Q3 ­K10
6
/15.B2
Sollwerteingabe

12
14
4017­1117
+A 0 I .3
+D ­S30 MONTAGE EINGANG 6 STUFEN 115V
­K12 MONTAJE AUSGANG 4­20mA / 0­10V
C 11 C
.4
/11.E7

GND
1 2 3 4 GND

22
24
+D
­K11 21 /10.B3
/11.E6

+D 21 +D 13
­K8 ­K8
22 14
D /15.F3 /15.E3 D

BREMSE
+D A1
FRENO
­Q3
DREHWERK
A2 MEC.DE GIRO

N­20 N­20
/12.E8 /14.E1

+D
E ­Q3 E
/13.D2
1 2
3 4
/15.B1
5 6
13 14
/11.A2
21 22
/15.A6

+D
­Q3
53 54
/14.B2
63 64
F /11.B4 F

20060500 22.03.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 13 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 3
/13.A8 /26.A1

A A

+D 53
BREMSE
­Q3 FRENO
54
/13.F2

B B

276
277
­X1

=A TK TK VENTILATOR
+D VENTILADOR
­M1
DREHWERK
C /10.E4 MEC.DE GIRO C
THERMO­ 70°C
KONTAKT EIN
INSERITO

D WINDFREISTELLUNG D
PUESTA EN VELETA

+D A1 +D A1
­K7 ­Q50
1.5 sek.
A2 A2

N­20 N­20
/13.E8 /15.E1

+D
­K7 +D
/14.D2 ­Q50
E 13 14 /14.D4 E
/15.B2 1 2
21 22
31 32 3 4
/10.C7
43 44 5 6
03 04 13 14
21 22

+D
­K7
55 56
/15.B2
67 68

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK DREHWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GIRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 14 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
/7.A8
27 27
/5.E8 /25.A1
29 29
/5.E8 /25.A1
28
/5.E8 +D 21
+A 61 +D 03
A ­K8 ­Q3 A
­Q30
/15.F3 22 ­X1 280 ­X1 282
/8.F1 62 04 /13.F2
+D 55 +D 57 * *
­K7 ­K8 251 259 +A 161 +A 21
­X1 ­X1
­Q30 ­Q30
/14.F2 56 /15.F3 58 =A =A

B:11
O
S
+A +D 162 22
* /8.F1 /8.E1
­W1 ­M1
/16.D5

R:11
13 /10.E5 +D 21 +D 43
1 3 5 +D
+D ­K6 ­K6

13
­K7 X5 ­X1 260
­Q3 22 44
B 14 /15.E5 /15.F5 B
/13.E2 2 4 6 /14.E2 +A +A

1
1
­X7 ­X8 ­X1 281 ­X1 283

/13.C2
­X1 249

1
1
WINDFREISTELLUNG
=A =X PUESTA EN VELETA
­X3 1
+D 13 +D 13
BREMSE
­S1 ­S1 FRENO
=A

B:13
+A Windfrei_L
/33.A1

2
14 14 AUF
* ­W1
ABIERTO /16.D5

U
+A +A

2
2
R:13

+D
­R2
­X7 ­X8

1
2
2
15
X5
+A +A
C C

3
3

­X7 ­X8

3
3

­X3 2

14
X5 WINDFREISTELLUNG
=A X1
=X X1 PUESTA EN VELETA
=A +D +D

R12
* +A ­H1 ­H1 BREMSE
­W1 FRENO
/16.D5 X2 X2 AUF

B:12
+A +A ABIERTO
4
4

253
254
255
256
258
257

PE18
­X1 ­PE ­X7 ­X8
/3.F7
4
4

­X1 252
10
10

D X5 D
+D A1 +D A1 *=A
R:10

­K8 * ­K6 +A
1.0 sek. ­W1
A2 A2 /16.D5
B:10

­X1 250
N­20 N­20
/14.E8 /17.E1

=A =A
=A +D M11 +D M21
E +D E
+D ­M1 ­M1
+D ­K6
­M1 M12 M22 /15.D5
/10.E4 /10.E4 ­K8
/10.E3 1 2 13 14
/15.D3
PE 21 22
13 14 /15.B7
/13.D4 31 32
21 22
AUS EIN /13.D2 43 44
31 32 /15.B7
DISINSERITO INSERITO 03 04
43 44
BREMSE
03 04
FRENO WINDFREISTELLUNG /15.A5
PUESTA EN VELETA
57 58
/15.B3
65 66
F F

20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDFREISTELLUNG 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH PUESTA EN VELETA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 15 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2 L1.2
/10.A8 /18.A1
L2.2 L2.2
/10.A8 /18.A1
L3.2 L3.2
/10.A8 /18.A1

26 26
/5.D8 /18.A1
A 25 25 A
/5.D8 /18.A1

EINGESTELLT AUF
+F 1 3 5 13 21
AJUSTADO A
­Q1
FAHRWERK
14 22
MEC.DE GRUA
I> I> I>
2 4 6

B B

153
154
155
156
157
­X1

*
=A

L
N
PE

B:1
B:2
B:3
B:4
B:5
B:6
B:7
B:8
B:9

B:L1
B:11
+A

B:L2
B:12

B:L3
B:10
B:13
B:14

B:PE
­W1

B:PE
B:PE
B:PE
PE
C C
SCHLEIFRINGE
ANILLOS COLECTORES

R:PE
R:L1
R:L2
R:L3
R:1
R:2
R:3
R:4
R:5
R:6
R:7
R:8
R:9
R:10
R:11
R12
R:13
R:14

2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

PE
PE
PE
1
1
17
17
10
10
13
14
15
16
X5 X5

/8.A3
/8.D3
/17.C2
/15.B4

/17.C3
/15.D6
/15.D4
/15.C6

/3.E1
PE
D D

E PE E

* =F
+F
­X1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK FAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GRUA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 16 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 5
/7.C8 /20.A2

3 5
A A
+F 1
+F
­S2 ­S2
1
/36.B2 /36.B3
4 6

=P1 =P1
­X20 16 ­X20 17
B B
+A +A

16
17
­X1 ­X1

16
17
­X1 160 ­X1 161

=A =A

B:8
B:9
* +A
* +A
­W1 ­W1
/16.D5 /16.D5

R:8
R:9

8
9
C X5 X5 C

10
10
* =A X5
D D

R:10
+A
­W1

B:10
­X1 162

N­20 N­20
/15.E8 /20.D1

VORWAERTS RÜCKWÄRTS
HACIA ADELANTE HACIA ATRAS
E E

F F

20082248 02.12.2008 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK FAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE GRUA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 17 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1.2 L1.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
L2.2 L2.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
L3.2 L3.2
/16.A8 /25.A1
26
/16.A8
25 orange
/16.A8
A A
X3­28
/19.D2
EINGESTELLT AUF BREMSE X3­E1
1 3 5 13 21 FRENO /19.D2
AJUSTADO A +K X3­E2
/19.D2
­Q1 X3­E3
+K 1 3 5 /19.D2
KATZFAHRWERK 11...16A 14 22 X3­E4
MEC.DE CARRO
­Q3 /19.D2
I> I> I>
2 4 6 X3­20

/21.A7
2 4 6 /20.F5 /19.A2
3kW ­> 16A
1,5kW ­> 11A

PE23
+K +K ­PE
B B

2
3
4
5
6
7

1
PE
+K +K ­X2 ­X2 /3.F7

4
5

PE22
­PE

2
3

1
PE
­X1 ­X1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
/3.F7

PE

4
5

1
2
3
PE
PE

C PE C
­PE PE20
/3.F7

L1 L2 L3 PE ~ ~ 13 14 8 62 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 A1 9 20 59 7 7 39
=C
+K
­T1 1 2 3 4 5
ON
OFF X X X X X
D D

E82MV552­4B

motec ­ LENZE

U V W PE + ­ BR0BR1BR2 T1 T2 K11K14K12

E E

M
3~

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 18 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X3­20
/18.B8
A A

B B

+K 13 +K 03 +K 03 +K 13 +K 13 +K 13
­Q3 ­K2 ­K4 ­K2 ­K4 ­K22
14 04 04 14 14 14
/20.F5 /20.F2 /20.F3 /20.E2 /20.E3 /21.F3

C C

+K 21 +K 13
­K22 ­K23
22 14
/21.F3 /21.F5

D orange D
X3­28
/18.A8
X3­E4
/18.A8
X3­E3
/18.A8
X3­E1
/18.A8
X3­E2
/18.A8

REGLERSPERRE INNEN AUSSEN

BLOQUEO DEL REGULADOR INTERIOR EXTERIOR Festfrequenz Jog 1­3
E E
Drehzahl E1 E2
JOG 1 1 0
JOG 2 0 1
JOG 3 1 1

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 19 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 5
/17.A8 /21.A1
4 4
/13.A8 /21.A1
4
/30.A6
3 5
A A
+K +K 3
1
­S2 ­S2 +K 53 +K 43
1 +H 23
3
­K2 ­K7
/36.D2 /36.D3 ­K90
4 6 54 44
24 /20.F2 /20.F4
INNEN /23.E2
AUSSEN
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
+H 23
­K91
24
=P1 =P1 /23.E3
B ­X20 18 ­X20 19 B

+K 53 +K 43
+K +K ­K4 ­K8
+A +A

10
12

18
19
­X2 ­X2 54 44
­X1 ­X1 /20.F3 /20.F3

12

10

18
19
=C =C
+K 41 +K 51
13 13 ­S7 ­S7
+K +K
­K8 ­K7
42 52
C 14 14 C
/20.F3 /20.F4
INNEN +K AUSSEN +K

11
13
INTERIOR ­X2 EXTERIOR ­X2
+K 21 +K 21

11
13
­K4 ­K2
22 22 +K 03
/20.E3 /20.E2
­K5
04
KAW­INNEN KAW­AUSSEN /21.F7
/32.A1 /32.A1

+K A1 +K A1 +K A1 +K A1 +K A1
­K2 ­K4 ­K8 ­K7 ­Q3
D D
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

N­20 N­20
/17.E8 /21.E1
INNEN AUSSEN ENDSCHALTER BREMSE
INTERIOR EXTERIOR INTERRUPTOR DE FIN DE CARRERA FRENO

E +K +K E
­K2 ­K4
/20.D2 /20.D3
13 14 13 14
/19.B6 /19.B7 +K +K +K
21 22 21 22
/20.C3 /20.C2 ­K8 ­K7 ­Q3
31 32 31 32
/21.D7 /21.D7 /20.D4 /20.D4 /20.D5
43 44 43 44
/21.C3 /21.B3 13 14 13 14 1 2
03 04 03 04 /20.C2 /20.C3
/19.B4 /19.B5 21 22 21 22 3 4
/18.B4
31 32 31 32 5 6
53 54 53 54 43 44 43 44 13 14
/20.A5 /20.B5 /20.B6 /20.A6 /19.B3
61 62 61 62 03 04 03 04 21 22

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 20 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/20.A7 /23.A1
5 5
/20.A7 /28.A1

7 9
A A
+K 3 +K 3
+K 13
2
­S2 ­S2 ­Q1
2 14
3 3
/36.D3 /36.D3 /18.B4
8 10

+K
+K 43

14
­X2
­K4

14
44
/20.F3
=P1 =P1
21
­X20 20 =C ­X20 31
B B
+K
­S8

­X2
+K
+A 22 +A

20
31
­X1 15 15 ­X1

31

20
=C +A 53
+K ­Q30
­S8 54
32 /8.E1

ENDSCHALTER
INTERRUPTOR DE FIN DE CARRERA
+K

16
43 ­X2
+K

16
C ­K2 C
44
/20.F2 VORABSCHALTUNG
PREDESCONECCIçN
MOMENTEN

22
24
MOMENTO
+H
LAST +K 31
CARGA
­K09 21 ­K2
/23.F7 32
/20.E2
VORABSCHALTUNG
PREDESCONECCIçN +K 31 +K 13
D D
KONSTANTE ­K4 ­K5
CONSTANTE 32 14
/20.E3 /21.F7
LAST
CARGA

+K A1 +K A1 +K A1
­K22 ­K23 ­K5
A2 A2 A2

E N­20 N­20 E
/20.D8 /23.E1
STUFE 2 STUFE 3 STÖRUNG
ESCALçN ESCALçN FALLA

+K +K +K
­K22 ­K23 ­K5
/21.E3 /21.E5 /21.E7
13 14 13 14 13 14
/19.B8 /19.D7 /21.D8
21 22 21 22 21 22
/19.D6
31 32 31 32 31 32
43 44 43 44 43 44
03 04 03 04 03 04
F /20.D5 F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 21 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK RESERVE 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH RISERVA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 22 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/21.A8

530
530
530
530
530
530
­X1 4
/24.A1
A ­X1 540 A

=D 21 13 PE

12
14

12
14
MOMENTEN +H =D 21 13 PE VORABSCHALTUNG
MOMENTO +H PREDESCONECCIçN
+H BRÜCKE ­S11 +H
­K09 11
­K9 11 ­S21 MOMENTEN
ÜBERLAST
22 14 /23.F7 MOMENTO
/24.F2 SOBRECARGA
22 14
LAST 90­97%
­X1 541 CARGA
B B

534
534
­X1
­X1 538

542
­X1

VORABSCHALTUNG
=D 21 13 PE PREDESCONECCIçN
=A =A =D 21 13 PE
+H X1/1
KONSTANTE +H X1 +H +H KONSTANTE
C CONSTANTE
­S12 CONSTANTE C
­H3 X2 ­E1 ­S22
22 14 LAST 90­97%
ÜBERLAST 22 14
X2/1 CARGA
SOBRECARGA ODER
+H 23 O
­K14

532
532
/30.E4 24 ­X1 533
87
+H ­X1 539
+H 75 ­K90
­K90
/23.F2
/23.F2 88
76

D 87 D
543

+H 75 +H ­X1
­K91 ­K91
/23.F3 /23.F3
76 88
H
/9.C7

+H A1
+H A1 +H A1
­K09
­K90 ­K91
A2
A2 A2
N­20 N­20
/21.E8 /24.E1
E E
+H ÜBERLAST +H
­K90 SOBRECARGA ­K91 +H
/23.E2 /23.E4
­K09
13 14 13 14 /23.E7
/29.A2 /29.B2
23 24 23 24 14
/20.A4 /20.B4 11
33 34 33 34 /23.B6 12
43 44 43 44 24
53 54 53 54 /21.D5 21
22
61 62 61 62
75 76 75 76
/23.D2 /23.D2
87 88 87 88
/23.D3 /23.D3
F F

20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK ÜBERLAST 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SOBRECARGA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 23 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/27.A2

A 4 ­X1 530 A
/23.A8

* =D 21 13 PE
+H
­S1
­25°C
Abschaltung 22 14
B >500kg B

­X1 537

C C

D D

* +H A1
­K9
A2

N­20 N­20
/23.E8 /26.A1

­25°C
Abschaltung
E E
>500kg

+H
­K9
/24.D2
14
/23.B3 11
12
24
21
22

F F

Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK ÜBERLAST 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SOBRECARGA
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 24 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
27
/15.A8
29
/15.A8
L1.2
/18.A8
L2.2
/18.A8
L3.2
/18.A8
A A
+H A1
­K3
A2
FU­0V
/26.E1

­X1

PE
1 3 5 +H
+H 13 21 +H ­K3

/26.D4
/26.D4
/26.D5
/26.D6
/26.D6
/26.D8
/26.B3 ­Q51 ­Q51 /25.A8
14 22 14
SH 91 92 93 95 01 02 03 35 36 16 17 18 19 20 27 29 32 33 61 68 69 11
B 0,5A I> I> I> /30.A5 12 B
+H L1 L2 L3 PE ­24V+

/30.B5
­T1 2 4 6 24

D IN 1
D IN 2
D IN 3
D IN 4
D IN 5
D IN 6
D IN 7
D IN 8
21
22

P RS485
N RS485
+H 1 3 5

COM D IN
Relay 01

COM RS485
­Q3
FREQUENCY CONVERTER VLT 5042 /30.E1 2 4 6
­P­T5­C20­SB­R3­DL­F00­A00­C1 =B P1 P2
Out: 3x0­Uin 0­1000Hz 61A 73A 52,5kVA +H
380­500VAC, IP20, LCP ­M1

Relay 02
+24V ϑ

A OUT
A IN 0V
A IN +/­10V
A IN 0/4­20mA

COM A OUT
+10V OUT
COM A IN

R­
R+
U V W PE PE OUT ­X3 3
C MOTORVOLL­ C
SH 96 97 98 99 81 82 94 04 05 12 13 39 42 45 50 53 54 55 60 SCHUTZ

431
432
­X1
2

+H 1 3 5
U

/26.B3
­Q50
+H
­R2
1

/30.E6 2 4 6

SCHIRM
6qmm ­X3 4

EINGESTELLT AUF

TEST
STOP
RESET
AJUSTADO A

1L1
3L2
5L3
+H 95 97
­F1 AUF
D 96 98
ABIERTO D
28...40A

2T1
4T2
6T3
445
446
447
PE24

32A ­X1 ­PE

/29.C7
448
449
PE25

/3.F7 ­X1 ­PE

/3.F7

ACHTUNG!
LEITUNG für 800V

RB1
+H
U V W PE SH ­R1
=B
E +H RB2 E
­M1 M =B
3~ =B +H
U V W PE ­M2
+H
­E1 M 1 2
3~
4p
PE
HUBWERK
MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN

MOTOR (EN) VENTILATOR BREMSE

MOTORE (MOTORI) VENTILADOR FRENO

F F

20061197 21.07.2006 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 25 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 3
/14.A7 /28.A1
N­20 N­20
/24.E8 /28.E1

A A
+H 03 +A 03
+H 03 +H 03 +H 13 +H 21 +H 13
­K4 ­K1
­K2 ­K15 ­K23 ­K22 ­K22
04

03
02
04 04 /29.F6 04 14 22 14
+H 04 /28.F1 /28.F2 /30.F5 /28.F5 /28.F4 /28.F4
+H
N B1 B2 L ­T1
+H ­T1 01
­T2 230VAC 05
115VAC
/25.C3

Brücke
/25.B3
+H 13
+H 13
­K29
­K21
24VDC / 1A 14
/29.E4 14
+ ­ /28.F3
B B

C C

18 19 27 29 32 33

+H D IN 3
+H D IN 4
+H D IN 5
+H D IN 6
+H D IN 7
+H D IN 8
­T1 ­T1 ­T1 ­T1 ­T1 ­T1

/25.B3 /25.B3 /25.B4 /25.B4 /25.B4 /25.B4

HUBWERK HUBWERK HUBWERK HUBWERK DREHZAHLBEGRENZUNG

PE26
­PE MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN LIMITE DEL N.D.R.
D D
/3.F7
HEBEN SENKEN SCHNELLHALT FREIGABE LAST LAST
+H A1 +H A1 SUBIR BAJAR PARADA RAPIDA AUTORIZACION CARGA CARGA
­K11 ­K12
KLEIN GROß
A2 A2 PEQUENO GRANDE

FU­0V
/25.A4
FREQUENZUMRICHTER HUBWERK
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA CABRESTANTE

BEREIT BREMSE
DISPUESTO FRENO
E E
+H +H
­K11 ­K12
/26.D3 /26.D3
14 14
/27.A6 11 /30.C2 11
12 12
24 24
/30.C6 21 21
22 22

F F

Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 26 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/24.A8 /28.A1

A A

12
14
+H
­K11 11
/26.E3

B B

+A
­X1 30
30

C C

=P1
+A
­X20L 30

=P1 X1
+A
­E5
YE
D D
X2

N­21
/8.E8

FREQUENZUMRICHTER HUBWERK
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA CABRESTANTE

BEREIT
DISPUESTO

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 03.05.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 27 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 4
/27.A8 /29.A1
3 3
/26.A8 /29.A1
5 5
/21.A8 /30.A1

A 7 9 11 13 15 A
+H 53
4 4 4 4
+H +H +H 2
+H 3
+H ­K15
1
­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3 ­S3
1
2
54
3 /30.F5
4
4 4 4
/36.B6 /36.B6 /36.B6 /36.B7 /36.B7
8 10 12 14 16

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 12

/30.A1
­X20 21 ­X20 22 ­X20 23 ­X20 24 ­X20 27
B +H 13 +H 13 +H 21 B
+A +A +A ­K4 ­K2

21
22
23
+A +A ­Q3

24
27
­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 ­X1 14 14
/28.F2 /28.F1 22
/30.F1

21
22
23
24
27
­X1 547 ­X1 549

KONSTANTE KONSTANTE
+H 13 +H 13 CONSTANTE =B CONSTANTE =B
+H +H
­K28 ­K27 ­S20 ­S21
ÜBERLAST ÜBERLAST
14 14 SOBRECARGA SOBRECARGA
/29.E2 /29.E1
C C
STUFE 3 STUFE 4
ESCALçN 3 ESCALçN 4

+H 33 +H 43 ­X1 548 ­X1 550

­K15 ­K15
34 44
/30.E5 /30.E5 +H 21 +H 31
­K13 ­K13
+A 23 +A 33 22 32
/30.E4 /30.E4
­K1 ­K1
24 34
/29.E6 /29.F6

D D
+H 61 +H 61 +H 43 +H 03
+H 13
­K4 ­K2 ­K6 ­K6 ­K6
62 62 14 44 04
/28.F2 /28.F1 /29.E5 /29.F5 /29.F5
WIW­HEBEN WIW­SENKEN
/32.A1 /32.A1

+H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1 B1
­K2 ­K4 ­K21 ­K22 ­K23 ­K18 ­K17 E
6.0sek.
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 1sek. A2
50%
N­20 /28.E7 N­20
/26.A8 /29.D1
E HEBEN SENKEN STUFE 2 STUFE 3 STUFE 4 E
SUBIR BAJAR ESCALçN 2 ESCALçN 3 ESCALçN 4

+H +H
+H +H +H +H +H ­K18 ­K17
­K2 ­K4 ­K21 ­K22 ­K23 /28.E6 /28.E7
/28.E1 /28.E2 /28.E3 /28.E4 /28.E5 13 14 18
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 /29.D6 15
/28.B6 /28.B6 /26.B7 /26.A8 /26.A7 21 22 16
23 24 23 24 21 22 21 22 21 22
/30.A2 /30.A2 /26.A7 31 32
33 34 33 34 31 32 31 32 31 32 43 44
43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44
/29.C5 /29.B5 03 04
03 04 03 04 03 04 03 04 03 04
/26.A4 /26.A5 57 58
53 54 53 54 /29.C6
/29.A5 /29.C5 65 66
F 61 62 61 62 F
/28.D2 /28.D1
20060721 04.05.06 KUGLER Gezeichnet 04.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
20090593 25.03.2009 KUGLER Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 28 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
/28.A8
4 4
/28.A8 /30.A1

+H 13 ­X1 435
A ­K15 A
14
/30.E5 +H 13 +H 23 +H 53
­K90 ­K27 ­K2 =B ­X1 451 3
/30.A6
14 24 54 +H 43 +H
+A 13 /23.E2 /29.E1 /28.F1
­K4 ­S8.1 =B
­K1 1
HEBEN +H
+H 13 44 +H 61 DREHZAHLWÄCHTER
14 /28.F2 SUBIR ­B1 N>
/29.E6 ­K91 ­Q3 MONITOR DE VELOCIDAD
2
14 62
/23.E3 /30.F1
­X1 452
B ­X1 438 B

­X1 439 ­X1 436 =B

+H 53 +H 43 +H
+H 23 ­S7.1
­K4 ­K2 +H 95
=B =B ­K28
54 44 ­F1
+H +H +A .3 +H 13 24 /28.F2 /28.F1 SENKEN
­K13 /29.E2 96
­S7 ­S8 ­S30 BAJAR /25.D4
.4 14
/30.E4
SENKEN HEBEN MONTAGE UMSCHEREN
BAJAR SUBIR MONTAJE CAMBIO DE ­X1 441
C RAMALES 57 C
+H
­K18
­X1 440 ­X1 437
/28.F6
58

+A 43
16
18

+A 53
­K1 ­K1
+H
/29.F6 /29.F6 44
54 ­K17 15
/28.F7

D D
+H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +A A1
­K27 ­K28 ­K29 ­K6 ­K1
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
N­20 N­20
/28.E8 /30.E1
SENKEN HEBEN VORABSCHALTUNG
BAJAR SUBIR PREDESCONECCIçN

E E
+H +H +H +H +A
­K27 ­K28 ­K29 ­K6 ­K1
/29.D1 /29.D2 /29.D4 /29.D5 /29.D7
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
/28.C2 /28.C1 /26.B5 /28.D3 /29.B1
23 24 23 24 23 24 21 22 23 24
/29.A4 /29.C4 /30.D2 /28.D1
33 34 33 34 33 34 31 32 33 34
/30.A3 /30.B3 /28.D2
43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44
/28.D4 /29.D7
03 04 03 04 03 04 03 04 03 04
/28.D5 /26.A5

53 54
/29.D4
61 62
F F

20090593 25.03.209 KUGLER Gezeichnet 22.03.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 29 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
/29.A8
5 4
/28.A8 /20.A7
12
/28.B8 3 3
=P1 /31.A1

12
14
A +H 13 +H A
­S2 ­S3 +H
+H 23 +H 23 +H 33
­K3 11
­K2 ­K4 ­K27 14 3 ­X1 520
/36.B5 /29.A8
24 24 34 UMSCHEREN 4 /25.B8
/28.F1 /28.F2 /29.F1
CAMBIO DE
RAMALES +H 13
­Q51
+H 33
­K28 14
=P1 =P1 /25.B6
34
/29.F2 ­X20 25 ­X20 26
+H 13
B ­F3 B
­X1 521
+H 13 14
­Q3 /5.C4
+A +A

25
26
14 ­X1 ­X1
/30.E1 =B S5 S6
+A 12 14

25
26
+H
­F4
­M1
11
/5.B4

12
14
THERMO­
+H KONTAKT

22
24
­K12 11 70°C
+H
C /26.E3 ­K11 C
21
+H 13 /26.E3
­K14
+H 23
14
­K29 /30.E4 +H 23
24 ­K15
/29.E4
24
/30.E5

D D

L
+H +H A1
+H A1 +H A1 +H A1 +H A1
­K13
­Q3 ­B2 h ­K14 ­K15 ­Q50
A2
A2 N A2 A2 A2
N­20 N­20
/29.D8 /31.F1
BREMSE BETRIEBSSTUNDENZÄHLER UMSCHEREN NULLSTELLUNG STÖRUNG VENTILATOR
FRENO CONTADOR DE HORAS DE SERVICIO CAMBIO DE PUESTA A CERO FALLA VENTILADOR
RAMALES
+H
+H +H +H ­K15 +H
E ­Q3 ­K13 ­K14 /30.D5 E
­Q50
/30.D2 /30.D4 13 14
1 2
/30.D4 /29.A1 /30.D6
13 14 23 24 1
13 14 /30.C5 2
3 4 /29.C3 23 24 /30.D6
/25.B7 21 22 /23.C2 33 34 3 4
5 6 /28.D4 33 34 /28.C1 /25.C6
31 32 43 44 5 6
13 14 /28.D5 43 44 /28.C2
/30.B3 43 44 03 04 13 14
21 22 /33.B1 03 04 /26.A6
/28.B7 03 04 21 22

+H
53 54 ­K15
61 62 53 54
/29.B7 /28.A6
61 62
F F

Gezeichnet 06.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK HUBWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE ELEVACIÓN
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 30 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 1 3 5
/30.A7 +A
*­Q31
A 2 4 6 A
/31.B4

L1
L2
L3
EINGESTELLT AUF
* 3 AJUSTADO A
+A 0­60°C

89
­B2 ϑ 15°C ­X1

90
2 +A 1 3 5
­Q2
PE
PE

I> I> I>

* +A A1 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
2 4 6
­Q31 EINGESTELLT AUF
AJUSTADO A
+A +A
N­20 A2 ­E5 ­E4
B B
14A

89
+A ­X1
EINGESTELLT AUF ­Q31

90
AJUSTADO A /31.B4
1 2
35°C 3 4
/31.A7 * PE PE
5 6
13 14 mit / with 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
2
+A 21 22 +A +A
3
­S1 ­E2 ­E1
heat pipe
1/L
4/N
cabinet cooler
C C

80
81
82
89
89
90
90

­X1 ­X1

* ­X1 83 83 83 83
84 84 84 84

D D

ODER *
L N PE O

PE27
+A ­PE +A
­E3 M /3.F7 ­E11 M M M M
E ~ ~ ~ ~ E
~

heat pipe
cabinet cooler

N­20
/30.E7

VENTILATOR
VENTILADOR

SCHALTSCHRANK
F F
ARMARIO EL CTRICO
20090883 12.05.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK KLIMAANLAGE 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH AIRE ACONDICIONADO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 31 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STEUERUNG­EIN
/8.D2
WIW­HEBEN
A /28.D2 A
WIW­SENKEN
/28.D3
DRW­LI
/12.D5
DRW­RE
/12.D4
KAW­AUSSEN
/20.D3
KAW­INNEN
/20.D2

B N­20 B
115V AC
=P2 1 =P2 2 =P2 3 =P2 4 =P2 5 =P2 6 =P2 10
+A +A +A +A +A +A +A
PE ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12 ­KF12
/32.D6 KAW­INNEN /32.D6 KAW­AUSSEN /32.D6 DRW­RE /32.D6 DRW­LI /32.D6 WIW­SENKEN /32.D6 WIW­HEBEN /32.D7 STEUERUNG­EIN
=P2 L N PE
+A 115VAC
­T1

24VDC
+V +V ­V ­V
C C
N­20
/33.E1

PE
24V_DC
/33.A1

0V_DC
/33.E1

/33.C1
/33.B2
/33.B3
/32.B4
/32.B4
/32.B5
/32.B6
/32.B6
/32.B7
/32.B8

D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 =P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 D
+A

0V
0V
GND
GND

FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI

COM1

DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DI 4
DI 5
DI 6
DI 7
DI 8
DO 1

GND
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
+24V
­KF12
DRW­LI

=P2
DRW­RE
FAHR­VOR

KAW­INNEN

+A
WIW­HEBEN

5V 5V
FAHR­RUECK

KAW­AUSSEN
WIW­SENKEN
TOTMANN­EIN

FUNK
­KF11 SD SD
STEUERUNG­EIN

COM3
COM2 DI DI
MDE­EMS­MODUL
RST RST
/32.E5

GND GND

MDE

/40.E1
COM3
COM3

EMS­2
24V 24V

EMS Modul
DISPLAY
MDE­EMS Modul

DO DO
COM3
CLK CLK
GND
GND

FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI
FREI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LD LD
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

MDE
E E

/32.E3
SHIFT ENTER
=P2 =P2
t +A +A
­KF11 ­KF12
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 /32.E2 /32.E7
/34.A1 /34.A2 /34.A4 /34.A5 /34.A6 /34.A7

F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EMS­MODUL 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#480;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 32 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 ­X05 102
/5.E8

12
14
Windfrei_L
/15.C8
A ­K10 A
/33.F3 11

24V_DC
/32.C4

12
14
12
14
12
14
­K11 ­K2 ­K1
WINDWARNSTUFE WINDWARNSTUFE
&#499; &#499; /33.F4 11 /33.F3 11 /33.F2 11
1 2

=P2 =P2
+A DO 1 +A DO 2
B +H 43 B

670
670
671
671

­KF11 ­KF11 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05

­K13 /32.D2 /32.D3
44 11 12
/30.F4

247
­X05
=D =D =D =D

2
3
2

1
­X2 ­X2 ­X2 ­X3
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
=D =D =D =D
115V OFF X
+A +A +A +A
ON X X X X X X X
­P4 ­P4 ­P4 ­P5
C OR RD C

=P2 5 N PE
+A =D =D
SIGNALSÄULE
­KF11

0
3

­X2 COLUMNA DE SENAL ­X3

/32.D2 DI 5 115V AC

STRANGUMSCHALTUNG
&#498;

D A1 A1 D
­K10 ­K11
A2 A2
A1 A1
­K1 ­K2
A2 A2

248
248
248
248

­X05 ­X05 ­X05 ­X05

0V_DC
/32.D4

N­20
E /32.C8 E
WINDFREISTELLUNG WINDWARNSTUFE
PUESTA EN VELETA &#499;

­K1 ­K2 ­K10 ­K11

/33.D2 /33.D3 /33.D4 /33.D4
14 14 14 14
/33.B5 11 /33.B5 11 /33.A4 11 /33.B4 11
F 12 12 12 12 F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDWARNANLAGE 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 33 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

=P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul =P2 EMS Modul
+A +A +A +A +A +A +A
A ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 ­KF11 A
/32.F2 /32.F2 /32.F2 /32.F2 /32.F3 /32.F3

GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
GND
24V/10V
4­20mA/0­10V
21 22 23 24 25 26 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

ODER
O

Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh

SH SH SH SH SH SH SH

B B

C C

D D

Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh Sh

SH SH SH SH SH SH SH

A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D E F A B C D A B C D
SH SH SH SH SH SH SH

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V

0..360°

4­15mA

4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA
4...20mA

E E
t t

LAST LAST
CARGA ODER CARGA
SENSOREN O MESSACHSE
SENSORES EJE DE MEDICION

F F

Gezeichnet 29.10.2007 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK EMS­MODUL 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#480;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 34 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A A

B B

=P1
­A1
C Steuerstand KST 85 C

10032650 =P1
­B10

=P1 =P1 =P1 =P1 =P1

LIEBHERR+H LIEBHERR
­S6 ­S2 ­SE3 ­S7 ­S2
D D
1 = Blindverschraubung I 0 17 = Leuchttaster (GN) Steuerung Ein
2 = Taster Horn Überlast =P1 =P1 =P1
GN
18 = Taster Horn Überlast
RD
3 = Taster Umscherung 19 = Taster Steuerung Aus
(1) ­S5 ­S8
20 = Taster Licht
4 = Blindverschraubung 21 = Taster Waschanlage
YE
5 = Blindverschraubung ­E5 22 = Lampe FU Bereit
(4) (5) (6) (22)
E
6 = Blindverschraubung E

+K +H
+D ­S3
­S2 ­S36 ­S41
=P1 +D Bremse Drehwerk Totmann =P1
Meisterschalter +F Meisterschalter
Dreh­ und Katzfahrt ­S37 ­S2 Hub­ und Fahrwerk

F F

=P1
=P1
­X10 =P1 =P1 =P1
­T1
KBSB117 KBSB118

7 = Blindverschraubung 0 YE 0
G 23 = Knebelschalter Ventilator, Heizung G
8 = Blindverschraubung 24 = Pilztaster Not ­ Halt
RD ­S9 ­S12 ­S11
9 = Blindverschraubung 25 = Knebelschalter Scheibenwischer
(7) (8) (9) (23) (24) (25)

=P1
­E10
­X20R
2
1
6
7

3
5
8
21
22
27

23
24
25
26
30

17
16

H H
­X20L =P1
A
B
C

661
661

652
662
682

653
663
663

2
1
4
6
7
7
7
7
7

3
3
5
8
8
9
11
12
17

10
13
14
15
16
M ­E9

A
B
C
=P1

21
31

22
27

20
23
24
25
26
32

30

18
19
­K00
J J

=P1

­X05

87
87
88
88
88
PE
PE

611
611

612
612
627
607

626
626
230
230

K K

L L

M M
Gezeichnet 08.08.2005 KUGLER Maßstab Anlage: =S1
LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERSTAND Type 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort: +A
A1 : BIBERACH GMBH PUESTO DE MANDO
Freigabe Blatt 35 von 42
09/06/2009 11:34

Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 04­Steuerstand

Copyright(c) Zeich.­Nr. 4005­22030_8_0 Art.­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+F +H
­S2 ­S3 4 4 4 4
1 2 3
1

1
1 2 3
4
4 4 4

2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
B B

/7.B3
/7.C3
/28.A1

/17.A2
/28.A2

/17.A3
/30.A4
/28.A3
/28.A4
/28.A5

C C
1 3 5 7 9
+K 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
+D
­S2
3 3 3 ­S37 5 5 5 5 5 5
1 2 3 4
2
1 1
1
2
3 1 1
3 3 2
3 4
5 5 5 5 5 5
2 4 6 8 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

/7.B3
/21.A1

/20.A2
/20.A2
/21.A5
/7.C3
/12.B3
/12.B4
/12.B5
/12.B6
/12.B7
/12.B7

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 26.04.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STEUERSTAND 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH PUESTO DE MANDO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 36 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

597
A +A A
­S50
Verdrahtung 595

DRW ­> 2,5qmm

KAW ­> 1,5qmm
+A
FAW ­> 2,5qmm ­E3
WIW ­> 10qmm 902
+A 216
B ­T3 546 * B
+D +H 215
655 547 547 547

241

239
220
220
239
­R2­R2
1 2 3 4 5 6 +A +A +A +D +D +F +H +D +D +D +D
+A +D +D +D
­Q2 ­Q3 ­F1 ­F1 ­Q51 ­Q1 ­Q51 +K ­K6 ­K2 ­K4 ­Q3 ­K10

+D ­K11
+D ­K12
­Q1 ­S1 ­K7 ­K8

­F3

­F3
­F4
­F4
543 542 904 236 541 543 544 905 410 412 412 493 695 465 460
548
35°C

145 +A ­X0
Pos. 706 ­X3 396396 305 410 410

+H

+D ­F1
+A
+A
+A

606
606
933442401
Einstellanweisung
Widerstand auf
KEB­FU DRW
C +A Pos. 109 +H C
in Schaltschranktüre innen ­S30 * ­R1
* aufschrauben und
ankleben! *

­K3

220
+A +H +H
montieren!
+D +H +H +H *
+A ­Q30 +A ­K9 ­K90 ­K91 ­T2

+H ­K11
+H ­K12

+H
­F10 ­S30 ­Q50 ­Q50
305 305 908 450 450 721 Widerstand 215
Pos. 101 390 492

+A ­Q30 491
396 396 396 links
305

+A ­F2
Abdeckblech 506
anbauen
linke Schrankseite mitte oben
D montieren!! D

+H +H +H +H +H
­K2 ­K4 ­K21 ­K22 ­K23
490 490 410 410 410
+K +K +K +K +K +K +K +K
­K2 ­K4 ­K8 ­K7 ­Q3 ­K22 ­K23 ­K5 415 415
490 490 410 410 305 410 410 410
410 410 Widerstände im Seitenfach montieren!!
E E

+H +H +H +H +H

+H ­K17
­T1 ­K18 ­K27 ­K28 ­K29
710 460 415 415 415
410 512

+A Widerstand
­T2
F 601 links F
Hauptschalter
+A +A anbauen
Betätigung ­Q1 ­Q20
500 490
seitlich 215 +H +A +H +H +H
­K6 ­K1 ­Q3 ­B2 ­K13
410 490 490 935 410
302 415 305
215 +W
+D ­S50
597

­R1 595
703
L3 L2 L1 PE
G G

+H +H +H
­K09­K14 ­K15
395 415 490 Widerstand auf
415 Pos. 109
+D aufschrauben und
­T1
700 montieren!
H H
+H­F1 215
nicht im Kanal

152
verdrahten!!

152

Klemmleiste I

16
Klemmleiste II

PE
1
6
+A
­X7

32
PE
+H

­X1 ­X1
+A +A
17
­F1 +A
590 ­T1
600

J
+D J
­V1 702

10

16
1 2 3 PE SH

PE
PE

+K
+K
­X1

­X2
1
1
Ansicht SCHRANKAUSSENSEITE!
Pos. 126 412101701 4xMutter Polyamid
Heizung auf Abstand Heizung auf Abstand über Befestigungsschraube Montageplatte
K keine thermische Kopplung keine thermische Kopplung K
zum Schutz im Kabelkanal
­X1
­X1

­X1
­X1
­X1
­X1

PE
PE ­X1
PE
PE ­X1

89 89 90 90
PE
PE
PE
PE

+A +A +A +A
­E1 ­E2 ­E4 ­E5
606
606
606
606

157 157
176 176 176 176 157 157

L L

216

215 215 215 215

im Schrankboden montiert!

M M
20071066 25.06.2007 KUGLER Gezeichnet 08.08.2005 KUGLER Anlage: =S1
Maßstab LIEBHERR - WERK GERÄTEANORDNUNG
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Type 71 EC­B 22kW FU Ort:
A1 : BIBERACH GMBH DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
Freigabe Blatt 37 von 42
09/06/2009 11:34

Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 05­Geräteanordnung

Copyright(c) Zeich.­Nr. 4005­22030_8_0 Art.­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

Klemmleiste I Klemmleiste II Klemmleiste III

B B

siehe
­X1 PE
­X1 PE
­X1 549 550 Heizungsbaugruppe
­X1 547 548
544
­X1 545
542
­X1 ­X1 543
PE 540
­X1 PE ­X1 541
163 538
­X1 162 ­X1 539
161 536
­X1 160 ­X1 537
159 530
­X1 158 ­X1 535
159 535 530
­X1 158 ­X1

175 175 175 175 175 156

C 156 157 ­X1 534 530 C
­X1 530
­X1 534

163
155
­X1 ­X1 533 530

163
154 530
­X1 ­X1 532
532 530

163
­X1 153 ­X1
133 529
­X1 132 ­X1 531
521

175 175
130 131 ­X1 520
­X1 451 452
­X1
­X1 ­X1 448 449
­X1 ­X1 446 447

110 110 111 114

­X1 445

176 176 176 176

­X1 ­X1 444
105 ­X1 439 441
­X1 104
­X1 439 440
­X1 102 100
­X1 436 437
­X1 101 100
101 100 435 438

175 175 175 175

­X1

97
­X1 432
­X1 431

96
­X1 283
D Pos. 181, 182 ­X1 282 D

95
­X1 281
­X1 280

95
­X1 277
­X1 276

92
­X1 275
­X1 274

90
­X1 273
­X1 272

90
­X1 271
­X1 270

89
­X1 260
­X1 259

89
215 ­X1 258
­X1 257

82
­X1 256
­X1 255

81
­X1 254
­X1 253

80
­X1 252

176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176
­X1 251
­X1 250
­X1 249
229 *
L3 ­X1 228

155
226 227 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 156
­X1
­X1 PE WINDWARNANLAGE
156

PE
L2

155
­X1 SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
E E
L1

155
­X1
247
671
671

102

PE

160
PE
PE
PE

320
320
330
330
248
248
248
248
670
670

­X05

­K1
­K2
­K10
­K11

F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 16.06.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK KATZFAHRWERK 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH MEC.DE CARRO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 38 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

/18.B6

+K PE /3.E7 /3.E8
­X2 +A PE +A PE
­X1 ­X1
9 1 /18.B5
B /30.B4 /17.B3
B
/12.A4 9 1 /5.F6 25 17
/20.B4 10 2 /18.B5
/12.C4 10 2 /7.A3 /30.B4 26 18 /20.B2
/20.C4 11 3 /18.B5
/12.C4 11 3 /7.A3 /28.B5 27 19 /20.B3
/20.B4 12 4 /18.B5 +A
­X1 /12.C5 12 4 /7.D4 28 20 /21.B2
+K
/20.C4 13 5 /18.B5 /12.C6 13 5 /8.C5 29 21 /28.B1
­X2
/21.B4 14 6 /18.B5 /12.C7 14 6 /8.D6 /27.C6 30 22 /28.B2
/21.B3 15 7 /18.B6 /13.B2 15 7 /7.B7 /21.B5 31 23 /28.B3
/17.B2 16 8 /9.B6 /12.C8 32 24 /28.B4
/21.C4 16 8
Anbaugehäuse
Anbaugehäuse 09 20 032 0302
09 30 016 0302
C C
Buchseneinsatz Buchseneinsatz
Buchseneinsatz 09 20 016 3101 09 20 016 3111
09 33 016 2702

/18.B4

+K PE /3.E7
D D
­X1 +A
6 1 /18.B3 ­X7
7 2 /18.B4 +K /15.D6 4 1 /15.B3
+A
­X1 5 2 /15.C3
8 3 /18.B4 ­X7
6 3 /15.C6
9 4 /18.B4
10 5 /18.B4

Anbaugehäuse
09 30 010 0302 Anbaugehäuse Buchseneinsatz
09 30 006 0302 09 33 006 2702
E E
Buchseneinsatz
09 33 010 2702

F F

Gezeichnet 15.06.2005 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK STECKER 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ENCHUFE
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 39 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
WINDWARNANLAGE
SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
BLITZLICHT

+D
BLINKLICHT
&#558; +A
­P4
HORN
B BOCINA B

X05 202
am Halter Windmesser

SCHALTSCHRANK
ARMARIO EL CTRICO
S1
203 +D
+A
C C
­P5
HORN
BOCINA

D D
DISPLAY EMS
GND PANTALLA EMS
RTS
=P2 CTS
Steuerleitung Display
+A +24V
­KF11 GND

EMS­2
COM2
/32.E2 N.C.

EMS Modul
RXD
TXD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+24V

E E

F F

20090175 27.02.2009 KUGLER Gezeichnet 27.02.2009 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S1

LIEBHERR - WERK WINDWARNANLAGE 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH SISTEMA DE AVISO DE VIENTO
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 40 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT 71 EC­B 22kW FU

A ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT A

&#524;
Änderungs­Nr Index Datum Name Blatt Kommentar
1 20082248 5.0 02.12.2008 Kugler Manfred 3,4,5,6,8,12,15,17 Optionen Ausrüstung Kran

2 20090175 6.0 27.02.2009 Kugler Manfred 32,33,38,40 Windwarnanlage

3 20090593 7.0 25.03.2009 Kugler Manfred 28,29 Wischrelais +A­K17 1W

B B
4 20090883 8.0 12.05.2009 Kugler Manfred Heizung/Heatpipe

C C

D D

E E

F F

Gezeichnet 12.05.2009 Type Anlage:

LIEBHERR - WERK ÄNDERUNGSÜBERSICHT 71 EC­B 22kW FU
Geprüft 12.05.2009 Kugler Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH &#524;
Freigabe Zeich.­Nr. Blatt A1 von 42
4005­22030_8_0
Änderungs­Nr. Datum Name Datum Name 20090883 Index: 8.0 Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 968493201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Projekt: FAW 50/63/71EC­B
STROMLAUFPLAN 4005­22074
ESQUEMA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AMPERIMETRICOS
B B

GERÄTEANORDNUNG
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS

C C
SACHNUMMER 969215501
NUMERO DE OBJETO

BETRIEBSSPANNUNG 400V 50­60 HZ

TENSION DE SERVICIO
D D

STEUERSPANNUNG 115 V 50­60HZ

TENSION DE MANDO

E E

F F

Gez. 19.01.2006 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S3

LIEBHERR - WERK SCHALTSCHRANK FAW 50/63/71EC­B
Bearb. Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ARMARIO EL CTRICO
Gepr. 21.06.2006 08:13 Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 1 von 11
4005­22074
Änderung Datum Name Datum Name Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 969215501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INHALTSVERZEICHNIS FAW 50/63/71EC­B

A A

INDICE
Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name Seite Bezeichnung erstellt Name

1 SCHALTSCHRANK 19.01.2006 KUGLER

ARMARIO EL CTRICO
B B
2 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS 23.01.2006 KUGLER
INDICE
3 EINSPEISUNG 19.01.2006 KUGLER
ALIMENTACIçN
4 EINSPEISUNG 19.01.2006 KUGLER
ALIMENTACIçN
C 5 BREMSE 19.01.2006 KUGLER C

FRENO
6 STEUERSTAND 19.01.2006 KUGLER
PUESTO DE MANDO
7 STEUERUNG 19.01.2006 KUGLER
COMMANDO

D
8 FREQUENZUMRICHTER 19.01.2006 KUGLER D
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA
9 FREQUENZUMRICHTER 19.01.2006 KUGLER
CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA
10 GERÄTEANORDNUNG 19.01.2006 KUGLER
DISPOSICION DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
11 KLEMMENPLAN 23.01.2006 KUGLER
E E
ESQUEMA DE BORNES

F F

Gez. 23.01.2006 KUGLER Type Anlage:

LIEBHERR - WERK INHALTSVERZEICHNIS FAW 50/63/71EC­B
Bearb. Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH INDICE
Gepr. 21.06.2006 08:13 Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 2 von 11
4005­22074
Änderung Datum Name Datum Name Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 969215501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L7
/5.A1
L8
/5.A1
L9
/5.A1
25
/5.A1
A 26 A
/5.A1

+A
­E1 HEIZUNG
CALEFACCIçN

L1 N PE

B B

6
0­60°C 3 /4.A1
+A
­B2 8
/7.A1
2 9
35°C /7.A1
10
/7.E1

12
/4.D1

4
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

PE
1
2
3
­X3 ­X3
PE
PE
PE

C C

PE
/5.D1

=A

PE
1
2
3
4
5
6
17
17
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
­X5

R:1
R:2
R:3
+A
D =A D

B:PE
­W1 *

B:1
B:2
B:3
EINSTELLWERT
VALOR DE AJUSTE

PE
L1
L2
L3
E
Leistungsschalter E
=S1
+F
­Q1
bei Inbetriebnahme
im S1 überprüfen!
F F

Gez. 19.01.2006 KUGLER Type Anlage: =S3

LIEBHERR - WERK EINSPEISUNG FAW 50/63/71EC­B
Bearb. Ort:
BIBERACH GmbH ALIMENTACIçN
Gepr. 21.06.2006 08:13 Zeich.­Nr. Blatt 3 von 11
4005­22074
Änderung Datum Name Datum Name Copyright (c) Artikel­Code: 969215501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 6 A
/3.B7

131
132
­X3 ­X3

13 21
+A * * .1
B ­B1 .1 +A B
+A
14 22 ­S1 ­S2
TÜRENDSCHALTER
INTERRUPTOR DE PUERTA .2 .2

130
133
­X3 ­X3